4D v11 SQL

______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Language Reference
Windows / Mac OS ® ®

4D®
© 4D SAS / 4D Inc. 1995-2009. All rights reserved.
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4D v11 SQL Language Reference

Release 4 (11.4) for Windows® and Mac OS®
Copyright © 4D SAS/4D, Inc. 1985-2009
All rights reserved.
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The Software described in this manual is governed by the grant of license in the 4D
Product Line License Agreement provided with the Software in this package. The
Software, this manual, and all documentation included with the Software are
copyrighted and may not be reproduced in whole or in part except for in accordance
with the 4D Product Line License Agreement.

4th Dimension, 4D, the 4D logo, 4D Developer, 4D Server are registered trademarks of
4D, Inc.

Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

Apple, Macintosh, Mac OS and QuickTime are trademarks or registered trademarks of

Apple Computer, Inc.

Mac2Win Software Copyright © 1990-2009, is a product of Altura Software, Inc.

This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation
(http://www.apache.org/).

ICU © Copyright 1995-2009 International Business Machines Corporation and others. All
rights reserved.

4th Dimension includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young

([email protected])
4th Dimension includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected]).

Spellchecker © Copyright SYNAPSE Développement, Toulouse, France, 1994-2009.

All other referenced trade names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective holders.
Contents
1. Introduction.............................. 41
Preface................................................................................................. 43
Introduction.........................................................................................45
Building a 4D Application.....................................................................55

2. Language Definition..................69
Introduction to the 4D Language......................................................... 71
Data Types........................................................................................... 76
Constants.............................................................................................81
Variables.............................................................................................. 85
System Variables...................................................................................91
Pointers................................................................................................93
Identifiers........................................................................................... 103
Control Flow...................................................................................... 114
If...Else...End if....................................................................................116
Case of...Else...End case......................................................................118
While...End while............................................................................... 122
Repeat...Until..................................................................................... 124
For...End for....................................................................................... 125
Methods............................................................................................ 132
Project Methods.................................................................................136

3. 4D Environment...................... 145
ADD DATA SEGMENT.........................................................................147
Application file................................................................................... 148
Application type.................................................................................149
Application version.............................................................................150
BUILD APPLICATION.......................................................................... 152
Compact data file...............................................................................154
COMPONENT LIST.............................................................................157
CREATE DATA FILE..............................................................................158
Data file............................................................................................. 159

4D Language Reference 3
 DATA SEGMENT LIST......................................................................... 160
FLUSH BUFFERS..................................................................................161
Get 4D folder..................................................................................... 162
Get current database localization........................................................167
Get database parameter..................................................................... 168
GET SERIAL INFORMATION................................................................ 171
Is compiled mode...............................................................................173
Is data file locked................................................................................174
NOTIFY RESOURCES FOLDER MODIFICATION....................................175
OPEN 4D PREFERENCES..................................................................... 176
OPEN ADMINISTRATION WINDOW................................................... 180
OPEN DATA FILE................................................................................ 182
OPEN SECURITY CENTER....................................................................183
PLUGIN LIST.......................................................................................184
QUIT 4D.............................................................................................185
SET DATABASE PARAMETER................................................................187
Structure file.......................................................................................205
VERIFY CURRENT DATA FILE............................................................... 207
VERIFY DATA FILE............................................................................... 208
Version type....................................................................................... 212

4. Arrays.......................................213
Arrays.................................................................................................215
Creating Arrays.................................................................................. 216
Arrays and Form Objects.................................................................... 219
Grouped Scrollable Areas....................................................................229
Arrays and the 4D Language.............................................................. 232
Arrays and Pointers.............................................................................234
Using the element zero of an array.....................................................237
Two-dimensional Arrays..................................................................... 240
Arrays and Memory............................................................................242
APPEND TO ARRAY.............................................................................244
ARRAY BOOLEAN............................................................................... 245
ARRAY DATE.......................................................................................247
ARRAY INTEGER..................................................................................249
ARRAY LONGINT................................................................................251

4 4D Language Reference
 ARRAY PICTURE..................................................................................253
ARRAY POINTER................................................................................. 255
ARRAY REAL........................................................................................257
ARRAY STRING................................................................................... 259
ARRAY TEXT....................................................................................... 261
ARRAY TO LIST................................................................................... 263
ARRAY TO SELECTION........................................................................265
BOOLEAN ARRAY FROM SET.............................................................. 267
COPY ARRAY...................................................................................... 268
Count in array.................................................................................... 269
DELETE FROM ARRAY......................................................................... 270
DISTINCT VALUES.............................................................................. 271
Find in array....................................................................................... 273
INSERT IN ARRAY............................................................................... 275
LIST TO ARRAY................................................................................... 276
LONGINT ARRAY FROM SELECTION...................................................278
MULTI SORT ARRAY............................................................................279
SELECTION RANGE TO ARRAY............................................................282
SELECTION TO ARRAY........................................................................285
Size of array....................................................................................... 287
SORT ARRAY.......................................................................................288

5. Backup..................................... 291
BACKUP............................................................................................. 293
CHECK LOG FILE................................................................................ 294
GET BACKUP INFORMATION............................................................. 296
GET RESTORE INFORMATION.............................................................297
SELECT LOG FILE................................................................................298
INTEGRATE LOG FILE..........................................................................300
Log File.............................................................................................. 302
New log file........................................................................................303
On Backup Shutdown Database Method............................................304
On Backup Startup Database Method.................................................305
RESTORE............................................................................................ 306

4D Language Reference 5
 6. BLOB........................................ 307
BLOB Commands...............................................................................309
BLOB PROPERTIES.............................................................................. 313
BLOB size........................................................................................... 315
BLOB TO DOCUMENT....................................................................... 316
BLOB to integer..................................................................................318
BLOB to list........................................................................................ 320
BLOB to longint................................................................................. 322
BLOB to real.......................................................................................324
BLOB to text...................................................................................... 326
BLOB TO VARIABLE............................................................................ 328
COMPRESS BLOB............................................................................... 330
COPY BLOB........................................................................................332
DECRYPT BLOB.................................................................................. 333
DELETE FROM BLOB...........................................................................334
DOCUMENT TO BLOB....................................................................... 335
ENCRYPT BLOB.................................................................................. 337
EXPAND BLOB................................................................................... 343
INSERT IN BLOB................................................................................. 345
INTEGER TO BLOB..............................................................................346
LIST TO BLOB.....................................................................................349
LONGINT TO BLOB............................................................................351
REAL TO BLOB....................................................................................354
SET BLOB SIZE....................................................................................357
TEXT TO BLOB................................................................................... 358
VARIABLE TO BLOB............................................................................ 361

7. Boolean....................................365
Boolean Commands...........................................................................367
True................................................................................................... 368
False...................................................................................................369
Not.................................................................................................... 370

6 4D Language Reference
8. Communications..................... 371
GET SERIAL PORT MAPPING...............................................................373
RECEIVE BUFFER................................................................................. 374
RECEIVE PACKET.................................................................................376
RECEIVE RECORD............................................................................... 379
RECEIVE VARIABLE.............................................................................. 384
SEND PACKET.................................................................................... 385
SEND RECORD................................................................................... 388
SEND VARIABLE..................................................................................389
SET CHANNEL....................................................................................390
SET TIMEOUT.....................................................................................395
USE CHARACTER SET..........................................................................397

9. Compiler.................................. 399
Compiler Commands......................................................................... 401
Using Compiler Directives.................................................................. 405
Typing Guide..................................................................................... 414
Syntax Details.................................................................................... 426
Optimization Hints............................................................................. 437
Error messages................................................................................... 442
C_BLOB............................................................................................. 451
C_BOOLEAN...................................................................................... 452
C_DATE..............................................................................................453
C_GRAPH........................................................................................... 454
C_INTEGER........................................................................................ 455
C_LONGINT.......................................................................................457
C_PICTURE.........................................................................................458
C_POINTER........................................................................................ 459
C_REAL.............................................................................................. 460
C_STRING.......................................................................................... 461
C_TEXT.............................................................................................. 463
C_TIME.............................................................................................. 464
IDLE................................................................................................... 465

4D Language Reference 7
 10. Database Methods................ 467
Database Methods............................................................................. 469
On Exit Database Method.................................................................. 471
On Startup Database Method.............................................................477

11. Data Entry..............................479

ADD RECORD.....................................................................................481
ADD SUBRECORD.............................................................................. 484
DIALOG............................................................................................. 486
Modified............................................................................................ 489
MODIFY RECORD...............................................................................491
MODIFY SUBRECORD.........................................................................493
Old.................................................................................................... 494

12. Date and Time....................... 495

Add to date........................................................................................497
Current date.......................................................................................498
Current time...................................................................................... 501
Date...................................................................................................502
Day number.......................................................................................504
Day of................................................................................................ 506
Milliseconds....................................................................................... 507
Month of........................................................................................... 509
SET DEFAULT CENTURY......................................................................511
Tickcount........................................................................................... 513
Time.................................................................................................. 514
Time string.........................................................................................515
Year of............................................................................................... 516

8 4D Language Reference
13. Debugging.............................517
Why a Debugger?.............................................................................. 519
Syntax Error Window..........................................................................524
Debugger...........................................................................................527
Watch Pane........................................................................................533
Call Chain Pane..................................................................................539
Custom Watch Pane...........................................................................541
Source Code Pane.............................................................................. 544
Break Points....................................................................................... 549
Break List............................................................................................552
Catching Commands......................................................................... 555
Debugger Shortcuts........................................................................... 559

14. Drag and Drop...................... 561

Drag and Drop...................................................................................563
On Drop Database Method................................................................572
DRAG AND DROP PROPERTIES...........................................................573
Drop position.....................................................................................582

15. Entry Control......................... 585

ACCEPT..............................................................................................587
CANCEL............................................................................................. 588
EDIT ITEM.......................................................................................... 590
FILTER KEYSTROKE............................................................................. 592
GOTO AREA....................................................................................... 599
Keystroke........................................................................................... 600
REJECT............................................................................................... 606

4D Language Reference 9
 16. Form Events........................... 609
Activated............................................................................................611
After...................................................................................................612
Before................................................................................................ 613
Contextual click................................................................................. 614
Deactivated........................................................................................615
During............................................................................................... 616
Form event.........................................................................................617
Get edited text...................................................................................638
In break..............................................................................................640
In footer.............................................................................................641
In header............................................................................................642
Outside call........................................................................................ 643
Right click.......................................................................................... 644
SET TIMER..........................................................................................645

17. Forms..................................... 647

Current form page............................................................................. 649
FIRST PAGE.........................................................................................651
GET FORM OBJECTS...........................................................................652
GET FORM PARAMETER......................................................................653
GET FORM PROPERTIES......................................................................655
GOTO PAGE.......................................................................................656
INPUT FORM......................................................................................657
LAST PAGE......................................................................................... 659
NEXT PAGE........................................................................................ 660
OUTPUT FORM.................................................................................. 661
PREVIOUS PAGE................................................................................. 663
SET FORM HORIZONTAL RESIZING....................................................664
SET FORM SIZE...................................................................................665
SET FORM VERTICAL RESIZING...........................................................669

10 4D Language Reference
18. Formulas................................ 671
EDIT FORMULA.................................................................................. 673
EXECUTE FORMULA........................................................................... 675
GET ALLOWED METHODS..................................................................676
SET ALLOWED METHODS...................................................................677

19. Graphs................................... 679

GRAPH............................................................................................... 681
GRAPH SETTINGS...............................................................................687
GRAPH TABLE.....................................................................................689

20. Hierarchical Lists....................693

Managing Hierarchical Lists................................................................695
APPEND TO LIST................................................................................ 701
CLEAR LIST.........................................................................................707
Copy list.............................................................................................709
Count list items.................................................................................. 710
DELETE FROM LIST.............................................................................713
Find in list.......................................................................................... 715
GET LIST ITEM....................................................................................718
Get list item font................................................................................ 720
GET LIST ITEM ICON.......................................................................... 721
GET LIST ITEM PARAMETER................................................................ 723
GET LIST ITEM PROPERTIES................................................................ 725
GET LIST PROPERTIES......................................................................... 727
INSERT IN LIST................................................................................... 729
Is a list................................................................................................731
List item parent.................................................................................. 732
List item position................................................................................735
LIST OF CHOICE LISTS........................................................................737
Load list............................................................................................. 738
New list..............................................................................................740

4D Language Reference 11
 REDRAW LIST..................................................................................... 741
SAVE LIST........................................................................................... 742
SELECT LIST ITEMS BY POSITION........................................................743
SELECT LIST ITEMS BY REFERENCE......................................................746
Selected list items...............................................................................748
SET LIST ITEM.....................................................................................752
SET LIST ITEM FONT...........................................................................754
SET LIST ITEM ICON...........................................................................755
SET LIST ITEM PARAMETER.................................................................757
SET LIST ITEM PROPERTIES................................................................. 759
SET LIST PROPERTIES..........................................................................762
SORT LIST.......................................................................................... 771

21. Import and Export.................775

EXPORT DATA....................................................................................777
EXPORT DIF....................................................................................... 779
EXPORT SYLK..................................................................................... 781
EXPORT TEXT.....................................................................................783
IMPORT DATA....................................................................................785
IMPORT DIF....................................................................................... 787
IMPORT SYLK..................................................................................... 789
IMPORT TEXT.....................................................................................791

22. Interruptions......................... 793

ABORT............................................................................................... 795
FILTER EVENT..................................................................................... 797
GET LAST ERROR STACK.....................................................................799
Method called on error...................................................................... 800
Method called on event..................................................................... 801
ON ERR CALL..................................................................................... 802
ON EVENT CALL.................................................................................807

12 4D Language Reference
23. Language............................... 811
Command name................................................................................ 813
Count parameters.............................................................................. 816
Current method name........................................................................818
EXECUTE METHOD............................................................................ 819
Get pointer........................................................................................ 820
Is a variable........................................................................................ 821
Nil......................................................................................................822
NO TRACE..........................................................................................823
RESOLVE POINTER..............................................................................824
Self.....................................................................................................826
TRACE................................................................................................ 827
Type...................................................................................................829

24. List Box.................................. 833

Managing List Box Objects.................................................................835
DELETE LISTBOX COLUMN................................................................ 843
DELETE LISTBOX ROW........................................................................844
GET LISTBOX ARRAYS.........................................................................845
GET LISTBOX CELL POSITION.............................................................847
Get listbox column width................................................................... 849
Get listbox information...................................................................... 850
Get listbox rows height...................................................................... 852
GET LISTBOX TABLE SOURCE............................................................. 853
Get number of listbox columns.......................................................... 854
Get number of listbox rows................................................................ 855
INSERT LISTBOX COLUMN.................................................................856
INSERT LISTBOX COLUMN FORMULA................................................858
INSERT LISTBOX ROW........................................................................860
MOVED LISTBOX COLUMN NUMBER................................................ 861
MOVED LISTBOX ROW NUMBER........................................................862
SELECT LISTBOX ROW........................................................................863
SET LISTBOX COLUMN WIDTH.......................................................... 865
SET LISTBOX GRID COLOR.................................................................866

4D Language Reference 13
 SET LISTBOX ROWS HEIGHT...............................................................867
SET LISTBOX TABLE SOURCE..............................................................868
SHOW LISTBOX GRID.........................................................................869
SORT LISTBOX COLUMNS................................................................. 870

25. Math...................................... 871

Abs.....................................................................................................873
Arctan................................................................................................ 874
Cos.................................................................................................... 875
Dec.................................................................................................... 876
Display of Real Numbers.....................................................................877
Euro converter....................................................................................879
Exp.................................................................................................... 881
Int......................................................................................................882
Log.................................................................................................... 883
Mod...................................................................................................884
Random............................................................................................. 885
Round................................................................................................ 886
SET REAL COMPARISON LEVEL...........................................................887
Sin..................................................................................................... 889
Square root........................................................................................ 890
Tan.................................................................................................... 891
Trunc................................................................................................. 892

26. Menus.................................... 893

Managing Menus............................................................................... 895
APPEND MENU ITEM......................................................................... 900
Count menu items............................................................................. 903
Count menus..................................................................................... 904
Create menu...................................................................................... 905
DELETE MENU ITEM...........................................................................906
DISABLE MENU ITEM..........................................................................907
Dynamic pop up menu...................................................................... 908
ENABLE MENU ITEM.......................................................................... 910

14 4D Language Reference
 Get menu bar reference......................................................................911
Get menu item...................................................................................912
GET MENU ITEM ICON...................................................................... 913
Get menu item key.............................................................................914
Get menu item mark.......................................................................... 916
Get menu item method......................................................................917
Get menu item modifiers....................................................................918
GET MENU ITEM PROPERTY............................................................... 920
Get menu item parameter..................................................................921
Get menu item style...........................................................................922
GET MENU ITEMS.............................................................................. 924
Get menu title....................................................................................925
Get selected menu item parameter.....................................................926
INSERT MENU ITEM........................................................................... 927
Menu selected....................................................................................929
RELEASE MENU.................................................................................. 931
SET MENU BAR...................................................................................932
SET MENU ITEM.................................................................................936
SET MENU ITEM ICON....................................................................... 937
SET MENU ITEM MARK.......................................................................938
SET MENU ITEM METHOD................................................................. 939
SET MENU ITEM PROPERTY................................................................940
SET MENU ITEM PARAMETER............................................................. 942
SET MENU ITEM SHORTCUT.............................................................. 943
SET MENU ITEM STYLE.......................................................................945

27. Messages............................... 947

ALERT.................................................................................................949
CONFIRM.......................................................................................... 952
DISPLAY NOTIFICATION.....................................................................955
GOTO XY...........................................................................................956
MESSAGE........................................................................................... 958
MESSAGES OFF.................................................................................. 961
MESSAGES ON...................................................................................963
Request.............................................................................................. 964

4D Language Reference 15
 28. Named Selections..................967
Named Selections.............................................................................. 969
CLEAR NAMED SELECTION................................................................ 972
COPY NAMED SELECTION................................................................. 973
CREATE SELECTION FROM ARRAY...................................................... 975
CUT NAMED SELECTION....................................................................977
USE NAMED SELECTION.................................................................... 978

29. Object Properties.................. 979

Object Properties................................................................................981
BEST OBJECT SIZE.............................................................................. 982
BUTTON TEXT....................................................................................984
DISABLE BUTTON...............................................................................986
ENABLE BUTTON............................................................................... 988
FONT................................................................................................. 990
FONT SIZE......................................................................................... 991
FONT STYLE....................................................................................... 992
Get alignment....................................................................................994
Get format......................................................................................... 996
GET OBJECT RECT.............................................................................. 998
MOVE OBJECT..................................................................................1000
SET ALIGNMENT.............................................................................. 1002
SET CHOICE LIST..............................................................................1003
SET COLOR...................................................................................... 1004
SET ENTERABLE................................................................................ 1006
SET FILTER........................................................................................1008
SET FORMAT.................................................................................... 1010
SET RGB COLORS.............................................................................1018
SET SCROLLBAR VISIBLE................................................................... 1023
SET VISIBLE.......................................................................................1024

16 4D Language Reference
30. On a Series...........................1027
On a Series.......................................................................................1029
Average............................................................................................1030
Max................................................................................................. 1031
Min.................................................................................................. 1033
Std deviation....................................................................................1035
Sum................................................................................................. 1036
Sum squares.....................................................................................1037
Variance........................................................................................... 1038

31. Operators............................ 1039

Operators.........................................................................................1041
Bitwise Operators............................................................................. 1043
Comparison Operators..................................................................... 1047
Date Operators................................................................................ 1052
Logical Operators.............................................................................1053
Numeric Operators...........................................................................1055
Picture Operators............................................................................. 1056
String Operators...............................................................................1066
Time Operators................................................................................ 1067

32. Pasteboard.......................... 1069

Managing Pasteboards.....................................................................1071
APPEND DATA TO PASTEBOARD......................................................1073
CLEAR PASTEBOARD........................................................................ 1080
Get file from pasteboard...................................................................1081
GET PASTEBOARD DATA.................................................................. 1082
GET PASTEBOARD DATA TYPE..........................................................1084
GET PICTURE FROM PASTEBOARD................................................... 1085
Get text from pasteboard................................................................. 1086
Pasteboard data size.........................................................................1087
SET FILE TO PASTEBOARD................................................................ 1090

4D Language Reference 17
 SET PICTURE TO PASTEBOARD.........................................................1091
SET TEXT TO PASTEBOARD.............................................................. 1093

33. Pictures................................ 1095

Pictures............................................................................................ 1097
BLOB TO PICTURE............................................................................1099
COMBINE PICTURES........................................................................ 1101
COMPRESS PICTURE.........................................................................1103
COMPRESS PICTURE FILE..................................................................1104
CONVERT PICTURE...........................................................................1106
CREATE THUMBNAIL........................................................................1107
GET PICTURE FROM LIBRARY............................................................1110
LOAD COMPRESS PICTURE FROM FILE.............................................1111
PICTURE CODEC LIST.......................................................................1113
PICTURE LIBRARY LIST...................................................................... 1114
PICTURE PROPERTIES........................................................................1116
Picture size....................................................................................... 1117
PICTURE TO BLOB............................................................................1118
PICTURE TO GIF............................................................................... 1119
PICTURE TYPE LIST........................................................................... 1122
READ PICTURE FILE...........................................................................1124
REMOVE PICTURE FROM LIBRARY.....................................................1125
SAVE PICTURE TO FILE......................................................................1126
SET PICTURE TO LIBRARY................................................................. 1127
TRANSFORM PICTURE......................................................................1130
WRITE PICTURE FILE......................................................................... 1132

34. Printing................................1133
ACCUMULATE..................................................................................1135
BREAK LEVEL.................................................................................... 1136
CLOSE PRINTING JOB.......................................................................1137
Get current printer........................................................................... 1138
Get print marker.............................................................................. 1139
GET PRINT OPTION..........................................................................1140

18 4D Language Reference
 GET PRINTABLE AREA....................................................................... 1142
GET PRINTABLE MARGIN..................................................................1143
Get printed height........................................................................... 1145
Level................................................................................................ 1146
OPEN PRINTING JOB........................................................................1148
PAGE BREAK..................................................................................... 1149
PAGE SETUP..................................................................................... 1151
Print form.........................................................................................1153
PRINT LABEL.....................................................................................1156
PRINT OPTION VALUES.................................................................... 1159
PRINT RECORD................................................................................ 1161
PRINT SELECTION............................................................................ 1163
PRINT SETTINGS.............................................................................. 1165
PRINTERS LIST..................................................................................1166
Printing page................................................................................... 1168
SET CURRENT PRINTER.....................................................................1169
SET PRINT MARKER.......................................................................... 1170
SET PRINT OPTION.......................................................................... 1176
SET PRINT PREVIEW..........................................................................1179
SET PRINTABLE MARGIN.................................................................. 1180
Subtotal........................................................................................... 1182

35. Process (Communications). 1185

CALL PROCESS................................................................................. 1187
CLEAR SEMAPHORE..........................................................................1189
GET PROCESS VARIABLE................................................................... 1190
Semaphore.......................................................................................1193
SET PROCESS VARIABLE....................................................................1196
Test semaphore................................................................................1199
VARIABLE TO VARIABLE.................................................................... 1200

36. Process (User Interface)...... 1203

BRING TO FRONT............................................................................ 1205
Frontmost process............................................................................1206

4D Language Reference 19
 HIDE PROCESS................................................................................. 1207
SHOW PROCESS...............................................................................1208

37. Processes............................. 1209

Processes..........................................................................................1211
Count tasks...................................................................................... 1215
Count user processes........................................................................1216
Count users......................................................................................1217
Current process................................................................................1218
DELAY PROCESS...............................................................................1219
EXECUTE ON CLIENT....................................................................... 1220
Execute on server............................................................................. 1222
GET REGISTERED CLIENTS................................................................1227
New process.................................................................................... 1228
PAUSE PROCESS...............................................................................1231
Process aborted................................................................................1232
Process number................................................................................1233
PROCESS PROPERTIES...................................................................... 1235
Process state.....................................................................................1238
REGISTER CLIENT............................................................................. 1240
RESUME PROCESS............................................................................ 1243
UNREGISTER CLIENT........................................................................ 1244

38. Queries................................ 1245

DESCRIBE QUERY EXECUTION..........................................................1247
Find in field...................................................................................... 1249
Get Last Query Path......................................................................... 1250
Get Last Query Plan..........................................................................1251
ORDER BY........................................................................................ 1252
ORDER BY FORMULA........................................................................1257
QUERY............................................................................................. 1259
QUERY BY EXAMPLE.........................................................................1266
QUERY BY FORMULA........................................................................1267
QUERY SELECTION...........................................................................1270

20 4D Language Reference
 QUERY SELECTION BY FORMULA..................................................... 1272
QUERY SELECTION WITH ARRAY...................................................... 1273
QUERY WITH ARRAY.........................................................................1274
SET QUERY AND LOCK.....................................................................1275
SET QUERY DESTINATION................................................................1277
SET QUERY LIMIT............................................................................. 1283

39. Quick Report........................1285

QR BLOB TO REPORT....................................................................... 1287
QR Count columns...........................................................................1288
QR DELETE COLUMN.......................................................................1289
QR DELETE OFFSCREEN AREA...........................................................1290
QR EXECUTE COMMAND................................................................ 1291
QR Find column............................................................................... 1292
QR Get area property....................................................................... 1293
QR GET BORDERS.............................................................................1294
QR Get command status.................................................................. 1296
QR GET DESTINATION..................................................................... 1297
QR Get document property..............................................................1298
QR Get drop column........................................................................1299
QR GET HEADER AND FOOTER.........................................................1300
QR Get HTML template....................................................................1302
QR GET INFO COLUMN................................................................... 1303
QR Get info row............................................................................... 1306
QR Get report kind...........................................................................1307
QR Get report table..........................................................................1308
QR GET SELECTION..........................................................................1309
QR GET SORTS.................................................................................1310
QR Get text property........................................................................1311
QR GET TOTALS DATA..................................................................... 1313
QR GET TOTALS SPACING................................................................1315
QR INSERT COLUMN....................................................................... 1316
QR New offscreen area.....................................................................1317
QR ON COMMAND.........................................................................1318
QR REPORT...................................................................................... 1319
QR REPORT TO BLOB....................................................................... 1322

4D Language Reference 21
 QR RUN........................................................................................... 1323
QR SET AREA PROPERTY................................................................... 1324
QR SET BORDERS............................................................................. 1325
QR SET DESTINATION......................................................................1327
QR SET DOCUMENT PROPERTY........................................................1329
QR SET HEADER AND FOOTER......................................................... 1330
QR SET HTML TEMPLATE..................................................................1332
QR SET INFO COLUMN....................................................................1334
QR SET INFO ROW...........................................................................1338
QR SET REPORT KIND.......................................................................1339
QR SET REPORT TABLE..................................................................... 1340
QR SET SELECTION.......................................................................... 1341
QR SET SORTS..................................................................................1342
QR SET TEXT PROPERTY................................................................... 1343
QR SET TOTALS DATA......................................................................1345
QR SET TOTALS SPACING................................................................ 1348

40. Record Locking.................... 1349

Record Locking.................................................................................1351
LOAD RECORD.................................................................................1358
Locked............................................................................................. 1359
LOCKED ATTRIBUTES....................................................................... 1360
READ ONLY......................................................................................1361
Read only state.................................................................................1362
READ WRITE..................................................................................... 1362
UNLOAD RECORD............................................................................1363

41. Records................................ 1365

About Record Numbers....................................................................1367
Using the Record Stack.....................................................................1371
CREATE RECORD.............................................................................. 1372
DELETE RECORD...............................................................................1373
DISPLAY RECORD............................................................................. 1374
DUPLICATE RECORD........................................................................ 1375

22 4D Language Reference
 GOTO RECORD................................................................................1376
Is new record................................................................................... 1377
Is record loaded............................................................................... 1378
Modified record............................................................................... 1379
POP RECORD................................................................................... 1380
PUSH RECORD................................................................................. 1381
Record number................................................................................ 1382
Records in table................................................................................1384
SAVE RECORD.................................................................................. 1385
Sequence number............................................................................ 1387

42. Relations.............................. 1389

About Relations................................................................................ 1391
CREATE RELATED ONE......................................................................1394
GET AUTOMATIC RELATIONS...........................................................1395
GET FIELD RELATION........................................................................1396
OLD RELATED MANY........................................................................1399
OLD RELATED ONE.......................................................................... 1400
RELATE MANY.................................................................................. 1401
RELATE MANY SELECTION................................................................1404
RELATE ONE.....................................................................................1405
RELATE ONE SELECTION.................................................................. 1407
SAVE RELATED ONE..........................................................................1408
SET AUTOMATIC RELATIONS........................................................... 1409
SET FIELD RELATION........................................................................ 1410

43. Resources.............................1413
Resources......................................................................................... 1415
ARRAY TO STRING LIST.................................................................... 1423
CLOSE RESOURCE FILE..................................................................... 1426
Create resource file...........................................................................1427
DELETE RESOURCE........................................................................... 1430
Get component resource ID............................................................. 1433
GET ICON RESOURCE.......................................................................1434

4D Language Reference 23
 Get indexed string............................................................................1436
GET PICTURE RESOURCE.................................................................. 1438
GET RESOURCE................................................................................ 1439
Get resource name...........................................................................1441
Get resource properties.................................................................... 1443
Get string resource...........................................................................1444
Get text resource..............................................................................1445
Open resource file............................................................................ 1446
RESOURCE LIST................................................................................ 1449
RESOURCE TYPE LIST........................................................................1451
SET PICTURE RESOURCE...................................................................1453
SET RESOURCE.................................................................................1454
SET RESOURCE NAME...................................................................... 1457
SET RESOURCE PROPERTIES..............................................................1458
SET STRING RESOURCE.................................................................... 1461
SET TEXT RESOURCE........................................................................ 1462
STRING LIST TO ARRAY.................................................................... 1463

44. Secured Protocol................. 1465

GENERATE CERTIFICATE REQUEST....................................................1467
GENERATE ENCRYPTION KEYPAIR.................................................... 1470

45. Selection.............................. 1473

ALL RECORDS...................................................................................1475
APPLY TO SELECTION...................................................................... 1476
Before selection................................................................................1478
DELETE SELECTION.......................................................................... 1480
DISPLAY SELECTION.........................................................................1482
Displayed line number......................................................................1485
End selection....................................................................................1487
FIRST RECORD..................................................................................1489
GET HIGHLIGHTED RECORDS...........................................................1490
GOTO SELECTED RECORD............................................................... 1492
HIGHLIGHT RECORDS...................................................................... 1494

24 4D Language Reference
 LAST RECORD.................................................................................. 1496
MODIFY SELECTION.........................................................................1497
NEXT RECORD................................................................................. 1498
ONE RECORD SELECT...................................................................... 1499
PREVIOUS RECORD.......................................................................... 1500
Records in selection..........................................................................1501
REDUCE SELECTION.........................................................................1502
SCAN INDEX....................................................................................1504
Selected record number................................................................... 1505
TRUNCATE TABLE.............................................................................1506

46. Sets...................................... 1507

Sets.................................................................................................. 1509
ADD TO SET.....................................................................................1515
CLEAR SET........................................................................................1516
COPY SET.........................................................................................1517
USE SET............................................................................................1518
CREATE EMPTY SET.......................................................................... 1519
CREATE SET......................................................................................1520
CREATE SET FROM ARRAY................................................................ 1521
DIFFERENCE..................................................................................... 1522
INTERSECTION.................................................................................1524
Is in set.............................................................................................1526
LOAD SET.........................................................................................1527
Records in set...................................................................................1528
REMOVE FROM SET..........................................................................1529
SAVE SET..........................................................................................1530
UNION.............................................................................................1531

47. SQL...................................... 1533

Overview of SQL Commands............................................................1535
Begin SQL........................................................................................ 1538
End SQL........................................................................................... 1539
Get current data source....................................................................1540

4D Language Reference 25
 GET DATA SOURCE LIST...................................................................1541
Is field value Null..............................................................................1543
On SQL Authentication Database Method........................................1544
QUERY BY SQL................................................................................. 1546
SET FIELD VALUE NULL.....................................................................1550
SQL CANCEL LOAD..........................................................................1551
SQL End selection.............................................................................1552
SQL EXECUTE...................................................................................1553
SQL EXPORT.................................................................................... 1556
SQL GET LAST ERROR.......................................................................1558
SQL GET OPTION.............................................................................1559
SQL IMPORT.................................................................................... 1560
SQL LOAD RECORD..........................................................................1562
SQL LOGIN...................................................................................... 1563
SQL LOGOUT...................................................................................1568
SQL SET OPTION............................................................................. 1569
SQL SET PARAMETER........................................................................1571
START SQL SERVER...........................................................................1573
STOP SQL SERVER............................................................................ 1574
USE EXTERNAL DATABASE................................................................1575
USE INTERNAL DATABASE................................................................ 1576

48. String................................... 1577

Character Reference Symbols........................................................... 1579
Change string.................................................................................. 1582
Char.................................................................................................1583
Character code.................................................................................1584
Convert case.................................................................................... 1586
CONVERT FROM TEXT..................................................................... 1587
Convert to text.................................................................................1592
Delete string.....................................................................................1593
Get localized string...........................................................................1594
Insert string......................................................................................1596
ISO to Mac.......................................................................................1597
Length............................................................................................. 1599
Lowercase........................................................................................ 1600

26 4D Language Reference
 Mac to ISO.......................................................................................1601
Mac to Win...................................................................................... 1604
Match regex.....................................................................................1606
Num................................................................................................ 1609
Position............................................................................................ 1612
Replace string...................................................................................1614
String...............................................................................................1616
Substring..........................................................................................1619
Uppercase........................................................................................ 1621
Win to Mac...................................................................................... 1622

49. Structure Access.................. 1625

Structure Access Commands............................................................ 1627
CREATE INDEX................................................................................. 1628
DELETE INDEX..................................................................................1630
Field.................................................................................................1631
Field name....................................................................................... 1632
GET FIELD ENTRY PROPERTIES..........................................................1633
GET FIELD PROPERTIES.....................................................................1635
Get last field number........................................................................1637
Get last table number.......................................................................1638
GET RELATION PROPERTIES..............................................................1639
GET TABLE PROPERTIES....................................................................1641
Is field number valid......................................................................... 1642
Is table number valid........................................................................1643
SET INDEX....................................................................................... 1644
Table................................................................................................1646
Table name...................................................................................... 1647

50. Subrecords...........................1649
ALL SUBRECORDS............................................................................ 1651
APPLY TO SUBSELECTION................................................................ 1652
Before subselection...........................................................................1653
CREATE SUBRECORD........................................................................1654

4D Language Reference 27
 DELETE SUBRECORD........................................................................ 1655
End subselection.............................................................................. 1657
FIRST SUBRECORD........................................................................... 1658
LAST SUBRECORD............................................................................ 1659
NEXT SUBRECORD........................................................................... 1660
ORDER SUBRECORDS BY.................................................................. 1661
PREVIOUS SUBRECORD.................................................................... 1662
QUERY SUBRECORDS....................................................................... 1663
Records in subselection.................................................................... 1664

51. System Documents..............1665

System Documents...........................................................................1667
Append document........................................................................... 1674
CLOSE DOCUMENT......................................................................... 1675
COPY DOCUMENT...........................................................................1676
CREATE ALIAS...................................................................................1678
Create document............................................................................. 1680
CREATE FOLDER...............................................................................1683
DELETE DOCUMENT........................................................................ 1684
DELETE FOLDER................................................................................1685
Document creator............................................................................ 1686
DOCUMENT LIST............................................................................. 1687
Document type................................................................................ 1688
FOLDER LIST.................................................................................... 1689
GET DOCUMENT ICON....................................................................1690
Get document position.................................................................... 1691
GET DOCUMENT PROPERTIES..........................................................1692
Get document size........................................................................... 1698
MAP FILE TYPES................................................................................1699
MOVE DOCUMENT..........................................................................1701
Open document...............................................................................1702
RESOLVE ALIAS.................................................................................1705
Select document.............................................................................. 1706
Select folder..................................................................................... 1710
SET DOCUMENT CREATOR.............................................................. 1714
SET DOCUMENT POSITION............................................................. 1715

28 4D Language Reference
 SET DOCUMENT PROPERTIES...........................................................1716
SET DOCUMENT SIZE...................................................................... 1717
SET DOCUMENT TYPE......................................................................1718
SHOW ON DISK............................................................................... 1719
Test path name................................................................................ 1721
VOLUME ATTRIBUTES.......................................................................1723
VOLUME LIST...................................................................................1726

52. System Environment........... 1727

Count screens.................................................................................. 1729
Current machine.............................................................................. 1730
Current machine owner................................................................... 1731
FONT LIST........................................................................................1732
Font name....................................................................................... 1733
Font number.................................................................................... 1734
Gestalt............................................................................................. 1735
GET SYSTEM FORMAT......................................................................1736
LOG EVENT......................................................................................1738
Menu bar height.............................................................................. 1740
Menu bar screen.............................................................................. 1741
PLATFORM PROPERTIES....................................................................1742
SCREEN COORDINATES................................................................... 1748
SCREEN DEPTH................................................................................ 1749
Screen height...................................................................................1751
Screen width.................................................................................... 1752
Select RGB Color.............................................................................. 1753
SET SCREEN DEPTH..........................................................................1755
System folder................................................................................... 1756
Temporary folder............................................................................. 1758

53. Table.................................... 1759

Current default table........................................................................ 1761
Current form table........................................................................... 1762
DEFAULT TABLE................................................................................1764

4D Language Reference 29
 NO DEFAULT TABLE......................................................................... 1766

54. Tools.................................... 1767

Choose.............................................................................................1769
DECODE.......................................................................................... 1771
ENCODE.......................................................................................... 1772
GET MACRO PARAMETER.................................................................1773
LAUNCH EXTERNAL PROCESS.......................................................... 1774
OPEN WEB URL................................................................................ 1777
SET DICTIONARY..............................................................................1779
SET ENVIRONMENT VARIABLE..........................................................1782
SET MACRO PARAMETER..................................................................1783
SPELL CHECKING............................................................................. 1785

55. Transactions........................ 1787

Using Transactions........................................................................... 1789
CANCEL TRANSACTION...................................................................1794
In transaction................................................................................... 1795
START TRANSACTION...................................................................... 1796
Transaction level.............................................................................. 1797
VALIDATE TRANSACTION.................................................................1798

56. Triggers............................... 1799

Triggers............................................................................................1801
Database event................................................................................ 1811
Trigger level..................................................................................... 1813
TRIGGER PROPERTIES....................................................................... 1814

30 4D Language Reference
57. User Forms...........................1815
Overview of user forms.....................................................................1817
CREATE USER FORM.........................................................................1819
DELETE USER FORM......................................................................... 1820
EDIT FORM...................................................................................... 1821
LIST USER FORMS.............................................................................1823

58. User Interface...................... 1825

BEEP.................................................................................................1827
Caps lock down................................................................................1828
Focus object.....................................................................................1829
GET FIELD TITLES............................................................................. 1830
GET HIGHLIGHT...............................................................................1831
GET MOUSE.....................................................................................1833
Get platform interface...................................................................... 1834
GET TABLE TITLES.............................................................................1835
HIDE MENU BAR.............................................................................. 1836
HIDE TOOL BAR............................................................................... 1837
HIGHLIGHT TEXT............................................................................. 1838
INVERT BACKGROUND.................................................................... 1840
Macintosh command down............................................................. 1841
Macintosh control down.................................................................. 1842
Macintosh option down................................................................... 1843
PLAY................................................................................................ 1844
Pop up menu................................................................................... 1846
POST CLICK..................................................................................... 1850
POST EVENT.....................................................................................1851
POST KEY......................................................................................... 1853
REDRAW...........................................................................................1854
SCROLL LINES.................................................................................. 1855
SET ABOUT...................................................................................... 1856
SET CURSOR.................................................................................... 1857
SET FIELD TITLES.............................................................................. 1858
SET PLATFORM INTERFACE.............................................................. 1860

4D Language Reference 31
 SET TABLE TITLES............................................................................. 1862
Shift down....................................................................................... 1868
SHOW MENU BAR............................................................................1869
SHOW TOOL BAR.............................................................................1870
Tool bar height................................................................................ 1871
Windows Alt down...........................................................................1872
Windows Ctrl down......................................................................... 1873

59. Users and Groups................ 1875

BLOB TO USERS............................................................................... 1877
CHANGE CURRENT USER................................................................. 1879
CHANGE LICENSES.......................................................................... 1881
CHANGE PASSWORD....................................................................... 1882
Current user..................................................................................... 1883
DELETE USER....................................................................................1884
EDIT ACCESS....................................................................................1885
Get default user................................................................................1886
GET GROUP LIST.............................................................................. 1887
GET GROUP PROPERTIES..................................................................1888
Get plugin access............................................................................. 1890
GET USER LIST..................................................................................1891
GET USER PROPERTIES......................................................................1892
Is license available............................................................................ 1894
Is user deleted.................................................................................. 1896
Set group properties.........................................................................1897
SET PLUGIN ACCESS........................................................................ 1899
Set user properties............................................................................1900
User in group................................................................................... 1903
USERS TO BLOB............................................................................... 1904
Validate password............................................................................ 1905

60. Variables.............................. 1907

CLEAR VARIABLE...............................................................................1909
LOAD VARIABLES..............................................................................1911

32 4D Language Reference
 SAVE VARIABLES............................................................................... 1912
Undefined........................................................................................ 1913

61. Web Area............................. 1915

Programmed management of Web Areas......................................... 1917
WA Back URL available..................................................................... 1922
WA Create URL history menu............................................................1923
WA Execute JavaScript......................................................................1925
WA EXECUTE JAVASCRIPT FUNCTION.............................................. 1926
WA Forward URL available................................................................1927
WA Get current URL......................................................................... 1928
WA GET EXTERNAL LINKS FILTERS....................................................1929
WA Get last filtered URL................................................................... 1930
WA GET LAST URL ERROR.................................................................1931
WA Get page content.......................................................................1932
WA Get page title.............................................................................1933
WA GET PREFERENCE....................................................................... 1934
WA GET URL FILTERS........................................................................1935
WA GET URL HISTORY......................................................................1936
WA OPEN BACK URL........................................................................ 1938
WA OPEN FORWARD URL.................................................................1939
WA OPEN URL..................................................................................1940
WA REFRESH CURRENT URL..............................................................1941
WA SET EXTERNAL LINKS FILTERS.....................................................1942
WA SET PAGE CONTENT..................................................................1944
WA SET PAGE TEXT LARGER............................................................. 1945
WA SET PAGE TEXT SMALLER........................................................... 1946
WA SET PREFERENCE........................................................................1947
WA SET URL FILTERS.........................................................................1948
WA STOP LOADING URL.................................................................. 1952

62. Web Server.......................... 1953

Web Server, Overview...................................................................... 1955
Web server configuration and connection management...................1960

4D Language Reference 33
 Your First Time with the Web Server.................................................1972
Connection Security.........................................................................1981
On Web Authentication Database Method....................................... 1991
On Web Connection Database Method............................................1997
Binding 4D objects with HTML objects.............................................2006
URLs and Form Actions.....................................................................2018
4D HTML Tags................................................................................. 2027
Web Server Settings......................................................................... 2037
Information about the Web Site....................................................... 2050
Using the Contextual Mode............................................................. 2057
Using SSL Protocol........................................................................... 2075
XML and WML Support....................................................................2080
Using CGIs....................................................................................... 2081
GET HTTP BODY...............................................................................2090
GET HTTP HEADER........................................................................... 2092
GET WEB FORM VARIABLES..............................................................2095
PROCESS HTML TAGS...................................................................... 2097
Secured Web connection..................................................................2099
SEND HTML BLOB............................................................................2100
SEND HTML FILE.............................................................................. 2103
SEND HTML TEXT............................................................................ 2106
SEND HTTP RAW DATA.................................................................... 2108
SEND HTTP REDIRECT...................................................................... 2111
SET CGI EXECUTABLE.......................................................................2113
SET HOME PAGE.............................................................................. 2115
SET HTML ROOT..............................................................................2116
SET HTTP HEADER............................................................................2117
SET WEB DISPLAY LIMITS................................................................. 2119
SET WEB TIMEOUT...........................................................................2122
START WEB SERVER.......................................................................... 2123
STOP WEB SERVER............................................................................2124
Validate Digest Web Password..........................................................2125
WEB CACHE STATISTICS...................................................................2127
Web Context....................................................................................2129

34 4D Language Reference
63. Web Services (Client).......... 2131
Web Services (Client) Commands.....................................................2133
AUTHENTICATE WEB SERVICE.......................................................... 2134
CALL WEB SERVICE...........................................................................2136
Get Web Service error info................................................................2141
GET WEB SERVICE RESULT................................................................2143
SET WEB SERVICE OPTION............................................................... 2145
SET WEB SERVICE PARAMETER..........................................................2148

64. Web Services (Server)......... 2151

Web Services (Server) Commands ................................................... 2153
Get SOAP info.................................................................................. 2154
Is SOAP request................................................................................2155
SEND SOAP FAULT...........................................................................2156
SOAP DECLARATION........................................................................2157

65. Windows..............................2163
Managing Windows......................................................................... 2165
Window Types................................................................................. 2168
CLOSE WINDOW............................................................................. 2178
Current form window.......................................................................2179
DRAG WINDOW...............................................................................2180
ERASE WINDOW.............................................................................. 2182
Find window.................................................................................... 2183
Frontmost window........................................................................... 2184
GET WINDOW RECT.........................................................................2185
Get window title.............................................................................. 2186
HIDE WINDOW................................................................................ 2187
MAXIMIZE WINDOW....................................................................... 2189
MINIMIZE WINDOW........................................................................2191
Next window................................................................................... 2193
Open external window.....................................................................2194

4D Language Reference 35
 Open form window..........................................................................2196
Open window.................................................................................. 2199
REDRAW WINDOW.......................................................................... 2203
RESIZE FORM WINDOW...................................................................2204
SET WINDOW RECT......................................................................... 2206
SET WINDOW TITLE......................................................................... 2208
SHOW WINDOW..............................................................................2210
Window kind....................................................................................2211
WINDOW LIST................................................................................. 2212
Window process...............................................................................2214

66. XML DOM............................2215

Overview of XML DOM Commands................................................. 2217
DOM CLOSE XML............................................................................ 2221
DOM Count XML attributes............................................................. 2222
DOM Count XML elements..............................................................2224
DOM Create XML element...............................................................2225
DOM Create XML Ref.......................................................................2228
DOM EXPORT TO FILE..................................................................... 2230
DOM EXPORT TO VAR..................................................................... 2231
DOM Find XML element.................................................................. 2232
DOM Find XML element by ID......................................................... 2234
DOM Get first child XML element.................................................... 2235
DOM Get last child XML element.....................................................2237
DOM Get next sibling XML element.................................................2238
DOM Get parent XML element........................................................ 2240
DOM Get previous sibling XML element...........................................2241
DOM Get Root XML element........................................................... 2242
DOM GET XML ATTRIBUTE BY INDEX.............................................. 2243
DOM GET XML ATTRIBUTE BY NAME...............................................2244
DOM Get XML element................................................................... 2246
DOM GET XML ELEMENT NAME......................................................2247
DOM GET XML ELEMENT VALUE......................................................2248
DOM Get XML information..............................................................2249
DOM Parse XML source....................................................................2250
DOM Parse XML variable..................................................................2253

36 4D Language Reference
 DOM REMOVE XML ELEMENT......................................................... 2255
DOM SET XML ATTRIBUTE............................................................... 2256
DOM SET XML ELEMENT NAME.......................................................2258
DOM SET XML ELEMENT VALUE...................................................... 2260
DOM SET XML OPTIONS................................................................. 2262

67. XML SAX..............................2263

Overview of XML SAX Commands....................................................2265
SAX ADD PROCESSING INSTRUCTION.............................................2266
SAX ADD XML CDATA..................................................................... 2267
SAX ADD XML COMMENT...............................................................2269
SAX ADD XML DOCTYPE................................................................. 2270
SAX ADD XML ELEMENT VALUE.......................................................2271
SAX CLOSE XML ELEMENT...............................................................2272
SAX GET XML CDATA...................................................................... 2273
SAX GET XML COMMENT................................................................2274
SAX GET XML DOCUMENT VALUES................................................. 2275
SAX GET XML ELEMENT...................................................................2276
SAX GET XML ELEMENT VALUE........................................................2278
SAX GET XML ENTITY.......................................................................2279
SAX Get XML node.......................................................................... 2280
SAX GET XML PROCESSING INSTRUCTION......................................2282
SAX OPEN XML ELEMENT................................................................ 2283
SAX OPEN XML ELEMENT ARRAYS................................................... 2284
SAX SET XML OPTIONS....................................................................2286

68. XML Utilities........................ 2287

Overview of XML Utilities Commands...............................................2289
APPLY XSLT TRANSFORMATION.......................................................2291
GET XML ERROR...............................................................................2293
GET XSLT ERROR..............................................................................2294
SET XSLT PARAMETER...................................................................... 2295
SVG Find element ID by coordinates.................................................2297
SVG EXPORT TO PICTURE................................................................ 2299

4D Language Reference 37
 69. Error Codes..........................2301
Backup Manager Errors (1401 -> 1421)............................................2303
Database Engine Errors (-10600 -> 4004).........................................2304
Mac OS System Errors (4 -> 28)........................................................2315
Network Errors (-10051 -> -10001).................................................. 2316
OS File Manager Errors (-124 -> -33)................................................2317
OS Memory Manager Errors (-117 -> -108)...................................... 2318
OS Printing Manager Errors (-8192 -> -1).........................................2319
OS Resource Manager Errors (-196 -> -1)..........................................2320
OS Serial Ports Manager Errors (-28).................................................2321
OS Sound Manager Errors (-209 -> -203)......................................... 2322
SANE NaN Errors (1 -> 255)............................................................. 2323
SQL Engine Errors (1001 -> 3018).................................................... 2324
Syntax Errors (1 -> 81)..................................................................... 2331

70. Character Codes.................. 2335

Unicode Codes.................................................................................2337
ASCII Codes..................................................................................... 2338
Function Key Codes..........................................................................2352

71. Command Syntax................ 2355

Command Syntax by Name............................................................. 2357

Constants...................................2385
4D Environment...............................................................................2387
ASCII Codes..................................................................................... 2388
Backup and Restore..........................................................................2390
BLOB................................................................................................2391
Colors.............................................................................................. 2392
Communications..............................................................................2393

38 4D Language Reference
Data file maintenance...................................................................... 2394
Database Engine.............................................................................. 2395
Database Events............................................................................... 2396
Database Parameters........................................................................2397
Date Display Formats....................................................................... 2399
Days and Months............................................................................. 2400
Dictionaries...................................................................................... 2401
Euro currencies.................................................................................2402
Events (Modifiers).............................................................................2403
Events (What)...................................................................................2404
Expressions.......................................................................................2405
Field and Variable Types...................................................................2406
Find window.................................................................................... 2407
Font Styles....................................................................................... 2408
Form area.........................................................................................2409
Form Events..................................................................................... 2410
Form Parameters.............................................................................. 2412
Function Keys...................................................................................2413
Hierarchical Lists...............................................................................2414
Index Type....................................................................................... 2415
Is license available............................................................................ 2416
ISO Latin Character Entities.............................................................. 2417
List box............................................................................................ 2419
Log Events........................................................................................2420
Math................................................................................................2421
Menu item properties.......................................................................2422
Object alignment............................................................................. 2423
Open form window..........................................................................2424
Open window.................................................................................. 2425
Pasteboard....................................................................................... 2426
Picture Compression........................................................................ 2427
Picture Display Formats.................................................................... 2428
Picture Transformation..................................................................... 2429
Platform Interface.............................................................................2430
Platform Properties...........................................................................2431
Print options.................................................................................... 2432
Process state.....................................................................................2433
Process Type.................................................................................... 2434

4D Language Reference 39
 QR Area Properties........................................................................... 2435
QR Borders.......................................................................................2436
QR Commands.................................................................................2437
QR Document Properties..................................................................2439
QR Operators................................................................................... 2440
QR Output Destination.....................................................................2441
QR Report Types.............................................................................. 2442
QR Rows for Properties.....................................................................2443
QR Text Properties........................................................................... 2444
Queries............................................................................................ 2445
Relations.......................................................................................... 2446
Resources Properties.........................................................................2447
SCREEN DEPTH................................................................................ 2448
SET RGB COLORS.............................................................................2449
SQL..................................................................................................2450
Standard System Signatures............................................................. 2451
System Documents...........................................................................2452
System Folder...................................................................................2453
System format..................................................................................2454
TCP Port Numbers........................................................................... 2455
Time Display Formats....................................................................... 2456
Value for Associated Standard Action................................................2457
Web Area......................................................................................... 2458
Web Services (Client)........................................................................2459
Web Services (Server)....................................................................... 2460
Window kind....................................................................................2461
XML................................................................................................. 2462

Command Index........................2463

40 4D Language Reference
1
______________________
Introduction

4D Language Reference 41
42 4D Language Reference
Preface Introduction

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4D has its own programming language. This built-in language, consisting of nearly 1000
commands, makes 4D a powerful development tool for database applications on desktop
computers. You can use the 4D language for many different tasks—from performing simple
calculations to creating complex custom user interfaces. For example, you can:
• Programmatically access any of the record management editors (order by, query, and so on),
• Create and print complex reports and labels with the information from the database,
• Communicate with other devices,
• Manage documents,
• Import and export data between 4D databases and other applications,
• Incorporate procedures written in other languages into the 4D programming language.

The flexibility and power of the 4D programming language make it the ideal tool for all levels
of users and developers to accomplish a complete range of information management tasks.
Novice users can quickly perform calculations. Experienced users without programming
experience can customize their databases. Experienced developers can use this powerful
programming language to add sophisticated features and capabilities to their databases,
including file transfer and communications. Developers with programming experience in
other languages can add their own commands to the 4D language.

The 4D programming language is expanded when any of the 4D modules are added to the
application. Each module includes language commands that are specific to the capabilities
they provide.

About the Manuals

The manuals described here provide a guide to the features of both 4D and 4D Server. The
only exception is the 4D Server Reference, which describes features exclusive to 4D Server.

• The Language Reference is a guide to using the 4D language. Use this manual to learn how
to customize your database by incorporating 4D commands and functions.
• The Design Reference provides detailed descriptions of the editors and tools available in this
environment.

4D Language Reference 43
• The Self-training manual leads you through example lessons in which you create and use a
4D database. These examples provide hands-on experience and help you become familiar with
the concepts and features of 4D and 4D Server.
• The 4D Server Reference, which is included only in the 4D Server package, is a guide to
managing multi-user databases with 4D Server.

About this Manual

This manual describes the 4D language. It assumes that you are familiar with terms such as
table, field, and form. Before you read this manual, you should:
• Use the Self-training manual to work through the database example.
• Begin creating your own databases, referring to the Design Reference manual when necessary.
• Increase your knowledge by studying that numerous demo and example databases that are
available on the 4D Web site (http://www.4d.com).

Writing conventions
In this manual, several writing conventions are used:
• Following the example of the 4D Method editor, commands are written in all caps using
special characters, e.g.: OPEN DOCUMENT. Functions (commands that return a value) start
with a capital letter and continue in lower case, e.g.: Change string.
• In the command syntax, the { } characters (braces) indicate optional parameters. For
example, SET DEFAULT CENTURY (century{; pivotYear}) means that the pivotYear parameter may
be omitted when calling the command.
• In the command syntax, the | character indicates an alternative. For example, Table
(tableNum | aPtr) indicates that the function accepts either a table number or a pointer as
parameter.
• In certain examples in this documentation, a line of code may be continued onto the
following line(s) due to lack of space. However, you should type these examples as a single line
of code without using carriage returns.

Where to go from here?

If you are reading this manual for the first time, read the Introduction section.

44 4D Language Reference
Introduction Introduction

version 2003 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

This topic introduces you to the 4D programming language. The following topics are discussed:
• What the language is and what it can do for you,
• How you will use methods,
• How to develop an application with 4D.

These topics are covered here in general terms; they are covered in greater detail in other
sections.

What is a Language?
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The 4D language is not very different from the spoken language we use every day. It is a form
of communication used to express ideas, inform, and instruct. Like a spoken language, 4D has
its own vocabulary, grammar, and syntax; you use it to tell 4D how to manage your database
and data.

You do not need to know everything in the language in order to work effectively with 4D. In
order to speak, you do not need to know the entire English language; in fact, you can have a
small vocabulary and still be quite eloquent. The 4D language is much the same—you only
need to know a small part of the language to become productive, and you can learn the rest as
the need arises.

Why Use a Language?

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

At first it may seem that there is little need for a programming language in 4D. In the Design
environment, 4D provides flexible tools that require no programming to perform a wide
variety of data management tasks. Fundamental tasks, such as data entry, queries, sorting, and
reporting are handled with ease. In fact, many extra capabilities are available, such as data
validation, data entry aids, graphing, and label generation.

4D Language Reference 45
Then why do we need a 4D language? Here are some of its uses:
• Automate repetitive tasks: These tasks include data modification, generation of complex
reports, and unattended completion of long series of operations.
• Control the user interface: You can manage windows and menus, and control forms and
interface objects.
• Perform sophisticated data management: These tasks include transaction processing,
complex data validation, multi-user management, sets, and named selection operations.
• Control the computer: You can control serial port communications, document management,
and error management.
• Create applications: You can create easy-to-use, customized databases that run in the
Application environment.
• Add functionality to the built-in 4D Web Services: Create dynamic HTML pages in addition
to those automatically translated from forms by 4D.

The language lets you take complete control over the design and operation of your database.
4D provides powerful “generic” editors, but the language lets you customize your database to
whatever degree you require.

Taking Control of Your Data

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The 4D language lets you take complete control of your data in a powerful and elegant
manner. The language is easy enough for a beginner, and sophisticated enough for an
experienced application developer. It provides smooth transitions from built-in database
functions to a completely customized database.

The commands in the 4D language provide access to the standard record management editors.
For example, when you use the QUERY command, you are presented with the Query Editor
(which can be accessed in the Design mode using the Query command in the Records menu.
You can tell the QUERY command to search for explicitly described data. For example, QUERY
([People];[People]Last Name="Smith") will find all the people named Smith in your database.

The 4D language is very powerful—one command often replaces hundreds or even thousands
of lines of code written in traditional computer languages. Surprisingly enough, with this
power comes simplicity—commands have plain English names. For example, to perform a
query, you use the QUERY command; to add a new record, you use the ADD RECORD command.

The language is designed for you to easily accomplish almost any task. Adding a record,
sorting records, searching for data, and similar operations are specified with simple and direct
commands. But the language can also control the serial ports, read disk documents, control
sophisticated transaction processing, and much more.

46 4D Language Reference
The 4D language accomplishes even the most sophisticated tasks with relative simplicity.
Performing these tasks without using the language would be unimaginable for many.
Even with the language’s powerful commands, some tasks can be complex and difficult. A tool
by itself does not make a task possible; the task itself may be challenging and the tool can only
ease the process. For example, a word processor makes writing a book faster and easier, but it
will not write the book for you. Using the 4D language will make the process of managing
your data easier and will allow you to approach complicated tasks with confidence.

Is it a “Traditional” Computer Language?

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

If you are familiar with traditional computer languages, this section may be of interest. If not,
you may want to skip it.

The 4D language is not a traditional computer language. It is one of the most innovative and
flexible languages available on a computer today. It is designed to work the way you do, and
not the other way around.

To use traditional languages, you must do extensive planning. In fact, planning is one of the
major steps in development. 4D allows you to start using the language at any time and in any
part of your database. You may start by adding a method to a form, then later add a few more
methods. As your database becomes more sophisticated, you might add a project method
controlled by a menu. You can use as little or as much of the language as you want. It is not
“all or nothing,” as is the case with many other databases.

Traditional languages force you to define and pre-declare objects in formal syntactic terms. In
4D, you simply create an object, such as a button, and use it. 4D automatically manages the
object for you. For example, to use a button, you draw it on a form and name it. When the
user clicks the button, the language automatically notifies your methods.

Traditional languages are often rigid and inflexible, requiring commands to be entered in a
very formal and restrictive style. The 4D language breaks with tradition, and the benefits are
yours.

Methods are the Gateway to the Language

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

A method is a series of instructions that causes 4D to perform a task. Each line of instruction
in a method is called a statement. Each statement is composed of parts of the language.

Because you have already worked through the Quickstart tutorials (you did go through
Quickstart, didn’t you?), you have already written and used methods.

4D Language Reference 47
You can create five types of methods with 4D:

• Object Methods: Usually short methods used to control form objects.

• Form Methods: Manage the display or printing of a form.
• Table Methods/Triggers: Used to enforce the rules of your database.
• Project methods: Methods that are available for use throughout your database. For example,
methods that can be attached to menus.
• Database methods: Execute initializations or special actions when a database is opened or
closed, or when a Web browser connects to your database published as a Web Server on
Internet an Intranet.

The following sections introduce each of these method types and give you a feel for how you
can use them to automate your database.

Getting started with object methods

Any form object that can perform an action (that is, any active object) can have a method
associated with it. An object method monitors and manages the active object during data
entry and printing. A object method is bound to its active object even when the object is
copied and pasted. This allows you to create reusable libraries of scripted objects. The object
method takes control exactly when needed.

Object methods are the primary tools for managing the user interface, which is the doorway to
your database. The user interface consists of the procedures and conventions by which a
computer communicates with the user. The goal is to make the user interface of your database
as simple and easy to use as possible. The user interface should make interaction with the
computer a pleasant process, one that the user enjoys or does not even notice.

There are two basic types of active objects in a form:

• Those for entering, displaying, and storing data; such as fields and subfields
• Those for control; such as enterable areas, buttons, scrollable areas, hierarchical lists, and
meters

48 4D Language Reference
4D enables you to build classic forms, such as the one shown here:

You can also build forms with multiple graphic controls, such as this one:

4D Language Reference 49
You can even build forms that incorporate a graphical flair limited only by your imagination:

Whatever your style in building forms, all active objects have built-in aids, like range checking
and entry filters for data entry areas, and automatic actions for controls, menus, and buttons.
Always use these aids before adding object methods. The built-in aids are similar to methods
in that they remain associated with the active object and are active only when the active
object is being used. You will typically use a combination of built-in aids and object methods
to control the user interface.

An object method associated with an active object used for data entry typically performs a
data-management task specific to the field or variable. The method can perform data
validation, data formatting, or calculations. It may even get related information from other
files. Some of these tasks can, of course, also be performed with the built-in data entry aids for
objects. Use object methods when the task is too complex for the built-in data entry aids to
manage. For more information about the built-in data entry aids, refer to the 4D Design
Reference manual.

50 4D Language Reference
Object methods are also associated with active objects used for control, such as buttons. Active
objects used for control are essential to navigating within your database. Buttons allow you to
move from record to record, move to different forms, and add and delete data. These active
objects simplify the use of a database and reduce the time required to learn it. Buttons also
have built-in aids and, as with data entry, you should use these built-in aids before adding
methods. Object methods enable you to add actions that are not built-in, to your controls. For
example, the following window is the object method for a button that, when clicked, displays
the Query editor.

As you become more proficient with scripts, you will find that you can create libraries of
objects with associated methods. You can copy and paste these objects and their methods
between forms, tables, and databases. You can even keep them in the Clipbook (Windows) or
Scrapbook (Macintosh), ready to be used when you need them.

Controlling forms with form methods

In the same way that object methods are associated with the active objects in a form, a form
method is associated with a form. Each form can have one form method. A form is the means
through which you can enter, view, and print your data. Forms allow you to present the data
to the user in different ways. Through the use of forms, you can create attractive and easy-to-
use data entry screens and printed reports. A form method monitors and manages the use of
an individual form both for data entry and for printing.

Form methods manage forms at a higher level than do object methods. Object methods are
activated only when the object is used, whereas a form method is activated when anything in
the form is used. Form methods are typically used to control the interaction between the
different objects and the form as a whole.

As forms are used in so many different ways, it is informative to monitor what is happening
while your form is in use. You use the various form events for this purpose. They tell you what
is currently happening with the form. Each type of event (i.e., clicks, double-clicks,
keystrokes...) enables or disables the execution of the form method as well as the object
method of each object of the form.

4D Language Reference 51
For more information about form, objects, events and methods, see the section Form event.

Enforcing the rules of your database using the table methods/triggers

A Trigger is attached to a table; for this reason, it is also called a Table Method. Triggers are
automatically invoked by the 4D database engine each you manipulate the records of a table
(Add, Delete, Modify and Load). Triggers are methods that can prevent “illegal” operations
with the records of your database. For example, in an invoicing system, you can prevent
anyone from adding an invoice without specifying the customer to whom the invoice is
billed. Triggers are a very powerful tool to restrict operations on a table as well as to prevent
accidental data loss or tampering. You can write very simple triggers, then make them more
and more sophisticated.

For detailed information about Triggers, see the section Triggers.

Using project method throughout the database

Unlike object methods, form methods, and triggers, which are all associated with a particular
object, form, or table, project methods are available for use throughout your database. Project
methods are reusable, and available for use by any other method. If you need to repeat a task,
you do not have to write identical methods for each case. You can call project methods
wherever you need them—from other project methods or from object or form methods. When
you call a project method, it acts as if you had written the method at the location where you
called it. Project methods called from other method are often referred to as “subroutines.”

There is one other way to use project methods—associating them with menu commands.
When you associate a project method with a menu command, the method is executed when
the menu is chosen. You can think of the menu command as calling the project method.

Handling working sessions with database methods

In the same way object and form methods are invoked when events occur in a form, there are
methods associated with the database which are invoked when a working session event occurs.
These are the database methods. For example, each time you open a database, you may want
to initialize some variables that will be used during the whole working session. To do so, you
use the On Startup Database Method, automatically executed by 4D when you open the
database.

For more information about Database Methods, see the section Database Methods.

52 4D Language Reference
Developing Your Database
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Development is the process of customizing a database using the language and other built-in
tools.

By simply creating a database, you have already taken the first steps to using the language. All
the parts of your database—the tables and fields, the forms and their objects, and the menus—
are tied to the language. The 4D language “knows” about all of these parts of your database.

Perhaps your first use of the language is to add a method to a form object in order to control
data entry. Later, you might add a form method to control the display of your form. As the
database becomes more complex, you can add a menu bar with project methods to completely
customize your database.

As with other aspects of 4D, development is a very flexible process. There is no formal path to
take during development—you can develop in a manner with which you are comfortable.
There are, of course, some general patterns in the process.
• Implementation: Implement your design in the Design environment.
• Testing: You try out the design and test each customized element using the Test Application
command to launch the Application environment.
• Usage: When your database is fully customized, you launch it directly in the Application
environment.
• Corrections: If you find errors, you return to the Design environment to fix them.

Special development support tools, hidden until needed, are built into 4D. As you use the
language more frequently, you will find that these tools facilitate the development process.
For example, the Method Editor catches typing errors and formats your work; the Interpreter
(the engine that runs the language) catches errors in syntax and shows you where and what
they are; and the Debugger lets you monitor the execution of your methods to catch errors in
design.

Building Applications
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

By now you are familiar with the general uses of a database—data entry, searching, sorting,
and reporting. You have performed these actions in the Design environment, using the
standard menus and editors.

4D Language Reference 53
As you use a database, you perform some sequences of tasks repeatedly. For example, in a
database of personal contacts, you might search for your business associates, order them by
last name, and print a specific report each time information about them is changed. These
tasks may not seem difficult, but they can certainly be time-consuming after you have done
them 20 times. In addition, if you don’t use the database for a couple of weeks, you may
return to find that the steps used to generate the report are not so fresh in your mind. The
steps in methods are chained together, so a single command automatically performs all the
tasks linked to it. Consequently, you do not have to worry about the specific steps.

Applications have custom menus and perform tasks that are specific to the needs of the person
using your database. An application is composed of all the pieces of your database: the
structure, the forms, the object, form and project methods, the menus, and the passwords.

You can compile your databases and create stand-alone Windows and Macintosh applications.
Compiling databases increases the execution speed of the language, protects your databases,
and allows you to create applications that are completely independent. The integrated
compiler also checks the syntax and the types of variables in methods for consistency.

An application can be as simple as a single menu that lets you enter people’s names and print
a report, or as complex as an invoicing, inventory, and control system. There are no limits to
the uses of database applications. Typically, an application grows from a database used in the
Design environment to a database controlled completely by custom menus and forms.

Where to go from here?

• Developing applications can be as simple or complex as you like. For a quick overview about
building a simple 4D application, see the section Building a 4D application.
• If you are new to 4D, refer to the Language Definition sections to learn about the basics of
the 4D language: start with Introduction to the 4D Language.

54 4D Language Reference
Building a 4D Application Introduction

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

An application is a database designed to fill a specific need. It has a user interface designed
specifically to facilitate its use. The tasks that an application performs are limited to those
appropriate for its purpose. Creating applications with 4D is smoother and easier than with
traditional programming. 4D can be used to create a variety of applications, including:
• An invoice system
• An inventory control system
• An accounting system
• A payroll system
• A personnel system
• A customer tracking system
• A database shared over the Internet or an Intranet

It is possible that a single application could even contain all of these systems. Applications like
these are typical uses of databases. In addition, the tools in 4D allow you to create innovative
applications, such as:
• A document tracking system
• A graphic image management system
• A catalog publishing application
• A serial device control and monitoring system
• An electronic mail system (E-mail)
• A multi-user scheduling system
• A list such as a menu list, video collection, or music collection

An application typically can start as a database used in the Design environment. The database
“evolves” into an application as it is customized. What differentiates an application is that the
systems required to manage the database are hidden from the user. Database management is
automated, and users use menus to perform specific tasks.

When you use a 4D database in the Design environment, you must know the steps to take to
achieve a result. In an application, you use the Application environment, in which you need
to manage all the aspects that are automatic in the Design Environment. These include:

•Table Navigation: The List of Tables window, the Last used tables command or the
navigation buttons are not available to the user. You can use menu commands and methods
to control navigation between tables.

4D Language Reference 55
• Menus: In the Application environment, you only have the default File menu with the Quit
menu command, the Edit menu, the Mode and the Help menu (as well as the application
menu under Mac OS). If the application requires more menus, you have to create and manage
them using 4D methods or standard actions.
• Editors: The editors, such as the Query and Order By editors, are no longer automatically
available in the Application environment. If you want to use them, you have to call them
using 4D methods.

The following sections include examples showing how the language can automate the use of a
database.

Application Environment: an Example

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Custom menus are the primary interface in an application. They make it easier for users to
learn and use a database. Creating custom menus is very simple—you associate methods or
automatic actions with each menu command (also called menu items) in the Menu editor.

“The User's Perspective” section describes what happens when the user chooses a menu
command. Next, “Behind the Scenes” describes the design work that made it happen.
Although the example is simple, it should be apparent how custom menus make the database
easier to use and learn. Rather than the “generic” tools and menu commands in the Design
environment, the user sees only things that are appropriate to his or her needs.

56 4D Language Reference
The User’s Perspective
The user chooses a menu item called Create from the People menu to add a new person to the
database.

The Input form for the People table is displayed.

4D Language Reference 57
The user enters the person’s first name and then tabs to the next field.

The user enters the person’s last name.

58 4D Language Reference
The user tabs to the next field: the last name is converted to uppercase.

The user finishes entering the record and clicks the validation button (generally the last
button in the button bar).

Another blank record appears, and the user clicks the Cancel button (the one with the “X”) to
terminate the “data entry loop.” The user is returned to the menu bar.

4D Language Reference 59
Behind the Scenes
The menu bar was created in the Design environment, using the Menu Bar Editor.

The menu item New has a project method named New Person associated with it. This method
was created in the Design environment, using the Method editor.

60 4D Language Reference
When the user chooses this menu item, the New Person method executes:

Repeat
ADD RECORD([People])
Until (OK=0)

The Repeat...Until loop with an ADD RECORD command within the loop acts just like the New
Record menu item in the Design environment. It displays the input form to the user, so that
he or she can add a new record. When the user saves the record, another new blank record
appears. This ADD RECORD loop continues to execute until the user clicks the Cancel button.

When a record is entered, the following occurs:

• There is no method for the First Name field, so nothing executes.
• There is a method for the Last Name field. This Object Method was created in the Design
environment, using the Form and Method editors. The method executes:

Last Name:=Uppercase(Last Name)

This line converts the Last Name field to uppercase characters.

After a record has been entered, when the user clicks the Cancel button for the next one, the
OK variable is set to zero, thus ending the execution of the ADD RECORD loop.

As there are no more statements to execute, the New Person method stops executing and
control returns to the menu bar.

Comparing an Automated Task with the Actions to be performed in the Design environment
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Let’s compare the way a task is performed in the Design environment and the way the same
task is performed using the language. The task is a common one:
• Find a group of records
• Sort them
• Print a report

The next section, “Using a Database in the Design Environment,” displays the tasks performed
in the Design environment.

The following section, “Using the Built-in Editors within the Application environment,”
displays the same tasks performed in an application.

4D Language Reference 61
Note that although both methods perform the same task, the steps in the second section are
automated using the language.

Using a database in the Design environment

The user chooses Query>Query... in the Records menu.

The Query editor is displayed.

62 4D Language Reference
The user enters the criteria and clicks the Query button. The search is performed.

The user chooses Order by from the Records menu.

The Order By editor is displayed.

The user enters the criteria and clicks the Sort button. The sort is performed.

Then, to print the records, these additional steps are required:

• The user chooses Print from the File menu.
• The Choose Print Form dialog box is displayed, because users need to know which form to
print.
• The Printing dialog boxes are displayed. The user chooses the settings, and the report is
printed.

4D Language Reference 63
Using the built-in editors within the Application environment
Let’s examine how this can be performed in the Application environment.

The User chooses Report from the People menu.

Even at this point, using an application is easier for the users—they did not need to know that
querying is the first step!

A method called My Report is attached to the menu command; it looks like this:

QUERY ([People])
ORDER BY ([People])
OUTPUT FORM ([People]; "Report")
PRINT SELECTION ([People])

The first line is executed:

QUERY ([People])

The Query editor is displayed.

64 4D Language Reference
The user enters the criteria and clicks the Query button. The query is performed.

The second line of the My Report method is executed:

ORDER BY ([People])

Note that the user did not need to know that ordering the records was the next step.

The Order By Editor is displayed.

The user enters the criteria and clicks the Sort button. The sort is performed.

The third line of the My Report method is executed:

OUTPUT FORM ([People]; "Report")

Once again, the user did not need to know what to do next; the method takes care of that.

The final line of the My Report method is executed:

PRINT SELECTION ([People])

The Printing dialog boxes are displayed. The User chooses the settings, and the report is
printed.

4D Language Reference 65
Automating the Application Further
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The same commands used in the previous example can be used to further automate the
database.

Let’s take a look at the new version of the My Report method.

The user chooses Report from the People menu. A method called My Report2 is attached to the
menu command. It looks like this:

QUERY([People];[People]Company="Acme")
ORDER BY([People]; [People]Last Name;>;[People]First Name;>)
OUTPUT FORM([People];"Report")
PRINT SELECTION([People];*)

The first line is executed:

QUERY([People];[People]Company="Acme")

The Query editor is not displayed. Instead, the query is specified and performed by the QUERY
command. The user does not need to do anything.

The second line of the My Report2 method is executed:

ORDER BY([People];[People]Last Name;>;[People]First Name;>)

The Order By editor is not displayed, and the sort is immediately performed. Once again, no
user actions are required.

The final lines of the My Report2 method are executed:

OUTPUT FORM ([People]; "Report")

PRINT SELECTION ([People]; *)

The Printing dialog boxes are not displayed. The PRINT SELECTION command accepts an
optional asterisk (*) parameter that instructs the command to use the print settings that were
in effect when the report form was created. The report is printed.

This additional automation saved the user from having to enter options in three dialog boxes.
Here are the benefits :
• The query is automatically performed: users may select wrong criteria when making a query.
• The sort is automatically performed: users may select wrong criteria when defining a sort.
• The printing is automatically performed: users may select the wrong form to print.

66 4D Language Reference
Help for Developing 4D Applications
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

As you develop a 4D application, you will discover many capabilities that you did not notice
when you started. You can even augment the standard version of 4D by adding other tools
and plug-ins to your 4D development environment.

4D plug-ins
4D provides several plug-ins that can be used for increasing the capabilities of your 4D
applications.

• 4D Write: Word-processor
• 4D Draw: Graphical drawing program
• 4D View: Spreadsheet and list editor
• 4D Internet Commands (built-in): Communication utilities via Internet.

• 4D ODBC Pro: Connectivity via ODBC

• 4D for OCI: Connectivity with ORACLE Call Interface
• 4D Open for Java: Connectivity with Java applications
• 4D Open for 4D: Connectivity (from 4D to 4D) for building distributed 4D information
systems.

For more information, contact 4D or its Partners. Visit our Web Sites:
USA & International:
http://www.4d.com
France:
http://www.4d.fr

The 4D community and third party tools

There is a very active worldwide 4D community, composed of User Groups, Electronic Forums,
and 4D Partners. 4D Partners produce Third Party Tools. You can suscribe to the user forum of
4D at the following address:

http://forums.4D.fr

The 4D community offers access to tips and tricks, solutions, information, and additional
tools that will save you time and energy, and increase your productivity.

4D Language Reference 67
68 4D Language Reference
2
______________________
Language Definition

4D Language Reference 69
70 4D Language Reference
Introduction to the 4D Language Language Definition

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The 4D language is made up of various components that help you perform tasks and manage
your data.

• Data types: Classifications of data in a database. See discussion in this section as well as the
detailed discussion in the section Data Types.
• Variables: Temporary storage places for data in memory. See detailed discussion in the
section Variables.
• Operators: Symbols that perform a calculation between two values. See discussion in this
section as well as the detailed discussion in the section Operators and its subsections.
• Expressions: Combinations of other components that result in a value. See discussion in this
section.
• Commands: Built-in instructions to perform an action. All 4D commands, such as ADD
RECORD, are described in this manual, grouped by theme; when necessary, the theme is
preceded by an introductory section. You can use 4D Plug-ins to add new commands to your
4D development environment. For example, once you have added the 4D Write Plug-in to
your 4D system, the 4D Write commands become available for creating and manipulating
word-processing documents.
• Methods: Instructions that you write using all parts of the language listed here. See
discussion in the section Methods and its subsections.

This section introduces Data Types, Operators, and Expressions. For the other components, refer
to the sections cited above.

In addition:
• Language components, such as variables, have names called Identifiers. For a detailed
discussion about identifiers and the rules for naming objects, refer to the section Identifiers.
• To learn more about array variables, refer to the section Arrays.
• To learn more about BLOB variables, refer to the section BLOB commands.
• If you plan to compile your database, refer to the section Compiler Commands as well as the
Design Reference manual of 4D.

4D Language Reference 71
Data Types
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

In the language, the various types of data that can be stored in a 4D database are referred to as
data types. There are seven basic data types: string, numeric, date, time, Boolean, picture, and
pointer.

• String: A series of characters, such as “Hello there”. Alpha and Text fields, and string and
text variables, are of the string data type.
• Numeric: Numbers, such as 2 or 1,000.67. Integer, Long Integer, and Real fields and variables
are of the numeric data type.
• Date: Calendar dates, such as 1/20/89. Date fields and variables are of the date data type.
• Time: Times, including hours, minutes, and seconds, such as 1:00:00 or 4:35:30 PM. Time
fields and variables are of the time data type.
• Boolean: Logical values of TRUE or FALSE. Boolean fields and variables are of the Boolean
data type.
• Picture: Picture fields and variables are of the picture data type.
• Pointer: A special type of data used in advanced programming. Pointer variables are of the
pointer data type. There is no corresponding field type.

Note that in the list of data types, the string and numeric data types are associated with more
than one type of field. When data is put into a field, the language automatically converts the
data to the correct type for the field. For example, if an integer field is used, its data is
automatically treated as numeric. In other words, you need not worry about mixing similar
field types when using the language; it will manage them for you.

However, when using the language it is important that you do not mix different data types. In
the same way that it makes no sense to store “ABC” in a Date field, it makes no sense to put
“ABC” in a variable used for dates. In most cases, 4D is very tolerant and will try to make sense
of what you are doing. For example, if you add a number to a date, 4D will assume that you
want to add that number of days to the date, but if you try to add a string to a date, 4D will
tell you that the operation cannot work.

There are cases in which you need to store data as one type and use it as another type. The
language contains a full complement of commands that let you convert from one data type to
another. For example, you may need to create a part number that starts with a number and
ends with characters such as “abc”. In this case, you might write:

[Products]Part Number:=String(Number)+"abc"

If Number is 17, then [Products]Part Number will get the string “17abc”.

The data types are fully defined in the section Data Types.

72 4D Language Reference
Operators
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

When you use the language, it is rare that you will simply want a piece of data. It is more
likely that you will want to do something to or with that data. You perform such calculations
with operators. Operators, in general, take two pieces of data and perform an operation on
them that results in a new piece of data. You are already familiar with many operators. For
example, 1 + 2 uses the addition (or plus sign) operator to add two numbers together, and the
result is 3. This table shows some familiar numeric operators:

Operator Operation Example

+ Addition 1 + 2 results in 3
– Subtraction 3 – 2 results in 1
* Multiplication 2 * 3 results in 6
/ Division 6 / 2 results in 3

Numeric operators are just one type of operator available to you. 4D supports many different
types of data, such as numbers, text, dates, and pictures, so there are operators that perform
operations on these different data types.
The same symbols are often used for different operations, depending on the data type. For
example, the plus sign (+) performs different operations with different data:

Data Type Operation Example

Number Addition 1 + 2 adds the numbers and results in 3
String Concatenation “Hello ” + “there” concatenates (joins
together)
the strings and results in “Hello there”
Date and Number Date addition !1/1/1989! + 20 adds 20 days to the date
January 1, 1989, and results in the date
January 21, 1989

The operators are fully defined in the section Operators and its subsections.

Expressions
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Simply put, expressions return a value. In fact, when using the 4D language, you use
expressions all the time and tend to think of them only in terms of the value they represent.
Expressions are also sometimes referred to as formulas.

Expressions are made up of almost all the other parts of the language: commands, operators,
variables, and fields. You use expressions to build statements (lines of code), which in turn are
used to build methods. The language uses expressions wherever it needs a piece of data.

4D Language Reference 73
Expressions rarely “stand alone.” There are only a few places in 4D where an expression can be
used by itself:
• Query by Formula dialog box
• Debugger where the value of expressions can be checked
• Apply Formula dialog box
• Quick Report editor as a formula for a column

An expression can simply be a constant, such as the number 4 or the string “Hello.” As the
name implies, a constant’s value never changes. It is when operators are introduced that
expressions start to get interesting. In preceding sections you have already seen expressions
that use operators. For example, 4 + 2 is an expression that uses the addition operator to add
two numbers together and return the result 6.

You refer to an expression by the data type it returns. There are seven expression types:
• String expression
• Numeric expression (also referred to as number)
• Date expression
• Time expression
• Boolean expression
• Picture expression
• Pointer expression
The following table gives examples of each of the seven types of expressions.

Expression Type Explanation

“Hello” String The word Hello is a string constant,
indicated by the double quotation marks.
“Hello ” + “there” String Two strings, “Hello ” and “there”,
are added together (concatenated)
with the string concatenation operator (+).
The string “Hello there” is returned.
“Mr. ” + [People]Name String Two strings are concatenated:
the string “Mr. ” and the current value
of the Name field in the People table.
If the field contains “Smith”, the expression
returns “Mr. Smith”.
Uppercase (“smith”) String This expression uses “Uppercase”,
a command from the language,
to convert the string “smith” to uppercase.
It returns “SMITH”.
4 Number This is a number constant, 4.

74 4D Language Reference
4*2 Number Two numbers, 4 and 2, are multiplied
using the multiplication operator (*).
The result is the number 8.
My Button Number This is the name of a button.
It returns the current value of the button:
1 if it was clicked, 0 if not.
!1/25/97! Date This is a date constant for the date 1/25/97
(January 25, 1997).
Current date + 30 Date This is a date expression that uses
the command “Current date” to get today’s date.
It adds 30 days to today’s date and returns
the new date.
?8:05:30? Time This is a time constant that represents 8 hours,
5 minutes, and 30 seconds.
?2:03:04? + ?1:02:03? Time This expression adds two times together and
returns the time 3:05:07.
True Boolean This command returns the Boolean value TRUE.
10 # 20 Boolean This is a logical comparison between two numbers.
The number sign (#) means “is not equal to”.
Since 10 “is not equal to” 20, the expression
returns TRUE.
“ABC” = “XYZ” Boolean This is a logical comparison between two strings.
They are not equal, so the expression returns FALSE.
My Picture + 50 Picture This expression takes the picture in My Picture,
moves it 50 pixels to the right, and returns
the resulting picture.
->[People]Name Pointer This expression returns a pointer to the field
called [People]Name.
Table (1) Pointer This is a command that returns a pointer to
the first table.

See Also
Arrays, Constants, Data Types, Methods, Operators, Pointers, Variables.

4D Language Reference 75
Data Types Language Definition

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4D fields, variables, and expressions can be of the following data types:

Data Type Field Variable Expression

String (see note 1) Yes Yes Yes
Number (see note 2) Yes Yes Yes
Date Yes Yes Yes
Time Yes Yes Yes
Boolean Yes Yes Yes
Picture Yes Yes Yes
Pointer No Yes Yes
BLOB (see note 3) Yes Yes No
Array (see note 4) No Yes No
Integer 64 bits (see note 5) Yes No No
Float (see note 5) Yes No No
Undefined No Yes Yes

Notes:
1. String includes alphanumeric field, fixed length variable, and text field or variable.
2. Number includes Real, Integer, and Long Integer field and variable.
3. BLOB is an acronym for Binary Large OBject. For more information about BLOBs, see the
section BLOB Commands.
4. Array includes all types of arrays. For more information, see the section Arrays.
5. The Integer 64 bits and Float types are only managed via SQL. It is not recommended to
work with them via the 4D language because in this case they are converted into the Real type
which could lead to some loss of accuracy.

String
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

String is a generic term that stands for:

• Alphanumeric fields or variables
• Text fields or variables
• Any String or Text expression

76 4D Language Reference
A string is composed of characters. The handling of character strings varies depending on
whether 4D is run in Unicode mode or in non-Unicode mode (compatibility mode). This
mode is set via the application Preference (see the ASCII Codes section).

Unicode Mode
• An Alphanumeric field may contain from 0 to 255 characters (limit is set during field
definition).
• A Text field, variable, or expression may contain from 0 to 2 GB of text.
• There is no difference between a string or text variable.

Non-Unicode Mode (compatibility)

Each character can be one of the 256 ASCII characters supported by Windows and Mac OS. For
more information about ASCII codes, please refer to the ASCII Codes section.
• An alphanumeric field may contain from 0 to 255 characters (limit is set during field
definition).
• A Fixed length variable may contain from 0 to 255 characters (limit depends on the variable
declaration).
• A Text field, variable, or expression may contain from 0 to32,000 characters .

No matter what the mode, youcan assign a string to a text field and vice-versa; 4D does the
conversion, truncating if necessary. You can mix string and text in an expression.

Note: In the 4D Language Reference manual, both string and text parameters in command
descriptions are denoted as String, except when marked otherwise.

Number
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Number is a generic term that stands for:

• Real Field, variable or expression
• Integer field, variable or expression
• Long Integer field, variable or expression

The range for the Real data type is ±1.7e±308 (15 digits)
The range for the Integer data type (2-byte Integer) is -32,768..32,767 (2^15..(2^15)-1)
The range for the Long Integer data type (4-byte Integer) is -2^31..(2^31)-1

4D Language Reference 77
You can assign any Number data type to another; 4D does the conversion, truncating or
rounding if necessary. However, when values are out of range, the conversion will not return a
valid value. You can mix Number data types in expressions.

Note: In the 4D Language Reference manual, no matter the actual data type, the Real, Integer,
and Long Integer parameters in command descriptions are denoted as Number, except when
marked otherwise.

Date
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

• A Date field, variable or expression can be in the range of 1/1/100 to 12/31/32,767.

• Using the US English version of 4D, a date is ordered month/day/year.
• If a year is given as two digits, it is assumed to be in the 1900’s if the value is greater than or
equal to 30, and the 2000’s if the value is less than 30 (this default can be changed using the
SET DEFAULT CENTURY command).

Note: In the 4D Language Reference manual, Date parameters in command descriptions are
denoted as Date, except when marked otherwise.

Time
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

• A Time field, variable or expression can be in the range of 00:00:00 to 596,000:00:00.

• Using the US English version of 4D, time is ordered hour:minute:second.
• Times are in 24-hour format.
• A time value can be treated as a number. The number returned from a time is the number of
seconds that time represents. For more information, see the section Time Operators.

Note: In the 4D Language Reference manual, Time parameters in command descriptions are
denoted as Time, except when marked otherwise.

Boolean
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

A Boolean field, variable or expression can be either TRUE or FALSE.

Note: In the 4D Language Reference manual, Boolean parameters in command descriptions are
denoted as Boolean, except when marked otherwise.

78 4D Language Reference
Picture
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

A Picture field, variable or expression can be any Windows or Macintosh picture. In general,
this includes any picture that can be put on the pasteboard or read from the disk using 4D or
Plug-In commands.

Note: In the 4D Language Reference manual, Picture parameters in command descriptions are
denoted as Picture, except when marked otherwise.

Pointer
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

A Pointer variable or expression is a reference to another variable (including arrays and array
elements), table, or field. There is no field of type Pointer.

For more information about Pointers, see the section Pointers.

Note: In the 4D Language Reference manual, Pointer parameters in command descriptions are
denoted as Pointer except when marked otherwise.

BLOB
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

A BLOB field or variable is a series of bytes (from 0 to 2 GB in length) that you can address
individually or by using the BLOB Commands. There is no expression of type BLOB.

Note: In the 4D Language Reference manual, BLOB parameters in command descriptions are
denoted as BLOB.

Array
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Array is not actually a data type. The various types of arrays (such as Integer Array, Text Array,
and so on) are grouped under this title. Arrays are variables—there is no field of type Array,
and there is no expression of type Array. For more information about arrays, see the section
Arrays.

Note: In the 4D Language Reference manual, Array parameters in command descriptions are
denoted as Array, except when marked otherwise (i.e., String Array, Numeric Array, ...).

4D Language Reference 79
Undefined
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Undefined is not actually a data type. It denotes a variable that has not yet been defined. A
function (a project method that returns a result) can return an undefined value if, within the
method, the function result ($0) is assigned an undefined expression (an expression calculated
with at least one undefined variable). A field cannot be undefined.

Converting Data Types

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The 4D language contains operators and commands to convert between data types, where
such conversions are meaningful. The 4D language enforces data type checking. For example,
you cannot write: "abc"+0.5+!12/25/96!-?00:30:45?. This will generate syntax errors.

The following table lists the basic data types, the data types to which they can be converted,
and the commands used to do so:

Data Type Convert to Convert to Convert to Convert to

String Number Date Time
String Num Date Time
Number (*) String
Date String
Time String
Boolean Num

(*) Time values can be be treated as numbers.

Note: In addition to the data conversions listed inthis table, more sophisticated data
conversions can be obtained by combining operators and other commands.

See Also
Arrays, Constants, Control Flow, Identifiers, Methods, Operators, Pointers, Type, Variables.

80 4D Language Reference
Constants Language Definition

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

A constant is an expression that has a fixed value. There are two types of constants:
predefined constants that you select by name, and literal constants for which you type the
actual value.

Predefined Constants
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4D provides a set of predefined constants. These constants are grouped by themes in the
Explorer Window:

To use a predefined constant in a Method editor window:

• Drag and drop the constant from the Explorer window to the Method editor window.
• Directly type its name in the Method editor window. The type-ahead mechanism suggests
constants that correspond to the programming context.

4D Language Reference 81
Predefined constant names can contain up to 31 characters.

Predefined constants appeared underlined by default within the Method Editor and Debugger
windows:

In the window shown here, On Load, for example, is a predefined constant.

Literal Constants
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Literal Constants can be of four data types:

• String
• Numeric
• Date
• Time

String Constants
A string constant is enclosed in double, straight quotation marks ("…"). Here are some
examples of string constants:

"Add Records"
"No records found."
"Invoice"

An empty string is specified by two quotation marks with nothing between them ("").

82 4D Language Reference
Numeric Constants
A numeric constant is written as a real number. Here are some examples of numeric constants:

27
123.76
0.0076

Negative numbers are specified with the minus sign(–). For example:

–27
–123.76
–0.0076

Date Constants
A date constant is enclosed by exclamation marks (!…!). In the US English version of 4D, a
date is ordered month/day/year, with a slash (/) setting off each part. Here are some examples
of date constants:

!1/1/76!
!4/4/04!
!12/25/96!

A null date is specified by !00/00/00!

Tip: The Method Editor includes a shortcut for entering a null date. To type a null date, enter
the exclamation (!) character and press Enter.

Note: A two-digit year is assumed to be in the 1900’s. Unless this default setting has been
changed using the command SET DEFAULT CENTURY.

Time Constants
A time constant is enclosed by question marks (?...?).

Note: This syntax can be used on both Windows and Macintosh. On Macintosh, you can also
use the Dagger symbol (Option-T on a US keyboard).

In the US English version of 4D, a time constant is ordered hour:minute:second, with a colon
(:) setting off each part. Times are specified in 24-hour format.

4D Language Reference 83
Here are some examples of time constants:

?00:00:00? ` midnight
?09:30:00? ` 9:30 am
?13:01:59? ` 1 pm, 1 minute, and 59 seconds

A null time is specified by ?00:00:00?

Tip: The Method Editor includes a shortcut for entering a null time. To type a null time, enter
the question mark (?) character and press Enter.

See Also
Control Flow, Data Types, Identifiers, Methods, Operators, Pointers, Variables.

84 4D Language Reference
Variables Language Definition

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Data in 4D is stored in two fundamentally different ways. Fields store data permanently on
disk; variables store data temporarily in memory.

When you set up your 4D database, you specify the names and types of fields that you want to
use. Variables are much the same—you also give them names and different types.

The following variable types correspond to each of the data types:

• String(*) or Text: Alphanumeric string of up to 2 GB of text
• Integer: Integer from -32768 to 32767
• Long Integer: Integer from -2^31 to (2^31)-1
• Real: A number to ±1.7e±308 (15 digits)
• Date: 1/1/100 to 12/31/32767
• Time: 00:00:00 to 596000:00:00 (seconds from midnight)
• Boolean: True or False
• Picture: Any Windows or Macintosh picture
• BLOB (Binary Large OBject): Series of bytes up to 2 GB in size
• Pointer: A pointer to a table, field, variable, array, or array element

(*) In Unicode mode, String and Text type variables are identical. In non-Unicode mode
(compatibility mode), a String is a fixed alphanumeric string of up to 255 characters.

You can display variables (except Pointer and BLOB) on the screen, enter data into them, and
print them in reports. In these ways, enterable and non-enterable area variables act just like
fields, and the same built-in controls are available when you create them:
• Display formats
• Data validation, such entry filters and default values
• Character filters
• Choice lists (hierarchical lists)
• Enterable or non-enterable values

Variables can also do the following:

• Control buttons (buttons, check boxes, radio buttons, 3D buttons, and so on)
• Control sliders (meters, rulers, and dials)
• Control scrollable areas, pop-up menus, and drop-down list boxes

4D Language Reference 85
• Control hierarchical lists and hierarchical pop-up menus
• Control button grids, tab controls, picture buttons, and so on
• Display results of calculations that do not need to be saved.

Creating Variables
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

You can create variables simply by using them; you do not necessarily need to formally define
them as you do with fields. For example, if you want a variable that will hold the current date
plus 30 days, you write:

MyDate:=Current date+30

4D creates MyDate and holds the date you need. The line of code reads “MyDate gets the
current date plus 30 days.” You could now use MyDate wherever you need it in your database.
For example, you might need to store the date variable in a field of same type:

[MyTable]MyField:=MyDate

However, it is usually recommended for a variable to be explicitly defined as a certain type. For
more information about typing variables for a database, see the section Compiler Commands.

Assigning Data to Variables

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Data can be put into and copied out of variables. Putting data into a variable is called
assigning the data to the variable and is done with the assignment operator (:=). The
assignment operator is also used to assign data to fields.

The assignment operator is the primary way to create a variable and to put data into it. You
write the name of the variable that you want to create on the left side of the assignment
operator. For example:

MyNumber:=3

creates the variable MyNumber and puts the number 3 into it. If MyNumber already exists,
then the number 3 is just put into it.

86 4D Language Reference
Of course, variables would not be very useful if you could not get data out of them. Once
again, you use the assignment operator. If you need to put the value of MyNumber in a field
called [Products]Size, you would write MyNumber on the right side of the assignment operator:

[Products]Size:=MyNumber

In this case, [Products]Size would be equal to 3. This example is rather simple, but it illustrates
the fundamental way that data is transferred from one place to another by using the language.

Important: Be careful not to confuse the assignment operator (:=) with the comparison
operator, equal (=). Assignment and comparison are very different operations. For more
information about the comparison operators, see the section Operators.

Local, Process, and Interprocess Variables

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

You can create three types of variables: local variables, process variables, and interprocess
variables. The difference between the three types of variables is their scope, or the objects to
which they are available.

Local variables
A local variable is, as its name implies, local to a method—accessible only within the method
in which it was created and not accessible outside of that method. Being local to a method is
formally referred to as being “local in scope.” Local variables are used to restrict a variable so
that it works only within the method.

You may want to use a local variable to:

• Avoid conflicts with the names of other variables
• Use data temporarily
• Reduce the number of process variables

The name of a local variable always starts with a dollar sign ($) and can contain up to 31
additional characters. If you enter a longer name, 4D truncates it to the appropriate length.

When you are working in a database with many methods and variables, you often find that
you need to use a variable only within the method on which you are working. You can create
and use a local variable in the method without worrying about whether you have used the
same variable name somewhere else.

4D Language Reference 87
Frequently, in a database, small pieces of information are needed from the user. The Request
command can obtain this information. It displays a dialog box with a message prompting the
user for a response. When the user enters the response, the command returns the information
the user entered. You usually do not need to keep this information in your methods for very
long. This is a typical way to use a local variable. Here is an example:

$vsID:=Request("Please enter your ID:")

If (OK=1)
QUERY ([People];[People]ID =$vsID)
End if

This method simply asks the user to enter an ID. It puts the response into a local variable,
$vsID, and then searches for the ID that the user entered. When this method finishes, the
$vsID local variable is erased from memory. This is fine, because the variable is needed only
once and only in this method.

Process variables
A process variable is available only within a process. It is accessible to the process method and
any other method called from within the process.

A process variable does not have a prefix before its name. A process variable name can contain
up to 31 characters.

In interpreted mode, variables are maintained dynamically, they are created and erased from
memory “on the fly.” In compiled mode, all processes you create (user processes) share the
same definition of process variables, but each process has a different instance for each variable.
For example, the variable myVar is one variable in the process P_1 and another one in the
process P_2.

A process can “peek and poke” process variables from another process using the commands
GET PROCESS VARIABLE and SET PROCESS VARIABLE. It is good programming practice to restrict
the use of these commands to the situation for which they were added to 4D:
• Interprocess communication at specific places or your code
• Handling of interprocess drag and drop
• In Client/Server, communication between processes on client machines and the stored
procedures running on the server machines

For more information, see the section Processes and the description of these commands.

88 4D Language Reference
Interprocess variables
Interprocess variables are available throughout the database and are shared by all processes.
They are primarily used to share information between processes.

The name of an interprocess variable always begins with the symbols (<>) — a “less than” sign
followed by a “greater than” sign— followed by 31 characters.

Note: This syntax can be used on both Windows and Macintosh. In addition, on Macintosh
only, you can use the diamond (Option-Shift-V on US keyboard).

In Client/Server, each machine (Client machines and Server machine) share the same
definition of interprocess variables, but each machine has a different instance for each variable.

Form Object Variables

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

In the Form editor, naming an active object—button, radio button, check box, scrollable area,
meter bar, and so on—automatically creates a variable with the same name. For example, if
you create a button named MyButton, a variable named MyButton is also created. Note that
this variable name is not the label for the button, but is the name of the button.

The form object variables allow you to control and monitor the objects. For example, when a
button is clicked, its variable is set to 1; at all other times, it is 0. The variable associated with a
meter or dial lets you read and change the current setting. For example, if you drag a meter to
a new setting, the value of the variable changes to reflect the new setting. Similarly, if a
method changes the value of the variable, the meter is redrawn to show the new value.

For more information about variables and forms, see the 4D Design Reference Manual as well as
the section Form event.

System Variables
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4D maintains a number of variables called system variables. These variables let you monitor
many operations. System variables are all process variables, accessible only from within a
process.

4D Language Reference 89
The most important system variable is the OK system variable. As its name implies, it tells you
if everything is OK in the particular process. Was the record saved? Has the importing
operation been completed? Did the user click the OK button? The OK system variable is set to
1 when a task is completed successfully, and to 0 when it is not.

For more information about system variables, see the section System Variables.

See Also
Arrays, Constants, Control Flow, Data Types, Identifiers, Methods, Operators, Pointers.

90 4D Language Reference
System Variables Language Definition

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4D manages system variables, which allow you to control the execution of different
operations. All system variables are process variables that can only be accessed within one
process. This section describes 4D system variables.

OK
This is the most commonly used system variable. Usually it is set to 1 when an operation is
successfully executed. It is set to 0 when the operation fails. Many 4D commands modify
the value of the OK system variable. Refer to the description of each command to find out
whether it affects this system variable.

Document
Document contains the "long name" (access path+name) of the last file opened or created
using the following commands:

Append document BUILD APPLICATION

Create document Create resource file
EXPORT DATA EXPORT DIF
EXPORT SYLK EXPORT TEXT
IMPORT DATA IMPORT DIF
IMPORT SYLK IMPORT TEXT
GET DOCUMENT ICON LOAD SET
LOAD VARIABLES Open document
Open resource file PRINT LABEL
QR REPORT READ PICTURE FILE
SAVE VARIABLES SAVE SET
Select document SELECT LOG FILE
SET CHANNEL USE CHARACTER SET
WRITE PICTURE FILE

FldDelimit
FldDelimit contains the character code that will be used as a field separator when importing
or exporting text. By default, this value is set to 9, which is the character code for the Tab
key. To use a different field separator, assign a new value to FldDelimit.

RecDelimit
RecDelimit contains the character code that will be used as a record separator when
importing or exporting text. By default, this value is set to 13, which is the character code
for the Carriage Return key. To use a different record separator, assign a new value to
RecDelimit.

4D Language Reference 91
Error
Error can only be used in a method installed by the ON ERR CALL command. This variable
contains the error code. 4D error codes and system error codes are listed in the Error Codes
section.

MouseDown, MouseX, MouseY, KeyCode, Modifiers and MouseProc

These system variables can only be used in a method installed by the ON EVENT CALL
command.

• MouseDown is set to 1 when the mouse button is pushed. Otherwise, it is set to 0.

• If the event is a MouseDown (MouseDown=1), the MouseX and MouseY system variables
are respectively set to the vertical and horizontal coordinates of the location where the
click took place. Both values are expressed in pixels and use the local coordinate system of
the window.
Note: When a picture field or variable is clicked, the MouseX and MouseY system variables
return the local coordinates of the click in the On Clicked, On Double clicked form events as
well as the On Mouse Enter and On Mouse Move form events. For more information, please
refer to the Pictures and SVG Find element ID by coordonates sections.
• KeyCode is set to the character code of the key that was just pressed. If the key is a
function key, KeyCode is set to a special code. Character codes and function key codes are
listed in the sections Unicode Codes, ASCII Codes and Function Key Codes.
• Modifiers is set to the keyboard modifier keys (Ctrl/Command, Alt/Option, Shift, Caps
Lock). This variable is only significant in an "interruption on event" installed by the
command ON EVENT CALL.
• MouseProc is set to the process number in which the last event took place.

See Also
Sets, Variables.

92 4D Language Reference
Pointers Language Definition

version 2004.1 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Pointers provide an advanced way (in programming) to refer to data.

When you use the language, you access various objects—in particular, tables, fields, variables,
and arrays—by simply using their names. However, it is often useful to refer to these elements
and access them without knowing their names. This is what pointers let you do.

The concept behind pointers is not that uncommon in everyday life. You often refer to
something without knowing its exact identity. For example, you might say to a friend, “Let’s
go for a ride in your car” instead of “Let’s go for a ride in the car with license plate 123ABD.”
In this case, you are referencing the car with license plate 123ABD by using the phrase “your
car.” The phrase “car with license plate 123ABD” is like the name of an object, and using the
phrase “your car” is like using a pointer to reference the object.

Being able to refer to something without knowing its exact identity is very useful. In fact, your
friend could get a new car, and the phrase “your car” would still be accurate—it would still be
a car and you could still take a ride in it. Pointers work the same way. For example, a pointer
could at one time refer to a numeric field called Age, and later refer to a numeric variable
called Old Age. In both cases, the pointer references numeric data that could be used in a
calculation.

You can use pointers to reference tables, fields, variables, arrays, and array elements. The
following table gives an example of each data type:

Object To Reference To Use To Assign

Table vpTable:=->[Table] DEFAULT TABLE(vpTable->) n/a
Field vpField:=->[Table]Field ALERT(vpField->) vpField->:="John"
Variable vpVar:=->Variable ALERT(vpVar->) vpVar->:="John"
Array vpArr:=->Array SORT ARRAY(vpArr->;>) COPY ARRAY (Arr;vpArr->)
Array element vpElem:=->Array{1} ALERT (vpElem->) vpElem->:="John"

4D Language Reference 93
Using Pointers: An Example
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

It is easiest to explain the use of pointers through an example. This example shows how to
access a variable through a pointer. We start by creating a variable:

MyVar:="Hello"

MyVar is now a variable containing the string “Hello.” We can now create a pointer to MyVar:

MyPointer:=->MyVar

The -> symbol means “get a pointer to.” This symbol is formed by a dash followed by a
“greater than” sign. In this case, it gets the pointer that references or “points to” MyVar. This
pointer is assigned to MyPointer with the assignment operator.

MyPointer is now a variable that contains a pointer to MyVar. MyPointer does not contain
“Hello”, which is the value in MyVar, but you can use MyPointer to get this value. The
following expression returns the value in MyVar:

MyPointer->

In this case, it returns the string “Hello”. The -> symbol, when it follows a pointer, references
the object pointed to. This is called dereferencing.

It is important to understand that you can use a pointer followed by the -> symbol anywhere
that you could have used the object that the pointer points to. This means that you could use
the expression MyPointer-> anywhere that you could use the original MyVar variable.

For example, the following line displays an alert box with the word Hello in it:

ALERT(MyPointer->)

You can also use MyPointer to change the data in MyVar. For example, the following statement
stores the string "Goodbye" in the variable MyVar:

MyPointer->:="Goodbye"

If you examine the two uses of the expression MyPointer->, you will see that it acts just as if
you had used MyVar instead. In summary, the following two lines perform the same action—
both display an alert box containing the current value in the variable MyVar:

ALERT(MyPointer->)
ALERT(MyVar)

94 4D Language Reference
The following two lines perform the same action— both assign the string "Goodbye" to MyVar:

MyPointer->:="Goodbye"
MyVar:="Goodbye"

Using Pointers to Buttons

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

This section describes how to use a pointer to reference a button. A button is (from the
language point of view) nothing more than a variable. Although the examples in this section
use pointers to reference buttons, the concepts presented here apply to the use of all types of
objects that can be referenced by a pointer.
Let’s say that you have a number of buttons in your forms that need to be enabled or disabled.
Each button has a condition associated with it that is TRUE or FALSE. The condition says
whether to disable or enable the button. You could use a test like this each time you need to
enable or disable the button:

If (Condition) ` If the condition is TRUE…

ENABLE BUTTON (MyButton) ` enable the button
Else ` Otherwise…
DISABLE BUTTON (MyButton) ` disable the button
End if
You would need to use a similar test for every button you set, with only the name of the
button changing. To be more efficient, you could use a pointer to reference each button and
then use a subroutine for the test itself.
You must use pointers if you use a subroutine, because you cannot refer to the button’s
variables in any other way. For example, here is a project method called SET BUTTON, which
references a button with a pointer:

` SET BUTTON project method

` SET BUTTON ( Pointer ; Boolean )
` SET BUTTON ( -> Button ; Enable or Disable )
`
` $1 – Pointer to a button
` $2 – Boolean. If TRUE, enable the button. If FALSE, disable the button
If ($2) ` If the condition is TRUE…
ENABLE BUTTON($1->) ` enable the button
Else ` Otherwise…
DISABLE BUTTON($1->) ` disable the button
End if

4D Language Reference 95
You can call the SET BUTTON project method as follows:

` ...
SET BUTTON (->bValidate;True)
` ...
SET BUTTON (->bValidate;False)
` ...
SET BUTTON (->bValidate;([Employee]Last Name#"")
` ...
For ($vlRadioButton;1;20)
$vpRadioButton:=Get pointer("r"+String($vlRadioButton))
SET BUTTON ($vpRadioButton;False)
End for

Using Pointers to Tables

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Anywhere that the language expects to see a table, you can use a dereferenced pointer to the
table.
You create a pointer to a table by using a line like this:

TablePtr:=->[anyTable]

You can also get a pointer to a table by using the Table command. For example:

TablePtr:=Table(20)

You can use the dereferenced pointer in commands, like this:

DEFAULT TABLE(TablePtr->)

Using Pointers to Fields

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Anywhere that the language expects to see a field, you can use a dereferenced pointer to
reference the field. You create a pointer to a field by using a line like this:

FieldPtr:=->[aTable]ThisField

You can also get a pointer to a field by using the Field command. For example:

FieldPtr:=Field(1; 2)

96 4D Language Reference
You can use the dereferenced pointer in commands, like this:

FONT(FieldPtr->; "Arial")

Using Pointers to Variables

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The example at the beginning of this section illustrates the use of a pointer to a variable:

MyVar:="Hello"
MyPointer:=->MyVar

You can use pointers to interprocess, process and, starting with version 2004.1, local variables.

When you use pointers to process or local variables, you must be sure that the variable pointed
to is already set when the pointer is used. Keep in mind that local variables are deleted when
the method that created them has completed its execution and process variables are deleted at
the end of the process that created them. When a pointer calls a variable that no longer exists,
this causes a syntax error in interpreted mode (variable not defined) but it can generate a more
serious error in compiled mode.

Note about local variables: Pointers to local variables allow you to save process variables in
many cases. Pointers to local variables can only be used within the same process.
In the debugger, when you display a pointer to a local variable that has been declared in
another method, the original method name is indicated in parentheses, after the pointer. For
example, if you write in Method1:

$MyVar:="Hello world"
Method2(->$MyVar)

In Method2, the debugger will display $1 as follows:

$1 ->$MyVar (Method1)

The value of $1 will be:

$MyVar (Method1) "Hello world"

4D Language Reference 97
Using Pointers to Array Elements
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

You can create a pointer to an array element. For example, the following lines create an array
and assign a pointer to the first array element to a variable called ElemPtr:

ARRAY REAL(anArray; 10) ` Create an array

ElemPtr:=->anArray{1} ` Create a pointer to the array element
You could use the dereferenced pointer to assign a value to the element, like this:

ElemPtr->:=8

Using Pointers to Arrays

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

You can create a pointer to an array. For example, the following lines create an array and
assign a pointer to the array to a variable called ArrPtr:

ARRAY REAL(anArray; 10) ` Create an array

ArrPtr := ->anArray ` Create a pointer to the array
It is important to understand that the pointer points to the array; it does not point to an
element of the array. For example, you can use the dereferenced pointer from the preceding
lines like this:

SORT ARRAY(ArrPtr->; >) ` Sort the array

If you need to refer to the fourth element in the array by using the pointer, you do this:

ArrPtr->{4} := 84

Using an Array of Pointers

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

It is often useful to have an array of pointers that reference a group of related objects.
One example of such a group of objects is a grid of variables in a form. Each variable in the
grid is sequentially numbered, for example: Var1,Var2,…, Var10. You often need to reference
these variables indirectly with a number. If you create an array of pointers, and initialize the
pointers to point to each variable, you can then easily reference the variables. For example, to
create an array and initialize each element, you could use the following lines:

ARRAY POINTER(apPointers; 10) ` Create an array to hold 10 pointers

For ($i; 1; 10) ` Loop once for each variable
apPointers{$i}:=Get pointer("Var"+String($i)) ` Initialize the array element
End for

98 4D Language Reference
The Get pointer function returns a pointer to the named object.

To reference any of the variables, you use the array elements. For example, to fill the variables
with the next ten dates (assuming they are variables of the date type), you could use the
following lines:

For ($i; 1; 10) ` Loop once for each variable

apPointers{$i}->:=Current date+$i ` Assign the dates
End for

Setting a Button Using a Pointer

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

If you have a group of related radio buttons in a form, you often need to set them quickly. It is
inefficient to directly reference each one of them by name. Let’s say you have a group of radio
buttons named Button1, Button2,…, Button5.

In a group of radio buttons, only one radio button is on. The number of the radio button that
is on can be stored in a numeric field. For example, if the field called [Preferences]Setting
contains 3, then Button3 is selected. In your form method, you could use the following code to
set the button:

Case of
:(Form event=On Load)
` ...
Case of
: ([Preferences]Setting = 1)
Button1:=1
: ([Preferences]Setting = 2)
Button2:=1
: ([Preferences]Setting = 3)
Button3:=1
: ([Preferences]Setting = 4)
Button4:=1
: ([Preferences]Setting = 5)
Button5:=1
End case
` ...
End case

4D Language Reference 99
A separate case must be tested for each radio button. This could be a very long method if you
have many radio buttons in your form. Fortunately, you can use pointers to solve this
problem. You can use the Get pointer command to return a pointer to a radio button. The
following example uses such a pointer to reference the radio button that must be set. Here is
the improved code:

Case of
:(Form event=On Load)
` ...
$vpRadio:=Get pointer("Button"+String([Preferences]Setting))
$vpRadio->:=1
` ...
End case

The number of the set radio button must be stored in the field called [Preferences]Setting. You
can do so in the form method for the On Clicked event:

[Preferences]Setting:=Button1+(Button2*2)+(Button3*3)+(Button4*4)+(Button5*5)

Passing Pointers to Methods

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

You can pass a pointer as a parameter to a method. Inside the method, you can modify the
object referenced by the pointer. For example, the following method, TAKE TWO, takes two
parameters that are pointers. It changes the object referenced by the first parameter to
uppercase characters, and the object referenced by the second parameter to lowercase
characters. Here is the method:

` TAKE TWO project method

` $1 – Pointer to a string field or variable. Change this to uppercase.
` $2 – Pointer to a string field or variable. Change this to lowercase.
$1->:=Uppercase($1->)
$2->:=Lowercase($2->)

The following line uses the TAKE TWO method to change a field to uppercase characters and to
change a variable to lowercase characters:

TAKE TWO (->[My Table]My Field; ->MyVar)

If the field [My Table]My Field contained the string "jones", it would be changed to the string
"JONES". If the variable MyVar contained the string "HELLO", it would be changed to the string
"hello".

100 4D Language Reference

In the TAKE TWO method, and in fact, whenever you use pointers, it is important that the data
type of the object being referenced is correct. In the previous example, the pointers must point
to an object that contains a string or text.

Pointers to Pointers
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

If you really like to complicate things, you can use pointers to reference other pointers.
Consider this example:

MyVar := "Hello"
PointerOne := ->MyVar
PointerTwo := ->PointerOne
(PointerTwo->)-> := "Goodbye"
ALERT((Point Two->)->)

It displays an alert box with the word “Goodbye” in it.

Here is an explanation of each line of the example:

• MyVar:="Hello"
→ This line puts the string "Hello" into the variable MyVar.
• PointerOne:=->MyVar
→ PointerOne now contains a pointer to MyVar.
• PointerTwo:=->PointerOne
→ PointerTwo (a new variable) contains a pointer to PointerOne, which in turn points to MyVar.
• (PointerTwo->)->:="Goodbye"
→ PointerTwo-> references the contents of PointerOne, which in turn references MyVar.
Therefore (PointerTwo->)-> references the contents of MyVar. So in this case, MyVar is assigned
"Goodbye".

• ALERT ((PointerTwo->)->)
→ Same thing: PointerTwo-> references the contents of PointerOne, which in turn references
MyVar. Therefore (PointerTwo->)-> references the contents of MyVar. So in this case, the alert
box displays the contents of myVar.

The following line puts "Hello" into MyVar:

(PointerTwo->)->:="Hello"

4D Language Reference 101

The following line gets "Hello" from MyVar and puts it into NewVar:

NewVar:=(PointerTwo->)->

Important: Multiple dereferencing requires parentheses.

See Also
Arrays, Arrays and Pointers, Constants, Control Flow, Data Types, Identifiers, Methods, Operators,
Variables.

102 4D Language Reference

Identifiers Language Definition

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

This section describes the conventions for naming various objects in the 4D language. The
names for all objects follow these rules:
• A name must begin with an alphabetic character.
• Thereafter, the name can include alphabetic characters, numeric characters, the space
character, and the underscore character.
• Periods, slashes, quotation marks and colons are not allowed.
• Characters reserved for use as operators, such as * and +, are not allowed.
• 4D ignores any trailing spaces.

Note: Additional rules need to be respected when objects need to be handled via SQL: only the
characters _0123456789abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz are accepted, and the name must not
include any SQL keywords (command, attribute, etc.). The "SQL" area of the Inspector in the
Structure editor automatically indicates any unauthorized characters in the name of a table or
field.

Tables
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

You denote a table by placing its name between brackets: [...]. A table name can contain up to
31 characters.

Examples
DEFAULT TABLE ([Orders])
INPUT FORM ([Clients]; "Entry")
ADD RECORD ([Letters])

Fields
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

You denote a field by first specifying the table to which the field belongs. The field name
immediately follows the table name. A field name can contain up to 31 characters.

Do not start a field name with the underscore character (_). The underscore character is
reserved for plug-ins. When 4D encounters this character at the beginning of a field in the
Method editor, it removes the underscore.

4D Language Reference 103

Examples
[Orders]Total:=Sum([Line]Amount)
QUERY([Clients];[Clients]Name="Smith")
[Letters]Text:=Capitalize text ([Letters]Text)

Interprocess Variables
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

You denote an interprocess variable by preceding the name of the variable with the symbols
(<>) — a “less than” sign followed by a “greater than” sign.

Note: This syntax can be used on both Windows and Macintosh. In addition, on Macintosh
only, you can use the diamond (Option-Shift-V on US keyboard).

An interprocess variable can have up to 31 characters, not including the <> symbols.

Examples
<>vlProcessID:=Current process
<>vsKey:=Char(KeyCode)
If (<>vtName#"")

Process Variables
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

You denote a process variable by using its name (which cannot start with the <> symbols nor
the dollar sign $). A process variable name can contain up to 31 characters.

Examples
<>vrGrandTotal:=Sum([Accounts]Amount)
If (bValidate=1)
vsCurrentName:=""

Local Variables
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

You denote a local variable with a dollar sign ($) followed by its name. A local variable name
can contain up to 31 characters, not including the dollar sign.

104 4D Language Reference

Examples
For ($vlRecord; 1; 100)
If ($vsTempVar="No")
$vsMyString:="Hello there"

Arrays
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

You denote an array by using its name, which is the name you passed to the array declaration
(such as ARRAY LONGINT) when you created the array. Arrays are variables, and from the scope
point of view, like variables, there are three different types of arrays:
• Interprocess arrays,
• Process arrays,
• Local arrays.

Interprocess Arrays
The name of an interprocess array is preceded by the symbols (<>) — a “less than” sign
followed by a “greater than” sign.

Note: This syntax can be used on both Windows and Macintosh. In addition, on Macintosh
only, you can use the diamond (Option-Shift-V on US keyboard).

An interprocess array name can contain up to 31 characters, not including the <> symbols.

Examples

ARRAY TEXT(<>atSubjects;Records in table([Topics]))

SORT ARRAY (<>asKeywords; >)
ARRAY INTEGER(<>aiBigArray;10000)

Process Arrays
You denote a process array by using its name (which cannot start with the <> symbols nor the
dollar sign $). A process array name can contain up to 31 characters.

Examples

ARRAY TEXT(atSubjects;Records in table([Topics]))

SORT ARRAY (asKeywords; >)
ARRAY INTEGER(aiBigArray;10000)

4D Language Reference 105

Local Arrays
The name of a local array is preceded by the dollar sign ($). An local array name can contain
up to 31 characters, not including the dollar sign.

Examples

ARRAY TEXT($atSubjects;Records in table([Topics]))

SORT ARRAY ($asKeywords; >)
ARRAY INTEGER($aiBigArray;10000)

Elements of arrays
You reference an element of an interprocess, process or local array by using the curly
braces({…}). The element referenced is denoted by a numeric expression.

Examples
` Addressing an element of an interprocess array
If (<>asKeywords{1}="Stop")
<>atSubjects{$vlElem}:=[Topics]Subject
$viNextValue:=<>aiBigArray{Size of array(<>aiBigArray)}

` Addressing an element of a process array

If (asKeywords{1}="Stop")
atSubjects{$vlElem}:=[Topics]Subject
$viNextValue:=aiBigArray{Size of array(aiBigArray)}

` Addressing an element of a local array

If ($asKeywords{1}="Stop")
$atSubjects{$vlElem}:=[Topics]Subject
$viNextValue:=$aiBigArray{Size of array($aiBigArray)}

Elements of two-dimensional arrays

You reference an element of a two-dimensional array by using the curly braces ({…}) twice.
The element referenced is denoted by two numeric expressions in two sets of curly braces.

106 4D Language Reference

Examples
` Addressing an element of a two-dimensional interprocess array
If (<>asKeywords{$vlNextRow}{1}="Stop")
<>atSubjects{10}{$vlElem}:=[Topics]Subject
$viNextValue:=<>aiBigArray{$vlSet}{Size of array(<>aiBigArray{$vlSet})}

` Addressing an element of a two-dimensional process array

If (asKeywords{$vlNextRow}{1}="Stop")
atSubjects{10}{$vlElem}:=[Topics]Subject
$viNextValue:=aiBigArray{$vlSet}{Size of array(aiBigArray{$vlSet})}

` Addressing an element of a two-dimensional local array

If ($asKeywords{$vlNextRow}{1}="Stop")
$atSubjects{10}{$vlElem}:=[Topics]Subject
$viNextValue:=$aiBigArray{$vlSet}{Size of array($aiBigArray{$vlSet})}

Forms
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

You denote a form by using a string expression that represents its name. A form name can
contain up to 31 characters.

Examples
INPUT FORM([People];"Input")
OUTPUT FORM([People]; "Output")
DIALOG([Storage];"Note box"+String($vlStage))

Methods
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

You denote a method (procedure and function) by using its name. A method name can
contain up to 31 characters.

Note: A method that does not return a result is also called a procedure. A method that returns
a result is also called a function.

Examples
If (New client)
DELETE DUPLICATED VALUES
APPLY TO SELECTION ([Employees];INCREASE SALARIES)

4D Language Reference 107

Tip: It is a good programming technique to adopt the same naming convention as the one
used by 4D for built-in commands. Use uppercase characters for naming your methods;
however if a method is a function, capitalize the first character of its name. By doing so, when
you reopen a database for maintenance after a few months, you will already know if a method
returns a result by simply looking at its name in the Explorer window.

Note: When you call a method, you just type its name. However, some 4D built-in commands,
such as ON EVENT CALL, as well as all the Plug-In commands, expect the name of a method as
a string when a method parameter is passed. Example:

Examples
` This command expects a method (function) or formula
QUERY BY FORMULA ([aTable];Special query)
` This command expects a method (procedure) or statement
APPLY TO SELECTION ([Employees];INCREASE SALARIES)
` But this command expects a method name
ON EVENT CALL ("HANDLE EVENTS")
` And this Plug-In command expects a method name
WR ON ERROR ("WR HANDLE ERRORS")

Methods can accept parameters (arguments). The parameters are passed to the method in
parentheses, following the name of the method. Each parameter is separated from the next by
a semicolon (;). The parameters are available within the called method as consecutively
numbered local variables: $1, $2,…, $n. In addition, multiple consecutive (and last) parameters
can be addressed with the syntax ${n}where n, numeric expression, is the number of the
parameter.

Inside a function, the $0 local variable contains the value to be returned.

Examples
` Within DROP SPACES $1 is a pointer to the field [People]Name
DROP SPACES (->[People]Name)

` Within Calc creator:

` - $1 is numeric and equal to 1
` - $2 is numeric and equal to 5
` - $3 is text or string and equal to "Nice"
` - The result value is assigned to $0
$vsResult:=Calc creator (1; 5; "Nice")

108 4D Language Reference

 ` Within Dump:
` - The three parameters are text or string
` - They can be addressed as $1, $2 or $3
` - They can also be addressed as, for instance, ${$vlParam} where $vlParam is 1, 2 or 3
` - The result value is assigned to $0
vtClone:=Dump ("is"; "the"; "it")

Plug-In Commands (External Procedures, Functions and Areas)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

You denote a plug-in command by using its name as defined by the plug-in. A plug-in
command name can contain up to 31 characters.

Examples
WR BACKSPACE (wrArea; 0)
$pvNewArea:=PV New offscreen area

Sets
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

From the scope point of view, there are two types of sets:
• Interprocess sets
• Process sets.
4D Server also includes:
• Client sets.

Interprocess Sets
A set is an interprocess set if the name of the set is preceded by the symbols (<>) — a “less
than” sign followed by a “greater than” sign.

Note: This syntax can be used on both Windows and Macintosh. In addition, on Macintosh
only, you can use the diamond (Option-Shift-V on US keyboard).

An interprocess set name can contain up to 255 characters, not including the <> symbols.

Process Sets
You denote a process set by using a string expression that represents its name (which cannot
start with the <> symbols or the dollar sign $). A set name can contain up to 255 characters.

4D Language Reference 109

Client Sets
The name of a client set is preceded by the dollar sign ($). A client set name can contain up to
255 characters, not including the dollar sign.

Note: Sets are maintained on the Server machine. In certain cases, for efficiency or special
purposes, you may need to work with sets locally on the Client machine. To do so, you use
Client sets.

Examples
` Interprocess sets
USE SET("<>Deleted Records")
CREATE SET([Customers];"<>Customer Orders")
If (Records in set("<>Selection"+String($i))>0)
` Process sets
USE SET("Deleted Records")
CREATE SET([Customers];"Customer Orders")
If (Records in set("<>Selection"+String($i))>0)
` Client sets
USE SET("$Deleted Records")
CREATE SET([Customers];"$Customer Orders")
If (Records in set("$Selection"+String($i))>0)

Named Selections
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

From the scope point of view, there are two types of named selections:
• Interprocess named selections
• Process named selections.

Interprocess Named Selections

A named selection is an interprocess named selection if its name is preceded by the symbols
(<>) — a “less than” sign followed by a “greater than” sign.

Note: This syntax can be used on both Windows and Macintosh. In addition, on Macintosh
only, you can use the diamond (Option-Shift-V on US keyboard).

An interprocess named selection name can contain up to 255 characters, not including the <>
symbols.

110 4D Language Reference

Process Named Selections
You denote a process named selection by using a string expression that represents its name
(which cannot start with the <> symbols nor the dollar sign $). A named selection name can
contain up to 255 characters.

Examples
` Interprocess Named Selection
USE NAMED SELECTION([Customers];"<>ByZipcode")
` Process Named Selection
USE NAMED SELECTION([Customers];"<>ByZipcode")

Processes
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

In the single-user version, or in Client/Server on the Client side, there are two types of
processes:
• Global processes
• Local processes.

Global Processes
You denote a global process by using a string expression that represents its name (which
cannot start with the dollar sign $). A process name can contain up to 255 characters.

Local Processes
You denote a local process if the name of the process is preceded by a dollar ($) sign. The
process name can contain up to 255 characters, not including the dollar sign.

Example
` Starting the global process "Add Customers"
$vlProcessID:=New process("P_ADD_CUSTOMERS";48*1024;"Add Customers")
` Starting the local process "$Follow Mouse Moves"
$vlProcessID:=New process("P_MOUSE_SNIFFER";16*1024;"$Follow Mouse Moves")

4D Language Reference 111

Summary of Naming Conventions
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The following table summarizes 4D naming conventions.

Type Max. Length Example

Table 31 [Invoices]
Field 31 [Employees]Last Name
Interprocess Variable <> + 31 <>vlNextProcessID
Process Variable 31 vsCurrentName
Local Variable $ + 31 $vlLocalCounter
Form 31 "My Custom Web Input"
Interprocess Array <> + 31 <>apTables
Process Array 31 asGender
Local Array $ + 31 $atValues
Method 31 M_ADD_CUSTOMERS
Plug-in Routine 31 WR INSERT TEXT
Interprocess Set <> + 255 "<>Records to be Archived"
Process Set 255 "Current selected records"
Client Set $ + 255 "$Previous Subjects"
Named Selection 255 "Employees A to Z"
Interprocess Named Selection <> + 255 "<>Employees Z to A"
Local Process $ + 255 "$Follow Events"
Global Process 255 "P_INVOICES_MODULE"
Semaphore 255 "mysemaphore"

Resolving Naming Conflicts

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

If a particular object has the same name as another object of a different type (for example, if a
field is named Person and a variable is also named Person), 4D uses a priority system to identify
the object. It is up to you to ensure that you use unique names for the parts of your database.

4D identifies names used in procedures in the following order:

1. Fields
2. Commands
3. Methods
4. Plug-in routines
5. Predefined constants
6. Variables.

112 4D Language Reference

For example, 4D has a built-in command called Date. If you named a method Date, 4D would
recognize it as the built-in Date command, and not as your method. This would prevent you
from calling your method. If, however, you named a field “Date”, 4D would try to use your
field instead of the Date command.

See Also
Arrays, Constants, Data Types, Methods, Operators, Pointers, Variables.

4D Language Reference 113

Control Flow Language Definition

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Regardless of the simplicity or complexity of a method, you will always use one or more of
three types of programming structures. Programming structures control the flow of execution,
whether and in what order statements are executed within a method. There are three types of
structures:
• Sequential
• Branching
• Looping

The 4D language contains statements that control each of these structures.

Sequential structure
The sequential structure is a simple, linear structure. A sequence is a series of statements that
4D executes one after the other, from first to last. For example:

OUTPUT FORM([People]; "Listing")

ALL RECORDS([People])
DISPLAY SELECTION([People])

A one-line routine, frequently used for object methods, is the simplest case of a sequential
structure. For example:

[People]Last Name:=Uppercase([People]Last Name)

Note: The Begin SQL / End SQL keywords can be used to delimit sequential structures to be
executed by the SQL engine of 4D. For more information, please refer to the description of
these keywords.

Branching structures
A branching structure allows methods to test a condition and take alternative paths,
depending on the result. The condition is a Boolean expression, an expression that evaluates
TRUE or FALSE. One branching structure is the If...Else...End if structure, which directs program
flow along one of two paths. The other branching structure is the Case of...Else...End case
structure, which directs program flow to one of many paths.

114 4D Language Reference

Looping structures
When writing methods, it is very common to find that you need a sequence of statements to
repeat a number of times. To deal with this need, the language provides three looping
structures:

• While...End while
• Repeat...Until
• For...End for

The loops are controlled in two ways: either they loop until a condition is met, or they loop a
specified number of times. Each looping structure can be used in either way, but While loops
and Repeat loops are more appropriate for repeating until a condition is met, and For loops are
more appropriate for looping a specified number of times.

Note: 4D allows you to embed programming structures (If/While/For/Case of/Repeat) up to a

"depth" of 512 levels.

See Also
Logical Operators, Methods.

4D Language Reference 115

If...Else...End if Language Definition

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The formal syntax of the If...Else...End if control flow structure is:

If (Boolean_Expression)
statements(s)
Else
statement(s)
End if

Note that the Else part is optional; you can write:

If (Boolean_Expression)
statements(s)
End if

The If...Else...End if structure lets your method choose between two actions, depending on
whether a test (a Boolean expression) is TRUE or FALSE.

When the Boolean expression is TRUE, the statements immediately following the test are
executed. If the Boolean expression is FALSE, the statements following the Else statement are
executed. The Else statement is optional; if you omit Else, execution continues with the first
statement (if any) following the End if.

Example
` Ask the user to enter the name
$Find:=Request(“Type a name:”)
If (OK=1)
QUERY([People]; [People]LastName=$Find)
Else
ALERT("You did not enter a name.")
End if

Tip: Branching can be performed without statements to be executed in one case or the other.

116 4D Language Reference

When developing an algorithm or a specialized application, nothing prevents you from
writing:

If (Boolean_Expression)
Else
statement(s)
End if

or:

If (Boolean_Expression)
statements(s)
Else
End if

See Also
Case of...Else...End case, Control Flow, For...End for, Repeat...Until, While...End while.

4D Language Reference 117

Case of...Else...End case Language Definition

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The formal syntax of the Case of...Else...End case control flow structure is:

Case of
: (Boolean_Expression)
statement(s)
: (Boolean_Expression)
statement(s)
.
.
.

: (Boolean_Expression)
statement(s)
Else
statement(s)
End case

Note that the Else part is optional; you can write:

Case of
: (Boolean_Expression)
statement(s)
: (Boolean_Expression)
statement(s)
.
.
.

: (Boolean_Expression)
statement(s)
End case

As with the If...Else...End if structure, the Case of...Else...End case structure also lets your method
choose between alternative actions. Unlike the If...Else...End if structure, the Case of...Else...End
case structure can test a reasonable unlimited number of Boolean expressions and take action
depending on which one is TRUE.

118 4D Language Reference

Each Boolean expression is prefaced by a colon (:). This combination of the colon and the
Boolean expression is called a case. For example, the following line is a case:

: (bValidate=1)

Only the statements following the first TRUE case (and up to the next case) will be executed. If
none of the cases are TRUE, none of the statements will be executed (if no Else part is
included).

You can include an Else statement after the last case. If all of the cases are FALSE, the
statements following the Else will be executed.
Example
This example tests a numeric variable and displays an alert box with a word in it:

Case of
: (vResult = 1) ` Test if the number is 1
ALERT("One.") ` If it is 1, display an alert
: (vResult = 2) ` Test if the number is 2
ALERT("Two.") ` If it is 2, display an alert
: (vResult = 3) ` Test if the number is 3
ALERT("Three.") ` If it is 3, display an alert
Else ` If it is not 1, 2, or 3, display an alert
ALERT("It was not one, two, or three.")
End case

For comparison, here is the If...Else...End if version of the same method:

If (vResult = 1) ` Test if the number is 1

ALERT("One.") ` If it is 1, display an alert
Else
If (vResult = 2) ` Test if the number is 2
ALERT("Two.") ` If it is 2, display an alert
Else
If (vResult = 3) ` Test if the number is 3
ALERT("Three.") ` If it is 3, display an alert
Else ` If it is not 1, 2, or 3, display an alert
ALERT("It was not one, two, or three.")
End if
End if
End if

4D Language Reference 119

Remember that with a Case of...Else...End case structure, only the first TRUE case is executed.
Even if two or more cases are TRUE, only the statements following the first TRUE case will be
executed.

Consequently, when you want to implement hierarchical tests, you should make sure the
condition statements that are lower in the hierarchical scheme appear first in the test
sequence. For example, the test for the presence of condition1 covers the test for the presence
of condition1&condition2 and should therefore be located last in the test sequence. For
example, the following code will never see its last condition detected:

Case of
: (vResult = 1)
... `statement(s)
: ((vResult = 1) & (vCondition#2)) `this case will never be detected
... `statement(s)
End case
.

In the code above, the presence of the second condition is not detected since the test
"vResult=1" branches off the code before any further testing. For the code to operate properly,
you can write it as follows:

Case of
: ((vResult = 1) & (vCondition#2)) `this case will be detected first
... `statement(s)
: (vResult = 1)
... `statement(s)
End case
.

Also, if you want to implement hierarchical testing, you may consider using hierarchical code.

Tip: Branching can be performed without statements to be executed in one case or another.

120 4D Language Reference

When developing an algorithm or a specialized application, nothing prevents you from
writing:

Case of
: (Boolean_Expression)
: (Boolean_Expression)

.
.
.

: (Boolean_Expression)
statement(s)
Else
statement(s)
End case
or:

Case of
: (Boolean_Expression)
: (Boolean_Expression)
statement(s)
.
.
.

: (Boolean_Expression)
statement(s)
Else
End case

or:

Case of
Else
statement(s)
End case

See Also
Control Flow, For...End for, If...Else...End if, Repeat...Until, While...End while.

4D Language Reference 121

While...End while Language Definition

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The formal syntax of the While...End while control flow structure is:

While (Boolean_Expression)
statement(s)
End while

A While...End while loop executes the statements inside the loop as long as the Boolean
expression is TRUE. It tests the Boolean expression at the beginning of the loop and does not
enter the loop at all if the expression is FALSE.

It is common to initialize the value tested in the Boolean expression immediately before
entering the While...End while loop. Initializing the value means setting it to something
appropriate, usually so that the Boolean expression will be TRUE and While...End while
executes the loop.

The Boolean expression must be set by something inside the loop or else the loop will
continue forever. The following loop continues forever because NeverStop is always TRUE:

NeverStop:=True
While (NeverStop)
End while

If you find yourself in such a situation, where a method is executing uncontrolled, you can
use the trace facilities to stop the loop and track down the problem. For more information
about tracing a method, see the section Debugging.

Example

CONFIRM ("Add a new record?") ` The user wants to add a record?

While (OK = 1) ` Loop as long as the user wants to
ADD RECORD([aTable]) ` Add a new record
End while ` The loop always ends with End while

122 4D Language Reference

In this example, the OK system variable is set by the CONFIRM command before the loop
starts. If the user clicks the OK button in the confirmation dialog box, the OK system variable
is set to 1 and the loop starts. Otherwise, the OK system variable is set to 0 and the loop is
skipped. Once the loop starts, the ADD RECORD command keeps the loop going because it sets
the OK system variable to 1 when the user saves the record. When the user cancels (does not
save) the last record, the OK system variable is set to 0 and the loop stops.

See Also
Case of...Else...End case, Control Flow, For...End for, If...Else...End if, Repeat...Until.

4D Language Reference 123

Repeat...Until Language Definition

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The formal syntax of the Repeat...Until control flow structure is:

Repeat
statement(s)
Until (Boolean_Expression)

A Repeat...Until loop is similar to a While...End while loop, except that it tests the Boolean
expression after the loop rather than before. Thus, a Repeat...Until loop always executes the
loop once, whereas if the Boolean expression is initially False, a While...End while loop does not
execute the loop at all.

The other difference with a Repeat...Until loop is that the loop continues until the Boolean
expression is TRUE.

Example
Compare the following example with the example for the While...End while loop. Note that the
Boolean expression does not need to be initialized—there is no CONFIRM command to
initialize the OK variable.

Repeat
ADD RECORD([aTable])
Until (OK=0)

See Also
Case of...Else...End case, Control Flow, For...End for, If...Else...End if, While...End while.

124 4D Language Reference

For...End for Language Definition

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The formal syntax of the For...End for control flow structure is:

For (Counter_Variable; Start_Expression; End_Expression {; Increment_Expression})

statement(s)
End for

The For...End for loop is a loop controlled by a counter variable:

• The counter variable Counter_Variable is a numeric variable (Real, Integer, or Long Integer)
that the For...End for loop initializes to the value specified by Start_Expression.
• Each time the loop is executed, the counter variable is incremented by the value specified in
the optional value Increment_Expression. If you do not specify Increment_Expression, the
counter variable is incremented by one (1), which is the default.
• When the counter variable passes the End_Expression value, the loop stops.

Important: The numeric expressions Start_Expression, End_Expression and Increment_Expression

are evaluated once at the beginning of the loop. If these expressions are variables, changing
one of these variables within the loop will not affect the loop.

Tip: However, for special purposes, you can change the value of the counter variable
Counter_Variable within the loop; this will affect the loop.

• Usually Start_Expression is less than End_Expression.

• If Start_Expression and End_Expression are equal, the loop will execute only once.
• If Start_Expression is greater than End_Expression, the loop will not execute at all unless you
specify a negative Increment_Expression. See the examples.

Basic Examples
1. The following example executes 100 iterations:

For (vCounter;1;100)
` Do something
End for

4D Language Reference 125

2. The following example goes through all elements of the array anArray:

For ($vlElem;1;Size of array(anArray))

` Do something with the element
anArray{$vlElem}:=...
End for

3. The following example goes through all the characters of the text vtSomeText:

For ($vlChar;1;Length(vtSomeText))
` Do something with the character if it is a TAB
If (Character code(vtSomeText[[$vlChar]])=Char(Tab))
` ...
End if
End for

4. The following example goes through the selected records for the table [aTable]:

FIRST RECORD([aTable])
For ($vlRecord;1;Records in selection([aTable]))
` Do something with the record
SEND RECORD([aTable])
` ...
` Go to the next record
NEXT RECORD([aTable])
End for

Most of the For...End for loops you will write in your databases will look like the ones listed in
these examples.

Decrementing variable counter

In some cases, you may want to have a loop whose counter variable is decreasing rather than
increasing. To do so, you must specify Start_Expression greater than End_Expression and a
negative Increment_Expression. The following examples do the same thing as the previous
examples, but in reverse order:

126 4D Language Reference

5. The following example executes 100 iterations:

For (vCounter;100;1;-1)
` Do something
End for

6. The following example goes through all elements of the array anArray:

For ($vlElem;Size of array(anArray);1;-1)

` Do something with the element
anArray{$vlElem}:=...
End for

7. The following example goes through all the characters of the text vtSomeText:

For ($vlChar;Length(vtSomeText);1;-1)
` Do something with the character if it is a TAB
If (Character code(vtSomeText[[$vlChar]])=Char(Tab))
` ...
End if
End for

8. The following example goes through the selected records for the table [aTable]:

LAST RECORD([aTable])
For ($vlRecord;Records in selection([aTable]);1;-1)
` Do something with the record
SEND RECORD([aTable])
` ...
` Go to the previous record
PREVIOUS RECORD([aTable])
End for

Incrementing the counter variable by more than one

If you need to, you can use an Increment_Expression (positive or negative) whose absolute
value is greater than one.

4D Language Reference 127

9. The following loop addresses only the even elements of the array anArray:

For ($vlElem;2;Size of array(anArray);2)

` Do something with the element #2,#4...#2n
anArray{$vlElem}:=...
End for

Getting out of a loop by changing the counter variable

In some cases, you may want to execute a loop for a specific number of iterations, but then get
out of the loop when another condition becomes TRUE. To do so, you can test this condition
within the loop and if it becomes TRUE, explicitly set the counter variable to a value that
exceeds the end expression.

10. In the following example, a selection of the records is browsed until this is actually done
or until the interprocess variable <>vbWeStop, intially set to FALSE, becomes TRUE. This
variable is handled by an ON EVENT CALL project method that allows you to interrupt the
operation:

<>vbWeStop:=False
ON EVENT CALL ("HANDLE STOP")
` HANDLE STOP sets <>vbWeStop to True if Ctrl-period (Windows)
` or Cmd-Period (Macintosh) is pressed
$vlNbRecords:=Records in selection([aTable])
FIRST RECORD([aTable])
For ($vlRecord;1;$vlNbRecords)
` Do something with the record
SEND RECORD([aTable])
` ...
` Go to the next record
If (<>vbWeStop)
$vlRecord:=$vlNbRecords+1 ` Force the counter variable to get out of the loop
Else
NEXT RECORD([aTable])
End if
End for
ON EVENT CALL("")
If (<>vbWeStop)
ALERT("The operation has been interrupted.")
Else
ALERT("The operation has been successfully completed.")
End if

128 4D Language Reference

Comparing looping structures
Let's go back to the first For...End for example:

The following example executes 100 iterations:

For (vCounter;1;100)
` Do something
End for

It is interesting to see how the While...End while loop and Repeat...Until loop would perform the
same action.

Here is the equivalent While...End while loop:

$i := 1 ` Initialize the counter

While ($i<=100) ` Loop 100 times
` Do something
$i := $i + 1 ` Need to increment the counter
End while

Here is the equivalent Repeat...Until loop:

$i := 1 ` Initialize the counter

Repeat
` Do something
$i := $i + 1 ` Need to increment the counter
Until ($i=100) ` Loop 100 times

Tip: The For...End for loop is usually faster than the While...End while and Repeat...Until loops,
because 4D tests the condition internally for each cycle of the loop and increments the
counter. Therefore, use the For...End for loop whenever possible.

Optimizing the execution of the For...End for loops

You can use Real, Integer, and Long Integer variables as well as interprocess, process, and local
variable counters. For lengthy repetitive loops, especially in compiled mode, use local Long
Integer variables.

4D Language Reference 129

11. Here is an example:

C_LONGINT($vlCounter) ` use local Long Integer variables

For ($vlCounter;1;10000)
` Do something
End for

Nested For...End for looping structures

You can nest as many control structures as you (reasonably) need. This includes nesting
For...End for loops. To avoid mistakes, make sure to use different counter variables for each
looping structure.

Here are two examples:

12. The following example goes through all the elements of a two-dimensional array:

For ($vlElem;1;Size of array(anArray))

` ...
` Do something with the row
` ...

For ($vlSubElem;1;Size of array(anArray{$vlElem}))

` Do something with the element
anArray{$vlElem}{$vlSubElem}:=...
End for
End for

13. The following example builds an array of pointers to all the date fields present in the
database:

ARRAY POINTER($apDateFields;0)
$vlElem:=0
For ($vlTable;1;Get last table number)
If(Is table number valid($vlTable))
For($vlField;1;Get last field number($vlTable))
If(Is field number valid($vlTable;$vlField))
$vpField:=Field($vlTable;$vlField)

130 4D Language Reference

 If (Type($vpField->)=Is Date)
$vlElem:=$vlElem+1
INSERT IN ARRAY($apDateFields;$vlElem)
$apDateFields{$vlElem}:=$vpField
End if
End for
End for

See Also
Case of...Else...End case, Control Flow, If...Else...End if, Repeat...Until, While...End while.

4D Language Reference 131

Methods Language Definition

version 2003 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

In order to make the commands, operators, and other parts of the language work, you put
them in methods. There are several kinds of methods: Object methods, Form methods, Table
methods (Triggers), Project methods, and Database methods. This section describes features
common to all types of methods.

A method is composed of statements; each statement consists of one line in the method. A
statement performs an action, and may be simple or complex. Although a statement is always
one line, that one line can be as long as needed (up to 32,000 characters, which is probably
enough for most tasks).

For example, the following line is a statement that will add a new record to the [People] table:

ADD RECORD([People])

A method also contains tests and loops that control the flow of the execution. For a detailed
discussion about the control flow programming structures, see the section Control Flow.

Note: The maximum size of a method is limited to 2 GB of text or 32 000 lines of command.
Beyond these limits, a warning message appears, indicating that the extra lines will not be
displayed.

Types of Methods
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

There are five types of methods in 4D:

• Object methods: An object method is a property of an object. It is usually a short method

associated with an active form object. Object methods generally “manage” the object while
the form is displayed or printed. You do not call an object method—4D calls it automatically
when an event involves the object to which the object method is attached.

• Form methods: A form method is a property of a form. You can use a form method to
manage data and objects, but it is generally simpler and more efficient to use an object
method for these purposes. You do not call a form method—4D calls it automatically when an
event involves the form to which the form method is attached.
For more information about Object methods and Form methods, see the 4D Design Reference
Manual as well as the section Form event.

132 4D Language Reference

• Table methods (Triggers): A Trigger is a property of a table. You do not call a Trigger.
Triggers are automatically called by the 4D database engine each time that you manipulate the
records of a table (Add, Delete, Modify and Load). Triggers are methods that can prevent
“illegal” operations with the records of your database. For example, in an invoicing system,
you can prevent anyone from adding an invoice without specifying the customer to whom the
invoice is billed. Triggers are a very powerful tool to restrict operations on a table, as well as to
prevent accidental data loss or tampering. You can write very simple triggers, and then make
them more and more sophisticated.

For detailed information about Triggers, see the section Triggers.

• Project methods: Unlike object methods, form methods, and triggers, which are all
associated with a particular object, form, or table, project methods are available for use
throughout your database. Project methods are reusable, and available for use by any other
method. If you need to repeat a task, you do not have to write identical methods for each case.
You can call project methods wherever you need them—from other project methods or from
object or form methods. When you call a project method, it acts as if you had written the
method at the location where you called it. Project methods called from other methods are
often referred to as “subroutines.” A project method that returns a result can also be called a
function.
There is one other way to use project methods—associating them with menu commands.
When you associate a project method with a menu command, the method is executed when
the menu command is chosen. You can think of the menu command as calling the project
method.

For detailed information about Project methods, see the section Project Methods.

• Database methods: In the same way that object and form methods are called when events
occur in a form, there are methods associated with the database that are called when a
working session event occurs. These are the database methods. For example, each time you
open a database, you may want to initialize some variables that will be used during the whole
working session. To do so, you use the On Startup Database Method, automatically executed by
4D when you open the database.

For moreinformation about D atabase Methods, see the section Database Methods.

4D Language Reference 133

An Example Project Method
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

All methods are fundamentally the same—they start at the first line and work their way
through each statement until they reach the last line (i.e., they execute sequentially). Here is
an example project method:

QUERY ([People]) ` Display the Query editor

If (OK=1) ` The user clicked OK, not cancel
If (Records in selection([People])=0) ` If no record was found…
ADD RECORD([People]) ` Let the user add a new record
End if
End if ` The end

Each line in the example is a statement or line of code. Anything that you write using the
language is loosely referred to as code. Code is executed or run; this means that 4D performs
the task specified by the code.

We will examine the first line in detail and then move on more quickly:

QUERY([People]) ` Display the Query editor

The first element in the line, QUERY, is a command. A command is part of the 4D language—it
performs a task. In this case, QUERY displays the Query editor. This is similar to choosing
Query from the Records menu in the Design environment.

The second element in the line, specified between parantheses, is an argument to the QUERY
command. An argument (or parameter) is data required by a command in order to complete
its task. In this case, [People] is the name of a table. Table names are always specified inside
square brackets ([…]). In our example, the People table is an argument to the QUERY
command. A command can accept several parameters.

The third element is a comment at the end of the line. A comment tells you (and anyone else
who might read your code) what is happening in the code. It is indicated by the reverse
apostrophe (`). Anything (on the line) following the comment mark will be ignored when the
code is run. A comment can be put on a line by itself, or you can put comments to the right of
the code, as in the example. Use comments generously throughout your code; this makes it
easier for you and others to read and understand the code.

Note: A comment can be up to 32 000 characters long.

134 4D Language Reference

The next line of the method checks to see if any records were found:

If (Records in selection([People]) = 0) ` If no record was found…

The If statement is a control-of-flow statement—a statement that controls the step-by-step

execution of your method. The If statement performs a test, and if the statement is true,
execution continues with the subsequent lines. Records in selection is a function—a command
that returns a value. Here, Records in selection returns the number of records in the current
selection for the table passed as argument.

Note: Notice that only the first letter of the function name is capitalized. This is the naming
convention for 4D functions.

You should already know what the current selection is—it is the group of records you are
working on at any given time. If the number of records is equal to 0 (in other words, if no
records were found), then the following line is executed:

ADD RECORD([People]) ` Let the user add a new record

The ADD RECORD command displays a form so that the user can add a new record. 4D formats
your code automatically; notice that this line is indented to show you that it is dependent on
the control-of-flow statement (If).

End if ` The end

The End if statement concludes the If statement’s section of control. Whenever there is a
control-of-flow statement, you need to have a corresponding statement telling the language
where the control stops.

Be sure you feel comfortable with the concepts in this section. If they are all new, you may
want to review them until they are clear to you.

Where to go from here?

To learn more about:
• Object methods and Form methods, see the section Form event.
• Triggers, see the section Triggers.
• Project methods, see the section Project Methods.
• Database methods, see the section Database Methods.

See Also
Arrays, Constants, Control Flow, Data Types, Database Methods, Identifiers, Operators, Pointers,
Triggers, Variables.

4D Language Reference 135

Project Methods Language Definition

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Project methods are aptly named. Whereas form and object methods are bound to forms and
objects, a project method is available anywhere; it is not specifically attached to any particular
object of the database. A project method can have one of the following roles, depending on
how it is executed and used:
• Menu method
• Subroutine and function
• Process method
• Event catching method
• Error catching method

These terms do not distinguish project methods by what they are, but by what they do.

A menu method is a project method called from a custom menu. It directs the flow of your
application. The menu method takes control—branching where needed, presenting forms,
generating reports, and generally managing your database.

The subroutine is a project method that can be thought of as a servant. It performs those tasks
that other methods request it to perform. A function is a subroutine that returns a value to the
method that called it.

A process method is a project method that is called when a process is started. The process lasts
only as long as the process method continues to execute. For more information about
processes, see the section Processes. Note that a menu method attached to a menu command
whose property Start a New Process is selected, is also the process method for the newly
started process.

An event catching method runs in a separate process as the process method for catching
events. Usually, you let 4D do most of the event handling for you. For example, during data
entry, 4D detects keystrokes and clicks, then calls the correct object and form methods so you
can respond appropriately to the events from within these methods. In other circumstances,
you may want to handle events directly. For example, if you run a lengthy operation (such as
For...End For loop browsing records), you may want to be able to interrupt the operation by
typing Ctrl-Period (Windows) or Cmd-Period (Macintosh). In this case, you should use an
event catching method to do so. For more information, see the description of the command
ON EVENT CALL.

136 4D Language Reference

An error catching method is an interrupt-based project method. Each time an error or an
exception occurs, it executes within the process in which it was installed. For more
information, see the description of the command ON ERR CALL.

Menu Methods
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

A menu method is invoked in the Application environment when you select the custom menu
command to which it is attached. You assign the method to the menu command using the
Menu editor. The menu executes when the menu command is chosen. This process is one of
the major aspects of customizing a database. By creating custom menus with menu methods
that perform specific actions, you personalize your database. Refer to the 4D Design Reference
manual for more information about the Menu editor.

Custom menu commands can cause one or more activities to take place. For example, a menu
command for entering records might call a method that performs two tasks: displaying the
appropriate input form, and calling the ADD RECORD command until the user cancels the data
entry activity.

Automating sequences of activities is a very powerful capability of the programming language.

Using custom menus, you can automate task sequences and thus provide more guidance to
users of the database.

Subroutines
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

When you create a project method, it becomes part of the language of the database in which
you create it. You can then call the project method in the same way that you call 4D’s built-in
commands. A project method used in this way is called a subroutine.

You use subroutines to:

• Reduce repetitive coding
• Clarify your methods
• Facilitate changes to your methods
• Modularize your code

4D Language Reference 137

For example, let’s say you have a database of customers. As you customize the database, you
find that there are some tasks that you perform repeatedly, such as finding a customer and
modifying his or her record. The code to do this might look like this:

` Look for a customer

QUERY BY EXAMPLE([Customers])
` Select the input form
INPUT FORM([Customers];"Data Entry")
` Modify the customer's record
MODIFY RECORD([Customers])

If you do not use subroutines, you will have to write the code each time you want to modify a
customer’s record. If there are ten places in your custom database where you need to do this,
you will have to write the code ten times. If you use subroutines, you will only have to write it
once. This is the first advantage of subroutines—to reduce the amount of code.

If the previously described code was a method called MODIFY CUSTOMER, you would execute
it simply by using the name of the method in another method. For example, to modify a
customer’s record and then print the record, you would write this method:

MODIFY CUSTOMER
PRINT SELECTION([Customers])

This capability simplifies your methods dramatically. In the example, you do not need to
know how the MODIFY CUSTOMER method works, just what it does. This is the second reason
for using subroutines—to clarify your methods. In this way, your methods become extensions
to the 4D language.

If you need to change your method of finding customers in this example database, you will
need to change only one method, not ten. This is the next reason to use subroutines—to
facilitate changes to your methods.

Using subroutines, you make your code modular. This simply means dividing your code into
modules (subroutines), each of which performs a logical task. Consider the following code
from a checking account database:

FIND CLEARED CHECKS ` Find the cleared checks

RECONCILE ACCOUNT ` Reconcile the account
PRINT CHECK BOOK REPORT ` Print a checkbook report

138 4D Language Reference

Even for someone who doesn’t know the database, it is clear what this code does. It is not
necessary to examine each subroutine. Each subroutine might be many lines long and perform
some complex operations, but here it is only important that it performs its task.

We recommend that you divide your code into logical tasks, or modules, whenever possible.

Passing Parameters to Methods

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

You’ll often find that you need to pass data to your methods. This is easily done with
parameters.

Parameters (or arguments) are pieces of data that a method needs in order to perform its task.
The terms parameter and argument are used interchangeably throughout this manual.
Parameters are also passed to built-in 4D commands. In this example, the string “Hello” is an
argument to the ALERT command:

ALERT("Hello")

Parameters are passed to methods in the same way. For example, if a method named DO
SOMETHING accepted three parameters, a call to the method might look like this:

DO SOMETHING(WithThis;AndThat;ThisWay)

The parameters are separated by semicolons (;).

In the subroutine (the method that is called), the value of each parameter is automatically
copied into sequentially numbered local variables: $1, $2, $3, and so on. The numbering of
the local variables represents the order of the parameters.

The local variables/parameters are not the actual fields, variables, or expressions passed by the
calling method; they only contain the values that have been passed.

Within the subroutine, you can use the parameters $1, $2... in the same way you would use
any other local variable.

Note: However, in the case where you use commands that modify the value of the variable
passed as parameter (for example, Find in field), the parameters $1, $2, and so on cannot be
used directly. You must first copy them into standard local variables (for example: $myvar:=$1).

4D Language Reference 139

Since they are local variables, they are available only within the subroutine and are cleared at
the end of the subroutine. For this reason, a subroutine cannot change the value of the actual
fields or variables passed as parameters at the calling method level. For example:

` Here is some code from the method MY METHOD

` ...
DO SOMETHING ([People]Last Name) ` Let's say [People]Last Name is equal to "williams"
ALERT([People]Last Name)

` Here is the code of the method DO SOMETHING

$1:=Uppercase($1)
ALERT($1)

The alert box displayed by DO SOMETHING will read “WILLIAMS” and the alert box displayed
by MY METHOD will read “williams”. The method locally changed the value of the parameter
$1, but this does not affect the value of the field [People]Last Name passed as parameter by the
method MY METHOD.

There are two ways to make the method DO SOMETHING change the value of the field:
1. Rather than passing the field to the method, you pass a pointer to it, so you would write:

` Here is some code from the method MY METHOD

` ...
DO SOMETHING (->[People]Last Name) ` Let's say [People]Last Name is equal to "williams"
ALERT([People]Last Name)

` Here the code of the method DO SOMETHING

$1->:=Uppercase($1->)
ALERT($1->)

Here the parameter is not the field, but a pointer to it. Therefore, within the DO SOMETHING
method, $1 is no longer the value of the field but a pointer to the field. The object referenced
by $1 ($1-> in the code above) is the actual field. Consequently, changing the referenced
object goes beyond the scope of the subroutine, and the actual field is affected. In this
example, both alert boxes will read “WILLIAMS”.

For more information about Pointers, see the section Pointers.

140 4D Language Reference

2. Rather than having the method DO SOMETHING “doing something,” you can rewrite the
method so it returns a value. Thus you would write:

` Here is some code from the method MY METHOD

` ...
` Let's say [People]Last Name is equal to "williams"
[People]Last Name:=DO SOMETHING ([People]Last Name)
ALERT([People]Last Name)
` Here the code of the method DO SOMETHING
$0:=$1
ALERT($0)

This second technique of returning a value by a subroutine is called “using a function.” This is
described in the next paragraphs.

Advanced note: Parameters within the subroutine are accessible through the local variables $1,
$2... In addition, parameters can be optional and can be referred to using the syntax ${...}. For
more information on parameters, see the description of the command Count parameters.

Functions: Project Methods that return a value

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Data can be returned from methods. A method that returns a value is called a function.

4D or 4D Plug-in commands that return a value are also called functions.

For example, the following line is a statement that uses the built-in function, Length, to return
the length of a string. The statement puts the value returned by Length in a variable called
MyLength. Here is the statement:

MyLength:=Length("How did I get here?")

Any subroutine can return a value. The value to be returned is put into the local variable $0.

For example, the following function, called Uppercase4, returns a string with the first four
characters of the string passed to it in uppercase:

$0:=Uppercase(Substring($1; 1; 4))+Substring($1; 5)

4D Language Reference 141

The following is an example that uses the Uppercase4 function:

NewPhrase:=Uppercase4 ("This is good.")

In this example, the variable NewPhrase gets “THIS is good.”

The function result, $0, is a local variable within the subroutine. It can be used as such within
the subroutine. For example, in the previous DO SOMETHING example, $0 was first assigned
the value of $1, then used as parameter to the ALERT command. Within the subroutine, you
can use $0 in the same way you would use any other local variable. It is 4D that returns the
value of $0 (as it is when the subroutine ends) to the called method.

Recursive Project Methods

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Project methods can call themselves. For example:

• The method A may call the method B which may call A, so A will call B again and so on.
• A method can call itself.

This is called recursion. The 4D language fully supports recursion.

Here is an example. Let’s say you have a [Friends and Relatives] table composed of this
extremely simplified set of fields:
- [Friends and Relatives]Name
- [Friends and Relatives]ChildrensName

For this example, we assume the values in the fields are unique (there are no two persons with
the same name). Given a name, you want to build the sentence “A friend of mine, John who is
the child of Paul who is the child of Jane who is the child of Robert who is the child of
Eleanor, does this for a living!”:

1. You can build the sentence in this way:

$vsName:=Request("Enter the name:";"John")

If (OK=1)
QUERY([Friends and Relatives];[Friends and Relatives]Name=$vsName)
If (Records in selection([Friends and Relatives])>0)
$vtTheWholeStory:="A friend of mine, "+$vsName
Repeat

142 4D Language Reference

 QUERY([Friends and Relatives];[Friends and Relatives]ChildrensName=$vsName)
$vlQueryResult:=Records in selection([Friends and Relatives])
If ($vlQueryResult>0)
$vtTheWholeStory:=$vtTheWholeStory+" who is the child of "+
[Friends and Relatives]Name
$vsName:=[Friends and Relatives]Name
End if
Until ($vlQueryResult=0)
$vtTheWholeStory:=$vtTheWholeStory+", does this for a living!"
ALERT($vtTheWholeStory)
End if
End if

2. You can also build it this way:

$vsName:=Request("Enter the name:";"John")

If (OK=1)
QUERY([Friends and Relatives];[Friends and Relatives]Name=$vsName)
If (Records in selection([Friends and Relatives])>0)
ALERT("A friend of mine, "+Genealogy of ($vsName)+", does this for a living!")
End if
End if
with the recursive function Genealogy of listed here:

` Genealogy of project method

` Genealogy of ( String ) -> Text
` Genealogy of ( Name ) -> Part of sentence

$0:=$1
QUERY([Friends and Relatives];[Friends and Relatives]ChildrensName=$1)
If (Records in selection([Friends and Relatives])>0)
$0:=$0+" who is the child of "+Genealogy of ([Friends and Relatives]Name)
End if

Note the Genealogy of method which calls itself.

The first way is an iterative algorithm. The second way is a recursive algorithm.

When implementing code for cases like the previous example, it is important to note that you
can always write methods using iteration or recursion. Typically, recursion provides more
concise, readable, and maintainable code, but using it is not mandatory.

4D Language Reference 143

Some typical uses of recursion in 4D are:
• Treating records within tables that relate to each other in the same way as in the example.
• Browsing documents and folders on your disk, using the commands FOLDER LIST and
DOCUMENT LIST. A folder may contain folders and documents, the subfolders can themselves
contain folders and documents, and so on.

Important: Recursive calls should always end at some point. In the example, the method
Genealogy of stops calling itself when the query returns no records. Without this condition
test, the method would call itself indefinitely; eventually, 4D would return a “Stack Full” error
becuase it would no longer have space to “pile up” the calls (as well as parameters and local
variables used in the method).

See Also
Control Flow, Database Methods, Methods.

144 4D Language Reference

3
______________________
4D Environment

4D Language Reference 145

146 4D Language Reference
ADD DATA SEGMENT 4D Environment

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

ADD DATA SEGMENT

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Compatibility note: Starting with version 11 of 4D, data segments are no longer supported (the
size of the data file is now unlimited). When it is called, this command does nothing.

4D Language Reference 147

Application file 4D Environment

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Application file → String

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result String ← Long name of the 4D executable file or application

Description
The Application file command returns the long name of the 4D executable file or application
you are running.

On Windows
If, for example, you are running 4D located at \PROGRAMS\4D on the volume E, the
command returns E:\PROGRAMS\4D\4D.EXE.

On Macintosh
If, for example, you are running 4D in the Programs folder on the disk Macintosh HD, the
command returns Macintosh HD:Programs:4D.app.

Example
At startup on Windows, you need to check if a DLL Library is correctly located at the same
level as the 4D executable file. In the On Startup database method of your application you can
write:
If (On Windows & (Application type#4D Server))
If (Test path name (Long name to path name (Application file)+"XRAYCAPT.DLL")
#Is a document)
` Display a dialog box explaining that the library XRAYCAPT.DLL
` is missing. Therefore, the X-ray capture capability will not be available.
End if
End if

Note: The project methods On Windows and Long name to path name are listed in the section
System Documents.
See Also
Data file, DATA SEGMENT LIST, Structure file.

148 4D Language Reference

Application type 4D Environment

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Application type → Long Integer

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Long Integer ← Numeric value denoting the type of the application

Description
The Application type command returns a numeric value that denotes the type of 4D
environment that you are running. 4D provides the following predefined constants:
Constant Type Value
4D local mode Long Integer 0
4D Volume Desktop Long Integer 1
4D remote mode Long Integer 4
4D Server Long Integer 5
4D First Long Integer 6

Example
Somewhere in your code, other than in the On Server Startup database method, you need to
check if you are running 4D Server. You can write:
If (Application type=4D Server)
` Perform appropriate actions
End if

See Also
Application version, Version type.

4D Language Reference 149

Application version 4D Environment

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Application version {(*)} → String

Parameter Type Description

* * → Long version number if passed, otherwise
Short version number

Function result String ← Version number encoded string

Description
The Application version command returns an encoded string value that expresses the version
number of the 4D environment you are running.

• If you do not pass the optional * parameter, a 4-character string is returned, formatted as
follows:
Characters Description
1-2 Version number
3 Update number
4 Revision number
Example: The string "0600" stands for version 6.0.0.

• If you pass the optional * parameter, an 8-character string is returned, formatted as follows:
Characters Description
1 "F" denotes a final version
"B" denotes a beta version
Other characters denote an 4D internal version
2-3-4 Internal 4D compilation number
5-6 Version number
7 Update number
8 Revision number
Example: The string "B0120602" would stand for the Beta 12 of version 6.0.2.

150 4D Language Reference

Examples
1. This example displays the 4D environment version number:
$vs4Dversion:=Application version
ALERT("You are using the version "+String(Num(Substring($vs4Dversion;1;2)))+"."+
$vs4Dversion[[3]]+"."+$vs4Dversion[[4]])

2. This example tests to verify that you are using a final version:
If(Substring(Application version(*);1;1)#"F")
ALERT("Please make sure you are using a Final Production version of 4D with this
database!")
QUIT 4D
End if

See Also
Application type, Version type.

4D Language Reference 151

BUILD APPLICATION 4D Environment

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

BUILD APPLICATION {(projectName)}

Parameter Type Description

projectName String → Full access path of the project to use

Description
The BUILD APPLICATION command launches the application generation process. It takes
into account parameters set in the current application project or the application project set
in the projectName parameter.

An application project is an XML file that contains all the parameters used to generate an
application. Most parameters can be seen in the Build Application... dialog box (for more
information, refer to the Design Reference manual of 4D).
By default, 4D creates an application project named “buildapp.xml” (default) for each
database and places it in the BuildApp subfolder in the database Preferences folder.

If the database has not yet been compiled or if the compiled code is outdated, the
command will first launch the compiler process. In this case, the compiler window does
not appear (unless an error occurs), only a progress bar is displayed.

If you do not pass the optional projectName parameter, the command displays a standard
open file dialog box, so that you can designate a project file. When the dialog box has been
validated, the system variable Document contains the full pathname of the open project
file.
If you pass the access path and name of an XML file for a valid application project (“.xml”
extension), the command will use the parameters defined in the file. For more information
on the structure and the keys that can be used in the XML file of an application project,
refer to the 4D XML Keys manual.

Example
This example builds two applications in a single method:

BUILD APPLICATION("c:\\folder\\projects\\myproject1.xml")
If (OK=1)
BUILD APPLICATION("c:\\folder\\projects\\myproject2.xml")
End if

152 4D Language Reference

System Variables or Sets
The system variable OK is set to 1 if the command has been correctly executed. Otherwise,
it is set to 0. The system variable Document contains the full pathname of the open project
file.

Error Handling
If the command fails, an error is generated that you can intercept using the ON ERR CALL
command.

4D Language Reference 153

Compact data file 4D Environment

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Compact data file (structurePath; dataPath{; archiveFolder{; option{; method}}}) → Text

Parameter Type Description

structurePath Text → Pathname of structure file
dataPath Text → Pathname of data file to be compacted
archiveFolder Text → Pathname of folder where original data file
will be put
option Number → Compacting options
method Text → Name of 4D callback method

Function result Text ← Complete pathname of folder containing

original data file

Description
The Compact data file command compacts the data file designated by the dataPath
parameter associated with the structurePath structure file. For more information about
compacting, refer to the Design Reference manual.

To ensure the continuity of the database operation, the new compacted data file
automatically replaces the original file. For security, the original file is not modified and is
moved into a special folder named “Replaced files (compacting) YYYY-MM-DD HH-MM-SS”
where YYYY-MM-DD HH-MM-SS represents the date and time of the backup. For example:
“Replaced files (compacting) 2007-09-27 15-20-35”.

The command returns the complete pathname of the folder actually created to store the
original data file. This command can only be executed from 4D (local mode) or 4D Server
(stored procedure). The data file to be compacted must correspond to the structure file
designated by structurePath. In addition, the data file must not be open when the command
is executed; otherwise an error is generated.
If an error occurs during the compacting process, the original files are kept in their initial
location. If an index file (.4DIndx file) is associated with the data file, it is also compacted.
As with the data file, the original file is saved and the new compacted version replaces the
previous one.

• In the structurePath parameter, pass the complete pathname of the structure file
associated with the data file that you want to compact. This information is needed for the
compacting procedure. The pathname must be expressed in the syntax of the operating
system. You can also pass an empty string; in this case, the standard Open file dialog box
appears so that you can designate the structure file to be used.

154 4D Language Reference

• In the dataPath parameter, you can pass an empty string, a file name or a complete
pathname, expressed in the syntax of the operating system. If you pass an empty string, the
standard Open file dialog box appears so that the user can designate the data file to be
compacted. This file must correspond to the structure file defined in the structurePath
parameter. If you only pass the name of the data file, 4D will look for it at the same level as
the structure file.

• The optional archiveFolder parameter can be used to specify the location of the “Replaced
files (compacting) DateTime” folder intended to receive the original versions of the data
files as well as any index files.
The command returns the complete pathname of the folder actually created.
- If you omit this parameter, the original files are automatically put in a “Replaced files
(compacting) DateTime” folder that is created next to the structure file.
- If you pass an empty string, a standard Open folder dialog box will appear so that the user
can specify the location of the folder to be created.
- If you pass a pathname (expressed in the syntax of the operating system), the command
will create a “Replaced files (compacting) DateTime” folder at this location.

• The optional options parameter is used to set various compacting options. To do so, use
the following constants, found in the “Data file maintenance” theme. You can pass several
options by combining them:
- Do not create log file (16384): Generally, this command creates a log file in XML format.
Its name is based on that of the data file and it is placed next to this file (original location).
For example, for a data file named “data.4dd,” the log file will be named
“data_compact_log.xml.” With this option, no log file will be created.
- Create process (32768): When this option is passed, compacting will be asynchronous and
you will need to manage the results using the callback method (see below). 4D will not
display the progress bar (it is possible to do so using the callback method). The OK system
variable is set to 1 if the process has been launched correctly and 0 in all other cases. When
this option is not passed, the OK variable is set to 1 if the compacting takes place correctly
and 0 otherwise.

• The method parameter is used to set a callback method which will be called regularly
during the compacting if the Create process option has been passed. Otherwise, the callback
method is never called. For more information about this method, please refer to the
description of the VERIFY DATA FILE command.
If the callback method does not exist in the database, an error is generated and the system
variable OK is set to 0.

By default, the Compact data file command creates a log file in XML format (if you have not
passed the Do not create log file option, see the options parameter). Its name is based on
that of the data file and it is placed next to this file. For example, for a data file named
“data.4dd,” the log file will be named “data_compact_log.xml.”

4D Language Reference 155

Example
The following example (Windows) carries out the compacting of a data file:

$structFile:=Structure file
$dataFile:="C:\Databases\Invoices\January\Invoices.4dd"
$origFile:="C:\Databases\Invoices\Archives\January\"
$archFolder:=Compact data file($structFile;$dataFile;$origFile)

See Also
VERIFY DATA FILE.

System Variables or Sets

If the compacting operation is carried out correctly, the OK system variable is set to 1;
otherwise, it is set to 0.

156 4D Language Reference

COMPONENT LIST 4D Environment

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

COMPONENT LIST (componentsArray)

Parameter Type Description

componentsArray Array string ← Names of the components

Description
When a database is opened, 4D loads the valid components found in the Components
folder that is next to the structure file. The COMPONENT LIST command sizes and fills the
componentsArray array with the names of the components loaded by the 4D application for
the current host database.

This command can be called from the host database or from a component. If the database
does not use any components, the componentsArray array is returned empty.

The names of the components are the names of the structure files of the matrix databases
(.4db, .4dc or .4dbase). This command can be used for setting up architectures and modular
interfaces that offer additional functionalities according to the presence of components.

For more information about 4D components, please refer to the Design Reference manual.

4D Language Reference 157

CREATE DATA FILE 4D Environment

version 6.8
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

CREATE DATA FILE (accessPath)

Parameter Type Description

accessPath String → Name or complete access path of the data file
to create

Description
The CREATE DATA FILE command allows creating a new data file to disk and to replace the data
file opened by the 4D application on-the-fly.

The general functioning of this command is identical to that of the OPEN DATA FILE
command; the only difference is that the new data file set by the accessPath parameter is
created just after the structure is re-opened.

Before launching the operation, the command verifies that the specified access path does not
correspond to an existing file.

4D Server: This command cannot be used with 4D Client or 4D Server.

See Also
OPEN DATA FILE.

158 4D Language Reference

Data file 4D Environment

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Data file {(segment)} → String

Parameter Type Description

segment Number → Obsolete, do not use

Function result String ← Long name of the data file for the database

Description
The Data file command returns the long name of the data file for the database with which you
are currently working.

Starting with version 11 of 4D, data segments are no longer supported. The segment parameter
is now ignored and must no longer be used.

On Windows
If, for example, you are working with the database MyCDs located at \DOCS\MyCDs on the
volume G, a call to Data file returns G:\DOCS\MyCDs\MyCDs.4DD (provided that you
accepted the default location and name proposed by 4D when you created the database).

On Macintosh
If, for example, you are working with the database located in the folder Documents:MyCDsƒ:
on the disk Macintosh HD, a call to Data file returns Macintosh
HD:Documents:MyCDsƒ:MyCDs.data (provided that you accepted the default location and
name proposed by 4D when you created the database).

WARNING: If you call this command from 4D in remote mode, only the name of the data file
is returned, not the long name.

See Also
Application file, DATA SEGMENT LIST, Structure file.

4D Language Reference 159

DATA SEGMENT LIST 4D Environment

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DATA SEGMENT LIST (segments)

Parameter Type Description

segments String array ← Long names of data segments for the database

Description
DATA SEGMENT LIST populates the segments array with the long names of the data segments
for the database with which you are currently working.

Compatibility Note: Starting with version 11 of 4D, data segments are no longer supported
(the size of the data file is now unlimited). This command has been kept for compatibility
reasons. It now systematically returns an array with one element containing the long name of
the data file of the database.

See Also
Application file, Data file, Structure file.

160 4D Language Reference

FLUSH BUFFERS 4D Environment

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

FLUSH BUFFERS

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
The FLUSH BUFFERS command immediately saves the data buffers to disk. All changes that
have been made to the database are stored on disk.

You usually do not need to call this command, as 4D saves data modification on a regular
basis. The Flush Data Buffers every X Minutes option (Data Management page of the
Preferences), which specifies how often to save, is typically used to control buffer flushing.

Note: 4D integrates a built-in data cache scheme for accelerating I/O operations. The fact that
data modifications are, for some time, present in the data cache and not on the disk is
transparent to your coding. For example, if you issue a QUERY call, the 4D database engine
integrates the data cache in the query operation.

4D Language Reference 161

Get 4D folder 4D Environment

version 11.2 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get 4D folder ({folder}{; }{*}) → String

Parameter Type Description

folder Longint → Folder type (if omitted = active 4D folder)
* * → Return folder of host database

Function result String ← Pathname to 4D Folder

Description
The Get 4D folder command returns the pathname to the active 4D folder of the current
application, or to the 4D environment folder specified by the folder parameter, if passed. This
command allows you to get the actual pathname of the folders used by the 4D application. By
using this command, you ensure that your code will work on any platform running any
localized system.

In folder, you can pass one of the following constants, which are located in the “4D
Environment” theme:
Constant Type Value
Active 4D Folder Longint 0 (default)
Licenses Folder Longint 1
Extras Folder Longint 2
4D Client Database Folder Longint 3
Database Folder Longint 4
Database Folder Unix Syntax Longint 5
Current Resources folder Longint 6
Logs Folder Longint 7
HTML Root Folder Longint 8

You will find below a description of each folder:

Preliminary notes about folder names:

• {Disk} is the disk where the system is installed.
• The word User represents the name of the user that opened the session.

162 4D Language Reference

Active 4D Folder
The 4D environment uses the 4D folder to store the following information:
• Preferences files used by the 4D environment applications
• Shortcuts.xml file (custom keyboard shortcuts)
• Macros v2 folder (macro commands of Method editor)
• Favorites v11 folder (pathnames for local and remote databases that have been opened)

The 4D folder is created by default at the following location:

• OnWindows Vista: {Disk}:\Users\Current user\AppData\Roaming\4D
• On Windows XP: {Disk}:\Documents and Settings\Current user\Application Data\4D
• On Mac OS: {Disk}:Users:Current user:Library:Preferences:4D

Licenses Folder
Folder containing the Licenses files of the machine.
The Licenses folder is placed at the following location:
• On Windows Vista: {Disk}:\ProgramData\4D\Licenses
• On Windows XP: {Disk}:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\4D\Licenses
• On Mac OS: {Disk}:Library:Application Support:4D:Licenses

Notes:
• In the case of an application merged with 4D Volume Desktop, the licenses folder is included
in the package of the application.
• If the licenses folder cannot be created in the system because of a lack of authorization, it is
created at the following locations:
- On Windows Vista: {Disk}:\Users\Current user\AppData\Roaming\4D\Licenses
- On Windows XP: {Disk}:\Documents and Settings\Current user\Application Data\4D\Licenses
- On Mac OS: {Disk}:Users:Current user:Library:Application Support:4D:Licenses

Extras Folder (obsolete)

Folder with customized contents downloaded to each client machine.
Compatibility Note: Beginning with version 11.2 of 4D v11 SQL, it is no longer advisable to
use the Extras folder for customized communication between the server and remote machines.
It is now recommended to use the Resources folder for this purpose (see the description of the
current Resources folder below). The Extras folder is nevertheless still supported by 4D Server so
as to maintain the compatibility of existing applications.

Note: If the Extras folder does not exist for the database, executing the Get 4D folder command
with the Extras Folder constant will create it.

4D Language Reference 163

4D Client Database Folder (Client machines)
4D database folder created on each 4D client machine for storing files and folders related to
the database (resources, plug-ins, Resources folder, etc.).
The 4D Client Database Folder is placed at the following location on each client machine:
• On Windows Vista: {Disk}:\Users\Current user\AppData\Local\4D\DatabaseName_Address
• On Windows XP: {Disk}:\Documents and Settings\Current user\Local Settings\Application
Data\DatabaseName_Address
• On Mac OS: {Disk}:Users:User:Library:Caches:4D:DatabaseName_Address:

Database Folder
Folder containing the database structure file. The pathname is expressed using the standard
syntax of the current platform.
With the 4D Client application, this constant is strictly equivalent to the previous 4D Client
Database Folder constant: the command returns the pathname of the folder created locally.

Database Folder Unix Syntax

Folder containing the database structure file. This constant designates the same folder as the
previous one but the pathname returned is expressed using the Unix syntax (Posix), of the
type /Users/... This syntax is mainly used when you use the LAUNCH EXTERNAL PROCESS
command under Mac OS or the SET CGI EXECUTABLE command.

Current Resources folder

Resources folder of the database. This folder contains the additional items (pictures, texts) used
for the database interface. A component can have its own Resources folder. The Resources
folder is located next to the database structure file.
In client/server mode, this folder can be used to organize the transfer of custom data (pictures,
files, subfolders, etc.) between the server machine and the client machines. The contents of
this folder are automatically updated on each client machine when it connects. All referencing
mechanisms associated with the Resources folder are supported in client/server mode (.lproj
folder, XLIFF, pictures, and so on). In addition, 4D v11 SQL provides various tools that can be
used to manage and update this folder dynamically, more particularly a resources explorer.

Note: If the Resources folder does not exist for the database, executing the Get 4D folder
command with the Current Resources folder constant will create it.

Logs Folder
The Logs folder of the database. This folder centralizes the log files of the current database. It
is created at the same level as the structure file and contains the following log files:
• database conversion,
• Web server requests,
• data verification and repair,
• structure verification and repair,

164 4D Language Reference

• backup/restore activities journal,
• command debugging,
•4D Server requests (generated on client machines and on the server).

Note: If the Logs folder does not exist for the database, executing the Get 4D folder command
with the Logs Folder constant will create it.

HTML Root Folder

Current HTML root folder of the database. The pathname returned is expressed with the
standard syntax of the current platform. The HTML root folder is the folder in which the 4D
Web server looks for the requested Web pages and files. By default, it is named WebFolder and
is placed next to the structure file (or its local copy in the case of 4D in remote mode). Its
location can be set on theWeb/Configuration page of the Preferences or dynamically via the
SET HTML ROOT command.
If the Get 4D folder command is called from a remote 4D, the path returned is that of the
remote machine, not that of 4D Server.

The optional * parameter is useful in the case of an architecture using components: it can be
used to determine the database (host or component) for which you want to get the folder
pathname. This parameter is only valid for Database Folder, Database Folder Unix Syntax and
Current Resources folder folders. It is ignored in all other cases.
When the command is called from a component:
• If the * parameter is passed, the command returns the pathname of the host database folder,
• If the * parameter is not passed, the command returns the pathname of the component
folder.
The database folder (Database Folder and Database Folder Unix Syntax) returned differs
according to the type of the component architecture:
- In the case of a .4dbase folder/package, the command returns the pathname of the .4dbase
folder/package,
- In the case of a .4db or .4dc file, the command returns the pathname of the “Components”
folder,
- In the case of an alias or shortcut, the command returns the pathname of the folder
containing the original matrix database. The result differs according to the format of this
database (.4dbase folder/package or .4db/.4dc file), as described above.
When the command is called from the host database, it always returns the pathname of the
host database folder, regardless of whether or not the * parameter is passed.

4D Language Reference 165

Examples
1. During the startup of a single-user database, you want to load (or create) your own settings
in a file located in the 4D folder. To do so, in the On Startup Database Method, you can write
code similar to this:
MAP FILE TYPES("PREF";"PRF";"Preferences file")
` Map PREF Mac OS file type to .PRF Windows file extension
$vsPrefDocName:=Get 4D folder+"MyPrefs" ` Build pathname to the Preferences file
` Check if the file exists
If (Test path name($vsPrefDocName+(".PRF"*Num(On Windows)))#Is a document)
$vtPrefDocRef:=Create document($vsPrefDocName;"PREF") ` If not, create it
Else
$vtPrefDocRef:=Open document($vsPrefDocName;"PREF") ` If so, open it
End if
If (OK=1)
` Process document contents
CLOSE DOCUMENT($vtPrefDocRef)
Else
` Handle error
End if

2. This example illustrates the use of the Database Folder Unix Syntax constant under Mac OS to
list the contents of the database folder:

$posixpath:="\""+Get 4D folder(Database Folder Unix Syntax)+"\""

$myfolder:="ls -l "+$posixpath
$in:=""
$out:=""
$err:=""
LAUNCH EXTERNAL PROCESS($myfolder;$in;$out;$err)

Note: Under Mac OS, it is necessary to put pathnames in quotes when they contain the names
of files or folders with spaces in them. The escape sequence "\" can be used to insert the
quotation mark character into the string. You can also use the statement Char(Double quote).

See Also
COMPONENT LIST, SET HTML ROOT, System folder, Temporary folder, Test path name.

System Variables or Sets

If the folder parameter is invalid or if the pathname returned is empty, the OK system variable
is set to 0.

166 4D Language Reference

Get current database localization 4D Environment

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get current database localization → String

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result String ← Current language of the database

Description
The Get current database localization command returns the current language used by the
database, expressed in the standard defined by the RFC 3066. Typically, the command
returns “en” for English, “es” for Spanish, etc. For more information about this standard
and the values returned by this command, please refer to the Design Reference manual.

The current language of the database can be used to determine the .lproj folder where the
program will look for the localized items of the database. 4D automatically determines the
current language on database startup according to the contents of the Resources folder and
the system environment. How it works is that 4D loads the first .lproj folder of the database
that corresponds to the reference language, with the following order of priority:
1. System language (under Mac OS, several languages can be set by order of preference, 4D
uses this setting).
2. Language of the 4D application.
3. English
4. First language found in the Resources folder.

Note: If the database does not have an .lproj folder, 4D applies the following order of
priority: 1. System language, 2. English (if the system language cannot be identified).

4D Language Reference 167

Get database parameter 4D Environment

version 11.4 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get database parameter ({aTable; }selector{; stringValue}) → Longint

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table from which to get the parameter, or
Default table if this parameter is omitted
selector Longint → Code of the database’s parameter
stringValue String ← String value of the parameter

Function result Longint ← Current value of the parameter

Description
The Get database parameter command allows you to get the current value of a 4D database
parameter. When the parameter value is a character string, it is returned in the stringValue
parameter.

The selector parameter designates the parameter to get. 4D offers you the following predefined
constants, which are in the “Database Parameters” theme:

Constant Type Value

Seq Order Ratio **** Selector disabled ****
Seq Access Optimization **** Selector disabled ****
Seq Distinct Values Ratio **** Selector disabled ****
Index Compacting **** Selector disabled ****
Seq Query Select Ratio **** Selector disabled ****
Minimum Web Process Longint 6
Maximum Web Process Longint 7
Web conversion mode Longint 8
Database Cache Size Longint 9
4D Local Mode Scheduler Longint 10
4D Server Scheduler Longint 11
4D Remote Mode Scheduler Longint 12
4D Server Timeout Longint 13
4D Remote Mode Timeout Longint 14
Port ID Longint 15
IP Address to listen Longint 16

168 4D Language Reference

Character set Longint 17
Max Concurrent Web Processes Longint 18
Client Minimum process Web Longint 19
Client Maximum process Web Longint 20
Client Maximum Web requests size Longint 21
Client Port ID Longint 22
Client IP Address to listen Longint 23
Client Character set Longint 24
Client Max Concurrent Web Proc Longint 25
Cache Writing Mode **** Selector disabled ****
Maximum Web requests size Longint 27
4D Server Log Recording Longint 28
Web Log Recording Longint 29
Client Web Log Recording Longint 30
Table Sequence Number Longint 31
Real Display Precision Longint 32
TCP_NODELAY Longint 33
Debug Log Recording Longint 34
Client Server Port ID Longint 35
WEDD Signature Longint 36
Invert Objects Longint 37
HTTPS Port ID Longint 39
Client HTTPS Port ID Longint 40
Unicode mode Longint 41
Temporary memory size Longint 42
SQL Autocommit Longint 43
SQL Engine Case Sensitivity Longint 44
Client Log Recording Longint 45
Query By Formula On Server Longint 46
Order By Formula On Server Longint 47
Auto Synchro Resources Folder Longint 48
QUERY BY FORMULA Joins Longint 49
HTTP Compression Level Longint 50
HTTP Compression Threshold Longint 51
Idle Connections Timeout Longint 54

To know the values that could be returned by this function, as well as the scope of each
selector and whether or not any changes made are kept between sessions, please refer to the
description of the SET DATABASE PARAMETER command.

4D Language Reference 169

The Database Cache Size (9) selector allows you to get the current database memory cache size.
The returned value is expressed in bytes.
The Maximum Cache size is set on the “Database/Data Management” page of the Preferences.
The actual size allocated to the database cache however will depend on both the settings and
the current system resources. The Get database parameter command allows you to get the
actual size of the memory allocated to the database cache by 4D.

Note: You cannot set the database cache memory size using the language. In other words, the
Database Cache Size selector cannot be set using the SET DATABASE PARAMETER command.

When you use the WEDD Signature (36) selector with this command, the string defined as the
WEDD signature is returned in the optional stringValue parameter and the function returns 0.

Examples
1. The following method allows you to get 4D scheduler current values:

C_LONGINT($ticksbtwcalls;$maxticks;$minticks;$lparams)
If (Application type=4D Local Mode) ` 4D local mode is used
$lparams:=Get database parameter(4D Local Mode Scheduler)
$ticksbtwcalls:=$lparams & 0x00ff
$maxticks:=($lparams>>8) & 0x00ff
$minticks:=($lparams>>16) & 0x00ff
End if

2. The selector 16 (IP Address to listen) lets you get the IP address on which the 4D Web server
receives HTTP requests. The following example splits up the hexadecimal value:

C_LONGINT($a;$b;$c;$d)
C_LONGINT($addr)
$addr:=Get database parameter(IP Address to listen)
$a:=($addr>>24)&0x000000ff
$b:=($addr>>16)&0x000000ff
$c:=($addr>>8)&0x000000ff
$d:=$addr&0x000000ff

See Also
DISTINCT VALUES, QUERY SELECTION, SET DATABASE PARAMETER.

170 4D Language Reference

GET SERIAL INFORMATION 4D Environment

version 6.7
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET SERIAL INFORMATION (key; user; company; connected; maxUser)

Parameter Type Description

key Longint ← Unique product key (encrypted)
user String ← Registered name
company String ← Registered organization
connected Longint ← Number of connected users
maxUser Longint ← Maximum number of connected users

Description
The GET SERIAL INFORMATION command returns various information about the 4D current
version serialization.

• key: unique ID of the installed product. A unique number is associated to a 4D application

(such as 4D Server, 4D in local mode, 4D Desktop, etc.) installed on a machine. This number is
encrypted, of course.
• user: Name application user as defined when installing.
• company: User’s company or organization name as defined during installation.
• connected: Number of connected users when executing the command.
• maxUsers: Maximal number of users concurrently connected.

Note: The last two parameters always return 1 for 4D single user except in demonstration
versions (0 is then returned).

GET SERIAL INFORMATION is part of the general component protection scheme implemented
in 4D. Component developers can associate a copy of their product to a given installed 4D
application, in order to avoid any illegal copies.

The serialization works as follows: a user who wants to get a component sends his unique key
generated through the GET SERIAL INFORMATION command to the developer. This can be done
through an Order form included in a demo version of the component. The generated key is
unique and is associated to a specific 4D application.

4D Language Reference 171

The component developer can then generate his own serial number combining the key and a
given cipher. The delivered component will offer a function verifying if the information
returned by the GET SERIAL INFORMATION matches this serial number. Otherwise, the user will
not be able to use the component.

Note: Plug-ins developers can use this protection scheme too. For more information, refer to
the 4D Plugin API Reference.

See Also
Get component resource ID.

172 4D Language Reference

Is compiled mode 4D Environment

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Is compiled mode {(*)} → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

* * → Returns information about host database

Function result Boolean ← Compiled (True), Interpreted (False)

Description
Is compiled mode tests whether you are running in compiled mode (True) or interpreted mode
(False).

The optional * parameter is useful in the case of an architecture using components: it can be
used to determine the database (host or component) for which you want to find out the
running mode.
• When the command is called from a component:
- If the * parameter is passed, the command returns True or False depending on the mode in
which the host database is running,
- If the * parameter is not passed, the command returns True or False depending on the mode
in which the component is running.
• When the command is called from a method of the host database, it returns True or False
depending on the mode in which the host database is running.

Example
In one of your routines, you include debugging code useful only when you are running in
interpreted mode, so surround this debugging code with a test that calls Is compiled mode:
` ...
If (Not(Is compiled mode))
` Include debugging code here
End if
` ...

See Also
IDLE, Undefined.

4D Language Reference 173

Is data file locked 4D Environment

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Is data file locked → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Boolean ← True = file/segment locked

False = file/segment not locked

Description
The Is data file locked command returns True if the data file of the open database or at least
one of its segments is locked — i.e. write protected.

Placed, for instance, in the On Startup Database Method, this command enables the
prevention of any risk of accidental opening of a locked data file.

Example
This method will prevent the opening of the database if the data file is locked:

If(Is data file locked)

ALERT("The data file is locked. Impossible to open database.")
QUIT 4D
End if

174 4D Language Reference

NOTIFY RESOURCES FOLDER MODIFICATION 4D Environment

version 11.2
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

NOTIFY RESOURCES FOLDER MODIFICATION

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
The NOTIFY RESOURCES FOLDER MODIFICATION command can be used to "force" 4D Server
to send a notification to all the connected 4D machines indicating that the Resources folder
of the database has been modified so that they can synchronize their local Resources folder.
This command can be used more particularly to manage the synchronization of the
Resources folders of remote machines after this folder has been modified by a stored
procedure on the server.
For more information about managing the Resources folder in remote mode, please refer to
the 4D Server Reference Guide.

Only the information that modification has occurred is sent. Each remote machine will
react according to its local preferences. The options are the following:
• no synchronization of the local Resources local folder during the session,
• automatic synchronization of the local Resources folder during the session,
• display of a warning so that the user may carry out a synchronization if desired.

See Also
Get 4D folder.

4D Language Reference 175

OPEN 4D PREFERENCES 4D Environment

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

OPEN 4D PREFERENCES (selector)

Parameter Type Description

selector String → Key designating a theme or a page or a
group of parameters in the Preferences
dialog box

Description
The OPEN 4D PREFERENCES command provokes the display of the Preferences dialog box of
the current 4D application and the display of the theme or page corresponding to the key
passed in selector.

The selector parameter must contain one or more “keys” indicating a theme, page or group
of parameters in the Preferences dialog box. The list of keys that can be used is provided
below.

You can pass either a fixed access path or the name of a single element in selector:
• Fixed access path: The selector parameter is put together in the following manner:
/Theme{/Page{/Parameter group}}.
The string must start with the / character and each level must be separated with a /.
For example, to set the Compiler page of the Design Mode theme, selector must contain
"/Design Mode/Compiler".
• Name (relative path): In this case, the selector parameter cannot start with the / character.
Simply pass the name of the desired element and 4D will open the first corresponding
element in the following search order: parameter group -> page-> theme.
For example, if you pass “Progress Indicator” in selector, 4D will open the Options page of
the Application theme.

To open the dialog box directly on the first page, simply pass “/” in selector.

The command opens the Preferences page on the element specified in selector; however, all
other themes and pages remain accessible. It is up to the developer to make sure that user
access to Preferences does not hinder the application. To control user actions, it is
recommended that you enable the user access management system.

176 4D Language Reference

Path keys
The following is a list of keys that can be used in the selector parameter:
/Application
/Application/Options
/Application/Options/Options
/Application/Options/Temporary Folder Location
/Application/Options/Drag and Drop Highlight
/Application/Options/Progress Indicator
/Application/Options/Display Toolbar
/Application/Options/Display Windows
/Application/Access
/Application/Access/Data Access
/Application/Access/General Settings
/Application/Access/User Access
/Application/CPU Priorities
/Application/CPU Priorities/Set CPU Priority to:
/Application/Shortcuts
/Application/Shortcuts/Keys
/Application/Compatibility
/Application/Compatibility/Design Compatibility
/Application/Compatibility/Web Compatibility
/Application/Compatibility/Platform
/Design Mode
/Design Mode/Structure
/Design Mode/Structure/General Font
/Design Mode/Structure/Forms and Methods Automatic Comments
/Design Mode/Structure/Automatic Form Creation
/Design Mode/Form Editor
/Design Mode/Form Editor/Object Templates
/Design Mode/Form Editor/Move
/Design Mode/Form Editor/Auto Alignment
/Design Mode/Form Editor/Default Display
/Design Mode/Method Editor
/Design Mode/Method Editor/Font
/Design Mode/Method Editor/Default Display
/Design Mode/Method Editor/Options
/Design Mode/Method Editor/Syntax
/Design Mode/Compiler
/Design Mode/Compiler/Compilation Options
/Design Mode/Compiler/Compiler Methods for...
/Design Mode/Documentation

4D Language Reference 177

/Design Mode/Moving
/Design Mode/Moving/Default Actions during the Copy if Dependent Objects
/Design Mode/Moving/Moving Dialog
/Design Mode/Documentation/Documentation Access from the Explorer
/Database
/Database/Data Management
/Database/Data Management/General
/Database/Data Management/Database Cache Settings
/Database/Data Management/WEDD
/Database/International
/Database/International/Script Manager
/Database/International/Right-to-left Languages
/Database/International/Numeric Display Format
/Backup
/Backup/Configuration
/Backup/Configuration/Backup Contents
/Backup/Configuration/Backup File Destination Folder
/Backup/Configuration/Last Backup Information
/Backup/Configuration/Log Management
/Backup/Scheduler
/Backup/Scheduler/Backup Frequency
/Backup/Backup
/Backup/Backup/General
/Backup/Backup/Archive
/Backup/Restore
/Backup/Restore/Automatic Restore
/Client-Server
/Client-Server/Configuration
/Client-Server/Configuration/Network
/Client-Server/Configuration/Client-Server Connections Timeout
/Client-Server/Configuration/Client-Server Communication
/Client-Server/Configuration/4D Open
/Client-Server/Publishing
/Client-Server/Publishing/Publishing Information
/Client-Server/Publishing/Allow-Deny Table Configuration
/Client-Server/Publishing/Encryption
/Web
/Web/Configuration
/Web/Configuration/Web Server Publishing
/Web/Configuration/Default HTML Path
/Web/Configuration/Starting Mode

178 4D Language Reference

/Web/Advanced
/Web/Advanced/Cache
/Web/Advanced/Web Process
/Web/Advanced/Options
/Web/Advanced/Web Passwords
/Web/Options
/Web/Options/Options
/Web/Options/Text Conversion
/Web/Options/Persisent Connections
/Web/Log Format
/Web/Log Format/Web Log Type
/Web/Log Format/Web Log Token Selection
/Web/Log Scheduler
/Web/Log Scheduler/Backup Frequency for Web Log File
/Web Services
/Web Services/SOAP
/Web Services/SOAP/Server Side
/Web Services/SOAP/Client Side
/SQL
/SQL/Configuration
/SQL/Configuration/SQL Server Access

Examples
1. Open Preferences on the first page:

OPEN 4D PREFERENCES("/")

2. Open the “Shortcuts” page of the “Application” theme:

OPEN 4D PREFERENCES("/Application/Shortcuts")

3. Open the “Advanced” page of the “Web” theme:

OPEN 4D PREFERENCES("Web Passwords")

System Variables or Sets

If the requested element is found and opened correctly, the system variable OK returns 1.
Otherwise, it returns 0.

4D Language Reference 179

OPEN ADMINISTRATION WINDOW 4D Environment

version 11.2
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

OPEN ADMINISTRATION WINDOW

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
The OPEN ADMINISTRATION WINDOW command displays the server administration
window on the remote 4D client machine that executes it. The 4D Server administration
window can be used to view the current parameters and to carry out various maintenance
operations (see the 4D Server Reference Guide). Beginning with version 11 of 4D Server, this
window can be displayed from a client machine:

This command must be called in the context of a 4D application connected to a 4D Server.

It does nothing if:
• it is called in a 4D application in local mode or executed as a stored procedure on the
server,
• it is executed by a user other than the Designer or the Administrator (in this case, the
error -9991 is generated, see the Database Engine Errors section).

180 4D Language Reference

Example
Here is the code for an administration button:

If (Application type=4D local mode)

OPEN SECURITY CENTER
` ...
End if
If (Application type=4D remote mode)
OPEN ADMINISTRATION WINDOW
` ...
End if
If (Application type=4D Server)
` ...
End if

See Also
OPEN SECURITY CENTER.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been executed correctly, the OK system variable is set to 1. Otherwise,
it is set to 0.

4D Language Reference 181

OPEN DATA FILE 4D Environment

version 6.8
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

OPEN DATA FILE (accessPath)

Parameter Type Description

accessPath String → Name or complete access path of the data file to open

Description
The OPEN DATA FILE command allows changing the data file opened by the 4D application on-
the-fly.

Pass the name or the full access path of the data file to open in the accessPath parameter. If
you pass only the file name, it must be placed next to the structure file of the database.

If the access path sets a valid data file, 4D quits the database in progress and re-opens it with
the specified data file. The On Exit Database Method and the On Startup Database Method are
successively called.

Warning: Since this command causes the application to quit before re-opening with the
specified data file, it is not possible to use it in the On Startup Database Method or in a method
called by this database method.

The command is executed in an asynchronous manner: after its call, 4D continues executing
the rest of the method. Then, the application behaves as if the Quit command was selected in
the File menu: open dialog boxes are cancelled, any open processes have 10 seconds to finish
before being terminated, etc.

Before launching the operation, the command checks the validity of the specified data file.
Also, if the file was already open, the command verifies that it corresponds to the current
structure.

If you pass an empty string in accessPath, the command will re-open the database without
changing the data file.

4D Server: This command cannot be used with 4D Client or 4D Server.

See Also
CREATE DATA FILE.

182 4D Language Reference

OPEN SECURITY CENTER 4D Environment

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

OPEN SECURITY CENTER

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
The OPEN SECURITY CENTER command displays the Maintenance and Security Center
(MSC) window.

Depending on the access rights of the current user, some functions available in this
window may be disabled.

See Also
VERIFY CURRENT DATA FILE.

4D Language Reference 183

PLUGIN LIST 4D Environment

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

PLUGIN LIST (numbersArray; namesArray)

Parameter Type Description

numbersArray Longint Array ← Numbers of plug-ins
namesArray Array string ← Names of plug-ins

Description
The PLUGIN LIST command fills in the numbersArray and namesArray arrays with the
numbers and names of the plug-ins loaded and usable by the 4D application. These two
arrays are automatically sized and synchronized by the command.

Note: You can compare the values returned in numbersArray with the constants of the “Is
license available” theme.

PLUGIN LIST takes all plug-ins into account, including those that are integrated (for
example, 4D Chart), and third-party plug-ins.

See Also
COMPONENT LIST, Get plugin access, Is license available, SET PLUGIN ACCESS.

184 4D Language Reference

QUIT 4D 4D Environment

version 6.8 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QUIT 4D {(time)}

Parameter Type Description

time Number → Time (mn) before quitting the server

Description
The QUIT 4D command exits the current 4D application and returns to the Desktop.

The command processing is different whether it is executed on 4D or on 4D Server.

With 4D local mode and remote mode:

After you call QUIT 4D, the current process stops its execution, then 4D acts as follows:

• If there is an On Exit Database Method, 4D starts executing this method within a newly
created local process. For example, you can use this database method to inform other
processes, via interprocess communication, that they must close (data entry) or stop the
execution of operations started by the On Startup Database Method (connection from 4D to
another database server). Note that 4D will eventually quit; the On Exit Database Method can
perform all the cleanup or closing operations you wish, but cannot refuse the quit and will at
some point end.

• If there is no On Exit Database Method, 4D aborts each running process one by one, without
distinction.

If the user is performing data entry, the records will be cancelled and not saved.
If you want to let the user save data entry modifications made in the current open windows,
you can use interprocess communication to signal all the other user processes that the
database is going to be exited. To do so, you can adopt two strategies:

• Perform these operations from within the current process before calling QUIT 4D
• Handle these operations from within the On Exit Database Method.

A third strategy is also possible. Before calling QUIT 4D, you check whether a window will need
validation; if that is the case, you ask the user to validate or cancel these windows and then to
choose Quit again. However, from a user interface standpoint, the first two strategies are
preferable.

Note: The time parameter cannot be used with 4D.

4D Language Reference 185

With 4D Server (Stored procedure)
The QUIT 4D command can be executed on the server machine, in a stored procedure. In this
case, it accepts the time optional parameter.
The time parameter allows setting a timeout to the 4D Server before the application actually
quits, allowing client machines the time to disconnect. You must pass a value in minutes in
time. This parameter is only taken into consideration during an execution on the server
machine. It is ignored in 4D.
If you do not pass a parameter for time, 4D Server will wait until all client machines are
disconnected before quitting.

Unlike 4D, the processing of QUIT 4D by 4D Server is asynchronous: the method where the
command is called is not interrupted after is has been executed.

If there is an On Server Stop Database Method, it is executed after the delay set by the time
parameter, or after all clients have disconnected, depending on your parameters.

The action of the QUIT 4D command used in a stored procedure is the same as the one for the
Quit command of the 4D Server File menu: it causes a dialog box to appear on each client
machine indicating that the server is about to quit.

Example
The project method listed here is associated with the Quit or Exit menu item in the File menu.

` M_FILE_QUIT Project Method

CONFIRM("Are you sure that you want to quit?")

If (OK=1)
QUIT 4D
End if

See Also
On Exit Database Method, On Server Shutdown Database Method.

186 4D Language Reference

SET DATABASE PARAMETER 4D Environment

version 11.4 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET DATABASE PARAMETER ({aTable; }selector; value)

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table for which to set the parameter or,
Default table if this parameter is omitted
selector Longint → Code of the database parameter to modify
value Longint | String → Value of the parameter

Description
The SET DATABASE PARAMETER command allows you to modify various internal parameters of
the 4D database.

The selector designates the database parameter to modify. 4D offers predefined constants,
which are located in the “Database Parameters” theme. The following table lists each constant,
describes its scope and indicates whether any changes made are kept between two sessions:

Constant for selector Value Scope Changes kept

Seq Order Ratio 1 **** Selector disabled**** -
Seq Access Optimization 2 **** Selector disabled**** -
Seq Distinct Values Ratio 3 **** Selector disabled**** -
Index Compacting 4 **** Selector disabled**** -
Seq Query Select Ratio 5 **** Selector disabled**** -
Minimum Web Process 6 4D local, 4D Server (*) Yes
Maximum Web Process 7 4D local, 4D Server (*) Yes
Web conversion mode 8 Current process -
Database cache size 9 4D application (*) (**) -
4D Local Mode Scheduler 10 4D application (*) Yes
4D Server Scheduler 11 4D application (*) Yes
4D Remote Mode Scheduler 12 4D application (*) Yes
4D Server Timeout 13 4D application if positive value (***) Yes
4D Remote Mode Timeout 14 4D application if positive value (***) Yes
Port ID 15 4D local, 4D Server (*) -
IP Address to listen 16 4D local, 4D Server (*) Yes
Character set 17 4D local, 4D Server (*) Yes
Max Concurrent Web Processes 18 4D local, 4D Server (*) Yes

4D Language Reference 187

Client Minimum process Web 19 All 4D remote machines (*) Yes
Client Maximum process Web 20 All 4D remote machines (*) Yes
Client Max Web requests size 21 All 4D remote machines (*) Yes
Client Port ID 22 All 4D remote machines (*) Yes
Client IP Address to listen 23 All 4D remote machines (*) Yes
Client Character set 24 All 4D remote machines (*) Yes
Client Max Concurrent Web Proc 25 All 4D remote machines (*) Yes
Cache writing mode 26 **** Selector disabled**** -
Maximum Web requests size 27 4D local, 4D Server (*) Yes
4D Server Log Recording 28 4D Server, 4D remote (*) -
Web Log Recording 29 4D local, 4D Server (*) Yes
Client Web Log Recording 30 All 4D remote machines (*) Yes
Table Sequence Number 31 4D Application Yes
Real Display Precision 32 4D Application -
TCP_NODELAY 33 4D Application (*) -
Debug Log Recording 34 4D Application (*) -
Client Server Port ID 35 Database (*) Yes
WEDD Signature 36 Database (*) Yes
Invert Objects 37 Database (*) Yes
HTTPS Port ID 39 4D local, 4D Server (*) Yes
Client HTTPS Port ID 40 All 4D remote machines (*) Yes
Unicode mode 41 Database (*) Yes
Temporary memory size 42 4D Application (*) -
SQL Autocommit 43 Database (*) Yes
SQL Engine Case Sensitivity 44 Database (*) Yes
Client Log Recording 45 4D remote machine(*) -
Query By Formula On Server 46 Current table and process -
Order By Formula On Server 47 Current table and process -
Auto Synchro Resources Folder 48 4D remote machine(*) -
QUERY BY FORMULA Joins 49 Current process(*) -
HTTP Compression Level 50 4D Application (*) -
HTTP Compression Threshold 51 4D Application (*) -
Idle Connections Timeout 54 4D Application unless value is negative (***) -

(*) The table parameter is ignored in this case.

(**) This selector can only be read (see Get database parameter command).
(***) If the value parameter is negative, the setting is local to the current process and is reset for
the next request.

188 4D Language Reference

The value designates the value of the parameter. The value passed depends on the parameter
that you want to modify. Here are the possible values for each selector:

Selector = 1 (Seq Order Ratio)

This selector has been disabled since it corresponds to a mechanism that has been optimized in 4D
version 11.

Selector = 2 (Seq Access Optimization)

This selector has been disabled since it corresponds to a mechanism that has been optimized in 4D
version 11.

Selector = 3 (Seq Distinct Values Ratio)

This selector has been disabled since it corresponds to a mechanism that has been optimized in 4D
version 11.

Selector = 4 (Index Compacting)

This selector has been disabled since it corresponds to a mechanism that has been optimized in 4D
version 11.

Selector = 5 (Seq Query Select Ratio)

This selector has been disabled since it corresponds to a mechanism that has been optimized in 4D
version 11.

Selector = 6 (Minimum Web Process)

• Values: 0 -> 32,767
• Description: Minimum number of Web processes to maintain in non-contextual mode with
4D in local mode and 4D Server. By default, the value is 0 (see below).

Selector = 7 (Maximum Web Process)

• Values: 0 -> 32,767
• Description: Maximum number of Web processes to maintain in non-contextual mode with
4D in local mode and 4D Server. By default, the value is 10.
In non-contextual mode, for the Web server to be reactive, 4D delays the Web processes for 5
seconds and reuses them to execute any possible future HTTP queries. In terms of
performance, this is actually more advantageous than creating a new process for each query.
Once a Web process is reused, it is delayed again for 5 seconds. When the maximum number
of Web processes has been reached, the web process is then aborted. If no query has been
attributed to a Web process within the 5 second delay, the process is aborted, except if the
minimum number of Web processes has been reached (in which case the process is delayed
again).
These parameters allow you to adjust how your Web server operates in relation to the number
of requests and the memory available as well as other parameters.

4D Language Reference 189

Selector = 8 (Web conversion mode)
• Values: 0, 1, 2 or 3
0= (Default mode) Conversion to the HTML 4.0 format if it is allowed by the browser.
Otherwise, HTML 3.2 format + array use.
1= 6.0.x conversion mode
2= 6.5 conversion mode
3= Conversion to the HTML 4.0 format + CSS-P (since version 6.5.2)
• Description: Conversion mode of 4D forms for the Web with 4D in local mode and 4D
Server. By default, the 4D Web Server uses the cascading style sheets (CSS1) to generate HTML
pages similar to the 4D forms displayed in 4D. With this feature, the forms might not convert
correctly for databases created with versions of 4D prior to 6.7. Consequently, you have the
possibility of setting the form conversion mode.
This mode is set only for the process (Web context) within which the SET DATABASE
PARAMETER was called. It can be called from within the On Web Connection Database Method
to ensure the compatibility of all the forms of a database, or just before a single form is
displayed. If the command is called outside either the contextual mode or a Web process, it
has no effect.

Note: An additional selector can be used with the Get database parameter command: Database
Cache Size (9). This selector cannot be used with the SET DATABASE PARAMETER command. For
more information, please refer to the description of the Get database parameter command.

Selector = 10 (4D Local Mode Scheduler)

Selector = 11 (4D Server Scheduler)
Selector = 12 (4D Remote Mode Scheduler)
• Values: For these three selectors, the value parameter is expressed in hexadecimal 0x00aabbcc
detailed as follows:
aa = minimum number of ticks per call to the system (0 to 100 included).
bb = maximum number of ticks per call to the system (0 to 100 included).
cc = number of ticks between calls to the system (0 to 20 included).
If one of the values is out of range, 4D sets it to its maximum. You can pass one of the
following preset standard values in the value parameter:
value = -1: maximum priority allocated to 4D,
value = -2: average priority allocated to 4D,
value = -3: minimum priority allocated to 4D.
• Description: This parameter allows you to dynamically set the 4D system internal calls.
Depending on the selector, the scheduler value will be set for:
- 4D local mode when the command is called from a 4D single-user application (selector=10).
- 4D Server when the command is called from 4D Server (selector=11).
- 4D remote mode when the command is called from a 4D connected to 4D Server
(selector=12).

190 4D Language Reference

Note: The operation of selector 12 (4D Remote Mode Scheduler) differs according to whether
the SET DATABASE PARAMETER command is executed on the server machine or on the client
machine:
- If the command is executed on the server machine, the new value will be applied to all the
client machines that connect to it subsequently.
- If the command is executed on the client machine, the new value is applied to the client
machine immediately as well as to all the client machines that connect to the server
subsequently.
You can use this operation to implement a dynamic and individualized management of
priority for each client machine. This consists in executing the command initially on the
client machine to be configured, then a second time on the server machine using the default
value, which will then be used for the client machines that connect to it subsequently.
This operation is in effect in 4D starting with versions 6.8.6, 2003.3 and 2004.

Warning: Configuring these selectors inappropriately can cause serious degradation of

application performance. It is recommended to only modify the default values with full
knowledge of the facts.

Selector = 13 (4D Server Timeout)

• Description: This parameter allows changing the value of the 4D Server timeout. The default
4D Server timeout value is defined on the “Client-Server/Configuration” page of the
Preferences dialog box on the server side.
The 4D Server Timeout selector allows you to set in the corresponding value parameter a new
timeout, expressed in minutes. This feature is particularly useful to increase the timeout before
executing a blocking and time-consuming operation on the client, such as printing a large
number of pages, which can cause an unexpected timeout.
You also have two options:
- If you pass a positive value in the value parameter, you set a global and permanent timeout:
the new value is applied to all process and is stored in the preferences of the 4D application
(equivalent to change in the Preferences dialog box).
- If you pass a negative value in the value parameter, you set a local and temporary timeout:
The new value is applied to the calling process only (the other processes keep the default
values) and is reset to default as soon as the server receives any signal of activity from the
client — for example, when the operation is finished. This option is useful for managing long
operations initiated by 4D plug-ins.
To set the “No timeout” option, pass 0 in value.
(See example 1).

Selector = 14 (4D Remote Mode Timeout)

• Description: This parameter allows changing the value of the timeout granted by the remote
4D machine to the 4D Server machine. The default timeout value used by 4D in remote mode
is set on the “Client-Server/Configuration” page of the Preferences dialog box on the remote
machine.

4D Language Reference 191

For more information about this selector, refer to 4D Server Timeout selector description (13).
The 4D Remote Mode Timeout selector can be used in very specific cases.

Selector = 15 (Port ID)

• Description: This parameter allows changing on the fly the TCP port ID used by the 4D Web
server with 4D in local mode and 4D Server. The default value, which can be set on the
“Web/Configuration” page of the Preferences dialog box, is 80. You can use the constants of
the “TCP Port Numbers” theme for the value parameter.
The Port ID selector is useful for 4D Web Servers compiled and merged with 4D Desktop (in
which there is no access to the Design mode). For more information about the TCP port ID,
refer to the Web Services, Configuration section.

Selector = 16 (IP Address to listen)

• Description: This parameter allows the user to change on the fly the IP address on which the
4D Web server will receive HTTP requests with 4D in local mode and 4D Server. By default, no
specific address is defined (value = 0). This parameter can be set in the Preferences of the
database.
The IP Address to listen selector is useful for 4D Web Servers compiled and merged with 4D
Desktop (in which there is no access to the Design mode).
You will pass in the value parameter a hexadecimal IP address. That is, to designate a IP address
such as “a.b.c.d”, you should write:

C_LONGINT($addr)
$addr:=($a<<24)|($b<<16)|($c<<8)|$d
SET DATABASE PARAMETER(IP Address to listen;$addr)

See also example 2. For more information on how to designate the IP address, refer to the Web
Services, Web Server Settings section.

Selector = 17 (Character set)

• Description: This parameter allows the user to change on the fly the character set that the
4D Web Server (with 4D in local mode and 4D Server) should use to communicate with
browsers connecting to the database. The default value actually depends on the language of
the operating system.
This parameter can be set in Preferences of the database. The Character set selector is useful for
4D Web Servers compiled and merged with 4D Desktop (in which there is no access to the
Design mode).
• Values: The possible values depend on the operating mode of the database relating to the
character set.

192 4D Language Reference

Unicode Mode: When the application is operating in Unicode mode, the values to pass for this
parameter are character set identifiers (MIBEnum, identifiers defined by IANA, see the
following address: http://www.iana.org/assignments/character-sets). Here is the list of identifiers
corresponding to the character sets supported by the 4D Web server:
4 = ISO-8859-1
12 = ISO-8859-9
13 = ISO-8859-10
17 = ShiftJIS
2026 = Big5
38 = euc-kr
106 = UTF-8
2250 = Windows-1250
2251 = Windows-1251
2253 = Windows-1253
2255 = Windows-1255
2256 = Windows-1256

Note: In the context of the Character set parameter, the Get database parameter command
returns the IANA name of the character set in the optional stringValue parameter.

ASCII compatibility mode:

0: Western European
1: Japanese
2: Chinese
3: Korean
4: User-defined
5: Reserved
6: Central European
7: Cyrillic
8: Arabic
9: Greek
10: Hebrew
11: Turkish
12: Baltic

Note: For more information about Unicode mode, please refer to the description of selector
41.

4D Language Reference 193

Selector = 18 (Max Concurrent Web Processes)
• Values: You can pass any value between 10 and 32 000. The default value is 32 000.
• Description: This parameter allows setting the strictly high limit of concurrent Web
processes of any type (contextual, non-contextual or belonging to the “pool of processes”—
see selector 7, Maximum Web Process) supported by the 4D Web Server with 4D in local mode
and 4D Server. When this number (minus one) is reached, 4D will not create any other
processes and returns the HTTP status 503 - Service Unavailable to all new requests.
This parameter can prevent the 4D Web Server from saturation, which can occur when an
exceedingly large number of concurrent requests are sent, or when too many context creations
are requested. This parameter can also be set in the Preferences dialog box (see the Web
Services, Web Server Settings section).
In theory, the maximum number of Web processes is the result of the following formula:
Available memory/Web process stack size. Another solution is to visualize the information on
Web processes displayed in the Runtime Explorer: the current number of Web processes and
the maximum number reached since the Web server boot are indicated.

Note: If you pass a value inferior to the high limit of the “pool of processes,” this limit is
reduced in order to match the value of the selector 18. If necessary, the low limit of the pool
(see selector 6, Minimum Web Process) is also modified.

Selector = 19 (Client Minimum process Web)

Selector = 20 (Client Maximum process Web)
Selector = 21 (Client Max Web requests size)
Selector = 22 (Client Port ID)
Selector = 23 (Client IP Address to listen)
Selector = 24 (Client Character set)
Selector = 25 (Client Max Concurrent Web Proc)
• Values: Identical to those of the corresponding 4D in local mode or 4D Server selectors (see
selectors 6 to 8, 15 to 18 and 27).
• Description: These selectors are used to specify the operating parameters of 4D Client
machines used as Web servers.
The values defined using these selectors are applied to all the 4D Client machines used as Web
servers. If you want to define values only for certain 4D Client machines, use the 4D Client
Preferences dialog box.

Selector = 26 (Cache writing mode)

This selector has been disabled since it corresponds to a mechanism that has been optimized
in 4D version 11.

194 4D Language Reference

Selector = 27 (Maximum Web requests size)
• Values: 500 000 to 2 147 483 648.
• Description: Maximum size (in bytes) of incoming HTTP requests (POST) that the Web server
is authorized to process. By default, the value is 2 000 000, i.e. a little less than 2 MB. Passing
the maximum value (2 147 483 648) means that, in practice, no limit is set.
This limit is used to avoid Web server saturation due to incoming requests that are too large.
When a request reaches this limit, the 4D Web server refuses it.

Selector = 28 (4D Server Log Recording)

• Values: 0 or from 1 to X (0 = do not record, 1 to X = sequential number, added to the file
name).
• Description: Starts or stops the recording of standard requests received by 4D Server
(excluding Web requests). By default, the value is 0 (requests not recorded).
4D Server lets you record each request received by the server machine in a log file. When this
mechanism is enabled, the log file is created next to the database structure file. Its name is
“4DRequestsLogX,” where X is the sequential number of the log. Once the file reaches a size of
10 MB, it is closed and a new file is generated, with an incremented sequential number. If a
file of the same name already exists, it is replaced directly. You can set the starting number of
the sequence using the value parameter.
This text file stores various information concerning each request in a simple tabulated format:
time, process number, user, size of request, processing duration, etc. This information can be
particularly useful when fine tuning the application or for statistical purposes. It can be
imported, for example, into a spreadsheet software in order to be processed.

Note: It is possible to manually enable or disable the recording of requests using the Ctrl+Alt+L
shortcut under Windows or the Command+Option+L shortcut under Mac OS.

Selector = 29 (Web Log Recording)

• Values: 0 = Do not record (default), 1 = Record in CLF format, 2 = Record in DLF format, 3 =
Record in ELF format, 4 = Record in WLF format.
• Description: Starts or stops the recording of Web requests received by the Web server of 4D
in local mode or 4D Server. By default, the value is 0 (requests not recorded).
The log of Web requests is stored as a text file named “logweb.txt” that is automatically placed
in the Logs folder of the database, next to the structure file. The format of this file is
determined by the value that you pass. For more information about Web log file formats,
please refer to the Information about the Web Site section.
This file can also be activated on the “Web/Advanced” page of the 4D Preferences.

WARNING: Formats 3 and 4 are custom formats whose contents must be set beforehand in the
application Preferences on the “Web/Log Format” page. If you use one of these formats
without any of its fields having been selected on this page, the log file will not be generated.

4D Language Reference 195

Selector = 30 (Client Web Log Recording)
• Values: 0 = Do not record (default), 1 = Record in CLF format, 2 = Record in DLF format, 3 =
Record in ELF format, 4 = Record in WLF format.
• Description: Starts or stops the recording of Web requests received by the Web servers of all
the client machines. By default, the value is 0 (requests not recorded).
The operation of this selector is identical to that of selector 29; however, it applies to all the
4D Client machines used as Web servers. The “logweb.txt” file is, in this case, automatically
placed in the Logs subfolder of the 4D Client database folder (cache folder). If you only want
to set values for certain client machines, use the Preferences dialog box of 4D Client.

Selector = 31 (Table Sequence Number)

• Values: Any longint value.
• Description: This selector is used to modify or get the current unique number for records of
the table passed as parameter. “Current number” means “last number used”: if you modify
this value using SET DATABASE PARAMETER, the next record will be created with a number that
consists of the value passed + 1. This new number is the one returned by the Sequence number
command as well in any field of the table to which the "Autoincrement" property has been
assigned in the Structure editor or via SQL.
By default, this unique number is set by 4D and corresponds to the order of record creation.
For additional information, refer to the documentation of the Sequence number command.

Selector = 32 (Real Display Precision)

• Values: Any positive longint value.
• Description: This selector lets you modify or get the number of non-significant digits
truncated from the right by the real screen display algorithm. This value is set for the current
application and session.
By default, the value of this option is 4. The value 0 indicates that the default value is used
and that the parameter has not been modified during the session.
For historical reasons, 4D works with real numbers stored on 10 bytes and converts them to 8
bytes during processing (see the Display of Real Numbers section). This is entirely transparent
and does not affect calculations; however certain results may not be displayed as anticipated.
For example, the operation 4,1-4,09 displays the result 0.009999999999999780000, but
searching for 0.01 finds the correct value.
Here is how 4D goes about displaying a real number: let's take the value
8.97499999999996158 obtained by a calculation as an example (the expected result would
normally be 8.975). The algorithm which rounds off most accurately removes the last four
digits (6158) by default and then checks whether the last remaining digit is a 0 or a 9. If it is 0,
the algorithm goes back to the first 0 and removes all the others. If the value is 9, the
algorithm goes back to the first 9 and rounds the decimal up to the next value. In our
example, the value 8.974999999999996158 is thus transformed into 8.975.

196 4D Language Reference

It may happen that certain results end with 5 non-significant digits, like
8.9749999999999986158 for instance. In this case, the algorithm cannot round the value off
correctly because the last remaining digit (after removing the last four) is neither 0 nor 9 and
it will thus do nothing.
You may want for the precision algorithm to truncate more or less digits according to the
specific characteristics of your database. In this case, pass a custom value. Except for zero (4D
internal value choice), this value will indicate the number of digits truncated by the precision
algorithm.
Keep in mind that this setting does not affect the display of numbers, nor their internal
processing.

• Selector = 33 (TCP_NODELAY)
• Possible values: 0 or 1 (0 = disable, 1 = enable)
• Description: Enabling or disabling of the TCP_NODELAY network option. This option,
which is internal to the TCP/IP protocol, controls a network communications optimization
mechanism. It can be set separately for the server machine and the client machines. By
default, the value is 1 (option enabled) on all the machines (server and clients).
In specific cases, in particular in the case of client/server connections by DSL or by VPN
(Virtual Private Network), disabling this option can noticeably improve application
performance. This operation should be carried out with caution and must be accompanied by
load testing in the different client/server configurations.
If you modify this value, it will be necessary to restart the application in order for the new
value to be taken into account.

• Selector = 34 (Debug Log Recording)

• Possible values: 0, 1 or 2 (0 = do not record, 1 = record, 2 = record in detailed mode)
• Description: Starts or stops the sequential recording of events occurring at the 4D
programming level, intended for debugging the application. By default, the value is 0 (events
are not saved).
When this mode is enabled, various types of information can be recorded, more particularly:
- For each event, the number of milliseconds since the creation of the file and the process
number ([n]),
- The execution of each 4D command (cmd) and each calling of a plug-in (plugInName); in this
case, the stack level is indicated (n),
- Each calling of project methods (meth), object methods (obj) and form methods (form),
- When the detailed mode is activated (value = 2), additional information concerning the plug-
ins are recorded: events in the plug-in areas (EventCode) and calls to 4D by the plug-ins
(externCall).

4D Language Reference 197

The events are stored in a file named “4DDebugLog.txt” that is automatically placed in the
Logs subfolder of the database, next to the structure file. Each event is systematically recorded
in the file before its execution, which guarantees its presence in the file even when the
application quits unexpectedly. Be careful, this file is erased and rewritten each time the
application is launched.
This option can be activated for any type of 4D application (4D all modes, 4D Server, 4D
Volume Desktop), in interpreted or compiled mode.

Note: This option is provided solely for the purpose of debugging and must not be put into
production since it may lead to deterioration of the application performance and saturation of
the hard disk.

• Selector = 35 (Client Server Port ID)

• Possible values: 0 to 65535
• Description: This parameter can be used to change the TCP port number where the 4D Server
publishes the database (bound for 4D Client machines) by programming. By default, the value
is 19813.
Customizing this value means that several 4D client-server applications can be used on the
same machine with the TCP protocol; in this case, you must indicate a different port number
for each application.
The value is stored in the database structure file. It can be set with 4D in local mode but is
only taken into account in client-server configuration.
When you modify this value, it is necessary to restart the server machine in order for the new
value to be taken into account.

• Selector = 36 (WEDD Signature)

• Possible values: String of 1 to 255 c haracters.
• Description: This parameter can be used to modify the WEDD signature of the open database
(structure file and data file). By default, this signature is blank (the parameter is not defined).
Keep in mind that the signature is case senstive.
The WEDD signature is used to associate a structure file with a specific data file. A structure file
containing a WEDD signature can only be opened with the data file containing the same
WEDD signature and vice versa. For more information about the WEDD signature, please refer
to the Design Reference manual.
Setting this value by programming facilitates the distribution of upgrades for applications that
have a custom signature.

Note: When you use this selector with the Get database parameter command, the string
defined as the WEDD signature is returned in the optional stringValue parameter and the
command returns 0.

198 4D Language Reference

• Selector = 37 (Invert Objects)
• Possible values: 0, 1 or 2 (0 = mode disabled, 1 = automatic mode, 2 = mode enabled)
• Description: Configuration of the "object inversion" mode which is used to invert forms,
objects, menu bars, and so on, in Application mode when the database is displayed under
Windows in a right-to-left language. This mode can also be configured on the Database/Script
Manager page of the application Preferences.
- Value 0 indicates that the mode is never enabled, regardless of the system configuration
(corresponds to the No value in the Preferences).
- Value 1 indicates that the mode is enabled or disabled depending on the system
configuration (corresponds to the Automatic value in the Preferences).
- Value 2 indicates that the mode is enabled, regardless of the system configuration
(corresponds to the Yes value in the Preferences).
For more information, refer to the Design Reference manual of 4D.

• Selector = 39 (HTTPS Port ID)

• Possible values: 0 to 65535
• Description: This selector can be used to modify by programming the TCP port number used
by the Web server of 4D in local mode and of 4D Server for secure connections via SSL (HTTPS
protocol). The HTTPS port number is set on the “Web/Configuration” page of the Preferences
dialog box. For more information, please refer to the Web Server Settings section.
By default, the value is 443 (standard value). You can use the constants of the “TCP Port
Numbers” theme for the value parameter.

• Selector = 40 (Client HTTPS Port ID)

• Possible values: 0 to 65535
• Description: This selector can be used to modify by programming the TCP port used by the
Web servers of the client machines for secure connections via SSL (HTTPS protocol). By
default, the value is 443 (standard value).
This selector operates exactly the same way as selector 39; however, it applies to all the 4D
Client machines used as Web servers. If you only want to modify the value of certain specific
client machines, use the Preferences dialog box of 4D Client.

Selector = 41 (Unicode mode)

• Possible values: 0 (compatibility mode ) or 1 (Unicode mode)
• Description: Current database operating mode, with regards to the character set. 4D supports
the Unicode character set but can function in “compatibility” mode (based on the Mac ASCII
character set). By default, converted databases are executed in compatibility mode (0) and
databases created with version 11 or higher are executed in Unicode mode. The execution
mode can be controlled via an option in the Preferences and can also be read or (for testing
purposes) modified via this selector. Modifying this option requires the database to be
restarted in order for it to be taken into account. Note that within a component it is not
possible to modify this value, but only to read it.

4D Language Reference 199

Selector = 42 (Temporary memory size)
• Possible values: Positive longint > 50,000,000
• Description: Temporary memory size expressed in bytes. By default, this size is 50,000,000
(50 MB).
4D uses a special temporary memory that is devoted to indexing and sorting operations. The
purpose of this memory is to protect the “standard” cache memory during mass operations.
When the maximum size of temporary memory is reached (critical case), 4D automatically
interrupts the last operation requested in order to avoid penalizing other processing underway.
In most cases, the default configuration of the temporary memory will be perfectly adequate.
However, in certain specific applications carrying out sorts or indexing in an especially
intensive manner, increasing this memory size might help to noticeably improve
performance. The ideal value will need to be determined empirically according to the specific
features of the application and will generally be the result of real volumetric testing.

Selector = 43 (SQL Autocommit)

• Possible values: 0 (deactivation) or 1 (activation)
• Description: Activation or deactivation of the SQL auto-commit mode. By default, the value
is 0 (deactivated mode)
The auto-commit mode is used to strengthen the referential integrity of the database. When
this mode is active, all SELECT, INSERT, UPDATE and DELETE (SIUD) queries are automatically
included in ad hoc transactions when they are not already executed within a transaction. This
mode can also be set in the Preferences of the database.

Selector = 44 (SQL Engine Case Sensitivity)

• Possible values: 0 (case not taken into account) or 1 (case-sensitive)
• Description: Activation or deactivation of case-sensitivity for string comparisons carried out
by the SQL engine.
By default, the value is 1 (case-sensitive): the SQL engine differentiates between upper and
lower case when comparing strings (sorts and queries). For example “ABC”= “ABC” but “ABC”
# “Abc.” In certain cases, for example so as to align the functioning of the SQL engine with
that of the 4D engine, you may wish for string comparisons to not be case-sensitive
(“ABC”=“Abc”).
This option can also be set on the SQL/Configuration page of the application Preferences.

Selector = 45 (Client Log Recording)

• Possible values: 0 or from 1 to X (0 = do not record, 1 to X= sequential number, attached to
file name)
• Description:Starts or stops recording of standard requests carried out by the 4D client
machine that executed the command (excluding Web requests). By default, the value is 0 (no
recording of requests).

200 4D Language Reference

4D lets you record the log of requests carried out by the client machine. When this
mechanism is activated, two files are created on the client machine, in the Logs subfolder of
the local folder of the database. They are named "4DRequestsLog_X" and
"4DRequestsLog_ProcessInfo_X," where X is the sequential number of the log. Once the file
4DRequestsLog has reached a size of 10 MB, it is closed and a new one is generated, with an
incremented sequential number. If a file with the same name already exists, it is directly
replaced. You can set the starting number for the sequence using the value parameter.
These text files store various information concerning each request in a simple tabbed format:
time, process number, size of request, processing duration, etc. This information is particularly
useful during the development phase of the application or for statistical purposes.

Selector = 46 (Query By Formula On Server)

• Possible values: 0 (use database configuration), 1 (execute on client) or 2 (execute on server)
• Description: Execution location of QUERY BY FORMULA and QUERY SELECTION BY FORMULA
commands for the table passed in the parameter.
When using a database in client-server mode, the query "by formula" commands can be
executed either on the server or on the client machine:
- In databases created with 4D v11 SQL, these commands are executed on the server.
- In converted databases, these commands are executed on the client machine, as in previous
versions of 4D.
- In converted databases, a specific preference (Application/Compatibility page) can be used to
globally modify the execution location of these commands.
This difference in execution location influences not only application performance (execution
on the server is usually faster) but also programming. In fact, the value of the components of
the formula (in particular variables called via a method) differ according to the execution
context. You can use this selector to punctually adapt the operation of your application.
If you pass 0 in the value parameter, the execution location of query "by formula" commands
will depend on the database configuration: in databases created with 4D v11 SQL, these
commands will be executed on the server. In converted databases, they will be executed on
the client machine or the server according to the database preferences. Pass 1 or 2 in value to
"force" the execution of these commands, respectively, on the client or on the server machine.
Refer to example 4.

Selector = 47 (Order By Formula On Server)

• Values: 0 (use database configuration), 1 (execute on client) or 2 (execute on server)
• Description: Execution location of ORDER BY FORMULA command for the table passed in the
parameter.
When using a database in client-server mode, the ORDER BY FORMULA command can be
executed either on the server or on the client machine. This selector can be used to specify the
execution location of this command (server or client). For more information, please refer to
the description of selector 46, Query By Formula On Server.

4D Language Reference 201

Selector = 48 (Auto Synchro Resources Folder)
• Values: 0 (no synchronization), 1 (auto synchronization) or 2 (ask)
• Description: Dynamic synchronization mode for Resources folder of 4D client machine that
executed the command with that of the server.
When the contents of the Resources folder on the server has been modified or a user has
requested synchronization (for example via the resources explorer or following the execution
of the NOTIFY RESOURCES FOLDER MODIFICATION command), the server notifies the
connected client machines.
Three synchronization modes are then possible on the client side. The Auto Synchro Resources
Folder selector is used to specify the mode to be used by the client machine for the current
session:
- value = 0 (default value) = no dynamic synchronization (synchronization request is ignored)
- value = automatic dynamic synchronization
- value = display of a dialog box on the client machines, with the possibility of allowing or
refusing synchronization.
The synchronization mode can also be set globally in the application Preferences

Selector = 49 (QUERY BY FORMULA Joins)

• Possible values: 0 (use database configuration), 1 (always use automatic relations) or 2 (use
SQL joins if possible
• Description: Operating mode of the QUERY BY FORMULA and QUERY SELECTION BY FORMULA
commands relating to the use of "SQL joins."
In databases created starting with version 11.2 of 4D v11 SQL, these commands carry out joins
based on the SQL joins model. This mechanism can be used to modify the selection of a table
according to a query carried out on another table without these tables being connected by an
automatic relation (necessary condition in previous versions of 4D).
The QUERY BY FORMULA Joins selector lets you specify the operating mode of the query by
formula commands for the current process:
- value = 0: Uses the current settings of the database (default value). In databases created
starting with version 11.2 of 4D v11 SQL, "SQL joins" are always activated for queries by
formula. In converted databases, this mechanism is not activated by default for compatibility
reasons but can be implemented via a preference.
- value = 1: Always use automatic relations (= functioning of previous versions of 4D). In this
mode, a relation is necessary in order to set the selection of a table according to queries carried
out on another table. 4D does not do "SQL joins."
- value = 2: Use SQL joins if possible (= default operation of databases created in version 11.2
and higher of 4D v11 SQL ). In this mode, 4D establishes "SQL joins" for queries by formula
when the formula is suited for it (with two notable exceptions, see the description of the
QUERY BY FORMULA or QUERY SELECTION BY FORMULA command).

202 4D Language Reference

Selector = 50 (HTTP Compression Level)
• Possible values: 1 to 9 (1 = faster, 9 = more compressed) or -1 = best compromise.
• Description: Sets the level of compression for all compressed HTTP exchanges for Web
Services (client requests or server replies). Compressed exchanges are an optimization that you
can implement when you have two 4D applications that are communicating via Web services
(see the SET WEB SERVICE OPTION command). This selector lets you optimize exchanges by
either privileging speed of execution (less compression) or the amount of compression (less
speed). The choice of a value depends on the size and type of data exchanged. Pass 1 to 9 in
the value parameter where 1 is the fastest compression and 9 the highest. You can also pass -1
to get a compromise between speed and rate of compression. By default, the compression level
is 1 (faster compression).

Selector = 51 (HTTP Compression Threshold)

• Possible values: Any Longint type value.
• Description: In the framework of inter-4D Web Services exchanges in optimized mode (see
above), sets the size threshold for requests below which exchanges should not be compressed.
This configuration is useful in order to avoid losing machine time by compressing small
exchanges.
Pass the size expressed in bytes in value. By default, the compression threshold is set to 1024
bytes.

Selector = 54 (Idle Connections Timeout)

• Values: Whole value expressing a duration in seconds. The value can be positive (new
connections) or negative (existing connections). By default, the value is 0 (no timeout).
• Description: This parameter can be used to set the maximum period of inactivity (timeout)
for connections to the both the 4D database engine and the SQL engine. It applies to all the
connections opened by the machine where the command was executed.
When an idle connection reaches this limit, it is automatically put on standby, which freezes
the client/server session and closes the network socket. This functioning is completely
transparent for the user: as soon as there is new activity on the connection which is on
standby, the socket is automatically reopened and the client/server session is restored.
On the one hand, this setting lets you save resources on the server: connections on standby
close the socket and free up a process on the server. On the other hand, it lets you avoid losing
connections due to the closing of idle sockets by the firewall. For this, the timeout value for
idle connections must be lower than that of the firewall in this case.
If you pass a positive value in value, it will apply to all new connections in all the processes. If
you pass a negative value, it will apply to connections that are open in the current process. If
you pass 0, idle connections will not be subjected to a timeout.

4D Language Reference 203

Examples
1. The following statement will avoid any unexpected timeout:

`Increasing the timeout to 3 hours for the current process

SET DATABASE PARAMETER(4D Server Timeout;-60*3)
`Executing a time-consuming operation with no control from 4D
...
WR PRINT MERGE (Area;3;0)
...

2. The IP address 192.193.194.195 will be set with the following statement:

SET DATABASE PARAMETER(IP Address to listen;0xC0C1C2C3)

3. This code can be used to switch the current character set and restart the database:

Current_unicode_mode:=Get database parameter(Unicode mode)

SET DATABASE PARAMETER(Unicode mode;1-Current_unicode_mode)
OPEN DATA FILE(Data file)

4. This example temporarily forces the execution of a query by formula command on the
client machine:

`Store the current setting

curVal:= Get database parameter([table1];Query By Formula On Server)
`Force execution on the client machine
SET DATABASE PARAMETER([table1];Query By Formula On Server;1)
QUERY BY FORMULA([table1];myformula)
`Re-establish current setting
SET DATABASE PARAMETER([table1];Query By Formula On Server;curVal)

See Also
Get database parameter, QUERY SELECTION.

204 4D Language Reference

Structure file 4D Environment

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Structure file {(*)} → String

Parameter Type Description

* * → Returns structure file of host database

Function result String ← Long name of the database structure file

Description
The Structure file command returns the long name of the structure file for the database with
which you are currently working.

On Windows
If, for example, you are working with the database MyCDs located in \DOCS\MyCDs on the
volume G, the command returns G:\DOCS\MyCDs\MyCDs.4DB.

On Macintosh
If, for example, you are are working with the database located in the folder
Documents:MyCDsƒ: on the disk Macintosh HD, the command returns Macintosh
HD:Documents:MyCDsƒ:MyCDs.

Note: In the particular case of a database that has been compiled and merged with 4D
Desktop, this command returns the pathname of the application file (executable application)
under Windows and Mac OS. Under Mac OS, this file is located inside the software package, in
the [Contents:Mac OS] folder. This stems from a former mechanism and is kept for
compatibility reasons. If you want to get the full name of the software package itself, it is
preferable to use the Application file command. The technique consists of testing the
application using the Application type command, then executing Structure file or Application file
depending on the context.

WARNING: If you call this command while running 4D Client, only the name of the structure
file is returned; the long name is not returned.

4D Language Reference 205

The optional * parameter is useful in the case of an architecture using components: it can be
used to determine the structure (host or component) for which you want to get the long name
depending on the context in which the command is called:
• When the command is called from a component:
- If the * parameter is passed, the command returns the long name of the structure file of the
host database,
- If the * parameter is not passed, the command returns the long name of the structure file of
the component.
The structure file of the component corresponds to the .4db or .4dc file of the component
found in the “Components” folder of the database. However, a component can also be
installed as an alias/shortcut or a .4dbase folder/package:
- In the case of a component installed as an alias/shortcut, the command returns the
pathname of the original .4db or .4dc file (the alias or shortcut is resolved).
- In the case of a component installed as a .4dbase folder/package, the command returns the
pathname of the .4db or .4dc file located within this folder/package.
• When the command is called from a method of the host database, it always returns the long
name of the structure file of the host database, regardless of whether or not the * parameter is
passed.

Examples
1. This example displays the name and the location of the structure file currently in use:
If (Application type#4D Client)
$vsStructureFilename:=Long name to file name (Structure file)
$vsStructurePathname:=Long name to path name (Structure file)
ALERT("You are currently using the database "+Char(34)+$vsStructureFilename+
Char(34)+" located at "+Char(34)+$vsStructurePathname+Char(34)+".")
Else
ALERT("You are connected to the database "+Char(34)+Structure file+Char(34))
End if
Note: The project methods Long name to file name and Long name to path name are listed in
the section System Documents.

2. The following example can be used to find out whether the method is called from a
component:

C_BOOLEAN($0)
$0:=(Structure file#Structure file(*))
` $0=True if method is called from a component

See Also
Application file, COMPONENT LIST, Data file, DATA SEGMENT LIST.

206 4D Language Reference

VERIFY CURRENT DATA FILE 4D Environment

version 11.4 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

VERIFY CURRENT DATA FILE{ (objects; options; method{; tablesArray; fieldsArray})}

Parameter Type Description

objects Number → Objects to check
options Number → Checking options
method Text → Name of 4D callback method
tablesArray Number array → Numbers of tables to be checked
fieldsArray 2D Number array → Numbers of indexes to be checked

Description
The VERIFY CURRENT DATA FILE command carries out a structural check of the objects found
in the data file currently opened by 4D.

This command has the same functioning as the VERIFY DATA FILE command, except that it
only applies to the current data file of the open database. It therefore does not require
parameters specifying the structure and data.
Refer to the VERIFY DATA FILE command for a description of the parameters.

If you pass the VERIFY CURRENT DATA FILE command with no parameters, the verification is
carried out with the default values of the parameters:
- objects = Verify All (= value 16)
- options = 0 (log file is created)
- method = ""
- tablesArray and fieldsArray are omitted.

When this command is executed, the data cache is flushed and all operations accessing the
data are blocked during the verification.

Note: This command must not be used when a process is creating or updating an index
since, in this case, the verification results will not be valid.

See Also
VERIFY DATA FILE.

4D Language Reference 207

VERIFY DATA FILE 4D Environment

version 11.3 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

VERIFY DATA FILE (structurePath; dataPath; objects; options; method{; tablesArray; fieldsArray})

Parameter Type Description

structurePath Text → Pathname of 4D structure file to be checked
dataPath Text → Pathname of 4D data file to be checked
objects Number → Objects to be checked
options Number → Checking options
method Text → Name of 4D callback method
tablesArray Number array → Numbers of tables to be checked
fieldsArray 2D Number array → Numbers of indexes to be checked

Description
The VERIFY DATA FILE command carries out a structural check of the objects contained in
the 4D data file designated by structurePath and dataPath.

Note: For more information about checking data, please refer to the Design Reference
manual.

• structurePath designates the structure file (compiled or not) associated with the data file to
be checked. This can be the open structure file or any other structure file. You must pass a
complete pathname, expressed with the syntax of the operating system. You can also pass
an empty string, in this case a standard Open file dialog box appears so that the user can
specify the structure file to be used.

• dataPath designates a 4D data file (.4DD). It must correspond to the structure file defined
by the structurePath parameter. Be careful, you can designate the current structure file but
the data file must not be the current (open) file. To check whether the data file is open, use
the VERIFY CURRENT DATA FILE command. If you attempt to check the current data file with
the VERIFY DATA FILE command, an error is generated.
The data file designated is opened in read only. You must make sure that no application
accesses this file in write mode, otherwise the results of the check may be distorted.
In the dataPath parameter, you can pass an empty string, a file name or a complete
pathname, expressed in the syntax of the operating system. If you pass an empty string, the
standard Open file dialog box appears so that the user can specify the file to be checked
(note that in this case, it is not possible to select the current data file). If you only pass a
data file name, 4D will look for it at the same level as the specified structure file.

208 4D Language Reference

• The objects parameter is used to designate which types of objects will be checked. Two
types of objects can be checked: records and indexes. You can use the following constants,
found in the “Data file maintenance” theme:
- Verify Records (4)
- Verify Indexes (8)
- Verify All (16)
To verify both the records and the indexes, pass the total of Verify Records+Verify Indexes.
The value 0 (zero) can also be used to obtain the same result. The Verify All option carries
out complete internal verification. This verification is compatible with the creation of a log.

• The options parameter is used to set verification options. A single option is currently
available, found in the“Data file maintenance” theme: Do not create log file (16384).
Generally, the VERIFY DATA FILE command creates a log file in XML format (please refer to
the end of the description of this command). You can cancel this operation by passing this
option. To create the log file, pass 0 in options.

• The method parameter is used to set a callback method that will be called regularly during
the verification. If you pass an empty string, no method is called. If the method passed
does not exist, the verification is not carried out, an error is generated and the OK variable
is set to 0. When it is called, this method receives up to 5 parameters depending on the
event type originating the call (see calls table). It is imperative to declare these parameters
in the method:
- $1 Longint Message type (see table)
- $2 Longint Object type
- $3 Text Message
- $4 Longint Table number
- $5 Longint Reserved

The following table describes the contents of the parameters depending on the event type:
Event $1 (Longint) $2 (Longint) $3 (Text) $4 (Longint) $5 (Longint)
Message 1 0 Progression Percentage Reserved
message done (0-100)
Verification OK 2 Object type OK message Table or index Reserved
test number
Error 3 Object type Text of error- Table or index Reserved
message number
End of execution 4 0 DONE 0 Reserved
Warning 5 Object type Text of error Table or index Reserved
message number

Object type: When an object has been verified, an OK message ($1=2), error ($1=3) or
warning ($1=5) can be sent. The object type returned in $2 can be one of the following:
• 0 = undetermined
• 4 = record
• 8 = index
• 16 = structure object (preliminary check of data file).

4D Language Reference 209

Special case: When $4 = 0 for $1=2, 3or 5, the message does not concern a table or an index
but rather the data file as a whole.

The callback method must also return a value in $0 (Longint), which is used to check the
execution of the operation:
- If $0 = 0, the operation continues normally
- If $0 = -128, the operation is stopped without any error generated
- If $0 = another value, the operation is stopped and the value passed in $0 is returned as
the error number. This error can be intercepted by an error-handling method.

Two optional arrays can also be used by this command:

• The tablesArray array contains the numbers of the tables whose records are to be checked.
It can be used to limit checking to only certain tables. If this parameter is not passed or if
the array is empty and the objects parameter contains Verify Records, all the tables will be
checked.
• The fieldsArray array contains the numbers of the indexed fields whose indexes are to be
checked. If this parameter is not passed or if the array is empty and the objects parameter
contains Verify Indexes, all the indexes will be checked. The command ignores fields that
are not indexed. If a field contains several indexes, they are all checked. If a field is part of a
composite index, the entire index is checked.
You must pass a 2D array in fieldsArray. For each row of the array:
- The element {0} contains the table number,
- The other elements {1...x} contain the field numbers.

By default, the VERIFY DATA FILE command creates a log file in XML format (if you have not
passed the Do not create log file option, see the options parameter). Its name is based on
that of the data file and it is placed in the "Logs" folder of the database. For example, for a
data file named “data.4dd,” the log file will be named “data_verify_log.xml.”

Examples
1. Simple checking of data and indexes:

VERIFY DATA FILE($StructName;$DataName;Verify Indexes+Verify Records;

Do not create log file;"")

2. Complete verification with log file:

VERIFY DATA FILE($StructName;$DataName;Verify All;0;"")

3. Checking of records only:

VERIFY DATA FILE($StructName;$DataName;Verify Records;0;"")

210 4D Language Reference

4. Checking of records from tables 3 and 7 only:

ARRAY LONGINT($arrTableNums;2)
ARRAY LONGINT($arrIndex;0) `not used but mandatory
$arrTableNums{1}:=3
$arrTableNums{2}:=7
VERIFY DATA FILE($StructName;$DataName;Verify Records;0;"FollowScan";
$arrTableNums;$arrIndex)

5. Checking of specific indexes (index of field 1 of table 4 and index of fields 2 and 3 of
table 5):

ARRAY LONGINT($arrTableNums;0) `not used but mandatory

ARRAY LONGINT($arrIndex;2;0) `2 rows (columns added later)
$arrIndex{1}{0}:=4 ` table number in element 0
APPEND TO ARRAY($arrIndex{1};1) `number of 1st field to be checked
$arrIndex{2}{0}:=5 ` table number in element 0
APPEND TO ARRAY($arrIndex{2};2) ` number of 1st field to be checked
APPEND TO ARRAY($arrIndex{2};3) ` number of 2nd field to be checked
VERIFY DATA FILE($StructName;$DataName;Verify Indexes;0;"FollowScan";
$arrTableNums;$arrIndex)

See Also
VERIFY CURRENT DATA FILE.

System Variables or Sets

If the callback method does not exist, an error is generated and the system variable OK is
set to 0.

4D Language Reference 211

Version type 4D Environment

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Version type → Long Integer

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Long Integer ← 0 -> Full version

1 -> Demo Limited version

Description
The Version type command returns a numeric value that denotes the type of 4D environment
version that you are running. 4D provides the following predefined constants:
Constant Type Value
Full Version Long Integer 0
Demo Version Long Integer 1

Example
Your 4D application includes some features that are not available when a demo version of the
4D environment is used. Surround these features with a test that calls Version type:
If (Version type=Full Version)
` Perform appropriate operations
Else
ALERT("This feature is not available in the Demo version of"+
" Super Management Systems™.")
End if

See Also
Application type, Application version.

212 4D Language Reference

4
______________________
Arrays

4D Language Reference 213

214 4D Language Reference
Arrays Arrays

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

An array is an ordered series of variables of the same type. Each variable is called an element of
the array. The size of an array is the number of elements it holds. An array is given its size
when it is created; you can then resize it as many times as needed by adding, inserting, or
deleting elements, or by resizing the array using the same command used to create it.

You create an array with one of the array declaration commands. For details, see the section
Creating Arrays.

Elements are numbered from 1 to N, where N is the size of the array. An array always has an
element zero that you can access just like any other element of the array, but this element is
not shown when an array is present in a form. Although the element zero is not shown when
an array supports a form object, there is no restriction in using it with the language. For more
information about the element zero, see the section Using the element zero of an array.

Arrays are 4D variables. Like any variable, an array has a scope and follows the rules of the 4D
language, though with some unique differences. For more information, see the sections Arrays
and the 4D Language and Arrays and Pointers.

Arrays are language objects; you can create and use arrays that will never appear on the screen.
Arrays are also user interface objects. For more information about the interaction between
arrays and form objects, see the sections Arrays and Form Objects and Grouped Scrollable Areas.

Arrays are designed to hold reasonable amounts of data for a short period of time. However,
because arrays are held in memory, they are easy to handle and quick to manipulate. For
details, see the section Arrays and Memory.

4D Language Reference 215

Creating Arrays Arrays

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

You create an array with one of the array declaration commands described in this chapter. The
following table lists the array declaration commands:

Command Creates or resizes an array of:

ARRAY INTEGER 2-byte Integer values
ARRAY LONGINT 4-byte Integer values (*)
ARRAY REAL Real values
ARRAY TEXT Text values (up to 2 GB of text per element) (**)
ARRAY STRING (obsolete in Unicode mode) (**)
ARRAY DATE Date values
ARRAY BOOLEAN Boolean values
ARRAY PICTURE Pictures values
ARRAY POINTER Pointer values

Each array declaration command can create or resize one-dimensional or two-dimensional

arrays. For more information about two-dimensional arrays, see the section Two-dimensional
Arrays.

(*) Longint arrays allows you to manipulate data of Time type. To display a Time array in a
form, apply to the associated form object the display format &/x, in which x represents the
number of the format in the Time formats list (by order of appearance). For example, &/4 will
display the Hour Min format.
(**) Text and String arrays work with the same types of elements: characters.
• In Unicode mode (default mode for databases created beginning with version 11 of 4D),
there is no difference between Text and String arrays. The strLen parameter of the ARRAY
STRING command is ignored. In this context, it is recommended to use Text arrays. The ARRAY
STRING command is only kept for compatibility reasons.
• In compatibility mode (non-Unicode), the ARRAY TEXT and ARRAY STRING commands differ:
- In a Text array, each element is of variable length and stores its characters in a separate part
of memory. Each element of a Text array can contain up to 32,000 characters.
• In a String array, all elements have the same fixed length (the length passed in the strLen
parameter when the array was created). All elements are stored one after the other in the same
part of memory,which makes String arrays faster than Text arrays. However, String arrays
cannot be longer than 255 characters.
For more information, please refer to the ASCII Codes section.

216 4D Language Reference

The following line of code creates (declares) an Integer array of 10 elements:
ARRAY INTEGER(aiAnArray;10)

Then, the following code resizes that same array to 20 elements:

ARRAY INTEGER(aiAnArray;20)

Then, the following code resizes that same array to no elements:

ARRAY INTEGER(aiAnArray;0)

You reference the elements in an array by using curly braces ({…}). A number is used within
the braces to address a particular element; this number is called the element number. The
following lines put five names into the array called atNames and then display them in alert
windows:

ARRAY TEXT (atNames;5)

atNames{1} := "Richard"
atNames{2} := "Sarah"
atNames{3} := "Sam"
atNames{4} := "Jane"
atNames{5} := "John"
For ($vlElem;1;5)
ALERT ("The element #"+String($vlElem)+" is equal to: "+atNames{$vlElem})
End for

Note the syntax atNames{$vlElem}. Rather than specifying a numeric literal such as atNames{3},
you can use a numeric variable to indicate which element of an array you are addressing.

Using the iteration provided by a loop structure (For...End for, Repeat...Until or While...End
while), compact pieces of code can address all or part of the elements in an array.

Arrays and other areas of the 4D language

There are other 4D commands that can create and work with arrays. More particularly:

• To work with arrays and selection of records, use the commands SELECTION RANGE TO
ARRAY, SELECTION TO ARRAY, ARRAY TO SELECTION and DISTINCT VALUES.

• Objects of the List box type are based on arrays; several commands of the “List box” theme
work with arrays, for instance INSERT LISTBOX ROW.

4D Language Reference 217

• You can create graphs and charts on series of values stored in tables and arrays. For more
information, see the GRAPH command.

• Although version 6 brings a full set of new commands to work with hierarchical lists, the
commands LIST TO ARRAY and ARRAY TO LIST (from the previous version) have been retained
for compatibility.

• Many commands can build arrays in one call, for example: FONT LIST, WINDOW LIST,
VOLUME LIST, FOLDER LIST, DOCUMENT LIST, GET SERIAL PORT MAPPING, SAX GET XML
ELEMENT, etc.

See Also
ARRAY BOOLEAN, ARRAY DATE, ARRAY INTEGER, ARRAY LONGINT, ARRAY PICTURE, ARRAY
POINTER, ARRAY REAL, ARRAY STRING, ARRAY TEXT, Arrays, Two-dimensional Arrays.

218 4D Language Reference

Arrays and Form Objects Arrays

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Arrays are language objects—you can create and use arrays that will never appear on the
screen. However, arrays are also user interface objects. The following types of Form Objects are
supported by arrays:
• Pop-up/Drop-down List
• Combo Box
• Scrollable Area
• Tab Control
• List box

While you can predefine these objects in the Design Environment Form Editor using the
Default Values button of the Property List window (except for the List box) , you can also
define them programmatically using the arrays commands. In both cases, the form object is
supported by an array created by you or 4D.

When using these objects, you can detect which item within the object has been selected (or
clicked) by testing the array for its selected element. Conversely, you can select a particular
item within the object by setting the selected element for the array.

When an array is used to support a form object, it has then a dual nature; it is both a language
object and a user interface object.

4D Language Reference 219

For example, when designing a form, you create a scrollable area:

The name of the associated variable, in this case atNames, is the name of the array you use for
creating and handling the scrollable area.

Notes:
• You cannot display two-dimensional arays or pointer arrays.
• The management of List box type objects (which may contain several arrays) entails many
specific aspects. These particularities are covered in the Managing List Box Objects section.

Example: Creating a drop-down list

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The following example shows how to fill an array and display it in a drop-down list. An array
arSalaries is created using the ARRAY REAL command. It contains all the standard salaries paid
to people in a company. When the user chooses an element from the drop-down list, the
[Employees]Salary field is assigned the value chosen.

220 4D Language Reference

Create the arSalaries drop-down list on a form
Create a drop-down list and name it arSalaries. The name of the drop-down list should be the
same as the name of the array.

Initializing the array

Initialize the array arSalaries using the On Load event for the object. To do so, remember to
enable that event in the Property List window, as shown:

4D Language Reference 221

Click the Object Method button and create the method, as follows:

The lines:

ARRAY REAL(arSalaries;10)
For($vlElem;1;10)
arSalaries{$vlElem}:=2000+($vlElem*500)
End for

create the numeric array 2500, 3000... 7000, corresponding to the annual salaries $30,000 up
to $84,000, before tax.

The lines:

arSalaries:=Find in array(arSalaries;[Employees]Salary)
If (arSalaries=-1)
arSalaries:=0
End if

handle both the creation of a new record or the modification of existing record.

222 4D Language Reference

• If you create a new record, the field [Employees]Salary is initially equal to zero. In this case,
Find in array does not find the value in the array and returns -1. The test If (arSalaries=-1) resets
arSalaries to zero, indicating that no element is selected in the drop-down list.
• If you modify an existing record, Find in array retrieves the value in the array and sets the
selected element of the drop-down list to the current value of the field. If the value for a
particular employee is not in the list, the test If (arSalaries=-1) deselects any element in the list.

Note: For more information about the array selected element, read the next section.

Reporting the selected value to the [Employees]Salary field

To report the value selected from the drop-down list arSalaries, you just need to handle the On
Clicked event to the object. The element number of the selected element is the value of the
array arSalaries itself. Therefore, the expression arSalaries{arSalaries} returns the value chosen in
the drop-down list.

Complete the method for the object arSalaries as follows:

Case of
: (Form event=On Load)
ARRAY REAL(arSalaries;10)
For($vlElem;1;10)
arSalaries{$vlElem}:=2000+($vlElem*500)
End for
arSalaries:=Find in array(arSalaries;[Employees]Salary)
If (arSalaries=-1)
arSalaries:=0
End if
: (Form event=On Clicked)
[Employees]Salary:=arSalaries{arSalaries}
End case

4D Language Reference 223

The drop-down list looks like this:

The following section describes the common and basic operations you will perform on arrays
while using them as form objects.

Getting the size of the array

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

You can obtain the current size of the array by using the Size of array command. Using the
previous example, the following line of code would display 5:

ALERT ("The size of the array atNames is: "+String(Size of array(atNames)))

Reordering the elements of the array

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

You can reorder the elements of the array using the SORT ARRAY command or of several arrays
using the MULTI SORT ARRAY command. Using the previous example, and provided the array is
shown as a scrollable area:
a. Initially, the area would look like the list on the left.
b. After the execution of the following line of code:
SORT ARRAY(atNames;>)
the area would look like the list in the middle.

224 4D Language Reference

c. After the execution of the following line of code:
SORT ARRAY(atNames;<)
the area would look like the list on the right.

Adding or deleting elements

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

You can add, insert, or delete elements using the commands APPEND TO ARRAY, INSERT IN
ARRAY and DELETE FROM ARRAY.

Handling clicks in the array: testing the selected element

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Using the previous example, and provided the array is shown as a scrollable area, you can
handle clicks in this area as follows:

` atNames scrollable area object method

Case of
: (Form event=On Load)
` Initialize the array (as shown further above)
ARRAY TEXT (atNames;5)
` ...
: (Form event=On Unload)
` We no longer need the array
CLEAR VARIABLE(atNames)

4D Language Reference 225

 : (Form event=On Clicked)
If (atNames#0)
vtInfo:="You clicked on: "+atNames{atNames}
End if
: (Form event=On Double Clicked)
If (atNames#0)
ALERT ("You double clicked on: "+atNames{atNames}
End if
End case

Note: The events must be activated in the properties of the object.

While the syntax atNames{$vlElem} allows you to work with a particular element of the array,
the syntax atNames returns the element number of the selected element within the array.
Thus, the syntax atNames{atNames} means “the value of the selected element in the array
atNames.” If no element is selected, atNames is equal to 0 (zero), so the test If (atNames#0)
detects whether or not an element is actually selected.

Setting the selected element

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

In a similar fashion, you can programmatically change the selected element by assigning a
value to the array.

Examples

` Selects the first element (if the array is not empty)

atNames:=1

` Selects the last element (if the array is not empty)

atNames:=Size of array(atNames)

` Deselects the selected element (if any) then no element is selected

atNames:=0

If ((0<atNames)&(atNames<Size of array(atNames))
` If possible, selects the next element to the selected element
atNames:=atNames+1
End if

226 4D Language Reference

 If (1<atNames)
` If possible, selects the previous element to the selected element
atNames:=atNames-1
End if

Looking for a value in the array

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The Find in array command searches for a particular value within an array. Using the previous
example, the following code will select the element whose value is “Richard,” if that is what is
entered in the request dialog box:

$vsName:=Request("Enter the first name:")

If (OK=1)
$vlElem:=Find in array (atNames;$vsName)
If ($vlElem>0)
atNames:=$vlElem
Else
ALERT ("This is no "+$vsName+" in that list of first names.")
End if
End if
Pop-up menus, drop-down lists, scrollable areas, and tab controls can be usually handled in
the same manner. Obviously, no additional code is required to redraw objects on the screen
each time you change the value of an element, or add or delete elements.

Note: To create and use tab controls with icons and enabled and disabled tabs, you must use a
hierarchical list as the supporting object for the tab control. For more information, see the
example for the New list command.

Handling combo boxes

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

While you can handle pop-up menus, drop-down lists, scrollable areas, and tab controls with
the algorithms described in the previous section, you must handle combo boxes differently.

A combo box is actually a text enterable area to which is attached a list of values (the elements
from the array). The user can pick a value from this list, and then edit the text. So, in a combo
box, the notion of selected element does not apply.

4D Language Reference 227

With combo boxes, there is never a selected element. Each time the user selects one of the
values attached to the area, that value is put into the element zero of the array. Then, if the
user edits the text, the value modified by the user is also put into that element zero.

Example

` asColors Combo Box object method

Case of
: (Form event=On Load)
ARRAY STRING(31;asColors;3)
asColors{1}:="Blue"
asColors{2}:="White"
asColors{3}:="Red"
: (Form event=On Clicked)
If (asColors{0}#"")
` The object automatically changes its value
` Using the On Clicked event with a Combo Box
` is required only when additional actions must be taken
End if
: (Form event=On Data Change)
` Find in array ignores element 0, so returns -1 or >0
If (Find in array(asColors;asColors{0})<0)
` Entered value is not one the values attached to the object
` Add the value to the list for next time
APPEND TO ARRAY(asColors;asColors{0})
Else
` Entered value is among the values attached to the object
End if
End case

See Also
Arrays, Grouped Scrollable Areas.

228 4D Language Reference

Grouped Scrollable Areas Arrays

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Compatibility note: Grouped scrollable areas can still be used in 4D; however, starting with
version 2004 they can be replaced by List box type objects. For more information about this,
refer to the Overview of List boxes section.

You can group scrollable areas for display in a form. When several scrollable areas are grouped,
they act as one scrollable area. Each scrollable area can have its own font and style; however,
we recommend that you use the same font height (which depends on the font and font size)
for each column. When displayed during data entry, only the frontmost scrollable area
displays a scroll bar. Following are three scrollable areas grouped together in the Design
environment:

Here are some tips on creating grouped scrollable areas:

• Make sure that all the arrays have been given the same size (number of elements).
• Use the same font size for each area.
• Make each area the same height.
• Align the tops of all the areas.
• Make sure the areas do not overlap.
• Make sure that the area on the right is in front, because the scroll bar appears on the
frontmost area.
• Group the areas (using the Group menu command) to make them work as one scrollable
area.

4D Language Reference 229

The following project method fills the three arrays and displays them on the screen:

ALL RECORDS(Employees)
SELECTION TO ARRAY([Employees]Last
Name;asName;[Employees]Title;asTitle;[Departments]Name;asDepartment)
DIALOG([Departments];"Example Grouped SA")

This method uses the data in the fields of the [People] table and the [Departments] table.
These tables are shown here:

Note: The [Departments] table can be used, provided that there is an automatic relation from
[People] to [Departments].
The resulting display:

230 4D Language Reference

Note that only a single scroll bar is displayed; it is always on the frontmost scrollable area.
This scroll bar controls the scrolling of all three arrays as if they were one. When the user
clicks a line, all three areas are highlighted simultaneously. The variable associated with each
scrollable area is set to the number of the line that the user clicks; only the object method for
the area that is clicked executes. For example, if the user clicks the name “Bentley,” asName,
asTitle, and asDepartment are all set to two, but only the object method for asName executes. If
you set the selected element of one of the arrays in the grouped scrollable areas, the other
arrays are set to the same selected element for the next event, and the respective line in the
scrollable area is highlighted.

The arrays can be sorted with the command SORT ARRAY. For example:

SORT ARRAY(asTitle;asName;asDepartment;>)
The following is the result of the sort:

Note that the arrays were sorted based on the first argument to the SORT ARRAY command; the
other two arrays were specified in order to keep the rows synchronized. The command SORT
ARRAY always sorts the arrays (if several are specified) on the values of the first array and keeps
the additional arrays synchronized.

Note: SORT ARRAY does not perform a multi-level sort on arrays. To show a table similar to the
one above and also perform multi-level sorts (i.e., by department, then by title, then by
name), use a subform in which you display the table, and then use ORDER BY.

See Also
Arrays, Arrays and Form Objects.

4D Language Reference 231

Arrays and the 4D Language Arrays

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Arrays are 4D variables. Like any variable, an array has a scope and follows the rules of the 4D
language, though with some unique differences.

Local, process and interprocess arrays

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

You can create and work with local, process, and interprocess arrays. Examples:

ARRAY INTEGER ($aiCodes;100) ` Creates local array of 100 2-byte Integer values
ARRAY INTEGER (aiCodes;100) ` Creates process array of 100 2-byte Integer values
ARRAY INTEGER (<>aiCodes;100) ` Creates interprocess array of 100 2-byte Integer values

The scope of these arrays is identical to the scope of other local, process, and interprocess
variables:

Local arrays
A local array is declared when the name of the array starts with a dollar sign ($).
The scope of a local array is the method in which it is created. The array is cleared when the
method ends. Local arrays with the same name in two different methods can have different
types, because they are actually two different variables with different scopes.
When you create a local array within a form method, within an object method, within or a
project method called as subroutine by the two previous type of method, the array is created
and cleared each time the form or object method is invoked. In other words, the array is
created and cleared for each form event. Consequently, you cannot use local arrays in forms,
neither for display nor printing.
As with local variables, it is a good idea to use local arrays whenever possible. In doing so, you
tend to minimize the amount of memory necessary for running your application.

Process arrays
A process array is declared when the name of the array starts with a letter.
The scope of a process array is the process in which it is created. The array is cleared when the
process ends or is aborted. A process array automatically has one instance created per process.
Therefore, the array is of the same type throughout the processes. However, its contents are
particular to each process.

232 4D Language Reference

Interprocess arrays
An interprocess array is declared when the name of the array starts with <> (on Windows and
Macintosh) or with the diamond sign, Option-Shift-V on a US keyboard (on Macintosh only).
The scope of an interprocess array consists of all processes during a working session. They
should be used only to share data and transfer information between processes.

Tip: When you know in advance that an interprocess array will be accessed by several
processes that could possible conflict, protect the access to that array with a semaphore. For
more information, see the example for the Semaphore command.
Note: You can use process and interprocess arrays in forms to create form objects such as
scrollable areas, drop-down lists, and so on.

Passing an Array as parameter

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

You can pass an array as parameter to a 4D command or to the routine of a 4D Plug-in. On the
other hand, you cannot pass an array as parameter to a user method. The alternative is to pass
a pointer to the array as parameter to the method. For details, see the section Arrays and
Pointers.

Assigning and array to another array

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unlike text or string variables, you cannot assign one array to another. To copy (assign) an
array to another one, use COPY ARRAY.

See Also
Arrays, Arrays and Pointers.

4D Language Reference 233

Arrays and Pointers Arrays

version 2004.1 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

You can pass an array as parameter to a 4D command or to the routine of a 4D Plug-in. On the
other hand, you cannot pass an array as parameter to a user method. The alternative is to pass
a pointer to the array as parameter to the method.

You can pass process and interprocess, process or local arrays as parameters.

Here are some examples.

• Given this example:

If ((0<atNames)&(atNames<Size of array(atNames))
` If possible, selects the next element to the selected element
atNames:=atNames+1
End if

If you need to do the same thing for 50 different arrays in various forms, you can avoid
writing the same thing 50 times, by using the following project method:

` SELECT NEXT ELEMENT project method

` SELECT NEXT ELEMENT ( Pointer )
` SELECT NEXT ELEMENT ( -> Array )

C_POINTER ($1)

If ((0<$1->)&($1-><Size of array($1->))
$1->:=$1->+1 ` If possible, selects the next element to the selected element
End if

Then, you can write:

SELECT NEXT ELEMENT (->atNames)

` ...
SELECT NEXT ELEMENT (->asZipCodes)
` ...
SELECT NEXT ELEMENT (->alRecordIDs)
` ... and so on

234 4D Language Reference

• The following project method returns the sum of all the elements of a numeric array
(Integer, Long Integer, or real):

` Array sum
` Array sum ( Pointer )
` Array sum ( -> Array )

C_REAL ($0)

$0:=0
For ($vlElem;1;Size of array($1->))
$0:=$0+$1->{$vlElem}
End for

Then, you can write:

$vlSum:=Array sum (->arSalaries)

` ...
$vlSum:=Array sum (->aiDefectCounts)
` ..
$vlSum:=Array sum (->alPopulations)

• The following project method capitalizes of all the elements of a string or text array:

` CAPITALIZE ARRAY
` CAPITALIZE ARRAY ( Pointer )
` CAPITALIZE ARRAY ( -> Array )

For ($vlElem;1;Size of array($1->))

If ($1->{$vlElem}#"")
$1->{$vlElem}:=Uppercase($1->{$vlElem}[[1]])+Lowercase(Substring
($1->{$vlElem};2))
End if
End for

Then, you can write:

CAPITALIZE ARRAY (->atSubjects )

` ...
CAPITALIZE ARRAY (->asLastNames )

4D Language Reference 235

The combination of arrays, pointers, and looping structures, such as For... End for, allows you
to write many useful small project methods for handling arrays.

See Also
Arrays, Arrays and the 4D Language.

236 4D Language Reference

Using the element zero of an array Arrays

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

An array always has an element zero. While element zero is not shown when an array supports
a form object, there is no restriction in using it with the language.

One example of the use of element zero is the case of the combo box discussed in the section
Arrays and Form Objects.

Here are two other examples.

1. If you want to execute an action only when you click on an element other than the
previously selected element, you must keep track of each selected element. One way to do this
is to use a process variable in which you maintain the element number of the selected
element. Another way is to use the element zero of the array:

` atNames scrollable area object method

Case of
: (Form event=On Load)
` Initialize the array (as shown further above)
ARRAY TEXT (atNames;5)
` ...
` Initialize the element zero with the number
` of the current selected element in its string form
` Here you start with no selected element
atNames{0}:="0"

: (Form event=On Unload)

` We no longer need the array
CLEAR VARIABLE(atNames)

: (Form event=On Clicked)

If (atNames#0)
If (atNames#Num(atNames{0}))
vtInfo:="You clicked on: "+atNames{atNames}+" and it was not selected
before."
atNames{0}:=String(atNames)
End if
End if

4D Language Reference 237

 : (Form event=On Double Clicked)
If (atNames#0)
ALERT ("You double clicked on: "+atNames{atNames}
End if
End case

2. In ASCII compatibility mode, when sending or receiving a stream of characters to or from a

document or a serial port, 4D provides a way to filter ASCII codes between platforms and
systems that use different ASCII maps— the commands USE CHARACTER SET, Mac to ISO, ISO to
Mac, Mac to Win and Win to Mac.

In certain cases, you might want to fully control the way ASCII codes are translated. One way
to do this is to use an Integer array of 255 elements, where the Nth element is set to the
translated ASCII code for the character whose source ASCII code is N. For example, if the ASCII
code #187 must be translated as #156, you would write <>aiCustomOutMap{187}:=156 and
<>aiCustomInMap{156}:=187 in the method that initializes the interprocess arrays used
everywhere in the database. You can then send a stream of characters with the following
custom project method:

` X SEND PACKET ( Text { ; Time } )

For ($vlChar;1;Length($1))
$1[[vlChar]]:=Char(<>aiCustomOutMap{Character code($1[[vlChar]])})
End for
If (Count parameters>=2)
SEND PACKET ($2;$1)
Else
SEND PACKET ($1)
End if

` X Receive packet ( Text { ; Time } ) -> Text

If (Count parameters>=2)
RECEIVE PACKET ($2;$1)
Else
RECEIVE PACKET ($1)
End if
$0:=$1
For ($vlChar;1;Length($1))
$0[[vlChar]]:=Char(<>aiCustomInMap{Character code($0[[vlChar]])})
End for

238 4D Language Reference

In this advanced example, if a stream of characters containing NULL characters (ASCII code
zero) is sent or received, the zero element of the arrays <>aiCustomOutMap and
<>aiCustomInMap will play its role as any other element of the 255 element arrays.

See Also
Arrays.

4D Language Reference 239

Two-dimensional Arrays Arrays

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Each of the array declaration commands can create or resize one-dimensional or two-
dimensional arrays. Example:

ARRAY TEXT (atTopics;100;50) ` Creates a text array composed of 100 rows of 50 columns

Two-dimensional arrays are essentially language objects; you can neither display nor print
them.

In the previous example:

• atTopics is a two-dimensional array
• atTopics{8}{5} is the 5th element (5th column...) of the 8th row
• atTopics{20} is the 20th row and is itself a one-dimensional array
• Size of array(atTopics) returns 100, which is the number of rows
• Size of array(atTopics{17}) returns 50, which the number of columns for the 17th row

In the following example, a pointer to each field of each table in the database is stored in a
two-dimensional array:

C_LONGINT($vlLastTable;$vlLastField)
C_LONGINT($vlFieldNumber)
` Create as many rows (empty and without columns) as there are tables
$vlLastTable:=Get last table number
ARRAY POINTER (<>apFields;$vlLastTable;0) `2D array with X rows and zero columns
` For each table
For ($vlTable;1;$vlLastTable)
If(Is table number valid($vlTable))
$vlLastField:=Get last field number($vlTable)
` Give value of elements
$vlColumnNumber:=0
For ($vlField;1;$vlLastField)
If(Is field number valid($vlTable;$vlField))
$vlColumnNumber:=$vlColumnNumber+1
`Insert a column in a row of the table underway
INSERT IN ARRAY(<>apFields{$vlTable};$vlColumnNumber;1)
`Assign the "cell" with the pointer
<>apFields{$vlTable}{$vlColumnNumber}:=Field($vlTable;$vlField)
End if

240 4D Language Reference

 End for
End if
End for

Provided that this two-dimensional array has been initialized, you can obtain the pointers to
the fields for a particular table in the following way:

` Get the pointers to the fields for the table currently displayed at the screen:
COPY ARRAY (<>apFields{Table(Current form table)};$apTheFieldsIamWorkingOn)
` Initialize Boolean and Date fields
For ($vlElem;1;Size of array($apTheFieldsIamWorkingOn))
Case of
: (Type($apTheFieldsIamWorkingOn{$vlElem}->)=Is Date)
$apTheFieldsIamWorkingOn{$vlElem}->:=Current date
: (Type($apTheFieldsIamWorkingOn{$vlElem}->)=Is Boolean)
$apTheFieldsIamWorkingOn{$vlElem}->:=True
End case
End for

Note: As this example suggests, rows of a two-dimensional arrays can be the same size or
different sizes.

See Also
Arrays.

4D Language Reference 241

Arrays and Memory Arrays

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Unlike the data you store on disk using tables and records, an array is always held in memory
in its entirety.

For example, if all US zip codes were entered in the [Zip Codes] table, it would contain about
100,000 records. In addition, that table would include several fields: the zip code itself and the
corresponding city, county, and state. If you select only the zip codes from California, the 4D
database engine creates the corresponding selection of records within the [Zip Codes] table,
and then loads the records only when they are needed (i.e., when they are displayed or
printed). In order words, you work with an ordered series of values (of the same type for each
field) that is partially loaded from the disk into the memory by the database engine of 4D.

Doing the same thing with arrays would be prohibitive for the following reasons:
• In order to maintain the four information types (zip code, city, county, state), you would
have to maintain four large arrays in memory.
• Because an array is always held in memory in its entirety, you would have to keep all the zip
codes information in memory throughout the whole working session, even though the data is
not always in use.
• Again, because an array is always held in memory in its entirety, each time the database is
started and then quit, the four arrays would have to be loaded and then saved on the disk,
even though the data is not used or modified during the working session.

Conclusion: Arrays are intended to hold reasonable amounts of data for a short period of time.
On the other hand, because arrays are held in memory, they are easy to handle and quick to
manipulate.

However, in some circumstances, you may need to work with arrays holding hundreds or
thousands of elements. The following table lists the formulas used to calculate the amount of
memory used for each array type:

Array Type Formula for determining Memory Usage in Bytes

Boolean (31+number of elements)\8
Date (1+number of elements) * 6
String (1+number of elements) * Declared length (+1 of odd, +2 if even)
Integer (1+number of elements) * 2
Long Integer (1+number of elements) * 4
Picture (1+number of elements) * 4 + Sum of the size of each picture

242 4D Language Reference

Pointer (1+number of elements) * 16
Real (1+number of elements) * 8
Text (1+number of elements) * 6 + Sum of the size of each text
Two-dimemsional (1+number of elements) * 12 + Sum of the size of each array

Note: A few additional bytes are required to keep track of the selected element, the number of
elements, and the array itself.
When working with very large arrays, the best way to handle full memory situations is to
surround the creation of the arrays with an ON ERR CALL project method. Example:

` You are going to run a batch operation the whole night

` that requires the creation of large arrays. Instead of risking
` occurrences of errors in the middle of the night, put
` the creation of the arrays at the beginning of the operation
` and test the errors at this moment:
gError:=0 ` Assume no error
ON ERR CALL ("ERROR HANDLING") ` Install a method for catching errors
ARRAY STRING (63;asThisArray;50000) ` Roughly 3125K
ARRAY REAL (arThisAnotherArray;50000) ` 488K
ON ERR CALL ("") ` No longer need to catch errors
If (gError=0)
` The arrays could be created
` and let's pursue the operation
Else
ALERT ("This operation requires more memory!")
End if
` Whatever the case, we no longer need the arrays
CLEAR VARIABLE (asThisArray)
CLEAR VARIABLE (arThisAnotherArray)

The ERROR HANDLING project method is listed here:

` ERROR HANDLING project method

gError:=Error ` Just return the error code

See Also
Arrays, ON ERR CALL.

4D Language Reference 243

APPEND TO ARRAY Arrays

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

APPEND TO ARRAY (array; value)

Parameter Type Description

array Array → Array to which an element will be appended
value Expression → Value to append

Description
The APPEND TO ARRAY command adds a new element at the end of array and assigns value
to the element. In interpreted mode, if array does not exist, the command creates it with
regard to the type of value.

This command works with all kind of arrays: string, number, Boolean, date, pointer and
picture.

The type of value must match the array type, otherwise the syntax error 54 “Argument
types are incompatible” is generated. The following values will, however, be accepted:
• a string array (Text or String) accepts any value of the Text or String type.
• a number array (Integer, Longint or Real) accepts any value of the Integer, Longint, Real or
Time type.

Example
The following code:

INSERT IN ARRAY($myarray;Size of array($myarray)+1)

$myarray{Size of array($myarray)}:=$myvalue

... can be replaced with:

APPEND TO ARRAY($myarray;$myvalue)

See Also
DELETE FROM ARRAY, INSERT IN ARRAY.

244 4D Language Reference

ARRAY BOOLEAN Arrays

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

ARRAY BOOLEAN (arrayName; size{; size2})

Parameter Type Description

arrayName Array → Name of the array
size Number → Number of elements in the array or
Number of rows if size2 is specified
size2 Number → Number of columns in a two-dimensional array

Description
The ARRAY BOOLEAN command creates and/or resizes an array of Boolean elements in memory.

• The arrayName parameter is the name of the array.

• The size parameter is the number of elements in the array.
• The size2 parameter is optional; if size2 is specified, the command creates a two-dimensional
array. In this case, size specifies the number of rows and size2 specifies the number of columns
in each array. Each row in a two-dimensional array can be treated as both an element and an
array. This means that while working with the first dimension of the array, you can use other
array commands to insert and delete entire arrays in a two-dimensional array.

While applying ARRAY BOOLEAN to an existing array:

• If you enlarge the array size, the existing elements are left unchanged, and the new elements
are initialized to False.
• If you reduce the array size, the last elements deleted from the array are lost.

Tip: In some contexts, an alternative to using Boolean arrays is using an Integer array where
each element “means true” if different from zero and “means false” if equal to zero.

Examples
1. This example creates a process array of 100 Boolean elements:

ARRAY BOOLEAN (abValues;100)

2. This example creates a local array of 100 rows of 50 Boolean elements:

ARRAY BOOLEAN ($abValues;100;50)

4D Language Reference 245

3. This example creates an interprocess array of 50 Boolean elements and sets each even
element to True:

ARRAY BOOLEAN (<>abValues;50)

For ($vlElem;1;50)
<>abValues{$vlElem}:=(($vlElem%2)=0)
End for

See Also
ARRAY INTEGER.

246 4D Language Reference

ARRAY DATE Arrays

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

ARRAY DATE (arrayName; size{; size2})

Parameter Type Description

arrayName Array → Name of the array
size Number → Number of elements in the array or
Number of rows if size2 is specified
size2 Number → Number of columns in a two-dimensional array

Description
The ARRAY DATE command creates and/or resizes an array of Date elements in memory.

• The arrayName parameter is the name of the array.

• The size parameter is the number of elements in the array.
• The size2 parameter is optional; if size2 is specified, the command creates a two-dimensional
array. In this case, size specifies the number of rows and size2 specifies the number of columns
in each array. Each row in a two-dimensional array can be treated as both an element and an
array. This means that while working with the first dimension of the array, you can use other
array commands to insert and delete entire arrays in a two-dimensional array.

While applying ARRAY DATE to an existing array:

• If you enlarge the array size, the existing elements are left unchanged, and the new elements
are initialized to the null date (!00/00/00!).
• If you reduce the array size, the last elements deleted from the array are lost.

Examples
1. This example creates a process array of 100 Date elements:

ARRAY DATE (adValues;100)

2. This example creates a local array of 100 rows of 50 Date elements:

ARRAY DATE ($adValues;100;50)

4D Language Reference 247

3. This example creates an interprocess array of 50 Date elements, and sets each element to the
current date plus a number of days equal to the element number:

ARRAY DATE (<>adValues;50)

For ($vlElem;1;50)
<>adValues{$vlElem}:=Current date+$vlElem
End for

248 4D Language Reference

ARRAY INTEGER Arrays

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

ARRAY INTEGER (arrayName; size{; size2})

Parameter Type Description

arrayName Array → Name of the array
size Number → Number of elements in the array or
Number of rows if size2 is specified
size2 Number → Number of columns in a two-dimensional array

Description
The ARRAY INTEGER command creates and/or resizes an array of 2-byte Integer elements in
memory.

• The arrayName parameter is the name of the array.

• The size parameter is the number of elements in the array.
• The size2 parameter is optional; if size2 is specified, the command creates a two-dimensional
array. In this case, size specifies the number of rows and size2 specifies the number of columns
in each array. Each row in a two-dimensional array can be treated as both an element and an
array. This means that while working with the first dimension of the array, you can use other
array commands to insert and delete entire arrays in a two-dimensional array.

While applying ARRAY INTEGER to an existing array:

• If you enlarge the array size, the existing elements are left unchanged, and the new elements
are initialized to 0.
• If you reduce the array size, the last elements deleted from the array are lost.

Examples
1. This example creates a process array of 100 2-byte Integer elements:

ARRAY INTEGER (aiValues;100)

2. This example creates a local array of 100 rows of 50 2-byte Integer elements:

ARRAY INTEGER ($aiValues;100;50)

4D Language Reference 249

3. This example creates an interprocess array of 50 2-byte Integer elements, and sets each
element to its element number:

ARRAY INTEGER (<>aiValues;50)

For ($vlElem;1;50)
<>aiValues{$vlElem}:=$vlElem
End for

See Also
ARRAY LONGINT, ARRAY REAL.

250 4D Language Reference

ARRAY LONGINT Arrays

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

ARRAY LONGINT (arrayName; size{; size2})

Parameter Type Description

arrayName Array → Name of the array
size Number → Number of elements in the array or
Number of rows if size2 is specified
size2 Number → Number of columns in a two-dimensional array

Description
The ARRAY LONGINT command creates and/or resizes an array of 4-byte Long Integer elements
in memory.

• The arrayName parameter is the name of the array.

• The size parameter is the number of elements in the array.
• The size2 parameter is optional; if size2 is specified, the command creates a two-dimensional
array. In this case, size specifies the number of rows and size2 specifies the number of columns
in each array. Each row in a two-dimensional array can be treated as both an element and an
array. This means that while working with the first dimension of the array, you can use other
array commands to insert and delete entire arrays in a two-dimensional array.

When applying ARRAY LONGINT to an existing array:

• If you enlarge the array size, the existing elements are left unchanged, and the new elements
are initialized to 0.
• If you reduce the array size, the last elements deleted from the array are lost.

Examples
1. This example creates a process array of 100 4-byte Long Integer elements:

ARRAY LONGINT (alValues;100)

2. This example creates a local array of 100 rows of 50 4-byte Long Integer elements:

ARRAY LONGINT ($alValues;100;50)

4D Language Reference 251

3. This example creates an interprocess array of 50 4-byte Long Integer elements and sets each
element to its element number:

ARRAY LONGINT (<>alValues;50)

For ($vlElem;1;50)
<>alValues{$vlElem}:=$vlElem
End for

See Also
ARRAY INTEGER, ARRAY REAL.

252 4D Language Reference

ARRAY PICTURE Arrays

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

ARRAY PICTURE (arrayName; size{; size2})

Parameter Type Description

arrayName Array → Name of the array
size Number → Number of elements in the array, or
Number of rows if size2 is specified
size2 Number → Number of columns in a two-dimensional array

Description
The ARRAY PICTURE command creates and/or resizes an array of Picture elements in memory.

• The arrayName parameter is the name of the array.

• The size parameter is the number of elements in the array.
• The size2 parameter is optional; if size2 is specified, the command creates a two-dimensional
array. In this case, size specifies the number of rows and size2 specifies the number of columns
in each array. Each row in a two-dimensional array can be treated as both an element and an
array. This means that while working with the first dimension of the array, you can use other
array commands to insert and delete entire arrays in a two-dimensional array.

While applying ARRAY PICTURE to an existing array:

• If you enlarge the array size, the existing elements are left unchanged, and the new elements
are initialized to empty pictures. This means that Picture size applied to one of these elements
will return 0.
• If you reduce the array size, the last elements deleted from the array are lost.

Examples
1. This example creates a process array of 100 Picture elements:

ARRAY PICTURE (agValues;100)

2. This example creates a local array of 100 rows of 50 Picture elements:

ARRAY PICTURE ($agValues;100;50)

4D Language Reference 253

3. This example creates an interprocess array of Picture elements and loads each picture into
one of the elements of the array. The array’s size is equal to the number of 'PICT' resources
available to the database. The array’s resource name starts with "User Intf/":

RESOURCE LIST("PICT";$aiResIDs;$asResNames)
ARRAY PICTURE (<>agValues;Size of array($aiResIDs))
$vlPictElem:=0
For ($vlElem;1;Size of array(<>agValues))
If ($asResNames{$vlElem}="User Intf/@")
$vlPictElem:=$vlPictElem+1
GET PICTURE RESOURCE("PICT";$aiResIDs{$vlElem};$vgPicture)
<>agValues{$vlPictElem}:=$vgPicture
End if
End for
ARRAY PICTURE (<>agValues;$vlPictElem)

254 4D Language Reference

ARRAY POINTER Arrays

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

ARRAY POINTER (arrayName; size{; size2})

Parameter Type Description

arrayName Array → Name of the array
size Number → Number of elements in the array, or
Number of rows if size2 is specified
size2 Number → Number of columns in a two-dimensional array

Description
The ARRAY POINTER command creates or resizes an array of Pointer elements in memory.

• The arrayName parameter is the name of the array.

• The size parameter is the number of elements in the array.
• The size2 parameter is optional; if size2 is specified, the command creates a two-dimensional
array. In this case, size specifies the number of rows and size2 specifies the number of columns
in each array. Each row in a two-dimensional array can be treated as both an element and an
array. This means that while working with the firt dimension of the array, you can use other
array commands to insert and delete entire arrays in a two-dimensional array.

While applying ARRAY POINTER to an existing array:

• If you enlarge the array size, the existing elements are left unchanged, and the new elements
are initialized to null pointer. This means that Nil applied to one of these elements will return
True.
• If you reduce the array size, the last elements deleted from the array are lost.

Examples
1. This example creates a process array of 100 Pointer elements:

ARRAY POINTER (apValues;100)

2. This example creates a local array of 100 rows of 50 Pointer elements:

ARRAY POINTER ($apValues;100;50)

4D Language Reference 255

3. This example creates an interprocess array of Pointer elements and sets each element
pointing to the table whose number is the same as the element. The size of the array is equal
to the number of tables in the database. In the case of a deleted table, the row will return Nil.

ARRAY POINTER (<>apValues;Get last table number)

For ($vlElem;1;Size of array(<>apValues);1;-1)
If(Is table number valid($vlElem))
<>apValues{$vlElem}:=Table($vlElem)
End for

256 4D Language Reference

ARRAY REAL Arrays

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

ARRAY REAL (arrayName; size{; size2})

Parameter Type Description

arrayName Array → Name of the array
size Number → Number of elements in the array or
Number of rows if size2 is specified
size2 Number → Number of columns in a two-dimensional array

Description
The ARRAY REAL command creates and/or resizes an array of Real elements in memory.

• The arrayName parameter is the name of the array.

• The size parameter is the number of elements in the array.
• The size2 parameter is optional; if size2 is specified, the command creates a two-dimensional
array. In this case, size specifies the number of rows and size2 specifies the number of columns
in each array. Each row in a two-dimensional array can be treated as both an element and an
array. This means that while working with the first dimension of the array, you can use other
array commands to insert and delete entire arrays in a two-dimensional array.

While applying ARRAY REAL to an existing array:

• If you enlarge the array size, the existing elements are left unchanged, and the new elements
are initialized to 0.
• If you reduce the array size, the last elements deleted from the array are lost.

Examples
1. This example creates a process array of 100 Real elements:

ARRAY REAL (arValues;100)

2. This example creates a local array of 100 rows of 50 Real elements:

ARRAY REAL ($arValues;100;50)

4D Language Reference 257

3. This example creates an interprocess array of 50 Real elements and sets each element to its
element number:

ARRAY REAL (<>arValues;50)

For ($vlElem;1;50)
<>arValues{$vlElem}:=$vlElem
End for

See Also
ARRAY INTEGER, ARRAY LONGINT.

258 4D Language Reference

ARRAY STRING Arrays

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

ARRAY STRING (strLen; arrayName; size{; size2})

Parameter Type Description

strLen Number → Length of string (1... 255)
arrayName Array → Name of the array
size Number → Number of elements in the array or
Number of rows if size2 is specified
size2 Number → Number of columns in a two-dimensional array

Description
The ARRAY STRING command creates and/or resizes an array of String elements in memory.

Compatibility Note: Databases created beginning with version 11 of 4D are executed by default
in Unicode mode (see the ASCII Codes section). In this mode, the functioning of the ARRAY
STRING command is strictly identical to that of the ARRAY TEXT command (the strLen
parameter is ignored). It is recommended to use ARRAY TEXT in new developments. The ARRAY
STRING command is kept only for reasons of compatibility.

• The strLen parameter specifies the maximum number of characters that can be contained in
each array element in a string array. The length can be from 1 to 255 characters.
Note: This parameter is taken into account only when the database is executed in non-
Unicode mode. In Unicode mode, it is ignored (see above Compatibility Note).
• The arrayName parameter is the name of the array.
• The size parameter is the number of elements in the array.
• The size2 parameter is optional; if size2 is specified, the command creates a two-dimensional
array. In this case, size specifies the number of rows and size2 specifies the number of columns
in each array. Each row in a two-dimensional array can be treated as both an element and an
array. This means that while working with the first dimension of the array, you can use other
array commands to insert and delete entire arrays in a two-dimensional array.

While applying ARRAY STRING to an existing array:

• If you enlarge the array size, the existing elements are left unchanged, and the new elements
are initialized to "" (empty string).
• If you reduce the array size, the last elements deleted from the array are lost.

4D Language Reference 259

Examples
1. This example creates a process array of 100 31-character String elements:

ARRAY STRING (31;asValues;100)

2. This example creates a local array of 100 rows of 50 63-character String elements:

ARRAY STRING (63;$asValues;100;50)

3. This example creates an interprocess array of 50 255-character String elements and sets each
element to the value “Element #” followed by its element number:

ARRAY STRING (255;<>asValues;50)

For ($vlElem;1;50)
<>asValues{$vlElem}:="Element #"+String($vlElem)
End for

See Also
ARRAY TEXT.

260 4D Language Reference

ARRAY TEXT Arrays

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

ARRAY TEXT (arrayName; size{; size2})

Parameter Type Description

arrayName Array → Name of the array
size Number → Number of elements in the array or
Number of rows if size2 is specified
size2 Number → Number of columns in a two-dimensional array

Description
The ARRAY TEXT command creates and/or resizes an array of Text elements in memory.

• The arrayName parameter is the name of the array.

• The size parameter is the number of elements in the array.
• The size2 parameter is optional; if size2 is specified, the command creates a two-dimensional
array. In this case, size specifies the number of rows and size2 specifies the number of columns
in each array. Each row in a two-dimensional array can be treated as both an element and an
array. This means that while working with the first dimension of the array, you can use other
array commands to insert and delete entire arrays in a two-dimensional array.

While applying ARRAY TEXT to an existing array:

• If you enlarge the array size, the existing elements are left unchanged, and the new elements
are initialized to "" (empty string).
• If you reduce the array size, the last elements deleted from the array are lost.

Examples
1. This example creates a process array of 100 Text elements:

ARRAY TEXT (atValues;100)

2. This example creates a local array of 100 rows of 50 Text elements:

ARRAY TEXT ($atValues;100;50)

4D Language Reference 261

3. This example creates an interprocess array of 50 Text elements and sets each element to the
value “Element #” followed by its element number:

ARRAY TEXT (<>atValues;50)

For ($vlElem;1;50)
<>atValues{$vlElem}:="Element #"+String($vlElem)
End for

See Also
ARRAY STRING.

262 4D Language Reference

ARRAY TO LIST Arrays

version 3

Compatibility Note
Due to the new implementation of Choice Lists, compatibility for this command could not be
fully maintained. Also, starting with version 6, we recommend that you use the command
SAVE LIST to work with the hierarchical lists defined in the Design environment List Editor.

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

ARRAY TO LIST (array; list{; itemRefs})

Parameter Type Description

array Array → Array from which to copy array elements
list String → List into which to copy array elements
itemRefs Array → Numeric array of item reference numbers

Description
The ARRAY TO LIST command creates or replaces the list list (as defined in the Design
environment List Editor) using the elements of the array array.

This command allows you to define only the first level items of the list.

The optional itemRefs parameter, if specified, must be a numeric array synchronized with the
array array. Each element, then, indicates the list item reference number for the corresponding
element in array. If you omit this parameter, 4D automatically sets the list item reference
numbers to 1, 2... N.

Compatibility Note: In the previous version of 4D, this parameter was used to link other lists
to each element in array. If an element of the links array was the name of an existing list, then
that list was attached to the corresponding item.

You can continue to use ARRAY TO LIST to build a list based on the elements of an array.
However, this command does not provide a means of working with the child items. To work
with hierarchical lists, use the new Hierarchical Lists commands introduced in version 6.

4D Language Reference 263

Example
The following example copies the array atRegions to the list called “Regions:”

ARRAY TO LIST (atRegions;"Regions")

See Also
LIST TO ARRAY, Load list, ON ERR CALL, SAVE LIST.

Error Handling
An error -9957 is generated when ARRAY TO LIST is applied to a list that is currently being
edited in the Design environment List Editor. You can catch this error using an ON ERR CALL
project method.

264 4D Language Reference

ARRAY TO SELECTION Arrays

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

ARRAY TO SELECTION (array; field{; array2; field2; ...; arrayN; fieldN})

Parameter Type Description

array Array → Array to copy to the selection
aField Field ← Field to receive the array data

Description
The ARRAY TO SELECTION command copies one or more arrays into a selection of records. All
fields listed must belong to the same table.

If a selection exists at the time of the call, the elements of the array are put into the records,
based on the order of the array and the order of the records. If there are more elements than
records, new records are created. The records, whether new or existing, are automatically saved.

All the arrays must have the same number of elements. If the arrays are of different sizes, a
syntax error is generated.

This command does the reverse of SELECTION TO ARRAY. However, the ARRAY TO SELECTION
command does not allow fields from different tables, including related tables, even when an
automatic relation exists.

WARNING: Use ARRAY TO SELECTION with caution, because it overwrites information in

existing records. If a record is locked by another process during the execution of ARRAY TO
SELECTION, that record is not modified. Any locked records are put into the process set called
LockedSet. After ARRAY TO SELECTION has executed, you can test the set LockedSet to see if any
records were locked.

4D Server: The command is optimized for 4D Server. Arrays are sent by the client machine to
the server, and the records are modified or created on the server machine. As such a request is
handled synchronously, the client machine must wait for the operation to be completed
successfully. In the multi-user or multi-process environment, any records that are locked will
not be overwritten.

4D Language Reference 265

Example
In the following example, the two arrays asLastNames and asCompanies place data in the
[People] table. The values from the array asLastNames area placed in the field [People]Last
Name and the values from the array asCompanies are placed in the field [People]Company:

ARRAY TO SELECTION (asLastNames;[People]Last Name;asCompanies;[People]Company)

See Also
SELECTION TO ARRAY.

266 4D Language Reference

BOOLEAN ARRAY FROM SET Arrays

version 6.5
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

BOOLEAN ARRAY FROM SET (booleanArr{; set})

Parameter Type Description

booleanArr Boolean Array ← Array to indicate if a record is in the set or not
set String → Name of the set or
UserSet if this parameter is omitted

Description
The BOOLEAN ARRAY FROM SET command fills an array of booleans indicating if each record
in the table is or is not in set.

The elements in the array are ordered in the order in which the records are created in the table
(absolute record numbers). If N is the number of records in the table, element 0 of the array
corresponds to record number 0, element 1 of the array corresponds to record number 1, etc.

Each element of the array is:

• True if the corresponding record belongs to the set.
• False if the corresponding record does not belong to the set.

Warning: The total number of elements in the booleanArr array is not significant. For
structural reasons, this number can be different from the number of records actually present in
the table. Possible extra elements are set to False.

If you don’t pass the set parameter, the command will use UserSet in the current process.

See Also
CREATE SET FROM ARRAY.

4D Language Reference 267

COPY ARRAY Arrays

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

COPY ARRAY (source; destination)

Parameter Type Description

source Array → Array from which to copy
destination Array ← Array to which to copy

Description
The COPY ARRAY command creates or overwrites the destination array destination with the
exact contents, size, and type of the source array source.

The source and destination arrays can be local, process, or interprocess arrays. When copying
arrays, the scope of the array does not matter.

Example
The following example fills the array named C. It then creates a new array, named D, of the
same size as C and with the same contents:

ALL RECORDS ([People]) ` Select all records in People

SELECTION TO ARRAY ([People]Company; C) ` Move company field data into array C
COPY ARRAY (C; D) ` Copy the array C to the array D

268 4D Language Reference

Count in array Arrays

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Count in array (array; value) → Longint

Parameter Type Description

array Array → Array where count should occur
value Expression → Value to count

Function result Longint ← Number of instances found

Description
The Count in array command returns the number of times value is found in array.

This command can be used with the following array types: Text, Alpha, number, Date,
Pointer and Boolean. The array and value parameters must be the same type or compatible.

If no element in array matches value, the command returns 0.

Example
The following example allows displaying the number of selected lines in a list box:

`tBList is the name of a List box column array

ALERT(String(Count in array(tBList;True))+" line(s) selected in the list box")

See Also
Find in array.

4D Language Reference 269

DELETE FROM ARRAY Arrays

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DELETE FROM ARRAY (array; where{; howMany})

Parameter Type Description

array Array → Array from which to delete elements
where Number → Element at which to begin deletion
howMany Number → Number of elements to delete, or
1 element if omitted

Description
The DELETE FROM ARRAY command deletes one or more elements from array. Elements are
deleted starting at the element specified by where.

The howMany parameter is the number of elements to delete. If howMany is not specified,
then one element is deleted. The size of the array shrinks by howMany.

Examples
1. The following example deletes three elements, starting at element 5:

DELETE FROM ARRAY(anArray; 5; 3)

2. The following example deletes the last element from an array, if it exists:

$vlElem:=Size of array(anArray)
If ($vlElem>0)
DELETE FROM ARRAY (anArray;$vlElem)
End if

See Also
INSERT IN ARRAY, Size of array.

270 4D Language Reference

DISTINCT VALUES Arrays

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DISTINCT VALUES (aField; array)

Parameter Type Description

aField Field → Indexable field to use for data
array Array ← Array to receive field data

Description
The DISTINCT VALUES command creates and populates the array array with non-repeated
(unique) values coming from the field aField for the current selection of the table to which the
field belongs.

You can pass to DISTINCT VALUES any indexable field, that is, whose type supports indexing
without necessarily being indexed.
However, executing this command on unindexed fields will be slower. Also note that, in this
case, the command loses the current record.

DISTINCT VALUES browses and retains the non-repeated values present only in the currently
selected records.

Note: When the DISTINCT VALUES command is called during a transaction (that has not yet
finished), it will take into account records created during that transaction.

If you create the array prior to the call, DISTINCT VALUES expects an array type compatible
with the field you pass. Otherwise, in interpreted mode, DISTINCT VALUES will create an array
of the proper type. However, if the field or subfield is of type Time, the command expects or
creates a LongInt array.

After the call, the size of the array is equal to the number of distinct values found in the
selection. The command does not change the current selection or the current record. The
DISTINCT VALUES command uses the index of the field, so the elements in array are returned
sorted in ascending order. If this is the order you need, you do not need to call SORT ARRAY
after using DISTINCT VALUES.

Note: When DISTINCT VALUES is executed with a text field associated with a keyword index,
the command fills the array with the keywords of the index. Unlike other types of data, the
values returned differ according to the existence of the index. The keyword index is always
taken into account, even when the field is also associated with a standard index.

4D Language Reference 271

WARNING: DISTINCT VALUES can create large arrays depending on the size of the selection and
the number of different values in the records. Arrays reside in memory, therefore it is a good
idea to test the result after the completion of the command. To do so, test the size of the
resulting array or cover the call to the command, using an ON ERR CALL project method.

4D Server: The command is optimized for 4D Server. The array is created and the values are
calculated on the server machine; the array is then sent, in its entirety, to the client.

Example
The following example creates a list of cities from the current selection and tells the user the
number of cities in which the firm has stores:

ALL RECORDS([Retail Outlets]) ` Create a selection of records

DISTINCT VALUES([Retail Outlets]City;asCities)
ALERT("The firm has stores in " +String(Size of array(asCities))+" cities.")

See Also
ON ERR CALL, SELECTION RANGE TO ARRAY, SELECTION TO ARRAY.

272 4D Language Reference

Find in array Arrays

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Find in array (array; value{; start}) → Number

Parameter Type Description

array Array → Array to search
value Expression → Value of same type to search in the array
start Number → Element at which to start searching

Function result Number ← Number of the first element in array

that matches value

Description
The Find in array command returns the number of the first element in array that matches value.

Find in array can be used with Text, String, Numeric, Date, Pointer, and Boolean arrays. The
array and value parameters must be of the same type.

If no match is found, Find in array returns –1.

If start is specified, the command starts searching at the element number specified by start. If
start is not specified, the command starts searching at element 1.

Examples
1. The following project method deletes all empty elements from the string or text array
whose pointer is passed as parameter:

` CLEAN UP ARRAY project method

` CLEAN UP ARRAY ( Pointer )
` CLEAN UP ARRAY ( -> Text or String array )
C_POINTER ($1)
Repeat
$vlElem:=Find in array ($1->;"")
If ($vlElem>0)
DELETE FROM ARRAY($1->;$vlElem)
End if
Until ($vlElem<0)

4D Language Reference 273

After this project method is implemented in a database, you can write:

ARRAY TEXT (atSomeValues;...)

` ...
` Do plenty of things with the array
` ...
` Eliminate empty string elements
CLEAN UP ARRAY (->atSomeValues)

2. The following project method selects the first element of an array whose pointer is passed as
the first parameter that matches the value of the variable or field whose pointer is passed as
parameter:

` SELECT ELEMENT project method

` SELECT ELEMENT ( Pointer ; Pointer)
` SELECT ELEMENT ( -> Text or String array ; -> Text or String variable or field )

$1->:=Find in array ($1->;$2->)

If ($1->=-1)
$1->:=0 ` If no element was found, set the array to no selected element
End if

After this project method is implemented in a database, you can write:

` asGender pop-up menu object method

Case of
: (Form Event=On Load)
SELECT ELEMENT (->asGender;->[People]Gender)

End case

See Also
DELETE FROM ARRAY, INSERT IN ARRAY, Size of array.

274 4D Language Reference

INSERT IN ARRAY Arrays

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

INSERT IN ARRAY (array; where{; howMany})

Parameter Type Description

array Array → Name of the array
where Number → Where to insert the elements
howMany Number → Number of elements to be inserted, or
1 element if omitted

Description
The INSERT IN ARRAY command inserts one or more elements into the array array. The new
elements are inserted before the element specified by where, and are initialized to the empty
value for the array type. All elements beyond where are consequently moved within the array
by an offset of one or the value you pass in howMany.

If where is greater than the size of the array, the elements are added to the end of the array.

The howMany parameter is the number of elements to insert. If howMany is not specified, then
one element is inserted. The size of the array grows by howMany.

Examples
1. The following example inserts five new elements, starting at element 10:

INSERT IN ARRAY(anArray;10;5)

2. The following example appends an element to an array:

$vlElem:=Size of array(anArray)+1
INSERT IN ARRAY (anArray;$vlElem)
anArray{$vlElem}:=...

See Also
DELETE FROM ARRAY, Size of array.

4D Language Reference 275

LIST TO ARRAY Arrays

version 3
Compatibility Note
Due to the new implementation of Choice Lists, compatibility for this command could not be
fully maintained. Also, starting with version 6, we recommend that you start using the
command Load list to work with the hierarchical lists defined in the Design environment List
Editor.

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

LIST TO ARRAY (list; array{; itemRefs})

Parameter Type Description

list String → List from which to copy the first level items
array Array ← Array to which to copy the list items
itemRefs Array ← List item reference numbers

Description
The LIST TO ARRAY command creates or overrides the array array with the first level items of
the list list.

LIST TO ARRAY creates or overrides an array with a new text array.

The optional itemRefs parameter (a numeric array) returns the list item reference numbers.

Compatibility Note: In the previous version of 4D, this array was filled with the names of any
linked lists. If an element of the list had a linked list, the name of the linked list was put into
the array element with the same number as the list element. If there was no linked list, then
the element was the empty string. The second array was set to the same size as array. You
could use the names in this array to access the linked lists.

You can continue to use LIST TO ARRAY to build an array based on the first level items of a
hierarchical list. However, this command does not provide you with the child items, if any. To
work with hierarchical lists, use the new Hierarchical Lists commands introduced in version 6.

276 4D Language Reference

Example
The following example copies the items of a list called Regions into an array called atRegions:

LIST TO ARRAY ("Regions"; atRegions )

See Also
ARRAY TO LIST, Load list, SAVE LIST.

4D Language Reference 277

LONGINT ARRAY FROM SELECTION Arrays

version 6.7 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

LONGINT ARRAY FROM SELECTION (aTable; recordArray{; selection})

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table of the current selection
recordArray Longint Array ← Array of record numbers
selection String → Name of the named selection or
the current selection if this parameter is omitted

Description
The LONGINT ARRAY FROM SELECTION command fills the recordArray array with the (absolute)
record numbers that are in selection.

If you do not pass the selection parameter, the command will use the current selection of
aTable.

Note: The array element number 0 is initialized to -1.

See Also
CREATE SELECTION FROM ARRAY.

278 4D Language Reference

MULTI SORT ARRAY Arrays

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

MULTI SORT ARRAY (array{; sort}{; array2; sort2; ...; arrayN; sortN})

Parameter Type Description

array Array → Array(s) to be sorted
sort > or < → > to sort by increasing order or
< to sort by decreasing order
If omitted = no sort

MULTI SORT ARRAY (ptrArrayName; sortArrayName)

Parameter Type Description

ptrArrayName Pointer array → Array of array pointers
sortArrayName Longint array → Sort order array(1 = sort by increasing
order, -1 = sort by decreasing order,
0 = synchronization with previous sorts)

Description
The MULTI SORT ARRAY command enables you to carry out a multi-level sort on a set of
arrays. This function is particularly useful in the context of grouped scrolling areas in
forms.

This command accepts two different syntaxes.

• First syntax: MULTI SORT ARRAY (array{; sort}{; array2; sort2; ...; arrayN; sortN})
This syntax is the simplest; it lets you directly pass the names of the synchronized arrays
where you want to apply a multi-criteria sort.

You can pass an unlimited number of pairs (array;> or <) and/or only arrays. All the arrays
passed as parameters are sorted in a synchronized manner.

You can pass arrays of any type except for Pointer or Picture arrays. You can sort an
element of a two-dimensional array (i.e. a2DArray{$vlThisElement}), but you cannot sort the
2D array itself (i.e. a2DArray).

4D Language Reference 279

To use the contents of an array as sort criteria, pass the sort parameter. The value of the
parameter (> or <) determines the order (ascending or descending) in which the array will
be sorted. If the sort parameter is omitted, the contents of the array are not used as sort
criteria.

Note: Keep in mind that at least one sort criterion must be passed in order for the
command to work. If no sort criterion is set, an error is generated.

The sort levels are determined by the order in which the arrays are passed to the command:
the position of an array with a sort criterion in the syntax determines its sort level.

• Second syntax: MULTI SORT ARRAY (ptrArrayName; sortArrayName)

This syntax, more complex, is also invaluable for generic developments (for example, you
can create a generic method for sorting arrays of all types, or yet again, create the
equivalent of a generic SORT ARRAY command).

The ptrArrayName parameter contains the name of an array of array pointers; each element
of this array is a pointer designating an array to be sorted. The sorts are performed in the
order of the array pointers defined by ptrArrayName. Warning: all the arrays pointed to by
ptrArrayName must have the same number of elements.

Note: ptrArrayName can be an array of local ($ptrArrayName), process (ptrArrayName) or

inter-process (<>ptrArrayName) pointers. Conversely, the elements of this array must point
to process or inter-process arrays only.

The sortArrayName parameter contains the name of an array in which each element
indicates the sorting order (-1, 0 or 1) of the element of the corresponding array of pointers:
-1 = Sort by decreasing order.
0 = The array is not used as a sorting criterion but must be sorted according to the other
sorts.
1 = Sort by increasing order.

Note: You cannot sort arrays of the Pointer or Picture type. You can sort an element of a
two-dimensional array (i.e. a2DArray{$vlThisElement}), but you cannot sort the 2D array
itself (i.e. a2DArray).

For each element of the ptrArrayName array, there must be a corresponding element of the
sortArrayName array. Both arrays must therefore have exactly the same number of elements.

280 4D Language Reference

Examples
1. The following example uses the first syntax: it creates four arrays and sorts them by city
(ascending order) then by salary (descending order) with the last two arrays, names_array
and telNum_array, being synchronized according to the previous sort criteria:

ALL RECORDS([Employees])
SELECTION TO ARRAY([Employees]City;cities;[Employees]Salary;salaries;
[Employees]Name;names;[Employees]TelNum;telNums)
MULTI SORT ARRAY (cities;>;salaries;<;names;telNums)

If you want for the names array to be used as the third sort criteria, just add > or < after the
names_array parameter.
Note that the syntax:
MULTI SORT ARRAY (cities;>;salaries;names;telNums)
is equivalent to:
SORT ARRAY(cities;salaries;names;telNums;>)

2. The following example uses the second syntax: it creates four arrays and sorts them by
city (increasing order) and company (decreasing order); the last two arrays, names_Array
and telNum_Array, being synchronized according to previous sort criteria:

ALL RECORDS([Employees])
SELECTION TO ARRAY([Employees]City;cities;[Employees]Company;companies;
[Employees]Name;names;[Employees]TelNum;telNums)
ARRAY POINTER(pointers_Array;4)
ARRAY LONGINT(sorts_Array;4)
pointers_Array{1}:=->cities
sorts_Array{1}:=1
pointers_Array{2}:=->companies
sorts_Array{2}:=-1
pointers_Array{3}:=->names
sorts_Array{3}:=0
pointers_Array{4}:=->telNums
sorts_Array{4}:=0
MULTI SORT ARRAY (pointers_Array;sorts_Array)

If you want the array of names be used as a third sort criterion, you need to assign the
value 1 to the sorts_Array{3} element. Or else, if you want the arrays to be sorted only by
the city criterion, assign the value 0 to the sorts_Array{2}, sorts_Array{3} and sorts_Array{4}
elements. In this way, you obtain an identical result to SORT
ARRAY(cities;companies;names;telNums;>).

See Also
ORDER BY, SELECTION TO ARRAY, SORT ARRAY.

4D Language Reference 281

SELECTION RANGE TO ARRAY Arrays

version 3.5.3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SELECTION RANGE TO ARRAY (start; end; aField | aTable; array{; aField2 | aTable2; array2; ...;
aFieldN | aTableN; arrayN})

Parameter Type Description

start Number → Selected record number where data retrieval starts
end Number → Selected record number where data retrieval ends
aField | aTable Field or Table → Field to use for retrieving data or
Table to use for retrieving record numbers
array Array ← Array to receive field data or record numbers

Description
SELECTION RANGE TO ARRAY creates one or more arrays and copies data from the fields or
record numbers from the current selection into the arrays.

Unlike SELECTION TO ARRAY, which applies to the current selection in its entirety, SELECTION
RANGE TO ARRAY only applies to the range of selected records specified by the parameters start
and end.

The command expects you to pass in start and end the selected record numbers complying
with the formula 1 <= start <= end <= Records in selection ([...]).

If you pass 1 <= start = end < Records in selection ([...]), you will load fields or get the record
number from the record whose selected record is start = end.

If you pass incorrect selected record numbers, the command does the following:
• If end > Records in selection ([...]), it returns values from the selected record specified by start
to the last selected record.
• If start > end, it returns values from the record whose selected record is start only.
• If both parameters are inconsistent with the size of the selection, it returns empty arrays.

Like SELECTION TO ARRAY, the SELECTION RANGE TO ARRAY command applies to the selection
for the table specified in the first parameter.

282 4D Language Reference

Also like SELECTION TO ARRAY, SELECTION RANGE TO ARRAY can perform the following:
• Load values from one or several fields.
• Load Record numbers using the syntax ...;[table];Array;...
• Load values from related fields, if there is a Many to One automatic relation between the
tables or if you have previously called SET AUTOMATIC RELATIONS to change manual Many to
One relations to automatic. In both cases, values can be loaded from tables through several
levels of Many to One relations.

Each array is typed according to the field type. There are two exceptions:
• In ASCII compatibility mode (non-Unicode), if a Text field is copied into a String array. In
this case, the array will remain a String array.
• When a Time field is copied into a Long Integer array.

If you load record numbers, they are copied into a Long Integer array.

4D Server: SELECTION RANGE TO ARRAY is optimized for 4D Server. Each array is created on the
server and then sent, in its entirety, to the client machine.

WARNING: SELECTION RANGE TO ARRAY can create large arrays, depending on the range you
specify in start and end, and on the type and size of the data you are loading. Arrays reside in
memory, so it is a good idea to test the result after the command is completed. To do so, test
the size of each resulting array or cover the call to the command, using an ON ERR CALL
project method.

If the command is successful, the size of each resulting array is equal to (end-start)+1, except if
the end parameter exceeded the number of records in the selection. In such a case, each
resulting array contains (Records in selection([...])-start)+1 elements.

Examples
1. The following code addresses the first 50 records from the current selection for the [Invoices]
table. It loads the values from the [Invoices]Invoice ID field and the [Customers]Customer ID
related field.

SELECTION RANGE TO ARRAY(1;50;[Invoices]Invoice ID;alInvoID;[Customers]Customer ID;

alCustID)

4D Language Reference 283

2. The following code addresses the last 50 records from the current selection for the [Invoices]
table. It loads the record numbers of the [Invoices] records as well as those of the [Customers]
related records:

lSelSize := Records in selection ([Invoices])

SELECTION RANGE TO ARRAY (lSelSize-49;lSelSize;[Invoices];alInvRecN;[Customers];
alCustRecN)

3. The following code process, in sequential “chunks”of 1000 records, a large selection that
could not be downloaded in its entirety into arrays:

lMaxPage := 1000
lSelSize := Records in selection ([Phone Directory])
For ($lPage ; 1; 1+((lSelSize-1)\lMaxPage) )
` Load the values and/or record numbers
SELECTION RANGE TO ARRAY (1+(lMaxPage*($lPage-1));lMaxPage*$lPage;...;...;...;...;
...;...)
` Do something with the arrays
End for

See Also
ON ERR CALL, SELECTION TO ARRAY, SET AUTOMATIC RELATIONS.

284 4D Language Reference

SELECTION TO ARRAY Arrays

version 3
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SELECTION TO ARRAY (aField | aTable; array{; aField2 | aTable2; array2; ...; aFieldN | aTableN;

arrayN})

Parameter Type Description

aField | aTable Field or Table → Field to use for retrieving data or
Table to use for retrieving record numbers
array Array ← Array to receive field data or record numbers

Description
The SELECTION TO ARRAY command creates one or more arrays and copies data in the fields
or record numbers from the current selection into the arrays.

The command SELECTION TO ARRAY applies to the selection for the table specified in the first
parameter. SELECTION TO ARRAY, can perform the following:
• Load values from one or several fields.
• Load Record numbers using the syntax ...;[table];Array;...
• Load values from related fields, provided that there is a Many to One automatic relation
between the tables or provided that you have previously called SET AUTOMATIC RELATIONS to
make manual Many to One relations automatic. In both cases, values are loaded from tables
through several levels of Many to One relations.

Each array is typed according to the field type. There are two exceptions:
• If a Text field is copied into a String array, the array will remain a String array.
• In ASCII compatibility mode (non-Unicode), if a Time field is copied into a Long Integer
array, the array will also remain a String array.

If you load record numbers, they are copied into a Long Integer array.

4D Server: The SELECTION TO ARRAY command is optimized for 4D Server. Each array is
created on the server and then sent, in its entirety, to the client machine.

WARNING: The SELECTION TO ARRAY command can create large arrays, depending on the size
of the current selection and on the type and size of the data you are loading. Arrays reside in
memory, so it is a good idea to test the result after the command is completed. To do so, test
the size of each resulting array or cover the call to the command, using an ON ERR CALL
project method.

4D Language Reference 285

Note: After a call to SELECTION TO ARRAY, the current selection and current record remain
the same, but the current record is no longer loaded. If you need to use the values of the
fields in the current record, use the LOAD RECORD command after the SELECTION TO ARRAY
command.
Examples
1. In the following example, the [People] table has an automatic relation to the [Company]
table. The two arrays asLastName and asCompanyAddr are sized according to the number of
records selected in the [People] table and will contain information from both tables:

SELECTION TO ARRAY ([People]Last Name;asLastName;[Company]Address;

asCompanyAddr)

2. The following example returns the [Clients] record numbers in the array alRecordNumbers
and the [Clients]Names field values in the array asNames:

SELECTION TO ARRAY([Clients];alRecordNumbers;[Clients]Names; asNames)

See Also
ARRAY TO SELECTION, MULTI SORT ARRAY, ON ERR CALL, SELECTION RANGE TO ARRAY, SET
AUTOMATIC RELATIONS.

286 4D Language Reference

Size of array Arrays

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Size of array (array) → Number

Parameter Type Description

array Array → Array whose size is returned

Function result Number ← Returns the number of elements in array

Description
The Size of array command returns the number of elements in array.

Example
1. The following example returns the size of the array anArray:

vlSize:=Size of array(anArray) ` vlSize gets the size of anArray

2. The following example returns the number of rows in a two-dimensional array:

vlRows:=Size of array(a2DArray) ` vlRows gets the size of a2DArray

3. The following example returns the number of columns for a row in a two-dimensional array:

vlColumns:=Size of array(a2DArray{10}) ` vlColumns gets the size of a2DArray{10}

See Also
DELETE FROM ARRAY, INSERT IN ARRAY.

4D Language Reference 287

SORT ARRAY Arrays

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SORT ARRAY (array{; array2; ...; arrayN}{; > or <})

Parameter Type Description

array Array → Arrays to sort
> or < → > to sort in Ascending order, or
< to sort in Descending order, or
Ascending order if omitted

Description
The SORT ARRAY command sorts one or more arrays into ascending or descending order.

Note: You cannot sort Pointer or Picture arrays. You can sort the elements of a two-
dimensional array (i.e., a2DArray{$vlThisElem}) but you cannot sort the two-dimensional array
itself (i.e., a2DArray).

The last parameter specifies whether to sort array in ascending or descending order. The
“greater than” symbol (>) indicates an ascending sort; the “less than” symbol (<) indicates a
descending sort. If you do not specify the sorting order, then the sort is ascending.

If more than one array is specified, the arrays are sorted following the sort order of the first
array; no multi-level sorting is performed here. This feature is especially useful with grouped
scrollable areas in a form; SORT ARRAY maintains the synchronicity of the arrays that sustain
the scrollable areas.

Examples
1. The following example creates two arrays and then sorts them by company:

ALL RECORDS ([People])

SELECTION TO ARRAY ([People]Name;asNames;[People]Company;asCompanies)
SORT ARRAY (asCompanies; asNames;>)

288 4D Language Reference

However, because SORT ARRAY does not perform multi-level sorts, you will end up with
people‘s names in random order within each company. To sort people by name within each
company, you would write:

ALL RECORDS ([People])

ORDER BY ([People];[People]Company;>;[People]Name;>)
SELECTION TO ARRAY ([People]Name;asNames;[People]Company;asCompanies)

2. You display the names from a [People] table in a floating window. When you click on
buttons present in the window, you can sort this list of names from A to Z or from Z to A. As
several people may have the same name, you also can use a [People]ID number field, which is
indexed unique. When you click in the list of names, you will retrieve the record for the name
you clicked. By maintaing a synchronized and hidden array of ID numbers, you are sure to
access the record corresponding to the name you clicked:

` asNames array object method

Case of
: (Form event=On Load)
ALL RECORDS([People])
SELECTION TO ARRAY([People]Name;asNames;[People]ID number;alIDs)
SORT ARRAY(asNames;alIDs;>)
: (Form event=On Unload)
CLEAR VARIABLE(asNames)
CLEAR VARIABLE(alIDs)
: (Form event=On Clicked)
If (asNames#0)
` Use the array alIDs to get the right record
QUERY([People];[People]ID Number=alIDs{asNames})
` Do something with the record
End if
End case

` bA2Z button object method

` Sort the arrays in ascending order and keep them synchronized
SORT ARRAY(asNames;alIDs;>)

` bZ2A button object method

` Sort the arrays in descending order and keep them synchronized
SORT ARRAY(asNames;alIDs;<)

See Also
MULTI SORT ARRAY, ORDER BY, SELECTION TO ARRAY.

4D Language Reference 289

290 4D Language Reference
5
______________________
Backup

4D Language Reference 291

292 4D Language Reference
BACKUP Backup

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

BACKUP

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
The BACKUP command starts the backup of the database using the current backup settings.
No confirmation dialog is displayed; however, a progress bar appears on screen.

Backup settings are set in the application Preferences. They are also stored in the
Backup.XML file located in the subfolder Preferences/Backup of the database.

The BACKUP command calls the On Backup Startup database method at the beginning of its
execution and the On Backup Shutdown database method at the end of its execution.
Because of this mechanism, the command should not be called from one of these database
methods.

4D Server: When called from a client machine, BACKUP is considered as a stored procedure;
it is still executed on the server.

See Also
GET BACKUP INFORMATION, On Backup Startup Database Method, RESTORE.

System Variables or Sets

If the backup is performed correctly, the system variable OK is set to 1; otherwise, it is set to
0.

Error Handling
In case of any incidents, an error is generated which you can intercept by means of an error-
handling method installed using the ON ERR CALL command.

4D Language Reference 293

CHECK LOG FILE Backup

version 2004.4
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

CHECK LOG FILE

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
The CHECK LOG FILE command displays the dialog box for viewing the current log file of
the database (which can also be accessed via the Maintenance Security Center window):

This dialog box includes the Rollback button that can be used to cancel operations carried
out on the data of the database. For more information about this dialog box, please refer to
the Design Reference manual of 4D.

Note: Since the rollback function is relatively powerful, it is recommended that access to
the CHECK LOG FILE command be restricted to the database administrators.

This command can only be used in the context of single-user applications. More
particularly, it allows access to the rollback function from 4D Volume Desktop applications
(applications with no Design mode). If it is called within a client/server application, the
command has no effect and the error 1421 is returned.

294 4D Language Reference

See Also
Backup management system errors, RESTORE.

Error Handling
• If this command is executed in a database operating without a log file, it does nothing
and the error 1403 is returned.
• If this command is executed in a client/server database, it does nothing and the error
1421 is returned.
You can intercept these errors using an error-handling method installed with the ON ERR
CALL command.

4D Language Reference 295

GET BACKUP INFORMATION Backup

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET BACKUP INFORMATION (selector; info1; info2)

Parameter Type Description

selector Longint → Type of information to get
info1 Date | Integer ← Value 1 of the selector
info2 Time | String ← Value 2 of the selector

Description
The GET BACKUP INFORMATION command allows getting information related to the last
backup performed on the database data.

Pass the type of information to get in selector. You can use one of the following constants,
placed in the “Backup and Restore” theme:
Constant Type Value
Last Backup Date Longint 0
Last Backup Status Longint 2
Next Backup Date Longint 4

The type and content of the info1 and info2 parameters depend on the value of selector.
• If selector = 0 (Last Backup Date), info1 returns the date and info2 the time of the last
backup.
• If selector = 2 (Last Backup Status), info1 returns the number and info2 the text of the
status of the last backup.
• If selector = 4 (Next Backup Date), info1 returns the date and info2 the time of the next
scheduled backup.

See Also
RESTORE.

296 4D Language Reference

GET RESTORE INFORMATION Backup

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET RESTORE INFORMATION (selector; info1; info2)

Parameter Type Description

selector Longint → Type of information to get
info1 Date | Integer ← Value 1 of the selector
info2 Time | String ← Value 2 of the selector

Description
The GET RESTORE INFORMATION command allows getting information related to the last
automatic database restore.

Pass the type of information to get in selector. You can use one of the following constants,
placed in the “Backup and Restore” theme:
Constant Type Value
Last Restore Date Longint 0
Last Restore Status Longint 2

The type and content of the info1 and info2 parameters depend on the value of selector.
• If selector = 0 (Last Restore Date), info1 returns the date and info2 the time of the last
automatic database restore.
• If selector = 2 (Last Restore Status), info1 returns the number and info2 the text of the
status of the last automatic database restore.

Note: This command does not take manual database restores into account.

See Also
RESTORE.

4D Language Reference 297

SELECT LOG FILE Backup

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SELECT LOG FILE (logFile | *)

Parameter Type Description

logFile | * String | * → Name of the log file or
"*" for closing the current log file

Description
The SELECT LOG FILE command creates, or closes the log file according to the value you pass in
logFile.

Note: Calling SELECT LOG FILE is the same as selecting/deselecting the Use Log File option on
the Backup/Configuration page of the application Preferences.

In logFile, pass the name or the full pathname of the log file to be created. If you only pass a
name, the file will be created in the "Logs" folder of the database located next to the database
structure file.
If you pass an empty string in logFile, SELECT LOG FILE presents an Save File dialog box,
allowing the user to choose the name and location of the log file to be created. If the file is
created correctly, the OK variable is set to 1. Otherwise, if the user clicks Cancel or if the log
file could not be created, OK is set to 0.

Note: The new log file is not generated immediately after execution of the command, but
rather after the next backup (the parameter is kept in the data file and will be taken into
account even if the database is closed in the meantime). You can call the BACKUP command to
trigger the creation of the log file.

If you pass "*" in logFile, SELECT LOG FILE closes the current log file for the database. The OK
variable is set to 1 when the log file is closed.

If you use SELECT LOG FILE to create a log file when a full backup has not yet been performed
and the data file already contains records, 4D then generates an error -4447, which you can
intercept with an ON ERR CALL method.

298 4D Language Reference

See Also
ON ERR CALL.

System Variables and Sets

OK is set to 1 if the log file is correctly created, or closed.

Error Handling
An error -4447 is generated if the operation cannot be performed because the database needs
to be backed up. You can intercept the error with an ON ERR CALL method.

4D Language Reference 299

INTEGRATE LOG FILE Backup

version 2004.3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

INTEGRATE LOG FILE (pathName)

Parameter Type Description

pathName Text → Name or pathname of the log file
to be integrated

Preliminary note: This command only works with 4D Server. It can only be executed via the
Execute on server command or in a stored procedure.

Description
The INTEGRATE LOG FILE command integrates the log file, whose name or pathname was
passed in the pathName parameter, into the current database. Afterwards, the file that was
integrated becomes the new current log file of the database. This command is meant to be
used for setting up a backup system using a logical mirror (see the section “Setting up a
logical mirror” in the 4D Server Reference manual).

Only log files that are not filed (extension .journal) can be integrated using this command.
No dialog box appears; but a progress bar is displayed on screen.

In the pathName parameter, you can pass an absolute pathname or one that is relative to
the database folder. If you pass an empty string in this parameter, a standard open file
dialog box will be displayed to allow you to indicate the file to be integrated. If this dialog
box is cancelled, no file will be integrated and the system variable OK is set to 0.

When using this command, it is up to the developer to:

• Install the mirror database on the mirror machine and make sure that the data file will
not be modified other than by the integration of the log file using the INTEGRATE LOG FILE
command. In order to detect whether it is the mirror version of the database, it is possible
to place a file in the 4D Extensions folder or database folder and to test for its presence for
instance during the On Startup database method. If the file is present, the mirror mode is
activated.

• Set up a communication system between the operational database and the mirror
database in order to organize the sending and receiving of the log file segments. To do this,
it is possible to use a Web service or the 4D Internet Commands.

300 4D Language Reference

• Handle any possible transmission errors that may occur between the two databases.

See Also
New log file.

System Variables or Sets

If the integration is carried out correctly, the system variable OK is set to 1; otherwise, it is
set to 0.

Error Handling
In the event of an error, the command generates a code that can be intercepted using the
ON ERR CALL command. If there are any locked records in the database, the command does
nothing and the error 1420 is generated.

4D Language Reference 301

Log File Backup

version 2004.3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Log File → String

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result String ← Long name of the database log file

Description
The Log File command returns the long name (i.e. the complete pathname of the file,
including its name) of the current log file of the open database.

If the database is operating without a log file, the command returns an empty string and
the system variable OK is set to 0.

If the database operates with a log file, the system variable OK is set to 1. The pathname
returned by the command is expressed with the syntax of the current platform.

WARNING: If you execute this command from a 4D Client machine, only the log file name
is returned, not the long name

See Also
SELECT LOG FILE.

System Variables or Sets

If the database is operating without a log file, the system variable OK is set to 0; otherwise,
it is set to 1.

302 4D Language Reference

New log file Backup

version 2004.3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

New log file → Text

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Text ← Full pathname of closed log file

Preliminary note: This command only works with 4D Server. It can only be executed via the
Execute on server command or in a stored procedure.

Description
The New log file command closes the current log file, renames it and creates a new one with
the same name in the same location as the previous one. This command is meant to be
used for setting up a backup system using a logical mirror (see the section “Setting up a
logical mirror” in the 4D Server Reference Manual).

The command returns the full pathname (access path + name) of the log file being closed
(called the “segment”). This file is stored in the same location as the current log file
(specified on the Configuration page in the Backup theme of the Preferences). The
command does not carry out any processing (compression, segmentation) on the saved file.
No dialog box appears.

The file is renamed with the current backup numbers of the database and of the log file, as
shown in the following example: DatabaseName[BackupNum-LogBackupNum].journal. For
instance:
• If the MyDatabase.4DD database has been saved 4 times, the last backup file will be
named MyDatabase[0004].4BK. The name of the first “segment” of the log file will therefore
be MyDatabase[0004-0000].journal.
• If the MyDatabase.4DD database has been saved 3 times and the log file has been saved 5
times since, the name of the 6th backup of the log file will be MyDatabase[0003-
0005].journal.

See Also
INTEGRATE LOG FILE.

Error Handling
In the event of an error, the command generates a code that can be intercepted using the
ON ERR CALL command.

4D Language Reference 303

On Backup Shutdown Database Method Backup

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The On Backup Shutdown Database Method is called every time a database backup ends. The
reasons for the stoppage of a backup can be the end of the copy, user interruption or an
error.
This concerns all 4D environments: 4D (all modes), 4D Server as well as 4D applications
compiled and merged with 4D Volume Desktop.

The On Backup Shutdown Database Method allows verifying that the backup was executed
correctly. It receives, in the $1 parameter, a value representing the status of the backup
once completed:
• If the backup was executed correctly, $1 equals 0.
• If the backup was interrupted by the user or following an error, $1 is different from 0. If
the backup was stopped by the On Backup Startup database method ($0 # 0), $1 gets the
value actually returned in the $0 parameter. This allows you to implement a customized
error management system.
In any case, you can get information about the error using the GET BACKUP INFORMATION
command.

Note: You must declare the $1 parameter (longint) in the database method:
C_LONGINT($1)

See Also
BACKUP, On Backup Startup Database Method.

304 4D Language Reference

On Backup Startup Database Method Backup

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The On Backup Startup Database Method is called every time a database backup is about to
start (manual backup, scheduled automatic backup, or using the BACKUP command).
This concerns all 4D environments: 4D (all modes), 4D Server and databases merged with
4D Volume Desktop.

The On Backup Startup Database Method allows verifying that the backup started. In this
method, you should return a value that authorizes or refuses the backup in the $0
parameter:
• If $0 = 0, the backup can be launched.
• If $0 # 0, the backup is not authorized. The operation is cancelled and an error is
returned. You can get the error using the GET BACKUP INFORMATION command.

You can use this database method to verify backup execution conditions (user, date of the
last backup, etc.).

Note: You must declare the $0 parameter (longint) in the database method:
C_LONGINT($0).

See Also
BACKUP, On Backup Shutdown Database Method.

4D Language Reference 305

RESTORE Backup

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

RESTORE

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
The RESTORE command displays a standard Open file dialog box that can be used by the
user to select an archive to restore.

This command is useful with customized interfaces for managing backups.

Note: In a 4D application that is compiled and merged with 4D Volume Desktop, the
RESTORE command causes the display of a standard open file dialog box that lists by default
any files having the “4BK” extension.

See Also
BACKUP, GET RESTORE INFORMATION.

306 4D Language Reference

6
______________________
BLOB

4D Language Reference 307

308 4D Language Reference
BLOB Commands BLOB

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Definition
4D supports the BLOB (Binary Large OBjects) data type.

You can define BLOB fields and BLOB variables:

• To create a BLOB field, select BLOB in the Field type drop-down-list within the Field
Properties window.
• To create a BLOB variable, use the compiler declaration command C_BLOB. You can create
local, process, and interprocess variables of type BLOB.

Note: There is no array for BLOBs.

Within 4D, a BLOB is a contiguous series of variable length bytes, which can be treated as one
whole object or whose bytes can be addressed individually. A BLOB can be empty (null length)
or can contain up to 2147483647 bytes (2 GB).

BLOBs and Memory

A BLOB is loaded into memory in its entirety. A BLOB variable is held and exists in memory
only. A BLOB field is loaded into memory from the disk, like the rest of the record to which it
belongs.

Like the other field types that can retain a large amount of data (Picture and subtable field
types), BLOB fields are not duplicated in memory when you modify a record. Consequently,
the result returned by the commands Old and Modified is not significant when applied to a
BLOB field.

Displaying BLOBs
A BLOB can retain any type of data, so it has no default representation on the screen. If you
display a BLOB field or variable in a form, it will always appear blank, whatever its contents.

BLOB fields
You can use BLOB fields to store any kind of data, up to 2 GB. You cannot index a BLOB field,
so you must use a formula in order to search records on values stored in a BLOB field.

4D Language Reference 309

Parameter passing, Pointers and function results
4D BLOBs can be passed as parameters to 4D commands or plug-in routines that expect a
BLOB parameters. BLOBS can also be passed as parameters to a user method or be returned as a
function result.

To pass a BLOB to your own methods, you can also define a pointer to the BLOB and pass the
pointer as parameter.
Examples:
` Declare a variable of type BLOB
C_BLOB (anyBlobVar)
` The BLOB is passed as parameter to a 4D command
SET BLOB SIZE (anyBlobVar;1024*1024)
` The BLOB is passed as parameter to an external routine
$errCode:= Do Something With This BLOB (anyBlobVar)
` The BLOB is passed as a parameter to a method that returns a BLOB
C_BLOB (retrieveBlob)
retrieveBlob:=Fill_Blob (anyBlobVar)
` A pointer to the BLOB is passed as parameter to a user method
COMPUTE BLOB (->anyBlobVar )

Note for Plug-in developers: A BLOB parameter is declared as “&O” (the letter “O”, not the
digit “0”).

Assignment
You can assign BLOBs to each other.
Example:
` Declare two variables of type BLOB
C_BLOB (vBlobA;vBlobB)
` Set the size of the first BLOB to 10K
SET BLOB SIZE (vBlobA;10*1024)
` Assign the first BLOB to the second one
vBlobB:=vBlobA

However, no operator can be applied to BLOBs; there is no expression of type BLOB.

310 4D Language Reference

Addressing BLOB contents
You can address each byte of a BLOB individually using the curly brackets symbols {...}.
Within a BLOB, bytes are numbered from 0 to N-1, where N is the size of the BLOB. Example:
` Declare a variable of type BLOB
C_BLOB (vBlob)
` Set the size of the BLOB to 256 bytes
SET BLOB SIZE (vBlob;256)
` The loop below initializes the 256 bytes of the BLOB to zero
For ( vByte ; 0 ; BLOB size (vBlob)-1)
vBlob{vByte}:=0
End for

Because you can address all the bytes of a BLOB individually, you can actually store whatever
you want in a BLOB field or variable.

BLOBs 4D commands
4D provides the following commands for working BLOBS:

• SET BLOB SIZE resizes a BLOB field or variable.

• BLOB size returns the size of a BLOB.
• DOCUMENT TO BLOB and BLOB TO DOCUMENT enable you to load and write a whole
document to and from a BLOB (optionally, the data and resource forks on Macintosh).
• VARIABLE TO BLOB and BLOB TO VARIABLE as well as LIST TO BLOB and BLOB to list allow you
to store and retrieve 4D variables in BLOBs.
• COMPRESS BLOB, EXPAND BLOB and BLOB PROPERTIES allow you to work with compressed
BLOBs
• The commands BLOB to integer, BLOB to longint, BLOB to real, BLOB to text, INTEGER TO
BLOB, LONGINT TO BLOB, REAL TO BLOB and TEXT TO BLOB enable you to manipulate any
structured data coming from disk, resources, OS, and so on.
• DELETE FROM BLOB, INSERT IN BLOB and COPY BLOB allow quick handling of large chunks of
data within BLOBs.
• ENCRYPT BLOB and DECRYPT BLOB allow you to encrypt and decrypt data in a 4D database.

These commands are described in this chapter.

4D Language Reference 311

In addition:

• C_BLOB declares a variable of type BLOB. Refer to the Compiler chapter for more
information.
• GET PASTEBOARD DATA and APPEND DATA TO PASTEBOARD enable you to deal with any data
type stored in the pasteboard. Refer to the Managing Pasteboards section for more information.
• GET RESOURCE and SET RESOURCE enable you to work with any type stored of resource stored
on disk. Refer to the Resources chapter for more information.
• SEND HTML BLOB enable you to send any type of data to a Web browser. Refer to the Web
Server chapter for more information.
• PICTURE TO BLOB, BLOB TO PICTURE and PICTURE TO GIF allow you to open and convert
pictures. Refer to the Pictures chapter for more information.
• GENERATE ENCRYPTION KEYPAIR and GENERATE CERTIFICATE REQUEST are encryption
commands used by the SSL (Secured Socket Layer) secured connection protocol. Refer to the
Secured Protocol chapter for more information.

312 4D Language Reference

BLOB PROPERTIES BLOB

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

BLOB PROPERTIES (blob; compressed{; expandedSize{; currentSize}})

Parameter Type Description

blob BLOB → BLOB for which to get information
compressed Number ← 0 = BLOB is not compressed
1 = BLOB compressed compact
2 = BLOB compressed fast
expandedSize Number ← Size of BLOB (in bytes) when not compressed
currentSize Number ← Current size of BLOB (in bytes)

Description
The BLOB PROPERTIES command returns information about the BLOB blob.

• The compressed parameter tells whether or not the BLOB is compressed, and returns one of
the following values. Note: 4D provides the predefined constants.

Constant Type Value

Is not compressed Long Integer 0
Compact compression mode Long Integer 1
Fast compression mode Long Integer 2

• Whatever the compression status of the BLOB, the expandedSize parameter returns the size
of the BLOB when it is not compressed.

• The parameter currentSize returns the current size of the BLOB. If the BLOB is compressed,
you will usually obtain currentSize less than expandedSize. If the BLOB is not compressed, you
will always obtain currentSize equal to expandedSize.

Examples
1. See examples for the commands COMPRESS BLOB and EXPAND BLOB.

4D Language Reference 313

2. After a BLOB has been compressed, the following project method obtains the percentage of
space saved by the compression:
` Space saved by compression project method
` Space saved by compression (Pointer {; Pointer } ) -> Long
` Space saved by compression ( -> BLOB {; -> savedBytes } ) -> Percentage

C_POINTER ($1;$2)
C_LONGINT ($0;$vlCompressed;$vlExpandedSize;$vlCurrentSize)

BLOB PROPERTIES ($1->;$vlCompressed;$vlExpandedSize;$vlCurrentSize)

If ($vlExpandedSize=0)
$0:=0
If (Count parameters>=2)
$2->:=0
End if
Else
$0:=100-(($vlCurrentSize/$vlExpandedSize)*100)
If (Count parameters>=2)
$2->:=$vlExpandedSize-$vlCurrentSize
End if
End if

After this method has been added to your application, you can use it this way:
` ...
COMPRESS BLOB (vxBlob)
$vlPercent:=Space saved by compression (->vxBlob;->vlBlobSize)
ALERT ("The compression saved "+String (vlBlobSize)+" bytes, so "+String ($vlPercent;
"#0%")+" of space.")

See Also
COMPRESS BLOB, EXPAND BLOB.

314 4D Language Reference

BLOB size BLOB

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

BLOB size (blob) → Longint

Parameter Type Description

blob BLOB → BLOB field or variable

Function result Longint ← Size in bytes of the BLOB

Description
BLOB size returns the size of blob expressed in bytes.

Examples
The line of code adds 100 bytes to the BLOB myBlob:
SET BLOB SIZE (BLOB size(myBlob)+100)

See Also
SET BLOB SIZE.

4D Language Reference 315

BLOB TO DOCUMENT BLOB

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

BLOB TO DOCUMENT (document; blob{; *})

Parameter Type Description

document String → Name of the document
blob BLOB → New contents for the document
* * → On Macintosh only:
Resource fork is written if * is passed;
otherwise, Data fork is written

Description
BLOB TO DOCUMENT rewrites the whole contents of document using the data stored in blob.
You can pass the name of a document in document. If the document does not exist, the
command creates it. If you pass the name of an existing document, make sure that it is not
already open, otherwise an error is generated. If you want to let the user choose the document,
use the commands Open document or Create document and use the process variable document
(see example).

Notes regarding Macintosh:

- Macintosh documents can be composed of two forks: the Data fork and the Resource fork. By
default, the command BLOB TO DOCUMENT rewrites the Data fork of the document. To
rewrite the Resource fork of the document instead, pass the optional * parameter. On
Windows, the optional * parameter is ignored.
- The documents generated by this command do not have a "type". If you want to create a
document with a type, you must use the SET DOCUMENT TYPE command.

Example
You write an Information System that enables you to quickly store and retrieve documents. In
a data entry form, you create a button which allows you to save a document that will contain
the data previously loaded into a BLOB field. The method for this button could be:
$vhDocRef:=Create document("") ` Save the document of your choice
If (OK=1) ` If a document has been created
CLOSE DOCUMENT($vhDocRef) ` We don't need to keep it open
` Write the document contents
BLOB TO DOCUMENT (Document;[YourTable]YourBLOBField)

316 4D Language Reference

 If (OK=0)
` Handle error
End if
End if

See Also
Create document, DOCUMENT TO BLOB, Open document.

System Variables
OK is set to 1 if the document is correctly written, otherwise OK is set to 0 and an error is
generated.

Error Handling
• If you try to rewrite a document that does not exist or that is already open by another
process or application, the appropriate File Manager error is generated.
• The disk space may be insufficient for writing the new contents of the document.
• I/O errors can occur while writing the document.
In all cases, you can trap the error using an ON ERR CALL interruption method.

4D Language Reference 317

BLOB to integer BLOB

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

BLOB to integer (blob; byteOrder{; offset}) → Number

Parameter Type Description

blob BLOB → BLOB from which to get the integer value
byteOrder Number → 0 Native byte ordering
1 Macintosh byte ordering
2 PC byte ordering
offset Variable → Offset within the BLOB (expressed in bytes)
← New offset after reading

Function result Number ← 2-byte Integer value

Description
The BLOB to integer command returns a 2-byte Integer value read from the BLOB blob.

The byteOrder parameter fixes the byte ordering of the 2-byte Integer value to be read. You
pass one of the following predefined constants provided by 4D:

Constant Type Value

Native byte ordering Long Integer 0
Macintosh byte ordering Long Integer 1
PC byte ordering Long Integer 2

Note regarding Platform Independence: If you exchange BLOBs between Macintosh and PC
platforms, it is up to you to manage byte swapping issues when using this command.

If you specify the optional offset variable parameter, the 2-byte Integer value is read at the
offset (starting from zero) within the BLOB. If you do not specify the optional offset variable
parameter, the first two bytes of the BLOB are read.

Note: You should pass an offset (in bytes) value between 0 (zero) and the size of the BLOB
minus 2. If you do not do so, an error -111 is generated.

After the call, the variable is incremented by the number of bytes read, Therefore, you can
reuse that same variable with another BLOB reading command to read another value.

318 4D Language Reference

Example
The following example reads 20 Integer values from a BLOB, starting at the offset 0x200:

$vlOffset:=0x200
For ($viLoop;0;19)
$viValue:=BLOB to integer(vxSomeBlob;PC byte ordering;$vlOffset)
` Do something with $viValue
End for

See Also
BLOB to longint, BLOB to real, BLOB to text, INTEGER TO BLOB, LONGINT TO BLOB, REAL TO
BLOB, TEXT TO BLOB.

4D Language Reference 319

BLOB to list BLOB

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

BLOB to list (blob{; offset}) → ListRef

Parameter Type Description

blob BLOB → BLOB containing a hierarchical list
offset Number → Offset within the BLOB (expressed in bytes)
← New offset after reading

Function result ListRef ← Reference to newly created list

Description
The BLOB to list command creates a new hierarchical list with the data stored within the BLOB
blob at the byte offset (starting at zero) specified by offset and returns a List Reference number
for that new list.

The BLOB data must be consistent with the command. Typically, you will use BLOBs that you
previously filled out using the command LIST TO BLOB.

If you do not specify the optional offset parameter, the list data is read starting from the
beginning of the BLOB. If you deal with a BLOB in which several variables or lists have been
stored, you must pass the offset parameter and, in addition, you must pass a numeric variable.
Before the call, set this numeric variable to the appropriate offset. After the call, that same
numeric variable returns the offset of the next variable stored within the BLOB.

After the call, if the hierarchical list has been successfully created, the OK variable is set to 1. If
the operation could not be performed, the OK variable is set to 0; for example, if there was not
enough memory.

Note regarding Platform Independence: BLOB to list and LIST TO BLOB use a 4D internal
format for handling lists stored in BLOBs. As a benefit, you do not need to worry about byte
swapping between platforms when using these two commands. In other words, a BLOB
created on Windows using those two commands can be reused on Macintosh and vice-versa.

320 4D Language Reference

Example
In this example, the form method for a data entry form extracts a list from a BLOB field before
the form appears on the screen, and stores it back to the BLOB field if the data entry is
validated:

` [Things To Do];"Input" Form Method

Case of

: (Form event=On Load)

hList:=BLOB to list([Things To Do]Other Crazy Ideas)
If (OK=0)
hList:=New list
End if

: (Form event=On Unload)

CLEAR LIST(hList;*)

: (bValidate=1)
LIST TO BLOB(hList;[Things To Do]Other Crazy Ideas)

End case

See Also
LIST TO BLOB.

System Variables and Sets

The OK variable is set to 1 if the list has been successfully created, otherwise it is set to 0.

4D Language Reference 321

BLOB to longint BLOB

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

BLOB to longint (blob; byteOrder{; offset}) → Number

Parameter Type Description

blob BLOB → BLOB from which to get the Long Integer value
byteOrder Number → 0 Native byte ordering
1 Macintosh byte ordering
2 PC byte ordering
offset Variable → Offset within the BLOB (expressed in bytes)
← New offset after reading

Function result Number ← 4-byte Long Integer value

Description
The BLOB to longint command returns a 4-byte Long Integer value read from the BLOB blob.

The byteOrder parameter fixes the byte ordering of the 4-byte Long Integer value to be read.
You pass one of the following predefined constants provided by 4D:

Constant Type Value

Native byte ordering Long Integer 0
Macintosh byte ordering Long Integer 1
PC byte ordering Long Integer 2

Note regarding Platform Independence: If you exchange BLOBs between Macintosh and PC
platforms, it is up to you to manage byte swapping issues while using this command.

If you specify the optional offset variable parameter, the 4-byte Long Integer is read at the
offset (starting from zero) within the BLOB. If you do not specify the optional offset variable
parameter, the first four bytes of the BLOB are read.

Note: You should pass an offset value between 0 (zero) and the size of the BLOB minus 4. If
you do not do so, an error -111 is generated.

After the call, the variable is incremented by the number of bytes read. Therefore, you can
reuse that same variable with another BLOB reading command to read another value.

322 4D Language Reference

Example
The following example reads 20 Long Integer values from a BLOB, starting at the offset 0x200:

$vlOffset:=0x200
For ($viLoop;0;19)
$vlValue:=BLOB to longint(vxSomeBlob;PC byte ordering;$vlOffset)
` Do something with $vlValue
End for

See Also
BLOB to integer, BLOB to real, BLOB to text, INTEGER TO BLOB, LONGINT TO BLOB, REAL TO
BLOB, TEXT TO BLOB.

4D Language Reference 323

BLOB to real BLOB

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

BLOB to real (blob; realFormat{; offset}) → Real

Parameter Type Description

blob BLOB → BLOB from which to get the Real value
realFormat Number → 0 Native real format
1 Extended real format
2 Macintosh Double real format
3 Windows Double real format
offset Variable → Offset within the BLOB (expressed in bytes)
← New offset after reading

Function result Real ← Real value

Description
The BLOB to real command returns a Real value read from the BLOB blob.

The realFormat parameter fixes the internal format and byte ordering of the Real value to be
read. You pass one of the following predefined constants provided by 4D:

Constant Type Value

Native real format Long Integer 0
Extended real format Long Integer 1
Macintosh double real format Long Integer 2
PC double real format Long Integer 3

Note regarding Platform Independence: If you exchange BLOBs between Macintosh and PC
platforms, it is up to you to manage real formats and byte swapping issues while using this
command.

If you specify the optional offset variable parameter, the Read value is read at the offset
(starting from zero) within the BLOB. If you do not specify the optional offset variable
parameter, the first 8 or 10 bytes of the BLOB are read.

Note: You should pass an offset value between 0 (zero) and the size of the BLOB minus 8 or
10. If you do not do so, an error -111 is generated.

324 4D Language Reference

After the call, the variable is incremented by the number of bytes read. Therefore, you can
reuse that same variable with another BLOB reading command to read another value.

Example
The following example reads 20 Real values from a BLOB, starting at the offset 0x200:
$vlOffset:=0x200
For ($viLoop;0;19)
$vrValue:=BLOB to real(vxSomeBlob;PC byte ordering;$vlOffset)
` Do something with $vrValue
End for

See Also
BLOB to integer, BLOB to longint, BLOB to text, INTEGER TO BLOB, LONGINT TO BLOB, REAL TO
BLOB, TEXT TO BLOB.

4D Language Reference 325

BLOB to text BLOB

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

BLOB to text (blob; textFormat{; offset{; textLength}}) → Text

Parameter Type Description

blob BLOB → BLOB from which to get the text
textFormat Number → Format and character set of text
offset Variable → Offset within the BLOB (expressed in bytes)
← New offset after reading
textLength Number → Number of characters to be read

Function result Text ← Text extracted

Description
The BLOB to text command returns a Text value read from the BLOB blob.

The textFormat parameter fixes the internal format and character set of the text value to be
read. In databases created beginning with version 11, 4D uses the Unicode character set (UTF8)
by default for managing text. For the sake of compatibility, this command can be used to
“force” conversion using the Mac Roman character set (used in previous versions of 4D). The
character set is chosen via the textFormat parameter. To do this, pass one of the following
constants (found in the“BLOB” theme) in the textFormat parameter:

Constant Type Value

Mac C string Long Integer 0
Mac Pascal string Long Integer 1
Mac Text with length Long Integer 2
Mac Text without length Long Integer 3
UTF8 C string Long Integer 4
UTF8 Text with length Long Integer 5
UTF8 Text without length Long Integer 6

Notes:
• The “UTF8” constants can only be used when the application runs in Unicode mode.
• The “Mac” constants cannot work with texts greater than 32 KB.
• If you want to work with character sets other than UTF8, use the Convert to text command.

326 4D Language Reference

For more information about these constants and the formats they represent, please refer to the
description of the TEXT TO BLOB command.

WARNING: The number of characters to be read is determined by the textFormat parameter,

EXCEPT for the formats Mac Text without length andUTF8 Text without length, for which you
MUST specify the number of characters to be read in the parameter textLength. For the other
formats, textLength is ignored and you can omit it.

If you specify the optional offset variable parameter, the Text value is read at the offset
(starting from zero) within the BLOB. If you do not specify the optional offset variable
parameter, the beginning of the BLOB is read according to the value you pass in textFormat.
Note that you must pass the offset variable parameter when you are reading text without
length.

Note: You should pass an offset value between 0 (zero) and the size of the BLOB minus the
size of the text to be read. If you do not do so, the function result is unpredictable.

After the call, the variable is incremented by the number of bytes read. Therefore, you can
reuse that same variable with another BLOB reading command to read another value.

See Also
BLOB to integer, BLOB to longint, BLOB to real, INTEGER TO BLOB, LONGINT TO BLOB, REAL TO
BLOB, TEXT TO BLOB.

4D Language Reference 327

BLOB TO VARIABLE BLOB

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

BLOB TO VARIABLE (blob; variable{; offset})

Parameter Type Description

blob BLOB → BLOB containing 4D variables
variable Variable ← Variable to write with BLOB contents
offset Number → Position of variable within BLOB
← Position of following variable within BLOB

Description
The BLOB TO VARIABLE command rewrites the variable variable with the data stored within the
BLOB blob at the byte offset (starting at zero) specified by offset.

The BLOB data must be consistent with the destination variable. Typically, you will use BLOBs
that you previously filled out using the command VARIABLE TO BLOB.

If you do not specify the optional offset parameter, the variable data is read starting from the
beginning of the BLOB. If you deal with a BLOB in which several variables have been stored,
you must pass the offset parameter and, in addition, you must pass a numeric variable. Before
the call, set this numeric variable to the appropriate offset. After the call, that same numeric
variable returns the offset of the next variable stored within the BLOB.

After the call, if the variable has been successfully rewritten, the OK variable is set to 1. If the
operation could not be performed, the OK variable is set to 0; for example, if there was not
enough memory.

Note regarding Platform Independence: BLOB TO VARIABLE and VARIABLE TO BLOB use a 4D
internal format for handling variables stored in BLOBs. As a benefit, you do not need to worry
about byte swapping between platforms while using these two commands. In other words, a
BLOB created on Windows using either of these commands can be reused on Macintosh, and
vice-versa.

328 4D Language Reference

Example
See the examples for the command VARIABLE TO BLOB.

See Also
VARIABLE TO BLOB.

System Variables or Sets

The OK variable is set to 1 if the variable has been successfully rewritten, otherwise it is set to
0.

4D Language Reference 329

COMPRESS BLOB BLOB

version 6.5.3 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

COMPRESS BLOB (blob{; compression})

Parameter Type Description

blob BLOB → BLOB to compress
compression Number → If not omitted:
1, compress as compact as possible
2, compress as fast as possible

Description
The COMPRESS BLOB command compresses the BLOB blob using the internal 4D compression
algorithm. This command only compresses BLOB whose size is over 255 bytes.

The optional compression parameter allows to set the way the BLOB will be compressed:
• If you pass 1, the BLOB is compressed as much as possible, at the expanse of the speed of
compression and decompression operations.
• If you pass 2, the BLOB is compressed as fast as possible (and will be decompressed as fast as
possible), at the expense of the compression ratio (the compressed BLOB will be bigger).
• If you pass another value or if you omit the parameter, the BLOB is compressed as much as
possible, using the compression mode 1.

4D provides the following predefined constants:

Constant Type Value

Compact compression mode Long Integer 1
Fast compression mode Long Integer 2

After the call, the OK variable is set to 1 if the BLOB has been successfully compressed. If the
compression could not be performed, the OK variable is set to 0. If the compression could not
be performed because of a lack of memory or because the actual size of the blob is less than
255 bytes, no error is generated and the method resumes its execution.
In any other cases (i.e. the BLOB is damaged), the error -10600 is generated. This error can be
trapped using the ON ERR CALL command.

After a BLOB has been compressed, you can expand it using the EXPAND BLOB command.

330 4D Language Reference

To detect if a BLOB has been compressed, use the BLOB PROPERTIES command.

WARNING: A compressed BLOB is still a BLOB, so there is nothing to stop you from modifying
its contents. However, if you do so, the EXPAND BLOB command will not be able to
decompress the BLOB properly.

Examples
1. This example tests if the BLOB vxMyBlob is compressed, and, if it is not, compresses it:
BLOB PROPERTIES (vxMyBlob;$vlCompressed;$vlExpandedSize;$vlCurrentSize)
If ($vlCompressed=Is not compressed)
COMPRESS BLOB (vxMyBlob)
End if

Note however, that if you apply COMPRESS BLOB to an already compressed BLOB, the
command detects it and does nothing.

2. This example allows you to select a document and then compress it:
$vhDocRef := Open document ("")
If (OK=1)
CLOSE DOCUMENT ($vhDocRef)
DOCUMENT TO BLOB (Document;vxBlob)
If (OK=1)
COMPRESS BLOB (vxBlob)
If (OK=1)
BLOB TO DOCUMENT (Document;vxBlob)
End if
End if
End if

See Also
BLOB PROPERTIES, EXPAND BLOB.

System Variables or Sets

The OK variable is set to 1 if the BLOB has been successfully compressed; otherwise, it is set to
0.

4D Language Reference 331

COPY BLOB BLOB

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

COPY BLOB (srcBLOB; dstBLOB; srcOffset; dstOffset; len)

Parameter Type Description

srcBLOB BLOB → Source BLOB
dstBLOB BLOB → Destination BLOB
srcOffset Number → Source position for the copy
dstOffset Number → Destination position for the copy
len Number → Number of bytes to be copied

Description
The COPY BLOB command copies the number of bytes specified by len from the BLOB srcBLOB
to the BLOB dstBLOB.

The copy starts at the position (expressed relative to the beginning of the source BLOB)
specified by srcOffset and takes place at the position (expressed relative to the beginning of the
destination BLOB) specified by dstOffset.

Note: The destination BLOB can be resized if necessary.

See Also
DELETE FROM BLOB, INSERT IN BLOB.

332 4D Language Reference

DECRYPT BLOB BLOB

version 6.7
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DECRYPT BLOB (toDecrypt; sendPubKey{; recipPrivKey})

Parameter Type Description

toDecrypt BLOB → Data to decrypt
← Decrypted data
sendPubKey BLOB → Sender’s public key
recipPrivKey BLOB → Recipient’s private key

Description
The DECRYPT BLOB command decrypts the content of the BLOB toDecrypt using the sender’s
public key sendPubKey and, optionally, the recipient’s private key recipPrivKey.

The BLOB containing the sender’s public key is passed in the sendPubKey parameter. This key
has been generated by the sender using the GENERATE ENCRYPTION KEYPAIR command and it
has to be sent to the recipient.

The BLOB containing the recipient’s private key can be passed in the optional parameter
recipPrivKey. In this case, the recipient has to generate a pair of encryption keys with the
GENERATE ENCRYPTION KEYPAIR command and has to send his/her public key to the sender.
The keypair-based encryption system guarantees that the message has been encrypted by the
sender only and it can be decrypted by the recipient only. For more information about the
keypair-based encryption system, refer to the routine ENCRYPT BLOB.

The command DECRYPT BLOB offers a checksum functionality in order to avoid any BLOB
content modification (deliberate or not). If the encrypted BLOB is damaged or modified, the
command will do nothing and an error will be returned.

Example
Refer to the examples given for the ENCRYPT BLOB command.

See Also
ENCRYPT BLOB, GENERATE ENCRYPTION KEYPAIR.

4D Language Reference 333

DELETE FROM BLOB BLOB

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DELETE FROM BLOB (blob; offset; len)

Parameter Type Description

blob BLOB → BLOB from which to delete bytes
offset Number → Starting offset where bytes will be deleted
len Number → Number of bytes to be deleted

Description
The DELETE FROM BLOB command deletes the number of bytes specified by len from the BLOB
blob at the position specified by offset (expressed relative to the beginning of the BLOB). The
BLOB then becomes len bytes smaller.

See Also
INSERT IN BLOB.

334 4D Language Reference

DOCUMENT TO BLOB BLOB

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DOCUMENT TO BLOB (document; blob{; *})

Parameter Type Description

document String → Name of the document
blob BLOB → BLOB field or variable to receive the document
← Document contents
* * → On Macintosh only:
Resource fork is loaded if * is passed
otherwise Data fork is loaded

Description
DOCUMENT TO BLOB loads the whole contents of document into blob. You must pass the
name of an existing document that is not already open, otherwise an error will be generated.
To let the user choose the document to be loaded into the BLOB, use the command Open
document and the process variable document (see Example).

Note regarding Macintosh: Macintosh documents can be composed of two forks: the Data fork
and the Resource fork. By default, the command DOCUMENT TO BLOB loads the Data fork of
the document. To load the Resource fork of the document instead, pass the optional *
parameter. On Windows, the optional * parameter is ignored. Note that the 4D environment
provides the equivalent of Mac OS resource forks on Windows. For example, the data fork of a
4D database is stored in a file with the file extension .4DB; the resource fork is stored in a file
with the same name and the file extension .RSR. On Windows, if you write a 4D application
with the data fork and resource fork stored in BLOBs, you just need to access the file
corresponding to the fork with which you want to work.

4D Language Reference 335

Example
You write an Information System that enables you to quickly store and retrieve documents. In
a data entry form, you create a button that allows you to load a document into a BLOB field.
The method for this button could be:
$vhDocRef:=Open document("") ` Select the document of your choice
If (OK=1) ` If a document has been chosen
CLOSE DOCUMENT($vhDocRef) ` We don't need to keep it open
DOCUMENT TO BLOB (Document;[YourTable]YourBLOBField) ` Load the document
If (OK=0)
` Handle error
End if
End if

See Also
BLOB TO DOCUMENT, Open document.

System Variables
OK is set to 1 if the document is correctly loaded, otherwise OK is set to 0 and an error is
generated.

Error Handling
• If you try to load (into a BLOB) a document that does not exist or that is already open by
another process or application, the appropriate File Manager error is generated.
• An I/O error can occur if the document is locked, located on a locked volume, or if there is
problem in reading the document.
• If there is not enough memory to load the document, an error -108 is generated.

In each case, you can trap the error using an ON ERR CALL interruption method.

336 4D Language Reference

ENCRYPT BLOB BLOB

version 6.7
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

ENCRYPT BLOB (toEncrypt; sendPrivKey{; recipPubKey})

Parameter Type Description

toEncrypt BLOB → Data to encrypt
← Encrypted data
sendPrivKey BLOB → Sender’s private key
recipPubKey BLOB → Recipient’s public key

Description
The ENCRYPT BLOB command encrypts the content of the toEncrypt BLOB with the sender’s
private key sendPrivKey, as well as optionally the recipient’s public key recipPubKey. These keys
should be generated by the command GENERATE ENCRYPTION KEYPAIR (within the “Secured
Protocol” theme).

Note: This command uses the SSL protocol algorithm and encryption features. To be able to
use this command, make sure that the components necessary to the SSL protocol are installed
properly on your machine — even though you do not want to use SSL for 4D Web server
connections. For detailed information on this protocol, please refer to section Web Services,
Using SSL Protocol.

• If one key is used for the encryption (the sender’s private key), only people in possession of
the public key will be able to read the information. This system guarantees that the sender
himself has encrypted the information.
• The simultaneous use of the sender’s private key and recipient’s public key guarantees that
only one recipient will be able to read the information.

The BLOB containing the keys has a PKCS internal format. This standard cross platform
format allows exchanging or handling keys simply by copy-pasting in an Email or a text file.

Once the command has been run, the toEncrypt BLOB contains the encrypted data that will be
decrypted only with the DECRYPT BLOB command, with the sender’s public key passed as
parameter.
Moreover, if the optional recipient’s public key has been used to encrypt the information, the
recipient’s private key will also be necessary for decrypting.

4D Language Reference 337

Encryption principle with public and private keys for message exchange between two people,
“Alice” and “Bob”:

Note: The cipher contains a checksum functionality in order to avoid any BLOB content
modification (deliberately or not). Consequently, an encrypted BLOB should not be modified
otherwise it might not be decrypted.

Optimizing Encryption Commands

Data encryption slows down the execution of your applications, especially if a pair of keys is
used. However, you can consider the following optimization tips:
• Depending on the current available memory, the command will execute in “synchronous”
or “asynchronous” mode.
The asynchronous mode is faster, since it does not freeze the other processes. This mode is
automatically used if the available memory is at least twice the size of the data to encrypt.
Otherwise, for security reasons, the synchronous mode is used. This mode is slower since it
freezes the other processes.
• Regarding large BLOBs, you can encrypt only a small “strategic” part of the BLOB in order to
reduce the size of data to be processed as well as the processing time.

338 4D Language Reference

Examples
• Using a single key
A company wants to keep the data stored in a 4D database private. It has to regularly send
these information to its subsidiaries through files, via the Internet.

1. The company generates a pair of keys with the command GENERATE ENCRYPTION KEYPAIR:

`Method GENERATE_KEYS_TXT
C_BLOB($BPublicKey; $BPrivateKey)
GENERATE ENCRYPTION KEYPAIR($BPrivateKey; $BPublicKey)
BLOB TO DOCUMENT("PublicKey.txt"; $BPublicKey)
BLOB TO DOCUMENT("PrivateKey.txt"; $BPrivateKey)

2. The company keeps the private key and sends a copy of the document containing the
public key to each subsidiary. For maximum security, the key should be copied on a disk
handed over to the subsidiaries.

3. Then the company copies the private information (stored in the text field, for example) in
BLOBs which will be encrypted with the private key:

`Method ENCRYPT_INFO
C_BLOB($vbEncrypted;$vbPrivateKey)
C_TEXT($vtEncrypted)

$vtEncrypted:=[Private]Info
VARIABLE TO BLOB ($vtEncrypted;$vbEncrypted)
DOCUMENT TO BLOB("PrivateKey.txt"; $vbPrivateKey)
If(OK=1)
ENCRYPT BLOB ($vbEncrypted; $vbPrivateKey)
BLOB TO DOCUMENT ("Update.txt";$vbEncrypted)
End if

4. The update files can be sent to the subsidiaries (though a non-secured channel such as the
Internet). If a third person gets hold of the encrypted file, he will not be able to decrypt it
without the public key.

4D Language Reference 339

5. Each subsidiary can decrypt the document with the public key:

`Method DECRYPT_INFO
C_BLOB($vbEncrypted;$vbPublicKey)
C_TEXT($vtDecrytped)
C_TIME ($vtDocRef)

ALERT ("Please select an encrypted document.")

$vtDocRef:=Open document("") `Select Update.txt
If (OK=1)
CLOSE DOCUMENT($vtDocRef)
DOCUMENT TO BLOB(Document;$vbEncrypted)
DOCUMENT TO BLOB("PublicKey.txt"; $vbPublicKey)
If (OK=1)
DECRYPT BLOB ($vbEncrypted; $vbPublicKey)
BLOB TO VARIABLE($vbEncrypted; $vtDecrypted)
CREATE RECORD ([Private])
[Private]Info:=$vtDecrypted
SAVE RECORD([Private])
End if
End if

• Using keypairs
A company wants to use the Internet to exchange information. Each subsidiary receives
private information and also sends information to the corporate office. Consequently there are
two requirements:
- The recipient only should be able to read the message,
- The recipient must have proof that the message was sent by the sender himself.

1. The corporate office and each subsidiary generate their own key pairs (with the
GENERATE_KEYS_TXT method).

2. The private key is kept secret by both sides. Each subsidiary sends its public key to the
corporate office who, in its turn, sends its public key too. This key transfer does not need to be
done through a secured channel as the public key is not enough to decrypt the message.

340 4D Language Reference

3. To encrypt the information to send, the subsidiary or the corporate house executes the
ENCRYPT_INFO_2 method which uses the sender’s private key and the recipient’s public key to
encrypt the information:

`Method ENCRYPT_INFO_2
C_BLOB($vbEncrypted;$vbPrivateKey;$vbPublicKey)
C_TEXT($vtEncrypt)
C_TIME ($vtDocRef)

$vtEncrypt:= [Private]Info
VARIABLE TO BLOB ($vtEncrypt;$vbEncrypted)
` Your own private key is loaded...
DOCUMENT TO BLOB("PrivateKey.txt"; $vbPrivateKey)
If (OK=1)
` ...and the recipient’s public key
ALERT ("Please select the recipient’s public key.")
$vhDocRef:=Open document("") `Public key to load
If (OK=1)
CLOSE DOCUMENT($vtDocRef)
DOCUMENT TO BLOB(Document;$vbPublicKey)
`BLOB encryption with the two keys as parameters
ENCRYPT BLOB ($vbEncrypted; $vbPrivateKey; $vbPublicKey)
BLOB TO DOCUMENT ("Update.txt";$vbEncrypted)
End if
End if

4. The encrypted file can then be sent to the recipient via the Internet. If a third person gets
hold of it, he or she will not be able to decrypt the message, even if he or she has the public
keys as the recipient’s private key will also be required.

5. Each recipient can decrypt the document by using his/her own private key and the sender’s
public key:

`Method DECRYPT_INFO_2
C_BLOB($vbEncrypted;$vbPublicKey;$vbPrivateKey)
C_TEXT($vtDecrypted)
C_TIME ($vhDocRef)

4D Language Reference 341

 ALERT ("Please select the encrypted document.")
$vhDocRef:=Open document("") `Select the Update.txt file
If (OK=1)
CLOSE DOCUMENT($vhDocRef)
DOCUMENT TO BLOB(Document;$vbEncrypted)
`Your own private key is loaded
DOCUMENT TO BLOB("PrivateKey.txt"; $vbPrivateKey)
If (OK=1)
` ...and the sender’s public key
ALERT ("Please select the sender’s public key.")
$vhDocRef:=Open document("") `Public key to load
If (OK=1)
CLOSE DOCUMENT($vhDocRef)
DOCUMENT TO BLOB(Document;$vbPublicKey)
`Decrypting the BLOB with two keys as parameters
DECRYPT BLOB ($vbEncrypted; $vbPublicKey;$vbPrivateKey)
BLOB TO VARIABLE($vbEncrypted; $vtDecrypted)
CREATE RECORD ([Private])
[Private]Info:=$vtDecrypted
SAVE RECORD([Private])
End if
End if
End if

See Also
DECRYPT BLOB, GENERATE ENCRYPTION KEYPAIR.

342 4D Language Reference

EXPAND BLOB BLOB

version 6.5.3 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

EXPAND BLOB (blob)

Parameter Type Description

blob BLOB → BLOB to expand

Description
The EXPAND BLOB command expands the BLOB blob that was previously compressed using
the COMPRESS BLOB command.

After the call, the OK variable is set to 1 if the BLOB has been expanded. If the expansion
could not be performed, the OK variable is set to 0.

If the expansion could not be performed because of a lack of memory, no error is generated
and the method resumes its execution.
In any other case (i.e. the BLOB has not been compressed or is damaged), the error -10600 is
generated. This error can be trapped using the ON ERR CALL command.

To check if a BLOB has been compressed, use the BLOB PROPERTIES command.

Examples
1. This example tests if the BLOB vxMyBlob is compressed and, if so, expands it:
BLOB PROPERTIES (vxMyBlob;$vlCompressed;$vlExpandedSize;$vlCurrentSize)
If ($vlCompressed#Is not compressed)
EXPAND BLOB (vxMyBlob)
End if

4D Language Reference 343

2. This example allows you to select a document and then expand it, if it is compressed:
$vhDocRef := Open document ("")
If (OK=1)
CLOSE DOCUMENT ($vhDocRef)
DOCUMENT TO BLOB (Document;vxBlob)
If (OK=1)
BLOB PROPERTIES (vxBlob;$vlCompressed;$vlExpandedSize;$vlCurrentSize)
If ($vlCompressed#Is not compressed)
EXPAND BLOB (vxBlob)
If (OK=1)
BLOB TO DOCUMENT (Document;vxBlob)
End if
End if
End if
End if

See Also
BLOB PROPERTIES, COMPRESS BLOB.

System Variables or Sets

The OK variable is set to 1 if the BLOB has been successfully expanded, otherwise it is set to 0.

344 4D Language Reference

INSERT IN BLOB BLOB

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

INSERT IN BLOB (blob; offset; len{; filler})

Parameter Type Description

blob BLOB → BLOB into which bytes will be inserted
offset Variable → Starting position where bytes will be inserted
len Number → Number of bytes to be inserted
filler Number → Default byte value (0x00..0xFF)
0x00 if omitted

Description
The INSERT IN BLOB command inserts the number of bytes specified by len into the BLOB blob
at the position specified by offset. The BLOB then becomes len bytes larger.

If you do not specify the optional filler parameter, the bytes inserted into the BLOB are set to
0x00. Otherwise, the bytes are set to the value you pass in filler (modulo 256 — 0..255).

Before the call, you pass in the offset parameter the position of the insertion relative to the
beginning of the BLOB.

See Also
DELETE FROM BLOB.

4D Language Reference 345

INTEGER TO BLOB BLOB

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

INTEGER TO BLOB (integer; blob; byteOrder{; offset | *})

Parameter Type Description

integer Number → Integer value to write into the BLOB
blob BLOB → BLOB to receive the Integer value
byteOrder Number → 0 Native byte ordering
1 Macintosh byte ordering
2 PC byte ordering
offset | * Variable | * ← New offset after writing if not *

Description
The INTEGER TO BLOB command writes the 2-byte Integer value integer into the BLOB blob.

The byteOrder parameter fixes the byte ordering of the 2-byte Integer value to be written. You
pass one of the following predefined constants provided by 4D:

Constant Type Value

Native byte ordering Long Integer 0
Macintosh byte ordering Long Integer 1
PC byte ordering Long Integer 2

Note regarding Platform Independence: If you exchange BLOBs between the Macintosh and
PC platforms, it is up to you to manage byte swapping issues when using this command.

If you specify the * optional parameter, the 2-byte Integer value is appended to the BLOB and
the size of the BLOB is extended accordingly. Using the * optional parameter, you can
sequentially store any number of Integer, Long Integer, Real or Text values (see other BLOB
commands) in a BLOB, as long as the BLOB fits into memory.

If you do not specify the * optional parameter or the offset variable parameter, the 2-byte
Integer value is stored at the beginning of the BLOB, overriding its previous contents; the size
of the BLOB is adjusted accordingly.

346 4D Language Reference

If you pass the offset variable parameter, the 2-byte Integer value is written at the byte offset
(starting from zero) within the BLOB. No matter where you write the 2-byte Integer value, the
size of the BLOB is increased according to the location you passed (plus up to 2 bytes, if
necessary). Newly allocated bytes, other than the ones you are writing, are initialized to zero.

After the call, the offset variable parameter is returned, incremented by the number of bytes
that have been written. Therefore, you can reuse that same variable with another BLOB
writing command to write another value.

Examples
1. After executing this code:
INTEGER TO BLOB (0x0206;vxBlob;Native byte ordering)

• The size of vxBlob is 2 bytes

• On PowerPC platform: vxBLOB{0} = $02 and vxBLOB{1} = $06
• On Intel platform: vxBLOB{0} = $06 and vxBLOB{1} = $02

2. After executing this code:

INTEGER TO BLOB (0x0206;vxBlob;Macintosh byte ordering)

• The size of vxBlob is 2 bytes

• On all platforms vxBLOB{0} = $02 and vxBLOB{1} = $06

3. After executing this code:

INTEGER TO BLOB (0x0206;vxBlob;PC byte ordering)

• The size of vxBlob is 2 bytes

• On all platforms vxBLOB{0} = $06 and vxBLOB{1} = $02

4. After executing this code:

SET BLOB SIZE (vxBlob;100)
INTEGER TO BLOB (0x0206;vxBlob;PC byte ordering;*)

• The size of vxBlob is 102 bytes

• On all platforms vxBLOB{100} = $06 and vxBLOB{101} = $02
• The other bytes of the BLOB are left unchanged

4D Language Reference 347

5. After executing this code:
SET BLOB SIZE (vxBlob;100)
vlOffset:=50
INTEGER TO BLOB (518;vxBlob;Macintosh byte ordering;vlOffset)

• The size of vxBlob is 100 bytes

• On all platforms vxBLOB{50} = $02 and vxBLOB{51} = $06
• The other bytes of the BLOB are left unchanged
• The variable vlOffset has been incremented by 2 (and is now equal to 52)

See Also
BLOB to integer, BLOB to longint, BLOB to real, BLOB to text, LONGINT TO BLOB, REAL TO BLOB,
TEXT TO BLOB.

348 4D Language Reference

LIST TO BLOB BLOB

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

LIST TO BLOB (list; blob{; *})

Parameter Type Description

list ListRef → Hierarchical list to store in the BLOB
blob BLOB → BLOB to receive the Hierarchical list
* * → * to append the value

Description
The LIST TO BLOB command stores the hierarchical list list in the BLOB blob.

If you specify the * optional parameter, the hierarchical list is appended to the BLOB and the
size of the BLOB is extended accordingly. Using the * optional parameter, you can sequentially
store any number of variables or lists (see other BLOB commands) in a BLOB, as long as the
BLOB fits into memory.

If you do not specify the * optional parameter, the hierarchical list is stored at the beginning
of the BLOB, overriding its previous contents; the size of the BLOB is adjusted accordingly.

Wherever the hierarchical list is stored, the size of the BLOB will be increased if necessary
according to the specified location (plus up to the size of the list if necessary). Modified bytes
(other than the ones you set) are reset to 0 (zero).

WARNING: If you use a BLOB for storing lists, you must later use the command BLOB to list for
reading back the contents of the BLOB, because lists are stored in BLOBs using a 4D internal
format.

After the call, if the list has been successfully stored, the OK variable is set to 1. If the
operation could not be performed, the OK variable is set to 0; for example, if there was not
enough memory.

Note regarding Platform Independence: LIST TO BLOB and BLOB to list use a 4D internal
format for handling lists stored in BLOBs. As a benefit, you do not need to worry about byte
swapping between platforms when using these two commands. In other words, a BLOB
created on Windows using those commands can be reused on Macintosh, and vice-versa.

4D Language Reference 349

Example
See example for the command BLOB to list.

See Also
BLOB to list, BLOB TO VARIABLE, SAVE LIST, VARIABLE TO BLOB.

350 4D Language Reference

LONGINT TO BLOB BLOB

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

LONGINT TO BLOB (longInt; blob; byteOrder{; offset | *})

Parameter Type Description

longInt Number → Long Integer value to write into the BLOB
blob BLOB → BLOB to receive the Long Integer value
byteOrder Number → 0 Native byte ordering
1 Macintosh byte ordering
2 PC byte ordering
offset | * Variable | * → Offset within the BLOB (expressed in bytes)
or * to append the value
← New offset after writing if not *

Description
The LONGINT TO BLOB command writes the 4-byte Long Integer value integer into the BLOB
blob.

The byteOrder parameter fixes the byte ordering of the 4-byte Long Integer value to be written.
You pass one of the following predefined constants provided by 4D:

Constant Type Value

Native byte ordering Long Integer 0
Macintosh byte ordering Long Integer 1
PC byte ordering Long Integer 2

Note regarding Platform Independence: If you exchange BLOBs between Macintosh and PC
platforms, it is up to you to manage byte swapping issues while using this command.

If you specify the * optional parameter, the 4-byte Long Integer value is appended to the BLOB
and the size of the BLOB is extended accordingly. Using the * optional parameter, you can
sequentially store any number of Integer, Long Integer, Real or Text values (see other BLOB
commands) in a BLOB, as long as the BLOB fits into memory.

If you do not specify the * optional parameter nor the offset variable parameter, the 4-byte
Long Integer value is stored at the beginning of the BLOB, overriding its previous contents;
the size of the BLOB is adjusted accordingly.

4D Language Reference 351

If you pass the offset variable parameter, the 4-byte Long Integer value is written at the offset
(starting from zero) within the BLOB. No matter where you write the 4-byte Long Integer
value, the size of the BLOB is increased according to the location you passed (plus up to 4
bytes, if necessary). New allocated bytes, other than the ones you are writing, are initialized to
zero.

After the call, the offset variable parameter is returned, incremented by the number of bytes
that have been written. Therefore, you can reuse that same variable with another BLOB
writing command to write another value.
Examples
1. After executing this code:
LONGINT TO BLOB (0x01020304;vxBlob;Native byte ordering)

• The size of vxBlob is 4 bytes

• On PowerPC platform: vxBLOB{0}=$01, vxBLOB{1}=$02, vxBLOB{2}=$03, vxBLOB{3}=$04
• On Intel platform: vxBLOB{0}=$04, vxBLOB{1}=$03, vxBLOB{2}=$02, vxBLOB{3}=$01

2. After executing this code:

LONGINT TO BLOB (0x01020304;vxBlob;Macintosh byte ordering)

• The size of vxBlob is 4 bytes

• On all platforms vxBLOB{0}=$01, vxBLOB{1}=$02, vxBLOB{2}=$03, vxBLOB{3}=$04

3. After executing this code:

LONGINT TO BLOB (0x01020304;vxBlob;PC byte ordering)

• The size of vxBlob is 4 bytes

• On all platforms vxBLOB{0}=$04, vxBLOB{1}=$03, vxBLOB{2}=$02, vxBLOB{3}=$01

4. After executing this code:

SET BLOB SIZE (vxBlob;100)
LONGINT TO BLOB (0x01020304;vxBlob;PC byte ordering;*)

• The size of vxBlob is 104 bytes

• On all platforms vxBLOB{100}=$04, vxBLOB{101}=$03, vxBLOB{102}=$02, vxBLOB{103}=$01
• The other bytes of the BLOB are left unchanged

352 4D Language Reference

5. After executing this code:
SET BLOB SIZE (vxBlob;100)
vlOffset:=50
LONGINT TO BLOB (0x01020304;vxBlob;Macintosh byte ordering;vlOffset)

• The size of vxBlob is 100 bytes

• On all platforms vxBLOB{50}=$01, vxBLOB{51}=$02, vxBLOB{52}=$03, vxBLOB{53}=$04
• The other bytes of the BLOB are left unchanged
• The variable vlOffset has been incremented by 4 (and is now equal to 54)

See Also
BLOB to integer, BLOB to longint, BLOB to real, BLOB to text, INTEGER TO BLOB, REAL TO BLOB,
TEXT TO BLOB.

4D Language Reference 353

REAL TO BLOB BLOB

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

REAL TO BLOB (real; blob; realFormat{; offset | *})

Parameter Type Description

real Number → Real value to write into the BLOB
blob BLOB → BLOB to receive the Real value
realFormat Number → 0 Native real format
1 Extended real format
2 Macintosh Double real format
3 Windows Double real format
offset | * Variable | * → Offset within the BLOB (expressed in bytes)
or * to append the value
← New offset after writing if not *

Description
The REAL TO BLOB command writes the Real value real into the BLOB blob.

The realFormat parameter fixes the internal format and byte ordering of the Real value to be
written. You pass one of the following predefined constants provided by 4D:

Constant Type Value

Native real format Long Integer 0
Extended real format Long Integer 1
Macintosh double real format Long Integer 2
PC double real format Long Integer 3

Platform Independence Note: If you exchange BLOBs between Macintosh and PC platforms, it
is up to you to manage real formats and byte swapping issues when using this command.

If you specify the * optional parameter, the Real value is appended to the BLOB; the size of the
BLOB is extended accordingly. Using the * optional parameter, you can sequentially store any
number of Integer, Long Integer, Real or Text values (see other BLOB commands) in a BLOB, as
long as the BLOB fits into memory.

354 4D Language Reference

If you do not specify the * optional parameter or the offset variable parameter, the Real value is
stored at the beginning of the BLOB, overriding its previous contents; the size of the BLOB is
adjusted accordingly.

If you pass the offset variable parameter, the Real value is written at the offset (starting from
zero) within the BLOB. No matter where you write the Real value, the size of the BLOB is
increased according to the location you passed (plus up to 8 or 10 bytes, if necessary). New
allocated bytes, other than the ones you are writing, are initialized to zero.

After the call, the offset variable parameter is returned, incremented by the number of bytes
that have been written. Therefore, you can reuse that same variable with another BLOB
writing command to write another value.

Examples
1. After executing this code:
C_REAL (vrValue)
vrValue := ...
REAL TO BLOB (vrValue;vxBlob;Native real format)

• On all platforms, the size of vxBlob is 8 bytes

2. After executing this code:

C_REAL (vrValue)
vrValue := ...
REAL TO BLOB (vrValue;vxBlob;Extended real format)

• On all platforms, the size of vxBlob is 10 bytes

3. After executing this code:

C_REAL (vrValue)
vrValue := ...
REAL TO BLOB (vrValue;vxBlob;Macintosh Double real format)
` or Windows double real format

• On all platforms, the size of vxBlob is 8 bytes

4D Language Reference 355

4. After executing this code:
SET BLOB SIZE (vxBlob;100)
C_REAL (vrValue)
vrValue := ...
INTEGER TO BLOB (vrValue;vxBlob;Windows Double real format)
` or Macintosh double real format

• On all platforms, the size of vxBlob is 8 bytes

5. After executing this code:

SET BLOB SIZE (vxBlob;100)
REAL TO BLOB (vrValue;vxBlob;Extended real format;*)

• On all platforms, the size of vxBlob is 110 bytes

• On all platforms, the real value is stored at the bytes #100 to #109
• The other bytes of the BLOB are left unchanged

6. After executing this code:

SET BLOB SIZE (vxBlob;100)
C_REAL (vrValue)
vrValue := ...
vlOffset:=50
REAL TO BLOB (vrValue;vxBlob;Windows Double real format;vlOffset)
` or Macintosh double real format

• On all platforms, the size of vxBlob is 100 bytes

• On all platforms, the real value is stored in the bytes #50 to #57
• The other bytes of the BLOB are left unchanged
• The variable vlOffset has been incremented by 8 (and is now equal to 58)

See Also
BLOB to integer, BLOB to longint, BLOB to real, BLOB to text, INTEGER TO BLOB, LONGINT TO
BLOB, TEXT TO BLOB.

356 4D Language Reference

SET BLOB SIZE BLOB

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET BLOB SIZE (blob; size{; filler})

Parameter Type Description

blob BLOB → BLOB field or variable
size Number → New size of the BLOB
filler Number → ASCII code of filler character

Description
SET BLOB SIZE resizes the BLOB blob according to the value passed in size.

If you want to allocate new bytes to a BLOB and want to have those bytes initialized to a
specific value, pass the value (0..255) into the filler optional parameter.

Examples
1. When you are through with a large process or interprocess BLOB, it is good idea to free the
memory it occupies. To do so, write:
SET BLOB SIZE(aProcessBLOB;0)
SET BLOB SIZE(<>anInterprocessBLOB;0)

2. The following example creates a BLOB of 16K filled of 0xFF:

C_BLOB(vxData)
SET BLOB SIZE(vxData;16*1024;0xFF)

See Also
BLOB size.

Error Handling
If you cannot resize a BLOB due to insufficient memory, the error -108 is generated. You can
trap this error using an ON ERR CALL interruption method.

4D Language Reference 357

TEXT TO BLOB BLOB

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

TEXT TO BLOB (text; blob{; textFormat{; offset | *}})

Parameter Type Description

text String → Text to write into the BLOB
blob BLOB → BLOB to receive the text
textFormat Number → Format and character set of text
offset | * Variable | * → Offset within the BLOB (expressed in bytes)
or * to append the value
← New offset after writing if not *

Description
The TEXT TO BLOB command writes the Text value text into the BLOB blob.

The textFormat parameter can be used to set the internal format and the character set of the
text value to be written. To do this, pass one of the following constants (found in the“BLOB”
theme) in the textFormat parameter:

Constant Type Value

Mac C string Long Integer 0
Mac Pascal string Long Integer 1
Mac Text with length Long Integer 2
Mac Text without length Long Integer 3
UTF8 C string Long Integer 4
UTF8 Text with length Long Integer 5
UTF8 Text without length Long Integer 6

If you omit the textFormat parameter, by default 4D uses the Mac C string format. In databases
created beginning with version 11, 4D works by default with the Unicode character set (UTF8)
for managing text, so it is recommended to use this character set.

Notes:
• The “UTF8” constants can only be used when the application runs in Unicode mode.
• The “Mac” constants cannot work with texts greater than 32 KB.
• If you want to work with character sets other than UTF8, use the CONVERT FROM TEXT
command.

358 4D Language Reference

The following table describes each of these formats:

Text format Description and Examples

C string The text is ended by a NULL character (ASCII code $00).
UTF8 "" → $00
"Café" → $43 61 66 C3 A9 00
Mac "" → $00
"Café" → $43 61 66 8E 00
Pascal string The text is preceded by a 1-byte length.
UTF8 -
-
Mac "" → $00
"Café" → $04 43 61 66 8E
Text with length The text is preceded by a 3-byte (UTF8) or 2-byte (Mac) length.
UTF8 "" → $00 00 00 00
"Café" → $00 00 00 05 43 61 66 C3 A9
Mac "" → $00 00
"Café" → $00 04 43 61 66 8E
Text without length The text is composed only of its characters.
UTF8 "" → No data
"Café" → $43 61 66 C3 A9
Mac "" → No data
"Café" → $43 61 66 8E

If you specify the * optional parameter, the Text value is appended to the BLOB; the size of the
BLOB is extended accordingly. Using the * optional parameter, you can sequentially store any
number of Integer, Long Integer, Real or Text values (see other BLOB commands) in a BLOB, as
long as the BLOB fits into memory.

If you do not specify the * optional parameter nor the offset variable parameter, the Text value
is stored at the beginning of the BLOB, overriding its previous contents; the size of the BLOB is
adjusted accordingly.

If you pass the offset variable parameter, the Text value is written at the offset (starting from
zero) within the BLOB. No matter where you write the Text value, the size of the BLOB is,
increased according to the location you passed (plus up to the size of the text, if necessary).
New allocated bytes, other than the ones you are writing, are initialized to zero.

4D Language Reference 359

After the call, the offset variable parameter is returned, incremented by the number of bytes
that have been written. Therfore, you can reuse that same variable with another BLOB writing
command to write another value.

Example
After executing this code:
SET BLOB SIZE (vxBlob;0)
C_TEXT (vtValue)
vtValue := "Café" ` Length of vtValue is 4 bytes
TEXT TO BLOB (vtValue;vxBlob;Mac C string) ` Size of BLOB becomes 5 bytes
TEXT TO BLOB (vtValue;vxBlob;Mac Pascal string) ` Size of BLOB becomes 5 bytes
TEXT TO BLOB (vtValue;vxBlob;Mac Text with length) ` Size of BLOB becomes 6 bytes
TEXT TO BLOB (vtValue;vxBlob;Mac Text without length) ` Size of BLOB becomes 4 bytes
TEXT TO BLOB (vtValue;vxBlob;UTF8 C string) ` Size of BLOB becomes 6 bytes
TEXT TO BLOB (vtValue;vxBlob;UTF8 Text with length) ` Size of BLOB becomes 9 bytes
TEXT TO BLOB (vtValue;vxBlob;UTF8 Text without length) ` Size of BLOB becomes 5 bytes

See Also
BLOB to integer, BLOB to longint, BLOB to real, BLOB to text, CONVERT FROM TEXT, INTEGER TO
BLOB, LONGINT TO BLOB, REAL TO BLOB.

360 4D Language Reference

VARIABLE TO BLOB BLOB

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

VARIABLE TO BLOB (variable; blob{; offset | *})

Parameter Type Description

variable Variable → Variable to store in the BLOB
blob BLOB → BLOB to receive the variable
offset | * Variable | * → Offset within the BLOB (expressed in bytes)
or * to append the value
← New offset after writing if not *

Description
The VARIABLE TO BLOB command stores the variable variable in the BLOB blob.

If you specify the * optional parameter, the variable is appended to the BLOB and the size of
the BLOB is extended accordingly. Using the * optional parameter, you can sequentially store
any number of variables or lists (see other BLOB commands) in a BLOB, as long as the BLOB
fits into memory.

If you do not specify the * optional parameter or the offset variable parameter, the variable is
stored at the beginning of the BLOB, overriding its previous contents; the size of the BLOB is
adjusted accordingly.

If you pass the offset variable parameter, the variable is written at the offset (starting from
zero) within the BLOB. No matter where you write the variable, the size of the BLOB is
increased according to the location you passed (plus the size of the variable, if necessary).
Newly allocated bytes, other than the ones you are writing, are initialized to zero.

After the call, the offset variable parameter is returned, incremented by the number of bytes
that have been written. Therefore, you can reuse that same variable with another BLOB
writing command to write another variable or list.

VARIABLE TO BLOB accepts any type of variable (including other BLOBs), except the following:
• Pointer
• Array of pointers
• Two-dimensional arrays

4D Language Reference 361

However, if you store a Long Integer variable that is a reference to a hierarchical list (ListRef),
VARIABLE TO BLOB will store the Long Integer variable, not the list. To store and retrieve
hierarchical lists in and from a BLOB, use the commands LIST TO BLOB and BLOB to list.

WARNING: If you use a BLOB for storing variables, you must later use the command
BLOB TO VARIABLE for reading back the contents of the BLOB, because variables are stored in
BLOBs using a 4D internal format.

After the call, if the variable has been successfully stored, the OK variable is set to 1. If the
operation could not be performed, the OK variable is set to 0; for example, there was not
enough memory.

Note regarding Platform Independence: VARIABLE TO BLOB and BLOB TO VARIABLE use a 4D
internal format for handling variables stored in BLOBs. As a benefit, you do not need to worry
about byte swapping between platforms while using these two commands. In other words, a
BLOB created on Windows using either of these commands can be reused on Macintosh, and
vice-versa.

Examples
1. The two following project methods allow you to quickly store and retrieve arrays into and
from documents on disk:
` SAVE ARRAY project method
` SAVE ARRAY ( String ; Pointer )
` SAVE ARRAY ( Document ; -> Array )
C_STRING (255;$1)
C_POINTER ($2)
C_BLOB ($vxArrayData)
VARIABLE TO BLOB ($2->;$vxArrayData) ` Store the array into the BLOB
COMPRESS BLOB ($vxArrayData) ` Compress the BLOB
BLOB TO DOCUMENT ($1;$vxArrayData) ` Save the BLOB on disk

` LOAD ARRAY project method

` LOAD ARRAY ( String ; Pointer )
` LOAD ARRAY ( Document ; -> Array )
C_STRING (255;$1)
C_POINTER ($2)
C_BLOB ($vxArrayData)
DOCUMENT TO BLOB ($1;$vxArrayData) ` Load the BLOB from the disk
EXPAND BLOB ($vxArrayData) ` Expand the BLOB
BLOB TO VARIABLE ($vxArrayData;$2->) ` Retrieve the array from the BLOB

362 4D Language Reference

After these methods have been added to your application, you can write:
ARRAY STRING (...;asAnyArray;...)
` ...
SAVE ARRAY ( $vsDocName;->asAnyArray)
` ...
LOAD ARRAY ( $vsDocName;->asAnyArray)

2. The two following project methods allow you to quickly store and retrieve any set of
variables into and from a BLOB:
` STORE VARIABLES INTO BLOB project method
` STORE VARIABLES INTO BLOB ( Pointer { ; Pointer ... { ; Pointer } } )
` STORE VARIABLES INTO BLOB ( BLOB { ; Var1 ... { ; Var2 } } )
C_POINTER (${1})
C_LONGINT ($vlParam)

SET BLOB SIZE ($1->;0)

For ($vlParam;2;Count parameters)
VARIABLE TO BLOB (${$vlParam}->;$1->;*)
End for

` RETRIEVE VARIABLES FROM BLOB project method

` RETRIEVE VARIABLES FROM BLOB ( Pointer { ; Pointer ... { ; Pointer } } )
` RETRIEVE VARIABLES FROM BLOB ( BLOB { ; Var1 ... { ; Var2 } } )
C_POINTER (${1})
C_LONGINT ($vlParam;$vlOffset)
$vlOffset:=0
For ($vlParam;2;Count parameters)
BLOB TO VARIABLE ($1->;${$vlParam}->;$vlOffset)
End for
After these methods have been added to your application, you can write:
STORE VARIABLES INTO BLOB ( ->vxBLOB;->vgPicture;->asAnArray;->alAnotherArray)
` ...
RETRIEVE VARIABLES FROM BLOB ( ->vxBLOB;->vgPicture;->asAnArray;->alAnotherArray)

See Also
BLOB to list, BLOB TO VARIABLE, LIST TO BLOB.

System Variables or Sets

The OK variable is set to 1 if the variable has been successfully stored, otherwise it is set to 0.

4D Language Reference 363

364 4D Language Reference
7
______________________
Boolean

4D Language Reference 365

366 4D Language Reference
Boolean Commands Boolean

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4D includes Boolean functions, are used for Boolean calculations:

True
False
Not

Example
This example sets a Boolean variable based on the value of a button. It returns True in
myBoolean if the myButton button was clicked and False if the button was not clicked. When a
button is clicked, the button variable is set to 1.

If (myButton=1) ` If the button was clicked

myBoolean:=True ` myBoolean is set to True
Else ` If the button was not clicked,
myBoolean:=False ` myBoolean is set to False
End if

The previous example can be simplified into one line.

myBoolean:=(myButton=1)

See Also
False, Logical Operators, Not, True.

In addition, the following 4D commands return a Boolean result: Activated, After, Before,
Before selection, Before subselection, Caps lock down, Is compiled mode, Deactivated, During, End
selection, End subselection, In break, In footer, In header, In transaction, Is a list, Is a variable, Is in
set, Is user deleted, Locked, Macintosh command down, Macintosh control down, Macintosh
option down, Modified, Modified record, Nil, Outside call, Read only state, Semaphore, Shift down,
True, Undefined, User in group, Windows Alt down, Windows Ctrl down.

4D Language Reference 367

True Boolean

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

True → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Boolean ← True

Description
True returns the Boolean value True.

Example
The following example sets the variable vbOptions to True:
vbOptions:=True

See Also
False, Not.

368 4D Language Reference

False Boolean

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

False → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Boolean ← False

Description
False returns the Boolean value False.

Example
The following example sets the variable vbOptions to False:
vbOptions:=False

See Also
Not, True.

4D Language Reference 369

Not Boolean

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Not (boolean) → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

boolean Boolean → Boolean value to negate

Function result Boolean ← Opposite of Boolean

Description
The Not function returns the negation of boolean, changing True to False or False to True.

Example
This example first assigns True to a variable, then changes the variable value to False, and then
back to True.
vResult:=True ` vResult is set to True
vResult:=Not(vResult) ` vResult is set to False
vResult:=Not(vResult) ` vResult is set to True

370 4D Language Reference

8
______________________
Communications

4D Language Reference 371

372 4D Language Reference
GET SERIAL PORT MAPPING Communications

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET SERIAL PORT MAPPING (numArray; nameArray)

Parameter Type Description

numArray Number array ← Array of port numbers
nameArray String array ← Array of port names

Description
The GET SERIAL PORT MAPPING command returns two arrays, numArray and nameArray,
containing the serial port numbers and the serial port names of the current machine.
This command is useful under Mac OS X, where the operating system dynamically allocates
the port number when using a USB serial adapter. You can address any extended serial port
using its name (static), regardless of its actual number.
Note: This command does not return meaningful values with standard ports. If you want
to address a standard port, you must pass its value (0 or 1) directly using the SET CHANNEL
command (former operation of 4D).
Example
This project method can be used to address the same serial port (without protocol),
regardless of the number that has been assigned to it:

ARRAY TEXT($arrPortNames;0)
ARRAY LONGINT($arrPortNums;0)
C_LONGINT($vPortNum;$vFinalPortNum)
`Find out the current numbers of the serial ports
GET SERIAL PORT MAPPING($arrPortNums;$arrPortNames)
$vPortNum:=Find in array($arrPortNames;vPortName)
` vPortName contains the name of the port to be used; it may come from
` a dialog box, a value stored in a field, etc.
If(arrPortNums{$vPortNum}=0)
$vFinalPortNum:=0 `special case under Mac OS X
Else
$vFinalPortNum:=arrPortNums{$vPortNum}+100
End if
`params contains the communication parameters
SET CHANNEL($vFinalPortNum;params)
... `Carry out the desired operations
SET CHANNEL(11) `Closing of port
See Also
SET CHANNEL.

4D Language Reference 373

RECEIVE BUFFER Communications

version 6.8.3 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

RECEIVE BUFFER (receiveVar)

Parameter Type Description

receiveVar Variable → Variable to receive data

Description
RECEIVE BUFFER reads the serial port that was previously opened with SET CHANNEL. The serial
port has a buffer that fills with characters until a command reads from the buffer. RECEIVE
BUFFER gets the characters from the serial buffer, put them into receiveVar then clears the
buffer. If there are no characters in the buffer, then receiveVar will contain nothing.

On Windows
The Windows serial port buffer is limited in size to 10 Kbytes. This means that the buffer can
overflow. When it is full and new characters are received, the new characters replace the oldest
characters. The old characters are lost; therefore, it is essential that the buffer is read quickly
when new characters are received.

On Mac OS
The Mac OS 9.x serial port buffer is limited in size to 10 Kbytes. Under Mac OS X, its capacity
is, in theory, unlimited (depending on the available memory). If the buffer is full and new
characters are received, the new characters replace the oldest characters. The old characters are
lost; therefore, it is essential that the buffer is read quickly when new characters are received.

Note: There are 4D plug-ins that enable you to increase the size of the serial buffer.

RECEIVE BUFFER is different from RECEIVE PACKET in that it takes whatever is in the buffer and
then immediately returns. RECEIVE PACKET waits until it finds a specific character or until a
given number of characters are in the buffer.

During the execution of RECEIVE BUFFER, the user can interrupt the reception by pressing Ctrl-
Alt-Shift (Windows) or Command-Option-Shift (Macintosh). This interruption generates an
error -9994 that you can catch with an error-handling method installed using ON ERR CALL.

374 4D Language Reference

Example
The project method LISTEN TO SERIAL PORT uses RECEIVE BUFFER to get text from the serial port
and accumulate it into a an interprocess variable:

` LISTEN TO SERIAL PORT

` Opening the serial port
SET CHANNEL (201; Speed 9600 + Data Bits 8 + Stop Bits One + Parity None)
<>IP_Listen_Serial_Port:=True
While (<>IP_Listen_Serial_Port)
RECEIVE BUFFER($vtBuffer)
If ((Length($vtBuffer)+Length(<>vtBuffer))>MAXTEXTLEN)
<>vtBuffer:=""
End if
<>vtBuffer:=<>vtBuffer+$Buffer
End while

At this point, any other process can read the interprocess <>vtBuffer to work with the data
coming from the serial port.

To stop listening to the serial port, just execute:

` Stop listening to the serial port

<>IP_Listen_Serial_Port:=False

Note that access to the interprocess <>vtBuffer variable should be protected by a semaphore, so
that processes will not conflict. See the command Semaphore for more information.

See Also
ON ERR CALL, RECEIVE PACKET, Semaphore, SET CHANNEL, Variables.

4D Language Reference 375

RECEIVE PACKET Communications

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

RECEIVE PACKET ({docRef; }receiveVar; stopChar | numChars)

Parameter Type Description

docRef DocRef → Document reference number, or
Current channel (serial port or document)
receiveVar String var | BLOB var → Variable to receive data
stopChar | numChars String | Number → Character(s) at which to stop receiving, or
Number of characters to receive

Description
RECEIVE PACKET reads characters from a serial port or from a document.

If docRef is specified, this command reads characters from a document opened using Open
document, Create document or Append document. If docRef is omitted, this command reads
characters from the serial port or the document opened using SET CHANNEL.

Whatever the source, the characters read are returned in receiveVar, which must be a Text,
String or BLOB variable. If the characters have been sent by the SEND PACKET command, the
type must corresond to that of the packet sent.

Notes:
•In non-Unicode mode (compatibility mode), String variables accept up to 255 characters and
have a fixed size and Text variables do not have a set size and can accept up to 32,000
characters.
•When the package received is of the BLOB type, the command does not take into account
any character set defined by the USE CHARACTER SET command. The BLOB is returned without
any modification.

To read a particular number of characters, pass this number in numChars. If the receiveVar
variable is of the Text type, in a single call you can read up to 2 GB of text in Unicode mode or
32,000 characters in non-Unicode mode (in this case, to specify the maximum number of
characters, you can pass the MAXTEXTLENBEFOREV11 constant in numChars.

To read characters until a particular string (composed of one or more characters) is

encountered, pass this string in stopChar (the string is not returned in receiveVar).

376 4D Language Reference

In this case, if the character string specified by stopChar is not found:
• When RECEIVE PACKET is reading a document, it will stop reading at the end of the
document.
• When RECEIVE PACKET is reading from a serial port, it will attempt to wait indefinitely until
the timeout (if any) has elapsed (see SET TIMEOUT) or until the user interrupts the reception
(see below).

During execution of RECEIVE PACKET, the user can interrupt the reception by pressing Ctrl-Alt-
Shift (Windows) or Command-Option-Shift (Macintosh). This interruption generates an error -
9994 that you can catch with an error-handling method installed using ON ERR CALL. Usually,
you will only have to handle interruption of a reception when communicating over a serial
port.

When reading a document, the first RECEIVE PACKET begins reading at the beginning of the
document. The reading of each subsequent packet begins at the character following the last
character read.

Note: This command is useful for document opened with SET CHANNEL. On the other hand,
for a document opened with Open document, Create document and Append document, you can
use the Get document position and SET DOCUMENT POSITION commands to get and change
the location in the document where the next writing (SEND PACKET) or reading (RECEIVE
PACKET) will occur.

When attempting to read past the end of a file, RECEIVE PACKET will return with the data read
up to that point and the variable OK will be set to 1. Then, the next RECEIVE PACKET will
return an empty string and set the OK variable to zero.

Note: In non-Unicode mode (compatibility mode), when you use the RECEIVE PACKET
command to read characters from a Windows document and do not want to use ASCII maps
to convert Windows characters into Mac OS characters, you can use the Win to Mac function.

Examples
1. The following example reads 20 characters from a serial port into the variable getTwenty:

RECEIVE PACKET (getTwenty; 20)

2. The following example reads data from the document referenced by the variable myDoc into
the variable vData. It reads until it encounters a carriage return:

RECEIVE PACKET (myDoc;vData;Char (Carriage Return))

4D Language Reference 377

3. The following example reads data from the document referenced by the variable myDoc into
the variable vData. It reads until it encounters the </TD> (end of table cell) HTML tag:

RECEIVE PACKET (myDoc;vData;"</TD>")

4. The following example reads data from a document into fields. The data is stored as fixed-
length fields. The method calls a subroutine to strip any trailing spaces (spaces at the end of
the string). The subroutine follows the method:

$vhDocRef := Open document ("";"TEXT") ` Open a TEXT document

If (OK=1) ` If the document was opened
Repeat ` Loop until no more data
RECEIVE PACKET ($vhDocRef; $Var1; 15) ` Read 15 characters
RECEIVE PACKET ($vhDocRef; $Var2; 15) ` Do same as above for second field
If (($Var1#"")|($Var2#"")) ` If at least one of the fields is not empty
CREATE RECORD([People]) ` Create a new record
[People]First := Strip ($Var1) ` Save the first name
[People]Last := Strip ($Var2) ` Save the last name
SAVE RECORD([People]) ` Save the record
End if
Until (OK =0)
CLOSE DOCUMENT ($vhDocRef) ` Close the document
End if

The spaces at the end of the data are stripped by the following method, called Strip:
For ($i; Length ($1); 1; -1) ` Loop from end of string to start
If ($1[[$i]] # " ") ` If it is not a space…
$i := -$i ` Force the loop to end
End if
End for
$0 := Delete string ($1; -$i; Length ($1)) ` Delete the spaces

See Also
Get document position, RECEIVE PACKET, SEND PACKET, SET DOCUMENT POSITION, SET
TIMEOUT, USE CHARACTER SET.

System Variables or Sets

After a call to RECEIVE PACKET, the OK system variable is set to 1 if the packet is received
without error. Otherwise, the OK system variable is set to 0.

378 4D Language Reference

RECEIVE RECORD Communications

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

RECEIVE RECORD {(table)}

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table into which to receive the record, or
Default table, if omitted

Description
RECEIVE RECORD receives a record into table from the serial port or document opened by the
SET CHANNEL command. The record must have been sent with SEND RECORD. When you
execute RECEIVE RECORD, a new record is automatically created for table. If the record is
received correctly, you must then use SAVE RECORD to save the new record.

The complete record is received. This means that pictures and BLOBs stored in or with the
record are also received.

Important: When records are being sent and received using SEND RECORD and RECEIVE
RECORD, the source table structure and the destination table structure must be compatible. If
they are not, 4D will convert values according to the table definitions when RECEIVE RECORD
is executed.

Notes
1. If you receive a record from a document using this command, the document must have
been opened using the SET CHANNEL command. You cannot use RECEIVE RECORD with a
document opened with Open document, Append document or Create document.
2. During the execution of RECEIVE RECORD, the user can interrupt the reception by pressing
Ctrl-Alt-Shift (Windows) or Command-Option-Shift (Macintosh). This interruption generates
an error -9994 that you can catch with an error-handling method installed using ON ERR CALL.
Usually, you only need to handle the interruption of a reception while communicating over a
serial port.

4D Language Reference 379

Example
A combined use of SEND VARIABLE, SEND RECORD, RECEIVE VARIABLE and RECEIVE RECORD is
ideal for archiving data or for exchanging data between identical single-user databases used in
different places. You can exchange data between 4D databases using the import/export
commands such as EXPORT TEXT and IMPORT TEXT. However, if your data contains graphics,
subtables and/or related tables, using SEND RECORD and RECEIVE RECORD is far more
convenient.

For instance, the documentation you are currently reading has been created using 4D and
4D Write. Because several writers in different locations wordwide were working on it, we
needed a simple way to exchange data between the different databases. Here is a simplified
view of the database structure:

The table [Commands] contains the description of each command or topic. The tables [CM US
Params] and [CM FR Params] respectivily contain the parameter list for each command in
English and in French. The table [CM See Also] contains the commands listed as reference (See
Also section) for each command. Exchanging documentation between databases therefore
consists in sending the [Commands] records and their related records. To do so, we use SEND
RECORD and RECEIVE RECORD. In addition, we use SEND VARIABLE and RECEIVE VARIABLE in
order to mark the import/export document with tags.

380 4D Language Reference

Here is the (simplified) project method for exporting the documentation:

` CM_EXPORT_SEL project method

` This method works with the current selection of the [Commands] table
SET CHANNEL(12;"") ` Let's the user create an open a channel document
If (OK=1)
` Tag the document with a variable that indicates its contents
` Note: the BUILD_LANG process variable indicates if US (English)
` or FR (French) data is sent
$vsTag:="4DV6COMMAND"+BUILD_LANG
SEND VARIABLE($vsTag)
` Send a variable indicationg how many [Commands] are sent
$vlNbCmd:=Records in selection([Commands])
SEND VARIABLE($vlNbCmd)
FIRST RECORD([Commands]) ` For each command
For ($vlCmd;1;$vlNbCmd)
` Send the [Commands] record
SEND RECORD([Commands])
` Select all the related records
RELATE MANY([Commands])
` Depending on the language, send a variable indicating
` the number of parameters that will follow
Case of
: (BUILD_LANG="US")
$vlNbParm:=Records in selection([CM US Params])
: (BUILD_LANG="FR")
$vlNbParm:=Records in selection([CM FR Params])
End case
SEND VARIABLE($vlNbParm)
` Send the parameter records (if any)
For ($vlParm;1;$vlNbParm)
Case of
: (BUILD_LANG="US")
SEND RECORD([CM US Params])
NEXT RECORD([CM US Params])
: (BUILD_LANG="FR")
SEND RECORD([CM FR Params])
NEXT RECORD([CM FR Params])
End case
End for

4D Language Reference 381

 ` Send a variable indicating how many “See Also” will follow
$vlNbSee:=Records in selection([CM See Also])
SEND VARIABLE($vlNbSee)
` Send the [See Also] records (if any)
For ($vlSee;1;$vlNbSee)
SEND RECORD([CM See Also])
NEXT RECORD([CM See Also])
End for
` Go to the next [Commands] record and continue the export
NEXT RECORD([Commands])
End for
SET CHANNEL(11) ` Close the document
End if

Here is the (simplified) project method for importing the documentation:

` CM_IMPORT_SEL project method

SET CHANNEL(10;"") ` Let's user open an existing document

If (OK=1) ` If a document was open
RECEIVE VARIABLE($vsTag) ` Try receiving the expected tag variable
If ($vsTag="4DV6COMMAND@") ` Did we get the right tag?
$CurLang:=Substring($vsTag;Length($vsTag)-1) ` Extract language from the tag
If (($CurLang="US") | ($CurLang="FR")) ` Did we get a valid language
` How many commands are there in this document?
RECEIVE VARIABLE($vlNbCmd)
If ($vlNbCmd>0) ` If at least one
For ($vlCmd;1;$vlNbCmd) ` For each archived [Commands] record
` Receive the record
RECEIVE RECORD([Commands])
` Call a subroutine that saves the new record or copies its values
` into an already existing record
CM_IMP_CMD ($CurLang)
` Receive the number of parameters (if any)
RECEIVE VARIABLE($vlNbParm)
If ($vlNbParm>=0)
` Call a subroutine that calls RECEIVE RECORD then saves
` the new records or copies them into already existing records
CM_IMP_PARM ($vlNbParm;$CurLang)
End if

382 4D Language Reference

 ` Receive the number of “See Also” (if any)
RECEIVE VARIABLE($vlNbSee)
If ($vlNbSee>0)
` Call a subroutine that calls RECEIVE RECORD then saves the
`new records or copies them into already existing records
CM_IMP_SEEA ($vlNbSee;$CurLang)
End if
End for
Else
ALERT("The number of commands in this export document is invalid.")
End if
Else
ALERT("The language of this export document is unkown.")
End if
Else
ALERT("This document is NOT a Commands export document.")
End if
SET CHANNEL(11) ` Close document
End if

Note that we do not test the OK variable while receiving the data nor try to catch the errors.
However, because we stored variables in the document that describes the document itself, if
these variables, once received, made sense, the probability for an error is very low. If for
instance a user opens a wrong document, the first test stops the operation right away.

See Also
RECEIVE VARIABLE, SEND RECORD, SEND VARIABLE.

System Variables or Sets

The OK system variable is set to 1 if the record is received. Otherwise, the OK system variable
is set to 0.

4D Language Reference 383

RECEIVE VARIABLE Communications

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

RECEIVE VARIABLE (variable)

Parameter Type Description

variable Variable → Variable in which to receive

Description
RECEIVE VARIABLE receives variable, which was previously sent by SEND VARIABLE from the
document or serial port previously opened by SET CHANNEL.

In interpreted mode, if the variable does not exist prior to the call to RECEIVE VARIABLE, the
variable is created, typed and assigned according to what has been received. In compiled
mode, the variable must be of the same type as what is received. In both cases, the contents of
the variable are replaced with what is received.

Notes
1. If you receive a variable from a document using this command, the document must have
been opened using the SET CHANNEL command. You cannot use RECEIVE VARIABLE with a
document opened with Open document, Append document or Create document.
2. This command does not support array variables. If you want to send and receive arrays from
a document or over a serial port, use the new BLOB commands introduced in version 6.
3. During the execution of RECEIVE VARIABLE, the user can interrupt the reception by pressing
Ctrl-Alt-Shift (Windows) or Command-Option-Shift (Macintosh). This interruption generates
an error -9994 that you can catch with an error-handling method installed using ON ERR CALL.
Usually, you only need to handle the interruption of a reception while communicating over a
serial port.

Example
See example for the RECEIVE RECORD command.

See Also
ON ERR CALL, RECEIVE RECORD, SEND RECORD, SEND VARIABLE.

System Variables or Sets

The OK system variable is set to 1 if the variable is received. Otherwise, the OK system variable
is set to 0.

384 4D Language Reference

SEND PACKET Communications

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SEND PACKET ({docRef; }packet)

Parameter Type Description

docRef DocRef → Document reference number, or
Current channel (serial port or document)
packet String | BLOB → String or BLOB to be sent

Description
SEND PACKET sends a packet to a serial port or to a document. If docRef is specified, the
packet is written to the document referenced by docRef. If docRef is not specified, the
packet is written to the serial port or document previously opened by the SET CHANNEL
command.

A packet is just a piece of data, generally a string of characters.

You can also pass a BLOB in packet. This allows you to bypass the constraints related to
encoding for characters sent in text mode (see example 2).

Note: When you pass a BLOB in packet, the command does not take into account any
character set defined by the USE CHARACTER SET command. The BLOB is sent without any
modification.

Before you use SEND PACKET, you must open a serial port or a document with SET
CHANNEL, or open a document with one of the document commands.

When writing to a document, the first SEND PACKET begins writing at the beginning of the
document unless the document was opened with Append document. Until the document is
closed, each subsequent packet is appended to any previously sent packets.

Note: This command is useful for a document opened with SET CHANNEL. On the other
hand, for a document opened with Open document, Create document and Append
document, you can use the commands Get document position and SET DOCUMENT
POSITION to get and change the location in the document where the next writing (SEND
PACKET) or reading (RECEIVE PACKET) will occur.

4D Language Reference 385

Important: In non-Unicode mode (compatibility mode), SEND PACKET writes Mac OS ASCII
data on both Windows and Macintosh platforms. Mac OS ASCII data uses eight bits.
Standard ASCII uses only the lower seven bits. Many devices do not use the eighth bit in
the same way as does Windows/Macintosh. If the string to be sent contains data that uses
the eighth bit, be sure to create an ASCII map to translate the ASCII characters, and execute
USE CHARACTER SET before using SEND PACKET. You can also use the Mac to Win function
(for more information, refer to the example for this function). Protocols like XON/XOFF
use some low ASCII codes to establish communication between machines. Be careful to not
send such ASCII codes, as this may interfere with the protocol or even break
communication.

Examples
1. The following example writes data from fields to a document. It writes the fields as fixed-
length fields. Fixed-length fields are always of a specific length. If a field is shorter than the
specified length, the field is padded with spaces. (That is, spaces are added to make up the
specified length.) Although the use of fixed-length fields is an inefficient method of storing
data, some computer systems and applications still use them:

$vhDocRef := Create document ("") ` Create a document

If (OK=1) ` Was the document created?
For ($vlRecord; 1; Records in selection ([People])) ` Loop once for each record
` Send a packet. Create the packet from a string of 15 spaces containing
` the first name field
SEND PACKET ($vhDocRef; Change string(15 * Char(Space); [People]First;1))
` Send a second packet. Create the packet from a string of 15 spaces
`containing the last name field
` This could be in the first SEND PACKET, but is separated for clarity
SEND PACKET ($vhDocRef; Change string (15 * Char(Space); [People]Last; 1))
NEXT RECORD([People])
End for
` Send a Char(26), which is used as an end-of-file marker for some computers
SEND PACKET ($vhDocRef; Char(SUB ASCII Code))
CLOSE DOCUMENT ($vhDocRef) ` Close the document
End if

386 4D Language Reference

2. This example illustrates the sending and retrieval of extended characters via a BLOB in a
document:

C_BLOB($send_blob)
C_BLOB($receive_blob)
TEXT TO BLOB("âzértÿ";$send_blob;UTF8 Text without length)
SET BLOB SIZE($send_blob;16;255)
$send_blob{6}:=0
$send_blob{7}:=1
$send_blob{8}:=2
$send_blob{9}:=3
$send_blob{10}:=0
$vlDocRef:=Create document("blob.test")
If(OK=1)
SEND PACKET($vlDocRef;$send_blob)
CLOSE DOCUMENT($vlDocRef)
End if
$vlDocRef:=Open document(document)
End(OK=1)
RECEIVE PACKET($vlDocRef;$receive_blob;65536)
CLOSE DOCUMENT($vlDocRef)
End if

See Also
Get document position, RECEIVE PACKET, SET DOCUMENT POSITION.

4D Language Reference 387

SEND RECORD Communications

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SEND RECORD {(aTable)}

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table from which to send the current record, or
Default table, if omitted

Description
SEND RECORD sends the current record of aTable to the serial port or document opened by the
SET CHANNEL command. The record is sent with a special internal format that can be read
only by RECEIVE RECORD. If no current record exists, SEND RECORD has no effect.

The complete record is sent. This means that pictures and BLOBs stored in or with the record
are also sent.

Important: When records are being sent and received using SEND RECORD and RECEIVE
RECORD, the source table structure and the destination table structure must be compatible. If
they are not, 4D will convert values according to the table definitions when RECEIVE RECORD
is executed.

Note: If you send a record to a document using this command, the document must have been
opened using the SET CHANNEL command. You cannot use SEND RECORD with a document
opened with Open document, Append document or Create document.

Example
See example for the command RECEIVE RECORD.

See Also
RECEIVE RECORD, RECEIVE VARIABLE, SEND VARIABLE.

388 4D Language Reference

SEND VARIABLE Communications

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SEND VARIABLE (variable)

Parameter Type Description

variable Variable → Variable to send

Description
SEND VARIABLE sends variable to the document or serial port previously opened by SET
CHANNEL. The variable is sent with a special internal format that can be read only by RECEIVE
VARIABLE. SEND VARIABLE sends the complete variable (including its type and value).

Notes
1. If you send a variable to a document using this command, the document must have been
opened using the SET CHANNEL command. You cannot use SEND VARIABLE with a document
opened with Open document, Append document or Create document.
2. This command does not support array variables. If you want to send and receive arrays from
a document or over a serial port, use the new BLOB commands introduced in version 6.

Example
See example for the command RECEIVE RECORD.

See Also
RECEIVE RECORD, RECEIVE VARIABLE, SEND RECORD, SET CHANNEL.

4D Language Reference 389

SET CHANNEL Communications

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET CHANNEL (port | operation{; settings | document})

Parameter Type Description

port | operation Number → Serial port number, or
Document operation to perform
settings | document Number | String → Serial port settings, or
Document name

Description
The SET CHANNEL command opens a serial port or a document. You can open only one serial
port or one document at a time with this command. To close an opened serial port, pass SET
CHANNEL (11).

Historical Note: This command was originally the first 4D command used for working with
serial ports and documents on disks. Since that time, new commands have been added. Today,
you will typically work with documents on disk using the commands Open document, Create
document and Append document. With these commands, you can read and write characters to
and from documents using SEND PACKET or RECEIVE PACKET (these commands work with SET
CHANNEL, too). However, if you want to use the commands SEND VARIABLE, RECEIVE VARIABLE,
SEND RECORD and RECEIVE RECORD, you must use SET CHANNEL to access the document on
disk.

The description of SET CHANNEL is composed of two sections:

• Working with Serial Ports
• Working with Documents

Working with Serial Ports - SET CHANNEL (port;settings)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The first form of the SET CHANNEL command opens a serial port, setting the protocol and
other port information. Data can be sent with SEND PACKET, SEND RECORD or SEND VARIABLE,
and received with RECEIVE BUFFER, RECEIVE PACKET, RECEIVE RECORD or RECEIVE VARIABLE.

The port Parameter

The first parameter, port, selects the port and the protocol.

390 4D Language Reference

You can address up to 99 serial ports (one at a time). The following table lists the values for
port:

Value for port Description

0 Printer port (Macintosh) or COM2 (PC) with no protocol
1 Modem port (Macintosh) or COM1 (PC) with no protocol
20 Printer port (Macintosh) or COM2 (PC) with sofware protocol such as
XON/XOFF
21 Modem port (Macintosh) or COM1 (PC) with sofware protocol such as
XON/XOFF
30 Printer port (Macintosh) or COM2 (PC) with hardware protocol such as
RTS/CTS
31 Modem port (Macintosh) or COM1 (PC) with hardware protocol such as
RTS/CTS
101 to 199 Serial communication with no protocol
201 to 299 Serial communication with software protocol such as XON/XOFF
301 to 399 Serial communication with hardware protocol such as RTS/CTS

Important: The value you pass in port must refer to an existing serial COM port recognized by
the operating system. For example, in order to be able to use the values 101, 103 and 125, the
serial ports COM1, COM3 and COM25 must have been set up correctly.

Note on serial ports

In a standard configuration Mac OS and Windows support two serial ports: on Mac OS, the
modem port and the printer port; on Windows, the COM1 and COM2 ports. However,
additional serial ports can be added by the use of extension boards. Originally, 4D only
adressed two standard serial ports and it was only later that the support of additional ports was
implemented. For compatibility reasons, both addressing systems were kept.
- If you want to address a standard serial port (printer/COM2 or modem/COM1), you can
either pass in the port parameter one of the following values 0, 1, 20, 21, 30 and 31 (that
corresponds to the old addressing method), or a value greater than 100 (please see the
following explanation).
- If you want to address additional serial ports, you need to pass the value N+100 (where N is
the value of the port to address). You may also consider adding 100 or 200 to the value
mentioned above (N+100), if you want to select respectively a software or a hardware protocol.

Examples
1. If you want to use the printer/COM2 port with no protocol, you can use one of the
following syntaxes:

SET CHANNEL (0;param)

or
SET CHANNEL (102;param)

4D Language Reference 391

2. If you want to use the modem/COM1 port with the XON/XOFF protocol, you can use one
of the following syntaxes:

SET CHANNEL (21;param)

or
SET CHANNEL (201;param)

3. If you want to use the COM 25 port with the RTS/CTS protocol, you need to use the
following syntax:

SET CHANNEL (325;param)

The settings Parameter

The settings parameter sets the speed, number of data bits, number of stop bits, and parity.
You determine the value for settings by adding the speed, data bits, stop bits, and parity values
as listed in the following table. For example, to set 1200 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no
parity, you would add 94 + 3072 + 16384 + 0 = 19550. You would then use 19550 as the value
of the setup parameter.

Value to accumulate Description

in settings parameter
Speed 380 300
(in baud) 189 600
94 1200
62 1800
46 2400
30 3600
22 4800
14 7200
10 9600
4 19200
2 28800
1 38400
0 57600
1022 115200
1021 230400
Data bits 0 5
2048 6
1024 7
3072 8

392 4D Language Reference

Stop bits 16384 1
–32768 1.5
–16384 2
Parity 0 None
4096 Odd
12288 Even

Tip: The various numeric values to be accumulated and passed in port and settings (but not
including the values for COM1...COM99) are available as predefined constants in the theme
Communications within the Design environment Explorer windows. For COM1...COM99, use
numeric literals.

Working with Documents on Disk - SET CHANNEL(operation;document)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The second form of the SET CHANNEL command allows you to create, open, and close a
document. Unlike the System documents commands, it can open only one document at a
time. The document can be read from or written to.

The operation parameter specifies the operation to be performed on the document specified by
document. The following table lists the values of operation and the resulting operation with
different values for document. The first column lists the allowed values for operation. The
second column lists the allowed values for document. The third column lists the resulting
operation.

For example, to display an Open File dialog box to open a text file, you would use the
following line:

SET CHANNEL (13; "")

Operation Document Result

10 String Opens the document specified by String.
If the document doesn’t exist, the document is opened
and created.
10 "" (empty string) Displays the Open File dialog box to open a file.
All file types are displayed.
11 none Closes an open file.
12 "" (empty string) Displays the Save File dialog box to create a new file.
13 "" (empty string) Displays the Open File dialog box to open a file. Only text
file types are displayed.

4D Language Reference 393

All of the operations in this table set the Document system variable if appropriate. They also
set the OK system variable to 1 if the operation was successful. Otherwise, the OK system
variable is set to 0.

Examples
See examples for the commands RECEIVE BUFFER, SET TIMEOUT and RECEIVE RECORD.

See Also
Append document, Create document, GET SERIAL PORT MAPPING, Open document, RECEIVE
BUFFER, RECEIVE PACKET, RECEIVE RECORD, RECEIVE VARIABLE, SEND PACKET, SEND RECORD,
SEND VARIABLE, SET TIMEOUT.

394 4D Language Reference

SET TIMEOUT Communications

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET TIMEOUT (seconds)

Parameter Type Description

seconds Number → Seconds until the timeout

Description
SET TIMEOUT specifies how much time a serial port command has to complete. If the serial
port command does not complete within the specified time, seconds, the serial port command
is canceled, an error -9990 is generated, and the OK system variable is set to 0. You can catch
the error with an error-handling method installed using ON ERR CALL.

Note that the time is the total time allowed for the command to execute, not the time
between characters received. To cancel a previous setting and stop monitoring serial port
communication, use a setting of 0 for seconds.

The commands that are affected by the timeout setting are:

• RECEIVE PACKET
• RECEIVE RECORD
• RECEIVE VARIABLE

Example
The following example sets the serial port to receive data. It then sets a time-out. The data is
read with RECEIVE PACKET. If the data is not received in time, an error occurs:

SET CHANNEL (MacOS Serial Port; Speed 9600 + Data Bits 8 + Stop Bits One +
Parity None)
` Open Serial Port
SET TIMEOUT (10) ` Set the timeout for 10 seconds
ON ERR CALL ("CATCH COM ERRORS") ` Do not let the method being interrupted
RECEIVE PACKET (vtBuffer; Char (13)) ` Read until a carriage return is met

4D Language Reference 395

 If (OK=0)
ALERT ("Error receiving data.")
Else
[People]Name:=vtBuffer ` Save received data in a field
End if
ON ERR CALL("")

See Also
ON ERR CALL, RECEIVE BUFFER, RECEIVE PACKET, RECEIVE RECORD, RECEIVE VARIABLE.

396 4D Language Reference

USE CHARACTER SET Communications

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

USE CHARACTER SET (map | *{; mapInOut})

Parameter Type Description

map | * String | * → Name of character set to use (Unicode mode), or
Document name of ASCII map to use (ASCII mode) or
* to reset to default character set/ASCII map
mapInOut Number → 0 = Output map
1 = Input map
If omitted, output map

Description
USE CHARACTER SET can be used to modify the character set used by 4D during transfer of data
between the database and a document or a serial port. Transfer operations include the import
and export of text (ASCII), DIF, and SYLK files. An ASCII map also works on data transferred
with SEND PACKET, RECEIVE PACKET (for text type packets) and RECEIVE BUFFER. It has no effect
on transfers of data done with SEND RECORD, SEND VARIABLE, RECEIVE RECORD, SEND PACKET
and RECEIVE PACKET (for BLOB type packets) and RECEIVE VARIABLE.

The USE CHARACTER SET command is used differently according to whether the database is
operating in Unicode mode or in ASCII compatibility mode. It loads into memory either a
character set or an ASCII map.

Note: For more information about these modes, please refer to the ASCII Codes section.

Unicode Mode
In Unicode mode, the map parameter must correspond to the “IANA” name of the character
set to be used, or to one of its aliases. For example, the names “iso-8859-1” or “utf-8” are both
valid names, as well as the aliases “latin1” or “l1”. For more information about these names,
please refer to the following address: http://www.iana.org/assignments/character-sets. Examples
if IANA names are also provided in the description of the CONVERT FROM TEXT command.

ASCII compatibility mode

In this mode, the command loads into memory and uses the ASCII map document (passed in
map) that was previously saved. The ASCII map must have been created beforehand using a
previous version of 4D. If you give an empty string for map, USE CHARACTER SET displays a
standard Open File dialog box so that the user can specify an existing ASCII map.

4D Language Reference 397

If mapInOut is 0, the map is set for exporting. If mapInOut is 1, the map is set for importing. If
you do not pass the mapInOut parameter, the export map is used by default.

When the * parameter is passed, the default character set is restored (import or export map
depending on the value of mapInOut).
In Unicode mode in 4D v11, the default character set is UTF-8.
In compatibility mode compatibilité, the standard Mac ASCII is restored.

Example
The following example (Unicode mode) uses the UTF-16 character set to export a text, then
the default character set is restored:

USE CHARACTER SET ("UTF-16LE"; 0) ` Use the UTF-16 'Little Endian' character set
EXPORT TEXT ([MyTable]; "MyText") ` Export data through the map
USE CHARACTER SET (*; 0) ` Restore the default character set

See Also
EXPORT DIF, EXPORT SYLK, EXPORT TEXT, IMPORT DIF, IMPORT SYLK, IMPORT TEXT, Mac to Win,
RECEIVE BUFFER, RECEIVE PACKET, SEND PACKET, Win to Mac.

System Variables or Sets

The OK system variable is set to 1 if the map is loaded correctly. Otherwise, it is set to 0.

398 4D Language Reference

9
______________________
Compiler

4D Language Reference 399

400 4D Language Reference
Compiler Commands Compiler

version 2003 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The integrated compiler of 4D translates your database applications into assembly level
instructions. The advantages of the compiler are:

• Speed: Your database can run from 3 to 1,000 times faster.

• Code checking: Your database application is scanned for the consistency of code. Both
logical and syntactical conflicts are detected.

• Protection: once your database is compiled, you can delete the interpreted code, Then, the
compiled database is functionally identical to the original, except that the structure and
procedures cannot be viewed or modified, deliberately or inadvertently.

• Stand-alone double-clickable applications: compiled databases can also be transformed into

stand-alone applications (.EXE files) with their own icon.

For a description of the operation of the 4D compiler, refer to the Design Reference manual.

The commands in this theme relate to the use of the compiler. They enable you to normalize
data types throughout your database. The IDLE command is specifically used in compiled
databases.

C_BLOB C_INTEGER C_REAL IDLE

C_BOOLEAN C_LONGINT C_STRING
C_DATE C_PICTURE C_TEXT
C_GRAPH C_POINTER C_TIME

These commands, except IDLE, declare variables and cast them as a specified data type.
Declaring variables resolves ambiguities concerning a variable’s data type. If a variable is not
declared with one of these commands, the compiler attempts to determine a variable’s data
type. The data type of a variable used in a form is often difficult for the compiler to determine.
Therefore, it is especially important that you use these commands to declare a variable used in
a form.

Note: To save time, you can use the option for generating and updating typing methods
(called “Compiler methods”) found in the compiler window. This option automatically creates
typing methods that take stock of and assign a type to all of the variables used in the database.

4D Language Reference 401

Arrays are variables that must follow the same rules as standard variables with respect to
compilation. The array declaration commands are grouped together in the “Arrays” theme.

General rules about writing code that will be compiled

• You must not give the same name to more than one method or variable. You cannot have a
method with the same name as a variable.

• Variable indirection as used in 4D version 1 is not allowed. You cannot use alpha
indirection, with the section symbol (§), to indirectly reference variables. Nor can you use
numeric indirection, with the curly braces ({...}), for this purpose. Curly braces can only be
used when accessing specific elements of an array that has been declared. However, you can
use parameter indirection.
• You can’t change the data type of any variable or array.
• You can’t change a one-dimensional array to a two-dimensional array, or change a two-
dimensional array to a one-dimensional array.
• You can’t change the length of string variables or of elements in string arrays.
• Although the compiler will type the variable for you, you should specify the data type of a
variable by using compiler directives where the data type is ambiguous, such as in a form.
• Another reason to explicitly type your variables is to optimize your code. This rule applies
especially to any variable used as a counter. Use variables of a long integer data type for
maximum performance.

• To clear a variable (initialize it to null), use CLEAR VARIABLE with the name of the variable.
Do not use a string to represent the name of the variable in the CLEAR VARIABLE command.

• The Undefined function will always return False. Variables are always defined.

• Numeric operations on long integer and integer variables are usually much faster than
operations on the default numeric type (real).

These principles are detailed in the following sections:

• Using Compiler Directives, explains when and where to write compiler directives,
• Typing Guide, describes the different types of conflicts that may occur during the
compilation of 4D databases,
• Syntax Details, provides additional information concerning several 4D commands,
• Optimization Hints, offers hints to accelerate the running of applications in compiled mode.

402 4D Language Reference

Examples
1. The following are some basic variable declarations for the compiler:
C_BLOB(vxMyBlob) ` The process variable vxMyBlob is declared as a variable of type BLOB
` The interprocess variable <>OnWindows is declared as a variable of type Boolean
C_BOOLEAN(<>OnWindows)
` The local variable $vdCurDate is declared as a variable of type Date
C_DATE($vdCurDate)
` The 3 process variables vg1, vg2 and vg3 are declared as variables of type Graph
C_GRAPH(vg1;vg2;vg3)

2. In the following example, the project method OneMethodAmongOthers declares 3

parameters:
` OneMethodAmongOthers Project Method
` OneMethodAmongOthers ( Real ; Integer { ; Long } )
` OneMethodAmongOthers ( Amount ; Percentage { ; Ratio } )

C_REAL($1) ` 1st parameter is of type Real

C_INTEGER($2) ` 2nd parameter is of type Integer
C_LONGINT($3) ` 3rd parameter is of type Long Integer

` ...

3. In the following example, the project method Capitalize accepts a string parameter and
returns a string result:
` Capitalize Project Method
` Capitalize ( String ) -> String
` Capitalize ( Source string ) -> Capitalized string

C_STRING(255;$0;$1)
$0:=Uppercase(Substring($1;1;1))+Lowercase(Substring($1;2))

4D Language Reference 403

4. In the following example, the project method SEND PACKETS accepts a time parameter
followed by a variable number of text parameters:
` SEND PACKETS Project Method
` SEND PACKETS ( Time ; Text { ; Text2... ; TextN } )
` SEND PACKETS ( docRef ; Data { ; Data2... ; DataN } )

C_TIME ($1)
C_TEXT (${2})
C_LONGINT ($vlPacket)

For ($vlPacket;2;Count parameters)

SEND PACKET ($1;${$vlPacket})
End for

5. In the following example, the project method COMPILER_Param_Predeclare28 predeclares

the syntax of other project methods for the compiler:
` COMPILER_Param_Predeclare28 Project Method

` OneMethodAmongOthers ( Real ; Integer { ; Long } )

C_REAL(OneMethodAmongOthers;$1)
C_INTEGER(OneMethodAmongOthers;$2) ` ...
C_LONGINT(OneMethodAmongOthers;$3) ` ...
C_STRING(Capitalize;255;$0;$1) ` Capitalize ( String ) -> String
C_TIME(SEND PACKETS;$1)` SEND PACKETS ( Time ; Text { ; Text2... ; TextN } )
C_TEXT(SEND PACKETS;${2}) ` ...

See Also
C_BLOB, C_BOOLEAN, C_DATE, C_GRAPH, C_INTEGER, C_LONGINT, C_PICTURE, C_POINTER,
C_REAL, C_STRING, C_TEXT, C_TIME, IDLE.

404 4D Language Reference

Using Compiler Directives Compiler

version 2003 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Data types of variables

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4D has three categories of variables:

• Local variables,
• Process variables,
• Interprocess variables.

For more information about this point, refer to the Variables section. Process and
interprocess variables are structurally the same for the compiler.

Since the compiler cannot determine the process in which the variable will be used, process
variables should be used with more care than interprocess variables. All process variables
are systematically duplicated when a new process begins. A process variable can have a
different value in each process, but it has the same type for the entire database.

Variable types
All variables have a type. As described in the Data Types section, there are 12 different types
of variables:
Boolean
Fixed string
Date
Integer
Longint
Graph
Time
Picture
Number (or Real)
Pointer
Text
BLOB

There are nine different types of arrays:

Boolean Array
String Array
Date Array
Integer Array
Longint Array
Picture Array
Real Array
Pointer Array
Text Array

4D Language Reference 405

Creation of the symbol table
In interpreted mode, a variable can have more than one data type. This is possible because
the code is interpreted rather than compiled. 4D interprets each statement separately and
comprehends its context. When you work in a compiled environment, the situation is
different. While interpretation is performed line by line, the compilation process looks at a
database in its entirety.

The compiler's approach is the following:

• The compiler systematically analyzes the objects in the database. The objects are database,
project, form, trigger and object methods.
• The compiler scans the objects to determine the data type of each variable used in the
database, and it generates the table of variables and methods (the symbol table).
• Once it has established the data types of all variables, the compiler translates (compiles)
the database. However, it cannot compile the database unless it can determine the data
type for each of the variables.

If the compiler comes across the same variable name and two different data types, it has no
reason to favor any particular one. In other words, in order to type an object and give it a
memory address, the compiler must know the precise identity of that object (i.e., its name
and its data type). The compiler determines its size from the data type. For every compiled
database, the compiler creates a map that lists, for each variable, its name (or identifier), its
location (or memory address), and the space it occupies (indicated by its data type). This
map is called the symbol table. An option in the Preferences lets you choose whether to
generate this table in the form of a file during compilation.
This map is also used for the automatic generation of compiler methods.

Typing variables
The compiler must respect the identification criteria of the variables.
There are two possibilities:
• If the variables are not typed, the compiler can do it for you automatically. Whenever
possible––as long as there is no ambiguity––the compiler determines a variable's type from
the way it is used. For example, if you write:
V1 := True

the compiler determines that variable V1 is of data type Boolean.

By the same token, if you write:

V2:= "This is a sample phrase"

the compiler determines that V2 is a Text type variable.

The compiler is also capable of establishing the data type of a variable in less
straightforward situations:
V3:= V1 `V3 is of the same type as V1
V4:= 2*V2 `V4 is of the same type as V2

406 4D Language Reference

The compiler also determines the data type of your variables according to calls to 4D
commands and according to your methods. For example if you pass a Boolean type
parameter and a Date type parameter to a method, the compiler assigns the Boolean type
and the Date type to the local variables $1 and $2 in the called method.

When the compiler determines the data type by inference, unless indicated otherwise in
the Preferences, it never assigns the limiting data types: Integer, Longint or String. The
default type assigned by the compiler is always the widest possible. For example, if you
write:
Number:=4

the compiler assigns the Real data type to Number, even though 4 happens to be an integer.
In other words, the compiler does not rule out the possibility that, under other
circumstances, the variable's value might be 4.5.
If it is appropriate to type a variable as Integer, Longint or String, you can do so using a
compiler directive. It is to your advantage to do so, because these data types occupy less
memory and performing operations on them is faster.

If you have already typed your variables and are sure that your typing is coherent and
complete, you may explicitly ask the compiler not to redo this work, using the compilation
Preferences. In case your typing was not complete and exhaustive, at the time of
compilation, the compiler will return errors requesting you to make the necessary
modifications.

• The compiler directive commands enable you to explicitly declare the variables used in
your databases.
They are used in the following manner:
C_BOOLEAN(Var)

Through such directives, you inform the compiler to create a variable Var that will be a
Boolean.
Whenever an application includes compiler directives, the compiler detects them and thus
avoids guesswork.

A compiler directive has priority over deductions made from assignments or use.

Variables declared with the compiler directive C_INTEGER are actually the same as those
declared by the directive C_LONGINT. They are, in fact, long integers between –2147483648
and +2147483647.

When to use compiler directives

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Compiler directives are useful in two cases:

• The compiler is unable to determine the data type of a variable from its context,
• You do not want the compiler to determine a variable's type from its use.
Furthermore, using compiler directives allows you to reduce compilation time.

4D Language Reference 407

Cases of ambiguity
Sometimes the compiler cannot determine the data type of a variable. Whenever it cannot
make a determination, the compiler generates an appropriate error message.
There are three major causes that prevent the compiler from determining the data type:
multiple data types, ambiguity on a forced deduction and the inability to determine a data
type.

• Multiple data types

If a variable has been retyped in different statements in the database, the compiler
generates an error that is easy to fix.
The compiler selects the first variable it encounters and arbitrarily assigns its data type to
the next occurrence of the variable having the same name but a different data type.

Here is a simple example:

in method A,
Variable:=True

in method B,
Variable:="The moon is green"

If method A is compiled before method B, the compiler considers the statement

Variable:="The moon is green" as a data type change in a previously encountered variable.
The compiler notifies you that retyping has occurred. It generates an error for you to
correct. In most cases, the problem can be fixed by renaming the second occurrence of the
variable.

• Ambiguity on a forced deduction

Sometimes, due to a sequence, the compiler can deduce that an object's type is not the
proper type for it. In this case, you must explicitly type the variable with a compiler
directive.

Here is an example using the default values for an active object:

In a form, you can assign default values for the following objects: combo boxes, pop-up
menus, tab controls, drop-down lists, menu/drop-down lists and scrollable areas using the
Edit button for the Value List (under the Entry Control theme of the Property List) (for
more information, refer to the 4D Design Reference manual). The default values are
automatically loaded into an array whose name is the same as the name of the object.
If the object is not used in a method, the compiler can deduce the type, without ambiguity,
as a text array.
However, if a display initialization must be performed, the sequence could be:
Case of
: (Form event=On Load)
MyPopUp:=2
...
End case

408 4D Language Reference

In this case, the ambiguity appears––when parsing methods, the compiler will deduce a
Real data type for the object MyPopUp. In this case, it is necessary to explicitly declare the
array in the form method or in a compiler method:
Case of
: (Form event=On Load)
ARRAY TEXT(MyPopUp;2)
MyPopUp:=2
...
End case

• Inability to determine a data type

This case can arise when a variable is used without having been declared, within a context
that does not provide information about its data type. Here, only a compiler directive can
guide the compiler.
This phenomenon occurs primarily within four contexts:
- when pointers are used,
- when you use a command with more than one syntax,
- when you use a command having optional parameters of different data types,
- when you use a 4D method called via a URL.

- Pointers
A pointer cannot be expected to return a data type other than its own.
Consider the following sequence:
Var1:=5.2 (1)
Pointer:=->Var1 (2)
Var2:=Pointer-> (3)

Although (2) defines the type of variable pointed to by Pointer, the type of Var2 is not
determined. During compilation, the compiler can recognize a pointer, but it has no way of
knowing what type of variable it is pointing to. Therefore it cannot deduce the data type of
Var2. A compiler directive is needed, for example C_REAL(Var2).

- Multi-syntax commands
When you use a variable associated with the function Year of, the variable can only be of
the data type Date, considering the nature of this function. However, things are not always
so simple. Here is an example:
The GET FIELD PROPERTIES command accepts two syntaxes:
GET FIELD PROPERTIES(tableNo;fieldNo;type;length;index)
GET FIELD PROPERTIES(fieldPointer;type;length;index)

When you use a multi-syntax command, the compiler cannot guess which syntax and
parameters you have selected. You must use compiler directives to type variables passed to
the command, if they are not typed according to their use elsewhere in the database.

4D Language Reference 409

- Commands with optional parameters of different data types
When you use a command that contains several optional parameters of different data
types, the compiler cannot determine which optional parameters have been used. Here is
an example:
The GET LIST ITEM command accepts two optional parameters; the first as a Longint and
the other as a Boolean.
The command can thus either be used as follows:
GET LIST ITEM(list;itemPos;itemRef;itemText;sublist;expanded)
or like this:
GET LIST ITEM(list;itemPos;itemRef;itemText;expanded)
You must use compiler directives to type optional variables passed to the command, if they
are not typed according to their use elsewhere in the database.

- Methods called via URLs

If you write 4D methods that need to be called via a URL, and if you do not use $1 in the
method, you must explicitly declare the text variable $1 with the following sequence:
C_TEXT($1)
In fact, the compiler cannot determine that the 4D method will be called via a URL.

Reducing time needed to compile

If all the variables used in the database are explicitly declared, it is not necessary for the
compiler to check the typing. In this case, you can set the options so that the compiler
only executes the translation phase of the method. This saves at least 50% in compilation
time.

Optimizing code
You can speed up your methods by using compiler directives. For more details on this
subject, refer to the Optimization Hints section. To give a simple example, suppose you need
to increment a counter using a local variable. If you do not declare the variable, the
compiler assumes that is a Real. If you declare it as a Longint, the compiled database will
perform more efficiently. On a PC, for instance, a Real takes 8 bytes, but if you type the
counter as a Longint, it only uses 4 bytes. Incrementing an 8-byte counter obviously takes
longer than incrementing a 4-byte one.

Where to place your compiler directives

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Compiler directives can be handled in two different ways, depending on whether or not
you want the compiler to type your variables.

410 4D Language Reference

Variables typed by the compiler
If you want the compiler to check the typing of your variables or to type them itself, it is
easy to place a compiler directive for this purpose. You can choose between two different
possibilities, depending on your working methods:
• Either use the directive in the method in which the variable first appears, depending on
whether it is a local, proces or interprocess variable. Be sure to use the directive the very
first time you use the variable, in the first method to be executed. Keep in mind that during
compilation, the compiler takes the methods in the order of their creation in 4D, and not
in the order in which they are displayed in the Explorer.
• Or, if you are systematic in your approach, group all the process and interprocess
variables with the different compiler directives in the On Startup Database Method or in a
method called by the On Startup Database Method.
For local variables, group the directives at the beginning of the method in which they
appear.

Variables typed by the developer

If you do not want the compiler to check your typing, you must give it a code to identify
the compiler directives.
The convention to follow is:
Compiler directives for the process and interprocess variables and the parameters should be
placed in one or more methods, the names of which begin with the key word Compiler.
By default, the compiler lets you automatically generate five types of Compiler methods,
which group together the directives for variables, arrays and method parameters (for more
information about this point, refer to the Design Reference manual).

Note: The syntax for declaring these parameters is the following:

Directive (methodName;parameter). This syntax is not executable in interpreted mode.

Particular parameters
• Parameters received by database methods
If these parameters have not been explicitly declared, they are typed by the compiler.
Nevertheless, if you declare them, the declaration must be done inside the database
methods.
This parameter declaration cannot be written in a Compiler method.
Example: On Web Connection Database Method receives six parameters, $1 to $6, of the
data type Text. At the beginning of the database method, you must write:
C_TEXT($1;$2;$3;$4;$5;$6)

• Triggers
The $0 parameter (Longint), which is the result of a trigger, is typed by the compiler if the
parameter has not been explicitly declared. Nevertheless, if you want to declare it, you
must do so in the trigger itself.
This parameter declaration cannot be written in a Compiler method.

4D Language Reference 411

• Objects that accept the “On Drag Over” form event
The $0 parameter (Longint), which is the result of the “On Drag Over” form event, is typed
by the compiler if the parameter has not been explicitly declared. Nevertheless, if you want
to decalre it, you must do so in the object method.
This parameter declaration cannot be written in a Compiler method.

Note: The compiler does not initialize the $0 parameter. So, as soon as you use the On Drag
Over form event, you must initialize $0. For example:
C_LONGINT($0)
If (Form event=On Drag Over)
$0:=0
...
If ($DataType=Is Picture)
$0:=-1
End if
...
End if

The C_STRING compiler directive

The C_STRING command uses a different syntax than the other directives because it accepts
an additional parameter––the maximum string length.
C_STRING(length;var1{;var2;…;varN})

Since C_STRING types fixed-length strings, you specify the maximum length of such
strings. In a compiled database, you must specify the length of the string with a constant
rather than with a variable.
In an interpreted database, the following sequence is acceptable:
TheLength:=15
C_STRING(TheLength;TheString)

4D interprets TheLength, then replaces TheLength with its value in the C_STRING compiler
directive.
However, the compiler uses this command when typing variables with no specific
assignment in mind. Thus, it is not in a position to know that TheLength equals 15. Not
knowing the string's length, the compiler cannot keep a space for it in the symbol table.
Therefore, with compilation in mind, use a constant to specify the length of the declared
character string. For example, use a statement such as this:
C_STRING(15;TheString)

The same rule applies to declaring fixed string arrays, which are typed with the command:
ARRAY STRING(length;arrayName;size)

The parameter that indicates string lengths in the array must be a constant.

412 4D Language Reference

However, you can specify the length of the string with a 4D constant or a hexadecimal
value in these two compiler directives. For example:
C_STRING(4DConstant;TheString)
ARRAY STRING(4DConstant;TheArray;2)
C_STRING(0x000A;TheString)
ARRAY STRING(0x000A;TheArray;2)

Do not confuse the length of an Alphanumeric field, which has a maximum of 80

characters, with a fixed string variable. The maximum length of a string declared by a
C_STRING directive, or belonging to an ARRAY STRING, is between 1 and 255.

Note: The syntax of this command allows you to declare several variables of the same
length in a single line. If you want to declare several strings of different lengths, do so on
separate lines.

A certain liberty permitted by the compiler

Compiler directives remove any ambiguity concerning data types and, in the case of
alphanumeric strings, lengths. Although a certain rigor is necessary, this does not
necessarily mean that the compiler is intolerant of any and every inconsistency.
For example, if you assign a real value to a variable declared as an Integer, or if you assign a
string of 30 characters to a variable declared as a 10-character string, the compiler does not
regard either assignment as a type conflict and assigns the corresponding values according
to your directives. So, if you write:
C_INTEGER(vInteger)
vInteger:=2.5

The compiler does not regard it as a data type conflict that will prevent compilation;
instead, the compiler simply rounds off to the closest integer value (3 instead of 2.5).
Similarly, if you declare a string that is shorter than the one you are dealing with, the
compiler will only take the number of characters declared in the directives. Therefore, in
the following sequence:
C_STRING(10;MyString)
MyString:="It is a beautiful day"

the compiler takes the first ten characters of the constant, i.e. “It is a be”.

See Also
Error messages, Optimization Hints, Syntax Details, Typing Guide.

4D Language Reference 413

Typing Guide Compiler

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

This section describes the main causes of typing conflicts on variables, as well as ways to
avoid them.

Conflicts on simple variables

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Simple data type conflicts can be summarized as follows:

• conflict between two uses,
• conflict between use and a compiler directive,
• conflict resulting from implicit retyping,
• conflict between two compiler directives.

Conflicts between two uses

The simplest data type conflict is one that stems from a single variable name designating
two different objects. Suppose that, in an application, you write:
Variable:=5
and that elsewhere, in the same application, you write:
Variable:=True
This generates a data type conflict. The problem can be solved by renaming one of the
variables.

Conflict between use and a compiler directive

Suppose that, in an application, you write:
Variable:=5
and that elsewhere, in the same application, you write:
C_BOOLEAN(Variable)
Since the compiler scans the directives first, it will type Variable as Boolean, but when it
finds the statement:
Variable:=5
it detects a data type conflict. You can solve the problem by renaming your variable or
modifying the compiler directive.

Using variables of different data types in one expression creates inconsistencies. The
compiler points out incompatibilities. Here is a simple example:
vBool:=True `The compiler infers that vBoolean is data type Boolean
C_INTEGER(<>vInteger) `Declaration of an Integer by a compiler directive
<>vInteger:=3 `Command compatible with the compiler directive
Var:= <>vInteger+vBool `Operation containing variables with incompatible data types

414 4D Language Reference

Conflict stemming from implicit retyping
Some functions return variables of a very precise data type. Assigning the result of one of
such variables to a variable already typed differently will cause a data type conflict if you
are not careful.
For example, in an interpreted application, you can write:
IdentNo:=Request("Identification Number") `IdentNo is data type Text
If(Ok=1)
IdentNo:=Num(IdentNo) `IdentNo is data type Real
QUERY([Contacts]Id=IdentNo)
End if

In this example, you create a type conflict in the third line. The solution consists in
controlling the behavior of the variable. In some cases, you must create an intermediate
variable that uses a different name. In other cases, such as this, your method can be
structured differently:
IdentNo:=Num(Request("Identification Number")) `IdentNo is data type Real
If(Ok=1)
QUERY([Contacts]Id=IdentNo)
End if

Conflict between two compiler directives

Declaring the same variable through two conflicting compiler directives constitutes a
retyping. If, in the same database, you write:
C_BOOLEAN(Variable)
C_TEXT(Variable)
the compiler detects the conflict and reports an error in the error file. Typically, you can
solve the problem by renaming one of the variables.

Keep in mind that a data type conflict can arise concerning the use of C_STRING if you
modify the maximum string length. Thus, if you write:
C_STRING(5;MyString)
MyString:="Hello"
C_STRING(7;MyString)
MyString:="Flowers"
the compiler identifies a conflict because it must provide an adequately-sized location
when declaring String variables.
The solution is to use a compiler directive that gives the maximum length, since, by
default, the compiler will accept a shorter length. You can write:
C_STRING(7;String)
String:="Flowers"
String:="Hello"

4D Language Reference 415

Note: If you have written C_STRING(7;String) twice, i.e.:
C_STRING(7;String)
String:="Flowers"
C_STRING(7;String)
String:="Hello"
the compiler will nevertheless accept the directives; the second directive is simply
redundant.

Note concerning local variables

Data type conflicts involving local variables are identical to those in process or interprocess
variables. The only difference is that there must be consistency only within a specified
method.
For process and interprocess variables, conflicts occur at the general leve of teh database.
For local variables, conflicts occur at the level of the method. For example, you cannot
write in the same method:
$Temp:="Flowers"
and then
$Temp:=5
However, you can write:
$Temp:="Flowers"
in method M1, and:
$Temp:=5
in method M2, because the scope of local variables is the method itself and not the entire
database.

Conflicts in arrays
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Conflicts concerning an array are never size-related. As in uncompiled databases, arrays are
managed dynamically. The size of an array can vary throughout methods, and you do not
have to declare a maximum size for an array.
Therefore, you can size an array to null, add or remove elements, or delete the contents.

You should follow these guidelines when writing a database intended for compilation:
• Do not change data types of array elements,
• Do not change the number of dimensions of an array,
• For a String array, do not change character-string length.

Changing data types of array elements

If you declare an array as an Integer array, it must remain an integer array throughout the
database. It can never contain, for example, Boolean type elements.
If you write:
ARRAY INTEGER(MyArray;5)
ARRAY BOOLEAN(MyArray;5)
the compiler cannot type MyArray.
Just rename one of the arrays.

416 4D Language Reference

Changing the number of dimensions of an array
In an uncompiled database, you can change the number of dimensions in an array. When
the compiler sets up the symbol table, one-dimensional arrays and two-dimensional arrays
are managed differently.
Consequently, you cannot redeclare a one-dimensional array as two-dimensional, or vice
versa.
Therefore, in the same database, you cannot have:
ARRAY INTEGER(MyArray1;10)
ARRAY INTEGER(MyArray1;10;10)
However, you can write the following statements in the same application:
ARRAY INTEGER(MyArray1;10)
ARRAY INTEGER(MyArray2;10;10)
The number of dimensions in an array cannot be changed in a database. However, you can
change the size of an array. You can resize one array of a two-dimensional array and write:
ARRAY BOOLEAN(MyArray;5)
ARRAY BOOLEAN(MyArray;10)

Note: A two-dimensional array is, in fact, a set of several one-dimensional arrays. For more
information, refer to the Two-dimensional Arrays section.

Case of fixed string arrays

String arrays follow the same rules as fixed strings, for the same reasons.
If you write:
ARRAY STRING(5;MyArray;10)
ARRAY STRING(10;MyArray;10)
the compiler detects a length conflict. The solution is simple: declare the maximum string
length. The compiler automatically handles shorter length strings.

Implicit retyping
When using commands such as COPY ARRAY, LIST TO ARRAY, ARRAY TO LIST, SELECTION TO
ARRAY, SELECTION RANGE TO ARRAY, ARRAY TO SELECTION, or DISTINCT VALUES, you may
change, voluntarily or not, the data types of elements, the number of dimensions, or, in a
String array, the string length. You will thus find yourself in one of the three situations
previously mentioned.
The compiler generates an error message; the required correction is usually quite obvious.
Examples of implicit array retyping are provided in the Syntax Details section.

Local arrays
If you want to compile a database that uses local arrays (arrays only visible by the methods
that created them), you must explicitly declare them in 4D before using them.
Explicitly declaring an array means using a command of the type ARRAY REAL, ARRAY
INTEGER, etc.
For example, if a method creates a local integer array of 10 elements, you should have the
following line in your method:
ARRAY INTEGER($MyArray;10)

4D Language Reference 417

Typing of variables created in forms
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Variables created in a form (e.g., buttons, drop-down list boxes, and so forth) are always
process or interprocess variables.
In an interpreted database, the data type of such variables is not important. However, in
compiled applications, it may have to be taken into consideration. The rules are,
nevertheless, quite clear:
• You can type form variables using compiler directives, or
• The compiler assigns it a default type that can be set in the compilation Preferences (see
the Design Reference manual).

Variables considered by default as Real

The following form variables are typed as Real by default:
Check box
3D check box
Button
Highlight button
Invisible button
3D button
Picture button
Button grid
Radio button
3D radio button
Radio picture
Picture menu
Hierarchical pop-up menu
Hierarchical list
Ruler
Dial
Thermometer.

Note: The Ruler, Dial and Thermometer form variables are always typed as Reals, even if
you choose Long integer as the Default Button Type in the Preferences.

For one of these variables, the only data type conflict that could arise would be if the name
of a variable were identical to that of another one located elsewhere in the database. In this
case, rename the second variable.

Graph variable
A graph area is automatically data type Graph (Longint). This variable never creates a data
type conflict. For a Graph type variable, the only possible data type conflict that could arise
would be if the name of a variable were identical to that of another one located elsewhere
in the database. In this case, rename the second variable.

418 4D Language Reference

Plug-in area variable
A plug-in area is always a Longint. There can never be a data type conflict.
For a plug-in area, the only possible data type conflict that could arise would be if the name
of a variable were identical to that of another one located elsewhere in the database. In this
case, rename the second variable.

Variables considered by default as Text

These variables are of the following types:
Non-enterable variable,
Enterable variable,
Drop-down list,
Menu/drop-down list,
Scrollable area,
Combo box,
Pop-up Menu,
Tab control.

These variables are divided into two categories:

• simple variables (enterable and non-enterable variables),
• display variables (drop-down lists, menus/drop-down lists, scrollable areas, pop-up
menus, combo boxes and tab controls).

• Simple variables
Their default data type is Text. When used in methods or object methods, they are assigned
the data type selected by you. There is no danger of conflict other than one resulting from
assigning the same name to another variable.

• Display variables
Some variables are used to display arrays in forms. If default values have been entered in
the Form editor, you must explicitly declare the corresponding variables using the Array
Declaration commands (ARRAY STRING, ARRAY TEXT...).

Pointers
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

When you use pointers in your database, you take advantage of a powerful and versatile 4D
tool. The compiler preserves all the benefits of pointers.
A pointer can point to variables of different data types. Do not create a conflict by
assigning different data types to a variable. Be careful not to change the data type of a
variable to which a pointer refers.
Here is an example of this problem:
Variable:=5.3
Pointer:=-> Variable
Pointer->:=6.4
Pointer->:=False

4D Language Reference 419

In this case, your dereferenced pointer is a Real variable. By assigning it a Boolean value,
you create a data type conflict.

If you need to use pointers for different purposes in the same method, make sure that your
pointers are defined:
Variable:=5.3
Pointer:=-> Variable
Pointer->:=6.4
Bool:=True
Pointer:=->Bool
Pointer->:=False

A pointer is always defined in relation to the object to which it refers. That is why the
compiler cannot detect data type conflicts created by pointers. In case of a conflict, you will
get no error message while you are in the typing phase or in the compilation phase.
This does not mean that the compiler has no way to detect conflicts involving pointers.
The compiler can verify your use of pointers when you check the Range Checking option in
the compilation Preferences (see the Design Reference manual).

Plug-in Commands
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

General points
During compilation, the compiler analyzes the definitions of the plug-in commands used
in the database, i.e. the number and type of parameters of these commands. There is no
danger of confusion at the typing level if your calls are consistent with the declaration of
the method.

Make sure that your plug-ins are installed in the PlugIns folder, in one of the locations
authorized by 4D: next to the database structure file or next to the executable application
(Windows) / in the software package (Mac OS). For compatibility reasons, it is still possible
to use the Win4DX or Mac4DX folder next to the structure file. For more information, refer
to the Installation Guide of 4D.
The compiler does not duplicate these files, but analyzes them to determine the proper
declaration of their routines.
If your plug-ins are located elsewhere, the compiler will ask you to locate them during
typing, via an Open file dialog box.

Plug-in commands receiving implicit parameters

Certain plug-ins, for example 4D Write, implement commands that implicitly call 4D
commands.
Take the example of 4D Write. The syntax for the WR ON EVENT command is:
WR ON EVENT(area;event;eventMethod)

420 4D Language Reference

The last parameter is the name of the method that you have created in 4D. This method is
called by 4D Write each time the event is received. It automatically receives the following
parameters:
Parameters Type Description
$0 Longint Function return
$1 Longint 4D Write area
$2 Longint Shift key
$3 Longint Alt key (Windows); Option key (Mac OS)
$4 Longint Ctrl key (Windows), Command key (Mac OS)
$5 Longint Type of event
$6 Longint Value depends on the Event parameter

For the compiler to take these parameters into account, you must make sure that they have
been typed, either by a compiler directive, or by their usage in the method. If they have
been used procedurally, the usage has to be explicit enough to be able to deduce the type
clearly.

4D components
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4D can be used to create and work with components. A 4D component is a set of 4D

objects representing one or more functionalities and grouped in a structure file (called the
matrix database), that can be installed in different databases (called host databases).
A host database running in interpreted mode can use either interpreted or compiled
components indifferently. It is possible to install both interpreted and compiled
components in the same host database. On the other hand, a host database running in
compiled mode cannot use interpreted components. In this case, only compiled
components can be used.
An interpreted host database containing interpreted components can be compiled if it does
not call any methods of the interpreted component. If this is not the case, a warning dialog
box appears when you attempt to compile the application and compilation is not possible.

A naming conflict can occur when a shared project method of the component has the same
name as a project method of the host database. In this case, when the code is executed in
the context of the host database, the method of the host database is called. This means that
it is possible to “mask” the method of the component with a custom method (for example,
to obtain a different functionality). When the code is executed in the context of the
component, the method of the component is called. This masking will be indicated by a
warning in the event of compilation of the host database.

If two components share methods having the same name, an error is generated when the
host database is compiled.

For more information about components, please refer to the Design Reference manual.

4D Language Reference 421

Handling local variables $0…$N and parameter passing
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The handling of local variables follows all the rules that have already been stated. As with
all other variables, their data types cannot be altered while the method executes. In this
section, we examine two instances that could lead to data type conflicts:
• When you actually require retyping. The use of pointers helps avoid data type conflicts.
• When you need to address parameters by indirection.

Using pointers to avoid retyping

A variable cannot be retyped. However, it is possible to use a pointer to refer to variables of
different data types.
As an example, consider a function that returns the memory size of a one-dimensional
array. In all but two cases, the result is a Real; for Text arrays and Picture arrays, the
memory size depends on values that cannot be expressed numerically (see the Arrays and
Memory section).
For Text and Picture arrays, the result is returned as a string of characters. This function
requires a parameter: a pointer to the array whose memory size we want to know.
There are two methods to carry out this operation:
• Work with local variables without worrying about their data types; in such case, the
method runs only in interpreted mode.
• Use pointers, and proceed in interpreted or in compiled mode.

• MemSize function, only in interpreted mode (example for Macintosh)

$Size:=Size of array($1->)
$Type:=Type($1->)
Case of
:($Type=Real array)
$0:=8+($Size*10) ` $0 is a Real
:($Type=Integer array)
$0:=8+($Size*2)
:($Type=LongInt array)
$0:=8+($Size*4)
:($Type=Date array)
$0:=8+($Size*6)
:($Type=Text array)
$0:=String(8+($Size*4))+("+Sum of text lengths") ` $0 is a Text
:($Type=Picture array)
$0:=String(8+($Size*4))+("+Sum of picture sizes") ` $0 is a Text
:($Type=Pointer array)
$0:=8+($Size*16)
:($Type=Boolean array)
$0:=8+($Size/8)
End case

In the above method, the data type of $0 changes according to the value of $1; therefore, it
is not compatible with the compiler.

422 4D Language Reference

• MemSize function in interpreted and compiled modes (example for Macintosh)
Here, the method is written using pointers:

$Size:=Size of array($1->)
$Type:=Type($1->)
VarNum:=0
Case of
:($Type=Real array)
VarNum:=8+($Size*10) ` VarNum is a Real
:($Type=Integer array)
VarNum:=8+($Size*2)
:($Type=LongInt array)
VarNum:=8+($Size*4)
:($Type=Date array)
VarNum:=8+($Size*6)
:($Type=Text array)
VarText:=String(8+($Size*4))+("+Sum of text lengths")
:($Type=Picture array)
VarText:=String(8+($Size*4))+("+Sum of picture sizes")
:($Type=Pointer array)
VarNum:=8+($Size*16)
:($Type=Boolean array)
VarNum:=8+($Size/8)
End case
If (VarNum#0)
$0:=->VarNum
Else
$0:=->VarText
End if

Here are the key differences between the two functions:

• In the first case, the function's result is the expected variable,
• In the second case, the function's result is a pointer to that variable. You simply
dereference your result.

Parameter indirection
The compiler manages the power and versatility of parameter indirection. In interpreted
mode, 4D gives you a free hand with numbers and data types of parameters. You retain this
freedom in compiled mode, provided that you do not introduce data type conflicts and
that you do not use more parameters than you passed in the calling method.
To prevent possible conflicts, parameters addressed by indirection must all be of the same
data type.

4D Language Reference 423

This indirection is best managed if you respect the following convention: if only some of
the parameters are addressed by indirection, they should be passed after the others.
Within the method, an indirection address is formatted: ${$i}, where $i is a numeric
variable. ${$i} is called a generic parameter.

As an example, consider a function that adds values and returns the sum formatted
according to a format that is passed as a parameter. Each time this method is called, the
number of values to be added may vary. We must pass the values as parameters to the
method and the format in the form of a character string. The number of values can vary
from call to call.
This function is called in the following manner:
Result:=MySum("##0.00";125,2;33,5;24)

In this case, the calling method will get the string “182.70”, which is the sum of the
numbers, formatted as specified. The function's parameters must be passed in the correct
order: first the format and then the values.

Here is the function, named MySum:

$Sum:=0
For($i;2;Count parameters)
$Sum:=$Sum+${$i}
End for
$0:=String($Sum;$1)

This function can now be called in various ways:

Result:=MySum("##0.00";125,2;33,5;24)
Result:=MySum("000";1;18;4;23;17)

As with other local variables, it is not necessary to declare generic parameters by compiler
directive. When required (in cases of ambiguity or for optimization), it is done using the
following syntax:
C_INTEGER(${4})

This command means that all parameters starting from the fourth (included) will be
addressed by indirection and will be of the data type Integer. $1, $2 and $3 can be of any
data type. However, if you use $2 by indirection, the data type used will be the generic
type. Thus, it will be of the data type Integer, even if for you it was, for instance, of the data
type Real.

Note: The compiler uses this command in the typing phase. The number in the declaration
has to be a constant and not a variable.

424 4D Language Reference

Reserved variables and constants

Some 4D variables and constants are assigned a data type and an identity by the compiler.
Therefore, you cannot create a new variable, method, function or plug-in command using
any of these variables or constant names. You can test their values and use them as you do
in interpreted mode.

System variables
Here is a complete list of 4D System Variables with their data types.
Variable Type
OK Longint
Document String (255)
FldDelimit Longint
RecDelimit Longint
Error Longint
MouseDown Longint
KeyCode Longint
Modifiers Longint
MouseX Longint
MouseY Longint
MouseProc Longint

Quick report variables

When you create a calculated column in a report, 4D automatically creates a variable C1 for
the first one, C2 for the second one, C3 and so forth. This is done transparently.
If you use these variables in methods, keep in mind that, like other variables, C1, C2, ... Cn
cannot be retyped.

4D predefined constants
A complete list of the predefined constants in 4D can be found in this manual. 4D
constants are also displayed in the Explorer, in Design mode.

See Also
Error messages, Optimization Hints, Syntax Details, Using Compiler Directives.

4D Language Reference 425

Syntax Details Compiler

version 2003 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The compiler expects that the usual syntactic rules for 4D commands are followed. It does
not require any special modifications for databases that will be compiled.

This section nevertheless provides certain reminders and specific details:

• Some commands that affect a variable's data type may lead, if you are not careful, to data
type conflicts.
• Since certain commands use more than one kind of syntax or parameters, it is to your
advantage to know which is the most appropriate one to select.

Strings
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Character code(character)
For commands operating on strings, only the Character code function requires special
attention. In interpreted mode, you can pass either a non-empty string or an empty string
to this function.
In compiled mode, you cannot pass an empty string.
If you pass an empty string, and if the argument passed to Character code is a variable, the
compiler will not be able to detect an error in compilation.

Communications
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SEND VARIABLE(variable)
RECEIVE VARIABLE(variable)
These two commands are used for writing and receiving variables sent to disk. Variables are
passed as parameters to these commands.
The parameter you pass must always be of the same data type. Suppose you want to send a
list of variables to a file. To eliminate the risk of changing data types inadvertently, we
recommend that you specify the data type of the variables being sent at the head of the list.
This way, when you receive these variables, you will always begin by getting an indicator.
Then, when you call RECEIVE VARIABLE, the transfer is managed by a Case of statement.

426 4D Language Reference

Example:
SET CHANNEL(12;"File")
If (OK=1)
$Type:=Type([Client]Total_TO)
SEND VARIABLE($Type)
For($i;1;Records in selection)
$Send_TO:=[Client]Total_TO
SEND VARIABLE($Send_TO)
End for
End if
SET CHANNEL(11)
SET CHANNEL(13;"MyFile")
If (OK=1)
RECEIVE VARIABLE($Type)
Case of
:($Type=Is String Var)
RECEIVE VARIABLE($String)
`Processing variable received
:($Type=Is Real)
RECEIVE VARIABLE($Real)
`Processing variable received
:($Type=Is Text)
RECEIVE VARIABLE($Text)
`Processing variable received
End case
End if
SET CHANNEL(11)

Structure access
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Field (field pointer) or (table number;field number)

Table(table pointer) or (table number) or (field pointer)
These two commands return results of different data types, according to the parameters
passed to them:
• If you pass a pointer to the Table function, the result returned is a number.
• If you pass a number to the Table function, the result returned is a pointer.
The two functions are not sufficient for the compiler to determine the data type of the
result. In such cases, use a compiler directive to avoid any ambiguity.

4D Language Reference 427

Documents
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Keep in mind that the document references returned by the Open document, Append
document and Create document functions are of the data type Time.

Math
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Mod (value;divider)
The expression “25 modulo 3” can be written in two different ways in 4D:
Variable:=Mod(25;3)
or
Variable:=25%3
The compiler sees a difference between the two: Mod applies to all numerics, while the
operator % applies only to Integers and Long Integers. If the operand of the % operator
exceeds the range of the Long Integer data type, the returned result is likely to be wrong.

Exceptions
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

IDLE
ON EVENT CALL (Method{; ProcessName})
ABORT

ON EVENT CALL
The IDLE command has been added to 4D language to manage exceptions. This command
should be used whenever you use the ON EVENT CALL command.

This command could be defined as an event management directive.

Only the kernel of 4D is able to detect a system event (mouse click, keyboard activity, and
so forth). In most cases, kernel calls are initiated by the compiled code itself, in a way that
is transparent to the user.

On the other hand, when 4D is waiting passively for an event––for example, in a waiting
loop––it is clear that there will be no call.

Example under Windows

`MouseClick Method
If (MouseDown=1)
<>vTest:=True
ALERT("Somebody clicked the mouse")
End if

428 4D Language Reference

 `Wait Method
<>vTest:=False
ON EVENT CALL("MouseClick")
While(<>vTest=False)
`Event's waiting loop
End while
ON EVENT CALL("")

In this case, you would add the IDLE command in the following manner:
`Wait Method
<>vTest:=False
ON EVENT CALL("MouseClick")
While(<>vTest=False)
IDLE
`Kernel call to sense an event
End while
ON EVENT CALL("")

ABORT
Use this command only in error-handling project methods. It works exactly as it does in
4D, except in a method that has been called by one of the following commands: EXECUTE
FORMULA, APPLY TO SELECTION and APPLY TO SUBSELECTION. Try to avoid this situation.

Arrays
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Seven 4D commands are used by the compiler to determine the data type of an array. They
are:
COPY ARRAY(source;destination)
SELECTION TO ARRAY(field;array)
ARRAY TO SELECTION(array;field)
SELECTION RANGE TO ARRAY(start;end;field;array)
LIST TO ARRAY(list;array{; itemRefs})
ARRAY TO LIST(array;list{; itemRefs})
DISTINCT VALUES(field;array)

COPY ARRAY
The COPY ARRAY command accepts two array type parameters. If one of the array
parameters is not declared elsewhere, the compiler determines the data type of the
undeclared array from the data type of the declared one.
This deduction is performed in the two following cases:
• The array typed is the first parameter. The compiler assigns the data type of the first array
to the second array.

4D Language Reference 429

• The declared array is the second parameter. Here, the compiler assigns the data type of
the second array to the first array.

Since the compiler is strict about data types, COPY ARRAY can be performed only from an
array of a certain data type to an array of the same type.
Consequently, if you want to copy an array of elements whose data types are similar, i.e.,
Integers, Long Integers and Reals, or Texts and Strings, or Strings with different lengths,
you have to copy the elements one by one.

Suppose you want to copy elements from an Integer array to a Real array. You can proceed
as follows:
$Size:=Size of array(ArrInt)
ARRAY REAL(ArrReal;$Size)
`Set same size for Real array as the Integer array
For($i;1;$Size)
ArrReal{$i}:=ArrInt{$i}
`Copy each of the elements
End for

Remember that you cannot change the number of dimensions of an array during the
process. If you copy a one-dimensional array into a two-dimensional array, the compiler
generates an error message.

SELECTION TO ARRAY, ARRAY TO SELECTION, DISTINCT VALUES, SELECTION RANGE TO

ARRAY
As with 4D in interpreted mode, these four commands do not require the declaration of
arrays. The undeclared array will be assigned the data type of the field specified in the
command.
If you write:
SELECTION TO ARRAY([MyTable]IntField;MyArray)
the data type of MyArray would be an Integer array having one dimension (assuming that
IntField is an integer field).

If the array has been declared, make sure that the field is of the same data type. Although
Integer, Longint and Real are similar types, they are not equivalent.
On the other hand, in the case of Text and String data types, you have a little more
latitude. By default, if an array was not previously declared and you apply a command that
includes a String type field as a parameter, the default data type assigned to the array is
Text. If the array was previously declared as String or Text, these commands will follow
your directives.

The same is true for Text type fields––your directives have priority.
Remember that the SELECTION TO ARRAY, SELECTION RANGE TO ARRAY, ARRAY TO
SELECTION and DISTINCT VALUES commands can only be used with a one-dimensional
array.

430 4D Language Reference

The SELECTION TO ARRAY command also has a second syntax:
SELECTION TO ARRAY(table;array).
In this case, the MyArray variable will be an array of Longints. The SELECTION RANGE TO
ARRAY command works in the same way.

LIST TO ARRAY, ARRAY TO LIST

The LIST TO ARRAY and ARRAY TO LIST commands only concern two types of arrays:
• one-dimensional String arrays, and
• one-dimensional Text arrays.
These commands do not require that the array passed as a parameter be declared. By
default, the non-declared array will be typed as a Text array. If the array was previously
declared as String or Text, these commands will follow your directives.

Using pointers in array-related commands

The compiler cannot detect a data type conflict if you use a dereferenced pointer as a
parameter to an array-declaration command. If you write:
SELECTION TO ARRAY([Table]Field;Pointer->)
where Pointer-> stands for an array, the compiler cannot check whether the field type and
array type are identical. It is up to you to prevent such conflicts; you should type the array
referred to by the pointer.

The compiler issues a warning whenever it encounters an array declaration statement in

which one of the parameters is a pointer. These messages can be helpful in detecting this
type of conflict.

Local arrays
If your database uses local arrays (arrays recognized only in the method in which they were
created), it is necessary to declare them explicitly in 4D before using them.

To declare a local array, use one of the array commands such as ARRAY REAL, ARRAY
INTEGER, etc.

For example, if a method creates a local Integer array with 10 elements, you need to declare
the array before using it. Use the command:
ARRAY INTEGER($MyArray;10)

Language
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get pointer(varName)
Type (object)
EXECUTE FORMULA(statement)
TRACE
NO TRACE

4D Language Reference 431

Get pointer
Get pointer is a function that returns a pointer to the parameter that you passed to it.
Suppose you want to initialize an array of pointers. Each element in that array points to a
given variable. Suppose there are twelve such variables named V1, V2, …V12. You could
write:
ARRAY POINTER(Arr;12)
Arr{1}:=->V1
Arr{2}:=->V2
…
Arr{12}:=->V12

You could also write:

ARRAY POINTER(Arr;12)
For($i;1;12)
Arr{$i}:=Get pointer("V"+String($i))
End for

At the end of this operation, you get an array of pointers where each element points to a
variable Vi.

These two sequences can be compiled. However, if the variables V1 to V12 are not used
explicitly elsewhere in the database, the compiler cannot type them. Therefore, they must
be used or declared explicitly elsewhere.
Such explicit declaration may be performed in two ways:
• By declaring V1, V2, …V12 through a compiler directive:
C_LONGINT(V1;V2;V3;V4;V5;V6;V7;V8;V9;V10;V11;V12)
• By assigning these variables in a method:
V1:=0
V2:=0
…
V12:=0

Type (object)
Since each variable in a compiled database has only one data type, this function may seem
to be of no use. However, it can be useful when you work with pointers. For example, you
may need to know the data type of the variable to which a pointer refers; due to the
flexibility of pointers, one cannot always be sure to what object it points.

EXECUTE FORMULA
This command offers benefits in interpreted mode that are not carried over to compiled
mode.
In compiled mode, a method name passed as a parameter to this command is interpreted.
Therefore, you miss some of the advantages provided by the compiler, and your parameter's
syntax cannot be checked.
Moreover, you cannot pass local variables as parameters to it.

432 4D Language Reference

EXECUTE FORMULA can be replaced by a series of statements. Two examples are given below.

Given the following sequence:

i:= FormFunc
EXECUTE FORMULA("INPUT FORM (Form"+String(i)+")")

It can be replaced by:

i:=FormFunc
VarForm:="Form"+String(i)
INPUT FORM(VarForm)

Below is another example:

$Num:=SelPrinter
EXECUTE FORMULA("Print"+$Num)

Here, EXECUTE FORMULA can be replaced with Case of:

Case of
: ($Num=1)
Print1
: ($Num=2)
Print2
: ($Num=3)
Print3
End case

The EXECUTE FORMULA command can always be replaced. Since the method to be executed
is chosen from the list of the database's project methods or the 4D commands, there is a
finite number of methods. Consequently, it is always possible to replace EXECUTE FORMULA
with either Case of or with another command. Furthermore, your code will execute faster.

TRACE, NO TRACE
These two commands are used in the debugging process. They serve no purpose in a
compiled database. However, you can keep them in your methods; they will simply be
ignored by the compiler.

Variables
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Undefined(variable)
SAVE VARIABLES(document;variable1{; variable2…})
LOAD VARIABLES(document;variable1{; variable2…})
CLEAR VARIABLE(variable)

4D Language Reference 433

Undefined
Considering the typing process carried out by the compiler, a variable can never be
undefined in compiled mode. In fact, all the variables have been defined by the time
compilation has been completed. The Undefined function therefore always returns False,
whatever parameter it is passed.

Note: To know if your application is running in compiled mode, call the Is compiled mode
command.

SAVE VARIABLES, LOAD VARIABLES

In interpreted mode, you can check that the document exists by testing if one of the
variables is undefined after performing a LOAD VARIABLES. This is no longer feasible in
compiled databases, because the Undefined function always returns False.

This test can be performed in either interpreted or compiled mode by:

1. Initializing the variables that you will receive to a value that is not a legal value for any
of the variables.
2. Comparing one of the received variables to the initialization value after LOAD VARIABLES.
The method can be written as follows:
Var1:="xxxxxx"
`"xxxxxx" is a value that cannot be returned by LOAD VARIABLES
Var2:="xxxxxx"
Var3:="xxxxxx"
Var4:="xxxxxx"
LOAD VARIABLES("Document";Var1;Var2;Var3;Var4)
If(Var1="xxxxxx")
`Document not found
…
Else
`Document found
…
End if

CLEAR VARIABLE
This routine uses two different syntaxes in interpreted mode:
CLEAR VARIABLE(variable)
CLEAR VARIABLE("a")
In compiled mode, the first syntax of CLEAR VARIABLE(variable) reinitializes the variable (set
to null for a numeric; empty string for a character string or a text, etc.), since no variable
can be undefined in compiled mode.
Consequently, CLEAR VARIABLE does not free any memory in compiled mode, except in four
cases: Text, Picture, BLOB and Array type variables.
For an array, CLEAR VARIABLE has the same effect as a new array declaration where the size
is set to null.

434 4D Language Reference

For an array MyArray whose elements are of the Integer type, CLEAR VARIABLE(MyArray) has
the same effect as one of the following expressions:
ARRAY INTEGER(MyArray;0)
`if it as a one-dimensional array
ARRAY INTEGER(MyArray;0;0)
`if it is a two-dimensional array

The second syntax, CLEAR VARIABLE("a"), is incompatible with the compiler, since compilers
access variables by address, not by name.

Pointers with certain commands

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The following commands have one common feature: they accept an optional first
parameter [Table], and the second parameter can be a pointer.
ADD TO SET LOAD SET
APPLY TO SELECTION LOCKED ATTRIBUTES
COPY NAMED SELECTION ORDER BY
CREATE EMPTY SET ORDER BY FORMULA
CREATE SET OUTPUT FORM
CUT NAMED SELECTION PAGE SETUP
DIALOG Print form
EXPORT DIF PRINT LABEL
EXPORT SYLK QR REPORT
EXPORT TEXT QUERY
GOTO RECORD QUERY BY FORMULA
GOTO SELECTED RECORD QUERY SELECTION
GRAPH TABLE QUERY SELECTION BY
FORMULA
IMPORT DIF REDUCE SELECTION
IMPORT SYLK RELATE MANY
IMPORT TEXT REMOVE FROM SET
INPUT FORM

In compiled mode, it is easy to return the optional [Table] parameter. However, when the
first parameter passed to one of these commands is a pointer, the compiler does not know
to what the pointer is referring; the compiler treats it as a table pointer.

Take the case of the QUERY command whose syntax is as follows:

QUERY({table{;formula{;*}})
The first element of the formula parameter must be a field.

4D Language Reference 435

If you write :
QUERY(PtrField->=True)
the compiler will look for a symbol representing a field in the second element. When it
finds the "=" sign, it will issue an error message, since it cannot identify the command with
an expression that it knows how to process.

On the other hand, if you write:

QUERY(PtrTable->;PtrField->=True)
or
QUERY([Table];PtrField->=True)
you will avoid any possible ambiguity.

Constants
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

If you create your own 4DK# resources (constants), make sure that numerics are declared as
Longints (L) or Reals (R) and character strings as Strings (S). Any other type will generate a
warning.

See Also
Error messages, Optimization Hints, Typing Guide, Using Compiler Directives.

436 4D Language Reference

Optimization Hints Compiler

version 2003 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

It is difficult to state a definitive “good-programming” method, but we wish to stress the

advantages of well-structured programs. The capacity for structured programming in 4D
can be a great help.
The compilation of a well-structured database can yield much better results than the same
effort performed in a poorly-designed one. For instance, if you write a generic method to
manage n object methods, you will get higher quality results in both interpreted and
compiled modes than in a situation where n object methods comprise n times the same set
of statements.
In other words, the quality of the programming does have an impact on the quality of the
compiled code.
With practice, you can gradually improve your 4D code. Frequent use of the compiler gives
you corrective feedback that enables you to reach instinctively for the most efficient
solution.
In the meantime, we can offer some advice and a few tricks that will save you time in
performing simple, recurring tasks.

Using comments in code

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Certain programming techniques may make your code less readable both for yourself or
another person at a later time. Because of this, we encourage you to comment your
methods with a lot of detail. In fact, while excessive comments have a tendency to slow
down interpreted databases, they have absolutely no influence on the execution time in a
compiled database.

Using compiler directives to optimize code

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Compiler directives can help you speed up your code considerably. When typing variables
on the basis of their use, the compiler uses the data type with the largest scope possible so
as not to penalize you. For example, if you do not type the variable defined by the
statement: Var:= 5, the compiler will type it as Real, even if it could be declared an Integer.

Numeric Variables
The compiler gives numeric variables (not typed by compiler directives) the default data
type Real if the Preferences are not set to anything else. But calculations performed on a
Real are slower than on a Longint. If you know that a numeric variable will always be an
integer, it is to your advantage to declare it through the compiler directives C_INTEGER or
C_LONGINT.
For example, it is good practice to declare your loop counters as Integers.

4D Language Reference 437

Some 4D functions return Integers (e.g., Character code, Int...). If you assign the result of
one of these functions to an untyped variable of your database, the compiler types it as Real
rather than as Integer. Remember to declare such variables with compiler directives
whenever you are sure that they will not be used in a different context.

Here is a simple example of a function that returns a random value with a given range:
$0:=Mod(Random;($2-$1+1))+$1
It will always return an integer. Written this way, the compiler will type $0 as Real rather
than Integer or Longint. It is preferable, therefore, to include a compiler directive in the
method:
C_LONGINT($0)
$0:=Mod(Random;($2-$1+1))+$1
The parameter returned by the method will take less space in memory and will be much
faster.

Here is another example. Suppose you typed two variables as Longint:

C_LONGINT($var1;$var2)
and a third non-typed variable receives the sum of the other two variables:
$var3:=$var1+$var2.
The compiler will type the third variable, $var3, as Real. You will have to explicitly declare
it as Longint if you want the result to be a long integer.

Note: Be careful with the computation mode in 4D. In compiled mode, it is not the data
type of the variable that receives the calculation which determines the computation mode,
but rather the data types of the operands.
• In the following example, the calculation is based on long integers:
C_REAL($var3)
C_LONGINT($var1;$var2)
$var1:=2147483647
$var2:=1
$var3:=$var1+$var2
$var3 is equal to –2147483648 in both compiled mode and interpreted mode.
• However, in this example:
C_REAL($var3)
C_LONGINT($var1)
$var1:=2147483647
$var3:=$var1+1
for optimization reasons, the compiler considers the value 1 as an integer. In compiled
mode, $var3 is equal to –2147483648 because the calculation is based on Longints. In
interpreted mode, $var3 is equal to 2147483648 because the calculation is based on Reals.

Buttons are a specific case of a Real that can be declared as Longint.

438 4D Language Reference

Strings
The default type assigned to alphanumeric variables is Text if the Preferences are not set to
anything else. For example, if you write:
MyString:="Hello", MyString would be typed as a Text variable by the compiler.
If this variable will be processed frequently, it is worthwhile to declare it using C_STRING.
Processing is much faster with String type variables, which have a defined maximum
length, than with Text variables. Keep in mind the rules governing the behavior of this
directive.

If you want to test the value of a character, make the comparison on its Character code
value rather than on the character itself. The regular character comparison procedure
considers all of the character's alternatives, such as diacritical marks.

Various observations
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Two-dimensional arrays
The processing of two-dimensional arrays is better managed if the second dimension is
larger than the first.

For example, an array declared as:

ARRAY INTEGER(Array;5;1000)
will be better managed than an array declared as:
ARRAY INTEGER(Array;1000;5)

Fields
Whenever you need to perform several calculations on a field, you can improve
performance by storing the value of that field in a variable and performing your
calculations on the variable rather than the field. Consider the following method:
Case of
: ([Client]Dest="New York City")
Transport:="Messenger"
: ([Client]Dest="Puerto Rico")
Transport:="Air mail"
: ([Client]Dest="Overseas")
Transport:="Express mail service"
Else
Transport:="Regular mail service"
End case

4D Language Reference 439

This method will take longer to execute than if it were written:
$Dest:=[Client]Dest
Case of
: ($Dest="New York City")
Transport:="Messenger"
: ($Dest="Puerto Rico")
Transport:="Air mail"
: ($Dest="Overseas")
Transport:="Express mail service"
Else
Transport:="Regular mail service"
End case

Pointers
As is the case with fields, it is faster to work with variables than with dereferenced pointers.
Whenever you need to perform several calculations on a variable referenced by a pointer,
you can save time by storing the dereferenced pointer in a variable.

For example, suppose you use a pointer, MyPtr, to refer to a field or to a variable. Then, you
want to perform a set of tests on the value referenced by MyPtr. You could write:
Case of
: (MyPtr-> = 1)
Sequence 1
: (MyPtr-> = 2)
Sequence 2
…
End case

The set of tests would be performed faster if it were written:

Temp:=MyPtr->
Case of
: (Temp = 1)
Sequence 1
: (Temp = 2)
Sequence 2
…
End case

440 4D Language Reference

Local variables
Use local variables wherever possible to structure you code. Using local variables has the
following advantages:
• Local variables take less space when used in a database. They are created when the
method in which they are used is entered, and they are destroyed when the method
finishes executing.
• The code generated is optimized for local variables, especially for those of the type
Longint. This is useful for counters in loops.

See Also
Error messages, Syntax Details, Typing Guide, Using Compiler Directives.

4D Language Reference 441

Error messages Compiler

version 2003 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

This section describes the different messages generated by the compiler. These messages are
of several different types:
• warnings, that help you avoid common pitfalls;
• errors, that it is up to you to correct;
• range checking messages, generated within 4D.

Warnings
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

These messages are generated throughout the compilation process. Each message is
accompanied here with an example of the problem and, when necessary, an additional
explanation.

Pointer in COPY ARRAY

COPY ARRAY(Pointer->;Array)

Pointer in SELECTION TO ARRAY

SELECTION TO ARRAY(Pointer->;MyArray)
SELECTION TO ARRAY([MyTable]MyField;Pointer->)

Pointer in ARRAY TO SELECTION

ARRAY TO SELECTION(Pointer->;[MyTable]MyField)

Pointer in LIST TO ARRAY

LIST TO ARRAY(List;Pointer->)

Pointer in ARRAY TO LIST

ARRAY TO LIST(Pointer->;List)

Pointer in an array declaration

ARRAY REAL(Pointer->;5)
The command ARRAY REAL(Array;Pointer->) does not generate this warning. The value of the
dimension of an array does not have any influence on its type. In this example, the array
referred to by the pointer must have been defined elsewhere.

Pointer in DISTINCT VALUES

DISTINCT VALUES(Pointer->;Array)

Using the function Undefined is not advised.

If(Undefined(Variable))

The Undefined function always returns FALSE in a compiled database.

442 4D Language Reference

This method is protected by a password.

An automatic action button does not have a name in the MyForm form on page X.
All of your buttons should have names to avoid conflicts.

Assumes that the pointer points to an alphanumeric expression.

Pointer->[[2]]:="a"

Assumes that the string index is numeric.

String[[Pointer->]]:="a"

Assumes that the array index is of type real.

ALERT(MyArray{Pointer->})

Missing parameter in the plug-in procedure call.

WR SET FONT(Area)

Error messages
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

These messages are generated throughout the compilation process. It is up to you to correct
these errors in order to for the compiler to be able to generate a compiled database. Each
message is accompanied here with an example of the problem and, when necessary, an
additional explanation.
The messages are grouped by the following topics: Typing, Syntax, Parameters, Operators,
Plug-in Commands and General Errors.

• Typing

The type of the variable is not compatible with the operator. Cannot make an assignment with
those types.
MyReal:=12.3
MyBoolean:=True
MyReal:=MyBoolean

Changing the maximum length of a string.

C_STRING(3;MyString)
C_STRING(5;MyString)

Changing the number of dimensions of an array.

ARRAY TEXT(MyArray;5;5)
ARRAY TEXT(MyArray;5)

Typing conflict on the MyArray variable in the form.

ARRAY INTEGER(MyArray)

4D Language Reference 443

Declaring an array without dimensions.
ARRAY INTEGER(MyArray)

Variable expected.
COPY ARRAY(MyArray;"")

Constant number expected.

C_STRING(Variable;MyString)

The type of Variable is unknown. This variable is used in the method M1.
The type of Variable cannot be determined. A compiler directive is necessary.

Invalid constant type

OK:="The weather is nice"

The method M1 is unknown.

The line contains a call to a method that does not exist or no longer exists.

Incorrect usage of a field.

MyDate:=Add to date(BooleanField;1;1;1)

The length of a string cannot be greater than 255 characters.

C_STRING(325;MyString)

The variable Variable is not a method.

Variable(1)

The variable Variable is not an array.

Variable{5}:=12

The result of the function is not compatible with the expression.

Text:="Number"+Num(i)

The types of the variables used in this expression are not compatible.
Integer:=MyDate*Text

Changing the type of the variable $i from type Fixed string to type Real.
$i:="3"
$($i):=5

The array index is not a number.

IntArray{"3"}:=4

Retyping the variable Variable from type Text to an array of type Text.
C_TEXT(Variable)
COPY ARRAY(TextArray;Variable)

444 4D Language Reference

Retyping of the variable Variable from type Text to type Real.
Variable:=Num(Variable)

Retyping the array MyBoolean from array of type Boolean to variable of type Real.
Variable:=MyBoolean

Retyping the array IntArray from array of type Integer to array of type Text.
ARRAY TEXT(IntArray;12)
if IntArray was declared elsewhere as an Integer array.

Trying to dereference a variable which is not of type Pointer.

Variable->:=5
if Variable is not of the type Pointer.

Retyping of the variable Var1 from type Text to type Number.

Var1:=3.5

Incorrect usage of a field.

Variable:=[MyTable]MyField
[MyTable]MyField is a Date field. Variable is of the type Number.

• Syntax

The result of the function is not a pointer.

Variable:=Num("The weather is nice")->
It is not possible to dereference this function.

Syntax error.
If(Boolean)
End for

Too many opening curly brackets ({) .

The line contains more opening brackets than closing brackets.

Too many closing curly brackets (})..

The line contains more closing brackets than opening brackets.

Closing parenthesis ) expected.

The line contains more opening parentheses than closing parentheses.

Opening parenthesis ( expected.

The line contains more closing parentheses than opening parentheses.

Field expected.
If(Modified(Variable))

4D Language Reference 445

Opening curly bracket expected.
C_INTEGER($

Variable expected.
C_INTEGER([MyTable]MyField)

Constant number expected.

C_INTEGER(${"3"})

Semicolon ; expected.
COPY ARRAY(Array1 Array2)

• Mac OS:
Too many opening character reference symbols.
MyString[[3:="a"
Too many closing character reference symbols.
MyString3]]:="a"

• Windows:
Too many opening character reference symbols.
MyString[[3:="a"
Too many closing character reference symbols.
MyString 3]]:="a"

Did not expect a subtable.

ARRAY TO SELECTION(Array;Subtable)

The argument of an IF statement must be a boolean.

If(Pointer)

Expression is too complex.

Divide your statement into several shorter statements.

Method is too complex.

Too many Case of...End case and/or If…End if structures.

Unknown field.
Your method, possibly copied from another database, contains •???• instead of a field
name.

Unknown table.
Your method, possibly copied from another database, contains •???• instead of a table
name.

Pointer to an incorrect expression.

Pointer:=->Variable+3

446 4D Language Reference

Incorrect usage of string index.
MyReal[[3]] or MyReal [[3]]
or
MyString[[Variable]] or MyString[[Variable]]
where Variable is not a Number variable.

• Parameters

The result of this function cannot be passed as a parameter to this method or command.
MyMethod(Num(MyString))
if MyMethod expects a Boolean expression.

Too many parameters have been passed to this method.

DEFAULT TABLE(Table;Form)

This value cannot be passed as a parameter to this method or command.

MyMethod(3+2)
if MyMethod expects a Boolean expression.

Function result type conflict.

C_INTEGER($0)
$0:=False

Generic parameter type conflict.

C_INTEGER(${3})
For($i;3;5)
${$i}:=String($i)
End for

This 4D command does not require any parameters.

SHOW TOOL BAR(MyVar)

This 4D command requires at least one parameter.

DEFAULT TABLE

MyString cannot be passed as a parameter to that method.

MyMethod(MyString)
if MyMethod is expecting a Boolean parameter.

The type of the parameter $1 is different in the calling and in the called method.
Calculate("3+2")
with the directive C_INTEGER($1) in Calculate.

One of the parameters in COPY ARRAY is a variable.

COPY ARRAY(Variable;Array)

4D Language Reference 447

Retyping of the variable $1 from type Number to type Text.
$1:=String($1)

An array cannot be a parameter.

ReInit(MyArray)
To pass an array in a method, you need to pass a pointer to the array.

• Operators

The type of the variable is not compatible with the operator.

Bool2:=Bool1+True
Addition cannot be performed on Boolean fields.

Did not expect the operator >.

QUERY(MyTable;[MyTable]MyField=0;>)

Cannot compare two variables of those types.

If(Number=Picture2)

Cannot negate this type of variable.

Boolean:=-False

• Plug-in Commands

The plug-in command PExt does not seem to be correctly defined.

Not enough parameters were passed to this plug-in command.

Too many parameters were passed to this plug-in command.

The plug-in command Variable does not seem to be correctly defined.

• General Errors

Two methods have the same name : Name.

To compile your database, all of the project methods must have different names.

Internal error # xx.

If this message appears, call 4D Technical Support and report the error number.

The variable Variable could not be typed. This variable is used in the method M1.
The Variable type cannot be determined. A compiler directive is necessary.

448 4D Language Reference

The original method is damaged.
The method is damaged in the original structure. Delete it or replace it.

Unknown 4D command.
The method is damaged.

Retyping the variable Variable in the form Form.

This message appears if you give, for example, the name OK to a variable of the type Graph
in a form.

The name of the function Name is also the name of a variable in the form.
Rename either the function or the variable.

A method and a variable have the same name : Name.

Rename either the method or the variable.

A plug-in command and a variable have the same name : Name.

Rename either the plug-in command or the variable.

Range-checking messages
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

These messages are generated in 4D while the compiled database is running. They are
displayed in a specific error window.

The result is out of range.

If MyArray is a five-element array, this message appears if you try to access element 17 in
the array.

Division by zero.
Var1:=0
Var2:=2
Var3:=Var2 / Var1

Accessing a parameter that does not exist.

Using the $4 local variable when only three parameters have been passed to the current
method.

The pointer is not properly initialized.

MyPointer->:=5
if MyPointer has not yet been initialized.

The destination string is smaller than the source.

C_STRING(MyString1;5)
C_STRING(MyString2;10)
MyString2:="Flowers"
MyString1:= MyString2

4D Language Reference 449

Invalid character reference.
i:=-30
MyString[[i]]:= MyString2 or MyString[[i]]:=MyString2

The parameter is an empty string.

MyString[[1]]:= ""
MyString[[1]]:= ""

Modulo by zero.
Var1:=0
Var2:=2
Var3:=Var2 % Var1

Invalid parameters in an Execute Formula command.

EXECUTE FORMULA("MyMethod(MyAlpha)")
if MyMethod expects a parameter other than an Alphanumeric.

Pointer to an unknown variable.

MyPointer:= Get pointer ("Variable")
MyPointer:= "MyString"
if Variable does not appear explicitly in the database.

Attempting to retype by using a pointer.

Boolean:=Pointer->
if Pointer points to a field of type Integer.

Bad usage of a pointer or pointer to an unknown variable.

Character:=StringVar [[Pointer->]]
Character:=StringVar[[Pointer]]
if Pointer does not point to a Number.

See Also
Optimization Hints, Syntax Details, Typing Guide, Using Compiler Directives.

450 4D Language Reference

C_BLOB Compiler

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

C_BLOB ({method; }variable{; variable2; ...; variableN})

Parameter Type Description

method Method → Optional name of method
variable Variable or ${...} → Name of variable(s) to declare

Description
C_BLOB casts each specified variable as a BLOB variable.

The first form of the command, in which the optional method parameter is NOT passed, is
used to declare and type any process, interprocess, or local variable.

Note: This form can be used in interpreted databases.

The second form of the command, in which the optional method parameter IS passed, is used
to predeclare to the compiler the result and/or the parameters ($0, $1, $2 etc) for a method.
Use this form of the command in order to skip the Typing variables phase while compiling a
database, saving compilation time.

WARNING: The second form cannot be executed in interpreted mode. For this reason, if you
are using this syntax, keep it in a method that is not executed in interpreted mode. The name
of this method must start with “COMPILER.”

Advanced Tip: The syntax C_BLOB(${...}) allows you to declare a variable number of parameters
of the same type, under the condition that these are the last parameters for the method. For
example, the declaration C_BLOB(${5}) tells 4D and the compiler that starting with the fifth
parameter, the method can receive a variable number of parameters of that type. For more
information, see the Count parameters command.

Examples
See examples in the section Compiler Commands.

See Also
Compiler Commands.

4D Language Reference 451

C_BOOLEAN Compiler

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

C_BOOLEAN ({method; }variable{; variable2; ...; variableN})

Parameter Type Description

method Method → Optional name of method
variable Variable or ${...} → Name of variable(s) to declare

Description
The C_BOOLEAN command casts each specified variable as a Boolean variable.

The first form of the command, in which the optional method parameter is NOT passed, is
used to declare and type any process, interprocess, or local variable.

Note: This form can be used in interpreted databases.

The second form of the command, in which the optional method parameter IS passed, is used
to predeclare to the compiler the result and/or the parameters ($0, $1, $2 etc) for a method.
Use this form of the command in order to skip the Typing variables phase while compiling a
database, saving compilation time.

WARNING: The second form cannot be executed in interpreted mode. For this reason, if you
are using this syntax, keep it in a method that is not executed in interpreted mode. The name
of this method must start with “COMPILER.”

Advanced Tip: The syntax C_BOOLEAN(${...}) allows you to declare a variable number of
parameters of the same type, under the condition that these are the last parameters for the
method. For example, the declaration C_BOOLEAN(${5}) tells 4D and the compiler that
starting with the fifth parameter, the method can receive a variable number of parameters of
that type. For more information, see the Count parameters command.

Examples
See examples in the section Compiler Commands.

See Also
Compiler Commands, Count parameters.

452 4D Language Reference

C_DATE Compiler

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

C_DATE ({method; }variable{; variable2; ...; variableN})

Parameter Type Description

method Method → Optional name of method
variable Variable or ${...} → Name of variable(s) to declare

Description
The C_DATE command casts each specified variable as a Date variable.

The first form of the command, in which the optional method parameter is NOT passed, is
used to declare and type any process, interprocess, or local variable.

Note: This form can be used in interpreted databases.

The second form of the command, in which the optional method parameter IS passed, is used
to predeclare to the compiler the result and/or the parameters ($0, $1, $2 etc) for a method.
Use this form of the command in order to skip the Typing variables phase while compiling a
database, saving compilation time.

WARNING: The second form cannot be executed in interpreted mode. For this reason, if you
are using this syntax, keep it in a method that is not executed in interpreted mode. The name
of this method must start with “COMPILER.”

Advanced Tip: The syntax C_DATE(${...}) allows you to declare a variable number of parameters
of the same type, under the condition that these are the last parameters for the method. For
example, the declaration C_DATE(${5}) tells 4D and the compiler that starting with the fifth
parameter, the method can receive a variable number of parameters of that type. For more
information, see the Count parameters command.

Examples
See examples in the section Compiler Commands.

See Also
Compiler Commands, Count parameters.

4D Language Reference 453

C_GRAPH Compiler

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

C_GRAPH ({method; }variable{; variable2; ...; variableN})

Parameter Type Description

method String → Name of method
variable Variable or ${...} → Name of variable(s) to declare

Description
The C_GRAPH command casts each specified variable as a Graph variable.

The first form of the command, in which the optional method parameter is NOT passed, is
used to declare and type any process, interprocess, or local variable.

Note: This form can be used in interpreted databases.

The second form of the command, in which the optional method parameter IS passed, is used
to predeclare to the compiler the result and/or the parameters ($0, $1, $2 etc) for a method.
Use this form of the command in order to skip the Typing variables phase while compiling a
database, saving compilation time.

WARNING: The second form cannot be executed in interpreted mode. For this reason, if you
are using this syntax, keep it in a method that is not executed in interpreted mode. The name
of this method must start with “COMPILER.”

Advanced Tip: The syntax C_GRAPH(${...}) allows you to declare a variable number of
parameters of the same type, under the condition that these are the last parameters for the
method. For example, the declaration C_GRAPH(${5}) tells 4D and the compiler that starting
with the fifth parameter, the method can receive a variable number of parameters of that type.
For more information, see the Count parameters command.

Examples
See examples in the section Compiler Commands.

See Also
Compiler Commands.

454 4D Language Reference

C_INTEGER Compiler

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

C_INTEGER ({method; }variable{; variable2; ...; variableN})

Parameter Type Description

method Method → Optional name of method
variable Variable or ${...} → Name of variable(s) to declare

Note: This command is still present in 4D for compatibility with old databases. In fact, 4D and
the compiler retype Integers into Longints internally. For example :
C_INTEGER($MyVar)
$TheType:=Type($MyVar) `$TheType = 9 (Is Longint)

Description
The C_INTEGER command casts each specified variable as an Integer variable.

The first form of the command, in which the optional method parameter is NOT passed, is
used to declare and type any process, interprocess, or local variable.

Note: This form can be used in interpreted databases.

The second form of the command, in which the optional method parameter IS passed, is used
to predeclare to the compiler the result and/or the parameters ($0, $1, $2 etc) for a method.
Use this form of the command in order to skip the Typing variables phase while compiling a
database, saving compilation time.

WARNING: The second form cannot be executed in interpreted mode. For this reason, if you
are using this syntax, keep it in a method that is not executed in interpreted mode. The name
of this method must start with “COMPILER.”

Advanced Tip: The syntax C_INTEGER(${...}) allows you to declare a variable number of
parameters of the same type, under the condition that these are the last parameters for the
method. For example, the declaration C_INTEGER(${5}) tells 4D and the compiler that starting
with the fifth parameter, the method can receive a variable number of parameters of that type.
For more information, see the Count parameters command.

4D Language Reference 455

Examples
See examples in the section Compiler Commands.

See Also
Compiler Commands, Count parameters, C_LONGINT, C_REAL.

456 4D Language Reference

C_LONGINT Compiler

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

C_LONGINT ({method; }variable{; variable2; ...; variableN})

Parameter Type Description

method Method → Optional name of method
variable Variable or ${...} → Name of variable(s) to declare

Description
The C_LONGINT command casts each specified variable as a Long Integer variable.

The first form of the command, in which the optional method parameter is NOT passed, is
used to declare and type any process, interprocess or local variable.

Note: This form can be used in interpreted databases.

The second form of the command, in which the optional method parameter IS passed, is used
to predeclare to the compiler the result and/or the parameters ($0, $1, $2 etc) for a method.
Use this form of the command in order to skip the Typing variables phase while compiling a
database, saving compilation time.

WARNING: The second form cannot be executed in interpreted mode. For this reason, if you
are using this syntax, keep it in a method that is not executed in interpreted mode. The name
of this method must start with “COMPILER.”

Advanced Tip: The syntax C_LONGINT(${...}) allows you to declare a variable number of
parameters of the same type, under the condition that these are the last parameters for the
method. For example, the declaration C_LONGINT(${5}) tells 4D and the compiler that starting
with the fifth parameter, the method can receive a variable number of parameters of that type.
For more information, see the Count parameters command.

Examples
See examples in the section Compiler Commands.

See Also
Compiler Commands, Count parameters, C_INTEGER, C_REAL.

4D Language Reference 457

C_PICTURE Compiler

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

C_PICTURE ({method; }variable{; variable2; ...; variableN})

Parameter Type Description

method Method → Optional name of method
variable Variable or ${...} → Name of variable(s) to declare

Description
The C_PICTURE command casts each specified variable as a Picture variable.

The first form of the command, in which the optional method parameter is NOT passed, is
used to declare and type any process, interprocess or local variable.

Note: This form can be used in interpreted databases.

The second form of the command, in which the optional method parameter IS passed, is used
to predeclare to the compiler the result and/or the parameters ($0, $1, $2 etc) for a method.
Use this form of the command in order to skip the Typing variables phase while compiling a
database, saving compilation time.

WARNING: The second form cannot be executed in interpreted mode. For this reason, if you
are using this syntax, keep it in a method that is not executed in interpreted mode. The name
of this method must start with “COMPILER.”

Advanced Tip: The syntax C_PICTURE(${...}) allows you to declare a variable number of
parameters of the same type, under the condition that these are the last parameters for the
method. For example, the declaration C_PICTURE(${5}) tells 4D and the compiler that starting
with the fifth parameter, the method can receive a variable number of parameters of that type.
For more information, see the Count parameters command.

Examples
See examples in the section Compiler Commands.

See Also
Compiler Commands, Count parameters.

458 4D Language Reference

C_POINTER Compiler

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

C_POINTER ({method; }variable{; variable2; ...; variableN})

Parameter Type Description

method Method → Optional name of method
variable Variable or ${...} → Name of variable(s) to declare

Description
The C_POINTER command casts each specified variable as a Pointer variable.

The first form of the command, in which the optional method parameter is NOT passed, is
used to declare and type any process, interprocess, or local variable.

Note: This form can be used in interpreted databases.

The second form of the command, in which the optional method parameter IS passed, is used
to predeclare to the compiler the result and/or the parameters ($0, $1, $2 etc) for a method.
Use this form of the command in order to skip the Typing variables phase while compiling a
database, saving compilation time.

WARNING: The second form cannot be executed in interpreted mode. For this reason, if you
are using this syntax, keep it in a method that is not executed in interpreted mode. The name
of this method must start with “COMPILER.”

Advanced Tip: The syntax C_POINTER(${...}) allows you to declare a variable number of
parameters of the same type, under the condition that these are the last parameters for the
method. For example, the declaration C_POINTER(${5}) tells 4D and the compiler that starting
with the fifth parameter, the method can receive a variable number of parameters of that type.
For more information, see the Count parameters command.

Examples
See examples in the section Compiler Commands.

See Also
Compiler Commands, Count parameters.

4D Language Reference 459

C_REAL Compiler

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

C_REAL ({method; }variable{; variable2; ...; variableN})

Parameter Type Description

method Method → Optional name of method
variable Variable or ${...} → Name of variable(s) to declare

Description
The C_REAL command casts each specified variable as a Real variable.

The first form of the command, in which the optional method parameter is NOT passed, is
used to declare and type any process, interprocess or local variable.

Note: This form can be used in interpreted databases.

The second form of the command, in which the optional method parameter IS passed, is used
to predeclare to the compiler the result and/or the parameters ($0, $1, $2 etc) for a method.
Use this form of the command in order to skip the Typing variables phase while compiling a
database, saving compilation time.

WARNING: The second form cannot be executed in interpreted mode. For this reason, if you
are using this syntax, keep it in a method that is not executed in interpreted mode. The name
of this method must start with “COMPILER.”

Advanced Tip: The syntax C_REAL(${...}) allows you to declare a variable number of parameters
of the same type, under the condition that these are the last parameters for the method. For
example, the declaration C_REAL(${5}) tells 4D and the compiler that starting with the fifth
parameter, the method can receive a variable number of parameters of that type. For more
information, see the Count parameters command.

Examples
See examples in the section Compiler Commands.

See Also
Compiler Commands, Count parameters, C_INTEGER, C_LONGINT.

460 4D Language Reference

C_STRING Compiler

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

C_STRING ({method; }size; variable{; variable2; ...; variableN})

Parameter Type Description

method Method → Optional name of method
size Number → Size of the string
variable Variable or ${...} → Name of variable(s) to declare

Description
The C_STRING command casts each specified variable as a String variable.

The size parameter specifies the maximum length of the strings that the variable can contain.
In non-Unicode mode (ASCII compatibility), strings are limited to 255 characters. If speed is a
concern, use string variables rather than text variables wherever possible.

Compatibility Note: Databases created beginning with version 11 of 4D are executed by default
in Unicode mode (see the ASCII Codes section). In this mode, the functioning of the C_STRING
command is strictly identical to that of the C_TEXT command (the size parameter is ignored).
It is recommended to use C_TEXT in new developments. The C_STRING command is kept only
for reasons of compatibility.

The first form of the command, in which the optional method parameter is NOT passed, is
used to declare and type any process, interprocess, or local variable.

Note: This form can be used in interpreted databases.

The second form of the command, in which the optional method parameter IS passed, is used
to predeclare to the compiler the result and/or the parameters ($0, $1, $2 etc) for a method.
Use this form of the command in order to skip the Typing variables phase while compiling a
database, saving compilation time.

WARNING: The second form cannot be executed in interpreted mode. For this reason, if you
are using this syntax, keep it in a method that is not executed in interpreted mode. The name
of this method must start with “COMPILER.”

4D Language Reference 461

Advanced Tip: The syntax C_STRING(...;${...}) allows you to declare a variable number of
parameters of the same type, under the condition that these are the last parameters for the
method. For example, the declaration C_STRING(...;${5}) tells 4D and the compiler that
starting with the fifth parameter, the method can receive a variable number of parameters of
that type. For more information, see the Count parameters command.

Examples
See examples in the section Compiler Commands.

See Also
Compiler Commands, Count parameters, C_TEXT.

462 4D Language Reference

C_TEXT Compiler

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

C_TEXT ({method; }variable{; variable2; ...; variableN})

Parameter Type Description

method Method → Optional name of method
variable Variable or ${...} → Name of variable(s) to declare

Description
The C_TEXT command casts each specified variable as a Text variable.

The first form of the command, in which the optional method parameter is NOT passed, is
used to declare and type any process, interprocess or local variable.

Note: This form can be used in interpreted databases.

The second form of the command, in which the optional method parameter IS passed, is used
to predeclare to the compiler the result and/or the parameters ($0, $1, $2 etc) for a method.
Use this form of the command in order to skip the Typing variables phase while compiling a
database, saving compilation time.

WARNING: The second form cannot be executed in interpreted mode. For this reason, if you
are using this syntax, keep it in a method that is not executed in interpreted mode. The name
of this method must start with “COMPILER.”

Advanced Tip: The syntax C_TEXT(${...}) allows you to declare a variable number of parameters
of the same type, under the condition that these are the last parameters for the method. For
example, the declaration C_TEXT(${5}) tells 4D and the compiler that starting with the fifth
parameter, the method can receive a variable number of parameters of that type. For more
information, see the Count parameters command.

Examples
See examples in the section Compiler Commands.

See Also
Compiler Commands, Count parameters, C_STRING.

4D Language Reference 463

C_TIME Compiler

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

C_TIME ({method; }variable{; variable2; ...; variableN})

Parameter Type Description

method Method → Optional name of method
variable Variable or ${...} → Name of variable(s) to declare

Description
The C_TIME command casts each specified variable as a Time variable.

The first form of the command, in which the optional method parameter is NOT passed, is
used to declare and type any process, interprocess, or local variable.

Note: This form can be used in interpreted databases.

The second form of the command, in which the optional method parameter IS passed, is used
to predeclare to the compiler the result and/or the parameters ($0, $1, $2 etc) for a method.
Use this form of the command in order to skip the Typing variables phase while compiling a
database, saving compilation time.

WARNING: The second form cannot be executed in interpreted mode. For this reason, if you
are using this syntax, keep it in a method that is not executed in interpreted mode. The name
of this method must start with “COMPILER.”

Advanced Tip: The syntax C_TIME(${...}) allows you to declare a variable number of parameters
of the same type, under the condition that these are the last parameters for the method. For
example, the declaration C_TIME(${5}) tells 4D and the compiler that starting with the fifth
parameter, the method can receive a variable number of parameters of that type. For more
information, see the Count parameters command.

Examples
See examples in the section Compiler Commands.

See Also
Compiler Commands, Count parameters.

464 4D Language Reference

IDLE Compiler

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

IDLE

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
The IDLE command is designed only for use with the compiler. This command is only used in
compiled databases in which user-defined methods are written so that no calls are made back
to the 4D engine. For example, if a method has a For loop in which no 4D commands are
executed, the loop could not be interrupted by a process installed with ON EVENT CALL, nor
could a user switch to another application. In this case, you should insert IDLE to allow 4D to
trap events. If you do not want any interruptions, omit IDLE.

Example
In the following example, the loop would never terminate in a compiled database without the
call to IDLE:
` Do Something Project Method
ON EVENT CALL ("EVENT METHOD")
<>vbWeStop:=False
MESSAGE ("Processing..."+Char(13)+"Type any key to interrupt...")
Repeat
` Do some processing that doesn’t involve a 4D command
IDLE
Until (<>vbWeStop)
ON EVENT CALL ("")

with:

` EVENT METHOD Project Method

If (Undefined(KeyCode))
KeyCode:=0
End if

4D Language Reference 465

 If (KeyCode#0)
CONFIRM ("Do you really want to stop this operation?")
If (OK=1)
<>vbWeStop:=True
End if
End if

See Also
Compiler Commands, ON EVENT CALL.

466 4D Language Reference

10
______________________
Database Methods

4D Language Reference 467

468 4D Language Reference
Database Methods Database Methods

version 11.2 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Database methods are methods that are automatically executed by 4D when a general session
event occurs.

To create or open and edit a database method:

1. Open the Explorer window.
2. Select the Methods page.
3. Expand the Database Methods theme.
4. Double click on the method.
or:
1. Select the method.

4D Language Reference 469

2. Press Enter or Return.

You edit a database method in the same way as any other method.

You cannot call a database method from another method. Database methods are automatically
invoked by 4D at certain points in a working session. The following table summarizes
execution of database methods:

Database Method 4D local 4D Server 4D remote

On Startup Yes, Once No Yes, Once
On Exit Yes, Once No Yes, Once
On Drop Yes, Multiple No Yes, Multiple
On Web Connection Yes, Multiple Yes, Multiple Yes, Multiple
On Web Authentication Yes, Multiple Yes, Multiple Yes, Multiple
On Backup Startup Yes, Multiple Yes, Multiple Yes, Multiple
On Backup Shutdown Yes, Multiple Yes, Multiple Yes, Multiple
On Server Startup No Yes, Once No
On Server Shutdown No Yes, Once No
On Server Open Connection No Yes, Multiple No
On Server Close Connection No Yes, Multiple No
On SQL Authentication Yes, Multiple Yes, Multiple Yes, Multiple

For detailed information about each of the database methods, see the following sections:
• On Startup Database Method
• On Exit Database Method
• On Drop Database Method
• On Web Connection Database Method
• On Web Authentication Database Method
• On Backup Startup Database Method
• On Backup Shutdown Database Method
• On SQL Authentication Database Method
• On Server Startup Database Method (4D Server Reference manual)
• On Server Shutdown Database Method (4D Server Reference manual)
• On Server Open Connection Database Method (4D Server Reference manual)
• On Server Close Connection Database Method (4D Server Reference manual)

470 4D Language Reference

On Exit Database Method Database Methods

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The On Exit Database Method is called once when you quit a database.

This method is used in the following 4D environments:

• 4D in local mode
• 4D in remote mode
• 4D application compiled and merged with 4D VolumeDesktop
Note: The On Exit Database Method is NOT invoked by 4D Server.

The On Exit Database Method is automatically invoked by 4D; unlike project methods, you
cannot call this database method yourself by programming. You can however execute it from
the Method editor. You can also use subroutines.

A database can be exited if any of the following occur:

• The user selects the menu command Quit from the Design Environment File menu or from
the Application environment (Quit standard action)
• A call to the QUIT 4D command is issued
• A 4D Plug-in issues a call to the QUIT 4D entry point

No matter how the exit from the database was initiated, 4D performs the following actions:
• If there is no On Exit Database Method, 4D aborts each running process one by one, without
distinction. If the user is performing data entry, the records will be cancelled and not saved.

• If there is an On Exit Database Method, 4D starts executing this method within a newly
created local process. You can therefore use this database method to inform other processes,
via interprocess communication, that they must close (data entry) or stop executing. Note that
4D will eventually quit—the On Exit Database Method can perform all the cleanup or closing
operations you want, but it cannot refuse the quit, and will at some point end.

The On Exit Database Method is the perfect place to:

• Stop processes automatically started when the database was opened
• Save (locally, on disk) Preferences or Settings to be reused at the beginning of the next
session in the On Startup Database Method

4D Language Reference 471

• Perform any other actions that you want to be done automatically each time a database is
exited

Note: Don’t forget that the On Exit Database Method is a local/client process, so it cannot
access the data file. Thus, if the On Exit Database Method performs a query or a sort, a 4D
Client that is about to quit will "freeze" and actually will not quit. If you need to access data
when a client quits the application, create a new global process from within the On Exit
Database Method, which will be able to access the data file. In this case, be sure that the new
process will terminate correctly before the end of the On Exit Database Method execution (by
using interprocess variables, by example).

Example
The following example covers all the methods used in a database that tracks the significant
events that occur during a working session and writes a description in a text document called
“Journal.”

• The On Startup Database Method initializes the interprocess variable <>vbQuit4D, which tells
all the use processes whether or not the database is being exited. It also creates the journal file,
if it does not already exist.

` On Startup Database Method

C_TEXT(<>vtIPMessage)
C_BOOLEAN(<>vbQuit4D)
<>vbQuit4D:=False

If (Test path name("Journal") # Is a document)

$vhDocRef:=Create document("Journal")
If (OK=1)
CLOSE DOCUMENT($vhDocRef)
End if
End if
WRITE JOURNAL ("Opening Session")

• The project method WRITE JOURNAL, used as subroutine by the other methods, writes the
information it receives, in the journal file:

` WRITE JOURNAL Project Method

` WRITE JOURNAL ( Text )
` WRITE JOURNAL ( Event description )
C_TEXT($1)
C_TIME($vhDocRef)

472 4D Language Reference

 While (Semaphore("$Journal"))
DELAY PROCESS(Current process;1)
End while
$vhDocRef:=Append document("Journal")
If (OK=1)
PROCESS PROPERTIES(Current process;$vsProcessName;$vlState;$vlElapsedTime;
$vbVisible)
SEND PACKET($vhDocRef;String(Current date)+Char(9)+String(Current time)+
Char(9)+String(Current process)+Char(9)+$vsProcessName+
Char(9)+$1+Char(13))
CLOSE DOCUMENT($vhDocRef)
End if
CLEAR SEMAPHORE("$Journal")

Note that the document is open and closed each time. Also note the use of a semaphore as
“access protection” to the document—we do not want two processes trying to access the
journal file at the same time.

• The M_ADD_RECORDS project method is executed when a menu item Add Record is chosen
in the Application environment:

` M_ADD_RECORDS Project Method

SET MENU BAR(1)
Repeat
ADD RECORD([Table1];*)
If (OK=1)
WRITE JOURNAL ("Adding record #"+String(Record number([Table1]))+" in Table1")
End if
Until ((OK=0) | <>vbQuit4D)

This method loops until the user cancels the last data entry or exits the database.

4D Language Reference 473

• The input form for [Table 1] includes the treatment of the On Outside Call events. So, even if
a process is in data entry, it can be exited smoothly, with the user either saving (or not saving)
the current data entry:

` [Table1];"Input" Form Method

Case of
: (Form event=On Outside Call)
If (<>vtIPMessage="QUIT")
CONFIRM("Do you want to save the changes made to this record?")
If (OK=1)
ACCEPT
Else
CANCEL
End if
End if
End case

• The M_QUIT project method is executed when Quit is chosen from the File menu in the
Application environment:

` M_QUIT Project Method

$vlProcessID:=New process("DO_QUIT";32*1024;"$DO_QUIT")

The method uses a trick. When QUIT 4D is called, the command has an immediate effect.
Therefore, the process from which the call is issued is in “stop mode” until the database is
actually exited. Since this process can be one of the processes in which data entry occurs, the
call to QUIT 4D is made in a local process that is started only for this purpose. Here is the
DO_QUIT method:

` DO_QUIT Project Method

CONFIRM("Are you sure you want to quit?")
If (OK=1)
WRITE JOURNAL ("Quitting Database")
QUIT 4D
` QUIT 4D has an immediate effect, any line of code below will never be executed
` ...
End if

474 4D Language Reference

• Finally, here is the On Exit Database Method which tells all open user processes “It's time to
get out of here!” It sets <>vbQuit4D to True and sends interprocess messages to the user
processes that are performing data entry:

` On Exit Database Method

<>vbQuit4D:=True
Repeat
$vbDone:=True
For ($vlProcess;1;Count tasks)
PROCESS PROPERTIES($vlProcess;$vsProcessName;$vlState;$vlElapsedTime;
$vbVisible)
If (((($vsProcessName="ML_@") | ($vsProcessName="M_@"))) & ($vlState>=0))
$vbDone:=False
<>vtIPMessage:="QUIT"
BRING TO FRONT($vlProcess)
CALL PROCESS($vlProcess)
$vhStart:=Current time
Repeat
DELAY PROCESS(Current process;60)
Until ((Process state($vlProcess)<0) | ((Current time-$vhStart)>=?00:01:00?))
End if
End for
Until ($vbDone)
WRITE JOURNAL ("Closing session")

Note: Processes that have names beginning with "ML_..." or "M_..." are started by menu
commands for which the Start a New Process property has been selected. In this example,
these are the processes started when the menu command Add record was chosen.

The test (Current time-$vhStart)>=?00:01:00? allows the database method to get out of the
“waiting the other process” Repeat loop if the other process does not act immediately.

4D Language Reference 475

• The following is a typical example of the Journal file produced by the database:

2/6/03 15:47:25 1 Main process Opening Session

2/6/03 15:55:43 5 ML_1 Adding record #23 in Table1
2/6/03 15:55:46 5 ML_1 Adding record #24 in Table1
2/6/03 15:55:54 6 $DO_QUIT Quitting Database
2/6/03 15:55:58 7 $xx Closing session

Note: The name $xx is the name of the local process started by 4D in order to execute the On
Exit Database Method.

See Also
On Startup Database Method, QUIT 4D.

476 4D Language Reference

On Startup Database Method Database Methods

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The On Startup Database Method is called once when you open a database.

This occurs in the following 4D environments:

• 4D in local mode
• 4D in remote mode (on the client side, after the connection has been accepted by 4D Server)
• 4D application compiled and merged with 4D Volume Desktop

Note: The On Startup Database Method is NOT invoked by 4D Server.

The On Startup Database Method is automatically invoked by 4D; unlike project methods, you
cannot call this database method yourself by programming. You can however execute it from
the Method editor. You can also use subroutines.

The On Startup Database Method is the perfect place to:

• Initialize interprocess variables that you will use during the whole working session.
• Start processes automatically when a database is opened.
• Load Preferences or Settings saved for this purpose during the previous working session.
• Prevent the opening of the database if a condition is not met (i.e., missing system resources)
by explicitly calling QUIT 4D.
• Perform any other actions that you want to be performed automatically each time a database
is opened.

Example
See the example in the section On Exit Database Method.

See Also
Database Methods, Methods, On Exit Database Method, QUIT 4D.

4D Language Reference 477

478 4D Language Reference
11
______________________
Data Entry

4D Language Reference 479

480 4D Language Reference
ADD RECORD Data Entry

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

ADD RECORD ({aTable}{; }{*})

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table to use for data entry, or
Default table, if omitted
* → Hide scroll bars

Description
The ADD RECORD command lets the user add a new record to the database for the table aTable
or for the default table, if you omit the aTable parameter.

ADD RECORD creates a new record, makes the new record the current record for the current
process, and displays the current input form. In the Application environment, after the user
has accepted the new record, the new record is the only record in the current selection.

The following figure shows a typical data entry form.

The form is displayed in the frontmost window of the process. The window has scroll bars and
a size box. Specifying the optional * parameter causes the window to be drawn without scroll
bars or a size box.

4D Language Reference 481

ADD RECORD displays the form until the user accepts or cancels the record. If the user is
adding several records, the command must be executed once for each new record.

The record is saved (accepted) if the user clicks an Accept button or presses the Enter key
(numeric keypad), or if the ACCEPT command is executed.

The record is not saved (canceled) if the user clicks a Cancel button or presses the cancel key
combination (Ctrl-Period on Windows, Command-Period on Macintosh), or if the CANCEL
command is executed.

After a call to ADD RECORD, OK is set to 1 if the record is accepted, to 0 if canceled.

Note: Even when canceled, the record remains in memory and can be saved if SAVE RECORD is
executed before the current record pointer is changed.

Examples
1. The following example is a loop commonly used to add new records to a database:

INPUT FORM ([Customers];"Std Input") ` Set input form for [Customers] table
Repeat ` Loop until the user cancels
ADD RECORD ([Customers];*) ` Add a record to the [Customers] table
Until (OK=0) ` Until the user cancels

2. The following example queries the database for a customer. Depending on the results of the
search, one of two things may happen. If no customer is found, then the user is allowed to
add a new customer with ADD RECORD. If at least one customer is found, the user is presented
with the first record found, which can be modified with MODIFY RECORD:

READ WRITE([Customers])
INPUT FORM([Customers];"Input") ` Set the input form
vlCustNum:=Num(Request ("Enter Customer Number:")) ` Get the customer number
If (OK=1)
QUERY ([Customers];[Customers]CustNo=vlCustNum) ` Look for the customer
If (Records in selection([Customers])=0) ` If no customer is found…
ADD RECORD([Customers]) ` Add a new customer
Else
If(Not(Locked([Customers])))
MODIFY RECORD([Customers]) ` Modify the record
UNLOAD RECORD([Customers])

482 4D Language Reference

 Else
ALERT("The record is currently being used.")
End if
End if
End if

See Also
ACCEPT, CANCEL, CREATE RECORD, MODIFY RECORD, SAVE RECORD.

System Variables or Sets

Accepting the record sets the OK system variable to 1; canceling it sets the OK system variable
to 0. The OK system variable is set only after the record is accepted or canceled.

4D Language Reference 483

ADD SUBRECORD Data Entry

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

ADD SUBRECORD (subtable; form{; *})

Parameter Type Description

subtable Subtable → Subtable to use for data entry
form String → Form to use for data entry
* → Hide scroll bars

Compatibility note: Subtables are no longer supported starting with version 11 of 4D. A
compatibility mechanism ensures the functioning of this command in converted databases;
however, it is strongly recommended to replace any subtables with standard related tables.

Description
The ADD SUBRECORD command lets the user add a new subrecord to subtable, using the form
form. ADD SUBRECORD creates a new subrecord in memory, makes it the current subrecord,
and displays form. A current record for the parent table must exist. If a current parent record
does not exist for the process, ADD SUBRECORD has no effect. The form must belong to
subtable.

The subrecord is kept in memory (accepted) if the user clicks an Accept button or presses the
Enter key (numeric pad), or if the ACCEPT command is executed. After the subrecord has been
added, the parent record must be explicitly saved in order for the subrecord to be saved.

The subrecord is not saved if the user clicks a Cancel button or presses the cancel key
combination (Ctrl-Period on Windows, Command-Period on Macintosh), or if the CANCEL
command is executed.

After a call to ADD SUBRECORD, OK is set to 1 if the subrecord is accepted, to 0 if canceled.

The form is displayed in the frontmost window of the process. The window has scroll bars and
a size box. Specifying the optional * parameter causes the window to be drawn without scroll
bars or a size box.

484 4D Language Reference

Example
The following example is part of a method. It adds a subrecord for a new child to an
employee’s record. The data for the children is stored in a subtable named [Employees]Children.
Note that the [Employees] record must be saved in order for the new subrecord to be saved:

ADD SUBRECORD([Employees]Children;"Add Child")

If (OK=1) ` If the user accepted the subrecord
SAVE RECORD ([Employees]) ` save the employee’s record
End if

See Also
ACCEPT, CANCEL, CREATE SUBRECORD, DELETE SUBRECORD, MODIFY SUBRECORD, SAVE
RECORD.

System Variables or Sets

Accepting the subrecord sets the OK system variable to 1; canceling it sets the OK system
variable to 0.

4D Language Reference 485

DIALOG Data Entry

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DIALOG ({aTable; }form; *)

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table owning the form or
If omitted: default table or use of project form
form String → Name of table or project form to display as dialog
* * → Use the same process

Description
The DIALOG command presents the form form to the user. This command is often used to get
information from the user through the use of variables, or to present information to the user,
such as options for performing an operation.

It is common to display the form inside a modal window created with the Open window
command.

Here is a typical example of a dialog:

Use DIALOG instead of ALERT, CONFIRM, or Request when the information that must be
presented or gathered is more complex than those commands can manage.

Note: In converted databases, it is possible to prohibit data entry in fields of dialog boxes (and
thus limit data entry to variables only) using an option in the Preferences of 4D
(Compatibility page). This restriction corresponds to the operation of former versions of 4D.

486 4D Language Reference

Unlike ADD RECORD or MODIFY RECORD, DIALOG does not use the current input form. You
must specify the form (project form or table form) to be used in the form parameter. Also, the
default button panel is not used if buttons are omitted. In this case, only the Escape
(Windows) or Esc (Mac OS) key lets you exit the form.

The dialog is accepted if the user clicks an Accept button or presses the Enter key (numeric key
pad), or if the ACCEPT command is executed.
Keep in mind that validation does not cause saving: if the dialog includes fields, you must
explicitly call the SAVE RECORD command to save any data that has been modified.

The dialog is canceled if the user clicks a Cancel button or presses the cancel key combination
(Ctrl-Period on Windows, Command-Period on Macintosh), or if the CANCEL command is
executed.

If you pass the optional * parameter, the form is loaded and displayed in the last open window
of the current process and the command finishes it execution while leaving the active form on
screen.
This form then reacts “normally” to user actions and is closed when 4D code related to the
form (object method or form method) calls the CANCEL or ACCEPT command. If the current
process terminates, the forms created in this way are automatically closed in the same way as
if a CANCEL command had been called. This opening mode is particularly useful for
displaying a floating palette with a document, without necessarily requiring another process.

Note: You must create a window before calling the statement DIALOG(form;*); it is not possible
to use the current dialog window in the process nor the window created by default for each
process. Otherwise, the error -9909 is generated.

After a call to DIALOG, if the dialog is accepted, OK is set to 1; if it is canceled, OK is set to 0.

Examples
1. The following example shows the use of DIALOG to specify search criteria. A custom form
containing the variables vName and vState is displayed so the user can enter the search criteria.

Open window (10;40;370;220) ` Open a modal window

DIALOG("Search Dialog") ` Display a custom search dialog
CLOSE WINDOW ` No longer need the modal window
If (OK=1) ` If the dialog is accepted
QUERY ([Company];[Company]Name=vName;*)
QUERY ([Company];&;[Company]State=vState)
End if

4D Language Reference 487

2. The following example can be used to create a tool palette:

`Display tool palette

$palette_window:=Open form window("tools";Palette form window)
DIALOG("tools";*) `Give back the control immediately
`Display main document windowl
$document_window:=Open form window("doc";Plain form window)
DIALOG("doc")

See Also
ACCEPT, ADD RECORD, CANCEL, Open window.

System Variables or Sets

After a call to DIALOG, if the dialog is accepted, OK is set to 1; if it is canceled, OK is set to 0.

488 4D Language Reference

Modified Data Entry

version 2004 (Modified)

Compatibility note
This function is kept for compatibility reasons only since it is based on the former
management of execution cycles, which is itself obsolete since version 6 (see the Before,
During, etc. commands). In most cases, it is now strongly recommended to use the Form event
command and to check whether it returns the On Data Change event.
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Modified (field) → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

field Field → Field to test

Function result Boolean ← True if the field has been assigned a new value,
otherwise False

Description
Modified returns True if field has been programmatically assigned a value or has been edited
during data entry. The Modified command must only be used in a form method (or a
subroutine called by a form method).

Be careful, this command only returns a significant value within the same execution cycle. It
is more particularly set to False for all the form events that correspond to the former During
execution cycle.

During data entry, a field is considered modified if the user has edited the field (whether or
not the original value is changed) and then left it by going to another field or by clicking on a
control. Note that just tabbing out of a field does not set Modified to True. The field must have
been edited in order for Modified to be True.

When executing a method, a field is considered to be modified if it has been assigned a value
(different or not).

Note: Modified always returns True after the execution of the PUSH RECORD and POP RECORD
commands.

In all cases, use the Old command to detect whether the field value has actually been changed.

4D Language Reference 489

Note: Although Modified can be applied to any type of field, if you use it in combination with
the Old command, be aware of the restrictions that apply to the Old command. For details, see
the description of the Old command.

During data entry, it is usually easier to perform operations in object methods than to use
Modified in form methods. Since an object method is sent an On Data Change event whenever
a field is modified, the use of an object method is equivalent to using Modified in a form
method.

Note: To operate properly, the Modified command is to be used only in a form method or in a
method called by a form method.

Examples
1. The following example tests whether either the [Orders]Quantity field or the [Orders]Price
field has changed. If either has been changed, then the [Orders]Total field is recalculated.

If ((Modified ([Orders]Quantity) | (Modified ([Orders]Price))

[Orders]Total :=[Orders]Quantity*[Orders]Price
End if

Note that the same thing could be accomplished by using the second line as a subroutine
called by the object methods for the [Orders]Quantity field and the [Orders]Price field within
the On Data Change form event.

2. You select a record for the table [anyTable], then you call multiple subroutines that may
modify the field [anyTable]Important field, but do not save the record. At the end of the main
method, you can use the Modified command to detect whether you must save the record:

` Here the record has been selected as current record

` Then you perform actions using subroutines
DO SOMETHING
DO SOMETHING ELSE
DO NOT FORGET TO DO THAT
` ...
` And then you test the field to detect whether the record has to be saved
If (Modified([anyTable]Important field))
SAVE RECORD([anyTable])
End if

See Also
Form event, Old.

490 4D Language Reference

MODIFY RECORD Data Entry

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

MODIFY RECORD ({aTable}{; }{*})

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table to use for data entry, or
Default table, if omitted
* → Hide scroll bars

Description
The MODIFY RECORD command lets the user modifies the current record for the table aTable or
for the default table if you omit the aTable parameter. MODIFY RECORD loads the record, if it is
not already loaded for the current process, and displays the current input form. If there is no
current record, then MODIFY RECORD does nothing. MODIFY RECORD does not affect the
current selection.

The form is displayed in the frontmost window of the process. The window has scroll bars and
a size box. Specifying the optional * parameter causes the window to be drawn without scroll
bars or a size box.

To use MODIFY RECORD, the current record must have read-write access and should not be
locked.
If the form contains buttons for moving within the selection of records, MODIFY RECORD lets
the user click the buttons to modify records and move to other records.

The record is saved (accepted) if the user clicks an Accept button or presses the Enter key
(numeric key pad), or if the ACCEPT command is executed.

The record is not saved (canceled) if the user clicks a Cancel button or presses the cancel key
combination (Ctrl-Period on Windows, Command-Period on Macintosh), or if the CANCEL
command is executed. Even when canceled, the record remains in memory and can be saved
if SAVE RECORD is executed before the current record pointer is changed.

After a call to MODIFY RECORD, OK is set to 1 if the record is accepted, to 0 if canceled.

Note: Even when canceled, the record remains in memory and can be saved if SAVE RECORD is
executed before the current record pointer is changed.

4D Language Reference 491

If you are using MODIFY RECORD and the user does not change any of the data in the record,
the record is not considered to be modified, and accepting the record does not cause it to be
saved again. Actions such as changing variables, checking check boxes, and selecting radio
buttons do not qualify as modifications. Only changing data in a field, either through data
entry or through a method, causes the record to be saved.

Example
See example for the command ADD RECORD.

See Also
ADD RECORD, Locked, Modified record, READ WRITE, UNLOAD RECORD.

System Variables or Sets

Accepting the record sets the OK system variable to 1; canceling it sets the OK system variable
to 0. The OK system variable is set only after the record is accepted or canceled.

492 4D Language Reference

MODIFY SUBRECORD Data Entry

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

MODIFY SUBRECORD (subtable; form{; *})

Parameter Type Description

subtable Subtable → Subtable to use for data entry
form → Form to use for data entry
* → Hide scroll bars

Compatibility note: Subtables are no longer supported starting with version 11 of 4D. A
compatibility mechanism ensures the functioning of this command in converted databases;
however, it is strongly recommended to replace any subtables with standard related tables.

Description
The MODIFY SUBRECORD command displays the current subrecord of subtable for modification
using the form form. The form must belong to subtable.

A current record for the parent table must exist. If a current parent record does not exist for
the process, MODIFY SUBRECORD has no effect. In addition, if there is no current subrecord,
then MODIFY SUBRECORD does nothing.

Any modifications made to the subrecord will actually only be saved if the parent record itself
is saved.

After a call to MODIFY SUBRECORD, OK is set to 1 if the subrecord modifications are accepted,
to 0 if canceled.

The form is displayed in the frontmost window of the process. The window has scroll bars and
a size box. Specifying the optional * parameter causes the window to be drawn without scroll
bars or a size box.

See Also
ACCEPT, ADD SUBRECORD, CANCEL, SAVE RECORD.

System Variables or Sets

Accepting the subrecord modifications sets the OK system variable to 1; canceling it sets the
OK system variable to 0.

4D Language Reference 493

Old Data Entry

version 11.1 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Old (aField) → Expression

Parameter Type Description

aField Field → Field for which to return old value

Function result Expression ← Original field value

Description
The Old command returns the value held in aField before the field was programmatically
assigned a value or modified in data entry.

Each time you change the current record for a table, 4D creates and maintains in memory a
duplicated “image” of the new current record when it is loaded in memory. When modifying
a record, you work with the actual image of the record, not this duplicated image. This image
is then discarded when you change the current record again.

Old returns the value from the duplicated image. In other words, for an existing record, it
returns the value of the field as it is stored on disk. If a record is new, Old returns the default
empty value for field according to its type. For example, if field is an Alpha field, Old returns an
empty string. If field is a numeric field, Old returns zero (0), and so on.

Old works on aField whether the field has been modified by a method or by the user during
data entry. It can be applied to all field types.

To restore the original value of a field, assign it the value returned by Old.

See Also
Modified.

494 4D Language Reference

12
______________________
Date and Time

4D Language Reference 495

496 4D Language Reference
Add to date Date and Time

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Add to date (aDate; years; months; days) → Date

Parameter Type Description

aDate Date → Date to which to add days, months, and years
years Number → Number of years to add to the date
months Number → Number of months to add to the date
days Number → Number of days to add to the date

Function result Date ← Resulting date

Description
The Add to date command adds years, months, and days to the date you pass in aDate, then
returns the result.

Although you can use the Date Operators to add days to a date, Add to date allows you to
quickly add months and years without having to deal with the number of days per month or
leap years (as you would when using the + date operator).

Example
` This line calculates the date in one year, same day
$vdInOneYear:=Add to date(Current date;1;0;0)

` This line calculates the date next month, same day

$vdNextMonth:=Add to date(Current date;0;1;0)

` This line does the same thing as $vdTomorrow:=Current date+1

$vdTomorrow:=Add to date(Current date;0;0;1)

See Also
Date Operators.

4D Language Reference 497

Current date Date and Time

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Current date {(*)} → Date

Parameter Type Description

* → Returns the current date from the server

Function result Date ← Current date

Description
The Current date command returns the current date as kept by the system clock.

4D Server: If you use the asterisk (*) parameter when executing this function on a 4D Client
machine, it returns the current date from the server.

Examples
1. The following example displays an alert box containing the current date:

ALERT("The date is " + String(Current date)+".")

2. If you write an application for the international market, you may need to know if the
version of 4D that you run works with dates formatted as MM/DD/YYYY (US version) or
DD/MM/YYYY (French version). This is useful to know for customizing data entry fields.

The following project method allows you to do so:

` Sys date format global function

` Sys date format -> String
` Sys date format -> Default 4D data format

C_STRING(31;$0;$vsDate;$vsMDY;$vsMonth;$vsDay;$vsYear)
C_LONGINT($1;$vlPos)
C_DATE($vdDate)

498 4D Language Reference

 ` Get a Date value where the month, day and year values are all different
$vdDate:=Current date
Repeat
$vsMonth:=String(Month of($vdDate))
$vsDay:=String(Day of($vdDate))
$vsYear:=String(Year of($vdDate)%100)
If (($vsMonth=$vsDay) | ($vsMonth=$vsYear) | ($vsDay=$vsYear))
vOK:=0
$vdDate:=$vdDate+1
Else
vOK:=1
End if
Until (vOK=1)
$0:=""  ` Initialize function result
$vsDate:=String($vdDate)
$vlPos:=Position("/";$vsDate)  ` Find the first / separator in the string ../../..
$vsMDY:=Substring($vsDate;1;$vlPos-1)  ` Extract the first digits from the date
  ` Eliminate the first digits as well as the first / separator
$vsDate:=Substring($vsDate;$vlPos+1)
Case of
: ($vsMDY=$vsMonth)  ` The digits express the month
$0:="MM"
: ($vsMDY=$vsDay)  ` The digits express the day
$0:="DD"
: ($vsMDY=$vsYear)  ` The digits express the year
$0:="YYYY"
End case
$0:=$0+"/"  ` Start building the function result
$vlPos:=Position("/";$vsDate)  ` Find the second separator in the string ../..
$vsMDY:=Substring($vsDate;1;$vlPos-1)  ` Extract the next digits from the date
$vsDate:=Substring($vsDate;$vlPos+1)  ` Reduce the string to the last digits from the date
Case of
: ($vsMDY=$vsMonth)  ` The digits express the month
$0:=$0+"MM"
: ($vsMDY=$vsDay)  ` The digits express the day
$0:=$0+"DD"
: ($vsMDY=$vsYear)  ` The digits express the year
$0:=$0+"YYYY"
End case

4D Language Reference 499

 $0:=$0+"/"  ` Pursue building the function result
Case of
: ($vsDate=$vsMonth)  ` The digits express the month
$0:=$0+"MM"
: ($vsDate=$vsDay)  ` The digits express the day
$0:=$0+"DD"
: ($vsDate=$vsYear)  ` The digits express the year
$0:=$0+"YYYY"
End case
` At this point $0 is equal to MM/DD/YYYY or DD/MM/YYYY or...

See Also
Date Operators, Day of, Month of, Year of.

500 4D Language Reference

Current time Date and Time

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Current time {(*)} → Time

Parameter Type Description

* → Returns the current time from the server

Function result Time ← Current time

Description
The Current time command returns the current time from the system clock.

The current time is always between 00:00:00 and 23:59:59. Use String or Time string to obtain
the string form of the time expression returned by Current time.

4D Server: If you use the asterisk (*) parameter when executing this function on a 4D Client
machine, it returns the current time from the server.

Examples
1. The following example shows you how to time the length of an operation. Here,
LongOperation is a method that needs to be timed:

$vhStartTime:=Current time ` Save the start time

LongOperation ` Perform the operation
` Display how long it took
ALERT ("The operation took "+String(Current time–$vhStartTime))

2. The following example extracts the hours, minutes, and seconds from the current time:

$vhNow:=Current time
ALERT("Current hour is: "+String($vhNow\3600))
ALERT("Current minute is: "+String(($vhNow\60)%60))
ALERT("Current second is: "+String($vhNow%60))

See Also
Milliseconds, String, Tickcount, Time Operators.

4D Language Reference 501

Date Date and Time

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Date (dateString) → Date

Parameter Type Description

dateString String → String representing the date to be returned

Function result Date ← Date

Description
The Date command evaluates dateString and returns a date.

The dateString parameter must follow the normal rules for the date format.

In the US version of 4D, the date must be in the order MM/DD/YY (month, day, year). The
month and day can be one or two digits. The year can be two or four digits. If the year is two
digits, then Date considers whether the date belongs to the 21st or 20th century according to
the value entered. By default, the pivotal value is 30:
• If the value is greater than or equal to 30, 4D considers the century to be the 20th and adds
19 to the beginning of the value.
• If the value is less than 30, 4D considers the century to be the 21st and adds 20 to the
beginning of the value. This mechanism can be configured using the SET DEFAULT CENTURY
command.
The following characters are valid date separators: slash (/), space, period (.), and comma (,).

Date does not check whether or not dateString is a valid date. If an invalid date (such as
"13/35/94") is passed, Date will return the invalid date. However, if dateString could not
possibly be interpreted as a date (for example, "aa/12/94"), the null date value (!00/00/00!) is
returned.

It is your responsibility to verify that dateString is a valid date.

502 4D Language Reference

Examples
1. The following example uses a request box to prompt the user for a date. The string entered
by the user is converted to a date and stored in the reqDate variable:

vdRequestedDate:=Date(Request ("Please enter the date:";String(Current date)))

If (OK=1)
` Do something with the date now stored in vdRequestedDate
End if

2. The following example returns the string "12/12/94" as a date:

vdDate:=Date("12/12/94")

See Also
SET DEFAULT CENTURY.

4D Language Reference 503

Day number Date and Time

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Day number (aDate) → Number

Parameter Type Description

aDate Date → Date for which to return the number

Function result Number ← Number representing the weekday on which

date falls

Description
The Day number command returns a number representing the weekday on which aDate falls.

Note: Day number returns 2 for null dates.

4D provides the following predefined constants, found in the "Days and Months" theme:

Constants Type Value

Monday Long Integer 2
Tuesday Long Integer 3
Wednesday Long Integer 4
Thursday Long Integer 5
Friday Long Integer 6
Saturday Long Integer 7
Sunday Long Integer 1

Note: Day number of returns a value between 1 and 7. To get the day number within the
month for a date, use the command Day of.

Example
The following example is a function that returns the current day as a string:
$viDay := Day number (Current date) ` $viDay gets the current day number
Case of
: ($viDay = 1)
$0 := "Sunday"

504 4D Language Reference

 : ($viDay = 2)
$0 := "Monday"
: ($viDay = 3)
$0 := "Tuesday"
: ($viDay = 4)
$0 := "Wednesday"
: ($viDay = 5)
$0 := "Thursday"
: ($viDay = 6)
$0 := "Friday"
: ($viDay = 7)
$0 := "Saturday"
End case

See Also
Day of.

4D Language Reference 505

Day of Date and Time

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Day of (aDate) → Number

Parameter Type Description

aDate Date → Date for which to return the day

Function result Number ← Day of the month of date

Description
The Day of command returns the day of the month of aDate.

Note: Day of returns a value between 1 and 31. To get the day of the week for a date, use the
command Day number.

Examples
1. The following example illustrates the use of Day of. The results are assigned to the variable
vResult. The comments describe what is put in vResult:
vResult:= Day of (!12/25/92!) ` vResult gets 25
vResult:= Day of (Current date) ` vResult gets day of current date

2. See the example for the command Current date.

See Also
Day number, Month of, Year of.

506 4D Language Reference

Milliseconds Date and Time

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Milliseconds → Longint

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Longint ← Number of milliseconds elasped

since the machine was started

Description
Milliseconds returns the number of milliseconds (1000th of a second) elapsed since the
machine was started.

Example
The following code displays the “Chronometer” window for one minute:

Open window (100;100;300;200;0;"Chronometer")

$vhTimeStart:=Current time
$vlTicksStart:=Tickcount
$vrMillisecondsStart:=Milliseconds
Repeat
GOTO XY (2;1)
MESSAGE ("Time...........:"+String (Current time -$vhTimeStart))
GOTO XY (2;3)
MESSAGE ("Ticks..........:"+String (Tickcount -$vlTicksStart))
GOTO XY (2;5)
MESSAGE ("Milliseconds...:"+String (Milliseconds -$vrMillisecondsStart))
Until ((Current time -$vhTimeStart)>=†00:01:00†)
CLOSE WINDOW

4D Language Reference 507

See Also
Current time, Tickcount.

508 4D Language Reference

Month of Date and Time

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Month of (aDate) → Number

Parameter Type Description

aDate Date → Date for which to return the month

Function result Number ← Number indicating the month of date

Description
The Month of command returns the month of aDate.

Note: Month of returns the number of the month, not the name (see Example 1).

To compare the value returned by this function, 4D provides the following predefined
constants, found in the "Days and Months" theme:

Constant Type Value

January Long Integer 1
February Long Integer 2
March Long Integer 3
April Long Integer 4
May Long Integer 5
June Long Integer 6
July Long Integer 7
August Long Integer 8
September Long Integer 9
October Long Integer 10
November Long Integer 11
December Long Integer 12

4D Language Reference 509

Examples
1. The following example illustrates the use of Month of. The results are assigned to the
variable vResult. The comments describe what is put in vResult:

vResult:= Month of (!12/25/92!) ` vResult gets 12

vResult:= Month of (Current date) ` vResult gets month of current date

2. See example for the command Current date.

See Also
Day of, Year of.

510 4D Language Reference

SET DEFAULT CENTURY Date and Time

version 6.7 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET DEFAULT CENTURY (century{; pivotYear})

Parameter Type Description

century Number → Default century (minus one)
for entry of date with two-digit year
pivotYear Number → Pivot year for entry of date with two-digit year

Description
The SET DEFAULT CENTURY command allows you to specify the default century and the pivot
year used by 4D when you enter a date with only two digits for the year.

The pivot year value defines the way 4D will interpret data entry of a date with a two-digit
year:
• If the year is greater than or equal to the pivot year, 4D uses the current default century.
• If the year is less than the pivot year, 4D uses the next century (relative to the current
default).

By default, 4D sets the century to be the 20th century and uses 30 as pivot year. For example:
• 01/25/97 means January 25, 1997.
• 01/25/30 means January 25, 1930.
• 01/25/29 means January 25, 2029.
• 01/25/07 means January 25, 2007.

To change this default, execute the SET DEFAULT CENTURY command. The effect of the
command is immediate. You can pass a new default century only, or a new default century
and a pivot year.

If you pass only a new default century minus one in century, 4D will interpret data entry of a
date with a two-digit year as belonging to this century.
For example, after the call:

SET DEFAULT CENTURY(20) ` Switch to 21st century for default century

• 01/25/97 means January 25, 2097
• 01/25/07 means January 25, 2007

4D Language Reference 511

In addition, you can specify the optional pivotYear parameter.
For example, after this call, in which the pivot year is 1995:

` Switch to 21st century for default century if year is less than 95

SET DEFAULT CENTURY(19;95)
• 01/25/97 means January 25, 1997
• 01/25/07 means January 25, 2007

Note: This command only affects how 4D interprets dates entered with a two-digit year.
In all cases:
• 01/25/1997 means January 25, 1997
• 01/25/2097 means January 25, 2097
• 01/25/1907 means January 25, 1907
• 01/25/2007 means January 25, 2007

This command only affects data entry. It has no effect on date storage, computation, and so
on.

512 4D Language Reference

Tickcount Date and Time

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Tickcount → Number

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Number ← Number of ticks (60th of a second) elapsed

since the machine was started

Description
Tickcount returns the number of ticks (60th of a second) elapsed since the machine was started.

Note: Tickcount returns a value of type Long Integer.

Example
See example for the command Milliseconds.

See Also
Current time, Milliseconds.

4D Language Reference 513

Time Date and Time

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Time (timeString) → Time

Parameter Type Description

timeString String → String to return as a time

Function result Time ← Time specified by timeString

Description
The Time command returns a time expression equivalent to the time specified as a string by
timeString.

The timeString parameter must contain a time expressed in one of the standard time formats of
4D corresponding to the language of your system (for more information, refer to the
description of the String command).

Example
The following example displays an alert box with the message “1:00 P.M. = 13 hours 0
minute”:

ALERT ("1:00 P.M. = "+String(Time("13:00:00");Hour Min))

See Also
String, Time string.

514 4D Language Reference

Time string Date and Time

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Time string (seconds) → String

Parameter Type Description

seconds Number → Seconds from midnight

Function result String ← Time as a string in 24-hour format

Description
The Time string command returns the string form of the time expression you pass in seconds.

The string is in the HH:MM:SS format.

If you go beyond the number of seconds in a day (86,400), Time string continues to add hours,
minutes, and seconds. For example, Time string (86401) returns 24:00:01.

Note: If you need the string form of a time expression in a variety of formats, use String.

Example
The following example displays an alert box with the message, “46800 seconds is 13:00:00.”

ALERT("46800 seconds is "+Time string(46800))

See Also
String, Time.

4D Language Reference 515

Year of Date and Time

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Year of (aDate) → Number

Parameter Type Description

aDate Date → Date for which to return the year

Function result Number ← Number indicating the year of date

Description
The Year of command returns the year of aDate.

Examples
1. The following example illustrates the use of Year of. The results are assigned to the variable
vResult.

vResult:= Year of (!12/25/92!) ` vResult gets 1992

vResult:= Year of (!12/25/1992!) ` vResult gets 1992
vResult:= Year of (!12/25/1892!) ` vResult gets 1892
vResult:= Year of (!12/25/2092!) ` vResult gets 2092
vResult:= Year of (Current date) ` vResult gets year of current date

2. See example for the command Current date.

See Also
Day of, Month of.

516 4D Language Reference

13
______________________
Debugging

4D Language Reference 517

518 4D Language Reference
Why a Debugger? Debugging

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

When developing and testing your methods, it is important that you find and fix the errors
they may contain.

There are several types of errors you can make when using the language: typing errors, syntax
or environmental errors, design or logic errors, and runtime errors.

Typing Errors
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Typing errors are detected by the Method editor and displayed in red and a message is
displayed in the information area at the bottom of the method window. The following
window shows a typing error:

Note: The comments have been manually inserted for the purpose of this manual. Only the
color is modified by 4D at the location of the error.

Such typing errors usually cause syntax errors (in this case, the name of the table is unknown).
The information area displays a description of the error when you validate the line of code.

4D Language Reference 519

When this occurs, fix the typing error and type Enter (on the numeric pad) to validate the fix.
For more information about the Method editor, refer to the 4D Design Reference.

Syntax or Environmental Errors

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Some errors can be caught only when you execute the method. The Syntax Error window is
displayed when an error occurs. For example:

In this window, the error is that a table name is passed to the Uppercase command, which
expects a text expression. To learn about this window and its button, see the section Syntax
Error window. In the above picture, the "Details" area is expanded in order to display the last
error and its number.

520 4D Language Reference

Occasionally, there there may not be enough memory to create an array or a BLOB. When you
access a document on disk, the document may not exist or may already open by another
application.

These errors do not directly occur because of your code or the way you wrote it; they occur
because sometimes “bad things just happen.” Most of the time, these errors are easy to treat
with an error catching method installed using the command ON ERR CALL (see the description
of ON ERR CALL).

For more information about this window, refer to the Syntax Error Window section.

Design or Logic Error

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

These are generally the most difficult type of error to find—use the Debugger to detect them.
Note that, other than typing errors, all the previous error types are to a certain extent covered
by the expression “Design or logic error.” For example:
• A syntax error may occur because you try to use a variable that has not yet been initialized.
• An environmental error may occur because you try to open a document whose name is
received by a subroutine which does not get the right value in the parameter. Note that in this
example, the piece of code that actually “breaks” may be different than the code that is
actually the origin of the problem.

4D Language Reference 521

Design or logic errors also include such situations as:

• A record is not properly updated because, while calling SAVE RECORD, you forgot to first test
whether or not the record was locked.
• A method does not do exactly what you expect, because the presence of an optional
parameter is not tested.

Runtime Error
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

In Application mode, you can obtain errors that you never saw in interpreted mode. Here is an
example:

This message indicates that you are trying to access a character whose position is beyond the
length of a string. To quickly find the origin of the problem, note the name of the method
and the line number, reopen the interpreted version of the structure file, and go to that
method at the indicated line.

What To Do When an Error Occurs?

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Errors are common. It would be unusual to write a substantial number of lines of code (let’s
say several hundred) without generating any errors. Conversely, treating and/or fixing errors is
normal, too!

With its multi-tasking environment, 4D enables you to quickly edit/run methods by simply
switching windows. You will discover how quickly you can fix mistakes and errors when you
do not have to rerun the whole thing each time. You will also discover how quickly you can
track errors if you use the Debugger.

522 4D Language Reference

A common beginner mistake in dealing with error detection is to click Abort in the Syntax
Error Window, go back to the Method Editor, and try to figure out what's going by looking at
the code. Do not do that! You will save plenty of time and energy by always using the
Debugger.

• If an unexpecting syntax error occurs, use the Debugger.

• If an environmental error occurs, use the Debugger.
• If any other type of error occurs, use the Debugger.

In 99% of the cases, the Debugger displays the information you need in order to understand
why an error occurred. Once you have this information, you know how to fix the error.

Tip: A few hours spent in learning and experimenting with the Debugger can save days and
weeks in the future when you have to track down errors.

Another reason to use the Debugger is for developing code. Sometimes you may write an
algorithm that is more complex than usual. Despite all feelings of accomplishment, you are
not totally sure that your coding is correct, even before trying it. Instead of running it “blind,”
use the TRACE command at the beginning of your code. Then, execute it step by step to
control what happens and to check whether your suspicion was correct or not. A purist may
dislike this method, but somethimes pragmatism pays off more quickly. Anyway... use the
Debugger.

General Conclusion
Use the Debugger.

See Also
Break List, Catching Commands, Debugger, Debugger Shortcuts, ON ERR CALL, Syntax Error
Window.

4D Language Reference 523

Syntax Error Window Debugging

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The Syntax Error Window is displayed when method execution is halted. Method execution can
be halted for either of two reasons:
• 4D halts execution because there is an error preventing further method execution.
• You generate a user interrupt by pressing Alt+Click (Windows) or Option+Click (Macintosh)
while a method is executing.

The Syntax Error window is shown here:

The upper text area of the Syntax Error window displays a message describing the error. The
lower text area shows the line that was executing when the error occurred; the area where the
error occurred is highlighted.

524 4D Language Reference

The Details button can be used to expand the lower part of the window displaying the "stack"
of errors related to the process:

There are five option buttons at the bottom of the window: Abort, Trace, Continue, Edit and
(if the window is expanded) Copy.

• Abort: The method is halted, and you return to where you were before you started executing
the method. If a form or object method is executing in response to an event, it is stopped and
you return to the form. If the method is executing from within the Application environment,
you return to this environment.

• Trace: You enter Trace/Debugger mode, and the Debugger window is displayed. If the
current line has been partially executed, you may have to click the Trace button several times.
Once the line finishes, you end up in the Debugger window.

• Continue: Execution continues. The line with the error may be partially executed, depending
on where the error was. Continue with caution—the error may prevent the remainder of your
method from executing properly. Usually, you do not want to continue. You can click
Continue if the error is in a trivial call, such as SET WINDOW TITLE, which does not prevent
executing and testing the rest of your code. You can thus concentrate on more important
code, and fix a minor error later.

4D Language Reference 525

• Edit: All method execution is halted. 4D switches to the Design environment. The method in
which the error occurred is opened in the Method editor, allowing you to correct the error.
Use this option when you immediately recognize the mistake and can fix it without further
investigation.

• Copy: This button copies the debugging information into the clipboard. This information
describes the internal environment of the error (number, internal component, etc.). It is
formatted as tabbed text. Once you have clicked this button, you can paste the contents of
the clipboard into a text file, a spreadsheet, an e-mail, etc. for analysis purposes.

See Also
Debugger, ON ERR CALL, Why a Debugger?.

526 4D Language Reference

Debugger Debugging

version 6.5 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The term Debugger comes from the term bug. A bug in a method is a mistake that you want to
eliminate. When an error has occurred, or when you need to monitor the execution of your
methods, you use the debugger. A debugger helps you find bugs by allowing you to slowly
step through your methods and examine method information. This process of stepping
through methods is called tracing.

You can cause the Debugger window to display and then trace the methods in the following
ways:

• Clicking the Trace button in the Syntax Error Window

• Using the TRACE command
• Clicking the Debug button in the Execute Method window.
• Pressing Alt+Shift+Right click (Windows) or Control+Option+Command+Click (Macintosh)
while a method is executing, then selecting the process to trace in the pop-up menu:

• Clicking the Trace button when a process is selected in the Process page of the Runtime
Explorer.
• Creating or editing a break point in the Method Editor window, or in the Break and Catch
pages of the Runtime Explorer.

Note: If a password system exists for the database, only the designer and users belonging to
the group that has design access privileges can trace methods.

4D Language Reference 527

The Debugger window is displayed here:

You can move the Debugger Window and/or resize any of its internal window panes as
necessary. Displaying a new debug window uses the same configuration (size and position of
the window, placing of the division lines and contents of the area that evaluates the
expressions) as the last window displayed in the same session.

4D is a multi-tasking environment. If you run several user processes, you can trace them
independently. You can have one debugger window open for each process.

528 4D Language Reference

Execution Control Tool Bar Buttons
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Nine buttons are located in the Execution Control Tool Bar at the top of the Debugger
window:

No Trace Button
Tracing is halted and normal method execution resumes.
Note: Shift+F5 or Shift+click on the No Trace button resumes execution. It also disables all the
subsequent TRACE calls for the current process.

Abort Button
The method is halted, and you return to where you were before you started executing the
method. If you were tracing a form or object method executing in response to an event, it is
stopped and you return to the form. If you were tracing a method executing from within the
Application environment, you return to the this environment.

Abort and Edit Button

The method is halted as if you clicked on Abort. Also, 4D opens a Method Editor window for
the method that was executing at the time the Abort and Edit button was clicked.

Tip: Use this button when you know which changes are required in your code and when these
changes are required to pursue the testing of your methods. After you are finished with the
changes, rerun the method.

4D Language Reference 529

Edit Button
Clicking the Edit button does the same as Clicking Abort and Edit button, but does not abort
the current execution. The method execution is paused at that point. 4D opens a Method
Editor window for the method that was executing at the time the Edit button was clicked.

Important: You can modify this method; however, these modifications will not appear or
execute in the instance of the method currently being traced in the debugger window. After
the method has either aborted or completed successfully, the modifications will appear on the
next execution of this method. In other words, the method must be reloaded so its
modifications will be taken into account.

Tip: Use this button when you know which changes are required in your code and when they
do not interfere with the rest of the code to be executed or traced.

Tip: Object Methods are reloaded for each event. If you are tracing an object method (i.e., in
response to a button click), you do not need to leave the form. You can edit the object
method, save the changes, then switch back to the form and retry. For tracing/changing form
methods, you must exit the form and reopen it in order to reload the form method. When
doing extensive debugging of a form, a trick is to put the code (that you are debugging) into a
project method that you use as subroutine from within a form method. In doing so, you can
stay in the form while you trace, edit, and retest your form, because the subroutine is
reloaded each time it is called by the form method.

Save Settings Button

Saves the current configuration of the debug window (size and position of the window,
placing of the division lines and contents of the area that evaluates the expressions), so that it
will be used by default each time the database is opened. These parameters are stored in the
database’s structure file.

Step Over Button

The current method line (the one indicated by the yellow arrow—called the program counter)
is executed, and the Debugger steps to the next line. The Step Over button does not step into
subroutines and functions; it stays at the level of the method you are currently tracing. If you
want to also trace subroutines and functions calls, use the Step Into button.

530 4D Language Reference

Step Into Button
On execution of a line that calls another method (subroutine or function), this button causes
the Debugger window to display the method being called and allows you to step through this
method. The new method becomes the current (top) method in the Call Chain pane of the
Debugger window. On execution of a line that does not call another method, this button acts
in the same manner as the Step Over button.

Step Into Process Button

On execution of a line that creates a new process (i.e., calling the command New process), this
button opens a new Debugger window that allows you to trace the process method of the
newly created process. On execution of a line that does not creates a new process, this button
acts in the same manner as the Step Over button.

Step Out Button

If you are tracing subroutines and functions, clicking on this button allows you to execute the
entire method currently being traced and to step back to the caller method. The Debugger
window is brought back to the previous method in the call chain. If the current method is the
last method in the call chain, the Debugger window is closed.

Execution Control Tool Bar Information

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

On the right side of the execution control tool bar, the debugger provides the following
information:
• The name of the method you are currently tracing (displayed in black)
• The problem caused the appearance of the Debugger window (displayed in red)

Using the example window shown above, the following information is displayed:
• The method DE_DebugDemo is the method being traced.
• The debugger window appeared because it detected a call to the command C_DATE and this
command was one of the commands to be caught.

Here are the possible reasons for the debugger to appear and for the message (displayed in red):
• TRACE Command: A call to TRACE has been issued.
• Break Point Reached: A temporary or persistent break point has been encountered.

4D Language Reference 531

• User Interrupt: You used Alt+Shift+Right click (Windows) or
Control+Option+Command+Click (Macintosh), or you clicked on the Trace button in the
Process page of the Design environment Runtime Explorer.
• Caught a call to: Name of the command: A call to a 4D command to be caught is on the
point of being performed.
• Stepping into a new process: You used the Step Into Process button and this message is
displayed by the Debugger window opened for the newly created process.

The Debugger Window’s Panes

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The Debugger window consists of the previously described Execution Control Tool Bar and
four resizable panes:

• Watch Pane
• Call Chain Pane
• Custom Watch Pane
• Source Code Pane

The first three panes use easy-to-navigate hierarchical lists to display pertinent debugging
information. The fourth one, Source Code Pane, displays the source code of the method being
traced. Each pane has its own function to assist you in your debugging efforts. You can use the
mouse to vertically and horizontally resize the debugger window and also each pane. In
addition, the first three panes include a dotted separation line between the two columns they
display. Using the mouse, you can move this dotted line to horizontally resize the columns, at
your convenience.

See Also
Break List, Call Chain Pane, Catching Commands, Custom Watch Pane, Debugger Shortcuts, ON
ERR CALL, Source Code Pane, Syntax Error Window, TRACE, Watch Pane, Why a Debugger?.

532 4D Language Reference

Watch Pane Debugging

version 6.5 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The Watch pane is displayed in the top left corner of the Debugger window, below the
Execution Control Tool Bar. Here is an example:

The Watch pane displays useful general information about the system, the 4D environment,
and the execution environment.

The Expression column displays the names of the objects or expressions. The Value column
displays the current value of corresponding the object or expression.

Clicking on any value on the right side of the pane allows you to modify the value of the
object, if this is permitted for that object.

The multi-level hierarchical lists are organized by theme at the main level. The themes are:
• Line Objects
• Variables
• Constants
• Fields
• Semaphores
• Sets
• Processes
• Named Selections
• Information
• Cache Statistics

4D Language Reference 533

Depending on the theme, each item may have one or several sublevels. Clicking the list node
next to a theme name expands or collapses the theme. If the theme is expanded, the items in
that theme are visible. If the theme has several levels of information, click the list node next
to each item for exploring all the information provided by the theme.

At any point, you can drag and drop themes, theme sublists (if any), and theme items to the
Custom Watch pane.

Cache Statistics: Displays statistics regarding the use of tables, index pages, and named
selections that are loaded in 4D’s cache. The expressions from this theme cannot be modified.

Information: Displays general information, such the current Default Table (if any). The
expressions from this theme cannot be modified.

Named Selections: Lists the process named selections that are defined in the current process
(the one you’re currently tracing); it also lists the interprocess named selections. For each
named selection, the Value column displays the number of records and the table name. This
list may be empty if you do not use named selections. The expressions from this theme cannot
be modified.

Processes: Lists the processes started since the beginning of the working session. The value
column displays the time used and the current state for each process (i.e., Executing, Paused,
and so on). The expressions from this theme cannot be modified.

Sets: Lists the sets defined in the current process (the one you're currently tracing); it also lists
the interprocess sets. For each set, the Value column displays the number of records and the
table name. This list may be empty if you do not use sets. The expressions from this theme
cannot be modified.

Semaphores: Lists the local semaphores currently being set. For each semaphore, the Value
column provides the name of the process that sets the semaphore. This list may be empty if
you do not use semaphores. The expressions from this theme cannot be modified. Global
semaphores are not displayed.

Tables & Fields: This theme lists the tables and fields in the database; it does not list subfields.
For each Table item, the Value column displays the size of the current selection for the current
process as well as (if the Table item is expanded) the number of locked records. For each Field
item, the Value column displays the value of the field (except picture, subtable, and BLOB) for
the current record, if any. In this theme, the field values can be modified (there is no undo),
but the table information cannot.

534 4D Language Reference

Constants: Displays predefined constants provided by 4D. like the Constants page of the
Explorer window. The expressions from this theme cannot be modified.

Variables: This theme is composed of the following subthemes:

• Interprocess: Displays the list of the interprocess variables being used at this moment. This
list can be empty if you do not use interprocess variables. The values of the interprocess
variables can be modified.
• Process: Displays the list of the process variables being used by the current process. This list
is rarely empty. The values of the process variables can be modified.
• Local: Displays the list of the local variables being used by the method being traced (the one
being shown in the source code pane). This list can be empty if no local variable is used or has
not yet been created. The values of the local variables can be modified.
• Parameters: Displays the list of parameters received by the method. This list can be empty if
no parameter were passed to the method being traced (the one being shown in the source
code pane). The values of the parameters can be modified.
• Self Pointer: Displays a pointer to the current object if you are tracing an Object Method.
This value cannot be modified

Note: You can modifiy String, Text, Numeric, Date, and Time variables; in other words, you
can modify the variables whose value can be entered with the keyboard.
Arrays, like other variables, appear in the Interprocess, Process, and Locals subthemes,
depending on their scope. The debugger displays each array with an additional hierarchical
level; this enables you to obtain or change the values of the array elements, if any. The
debugger displays the first 100 elements, including the element zero. The Value column
displays the size of the array in regard to its name. After you have deployed the array, the first
sub-item displays the current selected element number, then the element zero, then the other
elements (up to 100). You can modifiy String, Text, Numeric, and Date arrays. You can modify
the selected element number, the element zero, and the other elements (up to 100). You
cannot modify the size of the array.

Reminder: At any time, you can drag and drop an item from the Watch pane to the Custom
Watch pane, including an individual array element.

Line Objects
This theme displays the values of the objects or expressions that are:
• used in the line of code to be executed (the one marked with the program counter—the
yellow arrow in the Source Code pane), or
• used in the previous line of code.

4D Language Reference 535

Since the previous line of code is the one that was just executed before, the Line Objects
theme therefore shows the objects or expressions of the current line before and after that the
line was executed. Let's say you execute the following method:

TRACE
a:=1
b:=a+1
c:=a+b
` ...

1. You enter the Debugger window with the Source Code pane program counter set to the line
a:=1. At this point the Line Objects theme displays:

a: Undefined

The a variable is shown because it is used in the line to be executed (but has not yet been
initialized).

2. You step one line. The program counter is now set to the line b:=a+1. At this point, the Line
Objects theme displays:

a: 1
b: Undefined

The a variable is shown because it is used in the line that was just executed and was assigned
the numeric value 1. It is also shown because it is used in the line to be executed as the
expression to be assigned to the variable b. The b variable is shown because it is used in the
line to be executed (but has not yet been initialized).

3. Again, you step one line. The program counter is now set to the line c:=a+b. At this point
the Line Objects theme displays:

c: Undefined
a: 1
b: 2

The c variable is shown because it is used in the line to be executed (but has not yet been
initialized). The a and b variables are shown because there were used in the previous line and
are used in the line to be executed. And so on...

The Line Objects theme is a very convenient tool—each time you execute a line, you do not
need to enter an expression in the Custom Watch pane, just watch the values displayed by the
Line Objects theme.

536 4D Language Reference

Contextual Menu
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Addtional options are provided by the contextual menu of the Watch pane. To display this
menu:
• On Windows, click anywhere in the Watch pane using the right mouse button.
• On Macintosh, Control-Click anywhere in the Watch pane.

The contextual menu of the Watch pane is shown here:

• Collapse All: Collapses all levels of the Watch hierarchical list.

• Expand All: Expand all levels of the Watch hierarchical list.
• Show Types: Displays the object type for each object (when appropriate).
• Show Field and Table Numbers: Displays the number of each table or field of the Fields. If
you work with table or field numbers, or with pointers using the commands such as Table or
Field, this option is very useful.
• Show Icons: Displays an icon denoting the object type for each object. You can turn this
option off in order to speed up the display, or just because you prefer to use only the Show
Types option.
• Sorted Tables and Fields: Forces the table and fields to be displayed in alphabetical order,
within their respective lists.
• Show Integers in Hexadecimal: Numbers are usually displayed in decimal notation. This
option displays them in hexadecimal notation. Note: To enter a numeric value in
hexadecimal, type 0x (zero + "x"), followed by the hexadecimal digits.
• Enable activity monitoring: Activates the monitoring of activity (advanced checking of
internal activity of the application) and displays the information retrieved in the additional
themes: Scheduler, Web and Network.

4D Language Reference 537

The following is a view of the Watch pane with all options selected:

See Also
Call Chain Pane, Custom Watch Pane, Debugger, Debugger Shortcuts, Source Code Pane.

538 4D Language Reference

Call Chain Pane Debugging

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

One method may call other methods, which may call other methods. For this reason, it is
very helpful to see the chain of methods, or Call Chain, during the debugging process. The
Call Chain pane, which provides this useful function, is the top right pane of the Debugger
window. This pane is displayed using a hierarchical list. Here is an example of the Call Chain
pane:

• Each main level item is a name of a method. The top item is the method you are currently
tracing, the next main level item is the name of the caller method (the method that called the
method you are currently tracing), the next one is the caller's caller method, and so on. In the
example above, the method M_BitTestDemo is being traced; it has been called by the method
DE_LInitialize, which has been called by DE_DebugDemo.

• Double-clicking the name of a method in the Call Chain pane “transports” you back to the
caller method, displaying its source code in the Source code pane. In doing so, you can quickly
see “how” the caller method made its call to the called method. You can examine any stage of
the call chain this way.

• Clicking the node next to a Method name expands or collapses the parameter ($1, $2...) and
the optional function result ($0) list for the method. The values appear on the right side of the
pane. Clicking on any value on the right side allows you to change the value of any
parameter or function result. In the figure above:

1. M_BitTestDemo has not received any parameter.

2. M_BitTestDemo's $0 is currently undefined, as the method did not assign any value to $0
(because it has not executed this assignment yet or because the method is a subroutine and
not a function).

4D Language Reference 539

3. DE_LInitialize has received three parameters from DE_DebugDemo. $1 is a pointer to the table
[Customers], $2 is a pointer to the field [Customers]Company, and $3 is an alphanumeric
parameter whose value is "Z".

• After you have deployed the parameter list for a method, you can also drag and drop
parameters and function results to the Custom Watch pane.

See Also
Custom Watch Pane, Debugger, Debugger Shortcuts, Source Code Pane, Watch Pane.

540 4D Language Reference

Custom Watch Pane Debugging

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Directly below the Call Chain pane is the Custom Watch pane. This pane is used to evaluate
expressions. Any type of expression can be evaluated, including fields, variables, pointers,
calculations, built-in functions, your own functions, and anything else that returns a value.

You can evaluate any expression that can be shown in text form. This does not cover picture
and BLOB fields or variables. On the other hand, the Debugger uses deployed hierarchical lists
to let you display arrays and pointers. To display BLOB contents, you can use BLOB
commands, such as BLOB to text.

In the following example, you can see several of these items: two variables, a field pointer
variable and the result of a built-in function, and a calculation.

Inserting a new expression

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

You can add an expression to be evaluated in the Custom Watch pane in the following way:
• Drag and drop an object or expression from the Watch pane
• Drag and drop an object or expression from the Call Chain pane
• In the Source Code pane, click on an expression that can be evaluated

To create a blank expression, double-click somewhere in the empty space of the Custom
Watch pane. This adds an expression ` New expression and then goes into editing mode so you
can edit it. You can enter any 4D formula that returns a result.

After you have entered the formula, type Enter or Return (or click somewhere else in the
pane) to evaluate the expression.

To change the expression, click on it to select it, then click again (or press Enter — numeric
key pad) to go into editing mode.

4D Language Reference 541

If you no longer need an expression, click on it to select it, then press Backspace or Delete.

Warning: Be careful when you evaluate a 4D expression modifying the value of one of the
system variables (for instance, the OK variable) because the execution of the rest of the method
may be altered.

Custom Watch Pane Contextual Menu

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

To help you enter and edit an expression, the Custom Watch Pane’s contextual menu gives
you access the 4D formula editor. In fact, the contextual menu also proposes additional
options.

To display this menu, click anywhere in the Custom Watch pane using the right mouse button

542 4D Language Reference

• New Expression: This inserts a new expression and displays the 4D Formula Editor (as
shown) so you can edit the new expression.

For more information about the Formula Editor, see the 4D Design Reference manual.
• Insert Command: This hierarchical menu item is a shortcut for inserting a command as a
new expression, without using the Formula Editor.
• Delete All: Deletes all the expressions currently present.
• Standard Expressions: Recopies the list of objects in the Expression area.
• Collapse All/Expand All: Collapses or Expands all the expressions whose evaluation is done
by the means of a hierarchical list (i.e., pointers, arrays,...)
• Show Types: Displays the object type for each object (when appropriate).
• Show Field and Table Numbers: Displays the number of each table or field of the Fields. If
you work with table or field number or pointers using the commands such as Table or Field,
this option is very useful.
• Show Icons: Displays an icon denoting the object type for each object. You can turn this
option off in order to speed up the display, or just because you prefer to use only the Show
Types option.
• Sorted Tables and Fields: Forces the table and fields to be displayed in alphabetical order,
within their respective lists.
• Show Integers in Hexadecimal: Numbers are displayed using the decimal notation. This
option displays them hexadecimal notation. Note: To enter a numeric value in hexadecimal,
type 0x (zero + "x"), followed by the hexadecimal digits.
• Enable activity monitoring: Activates and displays activity monitoring information (see the
Watch Pane section).

See Also
Call Chain Pane, Debugger, Debugger Shortcuts, Source Code Pane, Watch Pane.

4D Language Reference 543

Source Code Pane Debugging

version 6.5 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The Source Code pane shows the source code of the method being traced.

• If the method is too long to fit in the text area, you can scroll to view other parts of the
method.
• Moving the mouse pointer over any expression that can be evaluated (field, variable, pointer,
array,...) will cause a Tool Tip to display the current value of the object or expression and its
declared type.
Here is an example of the Source Code pane:

A tool tip is displayed because the mouse pointer was over the variable pTable which,
according to the tool tip, is a pointer to the table [Customers].
• You can also select a portion of the text in the area displaying the code being executed.

544 4D Language Reference

In this case, when the cursor is placed above the selected text, a tip displays the selected
object’s value:

When you click on a variable name or field, it is automatically selected.

Tip: It is possible to copy any selected expression (that can be evaluated) from the Source Code
pane to the Custom Watch pane. You can use one of the following ways:
• by simply dragging and dropping (click on the selected text, drag it and drop it in the
evaluation area).
• by clicking on the selected text while holding down the Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Mac
OS) key.
• by using the Ctrl+D (Windows) or Command+D (Mac OS) key combinations.

Program Counter
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

A yellow arrow in the left margin of the Source Code pane (see the figure above) marks the
next line that will be executed. This arrow is called the program counter. The program
counter always indicates the line that is about to be executed.

For debugging purposes, you can change the program counter for the method being on top of
the call chain (the method actually being executed). To do so, click and drag the yellow arrow
vertically, to the line you want.

WARNING: Use this feature with caution!

4D Language Reference 545

Moving the program counter forward does NOT mean that the debugger is rapidly executing
the lines you skip. Similarily, moving the program counter backward does NOT mean that the
debugger is reversing the effect of the lines that has already been executed.

Moving the program counter simply tells the debugger to “pursue tracing or executing from
here.” All current settings, fields, variables, and so on are not affected by the move.

Here is an example of moving the program counter. Let’s say you are debugging the following
code:

` ...
If (This condition)
DO SOMETHING
Else
DO SOMETHING ELSE
End if
` ...

The program counter is set to the line If (This condition). You step once and you see that the
program counter moves to the line DO SOMETHING ELSE. This is unfortunate, because you
wanted to execute the other alternative of the branch. In this case, and provided that the
expression This condition does not perform operations affecting the next steps in your testing,
just move the program counter back to the line DO SOMETHING. You can now continuing
tracing the part of the code in which you are interested.

Setting Break Points in the Debugger

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

In the debugging process, you may need to skip the tracing of some parts of the code. The
debugger offers you several ways to execute code up to a certain point:

• While stepping, you can click on the Step Over button instead of Step Into button. This is
useful when you do not want to enter into possible subroutines or functions called in the
program counter line.
• If you mistakenly entered into a subroutine, you can execute it and directly go back to the
caller method by clicking on the Step Out button.
• If you have a TRACE call placed at some point, you can click the No Trace button, which
resumes the execution up to that TRACE call.

546 4D Language Reference

Now, let’s say you are executing the following code, with the program counter set to the line
ALL RECORDS([ThisTable]):

` ...
ALL RECORDS([ThisTable])
$vrResult:=0
For($vlRecord;1;Records in selection([ThisTable]))
$vrResult:=This Function([ThisTable]))
NEXT RECORD([ThisTable])
End for
If ($vrResult>=$vrLimitValue)
` ...

Your goal is to evaluate the value of $vrResult after the For loop has been completed. Since it
takes quite some execution time to reach this point in your code, you do not want to abort the
current execution, then edit the method in order to insert a TRACE call before the line If
($vrResult....

One solution is to step through the loop, however, if the table [ThisTable] contains several
hundreds records, you are going to spend the entire day for this operation. In this type of
situation, the debugger offers you break points. You can insert break points by clicking in the
left margin of the Source Code pane.

For example:
You click in the left margin of the Source Code pane at the level of the line If ($vrResult...:

This inserts a break point for the line. The break point is indicated by a red bullet. Then click
the No Trace button.

This resumes the normal execution up to the line marked with the break point. That line is
not executed itself—you are back to the trace mode. In this example, the whole loop has
consequently been executed normally. Then, when reaching the break point, you just need to
move the mouse button over $vrResult to evaluate its value at the exit point of the loop.

4D Language Reference 547

Setting a break point beyond the program counter and clicking the No Trace button allows
you to skip portions of the method being traced.

Note: You can also set break points directly in 4D's Method Editor. Please refer to the section
Break Points.

A red break point is a persistent break point. Once you created it, it “stays.” Even though you
quit the database, then reopen it later on, the break point will be there.

There are two ways to eliminate a persistent break point:

• If you are through with it, just remove it by clicking on the red bullet—the break point
disappears.
• If you are not totally through with it, you may want to keep the break point. You can
temporarily disable the break point by editing it. This explained in the section Break Points.

See Also
Break Points, Call Chain Pane, Custom Watch Pane, Debugger, Watch Pane.

548 4D Language Reference

Break Points Debugging

version 6.5 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

As explained in the Source Code pane section, you set a break point by clicking in the left
margin of the Source Code pane or of the Method Editor window, at the same level as the line
of code on which you want to create the break.

Note: Since you can insert, modify or delete break points either in the debugger's Source Code
pane or directly in the Method Editor, there is a dynamic interaction between the Method
Editor and the debugger (as well as the Runtime Explorer) in regards to break points. However,
temporary break points can be defined in the debugger only (see below).

In the following figure, a break point has been set, in the debugger, on the line
If($vrResult>=$vrLimitValue):

If you click again on the red bullet, the break point is deleted.

Editing a Break Point

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Pressing Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Macintosh) in the left margin of the Source code
pane or of the Method Editor window for a line of code, gives you access to the Break Point
Properties window.
• If you click on an existing break point, the window is displayed for that break point.
• If you click on a line where no break point was set, the debugger creates one and displays the
window for the newly created break point.

4D Language Reference 549

The Break Point Properties window is shown here:

Here are the properties:

Location: This tells you the name of the method and the line number where the break point is
set. You cannot change this information.

Type: By default, the debugger lets you create persistent break points, depicted by a red bullet
in the source code pane of the debugger window. To create a temporary break point, select the
Temporary option. A temporary break point is useful when you want to break just once in a
method. A temporary break point is identified by a green bullet in the source code pane of the
Debugger window. You can also set a temporary break point directly in the source code pane
by clicking in the left margin while pressing Alt+Shift (Windows) or Option+Shift (Macintosh).

Note: Temporary break points can be set in the debugger only.

Break when following expression is true: You can create conditional break points by entering a
4D formula that returns True or False. For example, if you want to break at a line only when
Records in selection([aTable])=0, enter this formula, and the break will occur only if there no
record selected for the table [aTable], when the debugger encounters the line with this break
point. If you are not sure about the syntax of your formula, click the Check Syntax button.

Number of times to skip before breaking: You can set a break point to a line of code located in
a loop structure (While, Repeat, or For) or located in subroutine or function called from within
a loop. For example, you know that the “problem” you are tracking does not occur before at
least the 200th iteration of the loop. Enter 200, and the break point will activate at the 201st
iteration.

550 4D Language Reference

Break Point is disabled: If you currently do not need a persistent break point, but you may
need it later, you can temporarily disable the break point by editing it. A disabled break point
appears as a dash (-) instead of a bullet (•) in the source code pane of the debugger window, in
the Method Editor and in the Break page of the Runtime Explorer.

You create and edit break point from within the Debugger or the Method Editor window. You
can also edit existing break points using the Break page of the Runtime Explorer. For more
information, see the section Break List window.

See Also
Break List, Catching Commands, Debugger, Source Code Pane.

4D Language Reference 551

Break List Debugging

version 6.5 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The Break List is a page of the Runtime Explorer that enables you to manage the persistent
Break Points created in the Debugger Window or in the Method Editor.

To open the Break List page:

1. Choose Runtime Explorer from the Run menu.

The Runtime Explorer can be displayed in a floating palette which always remains displayed in
the front. To do this, hold down the Shift key while selecting Runtime Explorer from the Run
menu. The Runtime Explorer is then available in all the 4D environments. For more
information, please refer to the Design Reference manuel.

The Runtime Explorer window appears.

2. Click on the Break button to display the Break List:

552 4D Language Reference

The Break List is composed of two columns:
• The left column displays the Enable/Disable status of the break point, followed by the name
of the method and the line number where the break point has been set (using the Debugger
window or the Method Editor).
• The right column displays the condition associated with the break point, if any.

Using this window, you can:

• Set a condifition for a break point,
• Enable, disable or delete each break point,
• Open a Method Editor window displaying the method in which a break point is defined, by
double-clicking on the break point.

However, you cannot add a new persistent break point from this window. Persistent break
points can only be created from within the Debugger window or the Method Editor.

Setting a Condition for a Break Point

To set a condifition for a break point, proceed as follows:
1. Click on the entry in the right column
2. Enter a 4D formula (expression or command call or project method) that returns a Boolean
value.

Note: To remove a condition, delete its formula.

Disabling/Enabling a Break Point

To disable or enable a break point:
1. Select the break point by clicking on it or by using the arrows to navigate through the list (if
the current selected entry is not already in edit mode).

2.Choose Enable/Disable from the contextual menu.

Shortcut: Each entry in the list may be disabled/enabled by clicking directly on the bullet (•).
The bullet changes to a dash (–) when disabled.

Deleting a Break Point

To delete a break point:
1. Select the break point by clicking on it or by using the arrows to navigate through the list (if
the current selected entry is not already in edit mode).

4D Language Reference 553

2. Press the Delete or Backspace key or click on the Delete button below the list.

Note: To delete all the break points, click on the Delete All button (second button below the
list) or choose Delete All in the contextual menu.

Tips
• Adding conditions to break points slows the execution, because the condition has to be
evaluated each time an exception is met. On the other hand, adding conditions accelerates the
debugging process, because it automatically skips occurrences that do not match the
conditions.
• Disabling a break point has almost the same effect as deleting it. During execution, the
debugger spends almost no time on the entry. The advantage of disabling an entry is that you
do not have to recreate it when you need it again.

See Also
Break Points, Catching Commands, Debugger, Source Code Pane, Why a Debugger?.

554 4D Language Reference

Catching Commands Debugging

version 6.5
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The Caught Commands List is a page of the Runtime Explorer that enables you to add
additional breaks to your code by catching calls to 4D commands.

Catching a command enables you to start tracing the execution of any process as soon as a
command is called by that process. Unlike a break point, which is located in a particular
project method (and therefore triggers a trace exception only when it is reached), the scope of
catching a command includes all the processes that execute 4D code and call that command.

Catching a command is a convenient way to trace large portions of code without setting break
points at arbitrary locations. For example, if a record that should not be deleted is deleted after
you have executed one or several processes, you can try to reduce the field of your
investigation by catching commands such as DELETE RECORD and DELETE SELECTION. Each
time these commands are called, you can check if the record in question has been deleted, and
thus isolate the faulty part of the code.

With some experience, you can combine the use of Break points and command catching.

To open the Caught Commands page:

1. Choose Runtime Explorer from the Run menu.

The Runtime Explorer can be displayed in a floating palette. In this case, the floating palette
always remains displayed in the front. To do this, hold down the Shift key while selecting
Runtime Explorer from the Tools menu. For more information, please refer to the Design
Reference manual.

The Runtime Explorer window appears.

4D Language Reference 555

2. Click on the Catch button to display the Caught Commands List:

This page lists the commands to be caught during execution. It is composed of two columns:
• The left column displays the Enable/Disable status of the caught command, followed by the
name of the command.
• The right column displays the condition associated with the caught command, if any.

Adding a New Command to be Caught

To add a new command:
1. Click on the add button (in the shape of a +) located below the list.
OR
Double-click the left mouse button in the Caught Commands list.
In both cases, a new entry is added to the list with the ALERT command as default.
The entry is set to the edit mode.

556 4D Language Reference

2. Enter the name of the command you want to catch.

3. Press Enter or Return to validate your choice.

OR

1. Press the right mouse button to display the contextual menu.

2. Select Add New Catch, then select the desired command from the command themes and
names submenus. A new entry is added with the command you selected.

Editing the Name of a Caught Command

To edit the name of a caught command:
1. Select the entry by clicking it or by using the arrow keys to navigate through the list (if the
current selected entry is not already in edit mode).

2. To toggle an entry between edit mode and select mode, press Enter or Return.
3. Enter or modify the name of the command.
4. To validate your changes, press Enter or Return. If name you entered does not correspond to
an existing 4D command, the entry is set to its previous value. If the entry is a new one, it is
reset to ALERT.

Disabling/Enabling a Caught Command

To disable or enable a caught command:
1. Select the entry by clicking it or by using the arrow keys to navigate through the list (if the
current selected entry is not already in edit mode).

4D Language Reference 557

2. If the entry is in edit mode, press Enter or Return to switch to select mode.

3. Choose Enable/Disable from the contextual menu.

Shortcut: Each entry in the list may be disabled/enabled by clicking on the bullet (•). The
bullet changes to a dash (–) when disabled.

Deleting a Caught Command

To delete a caught command:
1. Select the entry by clicking it or by using the arrow keys to navigate through the list (if the
current selected entry is not already in edit mode).
2. If the entry is in edit mode, press Enter or Return to switch to select mode.

3. Press the Delete key or click on the deletion button (in the shape of a '-') located below the
list.

Note: To delete all the caught commands, click on the Delete All button (third button located
below the list) or chosse Delete All in the contextual menu.

Setting a Condition for Catching a Command

To set a condition for catching a command:
1. Click on the entry in the right column.
2. Enter a 4D formula (expression, command call or project method) that returns a Boolean
value.

Note: To remove a condition, delete its formula.

Tips
• Adding conditions to caught commands slows the execution, because the condition has to
be evaluated each time an exception is met. On the other hand, adding conditions accelerates
the debugging process, because it automatically skips occurrences that do not match the
conditions.
• Disabling a caught command has almost the same effect as deleting it. During execution, the
debugger spends almost no time on the entry. The advantage of disabling an entry is that you
do not have to recreate it when you need it again.

See Also
Break List, Break Points, Debugger.

558 4D Language Reference

Debugger Shortcuts Debugging

version 2003 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

This section lists all the shortcuts provided by the Debugger window.

Execution Control Tool Bar

→ The following figure shows the shortcuts for the nine buttons located in the top left corner
of the Debugger Window:

→ Shift+F5 or Shift+click on the No Trace button resumes execution. Also, they disable all the
next TRACE calls for the current process.

Watch Pane
→ Right mouse button click (Windows) or Control-Click (Macintosh) in the Watch pane pulls
down the Watch contextual menu.
→ Double-click on an item of the Watch pane copies the item to the Custom Watch pane.
Call Chain Pane
→ Double-Click on a method name in the Call chain pane displays the method in the Source
Code pane at the line corresponding to the call in the call chain.

4D Language Reference 559

Custom Watch Pane
→ Right mouse button click (Windows) or Control-Click (Macintosh) in the Custom Watch
pane pulls down the Custom Watch contextual menu.
→ Double-Click in the Custom Watch pane creates a new watch.
Source Code Pane
→ Click in the left margin sets (persistent) or removes break points.
→ ALT-Shift-Click (Windows) or Option-Shift Click (Macintosh) sets a temporary break point.
→ Alt-Click (Windows) or Option-Click displays the Edit Break window for a new or existing
break point.
→ A selected expression or object can be copied to the Custom Watch pane by simple drag
and drop.
→ Click on the selected text while holding down the Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Mac OS)
key copies it to the Custom Watch pane.
→ Ctrl+D (Windows) or Command+D (Mac OS) key combinations copy the selected text to
the Custom Watch pane.

All Panes
→ Ctrl+* (Windows) or Command+* (Mac OS) forces the updating of the Watch pane.
→ When no item is selected in any pane, typing Enter steps by one line.
→ When an item value is selected, use the arrows keys to navigate through the list.
→ When an item is being edited, use the arrow keys to move the cursor; use Ctrl-A/X/C/V
(Windows) or Command-A/X/C/V (Macintosh) as shortcuts to the Select All/Cut/Copy/Paste
menu commands of the Edit menu.

See Also
Call Chain Pane, Custom Watch Pane, Debugger, Source Code Pane, Watch Pane.

560 4D Language Reference

14
______________________
Drag and Drop

4D Language Reference 561

562 4D Language Reference
Drag and Drop Drag and Drop

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4D allows built-in drag and drop capability between objects in your forms and applications.
You can drag and drop one object to another, in the same window or in another window. In
other words, drag and drop can be performed within a process or from one process to another.

You can also drag and drop objects between 4D forms and other applications or the desktop of
the operating system, and vice versa. For example, it is possible to drag and drop a GIF picture
file onto a 4D picture field. It is also possible to select text in a word processing application
and drop it onto a 4D text variable.

Finally, it is possible to drop objects directly onto the application without necessarily having a
form in the foreground. The On Drop Database Method can be used to manage the drag and
drop action in this case. This means, for example, that you can open a 4D Write document by
dropping it onto the 4D application icon.

Note: As an introduction, we assume that a drag and drop action “transports” some data from
one point to another. Later, we will see that drag and drop can also be a metaphor for any type
of operation.

Draggable and Droppable Object Properties

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

To drag and drop an object to another object, you must select the Draggable property for that
object in the Property List window. In a drag-and-drop operation, the object that you drag is
the source object.

To make an object the destination of a drag and drop operation, you must select the
Droppable property for that object in the Property List window. In a drag-and-drop operation,
the object that receives data is the destination object.

Automatic Drag and Automatic Drop: These additional properties are available for text fields
and variables as well as for combo boxes and list boxes. The Automatic Drop option is also
available for picture fields and variables. They can be used to enable an automatic drag and
drop mode based on copying the contents (the drag and drop action is no longer managed by
4D form events). Please refer to the "Automatic Drag and Drop" paragraph at the end of this
section.

By default, newly created objects can be neither dragged nor dropped. It is up to you to set
these properties.

4D Language Reference 563

All objects in an input or dialog form can be made to be dragged and dropped. Individual
elements of an array (i.e., scrollable area), items of a hierarchical list or rows in a list box can
be dragged and dropped. Conversely, you can drag and drop an object onto an individual
element of an array or an item of a hierarchical list or a list box row. However, you cannot
drag and drop objects from the detail area of an output form.

You can also manage dragging and dropping onto the application, outside of any form, using
the On Drop Database Method.

You can easily create a drag-and-drop user interface, because 4D allows you to use any type of
active object (field or variable) as source or destination objects. For example, you can drag and
drop a button.

Notes:
•To drag a text or a button labeled "draggable," you must first press the Alt (Windows) or
Option (Mac OS) keys.
• By default, in the case of picture fields and variables, the picture and its reference are both
dragged. If you only want to drag the reference of the variable or field, first hold down the Alt
(Windows) or Option (Mac OS) key.
• When the “Draggable” and “Movable Rows” properties are both set for a List box object, the
“Movable Rows” property takes priority when a row is moved. Dragging is not possible in this
case.

An object that is capable of being both dragged and dropped can also be dropped onto itself,
unless you reject the operation. For details, see the discussion below.

564 4D Language Reference

The following figure shows the Property List window with the Droppable and Draggable
properties set for the selected object:

Drag-and-Drop Programmatical Handling

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Management of drag and drop by programming is based on three form events: On Begin Drag
Over, On Drag Over and On Drop.
Note that the On Begin Drag Over event is generated in the context of the source object of the
drag while On Drag Over and On Drop are only sent to the destination object.

In order for the application to process these events, they must be selected in an appropriate
manner in the Property List:

4D Language Reference 565

• Property List:

On Begin Drag Over

The On Begin Drag Over form event can be selected for any form objects that can be dragged. It
is generated in every case where the object has the Draggable property.
Unlike the On Drag Over form event, On Begin Drag Over is called within the context of the
source object of the drag action. It can be called from the method of the source object or the
form method of the source object.
This event is useful for advanced management of the drag action. It can be used to:
• Get the data and signatures found in the pasteboard (via the GET PASTEBOARD DATA
command).
• Add data and signatures to the pasteboard (via the APPEND DATA TO PASTEBOARD
command).
• Accept or refuse dragging via $0 in the method of the dragged object. To indicate that drag
actions are accepted, the method of the source object must return 0 (zero); you must therefore
execute $0:=0. To indicate that drag actions are refused, the method of the source object must
return -1 (minus one); you must therefore execute $0:=-1. If no result is returned, 4D considers
that drag actions are accepted.

4D data are put in the pasteboard before calling the event. For example, in the case of
dragging without the Automatic Drag action, the dragged text is already in the pasteboard
when the event is called.

566 4D Language Reference

On Drag Over
The On Drag Over event is repeatedly sent to the destination object when the mouse pointer is
moved over the object. In response to this event, you usually:

• Call the DRAG AND DROP PROPERTIES command, which informs you about the source object.
• Depending on the nature and type of both the destination object (whose object method is
currently being executed) and the source object, you accept or reject the drag and drop.

To accept the drag, the destination object method must return 0 (zero), so you write $0:=0.
To reject the drag, the object method must return -1 (minus one), so you write $0:=-1. During
an On Drag Over event, 4D treats the object method as a function. If no result is returned, 4D
assumes that the drag is accepted.

If you accept the drag, the destination object is highlighted. If you reject the drag, the
destination is not highlighted. Accepting the drag does not mean that the dragged data is
going to be inserted into the destination object. It only means that if the mouse button was
released at this point, the destination object would accept the dragged data.

If you do not process the On Drag Over event for a droppable object, that object will be
highlighted for all drag over operations, no matter what the nature and type of the dragged
data.

The On Drag Over event is the means by which you control the first phase of a drag-and-drop
operation. Not only can you test whether the dragged data is of a type compatible with the
destination object, and then accept or reject the drag; you can simultaneously notify the user
of this fact, because 4D highlights (or not) the destination object, based on your decision.

The code handling an On Drag Over event should be short and execute quickly, because that
event is sent repeatedly to the current destination object, due to the movements of the mouse.

WARNING: If the drag and drop is an interprocess drag and drop, which means the source
object is located in a process (window) other than that of the destination object, the object
method of the destination object for an On Drag Over event is executed within the context of
the source process (the source object's process), and not in the process of the destination
object. This is the only case in which such an execution occurs. The advantages of this type of
execution are described at the end of this section.

4D Language Reference 567

On Drop
The On Drop event is sent once to the destination object when the mouse pointer is released
over the object. This event is the second phase of the drag-and-drop operation, in which you
perform an operation in response to the user action.

This event is not sent to the object if the drag was not accepted during the On Drag Over
events. If you process the On Drag Over event for an object and reject a drag, the On Drop
event does not occur. Thus, if during the On Drag Over event you have tested the data type
compatibility between the source and destination objects and have accepted a possible drop,
you do not need to re-test the data during the On Drop. You already know that the data is
suitable for the destination object.

An interesting aspect of the 4D drag-and-drop implementation is that 4D lets you do whatever

you want. Examples:
• If a hierarchical list item is dropped over a text field, you can insert the text of the list item
at the beginning, at the end, or in the middle of the text field.
• Your form contains a two-state picture button, which could represent an empty or full trash
can. Dropping an object onto that button could mean (from the user interface standpoint)
“delete the object that has been dragged and dropped into the trash can.” Here, the drag and
drop does not transport data from one point to another; instead, it performs an action.
• Dragging an array element from a floating window to an object in a form could mean “in
this window, show the Customer record whose name you just dragged and dropped from the
floating window listing the Customers stored in the database.”
• And so on.

So, the 4D drag-and-drop interface is a framework which enables you to implement any user
interface metaphor you may devise.

Drag-and-drop commands
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The DRAG AND DROP PROPERTIES command returns:

• A pointer to the dragged object (field or variable)
• The element or item number, if the dragged object is an array element or a list item
• The process number of the source process.

The Drop position command returns the element number of the item position of the target
element or list item, if the destination object is an array (i.e., scrollable area), a hierarchical
list, a text or a combo box, as well as the column number if the object is a list box.

568 4D Language Reference

Commands like RESOLVE POINTER and Type are useful for testing the nature and type of the
source object.

When the drag-and-drop operation is intended to copy the dragged data, the functionality of
these commands depend on how many processes are involved:
• If the drag and drop is limited to one process, use these commands to perform the
appropriate actions (i.e., simply assigning the source object to the destination object).
• If the drag and drop is an interprocess drag and drop, you need to be careful while getting
access to the dragged data; you must access the data instance from the source process. If the
dragged data comes from a variable, use GET PROCESS VARIABLE to get the right value. If the
dragged data comes from a field, remember that the current record for a table is probably
different for the two processes, so you need to access the right record.

In this last case, several solutions are available:

• If the On Drag Over event for the destination object method is executed in the context of
the source process, you can copy the field data or the record number to an interprocess
variable that will be reused during the On Drop event.
• You can get the required data by starting an interprocess communication during the On
Drop event.

If the drag and drop is not intended to move data, but is instead a user interface metaphor for
a particular operation, you can perform whatever you want.

Commands of the Pasteboard Theme

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

If the drag and drop operation involves the moving of heterogenous data or documents
between two 4D applications or a 4D application and a third-party application, the commands
of the “Pasteboard” theme will provide you with the tools needed.
In fact, these commands can be used to manage both the copy/paste and the drag and drop of
data. 4D uses two pasteboards: one for copied (or cut) data, which is the actual clipboard, and
the other for data being dragged and dropped. These two pastebaoards are managed using the
same commands. You access one or the other depending on the context.

For more information about using the commands of the “Pasteboard” theme for drag and
drop operations, please refer to the Managing Pasteboards section.

Automatic Drag and Drop

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Text areas (fields, variables, combo boxes and List boxes) as well as picture objects allow the
automatic drag and drop, which is the movement or copy of a text or picture selection from
one area to another by a single click. It can be used in the same 4D area, between two 4D
areas, or between 4D and another application, for example WordPad.

4D Language Reference 569

Note: In the case of automatic drag and drop between two 4D areas, the data are moved, in
other words, they are removed from the source area. If you want to copy the data, hold down
the Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Mac OS) key during the action.

Automatic drag and drop can be configured separately for each form object via two options of
the Property List: Automatic Drag and Automatic Drop:

• Automatic Drag: When this option is checked, the automatic drag mode is activated for the
object. This mode takes priority for pictures, even if the Draggable option is checked. In this
mode, the On Begin Drag form event is NOT generated.
If you want to “force” the use of the standard drag, hold down the Alt (Windows) or Option
(Mac OS) key during the action.

• Automatic Drop: This option is used to activate the automatic drop mode. In this mode, 4D
automatically manages — if possible — the insertion of dragged data of the text or picture
type that is dropped onto the object (the data are pasted into the object). The On Drag Over
and On Drop form events are not generated in this case. On the other hand, the On After Edit
(during a drop) and On Data Change (when the object loses the focus) events are generated.
In the case of data other than text or pictures (another 4D object, file, etc. ) or complex data
being dropped, the application refers to the value of the Droppable option: if it is checked, the
On Drag Over and On Drop form events are generated; otherwise, the drop is refused. This also
depends on the value of the “Prevent drop of data not coming from 4D” option (see below).

570 4D Language Reference

Prevent drop of data not coming from 4D (compatibility)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Beginning with version 11, 4D allows drag and drop of selections, objects and/or files external
to 4D, like picture files for example. This possibility must be supported by the database code.
In databases converted from previous versions of 4D, this possibility may lead to
malfunctioning if the existing code is not adapted accordingly. For this reason, an option in
the Preferences can be used to disable this function: Prevent drop of data not coming from
4D. This option is found on the Application/Compatibility page. It is checked by default in
converted databases.

When this option is check, the drop of external objects into 4D forms is refused. Note
however that the insertion of external objects remains possible in objects having the
Automatic Drop option, when the application can interpret the dropped data (text or picture).

See Also
DRAG AND DROP PROPERTIES, Drop position, Form event, GET PROCESS VARIABLE, Is a list,
RESOLVE POINTER, Type.

4D Language Reference 571

On Drop Database Method Drag and Drop

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The On Drop Database Method is available in local or remote 4D applications.

This database method is automatically executed in the case of objects being dropped in the
4D application outside of any form or windows, i.e.:
• In an empty area of the MDI window (Windows),
• On the 4D icon in the Dock (Mac OS) or on the system desktop.

Under Mac OS, you need to hold down the Option+Command keys during the drop in
order for the database method to be called.

When a drop occurs on the 4D application icon on the destktop, the On Drop Database
Method is only called when the application is already launched, except in the case of
applications merged with 4D Desktop. In this case, the database method is called even
when the application is not launched. This means that it is possible to define custom
document signatures.

Example
This example can be used to open a 4D Write document that is dropped outside of any
form:

`On Drop database method

droppedFile:=Get file from pasteboard(1)
If(Position(".4W7";droppedFile)=Length(droppedFile)-3)
externalArea:=Open external window(100;100;500;500;0;droppedFile;"_4D Write")
WR OPEN DOCUMENT(externalArea;droppedFile)
End if

See Also
Database Methods.

572 4D Language Reference

DRAG AND DROP PROPERTIES Drag and Drop

version 2004.2 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DRAG AND DROP PROPERTIES (srcObject; srcElement; srcProcess)

Parameter Type Description

srcObject Pointer ← Pointer to drag-and-drop source object
srcElement Number ← Dragged array element number, or
Dragged list box row number, or
Dragged hierarchical list item, or
-1 if source object is neither an array
nor a list box nor a hierarchical list
srcProcess Number ← Source process number

Description
The DRAG AND DROP PROPERTIES command enables you to obtain information about the
source object when an On Drag Over or On Drop event occurs for a “complex” object (array,
list box or hierarchical list).

Typically, you use DRAG AND DROP PROPERTIES from within the object method of the object
(or from one of the subroutines it calls) for which the On Drag Over or On Drop event occurs
(the destination object).

Important: A form object accepts dropped data if its Droppable property has been selected.
Also, its object method must be activated for On Drag Over and/or On Drop, in order to process
these events.

After the call:

• The srcObject parameter is a pointer to the source object (the object that has been dragged
and dropped). Note that this object can be the destination object (the object for which the On
Drag Over or On Drop event occurs) or a different object. Dragging and dropping data from
and to the same object is useful for arrays and hierarchical lists—it is a simple way of allowing
the user to sort an array or a list manually.

4D Language Reference 573

• If the dragged and dropped data is an array element (the source object being an array), the
srcElement parameter returns the number of this element. If the dragged and dropped data is a
list box row, the srcElement parameter returns the number of this row. If the drag and dropped
data is a list item (the source object being a hierarchical list), the srcElement parameter returns
the position of this item. Otherwise, if the source object does not belong to any of these
categories, srcElement is equal to -1.
• Drag and drop operations can occur between processes. The srcProcess parameter is equal to
the number process to which the source object belongs. It is important to test the value of this
parameter. You can respond to a drag and drop within the same process by simply copying the
source data to the destination object. On the other hand, when treating an interprocess drag
and drop, you will use the GET PROCESS VARIABLE command to get the source data from the
source process object instance. If the source object is a field, you must get the value from the
source process via interprocess communication or handle that particular case while responding
to the On Drag Over event (see below). However, you will usually implement drag and drop in
the user interface from source variables (i.e., arrays and lists) toward data entry areas (fields or
variables).

If you call DRAG AND DROP PROPERTIES when there is no drag and drop event, srcObject
returns a NIL pointer, srcElement returns -1 and srcProcess returns 0.

Tip: 4D automatically handles the graphical aspect of a drag and drop. You must then respond
to the event in the appropriate way. In the following examples, the response is to copy the
data that has been dragged. Alternatively, you can implement sophisticated user interfaces
where, for example, dragging and dropping an array element from a floating window will fill
in the destination window (the window where the destination object is located) with
structured data (i.e., several fields coming from a record uniquely identified by the source
array element).

You use DRAG AND DROP PROPERTIES during an On Drag Over event in order to decide
whether the destination object accepts the drag and drop operation, depending on the type
and/or the nature of the source object (or any other reason). If you accept the drag and drop,
the object method must return $0:=0. If you do not accept the drag and drop, the object
method must return $0:=-1. Accepting or refusing the drag and drop is reflected on the
screen—the object is or is not highlighted as the potential destination of the drag-and-drop
operation.

574 4D Language Reference

Tip: During an On Drag Over event, the object method of the destination object is executed
within the context of the source object’s process. If the source object of an interprocess drag
and drop is a field, you can use the opportunity of this event to copy the source data into an
interprocess variable. By doing so, later on, during the On Drop event, you will not have to
initiate an interprocess communication with the source process in order to get the value of the
field that was dragged. If an interprocess drag and drop involves a variable as source object,
you can use the GET PROCESS VARIABLE command during the On Drop event.

Examples
1. In several of your database forms, there are scrollable areas in which you want to manually
reorder the elements by simple drag and drop from one part of the scrollable area into another
within it. Rather than writing specific code for each case, you may implement a generic
project method that will handle any one of these scrollable areas. You could write something
like:

` Handle self array drag and drop project method

` Handle self array drag and drop ( Pointer ) -> Boolean
` Handle self array drag and drop ( -> Array ) -> Is a self array drag and drop

Case of
: (Form event=On Drag Over)
DRAG AND DROP PROPERTIES($vpSrcObj;$vlSrcElem;$vlPID)
If ($vpSrcObj=$1)
` Accept the drag and drop if it is from the array to itself
$0:=0
Else
$0:=-1
End if
: (Form event=On Drop)
` Get the information about the drag and drop source object
DRAG AND DROP PROPERTIES($vpSrcObj;$vlSrcElem;$vlPID)
` Get the destination element number
$vlDstElem:=Drop position

4D Language Reference 575

 ` If the element was not dropped over itself
If ($vlDstElem # $vlSrcElem)
` Save dragged element in element 0 of the array
$1->{0}:=$1->{$vlSrcElem}
` Delete the dragged element
` If the destination element was beyond the dragged element
DELETE FROM ARRAY($1->;$vlSrcElem)
If ($vlDstElem>$vlSrcElem)
` Decrement the destination element number
$vlDstElem:=$vlDstElem-1
End if
` If the drag and drop occurred beyond the last element
If ($vlDstElem=-1)
` Set the destination element number to a new element
`at the end of the array
$vlDstElem:=Size of array($1->)+1
End if
` Insert this new element
INSERT IN ARRAY($1->;$vlDstElem)
` Set its value which was previously saved in the element zero of the array
$1->{$vlDstElem}:=$1->{0}
` The element becomes the new selected element of the array
$1->:=$vlDstElem
End if
End case

Once you have implemented this project method, you can use it in the following way:

` anArray Scrollable Area Object Method

Case of
`...
: (Form event=On Drag Over)
$0:=Handle self array drag and drop (Self)
: (Form event=On Drop)
Handle self array drag and drop (Self)
` ...
End case

576 4D Language Reference

2. In several of your database forms, you have text enterable areas in which you want to drag
and drop data from various sources. Rather than writing specific code for each case, you may
implement a generic project method that will handle any one of these text enterable areas.
You could write something like:

` Handle dropping to text area project method

` Handle dropping to text area ( Pointer )
` Handle dropping to text area ( -> Text or String variable )

Case of
` Use this event for accepting or rejecting the drag and drop
: (Form event=On Drag Over)
` Initialize $0 for rejecting
$0:=-1
` Get the information about the drag and drop source object
DRAG AND DROP PROPERTIES($vpSrcObj;$vlSrcElem;$vlPID)
` In this example, we do not allow drag and drop from an object to itself
If ($vpSrcObj # $1)
` Get the type of the data which is being dragged
$vlSrcType:=Type($vpSrcObj->)
Case of
: ($vlSrcType=Is Alpha Field)
` Alphanumeric Field is OK
$0:=0 ` Copy the value now into an IP variable
<>vtDraggedData:=$vpSrcObj->
: ($vlSrcType=Is Text)
` Text Field or Variable is OK
$0:=0
RESOLVE POINTER($vpSrcObj;$vsVarName;$vlTableNum;
$vlFieldNum)
` If it is a field
If (($vlTableNum>0) & ($vlFieldNum>0))
` Copy the value now into an IP variable
<>vtDraggedData:=$vpSrcObj->
End if

4D Language Reference 577

 : ($vlSrcType=Is String Var)
` String Variable is OK
$0:=0
: (($vlSrcType=String array) | ($vlSrcType=Text array))
` String and Text Arrays are OK
$0:=0
: (($vlSrcType=Is LongInt) | ($vlSrcType=Is Real)
If (Is a list($vpSrcObj->))
` Hierarchical list is OK
$0:=0
End if
End case
End if

` Use this event for performing the actual drag and drop action
: (Form event=On Drop)
$vtDraggedData:=""
` Get the information about the drag and drop source object
DRAG AND DROP PROPERTIES($vpSrcObj;$vlSrcElem;$vlPID)
RESOLVE POINTER($vpSrcObj;$vsVarName;$vlTableNum;$vlFieldNum)
` If it is field
If (($vlTableNum>0) & ($vlFieldNum>0))
` Just grab the IP variable set during the On Drag Over event
$vtDraggedData:=<>vtDraggedData
Else
` Get the type of the variable which has been dragged
$vlSrcType:=Type($vpSrcObj->)
Case of
` If it is an array
: (($vlSrcType=String array) | ($vlSrcType=Text array))
If ($vlPID # Current process)
` Read the element from the source process instance
` of the variable
GET PROCESS VARIABLE($vlPID;$vpSrcObj->{$vlSrcElem};
$vtDraggedData)
Else
` Copy the array element
$vtDraggedData:=$vpSrcObj->{$vlSrcElem}
End if

578 4D Language Reference

 ` If it is a list
: (($vlSrcType=Is Real) | ($vlSrcType=Is LongInt))
` If it is a list from another process
If ($vlPID # Current process)
`Get the List Reference from the other process
GET PROCESS VARIABLE($vlPID;$vpSrcObj->;$vlList)
Else
$vlList:=$vpSrcObj->
End if
` If the list exists
If (Is a list($vpSrcObj->))
`Get the text of the item whose position was obtained
GET LIST ITEM($vlList;$vlSrcElem;$vlItemRef;$vsItemText)
$vtDraggedData:=$vsItemText
End if
Else
` It is a string or a text variable
If ($vlPID # Current process)
GET PROCESS VARIABLE($vlPID;$vpSrcObj->;$vtDraggedData)
Else
$vtDraggedData:=$vpSrcObj->
End if
End case
End if
` If there is actually something to drop (the source object may be empty)
If ($vtDraggedData # "")
` Check that the length of the text variable will not
` exceed 32,000 characters
If ((Length($1->)+Length($vtDraggedData))<=32000)
$1->:=$1->+$vtDraggedData
Else
BEEP
ALERT("The drag and drop cannot be completed because the text would
become too long.")
End if
End if

End case

4D Language Reference 579

Once you have implemented this project method, you can use it in the following way:

` [anyTable]aTextField Object Method

Case of
` ...
: (Form event=On Drag Over)
$0:=Handle dropping to text area (Self)

: (Form event=On Drop)

Handle dropping to text area (Self)
` ...
End case
3. We want to fill a text area (for example, a label) with data dragged from a list box.

Here is the label1 object method:

Case of
:(Form event=On Drag Over)
DRAG AND DROP PROPERTIES($source;$arrayrow;$processnum)
If ($source=Get pointer("list box1"))
$0:=0 `The drop is accepted
Else
$0:=-1 `The drag is refused
End if
:(Form event=On Drop)
DRAG AND DROP PROPERTIES($source;$arrayrow;$processnum)
QUERY([Members];[Members]LastName=arrNames{$arrayrow})
If (Records in selection([Members])#0)
label1:=[Members]FirstName+" "+[Members]LastName+Char(Carriage return)+
[Members]Address+Char(Carriage return)+[Members]City+","+" "+
[Members]State+" "+[Members]ZipCode
End if
End case

580 4D Language Reference

It then becomes possible to carry out the following action:

See Also
Drag and Drop, Drop position, Form event, GET PROCESS VARIABLE, Is a list, RESOLVE POINTER.

4D Language Reference 581

Drop position Drag and Drop

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Drop position {(columnNumber)} → Number

Parameter Type Description

columnNumber Longint ← List box column number or
-1 if the drop occurs beyond the last column

Function result Number ← • Number (array/list box) or

• Position (hierarchical list) or
• Position in string (text/combo box)
of destination item or
-1 if drop occurred beyond the last array element
or list item

Description
The Drop position command can be used to find out the location, in a “complex” destination
object, where an object has been (dragged and) dropped.

Typically, you will use Drop position when handling a drag and drop event that occurred over
an array, a list box, a hierarchical list or a text field.

• If the destination object is an array, the command returns an element number.

• If the destination object is a list box, the command returns a row number. In this case, the
command also returns the column number where the drop took place in the optional
columnNumber parameter.
• If the destination object is a hierarchical list, the command returns an item position.
• If the destination object is a text type variable or field, or a combo box, the command
returns a character position within the string.
In all cases, the command may return -1 if the source object has been dropped beyond the last
element or the last item of the destination object.

If you call Drop position when handling an event that is not a drag-and-drop event and that
occurred over an array a list box, a combo box, a hierarchical list or a text, the command
returns -1.

Important: A form object accepts dropped data if its Droppable property has been selected.

582 4D Language Reference

Also, its object method must be activated for On Drag Over and/or On Drop, in order to process
these events.

Examples
1. See the examples for the DRAG AND DROP PROPERTIES command.

2. In the following example, a list of amounts paid must be broken down per month and per
person. This is carried out by drag and drop from a scrollable area:

The list box object method contains the following code:

Case of
:(Form event=On Drag Over)
DRAG AND DROP PROPERTIES($source;$arrayrow;$processnum)
If ($source=Get pointer("SA1")) `If the drop does come from the scrollable area
$0:=0
Else
$0:=-1 `The drop is refused
End if

4D Language Reference 583

 :(Form event=On Drop)
DRAG AND DROP PROPERTIES($source;$arrayrow;$processnum)
$rownum:=Drop position($colnum)
If ($colnum=1)
BEEP
Else
Case of `Adding of dropped values
: ($colnum=2)
John{$rownum}:=John{$rownum}+SA1{$arrayrow}
: ($colnum=3)
Mark{$rownum}:=Mark{$rownum}+SA1{$arrayrow}
: ($colnum=4)
Peter{$rownum}:=Peter{$rownum}+SA1{$arrayrow}
End case
DELETE FROM ARRAY(SA1;$arrayrow) `Updating of area
End if
End case

See Also
Drag and Drop, DRAG AND DROP PROPERTIES.

584 4D Language Reference

15
______________________
Entry Control

4D Language Reference 585

586 4D Language Reference
ACCEPT Entry Control

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

ACCEPT

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
The ACCEPT command is used in form or object methods (or in subroutines) to:
• accept a new or modified record or subrecord, for which data entry has been initiated using
ADD RECORD, MODIFY RECORD, ADD SUBRECORD, or MODIFY SUBRECORD.
• accept a form displayed with the DIALOG command.
• exit a form displaying a selection of records, using DISPLAY SELECTION or MODIFY
SELECTION.

ACCEPT performs the same action as if a user had pressed the Enter key. After the form is
accepted, the OK system variable is set to 1.

ACCEPT is commonly executed as a result of choosing a menu command. ACCEPT is also

commonly used in the object method of a “no action” button.

It is also often used in the optional close box method for the Open window command. If there
is a Control-menu box on a window, ACCEPT or CANCEL can be called, in the method to be
executed, when the Control-menu box is double-clicked or the Close menu command is
chosen.

ACCEPT cannot be queued up. In response to an event, executing two ACCEPT commands in a
row from within a method would have the same effect as executing one.

See Also
CANCEL.

4D Language Reference 587

CANCEL Entry Control

version 2003 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

CANCEL

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
The CANCEL command is used in form or object methods (or in a subroutine) to:
• cancel a new or modified record or subrecord, for which data entry has been initiated using
ADD RECORD, MODIFY RECORD, ADD SUBRECORD, or MODIFY SUBRECORD.
• cancel a form displayed with the DIALOG command.
• exit a form displaying a selection of records, using DISPLAY SELECTION or MODIFY SELECTION.
• cancel the printing of a form that is about to be printed using the Print form command (see
below).

In the context of data entry, CANCEL performs the same action as if the user had pressed the
cancel key (Esc).

CANCEL is commonly executed as a result of a menu command being chosen. CANCEL is also
commonly used in the object method of a “no action” button.

It is also often used in the optional close box method for the Open window command. If there
is a Control-menu box on a window, ACCEPT or CANCEL can be called, in the method to be
executed, when the Control-menu box is double-clicked or the Close menu command is
chosen.

CANCEL cannot be queued up. Executing two CANCEL commands in a row from within a
method in response to an event would have the same effect as executing only one.

Finally, this command can be used in the On Printing Detail form event, when using the Print
form command. In this context, the CANCEL command suspends the printing of the form that
is about to be printed, then resumes it on the next page. This mechanism can be used to
manage form printing when there is a lack of space or if a page break is required.

Note: This operation differs from that of the PAGE BREAK(*) command that cancels ALL the
forms waiting to be printed.

588 4D Language Reference

Example
Refer to the example of the SET PRINT MARKER.

See Also
ACCEPT, PAGE BREAK, Print form.

System Variables and Sets

When the CANCEL command is executed (form or printing cancelled), the system variable OK
is set to 0.

4D Language Reference 589

EDIT ITEM Entry Control

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

EDIT ITEM ({*; }object{; item})

Parameter Type Description

* * → If set, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a table or variable
object Form object → Object name (if * set) or
Table or variable (if * omitted)
item Number → Item number

Description
The EDIT ITEM command allows you to edit the current item or the item number item in
the array or the list set in the object parameter.
This means that the selected item can be modified; entering a character entirely replaces
the item content.

If you pass the optional * parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is an object
name (in this case, pass a string in object). If you do not pass the parameter, you indicate
that the object parameter is a table or a variable. In this case, you do not pass a string but a
table or a variable reference.

This command applies to the following enterable objects:

• Hierarchical lists
• List boxes
• Subforms (in this case, only an object name — the subform — can be passed in object),
• List forms displayed using the MODIFY SELECTION or DISPLAY SELECTION commands.

If the command is used with an enterable object that is not a list, it then acts the same as
the GOTO AREA command.
The command does nothing if the list or the array is empty or invisible. Also, if the list or
the array is not enterable, the command only selects the specified item without changing
to editing mode. Regarding list boxes, if the column does not allow text entry (entry by
check boxes or drop-down lists only), the specified element gets the focus.

The optional item parameter allows you to set the position of the item (hierarchical list) or
the row number (list box, list forms and subform in “multiple selection” mode) to change
to editing mode. If you do not pass this parameter, the command is applied to the current
item for object. If there is no current item, the first item of object changes to editing mode.

Note: In subforms and list forms, the command changes the first field of a specified row to
edit mode, in the order of entry.

590 4D Language Reference

Examples
1. This command can be particularly useful when creating a new item in a hierarchical list.
When the command is called, the last item added or inserted in the list automatically
becomes editable without the user having to do anything.
The following code may be the method of a button that allows you to insert a new item in
an existing list. The default text “New_item” is automatically ready to be changed:

vlUniqueRef:=vlUniqueRef+1
INSERT IN LIST(hList;*;"New_item";vlUniqueRef)
EDIT ITEM(*;"MyList")

2. Given two columns in a list box whose variable names are “Array1” and “Array2”
respectively. The following example inserts a new item in the two arrays and passes the
new item of Array2 into editing mode:

$vlRowNum:=Size of array(Array1)+1
INSERT LISTBOX ROW(*;"MyListBox";$vlRowNum)
Array1{$vlRowNum}:="New value 1"
Array2{$vlRowNum}:="New value 2"
EDIT ITEM(Array2;$vlRowNum)

3. The following example allows changing the first field of the last subrecord in the
subselection to editing mode:

LAST SUBRECORD([Children])
EDIT ITEM(*;"Subform")

See Also
GOTO AREA, INSERT IN LIST, SET LIST ITEM.

4D Language Reference 591

FILTER KEYSTROKE Entry Control

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

FILTER KEYSTROKE (filteredChar)

Parameter Type Description

filteredChar String → Filtered keystroke character or
Empty string to cancel the keystroke

Description
FILTER KEYSTROKE enables you to replace the character entered by the user into a field or an
enterable area with the first character of the string filteredChar you pass.

If you pass an empty string, the keystroke is cancelled and ignored.

Usually, you will call FILTER KEYSTROKE within a form or object method while handling an On
Before Keystroke form event. To detect keystroke events, use the command Form event. To
obtain the actual keystroke, use the command Keystroke.

IMPORTANT NOTE: The command FILTER KEYSTROKE allows you to cancel or replace the
character entered by the user with another character. On the other hand, if you want to insert
more than one character for a specific keystroke, remember that the text you see on the screen
is NOT YET the value of the data source field or variable for the area being edited. The data
source field or variable is assigned the entered value after the data entry for the area is
validated. It is therefore up to you to “shadow” the data entry into a variable and then to work
with this shadow value and reassign the enterable area (see the example in this section).

You will use the command FILTER KEYSTROKE for:

• Filtering characters in a customized way
• Filtering data entry in a way that you cannot produce using data entry filters
• Implement dynamic lookup or type-ahead areas

WARNING: If you call the command Keystroke after calling FILTER KEYSTROKE, the character
you pass to this command is returned instead of the character actually entered.

592 4D Language Reference

Examples
1. Using the following code:
` myObject enterable area object method
Case of
: (Form event=On Load )
myObject:=""
: (Form event=On Before Keystroke )
If(Position(Keystroke;"0123456789")>0)
FILTER KEYSTROKE("*")
End if
End case

All the digits entered in the area myObject are transformed into star characters.

2. This code implements the behavior of a Password enterable area in which all the entered
characters are replaced (on the screen) by random characters:
` vsPassword enterable area object method
Case of
: (Form event=On Load )
vsPassword:=""
vsActualPassword:=""
: (Form event=On Before Keystroke )
Handle keystroke (->vsPassword;->vsActualPassword)
If (Position(Keystroke;Char(Backspace )+Char(Left Arrow Key )+
Char(Right Arrow Key )+Char(Up Arrow Key )+Char(Down Arrow Key ))=0)
FILTER KEYSTROKE(Char(65+(Random%26)))
End if
End case

After the data entry is validated, you retrieve the actual password entered by the user in the
variable vsActualPassword. Note: The method Handle keystroke is listed in the Example section
for the command Keystroke.

3. In your application, you have some text areas into which you can enter a few sentences.
Your application also includes a dictionary table of terms commonly used throughout your
database. While editing your text areas, you would like to be able to quickly retrieve and insert
dictionary entries based on the selected characters in a text area. You have two ways to do this:
- Provide some buttons with associated keys, or
- Intercept special keystrokes during the editing of the text area

4D Language Reference 593

This example implements the second solution, based on the Help key.

As explained above, during the editing of the text area, the data source for this area will be
assigned the entered value after you validate the data entry. In order to retrieve and insert
dictionary entries into the text area while this area is being edited, you therefore need to
shadow the data entry. You pass pointers to the enterable area and the shadow variable as the
first two parameters, and you pass a string of the “forbidden” characters as the third
parameter. No matter how the keystroke will be treated, the method returns the original
keystroke. The “forbidden” characters are those that you do not want to be inserted into the
enterable area and you want to treat as special characters.

` Shadow keystroke project method

` Shadow keystroke ( Pointer ; Pointer ; String ) -> String
` Shadow keystroke ( -> srcArea ; -> curValue ; Filter ) -> Old keystroke
C_STRING(1;$0)
C_POINTER($1;$2)
C_TEXT($vtNewValue)
C_STRING(255;$3)
` Return the original keystroke
$0:=Keystroke
` Get the text selection range within the enterable area
GET HIGHLIGHT($1->;$vlStart;$vlEnd)
` Start working with the current value
$vtNewValue:=$2->
` Depending on the key pressed or the character entered,
` Perform the appropriate actions
Case of
` The Backspace (Delete) key has been pressed
: (Character code ($0)=Backspace )
` Delete the selected characters or the character at the left of the text cursor
$vtNewValue:=Delete text ($vtNewValue;$vlStart;$vlEnd)
` An Arrow key has been pressed
` Do nothing, but accept the keystroke
: (Character code($0)=Left Arrow Key )
: (Character code($0)=Right Arrow Key )
: (Character code($0)=Up Arrow Key )
: (Character code($0)=Down Arrow Key )

594 4D Language Reference

 ` An acceptable character has been entered
: (Position($0;$3)=0)
$vtNewValue:=Insert text ($vtNewValue;$vlStart;$vlEnd;$0)
Else
` The character is not accepted
FILTER KEYSTROKE("")
End case
` Return the value for the next keystroke handling
$2->:=$vtNewValue

This method uses the two following submethods:

` Delete text project method
` Delete text ( String ; Long ; Long ) -> String
` Delete text ( -> Text ; SelStart ; SelEnd ) -> New text
C_TEXT($0;$1)
C_LONGINT($2;$3)
$0:=Substring($1;1;$2-1-Num($2=$3))+Substring($1;$3)

` Insert text project method

` Insert text ( String ; Long ; Long ; String ) -> String
` Insert text ( -> srcText ; SelStart ; SelEnd ; Text to insert ) -> New text
C_TEXT($0;$1;$4)
C_LONGINT($2;$3)
$0:=$1
If ($2#$3)
$0:=Substring($0;1;$2-1)+$4+Substring($0;$3)
Else
Case of
: ($2<=1)
$0:=$4+$0
: ($2>Length($0))
$0:=$0+$4
Else
$0:=Substring($0;1;$2-1)+$4+Substring($0;$2)
End case
End if

4D Language Reference 595

After you have added these project methods to your project, you can use them in this way:
` vsDescription enterable area object method
Case of
: (Form event=On Load )
vsDescription:=""
vsShadowDescription:=""
` Establish the list of the “forbidden” characters to be treated as special keys
` ( here, in this example, only the Help Key is filtered)
vsSpecialKeys:=Char(HelpKey)
: (Form event=On Before Keystroke )
$vsKey:=Shadow keystroke (->vsDescription;->vsShadowDescription;vsSpecialKeys)
Case of
: (Character code($vsKey)=Help Key )
` Do something when the Help key is pressed
` Here, in this example, a Dictionary entry must be searched
` and inserted
LOOKUP DICTIONARY (->vsDescription;->vsShadowDescription)
End case
End case

The LOOKUP DICTIONARY project method is listed below. Its purpose is to use the shadow
variable for reassigning the enterable area being edited:
` LOOKUP DICTIONARY project method
` LOOKUP DICTIONARY ( Pointer ; Pointer )
` LOOKUP DICTIONARY ( -> Enterable Area ; ->ShadowVariable )

C_POINTER($1;$2)
C_LONGINT($vlStart;$vlEnd)

` Get the text selection range within the enterable area

GET HIGHLIGHT($1->;$vlStart;$vlEnd)
` Get the selected text or the word on the left of the text cursor
$vtHighlightedText:=Get highlighted text ($2->;$vlStart;$vlEnd)
` Is there something to look for?
If ($vtHighlightedText#"")
` If the text selection was the text cursor,
` the selection now starts at the word preceeding the text cursor
If ($vlStart=$vlEnd)
$vlStart:=$vlStart-Length($vtHighlightedText)
End if

596 4D Language Reference

 ` Look for the first avaliable dictionary entry
QUERY([Dictionary];[Dictionary]Entry=$vtHighlightedText+"@")
` Is there one?
If (Records in selection([Dictionary])>0)
` If so, insert it in the shadow text
$2->:=Insert text ($2->;$vlStart;$vlEnd;[Dictionary]Entry)
` Copy the shadow text to the enterable being edited
$1->:=$2->
` Set the selection just after the insert dictionary entry
$vlEnd:=$vlStart+Length([Dictionary]Entry)
HIGHLIGHT TEXT(vsComments;$vlEnd;$vlEnd)
Else
` There is no corresponding entry in the Dictionary
BEEP
End if
Else
` There is no highlighted text
BEEP
End if

The Get highlighted text method is listed here:

` Get highlighted text project method
` Get highlighted text ( String ; Long ; Long ) -> String
` Get highlighted text ( Text ; SelStart ; SelEnd ) -> highlighted text
C_TEXT($0;$1)
C_LONGINT($2;$3)
If ($2<$3)
$0:=Substring($1;$2;$3-$2)
Else
$0:=""
$2:=$2-1
Repeat

4D Language Reference 597

 If ($2>0)
If (Position($1[[$2]];"  ,.!?:;()-_–—")=0)
$0:=$1[[$2]]+$0
$2:=$2-1
Else
$2:=0
End if
End if

Until ($2=0)
End if

See Also
Form event, Get edited text, Keystroke.

598 4D Language Reference

GOTO AREA Entry Control

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GOTO AREA ({*; }object)

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified = object is an object name (string)
If omitted = object is a field or a variable
object Field | Variable → Object name (if * specified) or
Field or Variable (if * omitted) to go to

Description
The GOTO AREA command is used to select the data entry object object as the active area of the
form. It is equivalent to the user’s clicking on or tabbing into the field or variable.

If you specify the optional * parameter, you indicate an object name (a string) in object. If you
omit the optional * parameter, you indicate a field or a variable in object. In this case, specify a
field or variable reference (field or variable objects only) instead of a string. For more
information about object names, see the section Object Properties.

To remove any focus in the current form, call the command while passing an empty object
name in object (see example 2).

Note: This command only functions in input forms. It has no effect on data entry areas
located in subform List forms.

Examples
1. The GOTO AREA command can be used in both ways:

GOTO AREA ([People]Name) ` Field Reference

GOTO AREA (*;"AgeArea") ` Object Name

2. You don't want any object of the form to have the focus:

GOTO AREA (*;"")

3. See the example for the command REJECT.

See Also
REJECT.

4D Language Reference 599

Keystroke Entry Control

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Keystroke → String

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result String ← Character entered by user

Description
Keystroke returns the character entered by the user into a field or an enterable area.

Usually, you will call Keystroke within a form or object method while handling an On Before
Keystroke event form. To detect keystroke events, use the command Form event.

To replace the character actually entered by the user with another character, use the command
FILTER KEYSTROKE.

Note: The Keystroke function does not work in subforms.

IMPORTANT NOTE: If you want to perform some “on the fly” operations depending on the
current value of the enterable area being edited, as well as the new character to be entered,
remember that the text you see on screen is NOT YET the value of the data source field or
variable for the area being edited. The data source field or variable is assigned the entered
value after the data entry for the area is validated (e.g., tabulation to another area, click on a
button, and so on). It is therefore up to you to “shadow” the data entry into a variable and
then to work with this shadow value. You must do so if you need to know the current text
value for executing any particular actions. You can also use the function Get edited text.

You will use the command Keystroke for:

• Filtering characters in a customized way
• Filtering data entry in a way that you cannot produce using data entry filters
• Implement dynamic lookup or type-ahead areas

600 4D Language Reference

Examples
1. See examples for the command FILTER KEYSTROKE.

2. When you process an On Before Keystroke event, you are dealing with the editing of the
current text area (the one where the cursor is), not with the “future value” of the data source
(field or variable) for this area. The Handle keystroke project method allows to shadow any text
area data entry into a second variable, which you can use to perform the actions while
entering characters into the area. You pass a pointer to the area’s data source as the first
parameter and a pointer to the shadow variable as second parameter. The method returns the
new value of the text area in the shadow variable, and returns True if the value is different
from it what was before the last entered character was inserted.
` Handle keystroke project method
` Handle keystroke ( Pointer ; Pointer ) -> Boolean
` Handle keystroke ( -> srcArea ; -> curValue ) -> Is new value

C_POINTER ($1;$2)
C_TEXT ($vtNewValue)

` Get the text selection range within the enterable area

GET HIGHLIGHT ($1->;$vlStart;$vlEnd)
` Start working with the current value
$vtNewValue:=$2->
` Depending on the key pressed or the character entered,
` Perform the appropriate actions
Case of

` The Backspace (Delete) key has been pressed

: (Character code (Keystroke)=Backspace )
` Delete the selected characters or the character at the left of the text cursor
$vtNewValue:=Substring ($vtNewValue;1;$vlStart-1-Num($vlStart=$vlEnd))
+Substring($vtNewValue;$vlEnd)

` An acceptable character has been entered

: (Position (Keystroke;"abcdefghjiklmnopqrstuvwxyz -0123456789")>0)
If ($vlStart#$vlEnd)
` One or several characters are selected, the keystroke is going to
` override them
$vtNewValue:=Substring($vtNewValue;1;$vlStart-1)
+Keystroke+Substring($vtNewValue;$vlEnd)
Else

4D Language Reference 601

 ` The text selection is the text cursor
Case of
` The text cursor is currently at the begining of the text
: ($vlStart<=1)
` Insert the character at the begining of the text
$vtNewValue:=Keystroke+$vtNewValue
` The text cursor is currently at the end of the text
: ($vlStart>=Length($vtNewValue))
` Append the character at the end of the text
$vtNewValue:=$vtNewValue+Keystroke
Else
` The text cursor is somewhere in the text, insert the new character
$vtNewValue:=Substring($vtNewValue;1;$vlStart-1)+Keystroke
+Substring($vtNewValue;$vlStart)
End case
End if

` An Arrow key has been pressed

` Do nothing, but accept the keystroke
: (Character code(Keystroke)=Left Arrow Key )
: (Character code(Keystroke)=Right Arrow Key )
: (Character code(Keystroke)=Up Arrow Key )
: (Character code(Keystroke)=Down Arrow Key )
`
Else
` Do not accept characters other than letters, digits, space and dash
FILTER KEYSTROKE ("")
End case
` Is the value now different?
$0:=($vtNewValue#$2->)
` Return the value for the next keystroke handling
$2->:=$vtNewValue

After this project method is added to your application, you can use it as follows:
` myObject enterable area object method
Case of
: (Form event=On Load)
MyObject:=""
MyShadowObject:=""

602 4D Language Reference

 : (Form event=On Before Keystroke)
If (Handle keystroke (->MyObject;->MyShadowObject))
` Perform appropriate actions using the value stored in MyShadowObject
End if
End case

Let’s examine the following part of a form:

It is composed of the following objects: an enterable area vsLookup, a non-enterable area

vsMessage, and a scrollable area asLookup. While entering characters in vsLookup, the method
for that object performs a query on a [US Zip Codes] table, allowing the user to find US cities
by typing only the first characters of the city names.

The vsLookup object method is listed here:

` vsLookup enterable area object method
Case of
: (Form event=On Load )
vsLookup:=""
vsResult:=""
vsMessage:="Enter the first characters of the city you are looking for."
CLEAR VARIABLE(asLookup)

4D Language Reference 603

 : (Form event=On Before Keystroke )
If (Handle keystroke (->vsLookup;->vsResult))
If (vsResult#"")
QUERY([US Zip Codes];[US Zip Codes]City=vsResult+"@")
MESSAGES OFF
DISTINCT VALUES([US Zip Codes]City;asLookup)
MESSAGES ON
$vlResult:=Size of array(asLookup)
Case of
: ($vlResult=0)
vsMessage:="No city found."
: ($vlResult=1)
vsMessage:="One city found."
Else
vsMessage:=String($vlResult)+" cities found."
End case
Else
DELETE FROM ARRAY(asLookup;1;Size of array(asLookup))
vsMessage:="Enter the first characters of the city you are looking for."
End if
End if
End case

Here is the form being executed:

604 4D Language Reference

Using the interprocess communication capabilities of 4D, you can similarily build user
interfaces in which Lookup features are provided in floating windows that communicate with
processes in which records are listed or edited.

See Also
FILTER KEYSTROKE, Form event, Get edited text.

4D Language Reference 605

REJECT Entry Control

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

REJECT {(aField)}

Parameter Type Description

aField Field → Field to reject

Description
REJECT has two forms. The first form has no parameters. It rejects the entire data entry and
forces the user to stay in the form. The second form rejects only the aField and forces the user
to stay in the field.

Note: You should consider the built-in data validation tools before using this command.

The first form of REJECT prevents the user from accepting a record that is not complete. You
can achieve the same result without using REJECT—you associate the Enter key with a No
Action button and use the ACCEPT and CANCEL commands to accept or cancel the record,
after the fields have been entered correctly. It is recommended that you use this second
technique and do not use the first form of REJECT.

If you use the first form, you execute REJECT to prevent the user from accepting a record,
usually because the record is not complete or has inaccurate entries. If the user tries to accept
the record, executing REJECT prevents the record from being accepted; the record remains
displayed in the form. The user must continue with data entry until the record is acceptable,
or cancel the record.

The best place to put this form of REJECT is in the object method of an Accept button
associated with the Enter key. This way, validation occurs only when the record is accepted,
and the user cannot bypass the validation by pressing the Enter key.

The second form of REJECT is executed with the field parameter. The cursor stays in the field
area. This form of REJECT forces the user to enter a correct value. It must be used immediately
following a modification to the field. You can test for modification by using the Modified
function. You can also use REJECT in the object method for the data entry area. This command
has no effect on fields in subform areas.

606 4D Language Reference

You must put either form of the REJECT command in the form method or object method for
the form that is being modified. If you are using REJECT for the subform’s Detail Form for a
table, put it in the form method or object method for the Detail Form.

You can use HIGHLIGHT TEXT to select the data in the field that is being rejected.

Examples
1. The following example is for a bank transaction record. It shows the first form of REJECT
being used in an Accept button object method. The Enter key is set as an equivalent for the
button. This means that even if the user presses the Enter key to accept the record, the
button’s object method will be executed. If the transaction is a check, then there must be a
check number. If there is no check number, the validation is rejected:

Case of
` If it is a check with no number...
: (([Operation]Transaction="Check") & ([Operation]Check Number = ""))
ALERT ("Please fill in the check number.") ` Alert the user
REJECT ` Reject the entry
GOTO AREA ([Operation]Check Number) ` Go to the check number field
End case

2. The following example is part of an object method for an [Employees]Salary field. The object
method tests the [Employees]Salary field and rejects the field if it is less than $10,000. You
could perform the same operation by specifying a minimum value for the field in the form
editor:

If ([Employees]Salary<10000)
ALERT ("Salary must be greater than $10,000")
REJECT ([Employees]Salary)
End if

See Also
ACCEPT, CANCEL, GOTO AREA.

4D Language Reference 607

608 4D Language Reference
16
______________________
Form Events

4D Language Reference 609

610 4D Language Reference
Activated Form Events

version 3
Compatibility Note
This command has been kept for compatibility reasons. Starting with version 6, you should
consider using the command Form event and checking if it returns an On Activate event.

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Activated → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Boolean ← Returns TRUE if the execution cycle is an activation

Description
The Activated command returns TRUE in a form method when the window containing the
form becomes the frontmost window of the frontmost process.

WARNING: Do not place a command such as TRACE or ALERT in the Activated phase of the
form, as this will cause an endless loop.

Note: In order for the Activated execution cycle to be generated, make sure that the On Activate
event property of the form has been selected in the Design environment. This is done
automatically when a database is converted.

See Also
Deactivated, Form event.

4D Language Reference 611

After Form Events

version 3
Compatibility Note
This command has been kept for compatibility reasons. Starting with version 6, you should
consider using the command Form event and checking if it returns an On Validate event.

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

After → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
In order for the After execution cycle to be generated, make sure that the On Validate event
property for the form and/or the objects has been selected in the Design environment.

See Also
Form event.

612 4D Language Reference

Before Form Events

version 3
Compatibility Note
This command has been kept in 4D for compatibility reasons. Starting with version 6, you
should consider using the command Form event and checking if it returns an On Load event.

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Before → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
In order for the Before execution cycle to be generated, make sure that the On Load event
property for the form and/or the objects has been selected in the Design environment.

See Also
Form event.

4D Language Reference 613

Contextual click Form Events

version 6.8.1
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Contextual click → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Boolean ← True if a contextual click was detected,

otherwise False

Description
The Contextual click command returns True if a contextual click has been made:
• Under Windows and Mac OS, contextual clicks are made using the right button of the
mouse.
• Under Mac OS, contextual clicks can also be made using a Control+click combination.

This command should be used only in the context of the On clicked form event. It is therefore
necessary to verify in Design mode that the event has been properly selected in the Form
properties and/or in the specific object.

Example
This method, combined with a scrollable area, enables you to change the value of an array
element using a contextual menu:

If(Contextual click)
If (Pop up menu("True;False")=1)
myArray{myArray}:="True"
Else
myArray{myArray}:="False"
End if
End if

See Also
Form event, Right click.

614 4D Language Reference

Deactivated Form Events

version 3

Compatibility Note
This command has been kept for compatibility reasons. Starting with version 6, you should
consider using the command Form event and checking if it returns an On Deactivate event.

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Deactivated → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Boolean ← Returns TRUE if the execution cycle is a deactivation

Description
The Deactivated command returns TRUE in a form or object method when the frontmost
window of the frontmost process, containing the form, moves to the back.

In order for the Deactivated execution cycle to be generated, make sure that the On Deactivate
event property of the form and/or the objects has been selected in Design environment.

See Also
Activated, Form event.

4D Language Reference 615

During Form Events

version 3
Compatibility Note
This command has been kept for compatibility reasons. Starting with version 6, you should
consider using the command Form event and checking if it returns an event such as On Clicked.

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

During → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
In order for the During execution cycle to be generated, make sure that the appropriate event
properties, such as On Clicked, for the form and/or the objects have been selected in the
Design environment.

See Also
Form event.

616 4D Language Reference

Form event Form Events

version 11.2 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Form event → Number

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Number ← Form event number

Description
Form event returns a numeric value identifying the type of form event that has just occurred.
Usually, you will use Form event from within a form or object method.

4D provides predefined constants (found in the “Form Events” theme) in order to compare the
values returned by the Form event command.

Certain events are generic (generated for any type of object) and others are specific to a
particular type of object.

Generic events
The following events can be generated for any form or object:

Constant Value Description

On Load 1 The form is about to be displayed or printed
On Unload 24 The form is about to be exited and released
On Validate 3 The record data entry has been validated
On Clicked 4 A click occurred on an object
On Double Clicked 13 A double click occurred on an object
On Before Keystroke 17 A character is about to be entered in the object that has the focus
Get edited text returns the object's text without this character
On After Keystroke 28 A character is about to be entered in the object that has the focus
Get edited text returns the object's text including this character
On After Edit 45 The contents of the enterable object that has the focus has just
been modified
On Getting Focus 15 A form object is getting the focus
On Losing Focus 14 A form object is losing the focus
On Activate 11 The form’s window becomes the frontmost window
On Deactivate 12 The form’s window ceases to be the frontmost window

4D Language Reference 617

On Outside Call 10 The form received a CALL PROCESS call
On Drop 16 Data has been dropped onto an object
On Drag Over 21 Data could be dropped onto an object
On Begin Drag Over 46 An object is being dragged
On Mouse Enter 35 The mouse cursor enters the graphic area of an object
On Mouse Move 37 The mouse cursor moves (at least one pixel) within the
graphic area of an object
On Mouse Leave 36 The mouse cursor leaves the graphic area of an object
On Menu Selected 18 A menu item has been chosen
On Data Change 20 Object data has been modified
On Plug in Area 19 An external object requested its object method to be executed
On Header 5 The form’s header area is about to be printed or displayed
On Printing Detail 23 The form’s detail area is about to be printed
On Printing Break 6 One of the form’s break areas is about to be printed
On Printing Footer 7 The form’s footer area is about to be printed
On Close Box 22 The window’s close box has been clicked
On Display Detail 8 A record is about to be displayed in a list
On Open Detail 25 A record is double clicked and you are going to the input form
On Close Detail 26 You left the input form and are going back to the output form
On Selection Change 31 • List box: the current selection of rows or columns is modified
• Records in list: the current record or the current selection of
rows is modified in a list form or subform
• Hierarchical list: the selection in the list is modified following
a click or a keystroke
On Load Record 40 During entry in list, a record is loaded during modification
(the user clicks on a record line and a field changes to editing
mode)
On Timer 27 The number of ticks defined by the SET TIMER command has
passed
On Resize 29 The form window is resized

List box
The following events are only generated for List boxes:
Constant Value Description
On Before Data Entry 41 A list box cell is about to change to editing mode
On Column Moved 32 A list box column is moved by the user via drag and drop
On Row Moved 34 A list box row is moved by the user via drag and drop
On Column Resize 33 The width of a list box column is modified
On Header Click 42 A click occurs in a column header of the list box
On After Sort 30 A standard sort has just been carried out in a list box column

618 4D Language Reference

3D buttons
The following events are only generated for 3D buttons:
Constant Value Description
On Long Click 39 A 3D button is clicked and the mouse button remains pushed
for a certain lapse of time
On Arrow Click 38 The “arrow” area of a 3D button is clicked

Hierarchical lists
The following events are only generated for hierarchical lists:
Constant Value Description
On Expand 43 An element of the hierarchical list has been expanded using a
click or a keystroke
On Collapse 44 An element of the hierarchical list has been collapsed using a
click or a keystroke
Web Areas
The following events are only generated for Web Area type objects:
Constant Value Description
On URL Resource Loading 48 A new resource is loaded in the Web area
On Begin URL Loading 47 A new URL is loaded in the Web area
On URL Loading Error 50 An error occurred when the URL was loading
On URL Filtering 51 A URL was blocked by the Web area
On End URL Loading 49 All the resources of the URL have been loaded
On Open External Link 52 An external URL has been opened in the browser
On Window Opening Denied 53 A pop-up window has been blocked

Note: The events specific to output forms cannot be used with project forms. This includes:
On Display Detail, On Open Detail, On Close Detail, On Load Record, On Header, On Printing
Detail, On Printing Break, On Printing Footer.

Events and Methods

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

When a form event occurs, 4D performs the following actions:

• First, it browses the objects of the form and calls the object method for any object (involved
in the event) whose corresponding object event property has been selected.
• Second, it calls the form method if the corresponding form event property has been selected.

4D Language Reference 619

Do not assume that the object methods, if any, will be called in a particular order. The rule of
thumb is that the object methods are always called before the form method. If an object is a
subform, the object methods of the subform’s list form are called, then the form method of
the list form is called. 4D then continues to call the object methods of the parent form. In
other words, when an object is a subform, 4D uses the same rule of thumb for the object and
form methods within the subform object.

Except for the On Load and On Unload events, if the form event property is not selected for a
given event, this does not prevent calls to object methods for the objects whose same event
property is selected. In other words, enabling or disabling an event at the form level has no
effect on the object event properties.

The number of objects involved in an event depends on the nature of the event:
• On Load event - All the objects of the form (from any page) whose On Load object event
property is selected will have their object method called. Then, if the On Load form event
property is selected, the form will have its form method called.
• On Activate or On Resize event - No object method will be called, because this event applies
to the form as a whole and not to a particular object. Consequently, if the On Activate form
event property is selected, only the form will have its form method called.
• On Timer event - This event is generated only if the form method contains a previous call to
the SET TIMER command. If the On Timer form event property is selected, only the form
method will receive the event, no object method will be called.
• On Drag Over event - Only the droppable object involved in the event will have its object
method called if the "Droppable" event property is selected for it. The form method will not be
called.
• Conversely, for the On Begin Drag Over event, the object method or form method of the
object being dragged will be called (if the "Draggable" event property is selected for the it).

WARNING: Unlike all other events, during a On Begin Drag Over or On Drag over event, the
method called is executed in the context of the process of the drag and drop source object, not
in that of the drag and drop destination object. For more information, see the Drag and Drop
section.
• If the On Mouse Enter, On Mouse Move and On Mouse Leave events have been checked for
the form, they are generated for each form object. If they are checked for an object, they are
generated only for that object. When there are superimposed objects, the event is generated by
the first object capable of managing it that is found going in order from top level to bottom.
Objects that are made invisible using the SET VISIBLE command do not generate these events.
During object entry, other objects may receive these type of events depending on the position
of the mouse.

620 4D Language Reference

• Records in list: The sequence of calls to methods and form events in the list forms displayed
via MODIFY SELECTION / DISPLAY SELECTION and the subforms is as follows:
For each object in the header area:
Object method with On Header event
Form method with On Header event
For each record:
For each object in the detail area:
Object method with On Display Detail event
Form method with On Display Detail event
Calling a 4D command that displays a dialog box from the On Display Detail and On Header
events is not allowed and will cause a syntax error to occur.
More particularly, the commands concerned are: ALERT, DIALOG, CONFIRM, Request, ADD
RECORD, MODIFY RECORD, DISPLAY SELECTION and MODIFY SELECTION.

The following table summarizes how object and form methods are called for each event type:

Event Object Methods Form Method Which Objects

On Load Yes Yes All objects

On Unload Yes Yes All objects
On Validate Yes Yes All objects
On Clicked Yes (if clickable) (*) Yes Involved object
only
On Double Clicked Yes (if clickable) (*) Yes Involved object
only
On Before Keystroke Yes (if keyboard enterable) (*) Yes Involved object
only
On After Keystroke Yes (if keyboard enterable) (*) Yes Involved object
only
On After Edit Yes (if enterable) (*) Yes Involved object
only
On Getting Focus Yes (if tabbable) (*) Yes Involved object
only
On Losing Focus Yes (if tabbable) (*) Yes Involved object
only
On Activate Never Yes None
On Deactivate Never Yes None
On Outside Call Never Yes None
On Begin Drag Over Yes (if draggable) (**) Yes Involved object
only

4D Language Reference 621

On Drop Yes (if droppable) (**) Yes Involved object
only
On Drag Over Yes (if droppable) (**) Never Involved object
only
On Mouse Enter Yes Yes All objects
On Mouse Move Yes Yes All objects
On Mouse Leave Yes Yes All objects
On Menu Selected Never Yes None
On Data Change Yes (if modifiable) (*) Yes Involved object
only
On Plug in Area Yes Yes Involved object
only
On Header Yes Yes All objects
On Printing Detail Yes Yes All objects
On Printing Break Yes Yes All objects
On Printing Footer Yes Yes All objects
On Close Box Never Yes None
On Display Detail Yes Yes All objects
On Open Detail Never Yes None
On Close Detail Never Yes None
On Resize Never Yes None
On Selection Change Yes (***) Yes Involved object
only
On Load Record Never Yes None
On Timer Never Yes None
On Before Data Entry Yes (List box) Never Involved object
only
On Column Moved Yes (List box) Never Involved object
only
On Row Moved Yes (List box) Never Involved object
only
On Column Resize Yes (List box) Never Involved object
only
On Header Click Yes (List box) Never Involved object
only
On After Sort Yes (List box) Never Involved object
only
On Long Click Yes (3D button) Yes Involved object
only
On Arrow Click Yes (3D button) Yes Involved object
only

622 4D Language Reference

On Expand Yes (Hier. list) Never Involved object
only
On Collapse Yes (Hier. list) Never Involved object
only
On URL Resource Loading Yes (Web Area) Never Involved object
only
On Begin URL Loading Yes (Web Area) Never Involved object
only
On URL Loading Error Yes (Web Area) Never Involved object
only
On URL Filtering Yes (Web Area) Never Involved object
only
On End URL Loading Yes (Web Area) Never Involved object
only
On Open External Link Yes (Web Area) Never Involved object
only
On Window Opening Denied Yes (Web Area) Never Involved object
only

(*) For more infomation, see the "Events, Objects and Properties" section below.
(**) Refer to the "Drag and Drop" section for more information.
(***) Only list box, hierarchical list and subform type objects support this event.

IMPORTANT: Always keep in mind that, for any event, the method of a form or an object is
called if the corresponding event property is selected for the form or objects. The benefit of
disabling events in the Design environment (using the Property List of the Form editor) is that
you can greatly reduce the number of calls to methods and therefore significantly optimize
the execution speed of your forms.

WARNING: The On Load and On Unload events are generated for objects if they are enabled for
both the objects and the form to which the objects belong. If the events are enabled for
objects only, they will not occur; these two events must also be enabled at the form level.

Events, Objects and Properties

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

An object method is called if the event can actually occur for the object, depending on its
nature and properties. The following section details the events you will generally use to
handle the various types of objects.
Keep in mind that the Property List of the Form editor only displays the events compatible
with the selected object or the form.

4D Language Reference 623

Clickable Objects
Clickable objects are mainly handled using the mouse. They include:
• Boolean enterable fields or variables
• Buttons, default buttons, radio buttons, check boxes, button grids
• 3D Buttons, 3D radio buttons, 3D check boxes
• Pop-up menus, hierarchical pop-up menus, picture menus
• Drop-down lists, menus/drop-down lists
• Scrollable areas, hierarchical lists, list boxes
• Invisible buttons, highlight buttons, radio pictures
• Thermometers, rulers, dials (also known as slider objects)
• Tab controls
• Splitters.

After the On Clicked or On Double Clicked object event property is selected for one of these
objects, you can detect and handle the clicks within or on the object, using the Form event
command that returns On Clicked or On Double Clicked, depending on the case.
If both events are selected for an object, the On Clicked and then the On Double Clicked events
will be generated when the user double-clicks the object.

For all these objects, the On Clicked event occurs once the mouse button is released. However,
there are several exceptions:
• Invisible buttons - The On Clicked event occurs as soon as the click is made and does not
wait for the mouse button to be released.
• Slider objects (thermometers, rulers, and dials) - If the display format indicates that the
object method must be called while you are sliding the control, the On Clicked event occurs as
soon as the click is made.

Note: Some of these objects can be activated with the keyboard. For example, once a check
box gets the focus, it can be entered using the space bar. In such a case, an On Clicked event is
still generated.

WARNING: Combo boxes are not considered to be clickable objects. A combo box must be
treated as an enterable text area whose associated drop-down list provides default values.
Consequently, you handle data entry within a combo box through the On Before Keystroke,
On After Keystroke and On Data Change events.

Keyboard Enterable Objects

Keyboard enterable objects are objects into which you enter data using the keyboard and for
which you may filter the data entry at the lowest level by detecting On After Edit, On Before
Keystroke and On After Keystroke events. You can take advantage of these events using the Get
edited text command.

624 4D Language Reference

Keyboard enterable objects and data types include:
• All enterable field objects of the alpha, text, date, time, number or (On After Edit only)
picture type
• All enterable variables of the alpha, text, date, time, number or (On After Edit only) picture
type
• Combo boxes
• List boxes.

Note: Even though they are “enterable” objects, hierarchical lists do not manage the On After
Edit, On Before Keystroke and On After Keystroke form events (see also the “Hierarchical lists”
paragraph below).

• On Before Keystroke and On After Keystroke

Note: Beginning with version 2004.2 of 4D, the On After Keystroke event can generally be
replaced by the On After Edit event (see below).

After the On Before Keystroke and On After Keystroke event properties are selected for an object,
you can detect and handle the keystrokes within the object, using the Form event command
that will return On Before Keystroke and then On After Keystroke (for more information, please
refer to the description of the Get edited text command). These events are also activated by
language commands that simulate a user action like POST KEY.
Keep in mind that user modifications that are not carried out using the keyboard (paste, drag-
drop, etc.) are not taken into account. To process these events, you must use On After Edit.
Note: The On Before Keystroke andOn After Keystroke events are not generated when using an
input method. An input method (or IME, Input Method Editor) is a program or a system
component that can be used to enter complex characters or symbols (for example, Japanese or
Chinese) using a Western keyboard.

• On After Edit
When it is used, this event is generated after each change made to the contents of an enterable
object, regardless of the action that caused the change, i.e.:
- Standard editing actions which modify content like paste, cut, delete or cancel;
- Dropping a value (action similar to paste);
- Any keyboard entry made by the user; in this case, the On After Edit event is generated after
the On Before Keystroke and On After Keystroke events, if they are used.
- Any modification made using a language command that simulates a user action (i.e., POST
KEY).
Be aware that the following actions do NOT trigger this event:
- Editing actions that do not modify the contents of the area like copy or select all;
- Dragging a value (action similar to copy);
- Any modifications made to the contents by programming, except for the commands
simulating a user action.

4D Language Reference 625

This event can be used to control user actions in order, for example, to prevent the pasting in
of text that is too long, to block certain characters or to prevent a password field from being
cut.

Modifiable Objects
Modifiable objects have a data source whose value can be changed using the mouse or the
keyboard; they are not truly considered as user interface controls handled through the On
Clicked event. They include:
• All enterable field objects (except subtables and BLOBs)
• All enterable variables (except BLOBs, pointers, and arrays)
• Combo boxes
• External objects (for which full data entry is accepted by the plug-in)
• Hierarchical lists
• List boxes.

These objects receive On Data Change events. After the On Data Change object event property
is selected for one of these objects, you can detect and handle the change of the data source
value, using the Form event command that will return On Data Change. The event is generated
as soon as the variable associated with the object is updated internally by 4D (i.e., in general,
when the entry area of the object loses the focus).

Tabbable Objects
Tabbable objects get the focus when you use the Tab key to reach them and/or click on them.
The object having the focus receives the characters (typed on the keyboard) that are not
modifiers to a menu item or to an object such as a button.
All objects are tabbable, EXCEPT the following:
• Non-enterable fields or variables
• Button grids
• 3D buttons, 3D radio buttons, 3D check boxes
• Pop-up menus, hierarchical pop-up menus
• Menus/drop-down lists
• Picture menus
• Scrollable areas
• Invisible buttons, highlight buttons, radio picture buttons
• Graphs
• External objects (for which full data entry is accepted by the 4D plug-in)
• Tab controls
• Splitters.

626 4D Language Reference

After the On Getting Focus and/or On losing Focus object event properties are selected for a
tabbable object, you can detect and handle the change of focus, using the Form event
command that will return On Getting Focus or On losing Focus, depending on the case.

3D buttons
3D buttons let you set up advanced graphic interfaces (for a description of 3D buttons, refer to
the Design Reference manual). In addition to generic events, two specific events can be used to
manage these buttons:
• On Long Click: This event is generated when a 3D button receives a click and the mouse
button is held for a certain length of time. In theory, the length of time for which this event is
generated is equal to the maximum length of time separating a double-click, as defined in the
system preferences.
This event can be generated for all styles of 3D buttons, 3D radio buttons and 3D check boxes,
with the exception of “previous generation” 3D buttons (i.e. background offset style) and
arrow areas of 3D buttons with a pop-up menu (see below).
This event is generally used to display pop-up menus in case of long button clicks. The On
Clicked event, if enabled, is generated if the user releases the mouse button before the “long
click” time limit.
• On Arrow Click: Some 3D button styles can be linked to a pop-up menu and display an arrow.
Clicking on this arrow causes a selection pop-up to appear that provides a set of additional
actions in relation to the primary button action.
4D allows you to manage this type of button using the On Arrow Click event. This event is
generated when the user clicks on the “arrow” (as soon as the mouse button is held down):
- If the pop-up menu is “separated,” the event is only generated when a click occurs on the
portion of the button with the arrow.
- If the pop-up menu is “linked,” the event is generated when a click occurs on any part of the
button. Please note that the On Long Click event cannot be generated with this type of button.

The following 3D button, 3D radio button and 3D check box styles accept the “With pop-up
menu” property: None, Toolbar button, Bevel, Rounded bevel and Office XP.

4D Language Reference 627

List boxes
Seven form events can be used to manage various specific features of list boxes:
• On Before Data Entry: This event is generated just before a cell in the list box is edited (before
the entry cursor is displayed). This event allows the developer, for example, to display a
different text depending on whether the user is in the display or edit mode.
• On Selection Change: This event is generated each time the current selection of rows or
columns of the list box is modified. This event is also generated for lists of records and
hierarchical lists.
• On Column Moved: This event is generated when a column of the list box is moved by the
user using drag and drop. It is not generated if the column is dragged and then dropped in its
initial location. The MOVED LISTBOX COLUMN NUMBER command returns the new position of
the column.
• On Row Moved: This event is generated when a row of the list box is moved by the user
using drag and drop. It is not generated if the row is dragged and then dropped in its initial
location.
• On Column Resize: This event is generated when the width of a column in the list box is
modified (using the mouse or by programming using the SET LISTBOX COLUMN WIDTH
command).
• On Header Click: This event is generated when a click occurs on the header of a column in
the list box. In this case, the Self command lets you find out the header of the column that
was clicked. The On Clicked event is generated when a right click (Windows) or Ctrl+click (Mac
OS) occurs on a column or column header.
If the Sortable property was checked in the list box, you can decide whether or not to
authorize a standard sort of the column by passing the value 0 or -1 in the $0 variable:
- If $0 equals 0, a standard sort is performed.
- If $0 equals -1, a standard sort is not performed and the header does not display the sort
arrow. The developer can still generate a column sort based on customized sort criteria using
the 4D array management commands.
If the Sortable property is not selected for the list box, the $0 variable is not used.
• On After Sort: This event is generated just after a standard sort is performed (however, it is
not generated if $0 returns -1 in the On Header Click event). This mechanism is useful for
storing the directions of the last sort performed by the user. In this event, the Self command
returns a pointer to the variable of the column that was sorted.

Hierarchical lists
In addition to generic events, three specific events can be used to handle user actions
performed on hierarchical lists:
• On Selection Change: This event is generated every time the selection in the hierarchical list
is modified after a mouse click or keystroke.

628 4D Language Reference

This event is also generated in list box objects and record lists.
• On Expand: This event is generated every time an element of the hierarchical list is expanded
with a mouse click or keystroke.
• On Collapse: This event is generated every time an element of the hierarchical list is
collapsed with a mouse click or keystroke.
These events are not mutually exclusive. They can be generated one after another for a
hierarchical list:
- Following a keystroke (in order):
Event Context
On Data Change Element was edited
On Expand/On Collapse Opening/Closing of a sublist using the -> or <-
arrow keys
On Selection Change Selection of a new element
On Clicked Activation of the list using keyboard
- Following a mouse click (in order):
Event Context
On Data Change Element was edited
On Expand/On Collapse Opening/Closing of a sublist using the expand/collapse
icons
or
Double-click on non-editable sublist
On Selection Change Selection of a new element
On Clicked / On Double Clicked Activation of the list using click or double-click

Web Areas
Seven form events are available specifically for Web areas:
• On Begin URL Loading: This event is generated at the start of loading a new URL in the Web
area. The "URL" variable associated with the Web area can be used to find out the URL being
loaded.
Note: The URL being loaded is different from the current URL (refer to the description of the
WA Get current URL command).
• On URL Resource Loading: This event is generated each time a new resource (picture, frame,
etc.) is loaded on the current Web page.
The "Progression" variable associated with the area lets you find out the current state of the
loading.
• On End URL Loading: This event is generated when all the resources of the current URL have
been loaded.
You can call the WA Get current URL command in order to find out the URL that was loaded.
• On URL Loading Error: This event is generated when an error is detected during the loading of
a URL.

4D Language Reference 629

You can call the WA GET LAST URL ERROR command in order to get information about the
error.
• On URL Filtering: This event is generated when the loading of a URL is blocked by the Web
area because of a filter set up using the WA SET URL FILTERS command.
You can find out the blocked URL using the WA Get last filtered URL command.
• On Open External Link: This event is generated when the loading of a URL was blocked by the
Web area and the URL was opened with the current system browser, because of a filter set up
via the WA SET EXTERNAL LINKS FILTERS command.
You can find out the blocked URL using the WA Get last filtered URL command.
• On Window Opening Denied: This event is generated when the opening of a pop-up window
is blocked by the Web area. 4D Web areas do not allow the opening of pop-up windows.
You can find out the blocked URL using the WA Get last filtered URL command.

Examples
In all the examples discussed here, it is assumed that the event properties of the forms and
objects have been selected appropriately.

1. This example sorts a selection of subrecords for the subtable [Parents]Children before a form
for the [Parents] table is displayed on the screen:

` Method of a form for the [Parents] table

Case of
: (Form event=On Load)
ORDER SUBRECORDS BY([Parents]Children;[Parents]Children'First name;>)
` ...
End case

2. This example shows the On Validate event being used to automatically assign (to a field) the
date that the record is modified:

` Method of a form
Case of
` ...
: (Form event=On Validate)
[aTable]Last Modified On:=Current date
End case

630 4D Language Reference

3. In this example, the complete handling of a drop-down list (initialization, user clicks, and
object release) is encapsulated in the method of the object:

` asBurgerSize Drop-down list Object Method

Case of
: (Form event=On Load)
ARRAY STRING(31;asBurgerSize;3)
asBurgerSize{1}:="Small"
asBurgerSize{1}:="Medium"
asBurgerSize{1}:="Large"
: (Form event=On Clicked)
If (asBurgerSize#0)
ALERT("You chose a "+asBurgerSize{asBurgerSize}+" burger.")
End if
: (Form event=On Unload)
CLEAR VARIABLE(asBurgerSize)
End case

4. This example shows how, in an object method, to accept and later handle a drag and drop
operation for a field object that only accepts picture values.

` [aTable]aPicture enterable picture field object method

Case of
: (Form event=On Drag Over)
` A drag-and-drop operation has started and the mouse is currently over the
` field. Get the information about the source object
DRAG AND DROP PROPERTIES ($vpSrcObject;$vlSrcElement;$lSrcProcess)
` Note that we do not need to test the source process ID number
` for the object method executed since it is in the same process
$vlDataType:=Type ($vpSrcObject->)
` Is the source data a picture (field, variable or array)?
If (($vlDataType=Is Picture) | ($vlDataType=Picture Array))
` If so, accept the drag.
$0:=0
Else
` If so, refuse the drag
$0:=-1
End if

4D Language Reference 631

 : (Form event=On Drop)
` The source data has been dropped on the object, we therefore need to copy it
` into the object
` Get the information about the source object
DRAG AND DROP PROPERTIES ($vpSrcObject;$vlSrcElement;$lSrcProcess)
$vlDataType:=Type ($vpSrcObject->)
Case of
` The source object is Picture field or variable
: ($vlDataType=Is Picture)
` Is the source object from the same process (thus from the same
` window and form)?
If ($lSrcProcess=Current process)
` If so, just copy the source value
[aTable]aPicture:=$vpSrcObject->
Else
` If not, is the source object a variable?
If (Is a variable ($vpSrcObject))
` If so, get the value from the source process
GET PROCESS VARIABLE ($lSrcProcess;$vpSrcObject->;
$vgDraggedPict)[aTable]aPicture:=$vgDraggedPict
Else
` If not, use CALL PROCESS to get the field value from the
` source process
End if
End if
` The source object is an array of pictures
: ($vlDataType=Picture Array)
` Is the source object from the same process (thus from the same
` window and form)?
If ($lSrcProcess=Current process)
` If so, just copy the source value
[aTable]aPicture:=$vpSrcObject->{$vlSrcElement}
Else
` If not, get the value from the source process
GET PROCESS VARIABLE ($lSrcProcess;$vpSrcObject
->{$vlSrcElement};$vgDraggedPict)
[aTable]aPicture:=$vgDraggedPict
End if
End case
End case

632 4D Language Reference

Note: For other examples showing how to handle On Drag Over and On Drop events, see the
examples of the DRAG AND DROP PROPERTIES command.

5. This example is a template for a form method. It shows each of the possible events that can
occur when a summary report uses a form as an output form:
` Method of a form being used as output form for a summary report
$vpFormTable:=Current form table
Case of
` ...
: (Form event=On Header)
` A header area is about to be printed
Case of
: (Before selection($vpFormTable->))
` Code for the first break header goes here
: (Level = 1)
` Code for a break header level 1 goes here
: (Level = 2)
` Code for a break header level 2 goes here
` ...
End case
: (Form event=On Printing Detail)
` A record is about to be printed
` Code for each record goes here
: (Form event=On Printing Break)
` A break area is about to be printed
Case of
: (Level = 0)
` Code for a break level 0 goes here
: (Level = 1)
` Code for a break level 1 goes here
` ...
End case
: (Form event=On Printing Footer)
If(End selection($vpFormTable->))
` Code for the last footer goes here
Else
` Code for a footer goes here
End if
End case

4D Language Reference 633

6. This example shows the template of a form method that handles the events that can occur
for a form displayed using the DISPLAY SELECTION or MODIFY SELECTION commands. For
didactic purposes, it displays the nature of the event in the title bar of the form window.

` A form method
Case of
: (Form event=On Load)
$vsTheEvent:="The form is about to be displayed"
: (Form event=On Unload)
$vsTheEvent:="The output form has been exited and is about to disappear from the
screen"
: (Form event=On Display Detail)
$vsTheEvent:="Displaying record #"+String(Selected record number([TheTable]))
: (Form event=On Menu Selected)
$vsTheEvent:="A menu item has been selected"
: (Form event=On Header")
$vsTheEvent:="The header area is about to be drawn"
: (Form event=On Clicked")
$vsTheEvent:="A record has been clicked"
: (Form event=On Double Clicked")
$vsTheEvent:="A record has been double clicked"
: (Form event=On Open Detail)
$vsTheEvent:="The record #"+String(Selected record number([TheTable]))+
" is double-clicked"
: (Form event=On Close Detail)
$vsTheEvent:="Going back to the output form"
: (Form event=On Activate)
$vsTheEvent:="The form's window has just become the frontmost window"
: (Form event=On Deactivate)
$vsTheEvent:="The form's window is no longer the frontmost window"
: (Form event=On Menu Selected)
$vsTheEvent:="A menu item has been chosen"
: (Form event=On Outside call)
$vsTheEvent:="A call from another has been received"
Else
$vsTheEvent:="What's going on? Event #"+String(Form event)
End case
SET WINDOW TITLE ($vsTheEvent)

634 4D Language Reference

7. For examples on how to handle On Before Keystroke and On After Keystroke events, see
examples for the Get edited text, Keystroke and FILTER KEYSTROKE commands.

8. This example shows how to treat clicks and double clicks in the same way in a scrollable
area:

` asChoices scrollable area object method

Case of
: (Form event=On Load)
ARRAY STRING (...;asChoices;...)
` ...
asChoices:=0
: ((Form event=On Clicked) | (Form event=On Double Clicked))
If (asChoices#0)
` An item has been clicked, do something here
` ...
End if
` ...
End case

9. This example shows how to treat clicks and double clicks using a different response. Note
the use of the element zero for keeping track of the selected element:
` asChoices scrollable area object method
Case of
: (Form event=On Load)
ARRAY STRING (...;asChoices;...)
` ...
asChoices:=0
asChoices{0}:="0"
: (Form event=On Clicked)
If (asChoices#0)
If (asChoices#Num(asChoices))
` A new item has been clicked, do something here
` ...
` Save the new selected element for the next time
asChoices{0}:=String (asChoices)
End if
Else
asChoices:=Num(asChoices{0})
End if

4D Language Reference 635

 : (Form event=On Double Clicked)
If (asChoices#0)
` An item has been double clicked, do something different here
End if
` ...
End case

10. This example shows how to maintain a status text information area from within a form
method, using the On Getting Focus and On Losing Focus events:
` [Contacts];"Data Entry" form method
Case of
: (Form Event=On Load)
C_TEXT(vtStatusArea)
vtStatusArea:=""
: (Form Event=On Getting Focus)
RESOLVE POINTER (Focus object;$vsVarName;$vlTableNum;$vlFieldNum)
If (($vlTableNum#0) & ($vlFieldNum#0))
Case of
: ($vlFieldNum=1) ` Last name field
vtStatusArea:="Enter the Last name of the Contact; it will be capitalized
automatically"
` ...
: ($vlFieldNum=10) ` Zip Code field
vtStatusArea:="Enter a 5-digit zip code; it will be checked and validated
automatically"
` ...
End case
End if
: (Form Event=On Losing Focus)
vtStatusArea:=""
` ...
End case

636 4D Language Reference

11. This example shows how to respond to a close window event with a form used for record
data entry:
` Method for an input form
$vpFormTable:=Current form table
Case of
` ...
: (Form Event=On Close Box)
If (Modified record($vpFormTable->))
CONFIRM ("This record has been modified. Save Changes?")
If (OK=1)
ACCEPT
Else
CANCEL
End if
Else
CANCEL
End if
` ...
End case

12. This example shows how to capitalize a text or alphanumeric field each time its data
source value is modified:
` [Contacts]First Name Object method
Case of
` ...
: (Form event=On Data Change)
[Contacts]First Name:= Uppercase(Substring([Contacts]First Name;1;1))+
Lowercase(Substring([Contacts]First Name;2))
` ...
End case

See Also
CALL PROCESS, Current form table, DRAG AND DROP PROPERTIES, FILTER KEYSTROKE, Get edited
text, Keystroke, SET TIMER.

4D Language Reference 637

Get edited text Form Events

version 6.5
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get edited text → Text

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Text ← Text being entered

Description
The Get edited text command is mainly to be used with the form event On After Keystroke to
retrieve the text as it is being entered. It can also be used with the On Before Keystroke form
event. For more information about those form events, please refer to the description of the
command Form event.

Note: To be in accordance with the new form event On After Keystroke (introduced in version
6.5 of 4D), the existing event On Keystroke has been renamed, and is now called On Before
Keystroke.

When used in a context other than text entry in a form object, this function returns an empty
string.

Examples
1. The following method automatically puts the characters being entered in capitals:

If (Form event=On After Keystroke)

[Trips]Agencies:=Uppercase(Get edited text)
End if

638 4D Language Reference

2. Here is an example of how to process on the fly characters entered in a text field. The idea
consists of placing in another text field (called “Words”) all the words of the sentence being
entered. To do so, write the following code in the object method of the field:

If (Form event=On After Keystroke)

$RealTimeEntry:=Get edited text
PLATFORM PROPERTIES($platform)
If ($platform#3) ` Mac OS
Repeat
$DecomposedSentence:=Replace string($RealTimeEntry;Char(32);Char(13))
Until (Position(" ";$DecomposedSentence)=0)
Else ` Windows
Repeat
$DecomposedSentence:=Replace string($RealTimeEntry;Char(32);Char(13)+
Char(10))
Until (Position(" ";$DecomposedSentence)=0)
End if
[Example]Words:=$DecomposedSentence
End if

Note: This example is not comprehensive because we have assumed that words are separated
uniquely by spaces (Char (32)). For a complete solution you will need to add other filters to
extract all the words (delimited by commas, semi-colons, apostrophes, etc.).

See Also
Form event.

4D Language Reference 639

In break Form Events

version 3
Compatibility Note
This command has been kept for compatibility reasons. Starting with version 6, you should
consider using the command Form event and checking if it returns an On Printing Break event.

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

In break → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
In order for the In break execution cycle to be generated, make sure that the On Printing Break
event property for the form and/or the objects has been selected in the Design environment.

See Also
During, In footer, In header.

640 4D Language Reference

In footer Form Events

version 3
Compatibility Note
This command has been kept for compatibility reason. Starting with version 6, you may want
to start using the command Form event and check if it returns an On Printing Footer event.

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

In footer → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
In order for the In footer execution cycle to be generated, make sure that the On Printing footer
event property for the form and/or the objects has been selected in the Design environment.

See Also
During, In break, In header.

4D Language Reference 641

In header Form Events

version 3
Compatibility Note
This command has been kept for compatibility reasons. Starting with version 6, you should
consider using the command Form event and checking if it returns an On Header event.

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

In header → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
In order for the In header execution cycle to be generated, make sure that the On Header event
property for the form and/or the objects has been selected in the Design environment.

See Also
During, In break, In footer.

642 4D Language Reference

Outside call Form Events

version 3
Compatibility Note
This command has been kept for compatibility reasons. Starting with version 6, you should
consider using the command Form event and checking if it returns an On Outside call event.

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Outside call → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
In order for the Outside call execution cycle to be generated, make sure that the On Outside call
event property for the form and/or the objects has been selected in the Design environment.

See Also
CALL PROCESS, Form event.

4D Language Reference 643

Right click Form Events

version 6.8.1
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Right click → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Boolean ← True if a right click was detected, otherwise False

Description
The Right click command returns True if the right button of the mouse has been clicked.

This command should be used only in the context of the On Clicked form event. It is therefore
necessary to verify in Design mode that the event has been properly selected in the Form
properties and/or in the specific object.

See Also
Contextual click, Form event.

644 4D Language Reference

SET TIMER Form Events

version 6.5
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET TIMER (tickCount)

Parameter Type Description

tickCount Longint → Tickcount or
-1=Trigger as soon as possible

Description
The SET TIMER command allows you to activate the On Timer form event and to set, for the
current process, the number of ticks elapsed between each On Timer form event.

Note: For more information about this new form event, please refer to the description of the
command Form event.

If this command is called in a context in which it is not displaying a form, it will have no
effect.

If you pass -1 in the tickCount parameter, the command will activate the On Timer form event
"as soon as possible", in other words, as soon as the 4D application hands over control to the
event manager. More particularly, this means that you can make sure that a form is
completely displayed before beginning processing (application fluidity).

Web server note: 4D’s Web server can take advantage of this command as well as the On Timer
form event to resend 4D forms. This feature allows you to obtain HTML pages updated in “real
time” while saving bandwidth. Actually, updating a form in this case is not automatic; you
must call the REDRAW command. You can then optimize the system by calling REDRAW only
when the data has been modified.
Only browsers that interpret JavaScript allow you to automatically redraw pages. The laps
defined by SET TIMER will be used by the browser and by the timeout of the Web process. The
laps must be a few seconds (5 being a practical value). For more information, please refer to
the second example shown below.

To procedurally disable the triggering of the On Timer form event, call SET TIMER again and
pass 0 in tickCount.

4D Language Reference 645

Examples
1. Let’s imagine that you want, when a form is displayed on screen, the computer to beep
every three seconds. To do so, write the following form method:

If (Form event=On Load)

SET TIMER(60*3)
End if

If (Form event=On Timer)

BEEP
End if

2. Let us imagine that you want your Web server to update a 4D form displayed on the Web
browser every five seconds. To do so, write the following form method:

If (Form event=On Load)

SET TIMER(60*5)
End if

If (Form event=On Timer)

... `You can place a test here to see if the data is being modified and to
`execute the following line only if this is true.
REDRAW ([MyTable])
End if

See Also
Form event, REDRAW.

646 4D Language Reference

17
______________________
Forms

4D Language Reference 647

648 4D Language Reference
Current form page Forms

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Current form page → Number

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Number ← Number of currently displayed form page

Description
The Current form page command returns the number of the currently displayed form page.

Example
In a form, when you select a menu item from the menu bar or when the form receives a call
from another process, you can perform different actions depending on the form page currently
displayed. In this example, you write:

` [myTable];"myForm" Form Method

Case of
: (Form event=On Load)
` ...
: (Form event=On Unload)
` ...
: (Form event=On Menu selected)
$vlMenuNumber:=Menu Selected >> 16
$vlItemNumber:=Menu Selected & 0xFFFF
Case of
: ($vlMenuNumber=...)
Case of
: ($vlItemNumber=...)
: (Current form page=1)
` Do appropriate action for page 1
: (Current form page=2)
` Do appropriate action for page 2
` ...

4D Language Reference 649

 : ($vlItemNumber=...)
` ...
End case
: ($vlMenuNumber=...)
` ...
End case
: (Form event=On Outside call)
Case of
: (Current form page=1)
` Do appropriate reply for page 1
: (Current form page=2)
` Do appropriate reply for page 2
End case
` ...
End case

See Also
FIRST PAGE, GOTO PAGE, LAST PAGE, NEXT PAGE, PREVIOUS PAGE.

650 4D Language Reference

FIRST PAGE Forms

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

FIRST PAGE

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
FIRST PAGE changes the currently displayed form page to the first form page. If a form is not
being displayed, or if the first form page is already displayed, FIRST PAGE does nothing.

Example
The following example is a one-line method called from a menu command. It displays the first
form page:

FIRST PAGE

See Also
Current form page, GOTO PAGE, LAST PAGE, NEXT PAGE, PREVIOUS PAGE.

4D Language Reference 651

GET FORM OBJECTS Forms

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET FORM OBJECTS (objectsArray{; variablesArray{; pagesArray}}{; *})

Parameter Type Description

objectsArray Array string ← Name of form objects
variablesArray Array pointer ← Pointers to variables or fields
associated with objects
pagesArray Array integer ← Page number of each object
* * → If passed = reduce to the current page

Description
The GET FORM OBJECTS command returns the list of all objects present in the current form
in the form of (an) array(s). This list can be restricted to the current form page. The
command can be used with both input and output forms.

If an array passed as a parameter is not previously declared, the command creates it and
automatically sets its size. However, in the interest of compiling the application, we
recommend that you explicitly declare each array.

Pass the name of the string array that will contain object names (each object name is
unique within a form) in objectsArray. The order in which objects appear in the array is not
significant.

The other arrays optionally filled by the command are synchronized with the first array.

Pass the name of the pointer array that already contains pointers to variables or fields
associated with objects in the optional variablesArray parameter. If an object does not have
an associated variable, the pointer Nil is returned. If there is a “subform” type object, a
pointer to the table of the subform is returned.

The third array (optional), pagesArray, is filled with the form page numbers. Each line of
this array contains the page number of the corresponding object.
Objects coming from an inherited form are considered as belonging to page 0 of the
current page.

The optional * parameter allows you to reduce the list of objects returned to the current
page of the form. When this parameter is passed, only objects of the current page, page 0
and inherited pages are returned by the command. In other words, all the objects present
in the current page of the form (visible or not) are processed by the command.

See Also
GET FORM PROPERTIES.

652 4D Language Reference

GET FORM PARAMETER Forms

version 2004.4
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET FORM PARAMETER ({aTable; }form; selector; value)

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Form table or
Default table if this parameter is omitted
form String → Form name
selector Longint → Code of the parameter
value Longint ← Current value of the parameter

Description
The GET FORM PARAMETER command can be used to get the current value of a parameter of
the form indicated by aTable and form.

selector indicates the parameter of the form whose value you want to find out. You can use
the following constant, found in the “Form Parameters” theme:

Constant Type Value

NonInverted Objects Longint 0

When you use the NonInverted Objects constant as selector, the command returns, in value,
the actual display mode of the form in Application mode under Windows. This parameter
is used when applications are displayed using "right-to-left" languages. For more
information about the support of right-to-left languages, please refer to the Design Reference
manual of 4D.
• If value returns 0, the form objects are inverted,
• If value returns 1, the form objects are not inverted.

If the command is not called within the context of the Application mode under Windows,
it always returns 1.

4D Language Reference 653

Keep in mind that the actual inversion of form objects will depend on a combination of
several parameters: the values of the “Inversion of objects in Application mode” preference,
the value of the “Do not invert objects” form option and the system on which the database
is running. The following table specifies the value returned by the GET FORM PARAMETER
command depending on the various combinations of these parameters:
Preferences: Form property: Right-to-left Value returned by
“Inversion of objects “Do not invert Display under GET FORM PARAMETER
in Application objects” Windows
mode” (1)
No X X 1
X 1
X 1
1
Automatic X X 1
X 0
X 1
1
Yes X X 1
X 0
X 1
0

(1) This preference can also be set or read using the SET DATABASE PARAMETER and Get
database parameter commands.

See Also
Get database parameter, GET FORM PROPERTIES, SET DATABASE PARAMETER.

654 4D Language Reference

GET FORM PROPERTIES Forms

version 6.5
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET FORM PROPERTIES ({table; }formName; width; height{; numPages{; fixedWidth{; fixedHeight{;
title}}}})

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table of the form or Default table, if omitted
formName String → Name of the form
width Longint ← Width of the form (in pixels)
height Longint ← Height of the form (in pixels)
numPages Longint ← Number of pages in the form
fixedWidth Boolean ← True = Fixed width, False = Variable width
fixedHeight Boolean ← True = Fixed height, False = Variable height
title Text ← Title of the form’s window

Description
The GET FORM PROPERTIES command returns the properties of the form formName.

The width and height parameters return the form’s width and height in pixels. These values are
determined from the form’s Default window size properties:
• If the form’s size is automatic, its width and height are calculated so that all the form’s
objects are visible, by taking into consideration the horizontal and vertical margins that were
defined.
• If the form’s size is set, its width and height are those manually entered in the
corresponding areas.
• If the form’s size is based on an object, its width and height are calculated in relation to this
object’s position.

The numPages parameter returns the number of pages in the form, excluding page 0 (zero).

The fixedWidth and fixedHeight parameters indicate if the length and width of the form are
resizable (the parameter returns False) or set (the parameter returns True).

The title parameter returns the title of the form's window as it was defined. If no name was
defined, the title parameter returns an empty string.

See Also
GET FORM OBJECTS, Open form window, SET FORM SIZE.

4D Language Reference 655

GOTO PAGE Forms

version 2004.3 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GOTO PAGE (pageNumber)

Parameter Type Description

pageNumber Number → Form page to display

Description
GOTO PAGE changes the currently displayed form page to the form page specified by
pageNumber.

If no form is displayed or if pageNumber corresponds to the current page of the form, GOTO
PAGE does nothing. If pageNumber is greater than the number of pages, the last page is
displayed. If pageNumber is less than one, the first page is displayed.

About form page management commands

Automatic action buttons perform the same tasks as the FIRST PAGE, LAST PAGE, NEXT PAGE,
PREVIOUS PAGE and GOTO PAGE commands that you can apply to objects such as tab controls,
drop-down list boxes, and so on. Whenever appropriate, use automatic action buttons instead
of commands.
Page commands can be used with input forms or with forms displayed in dialogs. Output
forms use only the first page. A form always has at least one page—the first page. Remember
that regardless of the number of pages a form has, only one form method exists for each form.

Use the Current form page command to find out which page is being displayed.

Note: When designing a form, you can work with pages 1 through X, as well as with page 0,
in which you put objects that will appear in all of the pages. When using a form, and therefore
when calling page commands, you work with pages 1 through X; page 0 is automatically
combined with the page being displayed.

Example
The following example is an object method for a button. It displays a specific page, page 3:

GOTO PAGE (3)

See Also
Current form page, FIRST PAGE, LAST PAGE, NEXT PAGE, PREVIOUS PAGE.

656 4D Language Reference

INPUT FORM Forms

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

INPUT FORM ({aTable; }form{; userForm}{; *})

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table for which to set the input form, or
Default table, if omitted
form String → Name of the form to set as input form
userForm String → Name of user form to use
* → Automatic window size

Description
The INPUT FORM command sets the current input form for aTable to form or userForm. The
form must belong to aTable.

The scope of this command is the current process. Each table has its own input form in each
process.

Note: For structural reasons, this command is not compatible with project forms. If you pass a
project form in form, the command does nothing.

INPUT FORM does not display the form; it just designates which form is used for data entry,
import, or operation by another command. For information about creating forms, see the 4D
Design Reference manual.

The default input form is defined in the Explorer window for each table. This default input
form is used if the INPUT FORM command is not used to specify an input form, or if you
specify a form that does not exist.

The optional userForm parameter lets you specify a user form (coming from form) as the
default input form. If you pass a valid user form name, this form will be used by default
instead of the input form in the current process. This allows you to have several different
custom user forms simultaneously (generated using the CREATE USER FORM command) and to
use the one that suits according to the context.
For more information about user forms, refer to the Overview of user forms section.

4D Language Reference 657

Input forms are displayed by a number of commands, which are generally used to allow the
user to enter new data or modify old data. The following commands display an input form for
data entry or query purposes:
• ADD RECORD
• DISPLAY RECORD
• MODIFY RECORD
• QUERY BY EXAMPLE
The DISPLAY SELECTION and MODIFY SELECTION commands display a list of records using the
output form. The user can double-click on a record in the list, which displays the input form.
The import commands IMPORT TEXT, IMPORT SYLK and IMPORT DIF use the current input form
for importing records.
The optional * parameter is used in conjunction with the form properties you set in the
Design environment Form Properties window and the command Open window. Specifying the
* parameter tells 4D to use the form properties to automatically resize the window for the next
use of the form (as an input form or as a dialog box). See Open window for more information.

Note: Whether or not you pass the optional * parameter, INPUT FORM changes the input form
for the table.
Examples
1. The following example shows a typical use of INPUT FORM:

INPUT FORM ([Companies]; "New Comp") ` Form for adding new companies
ADD RECORD ([Companies]) ` Add a new company
2. In an invoicing database managing several companies, the creation of an invoice must be
carried out using the corresponding user form:

Case of
: (company="4D SAS")
INPUT FORM([Invoices];"Input";"4D_SAS")
: (company="4D Inc")
INPUT FORM([Invoices];"Input";"4D_Inc")
: (company="Acme")
INPUT FORM([Invoices];"Input";"ACME")
End case
ADD RECORD([Factures])
See Also
ADD RECORD, CREATE USER FORM, DISPLAY RECORD, DISPLAY SELECTION, IMPORT DIF, IMPORT
SYLK, IMPORT TEXT, MODIFY RECORD, MODIFY SELECTION, Open window, OUTPUT FORM,
QUERY BY EXAMPLE.

658 4D Language Reference

LAST PAGE Forms

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

LAST PAGE

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
LAST PAGE changes the currently displayed form page to the last form page. If a form is not
being displayed, or if the last form page is already displayed, LAST PAGE does nothing.

Example
The following example is a one-line method called from a menu command. It displays the last
form page:

LAST PAGE

See Also
Current form page, FIRST PAGE, GOTO PAGE, NEXT PAGE, PREVIOUS PAGE.

4D Language Reference 659

NEXT PAGE Forms

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

NEXT PAGE

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
NEXT PAGE changes the currently displayed form page to the next form page. If a form is not
being displayed, or if the last form page is already displayed, NEXT PAGE does nothing.

Example
The following example is a one-line method called from a menu command. It displays the
form page that follows the one currently displayed:

NEXT PAGE

See Also
Current form page, FIRST PAGE, GOTO PAGE, LAST PAGE, PREVIOUS PAGE.

660 4D Language Reference

OUTPUT FORM Forms

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

OUTPUT FORM ({aTable; }form{; userForm})

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table for which to set the output form, or
Default table, if omitted
form String → Form name
userForm String → Name of user form to use

Description
The OUTPUT FORM command sets the current output form for table to form or userForm. The
form must belong to aTable.

The scope of this command is the current process. Each table has its own output form in each
process.

Note: For structural reasons, this command is not compatible with project forms. If you pass a
project form in form, the command does nothing.

OUTPUT FORM does not display the form; it just designates which form is printed, displayed,
or used by another command. For information about creating forms, see the 4D Design
Reference manual.

The default output form is defined in the Explorer window for each table. This default output
form is used if the OUTPUT FORM command is not used to specify an output form, or if you
specify a form that does not exist.

The optional userForm parameter lets you specify a user form (coming from form) as the
default output form. If you pass a valid user form name, this form will be used by default
instead of the output form in the current process. This allows you to have several different
custom user forms simultaneously (generated using the CREATE USER FORM command) and to
use the one that suits according to the context.
For more information about user forms, refer to the Overview of user forms section.

4D Language Reference 661

Output forms are used by three groups of commands. One group displays a list of records on
screen, another group generates reports, and the third group exports data. The DISPLAY
SELECTION and MODIFY SELECTION commands display a list of records using an output form.
You use the output form when creating reports with the PRINT LABEL and PRINT SELECTION
commands. Each of the export commands (EXPORT DIF, EXPORT SYLK and EXPORT TEXT) also
uses the output form.

Example
The following example shows a typical use of OUTPUT FORM. Note that although the OUTPUT
FORM command appears immediately before the output form is used, this is not required. In
fact, the command may be executed in a completely different method, as long as it is executed
prior to this method:

INPUT FORM ([Parts]; "Parts In") ` Select the input form

OUTPUT FORM ([Parts]; "Parts List") ` Select the output form
MODIFY SELECTION ([Parts]) ` This command uses both forms

See Also
CREATE USER FORM, DISPLAY SELECTION, EXPORT DIF, EXPORT SYLK, EXPORT TEXT, INPUT
FORM, MODIFY SELECTION, PRINT LABEL, PRINT SELECTION.

662 4D Language Reference

PREVIOUS PAGE Forms

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

PREVIOUS PAGE

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
PREVIOUS PAGE changes the currently displayed form page to the previous form page. If a form
is not being displayed, or if the first form page is already displayed, PREVIOUS PAGE does
nothing.

Example
The following example is a one-line method called from a menu command. It displays the
form page that precedes the one currently displayed:

PREVIOUS PAGE

See Also
Current form page, FIRST PAGE, GOTO PAGE, LAST PAGE, NEXT PAGE.

4D Language Reference 663

SET FORM HORIZONTAL RESIZING Forms

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET FORM HORIZONTAL RESIZING (resize{; minWidth{; maxWidth}})

Parameter Type Description

resize Boolean → True: The form can be resized horizontally
False: The form cannot be resized horizontally
minWidth Longint → Smallest form width allowed (pixels)
maxWidth Longint → Largest form width allowed (pixels)

Description
The SET FORM HORIZONTAL RESIZING command allows you to change the horizontal
resizing properties of the current form through programming. By default, these properties
are set in the Design environment Form editor. New properties are set for the current
process; they are not stored with the form.

The resize parameter lets you set whether the form can be resized horizontally; in other
words, if the width can be changed (manually by the user or through programming).
If you pass True, the form width can be modified by the user; 4D uses values passed in
minWidth and maxWidth as markers.
If you pass False, the current form width cannot be changed; in this case, there is no need
to pass values in the minWidth and maxWidth parameters.

If you passed True in the first parameter, you can pass new minimum and maximum
widths (in pixels) in the optional minWidth and maxWidth parameters. If you leave these
parameters out, the values set in the Design environment (if any) are used.

Example
Refer to the example of the SET FORM SIZE command.

See Also
SET FORM SIZE, SET FORM VERTICAL RESIZING.

664 4D Language Reference

SET FORM SIZE Forms

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET FORM SIZE ({object; }horizontal; vertical{; *})

Parameter Type Description

object String → Object name indicating form limits
horizontal Longint → If * passed: horizontal margin (pixels)
If * omitted: width (pixels)
vertical Longint → If * passed: vertical margin (pixels)
If * omitted: height (pixels
* * → • If passed: add margins defined by horizontal and
vertical parameters (automatic size or size based
on object, if object is passed)
• If omitted: use horizontal and vertical as width and
height of the form

Description
The SET FORM SIZE command allows you to change the size of the current form by
programming. The new size is defined for the current process; it is not saved with the form.

As in the Design environment, you can use this command to set the form size in three
ways:
• Automatically — 4D determines the size of the form based on the notion that all objects
must be visible — and possibly adding a horizontal and vertical margin,
• On the place where a form object is found, where a horizontal and vertical margin may
be added,
• By entering “fixed” sizes (width and height).
For more information on resizing forms, refer to the 4D Design Reference manual.

• Automatic size
If you want the size of the form to be set automatically, you must use the following syntax:

SET FORM SIZE(horizontal; vertical;*)

In this case, you must pass the margins (in pixels) that you want to add to the right and
bottom of the form in horizontal and vertical.

4D Language Reference 665

• Object-based size
If you want the form size to be based on an object, you must use the following syntax:

SET FORM SIZE(object; horizontal; vertical;*)

In this case, you must pass the margins (in pixels) that you want to add to the right and
bottom of the object in horizontal and vertical.

• Fixed size
In you want to have a fixed form size, you must use the following syntax:

SET FORM SIZE(horizontal; vertical)

In this case, you must pass the width and height (in pixels) of the form in horizontal and
vertical.

The SET FORM SIZE command changes the size of the form, but also takes into account the
resizing properties. For example, if the minimum width of a form is 500 pixels and if the
command sets a width of 400 pixels, the new form width will be 500 pixels.
Also note that this command does not change the size of the form window (you can resize
a form without changing the size of the window and vice versa). To change the size of the
form window, refer to the RESIZE FORM WINDOW command.

Example
The following example shows how an Explorer type window is set up. The following form
is created in the Design environment :

The size of the form is “automatic”.

The window is displayed using the following code:

$ref:=Open form window([Table 1];"Form1";Plain form window;

Horizontally centered; Vertically centered;*)
DIALOG([Table 1];"Form1")
CLOSE WINDOW

666 4D Language Reference

The right part of the window can be displayed or hidden by clicking on the
increase/decrease option:

The object method associated with this button is as follows:

Case of
: (Form event=On load)
C_BOOLEAN(b1;<>collapsed)
C_LONGINT(margin)
margin:=15
b1:=<>collapsed
If (<>collapsed)
SET FORM HORIZONTAL RESIZING(False)
SET FORM SIZE("b1";margin;margin)
Else
SET FORM HORIZONTAL RESIZING(True)
SET FORM SIZE("tab";margin;margin)
End if
: (Form event=On click)
<>collapsed:=b1
If (b1)
`collapsed
GET OBJECT RECT(*;"b1";$l;$t;$r;$b)
GET WINDOW RECT($lf;$tf;$rf;$bf;Current form window)
SET WINDOW RECT($lf;$tf;$lf+$r+margin;$tf+$b+margin;
Current form window)
SET FORM HORIZONTAL RESIZING(False)
SET FORM SIZE("b1";margin;margin)
Else

4D Language Reference 667

 `expanded
GET OBJECT RECT(*;"tab";$l;$t;$r;$b)
GET WINDOW RECT($lf;$tf;$rf;$bf;Current form window)
SET WINDOW RECT($lf;$tf;$lf+$r+margin;$tf+$b+margin;
Current form window)
SET FORM HORIZONTAL RESIZING(True)
SET FORM SIZE("tab";margin;margin)
End if

End case

See Also
SET FORM HORIZONTAL RESIZING, SET FORM VERTICAL RESIZING.

668 4D Language Reference

SET FORM VERTICAL RESIZING Forms

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET FORM VERTICAL RESIZING (resize{; minHeight{; maxHeight}})

Parameter Type Description

resize Boolean → True: The form can be resized vertically
False: The form cannot be resized vertically
minHeight Longint → Smallest form height allowed (pixels)
maxHeight Longint → Largest form height allowed (pixels)

Description
The SET FORM VERTICAL RESIZING command allows you to change the vertical resizing
properties of the current form through programming. By default, these properties are set in
the Design environment Form editor. New properties are set for the current process; they
are not stored with the form.

The resize parameter lets you set whether the form can be resized vertically; in other words,
if the height can be changed (manually by the user or through programming).
If you pass True, the form height can be modified by the user; 4D uses values passed in
minHeight and maxHeight as markers.
If you pass False, the current form height cannot be changed; in this case, there is no need
to pass values in the minHeight and maxHeight parameters.

If you passed True in the first parameter, you can pass new minimum and maximum
heights (in pixels) in the optional minHeight and maxHeight parameters. If you leave these
parameters out, the values set in the Design environment (if any) are used.

Example
Refer to the example of the SET FORM SIZE command.

See Also
SET FORM HORIZONTAL RESIZING, SET FORM SIZE.

4D Language Reference 669

670 4D Language Reference
18
______________________
Formulas

4D Language Reference 671

672 4D Language Reference
EDIT FORMULA Formulas

version 2004.4 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

EDIT FORMULA (table; formula)

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table to display by default in the Formula editor
formula String variable → Variable containing the formula to display in the
Formula editor or "" to display editor only
← Formula validated by the user

Description
The EDIT FORMULA command displays the Formula editor in order to let the user write or
modify a formula. The editor contains the following on opening:
• in the left list, the fields of the table passed in the table parameter,
• in the formula area, the formula contained in the formula variable. If you passed an
empty string in formula, the Formula editor is displayed without a formula.

The user can modify the formula displayed and save it. It is also possible to write or load a
new formula. Regardless, if the user validates the dialog box, the system variable OK is set
to 1 and the formula variable contains the formula defined by the user. If the user cancels
the formula, the system variable OK is set to 0 and the formula variable is left untouched.

Note: By default, access to methods and commands is restricted for all users (except for the
Designer and Administrator, in databases created with 4D 2004.4 and higher). When this
mechanism is enabled, you must explicitly designate the elements that can be accessed by
the users using the SET ALLOWED METHODS command. If formula calls methods that were
not first “authorized” in the Formula editor using the SET ALLOWED METHODS command, a
syntax error is generated and you will not be able to validate the dialog box.

Keep in mind that when the dialog box is validated, the command does not execute the
formula; it only validates and updates the contents of the variable. If you want to execute
the formula, you must use the EXECUTE FORMULA command.

4D Language Reference 673

Example
Displaying the Formula editor with the [Employees] table and without a pre-entered
formula:

$myFormula:=""
EDIT FORMULA([Employees];$myFormula)
If (OK=1)
APPLY TO SELECTION([Employees];EXECUTE FORMULA($myFormula))
End if

See Also
APPLY TO SELECTION, EXECUTE FORMULA, SET ALLOWED METHODS.

System Variables or Sets

If the user validates the dialog box, the system variable OK is set to 1. If the user cancels the
dialog box, the system variable OK is set to 0.

674 4D Language Reference

EXECUTE FORMULA Formulas

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

EXECUTE FORMULA (statement)

Parameter Type Description

statement String → Code to be executed

Description
EXECUTE FORMULA executes statement as a line of code. The statement string must be one line.
If statement is an empty string, EXECUTE FORMULA does nothing.

The rule of thumb is that if the statement can be executed as a one line method, then it will
execute properly. Use EXECUTE FORMULA sparingly, as it slows down execution speed. In a
compiled database, the line of code is not compiled. This means that statement will be
executed, but it will not have been checked by the compiler at compilation time.

The statement can be in the following:

• a Call to a project method
• a Call to a 4D command
• an Assignment

The formula can include process variables and interprocess variables. However, the statement
cannot contain control of flow statements (If, While, etc.), because it must be in one line of
code.

Example
See examples for the Command Name command.

See Also
Command name, EDIT FORMULA.

4D Language Reference 675

GET ALLOWED METHODS Formulas

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET ALLOWED METHODS (methodsArray)

Parameter Type Description

methodsArray Array string ← Array of method names

Description
The GET ALLOWED METHODS command returns, in methodsArray, the names of methods
that can be used to write formulas. These methods are listed at the end of the list of
commands in the editor.

By default, methods cannot be used in the Formula editor. Methods must be explicitly
authorized using the SET ALLOWED METHODS command. If this command has not been
executed, GET ALLOWED METHODS returns an empty array.

GET ALLOWED METHODS returns exactly what was passed to the SET ALLOWED METHODS
command, i.e. a string array (the command creates and sizes the array). Also, if the wildcard
(@) character is used to set a group of methods, the string containing the @ character is
returned (and not the names of the methods of the group).

This command is useful for storing the settings of the current set of authorized methods
before the execution of a formula in a specific context (for instance, a quick report).

Example
This example authorizes a set of specific methods to create a report:

`Store current parameters

GET ALLOWED METHODS(methodsArray)

`Define methods for quick report

methodsarr_Reports{1}:="Reports_@"
SET ALLOWED METHODS(methodsarr_Reports)
QR REPORT([People];"MyReport")

`Re-establish current parameters

SET ALLOWED METHODS(methodsArray)

See Also
SET ALLOWED METHODS.

676 4D Language Reference

SET ALLOWED METHODS Formulas

version 2004.4 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET ALLOWED METHODS (methodsArray)

Parameter Type Description

methodsArray Array string → Array of method names

Description
The SET ALLOWED METHODS command allows you to define methods that are displayed in
the Formula editor for the current session. The designated methods will appear at the end
of the list of commands and can be used in formulas. By default (if this command is not
used), no methods are visible in the Formula editor. If a formula uses an unauthorized
method name, a syntax error is generated and the formula cannot be validated.

Pass the name of an array containing the list of methods to offer in the Formula editor in
the methodsArray parameter. The array must have been set previously.
You can use the wildcard character (@) in method names to define one or more authorized
method groups.
If you would like the user to be able to call 4D commands that are unauthorized by default
or plug-in commands, you must use specific methods that handle these commands.

Note: Starting with version 2004.4 of 4D, the mechanism for restricting access to
commands and methods in the Formula editor can be disabled for all users (compatibility
option) or for the Designer and Administrator via two corresponding options in the
Preferences. If the compatibility option is checked, the SET ALLOWED METHODS command
will have no effect.

Example
This example authorizes all methods starting with “formula” and the “Total_general”
method in the Formula editor:

ARRAY STRING(15;methodsArray;2)
methodsArray{1}:="formula@"
methodsArray{2}:="Total_general"
SET ALLOWED METHODS(methodsArray)

See Also
EDIT FORMULA, GET ALLOWED METHODS.

4D Language Reference 677

678 4D Language Reference
19
______________________
Graphs

4D Language Reference 679

680 4D Language Reference
GRAPH Graphs

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GRAPH (graphArea; graphNumber; xLabels; yElements{; yElements2; ...; yElementsN})

Parameter Type Description

graphArea Graph variable | Pict variable → Graph area or Picture variable
graphNumber Number → Graph type number
xLabels Array → Labels for the x-axis
yElements Array → Data to graph (up to eight allowed)

Description
GRAPH draws a graph for a Graph area or a picture variable located in a form on the basis of
values coming from arrays. The GRAPH command must be placed in the form method or in an
object method belonging to the form, or yet again in a project method called by one of these
two methods.

The graphs generated by this command can be drawn either using the integrated 4D Chart
plug-in, or, beginning with 4D version 11, via the integrated SVG rendering engine.

Note: SVG (Scalable Vector Graphics) is a graphics file format (.svg extension). Based on XML,
this format is widespread and can be displayed more particularly in Web browsers. For more
information, please refer to the following address: http://www.w3.org.Graphics/SVG/. The SVG
EXPORT TO PICTURE command can also be used to take advantage of the integrated SVG
engine.

The type of the graphArea parameter determines which graphics engine is used for rendering:
if you pass a 4D Chart area reference or a graph area variable, the 4D Chart plug-in will be
used. If you pass a picture varaible, the SVG engine will be used. You can choose the type of
engine to be used according to the following criteria:
• Graphs generated by 4D Chart can be entirely controlled, handled and enhanced by
programming using the commands of the 4D Chart plug-in. For more information about
4D Chart commands, please refer to the 4D Chart Language Reference manual.
• Graphs generated by the SVG engine have a more modern appearance and benefit from
interface functions associated with picture variables: contextual menu in Application mode
(which can be used more particularly to choose the display format), scrollbars, etc.

4D Language Reference 681

In the graphArea parameter, pass either the graph area name (or a 4D Chart area reference), or
a 4D picture variable, according to the rendering engine to be used. These areas are created in
the Form editor in Design mode. For more information, see the 4D Design Reference manual.

The graphNum parameter defines the type of graph that will be drawn. It must be a number
from 1 to 8. The graph types are described in Example 1. After a graph has been drawn, you
can change the type by changing graphNum and executing the GRAPH command again.

The xLabels parameter defines the labels that will be used to label the x-axis (the bottom of the
graph). This data can be of string, date, time, or numeric type. There should be the same
number of array elements in xLabels as there are subrecords or array elements in each of the
yElements.

The data specified by yElements is the data to graph. The data must be numeric. Up to eight
data sets can be graphed. Pie charts graph only the first yElements.

Example
The following example shows the different types of graphs that you can obtain with each
graphics engine.. The code would be inserted in a form method or object method. It is not
intended to be realistic, since the data is constant:

C_PICTURE (vGraph) `Pass if you want to use the SVG engine

ARRAY STRING (4; X; 2) ` Create an array for the x-axis
X{1}:="1995" ` X Label #1
X{2}:="1996" ` X Label #2
ARRAY REAL (A; 2) ` Create an array for the y-axis
A{1}:=30 ` Insert some data
A{2}:=40
ARRAY REAL (B; 2) ` Create an array for the y-axis
B{1}:=50 ` Insert some data
B{2}:=80
GRAPH (vGraph;vType; X; A; B) ` Draw the graph
` Set the legends for the graph
GRAPH SETTINGS (vGraph;0;0;0;0;False;False;True;"France";"USA")

682 4D Language Reference

The following figure shows the resulting graph with each rendering engine (4D Chart then
SVG).

• With vType equal to 1, you obtain a Column graph:

• With vType equal to 2, you obtain a Proportional Column graph:

4D Language Reference 683

• With vType equal to 3, you obtain a Stacked Column graph:

• With vType equal to 4, you obtain a Line graph:

684 4D Language Reference

• With vType equal to 5, you obtain a Area graph:

• With vType equal to 6, you obtain a Scatter graph:

• With vType equal to 7, you obtain a Pie graph:

4D Language Reference 685

• With vType equal to 8, you obtain a Picture graph:

See Also
CT Chart arrays, CT Chart data, CT Chart selection, DOM EXPORT TO PICTURE, GRAPH SETTINGS,
GRAPH TABLE.

686 4D Language Reference

GRAPH SETTINGS Graphs

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GRAPH SETTINGS (graph; xmin; xmax; ymin; ymax; xprop; xgrid; ygrid; title{; title2; ...; titleN})

Parameter Type Description

graph Graph variable | Pict variable → Graph area or Picture variable
xmin Number or date or time → Minimum x-axis value for proportional
graph (line or scatter plot only)
xmax Number or date or time → Maximum x-axis value for proportional
graph (line or scatter plot only)
ymin Number → Minimum y-axis value
ymax Number → Maximum y-axis value
xprop Boolean → TRUE for proportional x-axis; FALSE for
normal x-axis (line or scatter plot only)
xgrid Boolean → TRUE for x-axis grid; FALSE for no x-axis grid
(only if xprop is TRUE)
ygrid Boolean → TRUE for y-axis grid; FALSE for no y-axis grid
title String → Title(s) for graph legend(s)

Description
GRAPH SETTINGS changes the graph settings for graph displayed in a form. The graph must
have already been displayed with the GRAPH command. It can have been drawn using the
4D Chart plug-in (graph is a graph variable or a 4D Chart area reference) or by the SVG engine
(graph is a picture variable). GRAPH SETTINGS has no effect on a pie chart. This command must
be placed in the form method or in an object method belonging to the form, or yet again in a
project method called by one of these two methods.

The xmin, xmax, ymin, and ymax parameters all set the minimum and maximum values for
their respective axes of the graph. If the value of any pair of these parameters is a null value (0,
?00:00:00?, or !00/00/00!, depending on the data type), the default graph values will be used.
The xprop parameter turns on proportional plotting for line graphs (type 4) and scatter graphs
(type 6). When TRUE, it will plot each point on the x-axis according to the point’s value, and
then only if the values are numeric, time, or date.

4D Language Reference 687

The xgrid and ygrid parameters display or hide grid lines. A grid for the x-axis will be displayed
only when the plot is a proportional scatter or line graph.

The title parameter(s) labels the legend.

Example
See example for the GRAPH command.

See Also
GRAPH, GRAPH TABLE.

688 4D Language Reference

GRAPH TABLE Graphs

version 6.0 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GRAPH TABLE {(table)}

or:

GRAPH TABLE ({aTable; }graphType; x field; y field{; y field2; ...; y fieldN})

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table to graph, or
Default table, if omitted
graphType Number → Graph type number
x field Field → Labels for the x-axis
y field Field → Fields to graph (up to eight allowed)

Description
GRAPH TABLE has two forms. The first form displays the Chart Wizard of 4D Chart and allows
the user to select the fields to be graphed. The second form specifies the fields to be graphed
and does not display the Chart Wizard.

GRAPH TABLE graphs data from a table’s fields. Only data from the current selection of the
current process is graphed.

Using the first form is equivalent to choosing Charts from the Tools menu in the Design
environment. The following figure shows the Chart Wizard, which allows the user to define
the graph.

4D Language Reference 689

The second form of the command graphs the fields specified for aTable.

The graphType parameter defines the type of graph that will be drawn. It must be a number
from 1 to 8. See the 4D Chart graph types listed in the example for the GRAPH command.

Note: The GRAPH TABLE command does not allow the use of the 4D SVG rendering engine.

The x field defines the labels that will be used to label the x-axis (the bottom of the graph). The
field type can be Alpha, Integer, Long integer, Real or Date.

The y field is the data to graph. The field type must be Integer, Long integer or Real. Up to
eight y fields can be graphed, each set off by a semicolon.

In either form, GRAPH TABLE opens a Chart window for working with the newly created graph.
For more information about using the Chart window, see the 4D Design Reference manual.

Note: You can also use the Quick Report editor to generate graphs from field data, by using
the Print Destination menu.

690 4D Language Reference

Examples
1. The following example illustrates the use of the first form of GRAPH TABLE. It presents the
Chart Wizard window and allows users to select the fields to graph. The code queries records
in the [People] table, sorts them, and then displays the Chart Wizard:

QUERY ([People])
If (OK=1)
ORDER BY ([People])
If (OK=1)
GRAPH TABLE([People])
End if
End if

2. The following example illustrates the use of the second form of GRAPH TABLE. It first queries
and orders records from the [People] table. It then graphs the salaries of the people:

QUERY([People];[People]Title="Manager")
ORDER BY([People];[People]Salary;>)
GRAPH TABLE([People];1;[People]Last Name;[People]Salary)

See Also
CT Chart selection, GRAPH.

4D Language Reference 691

692 4D Language Reference
20
______________________
Hierarchical Lists

4D Language Reference 693

694 4D Language Reference
Managing Hierarchical Lists Hierarchical Lists

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Hierarchical lists are form objects that can be used to display data as lists with one or more
levels that can be expanded or collapsed.

In forms, hierarchical lists can be used for displaying or entering data. Each list item can
contain up to 2 billion characters (maximum size of a text field) and be associated with an
icon. They generally support clicks, double-clicks and keyboard navigation as well as drag
and drop. It is possible to search the contents of a list (Find in list command).

Creation and modification

Hierarchical lists can be created entirely by programming (via the New list or Copy list
commands) or using lists defined in the List editor in Design mode (Load list command).

The contents and appearance of hierarchical lists are managed by programming using the
commands of the "Hierarchical Lists" theme. Certain specific appearance characteristics can
also be set using the generic commands of the "Object Properties" theme (see below).

ListRef and object name

A hierarchical list is both a language object existing in memory and a form object.
The language object is referenced by an unique internal ID of the Longint type, designated
by ListRef in this manual. This ID is returned by the commands that can be used to create
lists: New list, Copy list, Load list, BLOB to list. There is only one instance of the language
object in memory and any modification carried out on this object is immediately carried
over to all the places where it is used.
The form object is not necessarily unique: there may be several representations of the same
hierarchical list in the same form or in different ones. As with other form objects, you
specify the object in the language using the syntax (*;"ListName", etc.).

4D Language Reference 695

You connect the hierarchical list "language object" with the hierarchical list "form object"
by the intermediary of the variable containing the ListRef value. For example, if you write:

mylist:=New list
... you can simply associate the mylist variable name with the hierarchical list form object
in the Property list so that it manages the language object whose ListRef is stored in mylist.

Each representation of the list has its own specific characteristics as well as sharing
common characteristics with all the other representations.The following characteristics are
specific to each representation of the list:
• The selection,
• The expanded/collapsed state of its items,
• The position of the scrolling cursor,
The other characteristics (font, font size, style, entry control, color, list contents, icons, etc.)
are common to all the representations and cannot be modified separately.

Consequently, when you use commands based on the expanded/collapsed configuration or

the current item, for example Count list items (when the final * parameter is not passed), it is
important to be able to specify the representation to be used without any ambiguity.

You must use the ListRef ID with language commands when you want to specify the
hierarchical list found in memory.
If you want to specify the representation of a hierarchical list object at the form level, you
must use the object name (string type) in the command, via the syntax (*;"ListName", etc.).
This syntax is identical to that used in the commands of the "Object Properties" theme. It is
accepted by most of the commands of the "Hierarchical Lists" theme that act on the
properties of the lists (please see the description of the commands of this theme).

Warning, in the case of commands that set properties, the syntax based on the object name
does not mean that only the form object specified will be modified by the command, but
rather that the action of the command will be based on the state of this object. The
common characteristics of hierarchical lists are always modified in all of their
representations.
For example, if you pass the statement SET LIST ITEM FONT(*;"mylist1";*;thefont), you are
indicating that you want to modify the font of the hierarchical list item associated with the
mylist1 form object. The command will take the current item of the mylist1 object into
account to specify the item to modify, but this modification will be carried over to all the
representations of the list in all of the processes.

696 4D Language Reference

Support of @
As with other object property management commands, it is possible to use the “@”
character in the ListName parameter. As a rule, this syntax is used to designate a set of
objects in the form. However, in the context of hierarchical list commands, this does not
apply in every case. This syntax will have two different effects depending on the type of
command:
• For commands that set properties, this syntax designates all the objects whose name
corresponds (standard behavior). For example, the parameter "LH@" designates all objects of
the hierarchical list type whose name begins with “LH.” These commands are:
DELETE FROM LIST
INSERT IN LIST
SELECT LIST ITEMS BY POSITION
SET LIST ITEM
SET LIST ITEM FONT
SET LIST ITEM ICON
SET LIST ITEM PARAMETER
SET LIST ITEM PROPERTIES
• For commands retrieving properties, this syntax designates the first object whose name
corresponds. These commands are:
Count list items
Find in list
GET LIST ITEM
Get list item font
GET LIST ITEM ICON
GET LIST ITEM PARAMETER
GET LIST ITEM PROPERTIES
List item parent
List item position
Selected list items

Generic commands that can be used with hierarchical lists

It is possible to modify the appearance of a hierarchical list in a form using several generic
4D commands. You must pass to these commands either the object name of the
hierarchical list (using the * parameter), or its variable name (standard syntax).

Note: In the case of hierarhical lists, the variable of the form contains the ListRef value. If
you execute a command which modifies an attribute by passing the variable associated
with the hierarchical list, it will not be possible to set the target list in the case of multiple
representations. Therefore, only the object name allows you to differentiate individually
between each different representation.

4D Language Reference 697

Here is a list of commands that can be used with hierarchical lists. Except for SCROLL LINES,
all of these commands belong to the "Object Properties" theme:
FONT
FONT STYLE
FONT SIZE
SET COLOR
SET FILTER
SET ENTERABLE
SET SCROLLBAR VISIBLE
SCROLL LINES ("User Interface" theme)
SET RGB COLORS

Reminder: Except for the SCROLL LINES command, these commands modify all the
representations of the same list, even if you only specify a list via its object name.

Priority of property commands

Certain properties of hierarchical lists (for example, the Enterable attribute or the color) can
be set in three different ways: via the Property list in Design mode, via a command of the
“Object Properties” theme or via a command of the “Hierarchical Lists” theme.
When all three of these means are used to set list properties, the following order of priority
is applied:
1. Commands of the “Hierarchical Lists” theme
2. Generic object property commands
3. Property list parameters
This principle is applied regardless of the order in which the commands are called. If an
item property is modified individually via a hierarchical list command, the equivalent
object property command will have no effect on this item even if it is called subsequently.
For example, if you modify the color of an item via the SET LIST ITEM PROPERTIES
command, the SET COLOR command will have no effect on this item.

Management of items by position or by reference

You can usually work in two ways with the contents of hierarchical lists: by position or by
reference.
• When you work by position, 4D bases itself on the position in relation to the items of the
list displayed on screen in order to identify them. The result will differ according to
whether or not certain hierarchical items are expanded or collapsed. Note that in the case
of multiple representations, each form object has its own configuration of
expanded/collapsed items.
• When you work by reference, 4D bases itself on the itemRef ID number of the list items.
Each item can thus be specified individually, regardless of its position or its display in the
hierarchical list.

698 4D Language Reference

Using item reference numbers (itemRef)
Each item of a hierarchical list has a reference number (itemRef) of the Longint type. This
value is only intended for your own use: 4D simply maintains it.

Warning: You can use any type of Longint value as a reference number, except for 0. In
fact, for most of the commands in this theme, the value 0 is used to specify the last item
added to the list.

Here are a few tips for using reference numbers:

1. You do not need to identify each item with a unique number (beginner level).
• First example: you build a system of tabs by programming, for example, an address book.
Since the system returns the number of the tab selected, you will probably not need more
information than this. In this case, do not worry about item reference numbers: pass any
value (except 0) in the itemRef parameter. Note that for an address book system, you can
predefine a list A, B, ..., Z in Design mode, You can also create it by programming in order
to eliminate any letters for which there are no records.
• Second example: while working with a database, you progressively build a list of
keywords. You can save this list at the end of each session by using the SAVE LIST or LIST TO
BLOB commands and reload it at the beginning of each new session using the Load list or
BLOB to list commands. You can display this list in a floating palette; when each user clicks
on a keyword in the list, the item chosen is inserted into the enterable area that is selected
in the foreground process. You can also use drag and drop. In any case, the important thing
is that you only process the item selected (by click or drag and drop), because the Selected
list items (in the case of a click) and DRAG AND DROP PROPERTIES commands return the
position of the item that you must process. When using this position value, you obtain the
title of the item by means of the GET LIST ITEM command. Here again, you do not need to
identify each item individually; you can pass any value (except 0) in the itemRef parameter.

2. You need to partially identify the list items (intermediary level).

You use the item reference number to store information needed when you must work with
the item; this point is detailed in the example of the APPEND TO LIST command. In this
example, we use the item reference numbers to store record numbers. However, we must be
able to establish a distinction between items that correspond to the [Department] records
and those that correspond to the [Employees] records.

4D Language Reference 699

3. You need to identify all the list items individually (advanced level).
You program an elaborate management of hierarchical lists in which you absolutely must
be able to identify each item individually at every level of the list. A simple way of
implementing this is to maintain a personal counter. Suppose that you create a hlList list
using the New list command. At this stage, you initialize a counter vhlCounter to 1. Each
time you call APPEND TO LIST or INSERT IN LIST, you increment this counter
(vhlCounter:=vhlCounter+1), and you pass the counter number as the item reference
number. The trick consists in never decrementing the counter when you delete items —
the counter can only increase. In this way, you guarantee the uniqueness of the item
reference numbers. Since these numbers are of the Longint type, you can add or insert
more than two billion items in a list that has been reinitialized... (however if you are
working with such a great number of items, this usually means that you should use a table
rather than a list.)

Note: If you use Bitwise Operators, you can also use item reference numbers for storing
information that can be put into a Longint, i.e. 2 Integers, 4-byte values or, yet again, 32
Booleans.

When do you need unique reference numbers?

In most cases, when using hierarchical lists for user interface purposes and when only
dealing with the selected item (the one that was clicked or dragged), you will not need to
use item reference numbers at all. Using Selected list items and GET LIST ITEM you have all
you need to deal with the currently selected item. In addition, commands such as INSERT
IN LIST and DELETE FROM LIST allow you to manipulate the list “relatively” with respect to
the selected item.

Basically, you need to deal with item reference numbers when you want direct access to
any item of the list programmatically and not necessarily the one currently selected in the
list.

700 4D Language Reference

APPEND TO LIST Hierarchical Lists

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

APPEND TO LIST (list; itemText; itemRef{; sublist; expanded})

Parameter Type Description

list ListRef → List reference number
itemText String → Text of the new list item
itemRef Longint → Unique reference number for the new list item
sublist ListRef → Optional sublist to attach to the new list item
expanded Boolean → Indicates if the optional sublist will be expanded or
collapsed

Description
The APPEND TO LIST command appends a new item to the hierarchical list whose list reference
number you pass in list.

You pass the text of the item in itemText. You can pass a string or text expression of up to 2
billion characters.

You pass the unique reference number of the item(of the Longint type) in itemRef. Although
we qualify this item reference number as unique, you can actually pass the value you want.
Refer to the Managing Hierarchical Lists section for more information about the itemRef
parameter.

If you also want an item to have child items, pass a valid list reference to the child hierarchical
list in sublist. In this case, you must also pass the expanded parameter. Pass True or False in this
parameter so that the sublist is displayed expanded or collapsed respectively.

The list reference you pass in sublist must refer to an existing list. The existing list may be a
one-level list or a list with sublists. If you do not want to attach a child list to the new item,
omit the parameter or pass 0. Even though they are both optional, the sublist and expanded
parameters must be passed jointly.

Tips
• To insert a new item in a list, use INSERT IN LIST. To change the text of an existing item or
modify its child list as well as its expanded state, use SET LIST ITEM.
• To change the appearance of the new appended item use SET LIST ITEM PROPERTIES.

4D Language Reference 701

Example
Here is a partial view of a database structure:

The [Departments] and [Employees] tables contain the following records:

702 4D Language Reference

You want to display a hierarchical list, named hlList, that shows the Departments, and for each
Department, a child list that shows the Employees working in that Department. The object
method of hlList is:

` hlList Hierarchical List Object Method

Case of

: (Form event=On Load)

C_LONGINT(hlList;$hSubList;$vlDepartment;$vlEmployee)
` Create a new empty hierarchical list
hlList:=New list
` Select all the records from the [Departments] table
ALL RECORDS([Departments])
` For each Department

4D Language Reference 703

 For ($vlDepartment;1;Records in selection([Departments]))
` Select the Employees from this Department
RELATE MANY([Departments]Name)
` How many are they?
$vlNbEmployees:=Records in selection([Employees])
` Is there at least one Employee in this Department?
If ($vlNbEmployees>0)
` Create a child list for the Department item
$hSubList:=New list
` For each Employee
For ($vlEmployee;1;Records in selection([Employees]))
` Add the Employee item to the sublist
` Note that the record number of the [Employees] record
` is passed as item reference number
APPEND TO LIST($hSubList;[Employees]Last Name+", "+
[Employees]First Name;Record number([Employees]))
` Go the next [Employees] record
NEXT RECORD([Employees])
End for
Else
` No Employees, no child list for the Department item
$hSubList:=0
End if
` Add the Department item to the main list
` Note that the record number of the [Departments] record
` is passed as item reference number. The bit #31
` of the item reference number is forced to one so we'll be able
` to distinguish Department and Employee items. See note further
` below on why we can use this bit as supplementary information about
` the item.
APPEND TO LIST(hlList;[Departments]Name;0x80000000 | 
Record number([Departments]);$hSublist;$hSubList # 0)
` Set the Department item in Bold to emphasize the hierarchy of the list
SET LIST ITEM PROPERTIES(hlList;0;False;Bold;0)
` Go to the next Department
NEXT RECORD([Departments])
End for

704 4D Language Reference

 ` Sort the whole list in ascending order
SORT LIST(hlList;>)
` Display the list using the Windows style
` and force the minimal line height to 14 Pts
SET LIST PROPERTIES(hlList;ala Windows;Windows node;14)

: (Form event=On Unload)

` The list is no longer needed; do not forget to get rid of it!
CLEAR LIST(hlList;*)

: (Form event=On Double Clicked)

` A double-click occurred
` Get the position of the selected item
$vlItemPos:=Selected list items(hlList)
` Just in case, check the position
If ($vlItemPos # 0)
` Get the list item information
GET LIST ITEM(hlList;$vlItemPos;$vlItemRef;$vsItemText;$vlItemSubList;
$vbItemSubExpanded)
` Is the item a Department item?
If ($vlItemRef ?? 31)
` If so, it is a double-click on a Department Item
ALERT("You double-clicked on the Department item "+Char(34)+
$vsItemText+Char(34)+".")
Else
` If not, it is a double-click on an Employee item
` Using the parent item reference number find the
`[Departments] record
GOTO RECORD([Departments];List item parent(hlList;$vlItemRef)?-31)
` Tell where the Employee is working and to whom he or she
` is reporting
ALERT("You double-clicked on the Employee item "+Char(34)+
$vsItemText+Char(34)+" who is working in the Department "+
Char(34)+[Departments]Name+Char(34)+" whose manager is "+
Char(34)+[Departments]Manager+Char(34)+".")
End if
End if
End case
` Note: 4D can store up to 1 billion records per table
` The record number fits on 24 bits. In our example, we use bit #31 of the unused high
` byte for distinguishing Employees and Departments items.

4D Language Reference 705

In this example, there is only one reason to distinguish [Departments] items and [Employees]
items:
1. We store record numbers in the item reference numbers; therefore, we will probably end up
with [Departments] items whose item reference numbers are the same as [Employees] items.

2. We use the List parent item command to retrieve the parent of the selected item. If we click
on an [Employees] item whose associated record number is #10, and if there is also a
[Departments] item #10, the [Departments] item will be found first by List parent item when it
browses the lists to locate the item with the item reference number we pass. The command
will return the parent of the [Departments] item and not the parent of the [Employees] item.
Therefore, we made the item reference numbers unique, not because we wanted unique
numbers, but because we needed to distinguish [Departments] and [Employees] records.

When the form is executed, the list will look like this:

Note: This example is useful for user interface purposes if you deal with a reasonably small
number of records. Remember that lists are held in memory—do not build user interfaces with
hierarchical lists containing millions of items.

See Also
INSERT IN LIST, SET LIST ITEM, SET LIST ITEM PROPERTIES.

706 4D Language Reference

CLEAR LIST Hierarchical Lists

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

CLEAR LIST (list{; *})

Parameter Type Description

list ListRef → List reference number
* → If specified, clear sublists from memory, if any
If omitted, sublists, if any, are not cleared

Description
The CLEAR LIST command deletes the hierarchical list whose list reference number you pass in
list.

Usually you will pass the optional * parameter, so all the sublists, if any, attached to items or
subitems of the list will be deleted as well.

You do not need to clear a list attached to a form object via the Property List window. 4D
loads and clears the list for you. On the other hand, each time you load, copy, extract from a
BLOB, or create a list programmatically, call CLEAR LIST when you are through with the list.

To clear a sublist attached to an item (on any level) of another list currently displayed in a
form, proceed as follows:
1. Call GET LIST ITEM on the parent item to get the list reference of the sublist.
2. Call SET LIST ITEM on the parent item to detach the sublist from the list item before clearing
it.
3. Call CLEAR LIST to clear the sublist whose reference number you obtained with GET LIST
ITEM.

4D Language Reference 707

Examples
1. Within a clean-up routine that clears all objects and data that you no longer need (i.e.,
when a window is closed and a form unloaded), you may end up clearing a hierarchical list
that may have already been cleared, depending on the user actions within the form. Use Is a
list to clear the list only if necessary:

` Extract of clean-up routine

If (Is a list(hlList))
CLEAR LIST(hlList;*)
End if

2. See example for the Load list command.

3. See example for the BLOB to list command.

See Also
BLOB to list, Load list, New list.

708 4D Language Reference

Copy list Hierarchical Lists

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Copy list (list) → ListRef

Parameter Type Description

list ListRef → Reference to list to be copied

Function result ListRef ← List reference number to duplicated list

Description
The Copy list command duplicates the list whose reference number you pass in list, and returns
the list reference number of the new list.

After you have finished with the new list, call CLEAR LIST to delete it.

See Also
CLEAR LIST, Load list, New list.

4D Language Reference 709

Count list items Hierarchical Lists

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Count list items ({*; }list{; *}) → Longint

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, list is an object name (string)
If omitted, list is a list reference number
list ListRef | String → List reference number (if * omitted), or
Name of list type object (if * passed)
* * → If omitted (default): Return visible list items (expanded)
If specified: Return all list items

Function result Longint ← Number of visible (expanded) list items (if 2nd * omitted)
or Total number of list items (if 2nd * present)

Description
The Count list items command returns either the number of items currently “visible” or the
total number of items in the list whose reference number or object name you pass in list.

If you pass the first optional * parameter, you indicate that the list parameter is an object name
(string) corresponding to a representation of the list in the form. If you do not pass this
parameter, you indicate that the list parameter is a hierarchical list reference (ListRef). If you
only use a single representation of the list or work with all the items (the second * is passed),
you can use either syntax. Conversely, if you use several representations of the same list and
work with the visible items (the second * is omitted), the syntax based on the object name is
required since each representation can have its own expanded/collapsed configuration.

Note: If you use the @ character in the name of the list object and the form contains several
lists that match with this name, the Count list items command will only apply to the first
object whose name corresponds.

Use the second * parameter to determine which type of information will be returned. When
this parameter is passed, the command returns the total number of items present in the list,
regardless of whether it is expanded or collapsed.
When this parameter is omitted, the command returns the number of items that are visible,
depending on the current expanded/collapsed state of the list and its sublists.

You apply this command to a list displayed in a form.

710 4D Language Reference

Examples
Here a list named hList shown in the Application environment:

$vlNbItems:=Count list items(hList) ` at this point $vlNbItems gets 8

$vlNbTItems:=Count list items(hList;*) `$vlNbTItems also gets 8

$vlNbItems:=Count list items(hList) ` at this point $vlNbItems gets 2

$vlNbTItems:=Count list items(hList;*) `$vlNbTItems still gets 8

4D Language Reference 711

 $vlNbItems:=Count list items(hList) ` at this point $vlNbItems gets 5
$vlNbTItems:=Count list items(hList;*) `$vlNbTItems still gets 8

See Also
List item position, Selected list items.

712 4D Language Reference

DELETE FROM LIST Hierarchical Lists

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DELETE FROM LIST ({*; }list; itemRef | *{; *})

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, list is an object name (string)
If omitted, list is a list reference number
list ListRef | String → List reference number (if * omitted), or
Name of list type object (if * passed)
itemRef | * Longint | * → Item reference number, or
0 for the last item added to the list or
* for the currently selected list item
* → If specified, erases sublists (if any) from memory
If omitted, sublists (if any) are not erased

Description
The DELETE FROM LIST command deletes the item designated by the itemRef parameter of the
list whose reference number or object name is passed in list.

If you pass the first optional * parameter, you indicate that the list parameter is an object name
(string) corresponding to a representation of the list in the form. If you do not pass this
parameter, you indicate that the list parameter is a hierarchical list reference (ListRef). If you
only use a single representation of the list or work with structural items (the second * is
omitted), you can use either syntax. Conversely, if you use several representations of the same
list and work with the current item (the second * is passed), the syntax based on the object
name is required since each representation can have its own current item.

If you pass * in itemRef, you delete the currently selected item in the list. You can also pass 0 in
this parameter in order to request the deletion of the last item added to the list.

Otherwise, you specify the item reference number of the item you want to delete. If there is no
item with the item reference number you passed, the command does nothing.

If you work with item reference numbers, build a list in which the items have unique
reference numbers, otherwise you will not be able to distinguish the items. For more
information, see the description of the APPEND TO LIST command.

4D Language Reference 713

No matter which item you delete, you should specify the optional * parameter to let 4D
automatically delete the sublist attached to the item, if any. If you do not specify the *
parameter, it is a good idea to have previously obtained the list reference number of the sublist
(if any) attached to the item, so that you can delete it, if necessary, using the CLEAR LIST
command.

Example
The following code deletes the currently selected item of the list hList. If the item has an
attached sublist, the sublist (as well as any sub-sublist) is deleted:

DELETE FROM LIST(hList;*;*)

See Also
CLEAR LIST, GET LIST ITEM.

714 4D Language Reference

Find in list Hierarchical Lists

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Find in list ({*; }list; value; scope{; itemsArray{; *}}) → Longint

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, list is an object name (string)
If omitted, list is a list reference number
list ListRef | String → List reference number (if * omitted)
Name of list type object (if * passed)
value String → Value to be searched for
scope Integer → 0=Main list, 1=Sublist
itemsArray Longint Array ← - If 2nd * omitted: array of positions of items found
- If 2nd * passed: array of reference numbers of items
found
* * → - If omitted: use position of items
- If passed: use reference number of items

Function result Longint ← - If 2nd * omitted: position of item found

- If 2nd * passed: reference number of item found

Description
The Find in list command returns the position or reference of the first item of the list that is
equivalent to the string passed in value. If several items are found, the function can also fill
an itemsArray array with the position or reference of each item.

If you pass the first optional * parameter, you indicate that the list parameter is an object
name (string) corresponding to a representation of the list in the form. If you do not pass
this parameter, you indicate that the list parameter is a hierarchical list reference (ListRef). If
you only use a single representation of the list or work with item reference numbers (the
second * is omitted), you can use either syntax. Conversely, if you use several
representations of the same list and work with item positions (the second * is passed), the
syntax based on the object name is required since the position of items can vary from one
representation to another.

Note: If you use the @ character in the object name of the list and the form contains
several lists that match this name, the Find in list command will be applied to the first
object whose name corresponds.

The second * parameter can be used to indicate whether you want to work with the current
positions of the items (in which case, this parameter is omitted) or with the absolute
references of the items (in which case, it must be passed).

4D Language Reference 715

Pass the character strings to be searched for in value. The search will be of the “is exactly”
type; in other words, searching for “wood” will not find “wooden.” However, you can use
the wildcard character (@ ) to set up searches of the “begins with,” “ends with” or
“contains” types.

The scope parameter is used to set whether the search must only be carried out at the first
level of the list or whether it should include all the sublists. Pass 0 to limit the search to the
first level of the list and 1 to extend it to all the sublists.

If you want to find out the position or number of all the items corresponding to value, pass
a longint array in the optional itemsArray parameter. If necessary, the array will be created
and resized by the command. The command will fill in the array with the positions (if the
second * is omitted) or the reference numbers (if the second * is passed) of the items found.

Positions are expressed in relation to the top item of the main list, while taking into
account the current expanded/collapsed state of the list and sublists.

If no item corresponds to the value searched for, the function returns 0 and the itemsArray
array is returned empty.

Example
Given the following hierarchical list:

716 4D Language Reference

$vlItemPos:=Find in list(hList;"P@";1; $arrPos)
`$vlItemPos equals 6
`$arrPos{1} equals 6 and $arrPos{2} equals 11
$vlItemRef:=Find in list(hList;"P@";1;$arrRefs;*)
`$vlItemRef equals 7
`$arrRefs{1} equals 7 and $arrRefs{2} equals 18
$vlItemPos:=Find in list(hList;"Date";1;$arrPos)
`$vlItemPos equals 9
`$arrPos{1} equals 9 and $arrPos{2} equals 16
$vlItemRef:Find in list(hList;"Date";1;$arrRefs;*)
`$vlItemRef equals 11
`$arrRefs{1} equals 11 and $arrRefs{2} equals 23
$vlItemPos:=Find in list(hList;"Date";0;*)
`$vlItemPos equals 0

4D Language Reference 717

GET LIST ITEM Hierarchical Lists

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET LIST ITEM ({*; }list; itemPos  | *; itemRef; itemText{; sublist{; expanded}})

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, list is an object name (string)
If omitted, list is a list reference number
list ListRef | String → List reference number (if * omitted), or
Name of list type object (if * passed)
itemPos  | * Number | * → Position of item in expanded/collapsed list(s)
or * for the current item in the list
itemRef Longint ← Item reference number
itemText String ← Text of the list item
sublist ListRef ← Sublist list reference number (if any)
expanded Boolean ← If a sublist is attached:
TRUE = sublist is currently expanded
FALSE = sublist is currently collapsed

Description
The GET LIST ITEM command returns information about the item specified by itemPos of the
list whose reference number or object name is passed in list.

If you pass the first optional * parameter, you indicate that the list parameter is an object name
(string) corresponding to a representation of the list in the form. If you do not pass this
parameter, you indicate that the list parameter is a hierarchical list reference (ListRef). If you
only use a single representation of the list, you can use either syntax. Conversely, if you use
several representations of the same list, the syntax based on the object name is required since
each representation can have its own expanded/collapsed configuration and its own current
item.

Note: If you use the @ character in the name of the list object and the form contains several
lists that match with this name, the GET LIST ITEM command will only apply to the first object
whose name corresponds.

The position must be expressed relatively, using the current expanded/collapsed state of the
list and its sublist. You pass a position value between 1 and the value returned by Count list
items. If you pass a value outside this range, GET LIST ITEM returns empty values (0, "", etc.).

718 4D Language Reference

After the call, you retrieve:
• The item reference number of the item in itemRef.
• The text of the item in itemText.

If you passed the optional parameters sublist and expanded:

• subList returns the list reference number of the sublist attached to the item. If the item has
no sublist, subList returns zero (0).
• If the item has a sublist, expanded returns TRUE if the sublist is currently expanded, and
FALSE if it is collapsed.

Examples
1. hList is a list whose items have unique reference numbers. The following code
programmatically toggles the expanded/collapsed state of the sublist, if any, attached to the
current selected item:

$vlItemPos:=Selected list items(hList)

If ($vlItemPos>0)
GET LIST ITEM(hList;$vlItemPos;$vlItemRef;$vsItemText;$hSublist;$vbExpanded)
If (Is a list($hSublist))
SET LIST ITEM(hList;$vlItemRef;$vsItemText;$vlItemRef;$hSublist;
Not($vbExpanded))
End if
End if

2. Refer to the example of the APPEND TO LIST command.

See Also
GET LIST ITEM PROPERTIES, List item parent, List item position, Selected list items, SET LIST ITEM,
SET LIST ITEM PROPERTIES.

4D Language Reference 719

Get list item font Hierarchical Lists

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get list item font ({*; }list; itemRef | *) → String

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, list is an object name (string)
If omitted, list is a list reference number
list ListRef | String → List reference number (if * omitted) or
Name of list type object (if * passed)
itemRef | * Longint | * → Item reference number or
0 for the last item added to the list or
* for the current item of the list

Function result String ← Font name

Description
The Get list item font command returns the current character font name of the item
specified by the itemRef parameter of the list whose reference number or object name is
passed in list.

If you pass the first optional * parameter, you indicate that the list parameter is an object
name (string) corresponding to a representation of the list in the form. If you do not pass
this parameter, you indicate that the list parameter is a hierarchical list reference (ListRef). If
you only use a single representation of the list or work with structural items (the second * is
omitted), you can use either syntax. Conversely, if you use several representations of the
same list and work with the current item (the second * is passed), the syntax based on the
object name is required since each representation can have its own current item.

Note: If you use the @ character in the object name of the list and the form contains
several lists that match this name, the Get list item font command will be applied to the first
object whose name corresponds.

You can pass a reference number in itemRef. If this number does not correspond to any
item of the list, the command does nothing. You can also pass 0 in itemRef in order to get
the font of the last item added to the list (using APPEND TO LIST).
Lastly, you can pass * in itemRef: in this case, the command will get the font of the current
item of the list. If several items are selected manually, the current item is the one that was
selected last. If no item is selected, the command does nothing.

See Also
SET LIST ITEM FONT.

720 4D Language Reference

GET LIST ITEM ICON Hierarchical Lists

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET LIST ITEM ICON ({*; }list; itemRef | *; icon)

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, list is an object name (string)
If omitted, list is a list reference number
list ListRef | String → List reference number (if * omitted) or
Name of list type object (if * passed)
itemRef | * Longint | * → Item reference number or
0 for the last item added to the list or
* for the current item of the list
icon Picture var ← Icon associated with item

Description
The GET LIST ITEM ICON command returns, in icon, the icon associated with the item
whose eference number is passed in itemRef in the list whose reference number or object
name is passed in list.

If you pass the first optional * parameter, you indicate that the list parameter is an object
name (string) corresponding to a representation of the list in the form. If you do not pass
this parameter, you indicate that the list parameter is a hierarchical list reference (ListRef). If
you only use a single representation of the list or work with structural items (the second * is
omitted), you can use either syntax. Conversely, if you use several representations of the
same list and work with the current item (the second * is passed), the syntax based on the
object name is required since each representation can have its own current item.

Note: If you use the @ character in the object name of the list and the form contains
several lists that match this name, the GET LIST ITEM ICON command will be applied to the
first object whose name corresponds.

You can pass a reference number in itemRef. If this number does not correspond to an item
in the list, the command does nothing. You can also pass 0 in itemRef to indicate the last
item added to the list (using APPEND TO LIST).
Lastly, you can pass * in itemRef: in this case, the command will apply to the current item
of the list. If several items are selected manually, the current item is the one that was
selected last. If no item is selected, the command does nothing.

Pass a picture variable in icon. After the command is executed, it will contain the icon
associated with the item, regardless of the source of the icon (static picture, resource or
picture expression).

4D Language Reference 721

If no icon is associated with the item, the icon variable is returned empty.

Note: When the icon associated with an item has been defined via a static reference
(resource references or pictures from the picture library), it is possible to find out its
number using the GET LIST ITEM PROPERTIES command.

See Also
GET LIST ITEM PROPERTIES, SET LIST ITEM ICON.

722 4D Language Reference

GET LIST ITEM PARAMETER Hierarchical Lists

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET LIST ITEM PARAMETER ({*; }list; itemRef | *; selector; value)

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, list is an object name (string)
If omitted, list is a list reference number
list ListRef | String → List reference number (if * omitted) or
Name of list type object (if * passed)
itemRef | * Longint | * → Item reference number or
0 for the last item appended to the list or
* for the current list item
selector String → Parameter constant
value String | Boolean | Num ← Current value of parameter

Description
The GET LIST ITEM PARAMETER command is used to find out the current value of the selector
parameter for the itemRef item of the hierarchical list whose reference or object name is
passed in the list parameter.

If you pass the first optional * parameter, you indicate that the list parameter is an object
name (string) corresponding to a representation of the list in the form. If you do not pass
this parameter, you indicate that the list parameter is a hierarchical list reference (ListRef). If
you only use a single representation of the list or work with structural items (the second * is
omitted), you can use either syntax. Conversely, if you use several representations of the
same list and the second * is passed, the syntax based on the object name is required since
each representation can have its own current item.

Note: If you use the @ character in the object name of the list and the form contains
several lists that match this name, the GET LIST ITEM PARAMETER command will be applied
to the first object whose name corresponds.

You can pass a reference number in itemRef. If this number does not correspond to an item
in the list, the command does nothing. You can also pass 0 in itemRef to indicate the last
item added to the list (using APPEND TO LIST).
Lastly, you can pass * in itemRef: in this case, the command will be applied to the current
item of the list. If several items are selected manually, the current item is the last one that
was selected. If no item is selected, the command does nothing.

4D Language Reference 723

In selector, you can pass the Additional text constant (found in the “Hierarchical Lists”
theme) or any custom value. For more information about the selector and value parameters,
please refer to the description of the SET LIST ITEM PARAMETER command.

See Also
SET LIST ITEM PARAMETER.

724 4D Language Reference

GET LIST ITEM PROPERTIES Hierarchical Lists

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET LIST ITEM PROPERTIES ({*; }list; itemRef | *; enterable{; styles{; icon{; color}}})

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, list is an object name (string)
If omitted, list is a list reference number
list ListRef | String → List reference number (if * omitted), or
Name of list type object (if * passed)
itemRef | * Longint | * → Item reference number, or
0 for last list item added, or
* for the current list item
enterable Boolean ← TRUE = Enterable, FALSE = Non-enterable
styles Number ← Font style for the item
icon Number ← ‘cicn’ Mac OS-based resource ID, or
65536 + ‘PICT’ Mac OS-based resource ID, or
131072 + Picture Reference Number
color Longint ← RGB color value

Description
The GET LIST ITEM PROPERTIES command returns the properties of the item designated by the
itemRef parameter within the list whose list reference number or object name is passed in list.

If you pass the first optional * parameter, you indicate that the list parameter is an object name
(string) corresponding to a representation of the list in the form. If you do not pass this
parameter, you indicate that the list parameter is a hierarchical list reference (ListRef). If you
only use a single representation of the list or work with structural items (the second * is
omitted), you can use either syntax. Conversely, if you use several representations of the same
list and work with the current item (the second * is passed), the syntax based on the object
name is required since each representation can have its own current item.

Note: If you use the @ character in the object name of the list and the form contains several
lists matching this name, the GET LIST ITEM PROPERTIES command will be applied to the first
object whose name corresponds.

4D Language Reference 725

In itemRef, you can pass either a reference number, or the value 0 in order to designate the last
item added to the list, or * in order to designate the current item of the list. If several items are
selected, the current item is the last one selected.
If you pass * and no item is selected or if there is no item with the item reference number that
is passed, the command leaves the parameters unchanged.

If you work with item reference numbers, build a list in which items have unique reference
numbers, otherwise you will not be able to distinguish the items. For more information, refer
to the description of the command APPEND TO LIST.

After the call:

• enterable returns TRUE if the item is enterable.
• styles returns the font style of the item.
• icon returns the icon or picture assigned to the item, 0 if none.
• color returns the color of the text of the item specified.

Note: You can retrieve, in a picture variable, the icon associated with an item using the GET
LIST ITEM ICON command.

For details about these properties, see the description of the command SET LIST ITEM
PROPERTIES.

See Also
GET LIST ITEM, GET LIST ITEM ICON, SET LIST ITEM, SET LIST ITEM PROPERTIES.

726 4D Language Reference

GET LIST PROPERTIES Hierarchical Lists

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET LIST PROPERTIES (list; appearance{; icon{; lineHeight{; doubleClick{; multiSelections{;

editable}}}}})

Parameter Type Description

list ListRef → List reference number
appearance Number ← Graphical style of the list
1 = Hierarchical list a la Macintosh
2 = Hierarchical list a la Windows
icon Number ← ‘cicn’ Mac OS-based resource ID
lineHeight Number ← Minimal line height expressed in pixels
doubleClick Longint ← Expand/Collapse sublist on double-click?
0 = Yes, 1= No
multiSelections Longint ← Multiple selections: 0 = No, 1 = Yes
editable Longint ← List editable by user: 0 = No, 1 = Yes

Description
The GET LIST PROPERTIES command returns information about the list whose reference
number you pass in list.

The parameter appearance returns the graphical style of the list.

The parameter icon returns the resource IDs of the node icons displayed in the list.
The parameter lineHeight returns the minimal line height.
If doubleClick is set to 1, double-clicking on a parent list item does not provoke its child list to
expand or to collapse. If doubleClick is set to 0, this behavior is active (defaut value).
If the multiSelections parameter is set to 0, multiple selections of items (manually or by
programming) are not possible in the list. If it is set to 1, multiple selections are allowed.
If the editable parameter is set to 1, the list is editable when it is displayed as a choice list in a
record. If it is set to 0, the list is not editable.

These properties can be set using the command SET LIST PROPERTIES and/or in the Design
environment List Editor, if the list was created there or saved using the command SAVE LIST.

For a complete description of the appearance, node icons, minimal line height and double-
click management of a list, see the command SET LIST PROPERTIES.

4D Language Reference 727

Example
Given the list named hList, shown here in the Application environment:

The object method for a button:

` bMacOrWin button Object Method

GET LIST PROPERTIES(hList;$vlAppearance;$vlIcon;$vlLH;$vlClick;$vlSelect;$vlModif)
If ($vlAppearance=Ala Macintosh)
$vlAppearance:=Ala Windows
$vlIcon:=Windows node
$vlModif:=1
Else
$vlAppearance:=A la Macintosh
$vlIcon:=Macintosh node
$vlModif:=1
End if
SET LIST PROPERTIES(hList;$vlAppearance;$vlIcon;$vlLH;$vlClick;$vlSelect;$vlModif)
This method lets you display the list as follows:

See Also
SET LIST PROPERTIES.

728 4D Language Reference

INSERT IN LIST Hierarchical Lists

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

INSERT IN LIST({*; } list; beforeItemRef | *; itemText; itemRef{; sublist; expanded})

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, list is an object name (string)
If omitted, list is a list reference number
list ListRef | String → List reference number (if * omitted), or
Name of list type object (if * passed)
beforeItemRef | * Longint | * → Item reference number or
0 for the last item added to the list or
* for the currently selected list item
itemText String → Text for the new list item
itemRef Longint → Unique reference number for the new list item
sublist ListRef → Optional sublist to attach to the new list item
expanded Boolean → Indicates if the sublist will be expanded or collapsed

Description
The INSERT IN LIST command inserts the item designated by the itemRef parameter in the list
whose reference number or object name you pass in list.

If you pass the first optional * parameter, you indicate that the list parameter is an object name
(string) corresponding to a representation of the list in the form. If you do not pass this
parameter, you indicate that the list parameter is a hierarchical list reference (ListRef). If you
only use a single representation of the list or work with structural items (the second * is
omitted), you can use either syntax. Conversely, if you use several representations of the same
list and work with the current item (the second * is passed), the syntax based on the object
name is required since each representation can have its own current item.

The beforeItemRef parameter can be used to designate the item before which you wish to insert
the new item:
• You can pass the value 0 in order to designate the last item added to the list. The newly
inserted item will then become the selected item.
• You can pass * in order for the new item to be inserted before the currently selected item in
the list. In this case, the newly inserted item will also become the selected item.

4D Language Reference 729

• Otherwise, if you want to insert an item before a specific item, you pass the item reference
number of that item. In this case, the newly inserted item is not automatically selected. If
there is no item with the corresponding item reference number, the command does nothing.

You pass the text and the item reference number of the new item in itemText and itemRef.

If you want for the item to include subitems, pass a valid list reference number in the sublist
parameter. In this case, you must also pass the expanded parameter. Pass either True or False in
this parameter so that this sublist is displayed either expanded or collapsed respectively.

Example
The following code inserts an item (with no attached sublist) just before the currently selected
item in the hList list:

vlUniqueRef:=vlUniqueRef+1
INSERT IN LIST(hList;*;"New Item";vlUniqueRef)

See Also
APPEND TO LIST.

730 4D Language Reference

Is a list Hierarchical Lists

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Is a list (list) → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

list ListRef → ListRef value to be tested

Function result Boolean ← TRUE if list is a hierarchical list

FALSE if list is not a hierarchical list

Description
The Is a list command returns TRUE if the value you pass in list is a valid reference to a
hierarchical list. Otherwise, it returns FALSE.

Examples
1. See example for the command CLEAR LIST.
2. See examples for the command DRAG AND DROP PROPERTIES.

See Also
DRAG AND DROP PROPERTIES.

4D Language Reference 731

List item parent Hierarchical Lists

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

List item parent ({*; }list; itemRef | *) → Longint

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, list is an object name (string)
If omitted, list is a list reference number
list ListRef | String → List reference number (if * omitted), or
Name of list type object (if * passed)
itemRef | * Longint | * → Item reference number or
0 for the last item added to the list or
* for the current item in the list

Function result Longint ← Item reference number of parent item or

0 if none

Description
The List item parent command returns the item reference number of a parent item.

Pass the reference number or object name of the list in list .

If you pass the first optional * parameter, you indicate that the list parameter is an object name
(string) corresponding to a representation of the list in the form. If you do not pass this
parameter, you indicate that the list parameter is a hierarchical list reference (ListRef). If you
only use a single representation of the list or work with structural items (the second * is
omitted), you can use either syntax. Conversely, if you use several representations of the same
list and work with the current item (the second * is passed), the syntax based on the object
name is required since each representation can have its own current item.

Note: If you use the @ character in the object name of the list and the form contains several
lists matching this name, the List item parent command will be applied to the first object
whose name corresponds.

You pass the item reference number of an item in the list or 0 or yet again *, in itemRef. If you
pass 0, the command applies to the last item added to the list. If you pass *, the command
applies to the current item of the list. If several items have been selected manually, the current
item is the last one selected.

732 4D Language Reference

In return, if the corresponding item exists in the list and if this item is in a sublist (and
therefore has a parent item), you obtain the item reference number of the parent item.

If there is no item with the item reference number you passed, or if you have passed * and no
item is selected, or if the item has no parent, List item parent returns 0 (zero).

If you work with item reference numbers, be sure to build a list in which the items have
unique reference numbers; otherwise you will not be able to distinguish the items. For more
information, see the description of the APPEND TO LIST command.

Examples
Given the list named hList shown here in the Application environment:

The item reference numbers are set as follows:

Item Item Reference Number

a 100
a-1 101
a-2 102
b 200
b-1 201
b-2 202
b-3 203

• In the following code, if the item “b - 3” is selected, the variable $vlParentItemRef gets 200,
the item reference number of the item “b”:

$vlItemPos:=Selected list items(hList)

GET LIST ITEM(hList;$vlItemPos;$vlItemRef;$vsItemText)
$vlParentItemRef:=List item parent(hList;$vlItemRef) ` $vlParentItemRef gets 200

4D Language Reference 733

• If the item “a - 1” is selected, the variable $vlParentItemRef gets 100, the item reference
number of the item “a”.

• If the item “a” or “b” is selected, the variable $vlParentItemRef gets 0, because these items
have no parent item.

See Also
GET LIST ITEM, List item position, SELECT LIST ITEMS BY REFERENCE, SET LIST ITEM.

734 4D Language Reference

List item position Hierarchical Lists

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

List item position ({*; }list; itemRef) → Number

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, list is an object name (string)
If omitted, list is a list reference number
list ListRef | String → List reference number (if * omitted), or
Name of list type object (if * passed)
itemRef Longint → Item reference number

Function result Number ← Item position in expanded/collapsed lists

Description
The List item position command returns the position of the item whose item reference number
is passed in itemRef, within the list whose list reference number or object name is passed in list.

If you pass the first optional * parameter, you indicate that the list parameter is an object name
(string) corresponding to a representation of the list in the form. If you do not pass this
parameter, you indicate that the list parameter is a hierarchical list reference (ListRef). If you
only use a single representation of the list, you can use either syntax. Conversely, if you use
several representations of the same list, the syntax based on the object name is required since
each representation can have its own expanded/collapsed configuration.

Note: If you use the @ character in the object name of the list and the form contains several
lists matching this name, the List item position command will be applied to the first object
whose name corresponds.

Note: Unlike the other commands of this theme, with this command it is not possible to pass
the value 0 in itemRef to designate the last item added.

The position is expressed relative to the top item of the main list, using the current
expanded/collapsed state of the list and its sublist.

The result is therefore a number between 1 and the value returned by Count list items.

4D Language Reference 735

If the item is not visible because it is located in a collapsed list, List item position expands the
appropriate list to make the item visible.

If the item does not exist, List item position returns 0.

See Also
Count list items, SELECT LIST ITEMS BY REFERENCE.

736 4D Language Reference

LIST OF CHOICE LISTS Hierarchical Lists

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

LIST OF CHOICE LISTS (numsArray; namesArray)

Parameter Type Description

numsArray Longint Array ← Numbers of choice lists
namesArray Text Array ← Names of choice lists

Description
The LIST OF CHOICE LISTS command returns, in the synchronized numsArr and namesArr
arrays, the numbers and names of the choice lists defined by the list editor in Design mode.

The numbers of choice lists correspond to their order of creation. In the list editor, choice
lists are displayed in alphabetical order.

4D Language Reference 737

Load list Hierarchical Lists

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Load list (listName) → ListRef

Parameter Type Description

listName String → Name of a list created in the
Design environment List Editor

Function result ListRef ← List reference number of newly created list

Description
Load list creates a new hierarchical list whose contents are copied from the list and whose
name you pass in listName. It then returns the list reference number to the newly created list.

To find out the lists specified in the database, use the LIST OF CHOICE LISTS command.
To make sure that the list specified by listName exists, use the Is a list function.

Note that the new list is a copy of the list defined in the Design environment. Consequently,
any modifications made to the new list will not affect the list defined in the Design
environment. Conversely, any subsequent modifications made to the list defined in the
Design environment will not affect the list that you just created.

If you modify the newly created list and want to permanently save the changes, call SAVE LIST.

Remember to call CLEAR LIST in order to delete the newly created list when you have finished
with it. Otherwise, it will stay in memory until the end of the working session or until the
process in which it was created ends or is aborted.

Tip: If you associate a list with a form object (hierarchical list, tab control, or hierarchical pop-
up menu) using the Choice List property in the Property List window, you do not need to call
Load list or CLEAR LIST from the method of the object. 4D loads and clears the list
automatically for you.

738 4D Language Reference

Example
You create a database for the international market and you need to switch to different
languages while using the database. In a form, you present a hierarchical list, named hlList,
that proposes a list of standard options. In the Design environment, you have prepared
various lists, such as “Std Options US” for the English version, “Std Options FR” for the French
version, “Std Options SP” for the Spanish version, and so on. In addition, you maintain an
interprocess variable, named <>gsCurrentLanguage, where you store a 2-character language
code, such as “US” for the English version, “FR” for the French version, “SP” for the Spanish
version, and so on. To make sure that your list will always be loaded using the current selected
language, you can write:

` hlList Hierarchical List Object Method

Case of
: (Form event = On Load)
C_LONGINT (hlList)
hlList:=Load list("Std Options"+<>gsCurrentLanguage)
: (Form event = On Unload)
CLEAR LIST(hlList;*)
End case

See Also
CLEAR LIST, Is a list, SAVE LIST.

4D Language Reference 739

New list Hierarchical Lists

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

New list → ListRef

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result ListRef ← List reference number

Description
New list creates a new, empty hierarchical list in memory and returns its unique list reference
number.

WARNING: Hierarchical lists are held in memory. When you are finished with a hierarchical
list, it is important to dispose of it and free the memory, using the command CLEAR LIST.

Several other commands allow you to create hierarchical lists:

• Copy list duplicates a list from an existing list.
• Load list creates a list by loading a Choice List created (manually or programmatically) in the
Design enviornment List Editor.
• BLOB to list creates a list from the contents of a BLOB in which a list was previously saved.

After you have created a hierarchical list using New list, you can:
• Add items to that list, using the command APPEND TO LIST or INSERT IN LIST.
• Delete items from that list, using the command DELETE FROM LIST.

Example
See example for the command APPEND TO LIST.

See Also
APPEND TO LIST, BLOB to list, CLEAR LIST, Copy list, DELETE FROM LIST, INSERT IN LIST, LIST TO
BLOB, Load list.

740 4D Language Reference

REDRAW LIST Hierarchical Lists

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

REDRAW LIST (list)

Parameter Type Description

list ListRef → List reference number

Compatibility note: The REDRAW LIST command serves no purpose beginning with version 11
of 4D. All representations of hierarchical lists are now automatically redrawn. When it is
called, this command does nothing.

4D Language Reference 741

SAVE LIST Hierarchical Lists

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SAVE LIST (list; listName)

Parameter Type Description

list ListRef → List reference number
listName String → Name of the list as it will appear
in the Design environment List Editor

Description
The SAVE LIST command saves the list whose reference number you pass in list, within the
Design environment List Editor, under the name you pass in listName.

If there is already a list with this name, its contents are replaced.

See Also
Load list.

742 4D Language Reference

SELECT LIST ITEMS BY POSITION Hierarchical Lists

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SELECT LIST ITEMS BY POSITION ({*; }list; itemPos{; positionsArray})

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, list is an object name (string)
If omitted, list is a list reference number
list ListRef | String → List reference number (if * omitted), or
Name of list type object (if * passed)
itemPos Number → Position of item in expanded/collapsed list(s)
positionsArray Number array → Array of the positions in the expanded/collapsed list(s)

Description
The SELECT LIST ITEMS BY POSITION command selects the item(s) whose position is passed in
itemPos and, optionally, in positionsArray within the list whose reference number or object
name is passed in list.

If you pass the first optional * parameter, you indicate that the list parameter is an object name
(string) corresponding to a representation of the list in the form. If you do not pass this
parameter, you indicate that the list parameter is a hierarchical list reference (ListRef). If you
only use a single representation of the list, you can use either syntax. Conversely, if you use
several representations of the same list, the syntax based on the object name is required since
each representation can have its own expanded/collapsed configuration.

Note: If you use the @ character in the name of the list object and the form contains several
lists that match with this name, the SELECT LIST ITEMS BY POSITION command will only apply
to the first object whose name corresponds.

The position of items is always expressed using the current expanded/collapsed state of the list
and its sublists. You pass a position value between 1 and the value returned by Count list items.
If you pass a value outside this range, no item is selected.

If you do not pass the positionsArray parameter, the itemPos parameter represents the position
of the item to be selected.

4D Language Reference 743

The optional positionsArray parameter lets you select several items simultaneously within the
list. In positionsArray, you must pass an array where each line indicates the position of an item
to be selected.
When you pass this parameter, the item designated by the itemPos parameter sets the new
current item of the list among the resulting selection. It may or may not belong to the set of
items defined by the array. The current item is, more particularly, the one that is edited if the
EDIT ITEM command is used.

Note: In order for several items to be selected simultaneously in a hierarchical list (manually
or by programming), the multiSelections property must have been enabled for this list. This
property is set using the SET LIST PROPERTIES command.

Examples
Given the hierarchical list named hList, shown here in the Application environment:

1. After the execution of this code:

SELECT LIST ITEMS BY POSITION(hList;Count list items(hList))

The last visible list item is selected:

744 4D Language Reference

2. After execution of the following lines of code:

SET LIST PROPERTIES(hList;0;0;18;0;1)

`It is imperative to pass 1 as the last parameter in order to allow multiple selections
ARRAY LONGINT($arr;3)
$arr{1}:=2
$arr{2}:=3
$arr{3}:=5
SELECT LIST ITEMS BY POSITION(hList;3;$arr)
`The 3rd item is designated as the current item

... the 2nd, 3rd and 5th items of the hierarchical list are selected:

See Also
EDIT ITEM, SELECT LIST ITEMS BY REFERENCE, Selected list items.

4D Language Reference 745

SELECT LIST ITEMS BY REFERENCE Hierarchical Lists

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SELECT LIST ITEMS BY REFERENCE (list; itemRef{; refArray})

Parameter Type Description

list ListRef → List reference number
itemRef Longint → Item reference number or
0 for the last item added to the list
refArray Longint array → Array of item reference numbers

Description
The SELECT LIST ITEMS BY REFERENCE command selects the item(s) whose item reference
number is passed in itemRef and, optionally, in refArray, within the list whose reference
number is passed in list.

If there is no item with the item reference number you passed, the command does nothing.

If an item is not currently visible (i.e., it is located in a collapsed sublist), the command
expands the required sublist(s) so that it becomes visible.

If you do not pass the refArray parameter, the itemRef parameter represents the reference of the
item to be selected. If the item number does not correspond to an item in the list, the
command does nothing. You can also pass the value 0 in this parameter in order to designate
the last item added to the list.

The optional refArray parameter lets you select several items simultaneously within the list. In
refArray, you must pass an array where each line indicates the fixed reference of an item to be
selected.
In this case, the item designated by the itemRef parameter sets the new current item of the list
among the resulting selection. It may or may not belong to the set of items defined by the
array. The current item is, more particularly, the one that is edited if the EDIT ITEM command
is used.

Note: In order for several items to be selected simultaneously in a hierarchical list (manually
or by programming), the multiSelections property must have been enabled for this list. This
property is set using the SET LIST PROPERTIES command.

746 4D Language Reference

If you work with item reference numbers, be sure to build a list in which the items have
unique reference numbers; otherwise you will not be able to distinguish them. For more
information, see the description of the APPEND TO LIST command.

Example
hList is a list whose items have unique reference numbers. The following object method for a
button selects the parent item (if any) of the currently selected item:

$vlItemPos:=Selected list items(hList) ` Get position of selected item

` Get item ref number of selected item
GET LIST ITEM(hList;$vlItemPos;$vlItemRef;$vsItemText)
` Get item ref. number of parent item (if any)
$vlParentItemRef:=List item parent(hList;$vlItemRef)
If ($vlParentItemRef>0)
` Select the parent item
SELECT LIST ITEM BY REFERENCE(hList;List item parent(hList;$vlItemRef))
` Do NOT forget to call REDRAW LIST; otherwise the list won't be updated
End if

See Also
SELECT LIST ITEMS BY POSITION, Selected list items.

4D Language Reference 747

Selected list items Hierarchical Lists

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Selected list items ({*; }list{; itemsArray{; *}}) → Longint

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, list is an object name (string)
If omitted, list is a list reference number
list ListRef | String → List reference number (if * omitted), or
Name of list type object (if * passed)
itemsArray Longint array ← If 2nd * omitted: Array contains the positions
of selected items in the list(s)
If 2nd * passed: Array contains the selected
item references
* * → If omitted: Item position(s)
If passed: Item reference(s)

Function result Longint ← If 2nd * omitted: Position of current selected

list item in expanded/collapsed list(s)
If 2nd * passed: Reference of the selected item

Description
The Selected list items command returns the position or reference of the selected item in the
list whose reference number or object name you pass in list.

If you pass the first optional * parameter, you indicate that the list parameter is an object name
(string) corresponding to a representation of the list in the form. If you do not pass this
parameter, you indicate that the list parameter is a hierarchical list reference (ListRef). If you
only use a single representation of the list or work with item references (the second * is
passed), you can use either syntax. Conversely, if you use several representations of the same
list and work with the item positions (the second * is omitted), the syntax based on the object
name is required since each representation can have its own expanded/collapsed item
configuration.

Note: If you use the @ character in the name of the list object and the form contains several
lists that match with this name, the Selected list items command will only apply to the first
object whose name corresponds.

748 4D Language Reference

In the case of multiple selection, the command can also return in the itemsArray array, the
position or reference of each item selected. You apply this command to a list displayed in a
form to detect which item(s) the user has selected.

The second * parameter lets you indicate whether you want to work with current item
positions (in this case, the * parameter should be omitted) or with fixed item references (in
this case, the * parameter must be used).

You can pass a longint array in the itemsArray parameter. If necessary, the array will be created
and resized by the command. Once the command has been executed, itemsArray will contain:
• the position of each item selected relative to the expanded/collapsed state of the list(s) if the
* parameter is omitted.
• the fixed reference of each item selected if the * parameter is passed.
If no items have been selected, the array is returned empty.

Note: In the event of multiple selections, the command returns the position or reference of
the current item of list. The current item is the last item clicked by the user (manual selections)
or the item set by the SELECT LIST ITEMS BY POSITION or SELECT LIST ITEMS BY REFERENCE
commands (programmed selection).

If the list has sublists, you apply the command to the main list (the one actually defined in
the form), not one of its sublists. The positions are expressed relative to the top item of the
main list, using the current expanded/collapsed state of the list and its sublist.

In any case, if no items are selected, the function returns 0.

Examples
Here a list named hList, shown in the Application environment:

$vlItemPos:=Selected list items(hList) ` at this point $vlItemPos gets 2

4D Language Reference 749

 $vlItemPos:=Selected list items(hList) ` at this point $vlItemPos gets 5
$vlItemRef:=Selected list items(hList;*) ` $vlItemRef gets 200 (for instance)

$vlItemPos:=Selected list items(hList) ` at this point $vlItemPos gets 8

$vlItemRef:=Selected list items(hList;*) ` $vlItemRef gets 203 (for instance)

$vlItemPos:=Selected list items(hList;$arrPos) ` at this point, $vlItemPos gets 3

` $arrPos{1} gets 3, $arrPos{2} gets 4 and $arrPos{3} gets 5

750 4D Language Reference

 $vlItemRef:=Selected list items(hList;$arrRefs;*) ` $vlItemRef gets 203 (for instance)
` $arrRefs{1} gets 101, $arrRefs{2} gets 203 (for instance)

See Also
SELECT LIST ITEMS BY POSITION, SELECT LIST ITEMS BY REFERENCE.

4D Language Reference 751

SET LIST ITEM Hierarchical Lists

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET LIST ITEM (list; itemRef | *; newItemText; newItemRef{; sublist; expanded})

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, list is an object name (string)
If omitted, list is a list reference number
list ListRef | String → List reference number (if * omitted), or
Name of list type object (if * passed)
itemRef | * Longint | * → Item reference number,
or 0 for last item appended to the list,
or * for the current item in the list
newItemText String → New item text
newItemRef Longint → New item reference number
sublist ListRef → New sublist attached to item, or
0 for no sublist (detaching current one, if any), or
-1 for no change
expanded Boolean → Indicates if the optional sublist will be expanded or
collapsed

Description
The SET LIST ITEM command modifies the item designated by the itemRef parameter within the
list whose reference number or object name is passed in list.

If you pass the first optional * parameter, you indicate that the list parameter is an object name
(string) corresponding to a representation of the list in the form. If you do not pass this
parameter, you indicate that the list parameter is a hierarchical list reference (ListRef). If you
only use a single representation of the list or work with structural items (the second * is
omitted), you can use either syntax. Conversely, if you use several representations of the same
list and work with the current item (the second * is passed), the syntax based on the object
name is required since each representation can have its own current item.

You can pass a reference number in itemRef. If there is no item with the item reference
number you passed, the command does nothing. You can optionally pass 0 in itemRef to
designate the last item added to the list using APPEND TO LIST.
Lastly, you can pass * in itemRef: in this case, the command will apply to the current item of
the list. If several items are selected manually, the current item is the one that was selected
last. If no item is selected, the command does nothing.

752 4D Language Reference

If you work with item reference numbers, build a list in which the items have unique
reference numbers, otherwise you will not be able to distinguish the items. For more
information, refer to the Managing Hierarchical Lists section.

You pass the new text for the item in newItemText. To change the item reference number, pass
the new value in newItemRef; otherwise, pass the same value as itemRef.
To attach a list to the item, pass the list reference number in subList. In this case, you also
specify if the newly sublist is expanded by passing TRUE in expanded; otherwise, pass FALSE.

To detach a sublist already attached to the item, pass 0 (zero) in sublist. In this case, it is a good
idea to have previously obtained the reference number of that list using GET LIST ITEM, so you
can later delete the sublist using CLEAR LIST, if you no longer need it.

If you do not want to change the sublist property of the item, pass -1 in sublist.

Note: Even if they are optional, both the sublist and expanded parameters must be passed
jointly.

Examples
1. hList is a list whose items have unique reference numbers. The following object method for
a button adds a child item to the current selected list item.

$vlItemPos:=Selected list items(hList)

If ($vlItemPos>0)
GET LIST ITEM(hList;$vlItemPos;$vlItemRef;$vsItemText;$hSublist;$vbExpanded)
$vbNewSubList:=Not(Is a list($hSublist))
If ($vbNewSubList)
$hSublist:=New list
End if
vlUniqueRef:=vlUniqueRef+1
APPEND TO LIST($hSubList;"New Item";vlUniqueRef)
If ($vbNewSubList)
SET LIST ITEM(hList;$vlItemRef;$vsItemText;$vlItemRef;$hSublist;True)
End if
SELECT LIST ITEMS BY REFERENCE(hList;vlUniqueRef)
End if
2. See example for the command GET LIST ITEM.
3. See example for the command APPEND TO LIST.
See Also
GET LIST ITEM, GET LIST ITEM PROPERTIES, SET LIST ITEM PROPERTIES.

4D Language Reference 753

SET LIST ITEM FONT Hierarchical Lists

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET LIST ITEM FONT ({*; }list; itemRef | *; font)

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, list is an object name (string)
If omitted, list is a list reference number
list ListRef | String → List reference number (if * omitted) or
Name of list type object (if * passed)
itemRef | * Longint | * → Item reference number or
0 for the last item added to the list or
* for the current item of the list
font String | Num → Font name or number

Description
The SET LIST ITEM FONT command modifies the character font of the item specified by the
itemRef parameter of the list whose reference number or object name is passed in list.

If you pass the first optional * parameter, you indicate that the list parameter is an object
name (string) corresponding to a representation of the list in the form. If you do not pass
this parameter, you indicate that the list parameter is a hierarchical list reference (ListRef). If
you only use a single representation of the list or work with structural items (the second * is
omitted), you can use either syntax. Conversely, if you use several representations of the
same list and work with the current item (the second * is passed), the syntax based on the
object name is required since each representation can have its own current item.

You can pass a reference number in itemRef. If this number does not correspond to any
item of the list, the command does nothing. You can also pass 0 in itemRef in order to
request the modification of the last item added to the list (using APPEND TO LIST).
Lastly, you can pass * in itemRef: in this case, the command will apply to the current item
of the list. If several items are selected manually, the current item is the one that was
selected last. If no item is selected, the command does nothing.
In the font parameter, pass the name or number of the font to be used. To reapply the
default font of the hierarchical list, pass an empty string in font.

Example
Apply the Times font to the current item of the list:

SET LIST ITEM FONT(*;"Mylist";*;"Times")

See Also
FONT, Get list item font.

754 4D Language Reference

SET LIST ITEM ICON Hierarchical Lists

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET LIST ITEM ICON ({*; }list; itemRef | *; icon)

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, list is an object name (string)
If omitted, list is a list reference number
list ListRef | String → List reference number (if * omitted) or
Name of list type object (if * passed)
itemRef | * Longint | * → Item reference number or
0 for the last item added to the list or
* for the current item of the list
icon Picture → Icon to be associated with item

Description
The SET LIST ITEM ICON command can be used to modify the icon associated with the item
specified by the itemRef parameter of the list whose reference number or object name is
passed in list.

Note: It is possible to modify the icon associated with an item using the SET LIST ITEM
PROPERTIES command. However, SET LIST ITEM PROPERTIES only accepts static picture
references (resource references or pictures from the picture library).

If you pass the first optional * parameter, you indicate that the list parameter is an object
name (string) corresponding to a representation of the list in the form. If you do not pass
this parameter, you indicate that the list parameter is a hierarchical list reference (ListRef). If
you only use a single representation of the list or work with structural items (the second * is
omitted), you can use either syntax. Conversely, if you use several representations of the
same list and work with the current item (the second * is passed), the syntax based on the
object name is required since each representation can have its own current item.

You can pass a reference number in itemRef. If this number does not correspond to an item
in the list, the command does nothing. You can also pass 0 in itemRef to indicate the last
item added to the list (using APPEND TO LIST).
Lastly, you can pass * in itemRef: in this case, the command will be applied to the current
item of the list. If several items are selected manually, the current item is the last one that
was selected. If no item is selected, the command does nothing.

Pass a valid 4D picture expression (field, variable, pointer, etc.) in the icon parameter. The
picture will be placed to the left of the item.

4D Language Reference 755

The use of pointers is particularly recommended since hierarchical lists are optimized in
this case: only one instance of the picture will be created in memory if the same icon is
used for several different list items.

Note: Conversely, the direct use of variables generated by the GET ICON RESOURCE or GET
PICTURE RESOURCE commands is not recommended because the icon will be duplicated in
memory for each item of the list.

Example
This code has been optimized thanks to the use of a pointer:

vIcon:=[Params]Icon
SET LIST ITEM ICON(mylist;ref1;vIcon->)
SET LIST ITEM ICON(mylist;ref2;vIcon->)

See Also
SET LIST ITEM PROPERTIES.

756 4D Language Reference

SET LIST ITEM PARAMETER Hierarchical Lists

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET LIST ITEM PARAMETER ({*; }list; itemRef | *; selector; value)

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, list is an object name (string)
If omitted, list is a list reference number
list ListRef | String → List reference number (if * omitted) or
Name of list type object (if * passed)
itemRef | * Longint | * → Item reference number or
0 for the last item appended to the list or
* for the current list item
selector String → Parameter constant
value String | Boolean | Num → Value of the parameter

Description
The SET LIST ITEM PARAMETER command can be used to modify the selector parameter for
the itemRef item of the hierarchical list whose reference or object name is passed in the list
parameter.

If you pass the first optional * parameter, you indicate that the list parameter is an object
name (string) corresponding to a representation of the list in the form. If you do not pass
this parameter, you indicate that the list parameter is a hierarchical list reference (ListRef). If
you only use a single representation of the list or work with structural items (the second * is
omitted), you can use either syntax. Conversely, if you use several representations of the
same list and the second * is passed, the syntax based on the object name is required since
each representation can have its own current item.

You can pass a reference number in itemRef. If this number does not correspond to an item
in the list, the command does nothing. You can also pass 0 in itemRef to indicate the last
item added to the list (using APPEND TO LIST).
Lastly, you can pass * in itemRef: in this case, the command will be applied to the current
item of the list. If several items are selected manually, the current item is the last one that
was selected. If no item is selected, the command does nothing.

In selector, you can pass the Additional text constant (found in the “Hierarchical Lists”
theme) or any custom value:
• Additional Text: This constant is used to add text to the right of the itemRef item. This
additional title will always be displayed in the right part of the list, even when the user
moves the horizontal scrolling cursor. When you use this constant, pass the text to be
displayed in value.

4D Language Reference 757

• Custom selector: You can also pass custom text and associate it with a value of the Text,
Number or Boolean type in selector. This value will be stored with the list item and may be
retrieved using the GET LIST ITEM PARAMETER command. This lets you set up any type of
interface associated with hierarchical lists. For example, in a list of customer names, you
can store the age of each person and only display it when the corresponding item is
selected.

See Also
GET LIST ITEM PARAMETER.

758 4D Language Reference

SET LIST ITEM PROPERTIES Hierarchical Lists

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET LIST ITEM PROPERTIES ({*; }list; itemRef | *; enterable; styles; icon{; color})

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, list is an object name (string)
If omitted, list is a list reference number
list ListRef | String → List reference number (if * omitted) or
Name of list type object (if * passed)
itemRef | * Longint | * → Item reference number, or
0 for last item appended to the list, or
* for the current list item
enterable Boolean → TRUE = Enterable, FALSE = Non-enterable
styles Number → Font style for the item
icon Number → ‘cicn’ Mac OS-based resource ID, or
65536 + ‘PICT’ Mac OS-based resource ID, or
131072 + Picture Reference Number
color Longint → RGB color value or
-1 = reset to original color

Description
The SET LIST ITEM PROPERTIES command modifies the item designated by the itemRef
parameter within the list whose reference number or object name is passed in list.

If you pass the first optional * parameter, you indicate that the list parameter is an object name
(string) corresponding to a representation of the list in the form. If you do not pass this
parameter, you indicate that the list parameter is a hierarchical list reference (ListRef). If you
only use a single representation of the list or work with structural items (the second * is
omitted), you can use either syntax. Conversely, if you use several representations of the same
list and work with the current item (the second * is passed), the syntax based on the object
name is required since each representation can have its own current item.

You can pass a reference number in itemRef. If there is no item with the item reference
number that is passed, the command does nothing. You can optionally pass 0 in itemRef to
modify the last item added to the list using APPEND TO LIST.
Lastly, you can pass * in itemRef: in this case, the command will apply to the current item of
the list. If several items are selected manually, the current item is the one that was selected
last. If no item is selected, the command does nothing.

4D Language Reference 759

If you work with item reference numbers, build a list in which items have unique reference
numbers, otherwise you will not be able to distinguish the items. For more information, refer
to the Managing Hierarchical Lists section.

Note: To change the text of the item or its sublist, use the command SET LIST ITEM.

To make an item enterable, pass TRUE in enterable; otherwise, pass FALSE.

Important: In order for an item to be enterable, it must belong to a list that is enterable. To
make a whole list enterable, use the SET ENTERABLE command. To make an individual list
item enterable, use SET LIST ITEM PROPERTIES. Changing the enterable property at the list level
does not affect the enterable properties of the items. However, an item can be enterable only if
its list is enterable.

You specify the font style of the item in the styles parameter. You pass a combination (one or a
sum) of the following predefined constants:

Constant Type Value

Plain Long Integer 0
Bold Long Integer 1
Italic Long Integer 2
Underline Long Integer 4

To associate an icon to the item, pass one of the following numeric values:
• N, where N is the resource ID of Mac OS-based ‘cicn’ resource
• Use PICT resource+N, where N is the the resource ID of a Mac OS-based ‘PICT’ resource
• Use PicRef+N, where N is the reference number of a Picture from the Design environment
Picture Library

Pass zero (0), if you do not want any graphic for the item.

Notes:
• Use PICT resource and Use PicRef are predefined constants located in the Hierarchical Lists
theme.
• If you want to use 4D picture expressions (fields, variables, etc.) to specify the icons of the
items, use the SET LIST ITEM ICON command.

The color parameter (optional) lets you modify the color of the item text. The color must be
specified in the form of an RGB color, i.e. a 4-byte longint in the 0x00RRGGBB format. For
more information about this format, refer to the description of the SET RGB COLORS
command. Pass -1 in the color parameter to reset the original color of the item.

760 4D Language Reference

Examples
1. See the example for the command APPEND TO LIST.

2. The following example changes the text of the current item of list to bold and bright red:

SET LIST ITEM PROPERTIES(list;*;True;Bold;0;0x00FF0000)

See Also
GET LIST ITEM PROPERTIES, SET LIST ITEM, SET LIST ITEM ICON.

4D Language Reference 761

SET LIST PROPERTIES Hierarchical Lists

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET LIST PROPERTIES (list; appearance{; icon{; lineHeight{; doubleClick{; multiSelections{;

editable}}}}})

Parameter Type Description

list ListRef → List reference number
appearance Number → Graphical style of the list
1 = Hierarchical list a la Macintosh
2 = Hierarchical list a la Windows
0 = Auto appearance depending on platform
icon Number → ‘cicn’ Mac OS-based resource ID or
0 for default platform node icon
lineHeight Number → Minimal line height expressed in pixels
doubleClick Longint → Expand/Collapse sublist on double-click
0 = Yes, 1= No
multiSelections Longint → Multiple selections: 0 = No (default), 1 = Yes
editable Longint → 0 = List is not editable by user,
1 = List is editable by user (default)

Description
The SET LIST PROPERTIES command sets the appearance of the hierarchical list whose list
reference you pass in list.

The parameter appearance can be one of the following predefined constants provided by 4D in
the Hierarchical Lists theme:

Constant Type Value

ala Macintosh Long Integer 1
ala Windows Long Integer 2

In the Windows appearance, the list has connecting dotted lines between the nodes and
branches. One icon (+) denotes the collapsed nodes, a second one (–) the expanded nodes.
Nodes without child items have no icon.

762 4D Language Reference

Here is a default hierarchical list in Windows appearance:

In the Macintosh appearance, the list has no connecting dotted lines. One icon denotes the
collapsed nodes, a second one the expanded nodes. Nodes without child items have no icon.
Here is a default hierachical list in Macintosh appearance:

4D Language Reference 763

If you display a hierarchical list object without calling SET LIST PROPERTIES or pass 0 in the
appearence parameter, the list appears with the default Windows or Macintosh appearances,
depending on the Platform Interface property choosen for the object in the Design
environment's Form Editor.

The parameter icon indicates the icons that will be displayed for each node. The value passed
in icon sets the icon for collapsed nodes and icon+1 sets the icon for expanded nodes.

For example, if you pass 15000, the color icon 'cicn' ID=15000 will be displayed for each
collapsed node and the color icon 'cicn' ID=15001 will be displayed for each expanded node.

It is therefore important to have these 'cicn' color icon resources present in your database
structure file. If a color icon resource is missing, the corresponding nodes are displayed with
no icons. (You can actually take advantage of this to display a list with no icons.)

WARNING: When creating 'cicn' color icon resources, use resource IDs greater than or equal to
15000. Resource IDs less than 15000 are reserved for 4D.

The resource IDs of the default Macintosh and Windows nodes are expressed by the following
predefined constants provided by 4D:

Constant Type Value

Macintosh node Long Integer 860
Windows node Long Integer 138

In other words, 4D provides the following 'cicn' resources:

ID Number Description
860 Collapsed node a la Macintosh
861 Expanded node a la Macintosh
138 Collapsed node a la Windows
139 Expanded node a la Windows

If you do not pass the parameter icon or pass 0, the nodes are displayed with the default icons
of the chosen appearance type.

Color icon resources can be of various sizes. For example, you can create 16x16 or 32x32 color
icons.

764 4D Language Reference

If you do not pass the parameter lineHeight, the line height of a hierarchical list is determined
by the font and font size used for the object. If you use a color icons that is too tall or too
wide, it will be displayed truncated and/or will be overidden by the connecting dotted lines (if
appearance is Windows), as well as by the text of the nodes above or below it.

Choose color icon size, font, and font size accordingly, otherwise pass in the parameter
lineHeight the minimal line height of the hierarchical list. If the value you pass is greater than
the line height derived from the font and font size used, the line height of the hierarchical list
will be forced to the value you pass.

Note: SET LIST PROPERTIES affects the way nodes are displayed in the hierarchical list. If you
would rather customize the icon of each item in the list, use the command SET LIST ITEM
PROPERTIES.

The optional parameter doubleClick allows you to define that a double-click on a parent list
item will not provoke the sublist to expand or to collapse. By default, a double-click on a
parent list item provokes its child list to expand or to collapse. However, some user interfaces
may need to deactivate this behavior. To do this, the doubleClick parameter should be set to 1.
Only double-click will be deactivated. Users will still be able to expand or collapse sublists by
clicking on the list node.
If you omit the doubleClick parameter or pass 0, default behavior will be applied.

The optional multiSelections parameter lets you indicate whether the list must accept multiple
selections.
By default, as in previous versions of 4D, you cannot simultaneously select several items of a
hierarchical list. If you would like this function to be available for the list, pass the value 1 in
the multiSelections parameter. In that case, multiple selections can be used:
- manually, using the Shift+click key combination for a continuous selection or Ctrl+click
(Windows) / Command+click (Mac OS) for a discontinuous selection,
- by programming, using the SELECT LIST ITEMS BY POSITION and SELECT LIST ITEMS BY
REFERENCE commands.
If you pass 0 or omit the multiSelections parameter, the default behavior will be applied.

The optional editable parameter lets you indicate whether the list must be editable by the user
when it is displayed as a choice list associated with a field or a variable during data entry.
When the list is editable, a Modify button is added in the choice list window and the user can
add, delete and sort the values through a specific editor.
If you pass 1 or omit the editable parameter, the list will be editable; if you pass 0, it will not
be editable.

4D Language Reference 765

Examples
The following hierarchical list has been defined in the Design environment List Editor:

Within a form, the hierarchical list object hlCities reuses that list with this object method:

Case of
: (Form event=On Load)
hlCities:=Load list("Cities")
SET LIST PROPERTIES(hlCities;vlAppearance;vlIcon)
: (Form event=On Unload)
CLEAR LIST(hlCities;*)
End case

766 4D Language Reference

In addition, the structure file of the database has been edited so it contains the following 'cicn'
color icon resources:

1. With the following line:

SET LIST PROPERTIES(hlCities;Ala Macintosh;Macintosh node)

The hierarchical list will look like this:

4D Language Reference 767

2. With the following line:

SET LIST PROPERTIES(hlCities;Ala Windows;Windows node)

The hierarchical list will look like this:

3. With the following line:

SET LIST PROPERTIES(hlCities;Ala Windows;20000)

The hierarchical list will look like this:

768 4D Language Reference

4. With the following line:

SET LIST PROPERTIES(hlCities;Ala Macintosh;20010)

The hierarchical list will look like this:

The 'cicn' color icon resources shown are then added to the structure file of the database:

5. With the following line:

SET LIST PROPERTIES(hlCities;Ala Windows;20020;32)

4D Language Reference 769

The hierarchical list will look like this:

See Also
GET LIST ITEM PROPERTIES, GET LIST PROPERTIES, SET LIST ITEM PROPERTIES.

770 4D Language Reference

SORT LIST Hierarchical Lists

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SORT LIST (list{; > or <})

Parameter Type Description

list ListRef → List reference number
> or < → Sorting order:
> to sort in ascending order, or
< to sort in descending order

Description
The SORT LIST command sorts the list whose reference number is passed in list.

To sort in ascending order, pass >. To sort in descending order, pass <. If you omit the sorting
order parameter, SORT LIST sorts in ascending order by default.

SORT LIST sorts all levels of the list; it first sorts the items of the list, then it sorts the items in
each sublist (if any), and so on, through all the levels of the list. This is why you will usually
apply SORT LIST to a list in a form. Sorting a sublist is of little interest because the order will be
changed by a call to a higher level.

SORT LIST does not change the current list item nor the current expanded/collapsed state of
the list and sublists. However, because the current item can be moved by the sorting
operation, Selected list items may return a different position before and after the sort.

4D Language Reference 771

Example
Given the list named hList, shown here in the Application environment:

After the execution of this code:

` Sort the list and it sublists in ascending order

SORT LIST(hList;>)

The list looks like:

After the execution of this code:

` Sort the list and it sublists in descending order

SORT LIST(hList;<)

772 4D Language Reference

The list looks like:

See Also
Selected list items.

4D Language Reference 773

774 4D Language Reference
21
______________________
Import and Export

4D Language Reference 775

776 4D Language Reference
EXPORT DATA Import and Export

version 2003 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

EXPORT DATA (fileName{; project{; *}})

Parameter Type Description

fileName String → Full path name of the export file
project BLOB → Contents of the export project
← New contents of the export project (if the *
parameter has been passed)
* * → Displays the export dialog box and updates
the project

Description
The EXPORT DATA command allows you to export data in the fileName file. 4D can export data
in the following formats: Text, Fixed length text, XML, SYLK, DIF, DBF (dBase), and 4D.

If you pass an empty string in fileName, EXPORT DATA displays the standard save file dialog
box, allowing the user to define the name, type, and location of the export file. Once the
dialog box has been accepted, the Document system variable contains the access path and the
name of the file. If the user clicks Cancel, the execution of the command is stopped and the
OK system variable is equal to 0.

• If you don’t pass the optional parameter project, the export dialog box is displayed. The user
can define the export parameters or load an existing export project.

Note: An export project contains all the export parameters such as the tables and fields to
export, delimiters, etc. You define these parameters in the export dialog box. A project can be
saved to disk and then loaded. For more information about the export dialog box, please refer
to the 4D Design Reference manual.

• If you pass a BLOB containing a valid export project to the project parameter, the export will
be directly performed, without the user intervening. The project must already be predefined in
the export dialog box, then saved. To do so, you have two possible solutions:
- Save the project to disk, then load it by using the DOCUMENT TO BLOB command, in a field
or a variable of type BLOB that you pass to the project parameter.

4D Language Reference 777

- Use the EXPORT DATA command with an empty project parameter and the optional
parameter *, then store the project parameter in a field of type BLOB (see below). This solution
allows you to save the project with the datafile without having to load it from a BLOB on disk.

The optional parameter *, if it is specified, forces the display of the export dialog box with the
parameters defined in project. This feature allows you to use a predefined project, while still
having the possibility to modify one or more of the parameters. Furthermore, the project
parameter contains, after closing the export dialog box, the parameters of the “new” project.
You can then store the new project in a BLOB field, on disk, etc.

If the export was successful, the OK system variable is equal to 1.

Example
This example creates an empty project and stores the parameters set by the user in the export
dialog box there:

C_BLOB($exportParams)
SET BLOB SIZE($exportParams;0) `Initialization of BLOB
EXPORT DATA("DocExport.txt";$exportParams;*) ` Display of the export dialog box

See Also
EXPORT DIF, EXPORT SYLK, EXPORT TEXT, IMPORT DATA.

System Variables and Sets

If the user clicks Cancel in the standard open file dialog box or in the export dialog box, the
OK system variable is equal to 0. If the export was successful, the OK system variable is equal
to 1.

778 4D Language Reference

EXPORT DIF Import and Export

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

EXPORT DIF ({aTable; }document)

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table from which to export data,or
Default table, if omitted
document String → DIF document to receive the data

Description
The EXPORT DIF command writes data from the records of the current selection of aTable in
the current process. The data is written to document, a Windows or Macintosh DIF document
on the disk.

The export operation is performed through the current output form. The export operation
writes fields and variables based on the entry order of the output form. For this reason, you
should use an output form that contains only the fields or enterable objects that you wish to
export. Do not place buttons or other extraneous objects on the export form. Subform objects
are ignored.

An On Load event is sent to the form method for each record that is exported. Use this event
to set the variables you may use in the export form.

The document parameter can name a new or existing document. If document is given the same
name as an existing document, the existing document is overwritten. The document can
include a path that contains volume and folder names. If you pass an empty string, the
standard Save File dialog box is displayed. If the user cancels this dialog, the export operation
is canceled, and the OK system variable is set to 0.

A progress thermometer is displayed during export. The user can cancel the operation by
clicking a Stop button. If the export is successfully completed, the OK system variable is set to
1. If the operation is canceled or an error occurs, the OK system variable is set to 0. The
thermometer can be hidden with the MESSAGES OFF command.

4D Language Reference 779

In Unicode mode (standard mode), the command uses the default UTF-8 character set. You
can use the USE CHARACTER SET command to change this character set.
In ASCII compatibility mode, the export operation is made using the default ASCII map for
the platform on which it is executed, unless the command USE CHARACTER SET is used prior to
the export.

When using EXPORT DIF, the default field delimiter is the tab character (code 9). The default
record delimiter is the carriage return (code 13). You can modify these values by assigning new
values to the two system variables FldDelimit and RecDelimit. The user can change these default
values in the export dialog box of the Design mode. Since Text fields can contain carriage
returns, be careful if you use the carriage return as the field delimiter for fields to be exported.

Example
The following example exports data to a DIF document. The method first sets the output form
so that the data will be exported through the correct form, then performs the export:

OUTPUT FORM([People];"Export")
EXPORT DIF([People];"NewPeople.dif"") ` Export to the "NewPeople.dif" document

See Also
EXPORT SYLK, EXPORT TEXT, IMPORT DIF, USE CHARACTER SET.

System Variables and Sets

OK is set to 1 if the export is successfully completed; otherwise, it is set to 0.

780 4D Language Reference

EXPORT SYLK Import and Export

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

EXPORT SYLK ({aTable; }document)

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table from which to export data, or
Default table, if omitted
document String → SYLK document to receive the data

Description
The EXPORT SYLK command writes data from the records of the current selection of aTable in
the current process. The data is written to document, a Windows or Macintosh Sylk document
on the disk.

The export operation is performed through the current output form. The export operation
writes fields and variables based on the entry order of the output form. For this reason, you
should use an output form that contains only the fields or enterable objects that you wish to
export. Do not place buttons or other extraneous objects on the export form. Subform objects
are ignored.

An On Load event is sent to the form method for each record that is exported. Use this event
to set the variables you may use in the export form.

The document parameter can name a new or existing document. If document is given the same
name as an existing document, the existing document is overwritten. The document can
include a path that contains volume and folder names. If you pass an empty string, the
standard Save File dialog box is displayed. If the user cancels this dialog, the export operation
is canceled, and the OK system variable is set to 0.

A progress thermometer is displayed during export. The user can cancel the operation by
clicking a Stop button. If the export is successfully completed, the OK system variable is set to
1. If the operation is canceled or an error occurs, the OK system variable is set to 0. The
thermometer can be hidden with the MESSAGES OFF command.

4D Language Reference 781

In Unicode mode (standard mode), the command uses the default UTF-8 character set. You
can use the USE CHARACTER SET command to change this character set.
In ASCII compatibility mode, the export operation is made using the default ASCII map for
the platform on which it is executed, unless the command USE CHARACTER SET is used prior to
the export.

When using EXPORT SYLK, the default field delimiter is the tab character (code 9). The default
record delimiter is the carriage return (code 13). You can modify these values by assigning new
values to the two system variables FldDelimit and RecDelimit. The user can change these default
values in the export dialog box of the Design mode. Since Text fields can contain carriage
returns, be careful if you use the carriage return as the field delimiter for fields to be exported.

Example
The following example exports data to a SYLK document. The method first sets the output
form so that the data will be exported through the correct form, then performs the export:

OUTPUT FORM([People];"Export")
EXPORT SYLK([People];"NewPeople.slk") ` Export to the "NewPeople.slk" document

See Also
EXPORT DIF, EXPORT TEXT, IMPORT SYLK, USE CHARACTER SET.

System Variables and Sets

OK is set to 1 if the export is successfully completed; otherwise, it is set to 0.

782 4D Language Reference

EXPORT TEXT Import and Export

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

EXPORT TEXT ({aTable; }document)

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table from which to export data, or
Default table, if omitted
document String → Text document to receive the data

Description
The EXPORT TEXT command writes data from the records of the current selection of aTable in
the current process. The data is written to document, a Windows or Macintosh text document
on the disk.

The export operation is performed through the current output form. The export operation
writes fields and variables based on the entry order of the output form. For this reason, use an
output form that contains only the fields or enterable objects that you wish to export. Do not
place buttons or other extraneous objects on the export form. Subform objects are ignored.

An On Load event is sent to the form method for each record that is exported. Use this event
to set the variables you may use in the export form.

The document parameter can name a new or existing document. If document is given the same
name as an existing document, the existing document is overwritten. The document can
include a path that contains volume and folder names. If you pass an empty string, the
standard Save File dialog box is displayed. If the user cancels this dialog, the export operation
is canceled, and the OK system variable is set to 0.

A progress thermometer is displayed during export. The user can cancel the operation by
clicking a Stop button. If the export is successfully completed, the OK system variable is set to
1. If the operation is canceled or an error occurs, the OK system variable is set to 0. The
thermometer can be hidden with the MESSAGES OFF command.

In Unicode mode (standard mode), the command uses by default the UTF-8 character set. You
can use the USE CHARACTER SET command to change this character set.
In ASCII compatibility mode, the export operation uses the ASCII table of the platform on
which it is executed, except when the USE CHARACTER SET command was used prior to the
export.

4D Language Reference 783

Using EXPORT TEXT, the default field delimiter is the tab character (code 9). The default record
delimiter is the carriage return character (code 13). You can change these defaults by assigning
values to the two delimiter system variables: FldDelimit and RecDelimit. The user can change the
defaults in the Design environment Export Data dialog box. Text fields may contain carriage
returns, so be careful when using a carriage return as a delimiter if you are exporting text fields.

Example
This example exports data to a text document. The method first sets the output form so that
the data will be exported through the correct form, changes the 4D delimiter variables, then
performs the export:

OUTPUT FORM([People];"Export")
FldDelimit:=27 ` Set field delimiter to Escape character
RecDelimit:=10 ` Set record delimiter to Line Feed character
EXPORT TEXT([People];"NewPeople.txt") ` Export to the "NewPeople.txt" document

See Also
EXPORT DIF, EXPORT SYLK, IMPORT TEXT, USE CHARACTER SET.

System Variables and Sets

OK is set to 1 if the export is successfully completed; otherwise, it is set to 0.

784 4D Language Reference

IMPORT DATA Import and Export

version 2003 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

IMPORT DATA (fileName{; project{; *}})

Parameter Type Description

fileName String → Access path and name of the import file
project BLOB → Contents of the import project
← New contents of the import project (if the *
parameter has been passed)
* * → Displays the import dialog box and
updates the project

Description
The IMPORT DATA command allows you to import the data located in the fileName file. 4D can
import the data in the following formats: Text, Fixed length text, XML, SYLK, DIF, DBF
(dBase), and 4D.

If you pass an empty string to fileName, IMPORT DATA displays the standard save file dialog
box, allowing the user to define the name, type, and location of the import file. Once the
dialog box has been accepted, the Document system variable contains the access path and the
name of the file. If the user clicks Cancel, the execution of the command is stopped and the
OK system variable is set to 0.

• If you do not pass the optional parameter project, the import dialog box is displayed. The
user can define then import parameters or load an existing import project.

Note: An import project contains all the import parameters such as the tables and fields in
which to import, the delimiters to use, and so on. Those parameters are defined in the import
dialog box. An import project can be saved to disk to be loaded and used later. For more
information about the import dialog box, please refer to the 4D Design Reference manual.

• If you pass a BLOB containing a valid import project in the project parameter, the import
will be directly performed and will not require the user's intervention. The project must
already be predefined in the import dialog box, then saved. To do so, you have two possible
solutions:
- Save the project to disk, then load it, using the DOCUMENT TO BLOB command, in a BLOB
field or a BLOB variable that you pass in project.

4D Language Reference 785

- Use the IMPORT DATA command with an empty project parameter and the optional
parameter *, then store the project parameter in a BLOB field (see below). This solution allows
you to save the project with the datafile without having to load it from a BLOB located on the
disk.

Note: Refer to the EXPORT DATA command for an example concerning the definition of an
empty project.

The optional parameter *, if it is specified, forces the display of the import dialog box with the
import parameters set as they were defined in project. This feature allows you to use a
predefined project, while still having the possibility to modify one or more of the parameters.
Furthermore, the project parameter contains, after closing the import dialog box, the
parameters of the “new” project. You can then store the new project in a BLOB field, on disk,
and so on.

If the import was successful, the OK system variable is set to 1.

See Also
EXPORT DATA, IMPORT DIF, IMPORT SYLK, IMPORT TEXT.

System Variables and Sets

If the user clicks Cancel in the standard save file dialog box or in the import dialog box, the
OK system variable is set to 0. If the import was successful, the OK system variable is set to 1.

786 4D Language Reference

IMPORT DIF Import and Export

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

IMPORT DIF ({aTable; }document)

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table into which to import data, or
Default table, if omitted
document String → DIF document from which to import data

Description
The IMPORT DIF command reads data from document, a Windows or Macintosh DIF
document, into the table aTable by creating new records for that table.

The import operation is performed through the current input form. The import operation
reads fields and variables based on the layering of objects in the input form. For this reason,
you should be very careful about the front-to-back order of text objects (fields and variables) in
the form. The first object into which data will be imported should be in the back of the form,
and so on. If the number of fields or variables in the form does not match the number of fields
being imported, the extra ones are ignored. An input form used for importing cannot contain
any buttons. Subform objects are ignored.

Note: One way to ensure that the data is imported into the correct objects is to select the
object into which the first field should be imported and move it to the front. Continue to
move the fields and variables to the front, in order, making sure that you have one field or
variable for each field being imported.

An On Validate event is sent to the form method for each record that is imported. Use this
event to copy data from variables to fields, if you use variables in the import form.

The document parameter can include a path that contains volume and folder names. If you
pass an empty string, the standard Open File dialog box is displayed. If the user cancels this
dialog, the import operation is canceled, and the OK system variable is set to 0.

A progress thermometer is displayed during import. The user can cancel the operation by
clicking a Stop button. Records that have already been imported will not be removed if the
user presses the Stop button. If the import is successfully completed, the OK system variable is
set to 1. If an error occurs or the operation was interrupted, the OK variable is set to 0. The
thermometer can be hidden with the MESSAGES OFF command.

4D Language Reference 787

In Unicode mode (standard mode), the command uses the default UTF-8 character set. You
can use the USE CHARACTER SET command to change this character set.
In ASCII compatibility mode, the import operation is made using the default ASCII map for
the platform on which it is executed, unless the command USE CHARACTER SET is used prior to
the import.

When using IMPORT DIF, the default field delimiter is the tab character (code 9). The default
record delimiter is the carriage return (code 13). You can modify these values by assigning new
values to the two system variables FldDelimit and RecDelimit. The user can change these default
values in the export dialog box of the Design mode. Since Text fields can contain carriage
returns, be careful if you use the carriage return as the field delimiter for fields to be exported.

Example
The following example imports data from a DIF document. The method first sets the input
form so that the data will be imported through the correct form, then performs the import:

INPUT FORM([People]; "Import")

IMPORT DIF([People];"NewPeople.dif") ` Import from “NewPeople.dif” document

See Also
EXPORT DIF, IMPORT SYLK, IMPORT TEXT, USE CHARACTER SET.

System Variables and Sets

OK is set to 1 if the import is successfully completed; otherwise, it is set to 0.

788 4D Language Reference

IMPORT SYLK Import and Export

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

IMPORT SYLK ({aTable; }document)

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table into which to import data, or
Default table, if omitted
document String → SYLK document from which to import data

Description
The IMPORT SYLK command reads data from document, a Windows or Macintosh SYLK
document, into the table aTable by creating new records for that table.

The import operation is performed through the current input form. The import operation
reads fields and variables based on the layering of objects in the input form. For this reason,
you should be very careful about the front-to-back order of text objects (fields and variables) in
the form. The first object into which data will be imported should be in the back of the form,
and so on. If the number of fields or variables in the form does not match the number of fields
being imported, the extra ones are ignored. An input form used for importing cannot contain
any buttons. Subform objects are ignored.

Note: One way to ensure that the data is imported into the correct objects is to select the
object into which the first field should be imported and move it to the front. Continue to
move the fields and variables to the front, in order, making sure that you have one field or
variable for each field being imported.

An On Validate event is sent to the form method for each record that is imported. If you use
variables in the import form, use this event to copy data from variables to fields, .

The document parameter can include a path that contains volume and folder names. If you
pass an empty string, the standard Open File dialog box is displayed. If the user cancels this
dialog, the import operation is canceled, and the OK system variable is set to 0.

A progress thermometer is displayed during the import. The user can cancel the operation by
clicking a Stop button. Records that have already been imported will not be removed if the
user presses the Stop button. If the import is successfully completed, the OK system variable is
set to 1. If an error occurs or the operation was interrupted, the OK variable is set to 0. The
thermometer can be hidden with the MESSAGES OFF command.

4D Language Reference 789

In Unicode mode (standard mode), the command uses the default UTF-8 character set. You
can use the USE CHARACTER SET command to change this character set.
In ASCII compatibility mode, the import operation is made using the default ASCII map for
the platform on which it is executed, unless the command USE CHARACTER SET is used prior to
the import.

When using IMPORT SYLK, the default field delimiter is the tab character (code 9). The default
record delimiter is the carriage return (code 13). You can modify these values by assigning new
values to the two system variables FldDelimit and RecDelimit. The user can change these default
values in the export dialog box of the Design mode. Since Text fields can contain carriage
returns, be careful if you use the carriage return as the field delimiter for fields to be exported.

Example
The following example imports data from a SYLK document. The method first sets the input
form so the data will be imported through the correct form, then performs the import:

INPUT FORM([People]; "Import")

IMPORT SYLK([People];"NewPeople.slk") ` Import from “NewPeople.slk” document

See Also
EXPORT SYLK, IMPORT DIF, IMPORT TEXT, USE CHARACTER SET.

System Variables and Sets

OK is set to 1 if the import is successfully complete; otherwise, it is set to 0.

790 4D Language Reference

IMPORT TEXT Import and Export

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

IMPORT TEXT ({aTable; }document)

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table into which to import data, or
Default table, if omitted
document String → Text document from which to import data

Description
The IMPORT TEXT command reads data from document, a Windows or Macintosh text
document, into the table aTable by creating new records for that table.

The import operation is performed through the current input form. The import operation
reads fields and variables based on the layering of objects in the input form. For this reason,
you should be very careful about the front-to-back order of text objects (fields and variables) in
the form. The first object into which data will be imported should be in the back of the form,
and so on. If the number of fields or variables in the form does not match the number of fields
being imported, the extra ones are ignored. An input form used for importing cannot contain
any buttons. Subform objects are ignored.

Note: One way to ensure that the data is imported into the correct objects is to select the
object into which the first field should be imported and move it to the front. Continue to
move fields and variables to the front in order, making sure that you have one field or variable
for each field being imported.

An On Validate event is sent to the form method for each record that is imported. If you use
variables in the import form, use this event to copy data from variables to fields, .

The document parameter can include a path that contains volume and folder names. If you
pass an empty string, the standard Open File dialog box is displayed. If the user cancels this
dialog, the import operation is canceled, and the OK system variable is set to 0.

A progress thermometer is displayed during import. The user can cancel the operation by
clicking a button labeled Stop. Records that have already been imported will not be removed if
the user presses the Stop button. If the import is successfully completed, the OK system
variable is set to 1. If an error occurs or the operation was interrupted, the OK variable is set to
0. The thermometer can be hidden with the MESSAGES OFF command.

4D Language Reference 791

In Unicode mode (standard mode), the command uses by default the UTF-8 character set. You
can use the USE CHARACTER SET command to change this character set.
In ASCII compatibility mode, the import operation uses the ASCII table of the platform on
which it is executed, except when the USE CHARACTER SET command was used prior to the
import.

Using IMPORT TEXT, the default field delimiter is the tab character (code 9). The default record
delimiter is the carriage return character (code 13). You can change these defaults by assigning
values to the two delimiter system variables: FldDelimit and RecDelimit. The user can change the
defaults in the Design environment’s Import Data dialog box. Text fields may contain carriage
returns, therefore, be careful when using a carriage return as a delimiter if you are importing
text fields.

Example
The following example imports data from a text document. The method first sets the input
form so that the data will be imported through the correct form, changes the 4D delimiter
variables, then performs the import:

INPUT FORM([People]; "Import")

FldDelimit:=27 ` Set field delimiter to Escape character
RecDelimit:=10 ` Set record delimiter to Line Feed character
IMPORT TEXT([People];"NewPeople.txt") ` Import from “NewPeople.txt” document

See Also
EXPORT TEXT, IMPORT DIF, IMPORT SYLK, USE CHARACTER SET.

System Variables and Sets

OK is set to 1 if the import is successfully completed; otherwise, it is set to 0.

792 4D Language Reference

22
______________________
Interruptions

4D Language Reference 793

794 4D Language Reference
ABORT Interruptions

version 3

Note: You will rarely call this command.

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

ABORT

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
The ABORT command is to be used from within an error-handling project method installed
using the command ON ERR CALL.

If you do not have an error-handling project method, when an error occurs (for example, a
database engine error) 4D displays its standard error dialog box and then interrupts the
execution of your code. If the code being executed is:
• An object method, form method (or a project method called by a form or object method),
the control returns to the form currently being displayed.
• A method called from a menu, the control returns to the menu bar or to the form currently
being displayed.
• The master method of a process, the process then ends.
• A method called directly or indirectly by an import or export operation, the operation is
stopped. The same is true for sequential queries or order by operations.
• And so on...

If you use an error-handling project method to catch errors, 4D neither displays its standard
error dialog box nor interrupts the execution of your code. Instead, 4D calls your error-
handling project method (that you can see as an exception handler), and resumes the
execution to the next line of code in the method that triggered the error.

There are errors you can treat programmatically; for example, during an import operation, if
you catch a database engine duplicated value error, you can “cover” the error and pursue the
import. However, there are errors that you cannot process and errors that you should not
“cover.” In these cases, you need to stop the execution by calling ABORT from within the error-
handling project method.

4D Language Reference 795

Historical Note
Although the ABORT command is intended to be used only from within a error-handling
project method, some members of the 4D community also use it to interrupt execution in
other project methods. The fact that it works is only a side effect. We do not recommend the
use of this command in methods other than error-handling methods.

See Also
ON ERR CALL.

796 4D Language Reference

FILTER EVENT Interruptions

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

FILTER EVENT

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
You call the FILTER EVENT command from within an event-handling project method installed
using the ON EVENT CALL command.

If an event-handling method calls FILTER EVENT, the current event is not passed to 4D.

This command allows you to remove the current event (i.e., click, keystroke) from the event
queue, so 4D will not perform any additional treatment to the one you made in the event-
handling project method.

WARNING: Avoid creating an event-handling method that only calls the FILTER EVENT
command, because all the events are going to be ignored by 4D. In case you have an event-
handling method with only the FILTER EVENT command, type Ctrl+Shift+Backspace (on
Windows) or Command-Option-Shift-Control-Backspace (on Macintosh). This converts the
On Event Call process into a normal process that does not get any events at all.

Special case: The FILTER EVENT command can also be used within a standard output form
method when the form is displayed using the DISPLAY SELECTION or MODIFY SELECTION
commands. In this specific case, the FILTER EVENT command allows you to filter double-clicks
on the records (and in this way execute actions other than the opening of records in page
mode).
To do this, place the following lines in the output form method:

If(Form event=On Double Clicked)

FILTER EVENT
... `Process the double-click
End if

4D Language Reference 797

Example
See example for the command ON EVENT CALL.

See Also
ON EVENT CALL.

798 4D Language Reference

GET LAST ERROR STACK Interruptions

version 11.3 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET LAST ERROR STACK (codesArray; intCompArray; textArray)

Parameter Type Description

codesArray Number array ← Error numbers
intCompArray String array ← Internal component codes
textArray String array ← Text of errors

Description
The GET LAST ERROR STACK command returns information about the current stack of errors
of the 4D application. When a 4D statement causes an error, the current error stack
contains a description of the error as well as any series of errors generated. For example, a
"disk full" type error causes a write error in the file then an error in the record saving
command: the stack will therefore contain three errors. If the last 4D statement did not
generate an error, the current error stack is empty.

This generic command can be used to process any type of error that may occur in the 4D
application.

Note: However, to obtain detailed information concerning the errors generated by an

ODBC source, it will be necessary to use the SQL GET LAST ERROR command.

This command must be called from an on error call method installed by the ON ERR CALL
command.

The information is returned in three synchronized arrays:

• codesArray: This array receives the list of error codes generated.
• intCompArray: This array contains the codes of the internal components associated with
each error.
• textArray: This array contains the text of each error.

The list of error codes and their text is provided in the sections of the "Error Codes" theme.

See Also
ON ERR CALL, SQL GET LAST ERROR.

4D Language Reference 799

Method called on error Interruptions

version 6.8.1
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Method called on error → String

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result String ← Name of method called on error

Description
The Method called on error command returns the name of the method installed by the ON ERR
CALL command for the current process.

If no such method has been installed, an empty string ("") is returned.

Example
This command is particularly useful in the context of components because it enables you to
temporarily change and then restore the error-catching methods:

$methCurrent:=Method called on error

ON ERR CALL("NewMethod")
` If the document cannot be opened, an error is generated
$ref:=Open document("MyDocument")
` Reinstallation of previous method
ON ERR CALL($methCurrent)

See Also
ON ERR CALL.

800 4D Language Reference

Method called on event Interruptions

version 6.8.1
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Method called on event → String

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result String ← Name of method called on event

Description
The Method called on event command returns the name of the method installed by the ON
EVENT CALL command.

If no such method has been installed, an empty string ("") is returned.

See Also
ON EVENT CALL.

4D Language Reference 801

ON ERR CALL Interruptions

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

ON ERR CALL (errorMethod)

Parameter Type Description

errorMethod String → Error method to be invoked, or
Empty string to stop trapping errors

Description
The ON ERR CALL command installs the project method, whose name you pass in errorMethod,
as the method for catching (trapping) errors. This project method is called the error-handling
method or error-catching method.

The scope of this command is the current process. You can have only one error-handling
method per process at a time, but you can have different error-handling methods for several
processes.

To stop the trapping of errors, call ON ERR CALL again and pass the empty string in
errorMethod.

Once an error-handling project is installed, 4D calls the method each time an error occurs.

You can identify errors by reading the Error system variable, which contains the code number
of the error. Error codes are listed in the theme Error codes. For more information, see the
section Syntax Errors or Database Engine Errors. The Error variable value is significant only
within the error-handling method; if you need the error code within the method that
provoked the error, copy the Error variable to your own process variable.

The error-handling method should manage the error in an appropriate way or present an error
message to the user. Errors can be generated by:
• The 4D database engine; for example, when saving a record tries to duplicate a unique index
key.
• The 4D environment; for example, when you do not have enough memory for allocating an
array.
• The operating system on which the database is runs; for example, disk full or I/O errors.

802 4D Language Reference

The ABORT command can be used to terminate processing. If you don’t call ABORT in the error-
handling method, 4D returns to the interrupted method and continues to execute the
method. Use the ABORT command when an error cannot be recovered.

If an error occurs in the error-handling method itself, 4D takes over error handling. Therefore,
you should make sure that the error-handling method cannot generate an error. Also, you
cannot use ON ERR CALL inside the error-handling method.

ON ERR CALL is usually placed in the startup database method of an application, in order to
handle errors for this application. ON ERR CALL can also be placed at the start of a method in
order to handle errors specific to this method.

When an ON ERR CALL error-handling method is installed, it is not possible to trace a method
by using Alt+Click (on Windows) or Option-Click (on Macintosh). This is because Alt+Click
and Option-Click) generate an error (error code 1006) that immediately activates the ON ERR
CALL error-handling method. However, you can test this error code by calling TRACE.

Examples
1. The following project method tries to create a document whose name is received as
parameter. If the document cannot be created, the project metod returns 0 (zero) or the error
code:

` Create doc project method

` Create doc ( String ; Pointer ) -> LongInt
` Create doc ( DocName ; ->DocRef ) -> Error code result

gError:=0
ON ERR CALL("IO ERROR HANDLER")
$2->:=Create document($1)
ON ERR CALL("")
$0:=gError

The IO ERROR HANDLER project method is listed here:

` IO ERROR HANDLER project method

gError:=Error ` just copy the error code to the process variable gError

4D Language Reference 803

Note the use of the gError process variable to get the error code result within the current
executing method. Once these methods are present in your database, you can write:

` ...
C_TIME(vhDocRef)
$vlErrCode:=Create doc($vsDocumentName;->vhDocRef)
If ($vlErrCode=0)
`...
CLOSE DOCUMENT($vlErrCode)
Else
ALERT ("The document could not be created, I/O error "+String($vlErrCode))
End if

2. See example in the section Arrays and Memory.

3. While implementing a complex set of operations, you may end up with various subroutines
that require different error-handling methods. You can have only one error-handling method
per process at a time, so you have two choices:
- Keep track of the current one each time you call ON ERR CALL, or
- Use a process array variable (in this case, asErrorMethod) to “pile up” the error-handling
methods and a project method (in this case, ON ERROR CALL) to install and deinstall the error-
handling methods.

You must initialize the array at the very beginning of the process execution:

` Do NOT forget to initialize the array at the beginning

` of the process method (the project method that runs the process)
ARRAY STRING(63;asErrorMethod;0)

Here is the custom ON ERROR CALL method:

` ON ERROR CALL project method

` ON ERROR CALL { ( String ) }
` ON ERROR CALL { ( Method Name ) }

C_STRING(63;$1;$ErrorMethod)
C_LONGINT($vlElem)

804 4D Language Reference

 If (Count parameters>0)
$ErrorMethod:=$1
Else
$ErrorMethod:=""
End if

If ($ErrorMethod#"")
C_LONGINT(gError)
gError:=0
$vlElem:=1+Size of array(asErrorMethod)
INSERT IN ARRAY(asErrorMethod;$vlElem)
asErrorMethod{$vlElem}:=$1
ON ERR CALL($1)
Else
ON ERR CALL("")
$vlElem:=Size of array(asErrorMethod)
If ($vlElem>0)
DELETE FROM ARRAY(asErrorMethod;$vlElem)
If ($vlElem>1)
ON ERR CALL(asErrorMethod{$vlElem-1})
End if
End if
End if

Then, you can call it this way:

gError:=0
ON ERROR CALL("IO ERRORS") ` Installs the IO ERRORS error-handling method
` ...
ON ERROR CALL("ALL ERRORS") ` Installs the ALL ERRORS error-handling method
` ...
ON ERROR CALL ` Deinstalls ALL ERRORS error-handling method and reinstalls IO ERRORS
` ...
ON ERROR CALL ` Deinstalls the IO ERRORS error-handling method
` ...

4D Language Reference 805

4. The following error-handling method ignores the user interruptions:

` SHOW ONLY ERRORS project method

If (Error#1006)
ALERT ("The error "+String(Error)+" occurred.")
End if

See Also
ABORT, Method called on error.

806 4D Language Reference

ON EVENT CALL Interruptions

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

ON EVENT CALL (eventMethod{; processName})

Parameter Type Description

eventMethod String → Event method to be invoked, or
Empty string to stop intercepting events
processName String → Process name

Description
The ON EVENT CALL command installs the method, whose name you pass in eventMethod, as
the method for catching (trapping) events. This method is called the event-handling method
or event-catching method.

Tip: This command requires advanced programming knowledge. Usually, you do not need to
use ON EVENT CALL for working with events. While using forms, 4D handles the events and
sends them to the appropriate forms and objects.

Tip: Commands such as GET MOUSE, Shift down, etc., can be used for getting information
about events. These commands can be called from within object methods to get the
information you need about an event involving an object. Using them spares you the writing
of an algorithm based on the ON EVENT CALL scheme.

The scope of this command is the current working session. By default, the method is run in a
separate local process. You can have only one event-handling method at a time. To stop
catching events with a method, call ON EVENT CALL again and pass an empty string in
eventMethod.

Since the event-handling method is run in a separate process, it is constantly active, even if no
4D method is running. After installation, 4D calls the event-handling method each time an
event occurs. An event can be a mouse click or a keystroke.

The optional processName parameter names the process created by the ON EVENT CALL
command. If processName is prefixed with a dollar sign ($), a local process is started, which is
usually what you want. If you omit the processName parameter, 4D creates, by default, a local
process named $Event Manager.

4D Language Reference 807

WARNING: Be very careful in what you do within an event-handling method. Do NOT call
commands that generate events, otherwise it will be extremely difficult to get out of the event-
handling method execution. The key combination Ctrl+Shift+Backspace (on Windows) or
Command-Shift-Option-Control-Backspace (on Macintosh) converts the Event Manager
process into a normal process. This means that the method will no longer be automatically
passed all the events that occur. You may want to use this technique to recover an event-
handling gone wrong (i.e., one that has bugs triggering events).

In the event-handling method, you can read the following system variables—MouseDown,
KeyCode, Modifiers, MouseX, MouseY, and MouseProc. Note that these variables are process
variables. Their scope is therefore the event-handling process. Copy them into interprocess
variables if you want their values available in another process.

• The MouseDown system variable is set to 1 if the event is a mouse click, and to 0 if it is not.
• The KeyCode system variable is set to the code for a keystroke. This variable may return an
character code or a function key code. These codes are listed in the sections Unicode Codes
and ASCII Codes (and its subsections) as well as in the section Function Key Codes. 4D provides
predefined constants for the major ASCII Codes and for Function Key Codes. In the Explorer
window, look for the themes of these constants.
• The Modifiers system variable contains the modifier value. It indicates whether any of the
following modifier keys were down when the event occurred:

Platform Modifiers
Windows Shift key, Caps Lock, Alt key, Ctrl key, Right mouse button
Macintosh Shift key, Caps Lock, Option key, Command key, Control key

Notes
- The Windows ALT key is equivalent to the Macintosh Option key.
- The Windows Ctrl key is equivalent to the Macintosh Command key.
- The Macintosh Control key has no equivalent on Windows. However, a right mouse button
click on Windows is equivalent to a Control-Click on Macintosh.

The modifier keys do not generate an event; another key or the mouse button must also be
pressed. The Modifiers variable is a 4-byte Long Integer variable that should be seen as an array
of 32 bits. 4D provides predefined constants expressing bit positions or bit masks for testing
the bit corresponding to each modifier key. For example, to detect if the Shift key was pressed
for the event, you can write:

If (Modifiers ?? Shift key bit ) ` If the Shift key was down

or:
If ((Modifiers & Shift key mask)#0)` If the Shift key was down

808 4D Language Reference

Note: Under Windows, the value 128 is added to the Modifiers variable if the (left) button of
the mouse is released at the time of the event.

• The system variables MouseX and MouseY contain the horizontal and vertical positions of
the mouse click, expressed in the local coordinate system of the window where the click
occurred. The upper left corner of the window is position 0,0. These are meaningful only
when there is a mouse click.

• The MouseProc system variable contains the process reference number of the process in
which the event occurred (mouse click).

Important: The system variables MouseDown, KeyCode, Modifiers, MouseX, MouseY, and
MouseProc contain significant values only within an event-handling method installed with
ON EVENT CALL.

Example
This example will cancel printing if the user presses Ctrl+period. First, the event-handling
method is installed. Then a message is displayed, announcing that the user can cancel
printing. If the interprocess variable <>vbWeStop is set to True in the event-handling method,
the user is alerted to the number of records that have already been printed. Then the event-
handling method is deinstalled:

PAGE SETUP
If (OK=1)
<>vbWeStop:=False
ON EVENT CALL("EVENT HANDLER") ` Installs the event-handling method
ALL RECORDS([People])
MESSAGE("To interrupt printing press Ctrl+Period")
$vlNbRecords:=Records in selection([People])
For ($vlRecord;1;$vlNbRecords)
If (<>vbWeStop)
ALERT("Printing cancelled at record "+String($vlRecord)+" of "+
String($vlNbRecords))
$vlRecord:=$vlNbRecords+1
Else
Print form([People];"Special Report")
End if
End for
PAGE BREAK
ON EVENT CALL("") ` Deinstalls the event-handling method
End if

4D Language Reference 809

If Ctrl+period has been pressed, the event-handling method sets <>vbWeStop to True:

` EVENT HANDLER project method

If ((Modifiers ?? Command key bit) & (KeyCode = Period))
CONFIRM("Are you sure?")
If (OK=1)
<>vbWeStop:=True
FILTER EVENT ` Do NOT forget this call; otherwise 4D will also get this event
End if
End if

Note that this example uses ON EVENT CALL because it performs a special printing report using
the PAGE SETUP, Print form and PAGE BREAK commands with a For...End for loop.

If you print a report using PRINT SELECTION, you do NOT need to handle events that let the
user interrupt the printing; PRINT SELECTION does that for you.

See Also
FILTER EVENT, GET MOUSE, Method called on event, Shift down.

810 4D Language Reference

23
______________________
Language

4D Language Reference 811

812 4D Language Reference
Command name Language

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Command name (command) → String

Parameter Type Description

command Number → Command number

Function result String ← Localized command name

Description
The Command name command returns the literal name of the command whose command
number you pass in command.

4D integrates a dynamic translation of the keywords, constants, and command names used in
your methods. For example, if you use the English version of 4D, you write:
DEFAULT TABLE ([MyTable])
ALL RECORDS ([MyTable])
This same code, reopened with the French version of 4D, will read:
TABLE PAR DEFAUT ([MyTable])
TOUT SELECTIONNER ([MyTable])

However, 4D also includes a unique feature, the EXECUTE FORMULA command, which allows
you to build code on the fly and then execute this code, even though the database is compiled.

The example code, written with EXECUTE FORMULA statements in English, looks like:
EXECUTE FORMULA ( "DEFAULT TABLE([MyTable])")
EXECUTE FORMULA( "ALL RECORDS([MyTable])")

This same code, reopened with the French version of 4D, will then read:
EXECUTER FORMULE ( "DEFAULT TABLE([MyTable])")
EXECUTER FORMULE( "ALL RECORDS([MyTable])")

4D automatically translates EXECUTE FORMULA (English) to EXECUTER FORMULE (French), but

cannot translate the text statement you passed to the command.

4D Language Reference 813

If you use the EXECUTE FORMULA command in your application, you can use Command name
to eliminate international localization issues for statements you execute in this way, and thus
make your statements independent of language. The example code becomes:

EXECUTE FORMULA (Command name (46)+"([MyTable])")

EXECUTE FORMULA(Command name (47)+"([MyTable])")

With a French version of 4D, this code will read:

EXECUTER FORMULE(Nom commande (46)+"([MyTable])")
EXECUTER FORMULE(Nom commande (47)+"([MyTable])")

Note: To know the number of a command, refer to the Command Syntax by Name section.
Examples
1. For all the tables of your database, you have a form called “INPUT FORM” used for standard
data entry in each table. Then, you want to add a generic project method that will set this
form as the current input form for the table whose pointer or name you pass. You write:
` STANDARD INPUT FORM project method
` STANDARD INPUT FORM ( Pointer {; String })
` STANDARD INPUT FORM ( ->Table {; TableName })
C_POINTER ($1)
C_STRING (31;$2)

If (Count parameters>=2)
EXECUTE FORMULA(Command name (55)+"(["+$2+"];"INPUT FORM")")
Else
If (Count parameters>=1)
INPUT FORM ($1->;"INPUT FORM")
End if
End if

After this project method has been added to your database, you write:
STANDARD INPUT FORM (->[Employees])
STANDARD INPUT FORM ("Employees")

Note: Usually, it is better to use pointers when writing generic routines. First, the code will run
compiled if the database is compiled. Then, as in the previous example, your code can cease to
work correctly if you rename the table. However, in certain cases, using EXECUTE FORMULA
will solve the problem.

814 4D Language Reference

2. In a form, you want a drop-down list populated with the basic summary report commands.
In the object method for that drop-down list, you write:
Case of
: (Form event =On Before)
ARRAY TEXT (asCommand;4)
asCommand{1}:=Command name (1) ` Sum
asCommand{2}:=Command name (2) ` Average
asCommand{3}:=Command name (4) ` Min
asCommand{4}:=Command name (3) ` Max
` ...
End case

In the English version of 4D, the drop-down list will read: Sum, Average, Min, and Max. In the
French version, the drop-down list will read: Somme, Moyenne, Min, and Max.

See Also
Command Syntax by Name, EXECUTE FORMULA.

4D Language Reference 815

Count parameters Language

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Count parameters → Number

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Number ← Number of parameters actually passed

Description
The Count parameters command returns the number of parameters passed to a project method.

WARNING: Count parameters is meaningful only in a project method that has been called by
another method (project method or other). If the project method calling Count parameters is
associated with a menu, Count parameters returns 0.

Examples
1. 4D project methods accept optional parameters, starting from the right.
For example, you can call the method MyMethod(a;b;c;d) in the following ways:
MyMethod ( a ; b ; c ; d ) ` All parameters are passed
MyMethod ( a ; b ; c ) ` The last parameter is not passed
MyMethod ( a ; b ) ` The last two parameters are not passed
MyMethod ( a ) ` Only the first parameter is passed
MyMethod ` No Parameter is passed at all

Using Count parameters from within MyMethod, you can detect the actual number of
parameters and perform different operations depending on what you have received. The
following example displays a text message and can insert the text into a 4D Write area or send
the text into a document on disk:
` APPEND TEXT Project Method
` APPEND TEXT ( Text { ; Long { ; Time } } )
` APPEND TEXT ( Text { ; 4D Write Area { ; DocRef } } )

C_TEXT ($1)
C_TIME ($2)
C_LONGINT ($3)

816 4D Language Reference

 MESSAGE ($1)
If (Count parameters>=3)
SEND PACKET ($3;$1)
Else
If (Count parameters>=2)
WR INSERT TEXT ($2;$1)
End if
End if

After this project method has been added to your application, you can write:

APPEND TEXT (vtSomeText) ` Will only display the text message

APPEND TEXT (vtSomeText;$wrArea) ` Displays text message and appends it to $wrArea
APPEND TEXT (vtSomeText;0;$vhDocRef) ` Displays text message and writes it to $vhDocRef

2. 4D project methods accept a variable number of parameters of the same type, starting from
the right. To declare these parameters, you use a compiler directive to which you pass ${N} as a
variable, where N specifies the first parameter. Using Count parameters you can address those
parameters with a For loop and the parameter indirection syntax. This example is a function
that returns the greatest number received as parameter:
` Max of Project Method
` Max of ( Real { ; Real2... ; RealN } ) -> Real
` Max of ( Value { ; Value2... ; ValueN } ) -> Greatest value

C_REAL ($0;${1}) ` All parameters will be of type REAL as well as the function result
$0:=${1}
For ($vlParam;2;Count parameters)
If (${$vlParam}>$0)
$0:=${$vlParam}
End if
End for

After this project method has been added to your application, you can write:
vrResult:=Max of (Records in set("Operation A");Records in set("Operation B"))
or:
vrResult:=Max of (r1;r2;r3;r4;r5;r6)

See Also
Compiler Commands.

4D Language Reference 817

Current method name Language

version 6.7
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Current method name → String

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result String ← Calling method name

Description
The Current method name command returns the method name where it has been invoked.
This command is useful for debugging generic methods.

According to the calling method type, the returned string can be as follows:

Calling Method Returned string

Database Method MethodName
Trigger Trigger on [TableName]
Project Method MethodName
Form Method [TableName]FormName
Object Method [TableName]FormName.ObjectName

This command cannot be called from within a 4D formula.

Note: For this command to be able to operate in compiled mode, the database must have been
compiled with the Range Checking option (located in the application Preferences) selected.
In order to deactivate range checking in a method (or a part of a method) locally, you can use
the following special comments:
`%R- to deactivate range checking
`%R+ to activate range checking
`%R* to restore the initial state of range checking (defined in the Preferences).

818 4D Language Reference

EXECUTE METHOD Language

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

EXECUTE METHOD (methodName{; result | *{; param}}{; param2; ...; paramN})

Parameter Type Description

methodName String → Name of project method to be executed
result | * Variable | * ← Variable receiving the method result or
* for a method not returning a result
param Expression → Parameter(s) of the method

Description
The EXECUTE METHOD command causes the execution of the methodName project method
while passing any parameters in param1...paramN. You can pass the name of any method
that can be called from the database or the component executing the command.

In result, you can pass a variable which will receive the result of the execution of
methodName (value placed in $0 inside methodName). If the method does not return a
result, pass * as the second parameter. If the method does not return a result and does not
require any parameters to be passed, pass only the methodName parameter.

The execution context is preserved in the called method, which means that the current
form and any current form event remain defined.

If you call this command from a component and pass a method name belonging to the
host database in methodName (or vice versa), the method must have been shared (“Shared
by components and host database” option, in the Method properties).

See Also
EXECUTE FORMULA.

System Variables or Sets

If this command is executed correctly, the system variable OK is set to 1; otherwise, it is set
to 0.

4D Language Reference 819

Get pointer Language

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get pointer (varName) → Pointer

Parameter Type Description

varName String → Name of a process or interprocess variable

Function result Pointer ← Pointer to process or interprocess variable

Description
The Get pointer command returns a pointer to the process or interprocess variable whose name
you pass in varName.

To get a pointer to a field, use Field. To get a pointer to a table, use Table.

Note: You can pass expressions such as, for example, ArrName+"{3}" to Get pointer. However,
you cannot use 2D array elements (ArrName+"{3}{5}") or variable elements
(ArrName+"{myVar}").

Example
In a form, you build a 5 x 10 grid of enterable variables named v1, v2... v50. To initialize all of
these variables, you write:

` ...
For ($vlVar;1;50)
$vpVar:=Get pointer("v"+String($vlVar))
$vpVar->:=""
End for

See Also
Field, Table.

820 4D Language Reference

Is a variable Language

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Is a variable (aPointer) → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

aPointer Pointer → Pointer to be tested

Function result Boolean ← TRUE = Pointer points to a variable

FALSE = Pointer does not point to a variable

Description
The Is a variable command returns True if the pointer you pass in aPointer references a defined
variable. It returns False in all other cases (pointer to field or table, Nil pointer, and so on).

Starting with version 6, instead of using Is a variable, it will be more convenient to use RESOLVE
POINTER, which tells you about the nature of the referenced object, no matter what the object
is (including the case of Nil pointers).

See Also
Nil, RESOLVE POINTER.

4D Language Reference 821

Nil Language

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Nil (aPointer) → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

aPointer Pointer → Pointer to be tested

Function result Boolean ← TRUE = Nil pointer (->[])

FALSE = Valid pointer to an existing object

Description
The Nil command returns True if the pointer you pass in aPointer is Nil (->[]). It returns False in
all other cases (pointer to field, table or variable).

Starting with version 6, instead of using Nil, it will be more convenient to use RESOLVE
POINTER, which tells you about the nature of the referenced object, no matter what the object
is (including Nil pointers).

See Also
Is a variable, RESOLVE POINTER.

822 4D Language Reference

NO TRACE Language

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

NO TRACE

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
You use NO TRACE when checking the execution of methods during the development of a
database.

NO TRACE turns off the debugger engaged by TRACE, by an error, or by the user. Using NO
TRACE has the same effect as clicking the No Trace button in the debugger.

In compiled databases, the NO TRACE command is ignored.

See Also
TRACE.

4D Language Reference 823

RESOLVE POINTER Language

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

RESOLVE POINTER (aPointer; varName; tableNum; fieldNum)

Parameter Type Description

aPointer Pointer → Pointer for which to retrieve the referenced object
varName String ← Name of referenced variable or empty string
tableNum Number ← Number of referenced table or array element
or 0 or -1
fieldNum Number ← Number of referenced field or 0

Description
The RESOLVE POINTER command retrieves the information of the object referenced by the
pointer expression aPointer and returns it into the parameters varName, tableNum, and
fieldNum.

Depending on the nature of the referenced object, RESOLVE POINTER returns the following
values:

Referenced object Parameters

varName tableNum fieldNum
None (NIL pointer) "" (empty string) 0 0
Variable Name of the variable -1 0
Array Name of the array -1 0
Array element Name of the array Element number 0
Table "" (empty string) Table number 0
Field "" (empty string) Table number Field number

Notes:
• If the value you pass in pointer is not a pointer expression, a syntax error occurs.
• The RESOLVE POINTER command does not work with pointers to local variables. In fact, by
definition several local variables with the same name could exist in different locations, so it is
not possible for the command to find the correct variable.

824 4D Language Reference

Examples
1. Within a form, you create a group of 100 enterable variables called v1, v2... v100. To do so,
you perform the following steps:
a. Create one enterable variable that you name v.
b. Set the properties of the object.
c. Attach the following method to that object:
DoSomething (Self) ` DoSomething being a project method in your database
d. At this point, you can either duplicate the variable as many times as you need, or use the
Objects on Grid feature in the Form Editor.
e. Within the DoSomething method, if you need to know the index of the variable for which
the method is called, you write:
RESOLVE POINTER($1;$vsVarName;$vlTableNum;$vlFieldNum)
$vlVarNum:=Num(Substring($vsVarName;2))
Note that by constructing your form in this way, you write the methods for the 100 variables
only once; you do not need to write DoSomething (1), DoSomething (2)...,DoSomething (100).
2. For debugging purposes, you need to verify that the second parameter ($2) to a method is a
pointer to a table. At the beginning of this method, you write:

` ...
If (<>DebugOn)
RESOLVE POINTER($2;$vsVarName;$vlTableNum;$vlFieldNum)
If (Not(($vlTableNum>0)&($vlFieldNum=0)&($vsVarName="")))
` WARNING: The pointer is not a reference to a table
TRACE
End
End if
` ...

3. See example for the DRAG AND DROP PROPERTIES command.

See Also
DRAG AND DROP PROPERTIES, Field, Get pointer, Is a variable, Nil, Table.

4D Language Reference 825

Self Language

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Self → Pointer

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Pointer ← Pointer to form object (if any) whose method is
currently being executed.
Otherwise Nil (->[]) if outside of context

Description
The Self command returns a pointer to the object whose object method is currently being
executed.

Self is used to reference a variable within its own object method. It returns a valid pointer
when it is called from within an object method or from within a project method that is called
directly or indirectly by an object method.

If Self is called out of context, it returns a Nil pointer (->[]).

Tip: Self is useful when several objects on a form need to perform the same task, yet operate on
themselves.

Note: When it is used in the context of a list box, the function returns a pointer to the list box
or the column of the list box depending on the context. For more information, please refer to
the Managing List Box Objects section.

Example
See the example for the RESOLVE POINTER command.

See Also
RESOLVE POINTER.

826 4D Language Reference

TRACE Language

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

TRACE

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
You use TRACE to trace methods during the development of a database.

The TRACE command turns on the 4D Debugger for the current process. The debugger window
is displayed before the next line of code is executed, and continues to be displayed for each
line of code that is executed. You can also turn on the debugger by pressing Alt+Shift+right-
click (Windows) or Control+Option+Command+click (Macintosh) while code is executing.

In compiled databases, the TRACE command is ignored.

4D Server: If you call TRACE from a project method executed within the context of a Stored
Procedure, the debugger window appears on the Server machine.

Tip: Do not place TRACE calls when using a form whose On Activate and On Deactivate events
have been enabled. Each time the debugger window appears, these events will be invoked; you
will then loop infinitely between these events and the debugger window. If you end up in this
situation, Shift+click on the No Trace button of the debugger in order to get out of it. Any
subsequent calls to TRACE within the process will be ignored.

Example
The following code expects the process variable BUILD_LANG to be equal to “US” or “FR”. If
this is not the case, it calls the project method DEBUG:

` ...
Case of
: (BUILD_LANG="US")
vsBHCmdName:=[Commands]CM US Name

4D Language Reference 827

 : (BUILD_LANG="FR")
vsBHCmdName:=[Commands]CM FR Name
Else
DEBUG ("Unexpected BUILD_LANG value")
End case

The DEBUG project method is listed here:

` DEBUG Project Method

` DEBUG (Text)
` DEBUG (Optional Debug Information)

C_TEXT ($1)

If (<>vbDebugOn) ` Interprocess variable set in the On Startup Method

If (Is compiled mode)
If (Count parameters>=1)
ALERT ($1+Char(13)+"Call Designer at x911")
End if
Else
TRACE
End if
End if

See Also
NO TRACE.

828 4D Language Reference

Type Language

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Type (fieldVar) → Number

Parameter Type Description

fieldVar Field | Variable → Field or Variable to be tested

Function result Number ← Data type number

Description
The Type command returns a numeric value that denotes the type of the field or variable you
pass as fieldVar.

4D provides the following predefined constants:

Constant Type Value

Is Alpha Field Long Integer 0
Is String Var Long Integer 24
Is Text Long Integer 2
Is Real Long Integer 1
Is Float Long Integer 35
Is Integer Long Integer 8
Is LongInt Long Integer 9
Is Integer 64 bits Long Integer 25
Is Date Long Integer 4
Is Time Long Integer 11
Is Boolean Long Integer 6
Is Picture Long Integer 3
Is Subtable Long Integer 7
Is BLOB Long Integer 30
Is Undefined Long Integer 5
Is Pointer Long Integer 23
String array Long Integer 21
Text array Long Integer 18
Real array Long Integer 14
Integer array Long Integer 15

4D Language Reference 829

LongInt array Long Integer 16
Date array Long Integer 17
Boolean array Long Integer 22
Picture array Long Integer 19
Pointer array Long Integer 20
Array 2D Long Integer 13

Notes:
• Type returns 9 (Is LongInt) when applied to a Graph variable.
• Beginning with version 11 of 4D, Type returns the actual type of an array when it is applied
to a "row" of a 2D array, rather than Array 2D as before (see example 4).

You can apply Type to fields, interprocess variables, process variables, local variables, and
dereferenced pointers referring to these types of objects. You can apply Type to parameters
($1,$2..., ${...}), or to project method or function results ($0).

Examples
1. See example for the APPEND DATA TO PASTEBOARD command.

2. See example for DRAG AND DROP PROPERTIES command.

3. The following project method empties some or all of the fields for the current record of the
table whose a pointer is passed as parameter. It does this without deleting or changing the
current record:

` EMPTY RECORD Project Method

` EMPTY RECORD ( Pointer {; Long } )
` EMPTY RECORD ( -> [Table] { ; Type Flags } )

C_POINTER ($1)
C_LONGINT ($2;$vlTypeFlags)

If (Count parameters>=2)
$vlTypeFlags:=$2
Else
$vlTypeFlags:=0xFFFFFFFF
End if

830 4D Language Reference

 For ($vlField;1;Get last field number($1))
$vpField:=Field(Table($1);$vlField)
$vlFieldType:=Type($vpField->)
If ( $vlTypeFlags ?? $vlFieldType )
Case of
: (($vlFieldType=Is Alpha Field)|($vlFieldType=Is Text))
$vpField->:=""
: (($vlFieldType=Is Real)|($vlFieldType=Is Integer)|($vlFieldType=Is LongInt))
$vpField->:=0
: ($vlFieldType=Is Date)
$vpField->:=!00/00/00!
: ($vlFieldType=Is Time)
$vpField->:=?00:00:00?
: ($vlFieldType=Is Boolean)
$vpField->:=False
: ($vlFieldType=Is Picture)
C_PICTURE($vgEmptyPicture)
$vpField->:=$vgEmptyPicture
: ($vlFieldType=Is Subtable)
Repeat
ALL SUBRECORDS($vpField->)
DELETE SUBRECORD($vpField->)
Until(Records in subselection($vpField->)=0)
: ($vlFieldType=Is BLOB)
SET BLOB SIZE($vpField->;0)
End case
End if
End for
After this project method is implemented in your database, you can write:

` Empty the whole current record of the table [Things To Do]

EMPTY RECORD (->[Things To Do])

` Empty Text, BLOB and Picture fields for the current record of the table [Things To Do]
EMPTY RECORD (->[Things To Do]; 0 ?+ Is Text ?+ Is BLOB ?+ Is Picture )

` Empty the whole current record of the table [Things To Do] except
` Alphanumeric fields
EMPTY RECORD (->[Things To Do]; -1 ?- Is Alpha Field )

4D Language Reference 831

4. In certain cases, for example when writing generic code, you may need to find out whether
an array is a standard independent array or the “row” of a 2D array. In this case, you can use
the following code:

ptrmyArr:=->myArr{6} ` Is myArr{6} the row of a 2D array?

RESOLVE POINTER(ptrmyArr;varName;tableNum;fieldNum)
If(varName#"")
$ptr:=Get pointer(varName)
$thetype:=Type($ptr->)
` If myArr{6} is the row of a 2D array, $thetype equals 13
End if

See Also
Is a variable, Undefined.

832 4D Language Reference

24
______________________
List Box

4D Language Reference 833

834 4D Language Reference
Managing List Box Objects List Box

version 11.3 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The commands of this theme are dedicated to handling form objects of the List box type.
List boxes are comparable to Grouped Scrollable Areas. A list box provides all the functions
of grouped scrollable areas, notably the ability to represent data in the form of columns
and selectable rows. However, the list box does even more than that, including the ability
to enter values, sort columns, define alternating colors, etc.

You can set up a List box completely in the 4D Form editor and can also manage it through
programming. For more information on creating and setting List boxes in the Form editor
as well as on their use, refer to the Design Reference manual of the 4D documentation.
Programming List box objects is done in the same way as other 4D list form objects.
However, specific rules must be followed, as detailed in this section.

Note: List box objects are designed for screen interfaces only. They cannot be printed.

Data sources and principles for managing values

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

A list box can contain one or more columns and can be associated either with 4D arrays or
a selection of records. In the case of selection type list boxes, columns are associated with
fields or expressions.

4D Language Reference 835

It is not possible to have both types of data sources (arrays and selections) combined in the
same list box. The data source is set when the list box is created in the Form editor, via the
Property list. It is then no longer possible to modify it by programming.

Array type list boxes

In this type of list box, each column must be associated with a one-dimensional 4D array;
all array types can be used, with the exception of pointer arrays. The display format for
each column can be defined in the Form editor or by using the SET FORMAT command.

Using the language, the values of columns (data entry and display) are managed using high-
level List box commands (such as INSERT LISTBOX ROW or DELETE LISTBOX ROW) as well as
array manipulation commands.
For example, to initialize the contents of a column, you can use the following instruction:
ARRAY TEXT(ColumnName; size)

You can also use a list:

LIST TO ARRAY("ListName"; ColumnName)

Note: When a List box object contains several columns, each related array must have the
same size (same number of items) as the others, otherwise only the number of items of the
smallest array will be displayed.

Warning : When a list box contains several columns of different sizes, only the number of
items of the smallest array (column) will be displayed. You should make sure that each
array has the same number of elements as the others. Also, if a list box column is empty
(this occurs when the associated array was not correctly declared or sized using the
language), the list box displays nothing.

Selection type list boxes

In this type of list box, each column can be associated with a field or an expression. The
contents of each row is then evaluated according to a selection of records: the current
selection of a table or a named selection.

836 4D Language Reference

When the current selection is the data source, any modifications made on the database side
are automatically carried over to the list box and vice versa. The current selection is thus
always the same in both locations. Note that the INSERT LISTBOX ROW and DELETE LISTBOX
ROW commands cannot be used with selection type list boxes.
You can associate a list box column with an expression. The expression could be based on
one or more fields (for example [Employees]LastName+“ ”+[Employees]FirstName) or simply
be a formula (for example String(Milliseconds)). The expression can also be a project
method, a variable or an array element.
The SET LISTBOX TABLE SOURCE command can be used to modify the table associated with
the list box by programming.

Object, column and header

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

A List box object is composed of three separate items:

• the object itself,
• the columns,
• and the column headers.
These items can be selected individually in the Form editor. Each one has its own object
and variable name and can be handled separately.

By default, columns are named Column1 to X and headers are named Header1 to X in the
form, independently of the list box objects.

4D Language Reference 837

Each item type contains individual and shared characteristics with other items. For
example, character fonts can be globally assigned to the list box object or separately to
columns and headers. On the other hand, entry properties can only be defined for
columns.
These rules apply to the “Object properties” theme commands that can be used with list
boxes. Depending on its functionality, each command can be used with the list box,
columns and/or column headers. To set the type of item on which you want to work,
simply pass the name or the variable associated with it.
The following table details the scope of each command of the “Object properties” theme
that can be used with list boxes:
Object Properties commands Object Columns Column headers
MOVE OBJECT X
GET OBJECT RECT X
SET FILTER X
SET FORMAT X
SET ENTERABLE X
SET CHOICE LIST X
BUTTON TEXT X
SET COLOR X X
SET RGB COLORS X X
FONT X X X
FONT SIZE X X X
FONT STYLE X X X
SET ALIGNMENT X X X
Get alignment X X X
SET VISIBLE X X X
SET SCROLLBAR VISIBLE X
BEST OBJECT SIZE X X X

Notes:
• All the commands of the “List Box” theme apply only to List box objects, except for the
SET LISTBOX COLUMN WIDTH command (applies to object, column and header) and Get
listbox column width command (applies to column and header only).
• With array type list boxes, it is possible to specify the style, font color, background color
and visibility of each row separately. This is managed via arrays associated with the list box
in the Property List. You can retrieve the names of these arrays by programming using the
GET LISTBOX ARRAYS command.

List box and Language

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Object methods
It is possible to add an object method to the list box object and/or to each column of the
list box. Object methods are called in the following order:
1. Object method of each column
2. Object method of the list box
The column object method gets events that occur in its header.

838 4D Language Reference

SET VISIBLE and headers
When the SET VISIBLE command is used with a header, it is used on all List box object
headers, regardless of the header set in the command. For example, the SET
VISIBLE(*;"header3";False) instruction will hide all headers in the List box object to which
header3 belongs and not simply this header.

Focus object and Self

The Focus object (“User Interface” theme) and Self (“Language” theme) functions can be
used in the object method of a list box or a list box column. They return a pointer to the
list box, the list box column(1) or the header variable depending on the type of form event.
The following table details this functioning:
Event Focus object Self
On Clicked list box column
On Double Clicked list box column
On Before Keystroke column column
On After Keystroke column column
On After Edit column column
On Getting Focus column or list box (*) column or list box (*)
On Losing Focus column or list box (*) column or list box (*)
On Drop list box source list box (*)
On Drag Over list box source list box (*)
On Begin Drag Over list box list box (*)
On Mouse Enter list box (**) list box (**)
On Mouse Move list box (**) list box (**)
On Mouse Leave list box (**) list box (**)
On Data Change column column
On Selection Change list box (**) list box (**)
On Before Data Entry column column
On Column Moved list box column
On Row Moved list box list box
On Column Resize list box column
On Header Click list box header
On After Sort list box header
(*) When the focus is modified within a list box, a pointer to the column is returned. When
the focus is modified at the overall form level, a pointer to the list box is returned. In the
context of a column object method, a pointer to the column is returned.
(**) Not executed in the context of a column object method.

4D Language Reference 839

(1) When a pointer to a column is returned, the object pointed to depends on the type of
list box. With an array type list box, the Focus object function (“User Interface” theme)
returns a pointer to the column of the list box with the focus (i.e. to an array). The 4D
pointer mechanism allows you to see the item number of the modified array. For example,
supposing a user modified the 5th line of the column col2:
$Column:=Focus object
` $Column contains a pointer to col2
$Row:= $Column-> `$Row equals 5

For a selection type list box, the Focus object function returns:
• For a column associated with a field, a pointer to the associated field,
• For a column associated with a variable, a pointer to the variable,
• For a column associated with an expression, the Nil pointer.

SCROLL LINES
The SCROLL LINES command (“User Interface” theme) can be used with a list box. It scrolls
the list box rows so that the first selected row or a specified row is displayed.

EDIT ITEM
The EDIT ITEM command (“Entry Control” theme) allows you to pass a cell of a list box
object into edit mode.

Displayed line number

The Displayed line number command (“Selections” theme) functions in the context of the
On Display Detail form event for a list box object.

Form events
Specific form events are intended to facilitate list box management, in particular
concerning drag and drop and sort operations. For more information, refer to the
description of the Form event command.

Drag and drop

Managing the drag and drop of data in list boxes is supported by the Drop position and
DRAG AND DROP PROPERTIES commands. These commands have been specially adapted for
list boxes.
Be careful not to confuse drag and drop with the moving of rows and columns, supported
by the MOVED LISTBOX ROW NUMBER and MOVED LISTBOX COLUMN NUMBER commands.

Managing sorts
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

By default, the list box automatically handles standard column sorts when the header is
clicked. A standard sort is an alphanumeric sort of column values, alternately
ascending/descending with each successive click. All columns are always synchronized
automatically.
You can forbid standard user sorts by deselecting the “Sortable” property of the list box.

840 4D Language Reference

The developer can set up custom sorts using the SORT LISTBOX COLUMNS command and/or
combining the On Header Click and On After Sort form events (see the Form event
command) and array management 4D commands.

Note: The “Sortable” column property only affects the standard user sorts; the SORT
LISTBOX COLUMNS command does not take this property into account.

The value of the variable related to the column header allows you to manage additional
information: the current sort of the column (read) and the display of the sort arrow.
• If the variable is set to 0, the column is not sorted and the sort arrow is not displayed;

• If the variable is set to 1, the column is sorted in ascending order and the sort arrow is
displayed;

• If the variable is set to 2, the column is sorted in descending order and the sort arrow is
displayed.

You can set the value of the variable (for example, Header2:=2) in order to “force” the sort
arrow display. The column sort itself is not modified in this case; it is up to the developer
to handle it.

Managing selections
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Selections are managed differently depending on whether the list box is based on an array
or on a selection.

• Selection type list box: Selections are managed by a set called "Highlight Set." This set is
defined in the properties of the list box. It is automatically maintained by 4D: If the user
selects one or more rows in the list box, the set is immediately updated. On the other hand,
it is also possible to use the commands of the "Sets" theme in order to modify the selection
of the list box via programming.

• Array type list box: the SELECT LISTBOX ROW command can be used to select one or more
rows of the list box by programming.

The variable linked to the List box object is used to get, set or store selections of object
rows.
This variable corresponds to a Boolean array that is automatically created and maintained
by 4D. The size of this array is determined by the size of the list box: it contains the same
number of elements as the smallest array linked to the columns.

4D Language Reference 841

Each element of this array contains True if the corresponding line is selected and False
otherwise. 4D updates the contents of this array depending on user actions. Inversely, you
can change the value of array elements to change the selection in the list box.
On the other hand, you can neither insert nor delete rows in this array; you cannot retype
rows either.

Note: The Count in array command can be used to find out the number of selected lines.

For example, this method allows inverting the selection of the first row of the (array type)
list box:

ARRAY BOOLEAN(tBListBox;10)
` tBListBox is the name of the list box variable in the form
If (tBListBox{1} = True)
tBListBox{1}:= False
Else
tBListBox{1}:= True
End if

842 4D Language Reference

DELETE LISTBOX COLUMN List Box

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DELETE LISTBOX COLUMN ({*; }object; colPosition{; number})

Parameter Type Description

* → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)
colPosition Number → Column number to remove
number Number → Number of columns to be removed

Description
The DELETE LISTBOX COLUMN command removes one or more columns (visible or
invisible) in the list box set in the object et * parameters.

If you pass the optional * parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is an object
name (string). If you do not pass this parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is a
variable. In this case, you do not pass a string, but a variable reference. For more
information about object names, refer to the Object Properties section.

If you do not pass the optional number parameter, the command simply removes the
column set in the colPosition parameter.
Otherwise, the number parameter indicates the number of columns to remove to the right
starting from the column colPosition (this one included).

If the colPosition parameter is greater than the number of columns in the list box, the
command does nothing.

See Also
Get number of listbox columns, INSERT LISTBOX COLUMN.

4D Language Reference 843

DELETE LISTBOX ROW List Box

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DELETE LISTBOX ROW ({*; }object; position)

Parameter Type Description

* → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)
position Longint → Position of the row to delete

Description
The DELETE LISTBOX ROW command deletes the row number position (visible or not) from
the list box set in the object and * parameters.

Note: This command only works with list boxes based on arrays. When this command is
used with a list box based on a selection, it does nothing and the OK system variable is set
to 0.

If you pass the optional * parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is an object
name (string). If you do not pass this parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is a
variable. In this case, you do not pass a string, but a variable reference. For more
information about object names, refer to the Object Properties section.

Keep in mind that after command execution, there will no longer be any element selected
in the list box.

The position row is automatically removed from all the arrays used by the list box columns.
If the position value is higher than the total number of rows in the list box, the command
does nothing.

Note: This command does not take into account any hidden/displayed states of list box
rows.

See Also
Get number of listbox rows, INSERT LISTBOX ROW.

844 4D Language Reference

GET LISTBOX ARRAYS List Box

version 11.2 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET LISTBOX ARRAYS ({*; }object; arrColNames; arrHeaderNames; arrColVars; arrHeaderVars;

arrColsVisible; arrStyles)

Parameter Type Description

* → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)
arrColNames Array string ← Column object names
arrHeaderNames Array string ← Header object names
arrColVars Array pointer ← Pointers to column variables or
Pointers to column fields or Nil
arrHeaderVars Array pointer ← Pointers to header variables
arrColsVisible Array Boolean ← Visibility of each column
arrStyles Array pointer ← Pointers to arrays or
style, color and visibility variables or Nil

Description
The GET LISTBOX ARRAYS command returns a set of synchronized arrays providing
information on each column (visible or invisible) in the list box set in the object and *
parameters.

If you pass the optional * parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is an object
name (string). If you do not pass this parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is a
variable. In this case, you do not pass a string, but a variable reference. For more
information about object names, refer to the Object Properties section.

Once the command is executed:

• The arrColNames array contains the list of object names for each column in the list box.
• The arrHeaderNames array contains the list of object names for each column header in the
list box.
• The arrColVars array contains, for an array type list box, pointers toward variables (arrays)
associated with each column of the list box. For a selection type list box, arrColVars
contains:
- For a column associated with a field, a pointer to the associated field,
- For a column associated with a variable, a pointer to the variable,
- For a column associated with an expression, a Nil pointer.

4D Language Reference 845

• The arrHeaderVars array contains pointers toward variables associated with each column
header of the list box.
• The arrColsVisible array contains a Boolean value for each column, indicating whether the
column is visible (True) or hidden (False) in the list box.
• The arrStyles array contains, for an array type list box, four pointers to four arrays that
allow the applying of a specific style, font color, background color and a custom hidden
state to each row of the list box. These arrays are associated with the list box in the
Property List of the Design environment. If an array is not specified for the list box, the
corresponding item in arrStyles will contain a Nil pointer.
For a selection type list box, arrStyles contains:
- For each configuration set via a variable, a pointer to the variable,
- For each configuration set via an expression, a Nil pointer.

See Also
Get listbox information.

846 4D Language Reference

GET LISTBOX CELL POSITION List Box

version 11.2 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET LISTBOX CELL POSITION ({*; }object; column; row{; colVar})

Parameter Type Description

* → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)
column Longint ← Column number
row Longint ← Row number
colVar Pointer ← Pointer to column variable

Description
The GET LISTBOX CELL POSITION command returns the numbers of the column and the row
that correspond to the location of the last mouse click or the last selection made via the
keyboard in the listbox designated by * and object.
This command returns the coordinates of a click or a selection action even when data entry
is not allowed in the list box.

Note: The number returned in the row parameter does not take into account any
hidden/displayed states of list box rows.

If you pass the optional * parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is an object
name (a string). If you omit this parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is a
variable.

The optional colVar parameter returns a pointer to the variable (i.e. array) associated with
the column.

This command can only be called in the framework of a list box that generates one of the
following form events:
• On Clicked and On Double Clicked
• On Before Keystroke and On After Keystroke
• On After Edit
• On Getting Focus and On Losing Focus
• On Data Change
• On Selection Change
• On Before Data Entry
When the command is called outside of this context, GET LISTBOX CELL POSITION returns 0
in both column and row.

4D Language Reference 847

This command takes into account any selection or deselection actions whether by mouse
click, via keyboard keys, or using the EDIT ITEM command (which can generate the On
Getting Focus event).

If the selection is modified using the arrow keys of the keyboard, column returns 0. In this
case, if it is passed, the colVar parameter returns Nil.

The values returned by the command are not updated in the case of a right mouse click (or
Control+click under Mac OS) on the header of a list box column..

848 4D Language Reference

Get listbox column width List Box

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get listbox column width ({*; }object) → Integer

Parameter Type Description

* → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)

Function result Integer ← Column width (in pixels)

Description
The Get listbox column width command returns the width (in pixels) of the column set in
the object and * parameters. You can pass either a list box column or a column header in
the object parameter.

If you pass the optional * parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is an object
name (string). If you do not pass this parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is a
variable. In this case, you do not pass a string, but a variable reference. For more
information about object names, refer to the Object Properties section.

See Also
SET LISTBOX COLUMN WIDTH.

4D Language Reference 849

Get listbox information List Box

version 2004.1 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get listbox information ({*; }object; info) → Longint

Parameter Type Description

* → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)
info Longint → Information to get

Function result Longint ← Current value

Description
The Get listbox information command returns various information regarding the current
visibility and size of headers and scrollbars in the list box object set using the object and *
parameters.

If you pass the optional * parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is an object
name (string). If you do not pass this parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is a
variable. In this case, you do not pass a string, but a variable reference. For more
information about object names, refer to the Object Properties section.

In the dans info parameter, pass a value indicating the type of information that you want to
get. You can use a value or one of the following constants from the “List box” theme:
Constant Type Value Returned value(s)
Display listbox header Longint 0 0=hidden, 1=shown
Listbox header height Longint 1 Height in pixels
Display listbox hor scrollbar Longint 2 0=hidden, 1=shown
Listbox hor scrollbar height Longint 3 Height in pixels
Display listbox ver scrollbar Longint 4 0=hidden, 1=shown
Listbox ver scrollbar width Longint 5 Width in pixels
Position listbox hor scrollbar Longint 6 Position of the cursor in pixels
Position listbox ver scrollbar Longint 7 Position of the cursor in pixels

• The first six constants are useful for calculating the actual size of a list box area in a form.
• When you use the constants Position listbox hor scrollbar or Position listbox ver
scrollbar, the Get listbox information command returns the position of the scrolling cursor
in relation to its original position, i.e. the size of the hidden part of the window, expressed
in pixels. By default, this position corresponds to 0. Combined, for example, with
information concerning the row height, this value lets you find out the contents displayed
in the listbox.

850 4D Language Reference

Example
Given a list box containing rows with a height of 20 pixels each. You execute the following
statement:

$scroll:=Get listbox information(*;"Listbox";Position listbox ver scrollbar)

If, for instance, $scroll returns 200, you can conclude that the 11th row is currently the first
one displayed in the list box (200/20=10, thus 10 rows are hidden).

See Also
SET SCROLLBAR VISIBLE, SHOW LISTBOX GRID.

4D Language Reference 851

Get listbox rows height List Box

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get listbox rows height ({*; }object) → Integer

Parameter Type Description

* → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)

Function result Integer ← Row height (in pixels)

Description
The Get listbox rows height command returns the current row height (in pixels) in the list
box object set using the object and * parameters.

If you pass the optional * parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is an object
name (string). If you do not pass this parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is a
variable. In this case, you do not pass a string, but a variable reference. For more
information about object names, refer to the Object Properties section.

See Also
SET LISTBOX ROWS HEIGHT.

852 4D Language Reference

GET LISTBOX TABLE SOURCE List Box

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET LISTBOX TABLE SOURCE ({*; }object; tableNum{; name})

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)
tableNum Longint ← Table number of selection
name String ← Name of named selection or
"" for the current selection

Description
The GET LISTBOX TABLE SOURCE command can be used to find out the current source of the
data displayed in the listbox that is designated by the * and object parameters.

If you pass the optional * parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is an object
name (string). If you do not pass this parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is a
variable. In this case, you do not pass a string but a variable reference. For more
information about object names, please refer to the Object Properties section.

The command returns the number of the main table associated with the listbox in the
tableNum parameter and the name of any named selection used in the optional name
parameter.
If the rows of the list box are linked with the current selection of the table, the name
parameter, if passed, returns an empty string. If the rows of the list box are linked with a
named selection, the name parameter returns the name of this named selection.

If the list box is associated with arrays, tableNum returns -1 and name, if passed, returns an
empty string.

See Also
SET LISTBOX TABLE SOURCE.

4D Language Reference 853

Get number of listbox columns List Box

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get number of listbox columns ({*; }object) → Longint

Parameter Type Description

* → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)

Function result Longint ← Number of columns

Description
The Get number of listbox columns command returns the total number of columns (visible
or invisible) present in the list box set in the object and * parameters.

If you pass the optional * parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is an object
name (string). If you do not pass this parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is a
variable. In this case, you do not pass a string, but a variable reference. For more
information on object names, refer to the Object Properties section.

See Also
DELETE LISTBOX COLUMN.

854 4D Language Reference

Get number of listbox rows List Box

version 11.2 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get number of listbox rows ({*; }object) → Longint

Parameter Type Description

* → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)

Function result Longint ← Number of rows

Description
The Get number of listbox rows command returns the number of rows in the list box set in
the object and * parameters.

Note: Get number of listbox rows does not take the hidden/displayed state of the rows into
account. For example, in a list box with 10 rows where the first 9 rows are hidden, Get
number of listbox rows will return 10.

If you pass the optional * parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is an object
name (string). If you do not pass this parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is a
variable. In this case, you do not pass a string, but a variable reference. For more
information about object names, refer to the Object Properties section.

Note: If the arrays associated with the columns of a List box do not all have the same size,
only the number of items corresponding to the smallest array will appear in the list box
and thus be returned by this command.

See Also
DELETE LISTBOX ROW, INSERT LISTBOX ROW.

4D Language Reference 855

INSERT LISTBOX COLUMN List Box

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

INSERT LISTBOX COLUMN ({*; }object; colPosition; colName; colVariable; headerName;

headerVar)

Parameter Type Description

* → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is set) or
Variable (if * is omitted)
colPosition Number → Location of column to insert
colName String → Name of the column object
colVariable Array | Field | Var → Column array name or field or variable
headerName String → Name of the column header object
headerVar Integer variable → Column header variable

Description
The INSERT LISTBOX COLUMN command inserts a column in the list box set by the object
and * parameters.

If you pass the optional * parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is an object
name (string). If you do not pass this parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is a
variable. In this case, you do not pass a string, but a variable reference. For more
information about object names, refer to the Object Properties section.

The new column is inserted just in front of the column set using the colPosition parameter.
If the colPosition parameter is greater than the total number of columns, the column is
added after the last column.

Pass the name of the object and the variable of the inserted column in the colName and
colVariable parameters.
• With an array type list box, the name of the variable must match the name of the array
whose contents will be displayed in the column.
• With a selection type list box, you must pass a field or variable in the colVariable
parameter. The contents of the column will thus be the value of the field or variable,
evaluated for each record of the selection associated with the list box. This type of contents
can only be used when the “Data Source” property of the list box is Current Selection or
Named Selection (see the Management of List box objects section). You can use fields or
variables of the string, number, Date, Time, Picture and Boolean types.

856 4D Language Reference

In the context of list boxes based on selections, INSERT LISTBOX COLUMN can be used to
insert simple elements (fields or variables). If you want to handle more complex
expressions (such as formulas or methods), you must use the INSERT LISTBOX COLUMN
FORMULA command.

Note: It is not possible to combine columns of the array type (array data source) and those
of the field or variable type (selection data source) in the same list box.

Pass the object name and the variable of the inserted column header in the headerName
and headerVar parameters.

Note: Object names must be unique in a form. You must be sure that the names passed in
the colName and headerName parameters are not already used. Otherwise, the column is
not created and an error is generated.

Examples
1. We would like to add a column at the end of the list box:

C_LONGINT(HeaderVarName;$Last;RecNum)
ALL RECORDS([Table 1])
$RecNum:=Records in table([Table 1])
ARRAY PICTURE(Picture;$RecNum)

$Last:=Get number of listbox columns(*;"ListBox1")+1

INSERT LISTBOX COLUMN(*;"ListBox1";$Last;"ColumnPicture";Picture;"HeaderPicture";
HeaderVarName)

2. We would like to add a column to the right of the list box and associate the values of the
[Transport]Fees field with it:

$last:=Get number of listbox columns(*;"ListBox1")+1

INSERT LISTBOX COLUMN(*;"ListBox1";$last;"FieldCol";[Transport]Fees;"HeaderName";
HeaderVar)

See Also
DELETE LISTBOX COLUMN, INSERT LISTBOX COLUMN FORMULA.

4D Language Reference 857

INSERT LISTBOX COLUMN FORMULA List Box

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

INSERT LISTBOX COLUMN FORMULA ({*; }object; colPosition; colName; formula; dataType;
headerName; headerVariable)

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)
colPosition Number → Location of column to insert
colName String → Name of the column object
formula String → 4D formula associated with column
dataType Longint → Type of formula result
headerName String → Name of the column header object
headerVariable Integer variable → Column header variable

Description
The INSERT LISTBOX COLUMN FORMULA command inserts a column into the listbox
designated by the object and * parameters.
The INSERT LISTBOX COLUMN FORMULA command is similar to the INSERT LISTBOX
COLUMN command except that it can be used to enter a formula as the contents of a
column.
This type of contents can only be used when the “Data Source” property of the list box is
set to Current Selection or Named Selection (for more information about this, please refer
to the Managing List Box Objects section).

If you pass the optional * parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is an object
name (string). If you do not pass this parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is a
variable. In this case, you do not pass a string but a variable reference. For more
information about object names, please refer to the Object Properties section.

The new column is inserted just before the column designated by the colPosition parameter.
If the colPosition parameter is greater than the total number of columns, the column will be
added after the last column.

Pass the object name of the inserted column in the colName parameter.

858 4D Language Reference

The formula parameter can contain any valid expression, i.e.:
• An instruction,
• A formula generated using the Formula editor,
• A call to a 4D command,
• A call to a project method.

At the moment the command is called, the formula is parsed then executed.

Note: Use the Command name command in order to define formulas that are independent
from the application language (when they call on 4D commands).

The dataType parameter can be used to designate the type of data resulting from the
execution of the formula. You must pass one of the following constants of the “Field and
Variable Types” theme in this parameter:
Constant Type Valeur
Is Real Longint 1
Is Text Longint 2
Is Picture Longint 3
Is Date Longint 4
Is Boolean Longint 6
Is Time Longint 11

If the result of the formula does not correspond to the expected data type, an error is
generated.

In the headerName and headerVariable parameters, pass the object name and variable of the
column header inserted.

Note: Object names must be unique in a form. You need to make sure that the names
passed in the colName and headerName parameters are not already used. Otherwise, the
column is not created and an error is generated.

Example
We want to add a new column to the right of the list box that will contain a formula which
calculates an empolyee's age:

vAge:="Current Date-[Employees]BirthDate)\365"
$last:=Get number of listbox columns(*;"ListBox1")+1
INSERT LISTBOX COLUMN FORMULA(*;"ListBox1";$last;"ColFormula";vAge;Is Real;
"Age";HeaderVar)

See Also
INSERT LISTBOX COLUMN.

4D Language Reference 859

INSERT LISTBOX ROW List Box

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

INSERT LISTBOX ROW ({*; }object; position)

Parameter Type Description

* → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)
position Longint → Position of the row to insert

Description
The INSERT LISTBOX ROW command inserts a new row in the list box set in the object and *
parameters.

Note: This command only works with list boxes based on arrays. When this command is
used with a list box based on a selection, it does nothing and the OK system variable is set
to 0.

If you pass the optional * parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is an object
name (string). If you do not pass this parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is a
variable. In this case, you do not pass a string, but a variable reference. For more
information about object names, refer to the Object Properties section.

The row is inserted at the position set by the position parameter. A new row is automatically
added at this position in all the arrays used by the list box columns, whatever their type
and their visibility.

If the position value is higher than the total number of rows in the list box, the row is
added at the end of each array. If it is equal to 0, the row is added at the beginning of each
array. If it contains a negative value, the command does nothing.

See Also
DELETE LISTBOX ROW.

860 4D Language Reference

MOVED LISTBOX COLUMN NUMBER List Box

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

MOVED LISTBOX COLUMN NUMBER ({*; }object; oldPosition; newPosition)

Parameter Type Description

* → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)
oldPosition Number ← Previous position of the moved column
newPosition Number ← New position of the moved column

Description
The MOVED LISTBOX COLUMN NUMBER command returns two numbers in oldPosition and
newPosition indicating respectively the previous position and the new position of the
column moved in the list box, specified by the object and * parameters.

If you pass the optional * parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is an object
name (string). If you do not pass this parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is a
variable. In this case, you do not pass a string, but a variable reference. For more
information about object names, refer to the Object Properties section.

This command must be used with the form event On column moved (see the Form event
command).

Note: This command takes invisible columns into account.

See Also
Form event, MOVED LISTBOX ROW NUMBER.

4D Language Reference 861

MOVED LISTBOX ROW NUMBER List Box

version 11.2 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

MOVED LISTBOX ROW NUMBER ({*; }object; oldPosition; newPosition)

Parameter Type Description

* → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)
oldPosition Number ← Previous position of the moved row
newPosition Number ← New position of the moved row

Description
The MOVED LISTBOX ROW NUMBER command returns two numbers in oldPosition and
newPosition indicating respectively the previous position and the new position of the row
moved in list box, specified by the object and * parameters.

If you pass the optional * parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is an object
name (string). If you do not pass this parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is a
variable. In this case, you do not pass a string, but a variable reference. For more
information about object names, refer to the Object Properties section.

This command must be used with the form event On row moved (see the Form event
command).

Note: This command does not take into account any hidden/displayed states of list box
rows.

See Also
Form event, MOVED LISTBOX COLUMN NUMBER.

862 4D Language Reference

SELECT LISTBOX ROW List Box

version 11.2 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SELECT LISTBOX ROW ({*; }object; position{; action})

Parameter Type Description

* → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)
position Longint → Number of the row to select
action Longint → Selection action

Description
The SELECT LISTBOX ROW command selects the row whose number is passed in position in
the list box set in the object and * parameters.

If you pass the optional * parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is an object
name (string). If you do not pass this parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is a
variable. In this case, you do not pass a string, but a variable reference. For more
information about object names, refer to the Object Properties section.

The optional action parameter, if passed, is used to define the selection action to execute
when a selection of rows already exists in the list box. You can pass a value or one of the
following constants (located in the “List box” theme):
• Replace listbox selection (0): The row selected becomes the new selection and replaces the
existing selection. The command has the same effect as a user click on a row. This is the
default action (if the action parameter is omitted).
• Add to listbox selection (1): The row selected is added to the existing selection. If the row
specified already belongs to the existing selection, the command does nothing.
• Remove from listbox selection (2): The row selected is removed from the existing selection.
If the row specified does not belong to the existing selection, the command does nothing.

When the position parameter does not correspond exactly to an existing row number, the
command works as follows:
• If position is <0, the command does nothing, regardless of the action parameter value.
• If position is 0 and if the action parameter contains Replace listbox selection or is omitted,
all the rows of the listbox are selected. If the action parameter contains Remove from listbox
selection, all the listbox rows are deselected.

4D Language Reference 863

• If the position value is greater than the total number of rows contained in the listbox, the
Boolean array associated with the listbox is automatically resized and the selection action is
carried out. This mechanism means that you can use SELECT LISTBOX ROW with “standard”
array management commands (such as APPEND TO ARRAY) that do not cause immediate
synchronization of the listbox.
After execution of the method, the arrays are synchronized: if the source array of the
listbox has indeed been resized, the selection action is carried out. Otherwise, the Boolean
array associated with the listbox returns to its initial size and the command does nothing.

Notes:
• If you want the list box to scroll automatically in order to display the row selected, use
the SCROLL LINES command.
• To switch a row into editing mode (to allow data entry), use the EDIT ITEM command.
• If the number passed in position corresponds to a hidden row in the list box, the row is
selected but not displayed.

See Also
DELETE LISTBOX ROW, EDIT ITEM, INSERT LISTBOX ROW, SCROLL LINES.

864 4D Language Reference

SET LISTBOX COLUMN WIDTH List Box

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET LISTBOX COLUMN WIDTH ({*; }object; width)

Parameter Type Description

* → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)
width Integer → Column width (in pixels)

Description
The SET LISTBOX COLUMN WIDTH command allows you to modify through programming
the width of one or all column(s) of the object (list box, column or header) set using the
object and * parameters.

If you pass the optional * parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is an object
name (a string). If you do not pass this paraemter, you indicate that the object parameter is
a variable. In this case, you do not pass a string, but a variable reference. For more
information about object names, refer to the Object Properties section.

Pass the new width (in pixels) of the object in the width parameter.
• If object sets the list box object, all columns of the list box are resized.
• If object sets a column or a column header, only the column set is resized.

See Also
Get listbox column width.

4D Language Reference 865

SET LISTBOX GRID COLOR List Box

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET LISTBOX GRID COLOR ({*; }object; color; horizontal; vertical)

Parameter Type Description

* → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)
color Number → RGB color value
horizontal Boolean → Use color for horizontal grid lines
vertical Boolean → Use color for vertical grid lines

Description
The SET LISTBOX GRID COLOR command allows you to modify the color of the grid in the
list box object set using the object and * parameters.

If you pass the optional * parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is an object
name (string). If you do not pass this parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is a
variable. In this case, you do not pass a string, but a variable reference. For more
information about object names, refer to the Object Properties section.

Pass the RGB color value in color. For more information on RGB colors, refer to the
description of the SET RGB COLORS command.

The horizontal and vertical parameters allow you to set the grid lines to which you will
apply a color:
• If you pass True in horizontal, the color will be applied to horizontal grid lines. If you pass
False, their color is not changed.
• If you pass True in vertical, the color will be applied to vertical grid lines. If you pass False,
their color is not changed.

See Also
SET RGB COLORS, SHOW LISTBOX GRID.

866 4D Language Reference

SET LISTBOX ROWS HEIGHT List Box

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET LISTBOX ROWS HEIGHT ({*; }object; height)

Parameter Type Description

* → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)
height Integer → Row height (in pixels)

Description
The SET LISTBOX ROWS HEIGHT command allows you to modify by programming the row
height in the list box object set using the object and * parameters.

If you pass the optional * parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is an object
name (string). If you do not pass this parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is a
variable. In this case, you do not pass a string, but a variable reference. For more
information about object names, refer to the Object Properties section.

See Also
Get listbox rows height.

4D Language Reference 867

SET LISTBOX TABLE SOURCE List Box

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET LISTBOX TABLE SOURCE ({*; }object; tableNum | name)

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)
tableNum | name Longint |String → Number of table whose current selection
is to be used or Named selection to be used

Description
The SET LISTBOX TABLE SOURCE command can be used to modify the source of the data
displayed in the listbox that is designated by the * and object parameters.

Note: This command can only be used when the “Data Source” property of the list box is
set to Current Selection or Named Selection (for more information about this, please refer
to the Management of List box objects section). It does nothing if you use it with a listbox
that is associated with an array.

If you pass the optional * parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is an object
name (string). If you do not pass this parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is a
variable. In this case, you do not pass a string but a variable reference. For more
information about object names, please refer to the Object Properties section.

If you pass a table number as the tableNum parameter, the listbox will be filled in with the
data of the records in the current selection of the table.
If you pass a named selection as the name parameter, the listbox will be filled in with the
data of the records belonging to the named selection.

If the listbox already contains columns, their contents will be updated after the command
is executed.

Note: For optimization purposes, this command is processed in an asynchronous manner;

in other words, the source of the listbox is changed only after the complete execution of
the method in which the command is called.

See Also
GET LISTBOX TABLE SOURCE.

868 4D Language Reference

SHOW LISTBOX GRID List Box

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SHOW LISTBOX GRID ({*; }object; horizontal; vertical)

Parameter Type Description

* → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)
horizontal Boolean → True = show, False = hide
vertical Boolean → True = show, False = hide

Description
The SHOW LISTBOX GRID command allows you to display or hide the horizontal and/or
vertical grid lines that make up the grid in the list box object set using the object and *
parameters.

If you pass the optional * parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is an object
name (string). If you do not pass this parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is a
variable. In this case, you do not pass a string, but a variable reference. For more
information about object names, refer to the Object Properties section.

Pass the Boolean values in horizontal and vertical that indicate if the corresponding grid
lines should be displayed valeurs (True) or hidden (False). The grid is displayed by default.

See Also
Get listbox information, SET LISTBOX GRID COLOR.

4D Language Reference 869

SORT LISTBOX COLUMNS List Box

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SORT LISTBOX COLUMNS ({*; }object; colNum; order{; colNum2; order2; ...; colNumN;
orderN})

Parameter Type Description

* → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)
colNum Longint → Column number(s) to sort
order > or < → > to sort in ascending order or
< to sort in descending order

Description
The SORT LISTBOX COLUMNS command sorts the rows of the list box set in the object and *
parameters on the basis of one or more column value(s).

If you pass the optional * parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is an object
name (string). If you do not pass this parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is a
variable. In this case, you do not pass a string, but a variable reference. For more
information about object names, refer to the Object Properties section.

In colNum, pass the column number of the column whose values you want to use as the
sort criteria. You can use any type of array data, except pictures and pointers.

In order, pass the symbol > or < to indicate the sort order. If order contains the “greater
than” symbol (>), the sort order is ascending. If order contains the “less than” symbol (<),
the sort oder is descending.

You can define multi-level sorts: to do so, pass as many pairs (colNum;order) as necessary.
The sorting level is defined by the position of the parameter in the call.

In conformity with the principle of list box operation, the columns are synchronized which
means that the sorting of a column is automatically passed on to all the other columns of
the object.

870 4D Language Reference

25
______________________
Math

4D Language Reference 871

872 4D Language Reference
Abs Math

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Abs (number) → Number

Parameter Type Description

number Number → Number for which to return the absolute value

Function result Number ← Absolute value of number

Description
Abs returns the absolute (unsigned, positive) value of number. If number is negative, it is
returned as positive. If number is positive, it is returned unchanged.

Example
The following example returns the absolute value of –10.3, which is 10.3:

vlVector:=Abs(–10.3)

4D Language Reference 873

Arctan Math

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Arctan (number) → Number

Parameter Type Description

number Number → Tangent for which to calculate the angle

Function result Number ← Angle in radians

Description
Arctan returns the angle, expressed in radians, of the tangent number.

Note: 4D provides the predefined constants Pi, Degree, and Radian. Pi returns the Pi number
(3.14159...), Degree returns one degree expressed in radians (0.01745...), and Radian returns
one radian expressed in degrees (57.29577...).

Examples
The following example shows the value of Pi:

ALERT("Pi is equal to: "+String(Arctan(1)*4))

See Also
Cos, Sin, Tan.

874 4D Language Reference

Cos Math

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Cos (number) → Number

Parameter Type Description

number Number → Number, in radians, whose cosine is returned

Function result Number ← Cosine of number

Description
Cos returns the cosine of number, where number is expressed in radians.

Note: 4D provides the predefined constants Pi, Degree, and Radian. Pi returns the Pi number
(3.14159...), Degree returns one degree expressed in radians (0.01745...), and Radian returns
one radian expressed in degrees (57.29577...).

See Also
Arctan, Sin, Tan.

4D Language Reference 875

Dec Math

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Dec (number) → Number

Parameter Type Description

number Number → Number whose decimal portion is returned

Function result Number ← Decimal part of number

Description
Dec returns the decimal (fractional) portion of number. The value returned is always positive
or zero.

Example
The following example takes a monetary value expressed as a real number, and extracts the
dollar part and the cents part. If vrAmount is 7.31, then vlDollars is set to 7 and vlCents is set to
31:

vlDollars:=Int (vrAmount) ` Get the dollars

vlCents:=Dec(vrAmount) * 100 ` Get the fractional part

See Also
Int.

876 4D Language Reference

Display of Real Numbers Math

version 2004.2 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Preliminary Note
If you do not deal with cross-platform development, you can skip this section.

On computers, floating point arithmetic is more a technology than a mathematical science.

For example, you learned in school that one-third (1/3) can be written as an infinite number
of threes after the decimal point. A computer, on the other hand, does not know this and
must calculate the expression. In the same way, you know conceptually that three times one
third is equal to one; a computer calculates the expression to get the result. Depending on the
type of computer you use, one-third is calculated as a limited number of threes after the
decimal point. This number is called the “precision” of the machine.

On older 68K-based Macintosh, the precision number is 19; this means that 1/3 is calculated
with 19 significant digits. On Windows and Power Macintosh, this number is 15; so 1/3 is
displayed with 15 significant digits. If you display the expression 1/3 in the Debugger window
of 4D, you will get 0.3333333333333333333 on 68K-based Macintosh and something like
0.3333333333333333148 on Windows or Power Macintosh. Note that the last three digits are
different because the precision on Windows and Power Macintosh is less than on the 68K-
based Macintosh. Yet, if you display the expression (1/3)*3, the result is 1 on both machines.

If your floating point arithmetic computations deal with the number of square feet in your
backyard, you will say “Fine with me!” because you do not care about the digits after the
decimal point. On the other hand, if you are filling out an IRS form, you may, in certain
circumstances, care about the accuracy of your computer. However, remember that 19 or 15
digits after the decimal point are quite sufficient even if you manage billions of dollars of
revenue.

Why does the value 1/3 seem different on 68K Macintosh and onWindows or Power
Macintosh?

On 68K-based Macintosh, the operating system stores real numbers on 10 bytes (80 bits),
while on Windows and Power Macintosh, it stores them on 8 bytes (64 bits). This is why real
numbers have up to 19 significant digits on 68K-based Macintosh and up to 15 significant
digits on Windows and Power Macintosh.

So, why does the expression (1/3)*3 return 1 on both machines?

4D Language Reference 877

A computer can only make approximate computations. Therefore, while comparing or
computing numbers, a computer does not treat real numbers as mathematical objects but as
approximate values. In our example, 0.3333... multiplied by 3 gives 0.9999...; the difference
between 0.9999... and 1 is so small that the machine considers the result equal to 1, and
consequently returns 1. For details on this subject, see the discussion for the command SET
REAL COMPARISON LEVEL.

There is dual behavior of real numbers, so we must make the distinction between:
• How they are calculated and compared
• How they are displayed on the screen or printer
Originally, 4D handled real numbers using the standard 10-byte data type provided by the
operating system of the 68K-based Macintosh. Consequently, real values stored in the data file
on disk are saved using this format. In order to maintain compatibility between the 68K,
Power Macintosh, and Windows versions of 4D, the 4D data files still hold the real values
using the 10-byte data type. Because floating point arithmetic is performed on Windows or
Power Macintosh using the 8 byte format, 4D converts the values from 10 bytes to 8 bytes,
and vice versa. Therefore, if you load a record containing real values, which have been saved
on 68K-based Macintosh, onto Windows or Power Macintosh, it is possible to lose some
precision (from 19 to 15 significant digits). Yet, if you load a record containing real values,
which have been saved on Windows or Power Macintosh, on a 68K-based Macintosh, there
will be no loss of precision. Basically, if you use a database on 68K or Power Macintosh and
Windows, count on floating point arithmetic with 15 significant digits, not 19.

Using the SET DATABASE PARAMETER command, you can set the number of digits to be skipped
(4 by default) when simplifying the display of real numbers.

878 4D Language Reference

Euro converter Math

version 6.7 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Euro converter (value; fromCurrency; toCurrency) → Real

Parameter Type Description

value Real → Value to convert
fromCurrency String → Code of the currency in which the value is expressed
toCurrency String → Code of the currency into which the value must be
converted

Function result Real ← Converted value

Description
The Euro converter command allows you to convert any value from and to the different
currencies belonging to the “Euroland” and the Euro currency itself.

You can convert:

• a national currency into Euros,
• Euros into a national currency,
• a national currency into another national currency. In this case, the conversion is calculated
by the intermediary of the Euro, as specified in the European reglementation. For example, to
convert Belgian francs to Deutschemarks, 4D will perform the following calculations: Belgian
francs -> Euros -> Deutchemarks.

Pass the value to convert in the first parameter.

The second parameter indicates the Currency code in which value is expressed.
The third parameter indicates the Currency code into which value must be converted.

To specify a Currency code, 4D proposes the following predefined constants, placed in the
“Euro Currencies” theme:

Constant Type Value

Austrian Schilling String ATS
Belgian Franc String BEF
Deutschemark String DEM
Euro String EUR
Finnish Markka String FIM
French Franc String FRF

4D Language Reference 879

Greek drachma String GRD
Irish Pound String IEP
Italian Lire String ITL
Luxembourg Franc String LUF
Netherlands Guilder String NLG
Portuguese Escudo String PTE
Spanish Peseta String ESP

If necessary, 4D performs rounding automatically on conversion results and keeps 2 decimals

—except for conversions to Italian Lires, Belgian Francs, Luxembourg Francs and Spanish
Pesetas, for which 4D keeps 0 decimal (the result is an integer number).

The conversion rates between the Euro and the currencies of the 11 participating Member
States are fixed:

Currency Value for 1 Euro

Austrian Schilling 13.7603
Belgian Franc 40.3399
Deutschemark 1.95583
Finnish Markka 5.94573
French Franc 6.55957
Greek drachma 340.750
Irish Pound 0.787564
Italian Lire 1936.27
Luxembourg Franc 40.3399
Netherlands Guilder 2.20371
Portuguese Escudo 200.482
Spanish Peseta 166.386

Example
Here are some examples of conversions that can be done with this command:

$value:=10000 `Value expressed in French Francs

`Convert the value into Euros
$InEuros:=Euro converter($value;French Franc; Euro)
`Convert the value into Italian Lire
$InLires:=Euro converter ($value;French Franc; Italian Lire)

880 4D Language Reference

Exp Math

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Exp (number) → Number

Parameter Type Description

number Number → Number to evaluate

Function result Number ← Natural log base by the power of number

Description
Exp raises the natural log base (e = 2.71828...) by the power of number. Exp is the inverse
function of Log.

Note: 4D provides the predefined constant e number (2.71828...).

Example
The following example assigns the exponential of 1 to vrE (the log of vrE is 1):

vrE:= Exp (1) ` vrE gets 2.17828...

See Also
Log.

4D Language Reference 881

Int Math

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Int (number) → Number

Parameter Type Description

number Number → Number whose integer portion is returned

Function result Number ← Integer portion of number

Description
Int returns the integer portion of number. Int truncates a negative number away from zero.

Example
The following example illustrates how Int works for both positive and negative numbers. Note
that the decimal portion of the number is removed:

vlResult:=Int (123.4) ` vlResult gets 123

vlResult:=Int(–123.4) ` vlResult gets –124

See Also
Dec.

882 4D Language Reference

Log Math

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Log (number) → Number

Parameter Type Description

number Number → Number for which to return the log

Function result Number ← Log of number

Description
Log returns the natural (Napierian) log of number. Log is the inverse function of Exp.

Note: 4D provides the predefined constant e number (2.71828...).

Example
The following line displays 1:

ALERT(String(Log(Exp(1)))

See Also
Exp.

4D Language Reference 883

Mod Math

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Mod (number1; number2) → Number

Parameter Type Description

number1 Number → Number to divide
number2 Number → Number to divide by

Function result Number ← Returns the remainder

Description
The Mod command returns the remainder of the Integer division of number1 by number2.

Notes:
• Mod accepts Integer, Long Integer, and Real expressions. However, if number1 or number2
are real numbers, the numbers are first rounded and then Mod is calculated.
• Be careful when using Mod with real numbers of a large size (above 2^31) since, in this case,
its operation may reach the limits of the calculation capacities of standard processors.

You can also use the % operator to calculate the remainder (see Numeric Operators).

WARNING: The % operator returns valid results with Integer and Long Integer expressions. To
calculate the modulo of real values, you must use the Mod command.

Example
The following example illustrates how the Mod function works with different arguments. Each
line assigns a number to the vlResult variable. The comments describe the results:

vlResult:=Mod(3;2) ` vlResult gets 1

vlResult:=Mod(4;2) ` vlResult gets 0
vlResult:=Mod(3.5;2) ` vlResult gets 0

See Also
Numeric Operators.

884 4D Language Reference

Random Math

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Random → Number

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Number ← Random number

Description
Random returns a random integer value between 0 and 32,767 (inclusive).

To define a range of integers, use this formula:

(Random%(End–Start+1))+Start

The value start is the first number in the range, and the value end is the last.

Example
The following example assigns a random integer between 10 and 30 to the vlResult variable:
vlResult:=(Random%21)+10

4D Language Reference 885

Round Math

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Round (round; places) → Number

Parameter Type Description

round Number → Number to be rounded
places Number → Number of decimal places used for rounding

Function result Number ← Number rounded to the number of

decimal places specified by Places

Description
Round returns number rounded to the number of decimal places specified by places.

If places is positive, number is rounded to places decimal places. If places is negative, number is
rounded on the left of the decimal point.

If the digit following places is 5 though 9, Round rounds toward positive infinity for a positive
number, and toward negative infinity for a negative number. If the digit following places is 0
through 4, Round rounds toward zero.

Example
The following example illustrates how Round works with different arguments. Each line
assigns a number to the vlResult variable. The comments describe the results:

vlResult:=Round (16.857; 2) ` vlResult gets 16.86

vlResult:=Round (32345.67; –3) ` vlResult gets 32000
vlResult:=Round (29.8725; 3) ` vlResult gets 29.873
vlResult:=Round (–1.5; 0) ` vlResult gets –2

See Also
Trunc.

886 4D Language Reference

SET REAL COMPARISON LEVEL Math

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET REAL COMPARISON LEVEL (epsilon)

Parameter Type Description

epsilon Number → Epsilon value for real equality comparisons

Description
The SET REAL COMPARISON LEVEL command sets the epsilon value used by 4D to compare real
values and expressions for equality.

A computer always performs approximative real computations; therefore, testing real numbers
for equality should take this approximation into account. 4D does this when comparing real
numbers by testing whether or not the difference between the two numbers exceeds a certain
value. This value is called the epsilon and works this way:

Given two real numbers a and b, if Abs(a-b) is greater than the epsilon, the numbers are
considered not equal; otherwise, the numbers are considered equal.

By default, 4D, sets the epsilon value to 10 power minus 6 (10^-6). Please note that the epsilon
value should always be positive. Examples:

• 0.00001=0.00002 returns False, because the difference 0.00001 is greater than 10^-6.
• 0.000001=0.000002 returns True, because the difference 0.000001 is not greater than 10^-6.
• 0.000001=0.000003 returns False, because the difference 0.000002 is greater than 10^-6.

Using SET REAL COMPARISON LEVEL, you can increase or decrease the epsilon value as you
require.

Note: If you want to execute a query or an "Order by" on a numeric indexed field whose values
are lower than 10^-6, make sure that the SET REAL COMPARISON LEVEL command is executed
before construction of the index.

WARNING: Typically, you will not need to use this command to change the default epsilon
value.

4D Language Reference 887

IMPORTANT: Changing the epsilon only affects real comparison for equality. It has no effect
on other real computations nor on the display of real values.

See Also
Comparison Operators.

888 4D Language Reference

Sin Math

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Sin (number) → Number

Parameter Type Description

number Number → Number, in radians, whose sine is returned

Function result Number ← Sine of number

Description
Sin returns the sine of number, where number is expressed in radians.

Note: 4D provides the predefined constants Pi, Degree, and Radian. Pi returns the Pi number
(3.14159...), Degree returns one degree expressed in radians (0.01745...), and Radian returns
one radian expressed in degrees (57.29577...).

See Also
Arctan, Cos, Tan.

4D Language Reference 889

Square root Math

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Square root (number) → Number

Parameter Type Description

number Number → Number whose square root is calculated

Function result Number ← Square root of the number

Description
Square root returns the square root of number.

Examples
1. The line:

$vrSquareRootOfTwo := Square root (2)

assigns the value 1.414213562373 to the variable $vrSquareRootOfTwo.

2. The following method returns the hypotenuse of the right triangle whose two legs are
passed as parameters:

` Hypotenuse method
` Hypotenuse ( real ; real ) -> real
` Hypotenuse ( legA ; legB ) -> Hypotenuse
C_REAL($0;$1;$2)
$0:= Square root(($1^2)+($2^2))

For instance, Hypotenuse (4;3) returns 5.

See Also
Numeric Operators.

890 4D Language Reference

Tan Math

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Tan (number) → Number

Parameter Type Description

number Number → Number, in radians, whose tangent is returned

Function result Number ← Tangent of number

Description
Tan returns the tangent of number, where number is expressed in radians.

Note: 4D provides the predefined constants Pi, Degree, and Radian. Pi returns the Pi number
(3.14159...), Degree returns one degree expressed in radians (0.01745...), and Radian returns
one radian expressed in degrees (57.29577...).

See Also
Arctan, Cos, Sin.

4D Language Reference 891

Trunc Math

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Trunc (number; places) → Number

Parameter Type Description

number Number → Number to be truncated
places Number → Number of decimal places used for truncating

Function result Number ← Number with its decimal part truncated to the
number of decimal places specified by Places

Description
Trunc returns number with its decimal part truncated to the number of decimal places specified
by places. Trunc always truncates toward negative infinity.

If places is positive, number is truncated to places decimal places. If places is negative, number
is truncated on the left of the decimal point.

Example
The following example illustrates how Trunc works with different arguments. Each line assigns
a number to the vlResult variable. The comments describe the results:

vlResult:= Trunc (216.897; 1) ` vlResult gets 216.8

vlResult:= Trunc (216.897; –1) ` vlResult gets 210
vlResult:= Trunc (–216.897; 1) ` vlResult gets –216.9
vlResult:= Trunc (–216.897; –1) ` vlResult gets –220

See Also
Round.

892 4D Language Reference

26
______________________
Menus

4D Language Reference 893

894 4D Language Reference
Managing Menus Menus

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Terminology
The documentation of Menus commands uses the terms menu command and menu item
interchangeably when describing a line in a menu.

MenuRef and Menu Numbers

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The language of 4D offers two ways of managing menus and menu bars: by references or by
numbers.
• Managing menus by reference (MenuRef) is the new way of handling menus, introduced
with version 11 of 4D. This mode gives access to advanced functions such as the creation of
completely dynamic interfaces (menus created "on the fly" without necessarily existing in the
Menu editor) and the managing of multi-level hierarchical submenus.
• Managing menus and menu bars by number is based on the menus created in the Menu
editor in Design mode. Each menu bar and menu is assigned a fixed number (corresponding
to its position in the editor). This number is used by the language commands to specify the
menu bar or menu. The scope of language commands applied to menus managed by number
is the current menu bar.
This behavior corresponds to previous versions of 4D and complies with several rules
(described below in the "Managing menus by number" paragraph). It can still be used but does
not take advantage of the new functions offered starting with version 11, more particularly the
dynamic management of menus and the use of hierarchical submenus: it is not possible to
acccess a hiearchical submenu using a number.

Both menu management modes are compatible and can be used simultaneously in your
interfaces. Most of the commands in the “Menus” theme accept both menu numbers and
references indiscriminately.
However, managing menus by reference is recommended since it offers many more
possibilities. Note that if your menu interface is partially or completely defined via the Menu
editor, it remains entirely possible to work with it in the form of references using the Get
menu bar reference and GET MENU ITEMS commands.

4D Language Reference 895

Managing menus by reference
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

When menus are handled by means of MenuRef references, there is no difference per se
between a menu and a menu bar. In both cases, it consists of a list of items. Only their use
differs. In the case of a menu bar, each item corresponds to a menu which is itself composed
of items. This is also the principle on which hierarchical menus are based: each item can itself
be a menu, and so on.

When a menu is managed by reference, any changes made to this menu during the session are
immediately passed on to every instance of this menu and in every process of the database.

MenuRef
Like hierarchical lists, every menu has a unique reference, with which it can be identified
during the entire session. This reference, named by convention MenuRef, is a 16-character
alphanumeric. All the commands of the “Menus” theme accept either this reference, or a
menu number, to specify a menu or menu bar.
Menu references can be obtained using the Create menu, Get menu bar reference or GET MENU
ITEMS commands.

Managing menus by number

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Menu Bars
Menu bars can be defined in the Menu editor in Design mode. When managed by number,
each menu bar is identified by a number and by a name. The first menu bar (created
automatically by 4D) has the number 1 and is named Menu Bar #1 by default. You can rename
it in the Menu editor. The name of a menu bar may contain up to 31 characters and must be
unique.

Menu Bar #1 is also the default menu bar. To open an application with a menu bar other than
Menu Bar #1, you must use the SET MENU BAR command in the On Startup database method. It
is not possible to modify the contents of a menu bar itself by programming; however, the
menus comprising it can be modified. The scope of the language commands applied to static
menus is the current menu bar. On each call to the SET MENU BAR command (without the *
parameter), all the menus and menu commands return to their original state as defined in the
Menu editor.

Every menu bar comes equipped with three menus—the File, Edit and Mode menus.
• The File menu has only one menu command—Quit. The Quit standard action is assigned to
it. This action displays an "Are you sure?" confirmation dialog box then quits the 4D
application if this dialog box is validated. Otherwise, the operation is cancelled.

896 4D Language Reference

Note: Under Mac OS X, the created menu command associated with the Quit action is
automatically placed in the application menu when the database is executed on this system.

You can rename the File menu, add menu commands to it or keep it as is. It is recommended
that you always keep Quit as the last menu command in the File menu.

• The Edit menu contains the standard editing menu commands. A standard action (Cancel,
Cut, Copy, etc.) is assigned to each command of this menu. You can add commands to this
menu or use your own methods for managing editing actions.

• The Mode menu contains the Return to Design mode command. This command can be used
to return to the Design mode (when it is available) from the Application mode.

Note: 4D automatically manages the Help and application (Mac OS X) system menus. These
menus cannot be modified, except for the About 4D command, which can be managed using
the SET ABOUT command.

Warning: Menu bars are "interprocess." Any modification carried out on a menu bar in the
Design mode will be reflected in all the processes where the menu bar is used.

Menu Numbers and Menu Command Numbers

Like menu bars, menus are numbered. The File menu is generally menu 1. Thereafter, menus
are numbered sequentially from left to right (2, 3, 4, and so on). The Application menu (Mac
OS ) is excluded from this numbering. On both platforms, the Help menu is also excluded. It
should be noted that the Count menus command does not take these menus into account. If,
for example, your menu bar consists of the File, Edit, Customers, Inoices and Help menus,
Count menus will return 4 (ignoring the system menus maintained by 4D).
Menu numbering is important when you are working, for example, with the Menu selected
function.

When a menu is associated with a form, the menu numbering scheme is different. The first
appended menu begins with the number 2049. To refer to an appended menu, add 2048 to
the normal menu number.

The menu commands within each menu are numbered sequentially from the top of the menu
to the bottom including the separators. The topmost menu command is item 1.

4D Language Reference 897

Associated Menu Bars
You can associate a menu bar with a form in the Form properties (General page). Such a menu
bar is called a “form menu bar” in this document.

The menus on a form menu bar are appended to the current menu bar when the form is
displayed as an output form in the Application environment.

Form menu bars are specified by a menu bar number and a name. If the number or name of
the menu bar displayed with the current form is the same as that of the menu bar appended to
the form, the menu bar is not appended.

By default, when a form is displayed with a custom menu bar, the commands of the current
menu bar are deactivated, i.e. selecting them has no effect. You can modify this operation by
checking the Active Menu Bar option in the Form properties: in this case, the commands of
the current menu bar will remain usable.
In every case, the selection of a menu command causes an On Menu Selected event to be sent
to the form method; you can then use the Menu selected command to test the selected menu.

Attached Menus
Menus can be attached to menu bars. If an attached menu is modified using one of these
commands, every other instance of the menu will reflect these changes. For more information
about attaching menus, refer to the 4D Design Reference Manual.

Standard actions and methods associated with menu commands

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Each menu command can have a project method or a standard action attached to it. If you do
not assign a method or a standard action to a menu command, choosing that menu command
causes 4D to exit the Application environment and go to the Design environment. If only the
Application environment is available or if the user does not have access to the Design
environment, this means quitting to the Desktop.
Standard actions can be used to carry out various current operations linked to system
functions (copy, quit, etc.) or to those of the 4D database (add record, select all, etc.).
You can assign both a standard action and a project method to a menu command. In this case,
the standard action is never executed; however, 4D uses this action to activate/deactivate the
menu command according to the current context and to associate a specific operation with it
according to the platform (for example, the Preferences action is passed in the application
menu under Mac OS). When a menu command is deactivated, the associated project method
cannot be executed.

898 4D Language Reference

menuItem=-1
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

In order to facilitate the managing of menu items, 4D provides a shortcut that can be used to
specify the last item added to the menu: you simply need to pass -1 in the menuItem
parameter.
This principle can be used in all the commands of the “Menus” theme that work with menu
items.

4D Language Reference 899

APPEND MENU ITEM Menus

version 11.4 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

APPEND MENU ITEM (menu; itemText{; subMenu{; process{; *}}})

Parameter Type Description

menu Number | MenuRef → Menu number or Menu reference
itemText Text → Text for the new menu items
subMenu MenuRef → Reference of submenu associated with item
process Number → Process reference number
* * → If passed: consider metacharacters
as standard characters

Description
The APPEND MENU ITEM command appends new menu items to the menu whose number or
reference is passed in menu.

If you omit the process parameter, APPEND MENU ITEM applies to the menu bar for the current
process. Otherwise, APPEND MENU ITEM applies to the menu bar for the process whose
reference number is passed in process.

Note: If you pass a MenuRef in menu, the process parameter serves no purporse and will be
ignored.

If you do not pass the * parameter, APPEND MENU ITEM allows you to append one or several
menu items in one call.

You define the items to be appended with the parameter itemText as follows:
• Separate each item from the next one with a semi-colon (;). For example,
"ItemText1;ItemText2;ItemText3".
• To disable an item: Place an opening parenthesis (() in the item text.
• To specify a separation line: Pass "(-" as item text.
• To specify a font style for a line: In the item text, place a less than sign (<) followed by one
of these characters:
<B Bold
<I Italic
<U Underline

900 4D Language Reference

• To add a check mark to an item: In the item text, place an exclamation mark (!) followed by
the character you want as a check mark. On Macintosh, the character is displayed; on
Windows, a check mark is displayed no matter what character you passed.
• To add an icon to an item: In the item text, place a circumflex accent (^) followed by a
character whose code plus 208 is the resource ID of a Mac OS-based icon resource.
• To add a shortcut to an item: In the item text, place a slash (/) followed by the shortcut
character for the item.

Note: Use menus that have a reasonable number of items. For example, if you want to display
more than 50 items, consider using a scrollable area in a form instead of a menu.

If you pass the * parameter, the "special" characters (; ( !...) included in the item text will be
considered as standard characters and not as metacharacters. This means that you can create
menu items like "Copy (special)..." or "Find/Replace...". Note that when the * parameter is
passed, you cannot create several items in a single call since the ";" character is considered as a
standard character.
Note: The GET MENU ITEMS and Get menu item commands will or will not return any
metacharacters in the text of a menu item depending on how it was created: if it was created
with the * option, metacharacters will be returned as standard characters.

The optional subMenu parameter can be used to indicate a menu as the added item and thus
position a hierarchical submenu. You must pass a menu reference (MenuRef type string)
specifying a menu created, for example, using the Create menu command. If the command
adds more than one menu item, the submenu is associated with the first item.

Important: The new items do not have any associated methods or actions. These must be
associated with the items using the SET MENU ITEM PROPERTY or SET MENU ITEM METHOD
commands, or the items can also be managed from within a form method using the Menu
selected command.

Example
This example appends the names of the available fonts to the Font menu, which in this
example is the sixth menu of the current menu bar:

` In the On Startup database method

` The font list is loaded and menu item text is built
FONT LIST(<>asAvailableFont)
<>atFontMenuItems:=""
For ($vlFont;1;Size of array(<>asAvailableFont))
<>atFontMenuItems:=<>atFontMenuItems+";"+<>asAvailableFont{$vlFont}
End for

4D Language Reference 901

Then, in any form or project method, you can write:

APPEND MENU ITEM(6;<>atFontMenuItems)

See Also
DELETE MENU ITEM, INSERT MENU ITEM, SET MENU ITEM PARAMETER.

902 4D Language Reference

Count menu items Menus

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Count menu items (menu{; process}) → Number

Parameter Type Description

menu Num | MenuRef → Menu number or Menu reference
process Number → Process reference number

Function result Number ← Number of menu items in the menu

Description
The Count menu items command returns the number of menu items present in the menu
whose number or reference is passed in menu.

If you omit the process parameter, Count menu items applies to the menu bar for the current
process. Otherwise, Count menu items applies to the menu bar for the process whose reference
number is passed in process.

Note: If you pass a MenuRef parameter in menu, the process parameter serves no purpose and
will be ignored.

See Also
Count menus.

4D Language Reference 903

Count menus Menus

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Count menus {(process)} → Number

Parameter Type Description

process Number → Process reference number

Function result Number ← Number of menus in the current menu bar

Description
The Count menus command returns the number of menus present in the menu bar.

If you omit the process parameter, Count menus applies to the menu bar for the current
process. Otherwise, Count menus applies to the menu bar for the process whose reference
number is passed in process.

See Also
Count menu items.

904 4D Language Reference

Create menu Menus

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Create menu {(menu)} → MenuRef

Parameter Type Description

menu MenuRef | Num | Alpha → Menu reference or
Number or Name of menu bar

Function result MenuRef ← Menu reference

Description
The Create menu command can be used to create a new menu in memory. This menu will
only exist in memory and will not be added in the Menu editor in Design mode. Any
changes made to this menu during the session will be immediately carried over to all the
instances of this menu and in all the processes of the database.

The command returns an ID of the MenuRef type for the new menu.

• If you do not pass the optional menu parameter, the menu is created blank. You must
build and manage it using the APPEND MENU ITEM, SET MENU ITEM, etc. commands.
• If you pass the menu parameter, the menu created will be an exact copy of the source
menu designated by this parameter. All the properties of the souce menu, including any
associated submenus, will be applied to the new menu. Note that a new MenuRef reference
is created for the source menu and for any existing submenus that are associated with it.

In the menu parameter, you can pass either a valid menu reference, or the number or name
of a menu bar defined in Design mode. In this last case, the new menu will be made up of
the menus and submenus of the source menu bar.

A menu created by this command can be used as the menu bar using the SET MENU BAR
command.

Example
Refer to the example of the SET MENU BAR command.

See Also
Dynamic pop up menu, RELEASE MENU, SET MENU BAR.

4D Language Reference 905

DELETE MENU ITEM Menus

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DELETE MENU ITEM (menu; menuItem{; process})

Parameter Type Description

menu Number | MenuRef → Menu number or Menu reference
menuItem Number → Menu item number or
-1 for last item added
process Number → Process reference number

Description
The DELETE MENU ITEM command deletes the menu item whose menu number or reference is
passed in menu and whose item number is passed in menuItem. You can pass -1 in menuItem
in order to indicate the last item added to menu.

If the menu item specified by menu and menuItem is itself a menu managed by reference and
created, for example, using the Create menu command, DELETE MENU ITEM will only delete the
instance of the menuItem in menu. The submenu referenced by the menuItem will continue to
exist in memory. You must use the RELEASE MENU command in order to definitively delete a
menu that is managed by reference.
This command also works with a menu bar created using the Create menu command and
installed with the SET MENU BAR command.

If you omit the process parameter, DELETE MENU ITEM applies to the menu bar for the current
process. Otherwise, DELETE MENU ITEM applies to the menu bar for the process whose
reference number is passed in process.

Note: If you pass a MenuRef in menu, the process parameter serves no purpose and will be
ignored.

Note: For consistency in the user interface, do not keep a menu with no items.

See Also
APPEND MENU ITEM, INSERT MENU ITEM.

906 4D Language Reference

DISABLE MENU ITEM Menus

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DISABLE MENU ITEM (menu; menuItem{; process})

Parameter Type Description

menu Number | MenuRef → Menu number or Menu reference
menuItem Number → Menu item number or
-1 for the last item added
process Number → Proces reference number

Description
The DISABLE MENU ITEM command disables the menu item whose menu number or reference
is passed in menu and whose item number is passed in menuItem. You can pass -1 in
menuItem in order to designate the last item added to the menu.

If you omit the process parameter, DISABLE MENU ITEM applies to the menu bar for the current
process. Otherwise, DISABLE MENU ITEM applies to the menu bar for the process whose
reference number is passed in process.

If the menuItem parameter designates a hierarchical submenu, all the items of this menu and
any submenus are disabled. This command also works with a menu bar created using the
Create menu command and installed with the SET MENU BAR command.

Note: If you pass a MenuRef in menu, the process parameter serves no purpose and will be
ignored.

Tip: To enable/disable all items of a menu at once, pass 0 (zero) in menuItem.

See Also
ENABLE MENU ITEM.

4D Language Reference 907

Dynamic pop up menu Menus

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Dynamic pop up menu (menu{; default{; xCoord{; yCoord}}}) → String

Parameter Type Description

menu MenuRef → Menu reference
default String → Parameter of item selected by default
xCoord Number → X coordinate of top left corner
yCoord Number → Y coordinate of top left corner

Function result String ← Parameter of selected menu item

Description
The Dynamic pop up menu causes a hierarchical pop-up menu to appear at the current
location of the mouse or at the location set by the optional xCoord and yCoord parameters.
The hierarchical menu used must have been created using the Create menu command. The
reference returned by Create menu must then be passed in the menu parameter.

In conformity with standard interface rules, this command must generally be called in
response to a right mouse click or when the button is held down a certain period of time
(contextual menu for example).

The optional default parameter can be used to set an item of the popup menu as selected by
default whenever the menu appears. In this parameter, pass a custom string associated with
the menu item. This string must have been set beforehand using the SET MENU ITEM
PARAMETER command. If you do not pass this parameter, the first item of the menu will be
selected by default.

The optional xCoord and yCoord parameters can be used to specify the location of the pop-
up menu to be displayed. In the xCoord and yCoord parameters, pass the horizontal and
vertical coordinates, respectively, of the top left corner of the menu. These coordinates
must be expressed in pixels in the local coordinate system of the current form. Both
parameters must be passed together; if only one of them is passed, it will be ignored.

If you want to display a pop-up menu associated with a 3D button, then do not pass the
optional xCoord and yCoord parameters. In this case, 4D automatically calculates the
location of the menu with respect to the button according to the interface standards of the
current platform.

908 4D Language Reference

If a menu item has been selected, the command returns its associated custom character
string (such as it has been defined using the SET MENU ITEM PARAMETER command).
Otherwise, the command returns an empty string.

Note: The existing Pop up menu command (“User Interface” theme) can be used to create
pop-up menus based on text.

See Also
Get menu item parameter, Get selected menu item parameter, Pop up menu, SET MENU ITEM
PARAMETER.

4D Language Reference 909

ENABLE MENU ITEM Menus

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

ENABLE MENU ITEM (menu; menuItem{; process})

Parameter Type Description

menu Number | MenuRef → Menu number or Menu reference
menuItem Number → Menu item number or
-1 for the last item added
process Number → Proces reference number

Description
The ENABLE MENU ITEM command enables the menu item whose menu number or reference is
passed in menu and whose item number is passed in menuItem. You can pass -1 in menuItem
in order to designate the last item added to the menu.

If the menuItem parameter designates a hierarchical submenu, all the items of this menu and
any submenus are enabled. This command also works with a menu bar created using the
Create menu command and installed with the SET MENU BAR command.

If you omit the process parameter, ENABLE MENU ITEM applies to the menu bar for the current
process. Otherwise, ENABLE MENU ITEM applies to the menu bar for the process whose
reference number is passed in process.

Note: If you pass a MenuRef in menu, the process parameter serves no purpose and will be
ignored.

Tip: To enable/disable all items of a menu at once, pass 0 (zero) in menuItem.

See Also
DISABLE MENU ITEM.

910 4D Language Reference

Get menu bar reference Menus

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get menu bar reference {(process)} → MenuRef

Parameter Type Description

process Number → Reference number of process

Function result MenuRef ← Menu bar ID

Description
The Get menu bar reference command returns the ID of the current menu bar or the menu
bar of a specific process.

If the menu bar was created by the Create menu command, this ID corresponds to the
reference ID of the menu created. Otherwise, the command returns a specific internal ID.
In all cases, this MenuRef ID may be used to reference the menu bar by all the other
commands of the theme.

The process parameter can be used to designate the process where you want to get the
current menu bar ID. If you omit this parameter, the command returns the menu bar ID of
the current process.

Example
Refer to the example of the GET MENU ITEMS command.

See Also
SET MENU BAR.

4D Language Reference 911

Get menu item Menus

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get menu item (menu; menuItem{; process}) → String

Parameter Type Description

menu Number | MenuRef → Menu number or Menu reference
menuItem Number → Menu item number or
-1 for last item added
process Number → Process reference number

Function result String ← Text of the menu item

Description
The Get menu item command returns the text of the menu item whose menu and item
numbers are passed in menu and menuItem. You can pass -1 in menuItem in order to indicate
the last item added to menu.

If you omit the process parameter, Get menu item applies to the menu bar for the current
process. Otherwise, Get menu item applies to the menu bar for the process whose reference
number is passed in process.

Note: If you pass a MenuRef in menu, the process parameter serves no purpose and will be
ignored.

See Also
Get menu item key, SET MENU ITEM.

912 4D Language Reference

GET MENU ITEM ICON Menus

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET MENU ITEM ICON (menu; menuItem; iconRef{; process})

Parameter Type Description

menu MenuRef | Num → Menu reference or Menu number
menuItem Number → Number of menu item or
-1 for the last item added to the menu
iconRef Text var | Longint var ← Name or number of picture
associated with menu item
process Number → Process number

Description
The GET MENU ITEM ICON command returns, in the iconRef variable, the reference of any
icon that is associated with the menu item designated by the menu and menuItem
parameters. This reference is the name or number of the picture.

The icon associated with a menu item is added to the tool bar of the application.

You can pass -1 in menuItem in order to specify the last item added to menu.

In menu, you can pass a menu reference (MenuRef) or a menu number. If you pass a menu
reference, the process parameter is unnecessary and will be ignored if it is passed. If you
pass a menu number, the command will take the corresponding menu in the main menu
bar of the current process into account. If you want to designate another process, pass its
number in the optional process parameter.

If the icon has been specified using a library picture, the command returns either the name
or number of the picture depending on the type of variable passed in this parameter. If the
icon has been specified using a picture stored in the Resources folder of the database, the
command returns the picture pathname in iconRef.
If you do not attribute a specific type to the iconRef variable, by default, the name of the
picture is returned (text type).

If no icon is associated with the menu item, the command returns a blank value.

See Also
SET MENU ITEM ICON.

4D Language Reference 913

Get menu item key Menus

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get menu item key (menu; menuItem{; process}) → Number

Parameter Type Description

menu Number | MenuRef → Menu number or Menu reference
menuItem Number → Menu item number or
-1 for the last item added
process Number → Process reference number

Function result Number ← Character code of standard shortcut key

associated with the menu item

Description
The Get menu item key command returns the code of the Ctrl (Windows) or Command
(Macintosh) shortcut for the menu item whose menu number or reference is passed in menu
and whose item number is passed in menuItem. You can pass -1 in menuItem in order to
indicate the last item added to menu.

If you omit the process parameter, Get menu item key applies to the menu bar for the current
process. Otherwise, Get menu item key applies to the menu bar for the process whose reference
number is passed in process.

Note: If you pass a MenuRef in menu, the process parameter serves no purpose and will be
ignored.

If the menu item has no associated shortcut or if the menuItem parameter designates a
hierarchical submenu, Get menu item key returns 0 (zero).

914 4D Language Reference

Example
To obtain the shortcut associated with a menu item, it is useful to implement a programming
structure of the following type:

If(Get menu item key(mymenu;1) # 0)

$modifiers:=Get menu item modifiers(mymenu;1)
Case of
: ($modifiers=Option key mask)
...
: ($modifiers=Shift key mask)
...
: ($modifiers=Option key mask + Shift key mask)
...
End case
End if

See Also
Get menu item key, SET MENU ITEM SHORTCUT.

4D Language Reference 915

Get menu item mark Menus

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get menu item mark (menu; menuItem{; process}) → String

Parameter Type Description

menu Number | MenuRef → Menu number or Menu reference
menuItem Number → Menu item number or
-1 for last item added
process Number → Process reference number

Function result String ← Current menu item mark

Description
The Get menu item mark command returns the check mark of the menu item whose number
or reference is passed in menu and whose item number is passed in menuItem. You can pass -1
in menuItem in order to indicate the last item added to menu.

If you omit the process parameter, Get menu item mark applies to the menu bar for the current
process. Otherwise, Get menu item mark applies to the menu bar for the process whose
reference number is passed in process.

Note: If you pass a MenuRef in menu, the process parameter serves no purpose and will be
ignored.

If the menu item has no mark or if the menuItem parameter specifies a hierarchical submenu,
Get menu item mark returns an empty string.

Note: See discussion of check marks on Macintosh and Windows in the description of the
command SET MENU ITEM MARK.

Example
The following example toggles the check mark of a menu item:

SET MENU ITEM MARK($vlMenu;$vlItem;Char(18)*Num(Get menu item mark($vlMenu;

$vlItem)=""))

See Also
SET MENU ITEM MARK.

916 4D Language Reference

Get menu item method Menus

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get menu item method (menu; menuItem{; process}) → String

Parameter Type Description

menu MenuRef | Num → Menu reference or Menu number
menuItem Longint → Number of menu item or
-1 for the last item added to the menu
process Longint → Process number

Function result String ← Method name

Description
The Get menu item method command returns the name of the 4D project method
associated with the menu item designated by the menu and menuItem parameters.
You can pass -1 in menuItem in order to specify the last item added to menu.

In menu, you can pass a menu reference (MenuRef) or a menu number. If you pass a menu
reference, the process parameter is unnecessary and will be ignored if it is passed. If you
pass a menu number, the command will take the corresponding menu in the main menu
bar of the current process into account. If you want to designate another process, pass its
number in the optional process parameter.

The command returns the name of the 4D method as a character string (expression). If no
method is associated with a menu item, the command returns an empty string.

See Also
SET MENU ITEM METHOD.

4D Language Reference 917

Get menu item modifiers Menus

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get menu item modifiers (menu; menuItem{; process}) → Number

Parameter Type Description

menu MenuRef | Longint → Menu reference or Menu number
menuItem Longint → Number of menu item or
-1 for the last item added to the menu
process Longint → Process number

Function result Number ← Modification key(s) associated with menu item

Description
The Get menu item modifiers command returns any additional modifier(s) associated with
the standard shortcut of the menu item designated by the menu and menuItem parameters.
The standard shortcut is composed of the Command (Mac OS) or Ctrl (Windows) key plus a
custom key. The standard shortcut is managed using the SET MENU ITEM SHORTCUT and
Get menu item key commands.

The additional modifiers are the Shift key and the Option (Mac OS) /Alt (Windows) key.
These modifiers can only be used when a standard shortcut has been specified beforehand.

The number value returned by the command corresponds to the code of the additional
modifier key(s). The key codes are as follows:
• Shift= 512
• Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) = 2048
If both keys are used, their values are combined.

Note: You can evaluate the value returned using the Shift key mask and Option key mask
constants of the “Events (Modifiers)” theme.

If the menu item does not have an associated modifier key, the command returns 0.
You can pass -1 in menuItem in order to specify the last item added to menu.

In menu, you can pass a menu reference (MenuRef) or a menu number.

If you pass a menu reference, the process parameter serves no purpose and will be ignored if
it is passed.
If you pass a menu number, the command will take the corresponding menu in the main
menu bar of the current process into account. If you want to designate another process,
pass its number in the optional process parameter.

918 4D Language Reference

Example
Refer to the example of the Get menu item key command.

See Also
Get menu item key, SET MENU ITEM SHORTCUT.

4D Language Reference 919

GET MENU ITEM PROPERTY Menus

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET MENU ITEM PROPERTY (menu; menuItem; property; value{; process})

Parameter Type Description

menu MenuRef | Longint → Menu reference or Menu number
menuItem Longint → Number of menu item or -1 for the last item
added to the menu
property String → Property type
value Expression ← Property value
process Longint → Process number

Description
The GET MENU ITEM PROPERTY command returns, in the value parameter, the current value
of the property of the menu item designated by the menu and menuItem parameters.
You can pass -1 in menuItem in order to specify the last item added to menu.

In menu, you can pass a menu reference (MenuRef) or a menu number. If you pass a menu
reference, the process parameter is unnecessary and will be ignored if it is passed. If you
pass a menu number, the command will take the corresponding menu in the main menu
bar of the current process into account. If you want to designate another process, pass its
number in the optional process parameter.

In the property parameter, pass the property for which you want to get the value. You can
use one of the constants of the “Menu item properties” theme or a string corresponding to a
custom property. For more information about menu properties and their values, please
refer to the description of the SET MENU ITEM PROPERTY command.

See Also
SET MENU ITEM PROPERTY.

920 4D Language Reference

Get menu item parameter Menus

version 11.4 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get menu item parameter (menu; menuItem) → String

Parameter Type Description

menu MenuRef | Longint → Menu reference or Menu number
menuItem Longint → Number of menu item or
-1 for the last item added to the menu

Function result String ← Custom parameter of the menu item

Description
The Get menu item parameter command returns the custom character string associated with
the menu item designated by the menu and menuItem parameters. This string must have
been set beforehand using the SET MENU ITEM PARAMETER command.

See Also
Dynamic pop up menu, Get selected menu item parameter, SET MENU ITEM PARAMETER.

4D Language Reference 921

Get menu item style Menus

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get menu item style (menu; menuItem; itemStyle{; process})

Parameter Type Description

menu Number | MenuRef → Menu number or Menu reference
menuItem Number → Menu item number or
-1 for last item added
itemStyle Number → New menu item style
process Number → Process reference number

Description
The Get menu item style command returns the font style of the menu item whose number or
reference is passed in menu and whose item number is passed in menuItem. You can pass -1 in
menuItem in order to indicate the last item added to menu.

If you omit the process parameter, Get menu item style applies to the menu bar for the current
process. Otherwise, Get menu item style applies to the menu bar for the process whose
reference number is passed in process.

Note: If you pass a MenuRef in menu, the process parameter serves no purpose and will be
ignored.

Get menu item style returns a combination (one or a sum) of the following predefined
constants, found in the Font Styles theme:

Constant Type Value

Plain Long Integer 0
Bold Long Integer 1
Italic Long Integer 2
Underline Long Integer 4

922 4D Language Reference

Example
To test if a menu item is displayed in bold, you write:

If ((Get menu item style($vlMenu;$vlItem) & Bold)#0)

`...
End if

See Also
SET MENU ITEM STYLE.

4D Language Reference 923

GET MENU ITEMS Menus

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET MENU ITEMS (menu; menuTitlesArray; menuRefsArray)

Parameter Type Description

menu MenuRef | Longint → Menu reference or Menu number
menuTitlesArray String array (32) ← Array of menu titles
menuRefsArray String array (16) ← Array of menu references

Description
The GET MENU ITEMS command returns, in the menuTitlesArray and menuRefsArray arrays,
the titles and IDs of all the items of the menu or menu bar designated by the menu
parameter.

In the menu parameter, you can pass a menu reference (MenuRef), a menu bar number or a
menu bar reference obtained using the Get menu bar reference command.

If no menu reference is associated with an item, an empty string is returned in the

corresponding array element.

Example
You want to find out the contents of the menu bar of the current process:

ARRAY TEXT(menuTitlesArray;0)
ARRAY TEXT(menuRefsArray;0)
MenuBarRef:=Get menu bar reference(Frontmost process)
GET MENU ITEMS(MenuBarRef;menuTitlesArray;menuRefsArray)

924 4D Language Reference

Get menu title Menus

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get menu title (menu{; process}) → String

Parameter Type Description

menu Number | MenuRef → Menu number or Menu reference
process Number → Process reference number

Function result String ← Title of the menu

Description
The Get menu title command returns the title of the menu whose number or reference is
passed in menu.

If you omit the process parameter, Get menu title applies to the menu bar for the current
process. Otherwise, Get menu title applies to the menu bar for the process whose reference
number is passed in process.

Note: If you pass a MenuRef in menu, the process parameter serves no purpose and will be
ignored.

See Also
Count menus.

4D Language Reference 925

Get selected menu item parameter Menus

version 11.4 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get selected menu item parameter → String

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result String ← Custom parameter of the menu item

Description
The Get selected menu item parameter command returns the custom character string
assoaciated with the selected menu item. This parameter must have been set beforehand
using the SET MENU ITEM PARAMETER command.
If no menu item has been selected, the command returns an empty string "".

See Also
Dynamic pop up menu, Get menu item parameter, SET MENU ITEM PARAMETER.

926 4D Language Reference

INSERT MENU ITEM Menus

version 11.4 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

INSERT MENU ITEM (menu; afterItem; itemText{; subMenu{; process{; *}}})

Parameter Type Description

menu Number | MenuRef → Menu number or Menu reference
afterItem Number → Menu item number
itemText String → Text for the menu item to be inserted
subMenu MenuRef → Reference of submenu associated with item
process Number → Process reference number
* * → If passed: consider metacharacters
as standard characters

Description
The INSERT MENU ITEM command inserts new menu items into the menu whose number or
reference is passed in menu after the existing menu item whose number is passed in afterItem.

If you omit the process parameter, INSERT MENU ITEM applies to the menu bar for the current
process. Otherwise, INSERT MENU ITEM applies to the menu bar for the process whose
reference number is passed in process.

Note: If you pass a MenuRef in menu, the process parameter serves no purpose and will be
ignored.

If you do not pass the * parameter, INSERT MENU ITEM allows to you insert one or several
menu items in one call.

INSERT MENU ITEM works like APPEND MENU ITEM, except that it enables you to insert items
anywhere in the menu, while APPEND MENU ITEM always adds them at the end of the menu.

See the description of the APPEND MENU ITEM command for details about the item definition
passed in itemText and about the action of the * parameter.

The optional subMenu parameter can be used to indicate a menu as the added item and thus
position a hierarchical submenu. You must pass a menu reference (MenuRef type string)
specifying a menu created, for example, using the Create menu command. If the command
adds more than one menu item, the submenu is associated with the first item.

4D Language Reference 927

Important: The new items do not have any associated methods or actions. These must be
associated with the items using the SET MENU ITEM PROPERTY or SET MENU ITEM METHOD
commands, or the items can also be managed from within a form method using the Menu
selected command.

Example
The following example creates a menu consisting of two commands to which it assigns a
method:

menuRef:=Create menu
APPEND MENU ITEM(menuRef;"Characters")
SET MENU ITEM METHOD(menuRef;1;"CharMgmtDial")
INSERT MENU ITEM(menuRef;1;"Paragraphs")
SET MENU ITEM METHOD(menuRef;2;"ParaMgmtDial")

See Also
APPEND MENU ITEM, SET MENU ITEM PARAMETER.

928 4D Language Reference

Menu selected Menus

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Menu selected {(subMenu)} → Number

Parameter Type Description

subMenu MenuRef ← Reference of menu containing item selected

Function result Number ← Menu command selected

Menu number in high word
Menu item number in low word

Description
Menu selected is used only when forms are displayed. It detects which menu command has
been chosen from a menu and, in the case of a hierarchical submenu, returns the reference of
the submenu.

Tip: Whenever possible, use methods associated with menu commands in an associated menu
bar (with a negative menu bar number) instead of using Menu selected. Associated menu bars
are easier to manage, since it is not necessary to test for their selection.

The Menu selected command can be used to work with hierarchical submenus. When selecting
a hierarchical menu item beyond the first level, the command returns, in the optional
subMenu parameter, the reference (MenuRef type, 16-character string) of the submenu to which
the selected item belongs. If the menu command does not contain a hierarchical submenu,
this parameter receives an empy string.

Menu selected returns the menu-selected number, a long integer. To find the menu number,
divide Menu selected by 65,536 and convert the result to an integer. To find the menu
command number, calculate the modulo of Menu selected with the modulus 65,536. Use the
following formulas to calculate the menu number and menu command number:
Menu := Menu selected \ 65536
menu command := Menu selected % 65536

4D Language Reference 929

You can also extract these values using the bitwise operators as follows:

Menu := (Menu selected & 0xFFFF0000) >> 16

menu command := Menu selected & 0xFFFF

If no menu commands are selected, Menu selected returns 0.

Example
The following form method uses Menu selected to supply the menu and menu item arguments
to SET MENU ITEM MARK:
Case of
: (Form event=On Menu Selected)
C_STRING(16;$refMenuIncludingItem)
C_LONGINT($ref;$MenuNum;$MenuItemNum)
$ref:= Menu selected($refMenuIncludingItem)
$MenuNum:=$ref\65536
$MenuItemNum:=$ref%65536
SET MENU ITEM MARK ($refMenuIncludingItem; $MenuItemNum;Char(18))
End case

Note: The On Menu Selected form event is not activated if no item is selected,
$refMenuIncludingItem is always given a value and $MenuNum equals 0 if the menu is not one
of the menus of the menu bar.

See Also
Managing Menus.

930 4D Language Reference

RELEASE MENU Menus

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

RELEASE MENU (menu)

Parameter Type Description

menu MenuRef → Menu reference

Description
The RELEASE MENU command removes the menu whose ID is passed in menu from
memory. This menu must have been created by the menu Create menu command.

The command removes every instance of the menu menu from every menu bar and every
process. If the menu belongs to a menu bar which is in use, it will continue to work but
can no longer be modified. It will only be truly removed from the memory when the last
menu bar where it appears is no longer in use.

This command can be used with menus that are used as menu bars.
Any sub-menus used by menu will not be removed. If you want to remove a menu and its
sub-menus, you must remove each of the submenus individually.

See Also
Create menu.

4D Language Reference 931

SET MENU BAR Menus

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET MENU BAR (menuBar{; process}{; *})

Parameter Type Description

menuBar Number| String | MenuRef → Number or name of the menu bar or
Menu reference
process Number → Process reference number
* → Save menu bar state

Description
SET MENU BAR replaces the current menu bar with the one specified by menuBar for the
current process only. In the menuBar parameter, you can pass either the number or name of
the new menu bar. You can also pass a menu ID (MenuRef type, 16-character string). When
you work with references, the menus can be used as menu bars and vice versa (see the
Managing Menus section).

Note: The name of a menu bar may contain up to 31 characters and must be unique.

The optional process parameter changes the menu bar of the specified process to menuBar.

Note: If you pass a MenuRef in menuBar, the process parameter serves no purpose and will be
ignored.

The optional * parameter allows you to save the state of the menu bar. If this parameter is
omitted, SET MENU BAR reinitializes the menu bar when the command is executed.
For example, suppose that SET MENU BAR(1) is executed. Next, several menu commands are
disabled using the DISABLE MENU ITEM command.
If SET MENU BAR(1) is executed a second time, either from the same process or from a different
process, all menu commands will revert to their initial enabled state.
If SET MENU BAR(1;*) is executed, the menu bar will retain the same state as before, and the
menu commands that were disabled will remain disabled.

Note: If you pass a MenuRef in menuBar, the * parameter serves no purpose and will be ignored.

When a user enters the Application environment, the first menu bar is displayed (Menu Bar
#1). You can change this menu bar when opening a database by specifying the desired menu
bar in the On Startup database method or in the startup method for an individual user.

932 4D Language Reference

Examples
1. The following example changes the current menu bar to menu bar #3 and resets the states
of the menu commands to their original states:

SET MENU BAR (3)

2. The following example changes the current menu bar to the menu bar named
“FormMenuBar1” and saves the states of the menu commands. Menu commands that were
previously disabled will appear disabled.

SET MENU BAR ("FormMenuBar1";*)

3. The following example sets the current menu bar to menu bar #3 while records are being
modified. After the records have been modified, the menu bar is reset to menu bar #2, with
the menu state saved:

SET MENU BAR(3)

ALL RECORDS([Customers])
MODIFY SELECTION([Customers])
SET MENU BAR(2;*)

4. In this comprehensive example, we will create, by programming, a menu bar including the
following File and Edit menus:

4D Language Reference 933

 `Method for creating File menu
C_STRING(16;FileMenu) ` FileMenu will contain the File menu reference
FileMenu:=Create menu
INSERT MENU ITEM(FileMenu;-1;"My Database "+Get indexed string(131;29))
SET MENU ITEM MARK(FileMenu;1;Char(18))
INSERT MENU ITEM(FileMenu;-1;"(-")
INSERT MENU ITEM(FileMenu;-1;"Quit the Test Application mode/Y")
SET MENU ITEM PROPERTY(FileMenu;3;Associated Standard Action;
Return to Design mode)
INSERT MENU ITEM(FileMenu;-1;"(-")
INSERT MENU ITEM(FileMenu;-1;Get indexed string(131;26))
`Preferences
SET MENU ITEM PROPERTY(FileMenu;6;Associated Standard Action; Preferences Action)
INSERT MENU ITEM(FileMenu;-1;"(-")
INSERT MENU ITEM(FileMenu;-1;Get indexed string(131;30))
SET MENU ITEM PROPERTY(FileMenu;7;Associated Standard Action; Quit Action) `Quit
SET MENU ITEM SHORTCUT(FileMenu;7;Character code("Q"))

`Method for creating File and Replace menu

`FindAndReplaceMenu will contain the Find and Replace menu reference
C_STRING(16;FindAndReplaceMenu)
FindAndReplaceMenu:=Create menu
APPEND MENU ITEM(FindAndReplaceMenu; "Find;Find Next;Find Previous;(-;Replace;
Replace Next;Replace Previous")
SET MENU ITEM SHORTCUT(FindAndReplaceMenu;1;Character code("F"))
SET MENU ITEM SHORTCUT(FindAndReplaceMenu;5;Character code("R"))
SET MENU ITEM METHOD(FindAndReplaceMenu;1; "MyFindMethod")

`Method for creating Edit menu

C_STRING(16; EditMenu) `EditMenu will contain the Edit menu reference
EditMenu:=Create menu
APPEND MENU ITEM(EditMenu;"Cut;Copy;Paste")
SET MENU ITEM SHORTCUT(EditMenu;1;Character code("X"))
SET MENU ITEM PROPERTY(EditMenu;1;Associated Standard Action; Cut Action)
SET MENU ITEM SHORTCUT(EditMenu;2;Character code("C"))
SET MENU ITEM PROPERTY(EditMenu;2;Associated Standard Action;Copy Action)
SET MENU ITEM SHORTCUT(EditMenu;3;Character code("V"))
SET MENU ITEM PROPERTY(EditMenu;3;Associated Standard Action;Paste Action)
INSERT MENU ITEM(EditMenu;-1;"(-")
` item that will have submenu
INSERT MENU ITEM(EditMenu;-1;"Find and Replace" ; FindAndReplaceMenu)

934 4D Language Reference

 main_Bar:=Create menu ` Create the menu bar made up of other menus
INSERT MENU ITEM(main_Bar;-1;Get indexed string(79;1);FileMenu)
APPEND MENU ITEM(main_Bar; "Edit";EditMenu)

SET MENU BAR(main_Bar)

See Also
Managing Menus.

4D Language Reference 935

SET MENU ITEM Menus

version 11.4 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET MENU ITEM (menu; menuItem; itemText{; process}{; *})

Parameter Type Description

menu Number | MenuRef → Menu number or Menu reference
menuItem Number → Menu item number or
-1 for the last item added
itemText String → New text for the menu item
process Number → Process reference number
* * → If passed: consider metacharacters
as standard characters

Description
The SET MENU ITEM command changes the text of the menu item whose menu number or
reference is passed in menu and whose item number is passed in menuItem, to the text passed
in itemText. You can pass -1 in menuItem in order to designate the last item added to the
menu.

If you do not pass the * parameter, any "special" characters included in itemText (such as ( ; or
!) will be considered as instruction characters (metacharacters). For example, to set a menu
item as a separator line, you insert the “-” character into itemText. If you pass the * parameter,
the "special" characters will be considered as standard characters. Please refer to the description
of the APPEND MENU ITEM command for more details about these characters.

If you omit the process parameter, SET MENU ITEM applies to the menu bar for the current
process. Otherwise, SET MENU ITEM applies to the menu bar for the process whose reference
number is passed in process.

Note: If you pass a MenuRef in menu, the process parameter serves no purpose and will be
ignored.

See Also
APPEND MENU ITEM, Get menu item, SET MENU ITEM SHORTCUT.

936 4D Language Reference

SET MENU ITEM ICON Menus

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET MENU ITEM ICON (menu; menuItem; iconRef{; process})

Parameter Type Description

menu MenuRef | Num → Menu reference or Menu number
menuItem Number → Number of menu item or
-1 for the last item added to the menu
iconRef Text | Longint → Name or number of picture to be
associated with menu item
process Number → Process number

Description
The SET MENU ITEM ICON command can be used to modify the icon associated with the
menu item designated by the menu and menuItem parameters.
You can pass -1 in menuItem in order to specify the last item added to menu.

In menu, you can pass a menu reference (MenuRef) or a menu number. If you pass a menu
reference, the command will apply to all the instances of the menu in all the processes. In
this case, the process parameter is ignored if it is passed. If you pass a menu number, the
command will take the corresponding menu in the main menu bar of the current process
into account. If you want to designate another process, pass its number in the optional
process parameter.

The icon associated with a menu item is added to the tool bar of the application. The
picture will be displayed in a 20 x 20 pixel frame.

In iconRef, you can pass the picture to be used as the icon. You can use a library picture or a
picture reference.
• Library picture: You can pass either the name or number of the picture. It is generally
preferable to use its number rather than its name since picture numbers are unique IDs,
which is not the case with names.
• Picture reference: The picture must be located in the Resources folder of the database and
you must use a "file:{pathname}fileName" type syntax in iconRef. For more information
about the Resources folder, please refer to the Resources section.

Example
Use of a picture located in the Resources folder of the database:

SET MENU ITEM ICON($MenuRef;2;"File:English.lproj/spot.png")

See Also
GET MENU ITEM ICON.

4D Language Reference 937

SET MENU ITEM MARK Menus

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET MENU ITEM MARK (menu; menuItem; mark{; process})

Parameter Type Description

menu Number | MenuRef → Menu number or Menu reference
menuItem Number → Item number or
-1 for last item added
mark String → New menu item mark
process Number → Process reference number

Description
The SET MENU ITEM MARK command changes the check mark of the menu item whose menu
number or reference is passed in menu and whose item number is passed in menuItem to the
first character of the string passed in mark. You can pass -1 in menuItem in order to designate
the last item added to the menu.

If you omit the process parameter, SET MENU ITEM MARK applies to the menu bar for the
current process. Otherwise, SET MENU ITEM MARK applies to the menu bar for the process
whose reference number is passed in process.

Note: If you pass a MenuRef in menu, the process parameter serves no purpose and will be
ignored.

If you pass an empty string, any mark is removed from the menu item. Otherwise:
• On Macintosh, the first character of the string becomes the mark of the menu item. Usually,
you will pass Char (18), which is the check mark character for Macintosh menus.
• On Windows, the menu item is assigned the standard check mark.

Example
See example for the Get menu item mark command.

See Also
Get menu item mark.

938 4D Language Reference

SET MENU ITEM METHOD Menus

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET MENU ITEM METHOD (menu; menuItem; methodName{; process})

Parameter Type Description

menu MenuRef | Longint → Menu reference or Menu number
menuItem Longint → Number of menu item or
-1 for the last item added to the menu
methodName String → Method name
process Longint → Process number

Description
The SET MENU ITEM METHOD command can be used to modify the 4D project method
associated with the menu item designated by the menu and menuItem parameters.
You can pass -1 in menuItem in order to specify the last item added to menu.

In menu, you can pass a menu reference (MenuRef) or a menu number. If you pass a menu
reference, the command will apply to all the instances of the menu in all the processes. In
this case, the process parameter is ignored if it is passed. If you pass a menu number, the
command will be applied to the corresponding menu in the main menu bar of the current
process. If you want to designate another process, pass its number in the optional process
parameter.

In method, pass the name of the 4D method as a character string (expression).

Note: If the menu item corresponds to the title of a hierarchical sub-menu, the method will
not be called when the menu item is selected.

Example
Refer to the example of the SET MENU BAR command.

See Also
Get menu item method.

4D Language Reference 939

SET MENU ITEM PROPERTY Menus

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET MENU ITEM PROPERTY (menu; menuItem; property; value{; process})

Parameter Type Description

menu MenuRef | Longint → Menu reference or menu number
menuItem Longint → Number of menu item or -1 for the last item
added to the menu
property String → Property type
value Expression → Property value
process Longint → Process number

Description
The SET MENU ITEM PROPERTY command is used to set the value of the property for the
menu item designated by the menu and menuItem parameters.
You can pass -1 in menuItem in order to specify the last item added to menu.

In menu, you can pass a menu reference (MenuRef) or a menu number. If you pass a menu
reference, the command will apply to all the instances of the menu in all the processes. In
this case, the process parameter is ignored if it is passed. If you pass a menu number, the
command will take the corresponding menu in the main menu bar of the current process
into account. If you want to designate another process, pass its number in the optional
process parameter.

In the property parameter, pass the property whose value you want to modify and pass the
new value in value. For the property parameter, you can use one of the constants of the
“Menu item properties” theme or any custom value:

• Standard property: The constants of the “Menu item properties” theme as well as their
possible values are described below. Note that in the case of the Associated Standard Action
property, you can pass one of the constants of the “Value for Associated Standard Action”
theme in the value parameter:
property (Constant) value (Possible values)
Associated Standard Action 0 = No Action
Used to associate a standard action 1 = Cancel Action
with a menu item. 2 = Accept Action
3 = Next record Action
4 = Previous record Action
5 = First record Action
6 = Last record Action
7 = Delete record Action

940 4D Language Reference

 8 = Next page Action
9 = Previous page Action
10 = First page Action
11 = Last page Action
12 = Edit subrecord Action
13 = Delete subrecord Action
14 = Add subrecord Action
17 = Undo Action
18 = Cut Action
19 = Copy Action
20 = Paste Action
21 = Clear Action
22 = Select all Action
23 = Show Clipboard Action
26 = Test Application Action
27 = Quit Action
31 = Redo Action
32 = Preferences Action
35 = Return to Design mode
36 = MSC Action
Start a New Process 0 = No
Used to activate the "Start 1 = Yes
New Process" option.
Access Privileges 0 = All Groups
Used to assign an access group to >0 = Group ID
the command.

For more information about standard menu item properties, refer to the “Creating Custom
Menus” chapter of the Design Reference manual.

• Custom property: In property, you can pass any custom text and associate a value of the
text, number or Boolean type with it. This value will be stored with the item and can be
retrieved using the GET MENU ITEM PROPERTY command. You can use any custom string in
the property parameter, simply make sure not to use a title used by 4D (by convention,
properties set by 4D begin with “4D_”).

Note: If the menu item corresponds to the title of a hierarchical sub-menu, the standard
action will not be called when the menu item is selected.

See Also
GET MENU ITEM PROPERTY.

4D Language Reference 941

SET MENU ITEM PARAMETER Menus

version 11.4 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET MENU ITEM PARAMETER (menu; menuItem; param)

Parameter Type Description

menu MenuRef | Longint → Menu reference or Menu number
menuItem Longint → Number of menu item or
-1 for the last item added to the menu
param String → String to associate as parameter

Description
The SET MENU ITEM PARAMETER command can be used to associate a custom character
string with a menu item designated by the menu and menuItem parameters.

This parameter will mainly be used by the Dynamic pop up menu command.

See Also
Dynamic pop up menu, Get menu item parameter, Get selected menu item parameter.

942 4D Language Reference

SET MENU ITEM SHORTCUT Menus

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET MENU ITEM SHORTCUT (menu; menuItem; itemKey{; modifiers{; process}})

Parameter Type Description

menu Number | MenuRef → Menu number or Menu reference
menuItem Number → Menu item number or
-1 for last item added
itemKey Number | Text → Character code of keyboard shortcut or
Letter of keyboard shortcut
modifiers Longint → Modifier(s) to associate with shortcut
(ignored if key code is passed)
process Number → Process reference number

Description
The SET MENU ITEM SHORTCUT command replaces the shortcut key associated with the menu
command specified by menu and menuItem, by the character whose character code or text is
passed in itemKey. You can pass -1 in menuItem in order to indicate the last item added to
menu. This key will automatically be combined with the Ctrl (Windows) or Command
(Macintosh) key in order to set the new keyboard shortcut.

You can pass the name of the key directly as text (a letter) in the itemKey parameter, for
example “U” to specify the Ctrl+U (Windows) or Command+U (Mac OS) shortcut. When you
use this syntax, you can also pass the optional modifiers parameter in order to associate
additional modifiers with the shortcut. This way you can define shortcuts of the
Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Z (Windows) or Cmd+Option+Shift+Z (Mac OS) type.
To do this, pass the following values in modifiers:
• 512 for the Shift key
• 2048 for the Option (Mac OS) or Alt (Windows) key
• To associate both keys, combine their values.
Note that the Ctrl (Windows) and Command (Mac OS) keys are automatically added by 4D to
the keyboard shortcut.

Note: You can specify the value to pass using the Shift key mask and Option key mask constants
of the “Events (Modifiers)” theme.

4D Language Reference 943

If passed, the modifiers parameter is not taken into account when the shortcut key is specified
via a character code (former syntax).

If you omit the process parameter, SET MENU ITEM SHORTCUT applies to the menu bar for the
current process. Otherwise, SET MENU ITEM SHORTCUT applies to the menu bar for the process
whose reference number is passed in process.

Note: If you pass a MenuRef in menu, the process parameter serves no purpose and will be
ignored.

If you pass 0 (zero) in itemKey, any shortcut is removed from the menu item.

Example
Definition of the Ctrl+Shift+U (Windows) and Cmd+Shift+U (Mac OS) shortcut for the
“Underline” menu item:

SET MENU ITEM(menuRef;1;"Underline")

SET MENU ITEM SHORTCUT(menuRef;1;"U";Shift key mask)

See Also
Get menu item key, Get menu item modifiers.

944 4D Language Reference

SET MENU ITEM STYLE Menus

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET MENU ITEM STYLE (menu; menuItem; itemStyle{; process})

Parameter Type Description

menu Number | MenuRef → Menu number or Menu reference
menuItem Number → Menu item number or
-1 for last item added
itemStyle Number → New menu item style
process Number → Process reference number

Description
The SET MENU ITEM STYLE command changes the font style of the menu item whose menu
number or reference is passed in menu and whose item number is passed in menuItem
according to the font style passed in itemStyle. You can pass -1 in menuItem in order to
indicate the last item added to menu.

If you omit the process parameter, SET MENU ITEM STYLE applies to the menu bar for the
current process. Otherwise, SET MENU ITEM STYLE applies to the menu bar for the process
whose reference number is passed in process.

Note: If you pass a MenuRef in menu, the process parameter serves no purpose and will be
ignored.

You specify the font style of the item in the itemStyle parameter. You pass a combination (one
or a sum) of the following predefined constants, found in the Font Styles theme:

Constant Type Value

Plain Long Integer 0
Bold Long Integer 1
Italic Long Integer 2
Underline Long Integer 4

See Also
Get menu item style.

4D Language Reference 945

946 4D Language Reference
27
______________________
Messages

4D Language Reference 947

948 4D Language Reference
ALERT Messages

version 6.0 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

ALERT (message{; ok button title})

Parameter Type Description

message String → Message to display in the alert dialog box
ok button title String → OK button title

Description
The ALERT command displays an alert dialog box composed of a note icon, a message, and an
OK button.

You pass the message to be displayed in the parameter message. This message can be up to 255
characters long. However, if the message does not fit into the message area, it can appear
truncated, depending on its length and the width of the characters.

By default, the title of the OK button is “OK.” To change the title of the OK button, pass the
new custom title into the optional parameter ok button title. If necessary, the OK button width
is resized toward the left, according to the width of the custom title you pass.

Tip: Do not call the ALERT command from the section of a form or object method that handles
the On Activate or On Deactivate form events; this will cause an endless loop.

Examples
1. This example displays an alert showing information about a company. Note that the
displayed string contains carriage returns, which cause the string to wrap to the next line:
ALERT("Company: "+[Companies]Name+Char(13)+"People in company: "+
String(Records in selection([People]))+Char(13)+"Number of parts they supply: "
+String (Records in selection([Parts])))

4D Language Reference 949

This line of code displays the following alert box (on Windows):

2. The line:
ALERT("I'm sorry Dave, I can't do that.";"Alas!")
displays the alert dialog box (on Windows) shown:

3. The line:
ALERT("You no longer have the access privileges for deleting these records.";"Well, I swear I
did not know that")

950 4D Language Reference

displays the alert dialog box (on Windows) shown:

See Also
CONFIRM, DISPLAY NOTIFICATION, Request.

4D Language Reference 951

CONFIRM Messages

version 6.0 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

CONFIRM (message{; OK button title{; cancel button title}})

Parameter Type Description

message String → Message to display in the confirmation dialog box
OK button title String → OK button title
cancel button title String → Cancel button title

Description
The CONFIRM command displays a confirm dialog box composed of a note icon, a message, an
OK button, and a Cancel Button.

You pass the message to be displayed in the message parameter. This message can be up to 255
characters long. If the message does not fit into the message area, it can appear truncated,
depending on its length and the width of the characters.

By default, the title of the OK button is “OK” and that of the Cancel button is “Cancel.” To
change the titles of these buttons, pass the new custom titles into the optional parameters ok
button title and cancel button title. If necessary, the width of the buttons is resized toward the
left, according to the width of the custom titles you pass.

The OK button is the default button. If the user clicks the OK button or presses Enter to accept
the dialog box, the OK system variable is set to 1. If the user clicks the Cancel button to cancel
the dialog box, the OK system variable is set to 0.

Tip: Do not call the CONFIRM command from the section of a form or object method that
handles the On Activate or On Deactivate form events; this will cause an endless loop.

952 4D Language Reference

Examples
1. The line:
CONFIRM("WARNING: You will not be able to revert this operation.")
If (OK=1)
ALL RECORDS([Old Stuff])
DELETE SELECTION([Old Stuff])
Else
ALERT ("Operation canceled.")
End if
will display the confirm dialog box (on Windows) shown here:

2. The line:
CONFIRM("Do you really want to close this account?";"Yes";"No")
will display the confirm dialog box (on Windows) shown here:

3. You are writing a 4D application for the international market. You wrote a project method
that returns the correct localized text from its English version. You have also populated an
array named <>asLocalizedUIMessages,where you store the most common words. In doing so,
the line:
CONFIRM(INTL Text ("Do you want to add a new Memo?");
<>asLocalizedUIMessages{kLoc_YES};<>asLocalizedUIMessages{kLoc_NO})

4D Language Reference 953

could display the French confirm dialog box (on Windows) shown here:

4. The line:
CONFIRM("WARNING: If your pursue this operation, some records will be "+
"irremediably affected."+Char(13)+"What do you want to do?";"Do NOT continue";
"Continue")
will display the confirm dialog box (on Macintosh) shown here:

See Also
ALERT, Request.

954 4D Language Reference

DISPLAY NOTIFICATION Messages

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DISPLAY NOTIFICATION (title; text{; duration})

Parameter Type Description

title Alpha 255 → Notification title
text Alpha 255 → Notification text
duration Number → Display duration in seconds

Note: This command only works under Windows.

Description
The DISPLAY NOTIFICATION command displays a message in the notification area of the
Windows taskbar:

Usually this kind of message is used by the OS or an application to inform the user of an
external event (network disconnection, availability of an upgrade, etc.).

In title and text, pass the title and the text of the message to display (in the above example,
the title is “4D Export”). You can enter up to 255 characters.

By default, the message window remains displayed until the user clicks on the close box. If
you pass the optional duration parameter, the window will be closed automatically at the
end of the duration set if the user did not click on the close box. Note that the notification
icon will remain displayed until the end of duration, even if the user has closed the
window.

See Also
ALERT.

4D Language Reference 955

GOTO XY Messages

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GOTO XY (x; y)

Parameter Type Description

x Number → x (horizontal) position of cursor
y Number → y (vertical) position of cursor

Description
The GOTO XY command is used in conjunction with the MESSAGE command when you
display messages in a window opened using Open window.

GOTO XY positions the character cursor (an invisible cursor) to set the location of the next
message in the window.

The upper-left corner is position 0,0. The cursor is automatically placed at 0,0 when a window
is opened and after ERASE WINDOW is executed.

After GOTO XY positions the cursor, you can use MESSAGE to display characters in the window.

Tip: Using a fixed-width (monospaced) font, such as Terminal on Windows and Monaco on
Macintosh, for the message, gives the best display results with GOTO XY and MESSAGE. See the
description of the MESSAGE command for more information.

Examples
1. See example for the command MESSAGE.

2. See example for the command Milliseconds.

956 4D Language Reference

3. The following example:

Open window(50;50;300;300;5;"This is only a test")

For ($vlRow;0;9)
GOTO XY($vlRow;0)
MESSAGE(String($vlRow))
End for
For ($vlLine;0;9)
GOTO XY(0;$vlLine)
MESSAGE(String($vlLine))
End for
$vhStartTime:=Current time
Repeat
Until ((Current time-$vhStartTime)>†00:00:30†)
displays the following window (on Macintosh) for 30 seconds:

See Also
MESSAGE.

4D Language Reference 957

MESSAGE Messages

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

MESSAGE (message)

Parameter Type Description

message String → Message to display

Description
The MESSAGE command is usually used to inform the user of some activity. It displays message
on the screen in a special message window that opens and closes each time you call MESSAGE,
unless you work with a window you previously opened using Open window (see the following
details). The message is temporary and is erased as soon as a form is displayed or the method
stops executing. If another MESSAGE is executed, the old message is erased.

If a window is opened with Open window, all subsequent calls to MESSAGE display the
messages in that window. The window behaves like a terminal:
• Successive messages do not erase previous messages when displayed in the window. Instead,
they are concatenated onto existing messages.
• If a message is wider than the window, 4D automatically performs text wrap.
• If a message has more lines than the window, 4D automatically scrolls the message window.
• To control line breaks, include carriage returns — Char(13) — into your message.
• To display the text at a particular place in the window, call GOTO XY.
• To erase the contents of the window, call ERASE WINDOW .
• The window is only an output window and does not redraw when other windows overlap it.

Examples
1. The following example processes a selection of records and calls MESSAGE to inform the user
about the progress of the operation:

For($vlRecord;1;Records in selection([anyTable]))
MESSAGE ("Processing record #"+String($vlRecord))
` Do Something with the record
NEXT RECORD([anyTable])
End for

958 4D Language Reference

The following window appears and disappears at each MESSAGE call:

2. In order to avoid this "blinking" window, you can display the messages in a window opened
using Open window, as in this example:

Open window(50;50;500;250;5;"Operation in Progress")

For($vlRecord;1;Records in selection([anyTable]))
MESSAGE ("Processing record #"+String($vlRecord))
` Do Something with the record
NEXT RECORD([anyTable])
End for
CLOSE WINDOW

This provides the following result (shown here on Windows):

3. Adding a carriage return makes a better presentation:

Open window(50;50;500;250;5;"Operation in Progress")

For($vlRecord;1;Records in selection([anyTable]))
MESSAGE ("Processing record #"+String($vlRecord)+Char(Carriage return))
` Do Something with the record
NEXT RECORD([anyTable])
End for
CLOSE WINDOW

4D Language Reference 959

This provides the following result (shown here on Windows):

4. Using GOTO XY and writing some additional lines:

Open window(50;50;500;250;5;"Operation in Progress")

$vlNbRecords:=Records in selection([anyTable])
$vhStartTime:=Current time
For($vlRecord;1;$vlNbRecords)
GOTO XY(5;2)
MESSAGE ("Processing record #"+String($vlRecord)+Char(Carriage return))
` Do Something with the record
NEXT RECORD([anyTable])
GOTO XY(5;5)
$vlRemaining:=(($vlNbRecords/$vlRecord)-1)*(Current time-$vhStartTime)
MESSAGE ("Estimated remaining time: "+Time string($vlRemaining))
End for
CLOSE WINDOW

This provides the following result (shown here on Windows):

See Also
CLOSE WINDOW, ERASE WINDOW, GOTO XY, Open window.

960 4D Language Reference

MESSAGES OFF Messages

version 11.3 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

MESSAGES OFF

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
The MESSAGES ON and MESSAGES OFF commands turn on and off the progress meters
displayed by 4D while executing time-consuming operations. By default, messages are on.

The following table shows operations that display the progress meter:
Apply Formula Quick Report Order by
Export Data Import Data Graph
Query by Form Query by Formula Query Editor

The following table lists the commands that display the progress meter:
APPLY TO SELECTION
Average
DISTINCT VALUES
EXPORT DIF
EXPORT SYLK
EXPORT TEXT
GRAPH TABLE
IMPORT DIF
IMPORT SYLK
IMPORT TEXT
Max
Min
QR REPORT
QUERY
QUERY BY EXAMPLE
QUERY BY FORMULA
QUERY SELECTION
QUERY SELECTION BY FORMULA
REDUCE SELECTION

4D Language Reference 961

RELATE MANY SELECTION
RELATE ONE SELECTION
SCAN INDEX
Sum
ORDER BY
ORDER BY FORMULA

Example
The following example turns off the progress meter before doing a sort, and then turns it back
on after completing the sort:
MESSAGES OFF
ORDER BY ([Addresses];[Addresses]ZIP;>;[Addresses]Name2;>)
MESSAGES ON

962 4D Language Reference

MESSAGES ON Messages

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

MESSAGES ON

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
See the description of the MESSAGES OFF command.

4D Language Reference 963

Request Messages

version 6.0 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Request (message{; defaultResponse{; OKButtonTitle{; CancelButtonTitle}}}) → String

Parameter Type Description

message String → Message to display in the request dialog box
defaultResponse String → Default data for the enterable text area
OKButtonTitle String → OK button title
CancelButtonTitle String → Cancel button title

Function result String ← Value entered by user

Description
The Request command displays a request dialog box composed of a message, a text input area,
an OK button, and a Cancel Button.

You pass the message to be displayed in the message parameter. This message can be up to 255
characters long. If the message does not fit into the message area, it can appear truncated,
depending on its length and the width of the characters.

By default, the title of the OK button is “OK” and that of the Cancel button is “Cancel.” To
change the titles of these buttons, pass the new custom titles into the optional parameters
OKButtonTitle and CancelButtonTitle. If necessary, the width of the buttons is resized toward
the left, according to the width of the custom titles you pass.

The OK button is the default button. If you click the OK button or press Enter to accept the
dialog box, the OK system variable is set to 1. If you click the Cancel button to cancel the
dialog box, the OK system variable is set to 0.

The user can enter text into the text input area. To specify a default value, pass the default text
in the defaultResponse parameter. If the user clicks OK, Request returns the text. If the user
clicks Cancel, Request returns an empty string (""). If the response should be a numeric or a
date value, convert the string returned by Request to the proper type with the Num or Date
functions.

Tip: Do not call the Request command from the section of a form or object method that
handles the On Activate or On Deactivate form event; this will cause an endless loop.

964 4D Language Reference

Tip: If you need to get several pieces of information from the user, design a form and present it
with DIALOG, rather than presenting a succession of Request dialog boxes.

Examples
1. The line:
$vsPrompt:= Request ("Please enter your name:")
will display the request dialog box (on Windows) shown here:

2. The line:
vsPrompt:= Request ("Name of the Employee:";"";"Create Record";"Cancel")
If (OK=1)
ADD RECORD ([Employees])
` Note: vsPrompt is then copied into the field [Employees]Last name
` during the On Load event in the form method
End if
will display the request dialog box (on Windows) shown here:

3. The line:
$vdPrompt:= Date (Request ("Enter the new date:";String (Current date)))

4D Language Reference 965

will display the request dialog box (on Windows) shown here:

See Also
ALERT, CONFIRM.

966 4D Language Reference

28
______________________
Named Selections

4D Language Reference 967

968 4D Language Reference
Named Selections Named Selections

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Named selections provide an easy way to manipulate several selections simultaneously. A

named selection is an ordered list of records for a table in a process. This ordered list can be
given a name and kept in memory. Named selections offer a simple means to preserve in
memory the order of the selection and the current record of the selection.

The following commands enable you to work with named selections:

• COPY NAMED SELECTION
• CUT NAMED SELECTION
• USE NAMED SELECTION
• CLEAR NAMED SELECTION
• CREATE SELECTION FROM ARRAY

Named selections are created with the COPY NAMED SELECTION, CUT NAMED SELECTION and
CREATE SELECTION FROM ARRAY commands. Named selections are generally used to work on
one or more selections and to save and later restore an ordered selection. There can be many
named selections for each table in a process. To reuse a named selection as the current
selection, call USE NAMED SELECTION. When you are done with a named selection, use CLEAR
NAMED SELECTION.

Note: Combining the statement SET QUERY DESTINATION(Into named selection;namedselection)

with a search command (for example QUERY) can also be used to create a named selection.
Refer to the description of the SET QUERY DESTINATION command.

Named selections can be local, process or interprocess in scope.

A named selection is local when its name is preceded by a dollar sign. When its name is not
preceded by any symbol, it is a process named selection and it is an interprocess named
selection if its name is preceded by the symbols (<>) — a “less than” sign followed by a
“greater than” sign.

Note: This syntax can be used on both Windows and Macintosh. In addition, on Macintosh
only, you can use the diamond (Option-Shift-V on US keyboard).

4D Language Reference 969

The scope of an interprocess named selection is identical to the scope of an interprocess
variable. An interprocess named selection can be accessed from any process.
With 4D in remote mode and 4D Server, an interprocess named selection is available only to
the processes of the client that created it. An interprocess named selection is not available to
other client machines.

A process named selection is available only within the process in which it was created and on
the server.

A local named selection is defined for the process that created it and is not visible on the
server.

Warning: Creating a named selection requires access to the selection of the table. Since
selections are kept on the server and a local process does not have access to server data, do not
use named selections within local processes.

Visibility of Sets
The following table indicates the principles concerning the visibility of named selections
depending on their scope and where they were created:

Named Selections and Sets

The differences between sets and named selections are:
• A named selection is an ordered list of records; a set is not.
• Sets are very memory efficient, because they require only one bit for each record in the file.
Named selections require 4 bytes for each record in the selection.

970 4D Language Reference

• Unlike sets, named selections cannot be saved to disk.
• Sets have the standard Intersection, Union and Difference operations; named selections
cannot be combined with other named selections.

The similarities between named selections and sets are:

• Like a set, a named selection exists in memory.
• A named selection and a set store references to a record. If records are modified or deleted,
the named selection or the set can become invalid.
• Like a set, a named selection “remembers” the current record as of the time the named
selection was created.

See Also
Identifiers, SET QUERY DESTINATION.

4D Language Reference 971

CLEAR NAMED SELECTION Named Selections

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

CLEAR NAMED SELECTION (name)

Parameter Type Description

name String → Name of named selection to be cleared

Description
CLEAR NAMED SELECTION clears name from memory and frees the memory used by name.
CLEAR NAMED SELECTION does not affect tables, selections, or records. Since named selections
use memory, it is good practice to clear named selections when they are no longer needed.

If name was created using the CUT NAMED SELECTION command and then manipulated using
the USE NAMED SELECTION command, name no longer exists in memory. In this case, the
CLEAR NAMED SELECTION command does not need to be used.

See Also
COPY NAMED SELECTION, CUT NAMED SELECTION, USE NAMED SELECTION.

972 4D Language Reference

COPY NAMED SELECTION Named Selections

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

COPY NAMED SELECTION ({aTable; }name)

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table from which to copy selection, or
Default table, if omitted
name String → Name of the named selection to create

Description
COPY NAMED SELECTION copies the current selection of aTable to the named selection name.
The default table for the process is used if the optional table parameter is not specified. The
parameter name contains a copy of the selection. The current selection and the current record
of Table for the process are not changed.

A named selection does not actually contain the records, but only an ordered list of references
to records. Each reference to a record takes 4 bytes in memory. This means that when a
selection is copied using the COPY NAMED SELECTION command, the amount of memory
required is 4 bytes multiplied by the number of records in the selection. Since named
selections reside in memory, you should have enough memory for the named selection as well
as the current selection of the table in the process.

Use the CLEAR NAMED SELECTION command to free the memory used by name.

Example
The following example allows you to check if there are other overdue invoices in the [People]
table. The selection is sorted and then saved. We search for all records where invoices are due.
Then we reuse the selection and clear the named selection in memory. Clearing the named
selection in memory is optional, in case the database designer wants to keep the sorted
selection for future use:

ALL RECORDS([People])
`Allow the user to sort the selection
ORDER BY([People])
` Save the sorted selection as a named selection
COPY NAMED SELECTION([People];"UserSort")
` Search for records where invoices are due
QUERY([People];[People]InvoiceDue=True)

4D Language Reference 973

 ` If records are found
If (Records in selection([People])>0)
` Alert the user
ALERT("Yes, there are overdue invoices on table.")
End if
` Reuse the sorted named selection
USE NAMED SELECTION("UserSort")
` Remove the selection from memory
CLEAR NAMED SELECTION("UserSort")

See Also
CLEAR NAMED SELECTION, CUT NAMED SELECTION, Identifiers, USE NAMED SELECTION.

974 4D Language Reference

CREATE SELECTION FROM ARRAY Named Selections

version 6.7 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

CREATE SELECTION FROM ARRAY (aTable; recordArray{; selectionName})

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table from which to create the selection
recordArray Longint | Bool. Array → Array of record numbers, or
Array of booleans (True = the record is in the
selection, False = the record is not in the selection)
selectionName String → Name of the named selection to create, or
Apply the command to the current selection
if the parameter is omitted

Description
The CREATE SELECTION FROM ARRAY command creates the named selection selectionName
from:

• either an array of absolute record numbers recordArray from aTable,

• or an array of booleans. In this case, the values of the array indicate the belonging (True) or
not (False) of each record in table to selectionName.

If you don’t pass selectionName or if you pass an empty string, the command will be applied to
the current selection, which will then be updated.

When you use a Longint array with this command, all the numbers of the array represent the
list of record numbers in selectionName. If a number is incorrect (record not created), error -
10503 is generated.

Note: Be careful, you must make sure that the array does not contain any lines that have the
same value, otherwise the resulting selection will be incorrect.

When you use a Boolean array with this command, the Xth element of the array indicates if
the record number X is (True) or is not (False) in selectionName. The number of elements in
recordArray must be equal to the number of records in table. If the array is smaller than the
number of records, only the records defined by the array can make up the selection.

Note: With an array of booleans, the command uses elements from numbers 0 to X-1.

4D Language Reference 975

Warning: A named selection is created and loaded into memory. Therefore, make sure that
you have enough memory before executing this command.

See Also
CLEAR NAMED SELECTION, COPY NAMED SELECTION, CREATE SET FROM ARRAY, Identifiers,
LONGINT ARRAY FROM SELECTION, USE NAMED SELECTION.

976 4D Language Reference

CUT NAMED SELECTION Named Selections

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

CUT NAMED SELECTION ({aTable; }name)

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table from which to cut selection, or
Default table, if omitted
name String → Name of the named selection to create

Description
CUT NAMED SELECTION creates a named selection name and moves the current selection of
aTable to it. This command differs from COPY NAMED SELECTION in that it does not copy the
current selection, but moves the current selection of table itself.

After the command has been executed, the current selection of aTable in the current process
becomes empty. Therefore, CUT NAMED SELECTION should not be used while a record is being
modified.

CUT NAMED SELECTION is more memory efficient than COPY NAMED SELECTION. With COPY
NAMED SELECTION, 4 bytes times the number of selected records is duplicated in memory.
With CUT NAMED SELECTION, only the reference to the list is moved.

Example
The following method empties the current selection of a table [Customers]:
CUT NAMED SELECTION([Customers]; "ToBeCleared")
CLEAR NAMED SELECTION("ToBeCleared")

See Also
CLEAR NAMED SELECTION, COPY NAMED SELECTION, Identifiers, USE NAMED SELECTION.

4D Language Reference 977

USE NAMED SELECTION Named Selections

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

USE NAMED SELECTION (name)

Parameter Type Description

name String → Name of named selection to be used

Description
USE NAMED SELECTION uses the named selection name as the current selection for the table to
which it belongs.

When you create a named selection, the current record is “remembered” by the named
selection. USE NAMED SELECTION retrieves the position of this record and makes the record
the new current record; this command loads the current record. If the current record was
modified after name was created, the record should be saved before USE NAMED SELECTION is
executed, in order to avoid losing the modified information.

• If COPY NAMED SELECTION was used to create name, the named selection name is copied to
the current selection of the table to which name belongs. The named selection name exists in
memory until it is cleared. Use the CLEAR NAMED SELECTION command to clear the named
selection and free the memory used by name.

• If CUT NAMED SELECTION was used to create name, the current selection is set to name and
name no longer exists in memory.

Remember that a named selection is a representation of a selection of records at the moment

that the named selection is created. If the records represented by the named selection change,
the named selection may no longer be accurate. Therefore, a named selection represents a
group of records that does not change frequently. A number of things can invalidate a named
selection: modifying a record of the named selection, deleting a record of the named selection,
or changing the criterion that determined the named selection.

See Also
COPY NAMED SELECTION, CUT NAMED SELECTION, USE NAMED SELECTION.

978 4D Language Reference

29
______________________
Object Properties

4D Language Reference 979

980 4D Language Reference
Object Properties Object Properties

version 6.5 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The Object Properties commands act on the properties of objects present in forms. They
enable you to change the appearance and behavior of the objects while using the forms to
display records and in the Application environment.

Important: The scope of these commands is the form currently being used; changes disappear
when you exit the form.

Accessing Objects using their Object Names or their Data Source Names
The Object Properties commands share the same generic syntax described here:

COMMAND NAME({*;} object { ; additional parameters specific to each command )

If you specify the optional * parameter, you indicate an object name (a string) in object.

Note: It is possible to use the @ character within that name if you want to address several
objects of the form in one call. The following table shows examples of object names you can
specify to this command.

Object Names Objects affected by the call

mainGroupBox Only the object mainGroupBox.
main@ The objects whose name starts with “main”.
@GroupBox The objects whose name ends with “GroupBox”.
@Group@ The objects whose name contains “Group”.
main@Btn The objects whose name starts with “main” and ends with “Btn”.
@ All the objects present in the form.

If you omit the optional * parameter, you indicate a field or a variable in object. In this case,
you specify a field or variable reference (field or variable objects only) instead of a string.

Note: If you place several objects in a form that have different object names but which are
associated with the same variable, 4D will apply commands to all of the objects, even if you
have used the object name as parameter. For example, if a form contains three buttons named
"Btn1", "Btn2" and "Btn3" that are each associated with the same variable var1, executing the
ENABLE BUTTON(*;"Btn2") statement will trigger the activation of all three buttons.

4D Language Reference 981

BEST OBJECT SIZE Object Properties

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

BEST OBJECT SIZE ({*; }object; bestWidth; bestHeight{; maxWidth})

Parameter Type Description

* → If specified = object is an object name (String)
If omitted = object is a variable
object Object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Field or variable (if * is omitted)
bestWidth Longint ← Optimum object width
bestHeight Longint ← Optimum object height
maxWidth Longint → Maximum object width

Description
The BEST OBJECT SIZE command returns the bestWidth and bestHeight parameters, the
“optimal” width and height of the form object designated by the * and object parameters.
These values are expressed in pixels. This command is particularly useful for displaying or
printing complex reports, associated with the MOVE OBJECT command.

If you pass the optional * parameter, this indicates that the object parameter is an object
name (a character string). If you do not pass the * parameter, this indicates that object is a
field or a variable. In this case, do not pass a string but rather a field or variable reference
(object type only).

The optimal values returned indicate the minimum size of the object so that its current
contents are entirely included within the limits. Of course, these values are only
meaningful for objects containing text. This calculation takes the font, font size, font style
and object contents into account. It also takes hyphenation and carriage returns into
consideration. If the object specified is empty, the bestWidth returned is 0.

The size returned does not take into account any graphic frame applied around the object,
nor any scrollbars. To obtain the real size of an object on screen, it is necessary to add the
width of these elements.

The optional maxWidth parameter enables you to attribute a maximum width to the object.
If the optimal width of the object is greater than this value, BEST OBJECT SIZE returns
maxWidth in the bestWidth parameter and increases the optimal height as a consequence.

982 4D Language Reference

The following objects are handled by this command:
• Static text areas
• Text inserted in the form of references
• Fields and variables of the following types: Alpha, Text, Real, Integer, Long Integer, Date,
Time, Boolean (check boxes and radio buttons)
• Buttons.

For all other form object types (group areas, tabs, rectangles, straight lines, circles/ovals,
external areas, etc.), the BEST OBJECT SIZE command returns the current object size (defined
in the form editor and possibly using the MOVE OBJECT command).

Example
Refer to the example in the SET PRINT MARKER command.

See Also
MOVE OBJECT.

4D Language Reference 983

BUTTON TEXT Object Properties

version 6.0 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

BUTTON TEXT ({*; }object; buttonText)

Parameter Type Description

* → If specified, object is an Object Name (String)
If omitted, object is a Variable
object Form Object → Object Name (if * is specified), or
Variable (if * is omitted)
buttonText String → New title for the button

Description
The BUTTON TEXT command changes the title of the buttons specified by object to the value
you pass in buttonText.

If you specify the optional * parameter, you indicate an object name (a string) in object. If you
omit the optional * parameter, you indicate a field or a variable in object. In this case, you
specify a field or variable reference (field or variable objects only) instead of a string. For more
information about object names, see the section Object Properties.

BUTTON TEXT affects only buttons that display text: buttons, check boxes, and radio buttons.

Usually, you will apply this command to one button at a time. The button area must be large
enough to accommodate the text; if it is not, the text is truncated. Do not use carriage returns
in buttonText.

Example
The following example is the object method of a search button located in the footer area of an
output form displayed using MODIFY SELECTION. The method searches a table; depending on
the search results, it enables or disables a button labeled bDelete and changes its title:

QUERY ([People]; [People]Name = vName)

Case of
: (Records in selection ([People]) = 0) ` No people found
BUTTON TEXT (bDelete;" Delete")
DISABLE BUTTON (bDelete)

984 4D Language Reference

 : (Records in selection ([People]) = 1) ` One person found
BUTTON TEXT (bDelete;"Delete Person")
ENABLE BUTTON (bDelete)
: (Records in selection([People]) > 1) ` Many people found
BUTTON TEXT (bDelete;"Delete People")
ENABLE BUTTON (bDelete)
End case

See Also
DISABLE BUTTON, ENABLE BUTTON.

4D Language Reference 985

DISABLE BUTTON Object Properties

version 2004.1 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DISABLE BUTTON ({*; }object)

Parameter Type Description

* → If specified, object is an Object Name (String)
If omitted, object is a Variable
object Form Object → Object Name (if * is specified), or
Variable (if * is omitted)

Description
The DISABLE BUTTON command disables the form objects specified by object.

A disabled button or object does not react to mouse clicks and shortcuts, and is displayed
dimmed or grayed out.

Note: Disabling a button or an object does not prevent you from changing its value
programmatically.

If you specify the optional * parameter, you indicate an object name (a string) in object. If you
omit the optional * parameter, you indicate a field or a variable in object. In this case, you
specify a field or variable reference (field or variable objects only) instead of a string. For more
information about object names, see the section Object Properties.

This command (despite what its name suggests) can be applied to the following types of object:
• Button, Default Button, 3D Button, Invisible Button, Highlight Button
• Radio Button, 3D Radio Button, Radio Picture
• Check Box, 3D Check Box
• Pop-up menu, Drop-down List, Combo Box, Menu/Drop-down list
• Thermometer, Ruler

Note: This command has no effect with an object that is assigned an automatic action (4D
changes the state of the control when needed), except for Validate and Cancel actions.

986 4D Language Reference

Examples
1. This example disables the button bValidate:

DISABLE BUTTON(bValidate)

2. This example disables all form objects that have names containing “btn”:

DISABLE BUTTON(*;"@btn@")

3. See example for the command BUTTON TEXT.

See Also
BUTTON TEXT, ENABLE BUTTON.

4D Language Reference 987

ENABLE BUTTON Object Properties

version 2004.1 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

ENABLE BUTTON ({*; }object)

Parameter Type Description

* → If specified, object is an Object Name (String)
If omitted, object is a Variable
object Form Object → Object Name (if * is specified), or
Variable (if * is omitted)

Description
The ENABLE BUTTON command enables the form objects specified by object.

An enabled button or object reacts to mouse clicks and shortcuts.

If you specify the optional * parameter, you indicate an object name (a string) in object. If you
omit the optional * parameter, you indicate a field or a variable in object. In this case, you
specify a field or variable reference (field or variable objects only) instead of a string. For more
information about object names, see the section Object Properties.

This command (despite what its name suggests) can be applied to the following types of object:
• Button, Default Button, 3D Button, Invisible Button, Highlight Button
• Radio Button, 3D Radio Button, Radio Picture
• Check Box, 3D Check Box
• Pop-up menu, Drop-down List, Combo Box, Menu/Drop-down list
• Thermometer, Ruler

Note: This command has no effect with an object that is assigned an automatic action (4D
changes the state of the control when needed), except for Validate and Cancel actions.

Examples
1. This example enables the button bValidate:

ENABLE BUTTON(bValidate)

988 4D Language Reference

2. This example enables all form objects that have names containing “btn”:

ENABLE BUTTON(*;"@btn@")

3. See example for the command BUTTON TEXT.

See Also
BUTTON TEXT, DISABLE BUTTON.

4D Language Reference 989

FONT Object Properties

version 6.0 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

FONT ({*; }object; font)

Parameter Type Description

* → If specified, Object is an Object Name (String)
If omitted, Object is a Field or a Variable
object Form Object → Object Name (if * is specified), or
Field or Variable (if * is omitted)
font String | Number → Font name or Font number

Description
FONT sets the form objects specified by object to be displayed using the font whose name or
number you pass in font.

If you specify the optional * parameter, you indicate an object name (a string) in object. If you
omit the optional * parameter, you indicate a field or a variable in object. In this case, you
specify a field or variable reference (field or variable objects only) instead of a string. For more
information about object names, see the section Object Properties.

Examples
1. The following example sets the font for a button named bOK:

FONT (bOK; "Arial")

2. The following example sets the font for all the form objects whose name contains "info":

FONT (*;"@info@"; "Times")

3. The following example assigns the special %password font, which can be used for entry and
display of “password” type fields (characters are hidden).

FONT ([Users]Password;"%password")

See Also
FONT SIZE, FONT STYLE.

990 4D Language Reference

FONT SIZE Object Properties

version 6.0 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

FONT SIZE ({*; }object; size)

Parameter Type Description

* → If specified, Object is an Object Name (String)
If omitted, Object is a Field or a Variable
object Form Object → Object Name (if * is specified), or
Field or Variable (if * is omitted)
size Number → Font size in points

Description
FONT SIZE sets the form objects specified by object to be displayed using the font size you pass
in size.

If you specify the optional * parameter, you indicate an object name (a string) in object. If you
omit the optional * parameter, you indicate a field or a variable in object. In this case, you
specify a field or variable reference (field or variable objects only) instead of a string. For more
information about object names, see the section Object Properties.

The size is any integer between 1 and 255. If the exact font size does not exist, characters are
scaled.

The area for the object, as defined in the form, must be large enough to display the data in the
new size. Otherwise, the text may be truncated or not displayed at all.

Examples
1. The following example sets the font size for a variable named vtInfo:

FONT SIZE (vtInfo; 14)

2. The following example sets the font size for all the form objects whose name starts with "hl":

FONT SIZE (*;"hl@"; 14)

See Also
FONT, FONT STYLE.

4D Language Reference 991

FONT STYLE Object Properties

version 6.0 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

FONT STYLE ({*; }object; styles)

Parameter Type Description

* → If specified, Object is an Object Name (String)
If omitted, Object is a Field or a Variable
object Form Object → Object Name (if * is specified), or
Field or Variable (if * is omitted)
styles Number → Font style

Description
FONT STYLE sets the form objects specified by object to be displayed using the font style you
pass in styles.

If you specify the optional * parameter, you indicate an object name (a string) in object. If you
omit the optional * parameter, you indicate a field or a variable in object. In this case, you
specify a field or variable reference (field or variable objects only) instead of a string. For more
information about object names, see the section Object Properties.

You pass in styles a sum of the constants describing your font style selection. The following are
the predefined constants provided by 4D:
Constant Type Value
Plain Long Integer 0
Bold Long Integer 1
Italic Long Integer 2
Underline Long Integer 4

Examples
1. This example sets the font style for a button named bAddNew. The font style is set to bold
italic:

FONT STYLE (bAddNew; Bold + Italic)

992 4D Language Reference

2. This example sets the font style to Plain for all form objects with names starting with “vt”:

FONT STYLE (*;"vt@"; Plain)

See Also
FONT, FONT SIZE, SET LIST ITEM PROPERTIES.

4D Language Reference 993

Get alignment Object Properties

version 6.8.1
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get alignment ({*; }object) → Number

Parameter Type Description

* → If specified, object is an Object name (String)
If omitted, object is a field or a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * specified), or
Field or variable (if * omitted)

Function result Number ← Alignment code

Description
The Get alignment command returns a code indicating the type of alignment applied to the
object designated by the object and * parameters.

If you specify the optional * parameter, you indicate an object name (a string) in the object
parameter. If you omit the * parameter, you indicate a field or variable in the object parameter.
In this case, you specify a field or variable reference (field or variable objects only) instead of a
string.

Note: If you apply the command to a group of objects, only the alignment value of the last
object is returned.

The returned code corresponds to one of the following constants located in the Object
alignment theme:
Constant Type Value
Align default Longint 1
Align left Longint 2
Center Longint 3
Align right Longint 4

994 4D Language Reference

The form objects to which alignment can be applied are as follows:
• Scrollable areas
• Combo boxes
• Static text
• Group areas
• Pop up menu/Drop-down lists
• Fields
• Variables

See Also
SET ALIGNMENT.

4D Language Reference 995

Get format Object Properties

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get format ({*; }object) → String

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a field or a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Field or variable (if * is omitted)

Function result String ← Object display format

Description
The Get format command returns the current display format applied to the object specified
in the object parameter.

If you pass the optional * parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is an object
name (in this case, pass a string in object). If you do not pass this parameter, you indicate
that the object parameter is a field or variable. In this case, you do not pass a string, but a
field or variable reference.

This command returns the current display format of the object; in other words, the format
as defined in the Design environment or using the SET FORMAT command. Get format
works with all types of form objects (fields or variables) that accept a display format:
Boolean, date, time, picture, string, number, as well as button grids, dials, thermometers,
rulers, picture pop-up menus, picture buttons and 3D buttons. For more information on
the display formats of these objects, refer to the documentation for the SET FORMAT
command.

Note: If you apply the command to a set of objects, the form of the last object selected is
returned.

When the Get format command is applied to date, time or picture objects (formats defined
as constants), the string returned corresponds to the character code of the constant. To
obtain the value of the constant, simply apply the Character code function to the result (see
below).

996 4D Language Reference

Examples
1. This example allows you to obtain the value of the format constant applied to the
picture variable named “myphoto”:

C_STRING(2;$format)
SET FORMAT(*;"myphoto";Char(On background))
`Apply background format (value = 3)
$format:=Get format(*;"myphoto")
ALERT("Format number:"+String(Character code($format)))
`Display value "3"

2. This example allows you to obtain the format applied to the Boolean field
[Members]Marital_status:

C_STRING(30;$format)
$format:=Get format([Members]Marital_status)
ALERT($format) `Display format, for example "Married;Single"

See Also
SET FORMAT.

4D Language Reference 997

GET OBJECT RECT Object Properties

version 6.7 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET OBJECT RECT ({*; }object; left; top; right; bottom)

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified = object is the name of the object (string)
If omitted = object is a variable
object Object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Field or variable (if * is omitted)
left Longint ← Left coordinate of the object
top Longint ← Top coordinate of the object
right Longint ← Right coordinate of the object
bottom Longint ← Bottom coordinate of the object

Description
The GET OBJECT RECT command returns the coordinates left, top, right and bottom (in points)
in variables or fields of the object(s) of the current form defined by the parameters * and object.

If you pass the optional parameter *, it indicates that the object parameter is an object name (a
string). If you don’t pass the optional parameter *, it indicates that object is a field or a
variable. In this case, you don’t pass a string but a field or variable reference (only a field or
variable of type object).

If you pass an object name to object and use the wildcard character (“@”) to select more than
one object, the coordinates returned will be those of the rectangle formed by all the objects
concerned.

Note: Since 4D version 6.5, it is possible to set the interpretation mode of the wildcard
character (“@”), when it is included in a string of characters. This option has an impact on the
“Object Properties” commands. Please refer to the 4D Design Reference manual.

If the object doesn’t exist or if the command is not called in a form, the coordinates (0;0;0;0)
are returned.

998 4D Language Reference

Example
Let’s assume that you want to obtain the coordinates of a rectangle formed by all the objects
that begin with “button”:

GET OBJECT RECT(*;"button@";left;top;right;bottom)

See Also
MOVE OBJECT.

4D Language Reference 999

MOVE OBJECT Object Properties

version 6.7 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

MOVE OBJECT ({*; }object; moveH; moveV{; resizeH{; resizeV{; *}}})

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified= object is an object name (string)
If omitted = object is a variable
object Object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Field or variable (if * is omitted)
moveH Longint → Value of the horizontal move of the object
(>0 = to the right, <0 = to the left)
moveV Longint → Value of the vertical move of the object
(>0 = to the bottom, <0 = to the top)
resizeH Longint → Value of the horizontal resize of the object
resizeV Longint → Value of the vertical resize of the object
* * → If specified = absolute coordinates
If omitted = relative coordinates

Description
The MOVE OBJECT command allows you to move the object(s) in the current form, defined by
the * and object parameters moveH pixels horizontally and moveV pixels vertically.
It is also possible (optionally) to resize the object(s) resizeH pixels horizontally and resizeV
pixels vertically.

The direction to move and resize depend on the values passed to the moveH and moveV
parameters:
• If the value is positive, objects are moved and resized to the right and to the bottom,
respectively.
• If the value is negative, objects are moved and resized to the left and to the top, respectively.

If you pass the first optional parameter *, you indicate that the object parameter is a parameter
name (a string of characters). If you don’t pass the * parameter, object is a field or a variable. In
this case, you don’t pass a string but a field or variable reference (only a field or variable of
type object).

1000 4D Language Reference

If you pass an object name to object and use the wildcard character (“@”) to select more than
one object, all the objects concerned will be moved or resized.

Note: Since 4D version 6.5, it is possible to set the interpretation mode of the wildcard
character (“@”), when it is included in a string of characters. This option has an impact on the
“Object Properties” commands. Please refer to the 4D Design Mode manual.

By default, the values moveH, moveV, resizeH and resizeV modify the coordinates of the object
relative to its previous position. If you want the parameters to define the absolute parameters,
pass the last optional parameter *.

This command works in the following contexts:

• Data entering in Input forms,
• Forms displayed using the DIALOG command,
• Headers and footers of Output forms displayed with MODIFY SELECTION or DISPLAY
SELECTION commands,
• Form printing events.

Examples
1. The following statement moves “button_1” 10 pixels to the right, 20 pixels to the top and
resizes it to 30 pixels in width and 40 in height:

MOVE OBJECT (*;"button_1";10;-20;30;40)

2. The following statement moves “button_1” to the following coordinates (10;20) (30;40):

MOVE OBJECT (*;"button_1";10;20;30;40;*)

See Also
GET OBJECT RECT.

4D Language Reference 1001

SET ALIGNMENT Object Properties

version 6.8.1
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET ALIGNMENT ({*; }object; alignment)

Parameter Type Description

* → If specified, object is an Object name (String)
If omitted, object is a field or a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * specified), or
Field or variable (if * omitted)
alignment Number → Alignment code

Description
The SET ALIGNMENT command allows you to set the type of alignment applied to the object(s)
designated by the object and * parameters.

If you specify the optional * parameter, you indicate an object name (a string) in the object
parameter. If you omit the * parameter, you indicate a field or variable in the object parameter.
In this case, you specify a field or variable reference (field or variable objects only) instead of a
string.

Pass one of the constants of the Object alignment theme in the alignment parameter:
Constant Type Value
Align default Longint 1
Align left Longint 2
Center Longint 3
Align right Longint 4

The form objects to which alignment can be applied are as follows:

• Scrollable areas
• Combo boxes
• Static text
• Group areas
• Pop up menu/Drop-down lists
• Fields
• Variables

See Also
Get alignment.

1002 4D Language Reference

SET CHOICE LIST Object Properties

version 6.0 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET CHOICE LIST ({*; }object; list)

Parameter Type Description

* → If specified, object is an Object Name (String)
If omitted, object is a Field or a Variable
object Form Object → Object Name (if * is specified), or
Field or Variable (if * is omitted)
list String → Name of the list to use as Choice list
(as defined in Design environment)

Description
The SET CHOICE LIST command sets or replaces the choice list associated with the object or
group of objects specified by object to the choice list (defined in the Design environment List
Editor) whose name you pass in list.
This command can be applied in an input or dialog form, to fields and enterable variables
whose value can be entered as text. The choice list is displayed during data entry when the
user selects the text area.
If you specify the optional * parameter, you indicate an object name (a string) in object. If you
omit the optional * parameter, you indicate a field or a variable in object. In this case, you
specify a field or variable reference (field or variable objects only) instead of a string. For more
information about object names, see the section Object Properties.

Note: This command cannot be used with fields located in a subform’s list form.

Example
The following example sets a choice list for a shipping field. If the shipping is overnight, then
the choice list is set to shippers who can ship overnight. Otherwise, it is set to the standard
shippers:

If ([Shipments]Overnight)
SET CHOICE LIST([Shipments]Shipper; "Fast Shippers")
Else
SET CHOICE LIST([Shipments]Shipper; "Normal Shippers")
End if

4D Language Reference 1003

SET COLOR Object Properties

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET COLOR ({*; }object; color{; altColor})

Parameter Type Description

* → If specified, Object is an Object Name (String)
If omitted, Object is a Field or a Variable
object Field or variable → Object Name (if * is specified), or
Field or Variable (if * is omitted)
color Number → New colors for the object
altColor Number → Alternating colors for a list box

Description
The SET COLOR command sets the foreground and background colors of the form objects
specified by object. If object is a list box, an additional parameter is used to set the foreground
and background colors for even-numbered rows (alternating colors).

If you specify the optional * parameter, you indicate an object name (a string) in object. If you
omit the optional * parameter, you indicate a field or a variable in object. In this case, you
specify a field or variable reference (field or variable objects only) instead of a string. For more
information about object names, see the section Object Properties.

altColor is used to specify an alternative color for the even-numbered rows of a list box or a list
box column. When this parameter is passed, the color parameter will be applied only to odd-
numbered rows. Using alternating colors makes lists easier to read.
If object specifies the list box object, alternating colors are used throughout the entire list box.
If object specifies a column, only the column will use the colors set.

The color (as well as altColor) parameter specifies both foreground and background colors. The
color is calculated as:

Color:=-(Foreground+(256 * Background))
where foreground and background are color numbers (from 0 to 255) within the color palette.
Color is always a negative number. For example, if the foreground color is to be 20 and the
background color is to be 10, then color is – (20 + (256 * 10)) or –2580.

Note: You can see the color palette in the Form Editor’s Property List window.

1004 4D Language Reference

The numbers of the commonly used colors are provided by the following predefined
constants, located in the “Colors” theme:

Constant Type Value

White Long Integer 0
Yellow Long Integer 1
Orange Long Integer 2
Red Long Integer 3
Purple Long Integer 4
Dark Blue Long Integer 5
Blue Long Integer 6
Light Blue Long Integer 7
Green Long Integer 8
Dark Green Long Integer 9
Dark Brown Long Integer 10
Dark Grey Long Integer 11
Light Grey Long Integer 12
Brown Long Integer 13
Grey Long Integer 14
Black Long Integer 15

Note: While SET COLOR works with indexed colors within the default 4D color palette, the
command SET RGB COLORS allows you to work with any RGB color. To reestablish automatic
colors for an object, use the SET RGB COLORS command with the Default foreground color and
Default background color constants.

Example
The following example sets the color of the text area shown below in the form editor:

After executing the following statement:

SET COLOR (*;"Mytext"; - (Yellow + (256 * Red)))

... the area appears as follows:

See Also
SET RGB COLORS.

4D Language Reference 1005

SET ENTERABLE Object Properties

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET ENTERABLE ({*; }entryArea; enterable)

Parameter Type Description

* → If specified, Object is an Object Name (String)
If omitted, Object is a Field or a Variable
entryArea Form Object → Object Name (if * is specified), or
Table or Field or Variable (if * is omitted)
enterable Boolean → True for enterable; False for non-enterable

Description
The SET ENTERABLE command makes the form objects specified by object either enterable or
non-enterable.

If you specify the optional * parameter, you indicate an object name (a string) in object. If you
omit the optional * parameter, you indicate a table, field or variable in object. In this case,
specify a table, field or variable reference (field or variable objects only) instead of a string. For
more information about object names, see the section Object Properties.

Using this command is equivalent to selecting Enterable for a field or variable in the Form
Editor’s Property List window. This command works in subforms only if it is in the form
method of the subform.

When the entryArea is enterable (TRUE), the user can move the cursor into the area and enter
data. When the entryArea is non-enterable (FALSE), the user cannot move the cursor into the
area and cannot enter data.

The SET ENTERABLE command can also be used to enable the “Enter in List” mode by
programming for subforms and list forms displayed using the MODIFY SELECTION and DISPLAY
SELECTION commands:
• For subforms, in the entryArea parameter, pass either the name of the subform table or the
name of the subform object itself, for example: SET ENTERABLE(*;"Subform";True).
• For list forms, you must pass the name of the form table in the entryArea parameter, for
example: SET ENTERABLE([MyTable];True).

1006 4D Language Reference

Making an object non-enterable does not prevent you from changing its value
programmatically.

Examples
1. The following example sets a shipping field, depending on the weight of the shipment. If
the shipment is 1 ounce or less, then the shipper is set to US Mail and the field is set to be non-
enterable. Otherwise, the field is set to be enterable.

If ([Shipments]Weight<=1)
[Shipments]Shipper:="US Mail"
SET ENTERABLE([Shipments]Shipper;False)
Else
SET ENTERABLE([Shipments]Shipper;True)
End if

2. Here is the object method of a checkbox located in the header of a list in order to control
the Enter in List mode:

C_BOOLEAN(bEnterable)
SET ENTERABLE([Table1];bEnterable)

See Also
DISABLE BUTTON, ENABLE BUTTON, SET VISIBLE.

4D Language Reference 1007

SET FILTER Object Properties

version 6.0 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET FILTER ({*; }object; entryFilter)

Parameter Type Description

* → If specified, Object is an Object Name (String)
If omitted, Object is a Field or a Variable
object Form Object → Object Name (if * is specified), or
Field or Variable (if * is omitted)
entryFilter String → New data entry filter for the enterable area

Description
SET FILTER sets the entry filter for the objects specified by object to the filter you pass in
entryFilter.

If you specify the optional * parameter, you indicate an object name (a string) in object. If you
omit the optional * parameter, you indicate a field or a variable in object. In this case, you
specify a field or variable reference (field or variable objects only) instead of a string. For more
information about object names, see the section Object Properties.

SET FILTER can be used for input and dialog forms and can be applied to fields and enterable
variables that accept an entry filter in Design environment.

Passing an empty string in entryFilter removes the current entry filter for the objects.

Note: This command cannot be used with fields located in a subform’s list form.

Note: In entryFilter, to use entry filters you may have predefined using the Tool Box, prefix the
name of the filter with a vertical bar (|).

1008 4D Language Reference

Examples
1. The following example sets the entry filter for a postal code field. If the address is in the
U.S., the filter is set to ZIP codes. Otherwise, it is set to allow any entry:

If ([Companies]Country = "US") ` Set the filter to a ZIP code format

SET FILTER ([Companies]ZIP Code; "&9#####")
Else ` Set the filter to accept alpha and numeric and uppercase the alpha
SET FILTER ([Companies]ZIP Code; "~@")
End if

2. The following example allows only the letters “a,” “b,” “c,” or “g” to be entered in two
places in the field Field:

SET FILTER([Table]Field ;"&"+Char(Double quote)+ "a;b;c;g"+Char(Double quote)+"##")

Note: This example sets the entry filter to &"a;b;c;g"##.

See Also
SET FORMAT.

4D Language Reference 1009

SET FORMAT Object Properties

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET FORMAT ({*; }object; displayFormat)

Parameter Type Description

* → If specified, Object is an Object Name (String)
If omitted, Object is a Field or a Variable
object Form Object → Object Name (if * is specified), or
Field or Variable (if * is omitted)
displayFormat String → New display format for the object

Description
SET FORMAT sets the display format for the objects specified by object to the format you pass
in displayFormat. The new format is only used for the current display; it is not stored with the
form.

If you specify the optional * parameter, you indicate an object name (a string) in object. If you
omit the optional * parameter, you indicate a field or a variable in object. In this case, you
specify a field or variable reference (field or variable objects only) instead of a string. For more
information about object names, see the section Object Properties.

SET FORMAT can be used for both input forms and output forms (displayed or printed) and can
be applied to fields or variables (enterable/non-enterable).

Naturally, you must use a display format compatible with the type of data found in the object
or with the object itself.

Boolean
To format Boolean fields, there are two possibilities:
• You can pass a single value in displayFormat. In this case, the field will be displayed as a
checkbox and its label will be the value specified.
• You can pass two values, separated by a semicolon (;), in displayFormat. In this case, the field
will be displayed as two radio buttons.

1010 4D Language Reference

Date
To format Date fields or variables, pass Char(n) in displayFormat, where n is one of the
following predefined constants provided by 4D:
Constant Type Value
System date short Long Integer 1
System date abbreviated Long Integer 2
System date long Long Integer 3
Internal date short special Long Integer 4
Internal date long Long Integer 5
Internal date abbreviated Long Integer 6
Internal date short Long Integer 7
ISO Date Long Integer 8
Blank if null Long Integer 100

Note: The Blank if null constant must be added to the format; it indicates that in the case of a
null value, 4D must display an empty area instead of zeros.

Time
To format Time fields or variables, pass Char(n) in displayFormat, where n is one of the
following predefined constants provided by 4D:
Constant Type Value
HH MM SS Long Integer 1
HH MM Long Integer 2
Hour Min Sec Long Integer 3
Hour Min Long Integer 4
HH MM AM PM Long Integer 5
MM SS Long Integer 6
Min Sec Long Integer 7
ISO Time Long Integer 8
System time short Long Integer 9
System time long abbreviated Long Integer 10
System time long Long Integer 11
Blank if null Long Integer 100

Note: The Blank if null constant must be added to the format; it indicates that in the case of a
null value, 4D must display an empty area instead of zeros.

4D Language Reference 1011

Picture
To format Picture fields or variables, pass Char(n) in displayFormat, where n is one of the
following predefined constants provided by 4D:
Constant Type Value
Truncated Centered Long Integer 1
Scaled to Fit Long Integer 2
On Background Long Integer 3
Truncated non Centered Long Integer 4
Scaled to fit proportional Long Integer 5
Scaled to fit prop centered Long Integer 6
Replicated Long Integer 7

Alpha and number

To format fields or variables of the Alpha or Number type, pass the label of the format directly
in the displayFormat parameter.

For more information about display formats, see the 4D Design Reference manual.

Note: In displayFormat, to use custom display formats that you may have created in the tool
box, prefix the name of the format with a vertical bar (|).

Picture buttons
To format picture buttons, in the displayFormat parameter, pass a character string respecting
the following syntax:
cols;lines;picture;flags{;ticks}

• cols = number of columns in the picture.

• lines = number of lines in the picture.
• picture = picture used, coming from the picture library, a picture variable or a PICT resource:
- If the picture comes from the picture library, enter its number, preceded by a question mark
(e.g.: "?250").
- If the picture comes from a picture variable, enter the variable name.
- If the picture comes from a PICT resource, enter its number, preceded by a colon (e.g.:
":62500").

1012 4D Language Reference

• flags = display mode and operation of a picture button. This parameter can take any of the
following values: 0, 1, 2, 16, 32, 64 and 128. Each of these values represents a display mode or
an operation mode. These values are cumulative; for instance, if you want to enable the modes
1 and 64, pass 65 in the flags parameter. Here are the details for each value:
- flags = 0 (no option)
Displays the next picture in the series when the user clicks the picture. Displays the previous
picture in the series when the user holds down the Shift key and clicks on the picture. When
the user reaches the last picture in the series, the picture does not change when the user clicks
it again. That is, it does not cycle back to the first picture in the series.
- flags = 1 (Switch Continuously)
Similar to the previous option except that the user can hold down the mouse button to
display the pictures continuously (i.e., as an animation). When the user reaches the last
picture, the object does not cycle back to the first picture.
- flags = 2 (Loop Back to First Frame)
Similar to the previous option except that the pictures are displayed in a continuous loop.
When the user reaches the last picture and clicks again, the first picture appears, and so forth.
- flags = 16 (Switch when Roll Over)
The contents of the picture button are modified when the mouse cursor passes over it. The
initial picture is re-established when the cursor leaves the button's area. This mode is
frequently used in multimedia applications or in HTML documents. The picture that is then
displayed is the last picture of the thumbnail table, unless the Use Last Frame as Disabled
option is selected (128). If that option is selected, it is the next-to-last thumbnail that is
displayed.
- flags = 32 (Switch Back when Released)
This mode operates with two pictures. It displays the first picture all the time except when the
user clicks the button. In that case, the second picture is displayed until the mouse button is
released, whereupon it switches back to the first picture. This mode allows you to create an
action button that displays its status (idle or clicked). You can use this mode to create a 3D
effect or display any picture that depicts the action.
- flags = 64 (Transparent)
Used to make the background picture transparent.
- flags = 128 (Use Last Frame as Disabled)
This mode allows you to set the last thumbnail as the thumbnail to display when the button
is disabled. When this mode is selected, 4D displays the last thumbnail when the button is
disabled. When this mode is used in addition to the modes 0, 1 and 2, the last thumbnail is
not taken into account in the sequence of the other modes. It will appear only when the
button is disabled.
• ticks = activates the “Switch every n Ticks” mode and sets the time interval between the
display of each picture. When this optional parameter is passed, it allows you to cycle through
the contents of the picture button at the specified speed. For example, if you enter
"2;3;?16807;0;10", the picture button will display a different picture every 10 ticks. When this
mode is active, only the Transparent mode can be used (64).

4D Language Reference 1013

Picture pop-up menus
To format picture pop-up menus, in the displayFormat parameter, pass a character string
respecting the following syntax:
cols;lines;picture;hMargin;vMargin;flags

• cols = number of columns in the picture.

• lines = number of lines in the picture.
• picture = picture used, coming from the picture library, a picture variable or a PICT resource:
- if the picture comes from the picture library, enter its number, preceded by a question mark
(e.g.: "?250").
- If the picture comes from a picture variable, enter the variable name.
- If the picture comes from a PICT resource, enter its number, preceded by a colon (e.g.:
":62500")
• hMargin = margin in pixels between the horizontal limits of the menu and the picture.
• vMargin = margin in pixels between the vertical limits of the menu and the picture.
• flags = transparency mode of picture pop-up menu. Accepts the values 0 and 64:
- mode = 0: the picture pop-up menu is not transparent,
- mode = 64: the picture pop-up menu is transparent.

Thermometers and rulers

To format objects of the thermometer or ruler type, in the displayFormat parameter, pass a
character string respecting the following syntax:
min;max;unit;step;flags{;format}

• min = value of the first graduation of the indicator.

• max = value of the last graduation of the indicator.
• unit = interval between the indicator graduations.
• step = minimum interval of cursor movement in the indicator.
• flags = display mode and operation of indicators. This parameter accepts the values 0, 2, 3,
16, 32 and 128. These values can be accumulated in order to set several options (except for
128). Here are the details for each value:
- flags = 0: does not display the units.
- flags = 2: displays the units on the right or below the indicator.
- flags = 3: displays the units on the left or above the indicator.
- flags = 16: displays graduations adjacent to the units.
- flags = 32: On Data Change is executed while the user is adjusting the indicator. If this value
is not used, On Data Change occurs only after the user is finished adjusting the indicator.
- flags = 128: activates the "Barber shop" (continuous animation) mode. This value cannot be
combined with others. In this mode, the other parameters are ignored. For more information
about this mode, please refer to the Design Reference manual.
• format = display format of the indicator graduations.

1014 4D Language Reference

Keep in mind that the units and graduations are automatically hidden if the size of the
indicator object does not permit them to be displayed correctly.

Dials
To format objects of the dial type, in the displayFormat parameter, pass a character string
respecting the following syntax:
min;max;unit;step{;flags}

• min = value of the first graduation of the indicator.

• max = value of the last graduation of the indicator.
• unit = interval between the indicator graduations.
• step = minimum interval of cursor movement in the indicator.
• flags = operation mode of the dial (optional). This parameter only accepts the value 32: On
Data Change is executed while the user is adjusting the indicator. If this value is not used, On
Data Change occurs only after the user is finished adjusting the indicator.

Button grids
To format button grids, in the displayFormat parameter, pass a character string respecting the
following syntax:
cols;lines

• cols = number of columns of the grid.

• lines = number of lines of the grid.

Note: For more information about the display formats for form objects, refer to the 4D Design
Reference manual.

3D buttons
To format 3D buttons, in the displayFormat parameter, pass a character string respecting the
following syntax:
title;picture;background;titlePos;titleVisible;iconVisible;style;horMargin;vertMargin;
iconOffset;popupMenu

• title = Button title. This value can be expressed as text or a resource number (ex.: “:16800,1”)
• picture = Picture linked to a button that comes from a picture library, a picture variable or a
PICT resource:
- If the picture comes from a picture library, enter its number, preceded with a question mark
(ex.: “?250”).
- If the picture comes from a picture variable, enter the variable name.
- If the picture comes from a PICT resource, enter its number, preceded by a colon (ex.:
“:62500”).
- If the picture comes from a fiole stored in the Resources folder of the database, enter a URL of
the type "#{folder/}picturename" or "file:{folder/}picturename".

4D Language Reference 1015

• background = Background picture linked to a button (Custom style), that comes from a
picture library, a picture variable, a PICT resource or a file stored in the Resources folder (see
above).
• titlePos = position of the button title. Five values are possible:
- titlePos = 1: Left
- titlePos = 2: Top
- titlePos = 3: Right
- titlePos = 4: Bottom
- titlePos = 5: Middle
• titleVisible = Defines whether or not the title is visible. Two values are possible:
- titleVisible = 0: the title is hidden
- titleVisible = 1: the title is displayed
• iconVisible = Defines whether or not the icon is visible. Two values are possible:
- iconVisible = 0 : the icon is hidden
- iconVisible = 1 : the icon is displayed
• style = Button style. The value of this option determines whether various other options are
taken into consideration (for example, background). Ten values are possible:
- style = 0: None
- style = 1: Background offset
- style = 2: Push button
- style = 3: Toolbar button
- style = 4: Custom
- style = 5: Circle
- style = 6: Small system square
- style = 7: Office XP
- style = 8: Bevel
- style = 9: Rounded bevel
• horMargin = Horizontal margin. Number of pixels delimiting the inside left and right
margins of the button (areas that the icon and the text must not encroach upon).
• vertMargin = Vertical margin. Number of pixels delimiting the inside top and bottom
margins of the button (areas that the icon and the text must not encroach upon).
• iconOffset = Shifting of the icon to the right and down. This value, expressed in pixels,
indicates the shifting of the button icon to the right and down when the button is clicked (the
same value is used for both directions).
• popupMenu = Association of a pop-up menu with the button. Three values are possible:
- popupMenu = 0: No pop-up menu
- popupMenu = 1: With linked pop-up menu
- popupMenu = 2: With separate pop-up menu

1016 4D Language Reference

Certain options are not taken into account for all 3D button styles. Also, in certain cases, you
may wish to not change all the options. To not pass an option, simply omit the corresponding
value. For example, if you do not want to pass the titleVisible and vertMargin options, you can
write:
SET FORMAT(myVar;"NiceButton;?256;:562;1;;1;4;5;;5;0")
Examples
1. The following line of code formats the [Employee]Date Hired field to Month Date Year.

SET FORMAT ([Employee]Date Hired; Char(Month Date Year))

2. The following example changes the format for a [Company]ZIP Code field according to the
length of the value stored in the field:

If (Length ([Company]ZIP Code) = 9)

SET FORMAT ([Company]ZIP Code; "#####–####")
Else
SET FORMAT ([Company]ZIP Code; "#####")
End if

3. The following example sets the format of a Boolean field to display Married and Unmarried,
instead of the default Yes and No:

SET FORMAT ([Employee]Marital Status;"Married;Unmarried")

4. The following example sets the format of a Boolean field to display a checkbox labelled
“Classified”:

SET FORMAT ([Folder]Classification; "Classified")

5. You have a table of thumbnails containing 1 row and 4 columns, intended to display a
picture button (“default”, “clicked”, “roll over” and “disabled”). You want to associate the
Switch when Roll Over, Switch back when Released and Use Last Frame as Disabled options
with it:

SET FORMAT (*;"PictureButton"; "4;1;?15000;176")

6. Switching a thermometer to "Barber shop" mode:

SET FORMAT ($Mythermo;";;;;128")

$Mythermo:=1 `Start animation
See Also
Get format, GET SYSTEM FORMAT, SET FILTER.

4D Language Reference 1017

SET RGB COLORS Object Properties

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET RGB COLORS ({*; }object; foregroundColor; backgroundColor{; altBackgrndColor})

Parameter Type Description

* → If specified, Object is an Object Name (String)
If omitted, Object is a Field or a Variable
object Form Object → Object Name (if * is specified), or
Field or Variable (if * is omitted)
foregroundColor Number → RGB color value for Foreground color
backgroundColor Number → RGB color value for Background color
altBackgrndColor Number → RGB color value for Alternating background
color

Description
The SET RGB COLORS command changes the foreground and background colors of the objects
specified by object and the optional * parameters. When the command is applied to a List box
object, an additional parameter lets you modify the alternating color of the rows.

If you specify the optional * parameter, you indicate an object name (a string) in object. If you
omit the optional * parameter, you indicate a field or a variable in object. In this case, you
specify a field or variable reference (field or variable objects only) instead of a string. For more
information about object names, see the section Object Properties.

The optional altBackgrndColor parameter lets you set an alternate background color for even-
numbered rows. This parameter is only used when the object specified is a List box or a
column of the List box. When this parameter is used, the backgroundColor parameter is only
used for odd-numbered rows. Using alternating colors makes lists easier to read.
If object specifies a List box object, alternating colors are used for the entire List box. If object
specifies a column of the List box, only the column will use the colors set.

1018 4D Language Reference

You indicate RGB color values in foregroundColor, backgroundColor and altBackgrndColor. An
RGB value is a 4-byte Long Integer whose format (0x00RRGGBB) is described in the following
table (bytes are numbered from 0 to 3, from right to left):

Byte Description
3 Must be zero if absolute RGB color
2 Red component of the color (0..255)
1 Green component of the color (0..255)
0 Blue component of the color (0..255)

The following table shows some examples of RGB color values:

Value Description
0x00000000 Black
0x00FF0000 Bright Red
0x0000FF00 Bright Green
0x000000FF Bright Blue
0x007F7F7F Gray
0x00FFFF00 Bright Yellow
0x00FF7F7F Red Pastel
0x00FFFFFF White

Alternatively, you can specify one of the “system” colors used by 4D for drawing objects
whose colors are set automatically. The following predefined constants are provided by 4D:

Constant Type Value

Foreground color Long Integer -1
Background color Long Integer -2
Dark shadow color Long Integer -3
Light shadow color Long Integer -4

Highlight text background color Long Integer -7

Highlight text color Long Integer -8
Highlight menu background color Long Integer -9
Highlight menu text color Long Integer -10
Disable highlight item color Long Integer -11

4D Language Reference 1019

These colors (on a standard system) are shown here:

WARNING: These automatic colors are system dependent. If you change your system colors,
4D will adjust its automatic colors accordingly. Use the automatic color values for setting
objects to the system colors, not for setting them to the example colors shown above.

Examples
This form contains the two non-enterable variables vsColorValue and vsColor as well as the
three thermometers: thRed, thGreen, and thBlue.

1020 4D Language Reference

Here are the methods for these objects:

` vsColorValue non-enterable Object Method

Case of
: (Form event=On Load)
vsColorValue:="0x00000000"
End case
` vsColor non-enterable variable Object Method
Case of
: (Form event=On Load)
vsColor:=""
SET RGB COLORS(vsColor;0x00FFFFFF;0x0000)
End case

` thRed Thermometer Object Method

CLICK IN COLOR THERMOMETER

` thGreen Thermometer Object Method

CLICK IN COLOR THERMOMETER

` thBlue Thermometer Object Method

CLICK IN COLOR THERMOMETER

The project method called by the three thermometers is:

` CLICK IN COLOR THERMOMETER Project Method

SET RGB COLORS(vsColor;0x00FFFFFF;(thRed << 16)+(thGreen << 8)+thBlue)
vsColorValue:=String((thRed << 16)+(thGreen << 8)+thBlue;"&x")
If (thRed=0)
vsColorValue:=Substring(vsColorValue;1;2)+"0000"+Substring(vsColorValue;3)
End if

Note the use of the Bitwise operators for calculating the color value from the thermometer
values.

4D Language Reference 1021

When executed, the form looks like this:

See Also
Bitwise Operators, Select RGB Color, SET COLOR.

1022 4D Language Reference

SET SCROLLBAR VISIBLE Object Properties

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET SCROLLBAR VISIBLE ({*; }object; horizontal; vertical)

Parameter Type Description

* → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)
horizontal Boolean → True = show, False = hide
vertical Boolean → True = show, False = hide

Description
The SET SCROLLBAR VISIBLE command allows you to display or hide the horizontal and/or
vertical scrollbars in the object set using the object and * parameters.

If you pass the optional * parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is an object
name (string). If you do not pass this parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is a
variable. In this case, you do not pass a string, but a variable reference. For more
information about object names, refer to the Object Properties section.

This command is used with the following form objects:

• list boxes,
• scrollable areas,
• hierachical lists,
• subforms.

Pass the Boolean values in horizontal and vertical indicating whether the corresponding
scrollbars should be displayed (True) or hidden (False). The scrollbars are displayed by
default.

Note: Objects of the scrollable area type do not have horizontal scrollbars. Since the
horizontal parameter is mandatory, you must still pass it in this case; however, it will be
ignored.

See Also
Get listbox information, SET VISIBLE, SHOW LISTBOX GRID.

4D Language Reference 1023

SET VISIBLE Object Properties

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET VISIBLE ({*; }object; visible)

Parameter Type Description

* → If specified, Object is an Object Name (String)
If omitted, Object parameter is a Field or a Variable
object Form Object → Object Name (if * is specified), or
Field or Variable (if * is omitted)
visible Boolean → True for visible, False for invisible

Description
The SET VISIBLE command shows or hides the objects specified by object.

If you specify the optional * parameter, you indicate an object name (a string) in object. If you
omit the optional * parameter, you indicate a field or a variable in object. In this case, you
specify a field or variable reference (field or variable objects only) instead of a string. For more
information about object names, see the section Object Properties.

If you pass visible equal to TRUE, the objects are shown. If you pass visible equal to FALSE, the
objects are hidden.

Example
Here is a typical form in the Design environment:

1024 4D Language Reference

The objects in the Employer Information group box each have an object name that contains
the expression “employer” (including the group box). When the Currently Employed check
box is checked, the objects must be visible; when the check box is unchecked, the objects
must be invisible. Here is the object method of the check box:

  ` cbCurrentlyEmployed Check Box Object Method

Case of
: (Form event=On Load)
cbCurrentlyEmployed:=1

: (Form event=On Clicked)

` Hide or Show all the objects whose name contains "emp"
SET VISIBLE(*;"@emp@";cbCurrentlyEmployed # 0)
` But always keep the check box itself visible
SET VISIBLE(cbCurrentlyEmployed;True)
End case

Therefore, when executed, the form looks like:

4D Language Reference 1025

or:

See Also
DISABLE BUTTON, ENABLE BUTTON, SET ENTERABLE.

1026 4D Language Reference

30
______________________
On a Series

4D Language Reference 1027

1028 4D Language Reference
On a Series On a Series

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The functions of this theme perform calculations on a series of values.

The Average, Max, Min, Sum, Sum squares, Std deviation, and Variance functions are applied to
fields. They use a selection of records. Note that the Sum squares, Std deviation, and Variance
functions can be used only during printing.

These functions work on numeric data only. Each of these functions returns a numeric value.

Using statistical functions apart from printing

When Average, Max, Min, or Sum are used on a field outside a printing operation, they may
have to load each record in the current selection to calculate the result. If there are many
records, this process may take some time. To limit the processing time, you can index the field.

Note: When the operation is long, a progress thermometer appears. This thermometer has a
Stop button that lets the user interrupt the operation. If the user clicks this button, the OK
variable is set to 0. If the operation is completed correctly, the OK variable is set to 1.

Using statistical functions in a printed report

When statistical functions are used in a report, they behave in a specific way because the
report itself must load each record. Use these functions in a form or object method when
printing with the PRINT SELECTION command or when printing by choosing Print from the
File menu in the Design environment.

When you use these functions in a report, the values that are returned are reliable only at
break level 0, and only when break processing is turned on. This means that they are useful
only at the end of a report, after all the records have been processed.

You would use these functions only in an object method for a non-enterable area that is
included in the B0 Break area.

Remember that the field passed as a parameter to the statistical function must be a numeric.

See Also
Average, Max, Min, Std deviation, Sum, Sum squares, Variance.

4D Language Reference 1029

Average On a Series

version 11.3 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Average (series) → Number

Parameter Type Description

series Field → Data for which to return the average

Function result Number ← Arithmetic mean (average) of series

Description
Average returns the arithmetic mean (average) of series. If series is an indexed field, the index is
used to find the average.

If the command is correctly executed, the OK system variable is set to 1. If it is interrupted (for
example if the user clicks on the Stop button of the progress thermometer), the OK variable is
set to 0.

Example
The following example sets the variable vAverage that is in the B0 Break area of an output
form. The line of code is the object method for vAverage. The object method is not executed
until the level 0 break:

vAverage := Average ([Employees] Salary)

The following method is called to print the records in the selection and to activate break
processing:

ALL RECORDS ([Employees])

ORDER BY ([Employees];[Employees]LastNm;>)
BREAK LEVEL (1)
ACCUMULATE ([Employees]Salary)
OUTPUT FORM ([Employees];"PrintForm")
PRINT SELECTION ([Employees])

Note: The parameter to the BREAK LEVEL command should be equal to the number of breaks in
your report. For more information about break processing, refer to the printing commands.

See Also
ACCUMULATE, BREAK LEVEL, Max, Min, ORDER BY, PRINT SELECTION, Subtotal, Sum.

1030 4D Language Reference

Max On a Series

version 11.3 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Max (series) → Number

Parameter Type Description

series Field → Data for which to return the maximum value

Function result Number ← Maximum value in series

Description
Max returns the maximum value in series. If series is an indexed field, the index is used to find
the maximum value.

If the series selection is empty, Max returns -1E50.

If the command is correctly executed, the OK system variable is set to 1. If it is interrupted (for
example if the user clicks on the Stop button of the progress thermometer), the OK variable is
set to 0.

Example
The following example is an object method for the variable vMax placed in the break 0 portion
of the form. The variable is printed at the end of the report. The object method assigns the
maximum value of the field to the variable, which is then printed in the last break of the
report.

vMax:= Max ([Employees] Salary)

The following method is called to print the records in the selection and to activate break
processing:

ALL RECORDS ([Employees])

ORDER BY ([Employees];[Employees]LastNm;>)
BREAK LEVEL (1)
ACCUMULATE ([Employees]Salary)
OUTPUT FORM ([Employees];"PrintForm")
PRINT SELECTION ([Employees])

4D Language Reference 1031

Note: The parameter to the BREAK LEVEL command should be equal to the number of breaks in
your report. For more information about break processing, refer to the printing commands.

See Also
Min.

1032 4D Language Reference

Min On a Series

version 11.3 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Min (series) → Number

Parameter Type Description

series Field → Data for which to return the minimum value

Function result Number ← Minimum value in series

Description
Min returns the minimum value in series. If series is an indexed field, the index is used to find
the minimum value.

If the series selection is empty, Max returns 1E50.

If the command is correctly executed, the OK system variable is set to 1. If it is interrupted (for
example if the user clicks on the Stop button of the progress thermometer), the OK variable is
set to 0.

Examples
1. The following example is an object method for the variable vMin placed in the break 0
portion of the form. The variable is printed at the end of the report. The object method assigns
the minimum value of the field to the variable, which is then printed in the last break of the
report:

vMin:=Min([Employees]Salary)

The following method is called to print the records in the selection and to activate break
processing:

ALL RECORDS ([Employees])

ORDER BY ([Employees];[Employees]LastNm;>)
BREAK LEVEL (1)
ACCUMULATE ([Employees]Salary)
OUTPUT FORM ([Employees];"PrintForm")
PRINT SELECTION ([Employees])

Note: The parameter to the BREAK LEVEL command should be equal to the number of breaks in
your report. For more information about break processing, refer to the printing commands.

4D Language Reference 1033

2. The following example finds the lowest sale amount of an employee and displays the result
in an alert box:

ALERT ("Minimum sale = " + String(Min([Employees]Sales)))

See Also
Max.

1034 4D Language Reference

Std deviation On a Series

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Std deviation (series) → Number

Parameter Type Description

series Field → Data for which to return the standard deviation

Function result Number ← Standard deviation of series

Description
Std deviation returns the standard deviation of series. If series is an indexed field, the index is
used to find the standard deviation.

Example
The following example is an object method for the variable vDeviate. The object method
assigns the standard deviation for a data series to vDeviate:

vDeviate:= Std deviation ([Table1]DataSeries)

The following method is called to print the records in the selection and to activate break
processing:

ALL RECORDS ([Table1])

ORDER BY ([Table1];[Table1]DataSeries;>)
BREAK LEVEL (1)
ACCUMULATE ([Table1]DataSeries)
OUTPUT FORM ([Table1];"PrintForm")
PRINT SELECTION ([Table1])

Note: The parameter to the BREAK LEVEL command should be equal to the number of breaks in
your report. For more information about break processing, refer to the printing commands.

See Also
Average, Sum, Sum squares, Variance.

4D Language Reference 1035

Sum On a Series

version 11.3 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Sum (series) → Number

Parameter Type Description

series Field → Data for which to return the sum

Function result Number ← Sum for series

Description
The Sum command returns the sum (total of all values) for series. If series is an indexed field,
the index is used to total the values.

If the command is correctly executed, the OK system variable is set to 1. If it is interrupted (for
example if the user clicks on the Stop button of the progress thermometer), the OK variable is
set to 0.

Example
The following example is an object method for a variable that vTotal placed in a form. The
object method assigns the sum of all salaries to vTotal:

vTotal:=Sum([Employees]Salary)

The following method is called to print the records in the selection and to activate break
processing:
ALL RECORDS ([Employees])
ORDER BY ([Employees];[Employees]LastNm;>)
BREAK LEVEL (1)
ACCUMULATE ([Employees]Salary)
OUTPUT FORM ([Employees];"PrintForm")
PRINT SELECTION ([Employees])

Note: The parameter to the BREAK LEVEL command should be equal to the number of breaks in
your report. For more information about break processing, refer to the printing commands.

See Also
ACCUMULATE, Average, BREAK LEVEL, Max, Min, ORDER BY, PRINT SELECTION, Subtotal.

1036 4D Language Reference

Sum squares On a Series

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Sum squares (series) → Number

Parameter Type Description

series Field → Data for which to return the sum of squares

Function result Number ← Sum of squares of series

Description
Sum squares returns the sum of the squares of series. If series is an indexed field, the index is
used to find the sum of the squares.

Example
The following example is an object method for the variable vSquares. The object method
assigns the sum of squares for a data series to vSquares. The vSquares variable is printed in the
last break of the report:

vSquares:=Sum squares ([Table1]DataSeries)

The following method is called to print the records in the selection and to activate break
processing:

ALL RECORDS ([Table1])

ORDER BY ([Table1];[Table1]DataSeries;>)
BREAK LEVEL (1)
ACCUMULATE ([Table1]DataSeries)
OUTPUT FORM ([Table1];"PrintForm")
PRINT SELECTION ([Table1])

Note: The parameter to the BREAK LEVEL command should be equal to the number of breaks in
your report. For more information about break processing, refer to the printing commands.

See Also
Average, Std deviation, Sum, Variance.

4D Language Reference 1037

Variance On a Series

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Variance (series) → Number

Parameter Type Description

series Field → Data for which to return the variance

Function result Number ← Variance of series

Description
Variance returns the variance for series. If series is an indexed field, the index is used to find the
variance.

Example
The following example is an object method for the variable var. The object method assigns the
sum of squares for a data series to var:

var:= Variance (Students]Grades)

The following method is called to print the records in the selection and to activate break
processing:

ALL RECORDS ([Students])

ORDER BY ([Students];[Students]Class;>)
BREAK LEVEL (1)
ACCUMULATE ([Students]Grades)
OUTPUT FORM ([Students];"PrintForm")
PRINT SELECTION ([Students])

Note: The parameter to the BREAK LEVEL command should be equal to the number of breaks in
your report. For more information about break processing, refer to the printing commands.

See Also
Average, Std deviation, Sum, Sum squares.

1038 4D Language Reference

31
______________________
Operators

4D Language Reference 1039

1040 4D Language Reference
Operators Operators

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Operators are symbols used to specify operations performed between expressions. They:
• Perform calculations on numbers, dates, and times.
• Perform string operations, Boolean operations on logical expressions, and specialized
operations on pictures.
• Combine simple expressions to generate new expressions.

Precedence
The order in which an expression is evaluated is called precedence. 4D has a strict left-to-right
precedence, in which algebraic order is not observed. For example:

3+4*5
returns 35, because the expression is evaluated as 3 + 4, yielding 7, which is then multiplied
by 5, with the final result of 35.

To override the left-to-right precedence, you MUST use parentheses. For example:

3 + (4 * 5)
returns 23 because the expression (4 * 5) is evaluated first, because of the parentheses. The
result is 20, which is then added to 3 for the final result of 23.

Parentheses can be nested inside other sets of parentheses. Be sure that each left parenthesis
has a matching right parenthesis to ensure proper evaluation of expressions. Lack of, or
incorrect use of parentheses can cause unexpected results or invalid expressions. Furthermore,
if you intend to compile your applications, you must have matching parentheses—the
compiler detects a missing parenthesis as a syntax error.

The Assignment Operator

You MUST distinguish the assignment operator := from the other operators. Rather than
combining expressions into a new one, the assignment operator copies the value of the
expression to the right of the assignment operator into the variable or field to the left of the
operator. For example, the following line places the value 4 (the number of characters in the
word Acme) into the variable named MyVar. MyVar is then typed as a numeric value.

MyVar := Length ("Acme")

4D Language Reference 1041

Important: Do NOT confuse the assignment operator := with the equality comparison
operator =.

The other operators provided by the 4D language are described in the following sections:

String Operators
See the section String Operators.

Numeric Operators
See the section Numeric Operators.

Date Operators
See the section Date Operators.

Time Operators
See the section Time Operators.

Comparison Operators
See the section Comparison Operators.

Logical Operators
See the section Logical Operators.

Picture Operators
See the section Picture Operators.

Bitwise Operators
See the section Bitwise Operators.

See Also
Constants, Data Types, Identifiers, QUERY, QUERY BY FORMULA, QUERY SELECTION BY FORMULA.

1042 4D Language Reference

Bitwise Operators Operators

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The bitwise operators operates on Long Integer expressions or values.

Note: If you pass an Integer or a Real value to a bitwise operator, 4D evaluates the value as a
Long Integer value before calculating the expression that uses the bitwise operator.

While using the bitwise operators, you must think about a Long Integer value as an array of 32
bits. The bits are numbered from 0 to 31, from right to left.

Because each bit can equal 0 or 1, you can also think about a Long Integer value as a value
where you can store 32 Boolean values. A bit equal to 1 means True and a bit equal to 0 means
False.

An expression that uses a bitwise operator returns a Long Integer value, except for the Bit Test
operator, where the expression returns a Boolean value. The following table lists the bitwise
operators and their syntax:

Operation Operator Syntax Returns

Bitwise AND & Long & Long Long
Bitwise OR (inclusive) | Long | Long Long
Bitwise OR (exclusive) ^| Long ^| Long Long
Left Bit Shift << Long << Long Long (see note 1)
Right Bit Shift >> Long >> Long Long (see note 1)
Bit Set ?+ Long ?+ Long Long (see note 2)
Bit Clear ?- Long ?- Long Long (see note 2)
Bit Test ?? Long ?? Long Boolean (see note 2)

Notes
(1) For the Left Bit Shift and Right Bit Shift operations, the second operand indicates the number
of positions by which the bits of the first operand will be shifted in the resulting value.
Therefore, this second operand should be between 0 and 32. Note however, that shifting by 0
returns an unchanged value and shifting by more than 31 bits returns 0x00000000 because all
the bits are lost. If you pass another value as second operand, the result is non significant.
(2) For the Bit Set, Bit Clear and Bit Test operations , the second operand indicates the number
of the bit on which to act. Therefore, this second operand must be between 0 and 31.
Otherwise, the expression returns the value of the first operand unchanged for Bit Set and Bit
Clear, and returns False for Bit Test.

4D Language Reference 1043

The following table lists the bitwise operators and their effects:

Operation Description
Bitwise AND Each resulting bit is the logical AND of the bits in the two operands.
Here is the logical AND table:
1&1→1
0&1→0
1&0→0
0&0→0
In other words, the resulting bit is 1 if the two operand bits are 1;
otherwise the resulting bit is 0.
Bitwise OR (inclusive) Each resulting bit is the logical OR of the bits in the two operands.
Here is the logical OR table:
1|1→1
0|1→1
1|0→1
0|0→0
In other words, the resulting bit is 1 if at least one of the two operand
bits is 1; otherwise the resulting bit is 0.
Bitwise OR (exclusive) Each resulting bit is the logical XOR of the bits in the two operands.
Here is the logical XOR table:
1 ^| 1 → 0
0 ^| 1 → 1
1 ^| 0 → 1
0 ^| 0 → 0
In other words, the resulting bit is 1 if only one of the two operand bits
is 1; otherwise the resulting bit is 0.
Left Bit Shift The resulting value is set to the first operand value, then the resulting
bits are shifted to the left by the number of positions indicated by the
second operand. The bits on the left are lost and the new bits on the
right are set to 0.
Note: Taking into account only positive values, shifting to the left
by N bits is the same as multiplying by 2^N.

1044 4D Language Reference

Right Bit Shift The resulting value is set to the first operand value, then the resulting
bits are shifted to the right by the number of position indicated by the
second operand. The bits on the right are lost and the new bits on the
left are set to 0.
Note: Taking into account only positive values, shifting to the right
by N bits is the same as dividing by 2^N.
Bit Set The resulting value is set to the first operand value, then the resulting
bit, whose number is indicated by the second operand, is set to 1.
The other bits are left unchanged.
Bit Clear The resulting value is set to the first operand value, then the resulting
bit, whose number is indicated by the second operand, is set to 0.
The other bits are left unchanged.
Bit Test Returns True if, in the first operand, the bit whose number
is indicated by the second operand is equal to 1.
Returns False if, in the first operand, the bit whose number
is indicated by the second operand is equal to 0.
Examples
1. The following table gives an example of each bit operator:

Operation Example Result

Bitwise AND 0x0000FFFF & 0xFF00FF00 0x0000FF00
Bitwise OR (inclusive) 0x0000FFFF | 0xFF00FF00 0xFF00FFFF
Bitwise OR (exclusive) 0x0000FFFF ^| 0xFF00FF00 0xFF0000FF
Left Bit Shift 0x0000FFFF << 8 0x00FFFF00
Right Bit Shift 0x0000FFFF >> 8 0x000000FF
Bit Set 0x00000000 ?+ 16 0x00010000
Bit Clear 0x00010000 ?- 16 0x00000000
Bit Test 0x00010000 ?? 16 True

2. 4D provides many predefined constants. The literals of some of these constants end with
“bit” or “mask.” For example, this is the case of the constants provided in the Resources
properties theme:

Constant Type Value

System heap resource mask Long Integer 64
System heap resource bit Long Integer 6
Purgeable resource mask Long Integer 32
Purgeable resource bit Long Integer 5

4D Language Reference 1045

Locked resource mask Long Integer 16
Locked resource bit Long Integer 4
Protected resource mask Long Integer 8
Protected resource bit Long Integer 3
Preloaded resource mask Long Integer 4
Preloaded resource bit Long Integer 2
Changed resource mask Long Integer 2
Changed resource bit Long Integer 1
These constants enable you to test the value returned by Get resource properties or to create the
value passed to SET RESOURCE PROPERTIES. Constants whose literal ends with “bit” give the
position of the bit you want to test, clear, or set. Constants whose literal ends with “mask”
gives a long integer value where only the bit (that you want to test, clear, or set) is equal to
one.

For example, to test whether a resource (whose properties have been obtained in the variable
$vlResAttr) is purgeable or not, you can write:

If ($vlResAttr ?? Purgeable resource bit) ` Is the resource purgeable?

or:
If (($vlResAttr & Purgeable resource mask) # 0) Is the resource purgeable?
Conversely, you can use these constants to set the same bit. You can write:

$vlResAttr:=$vlResAttr ?+ Purgeable resource bit

or:
$vlResAttr:=$vlResAttr | Purgeable resource bit

3. This example stores two Integer values into a Long Integer value. You can write:
$vlLong:=($viIntA<<16) | $viIntB ` Store two Integers in a Long Integer
$vlIntA:=$vlLong>>16 ` Extract back the integer stored in the high-word

$viIntB:=$vlLong & 0xFFFF ` Extract back the Integer stored in the low-word

Tip: Be careful when manipulating Long Integer or Integer values with expressions that
combine numeric and bitwise operators. The high bit (bit 31 for Long Integer, bit 15 for
Integer) sets the sign of the value—positive if it is cleared, negative if it is set. Numeric
operators use this bit for detecting the sign of a value, bitwise operators do not care about the
meaning of this bit.

See Also
Comparison Operators, Date Operators, Logical Operators, Numeric Operators, Operators, Picture
Operators, String Operators, Time Operators.

1046 4D Language Reference

Comparison Operators Operators

version 11.1 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The tables in this section show the comparison operators as they apply to string, numeric,
date, time, and pointer expressions. An expression that uses a comparison operator returns a
Boolean value, either TRUE or FALSE.

String Comparisons
Operation Syntax Returns Expression Value
Equality String = String Boolean "abc" = "abc" True
"abc" = "abd" False
Inequality String # String Boolean "abc" # "abd" True
"abc" # "abc" False
Greater than String > String Boolean "abd" > "abc" True
"abc" > "abc" False
Less than String < String Boolean "abc" < "abd" True
"abc" < "abc" False
Greater than or equal to String >= String Boolean "abd" >= "abc" True
"abc" >= "abd" False
Less than or equal to String <= String Boolean "abc" <= "abd" True
"abd" <= "abc" False
Contains keyword String % String Boolean "Alpha Bravo" % "Bravo" True
"Alpha Bravo" % "ravo" False

Important: Additional information about string comparisons are provided at the end of this
section.

4D Language Reference 1047

Numeric Comparisons
Operation Syntax Returns Expression Value
Equality Number = Number Boolean 10 = 10 True
10 = 11 False
Inequality Number # Number Boolean 10 #11 True
10 # 10 False
Greater than Number > Number Boolean 11 > 10 True
10 > 11 False
Less than Number < Number Boolean 10 < 11 True
11 < 10 False
Greater than or equal to Number >= Number Boolean 11 >= 10 True
10 >= 11 False
Less than or equal to Number <= Number Boolean 10 <= 11 True
11 <= 10 False

Date Comparisons
Operation Syntax Returns Expression Value
Equality Date = Date Boolean !1/1/97! =!1/1/97! True
!1/20/97! =!1/1/97! False
Inequality Date # Date Boolean !1/20/97! # !1/1/97! True
!1/1/97! # !1/1/97! False
Greater than Date > Date Boolean !1/20/97! > !1/1/97! True
!1/1/97! > !1/1/97! False
Less than Date < Date Boolean !1/1/97! < !1/20/97! True
!1/1/97! < !1/1/97! False
Greater than or equal to Date >= Date Boolean !1/20/97! >=!1/1/97! True
!1/1/97!>=!1/20/97! False
Less than or equal to Date <= Date Boolean !1/1/97!<=!1/20/97! True
!1/20/97!<=!1/1/97! False

1048 4D Language Reference

Time Comparisons
Operation Syntax Returns Expression Value
Equality Time = Time Boolean ?01:02:03? = ?01:02:03? True
?01:02:03? = ?01:02:04? False
Inequality Time # Time Boolean ?01:02:03? # ?01:02:04? True
?01:02:03? # ?01:02:03? False
Greater than Time > Time Boolean ?01:02:04? > ?01:02:03? True
?01:02:03? > ?01:02:03? False
Less than Time < Time Boolean ?01:02:03? < ?01:02:04? True
?01:02:03? < ?01:02:03? False
Greater than or equal to Time >= Time Boolean ?01:02:03? >=?01:02:03? True
?01:02:03? >=?01:02:04? False
Less than or equal to Time <= Time Boolean ?01:02:03? <=?01:02:03? True
?01:02:04? <=?01:02:03? False

Pointer comparisons
With:

` vPtrA and vPtrB point to the same object

vPtrA:=->anObject
vPtrB:=->anObject
` vPtrC points to another object
vPtrC:=->anotherObject

Operation Syntax Returns Expression Value

Equality Pointer = Pointer Boolean vPtrA = vPtrB True
vPtrA = vPtrC False
Inequality Pointer # Pointer Boolean vPtrA # vPtrC True
vPtrA # vPtrB False

More about string comparisons

• Strings are compared on a character-by-character basis (except in the case of searching by

keywords, see below).
• When strings are compared, the case of the characters is ignored; thus, "a"="A" returns TRUE.
To test if the case of two characters is different, compare their character codes. For example,
the following expression returns FALSE:
Character code("A") = Character code("a") ` because 65 is not equal to 97

4D Language Reference 1049

• When strings are compared, diacritical characters are compared using the system character
comparison table of your computer. For example, the following expressions return TRUE:
"n" = "ñ"
"n" = "Ñ"
"A"="å"
` and so on

• Unlike other string comparisons, searching by keywords looks for “words” in “texts”: words
are considered both individually and as a whole. The % operator always returns False if the
query concerns several words or only part of a word (for example, a syllable). The “words” are
character strings surrounded by “separators,” which are spaces and punctuation characters and
dashes. An apostrophe, like in “Today's” is considered as part of the word. Numbers can be
searched for because they are evaluated as a whole (including decimal symbols). Other
symbols (currency, temperature, and so on) will be ignored.
"Alpha Bravo Charlie" % "Bravo" ` Returns True
"Alpha Bravo Charlie" % "vo" ` Returns False
"Alpha Bravo Charlie" % "Alpha Bravo" ` Returns False
"Alpha,Bravo,Charlie" % "Alpha" ` Returns True
"Software and Computers" % "comput@" ` Returns True

Note: For more information about the rules concerning how keywords are taken into account,
please refer to the following address:
http://www.unicode.org/unicode/reports/tr29/#Word_Boundaries.

• The wildcard character (@) can be used in any string comparison to match any number of
characters. For example, the following expression is TRUE:
"abcdefghij" = "abc@"

The wildcard character must be used within the second operand (the string on the right side)
in order to match any number of characters. The following expression is FALSE, because the @
is considered only as a one character in the first operand:
"abc@" = "abcdefghij"

The wildcard means “one or more characters or nothing”. The following expressions are TRUE:
"abcdefghij" = "abcdefghij@"
"abcdefghij" = "@abcdefghij"
"abcdefghij" = "abcd@efghij"
"abcdefghij" = "@abcdefghij@"
"abcdefghij" = "@abcde@fghij@"

1050 4D Language Reference

On the other hand, whatever the case, a string comparison with two consecutive wildcards
will always return FALSE. The following expression is FALSE:
"abcdefghij" = "abc@@fg"

When the comparison operator is or contains a < or > symbol, only comparison with a single
wildcard located at the end of the operand is supported:
"abcd" <= "abc@" `Valid comparison
"abcd" <= "abc@ef" `Not a valid comparison

Tip
If you want to execute comparisons or queries using @ as a character (and not as a wildcard),
you have two options:

• Use the Character code (At sign) instruction.

Imagine, for example, that you want to know if a string ends with the @ character.
- the following expression (if $vsValue is not empty) is always TRUE:
($vsValue[[Length($vsValue)]]="@")

- the following expression will be evaluated correctly:

(Character code($vsValue[[Length($vsValue)]])#64)
• Use the "Consider @ as a character for Query and Order By" option which can be accessed
using the Preferences dialog box.
This option lets you define how the @ character is interpreted when it is included in a
character string. As such, it can influence how comparison operators are used in Query or
Order By. For more information, refer to the 4D Design Reference manual.

See Also
Bitwise Operators, Date Operators, Logical Operators, Numeric Operators, Operators, Picture
Operators, Time Operators.

4D Language Reference 1051

Date Operators Operators

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

An expression that uses a date operator returns a date or a number, depending on the
operation. All date operations will result in an accurate date, taking into account the change
between years and leap years. The following table shows the date operators:

Operation Syntax Returns Expression Value

Date difference Date – Date Number !1/20/97! – !1/1/97! 19
Day addition Date + Number Date !1/20/97! + 9 !1/29/97!
Day subtraction Date – Number Date !1/20/97! – 9 !1/11/97!

See Also
Bitwise Operators, Comparison Operators, Logical Operators, Numeric Operators, Operators,
Picture Operators, String Operators, Time Operators.

1052 4D Language Reference

Logical Operators Operators

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4D supports two logical operators that work on Boolean expressions: conjunction (AND) and
inclusive disjunction (OR). A logical AND returns TRUE if both expressions are TRUE. A logical
OR returns TRUE if at least one of the expressions is TRUE.

4D also provides the Boolean functions True, False, and Not. For more information, see the
descriptions of these commands.

The following table shows the logical operators:

Operation Syntax Returns Expression Value

AND Boolean & Boolean Boolean ("A" = "A") & (15 # 3) True
("A" = "B") & (15 # 3) False
("A" = "B") & (15 = 3) False
OR Boolean | Boolean Boolean ("A" = "A") | (15 # 3) True
("A" = "B") | (15 # 3) True
("A" = "B") | (15 = 3) False

The following is the truth table for the AND logical operator:

Expr1 Expr2 Expr1 & Expr2

True True True
True False False
False True False
False False False

The following is the truth table for the OR logical operator:

Expr1 Expr2 Expr1 | Expr2

True True True
True False True
False True True
False False False

4D Language Reference 1053

Tip
If you need to calculate the exclusive disjunction between Expr1 and Expr2, evaluate:
(Expr1 | Expr2) & Not(Expr1 & Expr2)

See Also
Bitwise Operators, Comparison Operators, Date Operators, Numeric Operators, Operators, Picture
Operators, String Operators, Time Operators.

1054 4D Language Reference

Numeric Operators Operators

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

An expression that uses a numeric operator returns a number. The following table shows the
numeric operators:

Operation Syntax Returns Expression Value

Addition Number + Number Number 2+3 5
Subtraction Number – Number Number 3–2 1
Multiplication Number * Number Number 5*2 10
Division Number /Number Number 5/2 2.5
Longint division Number \ Number Number 5\2 2
Modulo Number % Number Number 5%2 1
Exponentiation Number ^ Number Number 2^3 8

Modulo Operator
The modulo operator % divides the first number by the second number and returns a whole
number remainder. Here are some examples:
• 10 % 2 returns 0 because 10 is evenly divided by 2.
• 10 % 3 returns 1 because the remainder is 1.
• 10.5 % 2 returns 0 because the remainder is not a whole number.

WARNING:
• The modulo operator % returns significant values with numbers that are in the Long Integer
range (from minus 2^31 to 2^31 minus one). To calculate the modulo with numbers outside
of this range, use the Mod command.
• The longint division operator \ returns significant values with integer numbers only.

See Also
Bitwise Operators, Comparison Operators, Date Operators, Logical Operators, Operators, Picture
Operators, String Operators, Time Operators.

4D Language Reference 1055

Picture Operators Operators

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

An expression that uses a picture operator returns a picture. The following table shows the
picture operators.

Operation Syntax Action

Horizontal concatenation Pict1 + Pict2 Add Pict2 to the right of Pict1
Vertical concatenation Pict1 / Pict2 Add Pict2 to the bottom of Pict1
Exclusive superimposition Pict1 & Pict2 Perform an XOR on Pict1 and Pict2
Inclusive superimposition Pict1 | Pict2 Perform a OR on Pict1 and Pict2
Horizontal move Picture + Number Move Picture horizontally Number pixels
Vertical move Picture / Number Move Picture vertically Number pixels
Resizing Picture * Number Resize Picture by Number ratio
Horizontal scaling Picture *+ Number Resize Picture horizontally by Number
ratio
Vertical scaling Picture */ Number Resize Picture vertically by Number ratio

The two operators & and | always return a bitmapped picture, no matter what the nature of
the two source pictures. The reason is that 4D first draws the pictures into memory bitmaps,
then calculates the resulting picture by performing graphical exclusive or inclusive OR on the
pixels of the bitmaps.

Note: The COMBINE PICTURES command can be used to superimpose pictures while keeping
the characteristics of each source picture in the resulting picture.

The other picture operators return vectorial pictures if the two source pictures are vectorial.
Remember, however, that pictures printed by the display format On Background are printed
bitmapped.

Examples
In the following examples, all of the pictures are shown using the display format On
Background.

1056 4D Language Reference

Here is the picture circle:

Here is the picture rectangle:

In the following examples, each expression is followed by its graphical representation.

• Horizontal concatenation

circle + rectangle ` Place the rectangle to the right of the circle

4D Language Reference 1057

 rectangle + circle ` Place the circle to the right of the rectangle

• Vertical concatenation

circle / rectangle ` Place the rectangle under the circle

1058 4D Language Reference

 rectangle / circle ` Place the circle under the rectangle

• Exclusive superimposition (XOR)

circle & rectangle ` Exclusive OR of the two pictures

4D Language Reference 1059

• Inclusive superimposition (OR)

circle | rectangle ` Inclusive OR of the two pictures

• Horizontal move

rectangle + 50 ` Move the rectangle 50 pixels to the right

1060 4D Language Reference

 rectangle - 50 ` Move the rectangle 50 pixels to the left

• Vertical move

rectangle /50 ` Move the rectangle down by 50 pixels

4D Language Reference 1061

 rectangle /-20 ` Move the rectangle up by 20 pixels

• Resize

rectangle * 1.5 ` The rectangle becomes 50% bigger

1062 4D Language Reference

 rectangle * 0.5 ` The rectangle becomes 50% smaller

• Horizontal scaling

circle *+3 ` The circle becomes 3 times wider

4D Language Reference 1063

 circle *+ 0.25 ` The circle's width becomes a quarter of what it was

• Vertical scaling

circle */ 2 ` The circle becomes twice as tall

1064 4D Language Reference

 circle */ 0.25 ` The circle's height becomes a quarter of what it was

See Also
Bitwise Operators, COMBINE PICTURES, Comparison Operators, Date Operators, Logical Operators,
Numeric Operators, Operators, String Operators, Time Operators, TRANSFORM PICTURE.

4D Language Reference 1065

String Operators Operators

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

An expression that uses a string operator returns a string. The following table shows the string
operators:

Operation Syntax Returns Expression Value

Concatenation String + String String "abc" + "def" "abcdef"
Repetition String * Number String "ab" * 3 "ababab"

See Also
Bitwise Operators, Comparison Operators, Date Operators, Logical Operators, Numeric Operators,
Operators, Picture Operators, Time Operators.

1066 4D Language Reference

Time Operators Operators

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

An expression that uses a time operator returns a time or a number, depending on the
operation. The following table shows the time operators:

Operation Syntax Returns Expression Value

Addition Time + Time Time ?02:03:04? + ?01:02:03? ?03:05:07?
Subtraction Time – Time Time ?02:03:04? – ?01:02:03? ?01:01:01?
Addition Time + Number Number ?02:03:04? + 65 7449
Subtraction Time – Number Number ?02:03:04? – 65 7319
Multiplication Time * Number Number ?02:03:04? * 2 14768
Division Time / Number Number ?02:03:04? / 2 3692
Longint division Time \ Number Number ?02:03:04? \ 2 3692
Modulo Time % Number Number ?02:03:04? % 2 0

Tips
(1) To obtain a time expression from an expression that combines a time expression with a
number, use the commands Time and Time string.
Example:

` The following line assigns to $vlSeconds the number of seconds that will be elapsed
` between midnight and one hour from now
$vlSeconds:=Current Time+3600

` The following line assigns to $vHSoon the time it will be in one hour
$vhSoon:=Time(Time string(Current time+3600))

The second line could be written in a simpler way:

` The following line assigns to $vHSoon the time it will be in one hour
$vhSoon:=Current time+?01:00:00?

However, while developing your application, you may encounter situations where a delay,
expressed in seconds and added to a time value, is only available to you as a numeric value.
In this case, use the next tip.

4D Language Reference 1067

(2) Some situations may require you to convert a time expression into a numeric expression.

For example, you open a document using Open document, which returns a Document
Reference (DocRef) that is formally a time expression. Later, you want to pass that DocRef to a
4D Extension routine that expects a numeric value as document reference. In such a case, use
the addition with 0 (zero) to get a numeric value from the time value, but without changing
its value.
Example:

` Select and open a document

$vhDocRef:=Open document("")
If (OK=1)
` Pass the DocRef time expression as a numeric expresssion
`to a 4D Extension routine
DO SOMETHING SPECIAL (0+$vhDocRef)
End if

See Also
Bitwise Operators, Comparison Operators, Date Operators, Logical Operators, Numeric Operators,
Operators, Picture Operators, String Operators.

1068 4D Language Reference

32
______________________
Pasteboard

4D Language Reference 1069

1070 4D Language Reference
Managing Pasteboards Pasteboard

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The commands of the “Pasteboard” theme can be used both for managing copy/paste
actions (Clipboard management), as well as inter-application drag and drop actions.

4D uses two data pasteboards: one for copied (or cut) data, which is the actual clipboard
that was already present in previous versions, and the other for data being dragged and
dropped.
These two pasteboards are managed using the same commands. You access one or the other
depending on the context:
• The drag and drop pasteboard can only be accessed within the On Begin Drag Over, On
Drag over or On Drop form events and in the On Drop database method. Outside of these
contexts, the drag and drop pasteboard is not available.
• The copy/paste pasteboard can be accessed in all other cases. Unlike the drag and drop
pasteboard, it keeps the data that are placed in it during the entire session. so long as they
are not cleared or reused.

Types of Data
During drag and drop actions, different types of data can be placed on and read from the
pasteboard. You can access a data type in several ways:
• Via its 4D signature: The 4D signature is a character string indicating a data type
referenced by the 4D application. The use of 4D signatures facilitates the development of
multi-platform applications since these signatures are identical under Mac OS and
Windows. You will find the list of 4D signatures below.
• Via a UTI (Uniform Type Identifier, Mac OS only): The UTI standard, specified by Apple,
associates a character string with each type of native object. For example, GIF pictures have
the UTI type “com.apple.gif”. UTI types are published in Apple documentations as well as
by the editors concerned.
• Via its number or its format name (Windows only): Under Windows, each native data
type is referenced by its number (“3”, “12”, and so on) and a name (“Rich Text Edit”). By
default, Microsoft specifies several native types called standard data formats. In addition,
third-party editors can “save” format names in the system, which then attributes them a
number in return. For more information about this and about native types, please refer to
the Microsoft developer documentation (more particularly at
http://msdn2.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ms649013.aspx).
Note: In 4D commands, the Windows format numbers are handled as text.

All the commands of the “Pasteboard” theme can work with each one of these data types.
You can find out which data types are present in the pasteboard in each of these formats
using the GET PASTEBOARD DATA TYPE command.

Note: The 4-character types (TEXT, PICT or custom types) are kept for compatibility with
prior versions of 4D.

4D Language Reference 1071

4D Signatures
Here is the list of standard 4D signatures as well as their description:
Signature Description
"com.4d.private.text.native" Text in native character set
"com.4d.private.text.utf16" Text in Unicode character set
"com.4d.private.text.rtf" Enriched text
"com.4d.private.picture.pict" PICT picture format
"com.4d.private.picture.pgn" PNG picture format
"com.4d.private.picture.gif" GIF picture format
"com.4d.private.picture.jfif" JPEG picture format
"com.4d.private.picture.emf" EMF picture format
"com.4d.private.picture.bitmap" BITMAP picture format
"com.4d.private.picture.tiff" TIFF picture format
"com.4d.private.picture.pdf" PDF document
"com.4d.private.file.url" File pathname

1072 4D Language Reference

APPEND DATA TO PASTEBOARD Pasteboard

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

APPEND DATA TO PASTEBOARD (dataType; data)

Parameter Type Description

dataType String → Type of data to be added
data BLOB → Data to append to the pasteboard

Description
The APPEND DATA TO PASTEBOARD command appends to the pasteboard the data contained
in the BLOB data under the data type specified in dataType.

Note: In the case of copy/paste operations, the pasteboard is equivalent to the Clipboard.

In dataType, pass a value specifying the type of data to be added. You can pass a 4D signature,
a UTI type (Mac OS), a format name/number (Windows), or a 4-character type (compatibility).
For more information about these types, please refer to the Managing Pasteboards section.

Usually, you will use the APPEND DATA TO PASTEBOARD command to append multiple
instances of the same data to the pasteboard or to append data that is not text or a picture. To
append new data to the pasteboard, you must first clear the pasteboard using the
CLEAR PASTEBOARD command.

If you want to clear and append:

• text to the pasteboard, use the SET TEXT TO PASTEBOARD command,
• a picture to the pasteboard, use the SET PICTURE TO PASTEBOARD command.
• a file pathname (drag and drop), use the SET FILE TO PASTEBOARD command.

However, note that if a BLOB actually contains some text or a picture, you can use the APPEND
DATA TO PASTEBOARD command to append a text or a picture to the pasteboard.

4D Language Reference 1073

Example
Using Pasteboard commands and BLOBs, you can build sophisticated Cut/Copy/Paste schemes
that deal with structured data rather than a unique piece of data. In the following example,
the two project methods SET RECORD TO PASTEBOARD and GET RECORD FROM PASTEBOARD
enable you to treat a whole record as one piece of data to be copied to or from the pasteboard.

` SET RECORD TO PASTEBOARD project method

` SET RECORD TO PASTEBOARD ( Number )
` SET RECORD TO PASTEBOARD ( Table number )

C_LONGINT($1;$vlField;$vlFieldType)
C_POINTER($vpTable;$vpField)
C_STRING(255;$vsDocName)
C_TEXT($vtRecordData;$vtFieldData)
C_BLOB($vxRecordData)

` Clear the pasteboard (it will stay empty if there is no current record)
CLEAR PASTEBOARD
` Get a pointer to the table whose number is passed as parameter
$vpTable:=Table($1)
` If there is a current record for that table
If ((Record number($vpTable->)>=0) | (Is new record($vpTable->)))
` Initialize the text variable that will hold the text image of the record
$vtRecordData:=""
` For each field of the record:
For ($vlField;1;Get last field number($1))
` Get the type of the field
GET FIELD PROPERTIES($1;$vlField;$vlFieldType)
` Get a pointer to the field
$vpField:=Field($1;$vlField)
` Depending on the type of the field, copy (or not) its data in the
` appropriate manner
Case of
: (($vlFieldType=Is Alpha field ) | ($vlFieldType=Is Text ))
$vtFieldData:=$vpField->
: (($vlFieldType=Is Real ) | ($vlFieldType=Is Integer ) | ($vlFieldType=Is LongInt )
 | ($vlFieldType=Is Date ) | ($vlFieldType=Is Time ))
$vtFieldData:=String($vpField->)
: ($vlFieldType=Is Boolean )
$vtFieldData:=String(Num($vpField->);"Yes;;No")
Else

1074 4D Language Reference

 ` Skip and ignore other field data types
$vtFieldData:=""  
End case
` Accumulate the field data into the text variable holding the text image
` of the record
$vtRecordData:=$vtRecordData+Field name($1;$vlField)+":"+Char(9)+
$vtFieldData+CR
` Note: The method CR returns Char(13) on Macintosh and Char(13)+Char(10)
`on Windows
End for
` Put the text image of the record into the pasteboard
SET TEXT TO PASTEBOARD($vtRecordData)  
` Name for scrap file in Temporary folder
$vsDocName:=Temporary folder+"Scrap"+String(1+(Random%99))
` Delete the scrap file if it exists (error should be tested here)
DELETE DOCUMENT($vsDocName)
` Create scrap file
SET CHANNEL(10;$vsDocName)
` Send the whole record into the scrap file
SEND RECORD($vpTable->)
` Close the scrap file
SET CHANNEL(11)
` Load the scrap file into a BLOB
DOCUMENT TO BLOB($vsDocName;$vxRecordData)
` We longer need the scrap file
DELETE DOCUMENT($vsDocName)
` Append the full image of the record into the pasteboard
` Note: We use arbitrarily "4Drc" as data type
APPEND DATA TO PASTEBOARD("4Drc";$vxRecordData)
` At this point, the pasteboardcontains:
` (1) A text image of the record (as shown in the screen shots below)
` (2) A whole image of the record (Picture, Subfile and BLOB fields included)
End if

4D Language Reference 1075

While entering the following record:

If you apply the method SET RECORD TO PASTEBOARD to the [Employees] table, the pasteboard
will contain the text image of the record, as shown, and also the whole image of the record.

1076 4D Language Reference

You can paste this image of the record to another record, using the method GET RECORD
FROM PASTEBOARD, as follows:

` GET RECORD FROM PASTEBOARDmethod

` GET RECORD FROM PASTEBOARD( Number )
` GET RECORD FROM PASTEBOARD( Table number )
C_LONGINT($1;$vlField;$vlFieldType;$vlPosCR;$vlPosColon)
C_POINTER($vpTable;$vpField)
C_STRING(255;$vsDocName)
C_BLOB($vxPasteboardData)
C_TEXT($vtPasteboardData;$vtFieldData)

` Get a pointer to the table whose number is passed as parameter

$vpTable:=Table($1)
` If there is a current record
If ((Record number($vpTable->)>=0) | (Is new record($vpTable->)))
Case of
` Does the pasteboard contain a full image record?
: (Pasteboard data size("4Drc")>0)
` If so, extract the pasteboard contents
GET PASTEBOARD DATA("4Drc";$vxPasteboardData)
` Name for scrap file in Temporary folder
$vsDocName:=Temporary folder+"Scrap"+String(1+(Random%99))  
` Delete the scrap file if it exists (error should be tested here)
DELETE DOCUMENT($vsDocName)
` Save the BLOB into the scrap file
BLOB TO DOCUMENT($vsDocName;$vxPasteboardData)
` Open the scrap file
SET CHANNEL(10;$vsDocName)
` Receive the whole record from the scrap file
RECEIVE RECORD($vpTable->)
` Close the scrap file
SET CHANNEL(11)
` We longer need the scrap file
DELETE DOCUMENT($vsDocName)

4D Language Reference 1077

 ` Does the pasteboard contain TEXT?
: (Pasteboard data size("TEXT")>0)
` Extract the text from the pasteboard
$vtPasteboardData:=Get text from pasteboard
` Initialize field number to be increment
$vlField:=0
Repeat
` Look for the next field line in the text
$vlPosCR:=Position(CR ;$vtPasteboardData)
If ($vlPosCR>0)
` Extract the field line
$vtFieldData:=Substring($vtPasteboardData;1;$vlPosCR-1)
` If there is a colon ":"
$vlPosColon:=Position(":";$vtFieldData)
If ($vlPosColon>0)
` Take only the field data (eliminate field name)
$vtFieldData:=Substring($vtFieldData;$vlPosColon+2)
End if
` Increment field number
$vlField:=$vlField+1
` Pasteboard may contain more data than we need...
If ($vlField<=Get last field number($vpTable))
` Get the type of the field
GET FIELD PROPERTIES($1;$vlField;$vlFieldType)
` Get a pointer to the field
$vpField:=Field($1;$vlField)
` Depending on the type of the field, copy (or not) the text
` in the appropriate manner
Case of
: (($vlFieldType=Is Alpha field ) | ($vlFieldType=Is Text ))
$vpField->:=$vtFieldData
: (($vlFieldType=Is Real ) | ($vlFieldType=Is Integer ) | 
($vlFieldType=Is LongInt ))
$vpField->:=Num($vtFieldData)
: ($vlFieldType=Is Date )
$vpField->:=Date($vtFieldData)
: ($vlFieldType=Is Time )
$vpField->:=Time($vtFieldData)
: ($vlFieldType=Is Boolean )
$vpField->:=($vtFieldData="Yes")
Else

1078 4D Language Reference

 ` Skip and ignore other field data types
End case
Else
` All fields have been assigned, get out of the loop
$vtPasteboardData:=""
End if
` Eliminate text that has just been extracted
$vtPasteboardData:=Substring($vtPasteboardData;$vlPosCR+
Length(CR ))
Else
` No delimiter found, get out of the loop
$vtPasteboardData:=""
End if
` Repeat as long as we have data
Until (Length($vtPasteboardData)=0)
Else
ALERT("The pasteboard does not any data that can be pasted as a record.")
End case
End if

See Also
CLEAR PASTEBOARD, SET PICTURE TO PASTEBOARD, SET TEXT TO PASTEBOARD.

System Variables
If the BLOB data is correctly appended to the pasteboard, OK is set to 1; otherwise OK is set to
0 and an error may be generated.

Error Handling
If there is not enough memory to append the BLOB data to the pasteboard, an error -108 is
generated.

4D Language Reference 1079

CLEAR PASTEBOARD Pasteboard

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

CLEAR PASTEBOARD

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
The CLEAR PASTEBOARD command clears the pasteboard of all its contents. If the pasteboard
contains multiple instances of the same data, all instances are cleared. After a call to CLEAR
PASTEBOARD, the pasteboard is empty.

You must call CLEAR PASTEBOARD once before appending new data to the pasteboard using
the command APPEND DATA TO PASTEBOARD, because this latter command does not clear the
pasteboard before appending the new data.

Calling CLEAR PASTEBOARD once and then calling APPEND DATA TO PASTEBOARD several times
enables you to Cut or Copy the same data under different formats.

On the other hand, the SET TEXT TO PASTEBOARD and SET PICTURE TO PASTEBOARD
commands automatically clear the pasteboard before appending the data to it.

Examples
1. The following code clears and then appends data to the pasteboard:

CLEAR PASTEBOARD ` Make sure the pasteboard is emptied

` Add some gif pictures
APPEND DATA TO PASTEBOARD("com.4d.private.picture.gif";$vxSomeData)
` Add some RTF text
APPEND DATA TO PASTEBOARD("com.4d.private.text.rtf";$vxSylkData)

2. See example for the APPEND DATA TO PASTEBOARD command.

See Also
APPEND DATA TO PASTEBOARD.

1080 4D Language Reference

Get file from pasteboard Pasteboard

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get file from pasteboard (xIndex) → String

Parameter Type Description

xIndex Number → Xth file included in drag action

Function result String ← Pathname of file extracted from pasteboard

Description
The Get file from pasteboard command returns the absolute pathname of a file included in a
drag and drop operation. Several files can be selected and moved simultaneously. The
xIndex parameter is used to designate a file from among the set of files selected.

If there is no Xth file in the pasteboard, the comand returns an empty string.

Example
The following example can be used to retrieve in an array all the pathnames of the files
included in a drag and drop operation:

ARRAY TEXT($filesArray;0)
C_TEXT($vfileArray)
C_INTEGER($n)
$n:=1
Repeat
$vfileArray:=Get file from pasteboard($n)
If($vfileArray#"")
APPEND TO ARRAY($filesArray;$vfileArray)
$n:=$n+1
End if
Until($vfileArray="")

See Also
SET FILE TO PASTEBOARD.

4D Language Reference 1081

GET PASTEBOARD DATA Pasteboard

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET PASTEBOARD DATA (dataType; data)

Parameter Type Description

dataType String → Type of data to be extracted from pasteboard
data BLOB ← Requested data extracted from the pasteboard

Description
The GET PASTEBOARD DATA command returns into the BLOB field or into the variable data the
data present in the pasteboard and whose type you pass in dataType.

In dataType, pass a value specifying the type of data to be retrieved. You can pass a 4D
signature, a UTI type (Mac OS), a format name/number (Windows), or a 4-character type
(compatibility). For more information about these types, please refer to the Managing
Pasteboards section.

Example
The following object methods for two buttons copy from and paste data to the array asOptions
(pop-up menu, drop-downlist,...) located in a form:

` bCopyasOptions object method

If (Size of array(asOptions)>0) ` Is there something to copy?
` Accumulate the array elements in a BLOB
VARIABLE TO BLOB (asOptions;$vxClipData)
CLEAR PASTEBOARD ` Empty the pasteboard
` Note the data type arbitrarily chosen
APPEND DATA TO PASTEBOARD ("artx";asOptions)
End if
` bPasteasOptions object method
If (Pasteboard data size ("artx")>0) ` Is there some "artx" data in the pasteboard?
GET PASTEBOARD DATA ("artx";$vxClipData) ` Extract the data from the pasteboard
BLOB TO VARIABLE ($vxClipData;asOptions) ` Populate the array with the BLOB data
asOptions:=0 ` Reset the selected element for the array
End if

1082 4D Language Reference

See Also
APPEND DATA TO PASTEBOARD, GET PICTURE FROM PASTEBOARD, Get text from pasteboard.

System Variables
If the data is correctly extracted, OK is set to 1; otherwise OK is set to 0 and an error is
generated.

Error Handling
If there is not enough memory to extract the data, an error -108 is generated.

4D Language Reference 1083

GET PASTEBOARD DATA TYPE Pasteboard

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET PASTEBOARD DATA TYPE (4Dsignatures; nativeTypes{; formatNames})

Parameter Type Description

4Dsignatures Text Array ← 4D signatures of data types
nativeTypes Text Array ← Native data types
formatNames Text Array ← Format names (Windows only),
empty strings under Mac OS

Description
The GET PASTEBOARD DATA TYPE command can be used to get a list of data types present
in the pasteboard. This command should generally be used in the context of a drag and
drop operation, within the On Drop or On Drag Over form events of the destination object.
More particularly, it allows the pasteboard to be checked for the presence of a specific type
of data.

This command returns the data types in several different forms via two (or three) arrays:
• The 4Dsignatures array contains the data types expressed using the internal 4D signature
(for example, “com.4d.private.picture.gif”). If a data type found is not recognized by 4D, an
empty string (“”) is returned in the array.
• The nativeTypes array contains the data types expressed using their native types. The
format of native types differs between Mac OS and Windows:
- UnderMac OS, native types are expressed as UTIs (Uniform Type Identifier).
- Under Windows, native types are expressed as numbers, with each number being
associated with a format name. The nativeTypes array contains these numbers in the form
of strings (“3”, “12”, and so on). If you want to use more explicit labels, it is recommended
to use the optional formatNames array, which contains the format names of the native
types under Windows.
The nativeTypes array lets any type of data found in the pasteboard to be supported,
including data whose type is not referenced by 4D.
• Under Windows, you can also pass the formatNames array, which receives the names of
the data types found in the pasteboard. The values returned in this array can be used, for
example, to build a format selection pop-up menu. Under Mac OS, the formatNames array
returns empty strings.

For more information about the data types supported, please refer to the Managing
Pasteboards section.

See Also
Managing Pasteboards.

1084 4D Language Reference

GET PICTURE FROM PASTEBOARD Pasteboard

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET PICTURE FROM PASTEBOARD (picture)

Parameter Type Description

picture Picture ← Picture extracted from pasteboard

Description
GET PICTURE FROM PASTEBOARD returns the picture present in the pasteboard into the picture
field or variable.

Note: In the case of copy/paste operations, the pasteboard is equivalent to the Clipboard.

The picture is transported in its native format (jpeg, tif, png, etc.). When the destination area
accepts native formats, the picture keeps its format; otherwise it is converted to the PICT
format.

Example
The following button’s object method assigns the picture (jpeg or gif format) present in the
pasteboard (if any) to the field [Employees]Photo:

If (Pasteboard data size("com.4d.private.picture.jpeg")>0) | (Pasteboard data

size("com.4d.private.picture.gif")>0))
GET PICTURE FROM PASTEBOARD([Employees]Photo)
Else
ALERT ("The pasteboard does not contain any pictures.")
End if

See Also
GET PASTEBOARD DATA, Get text from pasteboard, Pasteboard data size.

System Variables
If the picture is correctly extracted, OK is set to 1; otherwise OK is set to 0.

Error Handling
If there is not enough memory to extract the picture, an error -108 is generated.

4D Language Reference 1085

Get text from pasteboard Pasteboard

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get text from pasteboard → String

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result String ← Returns the text (if any) present in the pasteboard

Description
Get text from pasteboard returns the text present in the pasteboard.

Note: In the case of copy/paste operations, the pasteboard is equivalent to the Clipboard

If the pasteboard contains enriched text (for example in RTF format), the text will keep its
attributes when it is dropped or pasted, if the destination area is compatible.

Note that 4D text fields and variables can contain up to 2 GB of text.

See Also
GET PASTEBOARD DATA, GET PICTURE FROM PASTEBOARD, Pasteboard data size.

System Variables
If the text is correctly extracted, OK is set to 1; otherwise OK is set to 0.

Error Handling
If there is not enough memory to extract the text, an error -108 is generated.

1086 4D Language Reference

Pasteboard data size Pasteboard

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Pasteboard data size (dataType) → Number

Parameter Type Description

dataType String → Data type

Function result Number ← Size (in bytes) of data located in the pasteboard
or error code

Description
The Pasteboard data size command allows you to check whether there is any data of the type
you passed in dataType present in the pasteboard.

Note: In the case of copy/paste operations, the pasteboard is equivalent to the Clipboard.

If the pasteboard is empty or does not contain any data of the specified type, the command
returns an error -102. If the pasteboard contains data of the specified type, the command
returns the size of this data, expressed in bytes.

In dataType, pass a value specifying the type of data to be checked for. You can pass a 4D
signature, a UTI type (Mac OS), a format name/number (Windows), or a 4-character type
(compatibility). For more information about these types, please refer to the Managing
Pasteboards section.

After you have detected that the pasteboard contains data of the type in which you are
interested, you can extract that data from the pasteboard using one the following commands:
• If the pasteboard contains text type data, you can obtain that data using the
Get text from pasteboard command, which returns a text value, or the GET PASTEBOARD DATA
command, which returns the text in a BLOB.
• If the pasteboard contains picture type data, you can obtain that data using the
GET PICTURE FROM PASTEBOARD command, which returns the picture in a picture field or
variable, or the GET PASTEBOARD DATA command, which returns the picture in a BLOB.
• If the pasteboard contains a file pathname, you can extract it using the Get file from
pasteboard command, which will return the file pathname.
• For any other data type, use the GET PASTEBOARD DATA command, which returns the data in
a BLOB.

4D Language Reference 1087

Examples
1. The following code tests whether the pasteboard contains a jpeg picture and, if so, copies
that picture into a 4D variable:

` Is there a jpeg picture in the pasteboard?

If (Pasteboard data size ("com.4d.private.picture.jfif") > 0)
` If so, extract the picture from the pasteboard
GET PICTURE FROM PASTEBOARD($vPicVariable)
Else
ALERT("There is no picture in the pasteboard.")
End if

2. Usually, applications cut and copy Text or Picture type data into the pasteboard, because
most applications recognize these two standard data types. However, an application can
append to the pasteboard several instances of the same data in different formats. For example,
each time you cut or copy a part of a spreadsheet, the spreadsheet application could append
the data under the hypothetical ‘SPSH’ format, as well as in SYLK and TEXT formats. The
‘SPSH’ instance would contain the data formatted using the application’s data structure. The
SYLK form would contain the same data, but using the SYLK format recognized by most of the
other spreadsheet programs. Finally, the TEXT format would contain the same data, without
the extra information included in the SYLK or the hypothetical ‘SPSH’ format. At this point,
while writing Cut/Copy/Paste routines between 4D and that hypothetical spreadsheet
application, assuming you know the description of the ‘SPSH’ format and that you are ready to
parse SYLK data, you could write something like:

Case of
` First, check whether the pasteboard contains data from the hypothetical
`spreadsheet application
: (Pasteboard data size ('SPSH') > 0)
` ...
` Second, check whether the pasteboard contains Sylk data
: (Pasteboard data size ('SYLK') > 0)
` ...
` Finally check whether the pasteboard contains Text data
: (Pasteboard data size ('TEXT') > 0)
` ...
End case

In other words, you try to extract from the pasteboard the instance of the data that carries
most of the original information.

1088 4D Language Reference

3. See the example for the APPEND DATA TO PASTEBOARD command.

See Also
GET PASTEBOARD DATA, GET PICTURE FROM PASTEBOARD, Get text from pasteboard.

4D Language Reference 1089

SET FILE TO PASTEBOARD Pasteboard

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET FILE TO PASTEBOARD (filePath)

Parameter Type Description

filePath String → Complete pathname of file

Description
The SET FILE TO PASTEBOARD command adds the complete pathname passed in the filePath
parameter.

This command can be used to set up interfaces allowing the drag and drop of 4D objects to
files on the desktop for example.

Note: The pasteboard is in read-only mode during the On Drag Over form event. It is
therefore not possible to use this command in that context.

See Also
Get file from pasteboard.

1090 4D Language Reference

SET PICTURE TO PASTEBOARD Pasteboard

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET PICTURE TO PASTEBOARD (picture)

Parameter Type Description

picture Picture → Picture to be placed in pasteboard

Description
SET PICTURE TO PASTEBOARD clears the pasteboard and puts a copy of the picture passed in
picture into it.

Note: In the case of copy/paste operations, the pasteboard is equivalent to the Clipboard

The picture is transported in its native format (jpeg, tif, png, etc.).

After you have put a picture into the pasteboard, you can retrieve it using the GET PICTURE
FROM PASTEBOARD command or for example GET PASTEBOARD
DATA("com.4d.private.picture.gif";...).

Example
Using a floating window, you display a form that contains the array asEmployeeName, which
lists the names of the employees from an [Employees] table. Each time you click on a name,
you want to copy the employee's picture to the pasteboard. In the object method for the array,
you write:

If (asEmployeeName#0)
QUERY ([Employees];[Employees]Last name=asEmployeeName{asEmployeeName})
If (Picture size ([Employees]Photo)>0)
SET PICTURE TO PASTEBOARD([Employees]Photo) ` Copy the employee's photo
Else
CLEAR PASTEBOARD ` No photo or no record found
End if
End if

4D Language Reference 1091

See Also
APPEND DATA TO PASTEBOARD, GET PICTURE FROM PASTEBOARD.

System Variables or Sets

If a copy of the picture is correctly put into the pasteboard, the OK variable is set to 1.
If there is not enough memory to paste the picture into the pasteboard, the OK variable is set
to 0, but no error is generated.

1092 4D Language Reference

SET TEXT TO PASTEBOARD Pasteboard

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET TEXT TO PASTEBOARD (text)

Parameter Type Description

text String → Text to be put into the pasteboard

Description
SET TEXT TO PASTEBOARD clears the pasteboard and then puts a copy of the text you passed in
text into the pasteboard.

Note: In the case of copy/paste operations, the pasteboard is equivalent to the Clipboard

After you have put some text into the pasteboard, you can retrieve it using the Get text from
pasteboard command or by calling for example GET PASTEBOARD DATA
("com.4d.private.text.native";...).

4D text expressions can contain up to 2 GB of text.

Note: The pasteboard is read only during the On Drag Over form event. It is not possible to use
this command in this context.

Example
See the example for the APPEND DATA TO PASTEBOARD command.

See Also
APPEND DATA TO PASTEBOARD, Get text from pasteboard.

System Variables or Sets

If a copy of the text is correctly placed in the pasteboard, the OK variable is set to 1. If there is
not enough memory to place a copy of the text in the pasteboard, the OK variable is set to 0,
but no error is generated.

4D Language Reference 1093

1094 4D Language Reference
33
______________________
Pictures

4D Language Reference 1095

1096 4D Language Reference
Pictures Pictures

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Native Formats Supported

4D integrates native management of the most current picture formats, such as JPEG or GIF.
This means that pictures will be displayed and stored in their original format, without any
interpretation in 4D. The specific features of the different formats (shading, transparent areas,
etc.) will be retained when they are copied and pasted, and will be displayed without
alteration. This native support is valid for all pictures stored in 4D: library pictures, pictures
pasted into forms in Design mode, pictures pasted into fields or variables in Application mode,
etc.

The native formats are available in all cases and will always be returned by the PICTURE CODEC
LIST command, regardless of the operating system and machine configuration. These formats
are the following:
• Jpeg
• Png
• Bmp
• Gif
• Tif
• Emf (Windows only)
• Pict
• Svg
• Pdf (Mac OS only)

Note: If 4D cannot interpret the picture format, the program calls on Quicktime routines (see
below).

Picture Codec IDs

Picture formats recognized by 4D are returned by the PICTURE CODEC LIST command as
picture Codec IDs. They can be returned in three different forms:
• As an extension (for example “.gif”)
• As a Mime type (for example “image/jpeg”)
• As a 4-character QuickTime code (for example “PNTG”)
The form returned for each format will depend on the way the Codec is recorded at the
operating system level.
Most of the 4D picture management commands can receive a Codec ID as a parameter. It is
therefore imperative to use the system ID returned by the PICTURE CODEC LIST command.

4D Language Reference 1097

Coordinates for Clicks on a Picture
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4D lets you retrieve the local coordinates of a click on a picture field or variable, even if a scroll
or zoom has been applied to the picture.
The click coordinates are returned in the MouseX and MouseY system variables. The
coordinates are expressed in pixels with respect to the top left corner of the picture (0,0). You
must get the value of these variables as part of the On Clicked or On Double Clicked form event.
In order for this mechanism to work properly, the display format must be set to "Truncated
non-centered" (see the SET FORMAT command).
This mechanism, similar to that of a picture map, can be used, for example, to handle
scrollable button bars or the interface of cartography software.

Using Apple QuickTime with 4D

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4D can use Apple QuickTime routines to manage picture storage and display in databases.
Under Mac OS, QuickTime is integrated into the operating system, no extension is required.
Under Windows, 4D requires QuickTime version 4 (or higher) to be installed in order for you
to be able to use picture compression/decompression on this platform.

Compatibility Note: The LOAD COMPRESS PICTURE FROM FILE, COMPRESS PICTURE FILE and
COMPRESS PICTURE commands call upon obsolete mechanisms. They can be favorably
replaced by the WRITE PICTURE FILE, PICTURE TO BLOB or CONVERT PICTURE commands.
Moreover, commands that call on disk files (LOAD COMPRESS PICTURE FROM FILE and
COMPRESS PICTURE FILE) will not work under Windows, no matter what version of QuickTime
is installed.

• Picture Conversion and Compression Errors

When you try to use a picture conversion or compression command and QuickTime is not
installed in your system, 4D returns the error code -9955. Other errors generated by
QuickTime can also be returned. You can catch these errors using an error-handling method
installed with ON ERR CALL.

Picture Operators
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4D allows you to carry out operations on 4D pictures, such as concatenation, superimposing,

etc. This point is covered in the Picture Operators section.

1098 4D Language Reference

BLOB TO PICTURE Pictures

version 11.2 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

BLOB TO PICTURE (pictureBlob; picture{; codec})

Parameter Type Description

pictureBlob BLOB → BLOB containing a picture
picture Picture ← Picture from BLOB
codec String → Picture codec ID

Description
The BLOB TO PICTURE command inserts a picture stored in a BLOB into a 4D picture variable
or field, regardless its original format.

This command is similar to the command READ PICTURE FILE, it just applies to a BLOB instead
of a file. It allows you to display pictures stored in native format into BLOBs. You can load a
picture into a BLOB using, for example, the command DOCUMENT TO BLOB or PICTURE TO
BLOB.

A BLOB variable or field containing a picture is passed in the pictureBlob parameter. The
picture can be in any format supported natively by 4D or any QuickTime supported format.
You can obtain the list of available formats using the PICTURE CODEC LIST command. If you
pass the optional codec parameter, 4D will use the value provided in this parameter to decode
the BLOB (see the specific functioning of the command with this third parameter below).

Pass in the picture parameter the 4D picture field or variable which should display the picture.

Note: The internal picture format will be stored within the 4D variable or field. In the case of
custom formats using QuickTime, it will be necessary to have QuickTime to subsequently read
the picture within 4D.

Once the command has been executed, if the BLOB was correctly decoded, the picture
parameter contains the picture to display.

The optional codec parameter lets you specify the codec to be used for decoding the BLOB.
If you pass a codec recognized by 4D in codec (returned by the PICTURE CODEC LIST
command), it is applied to the BLOB and the picture is returned in the picture field or variable.

4D Language Reference 1099

If you pass a codex that is not recognized by 4D in codec, a new codec is recorded dynamically
with the ID passed in the parameter. 4D then returns a picture that encapsulates the BLOB and
the OK variable is set to 1. In this case, to retrieve the BLOB, you will need to use the PICTURE
TO BLOB command with the same custom ID. This particular mechanism can be used to meet
two specific needs:
• encapsulation of a BLOB (that is not a picture) into a picture,
• loading a picture without using a codec.
The implementation of these mechanisms allows, more specifically, the creation of "BLOB
arrays" via picture arrays. This technique must be used with caution because, since the arrays
are loaded entirely into memory, working with large sized BLOBs can affect the functioning of
the application.

Note: A BLOB created by the VARIABLE TO BLOB command is managed automatically; it is not
necessary to pass a codec to encapsulate it since the BLOB is "signed." In this case, for the
opposite operation, you will need to pass ".4DVarBlob" to the PICTURE TO BLOB command as
the codec ID.

See Also
PICTURE CODEC LIST, PICTURE TO BLOB, PICTURE TYPE LIST, READ PICTURE FILE.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been executed correctly, the system variable OK is set to 1. If the
conversion has failed (QuickTime is not installed, the BLOB does not contain a readable
picture, the codec parameter recognized but BLOB not validated, etc.), OK is set to 0 and the
4D picture variable or field is returned empty.

1100 4D Language Reference

COMBINE PICTURES Pictures

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

COMBINE PICTURES (resultingPict; pict1; operator; pict2{; horOffset; vertOffset})

Parameter Type Description

resultingPict Picture ← Picture resulting from combination
pict1 Picture → First picture to combine
operator Longint → Type of combination to be done
pict2 Picture → Second picture to combine
horOffset Longint → Horizontal offset for superimposition
vertOffset Longint → Vertical offset for superimposition

Description
The COMBINE PICTURES command can be used to combine the pict1 and pict2 pictures in
operator mode in order to produce a third, resultingPict. The resulting picture is of the
compound type and keeps all the characteristics of the source pictures.

Note: This command extends the functionalities offered by the conventional picture
combination operators (+/, etc., see the Picture Operators section). These operators remain
entirely usable in 4D v11.

In operator, pass the type of combination to be applied. Three types of combinations,

which can be accessed via the constants of the “Picture Transformation” theme, are proposed:
• Horizontal concatenation (1): pict2 is attached to pict1, the top left corner of pict2
coincides with the top right corner of pict1.
• Vertical concatenation (2): pict2 attached to pict1, the top left corner of pict2 coincides
with the lower left corner of pict1.
• Superimposition (3): pict2 is placed over pict1, the top left corner of pict2 coincides with
the top left corner of pict1.
If the optional horOffset and vertOffset parameters are used, a translation is applied to pict2
before superimposition. The values passed in horOffset and vertOffset must correspond to
pixels. Pass positive values for an offset to the right or towards the bottom and a negative
value for an offset to the left or towards the top.

Note: Superimposition carried out by the COMBINE PICTURES command differs from the
superimposition provided by the conventional & and |operators (exclusive and inclusive
superimposition). While the COMBINE PICTURES command preserves the characteristics of
each source picture in the resulting picture, the & and | operators process each pixel and
generate a bitmap picture in all cases. These operators, originally intended for black and
white pictures, are now obsolete.

4D Language Reference 1101

Example
Given the following pictures:

COMBINE PICTURES(flag;mybackground;Superimposition;mycircle;50;30)

Result:

See Also
Picture Operators, TRANSFORM PICTURE.

1102 4D Language Reference

COMPRESS PICTURE Pictures

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

COMPRESS PICTURE (picture; method; quality)

Parameter Type Description

picture Picture → Picture to be compressed
← Compressed picture
method String → 4-character string compression method
quality Number → Compression quality (1..1000)

Compatibility note: This command calls for obsolete mechanisms and is only kept for
compatibility reasons. It has been favorably replaced by the CONVERT PICTURE command.

Description
The COMPRESS PICTURE command compresses the picture contained in the field or variable
picture.

The parameter method is a 4-character string indicating the compressor type. You should pass
one of the constants of the Picture compression theme in this parameter.

The parameter quality is an integer between 1 and 1000 indicating the quality of the
compressed picture. In general, reducing the quality will allow for greater compression of the
picture.

Warning: The compression ratio possible for a given quality depends on the size and nature of
the picture you are compressing. Compressing small pictures may not produce any decrease in
size.

See Also
COMPRESS PICTURE FILE, CONVERT PICTURE, LOAD COMPRESS PICTURE FROM FILE, Pictures.

4D Language Reference 1103

COMPRESS PICTURE FILE Pictures

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

COMPRESS PICTURE FILE (document; method; quality)

Parameter Type Description

document DocRef → Document reference number
method String → 4-character string compression method
quality Number → Compression quality (1..1000)

Compatibility note: This command calls for obsolete mechanisms and is only kept for
compatibility reasons. It has been favorably replaced by the WRITE PICTURE FILE or PICTURE TO
BLOB commands.

Description
This command compresses a picture document on disk. Use this command to compress a
picture that you know cannot be loaded with the available memory. Once compressed, it can
be loaded into memory using LOAD COMPRESS PICTURE FROM FILE.

Note: This command does not work on Windows.

The parameter method is a 4-character string indicating the compressor type. You should pass
one of the constants of the Picture compression theme in method.

The parameter quality is an integer between 1 and 1000 indicating the quality of the
compressed picture. In general, reducing the quality will allow for greater compression of the
picture.

Warning: The compression ratio possible for a given quality depends on the size and nature of
the picture you are compressing. Compressing small pictures may not produce any decrease in
size.

1104 4D Language Reference

Example
The following example presents the Open File dialog box that allows you to select a PICT file.
Only PICT files will be displayed. The picture is compressed, loaded into memory, and stored
in a picture variable. The file is then closed.

vRef:=Open document ("";"PICT")

If (OK=1)
COMPRESS PICTURE FILE(vRef;QT Photo compressor;500)
LOAD COMPRESS PICTURE FROM FILE(vRef;"";500;vPict)
CLOSE DOCUMENT(vRef)
End if

See Also
COMPRESS PICTURE, LOAD COMPRESS PICTURE FROM FILE, SAVE PICTURE TO FILE.

4D Language Reference 1105

CONVERT PICTURE Pictures

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

CONVERT PICTURE (picture; codec)

Parameter Type Description

picture Picture → Picture to be converted
← Converted picture
codec String → Picture Codec ID

Description
The CONVERT PICTURE command converts picture into a new type.

The codec parameter indicates the type of picture to be generated. A Codec can be an
extension (for example, “.gif”), a Mime type (for example, “image/jpeg”) or a 4-character
QuickTime code (for example, “PNTG”). You can get a list of Codecs that are available
using the PICTURE CODEC LIST command.

If the picture field or variable is a compound type (if, for example, it is the result of a copy-
paste action), only the information corresponding to the codec type are preserved in the
resulting picture.

Example
Conversion of the vpPhoto picture to the jpeg format:

CONVERT PICTURE(vpPhoto;".jpg")

See Also
PICTURE CODEC LIST.

1106 4D Language Reference

CREATE THUMBNAIL Pictures

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

CREATE THUMBNAIL (source; dest{; width{; height{; mode{; depth}}}})

Parameter Type Description

source Picture → 4D picture field or variable to convert as a thumbnail
dest Picture ← Resulting thumbnail
width Integer → Thumbnail width in pixels, Default value = 48
height Integer → Thumbnail height in pixels, Default value = 48
mode Integer → Thumbnail creation mode
Default value = Scaled to fit prop centered (6)
depth Integer → Obsolete, do not use

Description
The CREATE THUMBNAIL command returns a thumbnail from a given source picture.
Thumbnails are usually used for picture preview within multimedia software or Web sites.

Note: This command does not require QuickTime installation.

You pass in the source parameter the 4D variable or field containing the picture to reduce to a
thumbnail. You pass in the dest parameter the 4D picture field or variable which should host
the resulting thumbnail.

The optional parameters width and height define the required thumbnail size (in pixels). If you
omit these parameters, the thumbnail default size will be 48 x 48 pixels.

The optional parameter mode defines the thumbnail creation mode, i.e. the reduction mode.
Three modes are available. The following predefined constants are provided by 4D in the
“Picture Display Formats” constant theme:

Constants Type Value

Scaled to fit Long integer 2
Scaled to fit proportional Long integer 5
Scaled to fit prop centered Long integer 6 (default)

Note: Only these constants can be used with CREATE THUMBNAIL. The other constants in the
theme “Picture Display Formats” cannot be applied to this command.

4D Language Reference 1107

If you do not enter any parameter, the “Scaled to fit prop centered” mode (6) is applied by
default. Below is an illustration of the various modes:

Source picture

Resulting thumbnails (48x48)

• Scaled to fit = 2

• Scaled to fit proportional = 5

1108 4D Language Reference

• Scaled to fit prop centered = 6 (default mode)

Note: With the “Scaled to fit proportional” and the “Scaled to fit prop centered”, the free
space will be displayed in white. When these modes are applied to picture field or variable in
4D forms, the free space is transparent.

Starting with version 11 of 4D, the depth parameter is ignored and must be omitted. The
command always uses the current screen depth (number of colors).

4D Language Reference 1109

GET PICTURE FROM LIBRARY Pictures

version 6.7 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET PICTURE FROM LIBRARY (picRef | picName; picture)

Parameter Type Description

picRef | picName Number | String → Reference number of Picture Library graphic or
Name of Picture Library graphic
picture Picture Variable ← Picture from the Picture Library

Description
The GET PICTURE FROM LIBRARY command returns in the picture parameter the Picture Library
graphic whose reference number is passed in picRef or whose name is passed in picName.

If there is no picture with that reference number or name, GET PICTURE FROM LIBRARY leaves
picture unchanged.

Examples
1. The following example returns in vgMyPicture the picture whose reference number is stored
in the local variable $vlPicRef:

GET PICTURE FROM LIBRARY($vlPicRef;vgMyPicture)

2. The following example returns in $DDcom_Prot_MyPicture the picture with the name
"DDcom_Prot_Button1" stored in the Picture Library:

GET PICTURE FROM LIBRARY("DDcom_Prot_Button1";$DDcom_Prot_MyPicture)

3. See the third example for the command PICTURE LIBRARY LIST.

See Also
PICTURE LIBRARY LIST, REMOVE PICTURE FROM LIBRARY, SET PICTURE TO LIBRARY.

System Variables and Sets

If the Picture Library exists, the OK variable is set to 1. Otherwise, OK is set to zero.

Error Handling
If there is not enough memory to return the picture, an error -108 is generated. You can catch
this error using an error-handling method.

1110 4D Language Reference

LOAD COMPRESS PICTURE FROM FILE Pictures

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

LOAD COMPRESS PICTURE FROM FILE (document; method; quality; picture)

Parameter Type Description

document DocRef → Document reference number
method String → 4-character string compression method
quality Number → Compression quality (1..1000)
picture Picture ← Compressed picture

Compatibility note: This command calls for obsolete mechanisms and is only kept for
compatibility reasons. It has been favorably replaced by the READ PICTURE FILE and CONVERT
PICTURE commands.

Description
This command compresses a picture loaded from a document on disk.

Note: This command does not work on Windows.

You can open a PICT document using the Open document function. You can then use the
document reference returned by this function to load and compress the PICT found in the
document. This command loads the picture into memory, compresses it using the method
and quality you have specified, and then returns it into picture.

The picture is loaded into memory before it is compressed. If there is not enough memory to
load the picture, use COMPRESS PICTURE FILE before calling LOAD COMPRESS PICTURE FROM
FILE.

The parameter method is a 4-character string indicating the compressor type. You should pass
one of the constants of the Picture compression theme in method. If method is an empty string,
the picture is loaded but not compressed.

The parameter quality is an integer between 1 and 1000 indicating the quality of the
compressed picture. In general, reducing the quality will allow for greater compression of the
picture.

4D Language Reference 1111

Warning: The compression ratio possible for a given quality depends on the size and nature of
the picture you are compressing. Compressing small pictures may not produce any decrease in
size.

Example
The following example presents an Open File dialog box that allows you to select a PICT file.
The picture in the PICT file is loaded into memory, compressed, and stored in a picture
variable. The file is then closed.

vRef:=Open document ("";"PICT")

If (OK=1)
LOAD COMPRESS PICTURE FROM FILE(vRef;QT Photo compressor;500;vPict)
CLOSE DOCUMENT(vRef)
End if

See Also
COMPRESS PICTURE, COMPRESS PICTURE FILE, CONVERT PICTURE, Pictures, READ PICTURE FILE,
SAVE PICTURE TO FILE.

1112 4D Language Reference

PICTURE CODEC LIST Pictures

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

PICTURE CODEC LIST (codecArray{; namesArray})

Parameter Type Description

codecArray String array ← IDs of available picture Codecs
namesArray String array ← Names of picture Codecx

Description
The PICTURE CODEC LIST command fills the codecArray array with the list of picture Codec
IDs that are available on the machine where it is executed. This list includes both the
Codec IDs of picture formats that are managed natively by 4D v11 (see below) as well as the
IDs of any additional QuickTime Codecs that are installed on the machine (see the Pictures
section).
These IDs can be passed in the format parameter for the WRITE PICTURE FILE and PICTURE TO
BLOB commands that are used for exporting pictures

The Codec IDs can be returned in the codecArray array in three different forms:
• As an extension (for example, “.gif”)
• As a Mime type (for example, “image/jpeg”)
• As a 4-character QuickTime code (for example, “PNTG”)

The form returned by the command will depend on the way the Codec is recorded at the
operating system level. The optional namesArray array can be used to retrieve the name of
each Codec. These names are more explicit than the IDs. This array can be used, for
example, to build and display a menu listing the available Codecs.

See Also
PICTURE TYPE LIST, Pictures.

4D Language Reference 1113

PICTURE LIBRARY LIST Pictures

version 6.0.2
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

PICTURE LIBRARY LIST (picRefs; picNames)

Parameter Type Description

picRefs Longint Array ← Reference numbers of the Picture Library graphics
picNames String Array ← Names of the Picture Library graphics

Description
The PICTURE LIBRARY LIST command returns the reference numbers and names of the pictures
currently stored in the Picture Library of the database.

After the call, you retrieve the reference numbers in the array picRefs and the names in the
array picNames. The two arrays are synchronized: the nth element of picRefs is the reference
number of the Picture Library graphic whose name is returned in the nth element of picNames.

If necessary, the command automatically creates and sizes the picRefs and picNames arrays.

The maximum length of a Picture Library graphic name is 255 characters.

If there are no pictures in the Picture Library, both arrays are returned empty.

To obtain the number of pictures currently stored in the Picture Library, use the Size of array
command to get the size of one of the two arrays.

Examples
1. The following code returns the catalog of the Picture Library in the arrays alPicRef and
asPicName:

PICTURE LIBRARY LIST(alPicRef;asPicName)

2. The following example tests whether or not the Picture Library is empty:

PICTURE LIBRARY LIST(alPicRef;asPicName)

If (Size of array(alPicRef)=0)
ALERT("The Picture Library is empty.")
Else
ALERT("The Picture Library contains "+String(Size of array(alPicRef))+" pictures.")
End if

1114 4D Language Reference

3. The following example exports the Picture Library to a document on disk:

PICTURE LIBRARY LIST($alPicRef;$asPicName)

$vlNbPictures:=Size of array($alPicRef)
If ($vlNbPictures>0)
SET CHANNEL(12;"")
If (OK=1)
$vsTag:="4DV6PICTURELIBRARYEXPORT"
SEND VARIABLE($vsTag)
SEND VARIABLE($vlNbPictures)
gError:=0
For($vlPicture;1;$vlNbPictures)
$vlPicRef:=$alPicRef{$vlPicture}
$vsPicName:=$asPicName{$vlPicture}
GET PICTURE FROM LIBRARY($alPicRef{$vlPicture};$vgPicture)
If (OK=1)
SEND VARIABLE($vlPicRef)
SEND VARIABLE($vsPicName)
SEND VARIABLE($vgPicture)
Else
$vlPicture:=$vlNbPictures+1
gError:=-108
End if
End for
SET CHANNEL(11)
If (gError#0)
ALERT("The Picture Library could not be exported, retry with more memory.")
DELETE DOCUMENT (Document)
End if
End if
Else
ALERT("The Picture Library is empty.")
End if

See Also
GET PICTURE FROM LIBRARY, REMOVE PICTURE FROM LIBRARY, SET PICTURE TO LIBRARY.

4D Language Reference 1115

PICTURE PROPERTIES Pictures

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

PICTURE PROPERTIES (picture; width; height{; hOffset{; vOffset{; mode}}})

Parameter Type Description

picture Picture → Picture for which to get information
width Number ← Width of the picture expressed in pixels
height Number ← Height of the picture expressed in pixels
hOffset Number ← Horizontal offset when displayed on background
vOffset Number ← Vertical offset when displayed on background
mode Number ← Transfer mode when displayed on background

Description
The PICTURE PROPERTIES command returns information about the picture you pass in picture.

The parameters width and height return the width and height of the picture.

The parameters hOffset, vOffset, and mode return the horizontal and vertical positions and the
transfer mode of the picture when displayed on the background in a form (“On Background”).

See Also
Picture size.

1116 4D Language Reference

Picture size Pictures

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Picture size (picture) → Number

Parameter Type Description

picture Picture → Picture for which to return the size in bytes

Function result Number ← Size in bytes of the picture

Description
This function returns the size of picture in bytes.

See Also
PICTURE PROPERTIES.

4D Language Reference 1117

PICTURE TO BLOB Pictures

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

PICTURE TO BLOB (picture; pictureBlob; codec)

Parameter Type Description

picture Picture → Picture field or variable
pictureBlob BLOB ← BLOB to receive the converted picture
codec String → Picture Codec ID

Description
The PICTURE TO BLOB command converts a picture stored in a 4D variable or field to another
format and places the resulting picture in a BLOB.

A picture 4D field or variable is passed in the picture parameter. In the pictureBlob parameter is
passed a BLOB variable or field which should contain the converted picture.

Pass in the codec parameter a string setting the conversion format.

A Codec can be an extension (for example, “.gif”), a Mime type (for example “image/jpeg”) or
a 4-character QuickTime code (for example “PNTG”). You can get a list of available Codecs via
the PICTURE CODEC LIST command.

Once the command has been executed, the pictureBlob contains the picture in the specified
format.

If the conversion was successful, the system variable OK is set to 1. If the conversion has failed
(QuickTime is not installed or the convertor is not available), OK is set to 0 and the generated
BLOB is empty (0 byte).

See Also
BLOB TO PICTURE, PICTURE CODEC LIST, PICTURE TO GIF, PICTURE TYPE LIST, WRITE PICTURE
FILE.

1118 4D Language Reference

PICTURE TO GIF Pictures

version 6.7 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

PICTURE TO GIF (pict; blobGIF)

Parameter Type Description

pict Picture → Picture field or picture variable
blobGIF BLOB ← BLOB containing the GIF picture

Description
The PICTURE TO GIF command allows you to convert a PICT picture stored in a variable or in a
4D field into a GIF picture.

You pass a picture variable or a picture field in pict and a BLOB variable or a BLOB field in
blobGIF. After executing the command, blobGIF contains the image in GIF format.

Note: The GIF picture format cannot contain more than 256 colors. If the original PICT
picture contains more colors, some may be lost. The command reduces the number of colors
according to the system palette. The GIF generated is of type 87a (opaque) and normal (not
interlaced).

You can then save the picture located in blobGIF in a file using the BLOB TO DOCUMENT
command or you can even publish it on the Web.

If the conversion was successful, the OK system variable is set to 1. Otherwise, it will be equal
to 0.

4D Language Reference 1119

Example
Let us assume that you want to generate a GIF picture on the fly by displaying a connection
counter. In the database’s picture library, place all the numbers as pictures:

In the On Web Connection Database Method, you write the following code:

If (Web Context)
...
Else
C_BLOB ($blob)
Case of
...
: ($1="/4dcgi/counter") `Generating a GIF counter
`When 4D detects this URL while sending the static page
$blob:=gifcounter (<>nbHits) `Calculates the GIF picture
`The <>nbHits variable contains the number of connections
SEND HTML BLOB ($blob;"image/gif")
`Insert the picture and send it to the browser
...
End case
End if

Here is the gifcounter method:

C_LONGINT($1)
C_PICTURE($img)
C_BLOB($0)
If ($1=0)
$ndigits:=1
Else
$ndigits:=1+Length(String($1))
End if

1120 4D Language Reference

 If ($ndigits<5)
$ndigits:=5
End if

$div:=10^($ndigits-1)
For ($i;1;$ndigits)
$ref:=Int($1/$div)%10
GET PICTURE FROM LIBRARY($ref+1000;picture)
$img:=$img+picture
$div:=$div/10
End for

PICTURE TO GIF($img;$0)

When sending a page to the Web browser, 4D displays a GIF picture that looks like the
following picture:

4D Language Reference 1121

PICTURE TYPE LIST Pictures

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

PICTURE TYPE LIST (formatArray{; nameArray})

Parameter Type Description

formatArray String Array (4) ← QuickTime codes for the available import/export
formats
nameArray String Array ← Format names

Compatibility Note: This command has been kept for compatibility reasons. However, it
requires QuickTime and does not provide access to formats managed natively by 4D starting
with version 11. It is thus of limited interest and can be replaced favorably by the PICTURE
CODEC LIST command.

Description
The PICTURE TYPE LIST command fills the formatArray array with picture import/export
QuickTime codes available on the machine where it is executed.

The optional parameter nameArray array gets each picture format name. Format names are
easier to understand than their codes.

QuickTime (version 4 minimum) needs to be installed on the machine where the command is
executed. Otherwise, formatArray contains the PICT format only.

PICTURE TYPE LIST can be used to check that some picture formats are available for a given
database. This command is useful when some specific formats, not installed by default, are
necessary (a QuickTime 4 feature).
The information gathered in the nameArray array allow to build and to display a pop up menu
containing the available picture export formats.

QuickTime 4 Conversion Codes

Below is the standard conversion code list provided by QuickTime 4. Each code is composed of
4 characters. Please note that as QuickTime 4 allows adding customized conversion routines,
not all machines offer the same codes.

1122 4D Language Reference

QuickTime 4 Codes Names
PICT QuickDraw PICT
PICS PICS
GIFf GIF
PNGf PNG
TIFF TIFF
8BPS Photoshop (2.5 & 3.0)
SGI Silicon Graphics
BMPf BMP
JPEG JPEG
JPEG JFIF
PNTG MacPaint
TPIC TGA (Targa)
qdgx QuickDraw GX Picture (if QuickDraw GX is installed)
qtif QuickTime picture
FPix FlashPix

See Also
BLOB TO PICTURE, PICTURE CODEC LIST, PICTURE TO BLOB, READ PICTURE FILE, WRITE PICTURE
FILE.

4D Language Reference 1123

READ PICTURE FILE Pictures

version 11.2 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

READ PICTURE FILE (fileName; picture{; *})

Parameter Type Description

fileName String → Name or full pathname of the file to read,
or empty string
picture Picture ← Field or variable receiving picture
* * → If passed = accept any type of file

Description
The READ PICTURE FILE command allows you to open the picture saved in the fileName disk file
and to load it in the picture 4D field or variable.

You can pass in fileName the full pathname of the file to read, or a file name only. If you just
pass the file name, it should be located next to the database structure file. Under Windows,
the file extension must be indicated.
If an empty string ("") is passed in fileName, the standard Open file dialog box is displayed and
the user can select the file to be read, as well as the available formats.

You can obtain the list of available formats using the PICTURE CODEC LIST command.

You pass in picture the picture variable or field which will receive the picture read.

Note: The internal picture format is stored within the 4D variable or field. In the case of
custom formats using QuickTime, it is necessary to have QuickTime in order to read the
picture within 4D.

If you pass the optional * parameter, the command will accept any type of file. This means
that you can work with pictures without necessarily having the suitable codecs (see the
description of the BLOB TO PICTURE command).

See Also
BLOB TO PICTURE, PICTURE CODEC LIST, PICTURE TYPE LIST, Pictures, WRITE PICTURE FILE.

System Variables or Sets

If the command is executed successfully, the system variable Document contains the full
pathname to the open file and the system variable OK is set to 1. Otherwise, OK is set to 0.

1124 4D Language Reference

REMOVE PICTURE FROM LIBRARY Pictures

version 6.7 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

REMOVE PICTURE FROM LIBRARY (picRef | picName)

Parameter Type Description

picRef | picName Number | String → Reference number of Picture Library graphic or
Name of Picture Library graphic

Description
The REMOVE PICTURE FROM LIBRARY command removes from the Picture Library the picture
whose reference number is passed in picRef or whose name is passed in picName.

If there is no picture with that reference number or name, the command does nothing.

4D Server: REMOVE PICTURE FROM LIBRARY cannot be used from within a method executed on
the server machine (stored procedure or trigger). If you call REMOVE PICTURE FROM LIBRARY on
a server machine, nothing happens—the call is ignored.

Warning: Design objects (hierarchical list items, menu items, etc.) may refer to Picture Library
graphics. Use caution when deleting a Picture Library graphic programmatically.

Examples
1. The following example deletes the picture #4444 from the Picture Library.

REMOVE PICTURE FROM LIBRARY(4444)

2. The following example deletes from the Picture Library any pictures whose names begin
with a dollar sign ($):

PICTURE LIBRARY LIST($alPicRef;$asPicName)

For($vlPicture;1;Size of array($alPicRef))
If ($asPicName{$vlPicture}="$@")
REMOVE PICTURE FROM LIBRARY($alPicRef{$vlPicture})
End if
End for

See Also
GET PICTURE FROM LIBRARY, PICTURE LIBRARY LIST, SET PICTURE TO LIBRARY.

4D Language Reference 1125

SAVE PICTURE TO FILE Pictures

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SAVE PICTURE TO FILE (document; picture)

Parameter Type Description

document DocRef → Document reference number
picture Picture → Picture to be saved

Compatibility note: This command calls for obsolete mechanisms and is only kept for
compatibility reasons. It has been favorably replaced by the WRITE PICTURE FILE command.

Description
This command saves picture in a document that was created using the Create document
function.

Example
The following example creates a document and saves a picture in it:

vRef:=Create document("";"PICT")
If (OK=1)
SAVE PICTURE TO FILE(vRef;vPict)
CLOSE DOCUMENT(vRef)
End if

See Also
WRITE PICTURE FILE.

1126 4D Language Reference

SET PICTURE TO LIBRARY Pictures

version 6.0.2
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET PICTURE TO LIBRARY (picture; picRef; picName)

Parameter Type Description

picture Picture → New picture
picRef Number → Reference number of Picture Library graphic
picName String → New name of the picture

Description
The SET PICTURE TO LIBRARY command creates a new picture or replaces a picture in the
Picture Library.

Before the call, you pass:

• the picture reference number in picRef (range 1...32767 )
• the picture itself in picture.
• the name of the picture in picName (maximum length: 255 characters).

If there is an existing Picture Library graphic with the same reference number, the picture
contents are replaced and the picture is renamed according to the values passed in picture and
picName.

If there is no Picture Library graphic with the reference number passed in picRef, a new picture
is added to the Picture Library.

4D Server: SET PICTURE TO LIBRARY cannot be used from within a method executed on the
server machine (stored procedure or trigger). If you call SET PICTURE TO LIBRARY on a server
machine, nothing happens—the call is ignored.

Warning: Design objects (hierarchical list items, menu items, etc.) may refer to Picture Library
graphics. Use caution when modifying a Picture Library graphic programmatically.

Note: If you pass an empty picture in picture or a negative or null value in picRef, the
command does nothing.

4D Language Reference 1127

Examples
1. No matter what the current contents of the Picture Library, the following example adds a
new picture to the Picture Library by first looking for a unique picture reference number:

PICTURE LIBRARY LIST($alPicRef;$asPicNames)

Repeat
$vlPicRef:=1+Abs(Random)
Until (Find in array($alPicRef;$vlPicRef)<0)
SET PICTURE TO LIBRARY(vgPicture;$vlPicRef;"New Picture")

2. The following example imports into the Picture Library the pictures (stored in a document
on disk) created by the third example for the command PICTURE LIBRARY LIST:

SET CHANNEL(10;"")
If (OK=1)
RECEIVE VARIABLE($vsTag)
If ($vsTag="4DV6PICTURELIBRARYEXPORT")
RECEIVE VARIABLE($vlNbPictures)
If ($vlNbPictures>0)
For($vlPicture;1;$vlNbPictures)
RECEIVE VARIABLE($vlPicRef)
If (OK=1)
RECEIVE VARIABLE($vsPicName)
End if
If (OK=1)
RECEIVE VARIABLE ($vgPicture)
End if
If (OK=1)
SET PICTURE TO LIBRARY($vgPicture;$vlPicRef;$vsPicName)
Else
$vlPicture:=$vlNbPictures+1
ALERT("This file looks like being damaged.")
End if
End for
Else
ALERT("This file looks like being damaged.")
End if
Else

1128 4D Language Reference

 ALERT("The file “"+Document+"” is not a Picture Library export file.")
End if
SET CHANNEL(11)
End

See Also
GET PICTURE FROM LIBRARY, PICTURE LIBRARY LIST, REMOVE PICTURE FROM LIBRARY.

Error Handling
If there is not enough memory to add the picture to the Picture Library, an error -108 is
generated. Note that I/O errors may also be returned (i.e., the structure file is locked). You can
catch these errors using an error-handling method.

4D Language Reference 1129

TRANSFORM PICTURE Pictures

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

TRANSFORM PICTURE (picture; operator{; param1{; param2{; param3{; param4}}}})

Parameter Type Description

picture Picture → Source picture to be transformed
← Resulting picture after transformation
operator Longint → Type of transformation to be done
param1 Number → Transformation parameter
param2 Number → Transformation parameter
param3 Number → Transformation parameter
param4 Number → Transformation parameter

Description
The TRANSFORM PICTURE command can be used to apply a transformation of the operator
type to the picture passed in the picture parameter.

Note: This command extends the functionalities offered by conventional picture

transformation operators (+/, etc., see the Picture Operators section). These operators remain
entirely usable in 4D v11.

The source picture is modified directly after execution of the command. Note that except
for “Crop” and “Fade to grey scale,” the operations are not destructive and can be reversed
by carrying out the opposite operation or via the “Reset” operation. For example, a picture
reduced to 1% will regain its original size with no alteration if it is enlarged by a factor of
100 subsequently. Transformations do not modify the original picture type: for example, a
vectorial picture will remain vectorial after its transformation.

In operator, pass the number of the operation to be carried out and in param, the
parameter(s) needed for this operation (the number of parameters depends on the
operation). You can use one of the constants of the “Picture Transformation” theme in
operator. These operators and their parameters are described in the following table:
operator (value) param1 param2 param3 param4 Values
Reset (0) - - - -
Scale (1) Width Height - - Factors
Translate (2) X axis Y axis - - Pixels
Flip horizontally (3) - - - -
Flip vertically (4) - - - -
Crop (100) X Orig. Y Orig. Width Height Pixels
Fade to grey scale (101) - - - -

1130 4D Language Reference

• Reset: All matrix operations carried out on the picture (scale, flip, and so on) are undone.
• Scale: The picture is resized horizontally and vertically according to the values passed
respectively in param1 and param2. These values are factors: for example, to enlarge the
width by 50%, pass 1.5 in param1 and to reduce the height by 50%, pass 0.5 in param2.
• Translate: The picture is moved by param1 pixels horizontally and by param2 pixels
vertically. Pass a positive value to move to the right or towards the bottom and a negative
value to move to the left or towards the top.
• Flip horizontally and Flip vertically: The original picture is flipped. Any movement that was
carried out beforehand will not be taken into account.
• Crop: The picture is cropped starting from the point of the param1 and param2
coordinates (expressed in pixels). The width and height of the new picture is determined by
the param3 and param4 parameters. This transformation cannot be undone.
• Fade to grey scale: The picture is switched to gray scale (no parameter is required). This
transformation cannot be undone.

Example
Here is an example of cropping a picture (the picture is displayed in the form with the
“Truncated (non-centered)” format):

TRANSFORM PICTURE($vpGears;Crop;50;50;100;100)

See Also
COMBINE PICTURES, Picture Operators.

4D Language Reference 1131

WRITE PICTURE FILE Pictures

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

WRITE PICTURE FILE (fileName; picture{; codec})

Parameter Type Description

fileName Alpha → Name or full pathname of the file to write,
or empty string
picture Picture → Picture field or variable to write
codec String → Picture Codec ID

Description
The WRITE PICTURE FILE command allows you to save the picture passed in the picture
parameter in the defined codec to disk.

You can pass in fileName the full pathname to the file to create, or a file name only. If you just
pass the file name, the file will be located next to the database structure file. Under Windows,
the file extension has to be indicated.
If an empty string ("") is passed in fileName, the standard Save file dialog box is displayed and
the user can indicate the name, location and format of the file to create.

You will pass in picture the picture variable or field which contains the picture to save on disk.

The optional codec parameter can be used to define the format in which the picture will be
saved. A Codec can be an extension (for example, “.gif”), a Mime type (for example
“image/jpeg”) or a 4-character QuickTime code (for example “PNTG”). You can get a list of
available Codecs via the PICTURE CODEC LIST command.
If the codec parameter is omitted, the picture file is created with a PICT format.

If the command is executed successfully, the system variable Document contains the full
pathname to the file created and the system variable OK is set to 1. Otherwise, OK is set to 0.

See Also
PICTURE TO BLOB, PICTURE TYPE LIST, Pictures, READ PICTURE FILE.

1132 4D Language Reference

34
______________________
Printing

4D Language Reference 1133

1134 4D Language Reference
ACCUMULATE Printing

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

ACCUMULATE (data{; data2; ...; dataN})

Parameter Type Description

data Field or variable → Numeric field or variable on which to accumulate

Description
ACCUMULATE specifies the fields or variables to be accumulated during a form report
performed using PRINT SELECTION.

You must execute BREAK LEVEL and ACCUMULATE before every report for which you want to do
break processing. These commands activate break processing for a report. See the explanation
for the Subtotal command.

Use ACCUMULATE when you want to include subtotals for numeric fields or variables in a form
report. ACCUMULATE tells 4D to store subtotals for each of the Data arguments. The subtotals
are accumulated for each break level specified with the BREAK LEVEL command.

Execute ACCUMULATE before printing the report with PRINT SELECTION.

Use the Subtotal function in the form method or an object method to return the subtotal of
one of the data arguments.

Example
See the example for the BREAK LEVEL command.

See Also
BREAK LEVEL, ORDER BY, PRINT SELECTION, Subtotal.

4D Language Reference 1135

BREAK LEVEL Printing

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

BREAK LEVEL (level{; pageBreak})

Parameter Type Description

level Number → Number of break levels
pageBreak Number → Break level for which to do a page break

Description
BREAK LEVEL specifies the number of break levels in a report performed using PRINT SELECTION.

You must execute BREAK LEVEL and ACCUMULATE before every report for which you want to do
break processing. These commands activate break processing for a report. See the explanation
for the Subtotal command.

The level parameter indicates the deepest level for which you want to perform break
processing. You must have sorted the records with at least that many levels. If you have sorted
more levels, those levels will be printed as sorted, but will not be processed for breaks.

Each break level that is generated will print the corresponding Break areas and Header areas in
the form. There should be at least as many Break areas in the form as the number you pass in
level. If there are more Break areas, they will be ignored and will not be printed.

The second, optional, argument, pageBreak, is used to cause page breaks during printing.

Example
The following example prints a report with two break levels. The selection is sorted on four
levels, but the BREAK LEVEL command specifies to break on only two levels. One field is
accumulated with the ACCUMULATE command:

ORDER BY ([Emp]Dept;>;[Emp]Title;>;[Emp]Last;>;[Emp]First;>) ` Sort on four levels

BREAK LEVEL (2) ` Turn on break processing to 2 levels (Dept and Title)
ACCUMULATE ([Emp]Salary) ` Accumulate the salaries
OUTPUT FORM ([Emp];"Dept salary") ` Select the report form
PRINT SELECTION([Emp]) ` Print the report

See Also
ACCUMULATE, ORDER BY, PRINT SELECTION, Subtotal.

1136 4D Language Reference

CLOSE PRINTING JOB Printing

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

CLOSE PRINTING JOB

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
The CLOSE PRINTING JOB command can be used to close the print job previously opened by
the OPEN PRINTING JOB command and to send any printing document that has been
assembled to the current printer.

Once this command is executed, the printer again becomes available for other print jobs.

See Also
OPEN PRINTING JOB.

4D Language Reference 1137

Get current printer Printing

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get current printer → String

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result String ← Name of the current printer

Description

Note: This command does not work under Mac OS 9. Under Windows, it requires at least
Windows 2000.

The Get current printer command returns the name of the current printer defined in the 4D
application. By default, on start-up of 4D, the current printer is the printer defined in the
system.

If the current printer is managed using a print server (spooler), the complete access path
(under Windows) or the name of the spooler (under Mac OS) is returned.

To obtain the list of available printers as well as additional information, use the PRINTERS
LIST command. To modify the current printer, use the SET CURRENT PRINTER command.

See Also
PRINTERS LIST, SET CURRENT PRINTER.

System Variables or Sets

If no printer is installed, the system variable OK is set to 0. Otherwise, it is set to 1.

1138 4D Language Reference

Get print marker Printing

version 2003 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get print marker (markNum) → Number

Parameter Type Description

markNum Number → Marker number

Function result Number ← Position of the marker

Description
The Get print marker command enables you to get the current position of a marker during
printing.

This command can be used in two contexts:

• During the On Header form event, in the context of PRINT SELECTION and PRINT RECORD
commands.
• During the On Printing Detail form event, in the context of the Print form command.

The coordinates are returned in pixels (1 pixel = 1/72 inch).

Pass one of the constants of the Form area theme in the markNum parameter:
Constant Type Value
Form Header Longint 200
Form Header1...10 Longint 201...210
Form Detail Longint 0
Form Break0...9 Longint 300...309
Form Footer Longint 100

Example
Refer to the example of the SET PRINT MARKER command.

See Also
MOVE OBJECT, SET PRINT MARKER.

4D Language Reference 1139

GET PRINT OPTION Printing

version 2004.3 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET PRINT OPTION (option; value1{; value2})

Parameter Type Description

option Longint → Option number
value1 Longint | String ← Value 1 of the option
value2 Longint ← Value 2 of the option

Description
The GET PRINT OPTION command returns the current value(s) of a print option.

The option parameter enables you to specify the option to get. You can either pass a value
or one of the following predefined constants, located in the “Print options” theme:
Constant Type Value
Paper option Longint 1
Orientation option Longint 2
Scale option Longint 3
Number of copies option Longint 4
Paper source option Longint 5
Color option Longint 8
Destination option Longint 9
Double sided option Longint 11
Spooler document name option Longint 12
Mac spool file format option Longint 13
Hide printing progress option Longint 14

The command returns, in the value1 and (optionally) value2 parameters, the current
value(s) of the specified option. For more information on options and possible values, refer
to the description of the SET PRINT OPTION command. Note the following specific features
of the GET PRINT OPTION command:
• option = 1 (paper option): returns the name of the current paper in value1 if value2 is
omitted. If value2 is passed, the command returns, respectively, the width and height of the
paper in value1 and value2. Use the PRINT OPTION VALUES command to get the name,
height and width of all the paper formats offered by the printer.
• option = 2 (orientation option): returns 1 (Portrait) or 2 (Landscape). If a different
orientation option is used, value1 is set to 0.
• option = 5 (paper source option): in value1, returns the index (in the array of trays
returned by the PRINT OPTION VALUES command) of the paper tray used (value2 must be
omitted).
Note: This option can only be used under Windows.

1140 4D Language Reference

• option = 8 (color option): returns a code in value1 specifying the mode for handling color:
1=Black and white (monochrome), 2=Color.
Note: This option can only be used under Windows.
• option = 9 (destination option): if the current value is not in the predefined list, value1
contains -1 and the system variable OK is set to 1. If an error occurs, value1 and the system
variable OK are set to 0. If value1 contains a predefined value different from 1 or 5, value2
contains the access path of the printed file.
• option = 11 (double sided option): returns 0 (Standard or Single-sided, default value) or 1
(Double-sided) in value1. If value1 equals 1, value2 may return one of the following values:
0=Left binding (default), 1=Top binding.
Note: This option can only be used under Windows.
• option = 12 (spooler document name option): returns the name of the current print
document in value1, if it has been defined previously. Otherwise, an empty string is
returned.

Note: The GET PRINT OPTION command only operates with PostScript printers.

See Also
PRINT OPTION VALUES, SET PRINT OPTION.

System Variables or Sets

The system variable OK is set to 1 if the command has been executed correctly; otherwise,
it is set to 0.

Constants
Print options theme.

4D Language Reference 1141

GET PRINTABLE AREA Printing

version 6.8.1
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET PRINTABLE AREA (height{; width})

Parameter Type Description

height Number ← Height of printable area
width Number ← Width of printable area

Description
The GET PRINTABLE AREA command returns the size, in pixels, of the height and width
parameters of the printable area. This size depends on the current printing parameters, the
paper orientation, etc.

The sizes returned do not vary from one page to another (after a page break, for instance).

Associated with the Get printed height command, this command is useful for knowing the
number of pixels available for printing or for centering an object on the page.

Note: For more information regarding Printing management and terminology in 4D, refer to
the GET PRINTABLE MARGIN command description.

To know the total size of the page, you can:

• either add the margins supplied by the GET PRINTABLE MARGIN command to the values
returned by this command.
• or use the following syntax:
SET PRINTABLE MARGIN(0;0;0;0) ` Set the paper margin
GET PRINTABLE AREA(hPaper;wPaper) ` Paper size

See Also
GET PRINTABLE MARGIN, Print form.

1142 4D Language Reference

GET PRINTABLE MARGIN Printing

version 6.8.1
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET PRINTABLE MARGIN (left; top; right; bottom)

Parameter Type Description

left Number ← Left margin
top Number ← Top margin
right Number ← Right margin
bottom Number ← Bottom margin

Description
The GET PRINTABLE MARGIN command returns the current values of the different margins
defined using the Print form command.

The values are returned in pixels with respect to the paper edges.

It is possible to obtain the paper size as well as to calculate the printable area using the GET
PRINTABLE AREA function.

About Printable Margin Management

By default, the printing calculation in 4D is based on “printable margins”. The advantage of
this system is that the forms adapt themselves automatically to the new printers (since they
are positioned in the printable area). On the other hand, in the case of pre-printed forms, it
was not possible to position the elements to be printed precisely because changing the printer
could modify the printable margins.

Beginning with 4D version 6.8.1, it is possible to base the form printing carried out using the
Print form, PRINT RECORD and PRINT SELECTION commands on a fixed margin which is
identical on each printer: the paper margins, i.e. the physical limits of the sheet. To do this,
simply use the GET PRINTABLE MARGIN, SET PRINTABLE MARGIN and GET PRINTABLE AREA
commands.

About Printing Terminology

• Paper margin: the paper margin corresponds to the physical limits of the sheet.
• Printer margin: the printer margin is the margin beyond which the printer is incapable of
printing (for material reasons: print rollers, printer head end-of-travel...). It varies from one
printer to another and from one format to another.

4D Language Reference 1143

• Dead margin: this referes to the area located between the paper margin and the printer
margin.

See Also
GET PRINTABLE AREA, Print form, SET PRINTABLE MARGIN.

1144 4D Language Reference

Get printed height Printing

version 6.8.1
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get printed height → Number

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Number ← Position of the marker

Description
The Get printed height command returns the overall height (in pixels) of the section printed
using the Print form command.

The value returned will be included between 0 (the top edge of the page) and the overall
height returned by the GET PRINTABLE AREA command (the maximum size of the printable
area).

If you print a new section using the Print form command, the height of the new section is
added to this value. If the printable area available is insufficient to contain this section, a new
page is generated and the value returned is 0.

The right and left printable margins, unlike the top and bottom margins (which may be
defined using the SET PRINTABLE MARGIN command), do not influence the value returned.

Note: For more information regarding Printing management and terminology in 4D, refer to
the GET PRINTABLE MARGIN command description.

See Also
GET PRINTABLE AREA, Print form, SET PRINTABLE MARGIN.

4D Language Reference 1145

Level Printing

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Level → Number

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Number ← Current break or header level

Description
Level is used to determine the current header or break level. It returns the level number during
the On Header and On Printing Break events.

Level 0 is the last level to be printed and is appropriate for printing a grand total. Level returns
1 when 4D prints a break on the first sorted field, 2 when 4D prints a break on the second
sorted field, and so on.

Example
This example is a template for a form method. It shows each of the possible events that can
occur while a summary report uses a form as an output form. Level is called when a header or a
break is printed:
` Method of a form being used as output form for a summary report
$vpFormTable:=Current form table
Case of
` ...
: (Form event=On Header)
` A header area is about to be printed
Case of
: (Before selection($vpFormTable->))
` Code for the first break header goes here
: (Level = 1)
` Code for a break header level 1 goes here
: (Level = 2)
` Code for a break header level 2 goes here
` ...
End case

1146 4D Language Reference

 : (Form event=On Printing Details)
` A record is about to be printed
` Code for each record goes here
: (Form event=On Printing Break)
` A break area is about to be printed
Case of
: (Level = 0)
` Code for a break level 0 goes here
: (Level = 1)
` Code for a break level 1 goes here
` ...
End case
: (Form event=On Printing Footer)
If(End selection($vpFormTable->))
` Code for the last footer goes here
Else
` Code for a footer goes here
End if
End case

See Also
ACCUMULATE, BREAK LEVEL, Form event, PRINT SELECTION.

4D Language Reference 1147

OPEN PRINTING JOB Printing

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

OPEN PRINTING JOB

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
The OPEN PRINTING JOB command opens a print job and stacks all the subsequent printing
orders there until the CLOSE PRINTING JOB command is called. This command lets you
control the print jobs and, more particularly, ensure that no other unexpected print job
can be inserted into a printing sequence.

The OPEN PRINTING JOB command can be used with all the 4D printing commands, the
quick report commands, and the printing commands of the 4D Write and 4D View plug-
ins. On the other hand, this command is not compatible with the 4D Chart and 4D Draw
plug-ins, as well as most third-party plug-ins.

When a print job is opened with this command, the printer is placed in “busy” mode until
the printing is actually launched. If a noncompatible plug-in launches a print job in this
context, the “printer busy” error is returned.

You must call the CLOSE PRINTING JOB command to terminate the print job and send the
print document to the printer. If you omit this command, the print document will remain
in the stack and the printer will not be available until you quit the 4D application.

The print job is local to the process. It is possible to open as many print jobs as there are
processes. Naturally, in this case it is necessary to have several printers since each printer
will be busy until the end of the job.

OPEN PRINTING JOB uses the current print settings (default settings or set using the PAGE
SETUP and/or SET PRINT OPTION commands). The commands that modify the print settings
must be called before OPEN PRINTING JOB. Otherwise, an error is generated.

See Also
CLOSE PRINTING JOB.

1148 4D Language Reference

PAGE BREAK Printing

version 2003 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

PAGE BREAK {(* | >)}

Parameter Type Description

* | > → * Cancel printing job started with Print form, or
> Force one printing job

Description
PAGE BREAK triggers the printing of the data that has been sent to the printer and ejects the
page. PAGE BREAK is used with Print form (in the context of the On Printing Detail form event)
to force page breaks and to print the last page created in memory. Do not use PAGE BREAK with
the PRINT SELECTION command. Instead, use Subtotal or BREAK LEVEL with the optional
parameter to generate page breaks.

The * and > parameters are both optional.

The * parameter allows you to cancel a print job started with the Print form command.
Executing this command immediately stops the print job in progress.

Note: Under Windows, this mechanism can be disrupted by the spooling properties of the
print server. If the printer is configured to start printing immediately, cancelling will not be
effective. For the PAGE BREAK(*) command to operate correctly, it is preferable to choose the
"Start printing after last page is spooled" property for the printer.

The > parameter modifies the way in which the PAGE BREAK command behaves. This syntax
has two effects:
• It holds the print job open until the PAGE BREAK command is executed again without a
parameter.
• It gives priority to the print job. No other printing can take place until the print job is
finished.
The second option is particularly useful when used with a spooled print job. The > parameter
guarantees that the print job will be spooled to one file. This will reduce printing time.

Note: When screen printing, if the user clicks on Cancel in the print preview dialog box, the
PAGE BREAK command sets the systemvariable OK to 0.

4D Language Reference 1149

Examples
1. See example for the Print form command.

2. Refer to the example of the SET PRINT MARKER command.

See Also
CANCEL, Print form.

1150 4D Language Reference

PAGE SETUP Printing

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

PAGE SETUP ({aTable; }form)

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table owning form, or
Default table, if omitted
form String → Form to use for page setup

Description
PAGE SETUP sets the page setup for the printer to that stored with form. The page setup is
stored with the form when the form is saved in the Design environment.

In the following three cases, the printing dialog boxes are not displayed and the printing is
performed with the default print settings. :
• Calling PRINT SELECTION to which you pass the optional * parameter
• Calling PRINT RECORD to which you pass the optional * parameter
• Issuing a series of calls to PRINT FORM not preceeded by a call to PRINT SETTINGS.

Calling PAGE SETUP enables you, in this case, to skip the printing dialog boxes AND to use
print settings other than the default ones.

Example
Several (empty) forms are created for a table named [Design Stuff]. The form “PS100” is
assigned a page setup with a scaling of 100%, the form “PS90” is assigned a page setup with a
scaling of 90%, and so on. The following project method enables you to print the selection of
a table using various scalings without having to specify the scaling in the printing dialog
boxes (which are not displayed), each time:

` AUTOMATIC SCALED PRINTING project method

` AUTOMATIC SCALED PRINTING ( Pointer ; String {; Long } )
` AUTOMATIC SCALED PRINTING ( ->[Table]; "Output form" {; Scaling } )
If (Count parameters>=3)
PAGE SETUP([Design Stuff];"PS"+String($3))
If (Count parameters>=2)
OUTPUT FORM($1->;$2)
End if
End if

4D Language Reference 1151

 If (Count parameters>=1)
PRINT SELECTION($1->;*)
Else
PRINT SELECTION(*)
End if

Once this project method is written, you call it in this way:

` Look for current invoices

QUERY ([Invoices];[Invoices]Paid=False)
` Print Summary Report in 90% reduction
AUTOMATIC SCALED PRINTING (->[Invoices];"Summary Report";90)
` Print Detailed Report in 50% reduction
AUTOMATIC SCALED PRINTING (->[Invoices];"Detailed Report";50)

See Also
Print form, PRINT RECORD, PRINT SELECTION, SET PRINT OPTION.

1152 4D Language Reference

Print form Printing

version 2004.5 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Print form ({aTable; }form{; area1{; area2}}){ → Number }

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table owning the form, or
Default table, if omitted
form String → Form to print
area1 Number → Print marker, or Beginning area (if area2 is specified)
area2 Number → Ending area (if area1 specified)

Function result Number ← Height of printed section

Description
Print form simply prints form with the current values of fields and variables of aTable. It is
usually used to print very complex reports that require complete control over the printing
process. Print form does not do any record processing, break processing or page breaks. These
operations are your responsibility. Print form prints fields and variables in a fixed size frame
only.

Since Print form does not issue a page break after printing the form, it is easy to combine
different forms on the same page. Thus, Print form is perfect for complex printing tasks that
involve different tables and different forms. To force a page break between forms, use the PAGE
BREAK command. In order to carry printing over to the next page for a form whose height is
greater than the available space, call the CANCEL command before the PAGE BREAK command.

Three different syntaxes may be used:

• Detail area printing

Syntax:
height:=Print form (myTable;myForm)

In this case, Print form only prints the Detail area (the area between the Header line and the
Detail line) of the form.

4D Language Reference 1153

• Form area printing
Syntax:
height:=Print form (myTable;myForm;marker)

In this case, the command will print the section designated by the marker. Pass one of the
constants of the Form area theme in the marker parameter:
Constant Type Value
Form Header Longint 200
Form Header1...10 Longint 201...210
Form Detail Longint 0
Form Break0...9 Longint 300...309
Form Footer Longint 100

• Section printing
Syntax:
height:=Print form (myTable;myForm;areaStart;areaEnd)

In this case, the command will print the section included between the areaStart and areaEnd
parameters. The values entered must be expressed in pixels.

The value returned by Print form indicates the height of the printable area. This value will be
automatically taken into account by the Get printed height command.

The printer dialog boxes do not appear when you use Print form. The report does not use the
print settings that were assigned to the form in the Design environment. There are two ways
to specify the print settings before issuing a series of calls to Print form:
• Call PRINT SETTINGS. In this case, you let the user choose the settings.
• Call PAGE SETUP. In this case, print settings are specified programmatically.

Print form builds each printed page in memory. Each page is printed when the page in memory
is full or when you call PAGE BREAK. To ensure the printing of the last page after any use of
Print form, you must conclude with the PAGE BREAK command. Otherwise, if the last page is
not full, it stays in memory and is not printed.

Starting with version 2004.5 of 4D, this command prints external areas and objects (for
example, 4D Write or 4D View areas). The area is reset for each execution of the command.

Warning: Subforms are not printed with Print form. To print only one form with such objects,
use PRINT RECORD instead.

1154 4D Language Reference

Print form generates only one On Printing Detail event for the form method.

4D Server: This command can be executed on 4D Server within the framework of a stored
procedure. In this context:
• Make sure that no dialog box appears on the server machine (except for a specific
requirement).
• In the case of a problem concerning the printer (out of paper, printer disconnected, etc.), no
error message is generated.

Examples
1. The following example performs as a PRINT SELECTION command would. However, the
report uses one of two different forms, depending on whether the record is for a check or a
deposit:

QUERY([Register]) ` Select the records

If (OK=1)
ORDER BY([Register]) ` Sort the records
If (OK=1)
PRINT SETTINGS ` Display Printing dialog boxes
If (OK=1)
For ($vlRecord; 1; Records in selection([Register]))
If ([Register]Type = "Check")
Print form ([Register]; "Check Out") ` Use one form for checks
Else
Print form ([Register]; "Deposit Out") ` Use another form for deposits
End if
NEXT RECORD([Register])
End for
PAGE BREAK ` Make sure the last page is printed
End if
End if
End if

2. Refer to the example of the SET PRINT MARKER command.

See Also
CANCEL, PAGE BREAK, PAGE SETUP, PRINT SETTINGS.

4D Language Reference 1155

PRINT LABEL Printing

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

PRINT LABEL ({aTable}{; document{; * | >}})

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table to print, or
Default table, if omitted
document String → Name of disk label document
* | > → * to suppress the printing dialog boxes, or
> to not reinitialize print settings

Description
PRINT LABEL enables you to print labels with the data from the selection of aTable.

If do not specify the document parameter, PRINT LABEL prints the current selection of aTable as
labels, using the current output form. You cannot use this command to print subforms. For
details about creating forms for labels, refer to the 4D Design Reference manual.

If you specify the document parameter, PRINT LABEL enables you to access the Label Wizard
(shown below) or to print an existing Label document stored on disk. See the following
discussion.

1156 4D Language Reference

By default, PRINT LABEL displays the printer dialog boxes before printing. If the user cancels
either of the printer dialog boxes, the command is canceled and the labels are not printed.
You can suppress these dialog boxes by using either the optional asterisk (*) parameter or the
optional “greater than” (>) parameter:
• The * parameter causes a print job using the current print parameters (default parameters or
those defined by the PAGE SETUP and/or SET PRINT OPTION commands).
• Furthermore, the > parameter causes a print job without reinitializing the current print
parameters. This setting is useful for executing several successive calls to PRINT LABEL (ex.
inside a loop) while maintaining previously set customized print parameters. For an example
of use of this parameter, refer to the PRINT RECORD command description.
Note that this parameter has no effect if the Label Wizard is involved.

If the Label Wizard is not involved, the OK variable is set to 1 if all labels are printed;
otherwise, it is set to 0 (zero) (i.e., if user clicked Cancel in the printing dialog boxes).

If you specify the document parameter, the labels are printed with the label setup defined in
document. If document is an empty string (""), PRINT LABEL will present an Open File dialog
box so the user can specify the file to use for the label setup. If document is the name of a
document that does not exist (for example, pass char(1) in document), the Label Wizard is
displayed and the user can define the label setup.

Note: If the table has been declared “invisible” in Design mode, the Label Wizard will not be
displayed.

4D Server: This command can be executed on 4D Server within the framework of a stored
procedure. In this context:
• Make sure that no dialog box appears on the server machine (except for a specific
requirement). To do this, it is necessary to call the command with the * or > parameter.
• The syntax which makes the label editor appear does not work with 4D Server; in this case,
the system variable OK is set to 0.
• In the case of a problem concerning the printer (out of paper, printer disconnected, etc.), no
error message is generated.

Examples
1. The following example prints labels using the output form of a table. The example uses two
methods. The first is a project method that sets the correct output form and then prints labels:

ALL RECORDS([Addresses]) ` Select all records

OUTPUT FORM ([Addresses]; "Label Out") ` Select the output form
PRINT LABEL([Addresses]) ` Print the labels
OUTPUT FORM ([Addresses];"Output") ` Restore default output form

4D Language Reference 1157

The second method is the form method for the form "Label Out". The form contains one
variable named vLabel, which is used to hold the concatenated fields. If the second address
field (Addr2) is blank, it is removed by the method. Note that this task is performed
automatically with the Label Wizard. The form method creates the label for each record:

` [Addresses]; "Label Out" form method

Case of
: (Form event=On load)
vLabel:=[Addresses]Name1+" "+[Addresses]Name2+Char(13)+[Addresses]Addr1+
Char(13)
If ([Addresses]Addr2 # "")
vLabel:=vLabel +[Addresses]Addr2+Char(13)
End if
vLabel:=vLabel+[Addresses]City+", "+[Addresses]State+" "+[Addresses]ZipCode
End case

2. The following example lets the user query the [People] table, and then automatically prints
the labels “My Labels”:

QUERY ([People])
If (OK=1)
PRINT LABEL ([People];"My Labels";*)
End if

3. The following example lets the user query the [People] table, and then lets the user choose
the labels to be printed:

QUERY ([People])
If (OK=1)
PRINT LABEL ([People];"")
End if

4. The following example lets the user query the [People] table, and then displays the Label
Wizard so the user can design, save, load and print any labels:

QUERY ([People])
If (OK=1)
PRINT LABEL ([People];Char(1))
End if

See Also
PRINT SELECTION, QR REPORT.

1158 4D Language Reference

PRINT OPTION VALUES Printing

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

PRINT OPTION VALUES (option; namesArray{; info1Array{; info2Array}})

Parameter Type Description

option Longint → Option number
namesArray Text Array ← Names of values
info1Array Longint Array ← Values (1) of the option
info2Array Longint Array ← Values (2) of the option

Description
In namesArray, the PRINT OPTION VALUES command returns a list of value names available
for the print option defined. Optionally, you can retrieve information for each value in
info1Array and info2Array.

The option parameter allows you to specify the option to get. You must pass one of the
following constants of the “Print options” theme (options able to return lists of value
names):
Constant Type Value
Paper option Longint 1
Paper source option Longint 5

After command execution, the namesArray array as well as, where applicable, the info1Array
and info2Array arrays will be filled in by the command with the names and information of
the available values.

If you pass value 1 (paper option) in the option parameter, the command will return the
following information:
• in namesArray, the names of the available paper formats;
• in info1Array, the heights of each paper format;
• in info2Array, the widths of each paper format.

Note: In order to obtain this information, the print driver must have access to a valid PPD
(PostScript Printer Description) file for the printer.

In order to apply a specific paper format using the SET PRINT OPTION command, you can
either pass one of the values of namesArray, the corresponding values of info1Array and
info2Array.

4D Language Reference 1159

If you pass value 5 (paper source option) in the option parameter, the command returns the
names of the different trays available in namesArray, and their internal Windows ID
numbers in info1Array (info2Array remains empty).
The order of the values in the arrays is defined by the print driver. To indicate a tray using
the SET PRINT OPTION command, you must pass the index, as found in the namesArray or
info1Array arrays, of the element desired.

Note: This option can only be used under Windows.

For more information on the different print options, refer to the description of the SET
PRINT OPTION and GET PRINT OPTION commands.

All the information returned by these commands is supplied by the operating system. Refer
to the documentation of your system for more details about specific options.

Note: The PRINT OPTION VALUES command only operates with PostScript printers.

See Also
GET PRINT OPTION, SET PRINT OPTION.

Constants
Print options theme.

1160 4D Language Reference

PRINT RECORD Printing

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

PRINT RECORD ({aTable}{; }{* | >})

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table for which to print the current record or
Default table if omitted
* | > *|> → * to suppress the printer dialog boxes, or
> to not reinitialize print settings

Description
PRINT RECORD prints the current record of aTable, without modifying the current selection.
The current output form is used for printing. If there is no current record for aTable, PRINT
RECORD does nothing.

You can print subforms with the PRINT RECORD command. This is not possible with Print form.

Note: If there are modifications to the record that have not been saved, this command prints
the modified field values, not the field values located on disk.

By default, PRINT RECORD displays the printer dialog boxes before printing. If the user cancels
either of the printer dialog boxes, the command is canceled and the record is not printed.
You can suppress these dialog boxes by using either the optional asterisk (*) parameter or the
optional “greater than” (>) parameter:
• The * parameter causes a print job using the current print parameters (default parameters or
those defined by the PAGE SETUP and/or SET PRINT OPTION commands).
• Furthermore, the > parameter causes a print job without reinitializing the current print
parameters. This setting is useful for executing several successive calls to PRINT RECORD (e.g.
inside a loop) while maintaining previously set customized print parameters.
4D Server: This command can be executed on 4D Server within the framework of a stored
procedure. In this context:
• Make sure that no dialog box appears on the server machine (except for a specific
requirement). To do this, it is necessary to call the command with the * or > parameter.
• In the case of a problem concerning the printer (out of paper, printer disconnected, etc.), no
error message is generated.

Warning: Do not use the PAGE BREAK command with PRINT RECORD. PAGE BREAK is
exclusively reserved for use in combination with the Print form command.

4D Language Reference 1161

Examples
1. The following example prints the current record of the [Invoices] table. The code is
contained in the object method of a Print button on the input form. When the user clicks the
button, the record is printed using an output form designed for this purpose.

` Select the right output form for printing

OUTPUT FORM([Invoices];"Print One From Data Entry")
` Print Invoices as it is (without showing the printing dialog boxes)
PRINT RECORD([Invoices];*)
OUTPUT FORM([Invoices];"Standard Output") ` Restore the previous output form

2. The following example prints the same current record in two different forms. The code is
contained in the object method of a Print button on the input form. You want to set
customized print parameters and then use them in the two forms.

PRINT SETTINGS `User defines print parameters

If (OK=1)
OUTPUT FORM([Employees];"Detailed") `Use the first print form
PRINT RECORD([Employees];>) `Print using user-defined parameters
OUTPUT FORM([Employees];"Simple") `Use the second print form
PRINT RECORD([Employees];>) `Print using user-defined parameters
OUTPUT FORM([Employees];"Output") `Restore default output form
End if

See Also
Print form.

1162 4D Language Reference

PRINT SELECTION Printing

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

PRINT SELECTION ({aTable}{; }{* | >})

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table for which to print the selection, or
Default table, if omitted
* | > *|> → * to delete the printing dialog boxes, or
> to not reinitialize print settings

Description
PRINT SELECTION prints the current selection of aTable. The records are printed with the
current output form of the table in the current process. PRINT SELECTION performs the same
action as the Print menu command in the Design environment. If the selection is empty,
PRINT SELECTION does nothing.

By default, PRINT SELECTION displays the printer dialog boxes before printing. If the user
cancels either of the printer dialog boxes, the command is canceled and the report is not
printed.
You can delete these dialog boxes by using either the optional asterisk (*) parameter or the
optional “greater than” (>) parameter:
• The * parameter causes a print job using the current print parameters (default parameters or
those defined by the PAGE SETUP and/or SET PRINT OPTION commands).
• Furthermore, the > parameter causes a print job without reinitializing the current print
parameters. This setting is useful for executing several successive calls to PRINT SELECTION
(e.g., inside a loop) while maintaining previously set customized print parameters. For an
example of the use of this parameter, refer to the PRINT RECORD command description.

During printing, the output form method and/or the form’s object methods are executed
depending on the events that are enabled for the form and objects using the Property List
window in the Design environment, as well as on the events actually occurring:

• An On Header event is generated just before a header area is printed.

• An On Printing Detail event is generated just before a record is printed.
• An On Printing Break event is generated just before a break area is printed.
• An On Printing Footer event is generated just before a footer is printed.

4D Language Reference 1163

You can check whether PRINT SELECTION is printing the first header by testing Before selection
during an On Header event. You can also check for the last footer, by testing End selection
during an On Printing Footer event. For more information, see the description of these
commands, as well as those of Form event and Level.

To print a sorted selection with subtotals or breaks using PRINT SELECTION, you must first sort
the selection. Then, in each Break area of the report, include a variable with an object method
that assigns the subtotal to the variable. You can also use statistical and arithmetical functions
like Sum and Average to assign values to variables. For more information, see the descriptions
of Subtotal, BREAK LEVEL and ACCUMULATE.

Warning: Do not use the PAGE BREAK command with the PRINT SELECTION command. PAGE
BREAK is to be used with the PRINT FORM command.

After a call to PRINT SELECTION, the OK variable is set to 1 if the printing has been completed.
If the printing was interrupted, the OK variable is set to 0 (zero) (i.e., the user clicked Cancel in
the printing dialog boxes).

4D Server: This command can be executed on 4D Server within the framework of a stored
procedure. In this context:
• Make sure that no dialog box appears on the server machine (except for a specific
requirement). To do this, it is necessary to call the command with the * or > parameter.
• In the case of a problem concerning the printer (out of paper, printer disconnected, etc.), no
error message is generated.

Example
The following example selects all the records in the [People] table. It then uses the DISPLAY
SELECTION command to display the records and allows the user to highlight the records to
print. Finally, it uses the selected records with the USE SET command, and prints them with
PRINT SELECTION:

ALL RECORDS([People]) ` Select all records

DISPLAY SELECTION ([People]; *) ` Display the records
USE SET ("UserSet") ` Use only records picked by user
PRINT SELECTION([People]) ` Print the records that the user picked

See Also
ACCUMULATE, BREAK LEVEL, Level, PAGE SETUP, Subtotal.

1164 4D Language Reference

PRINT SETTINGS Printing

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

PRINT SETTINGS {(dialType)}

Parameter Type Description

dialType Longint → Dialog box(es) to be displayed:
0 (or parameter omitted) = All
1 = Print Setup, 2 = Print Job

Description
PRINT SETTINGS displays either one or two print settings dialog boxes. This command must be
called before a series of Print form commands or the OPEN PRINTING JOB command.

The optional dialType parameter can be used to configure the display of the printing dialog
boxes:
• If you pass 0 in dialType or omit this parameter, both printing dialog boxes are displayed.
First, it displays the Print Setup dialog box. Then, it displays the Print Job dialog box.
• If you pass 1 in dialType, only the Print Setup dialog box is displayed. The current printing
options will be used.
• If you pass 2 in dialType, only the Print Job dialog box is displayed. The current print settings
will be used.

Note: The Print Job dialog box contains a Preview on Screen check box that allows the user to
specify to print to the screen. You can preset or reset this check bok by calling SET PRINT
PREVIEW before calling PRINT SETTINGS.

Example
See example for the command PRINT FORM.

System Variables or Sets

If the user clicks OK in both dialog boxes, the OK system variable is set to 1. Otherwise, the
OK system variable is set to 0.

See Also
OPEN PRINTING JOB, PAGE BREAK, Print form, SET PRINT PREVIEW.

4D Language Reference 1165

PRINTERS LIST Printing

version 2004.1 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

PRINTERS LIST (namesArray{; altNamesArray{; modelsArray}})

Parameter Type Description

namesArray Text Array ← Printer names
altNamesArray Text Array ← Windows: Printer locations
Mac OS: Custom printer names
modelsArray Text Array ← Printer models (Windows only)

Description
The PRINTERS LIST command fills in the array(s) passed as parameter(s) with the names as
well as, optionally, the locations or custom names and models of the available printers for
the machine.

Note: If the printers are managed using a print server (spooler), the complete access path
(under Windows) or the name of the spooler (under Mac OS) is returned.

Pass the name of a text array in the namesArray parameter. After command execution, this
array will contain the names of available printers. Under Mac OS, this will be the fixed
“system” names.

You can pass a second optional array, altNamesArray. The contents of this array will depend
on the platform:
• Under Windows, for each printer, you get its network location (or local port).
• Under Mac OS, for each printer, you get its custom name, which can be modified by the
user. This name can be used, for example, in dialog boxes.

The optional modelsArray parameter is used to get the model of each printer. This
parameter can only be used under Windows.

Use the SET CURRENT PRINTER and Get current printer commands to modify or get the
selected printer in 4D. You must pass them the names returned in the first array
(namesArray)

Under Windows, the name of a printer can be modified manually at the operating system
level. On the other hand, its location and model type are linked to its physical
characteristics. Therefore, you can use the optional array values to check the characteristics
of the selected printer — typically, you can check that all the client machines use the same
printer.

1166 4D Language Reference

Under Mac OS, this check can be carried out using the name of the printer (name of the
print server), which is the same for each machine that is connected.

See Also
Get current printer, SET CURRENT PRINTER.

System Variables or Sets

The system variable OK is set to 1 if the command has been executed correctly; otherwise,
it is set to 0 and the arrays are returned empty.

4D Language Reference 1167

Printing page Printing

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Printing page → Number

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Number ← Page number of page currently being printed

Description
Printing page returns the printing page number. It can be used only when you are printing
with PRINT SELECTION or the Print menu in the Design environment.

Example
The following example changes the position of the page numbers on a report so that the
report can be reproduced in a double-sided format. The form for the report has two variables
that display page numbers. A variable in the lower-left corner (vLeftPageNum) will print the
even page numbers. A variable in the lower-right corner (vRightPageNum) will print the odd
page numbers. The example tests for even pages, then clears and sets the appropriate variables:

Case of
: (Form event=On Printing Footer)
If ((Printing page % 2) = 0) ` Modulo is 0, it is an even page
vLeftPageNum:=String(Printing page) ` Set the left page number
vRightPageNum:="" ` Clear the right page number
Else ` Otherwise it is an odd page
vLeftPageNum:="" ` Clear the left page number
vRightPageNum:=String (Printing page) ` Set the right page number
End if
End case

See Also
PRINT SELECTION.

1168 4D Language Reference

SET CURRENT PRINTER Printing

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET CURRENT PRINTER (printerName)

Parameter Type Description

printerName String → Name of printer to be used

Description

Note: This command does not work under Mac OS 9. Under Windows, it requires at least
Windows 2000.

The SET CURRENT PRINTER command is used to designate the printer to be used for printing
with the current 4D application.

Pass the name of the printer to be selected in the printerName parameter. To get a list of
available printers, use the new PRINTERS LIST command beforehand.
If you pass an empty string in printerName, the current printer defined in the system will
be used.

The SET CURRENT PRINTER command must be called before SET PRINT OPTION, so that the
options available correspond to the selected printer. On the other hand, SET CURRENT
PRINTER must be called after PAGE SETUP, otherwise the print settings are lost.

This command can be used with the PRINT SELECTION, PRINT LABEL, PRINT RECORD, Print
form, and QR REPORT commands, and is applied to all 4D printing, including that in
Design mode.
It is imperative for print commands to be called with the > parameter (where applicable) so
that the specified settings are not lost.

See Also
Get current printer, PRINTERS LIST.

System Variables or Sets

If printer selection is carried out correctly, the system variable OK is set to 1. Should the
opposite occur (for instance if the designated printer is not found), the system variable OK
is set to 0 and the current printer remains unchanged.

4D Language Reference 1169

SET PRINT MARKER Printing

version 2003 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET PRINT MARKER (markNum; position{; *})

Parameter Type Description

markNum Number → Marker number
position Number → New position for the marker
* * → If passed = move subsequent markers
If omitted = do not move subsequent markers

Description
The SET PRINT MARKER command enables the definition of the marker position during
printing. Combined with the Get print marker, MOVE OBJECT or Print form commands, this
command allows you to adjust the size of the print areas.

SET PRINT MARKER can be used in two contexts:

• during the On header form event, in the context of PRINT SELECTION and PRINT RECORD
commands.
• during the On Printing Detail form event, in the context of the Print form command. This
operation facilitates the printing of customized reports (see example).
The effect of the command is limited to printing; no modification appears on the screen. The
modifications made to the forms are not saved.

Pass one of the constants of the Form area theme in the markNum parameter:
Constant Type Value
Form Header Longint 200
Form Header1...10 Longint 201...210
Form Detail Longint 0
Form Break0...9 Longint 300...309
Form Footer Longint 100

In position, pass the new position desired, expressed in pixels.

If you pass the optional * parameter, all the markers located below the marker specified in
markNum will be moved the same number of pixels and in the same direction as this marker
when the command is executed. Warning: in this case, any objects present in the areas located
below the marker are also moved.

1170 4D Language Reference

When the * parameter is used, it is possible to position the markNum marker beyond the initial
position of the markers that follow it — these latter markers will be moved simultaneously.

Notes:
• This command modifies only the existing marker position. It does not allow the addition of
markers. If you designate a marker that does not exist in the form, the command will not do
anything.
• The print marker mechanism in the Design mode is retained: a marker cannot go any higher
than the one that precedes it, nor any lower than the one that follows it (when the *
parameter is not used).

Example
This complete example enables you to generate the printing of a three-column report, the
height of each row being calculated on the fly according to the contents of the fields.
The output form used for printing is as follows:

4D Language Reference 1171

The On Printing Detail form event was selected for the form (keep in mind that no matter what
area is printed, the Print form command only generates this type of form event).
For each record, the row height must be adapted according to the contents of the "Actors" or
"Summary" column (column having the most content). Here is the desired result:

1172 4D Language Reference

The print project method is as follows:

C_LONGINT(vLprint_height;$vLheight;vLprinted_height)
C_STRING(31;vSprint_area)
PAGE SETUP([Film];"Print_List3")
GET PRINTABLE AREA(vLprint_height)
vLprinted_height:=0
ALL RECORDS([Film])

vSprint_area:="Header" `Printing of header area

$vLheight:=Print form([Film];"Print_List3";Form Header)
$vLheight:=21  `Fixed height
vLprinted_height:=vLprinted_height+$vLheight

While(Not(End selection([Film])))
vSprint_area:="Detail" `Printing of detail area
$vLheight:=Print form([Film];"Print_List3";Form Detail)
`Detail calculation is carried out in the form method
vLprinted_height:=vLprinted_height+$vLheight
If(OK=0) `CANCEL has been carried out in the form method
PAGE BREAK
vLprinted_height:=0
vSprint_area:="Header" `Reprinting of the header area
$vLheight:=Print form([Film];"Print_List3";Form Header)
$vLheight:=21
vLprinted_height:=vLprinted_height+$vLheight
vSprint_area:="Detail"
$vLheight:=Print form([Film];"Print_List3";Form Detail)
vLprinted_height:=vLprinted_height+$vLheight
End if
NEXT RECORD([Film])
End while
PAGE BREAK `Make sure that the last page is printed

The Print_List3 form method is as follows:

C_LONGINT($l;$t;$r;$b;$fixed_wdth;$exact_hght;$l1;$t1;$r1;$b1)
C_LONGINT($final_pos;$i)
C_LONGINT($detail_pos;$header_pos;$hght_to_print;$hght_remaining)

4D Language Reference 1173

 Case of
: (vSprint_area="Detail") `Printing of detail underway
GET OBJECT RECT([Film]Actors;$l;$t;$r;$b)
$fixed_wdth:=$r-$l `Calculation of the Actors text field size
$exact_hght:=$b-$t
BEST OBJECT SIZE([Film]Actors;$wdth;$hght;$fixed_wdth)
`Optimal size of the field according to its contents
$movement:=$hght-$exact_hght

GET OBJECT RECT([Film]Summary;$l1;$t1;$r1;$b1)

$fixed_wdth1:=$r1-$l1 `Calculation of the Summary text field size
$exact_hght1:=$b1-$t1
BEST OBJECT SIZE([Film]Summary;$wdth1;$hght1;$fixed_wdth1)
`Optimal size of the field according to its contents
$movement1:=$hght1-$exact_hght1
If($movement1>$movement)
`We determine the highest field
$movement:=$movement1
End if

If($movement>0)
$position:=Get print marker(Form Detail)
$final_pos:=$position+$movement
`We move the Detail marker and those that follow it
SET PRINT MARKER(Form Detail ;$final_pos;*)
`Resizing of text areas
MOVE OBJECT([Film]Actors;$l;$t;$r;$hght+$t;*)
MOVE OBJECT([Film]Summary;$l1;$t1;$r1;$hght1+$t1;*)

`Resizing of dividing lines

GET OBJECT RECT(*;"H1Line";$l;$t;$r;$b)
MOVE OBJECT(*;"H1Line";$l;$final_pos-1;$r;$final_pos;*)
For ($i;1;4;1)
GET OBJECT RECT(*;"VLine"+String($i);$l;$t;$r;$b)
MOVE OBJECT(*;"VLine"+String($i);$l;$t;$r;$final_pos;*)
End for
End if

1174 4D Language Reference

 `Calculation of available space
$detail_pos:=Get print marker(Form Detail)
$header_pos:=Get print marker(Form Header)
$hght_to_print:=$detail_pos-$header_pos
$hght_remaining:=printing_height-vLprinted_height
If($hght_remaining<$hght_to_print) `Insufficient height
CANCEL `Move form to the next page
End if
End case

See Also
BEST OBJECT SIZE, GET OBJECT RECT, Get print marker, MOVE OBJECT, PAGE BREAK, Print form,
PRINT RECORD, PRINT SELECTION.

4D Language Reference 1175

SET PRINT OPTION Printing

version 2004.3 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET PRINT OPTION (option; value1{; value2})

Parameter Type Description

option Longint → Option number
value1 Longint | String → Value 1 of the option
value2 Longint | String → Value 2 of the option

Description
The SET PRINT OPTION command is used to modify, by programming, the value of a print
option. Each option defined using this command is applied to the entire database and for
the duration of the session as long as no other command that modifies print parameters
(PRINT SETTINGS, PRINT SELECTION without the > parameter, etc.) is called.

The option parameter allows you to indicate the option to be modified. You can pass either
a value or one of the predefined constants of the “Print options” theme.
Pass the new value(s) of the specified option in the value1 and (optionally) value2
parameters. The number and nature of the values to be passed depend on the type of
option specified.

The following table lists the options and their possible values:

option (constant) value1 value2

1 (Paper option) Name -
Width Height
2 (Orientation option) 1=Portrait, 2=Landscape -
3 (Scale option) Number (%) -
4 (Number of copies option) Number -
5 (Paper source option) Windows only:
Index (number) -
8 (Color option) Windows only:
1=N/B, 2=Color -
9 (Destination option) 1=Printer, -
2=File (PC)/PS (Mac), Access path
3=PDF (Mac), Access path
5=Screen (Mac) -
11 (Double sided option) Windows only:
0=Single-sided (standard) -
1=Double-sided Binding: 0=Left
(default), 1=Top

1176 4D Language Reference

12 (Spooler document name option) Name of document -
to be printed
13 (Mac spool file format option) 0=PDF mode, 1= PostScript -
mode
14 (Hide printing progress option) 0=Display (default), -
1=Hide

• Paper option (1): the list of all the names of available paper can be obtained using the
PRINT OPTION VALUES command.
You can either pass the name of the paper in value1 (and, in this case, omit value2), or pass
the paper width in value1 and its height in value2. The width and height must be expressed
in screen pixels.
• Orientation option (2): you can pass either 1 (Portrait), or 2 (Landscape) in value1.
• Scale option (3): pass a percentage in value1. Be careful, some printers do not allow you to
modify the scale. If you pass an invalid value, the property is reset to 100% at the time of
printing.
• Number of copies option (4): pass the number of copies to be printed in value1.
• Paper source option (5): pass the number corresponding to the index, in the array of trays
returned by the PRINT OPTION VALUES command, of the paper tray to be used.
Note: This option can only be used under Windows.
• Color option (8): in value1, pass the code specifying the mode for handling color: 1=Black
and white (monochrome), 2=Color.
Note: This option can only be used under Windows.
• Destination option (9): in value1, pass the code specifying the type of print destination:
1=Printer, 2=File (PC)/PS (Mac), 3=PDF file (Mac OS only), 5=Screen (Mac OS X driver
option).
If value1 is different from 1 or 5, pass the pathname for the resulting document in value2.
This path will be used until another path is specified. If a file with the same name already
exists at the destination location, it will be replaced. Under Windows only: if you pass an
empty string in value2 or omit this parameter, a file saving dialog appears at the time of
printing.
• Double sided option (11): you can either pass 0 (Single-sided or standard), or 1 (Double-
sided) in value1. If value1 equals 1, you can define the binding to be applied using value2:
0=Left binding (default value), 1=Top binding.
Note: This option can only be used under Windows.
• Spooler document name option (12): in value1, pass the name of the print document
that must appear in the list of spooler documents.
To use or restore standard operation (using the method name in the case of a method, the
table name for a record, etc.), pass an empty string in value1.
Warning: The name defined by this statement will be used for all the print documents of
the session for as long as a new name or an empty string is not passed.

4D Language Reference 1177

• Mac spool file format option (13): in value1, pass 0 to set the print job in PDF mode
(default value) and 1 to “force” the print job in PostScript mode. This option has no effect
under Windows.
Note: Under Mac OS X, printing is done as a PDF by default. However, the PDF print driver
does not support PICT pictures with encapsulated PostScript information — these pictures
are generated, more particularly, by vectorial drawing software.
To avoid this problem, this option lets you modify the print mode to use under Mac OS X
for the current session. Keep in mind that printing in PostScript mode can lead to
undesired side effects.
• Hide printing progress option (14): pass 1 in value1 to hide the progress windows and 0 to
display them again (default operation). This option is particularly useful in the case of PDF
printing under Mac OS X.
Note: There is already a Printing progress option found in the Preferences dialog box
(Application/Options page). However, it is applied globally to the application and does not
hide all the windows under Mac OS X.

Once set using this command, a print option is kept throughout the duration of the session
for the entire 4D application. It will be used by the PRINT SELECTION, PRINT LABEL, PRINT
RECORD, Print form, and QR REPORT commands, as well as for all 4D printing, including
that in Design mode.

Notes:
• It is indispensable to use the optional > parameter with the PRINT SELECTION, PRINT
LABEL, PRINT RECORD and PAGE BREAK commands in order to avoid resetting the print
options that were set using the SET PRINT OPTION command.
• The SET PRINT OPTION command only operates with PostScript printers.

See Also
GET PRINT OPTION, PRINT OPTION VALUES, SET CURRENT PRINTER.

System Variables or Sets

The system variable OK is set to 1 if the command has been executed correctly; otherwise,
it is set to 0.

Error Handling
If the value passed for an option is invalid or if it is not available on the printer, the
command returns an error (that you can intercept using an error-handling method
installed by the ON ERR CALL command) and the current value of the option remains
unchanged.

Constants
Print options theme.

1178 4D Language Reference

SET PRINT PREVIEW Printing

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET PRINT PREVIEW (preview)

Parameter Type Description

preview Boolean → Preview on screen (TRUE), or
No preview (FALSE)

Description
SET PRINT PREVIEW allows you to programmatically check or uncheck the Preview on Screen
option of the Print dialog box. If you pass TRUE in preview, Preview on Screen will be checked,
if you pass FALSE in preview , Preview on Screen will be unchecked. This setting is local to a
process and does not affect the printing of other processes or users.

Example
The following example turns on the Preview on Screen option to display the results of a query
on screen, and then turns it off.

QUERY([Customers])
If (OK=1)
SET PRINT PREVIEW (True)
PRINT SELECTION ([Customers] ; *)
SET PRINT PREVIEW (False)
End if

See Also
PRINT RECORD, PRINT SELECTION, PRINT SETTINGS.

4D Language Reference 1179

SET PRINTABLE MARGIN Printing

version 6.8.1
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET PRINTABLE MARGIN (left; top; right; bottom)

Parameter Type Description

left Number → Left margin
top Number → Top margin
right Number → Right margin
bottom Number → Bottom margin

Description
The SET PRINTABLE MARGIN command enables you to set the values of various printing
margins by using the Print form command.

You can pass one of the following values into the left, top, right and bottom parameters:
• 0 = use paper margins
• -1 = use printer margins
• value > 0 = margin in pixels (remember that 1 pixel in 72 dpi represents approximately 0.4
mm)

The values of the right and bottom parameters relate to the right and bottom edges of the
paper respectively.

Note: For more information regarding Printing management and terminology in 4D, refer to
the GET PRINTABLE MARGIN command description.

By default, 4D bases its printouts on the printer margins. Once the SET PRINTABLE MARGIN
command is executed, the modified parameters are retained in the same process for the entire
session.

Examples
1. The following example enables you to obtain the size of the dead margin:

SET PRINTABLE MARGIN (-1;-1;-1;-1) `Sets the printer margin

GET PRINTABLE MARGIN($l;$t;$r;$b)
`$l, $t, $r and $b correspond to the dead margins of the sheet

1180 4D Language Reference

2. The following example enables you to obtain the paper size:

SET PRINTABLE MARGIN (0;0;0;0) `Sets the paper margin

GET PRINTABLE AREA($height;$width)
`For size A4: $height=842 ; $width=595 pixels

See Also
GET PRINTABLE MARGIN, Get printed height, Print form.

4D Language Reference 1181

Subtotal Printing

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Subtotal (data{; pageBreak}) → Number

Parameter Type Description

data Field → Numeric field or variable to return subtotal
pageBreak Number → Break level for which to cause a page break

Function result Number ← Subtotal of data

Description
Subtotal returns the subtotal for data for the current or last break level. Subtotal works only
when a sorted selection is being printed with PRINT SELECTION or when printing using Print
in the Design environment. The data parameter must be of type real, integer, or long integer.
Assign the result of the Subtotal function to a variable placed in the Break area of the form.

Warning: You must execute BREAK LEVEL and ACCUMULATE before every form report for which
you want to do break processing and calculate subtotals. See discussion at the end of the
description of this command.

The second, optional, argument to Subtotal is used to cause page breaks during printing. If
pageBreak is 0, Subtotal does not issue a page break. If pageBreak equals 1, Subtotal issues a
page break for each level 1 break. If pageBreak equals 2, Subtotal issues a page break for each
level 1 and level 2 break, and so on.

Tip: If you execute Subtotal from within an output form displayed at the screen, an error will
be generated, triggering an infinite loop of updates between the form and the error window.
To get out of this loop, press Alt+Shift (Windows) or Option-Shift (Macintosh) when you click
on the Abort button in the Error window (you may have to do so several times). This
temporarily stops the updates for the form’s window. Select another form as the output form
so the error will occur again. Go back to the Design Environment and isolate the call to
Subtotal into a test Form event=On Printing Break if you use the form both for display and
printing.

1182 4D Language Reference

Example
The following example is a one-line object method in a Break area of a form (B0, the area
above the B0 marker). The vSalary variable is placed in the Break area. The variable is assigned
the subtotal of the Salary field for this break level. Break processing must have been activated
beforehand using the ACCUMULATE and BREAK LEVEL commands.

Case of
: (Form event=On Printing Break)
vSalary:=Subtotal ([Employees]Salary)
End case

For more information about designing forms with header and break areas, see the 4D Design
Reference manual.

Activating Break Processing in Form Reports

In order to generate reports with breaks, break processing in form reports can be activated by
calling the BREAK LEVEL and ACCUMULATE commands.
You must execute both of these commands before printing a form report. The Subtotal
function is still required in order to display values on a form. You must sort on at least as
many levels as you need to break on.

When using BREAK LEVEL and ACCUMULATE, the process to print a report is typically like this:
1. Select the records to be printed.
2. Sort the records using ORDER BY. Sort on at least the same number of levels as breaks.
3. Execute BREAK LEVEL and ACCUMULATE.
4. Print the report using PRINT SELECTION.

The Subtotal function is necessary in order to display values on a form.

See Also
ACCUMULATE, BREAK LEVEL, Level, PRINT SELECTION.

4D Language Reference 1183

1184 4D Language Reference
35
______________________
Process
(Communications)

4D Language Reference 1185

1186 4D Language Reference
CALL PROCESS Process (Communications)

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

CALL PROCESS (process)

Parameter Type Description

process Number → Process number

Description
CALL PROCESS calls the form displayed in the frontmost window of process.

Important: CALL PROCESS only works between processes running on the same machine.

If you call a process that does not exist, nothing happens.

If process (the target process) is not currently displaying a form, nothing happens. The form
displayed in the target process receives an On Outside call event. This event must be enabled
for that form in the Design environment Form Properties window, and you must manage the
event in the form method. If the event is not enabled or if it is not managed in the form
method, nothing happens.

Note: The On Outside call event modifies the entry context of the receiving input form. In
particular, if a field was being edited, the On Data change event is generated.

The caller process (the process from which CALL PROCESS is executed) does not “wait”— CALL
PROCESS has an immediate effect. If necessary, you must write a waiting loop for a reply from
the called process, using interprocess variables or using process variables (reserved for this
purpose) that you can read and write between the two processes (using GET PROCESS VARIABLE
and SET PROCESS VARIABLE).

To communicate between processes that do not display forms, use the commands GET
PROCESS VARIABLE and SET PROCESS VARIABLE.

CALL PROCESS has the alternate syntax CALL PROCESS(-1).

4D Language Reference 1187

In order not to slow down the execution of methods, 4D does not redraw interprocess
variables each time they are modified. If you pass -1 instead of a process reference number in
the process parameter, 4D does not call any process. Instead, it redraws all the interprocess
variables currently displayed in all windows of any process running on the same machine.

Example
See example for On Exit Database Method.

See Also
Form event, GET PROCESS VARIABLE, SET PROCESS VARIABLE.

1188 4D Language Reference

CLEAR SEMAPHORE Process (Communications)

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

CLEAR SEMAPHORE (semaphore)

Parameter Type Description

semaphore String → Semaphore to clear

Description
CLEAR SEMAPHORE erases semaphore previously set by the Semaphore function.

As a rule, all semaphores that have been created should be cleared. If semaphores are not
cleared, they remain in memory until the process that creates them ends. A process can only
clear semaphores that it has created. If you try to clear a semaphore from within a process that
did not create it, nothing happens.

Example
See the example for Semaphore.

See Also
Semaphore.

4D Language Reference 1189

GET PROCESS VARIABLE Process (Communications)

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET PROCESS VARIABLE (process; srcVar; dstVar{; srcVar2; dstVar2; ...; srcVarN; dstVarN})

Parameter Type Description

process Number → Source process number
srcVar Variable → Source variable
dstVar Variable ← Destination variable

Description
The GET PROCESS VARIABLE command reads the srcVar process variables (srvVar2, etc.) from the
source process whose number is passed in process, and returns their current values in the
dstVar variables ( dstVar2, etc.) of the current process.

Each source variable can be a variable, an array or an array element. However, see the
restrictions listed later in this section.

In each couple of srcVar;dstVar variables, the two variables must be of compatible types,
otherwise the values you obtain may be meaningless.

The current process “peeks” the variables from the source process—the source process is not
warned in any way that another process is reading the instance of its variables.

4D Server: Using 4D Client, you can read variables in a destination process executed on the
server machine (stored procedure). To do so, put a minus sign before the process ID number in
the process parameter.
“Intermachine” process communication, provided by the commands GET PROCESS VARIABLE,
SET PROCESS VARIABLE and VARIABLE TO VARIABLE, is possible from client to server only. It is
always a client process that reads or write the variables of a stored procedure.

Tip: If you do not know the ID number of the server process, you can still use the interprocess
variables of the server. To do so, you can use any negative value in process. In other words, it is
not necessary to know the ID number of the process to be able to use the GET PROCESS
VARIABLE command with the interprocess variables of the server. This is useful when a stored
procedure is launched using the On server startup database method. As clients machines do not
automatically know the ID number of that process, any negative value can be passed in the
process parameter.

1190 4D Language Reference

Restrictions
GET PROCESS VARIABLE does not accept local variables as source variables.

On the other hand, the destination variables can be interprocess, process or local variables.
You “receive” the values only into variables, not into fields.

GET PROCESS VARIABLE accepts any type of source process or interprocess variable, except:
• Pointers
• Array of pointers
• Two-dimensional arrays

The source process must be a user process; it cannot be a kernel process. If the source process
does not exist, this command has no effect.

Note: In interpreted mode, if a source variable does not exist, the undefined value is returned.
You can detect this by using the Type function to test the corresponding destination variable.

Examples
1. This line of code reads the value of the text variable vtCurStatus from the process whose
number is $vlProcess. It returns the value in the process variable vtInfo of the current process:

GET PROCESS VARIABLE($vlProcess;vtCurStatus;vtInfo)

2. This line of code does the same thing, but returns the value in the local variable $vtInfo for
the method executing in the current process:

GET PROCESS VARIABLE($vlProcess;vtCurStatus;$vtInfo)

3. This line of code does the same thing, but returns the value in the variable vtCurStatus of
the current process:

GET PROCESS VARIABLE($vlProcess;vtCurStatus;vtCurStatus)

Note: The first vtCurStatus designates the instance of the variable in the source process The
second vtCurStatus designates the instance of the variable in the current process.

4D Language Reference 1191

4. This example sequentially reads the elements of a process array from the process indicated
by $vlProcess:

GET PROCESS VARIABLE($vlProcess;vl_IPCom_Array;$vlSize)

For($vlElem;1;$vlSize)
GET PROCESS VARIABLE($vlProcess;at_IPCom_Array{$vlElem};$vtElem)
` Do something with $vtElem
End for

Note: In this example, the process variable vl_IPCom_Array contains the size of the array
at_IPCom_Array, and must be maintained by the source process.

5. This example does the same thing as the previous one, but reads the array as a whole,
instead of reading the elements sequentially:

GET PROCESS VARIABLE($vlProcess;at_IPCom_Array;$anArray)

For($vlElem;1;Size of array($anArray))
` Do something with $anArray{$vlElem}
End for

6. This example reads the source process instances of the variables v1,v2,v3 and returns their
values in the instance of the same variables for the current process:

GET PROCESS VARIABLE($vlProcess;v1;v1;v2;v2;v3;v3)

7. See the example for the command DRAG AND DROP PROPERTIES.

See Also
CALL PROCESS, Drag and Drop, DRAG AND DROP PROPERTIES, Processes, SET PROCESS VARIABLE,
VARIABLE TO VARIABLE.

1192 4D Language Reference

Semaphore Process (Communications)

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Semaphore (semaphore{; tickCount}) → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

semaphore String → Semaphore to test and set
tickCount Integer → Maximum waiting time

Function result Boolean ← Semaphore has been successfully set (FALSE) or

Semaphore was already set (TRUE)

Description
A semaphore is a flag shared among workstations (each user’s computer) or among processes
on the same workstation. A semaphore simply exists or does not exist. The methods that each
user is running can test for the existence of a semaphore. By creating and testing semaphores,
methods can communicate between workstations.

The Semaphore function returns TRUE if semaphore exists. If semaphore does not exist,
Semaphore creates it and returns FALSE. Only one user at a time can create a semaphore. If
Semaphore returns FALSE, it means that the semaphore did not exist, but it also means that
the semaphore has been set for the process in which the call has been made.

Semaphore returns FALSE if the semaphore was not set. It also returns FALSE if the semaphore
is already set by the same process in which the call has been made. semaphore is limited to
255 characters, including prefixes (<>, $). If you pass a longer string, the semaphore will be
tested with the truncated string.

The optional parameter tickCount allows you to specify a waiting time (in ticks) if semaphore is
already set. In this case, the function will wait either for the semaphore to be freed or the
waiting time to expire before returning True.

There are two types of semaphores in 4D: local semaphores and global semaphores.
• A local semaphore is accessible by all processes on the same workstation and only on the
workstation. A local semaphore can be created by prefixing the name of the semaphore with a
dollar sign ($). You use local semaphores to monitor operations among processes executing on
the same workstation. For example, a local semaphore can be used to monitor access to an
interprocess array shared by all the processes in your single-user database or on the
workstation.

4D Language Reference 1193

• A global semaphore is accessible to all users and all their processes. You use global
semaphores to monitor operations among users of a multi-user database.

Global and local semaphores are identical in their logic. The difference resides in their scope.
In 4D Server, global semaphores are shared among all the processes running on all clients. A
local semaphore is only shared among the processes running on the client where it has been
created.
In 4D, global or local semaphores have the same scope because you are the only user.
However, if your database is being used in both setups, make sure to use global or local
semaphores depending on what you want to do.

You do not use semaphores to protect record access. This is automatically done by 4D and
4D Server. Use semaphores to prevent several users from performing the same operation at the
same time.

Examples
1. In this example, you want to prevent two users from doing a global update of the prices in
a Products table. The following method uses semaphores to manage this:

If (Semaphore("UpdatePrices")) ` Try to create the semaphore

ALERT("Another user is already updating prices. Retry later.")
Else
DoUpdatePrices ` Update all the prices
CLEAR SEMAPHORE("UpdatePrices")) ` Clear the semaphore
End if

2. The following example uses a local semaphore. In a database with several processes, you
want to maintain a To Do list. You want to maintain the list in an interprocess array and not
in a table. You use a semaphore to prevent simultaneous access. In this situation, you only
need to use a local semaphore, because your To Do list is only for your use.

The interprocess array is initialized in the Startup method:

ARRAY TEXT(<>ToDoList;0) ` The To Do list is initially empty

1194 4D Language Reference

Here is the method used for adding items to the To Do list:

` ADD TO DO LIST project method

` ADD TO DO LIST ( Text )
` ADD TO DO LIST ( To do list item )
C_TEXT($1)
If(Not(Semaphore("$AccessToDoList";300)))
` Wait 5 seconds if the semaphore already exists
$vlElem:=Size of array(<>ToDoList)+1
INSERT IN ARAY(<>ToDoList;$vlElem)
<>ToDoList{$vlElem}:=$1
CLEAR SEMAPHORE("$AccessToDoList") ` Clear the semaphore
End if

You can call the above method from any process.

See Also
CLEAR SEMAPHORE, Test semaphore.

4D Language Reference 1195

SET PROCESS VARIABLE Process (Communications)

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET PROCESS VARIABLE (process; dstVar; expr{; dstVar2; expr2; ...; dstVarN; exprN})

Parameter Type Description

process Number → Destination process number
dstVar Variable → Destination variable
expr Variable → Source expression (or source variable)

Description
The SET PROCESS VARIABLE command writes the dstVar process variables (dstVar2, etc.) of the
destination process whose number is passed in process using the values passed in expr1 (expr2,
etc.).
Each destination variable can be a variable or an array element. However, see the restrictions
listed later in this section.

For each couple of dstVar;expr variables, the expression must be of a type compatible with the
destination variable, otherwise you may end up with a meaningless value in the variable. In
interpreted mode, if a destination variable does not exist, it is created and assigned with the
expression.
The current process “pokes” the variables of the destination process—the destination process is
not warned in any way that another process is writing the instance of its variables.

4D Server: Using 4D Client, you can write variables in a destination process executed on the
server machine (stored procedure). To do so, put a minus sign before the process ID number in
the process parameter.
“Intermachine” process communication, provided by the commands GET PROCESS VARIABLE,
SET PROCESS VARIABLE and VARIABLE TO VARIABLE, is possible from client to server only. It is
always a client process that reads or write the variables of a stored procedure.

Tip: If you do not know the ID number of the server process, you can still use the interprocess
variables of the server. To do so, use any negative value in process. In other words, it is not
necessary to know the ID number of the process to be able to use the SET PROCESS VARIABLE
command with the interprocess variables of the server. This is useful when a stored procedure
is launched using the On server startup database method. As client machines do not
automatically know the ID number of that process, any negative value can be passed in the
process parameter.

1196 4D Language Reference

Restrictions
SET PROCESS VARIABLE does not accept local variables as destination variables.

SET PROCESS VARIABLE accepts any type of destination process or interprocess variable, except:
• Pointers
• Arrays of any type. To write an array as a whole from one process to another one, use the
command VARIABLE TO VARIABLE. Note, however, that SET PROCESS VARIABLE allows you to
write the element of an array.
• You cannot write the element of an array of pointers or the element of a two-dimensional
array.

The destination process must be a user process; it cannot be a kernel process. If the destination
process does not exist, an error is generated. You can catch this error using an error-handling
method installed with ON ERR CALL.

Examples
1. This line of code sets (to the empty string) the text variable vtCurStatus of the process whose
number is $vlProcess:

SET PROCESS VARIABLE($vlProcess;vtCurStatus;"")

2. This line of code sets the text variable vtCurStatus of the process whose number is $vlProcess
to the value of the variable $vtInfo from the executing method in the current process:

SET PROCESS VARIABLE($vlProcess;vtCurStatus;$vtInfo)

3. This line of code sets the text variable vtCurStatus of the process whose number is $vlProcess
to the value of the same variable in the current process:

SET PROCESS VARIABLE($vlProcess;vtCurStatus;vtCurStatus)

Note: The first vtCurStatus designates the instance of the variable in the destination process.
The second vtCurStatus designates the instance of the variable in the current process.

4. This example sequentially sets to uppercase all elements of a process array from the process
indicated by $vlProcess:

GET PROCESS VARIABLE($vlProcess;vl_IPCom_Array;$vlSize)

For($vlElem;1;$vlSize)
GET PROCESS VARIABLE($vlProcess;at_IPCom_Array{$vlElem};$vtElem)
SET PROCESS VARIABLE($vlProcess;at_IPCom_Array{$vlElem};Uppercase($vtElem))
End for

4D Language Reference 1197

Note: In this example, the process variable vl_IPCom_Array contains the size of the array
at_IPCom_Array and must be maintained by the source/destination process.

5. This example writes the destination process instance of the variables v1, v2 and v3 using the
instance of the same variables from the current process:

SET PROCESS VARIABLE($vlProcess;v1;v1;v2;v2;v3;v3)

See Also
CALL PROCESS, GET PROCESS VARIABLE, Processes, VARIABLE TO VARIABLE.

1198 4D Language Reference

Test semaphore Process (Communications)

version 6.5
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Test semaphore (semaphore) → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

semaphore String → Name of the semaphore to test

Function result Boolean ← True = the semaphore exists,

False = the semaphore doesn’t exist

Description
The Test semaphore command allows you to test the existence of a semaphore.

The difference between the Semaphore function and the Test semaphore function is that Test
semaphore doesn’t create the semaphore if it doesn’t exit. If the semaphore exists, the function
returns True. Otherwise, it returns False.

Example
The following example allows you to know the state of a process (in our case, while modifying
the code) without modifying semaphore:

$Win:=Open window (x1;x2;y1;y2;-Palette window)

Repeat
If (Test semaphore("Encrypting code"))
POSITION MESSAGE ($x3;$y3)
MESSAGE("Encrypting code being modified.")
Else
POSITION MESSAGE($x3;$y3)
MESSAGE("Modification of the encrypting code authorized.")
End if
Until (StopInfo)
CLOSE WINDOW

See Also
Semaphore.

4D Language Reference 1199

VARIABLE TO VARIABLE Process (Communications)

version 6.0.2
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

VARIABLE TO VARIABLE (process; dstVar; srcVar{; dstVar2; srcVar2; ...; dstVarN; srcVarN})

Parameter Type Description

process Number → Destination process number
dstVar Variable → Destination variable
srcVar Variable → Source variable

Description
The VARIABLE TO VARIABLE command writes the dstVar process variables (dstVar2, etc.) of the
destination process whose number is passed in process using the values of the variables srcVar1
srcVar2, etc.

VARIABLE TO VARIABLE has the same action as SET PROCESS VARIABLE, with the following
differences:
• You pass source expressions to SET PROCESS VARIABLE, and therefore cannot pass an array as
a whole. You must exclusively pass source variables to VARIABLE TO VARIABLE, and therefore
can pass an array as a whole.
• Each destination variable of SET PROCESS VARIABLE can be a variable or an array element,
but cannot be an array as a whole. Each destination variable of VARIABLE TO VARIABLE can be a
variable or an array or an array element.

4D Server: “Intermachine” process communication, provided by the commands GET PROCESS

VARIABLE, SET PROCESS VARIABLE and VARIABLE TO VARIABLE, is possible from client to server
only. It is always a client process that reads or write the variables of a stored procedure.

For each couple of dstVar;expr variables, the source variable must be of a type compatible with
the destination variable, otherwise you may end up with a meaningless value in the variable.
In interpreted mode, if a destination variable does not exist, it is created and assigned with the
type and value of the source variable.

The current process “pokes” the variables of the destination process—the destination process is
not warned in any way that another process is writing the instance of its variables.

Restrictions
VARIABLE TO VARIABLE does not accept local variables as destination variables.

1200 4D Language Reference

VARIABLE TO VARIABLE accepts any type of destination process or interprocess variables except:
• Pointers
• Array of pointers
• Two-dimensional arrays

The destination process must be a user process; it cannot be a kernel process. If the destination
process does not exist, an error is generated. You can catch this error using an error-handling
method installed with ON ERR CALL.

Example
The following example reads a process array from the process indicated by $vlProcess,
sequentially sets the elements to uppercase and then writes back the array as a whole:

GET PROCESS VARIABLE($vlProcess;at_IPCom_Array;$anArray)

For($vlElem;1;Size of array($anArray))
$anArray{$vlElem}:=Uppercase($anArray{$vlElem})
End for
VARIABLE TO VARIABLE($vlProcess;at_IPCom_Array;$anArray)

See Also
GET PROCESS VARIABLE, Processes, SET PROCESS VARIABLE.

4D Language Reference 1201

1202 4D Language Reference
36
______________________
Process (User Interface)

4D Language Reference 1203

1204 4D Language Reference
BRING TO FRONT Process (User Interface)

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

BRING TO FRONT (process)

Parameter Type Description

process Number → Process number of the process to
pass to the frontmost level

Description
BRING TO FRONT brings all the windows belonging to process to the front. The order of the
windows is retained. If the process is already the frontmost process, the command does
nothing. If the process is hidden, you must use SHOW PROCESS to display the process,
otherwise BRING TO FRONT has no effect.

The Main and Design processes can be brought to the front using this command.

Example
The following example is a method that can be executed from a menu. It checks to see if
<>vlAddCust_PID is the frontmost process. If not, the method brings it to the front:

If (Frontmost process#<>vlAddCust_PID)
BRING TO FRONT (<>vlAddCust_PID)
End if

See Also
HIDE PROCESS, Process state, SHOW PROCESS.

4D Language Reference 1205

Frontmost process Process (User Interface)

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Frontmost process {(*)} → Integer

Parameter Type Description

* → Process number for first non-floating window

Function result Integer ← Number of the process whose windows are in

the front

Description
Frontmost process returns the number of the process whose window (or windows) are in the
front.

When you have one or more floating windows open, there are two window layers:
• Regular windows
• Floating windows

If the Frontmost process function is used from within a floating window form method or
object method, the function returns the process reference number of the frontmost floating
window in the floating window layer. If you specify the optional * parameter, the function
returns the process reference number of the frontmost active window in the regular window
layer.

Example
See the example for BRING TO FRONT.

See Also
BRING TO FRONT, WINDOW LIST.

1206 4D Language Reference

HIDE PROCESS Process (User Interface)

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

HIDE PROCESS (process)

Parameter Type Description

process Number → Process number or process to be hidden

Description
HIDE PROCESS hides all windows that belong to process. All interface elements of process are
hidden until the next SHOW PROCESS. The menu bar of the process is also hidden. This means
that opening a window while the process is hidden does not make the screen redraw or
display. If the process is already hidden, the command has no effect.

The only exception to this rule is the Debugger window. If the Debugger window is displayed
when process is a hidden process, process is displayed and becomes the frontmost process.

If you do not want a process to be displayed when it is created, HIDE PROCESS should be the
first command in the process method. The Main Process and Cache Manager processes cannot
be hidden using this command.

Even though a process may be hidden, the process is still executing.

Example
The following example hides all the windows belonging to the current process:

HIDE PROCESS (Current process)

See Also
Process state, SHOW PROCESS.

4D Language Reference 1207

SHOW PROCESS Process (User Interface)

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SHOW PROCESS (process)

Parameter Type Description

process Number → Process number of process to be shown

Description
SHOW PROCESS displays all the windows belonging to process. This command does not bring
the windows of process to the frontmost level. To do this, use the BRING TO FRONT command.
If the process was already displayed, the command has no effect.

Example
The following example displays a process called Customers, if it has been previously hidden.
The process reference to the Customers process is stored in the interprocess variable
<>Customers:

SHOW PROCESS (<>Customers)

See Also
BRING TO FRONT, HIDE PROCESS, Process state.

1208 4D Language Reference

37
______________________
Processes

4D Language Reference 1209

1210 4D Language Reference
Processes Processes

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Multi-tasking in 4D is the ability to have distinct database operations that are executed
simultaneously. These operations are called processes.

Multiple processes are like multiple users on the same computer, each working on his or her
own task. This essentially means that each method can be executed as a distinct database task.

This section covers the following topics:

• Creating and clearing processes
• Elements of a process
• User processes
• Processes created by 4D
• Local and global processes
• Record locking between processes

Note: This section does not cover stored procedures. See the section Stored Procedures in the
4D Server Reference manual.

Creating and Clearing Processes

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

There are several ways to create a new process:

• Execute a method in the Design environment after checking the New Process check box in
the Execute Method dialog box. The method chosen in the Execute Method dialog box is the
process method.
• Processes can be run by choosing menu commands. In the Menu Bar editor, select the menu
command and click the Start a New Process check box. The method associated with the menu
command is the process method.
• Use the New process function. The method passed as a parameter to the New process
function is the process method.
• Use the Execute on server function in order to create a stored procedure on the server. The
method passed as a parameter of the function is the process method.

A process can be cleared under the following conditions. The first two conditions are
automatic:
• When the process method finishes executing
• When the user quits from the database

4D Language Reference 1211

• If you stop the process procedurally or use the Abort button in the Debugger
• If you choose Abort in the Runtime Explorer.

A process can create another process. Processes are not organized hierarchically—all processes
are equal, regardless of the process from which they have been created. Once the “parent”
process creates a “child” process, the child process will continue regardless of whether or not
the parent process is still executing.

Elements of a Process
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Each process contains specific elements. There are three types of distinctly different elements
in a process:
• Interface elements: Elements that are necessary to display a process.
• Data elements: Information that is related to the data in the database.
• Language elements: Elements that are used procedurally or are that are important for
developing your own application.

Interface Elements
Interface elements consist of the following:
• Menu bar: Each process can have its own current menu bar. The menu bar of the frontmost
process is the current menu bar for the database.
• One or more windows: Each process can have more than one window open simultaneously.
On the other hand, some processes have no windows at all.
• One active (frontmost) window: Even though a process can have several windows open
simultaneously, each process has only one active window. To have more than one active
window, you must start more than one process.

Note: Processes that are executed on the server (stored procedures) must not contain elements
of the interface.

Data Elements
Data elements refer to the data used by the database. The data elements are:
• Current selection per table: Each process has a separate current selection. One table can have
a different current selection in different processes.
• Current record per table: Each table can have a different current record in each process.

Note: This description of the data elements is valid if your processes are global in scope. By
default, all processes are global. See the “Global and Local Processes” section below.

1212 4D Language Reference

Language Elements
The language elements of a process are the elements related to programming in 4D.
• Variables: Every process has its own process variables. See Variables for more information.
Process variables are recognized only within the domain of their native process.
• Default table: Each process has its own default table. However, note that the DEFAULT TABLE
command is only a typing convention for programming.
• Input and Output forms: Default input and output forms can be set procedurally for each
table in each process.
• Process sets: Each process has its own process sets. LockedSet is a process set. Process sets are
cleared as soon as the process method ends.
• On Error Call per process: Each process has its own error-handling method.
• Debugger window: Each process can have its own Debugger window.

User Processes

User processes are processes that you create to perform certain tasks. They share processing
time with the kernel processes. As an example, Web connection processes are user processes.

The 4D application also creates processes for its own needs. The following processes are created
and managed by 4D:
• Main process: The main process manages the display windows of the user interface.
• Design process: The Design process manages the windows and editors of the Design
environment. There is no Design process in a compiled database that does not contain
interpreted code.
• Web Server process: The Web Server process runs when the database is published on the
Web. See the section Web server configuration and connection management for more
information.
• Cache Manager process: The Cache Manager process manages disk I/ O for the database.
This process is created as soon as 4D Developer or 4D Server are run.
• Indexing process: The Indexing process manages the indexing of fields in a database as a
separate process. This process is created when an index for a field is built or deleted.
• On Event Manager process: This process is created when an event-handling method is
installed by the ON EVENT CALL command. It executes the event method installed by ON
EVENT CALL whenever there is an event. The event method is the process method for this
process. This process executes continuously, even if no method is executing. Event handling
also occurs in the Design environment.

4D Language Reference 1213

Global and Local Processes

Processes can be either global or local in scope. By default, all processes are global.

Global processes can perform any operation, including accessing and manipulating data. In
most cases, you will want to use global processes.

Local processes should be used only for operations that do not access data. For example, you
can use a local process to run an event-handling method or to control interface elements such
as floating windows.

You specify that a process is local in scope through its name. The name of local process must
start with a dollar sign ($).

Warning: If you attempt to access data from a local process, you access it though the main
process, risking conflicts with operations performed within that process.

4D Server: Using local processes on the Client side for operations that do not require data
access reserves more processing time for server-intensive tasks.

Record Locking Between Processes

A record is locked when another process has successfully loaded the record for modification. A
locked record can be loaded by another process, but cannot be modified. The record is
unlocked only in the process in which the record is being modified. A table must be in
read/write mode for a record to be loaded unlocked. For more information, refer to the Record
Locking section.

See Also
Methods, Project Methods, Variables.

1214 4D Language Reference

Count tasks Processes

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Count tasks → Integer

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Integer ← Number of open processes

(including kernel processes)

Description
Count tasks returns the number of processes open in 4D Client, 4D Server (stored procedures)
or in 4D Developer.

This number takes into account all processes, even those that are automatically managed by
4D. These include the Main process, Design process, Cache Manager process, Indexing process,
and Web Server process.

The number returned by Count tasks also takes into account processes that have been aborted.

Example
See the example for Process state and On Exit Database Method.

See Also
Count user processes, Count users, PROCESS PROPERTIES, Process state.

4D Language Reference 1215

Count user processes Processes

version 11.3 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Count user processes → Integer

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Integer ← Number of live processes

(excluding internal processes)

Description
Count user processes returns the current number of "live" processes in the 4D application
whose type is different from -25 (Internal Timer Process), -31 (Client Manager Process) and -15
(Server Interface Process). For more information about process types, please refer to the
PROCESS PROPERTIES command and to the Process Type constants theme.
The Count user processes function returns the number of processes opened directly or
indirectly by the user (processes for which the origin parameter returned by the PROCESS
PROPERTIES command is greater than or equal to 0).

Note: The "live" processes are processes whose status is neither aborted, nor does not exist (see
the Process state command).

See Also
Count tasks, Count users.

1216 4D Language Reference

Count users Processes

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Count users → Integer

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Integer ← Number of users connected to the server

Description
When it is called from a stored procedure on the server, the Count users command returns the
number of users connected to the server machine.

If the server is running at least one stored procedure and if Count users is called from another
context (client machine, Web method), the command returns the number of users +1.

In the case of a 4D single-user version , Count users returns 1.

See Also
Count tasks, Count user processes.

4D Language Reference 1217

Current process Processes

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Current process → Number

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Number ← Process number

Description
Current process returns the process reference number of the process within which this
command is called.

Example
See the examples for DELAY PROCESS and PROCESS PROPERTIES.

See Also
Process number, PROCESS PROPERTIES, Process state.

1218 4D Language Reference

DELAY PROCESS Processes

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DELAY PROCESS (process; duration)

Parameter Type Description

process Number → Process number
duration Number → Duration expressed in ticks

Description
DELAY PROCESS delays the execution of a process for a number of ticks (1 tick = 1/60th of a
second). During this period, process does not take any processing time. Even though the
execution of a process may be delayed, it is still in memory.

If the process is already delayed, this command delays it again. The parameter duration is not
added to the time remaining, but replaces it. Therefore pass zero (0) for duration if you no
longer want to delay a process.

If the process does not exist, the command does nothing.

Note: You cannot use this command to assign a stored procedure on the server machine from
a client machine (process<0).

Examples
1. See example in Record Locking.
2. See example for the command Process number.

See Also
HIDE PROCESS, PAUSE PROCESS.

4D Language Reference 1219

EXECUTE ON CLIENT Processes

version 6.5
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

EXECUTE ON CLIENT (clientName; methodName{; param}{; param2; ...; paramN})

Parameter Type Description

clientName String → 4D Client’s registered name
methodName String → Name of the method to execute
param → Method’s parameter(s)

Description
The EXECUTE ON CLIENT command forces the execution of the methodName method, with the
parameters param1... paramN, if necessary, on the registered 4D Client whose name is
clientName. 4D Client’s registered name is defined by the REGISTER CLIENT command.
This command can be called from a 4D Client or a stored method from 4D Server.

If the method requires one or more parameters, pass them after the name of the method.
The execution of the method on 4D Client is done in a process automatically created on the
client workstation, and its name will be the 4D Client’s registered name.

If this command is called many times in a row on the same 4D Client, the execution orders
will be stacked. Therefore, the methods will be treated one after another in asynchronous
mode. The more methods that are stacked, the bigger the workload is for the 4D Client. You
can know the state of the workload of each client by using the GET REGISTERED CLIENTS
command.

Note: The stacking of the execution orders cannot be modified or stopped unless 4D Client is
unregistered by using the UNREGISTER CLIENT command.

You can simultaneously execute the same method on many or all of the registered 4D Clients.
To do so, use the wildcard character (@) in the clientName parameter.

The OK system variable is equal to 1 if 4D Server has correctly received the execution request
of a method; however, this does not guarantee that the method has been properly executed by
4D Client.

1220 4D Language Reference

Examples
1. Let’s assume that you want to execute the “GenerateNums” method on the “Client1” client
station:

EXECUTE ON CLIENT("Client1";"GenerateNums";12;$a;"Text")

2. If you want all the clients to execute the “EmptyTemp” method:

EXECUTE ON CLIENT("@";"EmptyTemp")

3. Refer to the example of the REGISTER CLIENT command.

See Also
GET REGISTERED CLIENTS, REGISTER CLIENT, UNREGISTER CLIENT.

4D Language Reference 1221

Execute on server Processes

version 2004.3 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Execute on server (procedure; stack{; name{; param{; param2; ...; paramN}{; *}}}) → Number

Parameter Type Description

procedure String → Procedure to be executed within the process
stack Number → Stack size in bytes
name String → Name of the process created
param Expression → Parameter(s) to the procedure
* → Unique process

Function result Number ← Process number for newly created process

or already executing process

Description
The Execute on server command starts a new process on the Server machine (if it is called in
Client/Server) or on the same machine (if it is called in single-user) and returns the process
number for that process.

You use Execute on server to start a stored procedure. For more information about stored
procedures, see the section Stored Procedures in the 4D Server Reference manual.

If you call Execute on server on a Client machine, the command returns a negative process
number. If you call Execute on server on the Server machine, Execute on server returns a
positive process number. Note that calling New process on the Server machine does the same
thing as calling Execute on server.

If the process could not be created (for example, if there is not enough memory), Execute on
server returns zero (0) and an error is generated. You can catch this error using an error-
handling method installed using ON ERR CALL.

Process Method: In method, you pass the name of the process method for the new process.
After 4D has set up the context for the new process, it starts executing this method, which
therefore becomes the process method.

1222 4D Language Reference

Process Stack: In stack, you pass the amount of memory allocated for the stack of the process.
It is the space in memory used to “pile up” method calls, local variables, parameters in
subroutines, and stacked records. It is expressed in bytes; it is recommended to pass at least
64K (around 64,000 bytes), but you can pass more if the process can perform large chain calls
(subroutines calling subroutines in cascade). For example, you can pass 200K (around 200000
bytes), if necessary.

Note: The stack is NOT the total memory for the process. Processes share memory for records,
interprocess variables, and so on. A process also uses extra memory for storing its process
variables. The stack only holds local variables, method calls, parameters in subroutines and
stacked records.

Process Name: You pass the name of the new process in name. In single-user, this name will
appear in the list of processes of the Runtime Explorer and will be returned by the command
PROCESS PROPERTIES when applied to this new process. In Client/Server, this name will appear
in blue in the Stored Procedure list of the 4D Server main window.

A process name can be up to 31 characters long. You can omit this parameter; if you do so, the
name of the process will be the empty string.

Warning: Contrary to New Process, do not attempt to make a process local in scope by
prefixing its name with the dollar sign ($) while using Execute on server. This will work in
single-user, because Execute on server acts as New Process in this environment. On the other
hand, in Client/Server, this will generate an error.

Parameter to Process Method: Starting with version 6, you can pass parameters to the process
method. You can pass parameters in the same way as you would pass them to a subroutine.
However, there is a restriction—you cannot pass pointer expressions. Also, remember that
arrays cannot be passed as parameters to a method. Upon starting execution in the context of
the new process, the process method receives the parameters values in $1, $2, etc.

Note: If you pass parameters to the process method, you must pass the name parameter; it
cannot be omitted in this case.

The optional * parameter: Specifying this last parameter tells 4D to first check whether or not
a process with the name you passed in name is already running. If it is, 4D does not start a
new process and returns the process number of the process with that name.

4D Language Reference 1223

Example
The following example shows how importing data can be dramatically accelerated in
Client/Server. The Regular Import method listed below allows you to test how long it takes to
import records using the IMPORT TEXT command on the Client side:

` Regular Import Project Method

$vhDocRef:=Open document("")
If (OK=1)
CLOSE DOCUMENT($vhDocRef)
INPUT FORM([Table1];"Import")
$vhStartTime:=Current time
IMPORT TEXT([Table1];Document)
$vhEndTime:=Current time
ALERT("It took "+String(0+($vhEndTime-$vhStartTime))+" seconds.")
End if

With the regular import data, 4D Client performs the parsing of the text file, then, for each
record, create a new record, fills out the fields with the imported data and sends the record to
the Server machine so it can be added to the database. There are consequently many requests
going over the network. A way to optimize the operation is to use a stored procedure to do the
job locally on the Server machine. The Client machine loads the document into a BLOB, start
a stored procedure passing the BLOB as parameter. The stored procedure stores the BLOB into
a document on the server machine disk, then imports the document locally. The import data
is therefore performed locally at a single-user version-like speed because most the network
requests have been eliminated. Here is the CLIENT IMPORT project method. Executed on the
Client machine, it starts the SERVER IMPORT stored procedure listed just below:

` CLIENT IMPORT Project Method

` CLIENT IMPORT ( Pointer ; String )
` CLIENT IMPORT ( -> [Table] ; Input form )

C_POINTER($1)
C_STRING(31;$2)
C_TIME($vhDocRef)
C_BLOB($vxData)
C_LONGINT(spErrCode)

1224 4D Language Reference

 ` Select the document do be imported
$vhDocRef:=Open document("")
If (OK=1)
` If a document was selected, do not keep it open
CLOSE DOCUMENT($vhDocRef)
$vhStartTime:=Current time
` Try to load it in memory
DOCUMENT TO BLOB(Document;$vxData)
If (OK=1)
` If the document could be loaded in the BLOB,
` Start the stored procedure that will import the data on the server machine
$spProcessID:=Execute on server("SERVER IMPORT";32*1024;
"Server Import Services";Table($1);$2;$vxData)
` At this point, we no longer need the BLOB in this process
CLEAR VARIABLE($vxData)
` Wait for the completion of the operation performed by the stored procedure
Repeat
DELAY PROCESS(Current process;300)
GET PROCESS VARIABLE($spProcessID;spErrCode;spErrCode)
If (Undefined(spErrCode))
` Note: if the stored procedure has not initialized its own instance
` of the variable spErrCode, we may be returned an undefined variable
spErrCode:=1
End if
Until (spErrCode<=0)
` Tell the stored procedure that we acknowledge
spErrCode:=1
SET PROCESS VARIABLE($spProcessID;spErrCode;spErrCode)
$vhEndTime:=Current time
ALERT("It took "+String(0+($vhEndTime-$vhStartTime))+" seconds.")
Else
ALERT("There is not enough memory to load the document.")
End if
End if

4D Language Reference 1225

Here is the SERVER IMPORT project method executed as a stored procedure:

` SERVER IMPORT Project Method

` SERVER IMPORT ( Long ; String ; BLOB )
` SERVER IMPORT ( Table Number ; Input form ; Import Data )

C_LONGINT($1)
C_STRING(31;$2)
C_BLOB($3)
C_LONGINT(spErrCode)

` Operation is not finished yet, set spErrCode to 1

spErrCode:=1
$vpTable:=Table($1)
INPUT FORM($vpTable->;$2)
$vsDocName:="Import File "+String(1+Random)
DELETE DOCUMENT($vsDocName)
BLOB TO DOCUMENT($vsDocName;$3)
IMPORT TEXT($vpTable->;$vsDocName)
DELETE DOCUMENT($vsDocName)
` Operation is finished, set spErrCode to 0
spErrCode:=0
` Wait until the requester Client got the result back
Repeat
DELAY PROCESS(Current process;1)
Until (spErrCode>0)

Once these two project methods have been implemented in a database, you can perform a
“Stored Procedure-based” import data by, for instance, writing:

CLIENT IMPORT (->[Table1];"Import")

With some benchmarks you will discover that using this method you can import records up to
60 times faster than the regular import.

See Also
New process, Stored Procedures.

1226 4D Language Reference

GET REGISTERED CLIENTS Processes

version 6.5
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET REGISTERED CLIENTS (clientList; methods)

Parameter Type Description

clientList Text Array ← List of the saved 4D Clients
methods Longint Array ← List of the methods to be executed

Description
The GET REGISTERED CLIENTS command fills two arrays:

• clientLists contains the list of clients who were “registered” by using the REGISTER CLIENT
command.

• methods supplies the list of each client’s “workload”. The workload is the number of
methods that a 4D Client must still execute by calling the EXECUTE ON CLIENT command (for
more information, please refer to the description of the EXECUTE ON CLIENT command).

Note: If the operation was successful, the OK system variable is equal to 1.

Examples
1. Let’s assume that you want to obtain a list of all the registered clients and the methods that
remain to be executed:

ARRAY TEXT($clients;0)
ARRAY LONGINT($methods;0)
GET REGISTERED CLIENTS($clients;$methods)

2. Refer to the example of the REGISTER CLIENT command.

See Also
EXECUTE ON CLIENT, REGISTER CLIENT, UNREGISTER CLIENT.

4D Language Reference 1227

New process Processes

version 2004.3 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

New process (method; stack{; name{; param{; param2; ...; paramN}{; *}}}) → Number

Parameter Type Description

method String → Method to be executed within the process
stack Number → Stack size in bytes
name String → Name of the process created
param Expression → Parameter(s) to the method
* → Unique process

Function result Number ← Process number for newly created process

or already executing process

Description
The New process command starts a new process (on the same machine) and returns the
process number for that process.

If the process could not be created (for example, if there is not enough memory), New process
returns zero (0) and an error is generated. You can catch this error using an error-handling
method installed using ON ERR CALL.

Process Method: In method, you pass the name of the process method for the new process.
After 4D has set up the context for the new process, it starts executing this method, which
therefore becomes the process method.

Process Stack: In stack, you pass the amount of memory allocated for the stack of the process.
It is the space in memory used to “pile up” method calls, local variables, parameters in
subroutines, and stacked records. It is expressed in bytes; it is recommended to pass at least
64K (around 64,000 bytes), but you can pass more if the process can perform large chain calls
(subroutines calling subroutines in cascade). For example, you can pass 200K (around 200000
bytes), if necesary.

1228 4D Language Reference

Note: The stack is NOT the total memory for the process. Processes share memory for records,
interprocess variables, and so on. A process also uses extra memory for storing its process
variables. The stack contains various 4D informations ; the amount of information kept on the
stack depends on the number of nested methods calls the process will employ, the number of
forms that it will open before closing them and the number and size of local variables used in
each nested method call.

Process Name: You pass the name of the new process in name. This name will appear in the
list of processes of the Runtime Explorer and will be returned by the command PROCESS
PROPERTIES when applied to this new process. A process name can be up to 31 characters long.
You can omit this parameter; if you do so, the name of the process will be the empty string.
You can make a process local in scope by prefixing its name with the dollar sign ($).

Important: Remember that local processes should not access data in Client/Server.
Parameter to Process Method: Starting with version 6, you can pass parameters to the process
method. You can pass parameters in the same way as you would pass them to a subroutine.
However, there is a restriction—you cannot pass pointer expressions. Also, remember that
arrays cannot be passed as parameters to a method. Upon starting execution in the context of
the new process, the process method receives the parameters values in $1, $2, etc.

Note: If you pass parameters to the process method, you must pass the name parameter; it
cannot be omitted in this case.

The optional * parameter: Specifying this last parameter tells 4D to first check whether or not
a process with the name you passed in name is already running. If it is, 4D does not start a
new process and returns the process number of the process with that name.

Example
Given the following project method:

` ADD CUSTOMERS
SET MENU BAR (1)
Repeat
ADD RECORD([Customers];*)
Until (OK=0)

If you attach this project method to a custom menu item Menu Bar Editor window whose
Start a New Process property is set, 4D will automatically start a new process running that
method. The call SET MENU BAR(1) adds a menu bar to the new process. In the absence of any
window (that you could open with Open window), the call to ADD RECORD will automatically
open one.

4D Language Reference 1229

To be able to start this Add Customers process when you click on a button in a custom control
panel, you can write:

` bAddCustomers button object method

$vlProcessID:=New process("Add Customers";32*1024;"Adding Customers")

The button does the same thing as the custom menu item.

While choosing the menu item or clicking the button, if you want to start the process (if it
does not exist) or bring it to the front (if it is already running), you can create the method
START ADD CUSTOMERS:

` START ADD CUSTOMERS

$vlProcessID:=New process("Add Customers";64*1024;"Adding Customers";*)
If ($vlProcessID#0)
BRING TO FRONT ($vlProcessID)
End if

The object method of the bAddCustomers becomes:

` bAddCustomers button object method

START ADD CUSTOMERS

In the Menu Bar editor, you replace the method ADD CUSTOMERS with the method START
ADD CUSTOMERS, and you deselect the Start a New Process property for the menu item.

See Also
Execute on server, Methods, Processes, Project Methods, Variables.

1230 4D Language Reference

PAUSE PROCESS Processes

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

PAUSE PROCESS (process)

Parameter Type Description

process Number → Process number

Description
PAUSE PROCESS suspends the execution of process until it is reactivated by the RESUME
PROCESS command. During this period, process does not take any time on your machine.
Even though a process may be paused, the process is still in memory.

If process is already paused, PAUSE PROCESS does nothing. If the process has been delayed
using the DELAY PROCESS command, the process is paused. RESUME PROCESS resumes the
process immediately.

While process execution is suspended, the windows belonging to this process are not
enterable. In this case, to avoid confusing the user, consider hiding the process. If process does
not exist, the command does nothing.

Warning: Use PAUSE PROCESS only in processes that you have started. PAUSE PROCESS will not
affect the Main process.

Note: You cannot use this command to assign a stored procedure on the server machine from
a client machine (process<0).

See Also
DELAY PROCESS, HIDE PROCESS, RESUME PROCESS.

4D Language Reference 1231

Process aborted Processes

version 6.5
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Process aborted → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Boolean ← True = the process is about to be aborted,

False = the process is not about to be aborted

Description
The Process aborted command returns True if the process in which it is called is about to be
interrupted unexpectedly, which means that the execution of the command was unable to
reach its “normal” completion. For example, this can occur after calling QUIT 4D.

Example
This command can be used as a particular type of programming on the Web server, only in
compiled mode. When you use a method to send Web pages by using a loop like While...End
while (see example), the mechanism of the Web server doesn’t allow you to stop the loop in
case of a timeout (end of the inactivity period authorized) on a Web browser. If the Web
process is not closed, a context is therefore still in use.
The Process aborted command, placed in the initial test of the loop, will return True in case of
a timeout. The loop can then be interrupted and the process can be aborted.
Here is a method that can be used to send HTML pages. In compiled mode, this loop cannot
be interrupted in case of a timeout:

While (True)
SEND HTML FILE (HTMLFile)
End while

The Process aborted command allows you to use the same type of method, while still being
able to exit the loop and abort the Web process in case of a timeout:

While (Not (Process aborted))

SEND HTML FILE (HTMLFile)
End while

1232 4D Language Reference

Process number Processes

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Process number (name{; *}) → Number

Parameter Type Description

name String → Name of process for which to retrieve
the process number
* → Return the process number from the server

Function result Number ← Process number

Description
Process number returns the number of the process whose name you pass in name. If no process
is found, Process number returns 0.

The optional parameter * allows you to retrieve, from 4D Client, the process ID of a process
that is executed on the server (a stored procedure). In this case, the returned value is negative.
This option is especially useful when using the GET PROCESS VARIABLE and SET PROCESS
VARIABLE commands. Please refer to the descriptions of these commands for details.

If the command is executed with the * parameter from a process on the server machine, the
returned value is positive.

Example
You create a custom floating window, run in a separate process, in which you implement your
own tools to interact with the Design environment. For example, when selecting an item in a
hierarchical list of keywords, you want to paste some text into the frontmost window of the
Design environment. To do so, you can use the pasteboard, but the pasting event must occur
within the Design process. The following small function returns the process number of the
Design process (if running):

` Design process number Project Method

` Design process number -> LongInt
` Design process number -> Design process number

$0:=Process number("Design Process")

` Note: This can break in the future if the process name changes

4D Language Reference 1233

Using this function, the following project method pastes the text received as parameter to the
frontmost window of the Design environment (if applicable):

` PASTE TEXT TO DESIGN Project Method

` PASTE TEXT TO DESIGN ( Text )
` PASTE TEXT TO DESIGN ( Text to Paste in frontmost Design window )

C_TEXT($1)
C_LONGINT($vlDesignPID;$vlCount)

$vlDesignPID:=Design process number

If ($vlDesignPID # 0)
` Put the text into the pasteboard
SET TEXT TO PASTEBOARD($1)
` Post a Ctrl-V / Command-V event
POST KEY(Character code ("v");Command key mask;$vlDesignPID)
` Call repeatedly DELAY PROCESS so the scheduler gets a chance
` to pass over the event to the Design process
For ($vlCount;1;5)
DELAY PROCESS(Current process;1)
End for
End if

See Also
GET PROCESS VARIABLE, PROCESS PROPERTIES, Process state, SET PROCESS VARIABLE.

1234 4D Language Reference

 Edited by Foxit Reader
Copyright(C) by Foxit Software Company,2005-2008
For Evaluation Only.
PROCESS PROPERTIES Processes

version 11.3 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

PROCESS PROPERTIES (process; procName; procState; procTime{; procVisible{; uniqueID{; origin}}})

Parameter Type Description

process Number → Process number
procName String ← Process name
procState Number ← Process state
procTime Number ← Cumulative time taken by process in ticks
procVisible Boolean ← Visible (TRUE) or Hidden (FALSE)
uniqueID Integer ← Unique process number
origin Longint ← Origin of the process

Description
The PROCESS PROPERTIES command returns information about the process whose process
number you pass in process.
After the call:
• procName returns the name of the process. Some things to note about the process name:
- If the process was started from the Execute Method dialog box (with the New Process option
selected), its name is “P_” followed by a number.
- If the process was started from a custom menu item whose Start a New Process property is
checked, the name of the process is “M_” or “ML_” followed by a number.
- If the process has been aborted (and its “slot” not reused yet), the name of the process is still
returned. To detect if a process is aborted, test procState=-1 (see below).
• procState returns the state of the process at the moment of the call. This parameter can
return one of the values provided by the following predefined constants:
Constant Type Value
Aborted Long Integer -1
Delayed Long Integer 1
Does not exist Long Integer -100
Executing Long Integer 0
Hidden modal dialog Long Integer 6
Paused Long Integer 5
Waiting for input output Long Integer 3
Waiting for internal flag Long Integer 4
Waiting for user event Long Integer 2

4D Language Reference 1235

• procTime returns the cumulative time that the process has used since it started, in ticks
(1/60th of a second) .

• procVisible, if specified, returns TRUE if the process is visible, FALSE if hidden.

• uniqueID, if specified, returns the unique process number. Actually, each process has
attributed a process number to it as well as a unique process number per session. The unique
number allows you to differentiate between two processes or two process sessions. It
corresponds to the process number having been started during 4D’s session.

• origin, if specified, returns a value that describes the origin of the process. 4D offers the
following predefined constants (in the "Process Type" theme):

Constant Type Value

Client Manager Process Longint -31
Monitor Process Longint -26
Internal Timer Process Longint -25
SQL Method Execution Process Longint -24
MSC Process Longint -22
Restore Process Longint -21
Log File Process Longint -20
Backup Process Longint -19
Internal 4D Server Process Longint -18
Method editor macro Process Longint -17
On Exit Process Longint -16
Server Interface Process Longint -15
Execute on Client Process Longint -14
Web server Process Longint -13
Web Process on 4D Client Longint -12
Web Process with Context Longint -11
Other 4D Process Longint -10
External Task Longint -9
Event Manager Longint -8
Apple Event Manager Longint -7
Serial Port Manager Longint -6
Indexing Process Longint -5
Cache Manager Longint -4
Web Process with no Context Longint -3
Design Process Longint -2
Main Process Longint -1
None Longint 0

1236 4D Language Reference

Execute on Server Process Longint 1
Created from Menu Command Longint 2
Created from execution dialog Longint 3
Other User Process Longint 4

Note: 4D’s internal processes return a negative value and the processes generated by the user
return a positive value.

If the process does not exist, which means you did not pass a number in the range 1 to Count
tasks, PROCESS PROPERTIES leaves the variable parameters unchanged.

Examples
1. The following example returns the name, state, and time taken in the variables vName,
vState, and vTimeSpent for the current process:

C_STRING(80; vName) ` Initialize the variables

C_INTEGER(vState)
C_INTEGER(vTime)
PROCESS PROPERTIES (Current process; vName; vState; vTimeSpent)

2. See example for On Exit Database Method.

See Also
Count tasks, Process state.

4D Language Reference 1237

Process state Processes

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Process state (process) → Number

Parameter Type Description

process Number → Process number

Function result Number ← State of the process

Description
The Process state command returns the state of the process whose number you pass in process.

The function result can be one of the values provided by the following predefined constants:

Constant Type Value

Aborted Long Integer -1
Delayed Long Integer 1
Does not exist Long Integer -100
Executing Long Integer 0
Hidden modal dialog Long Integer 6
Paused Long Integer 5
Waiting for input output Long Integer 3
Waiting for internal flag Long Integer 4
Waiting for user event Long Integer 2

If the process does not exist (which means you did not pass a number in the range 1 to Count
tasks), Process state returns Does not exist (-100).

Example
The following example puts the name and process reference number for each process into the
asProcName and aiProcNum arrays. The method checks to see if the process has been aborted.
In this case, the process name and number are not added to the arrays:

$vlNbTasks:=Count tasks
ARRAY STRING(31;asProcName; $vlNbTasks)
ARRAY INTEGER(aiProcNum; $vlNbTasks)
$vlActualCount:=0

1238 4D Language Reference

 For ($vlProcess;1; $vlNbTasks)
If (Process state($vlProcess)>=Executing)
$vlActualCount:=$vlActualCount+1
PROCESS PROPERTIES($vlProcess; asProcName{$vlActualCount};$vlState;$vlTime)
aiProcNum{$vlActualCount}:=$vlProcess
End if
End for
` Eliminate unused extra elements
ARRAY STRING(31;asProcName;$vlActualCount)
ARRAY INTEGER(aiProcNum;$vlActualCount)

See Also
Count tasks, PROCESS PROPERTIES.

4D Language Reference 1239

REGISTER CLIENT Processes

version 11.3 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

REGISTER CLIENT (clientName{; period}{; *})

Parameter Type Description

clientName String → Name of the 4D client session
period Longint → ***Ignored since version 11.3***
* * → Local process

Description
The REGISTER CLIENT command “registers” a 4D client station with the name specified in
clientName on 4D Server, so as to allow other clients or eventually 4D Server (by using stored
methods) to execute methods on it by using the EXECUTE ON CLIENT command. Once it is
registered, a 4D client can then execute one or more methods for other clients.

Notes:
• You can also automatically register each client station that connects to 4D Server by using
the “Register Clients at Startup...” option in the Preferences dialog box.
• If this command is used with 4D in local mode, it has no effect.
• More than one 4D client station can have the same registered name.

When this command is executed, a process, named clientName, is created on the client station.
This process can only be aborted by the UNREGISTER CLIENT command.
If you pass the optional * parameter, the created process is local. 4D will automatically add the
dollar sign ($) at the beginning of the process name. Otherwise, the process is global.

Compatibility Note: Since version 11.3 of 4D, the server/client communication mechanisms
have been optimized. Now the server sends execution requests directly to the registered clients
when necessary (technology "push"). The previous principle where clients queried the server
periodically is no longer used. The period parameter is ignored if it is passed.

Once the command is executed, it is not possible to modify a 4D client’s name on the fly. To
do so, you must call the UNREGISTER CLIENT command, then the REGISTER CLIENT command.

1240 4D Language Reference

Examples
In the following example, we are going to create a small messaging system that allows the
client workstations to communicate between themselves.
1. This method, Registration, allows you to register a 4D client and to keep it ready to receive a
message from another 4D client:

`You must unregister before registering under another name

UNREGISTER CLIENT
Repeat
vPseudoName:=Request("Enter your name:";"User";"OK";"Cancel")
Until ((OK=0) | (vPseudoName # ""))
If (OK=0)
...` Don’t do anything
Else
REGISTER CLIENT(vPseudoName)
End if

2. The following instruction allows you to get a list of the registered clients. It can be placed in
the On Startup Database Method:

PrClientList:=New process("4D Client List";32000;"List of registered clients")

3. The method 4D Client List allows you to recuperate all the registered 4D clients and those
that can receive messages:

If (Application type=4D Remote Mode)

` the code below is only valid in client-server mode
$Ref:=Open window(100;100;300;400;-(Palette window+Has window title);
"List of registered clients")
Repeat
GET REGISTERED CLIENTS($ClientList;$ListeCharge)
`Retrieve the registered clients in $ClientList
ERASE WINDOW($Ref)
GOTO XY(0;0)
For ($p;1;Size of array($ClientList))
MESSAGE($ClientList{$p}+Char(Carriage return))
End for
`Display each second
DELAY PROCESS(Current process;60)
Until (False) ` Infinite loop
End if

4D Language Reference 1241

4. The following method allows you to send a message to another registered 4D client. It calls
the Display_Message method (see below).

$Addressee:=Request("Addressee of the message:";"")

` Enter the name of the people visible in the window generated by the
` On Startup database method
If (OK # 0)
$Message:=Request("Message:") ` message
If (OK # 0)
EXECUTE ON CLIENT($Addressee;"Display_Message";$Message) ` Send message
End if
End if

5. Here is the Display_Message method:

C_TEXT($1)
ALERT($1)

6. Finally, this method allows a client station to no longer be visible by the other 4D clients
and to no longer receive messages:

UNREGISTER CLIENT

See Also
EXECUTE ON CLIENT, GET REGISTERED CLIENTS, UNREGISTER CLIENT.

System Variables and Sets

If the 4D client is correctly registered, the OK system variable is equal to 1. If the 4D client was
already registered, the command doesn’t do anything and OK is equal to 0.

1242 4D Language Reference

RESUME PROCESS Processes

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

RESUME PROCESS (process)

Parameter Type Description

process Number → Process number

Description
RESUME PROCESS resumes a process whose execution has been paused or delayed. If process is
not paused or delayed, RESUME PROCESS does nothing.

If process has been delayed before, see the PAUSE PROCESS or DELAY PROCESS commands. If
process does not exist, the command does nothing.

Note: You cannot use this command to assign a stored procedure on the server machine from
a client machine (process<0).

See Also
DELAY PROCESS, PAUSE PROCESS.

4D Language Reference 1243

UNREGISTER CLIENT Processes

version 6.5
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

UNREGISTER CLIENT

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
The UNREGISTER CLIENT command “unregisters” a 4D client station. The client must have
already been registered by the REGISTER CLIENT command.

Note: A 4D client is automatically unregistered when the user quits the application.

If the client workstation was not previously registered or if the command was executed on 4D
in local mode, the command has no effect.

If the client is correctly unregistered, the OK system variable is equal to 1. If the client wasn’t
registered, OK is equal to 0.

Example
Refer to the example for the REGISTER CLIENT command.

See Also
EXECUTE ON CLIENT, GET REGISTERED CLIENTS, REGISTER CLIENT.

System Variables and Sets

If the client is correctly unregistered, the OK system variable is set to 1. If the client was not
registered, OK is set to 0.

1244 4D Language Reference

38
______________________
Queries

4D Language Reference 1245

1246 4D Language Reference
DESCRIBE QUERY EXECUTION Queries

version 11.1
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DESCRIBE QUERY EXECUTION (status)

Parameter Type Description

status Boolean → True=Enable internal query analysis,
False=Disable internal query analysis

Description
The DESCRIBE QUERY EXECUTION command can be used to enable or disable the query
analysis mode for the current process. The command takes into account both queries
carried out via the 4D language or by SQL.

Callingthe command with the status parameter set to True enables the query analysis mode.
In this mode, the 4D engine records internally two specific pieces of information for each
subsequent query carried out on the data:
• A detailed internal description of the query just before its execution, in other words, what
was planned to be executed (the query plan),
• A detailed internal description of the query that was actually executed (the query path).

The information recorded includes the type of query (indexed, sequential), the number of
records found and the time needed for every query criteria to be executed. Y ou can then
read this information using the new Get Last Query Plan and Get Last Query Path commands.

Usually, the description of the query plan and its path are the same, but they may
nevertheless differ because 4D might implement dynamic optimizations during the query
execution in order to improve performance. For example, an indexed query may be
converted dynamically into a sequential query if the 4D engine estimates that this might
be faster — this is sometimes the case, more particularly, when the number of records being
queries is low.

Pass False in the status parameter when you no longer need to analyze queries. The query
analysis mode can slow down the application.

4D Language Reference 1247

Example
The following example illustrates the type of information obtained using these commands
in the case of an SQL query:

C_TEXT($vResultPlan;$vResultPath)
ARRAY TEXT(aTitles;0)
ARRAY TEXT(aDirectors;0)
DESCRIBE QUERY EXECUTION(True) `analysis mode
Begin SQL
SELECT ACTORS.FirstName, CITIES.City_Name
FROM ACTORS, CITIES
WHERE ACTORS.Birth_City_ID=CITIES.City_ID
ORDER BY 1
INTO :aTitles, :aDirectors;
End SQL
$vResultPlan:=Get Last Query Plan(Description in Text Format)
$vResultPath:=Get Last Query Path(Description in Text Format)
DESCRIBE QUERY EXECUTION(False) `End analysis mode

After this code is executed, $vResultPlan and $vResultPath contain descriptions of the queries
carried out, for example:

$vResultPlan:
[Join] : ACTORS.Birth_City_ID = CITIES.City_ID
$vResultPath:
And
[Merge] : ACTORS with CITIES
[Join] : ACTORS.Birth_City_ID = CITIES.City_ID (1227 records found in 13 ms)
→ 1227 records found in 13 ms
→ 1227 records found in 14 ms
If the Description in XML format constant is passed to the Get Last Query Path command,
$vResultPath contains the description of the query expressed in XML:
$vResultPath:
<QueryExecution>
<steps description="And" time="0" recordsfounds="1227">
<steps description="[Merge] : ACTORS with CITIES" time="13"
recordsfounds="1227">
<steps description="[Join] : ACTORS.Birth_City_ID =CITIES.City_ID"
time="13" recordsfounds="1227"/>
</steps>
</steps>
</QueryExecution>
See Also
Get Last Query Path, Get Last Query Plan.

1248 4D Language Reference

Find in field Queries

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Find in field (targetField; value) → Longint

Parameter Type Description

targetField Field → Field on which to execute the search
value Field | Variable → Value to search
← Value found

Function result Longint ← Number of the record found or

-1 if no record was found

Description
The Find in field command returns the number of the first record whose targetField field is
equal to value.
If no records are found, Find in field returns -1.
After calling this command, value contains the value found. This feature allows you to execute
searches using the wildcard character (“@”) on Alpha fields and then retrieve the value found.
This command doesn’t modify the current selection or the current record.
It is fast and particularly useful to avoid creating double entries during data entry.

Example
In an audio CD database, during data entry let’s assume that you want to verify the singer’s
name to see if it already exists in the database. Because homonyms can exist, you don’t want
the [Singer]Name field to be unique. Therefore, in the input form, you can write the following
code in the [Singer]Name field’s object method:

If (Form event=On Data Change)

$RecNum:=Find in field([Singer]Name;[Singer]Name)
If ($RecNum # -1) ` If this name has already been entered
CONFIRM("A singer with the same already exists. Do you want to see the record?";
"Yes";"No")
If (OK=1)
GOTO RECORD([Singer];$RecNum)
End if
End if
End if

4D Language Reference 1249

Get Last Query Path Queries

version 11.1
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get Last Query Path (descFormat) → String

Parameter Type Description

descFormat Longint → Description format (Text or XML)

Function result String ← Description of last executed query path

Description
The Get Last Query Path command returns the detailed internal description of the actual
path of the last query carried out on the data. For more information about query
descriptions, please refer to the documentation of the DESCRIBE QUERY EXECUTION
command.

This description is returned in Text or XML format depending on the value passed in the
descFormat parameter. You can pass one of the following constants, found in the “Queries”
theme:
Constant Type Value
Description in Text Format Longint 0
Description in XML Format Longint 1

This command returns a significant value if the DESCRIBE QUERY EXECUTION command has
been executed during the session.

The description of the last query path can be compared to the description of the query plan
provided for the last query (obtained using the Get Last Query Plan command) for
optimization purposes.

See Also
DESCRIBE QUERY EXECUTION, Get Last Query Plan.

1250 4D Language Reference

Get Last Query Plan Queries

version 11.1
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get Last Query Plan (descFormat) → String

Parameter Type Description

descFormat Longint → Description format (Text or XML)

Function result String ← Description of last executed query plan

Description
The Get Last Query Plan command returns the detailed internal description of the query
plan for the last query carried out on the data. For more information about query
descriptions, please refer to the documentation of the DESCRIBE QUERY EXECUTION
command.

This description is returned in Text or XML format depending on the value passed in the
descFormat parameter. You can pass one of the following constants, found in the “Queries”
theme:
Constant Type Value
Description in Text Format Longint 0
Description in XML Format Longint 1

This command returns a significant value if the DESCRIBE QUERY EXECUTION command has
been executed during the session.

The description of the last query plan can be compared to the description of the actual path
of the last query (obtained using the Get Last Query Path command) for optimization
purposes.

See Also
DESCRIBE QUERY EXECUTION, Get Last Query Path.

4D Language Reference 1251

ORDER BY Queries

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

ORDER BY ({aTable}{; aField}{; > or <}{; aField2; > or <2; ...; aFieldN; > or <N}{; *})

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table for which to order selected records, or
Default table, if omitted
aField Field → Field on which to set the order for each level
> or < → Ordering direction for each level:
> to order in ascending order, or
< to order in descending order
* → Continue order flag

Description
ORDER BY sorts (reorders) the records of the current selection of aTable for the current process.
After the sort has been completed, the new first record of the selection becomes the current
record.

If you omit the aTable parameter, the command applies to the default table. If no default table
has been set, an error occurs.

If you do not specify the aField, the > or < or the * parameters, ORDER BY displays the Order By
editor for aTable. The Order By editor is shown here:

1252 4D Language Reference

For more information about using the Order By editor, refer to the 4D Design Reference manual.

The user builds the sort, then clicks the Sort button to perform the sort. If the sort is
performed without interruption, the OK variable is set to 1. If the user clicks Cancel, the
ORDER BY terminates with no sort actually performed, and sets the OK variable to 0 (zero).

Examples
1. The following line displays the Order By editor for the [Products] table:

ORDER BY([Products])

2. The following line displays the Order By editor for the default table (if it has been set):

ORDER BY

If you specify the aField and > or < parameters, the standard Order By editor is not presented
and the sort is defined programmatically. You can sort the selection on one level or on several
levels. For each sort level, you specify a field in aField and the sorting order in > or <. If you
pass the “greater than” symbol (>), the order is ascending. If you pass the “less than” symbol
(<), the order is descending.

Examples
3. The following line orders the selection of [Products] by name in ascending order:

ORDER BY([Products];[Products]Name;>)

4. The following line orders the selection of [Products] by name in descending order:

ORDER BY([Products];[Products]Name;<)

5. The following line orders the selection of [Products] by type and price in ascending order for
both levels:

ORDER BY([Products];[Products]Type;>;[Products]Price;>)

6. The following line orders the selection of [Products] by type and price in descending order
for both levels:

ORDER BY([Products];[Products]Type;<;[Products]Price;<)

4D Language Reference 1253

7. The following line orders the selection of [Products] by type in ascending order and by price
in descending order:

ORDER BY([Products];[Products]Type;>;[Products]Price;<)

8. The following line orders the selection of [Products] by type in descending order and by
price in ascending order:

ORDER BY([Products];[Products]Type;<;[Products]Price;>)

If you omit the sorting order parameter > or <, ascending order is the default.

Example
9. The following line orders the selection of [Products] by name in ascending order:

ORDER BY([Products];[Products]Name)

If only one field is specified (one level sort) and it is indexed, the index is used for the order. If
the field is not indexed or if there is more than one field, the order is performed sequentially
(except in the case of composite indexes). The field may belong to the (selection’s) table being
reordered or to a One table related to aTable with an automatic or manual relation. In this
case, the sort is always sequential.
If the sorted fields are included in a composite index, ORDER BY uses the index for the order.

Examples
10. The following line performs an indexed sort if [Products]Name is indexed:

ORDER BY([Products];[Products]Name;>)

11. The following line performs a sequential sort, whether or not the fields are indexed:

ORDER BY([Products];[Products]Type;>;[Products]Price;>)

12. The following line performs a sequential sort using a related field:

ORDER BY([Invoices];[Companies]Name;>) ` Invoices are sorted alphabetically on the

Company name field

1254 4D Language Reference

13. The following example carries out an indexed sort on two levels if a [Contacts]LastName +
[Contacts]FirstName composite index has been specified in the database:

ORDER BY([Contacts];[Contacts]LastName ;> ;[Contacts]FirstName ;>)

For multiple sorts (sorts on multiple fields), you can call ORDER BY as many times as necessary
and specify the optional * parameter, except for the last ORDER BY call, which starts the actual
sort operation. This feature is useful for multiple sorts management in customized user
interfaces.
Warning: with this syntax, you can pass only one sort level (field) per ORDER BY call.

Example
14. In an Output form displayed in the Application environment, you allow the users to order
a column in ascending order by simply clicking in the column header.
If the user holds the Shift key down while clicking in other column headers, the sort is
performed on several levels:

Each column header contains a highlight button attached with the following object method:

MULTILEVEL (->[CDs]Title) `Title column header button

4D Language Reference 1255

Each button calls the MULTILEVEL project method with a pointer to the corresponding
column field. The MULTILEVEL project method is the following:

` MULTILEVEL Project Method

` MULTILEVEL (Pointer)
` MULTILEVEL (->[Table]Field)

C_POINTER($1)  `Sort level (field)

C_LONGINT($lLevelNb)

`Getting sorting levels

If (Not(Shift down))  `Simple sort (one-level)
ARRAY POINTER(aPtrSortField;1)
aPtrSortField{1}:=$1
Else
$lLevelNb:=Find in array(aPtrSortField;$1)  `Is this field already sorted?
If ($lLevelNb<0)  `If not
INSERT IN ARRAY(aPtrSortField;Size of array(aPtrSortField)+1;1)
aPtrSortField{Size of array(aPtrSortField)}:=$1
End if
End if
`Performing the sort
$lLevelNb:=Size of array(aPtrSortField)
If ($lLevelNb>0)  `There is at least one order level
For ($i;1;$lLevelNb)
ORDER BY([CDs];(aPtrSortField{$i})->;>;*)  `Building sort definition
End for
ORDER BY([CDs])  `No * ends the sort definition and starts the actual sort operation
End if

No matter what way a sort has been defined, if the actual sort operation is going to take some
time to be performed, 4D automatically displays a message containing a progress
thermometer. These messages can be turned on and off by using the commands MESSAGES ON
and MESSAGES OFF. If the progress thermometer is displayed, the user can click the Stop
button to interrupt the sort. If the sort is completed, OK is set to 1. Otherwise, if the sort is
interrupted, OK is set to 0 (zero).

See Also
ORDER BY FORMULA.

1256 4D Language Reference

ORDER BY FORMULA Queries

version 11.2 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

ORDER BY FORMULA (aTable{; expression{; > or <}}{; expression2; > or <2; ...; expressionN;

> or <N})

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table for which to order selected records
expression → Expression on which to set the order for each level
(can be of type Alphanumeric, Real, Integer,
Long Integer, Date, Time or Boolean)
> or < → Ordering direction for each level:
> to order in ascending order, or
< to order in descending order

Description
ORDER BY FORMULA sorts (reorders) the records of the current selection of aTable for the
current process. After the sort has been completed, the new first record of the selection
becomes the current record.

Note that you must specify aTable. You cannot use a default table.

You can sort the selection on one level or on several levels. For each sort level, you specify a
expression in expression and the sorting order in > or <. If you pass the “greater than” symbol
(>), the order is ascending. If you pass the “less than” symbol (<), the order is descending. If
you do not specify the sorting order, ascending order is the default.

The parameter expression can be of type Alphanumeric, Real, Integer, Long Integer, Date, Time
or Boolean.

No matter what way a sort has been defined, if the actual sort operation is going to take some
time to be performed, 4D automatically displays a message containing a progress
thermometer. These messages can be turned on and off by using the commands MESSAGES ON
and MESSAGES OFF. If the progress thermometer is displayed, the user can click the Stop
button to interrupt the sort. If the sort is completed, OK is set to 1. Otherwise, if the sort is
interrupted, OK is set to 0 (zero).

4D Language Reference 1257

4D Server: Beginning with version 11 of 4D Server, this command is executed on the server,
which optimizes its execution. Note that when variables are called directly in the expression,
the sort is calculated with the value of the variable on the client machine.
On the other hand, this principle does not apply for formulas using methods that, themselves,
call variables (the values of the variables are evaluated on the server). In this context, it may be
advisable to use the "Execute on server" method attribute that allows a method to be executed
on the server while passing parameters (variables) to it (see the Design Reference manual).
In previous versions of 4D Server, this command was executed on the client machines. For
compatibility's sake, this functioning is maintained in databases converted to version 11. A
compatibility preference and a selector of the SET DATABASE PARAMETER command can
nevertheless be used to adopt the functioning of version 11 (execution on the server) in these
databases.

Example
This example orders the records of the [People] table in descending order, based on the length
of each person’s last name. The record for the person with the longest last name will be first in
the current selection:

ORDER BY FORMULA ([People]; Length([People]Last Name);<)

See Also
ORDER BY.

1258 4D Language Reference

QUERY Queries

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QUERY ({aTable}{; queryArgument{; *}})

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table for which to return a selection of records, or
Default table, if omitted
queryArgument → Query argument
* → Continue query flag

Description
QUERY looks for records matching the criteria specified in queryArgument and returns a
selection of records for aTable. QUERY changes the current selection of aTable for the current
process and makes the first record of the new selection the current record.

If the aTable parameter is omitted, the command applies to the default table. If no default
table has been set, an error occurs.

If you do not specify queryArgument or the * parameters, QUERY displays the Query editor for
aTable (except when it is the last row of a multiple query, see example 2):

4D Language Reference 1259

For more information about using the Query Editor, refer to the 4D Design Reference manual.

The user builds the query, then clicks the Query button or chooses Query in selection to
perform the query. If the query is performed without interruption, the OK variable is set to 1.
If the user clicks Cancel, the QUERY terminates with no query actually performed, and sets the
OK variable to 0 (zero).

Examples
1. The following line displays the Query editor for the [Products] table:

QUERY([Products])

2. The following line displays the Query editor for the default table (if it has been set)

QUERY

If you specify the queryArgument parameter, the standard Query editor is not presented and
the query is defined programmatically. For simple queries (search on only one field) you call
QUERY once with queryArgument. For multiple queries (search on multiple fields or with
multiple conditions), you call QUERY as many times as necessary with queryArgument, and you
specify the optional * parameter, except for the last QUERY call, which starts the actual query
operation. The queryArgument parameter is described further in this section.

Examples
3. The following line looks for the [People] whose name starts with an “a”:

QUERY([People];[People]Last name="a@")

4. The following line looks for the [People] whose name starts with “a” or “b”:

QUERY([People];[People]Name="a@";*) ` * indicates that there are further search criteria

` No * ends the query definition and starts the actual query operation
QUERY([People]; |;[People]Name="b@")

Note: The interpretation of @ characters in queries can be modified via an option in the
Preferences. For more information, please refer to the Comparison Operators section.

Specifying the Query Argument

The queryArgument parameter uses the following syntax:

{ conjunction ; } field comparator value

1260 4D Language Reference

• The conjunction is used to join QUERY calls when defining multiple queries. The
conjunctions available are the same as those in the Query editor:

Conjunction Symbol to use with QUERY

AND &
OR |
Except #

The conjunction is optional and not used for the first QUERY call of a multiple query, or if the
query is a simple query. If you omit it within a multiply query, AND (&) is used by default.

• The field is the field to query. The field may belong to another table if it belongs to a One
table related to aTable with an automatic or manual relation.

• The comparator is the comparison that is made between field and value. The comparator is
one of the symbols shown here:

Comparison Symbol to use with QUERY

Equal to =
Not equal to #
Less than <
Greater than >
Less than or equal to <=
Greater than or equal to >=
Contains keyword %

Note: It is also possible to specify the comparison operator as an alphanumeric expression

instead of a symbol. In this case, it is mandatory to use semi-colons in order to separate the
items of the query string. This means that it is possible, for example, to create configurable
query sequences by varying the comparison operator, or to build custom user query interfaces.
Please refer to example 19.

• The value is the data against which field will be compared. The value can be any expression
that evaluates to the same data type as field. The value is evaluated once, at the beginning of
the query. The value is not evaluated for each record. To query for a string contained in a
string (a “contains” query), use the wildcard symbol (@) in value.
Searching by keywords is only available with Alpha or Text type fields. For more information
about this type of query, please refer to the Comparison Operators section.

4D Language Reference 1261

Here are the rules for building multiple queries:
• The first query argument must not contain a conjunction.
• Each successive query argument can begin with a conjunction. If you omit it, the AND (&)
operator is used by default.
• The first query and every other query, except the last, must use the * parameter.
• To perform the query, do not specify the * parameter in the last QUERY command.
Alternatively, you may execute the QUERY command without any parameters other than the
table (the Query editor is not shown; instead, the multiple query you just defined is
performed).

Note: Each table maintains its own current built query. This means that you can create
multiple built queries simultaneously, one for each table. You must use the aTable parameter
or set the default table to specify which table to use.

No matter which way a query has been defined:

• If the actual query operation is going to take some time to be performed, 4D automatically
displays a message containing a progress thermometer. These messages can be turned on and
off by using the commands MESSAGES ON and MESSAGES OFF. If the progress thermometer is
displayed, the user can click on the Stop button to interrupt the query. If the query is
completed, OK is set to 1. Otherwise, if the query is interrupted, OK is set to 0 (zero).

• If any indexed fields are specified, the query is optimized every time that it is possible
(indexed fields are searched first) resulting in a query that takes the least amount of time
possible. The command makes use of composite indexes for queries using the AND (&).

Examples
5. The following command finds the records for all the people named Smith:

QUERY([People];[People]Last Name="Smith")

Note: If the Last Name field were indexed, the QUERY command would automatically use the
index for a fast query.

Reminder: This query will find records like “Smith”, “smith”,“SMITH”, etc. To distinguish
lowercase from uppercase, perform additional queries using the character codes.

6. The following example finds the records for all people named John Smith. The Last Name
field is indexed. The First Name field is not indexed.

QUERY ([People]; [People]Last Name = "smith"; *) ` Find every person named Smith
QUERY ([People]; &; [People]First Name = "john") ` with John as first name

1262 4D Language Reference

When the query is performed, it quickly does an indexed search on Last Name and reduces the
selection of records to those of people named Smith. The query then sequentially searches on
First Name in this selection of records.

Note: This query is particularly optimized if the database contains a composite index
including the [People]Last Name+[People]First Name fields. In this case, the command takes
advantage of the index and the query is completely indexed.

7. The following example finds the records of people named Smith or Jones. The Last Name
field is indexed.

QUERY ([People]; [People]Last Name="smith"; *) ` Find every person named Smith…

QUERY ([People]; | ; [People]Last Name="jones") ` ...or Jones

The QUERY command uses the Last Name index for both queries. The two queries are
performed, and their results put into internal sets that are eventually combined using a union.

8. The following example finds the records for people who do not have a company name. It
does this by finding entries with empty fields (the empty string).

QUERY ([People]; [People]Company="") ` Find every person with no company

9. The following example finds the record for every person whose last name is Smith and who
works for a company based in New York. The second query uses a field from another table.
This query can be done because the [People] table is related to the [Company] table with a
many to one relation:

QUERY ([People]; [People]Last Name = "smith"; *) ` Find every person named Smith…
QUERY ([People]; & ; [Company]State = "NY") ` ... who works for a company based in NY

10. The following example finds the record for every person whose name falls between A
(included) and M (included):

QUERY ([People]; [People]Name < "n") ` Find every person from A to M

11. The following example finds the records for all the people living in the San Francisco or
Los Angeles areas (ZIP codes beginning with 94 or 90):

QUERY ([People]; [People]ZIP Code = "94@"; *) ` Find every person in the SF…
QUERY ([People]; | ; [People]ZIP Code = "90@") ` ...or Los Angeles areas

4D Language Reference 1263

12. Searching by keyword: the following example searches the [Products] table for records
where the Description field contains the word “easy”:

QUERY([Products];[Products]Description%"easy")
` Find products whose description contains the keyword easy

13. The following example finds the record that matches the invoice reference entered in the
request dialog box:

vFind:=Request("Find invoice reference:") ` Get an invoice reference from the user

If (OK = 1) ` If the user pressed OK
QUERY ([Invoice]; [Invoice]Ref = vFind) ` Find the invoice reference that matches vFind
End if

14. The following example finds the records for the invoices entered in 1996. It does this by
finding all records entered after 12/31/95 and before 1/1/97:

QUERY ([Invoice]; [Invoice]In Date > !12/31/95!; *) ` Find invoices after 12/31/95…
QUERY ([Invoice]; &; [Invoice]In Date < !1/1/97!) ` and before 1/1/97

15. The following example finds the record for each employee whose salary is between
$10,000 and $50,000. The query includes the employees who make $10,000, but excludes
those who make $50,000:

` Find employees who make between…

QUERY ([Employee]; [Employee]Salary >= 10000; *)
QUERY ([Employee]; & ; [Employee]Salary < 50000) ` ...$10,000 and $50,000

16. The following example finds the records for the employees in the marketing department
who have salaries over $20,000. The Salary field is queried first because it is indexed. Notice
that the second query uses a field from another table. It can do this because the [Dept] table is
related to the [Employee] table with an automatic many to one relation:

` Find employees with salaries over $20,000 and...

QUERY ([Employee]; [Employee]Salary > 20000; *)
` ...who are in the marketing department
QUERY ([Employee]; &;[Dept]Name = "marketing")

17. Given three tables related by Many-to-One relations: [City] -> [Department] -> [Region].
The following query finds all the regions with cities whose names begin with "Saint":

` Find all the regions with cities beginning with "Saint"

QUERY([Region]; [City]Name="Saint@")

1264 4D Language Reference

18. The following example queries for information that was entered into the variable myVar.

QUERY ([Laws]; [Laws]Text = myVar) ` Find all laws that match myVar

The query could have many different results, depending on the value of myVar. The query will
also be performed differently. For example:
• If myVar equals "Copyright@", the selection contains all laws with texts beginning with
Copyright.
• If myVar equals "@Copyright@", the selection contains all laws with texts containing at least
one occurrence of Copyright.

19. The following example adds or does not add lines to a complex query depending on the
value of the variables. This way, only valid criteria are taken into account for the query:

QUERY([Invoice];[Invoice]Paid=False;*)
If($city#"") ` if a city name has been specified
QUERY([Invoice];[Invoice]Delivery_city=$city;*)
End if
If($zipcode#"") ` If a zip code has been specified
QUERY([Invoice];[Invoice]ZipCode=$zipcode;*)
End if
QUERY([Invoice]) ` Execution of query on the criteria

20. This example illustrates the use of a comparison operator as an alphanumeric expression.
The value of the comparison operator is specified using a pop-up menu placed in a custom
query dialog box:

C_TEXT($oper)
$oper:=_popup_operator{_popup_operator} `$oper equals for example "#" or "="
If(OK =1)
QUERY(Invoice];[Invoice]Amount;$oper;$amount)
End if

See Also
Operators, QUERY SELECTION.

System Variables or Sets

If the query is carried out correctly, the OK system variable is set to 1.
The OK variable is set to 0 if:
- the user clicks on Cancel in the query dialog box,
- in 'query and lock' mode (see the SET QUERY AND LOCK command), the query has found at
least one locked record. In this case as well, the LockedSet system set is updated.

4D Language Reference 1265

QUERY BY EXAMPLE Queries

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QUERY BY EXAMPLE ({aTable}{; }{*})

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table for which to return a selection of records, or
Default table, if omitted
* → If passed, the scrolling bar will not be displayed

Description
QUERY BY EXAMPLE performs the same action as the Query by Example menu command in the
Design environment. It displays the current input form as a query window. QUERY BY
EXAMPLE queries aTable for the data that the user enters into the query window. The form
must contain the fields that you want the user to be able to query. The query is optimized;
indexed fields are automatically used to optimize the query.

See the 4D Design Reference manual for information about using the Query by Example menu
command in the Design environment.

Example
The method in this example displays the MyQuery form to the user. If the user accepts the
form and performs the query (that is, if the OK system variable is set to 1), the records that
meet the query criteria are displayed:

INPUT FORM ([People]; "MyQuery") ` Switch to query form

QUERY BY EXAMPLE ([People]) ` Display form and perform query
If (OK=1) ` If the user performed the query
DISPLAY SELECTION ([People]) ` Display the records
End if

See Also
ORDER BY, QUERY.

System Variables or Sets

If the user clicks the Accept button or presses the Enter key, the OK system variable is set to 1
and the query is performed. If the user clicks the Cancel button or presses the “cancel” key
combination, the OK system variable is set to 0 and the query is canceled.

1266 4D Language Reference

QUERY BY FORMULA Queries

version 11.2 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QUERY BY FORMULA ({aTable}{; }{queryFormula})

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table for which to return a selection of records
queryFormula Boolean → Query formula

Description
QUERY BY FORMULA looks for records in table. QUERY BY FORMULA changes the current
selection of aTable for the current process and makes the first record of the new selection the
current record.

QUERY BY FORMULA and QUERY SELECTION BY FORMULA work exactly the same way, except
that QUERY BY FORMULA queries every record in the entire table and QUERY SELECTION BY
FORMULA queries only the records in the current selection.

Both commands apply queryFormula to each record in the table or selection. The queryFormula
is a Boolean expression that must evaluate to either TRUE or FALSE. If queryFormula evaluates
as TRUE, the record is included in the new selection.

The queryFormula may be simple, perhaps comparing a field to a value; or it may be complex,
perhaps performing a calculation or even evaluating information in a related table. The
queryFormula can be a 4D function (command), or a function (method) or expression you have
created. You can use wildcards (@) in queryFormula when working with Alpha or text fields as
well as the "contains" (%) operator for keyword queries. For more information, please refer to
the description of the QUERY command.

If queryFormula is omitted, 4D displays the Query dialog box.

When the query is complete, the first record of the new selection is loaded from disk and
made the current record.

4D Language Reference 1267

These commands are optimized and can more particularly take advantage of indexes. When
the type of query allows it, these commands execute queries equivalent to the QUERY
command. For example, the statement QUERY BY FORMULA([mytable]; [mytable]myfield=value)
will be executed just like QUERY([mytable]; [mytable]myfield=value), which will allow the use of
indexes. 4D can also optimize queries containing parts that cannot be optimized, by first
executing the optimized parts and then combining the results with the rest of the query. For
example, the statement QUERY BY FORMULA[mytable];Length(myfield)=value) will not be
optimized. On the other hand, QUERY BY FORMULA([mytable];Length(myfield)=value1 |
myfield=value2) will be partially optimized.

These commands by default carry out "joins" like SQL. This means that it is not necessary for a
structural automatic relation to exist between table A and table B in order to execute a
statement of the type QUERY BY FORMULA([Table_A];[Table_A]field_X = [Table_B]field_Y) (see
example 3).
If they exist, the relations defined in the Structure editor are not used as a rule. However, these
commands will use automatic relations in the following cases:
- If the formula cannot be broken down into elements of the { field ; comparator ; value} form
- If two fields of the same table are compared.

Note: For compatibility reasons, it is possible to deactivate the joins mechanism, either
globally via the database Preference (converted databases only) or per process using the SET
DATABASE PARAMETER command.

4D Server: Beginning with version 11 of 4D Server, these commands are run on the server,
which optimizes their execution. Keep in mind that when variables are called directly in
queryFormula, the query is calculated with the value of the variables on the client machine. For
example, the statement QUERY BY FORMULA([mytable];[mytable]myfield=myvariable) will be run
on the server but with the contents of the myvariable variable of the client machine.
On the other hand, this principle is not applied for formulas using methods that, themselves,
call variables (the values of the variables are evaluated on the server). In this context, it may
be advisable to use the "Execute on server" method attribute, which allows the method to be
executed on the server while passing parameters (variables) to it (see the Design Reference
manual).
In previous versions of 4D Server, these commands were executed on client machines. For
compatibility's sake, this functioning is maintained for databases converted to version 11. A
compatibility preference and a selector of the SET DATABASE PARAMETER command can
nevertheless be used to adopt the functioning of version 11 (execution on the server) in
converted databases

1268 4D Language Reference

Examples
1. This example finds the records for all invoices that were entered in December of any year. It
does this by applying the Month of function to each record. This query could not be
performed any other way without creating a separate field for the month:

` Find the invoices entered in December

QUERY BY FORMULA ([Invoice]; Month of ([Invoice]Entered) = 12)

2. This example finds records for all the people who have names with more than ten
characters:

` Find names longer than ten characters

QUERY BY FORMULA ([People]; Length ([People]Name)>10)

3. This example activates SQL joins for a specific query by formula:

$currentVal:= Get database parameter(QUERY BY FORMULA Joins)

SET DATABASE PARAMETER(QUERY BY FORMULA Joins;2) `Activate SQL joins
`Query all the lines of "ACME" client invoices even though the tables are not related
QUERY BY FORMULA([invoice_line] ; ([invoice_line]invoice_id = [invoice]id &
[invoice]client = "ACME"))
`We re-establish the current settings
SET DATABASE PARAMETER(QUERY BY FORMULA Joins;$currentVal)

See Also
QUERY, QUERY BY SQL, QUERY SELECTION, QUERY SELECTION BY FORMULA.

4D Language Reference 1269

QUERY SELECTION Queries

version 6.5 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QUERY SELECTION ({aTable}{; queryArgument{; *}})

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table for which to return a selection of records, or
Default table, if omitted
queryArgument → Query argument
* → Continue query flag

Description
QUERY SELECTION looks for records in aTable. QUERY SELECTION command changes the
current selection of table for the current process and makes the first record of the new
selection the current record.

QUERY SELECTION works and performs the same actions as QUERY. The difference between the
two commands is the scope of the query:
• QUERY looks for records among all the records in the table.
• QUERY SELECTION looks for records among the records currently selected in the table.

For more information, see the description of the command QUERY.

Example
This example illustrates the difference between QUERY and QUERY SELECTION. Here are two
queries:

` Find ALL companies located in New York City

QUERY ([Company]; [Company]City="New York City")
` Find ALL companies doing Stock Exchange business
` no matter where they are located
QUERY ([Company]; [Company]Type Business="Stock Exchange")

1270 4D Language Reference

Note that the second QUERY simply “ignores” the result of the first one. Compare this with:

` Find ALL companies located in New York City

QUERY ([Company]; [Company]City="New York City")
` Find companies doing Stock Exchange business
` and that are located in New York City
QUERY SELECTION ([Company]; [Company]Type Business="Stock Exchange")

QUERY SELECTION looks only among the selected records, therefore, in this example, among
the companies located in New York City.

See Also
QUERY.

4D Language Reference 1271

QUERY SELECTION BY FORMULA Queries

version 11.2 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QUERY SELECTION BY FORMULA (aTable{; queryFormula})

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table for which to return a selection of records
queryFormula Boolean → Query formula

Description
QUERY SELECTION BY FORMULA looks for records in aTable. QUERY SELECTION BY FORMULA
changes the current selection of aTable for the current process and makes the first record of
the new selection the current record.

QUERY SELECTION BY FORMULA performs the same actions as QUERY BY FORMULA. The
difference between the two commands is the scope of the query:
• QUERY BY FORMULA looks for records among all the records in the table.
• QUERY SELECTION BY FORMULA looks for records among the records currently selected in the
table.

For more information, see the description of the command QUERY BY FORMULA.

See Also
QUERY, QUERY BY FORMULA, QUERY SELECTION.

1272 4D Language Reference

QUERY SELECTION WITH ARRAY Queries

version 11.2
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QUERY SELECTION WITH ARRAY (targetField; array)

Parameter Type Description

targetField Field → Field used to compare the values
array Array → Array of searched values

Description
The QUERY SELECTION WITH ARRAY command searches the table of the field passed as first
parameter for the records where the value of targetField is equal to at least one of the values
of the elements in the array. The records found will become the new current selection.

QUERY SELECTION WITH ARRAY functions in the same way as QUERY WITH ARRAY. The
difference between these two commands is the scope of the search:
• QUERY WITH ARRAY searches all the records of the table containing targetField.
• QUERY SELECTION WITH ARRAY only searches the records of the current selection of the
table containing targetField.

For more information, please refer to the description of the QUERY WITH ARRAY command.

See Also
QUERY WITH ARRAY.

4D Language Reference 1273

QUERY WITH ARRAY Queries

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QUERY WITH ARRAY (targetField; array)

Parameter Type Description

targetField Field → Field used to compare the values
array Array → Array of the searched values

Description
The QUERY WITH ARRAY command searches all the records for which the value of targetField is
equal, at least, to one of the values of the elements in array. The records found will become the
new current selection.

This command allows you to quickly and simply build a search on multiple values.

Notes:
• This command cannot be used with fields of the Picture, Subfield, or BLOB type.
• targetField and array must be of the same data type. Exception: you can use a Longint array
with a field of the Time type.

Example
The following example allows you to retrieve the records of both French and American clients:

ARRAY STRING (2;SearchArray;2)

SearchArray{1}:="FR"
SearchArray{2}:="US"
QUERY WITH ARRAY ([Clients]Country;SearchArray)

1274 4D Language Reference

SET QUERY AND LOCK Queries

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET QUERY AND LOCK (lock)

Parameter Type Description

lock Boolean → True = Lock the records found by queries
False = Do not lock records

Description
The SET QUERY AND LOCK command can be used to request the automatic locking of
records found by all queries that follow the calling of this command in the current
transaction. This means that the records cannot be modified by a process other than the
current process between a query and the handling of results.

By default, the records found by queries are not locked. Pass True in the lock parameter to
activate locking.

It is imperative for this command to be used within a transaction. If it is called outside of

this context, an error is generated. This allows for better control of record locking. The
records found will stay locked as long as the transaction has not been terminated (whether
validated or cancelled). After the transaction is completed, all the records are unlocked.

The records are locked for all the tables in the current transaction.

When a SET QUERY AND LOCK(True) statement has been executed, the query commands
(for example QUERY) adopt a specific functioning if a record that is already locked is found:
- The query is stopped and the system variable OK is set to 0,
- The current selection is cleared,
- The LockedSet system set contains the locked record that caused the query to be stopped.
Consequently, in this context it is necessary to test the LockedSet set after a fruitless query
(current selection empty and/or OK variable set to 0) in order to determine the cause of the
failure.

Call SET QUERY AND LOCK(False) in order to disable this mechanism afterwards.

4D Language Reference 1275

Example
In this example, it is not possible to delete a client who would have been passed from
category “C” to category “A” in another process between the QUERY and the DELETE
SELECTION:

START TRANSACTION
SET QUERY AND LOCK(True)
QUERY([Customers];[Customers]Catégorie=“C”)
`At this moment, the records found are automatically locked for all other processes
DELETE SELECTION([Customers])
SET QUERY AND LOCK(False)
VALIDATE TRANSACTION

Error Handling
If the command is not called in the context of a transaction, an error is generated.

See Also
QUERY.

1276 4D Language Reference

SET QUERY DESTINATION Queries

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET QUERY DESTINATION (destinationType{; destinationObject})

Parameter Type Description

destinationType Number → 0 current selection
1 set
2 named selection
3 variable
destinationObject String | Variable → Name of the set, or
Name of the named selection, or
Variable

Description
SET QUERY DESTINATION enables you to tell 4D where to put the result of any subsequent
query for the current process.

You specify the type of the destination in the parameter destinationType. 4D provides the
following predefined constants, found in the "Queries" theme:

Constant Type Value

Into current selection Long Integer 0
Into set Long Integer 1
Into named selection Long Integer 2
Into variable Long Integer 3

You specify the destination of the query itself in the optional destinationObject parameter
according to the following table:

destinationType destinationObject
parameter parameter
0 (current selection) You omit the parameter
1 (set) You pass the name of a set (existing or to be created)
2 (named selection) You pass the named of a named selection (existing or to be created)
3 (variable) You pass a numeric variable (existing or to be created)

4D Language Reference 1277

• With:
SET QUERY DESTINATION(Into current selection)
The records found by any subsequent query will end up in a new current selection for the
table involved by the query.
• With:
SET QUERY DESTINATION(Into set;"mySet")

The records found by any subsequent query will end up in the set "mySet". The current
selection and the current record for the table involved by the query are left unchanged.

Note: In client/server, you cannot use local/client sets (name preceeded by $ symbol) as a
query destination. This type of set is created on client machines when queries are executed on
the server. For more information on these types of sets, refer to the Sets section.
• With:
SET QUERY DESTINATION(Into named selection;"myNamedSel")

The records found by any subsequent query will end up in the named selection "myNamedSel".
The current selection and the current record for the table involved by the query are left
unchanged.

Note: If the named selection does not exist beforehand, it will be created automatically at the
end of the query.

• With:
SET QUERY DESTINATION(Into variable;$vlResult)

The number of records found by any subsequent query will end up in the variable $vlResult.
The current selection and the current record for the table involved by the query are left
unchanged.

Warning: SET QUERY DESTINATION affects all subsequent queries made within the current
process. REMEMBER to always counterbalance a call to SET QUERY DESTINATION (where
destinationType#0) with a call to SET QUERY DESTINATION(0) in order to restore normal query
mode.

1278 4D Language Reference

SET QUERY DESTINATION changes the behavior of the query commands only:
• QUERY
• QUERY SELECTION
• QUERY BY EXAMPLE
• QUERY BY FORMULA
• QUERY BY SQL
• QUERY SELECTION BY FORMULA
• QUERY SELECTION WITH ARRAY
• QUERY WITH ARRAY

On the other hand, SET QUERY DESTINATION does not affect other commands that may
change the current selection of a table such as ALL RECORDS, RELATE MANY and so on.

Examples
1. You create a form that will display the records from a [Phone Book] table. You create a Tab
Control named asRolodex (with the 26 letters of the alphabet) and a subform displaying the
[Phone Book] records. Choosing one Tab from the Tab Control displays the records whose
names start with the corresponding letter.

In your application, the [Phone Book] table contains a set of quite static data, so you do not
want to (or need to) perform a query each time you select a Tab. In this way, you can save
precious database engine time.

To do so, you can redirect your queries into named selections that you reuse as needed. You
write the object method of the Tab Control asRolodex as follows:

` asRolodex object method

Case of
: (Form event=On Load)
` Before the form appears on the screen,
` initialize the rolodex and an array of Booleans that
` will tell us if a query for the corresponding letter
` has been performed or not
ARRAY STRING(1;asRolodex;26)
ARRAY BOOLEAN(abQueryDone;26)
For ($vlElem;1;26)
asRolodex{$vlElem}:=Char(64+$vlElem)
abQueryDone{$vlElem}:=False
End for

4D Language Reference 1279

 : (Form event=On Clicked)
` When a click on the Tab control occurs, check whether the corresponding
` query has been performed or not
If (Not(abQueryDone{asRolodex}))
` If not, redirect the next query(ies) toward a named selection
SET QUERY DESTINATION(Into named selection;"Rolodex"+asRolodex
{asRolodex})
` Perform the query
QUERY([Phone Book];[Phone Book]Last name=asRolodex{asRolodex}+"@")
` Restore normal query mode
SET QUERY DESTINATION(Into current selection)
` Next time we choose that letter, we won't perform the query again
abQueryDone{asRolodex}:=True
End if
` Use the named selection for displaying the records corresponding
` to the chosen letter
USE NAMED SELECTION("Rolodex"+asRolodex{asRolodex})

: (Form event=On Unload)

` After the form disappeared from the screen
` Clear the named selections we created
For ($vlElem;1;26)
If(abQueryDone{$vlElem})
CLEAR NAMED SELECTION("Rolodex"+asRolodex{$vlElem})
End if
End for
` Clear the two arrays we no longer need
CLEAR VARIABLE(asRolodex)
CLEAR VARIABLE(abQueryDone)
End case

1280 4D Language Reference

2. The Unique values project method in this example allows you to verify the uniqueness of the
values for any number of fields in a table. The current record can be an existing or a newly
created record.
` Unique values project method
` Unique values ( Pointer ; Pointer { ; Pointer... } ) -> Boolean
` Unique values ( ->Table ; ->Field { ; ->Field2... } ) -> Yes or No

C_BOOLEAN($0;$2)
C_POINTER(${1})
C_LONGINT($vlField;$vlNbFields;$vlFound;$vlCurrentRecord)
$vlNbFields:=Count parameters-1
$vlCurrentRecord:=Record number($1->)
If ($vlNbFields>0)
If ($vlCurrentRecord#-1)
If ($vlCurrentRecord<0)
` The current record is an unsaved new record (record number is -3);
` therefore we can stop the query as soon as at least one record is found
SET QUERY LIMIT(1)
Else
` The current record is an existing record;
` therefore we can stop the query as soon as at least two records are found
SET QUERY LIMIT(2)
End if
` The query will return its result in $vlFound
` without changing the current record nor the current selection
SET QUERY DESTINATION(Into variable;$vlFound)
` Make the query according to the number of fields that are specified
Case of
: ($vlNbFields=1)
QUERY($1->;$2->=$2->)
: ($vlNbFields=2)
QUERY($1->;$2->=$2->;*)
QUERY($1->; & ;$3->=$3->)
Else
QUERY($1->;$2->=$2->;*)
For ($vlField;2;$vlNbFields-1)
QUERY($1->; & ;${1+$vlField}->=${1+$vlField}->;*)
End for
QUERY($1->; & ;${1+$vlNbFields}->=${1+$vlNbFields}->)
End case

4D Language Reference 1281

 SET QUERY DESTINATION(Into current selection) ` Restore normal query mode
SET QUERY LIMIT(0) ` No longer limit queries
` Process query result
Case of
: ($vlFound=0)
$0:=True ` No duplicated values
: ($vlFound=1)
If ($vlCurrentRecord<0)
` Found an existing record with same values as unsaved new record
$0:=False
Else
$0:=True ` No duplicated values; just found the very same record
End if
: ($vlFound=2)
$0:=False ` Whatever the case is, the values are duplicated
End case
Else
If (<>DebugOn) ` Does not make sense; signal it if development version
TRACE ` WARNING! Unique values is called with NO current record
End if
$0:=False ` Can't guarantee the result
End if
Else
If (<>DebugOn) ` Does not make sense; signal it if development version
TRACE ` WARNING! Unique values is called with NO query condition
End if
$0:=False ` Can't guarantee the result
End if
After this project method is implemented in your application, you can write:
` ...
If (Unique values (->[Contacts];->[Contacts]Company);->[Contacts]Last name;->
[Contacts]First name)
` Do appropriate actions for that record which has unique values
Else
ALERT("There is already a Contact with this name for this Company.")
End if
` ...
See Also
QUERY, QUERY BY EXAMPLE, QUERY BY FORMULA, QUERY BY SQL, QUERY SELECTION, QUERY
SELECTION BY FORMULA, QUERY WITH ARRAY, SET QUERY LIMIT.

1282 4D Language Reference

SET QUERY LIMIT Queries

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET QUERY LIMIT (limit)

Parameter Type Description

limit Number → Number of records, or
0 for no limit

Description
SET QUERY LIMIT allows you to tell 4D to stop any subsequent query for the current process as
soon as at least the number of records you pass in limit has been found.

For example, if you pass limit equal to 1, any subsequent query will stop browsing an index or
the data file as soon as one record that matches the query conditions has been found.

To restore queries with no limit, call SET QUERY LIMIT again with limit equal to 0.

Warning: SET QUERY LIMIT affects all the subsequent queries made within the current process.
REMEMBER to always counterbalance a call to SET QUERY LIMIT(limit) (where limit>0) with a
call to SET QUERY LIMIT(0) in order to restore queries with no limit.

SET QUERY LIMIT changes the behavior of the query commands:

• QUERY
• QUERY SELECTION
• QUERY BY EXAMPLE
• QUERY BY FORMULA
• QUERY BY SQL
• QUERY SELECTION BY FORMULA

On the other hand, SET QUERY LIMIT does not affect the other commands that may change the
current selection of a table, such as ALL RECORDS, RELATE MANY, and so on.

4D Language Reference 1283

Examples
1. To perform a query corresponding to the request “...give me any ten customers whose gross
sales are greater than $1 M...”, you would write:

SET QUERY LIMIT(10)

QUERY([Customers];[Customers]Gross sales>1000000)
SET QUERY LIMIT(0)

2. See the second example for the command SET QUERY DESTINATION.

See Also
QUERY, QUERY BY EXAMPLE, QUERY BY FORMULA, QUERY BY SQL, QUERY SELECTION, QUERY
SELECTION BY FORMULA, QUERY WITH ARRAY, SET QUERY DESTINATION.

1284 4D Language Reference

39
______________________
Quick Report

4D Language Reference 1285

1286 4D Language Reference
QR BLOB TO REPORT Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR BLOB TO REPORT (area; blob)

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area
blob BLOB → BLOB that houses the report

Description
The QR BLOB TO REPORT command places the report contained in blob in the Quick Report
area passed in area.

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.
If you pass an invalid blob parameter, the error -9852 will be generated.

Examples
1. The following code allows you to display, in MyArea, a report file named “report.4qr”
located next to the database structure. The report file does not have to be created with 4D
version 2003; it can originate from previous versions:

C_BLOB($doc)
C_LONGINT (MyArea)
DOCUMENT TO BLOB("report.4qr";$doc)
QR BLOB TO REPORT(MyArea;$doc)

2. The following statement retrieves the Quick Report stored in Field4 and displays it in
MyArea:

QR BLOB TO REPORT(MyArea;[Table 1]Field4)

See Also
QR REPORT TO BLOB.

4D Language Reference 1287

QR Count columns Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR Count columns (area) → Longint

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area

Function result Longint ← Number of columns in area

Description
The QR Count columns command returns the number of columns present in the Quick Report
area.

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.

Example
The following code retrieves the column count and inserts a column to the right of the
rightmost existing column:

$ColNb:=QR Count columns(MyArea)

QR INSERT COLUMN(MyArea;$ColNb+1;->[Table 1]Field2)

See Also
QR DELETE COLUMN, QR INSERT COLUMN.

1288 4D Language Reference

QR DELETE COLUMN Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR DELETE COLUMN (area; colNumber)

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area
colNumber Longint → Column number

Description
The QR DELETE COLUMN command deletes the column in area whose number was passed in
colNumber. This command does not apply to cross-table reports.

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.
If you pass an invalid column number, the error -9852 will be generated.

Example
The following example makes sure the report is a list report and deletes the third column:

If(QR Get report kind(MyArea )=qr list report)

QR DELETE COLUMN (MyArea;3)
End if

See Also
QR INSERT COLUMN.

4D Language Reference 1289

QR DELETE OFFSCREEN AREA Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR DELETE OFFSCREEN AREA (area)

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area to delete

Description
The QR DELETE OFFSCREEN AREA command deletes in memory the Quick Report offscreen area
whose reference was passed as parameter.

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.

See Also
QR New offscreen area.

1290 4D Language Reference

QR EXECUTE COMMAND Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR EXECUTE COMMAND (area; command)

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area
command Longint → Menu command to be executed

Description
The QR EXECUTE COMMAND command executes the menu command or toolbar button whose
reference was passed in command. The most common use for this command is to execute a
command after the user selected that command and your code intercepted it through the QR
ON COMMAND command.

In command, you can pass a value or one of the constants of the QR Commands constant
theme.

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.
If you pass an invalid command number, the error -9852 will be generated..

See Also
QR Get command status, QR ON COMMAND.

4D Language Reference 1291

QR Find column Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR Find column (area; expression) → Longint

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area
expression String | Pointer → Column object

Function result Longint ← Number of the column

Description
The QR Find column command returns the number of the first column whose contents match
the expression passed in parameter.

expression can either be a string or a pointer.

QR Find column returns –1 if nothing has been found.

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.

Example
The following code retrieves the column number that holds the field [G.NQR Tests]Quarter
and deletes that column:

$NumColumn:=QR Find column (MyArea;->[G.NQR Tests]Quarter)

or:
$NumColumn:=QR Find column (MyArea; "[G.NQR Tests]Quarter")

followed by:

If ($NumColumn#-1)
QR DELETE COLUMN (MyArea ; $NumColumn)
End if

1292 4D Language Reference

QR Get area property Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR Get area property (area; property) → Longint

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area
property Longint → Interface element designated

Function result Longint ← 1 = displayed, 0 = hidden

Description
The QR Get area property command returns 0 if the interface element (toolbar or menu bar)
passed in property is not displayed; otherwise, it returns 1.

The menu bar and toolbars are numbered from 1 to 6 (top to bottom) and the value 7 is
dedicated to the contextual menu.

You can use the constants from the QR Area Properties theme to designate the interface item:

Constant Description
qr view menubar (1) Display status of the menu bar (Displayed=1, Hidden=0)
qr view standard toolbar (2) Display status of the Standard toolbar (Displayed=1, Hidden=0)
qr view style toolbar (3) Display status of the Style toolbar (Displayed=1, Hidden=0)
qr view operators toolbar (4) Display status of the operators toolbar (Displayed=1,
Hidden=0)
qr view color toolbar (5) Display status of the Color toolbar (Displayed=1, Hidden=0)
qr view column toolbar (6) Display status of the Column toolbar (Displayed=1, Hidden=0)
qr view contextual menus (7) Display status of the Contextual menu (Displayed=1, Hidden=0)

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.
If you pass an invalid property parameter, the error -9852 will be generated.

See Also
QR SET AREA PROPERTY.

4D Language Reference 1293

QR GET BORDERS Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR GET BORDERS (area; column; row; border; line{; color})

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area
column Longint → Column number
row Longint → Row number
border Longint → Border value
line Longint ← Line thickness
color Longint ← Border color

Description
The QR GET BORDERS command allows you to retrieve the border style for a border of a given
cell.

area is the reference of the Quick Report area.

column is the column number of the cell.

row designates the row number of the cell.

• if row equals -1, the title of the report is affected
• if row equals -2, the detail of the report is affected
• if row equals -3, the grand total of the report is affected
• if row is a positive integer, it designates the Subtotal (break) level that is affected.

You can use constants from the QR Rows for Properties theme to designate the row item (qr
title= -1, qr detail=-2, qr grand total=-3).

border is the value that indicates which cell border is affected:

• 1 indicates the left border
• 2 indicates the top border
• 4 indicates the right border
• 8 indicates the bottom border
• 16 indicates the inside vertical border
• 32 indicates the inside horizontal border.

1294 4D Language Reference

You can use constants from the QR Borders theme to designate the border item.

Note: Unlike the command QR SET BORDERS, QR GET BORDERS does not accept a cumulative
value. You must test all the parameters separately to have an overall view of the cell border.

line is the thickness of the line:

• 0 indicates no line
• 1 indicates a thickness of 1/4 point
• 2 indicates a thickness of 1/2 point
• 3 indicates a thickness of 1 point
• 4 indicates a thickness of 2 points.

color is the color of the line; it returns the value of the color applied to the line segment.

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.
If you pass an invalid column number, the error -9852 will be generated.
If you pass an invalid row number, the error -9853 will be generated.
If you pass an invalid border parameter, the error -9854 will be generated.

See Also
QR SET BORDERS.

4D Language Reference 1295

QR Get command status Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR Get command status (area; command{; value}) → Longint

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area
command Longint → Command number
value Text | Longint ← Value for the selected sub-item

Function result Longint ← Command status

Description
The QR Get command status command returns 0 if the command is disabled or 1 if it is enabled.

value returns the value of the selected sub-item, if any. For example, if the command that was
selected is the Font menu (1000) and the font selected was “Arial”, value would return “Arial”,
or if the command that was selected is a color menu (1002, 1003 or 1004), value would return
the color number.

You can use the command in two types of contexts:

• As a simple statement to determine whether a command is enabled or disabled.
• In the method installed by QR ON COMMAND, to allow you to know which sub-item was
selected. In that method, $1 is the reference of the area and $2 is the number of the command.

In command, you can pass a value or one of the constants of the QR Commands constant
theme.

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.
If you pass an invalid command number, the error -9852 will be generated.

See Also
QR EXECUTE COMMAND, QR ON COMMAND.

1296 4D Language Reference

QR GET DESTINATION Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR GET DESTINATION (area; type{; specifics})

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area
type Longint ← Type of the report
specifics String | Variable ← Specifics linked to the output type

Description
The QR GET DESTINATION command retrieves the output type of the report for the area whose
reference was passed in area.

You can compare the value of the type parameter with the constants of the QR Destination
theme.

The following table describes the values that can be retrieved in both type and specifics
parameters:

Destination Type (value) Specifics

Printer qr printer (1) N.A.
Text file qr text file (2) File pathname
4D View qr 4D View area (3) N.A.
4D Chart qr 4D Chart area (4) N.A.
HTML file qr HTML file (5) Pathname to the HTML file

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.

See Also
QR SET DESTINATION.

4D Language Reference 1297

QR Get document property Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR Get document property (area; property) → Longint

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area
property Longint → 1 = Print Dialog, 2 = Document unit

Function result Longint ← Value for the property

Description
The QR Get document property command allows you to retrieve the display status for the print
dialog box or the unit used for the document that are present in area.

In property, you can use the following constants, located in the QR Document properties
constant theme:

Constant Value
qr printing dialog 1
qr unit 2

• If property equals 1, the command applies to the display of the print dialog box.
- If value equals 1, the print dialog box is displayed prior to printing.
- If value equals 0, the print dialog box is not displayed prior to printing.
The default value is 1.

• If property equals 2, the command applies to the document unit.

- If value equals 0, the document unit is points.
- If value equals 1, the document unit is centimeters.
- If value equals 2, the document unit is inches.

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.
If you pass an invalid property value, the error -9852 will be generated.

See Also
QR SET DOCUMENT PROPERTY.

1298 4D Language Reference

QR Get drop column Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR Get drop column (area) → Longint

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area

Function result Longint ← Drop value

Description
The QR Get drop column command returns a value depending on where the drop was
performed:
• if the value is negative, it indicates a column number (i.e., -3 if the the drop was performed
on column number 3)
• if the value is positive, it indicates that the drop was performed on a separator preceding the
column (i.e., 3 if the drop was performed after column 2). Keep in mind that the drop does
not have to take place before an existing column.

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.

See Also
QR DELETE COLUMN.

4D Language Reference 1299

QR GET HEADER AND FOOTER Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR GET HEADER AND FOOTER (area; selector; leftTitle; centerTitle; rightTitle; height{; picture{;
pictAlignment}})

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area
selector Longint → 1 = Header, 2 = Footer
leftTitle String ← Text displayed on the left side
centerTitle String ← Text displayed in the middle
rightTitle String ← Text displayed on the right side
height Real ← Header or footer height
picture Picture ← Picture to display
pictAlignment Longint ← Alignment attribute for the picture

Description
The QR GET HEADER AND FOOTER command allows you to retrieve the contents and size of the
header or footer.

selector allows you to select the header or the footer:

• if selector equals 1, the header information will be retrieved;
• if selector equals 2, the footer information will be retrieved.

leftTitle, centerTitle and rightTitle returns the values for, respectively, the left, center and right
header/footer.

height returns the height of the header/footer, expressed in the unit selected for the report.

picture returns a picture that is displayed in the header or footer.

pictAlignment is the alignment attribute for the picture displayed in the header/footer.
• If pictAlignment returns 0, the picture is aligned to the left.
• If pictAlignment returns 1, the picture is centered.
• If pictAlignment returns 2, the picture is aligned to the right.

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.
If you pass an invalid selector value, the error -9852 will be generated.

1300 4D Language Reference

Example
The following code retrieves the values of the header titles as well as the header size and
displays them in alerts:

QR GET HEADER AND FOOTER(MyArea;1;$LeftText;$CenterText;$RightText;$height)

Case of
: ($LeftText # "")
ALERT("The left title is "+Char(34)+$LeftText+Char(34))
: ($CenterText # "")
ALERT("The center title is "+Char(34)+$CenterText+Char(34))
: ($RightText # "")
ALERT("The right title is "+Char(34)+$RightText+Char(34))
Else
ALERT("No header title in this report.")
End case
ALERT("The height of the header is "+String($height))

See Also
QR SET HEADER AND FOOTER.

4D Language Reference 1301

QR Get HTML template Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR Get HTML template (area) → Text

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area

Function result Text ← HTML code used as template

Description
The QR Get HTML template command returns the HTML template currently used for the Quick
Report area. The returned value is a text value and includes all the contents of the HTML
template.

If no specific template was defined, the template that is returned is the default template. Please
note that no template will be returned if the output was not set to HTML file, either manually
or programmatically.

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.

See Also
QR SET HTML TEMPLATE.

1302 4D Language Reference

QR GET INFO COLUMN Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR GET INFO COLUMN (area; colNum; title; object; hide; size; repeatedValue; displayFormat)

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area
colNum Longint → Column number
title String ← Title of the column
object Field | Variable ← Object assigned for that column
hide Longint ← 0 = displayed, 1 = hidden
size Longint ← Column size
repeatedValue Longint ← 0 = not repeated, 1 = repeated
displayFormat Text ← Display format for the data

Description

List mode
The QR GET INFO COLUMN command allows you to retrieve the parameters of an existing
column.

area is the reference of the Quick Report area.

colNum is the number of the column to modify.

title returns the title that will be displayed in the header of the column.

object returns the name of the actual object of the column (variable, field name or formula).

hide returns whether the column is displayed or hidden:

• if hide equals 1, the column is hidden;
• if hide equals 0, the column is displayed.

size returns the size of the column in pixels. If the value returned is negative, the size of the
column is automatic.

4D Language Reference 1303

repeatedValue returns the status for data repetition. For example, if the value for a field or
variable does not change from one record to the other, it may or may not be repeated when
they do not change:
• if repeatedValue equals 0, values are not repeated,
• if repeatedValue equals 1, values are repeated.

format returns the display format. Display formats are the 4D formats compatible with the
data displayed.

Cross-table mode
The QR GET INFO COLUMN command allows you to retrieve the same parameters but the
reference of the areas to which it applies is different and varies depending on the parameter
you want to set. First of all, the title, hide, and repeatedValue parameters are meaningless when
this command is used in cross-table mode. The value to use for colNum varies depending on
whether you want to retrieve the column size or the data source and display format.
• Column size
This is a “visual” attribute, therefore columns are numbered from left to right, as depicted
below:

The following statement sets the size to automatic for all the columns in a cross-table report
and leaves other elements unchanged:

For ($i;1;3)
QR GET INFO COLUMN(qr_area;$i;$title;$obj;$hide;$size;$rep;$format)
QR SET INFO COLUMN(qr_area;$i;$title;$obj;$hide;0;$rep;$format)
End for

1304 4D Language Reference

You will notice that since you want to alter only the column size, you have to use QR GET
INFO COLUMN to retrieve the column properties and pass them to QR SET INFO COLUMN to
leave it unchanged, except for the column size.
• Data source (object) and display format
In this case, the numbering of columns operates as depicted below:

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.
If you pass an invalid ColNum value, the error -9852 will be generated.

See Also
QR Get info row, QR SET INFO COLUMN, QR SET INFO ROW.

4D Language Reference 1305

QR Get info row Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR Get info row (area; row) → Longint

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area created
row Longint → Row designator

Function result Longint ← 0 = displayed, 1 = hidden

Description
The QR Get info row command retrieves the display status of the row whose reference was
passed in row.

row designates which row is affected by the command:

• if row equals -1, the title display attribute is retrieved
• if row equals -2, the detail display attribute is retrieved
• if row equals -3, the grand total display attribute is retrieved
• if row is a positive integer, it designates the subtotal (break level) whose display attribute is
retrieved.

You can use constants from the QR Rows for Properties theme to designate the row item (qr
title= -1, qr detail=-2, qr grand total=-3)

The function result specifies whether the row is displayed or hidden. If it equals 1, the row is
set to hidden; if it equals 0, the row is set to displayed.

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.
If you pass an invalid row value, the error -9852 will be generated.

See Also
QR GET INFO COLUMN, QR SET INFO COLUMN, QR SET INFO ROW.

1306 4D Language Reference

QR Get report kind Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR Get report kind (area) → Longint

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area

Function result Longint ← Type of the report

Description
The QR Get report kind command retrieves the report type for the area whose reference was
passed in area.

• If the command returns 1, the report type is list.

• If the command returns 2, the report type is cross-table.

You can also compare the function result with the constants of the QR Report Types theme:
Constant Value
qr list report 1
qr cross report 2

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.

See Also
QR SET REPORT KIND.

4D Language Reference 1307

QR Get report table Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR Get report table (area) → Longint

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area

Function result Longint ← Table number

Description
The QR Get report table command returns the current table number for the report area whose
reference was passed in area.

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.

See Also
QR SET REPORT TABLE.

1308 4D Language Reference

QR GET SELECTION Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR GET SELECTION (area; left; top{; right{; bottom}})

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area
left Longint ← Left boundary
top Longint ← Top boundary
right Longint ← Right boundary
bottom Longint ← Bottom boundary

Description
The QR GET SELECTION command returns the coordinates of the cell that is selected.

left returns the number of the column that is the left boundary of the selection. If left equals 0,
the entire row is selected.

top returns the number of the row that is the top boundary of the selection. If top equals 0,
the entire column is selected.

Note: If both left and top equal 0, the entire area is highlighted.

right is the number of the column that is the right boundary of the selection.

bottom is the number of the row that is the top boundary of the selection.

Note: If there is no selection, left, top, right and bottom are set to -1.

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.

See Also
QR SET SELECTION.

4D Language Reference 1309

QR GET SORTS Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR GET SORTS (area; aColumns{; aOrders})

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area
aColumns Array real ← Sorted columns
aOrders Array real ← Sort orders

Description
The QR GET SORTS command populates two arrays:

• aColumns
This array includes all the columns that have a sort order.

• aOrders
Each element of this array contains the sort orders for the matching column.
- If aOrders{$i} equals 1, the sort order is ascending.
- If aOrders{$i} equals -1, the sort order is descending.

Cross-table mode
In the case of cross-table mode, the resulting arrays cannot have more than two elements since
sorts can only be performed on columns (1) and rows (2). (Values for aColumns).

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.

See Also
QR SET SORTS.

1310 4D Language Reference

QR Get text property Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR Get text property (area; colNum; rowNum; property) → Longint

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area
colNum Longint → Column number
rowNum Longint → Break number
property Longint → Operator value for the cell

Function result Longint ← Value for the selected property

Description
The QR Get text property command returns the property value of the text attributes for the cell
determined by colNum and RowNum.

area is the reference of the Quick Report area.

colNum is the number of the cell column.

rowNum is the reference of the cell row.

- if rowNum equals -1, it designates the column title.
- if rowNum equals -2, it designates the detail area.
- if rowNum equals -3, it designates the column grand total.
- if rowNum equals -4, it designates the page header.
- if rowNum equals -5, it designates the page footer.

Note: When passing -4 or -5 as rowNum, you still need to pass a column number in colNum,
even if it is not used.
- if rowNum is a positive value, it designates the corresponding subtotal (break level).

Note: In cross-table mode, the principle is similar except for the row values, which are always
positive.

4D Language Reference 1311

property is the value of the text attribute to get. You can use the constants of the QR Text
Properties theme, and the following values can be returned:

Constant (value) Returned value

qr font (1) font number as returned through Font number
qr font size (2) font size expressed in points (9 to 255)
qr bold (3) Bold style attribute (0 or 1)
qr italic (4) Italic style attribute (0 or 1)
qr underline (5) font Underline style attribute (0 or 1)
qr text color (6) font Color attribute (color number)
qr justification (7) font Justification attribute (0 for default, 1 for left,
2 for center or 3 for right).
qr background color (8) background color
qr alternate background color (9) alternate background color

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.
If you pass an invalid colNum number, the error -9852 will be generated.
If you pass an invalid rowNum number, the error -9853 will be generated.
If you pass an invalid property number, the error -9854 will be generated.

See Also
QR SET TEXT PROPERTY.

1312 4D Language Reference

QR GET TOTALS DATA Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR GET TOTALS DATA (area; colNum; breakNum; operator; text)

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area
colNum Longint → Column number
breakNum Longint → Break number
operator Longint ← Operator value for the cell
text String ← Contents of the cell

Description

List Mode
The QR GET TOTALS DATA command allows you to retrieve the details of a specific break.

area is the reference of the Quick Report area.

colNum is the number of the column whose data will be retrieved.

breakNum is the number of the break whose data will be retrieved (subtotal or grand total):
- Subtotal: between 1 and the number of Subtotal/sort.
- Grand total: -3 / constant: qr grand total.

operator returns the sum of all the operators present in the cell. You can use the constants of
the QR Operators theme to process the returned value:

Constant Value
qr sum 1
qr average 2
qr min 4
qr max 8
qr count 16
qr standard deviation 32

If the value returned equals 0, there is no operator.

4D Language Reference 1313

text returns the text present in the cell.

Note: operator and text are mutually exclusive, so you either have a result returned through
operator or through text.

Cross-table Mode
The QR GET TOTALS DATA command allows you to retrieve the details of a specific cell.

area is the reference of the Quick Report area.

colNum is the column number of the cell whose data is going to be retrieved.

breakNum is the row number of the cell whose data is going to be retrieved.

operator returns the sum of all the operators present in the cell. You can use the constants of
the QR Operators theme to process the returned value (see above).

text returns the text in the cell.

Here is a depiction of how the parameters colNum and breakNum have to be combined in cross-
table mode:

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.
If you pass an invalid colNum number, the error -9852 will be generated.
If you pass an invalid breakNum number, the error -9853 will be generated.

See Also
QR SET TOTALS DATA.

1314 4D Language Reference

QR GET TOTALS SPACING Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR GET TOTALS SPACING (area; subtotal; value)

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area
subtotal Longint → Subtotal number
value Longint ← 0=no space, 32000=inserts a page break,
>0=spacing added at the top of the break level,
<0=proportional increase

Description
The QR GET TOTALS SPACING command allows you to retrieve a space above a subtotal row. It
applies only to the list mode.

area is the reference of the Quick Report area.

subtotal is the subtotal level (or break level) that will be affected. subtotal is a value between 1
and the number of the subtotal/sort.

value defines the value of the spacing:

• If value equals 0, no space is added.
• If value equals 32000, a page break is inserted.
• If value is a positive value, it expresses the spacing value in pixels.
• If value is a negative value, it expresses the spacing as a percentage of the subtotal row. For
example, -100 will set a space of 100% above the subtotal row.

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.
If you pass an invalid subtotal, the error -9852 will be generated.

See Also
QR SET TOTALS SPACING.

4D Language Reference 1315

QR INSERT COLUMN Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR INSERT COLUMN (area; colNumber; object)

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area
colNumber Longint → Column number
object Field | Variable | Pointer → Object to be inserted in the column

Description
The QR INSERT COLUMN command inserts or creates a column at the specified position.
Columns located to the right of that position will be shifted accordingly.

position is the number of the column, established from left to right.

The default title for the column will be the value passed in object.

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.

Example
The following statement inserts (or creates) a first column in a Quick Report area, inserts
“Field1” as column title (default behavior) and populates the contents of the body with values
from Field1.

QR INSERT COLUMN (MyArea;1;->[Table 1]Field1)

See Also
QR DELETE COLUMN.

1316 4D Language Reference

QR New offscreen area Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR New offscreen area → Longint

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Longint ← Reference of the area created

Description
The QR New offscreen area command creates a new Quick Report offscreen area and returns its
reference.

See Also
QR DELETE OFFSCREEN AREA.

4D Language Reference 1317

QR ON COMMAND Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR ON COMMAND (area; methodName)

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area
methodName String → Name of the replacement method

Description
The QR ON COMMAND command executes the 4D method passed in methodName when a
Quick Report command is invoked by the user, by the selection of a menu command or by a
click on a button.

Note: This command does not work with external windows in Design mode.

If area equals zero, methodName will apply to each Quick Report area until the database is
closed or until the following call to QR ON COMMAND is made: QR ON COMMAND(0;"").

methodName receives two parameters:

• $1 is the reference of the area (Longint).
• $2 is the command number of the command that was selected (Longint).

Note: When planning on compiling the database, it is necessary to declare both $1 and $2 as
Longints, even if you do not use them.

If you want the initial command to be executed, you need to include the following in the
called method: QR EXECUTE COMMAND($1;$2).

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.

See Also
QR EXECUTE COMMAND, QR Get command status.

1318 4D Language Reference

QR REPORT Quick Report

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR REPORT ({aTable; }document{; hierarchical{; wizard{; search}}}{; *})

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table to use for the report, or Default table if omitted
document String → Quick Report document to load
hierarchical Boolean → True = Display related Many tables
False or omitted = Do not display (default)
wizard Boolean → True = Display the wizard button
False or omitted = Do not display (default)
search Boolean → True = Display the search tools and master table
choice, False or omitted = Do not display (default)
* * → Deletion of printing dialog boxes

Description
QR REPORT prints a report for aTable, created with the Quick Report editor shown here.

4D Language Reference 1319

The Quick Report editor allows users to create their own reports. See the 4D Design Reference
manual for details on creating reports with the Quick Report editor.

Notes:
• The editor does not appear if the table has been declared “Invisible.”
• When the editor is called using the QR REPORT command, the All relations in automatic
option that is used to modify the automatic/manual status of the relations is hidden. This
allows the developer to manage this status himself using the SET AUTOMATIC RELATIONS and
SET FIELD RELATION command.

The document parameter is a report document that was created with the Quick Report editor
and saved on disk. The document stores the specifications of the report, not the records to be
printed.
If an empty string ("") is specified for document, QR REPORT displays an Open File dialog box
and the user can select the report to print.
If the document parameter specifies a document that does not exist (for example, pass Char(1)
in document), the Quick Report editor is displayed.

The hierarchical parameter defines whether the related Many tables are displayed in the field
selection list. By default, this value is set to 0 (no display for related Many tables).

The wizard parameter indicates whether the Open Wizard button is going to be displayed in
the Quick Report editor, therefore either allowing or disallowing access to the wizard. By
default, this value is set to False (no access to the wizard).

The search parameter indicates whether the New Query button and the Master table drop-
down menu are going to be displayed in the Quick Report editor, therefore either allowing or
disallowing modification of the current table and current master table. By default, this value is
set to False (no access to the search tools and master table).

After a report is selected, the dialog boxes for printing are displayed, unless the * parameter is
specified. If this parameter is specified, these dialog boxes are not displayed. The report is then
printed.

If the Quick Report editor is not involved, the OK variable is set to 1 if a report is printed;
otherwise, it is set to 0 (zero) (i.e., if the user clicked Cancel in the printing dialog boxes).

4D Server: This command can be executed on 4D Server within the framework of a stored
procedure. In this context:
• Make sure that no dialog box appears on the server machine (except for a specific
requirement). To do this, it is necessary to call the command with the * or > parameter.

1320 4D Language Reference

• The syntax which makes the label editor appear does not work with 4D Server; in this case,
the system variable OK is set to 0.
• In the case of a problem concerning the printer (out of paper, printer disconnected, etc.), no
error message is generated.

Examples
1. The following example lets the user query the [People] table, and then automatically prints
the report “Detailed Listing”:

QUERY ([People])
If (OK=1)
QR REPORT ([People];"Detailed Listing";False;False;False;*)
End if

2. The following example lets the user query the [People] table, and then lets the user choose
which report to print:

QUERY ([People])
If (OK=1)
QR REPORT ([People];"";False;False;False)
End if

3. The following example lets the user query the [People] table, and then displays the Quick
Report editor so the user can design, save, load and print any reports with or without the
wizard:

QUERY ([People])
If (OK=1)
QR REPORT ([People];Char(1);False;True)
End if

4. Refer to the example of the SET FIELD RELATION command.

See Also
PRINT LABEL, PRINT SELECTION, SET ALLOWED METHODS.

4D Language Reference 1321

QR REPORT TO BLOB Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR REPORT TO BLOB (area; blob)

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area
blob BLOB → Blob to house the Quick Report

Description
The QR REPORT TO BLOB command places the report whose reference was passed in area in a
BLOB (variable or field).

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.

Example
The following statement assigns the Quick Report stored in MyArea into a BLOB Field.

QR REPORT TO BLOB (MyArea;[Table 1]Field4)

See Also
QR BLOB TO REPORT.

1322 4D Language Reference

QR RUN Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR RUN (area)

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area to execute

Description
The QR RUN command executes the report area whose reference was passed as parameter with
the Quick Report current settings, including the output type. You can use the QR SET
DESTINATION command to modify the output type.

The report is executed on the table to which the area belongs. When area designates an
offscreen area, it is necessary to specify the table to be used via the QR SET REPORT TABLE
command.

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.

4D Language Reference 1323

QR SET AREA PROPERTY Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR SET AREA PROPERTY (area; property; value)

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area
property Longint → Interface element designated
value Longint → 1 = displayed, 0 = hidden

Description
The QR SET AREA PROPERTY command allows you to display or hide the interface element
(toolbar or menu bar) whose reference is passed in property.

The menu bar and toolbars are numbered from 1 to 6 (top to bottom) and the value 7 is
dedicated to the contextual menu.
You can use the constants from the QR Area Properties theme to designate the interface item:

Constant Description
qr view menubar (1) Display status of the menu bar (Displayed=1, Hidden=0)
qr view standard toolbar (2) Display status of the Standard toolbar (Displayed=1, Hidden=0)
qr view style toolbar (3) Display status of the Style toolbar (Displayed=1, Hidden=0)
qr view operators toolbar (4) Display status of the Operators toolbar (Displayed=1,
Hidden=0)
qr view color toolbar (5) Display status of the Color toolbar (Displayed=1, Hidden=0)
qr view column toolbar (6) Display status of the Column toolbar (Displayed=1, Hidden=0)
qr view contextual menus (7) Display status of the Contextual menu (Displayed=1, Hidden=0)

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.
If you pass an invalid property parameter, the error -9852 will be generated.

See Also
QR Get area property.

1324 4D Language Reference

QR SET BORDERS Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR SET BORDERS (area; column; row; border; line{; color})

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area
column Longint → Column number
row Longint → Row number
border Longint → Border composite value
line Longint → Line thickness
color Longint → Border color

Description
The QR SET BORDERS command allows you to set the border style for a given cell.

area is the reference of the Quick Report area.

column is the column number of the cell.

row is the row number of the cell.

• if row equals -1, the title of the report is affected
• if row equals -2, the detail of the report is affected
• if row equals -3, the grand total of the report is affected
• if row is a positive integer, it designates the Subtotal (break) level that is affected.

You can use constants from the QR Rows for Properties theme to designate the row item. (qr
title= -1, qr detail=-2, qr grand total=-3).

border is a composite value that indicates which borders of the cell are to be affected:
• 1 indicates the left border
• 2 indicates the top border
• 4 indicates the right border
• 8 indicates the bottom border
• 16 indicates the inside vertical border
• 32 indicates the inside horizontal border.

4D Language Reference 1325

You can use constants from the QR Borders theme to designate the border item.

For example, a value of 5 passed in border would affect the right and left borders.

line is the thickness of the line:

• 0 indicates no line
• 1 indicates a thickness of 1/4 point
• 2 indicates a thickness of 1/2 point
• 3 indicates a thickness of 1 point
• 4 indicates a thickness of 2 points

color is the color of the line:

• If color is a positive value, it indicates a specific color.
• If color equals 0, the color is black.
• If color equals -1, no changes are to be made.
Note: The default color is black.

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.
If you pass an invalid column number, the error -9852 will be generated.
If you pass an invalid row number, the error -9853 will be generated.
If you pass an invalid border parameter, the error -9854 will be generated.
If you pass an invalid line parameter, the error -9855 will be generated.

See Also
QR GET BORDERS.

1326 4D Language Reference

QR SET DESTINATION Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR SET DESTINATION (area; type{; specifics})

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area
type Longint → Type of the report
specifics String | Variable → Specifics linked to the output type

Description
The QR SET DESTINATION command sets the output type of the report for the area whose
reference was passed in area.

In the type parameter, you can pass one of the constants of the QR Output Destination theme.
The contents of the specifics parameter depends on the value of type. The following table
describes the values that can be passed in both type and specifics parameters:

Destination Type (value) specifics

Printer qr printer (1) N.A.
Text file qr text file (2) Pathname to the file
4D View qr 4D View area (3) N.A.
4D Chart qr 4D Chart area (4) N.A.
HTML file qr HTML file (5) Pathname to the HTML file

qr text file (2): If you pass an empty string in the specifics parameter, a Save file dialog is
displayed; otherwise the file is saved at the location indicated by the path.
The default field delimiter is the tab character (code 9). The default record delimiter is the
carriage return character (code 13). You can change these defaults by assigning values to the
two delimiter system variables: FldDelimit and RecDelimit. If under Windows, FldDelimit equals
13, a char 10 (line feed) will be appended after the carriage return. Be aware that these
variables are used by other commands such as IMPORT TEXT for example. Changing them for
the Quick Report editor, changes them everywhere in the application.

qr 4D View area (3): If 4D View is active for the user, a 4D View external window is created and
populated with the results of the current settings of the Quick Report area.

4D Language Reference 1327

qr 4D Chart area (4): A 4D Chart external window is created and populated with the results of
the current settings of the Quick Report area. For detailed information on how the translation
is performed, please refer to the Design Reference manual.

qr HTML file (5): An HTML file is created using the template set by QR SET HTML TEMPLATE. For
detailed information on how the translation is performed, please refer to the Design Reference
manual.

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.
If the value of the destination type is incorrect, the error -9852 will be generated.

Example
The following code sets the destination as being the text file "Mydoc.txt" and executes the
Quick Report:

QR SET DESTINATION(MyArea; qr text file; "MyDoc.txt")

QR RUN(MyArea)

See Also
QR GET DESTINATION.

1328 4D Language Reference

QR SET DOCUMENT PROPERTY Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR SET DOCUMENT PROPERTY (area; property; value)

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area
property Longint → 1 = Printing dialog, 2 = Document unit
value Longint → Value for the property

Description
The QR SET DOCUMENT PROPERTY command allows you to display the printing dialog or to
define the unit used for the document.

In property, you can pass the following constants, located in the QR Document properties
constant theme:

Constant Value
qr printing dialog 1
qr unit 2

• If property equals 1, the command applies to the display of the print dialog.
- If value equals 1, the print dialog is displayed prior to printing.
- If value equals 0, the print dialog is not displayed prior to printing (default value).

• If property equals 2, the command applies to the document unit.

- If value equals 0, the document unit is points.
- If value equals 1, the document unit is centimeters.
- If value equals 2, the document unit is inches.

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.
If you pass an invalid property value, the error -9852 will be generated.

See Also
QR Get document property.

4D Language Reference 1329

QR SET HEADER AND FOOTER Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR SET HEADER AND FOOTER (area; selector; leftTitle; centerTitle; rightTitle; height{; picture{;
pictAlignment}})

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area
selector Longint → 1 = Header, 2 = Footer
leftTitle String → Text displayed on the left side
centerTitle String → Text displayed in the middle
rightTitle String → Text displayed on the right side
height Real → Header or footer height
picture Picture → Picture to display
pictAlignment Longint → Alignment attribute for the picture

Description
The QR SET HEADER AND FOOTER command allows you to set the contents and size of the
header or footer.

selector allows you to select the header or the footer:

• if selector equals 1, the header will be affected;
• if selector equals 2, the footer will be affected.

leftTitle, centerTitle and rightTitle are the values for, respectively, the left, center and right
header/footer.

height is the height of the header/footer, expressed in the unit selected for the quick report.

picture is a picture that will be displayed in the header or footer.

pictAlignment is the alignment attribute for the picture passed in picture.

• If pictAlignment equals 0, the picture is aligned to the left.
• If pictAlignment equals 1, the picture is centered.
• If pictAlignment equals 2, the picture is aligned to the right.

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.
If you pass an invalid selector value, the error -9852 will be generated.

1330 4D Language Reference

Example
The following statement places the title “Center title” in the header for the Quick Report in
MyArea and sets the header height to 200 points:

QR SET HEADER AND FOOTER(MyArea; 1;""; "Center title";""; 200)

See Also
QR GET HEADER AND FOOTER.

4D Language Reference 1331

QR SET HTML TEMPLATE Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR SET HTML TEMPLATE (area; template)

Parameter Type Description

area Longint --> Reference of the area
template Text --> HTML template

Description
The QR SET HTML TEMPLATE command sets the HTML template currently used for the Quick
Report area. The template will be used when building the report in HTML format.

The template uses a set of tags to process the data in order to either retain a layout close to the
original report or to adopt your own custom HTML.

Note: You first need to call QR SET DESTINATION to set the output to HTML file.

HTML Tags
<!--#4DQRheader--> ... <!--/#4DQRheader-->
The HTML contents that are included between these tags come from the column titles. You
will typically use these tags to define the title row of the report.

<!--#4DQRrow--> ... <!--/#4DQRrow-->

The HTML contents that are included between these tags are repeated for each data row
(including detail and subtotal rows).

<!--#4DQRcol--> ... <!--/#4DQRcol-->

The HTML contents that are included between these tags are repeated for each data column
within a row. The column order will remain identical to the order in the report. When used in
conjunction with <!--#4DQRcol;n--> ... <!--/#4DQRcol;n-->, the tags <!--#4DQRcol--> ...
<!--/#4DQRcol--> will only go through the columns whose contents are not inserted using
<!--#4DQRcol;n--> ... <!--/#4DQRcol;n-->.
For example, in a report that has five columns, you choose to use <!--#4DQRcol;2--> ...
<!--/#4DQRcol;2--> to insert data from the second column, <!--#4DQRcol--> ... <!--/#4DQRcol-->
will go, for each row, through columns 1, 3, 4, and 5. These last tags ignore the column whose
contents are published using <!--#4DQRcol;2--> ... <!--/#4DQRcol;2-->.

1332 4D Language Reference

<!--#4DQRcol;n--> ... <!--/#4DQRcol;n-->
The HTML contents that are included between these tags are extracted from the column in the
report whose number is “n”. If, for example, you want to display a different column order in
the HTML output for a three-column report, you could use:
<!--#4DQRrow--> <!--#4DQRcol;3--> ... <!--/#4DQRcol;3--><!--#4DQRcol;2--> ...
<!--/#4DQRcol;2--><!--#4DQRcol;1--> ... <!--/#4DQRcol;1--> <!--/#4DQRrow-->
In this example, the columns are inserted in the opposite order of the report.

<!--#4DQRfont--> ... <!--/#4DQRfont-->

The HTML contents that are included between these tags will be assigned the font of the
current column or cell.
<!--#4DQRfont--> will be replaced by an HTML font definition and <!--/#4DQRfont--> will be
replaced by the matching closing tag (</font>).

<!--#4DQRface--> ... <!--/#4DQRface-->

The HTML contents that are included between these tags will be assigned the font style of the
current column or cell.
<!--#4DQRface--> will be replaced by an HTML face definition and <!--#4DQRface--> will be
replaced by the matching closing tag (</face>).

<!--#4DQRbgcolor-->
This color tag will be replaced by the current color for the current cell.

<!--#4DQRdata-->
This tag will be replaced by the current data for the current cell.

<!--#4DQRlHeader--><!--#4DQRdata--><!--/#4DQRlHeader-->
<!--#4DQRcHeader--><!--#4DQRdata--><!--/#4DQRcHeader-->
<!--#4DQRrHeader--><!--#4DQRdata--><!--/#4DQRrHeader-->
These tags will be replaced respectively by the data in the left, center or right header.

<!--#4DQRlFooter--><!--#4DQRdata--><!--/#4DQRlFooter-->
<!--#4DQRcFooter--><!--#4DQRdata--><!--/#4DQRcFooter-->
<!--#4DQRrFooter--><!--#4DQRdata--><!--/#4DQRrFooter-->
These tags will be replaced respectively by the data in the left, center or right footer.

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.

See Also
QR Get HTML template.

4D Language Reference 1333

QR SET INFO COLUMN Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR SET INFO COLUMN (area; colNum; title; object; hide; size; repeatedValue; displayFormat)

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area
colNum Longint → Column number
title String → Title of the column
object Field | Variable → Object assigned for that column
hide Longint → 0 = displayed, 1 = hidden
size Longint → Column size
repeatedValue Longint → 0 = not repeated, 1 = repeated
displayFormat String → Format for the data

Description

List mode
The QR SET INFO COLUMN command allows you to set the parameters of an existing column.

area is the reference of the Quick Report area.

colNum is the number of the column to modify.

title is the title that will be displayed in the header of the column.

object is the actual object of the column (variable, field or formula).

hide specifies whether the column is displayed or hidden:

• if hide equals 1, the column is set to hidden;
• if hide equals 0, the column is set to displayed.

size is the size in pixels to assign to the column. If size equals -1, the size is made automatic.

repeatedValue is the status for data repetition. For example, if the value for a field or variable
does not change from one record to the other, it may or may not be repeated when they do
not change.
• If repeatedValue equals 0, values are not repeated.
• If repeatedValue equals 1, values are repeated.

1334 4D Language Reference

displayFormat is the display format. Display formats are the 4D formats compatible with the
data displayed.

The following statement sets the title of column #1 to Title, sets the contents of the body to
Field2, makes the column visible with a width of 150 pixels and sets the format to ###.##.

QR SET INFO COLUMN(area; 1;"Title"; "[Table 1]Field2";0;150;0;"###,##")

Cross-table mode
The QR SET INFO COLUMN command allows you to set the same parameters but the reference
of the areas to which it applies is different and varies depending on the parameter you want to
set.
First of all, the title, hide, and repeatedValue parameters are not used when this command is
used in cross-table mode. The value to use for colNum varies depending on whether you want
to set the column size or the data source and display format.
• Column size
This is a “visual” attribute, therefore columns are numbered from left to right, as depicted
below.

The following statement will set the size to automatic for all the columns in a cross-table
report and will leave other elements unchanged:

For ($i;1;3)
QR GET INFO COLUMN(qr_area;$i;$title;$obj;$hide;$size;$rep;$format)
QR SET INFO COLUMN(qr_area;$i;$title;$obj;$hide;0;$rep;$format)
End for

4D Language Reference 1335

You will notice that since you want to alter only the column size, you have to use QR GET
INFO COLUMN to retrieve the column properties and pass them to QR SET INFO COLUMN to
leave it unchanged, except for the column size.

• Data source (object) and display format

In this case the numbering of columns operates as depicted below:

You will notice that not all cells can be addressed using the QR SET INFO COLUMN command,
the cells that are not numbered above are addressed using QR SET TOTALS DATA.

The following code assigns data sources to the three cells required for creating a basic cross-
table report:

QR SET REPORT TABLE(qr_area;Table(->[Invoices]))

ALL RECORDS([Invoices])
QR SET REPORT KIND(qr_area;2)
QR SET INFO COLUMN(qr_area;1;"";->[Invoices]Item;1;-1;1;"")
QR SET INFO COLUMN(qr_area;2;"";->[Invoices]Quarter;1;-1;1;"")
QR SET INFO COLUMN(qr_area;3;"";->[Invoices]Quantity;1;-1;1;"")

1336 4D Language Reference

This would be the resulting report area:

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.
If you pass an invalid colNum value, the error -9852 will be generated.

See Also
QR GET INFO COLUMN, QR Get info row, QR SET INFO ROW.

4D Language Reference 1337

QR SET INFO ROW Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR SET INFO ROW (area; row; hide)

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area created
row Longint → Row designator
hide Longint → 0 = displayed, 1 = hidden

Description
The QR SET INFO ROW command displays/hides the row whose reference was passed in row.

row designates which row is affected:

• if row equals -1, the title of the report is affected,
• if row equals -2, the detail of the report is affected,
• if row equals -3, the grand total of the report is affected,
• if row is a positive integer, it designates the subtotal (break) level that is affected.

You can use constants from the QR Rows for Properties theme to designate the row item (qr
title= -1, qr detail=-2, qr grand total=-3).

hide specifies whether the line is displayed or hidden:

• if hide equals 1, the row is set to hidden;
• if hide equals 0, the row is set to displayed.

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.
If you pass an invalid row value, the error -9852 will be generated.

Example
The following statement hides the detail row:

QR SET INFO ROW (area;qr detail; 1)

See Also
QR GET INFO COLUMN, QR Get info row, QR SET INFO COLUMN.

1338 4D Language Reference

QR SET REPORT KIND Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR SET REPORT KIND (area; type)

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area
type Longint → Type of the report

Description
The QR SET REPORT KIND command sets the report type for the area whose reference was
passed in area.

• If type equals 1, the report type is list.

• If type equals 2, the report type is cross-table.

You can also use the constants of the QR Report Types theme:
Constant Value
qr list report 1
qr cross report 2

If you set a new type for an existing current report, it removes the previous settings and
creates a new empty report, ready to be set.

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.
If you pass an invalid type value, the error -9852 will be generated.

See Also
QR Get report kind.

4D Language Reference 1339

QR SET REPORT TABLE Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR SET REPORT TABLE (area; aTable)

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area
aTable Longint → Table number

Description
The QR SET REPORT TABLE command sets the current table for the report area whose reference
was passed in area to the table whose number was passed in aTable.

It is necessary for a table to be assigned to the report since the report editor will be using the
current selection for that table to display the data, perform computations and propagate
relations, if needed.

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.
If you pass an invalid table value, the error -9852 will be generated.

See Also
QR Get report table.

1340 4D Language Reference

QR SET SELECTION Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR SET SELECTION (area; left; top; right; bottom)

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area
left Longint → Left boundary
top Longint → Top boundary
right Longint → Right boundary
bottom Longint → Bottom boundary

Description
The QR SET SELECTION command allows you to highlight a cell, a row, a column or the entire
area as you would with a mouse click. It also allows you to deselect the current selection.

left is the number of the left boundary. If left equals 0, the entire row is selected.
top is the number of the top boundary. If top equals 0, the entire column is selected.
right is the number of the right boundary.
bottom is the number of the bottom boundary.

Notes:
• If both left and top equal 0, the entire area is highlighted.
• If you want no selection, pass -1 to left, right, top and bottom.

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.

See Also
QR GET SELECTION.

4D Language Reference 1341

QR SET SORTS Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR SET SORTS (area; aColumns{; aOrders})

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area
aColumns Real array → Columns
aOrders Real array → Sort orders

Description
The QR SET SORTS command allows you to set the sort orders for the columns in the report
whose reference is passed in area.

aColumns: in this array, you need to store the column numbers of columns to which you want
to assign a sort order.

aOrders: each element of this array must contain the sort orders for the matching column in
the aColumns array.
• If aOrders{$i} equals 1, the sort order is ascending.
• If aOrders{$i} equals - 1, the sort order is descending.

Cross-table mode
In the case of cross-table mode, you cannot have more than two items in the array. You can
only sort columns (1) and rows (2). The data (that are the intersection of columns and rows)
cannot be sorted.
Here is the code to sort only the rows in the case of a cross-table report:

ARRAY REAL($aColumns;1)
$aColumns{1}:=2
ARRAY REAL($aOrders;1)
$aOrders{1}:=-1 `Alphabetic sort for rows
QR SET SORTS (qr_area;$aColumns;$aOrders)

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.

See Also
QR GET SORTS.

1342 4D Language Reference

QR SET TEXT PROPERTY Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR SET TEXT PROPERTY (area; colNum; rowNum; property; value)

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area
colNum Longint → Column number
rowNum Longint → Row number
property Longint → Operator value for the cell
value Longint → Value for the selected property

Description
The QR SET TEXT PROPERTY command allows you to set the text attributes for the cell
determined by colNum and rowNum.

area is the reference of the Quick Report area.

colNum is the number of the cell column.

rowNum is the reference of the cell row:

• if rowNum equals -1, it designates the column title.
• if rowNum equals -2, it designates the detail area.
• if rowNum equals -3, it designates the column grand total.
• if rowNum equals -4, it designates the page header.
• if rowNum equals -5, it designates the page footer.
You can use constants from the QR Rows for Properties theme to designate the row item.
Constant Values are: qr title (-1), qr detail (-2), qr grand total (–3), qr header (–4), and qr footer (-
5).
Note: When passing -4 or -5 as rowNum, you still need to pass a column number in colNum,
even if it is not used.
• if rowNum is a positive value, it designates the corresponding subtotal (break level).

Note: In cross-table mode, the principle is similar except for the row values, which are always
positive.

4D Language Reference 1343

property is the value of the text attribute to assign. You can use the constants of the QR Text
Properties theme, and the following values can be set:

Constant (value) Value to set

qr font (1) font number as returned through FONT LIST
qr font size (2) font size expressed in points (9 to 255)
qr bold (3) Bold style attribute (0 or 1)
qr italic (4) Italic style attribute (0 or 1)
qr underline (5) font Underline style attribute (0 or 1)
qr text color (6) font Color number attribute (longint)
qr justification (7) font Justification attribute (0 for default, 1 for left,
2 for center or 3 for right)
qr background color (8) background color number
qr alternate background color (9) alternate background color number

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.
If you pass an invalid colNum number, the error -9852 will be generated.
If you pass an invalid rowNum number, the error -9853 will be generated.
If you pass an invalid property number, the error -9854 will be generated.

Example
This method defines several attributes of the first column’s title:

`The following call assigns the font Times:

QR SET TEXT PROPERTY(qr_area;1;-1;qr font;Font number("Times"))
`assigning the font size 10 points:
QR SET TEXT PROPERTY(qr_area;1;-1;qr font size;10)
`assigning the font attribute Bold:
QR SET TEXT PROPERTY(qr_area;1;-1;qr bold;1)
`assigning the font attribute Italic:
QR SET TEXT PROPERTY(qr_area;1;-1;qr italic;1)
`assigning the font attribute Underline:
QR SET TEXT PROPERTY(qr_area;1;-1;qr underline;1)
`assigning the color bright green:
QR SET TEXT PROPERTY(qr_area;1;-1;qr text color;0x0000FF00)

See Also
QR Get text property.

1344 4D Language Reference

QR SET TOTALS DATA Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR SET TOTALS DATA (area; colNum; breakNum; operator | value)

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area
colNum Longint → Column number
breakNum Longint → Break number
operator | value Longint | String → Operator value for the cell or Cell content

Description

Note: This command cannot create a subtotal.

List Mode
The QR SET TOTALS DATA command allows you to set the details of a specific break (total or
subtotal).

area is the reference of the Quick Report area.

colNum is the column number of the cell whose data is going to be set.

breakNum is the number of the break whose data will be set (subtotal or grand total). For a
Subtotal, breaknum is the sort number. For the Grand total, breaknum equals -3 or the constant
qr grand total.

operator is an addition of all the operators present in the cell. You can use the constants of the
QR Operators theme to set the value:

Constant Value
qr sum 1
qr average 2
qr min 4
qr max 8
qr count 16
qr standard deviation 32

4D Language Reference 1345

If operator equals 0, there is no operator.

value is the text to be placed in the cell.

Note: Operator/value is mutually exclusive, so you either set an operator or a text.

You can pass the following values:

- # for the value that triggered the break or subtotal
- ##S will be replaced by the sum.
- ##A will be replaced by the Average.
- ##C will be replaced by the Count
- ##X will be replaced by the Max.
- ##N will be replaced by the Min.
- ##D will be replaced by the Standard deviation.
- ##xx, where xx is a column number. This will be replaced by that column’s value, using its
formatting. If this column does not exist, then it will not be replaced.

Cross-table Mode
The QR SET TOTALS DATA command allows you to set the details of a specific cell.

area is the reference of the Quick Report area.

colNum is the column number of the cell whose data is going to be set.

breakNum is the row number of the cell whose data is going to be set.

operator is an addition of all the operators present in the cell. You can use the constants of the
QR Operators theme to set the value (see above).

value is the text to be placed in the cell.

1346 4D Language Reference

Here is a depiction of how the parameters column and break have to be combined in cross-
table mode:

Supported Types of Data

The types of data that you can pass are of two basic kinds:
• Title
A title is passed through the parameter value. The value is actually a string and can be passed
only for the following cells: colNum=3 breakNum=1 and colNum=1 breakNum=3.

• Operator
An operator or a combination of operators (as described above) can be passed for the following
cells:
colNum=2, breakNum=2
colNum=3, breakNum=2
colNum=2, breakNum=3
Please note that these last two values affect the cell (Column 3; Row 3) as well. If a
computation is defined in the cell (Column 2; Row 3), the contents of this cell (Column 2;
Row 3) always define the contents of the cell (Column 3; Row 3).

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.
If you pass an invalid colNum number, the error -9852 will be generated.
If you pass an invalid breakNum number, the error -9853 will be generated.

See Also
QR GET TOTALS DATA.

4D Language Reference 1347

QR SET TOTALS SPACING Quick Report

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QR SET TOTALS SPACING (area; subtotal; value)

Parameter Type Description

area Longint → Reference of the area
subtotal Longint → Subtotal number
value Longint → 0=no space, 32000=inserts a page break,
>0=spacing added at the top of the break level,
<0=proportional increase

Description
The QR SET TOTALS SPACING command allows you to set a space above a subtotal row. It
applies only to the list mode.

area is the reference of the Quick Report area.

subtotal is the subtotal level (or break level) that will be affected.

value defines the value of the spacing:

• If value equals 0, no space is added.
• If value equals 32000, a page break is inserted.
• If value is a positive value, it expresses the spacing value in pixels.
• If value is a negative value, it expresses the spacing as a percentage of the subtotal row. For
example, -100 will set a space of 100% above the subtotal row.

Note: If the space above a subtotal row “pushes” the row to the next page, there will be no
space inserted above the row on that page.

If you pass an invalid area number, the error -9850 will be generated.
If you pass an invalid subtotal, the error -9852 will be generated.

See Also
QR GET TOTALS SPACING.

1348 4D Language Reference

40
______________________
Record Locking

4D Language Reference 1349

1350 4D Language Reference
Record Locking Record Locking

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4D and 4D Server automatically manage databases by preventing multi-user or multi-process

conflicts. Two users or two processes cannot modify the same record or object at the same
time. However, the second user or process can have read-only access to the record or object at
the same time.

There are several reasons for using the multi-user commands:

• Modifying records by using the language.
• Using a custom user interface for multi-user operations.
• Saving related modifications inside a transaction.

There are three important concepts to be aware of when using commands in a multi-
processing database:
• Each table is in either a read-only or a read/write state.
• Records become locked when they are loaded and unlocked when they are unloaded.
• A locked record cannot be modified.

As a convention in the following sections, the person performing an operation on the multi-
user database is referred to as the local user. Other people using the database are referred to as
the other users. The discussion is from the perspective of the local user. Also, from a multi-
process perspective, the process executing an operation on the database is the current process.
Any other executing process is referred to as other processes. The discussion is from the point
of view of the current process.

Locked Records
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

A locked record cannot be modified by the local user or the current process. A locked record
can be loaded, but cannot be modified. A record is locked when one of the other users or
processes has successfully loaded the record for modification. Only the user who is modifying
the record sees that record as unlocked. All other users and processes see the record as locked,
and therefore unavailable for modification. A table must be in a read/write state for a record to
be loaded unlocked.

4D Language Reference 1351

Read-Only and Read/Write States
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Each table in a database is in either a read/write or a read-only state for each user and process
of the database. Read-only means that records for the table can be loaded but not modified.
Read/write means that records for the table can be loaded and modified if no other user has
locked the record first.

Note that if you change the status of a table, the change takes effect for the next record
loaded. If there is a record currently loaded when you change the table’s status, that record is
not affected by the status change.

Read-Only State
When a table is read-only and a record is loaded, the record is always locked. In other words,
the record can be displayed, printed, and otherwise used, but it cannot be modified.

Note that read-only status applies only to editing existing records. Read-only status does not
affect the creation of new records. You can add records to a read-only table using CREATE
RECORD and ADD RECORD or the menu commands of the Design environment.

4D automatically sets a table to read-only for commands that do not require write access to
records. These commands are:
• DISPLAY SELECTION
• DISTINCT VALUES
• EXPORT DIF
• EXPORT SYLK
• EXPORT TEXT
• GRAPH TABLE
• PRINT SELECTION
• PRINT LABEL
• QR REPORT
• SELECTION TO ARRAY
• SELECTION RANGE TO ARRAY

You can find out the state of a table at any time using the Read only state function.

Before executing any of these commands, 4D saves the current state of the table (read-only or
read/write) for the current process. After the command has executed, the state is restored.

1352 4D Language Reference

Read/Write State
When a table is read/write and a record is loaded, the record will become unlocked if no other
user has locked the record first. If the record is locked by another user, the record is loaded as a
locked record that cannot be modified by the local user.

A table must be set to read/write and the record loaded for it to become unlocked and thus
modifiable.

If a user loads a record from a table in read/write mode, no other users can load that record for
modification. However, other users can add records to the table, either through the CREATE
RECORD or ADD RECORD commands or manually in the Design environment.

Read/write is the default state for all tables when a database is opened and a new process is
started.

Changing the Status of a Table

You can use the READ ONLY and READ WRITE commands to change the state of a table. If you
want to change the state of a table in order to make a record read-only or read/write, you must
execute the command before the record is loaded. Any record that is already loaded is not
affected by the
READ ONLY and READ WRITE commands.

Each process has its own state (read-only or read/write) for each table in the database.

Loading, Modifying and Unloading Records

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Before the local user can modify a record, the table must be in the read/write state and the
record must be loaded and unlocked.

Any of the commands that loads a current record (if there is one) — such as NEXT RECORD,
QUERY, ORDER BY, RELATE ONE, etc. — sets the record as locked or unlocked. The record is
loaded according to the current state of its table (read-only or read/write) and its availability. A
record may also be loaded for a related table by any of the commands that cause an automatic
relation to be established.

If a table is in the read-only state, then a record loaded from that table is locked. A locked
record cannot be saved or deleted from another process. Read-only is the preferred state,
because it allows other users to load, modify, and then save the record.

4D Language Reference 1353

If a table is in the read/write state, then a record that is loaded from that table is unlocked
only if no other users have locked the record first. An unlocked record can be modified and
saved. A table should be put into the read/write state before a record needs to be loaded,
modified, and then saved.

If the record is to be modified, you use the Locked function to test whether or not a record is
locked by another user. If a record is locked (Locked returns True), load the record with the
LOAD RECORD command and again test whether or not the record is locked. This sequence
must be continued until the record becomes unlocked (Locked returns False).

When modifications to be made to a record are finished, the record must be released (and
therefore unlocked for the other users) with UNLOAD RECORD. If a record is not unloaded, it
will remain locked for all other users until a different current record is selected. Changing the
current record of a table automatically unlocks the previous current record. You need to
explicitly call UNLOAD RECORD if you do not change the current record. This discussion
applies to existing records. When a new record is created, it can be saved regardless of the state
of the table to which it belongs.

Note: When it is used in a transaction, the UNLOAD RECORD command unloads the current
record only for the process that manages the transaction. For other processes, the record stays
locked as long as the transaction has not been validated (or cancelled).

Use the LOCKED ATTRIBUTES command to see which user and/or process have locked a record.

Loops to Load Unlocked Records

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The following example shows the simplest loop with which to load an unlocked record:

READ WRITE ([Customers]) ` Set the table’s state to read/write

Repeat ` Loop until the record is unlocked
LOAD RECORD ([Customers]) ` Load record and set locked status
Until (Not (Locked([Customers])))
` Do something to the record here
READ ONLY ([Customers]) ` Set the table’s state to read-only

The loop continues until the record is unlocked.

A loop like this is used only if the record is unlikely to be locked by anyone else, since the user
would have to wait for the loop to terminate. Thus, it is unlikely that the loop would be used
as is unless the record could only be modified by means of a method.

1354 4D Language Reference

The following example uses the previous loop to load an unlocked record and modify the
record:

READ WRITE([Inventory])
Repeat ` Loop until the record is unlocked
LOAD RECORD([Inventory]) ` Load record and set it to locked
Until (Not (Locked([Inventory])))
[Inventory]Part Qty := [Inventory]Part Qty – 1 ` Modify the record
SAVE RECORD ([Inventory]) ` Save the record
UNLOAD RECORD ([Inventory]) ` Let other users modfiy it
READ ONLY([Inventory])

The MODIFY RECORD command automatically notifies the user if a record is locked, and
prevents the record from being modified. The following example avoids this automatic
notification by first testing the record with the Locked function. If the record is locked, the
user can cancel.

This example efficiently checks to see if the current record is locked for the table [Commands].
If it is locked, the process is delayed by the procedure for one second. This technique can be
used both in a multi-user or multi-process situation:

Repeat
READ ONLY([Commands]) ` You do not need read/write right now
QUERY([Commands])
` If the search was completed and some records were returned
If ((OK=1) & (Records in selection([Commands])>0))
READ WRITE([Commands]) ` Set the table to read/write state
LOAD RECORD([Commands])
While (Locked([Commands]) & (OK=1)) `If the record is locked,
` loop until the record is unlocked
` Who is the record locked by?
LOCKED ATTRIBUTES([Commands];$Process;$User;$Machine;$Name)
If ($Process=-1) ` Has the record been deleted?
ALERT("The record has been deleted in the meantime.")
OK:=0
Else

4D Language Reference 1355

 If ($User="") ` Are you in single-user mode
$User:="you"
End if
CONFIRM("The record is already used by "+$User+" in the "+$Name+
" Process.")
If (OK=1) ` If you want to wait for a few seconds
DELAY PROCESS(Current process;120) ` Wait for a few seconds
LOAD RECORD([Commands])` Try to load the record
End if
End if
End while
If (OK=1) ` The record is unlocked
MODIFY RECORD([Commands]) ` You can modify the record
UNLOAD RECORD([Commands])
End if
READ ONLY([Commands]) ` Switch back to read-only
OK:=1
End if
Until (OK=0)

Using Commands in Multi-user or Multi-process Environment

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

A number of commands in the language perform specific actions when they encounter a
locked record. They behave normally if they do not encounter a locked record.

Here is a list of these commands and their actions when a locked record is encountered.

• MODIFY RECORD: Displays a dialog box stating that the record is in use. The record is not
displayed, therefore the user cannot modify the record. In the Design environment, the record
is shown in read-only state.
• MODIFY SELECTION: Behaves normally except when the user double-clicks a record to modify
it. MODIFY SELECTION displays dialog box stating that the record is in use and then allows
read-only access to the record.
• APPLY TO SELECTION: Loads a locked record, but does not modify it. APPLY TO SELECTION
can be used to read information from the table without special care. If the command
encounters a locked record, the record is put into the LockedSet system set.
• DELETE SELECTION: Does not delete any locked records; it skips them. If the command
encounters a locked record, the record is put into the LockedSet system set.

1356 4D Language Reference

• DELETE RECORD: This command is ignored if the record is locked. No error is returned. You
must test that the record is unlocked before executing this command.
• SAVE RECORD: This command is ignored if the record is locked. No error is returned. You
must test that the record is unlocked before executing this command.
• ARRAY TO SELECTION: Does not save any locked records. If the command encounters a
locked record, the record is put into the LockedSet system set.
• GOTO RECORD: Records in a multi-user/multi-process database may be deleted and added by
other users, therefore the record numbers may change. Use caution when directly referencing
a record by number in a multi-user database.
• Sets: Take special care with sets, as the information that the set was based on may be
changed by another user or process.

See Also
LOAD RECORD, Locked, LOCKED ATTRIBUTES, Methods, READ ONLY, Read only state, READ
WRITE, UNLOAD RECORD, Variables.

4D Language Reference 1357

LOAD RECORD Record Locking

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

LOAD RECORD {(aTable)}

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table for which to load record, or
Default table, if omitted

Description
LOAD RECORD loads the current record of aTable. If there is no current record, LOAD RECORD
has no effect.
You can then use the Locked function to determine whether you can modify the record:
• If the table is in read-only state, the Locked function returns TRUE, and you cannot modify
the record.
• If the table is in read/write state but the record was already locked, the record will be read-
only, and you cannot modify the record.
• If the table is in read/write state and the record is not locked, you can modify the record in
the current process. The Locked function returns TRUE for all other users and processes.

Note: If the LOAD RECORD command is executed after a READ ONLY, the record is
automatically unloaded and loaded without having to use the UNLOAD RECORD command.

Usually, you do not need to use the LOAD RECORD command, because commands like QUERY,
NEXT RECORD, PREVIOUS RECORD, etc., automatically load the current record.

In multi-user and multi-process environments, when you need to modify an existing record,
you must access the table (to which the record belongs) in read/write mode. If a record is
locked and not loaded, LOAD RECORD allows you to attempt to load the record again at a later
time. By using LOAD RECORD in a loop, you can wait until the record becomes available in
read/write mode.

Tip: The LOAD RECORD command can be used to reload the current record in the context of
an input form. All the data modified are then replaced by their previous values. In this case,
the LOAD RECORD command carries out a sort of general cancellation of data entry.

See Also
Locked, Record Locking, UNLOAD RECORD.

1358 4D Language Reference

Locked Record Locking

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Locked {(aTable)} → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table to check for locked current record, or
Default table, if omitted

Function result Boolean ← Record is locked (TRUE), or

Record is unlocked (FALSE)

Description
Locked tests whether or not the current record of aTable is locked. Use this function to find out
whether or not the record is locked; then take appropriate action, such as giving the user the
choice of waiting for the record to be free or skipping the operation.

If Locked returns TRUE, then the record is locked by another user or process and cannot be
saved. In this case, use LOAD RECORD to reload the record until Locked returns FALSE.

If Locked returns FALSE, then the record is unlocked, meaning that the record is locked for all
other users. Only the local user or current process can modify and save the record. A table
must be in read/write state in order for you to modify the record.

If you try to load a record that has been deleted, Locked continues to return TRUE. To avoid
waiting for a record that does not exist anymore, use the LOCKED ATTRIBUTES command. If the
record has been deleted, the LOCKED ATTRIBUTES command returns -1 in the process
parameter.

Note: Locked returns False when there is no current record in table, in other words, when
Record number returns -1.

During transaction processing, LOAD RECORD and Locked are often used to test record
availability. If a record is locked, it is common to cancel the transaction.

See Also
LOAD RECORD, LOCKED ATTRIBUTES, Record Locking.

4D Language Reference 1359

LOCKED ATTRIBUTES Record Locking

version 11.2 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

LOCKED ATTRIBUTES ({aTable; }process; 4Duser; sessionUser; processName)

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table to check for record locked, or
Default table, if omitted
process Number ← Process reference number
4Duser String ← 4D user name
sessionUser String ← Name of user that opened work-session
processName String ← Process name

Description
LOCKED ATTRIBUTES returns information about the user and process that have locked a record.
The process number (on the server machine), the user name in the 4D application and in the
system as well as the process name are returned in the process, 4Duser, sessionUser, and
processName variables. You can use this information in a custom dialog box to warn the user
when a record is locked.

If the record is not locked, process returns 0 and 4Duser, sessionUser, and processName return
empty strings. If the record you try to load in read/write has been deleted, process returns -1
and 4Duser, sessionUser, and processName return empty strings.

The 4Duser parameter returned is the user name from the 4D password system, even if user
name is blank. If there is no password system, “Designer” is returned.

The sessionUser parameter returned corresponds to the name of the user that opened the
session on the client machine (this name is displayed more particularly in the 4D Server
administration window for each open process).

See Also
Locked, Record Locking.

1360 4D Language Reference

READ ONLY Record Locking

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

READ ONLY {(aTable | *)}

Parameter Type Description

aTable | * Table → Table for which to set read-only state, or
* for all the tables, or
Default table, if omitted

Description
READ ONLY changes the state of aTable to read-only for the process in which it is called. All
subsequent records that are loaded are locked, and you cannot make any changes made to
them. If the optional * parameter is specified, all tables are changed to read-only state.

Use READ ONLY when you do not need to modify the record or records.

Note: This command is not retroactive. A record is loaded according to the table’s read/write
status at the time of loading. To load a record from a read/write table in read-only mode, you
must first change the table state to read-only.

See Also
Read only state, READ WRITE, Record Locking.

4D Language Reference 1361

READ WRITE Record Locking

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

READ WRITE {(aTable | *)}

Parameter Type Description

aTable | * Table → Table for which to set read-write state, or
* for all the tables, or
Default table, if omitted

Description
READ WRITE changes the state of aTable to read/write for the process in which it is called. If the
optional * parameter is specified, all tables are changed to read/write state.

After a call to READ WRITE, when a record is loaded, the record is unlocked if no other user has
locked the record. This command does not change the status of the currently loaded record,
only that of subsequently loaded records.

The default state for all tables is read/write.

Use READ WRITE when you must modify a record and save the changes. Also use READ WRITE
when you must lock a record for other users, even if you are not making any changes. Setting
a table to read/write mode prevents other users from editing that table. However, other users
can create new records.

Note: This command is not retroactive. A record is loaded according to the table’s read/write
status at the time of loading. To load a record from a read-only table in read/write mode, you
must first change the table state to read/write.

See Also
READ ONLY, Read only state, Record Locking.

1362 4D Language Reference

UNLOAD RECORD Record Locking

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

UNLOAD RECORD {(table)}

Parameter Type Description

table Table → Table for which to unload record, or
Default table, if omitted

Description
UNLOAD RECORD unloads the current record of table.

If the record is unlocked for the local user (locked for the other users), UNLOAD RECORD
unlocks the record for the other users.

Although UNLOAD RECORD unloads it from memory, the record remains the current record.
When another record is made the current record, the previous current record is automatically
unloaded and therefore unlocked for other users. Always execute this command when you
have finished modifying a record and want to make it available to other users, while retaining
the record as your current record.

If a record has a large amount of data, picture fields, or external documents (such as 4D Write
or 4D Draw documents), you may not want to keep the current record in memory unless you
need to modify it. In this case, use the UNLOAD RECORD command to keep the current record
without having it in memory. You free the memory occupied by the record, but you do not
have access to its field values. If you later need access to the values of the record, use the LOAD
RECORD command.

Note: When it is used in a transaction, the UNLOAD RECORD command unloads the current
record only for the process that manages the transaction. For other processes, the record stays
locked as long as the transaction has not been validated (or cancelled).

See Also
LOAD RECORD, Record Locking.

4D Language Reference 1363

1364 4D Language Reference
41
______________________
Records

4D Language Reference 1365

1366 4D Language Reference
About Record Numbers Records

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

There are three numbers associated with a record:

• Record number
• Selected record number
• Sequence number

Record Number
The record number is the absolute/physical record number for a record. A record number is
automatically assigned to each new record and remains constant for the record until the
record is deleted. Record numbers start at zero. They are not unique because record numbers of
deleted records are reused for new records. They also change when the database is compacted
or repaired.

Selected Record Number

The selected record number is the position of the record in the current selection, and so
depends on the current selection. If the selection is changed or sorted, the selected record
number will probably change. Numbering for the selected record number starts at one (1).

Sequence Number
The sequence number is a unique nonrepeating number that may be assigned to a field of a
record (via the Autoincrement property, the SQL AUTO_INCREMENT attribute or the Sequence
number command). It is not automatically stored with each record. It starts by default at 1 and
is incremented for each new record that is created. Unlike record numbers, a sequence number
is not reused when a record is deleted or when a database is compacted or repaired. Sequence
numbers provide a way to have unique ID numbers for records. If a sequence number is
incremented during a transaction, the number is not decremented if the transaction is
canceled.

Note: 4D does not carry out any check when you modify the automatic number internal
counter of a table using the SET DATABASE PARAMETER command. If you decrement this
counter, the new records created may have numbers that have already been assigned.

4D Language Reference 1367

Record Number Examples
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The following tables illustrate the numbers that are associated with records. Each line in the
table represents information about a record. The order of the lines is the order in which
records would be displayed in an output form.

• Data column: The data from a field in each record. For our example, it contains a person’s
name.
• Record Number column: The record’s absolute record number. This is the number returned
by the Record number function.
• Selected Record Number column: The record’s position in the current selection. This is the
number returned by the Selected record number function.
• Sequence Number column: The record’s unique sequence number. This is the number
returned by the Sequence number function when the record was created. This number is stored
in a field.

After the Records Are Entered

The first table shows the records after they are entered.
• The default order for the records is by record number.
• The record number starts at 0.
• The selected record number and the sequence number start at 1.

Data Record Number Selected Record Number Sequence Number

Tess 0 1 1
Terri 1 2 2
Sabra 2 3 3
Sam 3 4 4
Lisa 4 5 5

Note: The records remain in the default order after a command changes the current selection
without reordering it; for example, after the Show All menu command is chosen in the Design
environment, or after the ALL RECORDS command is executed.

After the Records Are Sorted

The next table shows the same records sorted by name.
• The same record number remains associated with each record.
• The selected record numbers reflect the new position of the records in the sorted selection.
• The sequence numbers never change, since they were assigned when each record was created
and are stored in the record.

1368 4D Language Reference

Data Record Number Selected Record Number Sequence Number
Lisa 4 1 5
Sabra 2 2 3
Sam 3 3 4
Terri 1 4 2
Tess 0 5 1

After a Record Is Deleted

The following table shows the records after Sam is deleted.
• Only the selected record numbers have changed. Selected record numbers reflect the order in
which the records are displayed.

Data Record Number Selected Record Number Sequence Number

Lisa 4 1 5
Sabra 2 2 3
Terri 1 3 2
Tess 0 4 1

After a Record Is Added

The next table shows the records after a new record has been added for Liz.
• A new record is added to the end of the current selection.
• Sam’s record number is reused for the new record.
• The sequence number continues to increment.

Data Record Number Selected Record Number Sequence Number

Tess 0 1 1
Terri 1 2 2
Sabra 2 3 3
Lisa 4 4 5
Liz 3 5 6

4D Language Reference 1369

After the Selection is Changed and Sorted
The following table shows the records after the selection was reduced to three records and
then sorted.
• Only the selected record number associated with each record changes.

Data Record Number Selected Record Number Sequence Number

Sabra 2 1 3
Liz 3 2 6
Terri 1 3 2

See Also
Record number, Selected record number, Sequence number.

1370 4D Language Reference

Using the Record Stack Records

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The PUSH RECORD and POP RECORD commands allow you to put (“push”) records onto the
record stack, and to remove (“pop”) them from the stack.

Each process has its own record stack for each table. 4D maintains the record stacks for you.
Each record stack is a last-in-first-out (LIFO) stack. Stack capacity is limited by memory.

PUSH RECORD and POP RECORD should be used with discretion. Each record that is pushed
uses part of free memory. Pushing too many records can cause an out-of-memory or stack full
condition.

4D clears the stack of any unpopped records when you return to the menu at the end of
execution of your method.

PUSH RECORD and POP RECORD are useful when you want to examine records in the same file
during data entry. To do this, you push the record, search and examine records in the file
(copy fields into variables, for example), and finally pop the record to restore the record.

Note to version 3 users: While entering a record, if you have to check a multiple field unique
value, use the new SET QUERY DESTINATION command. This will save you the calls to PUSH
RECORD and POP RECORD that you were making before and after the call to QUERY in order to
preserve the data entered in the current record. SET QUERY DESTINATION allows you to make a
query that does not change the selection nor the current record.

See Also
POP RECORD, PUSH RECORD, SET QUERY DESTINATION.

4D Language Reference 1371

CREATE RECORD Records

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

CREATE RECORD {(aTable)}

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table for which to create a new record, or
Default table, if omitted

Description
CREATE RECORD creates a new empty record for table, but does not display the new record. Use
ADD RECORD to create a new record and display it for data entry.

CREATE RECORD is used instead of ADD RECORD when data for the record is assigned with the
language. The new record becomes the current record but the current selection is left
untouched.
The record exists in memory only until a SAVE RECORD command is executed for the table. If
the current record is changed (for example, by a query) before the record is saved, the new
record is lost.

Example
The following example archives records that are over 30 days old. It does does this by creating
new records in an archival table. When the archiving is finished, the records that were
archived are deleted from the [Accounts] table:

` Find records more than 30 days old

QUERY ([Accounts]; [Accounts]Entered < (Current date – 30))
For ($vlRecord;1; Records in selection([Accounts])) ` Loop once for each record
CREATE RECORD ([Archive]) ` Create a new archive record
[Archive]Number:=[Account]Number ` Copy fields to the archive record
[Archive]Entered:=[Account]Entered
[Archive]Amount:=[Account]Amount
SAVE RECORD([Archive]) ` Save the archive record
NEXT RECORD([Accounts]) ` Move to the next account record
End for
DELETE SELECTION([Accounts]) ` Delete the account records
See Also
ADD RECORD, MODIFY RECORD, SAVE RECORD.

1372 4D Language Reference

DELETE RECORD Records

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DELETE RECORD {(aTable)}

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table where the current record will be deleted, or
Default table, if omitted

Description
DELETE RECORD deletes the current record of aTable in the process. If there is no current record
for aTable in the process, DELETE RECORD has no effect. In a form, you can create a Delete
Record button instead of using this command.

Note: If the current record is unloaded from memory before calling DELETE RECORD (for
example, subsequent to an UNLOAD RECORD), the current selection of table is empty after the
deletion occurs.

Deleting records is a permanent operation and cannot be undone.

If a record is deleted, the record number will be reused when new records are created. Do not
use the record number as the record identifier if you will ever delete records from the database.

Example
The following example deletes an employee record. The code asks the user what employee to
delete, searches for the employee’s record, and then deletes it:
vFind := Request ("Employee ID to delete:") ` Get an employee ID
If (OK = 1)
QUERY ([Employee]; [Employee]ID = vFind) ` Find the employee
DELETE RECORD ([Employee]) ` Delete the employee
End if

See Also
Locked, Triggers.

4D Language Reference 1373

DISPLAY RECORD Records

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DISPLAY RECORD {(aTable)}

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table from which to display the current record, or
Default table, if omitted

Description
The DISPLAY RECORD command displays the current record of aTable, using the current input
form. The record is displayed only until an event redraws the window. Such an event might be
the execution of an ADD RECORD command, returning to an input form, or returning to the
menu bar. DISPLAY RECORD does nothing if there is no current record.

DISPLAY RECORD is often used to display custom progress messages. It can also be used to
generate a free-running slide show.

If a form method exists, an On Load event will be generated.

WARNING: Do not call DISPLAY RECORD from within a Web connection process, because the
command will be executed on the 4D Web server machine and not on the Web browser client
machine.

Example
The following example displays a series of records as a slide show:
ALL RECORDS([Demo]) ` Select all of the records
INPUT FORM ([Demo]; "Display") ` Set the form to use for display
For ($vlRecord;1;Records in selection([Demo])) ` Loop through all of the records
DISPLAY RECORD([Demo]) ` Display a record
DELAY PROCESS (Current process; 180) ` Pause for 3 seconds
NEXT RECORD([Demo]) ` Move to the next record
End for

See Also
MESSAGE.

1374 4D Language Reference

DUPLICATE RECORD Records

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DUPLICATE RECORD {(aTable)}

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table for which to duplicate the current record, or
Default table, if omitted

Description
DUPLICATE RECORD creates a new record for aTable that is a duplicate of the current record.
The new record becomes the current record. If there is no current record, then DUPLICATE
RECORD does nothing. You must use SAVE RECORD to save the new record.

DUPLICATE RECORD can be executed during data entry. This allows you to create a clone of the
currently displayed record. Remember that you must first execute SAVE RECORD in order to
save any changes made to the original record.

See Also
SAVE RECORD.

4D Language Reference 1375

GOTO RECORD Records

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GOTO RECORD ({aTable; }record)

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table in which to go to the record, or
Default table, if omitted
record Number → Number returned by Record number

Description
GOTO RECORD selects the specified record of aTable as the current record. The record
parameter is the number returned by the Record number function. After executing this
command, the record is the only record in the selection.

If record is less than the smallest record number in the database or greater than the greatest
record number in the database, 4D generates an error message stating that the record number
is out of range. If record is equal to the record number of a deleted record, 4D returns the error
-10503 and the selection becomes empty.

Example
See the example for Record number.

See Also
About Record Numbers, Record number.

1376 4D Language Reference

Is new record Records

version 6.5
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Is new record {(aTable)} → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table of the record to examine or
Default table if this parameter is omitted

Function result Boolean ← True if the record is being created,

False otherwise

Description
The Is new record command returns True when the aTable’s current record is being created and
has not yet been saved in the current process.

Compatibility Note: You can obtain the same information by using the existing Record number
command, and by testing if it returns -3.
However, we strongly advise you to use Is new record instead of Record number in this case. In
fact, the Is new record command ensures compatibility with future versions of 4D.
4D Server: This command returns a different result for the On Validate form event depending
on whether it is executed on 4D in local mode or 4D in remote mode. In local mode, the
command returns False (the record is considered as already created). In remote mode, the
command returns True because, in this case, the record is already created on the server but the
information has not yet been sent to the client.

Example
The following two instructions are identical. The second one is strongly advised so that the
code will be compatible with future versions of 4D:
If (Record number([Table])=-3) `Not advised
` ...
End if
If (Is new record([Table])) `Strongly advised
` ...
End if
See Also
Modified record, Record number.

4D Language Reference 1377

Is record loaded Records

version 6.5
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Is record loaded {(aTable)} → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table of the record to examine or
Default table if this parameter is omitted

Function result Boolean ← True if the record is loaded

Otherwise False

Description
The Is record loaded command returns True if the aTable’s current record is loaded in the
current process.

Example
Instead of using the “Next record” or “Previous record” automatic actions, you can write
object methods for these buttons to improve their operation. The “Next” button will display
the beginning of the selection if the user is at the end of the selection and the “Previous”
button will show the end of the selection when the user is at the beginning of the selection.

` Object method of the “Previous” button (without an automatic action)

If (Form event=On Clicked)
PREVIOUS RECORD([Group])
If (Not(Is record loaded([Group])))
GOTO SELECTED RECORD([Group];Records in selection([Group]))
`Go to the last record in the selection
End if
End if

` Object method of the “Next” button (without an automatic action)

If (Form event=On Clicked)
NEXT RECORD([Group])
If (Not(Is record loaded([Group])))
GOTO SELECTED RECORD([Groups];1)
`Go to the first record in the selection
End if
End if

1378 4D Language Reference

Modified record Records

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Modified record {(aTable)} → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table to test if current record has been modified, or
Default table, if omitted

Function result Boolean ← Record has been modified (True), or

Record has not been modified (False)

Description
Modified record returns True if the current record of aTable has been modified but not saved;
otherwise it returns False. This function allows the designer to quickly test whether or not the
record needs to be saved. It is especially valuable in input forms to check whether or not to
save the current record before proceeding to the next one. This function always returns TRUE
for a new record.

Example
The following example shows a typical use for Modified record:

If (Modified record ([Customers]))

SAVE RECORD ([Customers])
End if

See Also
Modified, Old, SAVE RECORD.

4D Language Reference 1379

POP RECORD Records

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

POP RECORD {(aTable)}

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table for which to pop record, or
Default table, if omitted

Description
POP RECORD pops a record belonging to aTable from the table’s record stack, and makes the
record the current record.

If you push a record, change the selection to not include the pushed record, and then pop the
record, the current record is not in the current selection. To designate the popped record as
the current selection, use ONE RECORD SELECT. If you use any commands that move the
record pointer before saving the record, you will lose the copy in memory.

Example
The following example pops the record for the customer off the record stack:

POP RECORD ([Customers]) ` Pop customer’s record onto stack

See Also
PUSH RECORD, Using the Record Stack.

1380 4D Language Reference

PUSH RECORD Records

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

PUSH RECORD {(aTable)}

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table for which to push record, or
Default table, if omitted

Description
PUSH RECORD pushes the current record of aTable (and its subrecords, if any) onto the table’s
record stack. PUSH RECORD may be executed before a record is saved.

If you push a record that was unlocked, this record stays locked for all the other processes and
users until you pop and unload it.

Example
The following example pushes the record for the customer onto the record stack:

PUSH RECORD ([Customer]) ` Push customer’s record onto stack

See Also
POP RECORD, Using the Record Stack.

4D Language Reference 1381

Record number Records

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Record number {(aTable)} → Number

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table for which to return the
number of the current record, or
Default table, if omitted

Function result Number ← Current record number

Description
Record number returns the physical record number for the current record of aTable. If there is
no current record, such as when the record pointer is before or after the current selection,
Record number returns –1. If the record is a new record that has not been saved, Record number
returns –3.

Record numbers can change. The record numbers of deleted records are reused. Record
numbers will also change if you compact the database.

4D Server: This command returns a different result for the On Validate form event depending
on whether it is executed on 4D in local mode or 4D in remote mode. In local mode, the
command returns a record number (the record is considered as already created). In remote
mode, the command returns -3 because, in this case, the record is already created on the server
but the information has not yet been sent to the client.

Note: It is recommended to use the Is new record command to check whether a record is in the
process of being created.

1382 4D Language Reference

Example
The following example saves the current record number and then searches for any other
records that have the same data:

$RecNum:=Record number([People]) ` Get the record number

QUERY ([People]; [People]Last = [People]Last) ` Anyone else with the last name?
` Display an alert with the number of people with the same last name
ALERT ("There are "+String (Records in selection([People])+" with that name.")
GOTO RECORD ([People]; $RecNum) ` Go back to the same record

See Also
About Record Numbers, GOTO RECORD, Is new record, Selected record number, Sequence
number.

4D Language Reference 1383

Records in table Records

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Records in table {(table)} → Number

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table for which to return the number of records, or
Default table, if omitted

Function result Number ← Total number of records in the table

Description
Records in table returns the total number of records in aTable. Records in selection returns the
number of records in the current selection only. If Records in table is used within a transaction,
records created during the transaction will be taken into account.

Example
The following example displays an alert that shows the number of records in a table:

ALERT ("There are "+String(Records in table([People]))+" records in the table.")

See Also
Records in selection.

1384 4D Language Reference

SAVE RECORD Records

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SAVE RECORD {(table)}

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table for which to save the current record, or
Default table, if omitted

Description
SAVE RECORD saves the current record of aTable in the current process. If there is no current
record, then SAVE RECORD is ignored.

You use SAVE RECORD to save a record that you created or modified with code. A record that
has been modified and validated by the user in a form does not need to be saved with SAVE
RECORD. A record that has been modified by the user in a form, but has been canceled, can
still be saved with SAVE RECORD.

Here are some cases where SAVE RECORD is required:

• To save a new record created with CREATE RECORD or DUPLICATE RECORD
• To save data from RECEIVE RECORD
• To save a record modified by a method
• To save a record that contains new or modified subrecord data following an ADD
SUBRECORD, CREATE SUBRECORD, or MODIFY SUBRECORD command
• During data entry to save the displayed record before using a command that changes the
current record
• During data entry to save the current record

You should not execute a SAVE RECORD during the On Validate event for a form that has been
accepted. If you do, the record will be saved twice.

4D Language Reference 1385

Example
The following example is part of a method that reads records from a document. The code
segment receives a record, and then, if it is received properly, saves it:

RECEIVE RECORD ([Customers]) ` Receive record from disk

If (OK= 1) ` If the record is received properly…
SAVE RECORD ([Customers]) ` save it
End if

See Also
CREATE RECORD, Locked, Triggers.

1386 4D Language Reference

Sequence number Records

version 2004.1 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Sequence number {(aTable)} → Number

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table for which to return the sequence number, or
Default table, if omitted

Function result Number ← Sequence number

Description
Sequence number returns the next sequence number for aTable. The sequence number is
unique for each table. It is a non-repeating number that is incremented for each new record
created for the table. By default, the numbering starts at 1. You can change the numbering for
a table using the SET DATABASE PARAMETER command.

The Sequence number function is useful in the following cases:

• The sequence number needs an increment greater than 1
• The sequence number is part of a code, for example a part number code.

To store the sequence number by means of a method, create a long integer field in the table
and assign the sequence number to the field.

The sequence number returned by this function for the table is the same number as the one
generated when you check the Autoincrement option for a field of the table using the
Structure inspector, or as the one assigned by using the #N symbol as the default value for a
field of the table in a form (see the 4D Design Reference manual).

Note: Automatic incrementation can also be set via the SQL AUTO_INCREMENT attribute.

If the sequence number needs to start at a number other than 1, just add the difference to
Sequence number. For example, if the sequence number must start at 1000, you would use the
following statement to assign the number:

[Table1]Seq Field := Sequence number ([Table1]) + 999

4D Language Reference 1387

Example
The following example is part of a form method. It tests to see if this is a new record; i.e., if
the invoice number is an empty string. If it is a new record, the method assigns an invoice
number. The invoice number is formed from two pieces of information: the sequence number,
and the operator’s ID, which was entered when the database was opened. The sequence
number is formatted as a 5-character string:
` If this is a new part number, create a new invoice number
If ([Invoices]Invoice No = "")
` The invoice number is a string that ends with the operator’s ID.
[Invoices]Invoice No:=String(Sequence number;"00000")+[Invoices]OpID
End if

See Also
About Record Numbers, Record number, Selected record number.

1388 4D Language Reference

42
______________________
Relations

4D Language Reference 1389

1390 4D Language Reference
About Relations Relations

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The commands in this theme, in particular RELATE ONE and RELATE MANY, establish and
manage the automatic and non-automatic relations between tables. Before using any of the
commands in this theme, refer to the 4D Design Reference manual for information about
creating relations between tables.

Using Automatic Table Relations with Commands

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Two tables can be related with automatic table relations. In general, when an automatic table
relation is established, it loads or selects the related records in a related table. Many operations
cause the relation to be established.

These operations include:

• Data entry
• Listing records on the screen in output forms
• Reporting
• Operations on a selection of records, such as queries, sorts, and applying a formula

To optimize performance, when 4D establishes automatic relations, only one record becomes
the current record for a table. For each of the operations listed above, the related record is
loaded according to the following principles:
• If a relation selects only one record of a related table, that record is loaded from disk.
• If a relation selects more than one record of a related table, a new selection of records is
created for that table, and the first record in that selection is loaded from disk.

For example, using the database structure displayed here, if a record for the [Employees] table
is loaded and displayed for data entry, the related record from the [Companies] table is
selected and is loaded. Similarly, if a record for the [Companies] table is loaded and displayed
for data entry, the related records from the [Employees] table are selected.

4D Language Reference 1391

In this database structure, the [Employees] table is referred to as the Many table, and the
[Companies] table is referred to as the One table. To remember this concept, think of “there
are many employees related to one company” and “each company has many employees.”

Similarly, the Company field in the [Employees] table is referred to as the Many field, and the
Name field in the [Companies] table is referred to as the One field.

It is not always possible to have the related field be unique. For example, the
[Companies]Name field may have several company records containing the same value. This
non-unique situation can be easily handled by creating a relation, which will always be
unique, on another field in the related table. This field could be a company ID field.

The following table lists commands that use automatic relations to load related records during
operation of the command. All of the commands will use existing automatic Many-to-One
relations. Only those commands with Yes in the One-to-Many established column below will
use automatic One-to-Many relations.

Command One-to-Many established

ADD RECORD Yes
ADD SUBRECORD No
APPLY TO SELECTION No
DISPLAY SELECTION No
EXPORT DIF No
EXPORT SYLK No
EXPORT TEXT No
EXPORT DATA No
MODIFY RECORD Yes
MODIFY SUBRECORD No
MODIFY SELECTION Yes (in data entry)
ORDER BY No
ORDER BY FORMULA No
QUERY BY FORMULA Yes
QUERY SELECTION Yes
QUERY Yes
PRINT LABEL No
PRINT SELECTION Yes
QR REPORT No
SELECTION TO ARRAY No
SELECTION RANGE TO ARRAY No

1392 4D Language Reference

Using Commands to Establish Table Relations
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Automatic relations do not mean that the related record or records for a table will be selected
simply because a command loads a record. In some cases, after using a command that loads a
record, you must explicitly select the related records by using RELATE ONE or RELATE MANY if
you need to access the related data.

Some of the commands listed in the previous table (such as the query commands) load a
current record after the task is completed. In this case, the record that is loaded does not
automatically select the records related to it. Again, if you need to access the related data, you
must explicitly select the related records by using RELATE ONE or RELATE MANY.

See Also
CREATE RELATED ONE, GET AUTOMATIC RELATIONS, GET FIELD RELATION, OLD RELATED MANY,
OLD RELATED ONE, RELATE MANY, RELATE MANY SELECTION, RELATE ONE, RELATE ONE
SELECTION, SAVE RELATED ONE, SET AUTOMATIC RELATIONS, SET FIELD RELATION.

4D Language Reference 1393

CREATE RELATED ONE Relations

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

CREATE RELATED ONE (aField)

Parameter Type Description

aField Field → Many field

Description
CREATE RELATED ONE performs two actions. If a related record does not exist for aField (that is,
if a match is not found for the current value of field), CREATE RELATED ONE creates a new
related record.

To save a value in the appropriate field, assign values to the One field from the Many field.
Call SAVE RELATED ONE to save the new record.

If a related record exists, CREATE RELATED ONE acts just like RELATE ONE and loads the related
record into memory.

See Also
SAVE RELATED ONE.

1394 4D Language Reference

GET AUTOMATIC RELATIONS Relations

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET AUTOMATIC RELATIONS (one; many)

Parameter Type Description

one Boolean ← Status of all Many-to-One relations
many Boolean ← Status of all One-to-Many relations

Description
The GET AUTOMATIC RELATIONS command lets you know if the automatic/manual status
of all manual many-to-one and one-to-many relations of the database have been modified
in the current process.

• one: This parameter returns True if a previous calll from the SET AUTOMATIC RELATIONS
command made all manual many-to-one relations automatic — for example, SET
AUTOMATIC RELATIONS(True;False).
This parameter returns False if the SET AUTOMATIC RELATIONS command has not been
called or if its previous execution did not modify manual many-to-one relations — for
example, SET AUTOMATIC RELATIONS(False;False).

• many: This parameter returns True if a previous call from the SET AUTOMATIC RELATIONS
command made all manual one-to-many relations automatic — for example, SET
AUTOMATIC RELATIONS(True;True).
This parameter returns False if the SET AUTOMATIC RELATIONS command has not been
called or if its previous execution did not modify manual one-to-many relations — for
example, SET AUTOMATIC RELATIONS(True;False).

Example
Refer to the example of the GET FIELD RELATION command.

See Also
GET FIELD RELATION, GET RELATION PROPERTIES, SET AUTOMATIC RELATIONS.

4D Language Reference 1395

GET FIELD RELATION Relations

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET FIELD RELATION (manyField; one; many{; *})

Parameter Type Description

manyField Field → Starting field of a relation
one Longint ← Status of the Many-to-One relation
many Longint ← Status of the One-to-Many relation
* * → • If passed: one and many return the current status
of the relation (values 2 or 3 only)
• If omitted (default): one and many can return the
value 1 if the relation has not been modified through
programming

Description
The GET FIELD RELATION command lets you find out the automatic/manual status of the
relation starting from manyField for the current process. You can view any relation,
including automatic relations set in the Structure window.

• In manyField, pass the name of theMany table field from which the relation whose status
you want to find out originates. If no relation originates from the manyField field, the one
et many parameters return 0, an error is returned and the system variable OK is set to 0 (see
below).

• After the command is executed, the one parameter contains a value indicating whether
the Many-to-One relation specified is set as automatic:
0 = There is no relation originating from manyField. Syntax error No. 16 (“The field has
no relation”) is generated and the system variable OK is set to 0.
1 = The automatic/manual status of the Many-to-One relation specified is that set by
the Auto Relate One option in the Relation properties of the Design environment (it
has not been modified by programming).
2 = The Many-to-One relation is manual for the process.
3 = The Many-to-One relation is automatic for the process.

• After the command is executed, the many parameter contains a value indicating whether
the One-to-Many relation specified is set as automatic:
0 = There is no relation originating from manyField. Syntax error No. 16 (“The field has
no relation”) is generated and the system variable OK is set to 0.
1 = The automatic/manual status of the One-to-Many relation specified is that set by
the Auto One to Many option in the Relation properties of the Design environment (it
has not been modified by programming).

1396 4D Language Reference

 2 = The One-to-Many relation is manual for the process.
3 = The One-to-Many relation is automatic for the process.

You can compare the values returned in the one and many parameters with the constants of
the “Relations” theme:
Constant Type Value
No relation Longint 0
Structure configuration Longint 1
Manual Longint 2
Automatic Longint 3

• The optional * parameter lets you “force” the reading of the current status of the relation,
even if it has not been modified by programming. In other words, when you pass the *
parameter, only the values 2 or 3 can be returned in the one and many parameters.

Example
Given the following structure:

The properties of the relation linking the [Employees]Company field to the

[Companies]Name field are the following:

4D Language Reference 1397

The following code illustrates the various possibilities offered by the GET FIELD RELATION,
GET AUTOMATIC RELATIONS, SET FIELD RELATION and SET AUTOMATIC RELATIONS
commands along with their effects:

GET AUTOMATIC RELATIONS(one;many) `returns False, False

GET FIELD RELATION([Employees]Company;one;many) `returns 1,1
GET FIELD RELATION([Employees]Company;one;many;*) `returns 3,2

SET FIELD RELATION ([Employees]Company;2;0)

GET FIELD RELATION([Employees]Company;one;many) `returns 2,1

GET FIELD RELATION([Employees]Company;one;many;*) `returns 2, 2

`re-establishes the parameters set in Design environment for Many-to-One relation

SET FIELD RELATION ([Employees]Company;1;0)

GET FIELD RELATION([Employees]Company;one;many) `returns 1,1

GET FIELD RELATION([Employees]Company;one;many;*) `returns 3,2

`changes all relations of all tables to automatic

SET AUTOMATIC RELATIONS(True;True)

GET AUTOMATIC RELATIONS(one;many) `returns True, True

GET FIELD RELATION([Employees]Company;one;many) `returns 1,1
GET FIELD RELATION([Employees]Company;one;many;*) `returns 3,3

See Also
GET AUTOMATIC RELATIONS, GET RELATION PROPERTIES, SET AUTOMATIC RELATIONS, SET
FIELD RELATION.

1398 4D Language Reference

OLD RELATED MANY Relations

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

OLD RELATED MANY (field)

Parameter Type Description

field Field → One field

Description
OLD RELATED MANY operates the same way RELATE MANY does, except that OLD RELATED
MANY uses the old value in the one field to establish the relation.

Note: OLD RELATED MANY uses the old value of the many field as returned by the Old
function. For more information, see the description of the Old command.

OLD RELATED MANY changes the selection of the related table, and selects the first record of
the selection as the current record.

See Also
OLD RELATED ONE, RELATE MANY.

4D Language Reference 1399

OLD RELATED ONE Relations

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

OLD RELATED ONE (aField)

Parameter Type Description

aField Field → Many field

Description
OLD RELATED ONE operates the same way as RELATE ONE does, except that OLD RELATED ONE
uses the old value of aField to establish the relation.

Note: OLD RELATED ONE uses the old value of the Many field as returned by the Old function.
For more information, see the description of the Old command.

OLD RELATED ONE loads the record previously related to the current record. The fields in that
record can then be accessed. If you want to modify this old related record and save it, you
must call SAVE RELATED ONE. Note that there is no old related record for a newly created
record.

See Also
Old, OLD RELATED MANY, RELATE ONE, SAVE RELATED ONE.

System Variables and Sets

If the command has been executed correctly and if the related records have been loaded, the
OK system variable is set to 1. If the user clicked on Cancel in the record selection dialog box
(that appears when the related record has been modified), the OK variable is set to 0.

1400 4D Language Reference

RELATE MANY Relations

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

RELATE MANY (oneTable | Field)

Parameter Type Description

oneTable | Field Table | Field → Table to establish all one-to-many relations, or
One Field

Description
RELATE MANY has two forms.

The first form, RELATE MANY(oneTable), establishes all One-to-Many relations for oneTable. It
changes the current selection for each table that has a One-to-Many relation to oneTable. The
current selections in the Many tables depend on the current value of each related field in the
One table. Each time this command is executed, the current selections of the Many tables will
be regenerated and the first record of the selection is loaded as the current record..

The second form, RELATE MANY(oneField), establishes the One-to-Many relation for oneField. It
changes the current selection and the current record for only those tables that have relations
with oneField. This means that the related records become the current selection for the Many
table.

Note: If the current selection in the One table is empty while the RELATE MANY command is
executed, it has no effect.

4D Language Reference 1401

Example
In the following example, three tables are related with automatic relations. Both the [People]
table and the [Parts] table have a Many-to-One relation to the [Companies] table.

This form for the [Companies] table will display related records from both the [People] and
[Parts] tables.

When the People and Parts forms are displayed, the related records for both the [People] table
and the [Parts] table are loaded and become the current selections in those tables.

1402 4D Language Reference

On the other hand, the related records are not loaded if a record for the [Companies] table is
selected programmatically. In this case, you must use the RELATE MANY command.

Notes:
• When the RELATE MANY command is applied to an empty selection, the command is not
executed and the selection for the MANY table does not change.
• For the command to work, the foreign key fields (Many fields) must be indexed.

For example, the following method moves through each record of the [Companies] table. An
alert box is displayed for each company. The alert box shows the number of people in the
company (the number of related [People] records), and the number of parts they supply (the
number of related [Parts] records). In the example, the argument to the ALERTcommand is
printed on multiple lines for clarity.

Note that the RELATE MANY command is needed, even though the relations are automatic.

ALL RECORDS ([Companies]) ` Select all records in the table

ORDER BY ([Companies]; [Companies]Name) ` Order records in alphabetical order
For ($i; 1; Records in table ([Companies])) ` Loop once for each record
RELATE MANY ([Companies]Name) ` Select the related records
ALERT ("Company: "+[Companies]Name+Char (13)+"People in company: "+
String (Records in selection ([People]))+Char(13)+ "Number of parts they supply: "
+ String (Records in selection ([Parts])))
NEXT RECORD ([Companies]) ` Move to the next record
End for

See Also
OLD RELATED MANY, RELATE ONE.

4D Language Reference 1403

RELATE MANY SELECTION Relations

version 6.0 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

RELATE MANY SELECTION (aField)

Parameter Type Description

aField Field → Many table field (from which the relation starts)

Description
The RELATE MANY SELECTION command generates a selection of records in the Many table,
based on a selection of records in the One table, and loads the first record of the Many table as
the current record.

Note: RELATE MANY SELECTION changes the current record for the One table.

Example
This example selects all invoices made to the customers whose credit is greater than or equal
to $1,000. The [Invoices] table field [Invoices]Customer ID relates to the [Customer] table field
[Customers]ID Number.

` Select the Customers

QUERY ([Customers];[Customers]Credit>=1000)
` Find all invoices related to any of these customers
RELATE MANY SELECTION ([Invoices]Customer ID)

See Also
QUERY, RELATE ONE, RELATE ONE SELECTION.

1404 4D Language Reference

RELATE ONE Relations

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

RELATE ONE (manyTable | Field{; choiceField})

Parameter Type Description

manyTable | Field Table | Field → Table for which to establish all automatic relations,
or Field with manual relation to one table
choiceField Field → Choice field from the one table

Description
RELATE ONE has two forms.

The first form, RELATE ONE(manyTable), establishes all automatic Many-to-One relations for
manyTable in the current process. This means that for each field in manyTable that has an
automatic Many-to-One relation, the command will select the related record in each related
table. This changes the current record in the related tables for the process.

The second form, RELATE ONE(manyField{;choiceField}), looks for the record related to
manyField. The relation does not need to be automatic. If it exists, RELATE ONE loads the
related record into memory, making it the current record and current selection for its table.

The optional choiceField can be specified only if manyField is an Alpha field. The choiceField
must be a field in the related table. The choiceField must be an Alpha, Numeric, Date, Time, or
Boolean field; it cannot be a text, picture, BLOB, or subtable field.

If choiceField is specified and more than one record is found in the related table, RELATE ONE
displays a selection list of records that match the value in manyField. In the list, the left
column displays related field values, and the right column displays choiceField values.

More than one record may be found if manyField ends with the wildcard character (@). If there
is only one match, the list does not appear. Specifying choiceField is the same as specifying a
wildcard choice when establishing the table relation. For information about specifying a
wildcard choice, refer to the 4D Design Reference manual.

RELATE ONE works with relations to subtables, but you must have a relation to the parent table
and to the subtable’s related field in order for the relation to be properly established. When
using a relation to a subrecord, you must first use RELATE ONE to load the related record into
memory, then use a second RELATE ONE command for the subtable.

4D Language Reference 1405

Example
Let’s say you have an [Invoice] table related to a [Customers] table with two non-automatic
relations. One relation is from [Invoice]Bill to to [Customers]ID, and the other relation is from
[Invoice]Ship to to [Customers]ID.

Since both relations are to the same table, [Customers], you cannot obtain the billing and
shipment information at the same time. Therefore, displaying both addresses in a form should
be performed using variables and calls to RELATE ONE. If the [Customers] fields were displayed
instead, data from only one of the relations would be displayed.

The following two methods are the object methods for the [Invoice]Bill to and [Invoice]Ship to
fields. They are executed when the fields are entered.

Here is the object method for the [Invoice]Bill to field:

RELATE ONE ([Invoice]Bill to)

vAddress1 := [Customers]Address
vCity1 := [Customers]City
vState1 := [Customers]State
vZIP1 := [Customers]ZIP

Here is the object method for the [Invoice]Ship to field:

RELATE ONE ([Invoice]Ship to)

vAddress2 := [Customers]Address
vCity2 := [Customers]City
vState2 := [Customers]State
vZIP2 := [Customers]ZIP

See Also
OLD RELATED ONE, RELATE MANY.

System Variables and Sets

If the command has been executed correctly and if the related records have been loaded, the
OK system variable is set to 1. If the user clicked on Cancel in the record selection dialog box
(that appears when the related record has been modified), the OK variable is set to 0.

1406 4D Language Reference

RELATE ONE SELECTION Relations

version 6.0 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

RELATE ONE SELECTION (manyTable; oneTable)

Parameter Type Description

manyTable Table → Many table name (from which the relation starts)
oneTable Table → One table name (to which the relation refers)

Description
The RELATE ONE SELECTION command creates a new selection of records for the table
oneTable, based on the selection of records in the table manyTable and loads the first record of
the new selection as the current record.

This command can only be used if there is a relation from manyTable to oneTable. RELATE ONE
SELECTION can work across several levels of relations. There can be several related tables
between manyTable and oneTable. The relations can be manual or automatic.

Example
The following example finds all the clients whose invoices are due today.

Here is one way of creating a selection in the [Customers] table, given a selection of records in
the [Invoices] table:

CREATE EMPTY SET([Customers];"Payment Due")

QUERY([Invoices];[Invoices]DueDate = Current date)
While(Not(End selection([Invoices])))
RELATE ONE ([Invoices]CustID)
ADD TO SET([Customers];"Payment Due")
NEXT RECORD([Invoices])
End while

The following technique uses RELATE ONE SELECTION to accomplish the same result:

QUERY([Invoices];[Invoices]DueDate = Current date)

RELATE ONE SELECTION([Invoices];[Customers])

See Also
QUERY, RELATE MANY SELECTION, RELATE ONE, Sets.

4D Language Reference 1407

SAVE RELATED ONE Relations

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SAVE RELATED ONE (aField)

Parameter Type Description

aField Field → Many field

Description
SAVE RELATED ONE saves the record related to aField. Execute a SAVE RELATED ONE command
to update a record created with CREATE RELATED ONE, or to save modifications to a record
loaded with RELATE ONE.

SAVE RELATED ONE does not apply to subtables, because saving the parent record automatically
saves the subrecords.

SAVE RELATED ONE will not save a locked record. When using this command, you must first be
sure that the record is unlocked. If the record is locked, the command is ignored, the record is
not saved, and no error is returned.

See Also
CREATE RELATED ONE, Locked, RELATE ONE, Triggers.

1408 4D Language Reference

SET AUTOMATIC RELATIONS Relations

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET AUTOMATIC RELATIONS (one{; many})

Parameter Type Description

one Boolean → Status of all Many-to-One relations
many Boolean → Status of all One-to-Many relations

Description
SET AUTOMATIC RELATIONS temporarily changes all the manual relations into automatic
relations for the entire database in the current process. The relations stay automatic unless a
subsequent call to SET AUTOMATIC RELATIONS is made.

• If one is true, then all manual Many-to-One relations will become automatic. If one is false,
all previously changed Many-to-One relations will revert to manual relations.

• The same is true for the many parameter, except that manual One-to-Many relations are
affected.

Relations that are set as automatic in the Design environment are not affected by this
command.

If all relations have been set as manual in the Design environment, this command makes it
possible to change them to be automatic, just before executing operations that need the
relation to be automatic (such as relational searches and sorts). After the operation is finished,
the relation can be changed back to manual.

Example
The following example makes all manual Many-to-One relations automatic and reverts any
previously changed One-to-Many relations:

SET AUTOMATIC RELATIONS (True; False)

See Also
About Relations, GET AUTOMATIC RELATIONS, GET RELATION PROPERTIES, SELECTION RANGE TO
ARRAY, SELECTION TO ARRAY, SET FIELD RELATION.

4D Language Reference 1409

SET FIELD RELATION Relations

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET FIELD RELATION (manyTable | manyField; one; many)

Parameter Type Description

manyTable | manyField Table | Field → Starting table of relations or
Starting field of a relation
one Longint → Status of the Many-to-One relation starting from
the field or the Many-to-One relations of the
table
many Longint → Status of the One-to-Many relation starting from
the field or the One-to-Many relations of the
table

Description
The SET FIELD RELATION command lets you set the automatic/manual status of each
relation of the database separately for the current process, regardless of its initial status as
defined in the Relation properties window in the Design environment.

In the first parameter, pass a table or field name:

• If you pass a field name (manyField), the command will only apply to the relation starting
from the specified Many field.
• If you pass a table name (manyTable), the command will apply to all the relations starting
from the specified Many table.
• If there is no relation starting from the manyField field or manyTable table, the syntax
error No. 16 (“The field has no relation”) is generated and the system variable OK is set to
0.

In the one and many parameters, pass the values indicating the changing of the
automatic/manual status to be applied respectively to the specified Many-to-One and One-
to-Many relation(s). You can use the constants of the “About Relations” theme:
• Do not modify (0) = Do not modify the current status of the relation(s).
• Structure configuration (1) = Use the configuration set for the relation(s) in the Structure
window of the application.
• Manual (2) = Makes the relation(s) manual for the current process.
• Automatic (3) = Makes the relation(s) automatic for the current process.

Note: Changes made using this command only apply to the current process. The
configuration of the relations set using the options in the Relation properties window is
not modified.

1410 4D Language Reference

Example
This command makes the management of relations easier in the Quick Report editor. In
previous versions of 4D, it was necessary to set all relations as automatic to use them in the
editor. Now, the following code allows setting only useful relations as automatic:

SET AUTOMATIC RELATIONS(False;False) `Reset of the relations

`Only the following relations will be used
SET FIELD RELATION([Invoices]Cust_IDt;Automatic;Automatic)
SET FIELD RELATION([Invoice_Row]Invoice_ID;Automatic;Automatic)
QR REPORT([Invoices];Char(1);True;True;True)

See Also
GET AUTOMATIC RELATIONS, GET FIELD RELATION, GET RELATION PROPERTIES, SET
AUTOMATIC RELATIONS.

4D Language Reference 1411

1412 4D Language Reference
43
______________________
Resources

4D Language Reference 1413

1414 4D Language Reference
Resources Resources

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Compatibility notes about resource management mechanisms (4D v11)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The management of resources has been modified in 4D beginning with version 11. In
conformity with the directions specified by Apple and implemented in the most recent Mac
OS versions, the concept of resources in the strictest sense (see definition below) is now
obsolete and will be abandoned progressively. New mechanisms have been implemented to
support the needs that were previously met by resources: XLIFF files for the translation of
character strings, .png picture files, etc. In fact, resource files will be replaced in favor of
standard type files. 4D supports this evolution and, beginning with version 11, provides new
tools for the management of database translations, while maintaining compatibility with
existing systems.

Compatibility
To maintain compatibility and in order to permit the progressive adaptation of existing
applications, the former resource mechanisms will containue to work in 4D v11, with just a
few notable differences:
• When present, resource files are still supported by 4D and the principle of the“string of
resource files” (successive opening of several resource files) remains valid. The “string of
resource files” includes more particularly the .rsr or .4dr files of converted databases (opened
automatically) and the custom resource files opened using the commands of this theme.
• However, for reasons related to the evolution of the internal architecture, it is no longer
possible to access the resources of the 4D application nor those of the system directly, whether
via the commands of this theme or using dynamic references. Certain developers make use of
4D internal resources for their interfaces (for example, resources containing the names of the
months or those of the language commands). This practice is now strictly forbidden. In most
cases, it is possible to use other means instead of 4D internal resources (constants, language
commands, and so on). In order to limit the impact of this modification on existing databases,
a substitution system has been implemented, based on the externalization of the resources
that are most frequently used. It is nevertheless strongly recommended to change converted
databases and to remove any calls to 4D internal resources they may contain.
• Starting with version 11, databases created by 4D will no longer contain .RSR (structure
resources) and .4DR (data resources) files by default.

4D Language Reference 1415

New resource management principles
In 4D v11, the notion of “resources” must now be understood in the broader sense as “files
that are necessary for the translation of application interfaces.” The new architectue of
resources is based on a folder, named Resources, that must be located next to the database
structure file (.4db or .4dc). It is not created by default; you will have to create it if your
database uses resources. In this folder, you need to put all the files that are necessary for the
translation or customizing of the application interfaces (picture files, text files, XLIFF files, and
so on).
It can also contain any “former generation” resource files of the database (.rsr files). Be careful,
these files are not automatically included in the string of resources; they must be opened using
standard 4D resource handling commands. 4D uses automatic mechanisms when working
with the contents of this folder, in particular for the management of XLIFF files (this point is
covered in the Design Reference manual). Two commands of the "Resources" theme can be used
to take advantage of this architecture (see the Get indexed string and STRING LIST TO ARRAY
commands).

Resource management (traditional principles)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Compatibility Note: The traditional resource management principles are progressively being
abandoned in 4D (see previous paragraph). For new databases, it is now recommended to rely
on XLIFF architecture or the use of standard files.

What is a resource?
A resource is data of any kind stored in a defined format in a separate file or in the resource
fork of a Macintosh file. Resources typically include data such as strings, pictures, icons and so
on. As a matter of fact, you can create and use your own kinds of resources and store whatever
data you want into them.

Data Fork, Resource Fork and Resource file

Originally, on Macintosh, data and resources were stored in the same file, made of a data fork
and a resource fork. The data fork of a Macintosh file is the equivalent of a file on Windows
and UNIX. The resource fork of a Macintosh file contains the Macintosh-based resources of the
file and has no direct equivalent on Windows or UNIX.
Although this feature is still supported by 4D, now under Mac OS as well as under Windows,
the resources are stored in a separate file (in the data fork on Mac OS). This principle is
managed transparently by 4D and allows direct exchange of files between the different
platforms without conversion.
Resource file management commands (Create resource file and Open resource file) can work
directly within the data fork for a better cross-platform compatibility.

1416 4D Language Reference

Resource Files
In databases created with a version of 4D prior to v11, 4D automatically created a .rsr file in
order to store the structure file resources and a .4dr file for the data file resources.
The 4D application itself uses resources, stored in a file suffixed “.RSR”. 4D Plug-ins like 4D
Write can also use resources.

Creating Your Own Resource Files

In addition to the resource files provided by 4D, you can create and use your own resource
files using the 4D commands Create resource file and Open resource file. These two commands
return a resource file reference number that uniquely identifies the open resource file. The
resource file reference number is the equivalent of the document reference number for regular
files returned by System documents commands such as Open document. All the 4D Resources
commands optionally expect a resource file reference number. After you have finished with a
resource file, remember to close it using the command CLOSE RESOURCE FILE.

The Resource Files Chain

When you work with a 4D database, you can either work with all the currently open resource
files or with a specific resource file.

Multiple resource files can be open at the same time. This is always the case from within a 4D
database. The following files are open:
• On Macintosh, the System resource file.
• On Windows, the ASIPORT.RSR file (it contains part of the Macintosh system resources).
• The 4D application resource file.
• The database structure resource file (if any).
• The database data file resource file (if any) may be optionally open.
• Finally, you can open your own resource file using the command Open resource file.

This list of open resource files is called the resource files chain. You can search for a given
resource in two ways:
• If you pass a resource file reference number to a resource 4D command, the resource is
searched for in that resource file only.
• If you do not pass a resource file reference number to a 4D Resource command, the resource
is searched for in all currently open resource files, starting with the most recently opened file
and ending with the first opened file. The resource files chain is thus browsed in the reverse
order of opening—the last opened resource file is examined first.

4D Language Reference 1417

Resource Type
A resource file is highly structured. In addition to the data of each resource, it contains a
header and a map that fully describe its contents.

Resources are classified by types. A resource type is always denoted by a 4-character string. A
resource type is both case sensitive and diacritical sensitive. For example, the resource types
“Hi_!”, “hi_!” and “HI_!” are all different.

Important: Resource types with lowercase characters are reserved for use by the Operating
System. Avoid designating your own resource types with lowercase characters.

The following is a list of some commonly-used resource types:

• A resource of type “STR#” is a resource containing a list of Pascal strings. This resource is
called a string list resource.
• A resource of type “STR ” (note the space as fourth character) is a resource containing an
individual Pascal string. This resource is called a string resource.
• A resource of type “TEXT” is a resource containing a text string without length. This resource
is called a text resource.
• A resource of type “PICT” is a resource containing a Macintosh-based QuickDraw picture
that you can use and display on both Macintosh and Windows with 4D. This resource is called
a picture resource.

• A resource of type “cicn” is a resource containing a Macintosh-based color icon that you can
use and display with 4D on both Macintosh and Windows. This resource is called a color icon
resource. For example, a “cicn” resource can be associated with an item of a hierarchical list,
using the command SET LIST ITEM PROPERTIES.

In addition to the standard resource types, you can create you own types. For example, you
can decide to work with resources of type “MTYP” (for “My Type”).

To obtain the list of resource types currently present in all open resource files or in a particular
resource file, use the command RESOURCE TYPE LIST. Then, to obtain the list of a specified type
of resource present in all open resource files or in a particular resource file, use the command
RESOURCE LIST. This command returns the IDs and Names (see next section) of all resources of
a given type.

WARNING: Many applications rely on the resource type for working with its contents. For
example, while accessing a “STR#” resource, applications expect to find a string list in the
resource. Do NOT store inconsistent data in resources of standard types; this may lead to
system errors in your 4D application or in other applications.

1418 4D Language Reference

WARNING: A resource is a highly structured file—do NOT access the file with commands other
than Resources commands. Note that nothing prevents you from passing a resource file
reference number (formally a 4D time expression like the document reference number) to a
command such as SEND PACKET. However, if you do so, you will probably damage the
resource file.

WARNING: A resource file can contain about up to 2,700 individual resources. Do NOT
attempt to exceed this limit. Note that nothing prevents you from doing so; however, this will
damage the resource file and make it unusable.

Resource Name and Resource ID

A resource has a resource name. A resource name can be up to 255 characters, and is diacritical
sensitive but not case sensitive. Resource names are useful for describing a resource, but you
access a resource using its type and ID number. Resource names are not unique; several
resources can have the same name.

A resource has a resource ID number (for short, resource ID or ID). This ID is unique within a
resource type and a resource file. For example:
• One resource file can contain a resource “ABCD” ID=1 and a resource “EFGH” ID=1.
• Two resource files can contain a resource with the same type and ID.

When you access a resource using a 4D command, you indicate its type and ID. If you do not
specify the resource file in which you are looking for this resource, the command returns the
occurrence of the resource found in the first examined resource file. Remember that resource
files are examined in the reverse order in which they have been opened.

The range of a resource ID is -32,768..32,767.

Important: Use the range 15,000..32,767 for your own resources. Do NOT use negative
resource IDs; these are reserved for use by the Operating System. Do NOT use resource IDs in
the range 0..14,999; this range is reserved for use by 4D.

To obtain the IDs and names of a given resource type, use the command RESOURCE LIST.

To obtain the name of an individual resource, use the command Get resource name.

To change the name of and individual resource, use the command SET RESOURCE NAME.

4D Language Reference 1419

As each 4D command optionally accepts a resource file reference number, you can easily deal
with resources having the same type and ID in two different resource files. The following
example copies all the “PICT” resources from one resource file to another:
` Open an existing resource file
$vhResFileA:=Open resource file("")
If (OK=1)
` Create a new resource file
$vhResFileB:=Create resource file("")
If (OK=1)
` Get the ID and Name lists of all the resources of type "PICT"
` located in the resource file A
RESOURCE LIST("PICT";$aiResID;$asResName;$vhResFileA)
` For each resource:
For($vlElem;1;Size of array($aiResID))
$viResID:=$aiResID{$vlElem}
` Load the resource from file A
GET RESOURCE ("PICT";$viResID;vxResData;$vhResFileA)
` If the resource could be loaded
If (OK=1)
` Add and write the resource into file B
SET RESOURCE ("PICT";$viResID;vxResData;$vhResFileB)
` If the resource could be added and written
If (OK=1)
` Copy also the name of the resource
SET RESOURCE NAME("PICT";$viResID;$asResName{$vlElem};
$vhResFileB)
` As well as its properties (see Resource Properties below)
$vlResAttr:=Get resource properties("PICT";$viResID;$vhResFileA)
SET RESOURCE PROPERTIES("PICT";$viResID;$vlResAttr;$vhResFileB)
Else
ALERT("The resource PICT ID="+String($viResID)+" could not be
added.")
End if
Else
ALERT("The resource PICT ID="+String($viResID)+" could not be loaded.")
End if
End for
CLOSE RESOURCE FILE($vhResFileB)
End if
CLOSE RESOURCE FILE($vhResFileA)
End if

1420 4D Language Reference

Resource Properties

Besides its type, name and ID, a resource has additional properties (also called attributes). For
example, a resource may or may not be purged. This attribute tells the Operating System
whether or not a loaded resource can be purged from memory when free memory is required
for allocating another object. As shown in the previous example, when creating or copying a
resource, it can be important to not only copy the resource, but also its name and properties.
For a complete explanation of resource properties, see the description of the commands Get
resource properties and SET RESOURCE PROPERTIES.

Handling Resource Contents

To load a resource of any type into memory, call GET RESOURCE, which returns the contents of
the resource in a BLOB.

To add or rewrite a resource on disk, call SET RESOURCE, which sets the contents of the
resource to the contents of the BLOB you pass.

To delete an existing resource, use the command DELETE RESOURCE.

To simplify handling of standard resource types, 4D provides additional built-in commands

that save you from having to parse a BLOB in order to extract the resource data:
• STRING LIST TO ARRAY populates a String or Text array with the strings contained in a string
list resource.
• ARRAY TO STRING LIST creates or rewrites a string list resource with the elements of a String
or Text array.
• Get indexed string returns a particular string from a string list resource.
• Get string resource returns the string from a string resource.
• SET STRING RESOURCE creates or rewrites a string resource.
• Get text resource returns the text of a text resource.
• SET TEXT RESOURCE creates or rewrites a text resource.
• GET PICTURE RESOURCE returns the picture of a picture resource.
• SET PICTURE RESOURCE creates or rewrites a picture resource.
• GET ICON RESOURCE returns a color icon resource as a picture.

Note that these commands are provided to simplify manipulation of standard resource types;
however, they do not prevent you from using GET RESOURCE and SET RESOURCE using BLOBs.

4D Language Reference 1421

For example, this line of code:

ALERT(Get text resource(20000))

is the shorter equivalent of:

GET RESOURCE("TEXT";20000;vxData)
If (OK=1)
$vlOffset:=0
ALERT(BLOB to text(vxData;UTF8 Text without length;$vlOffset;BLOB Size(vxData)))
End if

4D Commands and Resources

In addition to the Resources commands described in this chapter, there are other 4D
commands that work with resources and resource files:
• On Macintosh, DOCUMENT TO BLOB and BLOB TO DOCUMENT can load and write the
whole resource fork of a Macintosh file.
• Using the commands SET LIST ITEM PROPERTIES and SET LIST PROPERTIES, you can associate
picture or color icon resources to the items of a list or use color icon resources as nodes of a list.
• The PLAY command plays “snd ” resources on both Macintosh and Windows.
• The SET CURSOR command changes the appearance of the mouse using “CURS” resources.

See Also
BLOB Commands, Get component resource ID, OS Resource Manager Errors.

1422 4D Language Reference

ARRAY TO STRING LIST Resources

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

ARRAY TO STRING LIST (strings; resID{; resFile})

Parameter Type Description

strings String array → String or Text array
(new contents for the STR# resource)
resID Number → Resource ID number
resFile DocRef → Resource file reference number, or
current resource file, if omitted

Description
The ARRAY TO STRING LIST command creates or rewrites the string list (“STR#”) resource whose
ID is passed in resID. The contents of the resource are created from the strings passed in the
array strings. The array can be a String or Text array.

If the resource cannot be added, the OK variable is set to 0 (zero).

If you pass a valid resource file reference number in resFile, the resource is added to that file. If
you do not pass resFile, the resource is added to the file at the top the resource files chain (the
last resource file opened).

Note: Each string of a string list resource can contain up to 255 characters.

Tip: Limit your use of string list resources to resources no more than 32K in total size, and a
maximum of a few hundred strings maximum per resource.

4D Language Reference 1423

Example
Your database relies on a given set of fonts.

In the On Exit Database Method, you write:

` On Exit Database Method

If (<>vbFontsAreOK)
FONT LIST($atFont)
$vhResFile:=Open resource file("FontSet")
If (OK=1)
ARRAY TO STRING LIST($atFont;15000;$vhResFile)
CLOSE RESOURCE FILE($vhResFile)
End if
End if
In the On Startup Database Method, you write:

` On Startup Database Method

<>vbFontsAreOK:=False
FONT LIST($atNewFont)
If (Test path name("FontSet")#Is a document)
$vhResFile:=Create resource file("FontSet")
Else
$vhResFile:=Open resource file("FontSet")
End if
If (OK=1)
STRING LIST TO ARRAY(15000;$atOldFont;$vhResFile)
If (OK=1)
<>vbFontsAreOK:=True
For($vlElem;1;Size of array($atNewFont))
If ($atNewFont{$vlElem}#$atOldFont{$vlElem}))
$vlElem:=MAXLONG
<>vbFontsAreOK:=False
End if
End for
Else
<>vbFontsAreOK:=True
End if
CLOSE RESOURCE FILE($vhResFile)
End if

1424 4D Language Reference

 If(Not(<>vbFontsAreOK))
CONFIRM("You are not using the same font set, OK?")
If(OK=1)
<>vbFontsAreOK:=True
Else
QUIT 4D
End if
End if

See Also
SET STRING RESOURCE, SET TEXT RESOURCE, STRING LIST TO ARRAY.

System Variables and Sets

If the resource has been written, OK is set to 1. Otherwise, it is set to 0 (zero).

4D Language Reference 1425

CLOSE RESOURCE FILE Resources

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

CLOSE RESOURCE FILE (resFile)

Parameter Type Description

resFile DocRef → Resource file reference number

Description
The CLOSE RESOURCE FILE command closes the resource file whose reference number is passed
in resFile.

Even if you have opened the same resource file several times, you need to call CLOSE
RESOURCE FILE only once in order to close that file.

If you apply CLOSE RESOURCE FILE to the 4D application or database resource files, the
command detects it and does nothing.

If you pass an invalid resource file reference number, the command does nothing.

Remember to eventually call CLOSE RESOURCE FILE for a resource file that you have opened
using Open Resource file or Create resource file. Note that when you quit the application (or
open another database), 4D automatically closes all the resource files you opened.

Example
The following example creates a resource file, adds a string resource and closes the file:

$vhDocRef:=Create resource file("Just a file")

If (OK=1)
SET STRING RESOURCE(20000;"Just a string";$vhDocRef)
CLOSE RESOURCE FILE($vhDocRef)
End if

See Also
Create resource file, Open resource file.

1426 4D Language Reference

Create resource file Resources

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Create resource file (resFilename{; fileType{; *}}) → DocRef

Parameter Type Description

resFilename String → Short or long name of resource file, or
empty string for standard Save File dialog box
fileType String → Mac OS file type (4-character string), or
Windows file extension (1- to 3-character string), or
Resource ("res " / .RES) document, if omitted
* → If passed = Use data fork

Function result DocRef ← Resource file reference number

Description
The Create resource file command creates and opens a new resource file whose name or
pathname is passed in resFileName.

If you pass a filename, the file will be located in the same folder as the structure file of the
database. Pass a pathname to create a resource file located in another folder.

If the file already exists and is not currently open, Create resource file overrides it with a new
empty resource file. If the file is currently open, an I/O error is returned.

If you pass an empty string in resFileName, the Save File dialog box is presented. You can then
choose the location and the name of the resource file to be created. If you cancel the dialog,
no resource file is created; Create resource file returns a null DocRef and sets the OK variable to
0.

If the resource file is correctly created and opened, Create resource file returns its resource file
reference number and sets the OK variable to 1. If the resource file cannot be created, an error
is generated.

On Macintosh, the default file type for a file created with Create resource file is “res ”.
On Windows, the default file extension is “.res”. To create a file of another type:
• On Macintosh, pass the file type in the optional parameter fileType.
• On Windows, in fileType, pass a 1- to 3-character Windows file extension or a Macintosh file
type mapped using the command MAP FILE TYPES.

4D Language Reference 1427

By default, if the * parameter is omitted, the command creates and opens the file resource fork.
When this parameter is passed, the command creates and opens the file data fork (readable on
both Mac OS and Windows platforms). For more information, refer to the Resources topic.

Remember to call CLOSE RESOURCE FILE for the resource file. Note, however, when you quit
the application (or open another database), 4D automatically closes all the resource files you
opened using Create resource file or Open resource file.

Examples
1. The following example tries to create and open on Windows, the resource file “MyPrefs.res”
located in the database folder:

$vhResFile:=Create resource file("MyPrefs";*)

On Macintosh, the example tries to create and open the file “MyPrefs”.

2. The following example tries to create and open, on Windows, the resource file “MyPrefs.rsr”
located in the database folder:

$vhResFile:=Create resource file("MyPrefs";"rsr")

On Macintosh, the example tries to create and open the file “MyPrefs”.

3. The following example displays the Save File dialog box:

$vhResFile:=Create resource file("")

If (OK=1)
ALERT("You just created “"+Document+"”.")
CLOSE RESOURCE FILE($vhResFile)
End if

See Also
CLOSE RESOURCE FILE, ON ERR CALL, Open resource file, Resources.

System Variables and Sets

If the resource file is successfully created and opened, the OK variable is set to 1. If the resource
file could not be created or if the user clicked Cancel in the Save File dialog box, the OK
variable is set to 0 (zero).

1428 4D Language Reference

If the resource file is successfully created and opened through the Save File dialog box, the
Document variable is set to the pathname of the file.

Error Handling
If the resource file could not be created or opened due to a resource or I/O problem, an error is
generated. You can catch this error with an error-handling method installed using ON ERR
CALL.

4D Language Reference 1429

DELETE RESOURCE Resources

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DELETE RESOURCE (resType; resID{; resFile})

Parameter Type Description

resType String → 4-character resource type
resID Number → Resource ID number
resFile DocRef → Resource file reference number, or
current resource file, if omitted

Description
The DELETE RESOURCE command deletes the resource whose type is passed in resType and
whose ID number is passed in resID.

If you pass a valid resource file reference number in the parameter resFile, the resource is
searched for within that file only. If you do not pass resFile, the resource is searched for within
the current open resource files.

If the resource does not exist, DELETE RESOURCE does nothing and sets the OK variable to 0
(zero). If the resource is found and deleted, the OK variable is set to 1.

WARNING: DO NOT delete resources that belong to 4D or to any System files. If you do so,
you may provoke undesired system errors.

Examples
1. The following example deletes the resource "STR#" ID=20000:

` Note that this example will delete the first "STR#" ID=20000 resource
` found in any resource file currently open:
DELETE RESOURCE ("STR#";20000)

1430 4D Language Reference

2. The following example deletes the resource "STR#" ID=20000 if it is found in a specified
resource file:

` Note that this example will delete the resource "STR#" ID=20000
` only if it is present in the resource file specified by $vhResFile:
DELETE RESOURCE ("STR#";20000;$vhResFile)
` Note also that if there is such a resource in a currently open
` resource file other than that specified by $vhResFile, this resource
` is left untouched

3. The project method DELETE RESOURCES OF TYPE deletes all the resources of the type
specified (as the second parameter) from the resource file specified (as the first parameter):

` DELETE RESOURCES OF TYPE Project Method

` DELETE RESOURCES OF TYPE ( Time ; String )
` DELETE RESOURCES OF TYPE ( resFile ; resType )

C_TIME($1)
C_STRING(4;$2)

RESOURCE LIST($2;$aiResID;$asResName;$1)
If(OK=1)
For($vlElem;1;Size of array($aiResID))
DELETE RESOURCE($2;$aiResID{$vlElem};$1)
End for
End if

After this project method is present in a database, you can write:

` Delete all the resource of type "PREF" from the resource file $vhResFile
DELETE RESOURCES OF TYPE ($vhResFile;"PREF")

4. The project method DELETE RESOURCE BY NAME deletes a resource (of a specific type) whose
name is known:

` DELETE RESOURCE BY NAME Project Method

` DELETE RESOURCE BY NAME ( Time ; String ; String )
` DELETE RESOURCE BY NAME ( resFile ; resType ; resName )
C_TIME($1)
C_STRING(4;$2)
C_STRING(255;$3)

4D Language Reference 1431

 RESOURCE LIST($2;$aiResID;$asResName;$1)
If(OK=1)
$vlElem:=Find in array($asResName;$3)
If($vlElem>0)
DELETE RESOURCE($2;$aiResID{$vlElem};$1)
End for
End if

After this project method is present in a database, you can write:

` Delete, from the resource file $vhResFile, the resource "PREF"

` whose name is “Standard Settings”:
DELETE RESOURCE BY NAME ($vhResFile;"PREF";"Standard Settings")

See Also
RESOURCE LIST, SET RESOURCE PROPERTIES.

System Variables and Sets

The OK variable is set to 0 if the resource does not exist. If the resource has been deleted, the
OK variable is set to 1.

1432 4D Language Reference

Get component resource ID Resources

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Compatibility Note: This command worked with former generation components that are
incompatible with version 11 and higher of 4D. It now has no effect and should no longer be
used.

Get component resource ID (compName; resType; originalResNum) → Number

Parameter Type Description

compName String (32) → Component name referencing the resource
resType String (4) → Resource type (4 characters), PICT or STR#
originalResNum Number → Resource original number before component
installation

Function result Number ← Current resource number

4D Language Reference 1433

GET ICON RESOURCE Resources

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET ICON RESOURCE (resID; resData{; fileRef})

Parameter Type Description

resID Number → Icon resource ID number
resData Picture → Picture field or variable to receive the picture
← Contents of the cicn resource
fileRef Number → Resource file reference number, or
all open resource files, if omitted

Description
The GET ICON RESOURCE command returns, in the picture field or variable resData, the icon
stored in the color icon (“cicn”) resource whose ID is passed in resID.

If the resource is not found, the resData parameter is left unchanged and the OK variable is set
to 0 (zero).

If you pass a valid resource file reference number in resFile, the resource is searched for in that
file only. If you do not pass resFile, the first occurrence of the resource found in the resource
files chain is returned.

Example
The following example loads, in a Picture array, the color icons located in the active 4D
application:

If (On Windows)
$vh4DResFile:=Open resource file(Replace string(Application file;".EXE";".RSR"))
Else
$vh4DResFile:=Open resource file(Application file)
End if
RESOURCE LIST("cicn";$alResID;$asResName;$vh4DResFile)
$vlNbIcons:=Size of array($alResID)
ARRAY PICTURE(ag4DIcon;$vlNbIcons)
For ($vlElem;1;$vlNbIcons)
GET ICON RESOURCE($alResID{$vlElem};ag4DIcon{$vlElem};$vh4DResFile)
End for

1434 4D Language Reference

After this code has been executed, the array looks like this when displayed in a form:

See Also
GET PICTURE RESOURCE.

System Variables and Sets

If the resource is found, OK is set to 1. Otherwise, it is set to 0 (zero).

4D Language Reference 1435

Get indexed string Resources

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get indexed string (resID; strID{; resFile}) → String

Parameter Type Description

resID Number → Resource ID number or
'id' attribute of the 'group' element (XLIFF)
strID Number → String number or
'id' attribute of the 'trans-unit' element (XLIFF)
resFile DocRef → Resource file reference number
If omitted: all the XLIFF files or
open resource files

Function result String ← Value of the indexed string

Description
The Get indexed string command returns:
• Either one of the strings stored in the string list (“STR#”) resource whose ID is passed in resID.
• Or a string stored in an open XLIFF file whose 'id' attribute of the 'group' element is passed in
resID (see "Compatibility with XLIFF architecture" below).

You pass the number of the string in strID. The strings of a string list resource are numbered
from 1 to N. To get all the strings (and their numbers) of a string list resource, use the
command STRING LIST TO ARRAY.

If the resource or the string within the resource is not found, an empty string is returned and
the OK variable is set to 0 (zero).

If you pass a valid resource file reference number in resFile, the resource is searched for in that
file only. If you do not pass resFile, the first occurrence of the resource found in the resource
files chain is returned.

Note: A string of a string list resource can contain up to 255 characters.

1436 4D Language Reference

Compatibility with XLIFF architecture
The Get indexed string command is compatible with the XLIFF architecture of 4D beginning
with version 11: the command first looks for values corresponding to resID and strID in all the
open XLIFF files (when the resFile parameter is omitted). In this case, resID specifies the id
attribute of the group element and strID specifies the id attribute of the trans-unit element. If
the value is not found, the command continues searching in the open resources files. For more
information about XLIFF architecture in 4D, refer to the Design Reference manual.

Example
See example for the command Month of.

See Also
Get string resource, Get text resource, STRING LIST TO ARRAY.

System Variables and Sets

If the resource is found, OK is set to 1. Otherwise, it is set to 0 (zero).

4D Language Reference 1437

GET PICTURE RESOURCE Resources

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET PICTURE RESOURCE (resID; resData{; resFile})

Parameter Type Description

resID Number → Resource ID number
resData Field or Variable → Picture field or variable to receive the picture
← Contents of the PICT resource
resFile DocRef → Resource file reference number, or
all open resource files, if omitted

Description
The GET PICTURE RESOURCE command returns in the picture field or variable resData the
picture stored in the picture (“PICT”) resource whose ID is passed in resID.

If the resource is not found, the resData parameter is left unchanged, and the OK variable is set
to 0 (zero).

If you pass a valid resource file reference number in resFile, the resource is searched for in that
file only. If you do not pass resFile, the first occurrence of the resource found in the resource
files chain is returned.

Note: A picture resource can be at least several megabytes in size.

Example
See example for the command RESOURCE LIST.

See Also
GET ICON RESOURCE, ON ERR CALL, SET PICTURE RESOURCE.

System Variables and Sets

If the resource is found, OK is set to 1. Otherwise, it is set to 0 (zero).

Error Handling
If there is not enough memory to load the picture, an error is generated. You can catch this
error with an error-handling method installed using ON ERR CALL.

1438 4D Language Reference

GET RESOURCE Resources

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET RESOURCE (resType; resID; resData{; resFile})

Parameter Type Description

resType String → 4-character resource type
resID Number → Resource ID number
resData BLOB → BLOB field or variable to receive the data
← Contents of the resource
resFile DocRef → Resource file reference number, or
all open resource files, if omitted

Description
The GET RESOURCE command returns in the BLOB field or variable resData the contents of the
resource whose type and ID is passed in resType and resID.

Important: You must pass a 4-character string in resType.

If the resource is not found, the resData parameter is left unchanged and the OK variable is set
to 0 (zero).

If you pass a valid resource file reference number in resFile, the resource is searched for in that
file only. If you do not pass resFile, the first occurrence of the resource found in the resource
files chain is returned.

Note: A resource can be at least several megabytes in size.

Platform independence: Remember that you are working with Mac OS-based resources. No
matter what the platform, internal resource data such as Long Integer is stored using
Macintosh byte ordering. On Windows, the data for standard resources (such as string list and
pictures resources) is automatically byte swapped when necessary. On the other hand, if you
create and use your own internal data structures, it is up to you to byte swap the data you
extract from the BLOB (i.e., passing Macintosh byte ordering to a command such as BLOB to
longint).

Example
See the example for the command SET RESOURCE.

4D Language Reference 1439

See Also
BLOB Commands, Resources, SET RESOURCE.

System Variables and Sets

If the resource is found, OK is set to 1. Otherwise, it is set to 0 (zero).

Error Handling
If there is not enough memory to load the resource, an error is generated. You can catch this
error with an error-handling method installed using ON ERR CALL.

1440 4D Language Reference

Get resource name Resources

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get resource name (resType; resID{; resFile}) → String

Parameter Type Description

resType String → 4-character resource type
resID Number → Resource ID number
resFile DocRef → Resource file reference number, or
all open resource files, if omitted

Function result String ← Name of the resource

Description
The Get resource name command returns the name of the resource whose type is passed in
resType and whose ID number is passed in resID.

If you pass a valid resource file reference number in the parameter resFile, the resource is
searched for within that file only. If you do not pass the parameter resFile, the resource is
searched for within the current open resource files.

If the resource does not exist, Get resource name returns an empty string and sets the OK
variable to 0 (zero).

Example
The following project method copies a resource, and its resource name and attributes, from
one resource file to another:
` COPY RESOURCE Project Method
` COPY RESOURCE ( String ; Long ; Time ; Time )
` COPY RESOURCE ( resType ; resID ; srcResFile ; dstResFile )

C_STRING (4;$1)
C_LONGINT ($2)
C_TIME ($3;$4)
C_BLOB ($vxResData)

4D Language Reference 1441

 GET RESOURCE ($1;$2;$vxData;$3)
If (OK=1)
SET RESOURCE ($1;$2;$vxData;$4)
If (OK=1)
SET RESOURCE NAME ($1;$2; Get resource name ($1;$2;$3);$4)
SET RESOURCE PROPERTIES ($1;$2; Get resource properties ($1;$2;$3);$4)
End if
End if
Once this project method is present in your application, you can write:
` Copy the resource 'DATA' ID = 15000 from file A to file B
COPY RESOURCE ("DATA";15000;$vhResFileA;$vhResFileB)

See Also
SET RESOURCE PROPERTIES.

System Variables or Sets

The OK variable is set to 0 if the resource does not exist; otherwise, it is set to 1.

1442 4D Language Reference

Get resource properties Resources

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get resource properties (resType; resID{; resFile}) → Number

Parameter Type Description

resType String → 4-character resource type
resID Number → Resource ID number
resFile DocRef → Resource file reference number, or
all open resource files, if omitted

Function result Number ← Resource attributes

Description
The Get resource properties command returns the attributes of the resource whose type is
passed in resType and whose ID number is passed in resID.

If you pass a valid resource file reference number in the parameter resFile, the resource is
searched for within that file only. If you do not pass the parameter resFile, the resource is
searched for within the current open resource files.

If the resource does not exist, Get resource properties returns 0 (zero) and sets the OK variable
to 0 (zero).

The numeric value returned by Get resource properties must be seen as a bit field value whose
bits have special meaning. For a description of the resource attributes and their effects, please
refer to the command SET RESOURCE PROPERTIES.

Example
See example for the command Get resource name.

See Also
SET RESOURCE NAME.

System Variables or Sets

The OK variable is set to 0 if the resource does not exist; otherwise, it is set to 1.

4D Language Reference 1443

Get string resource Resources

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get string resource (resID{; resFile}) → String

Parameter Type Description

resID Number → Resource ID number
resFile DocRef → Resource file reference number, or
all open resource files, if omitted

Function result String ← Contents of the STR resource

Description
The Get string resource command returns the string stored in the string (“STR ”) resource
whose ID is passed in resID.

If the resource is not found, an empty string is returned and the OK variable is set to 0 (zero).

If you pass a valid resource file reference number in resFile, the resource is searched for in that
file only. If you do not pass resFile, the first occurrence of the resource found in the resource
files chain is returned.

Note: A string resource can contain up to 255 characters.

Example
The following example displays the contents of the string resource ID=20911, which must be
located in at least one of the currently open resource files:

ALERT (Get string resource(20911))

See Also
Get indexed string, Get text resource, SET STRING RESOURCE, STRING LIST TO ARRAY.

System Variables and Sets

If the resource is found, OK is set to 1. Otherwise, it is set to 0 (zero).

1444 4D Language Reference

Get text resource Resources

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get text resource (resID{; resFile}) → Text

Parameter Type Description

resID Number → Resource ID number
resFile DocRef → Resource file reference number, or
all open resource files, if omitted

Function result Text ← Contents of the TEXT resource

Description
The Get text resource command returns the text stored in the text (“TEXT”) resource whose ID
is passed in resID.

If the resource is not found, empty text is returned, and the OK variable is set to 0 (zero).

If you pass a valid resource file reference number in resFile, the resource is searched for in that
file only. If you do not pass resFile, the first occurrence of the resource found in the resource
files chain is returned.

Note: A text resource can contain up to 32,000 characters.

Example
The following example displays the contents of the text resource ID=20800, which must be
located in at least one of the currently open resource files:

ALERT (Get text resource(20800))

See Also
Get indexed string, Get string resource, SET TEXT RESOURCE, STRING LIST TO ARRAY.

System Variables and Sets

If the resource is found, OK is set to 1. Otherwise, it is set to 0 (zero).

4D Language Reference 1445

Open resource file Resources

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Open resource file (resFilename{; fileType}) → DocRef

Parameter Type Description

resFilename String → Short or long name of resource file, or
Empty string for standard Open File dialog box
fileType String → Mac OS file type (4-character string), or
Windows file extension (1- to 3-character string), or
All files, if omitted

Function result DocRef ← Resource file reference number

Description
The Open resource file command opens the resource file whose name or pathname you pass in
resFileName.

If you pass a filename, the file should be located in the same folder as the structure file of the
database. Pass a pathname to open a resource file located in another folder.

If you pass an empty string in resFileName, the Open File dialog box is presented. You can
then select the resource file to open. If you cancel the dialog, no resource file is open; Open
resource file returns a null DocRef and sets the OK variable to 0.

By default, the command opens the resource fork of the file passed as parameter. If it is empty,
the command opens the data fork of the file and accesses any resources found there. For more
information, refer to the Resources section.

If the resource file is opened correctly, Open resource file returns its resource file reference
number and sets the OK variable to 1. If the resource file does not exist, or if the file you try to
open is not a resource file, an error is generated.

On Macintosh, if you use the Open File dialog box, all files are presented by default. To show a
particular type of file, specify the file type in the optional fileType parameter.

On Windows, if you use the Open File dialog box, all files are presented by default. To show a
particular type of file, in fileType, pass a 1- to 3-character Windows file extension or a
Macintosh file type mapped using the command MAP FILE TYPES.

1446 4D Language Reference

Remember to call CLOSE RESOURCE FILE for the resource file. Note, however, that when you
quit the application (or open another database), 4D automatically closes all the resource files
you opened using Open resource file or Create resource file .

Unlike the Open document command, which opens a document with exclusive read-write
access by default, Open resource file does not prevent you from opening a resource file already
open from within the 4D session. For example, if you try to open the same document twice
using Open document, an I/O error will be returned at second attempt. On the other hand, if
you try to open a resource file already open from within the 4D session, Open resource file will
return the resource file reference number to the file already open. Even if you open a resource
file several times, you need to call CLOSE RESOURCE FILE once in order to close that file. Note
that this is permitted if the resource file is open from within the 4D session; if you try open a
resource file already opened by another application, you will get an I/O error.

WARNING
• It is forbidden to access a 4D application resource file as well as a 4D Desktop merged
database resource file.
• Although it is technically possible, you are advised not to use the database structure resource
file because your code will not work if the database is compiled and merged with 4D Desktop.
However, if you access and intend to programmatically add, delete or modify its resources, be
sure to test the environment in which you are running. With 4D Server, this will probably
lead to serious issues. For example, if you modify a resource on the server machine (via a
database method or a stored procedure), you will definitely affect the built-in 4D Server
administration service that distributes resources (transparently) to the workstations. Note that
with 4D Client, you do not have direct access to the structure file; it is located on the server
machine.
• For these reasons, if you use resources, store them in your own files.
• When working with your own resources, do NOT use negative resource IDs; they are reserved
for use by the Operating System. Do NOT use resource IDs in the range 0..14,999; this range is
reserved for use by 4D. Use the range 15,000..32,767 for your own resources. Remember that
once you have opened a resource file, it will be the first file to be searched in the resource files
chain. If you store a resource in that file with an ID in the range of system or 4D resources,
this resource will be found by commands such as GET RESOURCE and also by internal routines
of the 4D application. This may be the result you want to achieve, but if you are not sure, do
NOT use these ranges, as they may lead to system errors.
• Resource files are highly structured files and cannot accept more than 2,700 resources per
file. If you work with files containing a large number of resources, it is a good idea to test that
number before adding new resources to a file. See the Count resources examples listed for the
command RESOURCE TYPE LIST.

After you have opened a resource file, you can analyze the contents of the file using the
commands RESOURCE TYPE LIST and RESOURCE LIST.

4D Language Reference 1447

Examples
1. The following example tries to open, on Windows, the resource file “MyPrefs.res” located in
the database folder:

$vhResFile:=Open resource file("MyPrefs";"res ")

On Macintosh, the example tries to open the file “MyPrefs”.

2. The following example tries to open, on Windows. the resource file “MyPrefs.rsr” located in
the database folder:

$vhResFile:=Open resource file("MyPrefs";"rsr")

On Macintosh, the example tries to open the file “MyPrefs”.

3. The following example displays the Open file dialog box showing all types of files:

$vhResFile:=Open resource file("")

4. The following example displays the Open file dialog box showing files created by the Create
resource file command, using the default file type:

$vhResFile:=Open resource file("";"res ")

If (OK=1)
ALERT("You just opened "+Document+”.")
CLOSE RESOURCE FILE($vhResFile)
End if

See Also
CLOSE RESOURCE FILE, Create resource file, Resources.

System Variables and Sets

If the resource file is successfully opened, the OK variable is set to 1. If the resource file could
not be opened or if the user clicked Cancel in the Open file dialog box, the OK variable is set
to 0 (zero).

If the resource file is successfully opened using the Open file dialog box, the Document
variable is set to the pathname of the file.

Error Handling
If the resource file could not be opened due to a resource or I/O problem, an error is generated.
You can catch this error with an error-handling method installed using ON ERR CALL.

1448 4D Language Reference

RESOURCE LIST Resources

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

RESOURCE LIST (resType; resIDs; resNames{; resFile})

Parameter Type Description

resType String → 4-character resource type
resIDs LongInt Array ← Resource ID numbers for resources of this type
resNames String Array ← Resource names for resources of this type
resFile DocRef → Resource file reference number, or
all open resource files, if omitted

Description
The RESOURCE LIST command populates the arrays resIDs and resNames with the resource IDs
and names of the resources whose type is passed in resType.

Important: You must pass a 4-character string in resType.

If you pass a valid resource file reference number in the optional parameter resFile, only the
resources from that file are listed. If you do not pass the parameter resFile, all resources from
the current open resource files are listed.

If you predeclare the arrays before calling RESOURCE LIST, you must predeclare resIDs as a
Longint array and resNames as a String or Text array. If you do not predeclare the arrays, the
command creates resIDs as a Longint array and resNames as a Text array.

After the call, you can test the number of resources found by applying the command Size of
array to the array resIDs or resNames.

Examples
1. The following example populates the arrays $alResID and $atResName with the IDs and
names of the string list resources present in the structure file of the database:

If (On Windows)
$vhStructureResFile:=Open resource file(Replace string(Structure file;".4DB";".RSR"))
Else
$vhStructureResFile:=Open resource file(Structure file)
End if

4D Language Reference 1449

 If (OK=1)
RESOURCE LIST("STR#";$alResID;$atResName;$vhStructureResFile)
End if

2. The following example copies the picture resources present in all currently open resource
files into the Picture Library of the database:

RESOURCE LIST("PICT";$alResID;$atResName)
Open window(50;50;550;120;5;"Copying PICT resources...")
For ($vlElem;1;Size of array($alResID))
GET PICTURE RESOURCE($alResID{$vlElem};$vgPicture)
If (OK=1)
$vsName:=$atResName{$vlElem}
If ($vsName="")
$vsName:="PICT resID="+String($alResID{$vlElem})
End if
ERASE WINDOW
GOTO XY(2;1)
MESSAGE("Adding picture “"+$vsName+"” to the DB Picture library.")
SET PICTURE TO LIBRARY($vgPicture;$alResID{$vlElem};$vsName)
End if
End for
CLOSE WINDOW

See Also
RESOURCE TYPE LIST.

1450 4D Language Reference

RESOURCE TYPE LIST Resources

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

RESOURCE TYPE LIST (resTypes{; resFile})

Parameter Type Description

resTypes String Array ← List of available resource types
resFile DocRef → Resource file reference number, or
all open resource files, if omitted

Description
The RESOURCE TYPE LIST command populates the array resTypes with the resource types of the
resources present in the resource files currently open.

If you pass a valid resource file reference number in the optional parameter resFile, only the
resources from that file are listed. If you do not pass the parameter resFile, all the resources
from the current open resource files are listed.

You can predeclare the array resTypes as a String or Text array before calling RESOURCE TYPE
LIST. If you do not predeclare the array, the command creates resTypes as a Text array.
After the call, you can test the number of resource types found by applying the command Size
of array to the array resTypes.

Examples
1. The following example populates the array atResType with the resource types of the
resources present in all the resource files currently open:

RESOURCE TYPE LIST(atResType)

2. The following example tells you if the Macintosh 4D structure file you are using contains
old 4D plug-ins that will need to be updated in order to use the database on Windows:

$vhResFile:=Open resource file(Structure file)

RESOURCE TYPE LIST(atResType;$vhResFile)
If (Find in array(atResType;"4DEX")>0)
ALERT("This database contains old model Mac OS 4D plug-ins."+(Char(13)*2)+
"You will have to update them for using this database on Windows.")
End if

4D Language Reference 1451

Note: The structure file is not the only file where old version plug-ins can be stored. The
database can also include a Proc.Ext file.

3. The following project method returns the number of resources present in a resource file:

` Count resources project method

` Count resources ( Time ) -> Long
` Count resources ( DocRef ) -> Number of resources

C_LONGINT($0)
C_TIME($1)

$0:=0
RESOURCE TYPE LIST($atResType;$1)
For ($vlElem;1;Size of array($atResType))
RESOURCE LIST($atResType{$vlElem};$alResID;$atResName;$1)
$0:=$0+Size of array($alResID)
End for

Once this project method is implemented in a database, you can write:

$vhResFile:=Open resource file("")

If (OK=1)
ALERT("The file “"+Document+"” contains "+String(Count resources ($vhResFile))+
" resource(s).")
CLOSE RESOURCE FILE($vhResFile)
End if

See Also
RESOURCE LIST.

1452 4D Language Reference

SET PICTURE RESOURCE Resources

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET PICTURE RESOURCE (resID; resData{; resFile})

Parameter Type Description

resID Number → Resource ID number
resData Picture → New contents for the PICT resource
resFile DocRef → Resource file reference number, or
current resource file, if omitted

Description
The SET PICTURE RESOURCE command creates or rewrites the picture (“PICT”) resource whose
ID is passed in resID with the picture passed in resData.

If the resource cannot be added, the OK variable is set to 0 (zero).

If you pass a valid resource file reference number in resFile, the resource is added to that file. If
you do not pass resFile, the resource is added to the file at the top of the resource files chain
(the last resource file opened).

If you pass in resData an empty picture field or variable, the command has no effect and the
OK variable is set to 0.

Note: A picture resource can be several megabytes in size and even more.

See Also
GET PICTURE RESOURCE.

System Variables and Sets

If the resource has been written, OK is set to 1. Otherwise, it is set to 0 (zero).

4D Language Reference 1453

SET RESOURCE Resources

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET RESOURCE (resType; resID; resData{; resFile})

Parameter Type Description

resType String → 4-character resource type
resID Number → Resource ID number
resData BLOB → New contents for the resource
resFile DocRef → Resource file reference number, or
current resource file, if omitted

Description
The SET RESOURCE command creates or rewrites the resource whose type and ID is passed in
resType and resID with the data passed in the BLOB resData.

Important: You must pass a 4-character string in resType.

If the resource cannot be written, the OK variable is set to 0 (zero).

If you pass a valid resource file reference number in resFile, the resource is added to that file. If
you do not pass resFile, the resource is added to the file at the top of the resource files chain
(the last resource file opened).

Note: A resource can be at least several megabytes in size.

Platform independence: Remember that you are working with Mac OS-based resources. No
matter what the platform, internal resource data such as Long Integer is stored using
Macintosh byte ordering. On Windows, the data for standard resources (such as string list and
pictures resources) is automatically byte swapped when necessary. On the other hand, if you
create and use your own internal data structures, it it up to you to byte swap the data you
write into the BLOB (i.e., passing Macintosh byte ordering to a command such as LONGINT TO
BLOB).

1454 4D Language Reference

Example
During a 4D session you maintain some user preferences in interprocess variables. To save
these preferences from session to session, you can:
1. Use the commands SAVE VARIABLES and LOAD VARIABLES to store and retrieve the variables
in variable documents on disk.
2. Use the commands VARIABLE TO BLOB, BLOB TO DOCUMENT, DOCUMENT TO BLOB and
BLOB TO VARIABLE to store and retrieve the variables in BLOB documents on disk.
3. Use the commands VARIABLE TO BLOB, SET RESOURCE, GET RESOURCE and BLOB TO
VARIABLE to to store and retrieve the variables in resource files on disk.
The following is an example of the third method.

In the On Exit Database Method you write:

` On Exit Database Method

If (Test path name("DB_Prefs")#Is a document)
$vhResFile:=Create resource file("DB_Prefs")
Else
$vhResFile:=Open resource file("DB_Prefs")
End if
If (OK=1)
VARIABLE TO BLOB(<>vbAutoRepeat;$vxPrefData)
VARIABLE TO BLOB(<>vlCurTable;$vxPrefData;*)
VARIABLE TO BLOB(<>asDfltOption;$vxPrefData;*)
` and so on...
SET RESOURCE("PREF";26500;$vxPrefData;$vhResFile)
CLOSE RESOURCE FILE($vhResFile)
End if

In the On Startup Database Method you write:

` On Startup Database Method

C_BOOLEAN(<>vbAutoRepeat)
C_LONGINT(<>vlCurTable)
$vbDone:=False
$vhResFile:=Open resource file("DB_Prefs")
If (OK=1)
GET RESOURCE("PREF";26500;$vxPrefData;$vhResFile)

4D Language Reference 1455

 If (OK=1)
$vlOffset:=0
BLOB TO VARIABLE($vxPrefData;<>vbAutoRepeat;$vlOffset)
BLOB TO VARIABLE($vxPrefData;<>vlCurTable;$vlOffset)
BLOB TO VARIABLE($vxPrefData;<>asDfltOption;$vlOffset)
` and so on...
$vbDone:=True
End if
CLOSE RESOURCE FILE($vhResFile)
End if
If(Not($vbDone))
<>vbAutoRepeat:=False
<>vlCurTable:=0
ARRAY STRING(127;<>asDfltOption;0)
End if

See Also
BLOB Commands, GET RESOURCE.

System Variables and Sets

If the resource is written, OK is set to 1. Otherwise, it is set to 0 (zero).

1456 4D Language Reference

SET RESOURCE NAME Resources

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET RESOURCE NAME (resType; resID; resName{; resFile})

Parameter Type Description

resType String → 4-character resource type
resID Number → Resource ID number
resName String → New name for the resource
resFile DocRef → Resource file reference number, or
current resource file, if omitted

Description
The SET RESOURCE NAME command changes the name of the resource whose type is passed in
resType and whose ID number is passed in resID.

If you pass a valid resource file reference number in the parameter resFile, the resource is
searched for within that file only. If you do not pass the parameter resFile, the resource is
searched for within the current open resource files.

If the resource does not exist, SET RESOURCE NAME does nothing and sets the OK variable to 0
(zero).

WARNING: DO NOT change the names of resources that belong to 4D or to any System files. If
you do so, you may provoke undesired system errors.

Note: Resource names can be up to 255 characters in length. They are not case sensitive, but
are diacritical sensitive.

Example
See example for the command Get resource name.

See Also
SET RESOURCE PROPERTIES.

System Variables or Sets

The OK variable is set to 0 if the resource does not exist, otherwise it is set to 1.

4D Language Reference 1457

SET RESOURCE PROPERTIES Resources

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET RESOURCE PROPERTIES (resType; resID; resAttr{; resFile})

Parameter Type Description

resType String → 4-character resource type
resID Number → Resource ID number
resAttr Number → New attributes for the resource
resFile DocRef → Resource file reference number, or
current resource file, if omitted

Description
The SET RESOURCE PROPERTIES command changes the attributes of the resource whose type is
passed in resType and whose ID number is passed in resID.
If you pass a valid resource file reference number in the parameter resFile, the resource is
searched for within that file only. If you do not pass the parameter resFile, the resource is
searched for within the current open resource files.
If the resource does not exist, SET RESOURCE PROPERTIES does nothing and sets the OK variable
to 0 (zero).
The numeric value you pass in resAttr must be seen as a bit field value whose bits have special
meaning. The following predefined constants are provided by 4D:

Constant Type Value

System heap resource mask Long Integer 64
System heap resource bit Long Integer 6
Purgeable resource mask Long Integer 32
Purgeable resource bit Long Integer 5
Locked resource mask Long Integer 16
Locked resource bit Long Integer 4
Protected resource mask Long Integer 8
Protected resource bit Long Integer 3
Preloaded resource mask Long Integer 4
Preloaded resource bit Long Integer 2
Changed resource mask Long Integer 2
Changed resource bit Long Integer 1

1458 4D Language Reference

Using these constants, you can build any resource attributes value. See examples below.

Resource Attributes and Their Effects

• System heap
If this attribute is set, the resource will be loaded into the system memory rather than into 4D
memory. You should not use this attribute, unless you really know what you are doing.
• Purgeable
If this attribute is set, after the resource has been loaded, you can purge it from memory if
space is required for allocation of other data. Since you load resources into 4D BLOBs, it is a
good idea to have all your own resources purgeable in order to reduce memory usage.
However, if you frequently access this resource during a working session, you might want to
make it non-purgeable in order to reduce disk access due to frequent reloading of a purged
resource.
• Locked
If this attribute is set, you will not be able to relocate the resource (unmovable) after it is
loaded into memory. A locked resource cannot be purged even if it is purgeable. Locking a
resource has the undesirable effect of fragmenting the memory space. DO NOT use this
attribute, unless you really know what you are doing.
• Protected
If this attribute is set, you can no longer change the name, ID number or the contents of a the
resource. You can no longer delete this resource. However, you can call SET RESOURCE
PROPERTIES to clear this attribute; then you can again modify or delete the resource. Most of
the time, you will not use this attribute. Note: This attribute has no effect on Windows.
• Preloaded
If this attribute is set, the resource is automatically loaded into memory if the resource file
where it is located is open. This attribute is useful for optimizing resource loading when a
resource file is opened. Most of the time, you will not use this attribute.
• Changed
If this attribute is set, the resource is marked as “must be saved on disk” when the resource file
where it is located is closed. Since the 4D command SET RESOURCE handles the writing and
rewriting of resources internally, you should not use this attribute, unless you really know
what you are doing.

You will usually use the attribute purgeable and, more rarely, Preloaded and Protected.

WARNING: DO NOT change the attributes of resources that belong to 4D or to any System
files. If you do so, you may provoke undesired system errors.

4D Language Reference 1459

Examples
1. See example for the command Get resource name.

2. The following example makes the resource 'STR#' ID=17000 purgeable, but leaves the other
attributes unchanged:

$vlResAttr:=Get resource properties ('STR#';17000;$vhResFile)

SET RESOURCE PROPERTIES('STR#';17000;$vlResAttr ?+ Purgeable resource bit;
$vhMyResFile)

3. The following example makes the resource 'STR#' ID=17000 preloaded and non purgeable:

SET RESOURCE PROPERTIES('STR#';17000;Preloaded resource mask;$vhResFile)

4. The following example makes the resource 'STR#' ID=17000 preloaded but purgeable:

SET RESOURCE PROPERTIES('STR#';17000;Preloaded resource mask+

Purgeable resource mask;$vhResFile)

See Also
SET RESOURCE NAME.

System Variables or Sets

The OK variable is set to 0 if the resource does not exist; otherwise, it is set to 1.

1460 4D Language Reference

SET STRING RESOURCE Resources

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET STRING RESOURCE (resID; resData{; resFile})

Parameter Type Description

resID Number → Resource ID number
resData String → New contents for the STR resource
resFile DocRef → Resource file reference number, or
current resource file, if omitted

Description
The SET STRING RESOURCE command creates or rewrites the string (“STR ”) resource whose ID
is passed in resID with the string passed in resData.

If the resource cannot be added, the OK variable is set to 0 (zero).

If you pass a valid resource file reference number in resFile, the resource is added to that file. If
you do not pass resFile, the resource is added to the file at the top the resource files chain (the
last resource file opened).

Note: A string resource can contain up to 255 characters.

See Also
Get string resource, SET TEXT RESOURCE.

System Variables and Sets

If the resource has been written, OK is set to 1. Otherwise, it is set to 0 (zero).

4D Language Reference 1461

SET TEXT RESOURCE Resources

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET TEXT RESOURCE (resID; resData{; resFile})

Parameter Type Description

resID Number → Resource ID number
resData String → New contents for the TEXT resource
resFile DocRef → Resource file reference number, or
current resource file, if omitted

Description
The SET TEXT RESOURCE command creates or rewrites the text (“TEXT”) resource whose ID is
passed in resID with the text or string passed in resData.

If the resource cannot be added, the OK variable is set to 0 (zero).

If you pass a valid resource file reference number in resFile, the resource is added to that file. If
you do not pass resFile, the resource is added to the file at the top the resource files chain (the
last resource file opened).

Note: A text resource can contain up to 32,000 characters.

See Also
Get text resource, SET STRING RESOURCE.

System Variables and Sets

If the resource has been written, OK is set to 1. Otherwise, it is set to 0 (zero).

1462 4D Language Reference

STRING LIST TO ARRAY Resources

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STRING LIST TO ARRAY (resID; strings{; resFile})

Parameter Type Description

resID Number → Resource ID number or
'id' attribute of the 'group' element (XLIFF)
strings String array ← Strings from the STR# resource or
Strings from the 'group' element (XLIFF)
resFile DocRef → Resource file reference number
If omitted: all the XLIFF files or
open resources files

Description
The STRING LIST TO ARRAY command populates the array strings with:
• Either the strings stored in the string list ("STR#") resource whose ID is passed in resID.
• Or a string stored in an open XLIFF file whose 'id' attribute of the 'group' element is passed in
resID (see "Compatibility with XLIFF architecture" below).

If the resource is not found, the array strings is left unchanged and the OK variable is set to 0
(zero).

If you pass a valid resource file reference number in resFile, the resource is searched for in that
file only. If you do not pass resFile, the first occurrence of the resource found in the resource
files chain is returned.

Before calling STRING LIST TO ARRAY, you can predeclare the array strings as a String or Text
array. If you do not predeclare the array, the command creates strings as a Text array.

Note: Each string of a string list resource can contain up to 255 characters.

Tip: Limit your use of string list resources to those up to 32K in total size, and a maximum of a
few hundred strings per resource.

4D Language Reference 1463

Compatibility with XLIFF architecture
The STRING LIST TO ARRAY command is compatible with the XLIFF architecture of 4D v11: the
command first looks for values corresponding to resID and strID in all the open XLIFF files
(when the resFile parameter is omitted) and fills the strings array with the corresponding
values. In this case, resID specifies the id attribute of the group element and the strings array
contains all the strings of the element. If the value is not found, the command continues
searching in the open resources files.
For more information about XLIFF architecture in 4D, refer to the Design Reference manual.

Example
See example for the command ARRAY TO STRING LIST.

See Also
ARRAY TO STRING LIST, Get indexed string, Get string resource, Get text resource.

System Variables and Sets

If the resource is found, OK is set to 1. Otherwise, it is set to 0 (zero).

1464 4D Language Reference

44
______________________
Secured Protocol

4D Language Reference 1465

1466 4D Language Reference
GENERATE CERTIFICATE REQUEST Secured Protocol

version 6.7
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GENERATE CERTIFICATE REQUEST (privKey; certifRequest; codeArray; nameArray)

Parameter Type Description

privKey BLOB → BLOB containing the private key
certifRequest BLOB ← BLOB receiving the certificate request
codeArray Longint Array → Information code list
nameArray String Array → Name list

Description
The GENERATE CERTIFICATE REQUEST command generates a certificate request at the PKCS
format which can be directly used by certificate authorities such as Verisign(R) . The certificate
plays an important part in the SSL secured protocol. It is sent to each browser connecting in
SSL mode. It contains the “ID card” of the Web site (made from the information entered in
the command), as well as its public key allowing the browsers to decrypt the received
information. Furthermore, the certificate contains various information added by the certificate
authority which guarantees its integrity.

Note: For more information on the SSL protocol use with 4D Web server, refer to the section
Using SSL Protocol.

The certificate request uses keypairs generated with the command GENERATE ENCRYPTION
KEYPAIR and contains various information. The certificate authority will generate its certificate
combining this request with other parameters.

Pass in privKey a BLOB containing the private key generated with the command GENERATE
ENCRYPTION KEYPAIR.

Pass in certifRequest an empty BLOB. Once the command has been executed, it contains the
certificate request at the PKCS format. You can store this request in a text file, for example
using the BLOB TO DOCUMENT command, to submit it to the certificate authority.

Warning: The private key is used to generate the request but should NOT be sent to the
certificate authority.

The arrays codeArray (long integer) and nameArray (string) should be filled respectively with
the code numbers and the information content required by the certificate authority.

4D Language Reference 1467

The required codes and names may change according to the certificate authority and the
certificate use. However, within a normal use of the certificate (Web server connections via
SSL), the arrays should contain the following items:

Information to provide codeArray nameArray (Examples)

CommonName 13 www.4D.com
CountryName (two letters) 14 US
LocalityName 15 San Jose
StateOrProvinceName 16 California
OrganizationName 17 4D, Inc.
OrganizationUnit 18 Web Administrator

The code and information content entering order does not matter, however the two arrays
must be synchronized: if the third item of the codeArray contains the value 15 (locality name),
the nameArray third item should contain this information, in our example San Jose.

Example
A “Certificate request” form contains the six fields necessary for a standard certificate request.
The Generate button creates a document on disk containing the certificate request. The
“Privatekey.txt” document containing the private key (generated with the GENERATE
ENCRYPTION KEYPAIR command) should be on the disk:

1468 4D Language Reference

Here is the Generate button method:

` bGenerate Object Method

C_BLOB($vbprivateKey;$vbcertifRequest)
C_LONGINT($tableNum)
ARRAY LONGINT($tLCodes;6)
ARRAY STRING(80;$tSInfos;6)

$tableNum:=Table(Current form table)

For ($i;1;6)
$tSInfos{$i}:= Field($tableNum;$i)->
$tLCodes{$i}:=$i+12
End for
If (Find in array($tSInfos;"") # -1)
ALERT ("All fields should be filled.")
Else
ALERT ("Select your private key.")
$vhDocRef:=Open document("")
If(OK=1)
CLOSE DOCUMENT($vhDocRef)
DOCUMENT TO BLOB(Document;$vbprivateKey)
GENERATE CERTIFICATE REQUEST($vbPrivateKey;$vbcertifRequest;$tLCodes;
$tSInfos)
BLOB TO DOCUMENT ("Request.txt";$vbcertifRequest)
Else
ALERT ("Invalid private key.")
End if
End if

See Also
GENERATE ENCRYPTION KEYPAIR, Using SSL Protocol.

4D Language Reference 1469

GENERATE ENCRYPTION KEYPAIR Secured Protocol

version 6.7
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GENERATE ENCRYPTION KEYPAIR (privKey; pubKey{; length})

Parameter Type Description

privKey BLOB ← BLOB to contain the private key
pubKey BLOB ← BLOB to contain the public key
length Longint → Key length (bits) [386...1024]
Default value = 512

Description
The GENERATE ENCRYPTION KEYPAIR command generates a new pair of RSA keys. The security
system offered in 4D is based on keys designed to encrypt/decrypt information. They can be
used within the SSL protocol, with 4D Web server (encryption and secured communications)
and in all databases (for data encryption).

Once the command has been executed, the BLOBs passed in privKey and pubKey parameters
contain a new pair of encryption keys.

The optional parameter length can be used to set the key size (in bits). The larger the key, the
more difficult it is to break the encryption code.
However, large keys require longer execution or reply time, especially within a SSL connection.
By default (if the length parameter is omitted), the generated key size is set to 512 bits, which
is a good compromise for the security/efficiency ratio. To increase the security factor, you can
change keys more often, for example every six months.You can generate 1024 bits keys to
increase the encryption security but the Web application connections will be slowed down.

Note: If you generate keys in order to establish a SSL certificate request, pay attention to the
fact that only 512 bits and 1024 bits key length are admitted.

This command will generate keys at the PKCS format, which means that their content can be
copied/pasted in an email without any change. Once the pair of keys has been generated, a
text document can be produced (using the BLOB TO DOCUMENT command for example) and
the keys can be stored in a safe place.

Warning: The private key should always be kept secret.

1470 4D Language Reference

About RSA, private key and public key
The RSA cipher used by GENERATE ENCRYPTION KEYPAIR is based on a double key encryption
system: a private key and a public key. As indicated by its name, the public key can be given to
a third person and used to decrypt information. The public key is matched with a unique
private key, used to encrypt the information. Thus, the private key is used for encryption; the
public key for decryption (or vice versa). The information encrypted with one key can only be
decrypted with the other one.
The SSL protocol encryption functionalities are based on this principle, the public key being
included in the certificate sent to the browsers (for more information, see the section Using SSL
Protocol).

This encryption mode is also used by the first syntax of the ENCRYPT BLOB and DECRYPT BLOB
commands. The public key should be confidentially published.
It is possible to mix the public and private keys from two persons to encrypt information so
that the recipient is the only person to be able to decrypt them and the sender is the only
person to have encrypted them. This principle is given by the two commands ENCRYPT BLOB
and DECRYPT BLOB second syntax.

Example
See example for command ENCRYPT BLOB.

See Also
DECRYPT BLOB, ENCRYPT BLOB, GENERATE CERTIFICATE REQUEST.

4D Language Reference 1471

1472 4D Language Reference
45
______________________
Selection

4D Language Reference 1473

1474 4D Language Reference
ALL RECORDS Selection

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

ALL RECORDS {(aTable)}

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table for which to select all records, or
Default table, if omitted

Description
ALL RECORDS selects all the records of aTable for the current process. ALL RECORDS makes the
first record the current record and loads the record from disk. ALL RECORDS returns the records
to the default record order, which is the order in which the records are stored on disk.

Example
The following example displays all the records from the [People] table:

ALL RECORDS ([People]) ` Select all the records in the table

DISPLAY SELECTION ([People]) ` Display records in output form

See Also
DISPLAY SELECTION, MODIFY SELECTION, ORDER BY, QUERY, Records in selection, Records in
table.

4D Language Reference 1475

APPLY TO SELECTION Selection

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

APPLY TO SELECTION (aTable; statement)

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table for which to apply statement
statement Statement → One line of code or a method

Description
APPLY TO SELECTION applies statement to each record in the current selection of aTable. The
statement can be a statement or a method. If statement modifies a record of aTable, the
modified record is saved. If statement does not modify a record, the record is not saved. If the
current selection is empty, APPLY TO SELECTION has no effect. If the relation is automatic, the
statement can contain a field from a related table.

APPLY TO SELECTION can be used to gather information from the selection of records (for
example, a total), or to modify a selection (for example, changing the first letter of a field to
uppercase). If this command is used within a transaction, all changes can be undone if the
transaction is canceled.

4D Server: The server does not execute any of the commands that may be passed in statement.
Every record in the selection will be sent back to the local workstation to be modified.

The progress thermometer is displayed while APPLY TO SELECTION is executing. To hide it, use
MESSAGES OFF prior to the call to APPLY TO SELECTION. If the progress thermometer is
displayed, the user can cancel the operation.

Examples
1. The following example changes all the names in the table [Employees] to uppercase:

APPLY TO SELECTION([Employees];[Employees]Last Name:=Uppercase([Employees]

Last Name))

1476 4D Language Reference

2. If a record is locked during execution of APPLY TO SELECTION and that record is modified,
the record will not be saved. Any locked records that are encountered are put in a set called
LockedSet. After APPLY TO SELECTION has executed, test LockedSet to see if any records were
locked. The following loop will execute until all records have been modified:

Repeat
APPLY TO SELECTION([Employees];[Employees]Last Name:=Uppercase([Employees]
Last Name))
USE SET ("LockedSet") ` Select only locked records
Until (Records in set ("LockedSet") = 0) ` Done when there are no locked records

3. This example uses a method:

ALL RECORDS ([Employees])

APPLY TO SELECTION([Employees];M_Cap)

System Variables or Sets

If the user clicks the Stop button in the progress thermometer, the OK system variable is set to
0. Otherwise, the OK system variable is set to 1.

See Also
EDIT FORMULA, Sets.

4D Language Reference 1477

Before selection Selection

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Before selection {(table)} → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

table Table → Table for which to test if record pointer
is before the first selected record, or
Default table, if omitted

Function result Boolean ← Yes (TRUE) or No (FALSE)

Description
Before selection returns TRUE when the current record pointer is before the first record of the
current selection of table. Before selection is commonly used to check whether or not PREVIOUS
RECORD has moved the current record pointer before the first record. If the current selection is
empty, Before selection returns TRUE.

To move the current record pointer back into the selection, use LAST RECORD, FIRST RECORD,
or GOTO SELECTED RECORD. NEXT RECORD does not move the pointer back into the selection.

Before selection also returns TRUE in the first header when a report is being printed with PRINT
SELECTION or from the Print menu. You can use the following code to test for the first header
and print a special header for the first page:

` Method of a form being used as output form for a summary report

$vpFormTable:=Current form table
Case of
` ...
: (Form event=On Header)
` A header area is about to be printed
Case of
: (Before selection($vpFormTable->))
` Code for the first break header goes here
` ...
End case
End case

1478 4D Language Reference

Example
This form method is used during the printing of a report. It sets a variable, vTitle, to print in
the Header area on the first page:

` [Finances];"Summary" Form Method

Case of
` ...
: (Form event=On Header)
Case of
: (Before selection([Finances))
vTitle := "Corporate Report 1997" ` Set the title for the first page
Else
vTitle := "" ` Clear the title for all other pages
End case
End case

See Also
End selection, FIRST RECORD, Form event, PREVIOUS RECORD, PRINT SELECTION.

4D Language Reference 1479

DELETE SELECTION Selection

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DELETE SELECTION {(aTable)}

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table for which to delete the current selection, or
Default table, if omitted

Description
DELETE SELECTION deletes the current selection of records from aTable. If the current selection
is empty, DELETE SELECTION has no effect. After the records are deleted, the current selection is
empty. Records that are deleted during a transaction are locked to other users and other
processes until the transaction is validated or canceled.
Warning: Deleting a selection of records is a permanent operation, and cannot be undone.

The Records definitively deleted option in the table Inspector allows you to increase the speed
of deletions when DELETE SELECTION is used.

Examples
1. The following example displays all the records from the [People] table and allows the user to
select which ones to delete. The example has two sections. The first is a method to display the
records. The second is an object method for a Delete button. Here is the first method:
ALL RECORDS ([People]) ` Select all records
OUTPUT FORM ([People]; "Listing") ` Set the form to list the records
DISPLAY SELECTION ([People]) ` Display all records
The following is the object method for the Delete button, which appears in the Footer area of
the output form. The object method uses the records the user selected (the UserSet) to delete
the selection. Note that if the user did not select any records, DELETE SELECTION has no effect.
` Confirm that the user really wants to delete the records
CONFIRM("You selected "+String(Records in set ("UserSet"))+" people to delete."+Char(13)
+"Click OK to Delete them.")
If (OK=1)
USE SET ("UserSet") ` Use the records chosen by the user
DELETE SELECTION([People]) ` Delete the selection of records
End if
ALL RECORDS ([People]) ` Select all records

1480 4D Language Reference

2. If a locked record is encountered during the execution of DELETE SELECTION, that record is
not deleted. Any locked records are put into a set called LockedSet. After DELETE SELECTION has
executed, you can test the LockedSet to see if any records were locked. The following loop will
execute until all the records have been deleted:

Repeat ` Repeat for any locked records

DELETE SELECTION([ThisTable])
If (Records in set("LockedSet")#0) ` If there are locked records
USE SET ("LockedSet") ` Select only the locked records
End if
Until (Records in set("LockedSet")=0) ` Until there are no more locked records

See Also
DISPLAY SELECTION, MODIFY SELECTION, Record Locking, Sets, TRUNCATE TABLE.

4D Language Reference 1481

DISPLAY SELECTION Selection

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DISPLAY SELECTION ({aTable}{; selectMode}{; enterList}{; *}{; *})

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table to display, or
Default table, if omitted
selectMode Longint → Selection mode
enterList Boolean → Authorize Enter in list option
* → Use output form for one record selection
and hide scroll bars in the input form
* → Show scroll bars in the input form
(overrides second option of first optional *)

Description
DISPLAY SELECTION displays the selection of aTable, using the output form. The records are
displayed in a scrollable list similar to that of the Design environment. If the user double-
clicks a record, by default the record is displayed in the current input form. The list is
displayed in the frontmost window.

To display a selection and also modify a record in the current input form after you have
double-clicked on it (as you do in the Design environment window), use MODIFY SELECTION
instead of DISPLAY SELECTION.
All of the following information applies to both commands, except for the information on
modifying records.

After DISPLAY SELECTION is executed, there may not be a current record. Use a command such
as FIRST RECORD or LAST RECORD to select one.

The selectMode parameter is used to set the possibilities for selecting records in the list using
the mouse. You can pass one of the following constants of the “Form Parameters” theme in
this parameter:
• if you pass No Selection (0), it will not be possible to select a record in the list.
• if you pass Single Selection (1), only one record can be selected at a time.

1482 4D Language Reference

• if you pass Multiple Selection (2), the user can select several records at once. To select adjacent
records, click on the first record to be selected, then press the Shift key before clicking on the
last record you want to include in the selection. To select non-adjacent records, click on each
record separately while holding down the Ctrl (under Windows) or Command (under Mac OS)
key.
If you do not pass the selectMode parameter, the “Multiple Selection” mode is used by default.

The enterList parameter lets you authorize the “Enter in List” mode for the displayed list. This
lets the user select and modify the record values directly in the output form. Pass True to
enable this mode or False to disable it. By default, if you do not pass the enterList parameter,
the “Enter in List” mode is disabled.
Keep in mind that with the DISPLAY SELECTION command, this parameter only allows the
selection of the values in the list and not their modification. In fact, the DISPLAY SELECTION
command loads the records of the current selection in Read only in the current process. Only
the MODIFY SELECTION command allows the actual entry of values.

Note: The SET ENTERABLE command can be used to enable or disable the Enter in list mode on
the fly.

Some rules regarding the optional * parameter:

- If the selection contains only one record and the first optional * is not used, the record
appears in the input form instead of the output form.
- If the first optional * is specified, a one-record selection is displayed, using the output form.
- If the first optional * is specified and the user displays the record in the input form by double-
clicking on it, the scroll bars will be hidden in the input form. To reverse this effect, pass the
second optional *.

Custom buttons may be put in the Footer or Header area of the output form in order to
terminate the execution of the DISPLAY SELECTION command. You can use automatic Accept
or Cancel buttons to exit, or use an object method that calls ACCEPT or CANCEL. When an
output form called by the DISPLAY SELECTION command has no buttons, only the Escape
(Windows) or Esc (Mac OS) key can be used to exit the list.

During and after execution of DISPLAY SELECTION, the records that the user highlighted
(selected) are kept in a set named UserSet. The UserSet is available within the selection display
for object methods when a button is clicked or a menu item is chosen. It is also available to
the project method that called DISPLAY SELECTION after the command was completed.

4D Language Reference 1483

Examples
1. The following example selects all the records in the [People] table. It then uses DISPLAY
SELECTION to display the records, and allows the user to select the records to print. Finally, it
selects the records with USE SET, and prints them with PRINT SELECTION:

ALL RECORDS([People]) ` Select all records

DISPLAY SELECTION ([People]; *) ` Display the records
USE SET ("UserSet") ` Use only records picked by user
PRINT SELECTION ([People]) ` Print the records that the user picked
2. See example #6 for the Form event command. This example shows all the tests you may
need to check in order to fully monitor the events that occur during a DISPLAY SELECTION.
3. To reproduce the functionality provided by, for example, the Records menu of the Design
environment when you use DISPLAY SELECTION or MODIFY SELECTION in the Application
environment, proceed as follows:
a. In the Design environment, create a menu bar with the menu commands you want, for
example, Show All, Query and Order By.
b. Associate this menu bar (using the “Associated menu bar” menu in the form properties
dialog box) with the output form used with DISPLAY SELECTION or MODIFY SELECTION.
c. Associate the following project methods to your menu commands:

` M_SHOW_ALL (attached to menu item Show All)

$vpCurTable:=Current form table
ALL RECORDS($vpCurTable->)
` M_QUERY (attached to menu item Query)
$vpCurTable:=Current form table
QUERY($vpCurTable->)
` M_ORDER_BY (attached to menu item Order By)
$vpCurTable:=Current form table
ORDER BY($vpCurTable->)

You can also use other commands, such as PRINT SELECTION, QR REPORT, and so on, to
provide all the “standard” menu options you may want each time you display or modify a
selection in the Application environment. Thanks to the Current form table command, these
methods are generic, and the menu bar they support can be attached to any output form of
any table.

See Also
Form event, MODIFY SELECTION, Sets.

1484 4D Language Reference

Displayed line number Selection

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Displayed line number → Longint

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Longint ← Number of row being displayed

Description
The Displayed line number command only works with the On Display Detail form event. It
returns the number of the row being processed while a list of records or list box rows is
displayed on screen. If Displayed line number is called other than when displaying a list or a
list box, it returns 0.

In the case of a list of records, when the displayed row is not empty (when it is linked to a
record), the value returned by Displayed line number is identical to the value returned by
Selected record number.

Like Selected record number, Displayed line number starts at 1. This command is useful if you
want to process each row of a list form or list box displayed on screen, including empty
rows.

Example
This example lets you apply an alternating color to a list form displayed on screen, even for
rows without records:

`List form method

If (Form event=On Display Detail)
If (Displayed line number % 2 = 0)
`Black on white for even row text
SET RGB COLORS([Table 1]Field1; -1; 0x00FFFFFF)
Else
`Black on light blue for odd row text
SET RGB COLORS([Table 1]Field1; -1; 0x00E0E0FF)
End if
End if

4D Language Reference 1485

See Also
Form event, Selected record number.

1486 4D Language Reference

End selection Selection

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

End selection {(aTable)} → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table for which to test if record pointer
is beyond the last selected record, or
Default table, if omitted

Function result Boolean ← Yes (TRUE) or No (FALSE)

Description
End selection returns TRUE when the current record pointer is beyond the last record of the
current selection of aTable. End selection is commonly used to check whether or not NEXT
RECORD has moved the current record pointer past the last record. If the current selection is
empty, End selection returns TRUE.

To move the current record pointer back into the selection, use LAST RECORD, FIRST RECORD,
or GOTO SELECTED RECORD. PREVIOUS RECORD does not move the pointer back into the
selection.

End selection also returns TRUE in the last footer when a report is being printed with PRINT
SELECTION or from the Print menu. You can use the following code to test for the last footer
and print a special footer for the last page:

` Method of a form being used as output form for a summary report

$vpFormTable:=Current form table
Case of
` ...
: (Form event=On Printing Footer)
` A footer is about to be printed
If(End selection($vpFormTable->))
` Code for the last footer goes here
Else
` Code for a footer goes here
End if
End case

4D Language Reference 1487

Example
This form method is used during the printing of a report. It sets the variable vFooter to print in
the Footer area on the last page:

` [Finances];"Summary" Form Method

Case of
` ...
: (Form event=On Printing Footer)
If(End selection([Finances]))
vFooter := "©2001 Acme Corp." ` Set the footer for the last page
Else
vFooter := "" ` Clear the footer for all other pages
End if
End case

See Also
Before selection, Form event, LAST RECORD, NEXT RECORD, PRINT SELECTION.

1488 4D Language Reference

FIRST RECORD Selection

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

FIRST RECORD {(aTable)}

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table for which to move to the first selected record,
or Default table, if omitted

Description
FIRST RECORD makes the first record of the current selection of aTable the current record, and
loads the record from disk. All query, selection, and sorting commands also set the current
record to the first record. If the current selection is empty or if the current record is already the
first record of the selection, FIRST RECORD has no effect.

This command is most often used after the USE SET command to begin looping through a
selection of records from the first record. However, you can also call it from a subroutine if
you are not sure whether or not the current record is actually the first.

Example
The following example makes the first record of the [Customers] table the first record:

FIRST RECORD ([Customers])

See Also
Before selection, End selection, LAST RECORD, NEXT RECORD, PREVIOUS RECORD.

4D Language Reference 1489

GET HIGHLIGHTED RECORDS Selection

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET HIGHLIGHTED RECORDS ({aTable; }setName)

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table where the highlighted records will be read
If omitted, table of the current form
setName String → Set where the highlighted records will be stored

Description
The GET HIGHLIGHTED RECORDS command stores in the set designated by the setName
parameter the highlighted records (i.e., the records highlighted by the user in the list form)
in the aTable passed as parameter. If the aTable parameter is omitted, the table of the
current form or subform is used.

In Design mode or when executing the DISPLAY SELECTION / MODIFY SELECTION

commands, this command can be replaced by calling the UserSet system set which is
automatically maintained by 4D. However, since this command allows you to pick the
table that will receive highlighted records, the GET HIGHLIGHTED RECORDS command can
also manage record selections in subforms as well. In this case, subform selections can also
come from different tables. For more information about the UserSet set, refer to the Sets
section.

The GET HIGHLIGHTED RECORDS command can also be called in a non-form context;
however, the returned set is empty.
The set designated by setName can be local/client, process or interprocess.

Note: In included subforms, the GET HIGHLIGHTED RECORDS command returns an empty
set if the subform does not have the Multiple Selection Mode property. In this case, to find
out the selected row, you must use the Selected record number command.

1490 4D Language Reference

Example
This method indicates how many records are selected in the subform displaying the records
of the [CDs] table:

GET HIGHLIGHTED RECORDS ([CDs];"$highlight")

ALERT(String(Records in set("$highlight"))"+" selected records.")
CLEAR SET("$highlight")

See Also
HIGHLIGHT RECORDS.

System Variables or Sets

If the command was executed properly, the system variable OK is set to 1. Otherwise, it is
set to 0.

4D Language Reference 1491

GOTO SELECTED RECORD Selection

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GOTO SELECTED RECORD ({table; }record)

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table in which to go to the selected record, or
Default table, if omitted
record Number → Position of record in the selection

Description
GOTO SELECTED RECORD moves to the specified record in the current selection of aTable and
makes that record the current record. The current selection does not change. The record
parameter is not the same as the number returned by Record number; it represents the record’s
position in the current selection. The record’s position depends on how the selection is made
and whether or not the selection is sorted.

If there are no records in the current selection, or the number is not in the selection, then
GOTO SELECTED RECORD does nothing.

If you pass 0 in position, there will no longer be a current record in aTable. When the “single”
selection mode is chosen, this allows you to deselect all the records in a list, in particular in
the case of included subforms.

Example
The following example loads data from the field [People]Last Name into the atNames array. An
array of long integers, called alRecNum, is filled with numbers that will represent the selected
record numbers. Both arrays are then sorted:

` Make any selection for the [People] table here

` ...
` Get the names
SELECTION TO ARRAY ([People]Last Name;atNames)
` Create an array for the selected record numbers
$vlNbRecords:=Size of array (atNames)
ARRAY LONGINT (alRecNum;$vlNbRecords)

1492 4D Language Reference

 For ($vlRecord; 1; $vlNbRecords)
alRecNum{$vlRecord}:=$vlRecord
End for
` Sort the arrays in alphabetical order
SORT ARRAY (atNames; alRecNum; >)

If the atNames array is displayed in a scrollable area, the user can click one of the items. Since
the sorting of the two arrays is synchronized, any element in alRecNum provides the selected
record number for the record whose name is stored in the corresponding element in atNames.
The following object method for atNames selects the correct record in the [People] selection,
according to the name chosen in the scrollable area:

Case of
: (Form event=On Clicked)
If (atNames#0)
GOTO SELECTED RECORD (alRecNum{atNames})
End if
End case

See Also
Selected record number.

4D Language Reference 1493

HIGHLIGHT RECORDS Selection

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

HIGHLIGHT RECORDS ({aTable}{; setName{; *}})

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table where records will be highlighted
If omitted, table of current form
setName String → Set of records to highlight or
Userset if omitted
* * → Disable the automatic scroll of the list

Description
The HIGHLIGHT RECORDS command allows you to highlight records in a list form. This
operation is identical to manually selecting records in list mode by using the mouse or the
Shift+Click or Ctrl+Click (Windows) or Command+Click (Mac OS) key combinations.
The current selection is not modified.

Note: The set of “selected” records is updated after redrawing the records; that is, after
executing the entire calling method — and not just immediately after executing HIGHLIGHT
RECORDS.

The aTable parameter lets you designate the table where records will be “highlighted.” This
parameter can be used, in particular, to highlight the records of included subforms — which
do not belong to the current table (see below).

• If you pass a valid set name to setName, the command will be applied to the records in that
set for the table defined.
• If you omit the setName parameter, the command will only highlight the records in the
current UserSet set. This set is only managed in Design mode and when calling the MODIFY
SELECTION / DISPLAY SELECTION commands. If you want to highlight the records of a
subform, you must pass a table name and set name. For more information about the UserSet
set, refer to the Sets section.

The * parameter, when passed, causes the disabling of the automatic scroll function of the list
if the highlighted records are not visible. This mechanism authorizes customized scroll
management using the new SCROLL LINES command.

1494 4D Language Reference

Note: Regarding included subforms, the HIGHLIGHT RECORDS command does nothing if the
Selection Mode property Multiple is not selected for the subform. In this case, to highlight a
line, you should use the GOTO SELECTED RECORD command.

Example
In an output form displayed by the MODIFY SELECTION command, you want the user to be
able to perform searches without the current selection being modified. To do this, place a
Search button in the form and associate it with the following method:

SET QUERY DESTINATION(Into Set;"UserSet")

QUERY
SET QUERY DESTINATION(Into Current Selection)
HIGHLIGHT RECORDS

When the user clicks the button, the standard query dialog box appears. Once the search has
been validated, the records found will be highlighted without the current selection being
modified.

See Also
GET HIGHLIGHTED RECORDS, SCROLL LINES.

4D Language Reference 1495

LAST RECORD Selection

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

LAST RECORD {(aTable)}

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table for which to move to the last selected record,
or Default table, if omitted

Description
LAST RECORD makes the last record of the current selection of aTable the current record and
loads the record from disk. If the current selection is empty, LAST RECORD has no effect.

Example
The following example makes the last record of the [People] table the current record:

LAST RECORD ([People])

See Also
Before selection, End selection, FIRST RECORD, NEXT RECORD, PREVIOUS RECORD.

1496 4D Language Reference

MODIFY SELECTION Selection

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

MODIFY SELECTION ({aTable}{; selectMode}{; enterList}{; *}{; *})

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table to display and modify, or
Default table, if omitted
selectMode Longint → Selection mode
enterList Boolean → Authorize Enter in list option
* → Use output form for one record selection
and hide scroll bars in the input form
* → Show scroll bars in the input form
(overrides second option of first optional *)

Description
MODIFY SELECTION does almost the same thing as DISPLAY SELECTION. Refer to the description
of DISPLAY SELECTION for details. The differences between the two commands are:

1. DISPLAY SELECTION and MODIFY SELECTION enable you to display the current selected
records in list mode, or in the input form when you double-click on a record. Using MODIFY
SELECTION, you can also modify the fields of the record in the input form when you double-
click on it, if it is not already in use by another process or user, or in “Enter in List” mode (if it
is authorized).

2. DISPLAY SELECTION loads the records in Read-only mode in the current process, which
means that they are not locked for writing in the other processes. MODIFY SELECTION places
all the records of the selection in Read-Write mode, which means that they are automatically
locked for writing in other processes. MODIFY SELECTION frees the records when its execution
is completed.

See Also
DISPLAY SELECTION, Form event, Sets.

4D Language Reference 1497

NEXT RECORD Selection

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

NEXT RECORD {(aTable)}

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table for which to move to the next selected record,
or Default table, if omitted

Description
NEXT RECORD moves the current record pointer to the next record in the current selection of
aTable for the current process. If the current selection is empty, or if Before selection or End
selection is TRUE, NEXT RECORD has no effect.

If NEXT RECORD moves the current record pointer past the end of the current selection, End
selection returns TRUE, and there is no current record. If End selection returns TRUE, use FIRST
RECORD, LAST RECORD, or GOTO SELECTED RECORD to move the current record pointer back
into the current selection.

Example
See the example for DISPLAY RECORD.

See Also
Before selection, End selection, FIRST RECORD, LAST RECORD, PREVIOUS RECORD.

1498 4D Language Reference

ONE RECORD SELECT Selection

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

ONE RECORD SELECT {(aTable)}

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table in which to reduce the
selection to the current record, or
Default table, if omitted

Description
ONE RECORD SELECT reduces the current selection of aTable to the current record. If no current
record exists or if the current record is not loaded into memory (special case), ONE RECORD
SELECT has no effect.

Historical Note: This command was useful to “return” a record that had been pushed and
popped from the record stack back to the selection while the selection for the table was
changed. In version 6, SET QUERY DESTINATION allows you to make a query without changing
the selection or the current record of a table; therefore, you no longer need to push and pop a
current record in order to query its table. Consequently, ONE RECORD SELECT is less useful,
unless you actually want to reduce the selection of a table to the current record.

4D Language Reference 1499

PREVIOUS RECORD Selection

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

PREVIOUS RECORD {(aTable)}

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table for which to move to the
previous selected record, or
Default table, if omitted

Description
PREVIOUS RECORD moves the current record pointer to the previous record in the current
selection of aTable for the current process. If the current selection is empty, or if Before
selection or End selection is TRUE, PREVIOUS RECORD has no effect.

If PREVIOUS RECORD moves the current record pointer before the current selection, Before
selection returns TRUE, and there is no current record. If Before selection returns TRUE, use
FIRST RECORD, LAST RECORD, or GOTO SELECTED RECORD to move the current record pointer
back into the current selection.

See Also
Before selection, End selection, FIRST RECORD, LAST RECORD, NEXT RECORD.

1500 4D Language Reference

Records in selection Selection

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Records in selection {(aTable)} → Number

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table for which to return number of selected records,
or Default table, if omitted

Function result Number ← Records in selection of table

Description
Records in selection returns the number of records in the current selection of aTable. In
contrast, Records in table returns the total number of records in the table.

Example
The following example shows a loop technique commonly used to move through all the
records in a selection. The same action can also be accomplished with the APPLY TO
SELECTION command:

FIRST RECORD ([People]) ` Start at first record in the selection

For ($vlRecord; 1; Records in selection ([People])) ` Loop once for each record
Do Something ` Do something with the record
NEXT RECORD ([People]) ` Move to the next record
End for

See Also
Records in table.

4D Language Reference 1501

REDUCE SELECTION Selection

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

REDUCE SELECTION ({aTable; }number)

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table for which to reduce the selection, or
Default table, if omitted
number Number → Number of records to keep selected

Description
REDUCE SELECTION creates a new selection of records for aTable. The command returns the
first number of records from the current selection table. REDUCE SELECTION is applied to the
current selection of aTable in the current process. It changes the current selection of aTable for
the current process; the first record of the new selection is the current record.

Note: If the statement REDUCE SELECTION(0) is executed, there is no longer any selection nor
any current records in the aTable.

Examples
The following example first finds the correct statistics for a worldwide contest among the
dealers in over 20 countries. For each country, the 3 best dealers who have sold product worth
more than $50,000 and who are among the 100 best dealers in the world are awarded a prize.
With a few lines of code, this complex request can be executed by using indexed searches:

CREATE EMPTY SET([Dealers];"Winners") ` Create an empty set

SCAN INDEX([Dealers]Sales amount;100;<) ` Scan from the end of the index
CREATE SET([Dealers];"100 best Dealers") ` Put the selected records in a set

1502 4D Language Reference

 For ($Country;1;Records in table([Countries])) ` For each Country
` Search for the dealers in this country
` ...who sold for more than $50,000
QUERY([Dealers];[Dealers]Country=[Countries]Name;*)
QUERY(&;[Dealers];[Dealers]Sales amount>=50000)
CREATE SET([Dealers];"WinnerDealers") ` Put them in a set
` They should be in the group of 100 best dealers
INTERSECTION("WinnerDealers";"100 best Dealers";"WinnerDealers")
USE SET("WinnerDealers") ` Potential winners for the country
` Sort them by the results in descending order
ORDER BY([Dealers];[Dealers]Sales amount;<)
REDUCE SELECTION([Dealers];3) ` Take the 3 best Dealers
CREATE SET([Dealers];"WinnerDealers") ` The winners for the country
` Put them in the worldwide winners list
UNION("WinnerDealers";"TheWinners";"TheWinners")
End for
CLEAR SET("100 best Dealers") ` Don't need this set anymore
CLEAR SET("WinnerDealers") ` Don't need this set anymore
USE SET("The Winners") ` Here you have the Winners
CLEAR SET("The Winners") ` Don't need this set anymore
OUTPUT FORM([Dealers];"Prize letter") ` Select the letter
PRINT SELECTION([Dealers]) ` Print the letters

See Also
ORDER BY, QUERY, SCAN INDEX, Sets.

4D Language Reference 1503

SCAN INDEX Selection

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SCAN INDEX (aField; number{; > or <})

Parameter Type Description

aField Field → Indexed field on which to scan index
number Number → Number of records to return
> or < → > from beginning of index
< from end of index

Description
SCAN INDEX returns a selection of number records from the table containing the aField field. If
you pass <, SCAN INDEX returns the number of records from the end of the index (high
values). If you pass >, SCAN INDEX returns the number of records from the beginning of the
index (low values). This command is very efficient because it uses the index to perform the
operation.

Note: The selection obtained is not sorted.

SCAN INDEX only works on indexed fields. This command changes the current selection of the
table for the current process and loads the first record of the selection as the current record.

If you specify more records than exist in the table, SCAN INDEX will return all the records.
Example
The following example mails letters to 50 of the worst customers and then to 50 of the best
customers:

SCAN INDEX([Customers]TotalDue;50;<) ` Get the 50 worst customers

ORDER BY([Customers]Zipcode;>) ` Sort by Zip codes
OUTPUT FORM([Customers];"ThreateningMail")
PRINT SELECTION([Customers]) ` Print the letters
SCAN INDEX([Customers]TotalDue;50;>) ` Get the 50 best customers
ORDER BY([Customers]Zipcode;>) ` Sort by Zip codes
OUTPUT FORM([Customers];"Thanks Letter")
PRINT SELECTION([Customers]) ` Print the letters
See Also
ORDER BY, QUERY, REDUCE SELECTION.

1504 4D Language Reference

Selected record number Selection

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Selected record number {(aTable)} → Number

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table for which to return the selected record number
or Default table, if omitted

Function result Number ← Selected record number of current record

Description
Selected record number returns the position of the current record within the current selection
of aTable.

If the selection is not empty and if the current record is within the selection, Selected record
number returns a value between 1 and Records in selection. If the selection is empty, of if there
is no current record, it returns 0 (zero).

The selected record number is not the same as the number returned by Record number, which
returns the physical record number in the table. The selected record number depends on the
current selection and the current record.

Example
The following example saves the current selected record number in a variable:

CurSelRecNum:=Selected record number([People]) ` Get the selected record number

See Also
About Record Numbers, GOTO SELECTED RECORD, Records in selection.

4D Language Reference 1505

TRUNCATE TABLE Selection

version 11.3 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

TRUNCATE TABLE {(aTable)}

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table where all records will be deleted
or Default table if this parameter is omitted

Description
The TRUNCATE TABLE command quickly deletes all the records of aTable. After calling the
command, there is no longer any current selection or current record.

The effect of this command is similar to that of an ALL RECORDS / DELETE SELECTION
sequence; however, its functioning differs on the following points:
• No trigger is called
• The referential integrity of the data is not checked.
• No transaction must be underway in the process executing TRUNCATE TABLE. If this if the
case, the command does nothing and the OK system variable is set to 0
• If one or more records are locked by another process, the command fails: an error is
generated and the OK system variable is set to 0. The LockedSet system set is not created.
• If aTable is already empty, TRUNCATE TABLE does nothing and sets the OK variable to 1.
• If aTable is in read-only, TRUNCATE TABLE does nothing and sets the OK variable to 0.
• The operation is recorded in the log file if there is one.

The TRUNCATE TABLE command should therefore be used with caution but is very effective
in certain cases, for example, such as quickly deleting temporary data

Note: The concept and functioning of this command is similar to that of the SQL
TRUNCATE (TABLE) command.

See Also
DELETE SELECTION.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been executed correctly, the OK system variable is set to 1. Otherwise,
it is set to 0.

1506 4D Language Reference

46
______________________
Sets

4D Language Reference 1507

1508 4D Language Reference
Sets Sets

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Sets offer you a powerful, swift means for manipulating record selections. Besides the ability to
create sets, relate them to the current selection, and store, load, and clear sets, 4D offers three
standard set operations:
• Intersection
• Union
• Difference.

Sets and the Current Selection

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

A set is a compact representation of a selection of records. The idea of sets is closely bound to
the idea of the current selection. Sets are generally used for the following purposes:
• To save and later restore a selection when the order does not matter
• To access the selection a user made on screen (the UserSet)
• To perform a logical operation between selections.

The current selection is a list of references that points to each record that is currently selected.
The list exists in memory. Only currently selected records are in the list. A selection doesn’t
actually contain the records, but only a list of references to the records. Each reference to a
record takes 4 bytes in memory. When you work on a table, you always work with the records
in the current selection. When a selection is sorted, only the list of references is rearranged.
There is only one current selection for each table inside a process.

Like a current selection, a set represents a selection of records. A set does this by using a very
compact representation for each record. Each record is represented by one bit (one-eighth of a
byte). Operations using sets are very fast, because computers can perform operations on bits
very quickly. A set contains one bit for every record in the table, whether or not the record is
included in the set. In fact, each bit is equal to 1 or 0, depending on whether or not the record
is in the set.

Sets are very economical in terms of RAM space. The size of a set, in bytes, is always equal to
the total number of records in the table divided by 8. For example, if you create a set for a
table containing 10,000 records, the set takes up 1,250 bytes, which is about 1.2K in RAM.

There can be many sets for each table. In fact, sets can be saved to disk separately from the
database. To change a record belonging to a set, first you must use the set as the current
selection, then modify the record or records.

4D Language Reference 1509

A set is never in a sorted order—the records are simply indicated as belonging to the set or not.
On the other hand, a named selection is in sorted order, but it requires more memory in most
cases. For more information about named selections, see the Named Selections section.

A set “remembers” which record was the current record at the time the set was created. The
following table compares the concepts of the current selection and of sets:

Comparison Current Selection Sets

Number per table 1 0 to many
Sortable Yes No
Can be saved on disk No Yes
RAM per record(in bytes) Number of Total number of
selected records * 4 records/8
Combinable No Yes
Contains current record Yes Yes, as of the time the set
was created

When you create a set, it belongs to the table from which you created it. Set operations can be
performed only between sets belonging to the same table.

Sets are independent from the data. This means that after changes are made to a file, a set may
no longer be accurate. There are many operations that can cause a set to be inaccurate. For
example, if you create a set of all the people from New York City, and then change the data in
one of those records to “Boston” the set would not change, because the set is just a
representation of a selection of records. Deleting records and replacing them with new ones
also changes a set, as well as compacting the data. Sets can be guaranteed to be accurate only
as long as the data in the original selection has not been changed.

Process and Interprocess Sets

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

You can have the following three types of sets:

• Process sets: A process set can only be accessed by the process in which it has been created.
UserSet and LockedSet are process sets. Process sets are cleared as soon as the process method
ends. Process sets do not need any special prefix in the name.
• Interprocess sets: A set is an interprocess set if the name of the set is preceded by the
symbols (<>) — a “less than” sign followed by a “greater than” sign. Note: This syntax can be
used on both Windows and Macintosh. Also, on Macintosh only, you can use the diamond
(Option-Shift-V on a US keyboard).
An interprocess set is “visible” to all the processes of the database.

1510 4D Language Reference

In client/server mode, an interprocess set is “visible” to all the processes of every client if it has
been created in a client process or by all server processes if it has been created in a server
process (stored procedure).
The name of an interprocess set must be unique in the database.
• Local Sets/Client Sets: Local/client sets are intended for use in client/server mode. Version 6
introduces local/client sets. The name of a local/client set is preceded by the dollar sign ($).
Unlike other types of sets, a local/client set is stored on the client machine.

Note: For more information about the use of sets in client/server mode, please refer to the 4D
Server, sets and named selections section of the 4D Server Reference Manual.

Visibility of Sets
The following table indicates the principles concerning the visibility of sets depending on
their scope and where they were created:

Sets and Transactions

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

A set can be created inside a transaction. It is possible to create a set of the records created
inside a transaction and a set of records created or modified outside of a transaction. When
the transaction ends, the set created during the transaction should be cleared, because it may
not be an accurate representation of the records, especially if the transaction was canceled.

4D Language Reference 1511

Set Example
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The following example deletes duplicate records from a table which contains information
about people. A For...End for loop moves through all the records, comparing the current record
to the previous record. If the name, address, and zip code are the same, then the record is
added to a set. At the end of the loop, the set is made the current selection and the (old)
current selection is deleted:

CREATE EMPTY SET([People];"Duplicates")

` Create an empty set for duplicate records
ALL RECORDS([People])
` Select all records
` Sort the records by ZIP, address, and name so
` that the duplicates will be next to each other
ORDER BY ([People];[People]ZIP;>;[People]Address;>;[People]Name;>)
` Initialize variables that hold the fields from the previous record
$Name:=[People]Name
$Address:=[People]Address
$ZIP:=[People]ZIP
` Go to second record to compare with first
NEXT RECORD ([People])
For ($i; 2; Records in table ([People]))
` Loop through records starting at 2
` If the name, address, and ZIP are the same as the
` previous record then it is a duplicate record.
If (([People]Name=$Name) & ([People]Address=$Address) & ([People]ZIP=$ZIP))
` Add current record (the duplicate) to set
ADD TO SET ([People]; "Duplicates")
Else
` Save this record’s name, address, and ZIP for comparison with the next record
$Name:=[People]Name
$Address:=[People]Address
$ZIP:=[People]ZIP
End if
` Move to the next record
NEXT RECORD ([People])
End for

1512 4D Language Reference

 ` Use duplicate records that were found
USE SET ("Duplicates")
` Delete the duplicate records
DELETE SELECTION ([People])
` Remove the set from memory
CLEAR SET ("Duplicates")
As an alternative to immediately deleting records at the end of the method, you could display
them on screen or print them, so that a more detailed comparison can be made.

The UserSet System Set

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4D maintains a system set named UserSet, which automatically stores the most recent
selection of records highlighted on screen by the user. Thus, you can display a group of
records with MODIFY SELECTION or DISPLAY SELECTION, ask the user to select from among
them and turn the results of that manual selection into a selection or into a set that you name.
4D Server: Although its name does not begin with the character "$", the UserSet system set is a
client set. So, when using INTERSECTION, UNION and DIFFERENCE, make sure you compare
UserSet only to client sets. For more information, please refer to the descriptions of these
commands as well as to the 4D Server, sets and named selections section of the 4D Server
Reference Manual.

There is only one UserSet for a process. Each table does not have its own UserSet. UserSet
becomes “owned” by a table when a selection of records is displayed for the table.

4D manages the UserSet set for list forms displayed in Design mode or using the MODIFY
SELECTION or DISPLAY SELECTION commands. However, this mechanism is not active for
subforms.

The following method illustrates how you can display records, allow the user to select some of
them, and then use UserSet to display the selected records:

` Display all records and allow user to select any number of them.
` Then display this selection by using UserSet to change the current selection.
OUTPUT FORM ([People]; "Display") ` Set the output layout
ALL RECORDS ([People]) ` Select all people
ALERT ("Press Ctrl or Command and Click to select the people required.")
DISPLAY SELECTION ([People]) ` Display the people
USE SET ("UserSet") ` Use the people that were selected
ALERT ("You chose the following people.")
DISPLAY SELECTION ([People]) ` Display the selected people

4D Language Reference 1513

The LockedSet System Set
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The APPLY TO SELECTION, ARRAY TO SELECTION and DELETE SELECTION commands create a set
named LockedSet when used in a multi-processing environment.
Query commands also create a LockedSet system set when they find locked records in the
'query and lock' context (see the SET QUERY AND LOCK command).
LockedSet indicates which records were locked during the execution of the command.

See Also
Identifiers.

1514 4D Language Reference

ADD TO SET Sets

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

ADD TO SET ({aTable; }set)

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Current record's table, or
Default table, if omitted
set String → Name of the set to which to add the current record

Description
ADD TO SET adds the current record of aTable to set. The set must already exist; if it does not,
an error occurs. If a current record does not exist for aTable, ADD TO SET has no effect.

See Also
REMOVE FROM SET.

4D Language Reference 1515

CLEAR SET Sets

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

CLEAR SET (set)

Parameter Type Description

set String → Name of the set to clear from memory

Description
CLEAR SET clears set from memory and frees the memory used by set. CLEAR SET does not affect
tables, selections, or records. To save a set before clearing it, use the SAVE SET command. Since
sets use memory, it is good practice to clear them when they are no longer needed.

Example
See the example for USE SET.

See Also
CREATE EMPTY SET, CREATE SET, LOAD SET.

1516 4D Language Reference

COPY SET Sets

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

COPY SET (srcSet; dstSet)

Parameter Type Description

srcSet String → Source set name
dstSet String → Destination set name

Description
The COPY SET command copies the contents of the set srcSet into the set dstSet.

Both sets can be process, interprocess or local sets.

Examples
1. The following example, in Client/Server, copies the local set "$SetA", maintained on the
client machine, to the process set "SetB", maintained on the server machine:

COPY SET("$SetA";"SetB")

2. The following example, in Client/Server, copies the process set "SetA", maintained on the
server machine, to the local process set "$SetB", maintained on the client machine:

COPY SET("SetA";"$SetB")

See Also
Sets.

4D Language Reference 1517

USE SET Sets

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

USE SET (set)

Parameter Type Description

set String → Name of the set to use

Description
USE SET makes the records in set the current selection for the table to which the set belongs.

When you create a set, the current record is “remembered” by the set. USE SET retrieves the
position of this record and makes the it the new current record. If you delete this record before
you execute USE SET, 4D selects the first record in the set as the current record. The set
commands INTERSECTION, UNION, DIFFERENCE, and ADD TO SET reset the current record.
Also, if you create a set that does not contain the position of the current record, USE SET
selects the first record in the set as the current record.

WARNING: Remember that a set is a representation of a selection of records at the moment

that the set is created. If the records represented by the set do change, the set may no longer
be accurate. Therefore, a set saved to disk should represent a group of records that does not
change frequently. A number of things can invalidate a set invalid: modifying a record of the
set, deleting a record of the set, or changing the criteria that determined the set.

Example
The following example uses LOAD SET to load a set of the Acme locations in New York. It then
uses USE SET to make the loaded set the current selection:

LOAD SET ([Companies]; "NY Acme"; "NYAcmeSt") ` Load the set into memory
USE SET ("NY Acme") ` Change current selection to NY Acme
CLEAR SET ("NY Acme") ` Clear the set from memory

See Also
CLEAR SET, LOAD SET.

1518 4D Language Reference

CREATE EMPTY SET Sets

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

CREATE EMPTY SET ({aTable; }set)

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table for which to create an empty set, or
Default table, if omitted
set String → Name of the new empty set

Description
CREATE EMPTY SET creates a new empty set, set, for aTable. You can add records to this set with
the ADD TO SET command. If a set with the same name already exists, the existing set is
cleared by the new set.

Note: You do not need to use CREATE EMPTY SET before using CREATE SET.

Example
Please refer to the examples of the Sets section.

See Also
CLEAR SET, CREATE SET.

4D Language Reference 1519

CREATE SET Sets

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

CREATE SET ({aTable; }set)

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table for which to create a set from the selection, or
Default table, if omitted
set String → Name of the new set

Description
CREATE SET creates a new set, set, for aTable, and places the current selection in set. The
current record pointer for the table is saved with set. If set is used with USE SET, the current
selection and current record are restored. As with all sets, there is no sorted order; when set is
used, the default order is used. If a set with the same name already exists, the existing set is
cleared by the new set.

Example
The following example creates a set after doing a search, in order to save the set to disk:

QUERY ([People]) ` Let the user do a search

CREATE SET ([People]; "SearchSet") ` Create a new set
SAVE SET ("SearchSet"; "MySearch") ` Save the set on disk

See Also
CLEAR SET, CREATE EMPTY SET, Identifiers.

1520 4D Language Reference

CREATE SET FROM ARRAY Sets

version 6.7 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

CREATE SET FROM ARRAY (aTable; recordsArray{; setName})

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table of the set
recordsArray Longint | Boolean array → Array of record numbers, or
Array of booleans (True = the record is in the set,
False = the record is not in the set)
setName String → Name of the set to create, or
Apply the command to the Userset if omitted

Description
The CREATE SET FROM ARRAY command creates setName from:

• Either an array of absolute record numbers recordsArray from aTable,

• Or an array of booleans recordsArray. In this case, the values of the array indicate if each
record in the table belongs (True) or not (False) to setName.

When you use this command and pass a Longint array in recordsArray, all the numbers in the
array represent the list of record numbers that are in setName. If a number is invalid (for
example, if a record has not been created), the error -10503 is generated.

When you use this command and pass a Boolean array in recordsArray, the Nth element of the
array indicates whether the "Nth" record is contained (True) or not (False) in setName. Usually,
the number of elements in the array must equal the number of records in the table. If the
array is smaller than the number of records, only the records defined by the array will be in
the set.

Note: With a Boolean array, this command uses the elements from 0 to N-1.

If you do not pass the setName parameter or if you pass an empty string, the command will be
applied to the Userset system set.

See Also
BOOLEAN ARRAY FROM SET, CREATE SELECTION FROM ARRAY, Identifiers.

4D Language Reference 1521

DIFFERENCE Sets

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DIFFERENCE (set; subtractSet; resultSet)

Parameter Type Description

set String → Set
subtractSet String → Set to subtract
resultSet String → Resulting set

Description
DIFFERENCE compares set1 and set2 and excludes all records that are in set2 from the resultSet.
In other words, a record is included in the resultSet only if it is in set1, but not in set2. The
following table shows all possible results of a set Difference operation.

Set1 Set2 Result Set

Yes No Yes
Yes Yes No
No Yes No
No No No

The result of a Difference operation is depicted here. The shaded area is the result set.

The resultSet is created by DIFFERENCE. The resultSet replaces any existing set having the same
name, including set1 and set2. Both set1 and set2 must be from the same table. The resultSet
belongs to the same table as set1 and set2.

1522 4D Language Reference

4D Server: In Client/Server mode, sets are "visible" depending on their type (interprocess,
process and local) and where they were created (server or client). DIFFERENCE requires all three
sets to be visible on the same machine. See the paragraph 4D Server, sets and named selections
in the 4D Server Reference manual for more information.

Example
This example excludes the records that a user selects from a displayed selection. The records
are displayed on screen with the following line:

DISPLAY SELECTION ([Customers]) ` Display the customers in a list

At the bottom of the list of records is a button with an object method. The object method
excludes the records that the user has selected (the set named “UserSet”), and displays the
reduced selection:

CREATE SET ([Customers]; "$Current") ` Create a set of current selection

DIFFERENCE ("$Current";"UserSet";"$Current") ` Exclude selected records
USE SET ("$Current") ` Use the new set
CLEAR SET ("$Current") ` Clear the set

See Also
INTERSECTION, UNION.

4D Language Reference 1523

INTERSECTION Sets

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

INTERSECTION (set1; set2; resultSet)

Parameter Type Description

set1 String → First set
set2 String → Second set
resultSet String → Resulting set

Description
INTERSECTION compares set1 and set2 and selects only the records that are in both. The
following table lists all possible results of a set Intersection operation.

Set1 Set2 Result Set

Yes No No
Yes Yes Yes
No Yes No
No No No

The graphical result of an Intersection operation is displayed here. The shaded area is the
result set.

The resultSet is created by INTERSECTION. The resultSet replaces any existing set having the
same name, including set1 and set2. Both set1 and set2 must be from the same table. The
resultSet belongs to the same table as set1 and set2.

1524 4D Language Reference

4D Server: In Client/Server mode, sets are "visible" depending on their type (interprocess,
process and local) and where they were created (server or client). INTERSECTION requires all
three sets to be visible on the same machine. See the paragraph 4D Server, sets and named
selections in the 4D Server Reference manual for more information.

Example
The following example finds the customers who are served by two sales representatives, Joe
and Abby. Each sales representative has a set that represents his or her customers. The
customers that are in both sets are represented by both Joe and Abby:

INTERSECTION ("Joe"; "Abby"; "Both") ` Put customers in both sets in Both

USE SET ("Both") ` Use the set
CLEAR SET ("Both") ` Clear this set but save the others
DISPLAY SELECTION ([Customers]) ` Display customers served by both

See Also
DIFFERENCE, UNION.

4D Language Reference 1525

Is in set Sets

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Is in set (set) → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

set String → Name of the set to test

Function result Boolean ← Current record of set's table is in set (True) or

Current record of set's table is not in set (False)

Description
Is in set tests whether or not the current record for the table is in set. The Is in set function
returns TRUE if the current record of the table is in set, and returns FALSE if the current record
of the table is not in set.

Example
The following example is a button object method. It tests to see whether or not the currently
displayed record is in the set of best customers:

If (Is in set ("Best")) ` Check if it is a good customer

ALERT ("They are one of our best customers.")
Else
ALERT ("They are not one of our best customers.")
End if

See Also
ADD TO SET, REMOVE FROM SET.

1526 4D Language Reference

LOAD SET Sets

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

LOAD SET ({aTable; }set; document)

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table to which the set belongs, or
Default table, if omitted
set String → Name of the set to be created in memory
document String → Document holding the set

Description
LOAD SET loads a set from document that was saved with the SAVE SET command.

The set that is stored in document must be from aTable. The set created in memory is
overwritten if it already exists.

The document parameter is the name of the disk document containing the set. The document
need not have the same name as the set. If you supply an empty string for document, an Open
File dialog box appears so that the user can choose the set to load.
Remember that a set is a representation of a selection of records at the moment that the set is
created. If the records represented by the set change, the set may no longer be accurate.
Therefore, a set loaded from disk should represent a group of records that does not change
frequently. A number of things can make a set invalid: modifying a record of the set, deleting
a record of the set, or changing the criteria that determined a set.

Example
The following example uses LOAD SET to load a set of the Acme locations in New York:

LOAD SET ([Companies]; "NY Acme"; "NYAcmeSt") ` Load the set into memory
USE SET ("NY Acme") ` Change current selection to NY Acme
CLEAR SET ("NY Acme") ` Clear the set from memory
System Variables or Sets
If the user clicks Cancel in the Open File dialog box, or there is an error during the load
operation, the OK system variable is set to 0. Otherwise, it is set to 1.
See Also
SAVE SET.

4D Language Reference 1527

Records in set Sets

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Records in set (set) → Number

Parameter Type Description

set String → Name of the set to test

Function result Number ← Number of records in test

Description
Records in set returns the number of records in set. If set does not exist, or if there are no
records in set, Records in set returns 0.

Example
The following example displays an alert telling what percentage of the customers are rated as
the best:

` First calculate the percentage

$Percent := (Records in set ("Best") / Records in table ([Customers])) * 100
` Display an alert with the percentage
ALERT (String ($Percent; "##0%") + " of our customers are the best.")

See Also
Records in selection, Records in table.

1528 4D Language Reference

REMOVE FROM SET Sets

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

REMOVE FROM SET ({aTable; }set)

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Current record's table, or
Default table, if omitted
set String → Name of the set from which to remove
the current record

Description
REMOVE FROM SET removes the current record of aTable from set. The set must already exist; if
it does not, an error occurs. If a current record does not exist for aTable, REMOVE FROM SET has
no effect.

See Also
ADD TO SET.

4D Language Reference 1529

SAVE SET Sets

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SAVE SET (set; document)

Parameter Type Description

set String → Name of the set to save
document String → Name of the disk file to which to save the set

Description
SAVE SET saves Set to document, a document on disk.

The document need not have the same name as the set. If you supply an empty string for
document, a Create File dialog box appears so that the user can enter the name of the
document. You can load a saved set with the LOAD SET command.
If the user clicks Cancel in the Save File dialog box, or if there is an error during the save
operation, the OK system variable is set to 0. Otherwise, it is set to 1.

SAVE SET is often used to save to disk the results of a time-consuming search.

WARNING: Remember that a set is a representation of a selection of records at the moment

that the set is created. If the records represented by the set change, the set may no longer be
accurate. Therefore, a set saved to disk should represent a group of records that does not
change frequently. A number of things can invalidate a set invalid: modifying a record of the
set, deleting a record of the set, or changing the criteria that determined the set. Also
remember that sets do not save field values.

Example
The following example displays the Save File dialog box, which the user can enter the name of
the document that contains the set:

SAVE SET ("SomeSet"; "")

System Variables or Sets

If the user clicks Cancel in the Save File dialog box, or if there is an error during the load
operation, the OK system variable is set to 0. Otherwise, it is set to 1.

See Also
LOAD SET.

1530 4D Language Reference

UNION Sets

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

UNION (set1; set2; resultSet)

Parameter Type Description

set1 String → First set
set2 String → Second set
resultSet String → Resulting set

Description
UNION creates a set that contains all records from set1 and set2. The following table shows all
possible results of a set Union operation.

Set1 Set2 Result Set

Yes No Yes
Yes Yes Yes
No Yes Yes
No No No

The result of a Union operation is depicted here. The shaded area is the result set.

The resultSet is created by UNION. The resultSet replaces any existing set having the same
name, including set1 and set2. Both set1 and set2 must be from the same table. The resultSet
belongs to the same table as set1 and set2. The current record for the resultSet is the current
record from Set1.

4D Language Reference 1531

4D Server: In Client/Server mode, sets are "visible" depending on their type (interprocess,
process and local) and where they were created (server or client). UNION requires that all three
sets be visible on the same machine. See the paragraph 4D Server, sets and named selections in
the 4D Server Reference manual for more information.

Example
This example adds records to a set of best customers. The records are displayed on screen with
the first line. After the records are displayed, a set of the best customers is loaded from disk,
and any records that the user selected (the set named “UserSet”) are added to the set. Finally,
the new set is saved on disk:

ALL RECORDS ([Customers]) ` Select all the customers

DISPLAY SELECTION ([Customers]) ` Display all the customers in a list
LOAD SET ("$Best"; "$SaveBest") ` Load the set of best customers
UNION ("$Best"; "UserSet"; "$Best") ` Add any selected to the set
SAVE SET ("$Best"; "$SaveBest") ` Save the set of best customers

See Also
DIFFERENCE, INTERSECTION.

1532 4D Language Reference

47
______________________
SQL

4D Language Reference 1533

1534 4D Language Reference
Overview of SQL Commands SQL

version 11.3 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Beginning with version 11, 4D includes an integrated SQL kernel. The program also
includes an SQL server that other 4D applications or third-party applications can query (via
the 4D OBDC driver).
The different ways of accessing the 4D SQL kernel, the configuration of the SQL server as
well as the commands and keywords that can be used in SQL queries are detailed in a
separate manual, the 4D SQL Reference manual.

The "SQL" theme groups together various 4D commands concerning the use of SQL in 4D:
• Control of the SQL server: START SQL SERVER and STOP SQL SERVER
• Direct access to the integrated SQL kernel: SET FIELD VALUE NULL, Is field value Null, QUERY
BY SQL.
• Management of connections to external or internal data sources (SQL pass-through): GET
DATA SOURCE LIST, Get current data source, SQL LOGIN, SQL LOGOUT.
• High-level commands for handling data in the framework of direct SQL connections or
via ODBC: Begin SQL, End SQL, SQL CANCEL LOAD, SQL LOAD RECORD, SQL EXECUTE, SQL
EXPORT, SQL End of selection, SQL SET OPTION, SQL SET PARAMETER, SQL IMPORT, SQL GET
LAST ERROR, SQL GET OPTION.

How high-level SQL commands work

The built-in SQL commands of 4D begin with the prefix "SQL" and implement the
following principles:
• You can use these commands with the 4D internal SQL kernel or in an external
connection that is opened directly or via ODBC. The SQL LOGIN command lets you specify
the type of connection to open.
• The scope of a connection is the process. If you want to manage several simultaneous
connections, you must start a process by SQL LOGIN.
The SQL CANCEL LOAD command can be used to execute several SELECT requests in the
same connection.
• You can intercept any ODBC errors generated during the execution of one of the high-
level SQL commands using the ON ERR CALL command. The SQL GET LAST ERROR
command can be used in this case to obtain additional information.

Support of standard ODBC

The ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) standard specifies a library of standardized
functions. These functions allow an application such as 4D to access any ODBC-compatible
data management system (databases, spreadsheets, another 4D application, etc.) via SQL
language.

Note: 4D also allows data to be imported from and exported to an ODBC source in Design
mode. For more information, please refer to the 4D Design Reference manual.

4D Language Reference 1535

Note: The high-level SQL commands of 4D can be used to implement simple solutions
allowing 4D applications to communicate with ODBC data sources. If your applications
require more extensive support of ODBC standards, you will need to have the “low level”
ODBC plug-in for 4D, 4D ODBC Pro.

Correspondence of data types

The following table lists the correspondences that are automatically established by 4D
between 4D and SQL data types:

4D Type SQL Type

C_STRING SQL_C_CHAR
C_TEXT SQL_C_CHAR
C_REAL SQL_C_DOUBLE
C_DATE SQL_C_TYPE_DATE
C_TIME SQL_C_TYPE_TIME
C_BOOLEAN SQL_C_BIT
C_INTEGER SQL_C_SHORT
C_LONGINT SQL_C_SLONG
C_BLOB SQL_C_BINARY
C_PICTURE SQL_C_BINARY
C_GRAPH SQL_C_BINARY

Referencing 4D expressions in SQL requests

4D provides two ways for inserting 4D expressions (variables, arrays, fields, pointers, valid
expressions) into SQL requests: direct association and the setting of parameters using SQL
SET PARAMETER.

Direct association can be carried out in two ways:

• Insertion of the name of the 4D object between the << and >> characters in the text of
the request.
• Precede the reference with a colon ":".
Examples:
SQL EXECUTE("INSERT INTO emp (empnum,ename) VALUES
(<<vEmpnum>>,<<vEname>>)")
SQL EXECUTE("SELECT age FROM People WHERE name= :vName")

In these examples, the current values of the 4D vEmpnum, vEname and vName variables
will replace the parameters when the request is executed. This solution also works with 4D
fields and arrays.

This easy-to-use syntax nevertheless has the drawback of not being compliant with the SQL
standard and of not allowing the use of output parameters. To remedy this, you can use the
SQL SET PARAMETER command. This command can be used to set each 4D object to be
integrated into a request as well as its mode of use (input, output or both). The syntax
produced is thus standard. For more information, please refer to the description of the SQL
SET PARAMETER command.

1536 4D Language Reference

1. This example executes an SQL query that directly uses the associated 4D arrays:

ARRAY TEXT(MyTextArray;10)
ARRAY LONGINT(MyLongintArray;10)

For(vCounter;1;Size of array(MyTextArray))
MyTextArray{vCounter}:="Text"+String(vCounter)
MyLongintArray{vCounter}:=vCounter
End for
SQL LOGIN("mysql";"root";"")
SQLStmt:="insert into app_testTable (alpha_field, longint_field) VALUES
(<<MyTextArray>>, <<MyLongintArray>>)"
SQL EXECUTE(SQLStmt)

2. This example can be used to execute an SQL query that directly uses the associated 4D
fields:

ALL RECORDS([Table 2])

SQL LOGIN("mysql";"root";"")
SQLStmt:="insert into app_testTable (alpha_field, longint_field) VALUES
(<<[Table 2]Field1>"+">,<<[Table 2]Field2>>)"
SQL EXECUTE(SQLStmt)

3. This example lets you execute an SQL query by directly passing a variable via a
dereferenced pointer:

C_LONGINT($vLong)
C_POINTER($vPointer)
$vLong:=1
$vPointer:=->$vLong
SQL LOGIN("mysql";"root";"")
SQLStmt:="SELECT Col1 FROM TEST WHERE Col1=:$vPointer"
SQL EXECUTE(SQLStmt)

Retrieving values in 4D
Retrieving values in the 4D language that result from SQL queries is carried out in two ways:
• Using the additional parameters of the SQL EXECUTE command (recommended solution).
• Using the INTO clause in the SQL query itself (solution reserved for special cases).

4D Language Reference 1537

Begin SQL SQL

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Begin SQL

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
Begin SQL is a keyword that can be used in the Method editor to indicate the beginning of a
sequence of SQL commands that must be interpreted by the current data source of the
process (the integrated SQL engine of 4D or any source specified via the SQL LOGIN
command).

A sequence of SQL commands started with Begin SQL must be closed with the End SQL
keyword.

These keywords work as follows:

• You can place one or more blocks of Begin SQL/End SQL tags in the same method. You
can generate methods made up entirely of SQL code or mix 4D code and SQL code in the
same method.
• You can write several SQL statements on the same line or on different lines by separating
them with a semi-colon “;”. For example, you can write:

Begin SQL
INSERT INTO SALESREPS (NAME, AGE) VALUES (‘Henry’,40);
INSERT INTO SALESREPS (NAME, AGE) VALUES (‘Bill’,35)
End SQL

or:

Begin SQL
INSERT INTO SALESREPS (NAME, AGE) VALUES (‘Henry’,40);INSERT INTO
SALESREPS (NAME, AGE) VALUES (‘Bill’,35)
End SQL

Note that the 4D Debugger will evaluate the SQL code line by line. In certain cases, it may
be preferable to use more than one line.

See Also
End SQL, Get current data source, SQL LOGIN.

1538 4D Language Reference

End SQL SQL

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

End SQL

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
End SQL is a keyword indicating the end of a sequence of SQL commands in the Method
editor.

A sequence of SQL statements must be surrounded by the Begin SQL and End SQL keywords.
For more information, please refer to the description of the Begin SQL keyword.

See Also
Begin SQL.

4D Language Reference 1539

Get current data source SQL

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get current data source → String

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result String ← Name of current data source being used

Description
The Get current data source command returns the name of the current data source of the
application. The current data source receives the SQL queries executed within Begin
SQL/End SQL structures.
When the current data source is the local 4D database, the command returns the string
“;DB4D_SQL_LOCAL;”, which corresponds to the value of the SQL_INTERNAL constant
("SQL" theme).
This command lets you check the current data source, generally before executing an SQL
query.

See Also
Begin SQL, End SQL, GET DATA SOURCE LIST, SQL LOGIN, SQL LOGOUT.

1540 4D Language Reference

GET DATA SOURCE LIST SQL

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET DATA SOURCE LIST (sourceType; sourceNamesArr; driversArr)

Parameter Type Description

sourceType Longint → Source type: user or system
sourceNamesArr Text array ← Array of data source names
driversArr Text array ← Array of drivers for sources

Description
The GET DATA SOURCE LIST command returns; in the sourceNamesArr and driversArr arrays,
the names and drivers of the sourceType type data sources defined in the ODBC manager of
the operating system.

4D allows you to connect to an external ODBC data source directly via the language and
execute SQL queries within a Begin SQL/End SQL tag structure. This works as follows: the
GET DATA SOURCE LIST command can be used to get a list of data sources present on the
machine. The SQL LOGIN command can then be used to designate the source to be used.
You can then execute SQL queries using a Begin SQL/End SQL tag structure in the “current”
source. To carry out queries using the 4D internal engine again, simply pass the SQL
LOGOUT command. For more information about SQL commands in the Method editor,
please refer to the 4D SQL Reference manual.

In sourceType, pass the type of data source that you want to retrieve. You can use one of the
following constants, found in the “SQL” theme:
Constant Type Value
User Data Source Longint 1
System Data Source Longint 2

Note: This command does not take file type data sources into account.

The command fills and sizes the sourceNamesArr and driversArr arrays with the
corresponding values.

Note: If you want to connect to an external 4D data source via ODBC, you will need to
have installed the 4D ODBC Driver on your machine. For more information, please refer to
the 4D ODBC Driver Installation manual.

4D Language Reference 1541

Example
Example using a user data source:

ARRAY TEXT(arrDSN;0)
ARRAY TEXT(arrDSNDrivers;0)
GET DATA SOURCE LIST(User Data Source;arrDSN;arrDSNDrivers)

See Also
Get current data source, SQL LOGIN, SQL LOGOUT.

System Variables or Sets

If the command is executed correctly, the OK system variable is set to 1. Otherwise, it is set
to 0 and an error is generated.

1542 4D Language Reference

Is field value Null SQL

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Is field value Null (aField) → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

aField Field → Field to be evaluated

Function result Boolean ← True = field is NULL,

False = field is not NULL

Description
The Is field value Null command returns True if the field designated by the aField parameter
contains the NULL value, and False otherwise.

The NULL value is used by the SQL kernel of 4D. For more information, please refer to the
4D SQL Reference manual.

See Also
SET FIELD VALUE NULL.

4D Language Reference 1543

On SQL Authentication Database Method SQL

version 11.3 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The On SQL Authentication database method can be used to filter requests sent to the
integrated SQL server of 4D. This filtering can be based on the name and password as well
as the (optional) IP address of the user. The developer can use their own table of users or
that of the 4D users to evaluate the connection identifiers. Once the connection is
authenticated, the CHANGE CURRENT USER command must be called in order to control
access of requests within the 4D database.

When it exists, the On SQL Authentication database method is called automatically by 4D or

4D Server on each external connection to the SQL server. The internal system for managing
4D users is therefore not activated. The connection is only accepted if the database method
returns True in $0 and if the CHANGE CURRENT USER command has been executed
successfully. If one of these conditions is not met, the request is refused.

Note: The statement SQL LOGIN(SQL_INTERNAL;$user;$password) does not call the On SQL
Authentication database method since it is an internal connection in this case.

The database method receives up to three parameters of the Text type, passed by 4D ($1, $2
and $3), and returns a Boolean, $0. Here is a description of these parameters:

Parameters Type Description

$1 Text User name
$2 Text Password
$3 Text (optional) IP address of client at origin of the request

$0 Boolean True = request accepted, False = request refused

You must declare these parameters as follows:

` On Web Authentication database method

C_TEXT($1;$2;$3)
C_BOOLEAN($0)
` Code for method

The password ($2) is received as standard text.

You must check the identifiers of the SQL connection in the On SQL Authentication
database method. For example, you can check the name and password using a custom table
of users. If the identifiers are valid, pass True in $0 to accept the connection.
Otherwise, pass False in $0; in this case, the connection is refused.
By default, $0 equals False. If the On SQL Authentication database method exists and if $0 is
not defined, all the connections are therefore refused.

1544 4D Language Reference

Note: If the On SQL Authentication database method does not exist, the connection is
evaluated using the integrated user management system of 4D (if it is activated, in other
words, if a password has been assigned to the Designer). If this system is not activated,
users are connected with Designer access rights (free access).

If you have passed True in $0, you must then successfully call the CHANGE CURRENT USER
command in the On SQL Authentication Database Method in order for the request to be
accepted and for 4D to open an SQL session for the user.
The use of the CHANGE CURRENT USER command can be used to implement a virtual
authentication system which has the double advantage of allowing the control of
connection actions and of hiding the connection identifiers from the outside in the 4D
SQL session.

This example of the On SQL Authentication database method checks whether the connection
request comes from the internal network, validates the identifiers and then assigns access
rights to the "sql_user" user for the SQL session.

C_TEXT($1;$2;$3)
C_BOOLEAN ($0)
`$1: user
`$2: password
`{$3: IP address of client}
ON ERR CALL ("SQL_error")
If (checkInternalIP($3))
`The checkInternalIP method checks whether the IP address is internal
If ($1="victor") & ($2="hugo")
CHANGE CURRENT USER("sql_user";"")
If (OK=1)
$0:=True
Else
$0:=False
End if
Else
$0:=False
End if
Else
$0:=False
End if

See Also
CHANGE CURRENT USER.

4D Language Reference 1545

QUERY BY SQL SQL

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QUERY BY SQL ({aTable; }sqlFormula)

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table in which to return a selection of records or
Default table if this parameter is omitted
sqlFormula String → Valid SQL search formula representing
the WHERE clause of the SELECT query

Description
The QUERY BY SQL command can be used to take advantage of the SQL kernel integrated
into 4D. It can execute a simple SELECT query that can be written as follows:
SELECT *
FROM table
WHERE <sqlFormula>
aTable is the name of the table passed in the first parameter and sqlFormula is the query
string passed in the second parameter.

For example, the following statement:

([Employees];"name=’smith’")
is equivalent to the following SQL query:
SELECT * FROM Employees WHERE "name=’smith’"

The QUERY BY SQL command is similar to the QUERY BY FORMULA command. It looks for
records in the specified table. It changes the current selection of aTable for the current
process and makes the first record of the new selection the current record.

Note: The QUERY BY SQL command cannot be used in the context of an external SQL
connection; it connects directly to the integrated SQL engine of 4D.

QUERY BY SQL applies sqlFormula to each record in the table selection. sqlFormula is a
Boolean expression that must return True or False. As you may know, in the SQL standard, a
search condition can yield a True, False or NULL result. All the records (rows) where the
search condition returns True are included in the new current selection.

The sqlFormula expression may be simple, such as comparing a field (column) to a value; or
it may be complex, such as performing a calculation. Like QUERY BY FORMULA, QUERY BY
SQL is able to evaluate information in related tables (see example 4). sqlFormula must be a
valid SQL statement that is compliant with the SQL-2 standard and with respect to the
limitations of the current SQL implementation of 4D. For more information about SQL
support in 4D, please refer to the 4D SQL Reference manuel.

1546 4D Language Reference

The sqlFormula parameter can use references to 4D expressions. The syntax to use is the
same as for the integrated SQL commands or the code included between the Begin SQL/End
SQL tags, i.e.: <<MyVar>> or :MyVar.
For more information, refer to the SQL Commands section.

Note: This command is compatible with the SET QUERY LIMIT and SET QUERY DESTINATION
commands.

About Relations
QUERY BY SQL does not use relations between tables defined in the 4D Structure editor. If
you want to make use of related data, you will have to add a JOIN to the query. For
example, assuming we have the following structure with a Many-to-One relation
from[Persons]City to [Cities]Name:
[People]
Name
City
[Cities]
Name
Population
Using the QUERY BY FORMULA command, you can write:
QUERY BY FORMULA([People];[Cities]Population>1000)
Using QUERY BY SQL, you must write the following statement, regardless of whether the
relation exists:
QUERY BY SQL([People];"people.city=cities.name AND cities.population>1000")

Note: QUERY BY SQL handles One-to-Many and Many-to-Many relations differently than
QUERY BY FORMULA.

Examples
1. This example shows the offices where sales exceed 100. The SQL query is:
SELECT *
FROM Offices
WHERE Sales > 100

When using the QUERY BY SQL command:

C_STRING(30;$queryFormula)
$queryFormula:="Sales > 100"
QUERY BY SQL([Offices];$queryFormula)

2. This example shows the orders that fall into the 3000 to 4000 range. The SQL query is:
SELECT *
FROM Orders
WHERE Amount BETWEEN 3000 AND 4000

4D Language Reference 1547

When using the QUERY BY SQL command:

C_STRING(40;$queryFormula)
$queryFormula:="Amount BETWEEN 3000 AND 4000"
QUERY BY SQL([Orders];$queryFormula)

3. This example shows how to get the query result ordered by a specific criterion. The SQL
query is:
SELECT *
FROM People
WHERE City =’Paris’
ORDER BY Name

When using the QUERY BY SQL command:

C_STRING(40;$queryFormula)
$queryFormula:="City= ‘Paris’ ORDER BY Name"
QUERY BY SQL([People];$queryFormula)

4. This example shows a query using related tables in 4D. In SQL you should use a JOIN to
simulate this relation. Assuming we have the two following tables:
[Invoices] with the following columns (fields):
ID_Inv: Longint
Date_Inv: Date
Amount: Real
[Lines_Invoices] with the following columns (fields):
ID_Line: Longint
ID_Inv: Longint
Code: Alpha (10)
There is a Many-to-One relation from [Lines_Invoices]ID_Inv to [Invoices]ID_Inv.
Using the QUERY BY FORMULA command, you could write:

QUERY BY FORMULA([Lines_Invoices];([Lines_Invoices]Code="FX-200") & (Month of

([Invoices]Date_Inv)=4))

The SQL query is:

SELECT ID_Line
FROM Lines_Invoices, Invoices
WHERE Lines_Invoices.ID_Inv=Invoices.ID_Inv
AND Lines_Invoices.Code='FX-200'
AND MONTH(Invoices.Date_Inv) = 4

1548 4D Language Reference

When using the QUERY BY SQL command:

C_STRING(40;$queryFormula)
$queryFormula:="Lines_Invoices.ID_Inv=Invoices.ID_InvAND Lines_Invoices.Code=
’FX-200’ AND MONTH(Invoices.Date_Inv)=4"
QUERY BY SQL([Lines_Invoices];$queryFormula)

See Also
QUERY BY FORMULA.

System Variables or Sets

If the format of the search condition is correct, the system variable OK is set to 1.
Otherwise, it is set to 0, the result of the command is an empty selection and an error is
returned. This error can be intercepted by a method installed using the ON ERR CALL
command.

4D Language Reference 1549

SET FIELD VALUE NULL SQL

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET FIELD VALUE NULL (aField)

Parameter Type Description

aField Field → Field where NULL value is to be attributed

Description
The SET FIELD VALUE NULL command assigns the NULL value to the field designated by the
aField parameter.

The NULL value is used by the SQL kernal of 4D. For more information, please refer to the
4D SQL Reference manual.

Note: It is possible to disallow the Null value for 4D fields at the Structure editor level (see
the Design Reference manual).

See Also
Is field value Null.

1550 4D Language Reference

SQL CANCEL LOAD SQL

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SQL CANCEL LOAD

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
The SQL CANCEL LOAD command ends the current SELECT request and initializes the
parameters.

This command is used to execute several SELECT requests within the same connection (i.e.
the same cursor) initiated by the SQL LOGIN command.

Example
In this example, two requests are executed in the same connection:

C_BLOB(Myblob)
C_TEXT(MyText)
SQL LOGIN("mysql";"root";"")
SQLStmt:="SELECT blob_field FROM app_testTable"
SQL EXECUTE(SQLStmt;Myblob)
While(Not(SQL End selection))
SQL LOAD RECORD
End while
`Resetting of cursor
SQL CANCEL LOAD
SQLStmt:="SELECT Name FROM Employee"
SQL EXECUTE(SQLStmt;MyText)
While(Not(SQL End selection))
SQL LOAD RECORD
End while

See Also
SQL LOAD RECORD, SQL LOGIN.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been correctly executed, the system variable OK returns 1. Otherwise,
it returns 0.

4D Language Reference 1551

SQL End selection SQL

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SQL End selection → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Boolean ← Result set boundaries reached

Description
The SQL End selection command is used to determine if the boundaries of the result set
have been reached.

Example
The code below connects to an external data source (Oracle) using the following parameters:

C_TEXT(vName)

SQL LOGIN("TestOracle";"scott";"tiger")
If (OK=1)
SQL EXECUTE("SELECT ename FROM emp";vName)
While(Not(SQL End selection))
SQL LOAD RECORD
End while
SQL LOGOUT
End if

This code will return in the 4D vName variable the emp names (ename) stored in the table
named emp.

1552 4D Language Reference

SQL EXECUTE SQL

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SQL EXECUTE (sqlStatement{; boundObj}{; boundObj2; ...; boundObjN})

Parameter Type Description

sqlStatement Text → SQL command to execute
boundObj Variable | Field ← Receives result (if necessary)

Description
The SQL EXECUTE command is used to execute an SQL command and to bind the result to
4D objects (arrays, variables or fields).

A valid connection must be specified in the current process in order to execute this
command.

The sqlStatement parameter contains the SQL command to execute. boundObj receives the
results. Variables are bound in the column sequence order, which means that any
remaining remote columns are discarded.

If 4D fields are passed as parameters in boundObj, the command will create records and
save them automatically. 4D fields must come from the same table (a field from table 1 and
a field from table 2 cannot be passed in the same call). If fields from more than one table
are passed, an error is generated.

If you pass 4D arrays in the boundObj parameter(s), it is advisable to declare them before
calling the command in order to check the type of data processed. Arrays are automatically
resized when necessary.

With a 4D variable, one record is fetched at a time. The other results are ignored.

Note: For more information about referencing 4D expressions in SQL queries, please refer
to the SQL Commands section.

4D Language Reference 1553

Examples
1. In this example, we will get the ename column of the emp table of the data source. The
result is stored in the [Employee]Name 4D field. 4D records will be created automatically:

SQLStmt:="SELECT ename FROM emp"

SQL EXECUTE(SQLStmt;[Employee]Name)
SQL LOAD RECORD(SQL All Records)

2. To check the creation of records, it is possible to include code within a transaction and
to validate it only if the operation proves to be satisfactory:

SQL LOGIN("mysql";"root";"")
SQLStmt:="SELECT alpha_field FROM app_testTable"
START TRANSACTION
SQL EXECUTE(SQLStmt;[Table 2]Field1)
While(Not(SQL End Selection))
SQL LOAD RECORD
... `Place the data validation code here
End while
VALIDATE TRANSACTION `Validation of the transaction

3. In this example, we want to get the ename column of the emp table of the data source.
The result will be stored in an aName array. We fetch records 10 at a time.

ARRAY STRING(30;aName;20)
SQLStmt:="SELECT ename FROM emp"
SQL EXECUTE(SQLStmt;aName)
While(Not(SQL End Selection))
SQL LOAD RECORD(10)
End while

4. In this example, we want to get the ename and job of the emp table for a specific ID
(WHERE clause) of the data source. The result will be stored in the vName and vJob 4D
variables. Only the first record is fetched.

SQLStmt:="SELECT ename, job FROM emp WHERE id = 3"

SQL EXECUTE(SQLStmt;vName;vJob)
SQL LOAD RECORD

1554 4D Language Reference

5. In this example, we want to get the Blob_Field column of the Test table in the data
source. The result will be stored in a BLOB variable whose value is updated each time a
record is loaded.

C_BLOB(MyBlob)
SQL LOGIN
SQL EXECUTE("SELECT Champ_Blob FROM Test";MonBlob)
While(Not(SQL End selection))
`We look through the results
SQL LOAD RECORD
`The value of MyBlob is updated on each call
End while

See Also
SQL LOAD RECORD.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been executed correctly, the system variable OK returns 1. Otherwise,
it returns 0.

4D Language Reference 1555

SQL EXPORT SQL

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SQL EXPORT (sourceTable{; project{; *}})

Parameter Type Description

sourceTable String → Name of table in ODBC data source
project BLOB → Contents of export project
← New contents of export project (if * is passed)
* * → Display of export dialog box and project update

Description
The SQL EXPORT command is used to export data in the sourceTable table of an external
ODBC source. The connection parameters (source name, user and password) are included in
the project BLOB.

Notes:
• The project contains all the export parameters, in particular the data source and the
exported tables and fields. You set these parameters in the ODBC export dialog box, then
you can save them in a file on disk if necessary. For more information, refer to the Design
Reference manual.
• The projects generated in the ODBC export dialog box are not compatible with the
commands or the standard export dialog box of 4D.
• This command cannot be used in the case of connections with the internal SQL kernel of
4D.
If you do not pass the optional project parameter, SQL EXPORT displays a dialog box for
selecting the ODBC data source:
Windows

1556 4D Language Reference

Mac OS

Once you have selected the source, the 4D ODBC export dialog box appears, allowing the
user to configure the operation. If the user clicks Cancel in either of the two dialog boxes,
execution is stopped and the system variable OK is set to 0.

If you pass a BLOB containing a valid ODBC export project in the project parameter, the
export will be carried out directly, without any user intervention. To do this, you simply
need to load a project that has been saved on disk beforehand into the field or the BLOB
variable that you pass in the project parameter, using the DOCUMENT TO BLOB command.
You can also use the SQL EXPORT command with an empty project parameter and the
optional * parameter, then store the project parameter in a BLOB field (see below). On the
one hand, this solution lets you store the project with the data file and, on the other, to
avoid the phase of loading it from the disk into a BLOB.

Note: Refer to the EXPORT DATA command for an example concerning the definition of an
empty project.

The optional * parameter, if it is set, displays the ODBC data export dialog box with the
settings defined in project (if any). This allows you to use a predefined project while still
being able to modify one or more parameters. Moreover, in this case, the project parameter
contains the parameters of the “new” project after the dialog box is closed. You can then
store it in a BLOB field, in a file on disk, etc.

See Also
SQL IMPORT.

System Variables or Sets

If the user clicks Cancel in either of the two dialog boxes (for selecting the data source or
the export settings), the system variable OK is set to 0. If the export is carried out correctly,
the system variable OK is set to 1.

4D Language Reference 1557

SQL GET LAST ERROR SQL

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SQL GET LAST ERROR (errCode; errText; errODBC; errSQLServer)

Parameter Type Description

errCode Longint ← Error code
errText Text ← Error text
errODBC Text ← ODBC error code
errSQLServer Longint ← SQL server native error code

Description
The SQL GET LAST ERROR command returns information related to the last error
encountered during the execution of an ODBC command. The error may come from the
4D application, the network, the ODBC source, etc.

This command must generally be called in the context of an error-handling method

installed using the ON ERR CALL command.

• The errCode parameter returns the error code.

• The errText parameter returns the error text.

The last two parameters are only filled when the error comes from the ODBC source;
otherwise, they are returned empty.
• The errODBC parameter returns the ODBC error code (SQL state).
• The errSQLServer parameter returns the SQL server native error code.

See Also
GET LAST SQL ERROR, ON ERR CALL.

1558 4D Language Reference

SQL GET OPTION SQL

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SQL GET OPTION (option; value)

Parameter Type Description

option Longint → Option number
value Longint ← Option value

Description
The SQL GET OPTION command returns the current value of the option passed in option.

For more information on the different options and their associated values, refer to the
description of the SQL SET OPTION command.

See Also
SQL SET OPTION.

System Variables or Sets

If the command was properly executed, the system variable OK is set to 1. Otherwise, it is
set to 0.

4D Language Reference 1559

SQL IMPORT SQL

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SQL IMPORT (sourceTable{; project{; *}})

Parameter Type Description

sourceTable String → Name of table in ODBC data source
project BLOB → Contents of import project
← New contents of import project (if * is passed)
* * → Display of import dialog box and project update

Description
The SQL IMPORT command is used to import data from the sourceTable table of an external
ODBC source. The connection parameters (source name, user and password) are included in
the project BLOB.

Notes:
• The project contains all the import parameters, in particular the data source and target
tables and fields. You set these parameters in the ODBC import dialog box, then you can
save them in a file on disk if necessary. For more information, refer to the Design Reference
manual.
• The projects generated in the ODBC import dialog box are not compatible with the
commands or the standard import dialog box of 4D.
• This command cannot be used in the case of connections with the internal SQL kernel of
4D.

If you do not pass the optional project parameter, SQL IMPORT displays a dialog box for
selecting the ODBC data source:
Windows

1560 4D Language Reference

Mac OS

Once you have selected the source, the 4D ODBC import dialog box appears, allowing the
user to configure the operation. If the user clicks Cancel in either of the two dialog boxes,
execution is stopped and the system variable OK is set to 0.

If you pass a BLOB containing a valid ODBC import project in the project parameter, the
import will be carried out directly, without any user intervention. To do this, you simply
need to load a project that has been saved on disk beforehand into the field or the BLOB
variable that you pass in the project parameter, using the DOCUMENT TO BLOB command.
You can also use the SQL IMPORT command with an empty project parameter and the
optional * parameter, then store the project parameter in a BLOB field (see below). On the
one hand, this solution lets you store the project with the data file and, on the other, to
avoid the phase of loading it from the disk into a BLOB.

Note: Refer to the EXPORT DATA command for an example concerning the definition of an
empty project.

The optional * parameter, if it is set, displays the ODBC data import dialog box with the
settings defined in project (if any). This allows you to use a predefined project while still
being able to modify one or more parameters. Moreover, in this case, the project parameter
contains the parameters of the “new” project after the dialog box is closed. You can then
store it in a BLOB field, in a file on disk, etc.

See Also
ODBC EXPORT.

System Variables or Sets

If the user clicks Cancel in either of the two dialog boxes (for selecting the data source or
the import settings), the system variable OK is set to 0. If the import is carried out correctly,
the system variable OK is set to 1.

4D Language Reference 1561

SQL LOAD RECORD SQL

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SQL LOAD RECORD {(numRecords)}

Parameter Type Description

numRecords Integer → Number of records to load

Description
The SQL LOAD RECORD command retrieves one or more record(s) in 4D coming from the
data source open in the current connection.

The optional numRecords parameter is used to set the number of records to retrieve:
• If you omit this parameter, the command will retrieve the current record from the data
source. This principle corresponds to the retrieval of data in a loop where one record is
received at a time.
• If you pass an integer value in numRecords, the command will retrieve numRecords
records.
• If you pass the SQL All Records constant (value -1), the command will retrieve all the
records of the table.

Note: These last two parameters are only meaningful if the data retrieved are associated
with arrays or with 4D fields.

See Also
SQL CANCEL LOAD, SQL EXECUTE.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been executed correctly, the system variable OK returns 1. Otherwise,
it returns 0.

1562 4D Language Reference

SQL LOGIN SQL

version 11.3 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SQL LOGIN{(dataEntry; userName; password; *)}

Parameter Type Description

dataEntry String → • Name of external database or
• IP address of external database or
• Name of the data source entry in the ODBC
Manager or
• "" to display the selection dialog box
userName String → Name of the user registered in the data source
password String → Password of the user registered in the data source
* * → Applied to Begin SQL/End SQL
If omitted: do not apply (local database); if passed:
apply

Description
The SQL LOGIN command allows you to connect to an SQL data source specified in the
dataEntry parameter. It designates the target of the SQL queries executed subsequently in
the application:
• via the SQL EXECUTE command,
• via code placed within the Begin SQL / End SQL tags (if the * parameter is passed).

The SQL data source can either be:

• an external 4D Server database that you access directly,
• an external ODBC source,
• the internal SQL engine.

In dataEntry, you can pass one of the following values: an IP address, a 4D database
publication name, an ODBC data source name, an empty string or the SQL_INTERNAL constant.

• IP address
Syntax: IP:<IPAddress>{:<TCPPort>}
In this case, the command opens a direct connection with the 4D Server database executed
on the machine with the IP address specified. On the "target" machine, the SQL server must
be started. If you pass a TCP port number, it must have been specified as the publication
port of the SQL server in the "target" database. If you do not pass a TCP port number, the
default port will be used (19812). The TCP port number of the SQL server can be modified
on the "SQL/Configuration" page of the application Preferences.
Refer to examples 1 and 2.

4D Language Reference 1563

• 4D database publication name
Syntax: 4D:<Publication_Name>
In this case, the command opens a direct connection with the 4D Server database whose
publication name on the network corresponds to the name specified. The network
publication name of a database is set on the "Client-Server/Configuration" page of the
application Preferences.
Refer to example 4.
Note: The TCP port number of the target 4D SQL server (that publishes the 4D database)
and the TCP port number of the SQL server of the 4D application that opens the
connection must be the same.

• valid ODBC data source name

Syntax: ODBC:<My_DSN> or <My_DSN>
In this case, the dataEntry parameter contains the name of the data source as it has been set
in the ODBC driver manager.
Note: For compatibility with previous versions of 4D, it is possible to omit the "ODBC:"
prefix. However, for better code readability, it is recommended to use this prefix.
Refer to example 4.

• empty string
Syntax: ""
In this case, the command displays the connection dialog box so that the data source to be
connected to can be entered manually:

This dialog box includes several pages. The TCP/IP page includes the following elements:
* Target Name: This menu is built using two lists:
- The list of databases that have been opened recently in direct connection. The mechanism
for updating this list is the same as that of the 4D application, except that the folder
containing the .4DLink files is named "Favorites SQL v11" instead of "Favorites v11".

1564 4D Language Reference

- The list of 4D Server applications whose SQL server is started and whose TCP port for SQL
connections is the same as that of the source application. This list is dynamically updated
on each new call to the SQL LOGIN command without the dataEntry parameter. If the "^"
character is placed before a database name, this indicates that the connection has been
made in secured mode via SSL.
* Network Address: This area displays the IP address and possibly the TCP port of the
database selected in the Target Name menu. You can also enter an IP address in this area
and then click on the Connection button in order to connect to the corresponding
4D Server database. You can also specify the TCP port by entering a colon (:) followed by
the port number after the address. For example: 192.168.93.105:19855
* User Name and Password: These areas can be used to enter the connection identifiers.
* The User DSN and System DSN pages display, respectively, the list of user and system
ODBC data sources specified in the ODBC driver of the machine. These pages can be used
to select a data source and enter the identifiers in order to open a connection with an
external ODBC data source.
If the connection is established, the OK system variable is set to 1. Otherwise, it is set to 0
and an error is generated. This error can be intercepted via an error-handling method
installed by the ON ERR CALL command.

• SQL_INTERNAL constant
Syntax: SQL_INTERNAL
In this case, the command redirects subsequent SQL queries to the internal SQL engine of
the database.

userName contains the name of the user authorized to connect to the external data source.
For example, with Oracle®, the user name can be “Scott”.

password contains the password of the user authorized to connect to the external data
source. For example, with Oracle®, the password can be “tiger”.

Note: In the case of a direct connection, if you pass empty strings in the userName and
password parameters, the connection will only be accepted if 4D passwords are not
activated in the target database. Otherwise, the connection will be refused.

The optional * parameter can be used to change the target of the SQL code executed within
the Begin SQL/End SQL tags. If you do not pass this parameter, the code placed within the
Begin SQL/End SQL tags will still be sent to the internal SQL engine of 4D, without taking
the configuration specified by the SQL LOGIN command into account. If you do pass this
parameter, the SQL code executed within the Begin SQL/End SQL tags will be sent to the
source specified in the dataEntry parameter.

To close the current connection and free the memory, simply execute the SQL LOGOUT
command. All the SQL queries are then sent to the internal SQL engine of the database.
If you call SQL LOGIN again without having explicitly closed the current connection, it will
be closed automatically.

4D Language Reference 1565

These parameters are optional; if no parameters are passed, the command will bring up the
ODBC Login dialog box that allows you to select the external data source.

The scope of this command is per process; in other words, if you want to execute two
distinct connections, you must create two processes and execute each connection in each
process.

Examples
1. This statement will bring up the ODBC Manager dialog box:

SQL LOGIN

2. Opening of a connection via the ODBC protocol with the "MyOracle" external data
source. SQL queries executed via the SQL EXECUTE command and queries included within
the Begin SQL/End SQL tags will be redirected to this connection:

SQL LOGIN("ODBC:MyOracle";"Scott";"tiger";*)

3. Open a connection with the 4D internal SQL kernel:

SQL LOGIN(SQL_INTERNAL;$user;$password)

4. Opening of a direct connection with the 4D Server v11 SQL application executed on the
machine having the IP address 192.168.45.34 and replying on the default TCP port. The
SQL queries executed via the SQL EXECUTE command will be redirected to this connection;
the queries included within the Begin SQL/End SQL tags will not be redirected.

SQL LOGIN("IP:192.168.45.34";"John";"azerty")

5. Opening of a direct connection with the 4D Server v11 SQL application executed on the
machine having the IP address 192.168.45.34 and replying on TCP port 20150. The SQL
queries executed via the SQL EXECUTE command and the queries included within the Begin
SQL/End SQL tags will be redirected to this connection.

SQL LOGIN("IP:192.168.45.34:20150";"John";"azerty";*)

6. Opening of a direct connection with the 4D Server v11 SQL application which publishes,
on the local network, a database whose publication name is "Accounts_DB." The TCP port
used for the SQL server of both databases (set on the SQL/Configuration page of the
Preferences) must be the same (19812 by default). The SQL queries executed via the SQL
EXECUTE command will be redirected to this connection; the queries included within the
Begin SQL/End SQL tags will not be redirected.

SQL LOGIN ("4D:Accounts_DB";"John";"azerty")

1566 4D Language Reference

7. This example illustrates the connection possibilities provided by the SQL LOGIN
command:

ARRAY TEXT (30;aNames)

ARRAY LONGINT(aAges;0)
SQL LOGIN("ODBC:MyORACLE";"Marc";"azerty")
If(OK=1)
`The following query will be redirected to the external ORACLE database
SQL EXECUTE("SELECT Name, Age FROM PERSONS";aNames; aAges)
`The following query will be sent to the local 4D database
Begin SQL
SELECT Name, Age
FROM PERSONS
INTO :aNames, :aAges;
End SQL
`The following SQL LOGIN command closes the current connection
`with the external ORACLE database and opens a new connection
`with an external MySQL database
SQL LOGIN ("ODBC:MySQL";"Jean";"qwerty";*)
If(OK=1)
`The following query will be redirected to the external MySQL database
SQL EXECUTE("SELECT Name, Age FROM PERSONS";aNames; aAges)
`The following query will also be redirected to the external MySQL database
Begin SQL
SELECT Name, Age
FROM PERSONS
INTO :aNames, :aAges;
End SQL
SQL LOGOUT
`The following query will be sent to the local 4D database
Begin SQL
SELECT Name, Age
FROM PERSONS
INTO :aNames, :aAges;
End SQL
End if
End if

See Also
Begin SQL, End SQL, SQL LOGOUT.

System Variables or Sets

If the connection is successful, the system variable OK is set to 1; otherwise, it is set to 0.

4D Language Reference 1567

SQL LOGOUT SQL

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SQL LOGOUT

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
The SQL LOGOUT command closes the connection of the current process (if applicable). If
there is no connection, the command does nothing.

See Also
ODBC LOGIN.

System Variables or Sets

If the logout is performed properly, the system variable OK is set to 1; otherwise, it is set to
0. You can intercept this error with an error-handling method installed by the ON ERR CALL
command.

1568 4D Language Reference

SQL SET OPTION SQL

version 11.4 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SQL SET OPTION (option; value)

Parameter Type Description

option Longint → Number of option to set
value Longint | String → New value of option

Description
The SQL SET OPTION command is used to modify the value of the option passed in option.

option can have one of the following values, located in the “SQL” theme:
Constant Description and possible values
SQL Asynchronous (1) 0 = Synchronous connection (default value),
1 (or value other than 0) = Asynchronous connection
SQL Max Rows (2) Maximum number of rows in resulting group
(used for previews)
SQL Max Data Length (3) Maximum length of data returned
SQL Query Time Out (4) Maximum timeout awaiting response when executing
the SQL EXECUTE command.
Values: time in seconds
By default: no timeout
SQL Connection Time Out (5) Maximum timeout awaiting response when executing
the SQL LOGIN command.
This value must be set before opening the connection
in order to be taken into account
Possible values: time in seconds
By default: no timeout
SQL Charset (100) Text encoding used for requests sent to external sources
(via the SQL pass-through).
The modification is carried out for the current process and
the current connection.
Possible values: MIBEnum identifier (see note 2) or
"WCHAR"
string (see note 3)
By default: 106 (UTF-8)

Notes:
1. When you work with the internal SQL kernel of 4D, the SQL Asynchronous option serves
no purpose due to the fact that this type of connection is always synchronous.

4D Language Reference 1569

2. MIBEnum numbers are referenced at the following address:
http://www.iana.org/assignments/character-sets.
3. When the "WCHAR" string is passed as the value to SQL Charset, the encoding used by
the 4D SQL server is automatically adapted to the running platform:
- Under Windows, UTF-16 is used,
- Under Mac OS, UTF-32 is used.

See Also
SQL GET OPTION.

System Variables or Sets

If the command was properly executed, the system variable OK returns 1. Otherwise, it
returns 0.

1570 4D Language Reference

SQL SET PARAMETER SQL

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SQL SET PARAMETER (object; paramType)

Parameter Type Description

object 4D object → 4D object to be used (variable, array or field)
paramType Longint → Type of parameter

Description
The SQL SET PARAMETER command allows the use of a 4D variable, array or field value in
SQL requests.

Note: It is also possible to directly insert the name of a 4D object to be used (variable, array
or field) between the << and >> characters in the text of the request (see example 1). For
more information about this, please refer to the SQL Commands section.

- In the object parameter, pass the 4D object (variable, array or field) to be used in the
request.
- In the paramType parameter, pass the SQL type of the parameter. You can pass a value or
use one of the following constants, located in the “SQL” theme:
Constant Type Value
SQL Param In Longint 1
SQL Param In Out Longint 2
SQL Param Out Longint 4

The value of the 4D object replaces the ? character in the SQL request (standard syntax).
If the request contains more than one ? character, several calls to SQL SET PARAMETER will
be necessary. The values of the 4D objects will be assigned sequentially in the request, in
accordance with the execution order of the commands.

Examples
1. This example is used to execute an SQL request which calls the associated 4D variables
directly:

C_TEXT(MyText)
C_LONGINT(MyLongint)

SQL LOGIN("mysql";"root";"")
SQLStmt:="insert into app_testTable (alpha_field, longint_field) VALUES (<<MyText>>,
<<MyLongint>>)"

4D Language Reference 1571

 For (vCounter;1;10)
MyText:="Text"+String(vCounter)
MyLongint:=vCounter
SQL EXECUTE(SQLStmt)
SQL CANCEL LOAD
End for
SQL LOGOUT

2. Same example as the previous one, but using the SQL SET PARAMETER command:

C_TEXT(MyText)
C_LONGINT(MyLongint)

SQL LOGIN("mysql";"root";"")
SQLStmt:="insert into app_testTable (alpha_field, longint_field) VALUES (?,?)"
For (vCounter;1;10)
MyText:="Text"+String(vCounter)
MyLongint:=vCounter
SQL SET PARAMETER(MyText;SQL Param In)
SQL SET PARAMETER(MyLongint;SQL Param In)
SQL EXECUTE(SQLStmt)
SQL CANCEL LOAD
End for
SQL LOGOUT

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been executed correctly, the system variable OK returns 1. Otherwise,
it returns 0.

1572 4D Language Reference

START SQL SERVER SQL

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

START SQL SERVER

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
The START SQL SERVER command launches the integrated SQL server in the 4D application
where it has been executed. Once launched, the SQL server can respond to external SQL
queries.

Note: This command does not affect the internal functioning of the 4D SQL kernel. The
SQL kernal is always available for internal queries.

See Also
STOP SQL SERVER.

System Variables or Sets

If the SQL server has been launched correctly, the OK system variable is set to 1. Otherwise,
it is set to 0.

4D Language Reference 1573

STOP SQL SERVER SQL

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STOP SQL SERVER

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
The STOP SQL SERVER command stops the integrated SQL server in the 4D application
where it has been executed.

If the SQL server was launched, all the SQL connections are interrupted and the server no
longer accepts any external SQL queries. If the SQL server was not launched, the command
does nothing.

Note: This command does not affect the internal functioning of the 4D SQL kernel. The
SQL kernel is always available for internal queries.

See Also
START SQL SERVER.

1574 4D Language Reference

USE EXTERNAL DATABASE SQL

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Compatibility Note: This command has been replaced by the SQL LOGIN command starting
with version 11.3 of 4D. It has been kept for compatibility reasons only and will not be
maintained in future versions of the program.

USE EXTERNAL DATABASE (sourceName{; user; password})

Parameter Type Description

sourceName String → Name of ODBC data source to connect to
user String → User name
password String → User password

System Variables or Sets

If the command is executed correctly, the OK system variable is set to 1. Otherwise, it is set
to 0 and an error is generated.

4D Language Reference 1575

USE INTERNAL DATABASE SQL

version 11.3 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Compatibility Note: This command has been replaced by the SQL LOGOUT command
starting with version 11.3 of 4D. It has been kept for compatibility reasons only and will
not be maintained in future versions of the program.

USE INTERNAL DATABASE

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

System Variables or Sets

If the command is executed correctly, the OK system variable is set to 1. Otherwise, it is set
to 0 and an error is generated.

1576 4D Language Reference

48
______________________
String

4D Language Reference 1577

1578 4D Language Reference
Character Reference Symbols String

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Introduction
The character reference symbols:

are used to refer to a single character within a string. This syntax allows you to individually
address the characters of a text variable, string variable, or field.

Note: On Macintosh, you obtain the first two symbols by typing Option+"<" and Option+">".

If the character reference symbols appear on the left side of the assignment operator (:=), a
character is assigned to the referenced position in the string. For example, if vsName is not an
empty string, the following line sets the first character of vsName to uppercase:

If (vsName#"")
vsName[[1]]:=Uppercase(vsName[[1]])
End if

Otherwise, if the character reference symbols appear within an expression, they return the
character (to which they refer) as a 1-character string. For example:

` The following example tests if the last character of vtText is an At sign "@"
If (vtText # "")
If (Character code(Substring(vtText;Length(vtText);1))=At Sign)
` ...
End if
End if

` Using the character reference syntax, you would write in a simpler manner:
If (vtText # "")
If (Character code(vtText[[Length(vtText)]])=At Sign)
` ...
End if
End if

4D Language Reference 1579

Advanced note about invalid character reference
When you use the character reference symbols, you must address existing characters in the
string in the same way you address existing elements of an array. For example if you address
the 20th character of a string variable, this variable MUST contain at least 20 characters.
• Failing to do so, in interpreted mode, does not cause a syntax error.
• Failing to do so, in compiled mode (with no options), may lead to memory corruption, if, for
instance, you write a character beyond the end of a string or a text.
• Failing to do so, in compiled mode, causes an error with the option Range Checking On. For
example, executing the following code:

` Very bad and nasty thing to do, boo!

vsAnyText:=""
vsAnyText[[1]]:="A"

will trigger the Runtime Error shown here:

Example
The following project method capitalizes the first character of each word of the text received
as parameter and returns the resulting capitalized text:

` Capitalize text project method

` Capitalize text ( Text ) -> Text
` Capitalize text ( Source text ) -> Capitalized text

1580 4D Language Reference

 $0:=$1
$vlLen:=Length($0)
If ($vlLen>0)
$0[[1]]:=Uppercase($0[[1]])
For ($vlChar;1;$vlLen-1)
If (Position($0[[$vlChar]];" !&()-{}:;<>?/,.=+*")>0)
$0[[$vlChar+1]]:=Uppercase($0[[$vlChar+1]])
End if
End for
End if

For example, the line:

ALERT(Capitalize text ("hello, my name is jane doe and i'm running for president!"))

displays the alert shown here:

See Also
ASCII Codes, Char, Character code.

4D Language Reference 1581

Change string String

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Change string (source; newChars; where) → String

Parameter Type Description

source String → Original string
newChars String → New characters
where Number → Where to start the changes

Function result String ← Resulting string

Description
Change string changes a group of characters in source and returns the resulting string. Change
string overlays source, with the characters in newChars, at the character described by where.

If newChars is an empty string (""), Change string returns source unchanged. Change string
always returns a string of the same length as source. If where is less than one or greater than
the length of source, Change string returns source.

Change string is different from Insert string in that it overwrites characters instead of inserting
them.

Example
The following example illustrates the use of Change string. The results are assigned to the
variable vtResult.

vtResult := Change string ("Acme"; "CME"; 2) ` vtResult gets "ACME"

vtResult := Change string ("November";"Dec"; 1) ` vtResult gets "December"

See Also
Delete string, Insert string, Replace string.

1582 4D Language Reference

Char String

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Char (charCode) → String

Parameter Type Description

charCode Number → Character code

Function result String ← Character represented by the charCode

Description
The Char command returns the character whose code is charCode.

• If the database operates in Unicode mode (default mode for databases created starting with
4D version 11), you must pass a UTF-16 value (included between 1 and 65535) in charCode.
• If the database operates in ASCII compatibility mode, you must pass an ASCII code (included
between 0 and 255) in charCode.
For more information about the different modes for managing strings in 4D, please refer to
the ASCII Codes section.

Tip: In editing a method, the command Char is commonly used to specify characters that
cannot be entered from the keyboard or that would be interpreted as an editing command in
the Method editor.

Important: In ASCII compatibility mode, all the text values, fields, or variables that you have
not yet converted to another ASCII map are Mac OS-encoded on both Macintosh and
Windows. For more information, see the section ASCII Codes.

Example
The following example uses Char to insert a carriage return within the text of an alert message:
ALERT("Employees: "+String(Records in table([Employees]))+Char(Carriage return)+
"Press OK to continue.")

See Also
ASCII Codes, Character code, Character Reference Symbols, Unicode Codes.

4D Language Reference 1583

Character code String

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Character code (character) → Number

Parameter Type Description

character String → Character for which you want to get the code

Function result Number ← Character code

Description
The Character code command returns the current character code of character.
• If the database is operating in Unicode mode (default mode for databases created with
version 11 and higher of 4D), the command returns the Unicode UTF-16 code of character
(included between 1 and 65535).
• If the database is operating in ASCII compatibility mode, the command returns the ASCII
code of character (included between 0 and 255).
For more information about the different modes for managing strings in 4D, please refer to
the ASCII Codes section.

If there is more than one character in the string, Character code returns only the code of the
first character.

The Char function is the counterpart of Character code. It returns the character that a UTF-16
or ASCII code represents.

Important: In ASCII compatibility mode, all the text values, fields, or variables that you have
not yet converted to another ASCII map are Mac OS-encoded on both Macintosh and
Windows. For more information, see the section ASCII Codes.

Examples
1. Uppercase and lowercase characters are considered equal within a comparison. You can use
Character code to differentiate between uppercase and lowercase characters. Thus, this line
returns True:

("A" = "a")

1584 4D Language Reference

On the other hand, this line returns False:

(Character code("A")=Character code("a"))

2. This example returns the code of the first character of the string "ABC":

GetCode:=Character code("ABC") ` GetCode gets 65, the character code of A

3. The following example tests for carriage returns and tabs:

For($vlChar;1;Length(vtText))
Case of
: (vtText[[$vlChar]]=Char(Carriage return))
` Do something
: (vtText[[$vlChar]]=Char(Tab))
` Do something else
: (...)
` ...
End case
End for

When executed multiple times on large texts, this test will run faster when compiled if it is
written this way:

For($vlChar;1;Length(vtText))
$vlCode:=Character code(vtText[[$vlChar]])
Case of
: ($vlCode=Carriage return)
` Do something
: ($vlCode=Tab)
` Do something else
: (...)
` ...
End case
End for

The second piece of code runs faster for two reasons: it does only one character reference by
iteration and uses LongInt comparisons instead of string comparisons to test for carriage
returns and tabs. Use this technique when working with common codes such as CR and TAB.

See Also
ASCII Codes, Char, Character Reference Symbols.

4D Language Reference 1585

Convert case String

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Preliminary note
This command meets very specific needs related to non-Roman character sets. Its use is
very limited.

Convert case (string; target; srcMask) → String

Parameter Type Description

string String → String to be converted
target Integer → Type of conversion
srcMask Longint → Part to be converted

Function result String ← Converted string

Description
The Convert case command calls the TransliterateText function of the Apple Script Manager
directly, which permits the conversion of text into different subvariants on non-Roman
systems. For a complete description of this function, please refer to the following address:
http://developer.apple.com/documentation/mac/Text/Text-402.html

The parameters of this command correspond to those of the TransliterateText function. Note
that 4D uses the smSystemScript scriptCode.

1586 4D Language Reference

CONVERT FROM TEXT String

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

CONVERT FROM TEXT (4Dtext; charSet; convertedBLOB)

Parameter Type Description

4Dtext String → Text expressed in current character set of 4D
charSet String | Longint → Name or Number of character set
convertedBLOB BLOB ← BLOB containing converted text

Description
The CONVERT FROM TEXT command can be used to convert a text expressed in the current
character set of 4D to a text expressed in another character set.

In the 4Dtext parameter, pass the text to be converted. This text is expressed in the
character set of 4D. In version 11, 4D uses the Unicode character set by default.

In charSet, pass the character set to be used for the conversion. You can pass a string
containing the standard name of the set (for example “ISO-8859-1” or “UTF-8”), or its
MIBEnum identifier.

Here is a list of character sets supported by the CONVERT FROM TEXT and Convert to text
commands:
MIBEnum Name(s)
1017 UTF-32
1018 UTF-32BE
1019 UTF-32LE
1015 UTF-16
1013 UTF-16BE
1014 UTF-16LE
106 UTF-8
1012 UTF-7
3 US-ASCII
3 ANSI_X3.4-1968
3 ANSI_X3.4-1986
3 ASCII
3 cp367
3 csASCII
3 IBM367
3 iso-ir-6
3 ISO_646.irv:1991
3 ISO646-US

4D Language Reference 1587

3 us
2011 IBM437
2011 cp437
2011 437
2011 csPC8CodePage437
2028 ebcdic-cp-us
2028 cp037
2028 csIBM037
2028 ebcdic-cp-ca
2028 ebcdic-cp-n
2028 ebcdic-cp-wt
2028 IBM037
2027 MacRoman
2027 x-mac-roman
2027 mac
2027 macintosh
2027 csMacintosh
2252 windows-1252
1250 MacCE
1250 x-mac-ce
2250 windows-1250
1251 x-mac-cyrillic
2251 windows-1251
1253 x-mac-greek
2253 windows-1253
1254 x-mac-turkish
2254 windows-1254
1256 x-mac-arabic
2256 windows-1256
1255 x-mac-hebrew
2255 windows-1255
1257 x-mac-ce
2257 windows-1257
17 Shift_JIS
17 csShiftJIS
17 MS_Kanji
17 Shift-JIS
39 ISO-2022-JP
39 csISO2022JP
2026 Big5
2026 csBig5
38 EUC-KR
38 csEUCKR
2084 KOI8-R

1588 4D Language Reference

2084 csKOI8R
4 ISO-8859-1
4 CP819
4 csISOLatin1
4 IBM819
4 iso-ir-100
4 ISO_8859-1
4 ISO_8859-1:1987
4 l1
4 latin1
5 ISO-8859-2
5 csISOLatin2
5 iso-ir-101
5 ISO_8859-2
5 ISO_8859-2:1987
5 l2
5 latin2
6 ISO-8859-3
6 csISOLatin3
6 ISO-8859-3:1988
6 iso-ir-109
6 ISO_8859-3
6 l3
6 latin3
7 ISO-8859-4
7 csISOLatin4
7 ISO-8859-4:1988
7 iso-ir-110
7 ISO_8859-4
7 l4
7 latin4
8 ISO-8859-5
8 csISOLatinCyrillic
8 cyrillic
8 ISO-8859-5:1988
8 iso-ir-144
8 ISO_8859-5
9 ISO-8859-6
9 arabic
9 ASMO-708
9 csISOLatinArabic
9 ECMA-114
9 ISO-8859-6:1987
9 iso-ir-127

4D Language Reference 1589

9 ISO_8859-6
10 ISO-8859-7
10 csISOLatinGreek
10 ECMA-118
10 ELOT_928
10 greek
10 greek8
10 iso-ir-126
10 ISO_8859-7
10 ISO_8859-7:1987
11 ISO-8859-8
11 csISOLatinHebrew
11 hebrew
11 iso-ir-138
11 ISO_8859-8
11 ISO_8859-8:1988
12 ISO-8859-9
12 csISOLatin5
12 iso-ir-148
12 ISO_8859-9
12 ISO_8859-9:1989
12 l5
12 latin5
13 ISO-8859-10
13 csISOLatin6
13 iso-ir-157
13 ISO_8859-10
13 ISO_8859-10:1992
13 l6
13 latin6
109 ISO-8859-13
111 ISO-8859-15
111 Latin-9
2025 GB2312
2025 csGB2312
2025 x-mac-chinesesimp
2025 x-mac-chinesesimp
57 GB_2312-80
57 csISO58GB231280

Note: Several rows have the same MIBEnum identifier because a character set can have
more than one name (alias).

For more information about the names of character sets, please refer to the following
address: http://www.iana.org/assignments/character-sets

1590 4D Language Reference

After execution of the command, the converted text will be returned in the convertedBLOB
BLOB. This BLOB can be read by the Convert to text command.

Note: This command only works when 4D is executed in Unicode mode (the Unicode
option must be checked in the 4D Preferences, see the "ASCII Codes" section). If it is used in
compatibility mode (non-Unicode), convertedBLOB is returned empty and the OK variable
is set to 0.

See Also
Convert to text.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been correctly executed, the OK variable is set to 1. Otherwise, it is set
to 0.

4D Language Reference 1591

Convert to text String

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Convert to text (BLOB; charSet) → Text

Parameter Type Description

BLOB BLOB → BLOB containing text expressed in a
specific character set
charSet String | Longint → Name or Number of BLOB character set

Function result Text ← Contents of BLOB expressed in 4D character set

Description
The Convert to text command converts the text contained in the blob parameter and
returns it in text expressed in the character set of 4D. In version 11, 4D uses the Unicode
character set by default.

In charSet, pass the character set of the text contained in blob, which will be used for the
conversion. You can pass a string providing the standard name of the character set, or one
of its aliases (for example, “ISO-8859-1” or “UTF-8”), or its identifier (longint). For more
information, please refer to the description of the CONVERT FROM TEXT command.

Note: This command only works when 4D is executed in Unicode mode (the Unicode
option must be checked in the 4D Preferences, see the “ASCII Codes” section). If it is used in
compatibility mode (non-Unicode), it returns an empty string and the OK variable is set to
0.

See Also
CONVERT FROM TEXT.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been correctly executed, the OK variable is set to 1. Otherwise, it is set
to 0.

1592 4D Language Reference

Delete string String

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Delete string (source; where; numChars) → String

Parameter Type Description

source String → String from which to delete characters
where Number → First character to delete
numChars Number → Number of characters to delete

Function result String ← Resulting string

Description
Delete string deletes numChars from source, starting at where, and returns the resulting string.

Delete string returns the same string as source when:

• source is an empty string
• where is greater than the length of Source
• numChars is zero (0)

If where is less than one, the characters are deleted from the beginning of the string.

If where plus numChars is equal to or greater than the length of source, the characters are
deleted from where to the end of source.

Example
The following example illustrates the use of Delete string. The results are assigned to the
variable vtResult.

vtResult:=Delete string("Lamborghini"; 6; 6) ` vtResult gets "Lambo"

vtResult:=Delete string("Indentation"; 6; 2) ` vtResult gets "Indention"
` vtResult gets the first two characters of vtOtherVar
vtResult:=Delete string(vtOtherVar;3;32000)

See Also
Change string, Insert string, Replace string.

4D Language Reference 1593

Get localized string String

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get localized string (resName) → String

Parameter Type Description

resName String → Name of resname attribute

Function result String ← Value of string designated by resName

in current language

Description
The Get localized string command returns the value of the string designated by the resName
attribute for the current language.

This command only works within an XLIFF architecture. For more information about this
type of architecture, please refer to the description of XLIFF support in the Design Reference
manual.

Note: The Get current database localization command can be used to find out the language
used by the application.

Pass the resource name of the string for which you want to get the translation into the
current target language in resName.

Note that XLIFF is diacritical.

Example
Here is an extract from an .xlf file:

<file source-language="en-US" target-language="fr-FR">

[...]
<trans-unit resname="Show on disk">
<source>Show on disk</source>
<target>Montrer sur le disque</target>
</trans-unit>

1594 4D Language Reference

After executing the following statement:

$FRvalue:=Get localized string("Show on disk")

... if the current language is French, $FRvalue contains “Montrer sur le disque”.

See Also
Get current database localization.

System Variables or Sets

If the command is executed correctly, the OK variable is set to 1. If resName is not found,
the command returns an empty string and the OK variable is set to 0.

4D Language Reference 1595

Insert string String

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Insert string (source; what; where) → String

Parameter Type Description

source String → String in which to insert the other string
what String → String to insert
where Number → Where to insert

Function result String ← Resulting string

Description
Insert string inserts a string into source and returns the resulting string. Insert string inserts the
string what before the character at position where.

If what is an empty string (""), Insert string returns source unchanged.

If where is greater than the length of source, then what is appended to source. If where is less
than one (1), then what is inserted before source.

Insert string is different from Change string in that it inserts characters instead of overwriting
them.

Example
The following example illustrates the use of Insert string. The results are assigned to the
variable vtResult.

vtResult := Insert string ("The tree"; " green"; 4) ` vtResult gets "The green tree"
vtResult := Insert string ("Shut"; "o"; 3) ` vtResult gets "Shout"
vtResult := Insert string ("Indention"; "ta"; 6) ` vtResult gets "Indentation"

See Also
Change string, Delete string, Replace string.

1596 4D Language Reference

ISO to Mac String

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

ISO to Mac (text) → String

Parameter Type Description

text String → Text expressed using standard Web character set

Function result String ← Text expressed using Mac OS ASCII map

Compatibility Note: This command only works when the database is executed in ASCII
compatibility mode. In Unicode mode, it does nothing (the text string is returned without
modification). Beginning with version 11 of 4D, this command is thus obsolete and its use is
no longer recommended. It is recommended to convert character strings using the CONVERT
FROM TEXT or Convert to text commands.

Description
The ISO to Mac command returns text, expressed using the Mac OS ASCII map, equivalent to
the text you pass in text, expressed using the ISO Latin-1 character map.

You will generally not need to use this command.

This command expects a text parameter expressed using the ISO Latin-1 character map.

4D converts characters received from and sent to a Web Browser. As a result, the text values
you deal with, inside a Web Connection process, are always expressed using the Mac OS ASCII
map.

Generally, when running on Windows, you do not need to convert ASCII codes. In ASCII
compatibility mode (non-Unicode), when you copy or paste text between 4D and Windows or
when you import or export data, 4D automatically performs these conversions. However,
when you use disk read/write commands such as SEND PACKET or RECEIVE PACKET, 4D does
not perform any ASCII code conversion.

Within 4D, all the text values, fields, or variables that you have not yet converted to another
ASCII map are Mac OS-encoded on both Macintosh and Windows. For more information, see
the ASCII Codes section.

4D Language Reference 1597

On Windows, it is necessary that, in this case, you do not filter the characters using an output
filter ASCII map.

Consequently, no matter what the platform, if you want to use RECEIVE PACKET to read ISO
Latin-1 HTML documents from the disk, you just need to convert the text using ISO to Mac.
This is the main purpose of the ISO to Mac command.

Example
The following line of code converts the (assumed) ISO Latin-1 encoded text stored in
vtSomeText into a Mac OS encoded text:

` Read some text from an ISO Latin-1 HTML document

RECEIVE PACKET ($vhDocRef;vtSomeText;16*1024)
vtSomeText:=ISO to Mac(vtSomeText)

See Also
ASCII Codes, Mac to ISO, RECEIVE PACKET, USE CHARACTER SET.

1598 4D Language Reference

Length String

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Length (aString) → Number

Parameter Type Description

aString String → String for which to return length

Function result Number ← Length of string

Description
Length is used to find the length of aString. Length returns the number of characters that are in
aString.

Note: The test If (vtAnyText="") is equivalent to the test If(Length(vtAnyText)=0).

Example
This example illustrates the use of Length. The results, described in the comments, are assigned
to the variable vlResult.
vlResult := Length ("Topaz") ` vlResult gets 5
vlResult := Length ("Citizen") ` vlResult gets 7

4D Language Reference 1599

Lowercase String

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Lowercase (aString; *) → String

Parameter Type Description

aString String → String to convert to lowercase
* * → If passed: keep accents

Function result String ← String in lowercase

Description
Lowercase takes aString and returns the string with all alphabetic characters in lowercase.

The optional * parameter, if passed, indicates that any accented characters present in aString
must be returned as accented lowercase characters. By default, when this parameter is omitted,
accented characters “lose” their accents after the conversion is carried out.

Examples
1. The following project method capitalizes the string or text received as parameter. For
instance, Caps ("john") would return "John".

` Caps project method

` Caps ( String ) -> String
` Caps ( Any text or string ) -> Capitalized text

$0:=Lowercase($1)
If (Length($0)>0)
$0[[1]]:=Uppercase($0[[1]])
End if

2. This example compares the results obtained according to whether or not the * parameter
has been passed:

$thestring:=Lowercase("DÉJÀ VU") ` $thestring is "deja vu"

$thestring:=Lowercase("DÉJÀ VU";*) ` $thestring is "déjà vu"

See Also
Uppercase.

1600 4D Language Reference

Mac to ISO String

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Mac to ISO (text) → String

Parameter Type Description

text String → Text expressed using Mac OS ASCII map

Function result String ← Text expressed using standard Web character set

Compatibility Note: This command only works when the database is executed in ASCII
compatibility mode. In Unicode mode, it does nothing (the text string is returned without
modification). Beginning with version 11 of 4D, this command is thus obsolete and its use is
no longer recommended. It is recommended to convert character strings using the CONVERT
FROM TEXT or Convert to text commands.

Description
The Mac to ISO command returns text equivalent to that passed in text, but expressed using
the Web characters table found in the Standard Set menu of the Web/Options page in the
application Preferences.

You will generally not need to use this command.

This command expects a text parameter expressed using the Mac OS ASCII map.

4D converts characters received from and sent to a Web Browser. As a result, the text values
you deal with, inside a Web Connection process, are always expressed using the Mac OS ASCII
map.

Generally, when running on Windows, you do not need to convert ASCII codes. In ASCII
compatibility mode (non-Unicode), when you copy or paste text between 4D and Windows or
when you import or export data, 4D automatically performs these conversions. However,
when you use disk read/write commands such as SEND PACKET or RECEIVE PACKET, you need
to explicitly invoke ASCII conversions.

Within 4D, all the text values, fields, or variables that you have not yet converted to another
ASCII map are Mac OS-encoded on both Macintosh and Windows. For more information, see
the ASCII Codes section.

4D Language Reference 1601

On Windows, it is necessary that, in this case, you do not filter the characters using an output
filter ASCII map.

Consequently, no matter what the platform, if you want to write ISO Latin-1 HTML
documents or documents using other Web character sets on disk, you just need to convert the
text using Mac to ISO. This is the main purpose of the Mac to ISO command.

Examples
1. The following line of code converts by default the (assumed) Mac OS encoded text stored in
vtSomeText into an ISO-Latin 1 encoded text:

vtSomeText:=Mac to ISO(vtSomeText)

2. While developing a 4D Web Server application, you build HTML documents that you later
send over Intranet or Internet, using the SEND HTML FILE command. Some of these documents
have references or links to other documents.

The following project method calculates an HTML-based pathname from the Windows or
Macintosh pathname received as parameter:

` HTML Pathname project method

` HTML Pathname ( Text ) -> Text
` HTML Pathname ( Native File Manager Pathname ) -> HTML Pathname

C_TEXT($0;$1)
C_LONGINT($vlChar;$vlAscii)
C_STRING(31;$vsChar)

$0:=""
If (On Windows )
$1:=Replace string($1;"\";"/")
Else
$1:=Replace string($1;":";"/")
End if
$1:=Mac to ISO($1)
For ($vlChar;1;Length($1))
$vlAscii:=Character code($1[[$vlChar]])
Case of
: ($vlAscii>=127)
$vsChar:="%"+Substring(String($vlAscii;"&$");2)

1602 4D Language Reference

 : (Position(Char($vlAscii);":<>&%= "+Char(34))>0)
$vsChar:="%"+Substring(String($vlAscii;"&$");2)
Else
$vsChar:=Char($vlAscii)
End case
$0:=$0+$vsChar
End for

Note: The On Windows project method is listed in the System Documents section.

Once this project method is present in your database, if you want to include a list of FTP links
to documents present in a particular directory, you can write:

` Interprocess variables set, for instance, in the On Startup database method

<>vsFTPURL:="ftp://123.4.56.78/Spiders/"
<>vsFTPDirectory:="APS500:Spiders:" ` Here, a Mac OS File Manager pathname
` ...

` ...
ARRAY STRING(31;$asDocuments;0)
DOCUMENT LIST(...;$asDocuments)
$vlNbDocuments:=Size of array($asDocuments)
jsHandler:=...
For ($vlDocument;1;$vlNbDocuments)
vtHTMLCode:=vtHTMLCode+"<P><A HREF="+Char(34)+<>vsFTPURL+HTML Pathname
(Substring($1+$asDocuments{$vlDocument};Length(<>vsFTPDirectory)+1))+
Char(34)+jsHandler+"> "+$asDocuments{$vlDocument}+
"</A></P>"+Char(13)
End for
` ...

See Also
ASCII Codes, ISO to Mac, SEND HTML FILE, SEND PACKET, USE CHARACTER SET.

4D Language Reference 1603

Mac to Win String

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Mac to Win (text) → String

Parameter Type Description

text String → Text expressed using Mac OS ASCII map

Function result String ← Text expressed using Windows ANSI map

Compatibility Note: This command only works when the database is executed in ASCII
compatibility mode. In Unicode mode, it does nothing (the text string is returned without
modification). Beginning with version 11 of 4D, this command is thus obsolete and its use is
no longer recommended. It is recommended to convert character strings using the CONVERT
FROM TEXT or Convert to text commands.

Description
The Mac to Win command returns a text expressed using the Windows ANSI map that is
equivalent to the text you pass in text, which is expressed using the Mac OS ASCII map.

This command expects a Text type parameter that is expressed using the Mac OS ASCII map.

Generally, when running on Windows, you do not need to use this command to convert
ASCII codes. In ASCII compatibility mode (non-Unicode), when you copy or paste text
between 4D and Windows or when you import or export data, 4D automatically performs
these conversions. However, when you use disk read/write commands such as SEND PACKET or
RECEIVE PACKET, you need to explicitly perform ASCII conversions. This is the main purpose of
the Mac to Win command.

Within 4D, all the text values, fields, or variables that you have not yet converted to another
ASCII map are Mac OS-encoded on both Macintosh and Windows. For more information, see
the section ASCII Codes.

Note: This command replaces the CR (Carriage return) characters with CRLF (Carriage return +
Line feed, character codes 13 and 10) characters. Consequently, the text returned may be
longer than the original text.

1604 4D Language Reference

Example
On Windows, when you write characters into a document using SEND PACKET, if you do not
use an output ASCII map for filtering characters from Mac OS to Windows (see USE
CHARACTER SET), you need to convert the text from Mac OS to Windows yourself. You can do
it this way:
` ...
SEND PACKET ($vhDocRef;Mac to Win(vtSomeText))
` ...

See Also
ASCII Codes, SEND PACKET, USE CHARACTER SET, Win to Mac.

4D Language Reference 1605

Match regex String

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Match regex (pattern; aString{; start{; pos_found; length_found; *}}) → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

pattern Text → Regular expression
aString Text → String in which search will be done
start Number → Position in aString where search will start
pos_found Longint Var | Longint Array ← Position of occurrence
length_found Longint Var | Longint Array ← Length of occurrence
* * → If passed: only searches at position indicated

Function result Boolean ← True = search has found an occurrence;

Otherwise, False.

Description
The Match regex command can be used to check the conformity of a character string with
respect to a set of synthesized rules by means of a meta-language called “regular
expression” or “rational expression.” The regex abbreviation is commonly used to indicate
these types of notations.

Pass the regular expression to search for in pattern. This consists of a set of characters used
for describing a character string, using special characters.

Pass the string in which to search for the regular expression in aString.

In start, pass the position at which to start the search in aString.

If pos_found and length_found are variables, the command returns the position and length
of the occurrence in these variables. If you pass arrays, the command returns the position
and length of the occurrence in the element zero of the arrays and the positions and
lengths of the groups captured by the regular expression in the following elements.

The optional * parameter indicates, when it is passed, that the search must be carried out at
the position specified by start without searching any further in the case of failure.

The command returns True if the search has found an occurrence.

For more information about regex, refer to the following address:

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression

1606 4D Language Reference

For more information about the syntax of the regular expression passed in the pattern
parameter, refer to the following address:
http://www.icu-project.org/userguide/regexp.html

Examples
This command can be used in several ways, as illustrated by the following examples:

1. Search for complete equality:

vfound:=Match regex(pattern;mytext)

QUERY BY FORMULA([Employees];Match regex(".*smith.*"; [Employees]name))

2. Search in text by position:

vfound:=Match regex( pattern;mytext; start; pos_found; length_found)
Example to display all the $1 tags:

start:=1
Repeat
vfound:=Match regex("<.*>";$1;start;pos_found;length_found)
If(vfound)
ALERT(Substring($1;pos_found;length_found))
start:=pos_found+length_found
End if
Until(Not(vfound))

3. Search with support of “capture groups”:

vfound:=Match regex( pattern;mytext; start; pos_found_array; length_found_array)

ARRAY LONGINT(pos_found_array;0)
ARRAY LONGINT(length_found_array;0)
vfound:=Match regex("(.*)stuff(.*)";$1;1;pos_found_array; length_found_array)
If(vfound)
$group1:=Substring($1;pos_found_array{1};length_found_array{1})
$group2:=Substring($1;pos_found_array{2};length_found_array{2})
End if

4. Search limiting the comparison of the pattern to the position indicated:

Add a star to the end of one of the two previous syntaxes.

vfound:=Match regex("a.b";"---a-b---";1;$pos_found;$length_found)
`returns True
vfound:=Match regex("a.b";"---a-b---";1;$pos_found;$length_found;*)
`returns False
vfound:=Match regex("a.b";"---a-b---";4;$pos_found;$length_found;*)
`returns True

4D Language Reference 1607

Note: The positions and lengths returned are only meaningful in Unicode mode or if the
text being worked with is of the 7-bit ASCII type.

Error Handling
In the event of an error, the command generates an error that you can intercept via a
method installed by the ON ERR CALL command.

1608 4D Language Reference

Num String

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Num (expression; separator) → Number

Parameter Type Description

expression String | Boolean | Num → String for which to return the numeric form, or
Boolean to return 0 or 1, or
Numeric expression
separator String → Decimal separator

Function result Number ← Numeric form of the expression parameter

Description
The Num command returns the numeric form of the String, Boolean or numeric expression
you pass in expression. The optional separator parameter can be used to designate a decimal
separator for evaluating string type expressions.

String Expressions
If expression consists only of one or more alphabetic characters, Num returns a zero. If
expression includes alphabetic and numeric characters, Num ignores the alphabetic
characters. Thus, Num transforms the string "a1b2c3" into the number 123.

Note: Only the first 32 characters of expression are evaluated.

There are three reserved characters that Num treats specially: the decimal separator as
defined in the system (if the separator parameter is not passed), the hyphen “-”, and “e” or
“E”. These characters are interpreted as numeric format characters.
• The decimal separator is interpreted as a decimal place and must appear embedded in a
numeric string. By default, the command uses the decimal separator set by the operating
system. You can modify this character using the separator parameter (see below).
• The hyphen causes the number or exponent to be negative. The hyphen must appear
before any negative numeric characters or after the “e” for an exponent. Except for the “e”
character, if a hyphen is embedded in a numeric string, the portion of the string after the
hyphen is ignored. For example, Num("123-456") returns 123, but Num("-9") returns -9.
• The e or E causes any numeric characters to its right to be interpreted as the power of an
exponent. The “e” must be embedded in a numeric string. Thus, Num("123e–2") returns
1.23.
Note that when the string includes more than on "e", conversion might give different
results under Mac OS and under Windows.

4D Language Reference 1609

The separator parameter can be used to designate a custom decimal separator for evaluating
the expression. When the string to be evaluated is expressed with a decimal separator
different from the system operator, the command returns an incorrect result. The separator
parameter can be used in this case to obtain a correct evaluation. When this parameter is
passed, the command does not take the system decimal separator into account. You can
pass one or more characters.

Note: The GET SYSTEM FORMAT command can be used to find out the current decimal
separator as well as several other regional system parameters.

Boolean Expressions
If you pass a Boolean expression, Num returns 1 if the expression is True; otherwise, it
returns 0 (zero).

Numeric Expressions
If you pass a numeric expression in the expression parameter, Num returns the value passed
in the expression parameter as is. This can be useful more particularly in the case of generic
programming using pointers.

Examples
1. The following example illustrates how Num works when passed a string argument. Each
line assigns a number to the vResult variable. The comments describe the results:

vResult := Num ("ABCD") ` vResult gets 0

vResult := Num ("A1B2C3") ` vResult gets 123
vResult := Num ("123") ` vResult gets 123
vResult := Num ("123.4") ` vResult gets 123.4
vResult := Num ("–123") ` vResult gets –123
vResult := Num ("–123e2") ` vResult gets –12300

2. Here, [Client]Debt is compared with $1000. The Num command applied to these
comparisons returns 1 or 0. Multiplying 1 or 0 with a string repeats the string once or
returns the empty string. As a result, [Client]Risk gets either “Good” or “Bad”:

` If client owes less than 1000, a good risk.

` If client owes more than 1000, a bad risk.
[Client]Risk:=("Good"*Num ([Client]Debt<1000))+("Bad"*Num([Client]Debt>=1000))

1610 4D Language Reference

3. This example compares the results obtained depending on the “current” separator:

$thestring:="33,333.33"
$thenum:=Num($thestring)
` by default, $thenum equals 33,33333 on a French system
$thenum:=Num($thestring;".")
` $thenum will be correctly evaluated regardless of the system;
` for example, 33 333,33 on a French system

See Also
GET SYSTEM FORMAT, Logical Operators, String, String Operators.

4D Language Reference 1611

Position String

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Position (find; aString{; start{; lengthFound{; *}}}) → Number

Parameter Type Description

find String → String to find
aString String → String in which to search
start Number → Position in string where search will start
lengthFound Longint ← Length of string found
* * → If passed: evaluation based on character codes

Function result Number ← Position of first occurrence

Description
Position returns the position of the first occurrence of find in aString.

If aString does not contain find, it returns a zero (0).

If Position locates an occurrence of find, it returns the position of the first character of the
occurrence in aString.

If you ask for the position of an empty string within an empty string, Position returns zero (0).

By default, the search begins at the first character of aString. The optional start parameter can
be used to specify the character where the search will begin in aString.

The lengthFound parameter, if passed, returns the length of the string actually found by the
search. This parameter is necessary to be able to correctly manage letters that can be written
using one or more characters (e.g.: æ and ae, ß and ss, etc.).
Note that when the * parameter is passed (see below), these letters are not considered as
equivalent (æ # ae); in this mode, lengthFound is always equal to the length of find (if an
occurrence is found).

By default, the command makes global comparisons that take linguistic particularities and
letters that may be written with one or more characters (for example æ = ae) into account. On
the other hand, it is not diacritical (a=A, a=à and so on) and does not take "ignorable"
characters such as carriage returns into account (Unicode specification).

1612 4D Language Reference

To modify this functioning, pass the asterisk * as the last parameter. In this case, comparisons
will be based on character codes. You must pass the * parameter:
• If you want to take special characters into account, used for example as delimiters (carriage
returns, Char(1), etc.),
• If the evaluation of characters must be case sensitive and take accented characters into
account (a#A, a#à and so on).
Note that in this mode, the evaluation does not handle variations in the way words are
written.

Warning: You cannot use the @ wildcard character with Position. For example, if you pass
"abc@" in find, the command will actually look for "abc@" and not for "abc" plus any character.

Examples
1. This example illustrates the use of Position. The results, described in the comments, are
assigned to the variable vlResult.
vlResult := Position ("ll"; "Willow") ` vlResult gets 3
vlResult := Position (vtText1; vtText2) ` Returns first occurrence of vtText1 in vtText2
vlResult := Position ("day"; "Today is the first day";1) ` vlResult gets 3
vlResult := Position ("day"; "Today is the first day";4) ` vlResult gets 20
vlResult := Position ("DAY"; "Today is the first day";1;*) ` vlResult gets 0

vlResult := Position ("œ"; "Bœuf";1;$length) ` vlResult =2, $length = 1

2. In the following example, the lengthFound parameter can be used to search for all the
occurrences of "aegis" in a text, regardless of how it is written:

$start:=1
Repeat
vlResult := Position ("aegis";$text;$start;$lengthfound)
$start:= $start+$lengthfound
Until(vlResult =0)

See Also
Comparison Operators, Substring.

4D Language Reference 1613

Replace string String

version 11.1 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Replace string (source; oldString; newString{; howMany}{; *}) → String

Parameter Type Description

source String → Original string
oldString String → Characters to replace
newString String → Replacement string
(if empty string, occurrences are deleted)
howMany Number → How many times to replace
If omitted, all occurrences are replaced
* * → If passed: evaluation based on character codes

Function result String ← Resulting string

Description
Replace string replaces howMany occurrences of oldString in source with newString.

If newString is an empty string (""), Replace string deletes each occurrence of oldString in source.

If howMany is specified, Replace string will replace only the number of occurrences of oldString
specified, starting at the first character of source. If howMany is not specified, then all
occurrences of oldString are replaced.

If oldString is an empty string, Replace string returns the unchanged source.

By default, the command makes global comparisons that take linguistic particularities and
letters that may be written with one or more characters (for example æ = ae) into account. On
the other hand, it is not diacritical (a=A, a=à and so on) and does not take "ignorable"
characters such as carriage returns into account (Unicode specification).
To modify this functioning, pass the asterisk * as the last parameter. In this case, comparisons
will be based on character codes. You must pass the * parameter:
• If you want to replace special characters, used for example as delimiters (carriage returns,
Char(1), etc.),
• If the replacement of characters must be case sensitive and take accented characters into
account (a#A, a#à and so on).
Note that in this mode, the evaluation does not handle variations in the way words are
written.

1614 4D Language Reference

Examples
1. The following example illustrates the use of Replace string. The results, described in the
comments, are assigned to the variable vtResult.

vtResult:=Replace string("Willow";" ll";"d") ` Result gets "Widow"

vtResult:=Replace string("Shout"; "o";"") ` Result gets "Shut"
` Replaces all tabs in vtOtherVar with commas
vtResult:=Replace string(vtOtherVar;Char(Tab);",";*)

2. The following example eliminates CRs and TABs from the text in vtResult:

vtResult:=Replace string(Replace string(vtResult;Char(Carriage return);"";*);Char(Tab);"";*)

3. The following example illustrates the use of the * parameter in the case of a diacritical
evaluation:

vtResult:=Replace string("Crème brûlée";"Brulee";"caramel") `Result gets "Crème caramel"

vtResult:=Replace string("Crème brûlée";"Brulee";"caramel";*) `Result gets "Crème brûlée"

See Also
Change string, Delete string, Insert string.

4D Language Reference 1615

String String

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

String (expression{; format}) → String

Parameter Type Description

expression → Expression for which to return the string form
(can be Real, Integer, Long Integer, Date, Time
String, Text or Boolean)
format String | Number → Display format

Function result String ← String form of the expression

Description
The String command returns the string form of the numeric, Date, Time, string or Boolean
expression you pass in expression.
If you do not pass the optional format parameter, the string is returned with the appropriate
default format. If you pass format, you can force the result string to be of a specific format.

Numeric Expressions
If expression is a numeric expression (Real, Integer, Long Integer), you can pass an optional
string format. Following are some examples:

Example Result
String(2^15) ` Use default format 32768 (Default format used here)
String(2^15;"###,##0 Inhabitants") 32,768 Inhabitants
String(1/3;"##0.00000") 0.33333
String(1/3) ` Use default format 0.3333333333333330000 (Default format used here)
String(Arctan(1)*4) 3.141592653589790000 (Default format used here)
String(Arctan(1)*4;"##0.00") 3.14
String(-1;"&x") 0xFFFFFFFF
String(-1;"&$") $FFFFFFFF
String(0 ?+ 7;"&x") 0x0080
String(0 ?+ 7;"&$") $80
String(0 ?+ 14;"&x") 0x4000
String(0 ?+ 14;"&$") $4000
String(Num(1=1);"True;;False") True
String(Num(1=2);"True;;False") False

1616 4D Language Reference

The format is specified in the same way as it would be for a number field on a form. See the
4D Design Reference manual for more information about formatting numbers. You can also
pass the name of a custom style in format. The custom style name must be preceded by the “|”
character.

Date Expressions
If expression is a Date expression, the string is returned using the default format specified in
the system.
In the format parameter, you can pass one of the following constants ("Date Display Formats"
theme):

Number Constant Example

1 System date short 12/29/2006
2 System date abbreviated Sun, Dec 29, 2006
3 System date long Sunday, December 29, 2006
4 Internal date short special 12/29/06 or 12/29/1896 or 12/29/2096
5 Internal date long December 29, 2006
6 Internal date abbreviated Dec 29, 2006
7 Internal date short 12/29/2006
8 ISO Date 2006-12-29T00:00:00
100 Blank if null "" instead of 0

Notes:
•The ISO Date format corresponds to the ISO8601 standard. This format contains a date and a
time. For example, the date May 31, 2006 at 1:20 p.m. is written 2006-05-31T13:20:00. It is
used for XML processing and with Web services. 4D does not permit storing a date and a time
in a single field. However, it is possible to handle dates in this format using the String
command.
• The Blank if null constant must be added to the format; it indicates that in the case of a null
value, 4D must return an empty string instead of zeros.

These examples assume that the current date is 12/29/2006:

$vsResult:=String(Current date) ` $vsResult gets "12/29/06"

$vsResult:=String(Current date;Internal date long) ` $vsResult gets "December 29, 2006"
$vsResult:=String(Current date;ISO Date) ` $vsResult gets "2006-12-29T00:00:00"

4D Language Reference 1617

Time Expressions
If expression is a Time expression, the string is returned using the default HH:MM:SS format. In
the format parameter, you can pass one of the following constants ("Time Display Formats"
theme):

Number Constant Example

1 HH:MM:SS 01:02:03
2 HH:MM 01:02
3 Hour Min Sec 1 hour 2 minutes 3 seconds
4 Hour Min 1 hour 2 minutes
5 HH MM AM PM 1:02 AM
6 MM SS 62:03
7 Min Sec 62 minutes 3 seconds
8 ISO Time 0000-00-00T01:02:03
9 System time short 01:02:03
10 System time long abbreviated 1•02•03 AM (Mac only)
11 System time long 1:02:03 AM HNEC (Mac only)
100 Blank if null "" instead of 0

Notes:
• For more information about the ISO Time format, refer to the note above.
• The Blank if null constant must be added to the format; it indicates that in the case of a null
value, 4D must return an empty string instead of zeros.

These examples assume that the current time is 5:30 PM and 45 seconds:

$vsResult:=String(Current time) ` $vsResult gets "17:30:45"

$vsResult:=String(Current time;Hour Min Sec) ` $vsResult gets "17 hours 30 minutes 45
seconds"

String Expressions
If expression is of the String or Text type, the command returns the same value as the one
passed in the parameter. This can be useful more particularly in generic programming using
pointers.
In this case, the format parameter, if passed, is ignored.

Boolean Expressions
If expression is of the Boolean type, the command returns the string “True” or “False” in the
language of the application (for example, “Vrai” or “Faux” in a French version of 4D).
In this case, the format parameter, if passed, is ignored.

See Also
Date, Num, Time string.

1618 4D Language Reference

Substring String

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Substring (source; firstChar{; numChars}) → String

Parameter Type Description

source String → String from which to get substring
firstChar Number → Position of first character
numChars Number → Number of characters to get

Function result String ← Substring of source

Description
The Substring command returns the portion of source defined by firstChar and numChars.

The firstChar parameter points to the first character in the string to return, and numChars
specifies how many characters to return.

If firstChar plus numChars is greater than the number of characters in the string, or if numChars
is not specified, Substring returns the last character(s) in the string, starting with the character
specified by firstChar. If firstChar is greater than the number of characters in the string,
Substring returns an empty string ("").

Examples
1. This example illustrates the use of Substring. The results, described in the comments, are
assigned to the variable vsResult.
vsResult := Substring ("08/04/62"; 4; 2) ` vsResult gets "04"
vsResult := Substring ("Emergency"; 1; 6) ` vsResult gets "Emerge"
vsResult := Substring (var; 2) ` vsResult gets all characters except ` the first

4D Language Reference 1619

2. The following project method appends the paragraphs found in the text (passed as first
parameter) to a string or text array (the pointer of which is passed as second parameter):

` EXTRACT PARAGRAPHS
` EXTRACT PARAGRAPHS ( text ; Pointer )
` EXTRACT PARAGRAPHS ( Text to parse ; -> Array of ¶s )

C_TEXT ($1)
C_POINTER ($2)

$vlElem:=Size of array($2->)
Repeat
$vlElem:=$vlElem+1
INSERT IN ARRAY($2->;$vlElem)
$vlPos:=Position(Char(Carriage return);$1)
If ($vlPos>0)
$2->{$vlElem}:=Substring($1;1;$vlPos-1)
$1:=Substring($1;$vlPos+1)
Else
$2->{$vlElem}:=$1
End if
Until ($1="")

See Also
Position.

1620 4D Language Reference

Uppercase String

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Uppercase (aString; *) → String

Parameter Type Description

aString String → String to convert to uppercase
* * → If passed: keep accents

Function result String ← String in uppercase

Description
Uppercase takes aString and returns the string with all alphabetic characters in uppercase.

The optional * parameter, if passed, indicates that any accented characters present in aString
must be returned as accented uppercase characters. By default, when this parameter is omitted,
accented characters “lose” their accents after the conversion is carried out.

Examples
1. This example compares the results obtained according to whether or not the * parameter
has been passed:

$thestring:=Uppercase("hélène") ` $thestring is "HELENE"

$thestring:=Uppercase("hélène";*) ` $thestring is "HÉLÈNE"

2. See the example for Lowercase.

See Also
Lowercase.

4D Language Reference 1621

Win to Mac String

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Win to Mac (text) → String

Parameter Type Description

text String → Text expressed using Windows ANSI map

Function result String ← Text expressed using Macintosh ASCII map

Compatibility Note: This command only works when the database is executed in ASCII
compatibility mode. In Unicode mode, it does nothing (the text string is returned without
modification). Beginning with version 11 of 4D, this command is thus obsolete and its use is
no longer recommended. It is recommended to convert character strings using the CONVERT
FROM TEXT or Convert to text commands.

Description
The Win to Mac command returns text expressed using the Mac OS ASCII map that is
equivalent to the text you pass in Text, which is expressed using the Windows ANSI map.

This command expects a text parameter that is expressed using the Windows ANSI map.

Generally, when running on Windows, you do not need to use this command to convert
ASCII codes. In ASCII compatibility mode (non-Unicode), when you copy or paste text
between 4D and Windows or when you import or export data, 4D automatically performs
these conversions. However, when you use disk read/write commands such as SEND PACKET or
RECEIVE PACKET, you need to explicitly perform ASCII conversions. This is the main purpose of
the Win to Mac command.

Within 4D, all the text values, fields, or variables that you have not yet converted to another
ASCII map are Mac OS-encoded on both Macintosh and Windows. For more information, see
the section ASCII Codes.

Note: This command replaces the CRLF (Carriage return + Line feed, character codes 13 and
10) characters with the CR (Carriage return) characters. Consequently, the text returned may
be shorter than the original text.

1622 4D Language Reference

Example
When you read characters from a Windows document using RECEIVE PACKET, if you do not use
an input ASCII map for filtering characters from Windows to Mac OS (see USE CHARACTER
SET), you need to convert the text from Windows to Mac OS yourself. You can do it this way:
` ...
RECEIVE PACKET ($vhDocRef;vtSomeText;16*1024)
vtSomeText:=Win to Mac(vtSomeText)
` ...

See Also
ASCII Codes, Mac to Win, RECEIVE PACKET, USE CHARACTER SET.

4D Language Reference 1623

1624 4D Language Reference
49
______________________
Structure Access

4D Language Reference 1625

1626 4D Language Reference
Structure Access Commands Structure Access

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The commands in this theme return a description of the database structure. They can be used
to find out the number of tables, the number of fields in each table, the names of the tables
and fields, and the type and properties of each field.

Determining the database structure is extremely useful when you are developing and using
groups of project methods and forms that can be copied into different databases.

The ability to read the database structure allows you to develop and use portable code.

Counting tables and fields

Since version 11 of 4D, it is possible to delete tables and fields. This possibility means that the
algorithms used in previous versions for counting tables and fields need to be modified. It is
now necessary to use algorithms combining the Get last table number and Get last field number
and Is table number valid and Is field number valid commands. The following is an example of
this type of algorithm:

For($thetable;1;Get last table number)

If (Is table number valid($thetable))
For($thefield;1;Get last field number($thetable))
If(Is field number valid($thetable;$thefield))
... `The field exists and is valid
End if
End for
End if
End for

See Also
Field, GET FIELD PROPERTIES, Get last field number, Get last table number, Pointers, SET INDEX,
Table, Table name.

4D Language Reference 1627

CREATE INDEX Structure Access

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

CREATE INDEX (theTable; fieldsArray; indexType; indexName{; *})

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table for which to create an index
fieldsArray Array pointer → Pointer(s) to field(s) to be indexed
indexType Integer → Type of index to create: -1 = Keywords, 0 = default,
1 = Standard B-Tree, 3 = Cluster B-Tree
indexName Text → Name of index to create
* * → If passed = asynchronous indexing

Description
The CREATE INDEX command can be used to create:
• A standard index on one or more fields (composite index) or
• A keyword index on a field.

The index is created for the aTable table by using one or more fields designated by the
fieldsArray pointer array. This array contains a single row when you want to create a simple
index and two or more rows when you want to create a composite index (except in the case
of a keyword index). In the case of composite indexes, the order of the fields in the array is
important when the index is being built.

The indexType parameter is used to define the type of index to be created. You can pass one
of the following constants, found in the “Index Type” theme:
• Keywords Index (-1): Keyword type index. Remember that keywords cannot be composite:
you must pass only one field in the fieldsArray array.
• Default Index Type (0): In this case, 4D sets the index type (except for keyword indexes)
that is optimal according to the contents of the field.
• Standard BTree Index (1): Index of the standard B-Tree type. This multipurpose index type
is used in previous versions of 4D.
• Cluster BTree Index (3): Index of the B-Tree type using clusters. This index type is optimal
when the index contains few keys, i.e. when the same values occur frequently in the data.

In the indexName parameter, pass the name of the index to be created. This name is
mandatory; if you pass an empty string, an error is generated. If the indexName index
already exists, the command does nothing.

The optional * parameter, when it is passed, is used to carry out indexing in asynchronous
mode. In this mode, the original method continues its execution after the call from the
command, regardless of whether or not the indexing is finished.

1628 4D Language Reference

If the CREATE INDEX command encounters any locked records, they will not be indexed
and the command will wait for them to be unlocked.

If a problem occurs during command execution (non-indexed field, attempt to create a

keyword index on more than one field, etc.), an error is generated. This error can be
intercepted using an errorhandlingmethod.

Examples
1. Creation of two standard indexes on the “Last Name” and “Telephone”fields of the
[Customers] table:

ARRAY POINTER(fieldPtrArr;1)
fieldPtrArr{1}:=->[Customers]LastName
CREATE INDEX([Customers];fieldPtrArr;Standard BTree Index;"CustLNameIdx")
fieldPtrArr{1}:=->[Customers]Telephone
CREATE INDEX([Customers];fieldPtrArr;Standard BTree Index;"CustTelIdx")

2. Creation of a keywords index on the “Observations” field of the [Customers] table:

ARRAY POINTER(fieldPtrArr;1)
fieldPtrArr{1}:=->[Customers]Observations
CREATE INDEX([Customers];fieldPtrArr;Keywords Index;"CustObsIdx")

3. Creation of a composite index on the “City” and “Zipcode” fields of the [Customers]
table:

ARRAY POINTER(fieldPtrArr;2)
fieldPtrArr{1}:=->[Customers]City
fieldPtrArr{2}:=->[Customers]Zipcode
CREATE INDEX([Customers];fieldPtrArr;Standard BTree Index;"CityZip")

See Also
DELETE INDEX, SET INDEX.

4D Language Reference 1629

DELETE INDEX Structure Access

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DELETE INDEX (fieldPtr | indexName{; *})

Parameter Type Description

fieldPtr | indexName Pointer | Text → Pointer to field whose indexes are to be deleted or
Name of index to be deleted
* * → If passed = asynchronous operation

Description
The DELETE INDEX command is used to delete one or more existing indexes from the
database.
You can pass either a pointer to a field or the name of an index in the parameter:
• If you pass a pointer to a field (fieldPtr), all the indexes associated with the field will be
deleted. This can consist of keyword indexes or standard indexes. If the field is included in
one or more composite indexes, they will also be deleted.
• If you pass the name of an index (indexName), only the designated index will be deleted.
This can consist of keyword indexes or standard indexes. If the field contains other indexes
or belongs to other composite indexes, they will not be deleted.

The optional * parameter, when it is passed, is used to carry out the deindexing in
asynchronous mode. In this mode, the original method continues its execution after the
call from the command, regardless of whether or not the index deletion is finished.

If there is no index corresponding to fieldPtr or indexName, the command does nothing.

Example
This example illustrates both syntaxes of the command:

`Deletion of all indexes related to the LastName field

DELETE INDEX(->[Customers]LastName)
`Deletion of index named “CityZip”
DELETE INDEX("CityZip")

See Also
CREATE INDEX, SET INDEX.

1630 4D Language Reference

Field Structure Access

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Field (tableNum | fieldPtr{; fieldNum}) → Number | Pointer

Parameter Type Description

tableNum | fieldPtr Number | Pointer → Table number or Field pointer
fieldNum Number → Field number, if Table number is passed

Function result Number | Pointer ← Field number, if Field pointer is passed

Field pointer, if Table and Field numbers
are passed

Description
The Field command has two forms:
• If you pass a table number in tableNum and a field number in fieldNum, Field returns a
pointer to the field.
• If you pass a field pointer in fieldPtr, Field returns the field number of the field.

Examples
1. The following example sets the fieldPtr variable to a pointer to the second field in the third
table:

FieldPtr:=Field(3; 2)

2. Passing fieldPtr (a pointer to the second field of a table) to Field returns the number 2. The
following line sets FieldNum to 2:

FieldNum:=Field(FieldPtr)

3. The following example sets the FieldNum variable to the field number of [Table3]Field2:

FieldNum:=Field(->[Table3]Field2)

See Also
Field name, GET FIELD PROPERTIES, Get last field number, Table.

4D Language Reference 1631

Field name Structure Access

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Field name (fieldPtr | tableNum{; fieldNum}) → String

Parameter Type Description

fieldPtr | tableNum Number → Field pointer or Table number
fieldNum Number → Field number if a table number is passed
as first parameter

Function result String ← Name of the field

Description
The Field name command returns the name of the field whose pointer you pass in fieldPtr or
whose table and field number you pass in tableNum and fieldNum.

Examples
1. This example sets the second element of the array FieldArray{1} to the name of the second
field in the first table. FieldArray is a two-dimensional array:

FieldArray{1}{2}:=Field name(1;2)

2. This example sets the second element of the array FieldArray{1} to the name of the field
[MyTable]MyField. FieldArray is a two-dimensional array:

FieldArray{1}{2}:=Field name(->[MyTable]MyField)

3. This example displays an alert. This method passes a pointer to a field:

ALERT("The ID number for the field "+Field name($1)+" in the table "+Table name
(Table($1))+" has to be longer than five characters.")

See Also
Field, Get last field number, Table name.

1632 4D Language Reference

GET FIELD ENTRY PROPERTIES Structure Access

version 6.7
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET FIELD ENTRY PROPERTIES (fieldPtr|tableNum{; fieldNum}; list; mandatory; nonEnterable;

nonModifiable)

Parameter Type Description

fieldPtr|tableNum Pointer|Longint → Field pointer or table number
fieldNum Longint → Field number if the table number is passed as
first parameter
list String ← Associated choice list name or empty string
mandatory Boolean ← True = Mandatory, False = Optional
nonEnterable Boolean ← True = Non-enterable, False = Enterable
nonModifiable Boolean ← True = Non-modifiable, False = Modifiable

Description
The GET FIELD ENTRY PROPERTIES command returns the data entry properties for the field
specified by tableNum and fieldNum or by fieldPtr.
You can either pass:
• table and field numbers in tableNum and fieldNum, or
• a pointer to the field in fieldPtr.

Note: This command returns the properties defined at the structure window level. Similar
properties can be defined at the form level.

Once the command has been executed:

• The list parameter returns the choice list name associated to the field (if any). A list can be
associated to the following field types: String, Text, Real, Integer, Long Integer, Date, Time and
Boolean.
If there is no choice list associated to the field or if the field type is not suitable for a choice
list, an empty string is returned ("").
• The mandatory parameter returns True if the field is “Mandatory”; else False. The Mandatory
attribute can be set for all field types, except Subtable and BLOB.
• The nonEnterable parameter returns True if the field is “Non-enterable”, else False. A non-
enterable field can only be read, no data can be entered. The non-enterable attribute can be set
for all field types, except for subtable and BLOB.

4D Language Reference 1633

• The nonModifiable parameter returns True if the field is “Non-modifiable”, else False. A non-
modifiable field can be entered just once and cannot be modified anymore. The Non-
modifiable attribute can be set for all field types, except for subtable and BLOB.

See Also
GET FIELD PROPERTIES, GET RELATION PROPERTIES, GET TABLE PROPERTIES.

1634 4D Language Reference

GET FIELD PROPERTIES Structure Access

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET FIELD PROPERTIES (fieldPtr | tableNum{; fieldNum}; fieldType{; fieldLength{; indexed{;

unique{; invisible}}}})

Parameter Type Description

fieldPtr | tableNum Pointer | Number → Table number or Field pointer
fieldNum Number → Field number if Table number is passed
fieldType Number ← Type of field
fieldLength Number ← Length of field, if Alphanumeric
indexed Boolean ← True = Indexed, False = Non indexed
unique Boolean ← True = Unique, False = Non unique
invisible Boolean ← True = Invisible, False = Visible

Description
The GET FIELD PROPERTIES command returns information about the field specified by fieldPtr
or by tableNum and fieldNum.

You either pass:

• the table and field numbers in tableNum and fieldNum, or
• a pointer to the field in fieldPtr.

After the call:

• fieldType returns the type of the field. The fieldType variable parameter can take a value
provided by the following predefined constants:

Constant Type Value

Is Alpha Field Long Integer 0
Is Text Long Integer 2
Is Real Long Integer 1
Is Float Long Integer 35
Is Integer Long Integer 8
Is LongInt Long Integer 9
Is Integer 64 bits Long Integer 25
Is Date Long Integer 4
Is Time Long Integer 11

4D Language Reference 1635

Is Boolean Long Integer 6
Is Picture Long Integer 3
Is Subtable Long Integer 7
Is BLOB Long Integer 30

• The fieldLen parameter returns the length of the field, if the field is Alphanumeric (i.e.,
fieldType=Is Alpha Field). The value of fieldLen is meaningless for the other field types.

• The indexed parameter returns True is the field is indexed, and False if not. The value of
indexed is meaningful only for Alphanumeric, Integer, Long Integer, Real, Date, Time, and
Boolean fields.

• The unique parameter returns True if the field is set to “Unique”, else False. The Unique
attribute can be set only to indexed fields.

• The invisible parameter returns True if the field is set to “Invisible”, else False. The Invisible
attribute can be used to hide a given field in 4D standard editor (label, charts...).

Examples
1. This example sets the variables vType, vLength, vIndex, vUnique and vInvisible to the
properties for the third field of the first table:

GET FIELD PROPERTIES(1; 3;vType;vLength;vIndex;vUnique;vInvisible)

2. This example sets the variables vType, vLength, vIndex, vUnique and vInvisible to the
properties for the field named [Table3]Field2:

GET FIELD PROPERTIES(->[Table3]Field2;vType;vLength;vIndex;vUnique;vInvisible)

See Also
Field, Field name, SET INDEX.

1636 4D Language Reference

Get last field number Structure Access

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get last field number (tableNum | tablePtr) → Number

Parameter Type Description

tableNum | tablePtr Number | Pointer → Table number or Pointer to table

Function result Number ← Highest field number in table

Description
The Get last field number command returns the highest field number among the fields in the
table whose number or pointer you pass in tableNum or tablePtr.

Fields are numbered in the order in which they are created. If no field has been deleted from
the table, then this command returns the number of fields that the table contains. In the case
of iterative loops on the field numbers of the table, you must use the Is field number valid
command in order to check whether the field has been deleted.

Example
The following project method builds the array asFields, consisting of the field names, for the
table whose pointer is received as first parameter:

$vlTable:=Table($1)
ARRAY STRING(31;asFields;Get last field number($vlTable))
For ($vlField;1;Size of array(asFields);1;-1)
If(Is field number valid($vlTable;$vlField))
asFields{$vlField}:=Field name($vlTable;$vlField)
Else
DELETE FROM ARRAY(asFields;$vlField)
End if
End for

See Also
Field name, GET FIELD PROPERTIES, Get last table number, Is field number valid.

4D Language Reference 1637

Get last table number Structure Access

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get last table number → Number

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Number ← Highest table number in the database

Description
Get last table number returns the highest table number among the tables in the database.
Tables are numbered in the order in which they are created. If no table has been deleted from
the database, this command then returns the number of tables present in the database. In the
case of repeated loops on the table numbers of the database, you must use the Is table number
valid command in order to check that the table has not been deleted.

Example
The following example builds an array, named asTables, with the names of tables defined in
the database. This array can be used as a drop-down list (or tab control, scrollable area, and so
on) to display the list of the tables, within a form:

ARRAY STRING (31;asTables;Get last table number)

If (Get last table number>0) `If the database does contain tables
For ($vlTables; Size of array(asTables);1;-1)
If(Is table number valid($vlTables))
asTables {$vlTables}:=Table name ($vlTables)
Else
DELETE FROM ARRAY(asTables; $vlTables)
End if
End for
End if

See Also
Get last field number, Is table number valid, Table name.

1638 4D Language Reference

GET RELATION PROPERTIES Structure Access

version 6.7
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET RELATION PROPERTIES (fieldPtr|tableNum{; fieldNum}; oneTable; oneField{; choiceField{;

autoOne{; autoMany}}})

Parameter Type Description

fieldPtr|tableNum Pointer|Longint → Field pointer or table number
fieldNum Longint → Field number if the table number is passed as
first parameter
oneTable Longint ← One table number or 0 if no relation is defined
from the field
oneField Longint ← One field number or 0 if no relation is defined
from the field
choiceField Longint ← Choice field number or 0 if no choice field
autoOne Boolean ← True = Auto relate one,
False = Manual relate one
autoMany Boolean ← True = Auto one to many,
False = Manual one to many

Description
The GET RELATION PROPERTIES command returns the properties of the relation (if any) which
starts from the source field defined by tableNum and fieldNum or by fieldPtr.

You can pass:

• Either table and field numbers in tableNum and fieldNum,
• Or a pointer to the field in fieldPtr.

Once the command has been executed:

• The oneTable and oneField parameters contain respectively the table and field number to
which the relation (from the source field) is pointing. If there is no relation starting from the
field, these parameters return 0.
• The choicefield parameter contains the choice field number (from the target table) defined
within this relation. If no choice field has been set for this relation, or if no relation starts
from the source field, this parameter returns 0.

4D Language Reference 1639

• The autoOne and autoMany parameters return True if, respectively, the “Auto Relate One”
and “Auto One to Many” boxes has been checked for this relation; otherwise, they return
False.

Note: The autoOne and autoMany parameters will also return True if no relation starts from the
source field (in this case they return non-significant values). The value of both the oneTable
and oneField parameters allows you to make sure that a relation exists.

See Also
GET FIELD ENTRY PROPERTIES, GET FIELD PROPERTIES, GET TABLE PROPERTIES, SET AUTOMATIC
RELATIONS, SET FIELD RELATION.

1640 4D Language Reference

GET TABLE PROPERTIES Structure Access

version 11.2 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET TABLE PROPERTIES (tablePtr|tableNum; invisible{; trigSaveNew{; trigSaveRec{; trigDelRec{;

trigLoadRec}}}})

Parameter Type Description

tablePtr|tableNum Pointer|Longint → Table pointer or Table number
invisible Boolean ← True = Invisible, False = Visible
trigSaveNew Boolean ← True = Trigger “On saving new record” activated;
otherwise, False
trigSaveRec Boolean ← True = Trigger “On saving an existing record”
activated; otherwise, False
trigDelRec Boolean ← True = Trigger “On deleting a record” activated;
otherwise, False
trigLoadRec Boolean ← *** Do not use (obsolete) ***

Description
The GET TABLE PROPERTIES command returns the properties for the table passed in tablePtr or
tableNum. The table number or a pointer to the table can be passed as first parameter.

Once the command has been executed:

• The invisible parameter returns True if the “Invisible” attribute has been set for the table, else
False. The Invisible attribute allows to hide the table when using 4D standard editors (label,
charts...).
• The trigSaveNew parameter returns True if the “On saving new record” trigger has been set
for the table, else False.
• The trigSaveRec parameter returns True if the “On saving an existing record” trigger has been
set for the table, else False.
• The trigDelRec parameter returns True if the “On deleting a record” trigger has been set for
this table, else false.

See Also
GET FIELD ENTRY PROPERTIES, GET FIELD PROPERTIES, GET RELATION PROPERTIES.

4D Language Reference 1641

Is field number valid Structure Access

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Is field number valid (tableNum | tablePtr; fieldNum) → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

tableNum | tablePtr Num | Pointer → Table number or Pointer to table
fieldNum Longint → Field number

Function result Boolean ← True = field exists in the table

False = field does not exist in the table

Description
The Is field number valid command returns True if the field whose number is passed in the
fieldNum parameter exists in the table whose number or pointer is passed in the tableNum
or tablePtr parameter. If the field does not exist, the command returns False. Keep in mind
that the command returns False if the table containing the field is in the Trash of the
Explorer.

This command can be used to detect any field deletions, which create gaps in the sequence
of field numbers.

See Also
Get last table number, Is table number valid.

1642 4D Language Reference

Is table number valid Structure Access

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Is table number valid (tableNum) → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

tableNum Longint → Table number

Function result Boolean ← True = table exists in database,

False = table does not exist in database

Description
The Is table number valid command returns True if the table whose number is passed in the
tableNum parameter exists in the database and False otherwise. Keep in mind that the
command returns False if the table is in the Trash of the Explorer.

This command can be used to detect any table deletions, which create gaps in the sequence
of table numbers.

See Also
Get last table number, Is field number valid.

4D Language Reference 1643

SET INDEX Structure Access

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET INDEX (aField; index{; mode{; *}})

Parameter Type Description

aField Field → Field for which to create or delete the index
index Boolean | Integer → • True=Create index, False=Delete index, or
• Create an index of the type: -1=Keywords,
0=by default, 1=B-Tree standard, 3=B-Tree cluster
mode Longint → Obsolete (parameter ignored)
* → Asynchronous indexing if * is passed

Description
The SET INDEX accepts two syntaxes:
• If you pass a Boolean in theindex parameter, the command creates or removes the index for
the field you pass in aField.
• If you pass an integer in the index parameter, the command creates an index of the type
specified.

index = Boolean
To index the field, pass True in index. The command creates an index of the default type. If
the index already exists, the call has no effect.
If you pass False in index, the command will delete all the non-composite indexes associated
with the field. If the index does not exist, the call has no effect.

index = Integer
In this case, the command creates an index of the type specified for aField. You can pass one of
the following constants, found in the “Index Type” theme:
• Keywords Index (-1): Index of keywords which permits word-by-word indexing of field
contents. This type of index can only be used with fields of the Text or Alpha type.
• Default Index Type (0): In this case, 4D defines the index type (excluding keywords indexes)
that is the most optimized according to the contents of the field.
• Standard BTree Index (1): Standard B-Tree type index. This multi-purpose index type is used
in previous versions of 4D.
• Cluster BTree Index (3): B-Tree type index using clusters. This type of index is optimized when
the index contains few keywords, i.e. when the same values occur frequently in the data.

1644 4D Language Reference

SET INDEX will not index locked records; it will wait until the record becomes unlocked.

Starting with version 11, the mode parameter no longer serves any purpose and will be
ignored if it is passed.

The optional * parameter indicates an asynchronous (simultaneous) indexing. Asynchronous

indexing allows the execution of the calling method to continue immediately, whether or not
indexing is completed. However, execution will halt at any command that requires the index.

Notes:
• Indexes created by this command do not have names. They cannot be deleted by the DELETE
INDEX command using the syntax based on the name.
• This command cannot be used to create or delete composite indexes.
• This command cannot be used to delete a keywords index created by the CREATE INDEX
command.

Examples
1. The following example indexes the field [Customers]ID:

UNLOAD RECORD([Customers])
SET INDEX ([Customers]ID; True)

2. You want to index the [Customers]Name field in asynchronous mode:

SET INDEX ([Customers]Name; True;*)

3. Creation of a keywords index:

SET INDEX([Books]Summary;Keywords Index)

See Also
CREATE INDEX, DELETE INDEX, GET FIELD PROPERTIES, ORDER BY, QUERY.

4D Language Reference 1645

Table Structure Access

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Table (tableNum | aPtr) → Pointer | Number

Parameter Type Description

tableNum | aPtr Number | Pointer → Table number, or
Table pointer, or
Field pointer

Function result Pointer | Number ← Table pointer, if a Table number is passed

Table number, if a Table pointer is passed
Table number, if a Field pointer is passed

Description
The Table command has three forms:
• If you pass a table number in tableNum, Table returns a pointer to the table.
• If you pass a table pointer in aPtr, Table returns the table number of the table.
• If you pass a field pointer in aPtr, Table returns the table number of the field.

Examples
1. This example sets the tablePtr variable to a pointer to the third table of the database:

TablePtr:=Table(3)

2. Passing tablePtr (a pointer to the third table) to Table returns the number 3. The following
line sets TableNum to 3:

TableNum:=Table(TablePtr)
3. This example sets the tableNum variable to the table number of [Table3]:

TableNum:=Table(->[Table3])
4. This example sets the tableNum variable to the table number of the table to which the
[Table3]Field1 field belongs:

TableNum:=Table (->[Table3]Field1)
See Also
Field, Get last table number, Pointers, Table name.

1646 4D Language Reference

Table name Structure Access

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Table name (tableNum | tablePtr) → String

Parameter Type Description

tableNum | tablePtr Number | Pointer → Table number or Table pointer

Function result String ← Name of the table

Description
The Table name command returns the name of the table whose number of pointer you pass in
tableNum or tablePtr.

Example
The following is an example of a generic method that displays the records of a table. The
reference to the table is passed as a pointer to the table. The Table name command is used to
include the name of the table in the title bar for the window:

` SHOW CURRENT SELECTION Project method

` SHOW CURRENT SELECTION ( Pointer )
` SHOW CURRENT SELECTION (->[Table])

SET WINDOW TITLE("Records for "+Table name($1)) ` Sets the window title
DISPLAY SELECTION($1->) ` Displays the selection

See Also
Field name, Get last table number, Table.

4D Language Reference 1647

1648 4D Language Reference
50
______________________
Subrecords

4D Language Reference 1649

1650 4D Language Reference
ALL SUBRECORDS Subrecords

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

ALL SUBRECORDS (subtable)

Parameter Type Description

subtable Subtable → Subtable in which to select all subrecords

Compatibility note: Subtables are no longer supported starting with version 11 of 4D. A
compatibility mechanism ensures the functioning of this command in converted databases;
however, it is strongly recommended to replace any subtables with standard related tables.

Description
ALL SUBRECORDS makes all the subrecords of subtable the current subselection. If a current
parent record does not exist, ALL SUBRECORDS has no effect. When a parent record is first
loaded, the subselection contains all subrecords. A subselection may not contain all subrecords
after ADD SUBRECORD, QUERY SUBRECORDS, or DELETE SUBRECORD is executed.

Example
The following example selects all subrecords to ensure that they are all included in the sum:

ALL SUBRECORDS ([Stats]Sales)

TotalSales := Sum ([Stats]Sales'Dollars)

See Also
QUERY SUBRECORDS, Records in subselection.

4D Language Reference 1651

APPLY TO SUBSELECTION Subrecords

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

APPLY TO SUBSELECTION (subtable; statement)

Parameter Type Description

subtable Subtable → Subtable to which to apply the formula
statement Statement → One line of code or a method

Compatibility note: Subtables are no longer supported starting with version 11 of 4D. A
compatibility mechanism ensures the functioning of this command in converted databases;
however, it is strongly recommended to replace any subtables with standard related tables.

Description
APPLY TO SUBSELECTION applies statement to each subrecord in the current subselection of
subtable. The statement may be a statement or a method. If the statement modifies a subrecord,
the modified subrecord is written to disk only when the parent record is written. If the
subselection is empty, APPLY TO SUBSELECTION has no effect.

APPLY TO SUBSELECTION can be used to gather information from the subselection or to modify
the subselection.

Example
The following example capitalizes the first names in [People]Children:

ALL SUBRECORDS ([People]Children)

APPLY TO SUBSELECTION([People]Children;[People]Children'Name:=Uppercase
(Substring([People]Children'Name;1;1))+Lowercase(Substring([People]
Children'Name;2)))

Note: The statement has been put on several lines for clarity in documentation only.

See Also
ALL SUBRECORDS, EDIT FORMULA, QUERY SUBRECORDS, SAVE RECORD.

1652 4D Language Reference

Before subselection Subrecords

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Before subselection (subtable) → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

subtable Subtable → Subtable for which to test if subrecord pointer is
before the first selected subrecord

Function result Boolean ← Yes (TRUE) or No (FALSE)

Compatibility note: Subtables are no longer supported starting with version 11 of 4D. A
compatibility mechanism ensures the functioning of this command in converted databases;
however, it is strongly recommended to replace any subtables with standard related tables.

Description
Before subselection returns True when the current subrecord pointer is before the first
subrecord of subtable. Before subselection is used to check whether or not PREVIOUS
SUBRECORD has moved the pointer before the first subrecord. If the current subselection is
empty, Before subselection returns True.

Example
The following example is an object method for a button. When the button is clicked, the
pointer moves to the previous subrecord. If the pointer is before the first subrecord, it moves
to the last subrecord:

PREVIOUS SUBRECORD ([People]Children) ` Move to the previous subrecord

If (Before subselection ([People]Children) ` If we have gone too far...
LAST SUBRECORD ([People]Children) ` move to the last subrecord
End if

See Also
PREVIOUS SUBRECORD.

4D Language Reference 1653

CREATE SUBRECORD Subrecords

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

CREATE SUBRECORD (subtable)

Parameter Type Description

subtable Subtable → Subtable for which to create a new subrecord

Compatibility note: Subtables are no longer supported starting with version 11 of 4D. A
compatibility mechanism ensures the functioning of this command in converted databases;
however, it is strongly recommended to replace any subtables with standard related tables.

Description
CREATE SUBRECORD creates a new subrecord for subtable and makes the new subrecord the
current subrecord. The new subrecord is saved only when the parent record is saved. The
parent record can be saved by a command such as SAVE RECORD or by the user accepting the
record. If there is no current record, CREATE SUBRECORD has no effect. To add a new subrecord
through a subrecord input form, use ADD SUBRECORD.
Example
The following example is an object method for a button. When it is executed (that is, when
the button is clicked), it creates new subrecords for children in the [People] table. The Repeat
loop lets the user add children until the Cancel button is clicked. The form displays the
children in an subform, but will not allow direct data entry into the subtable because the
Enterable option has been turned off:
Repeat
` Get the child’s name
vChild := Request("Name (cancel when done):")
` If the user clicked OK
If (OK = 1)
` Add a new subrecord for a child
CREATE SUBRECORD([People]Children)
` Assign child’s name to the subfield
[People]Children'Name:=vChild
End if
Until (OK=0)
See Also
ADD SUBRECORD, DELETE SUBRECORD, MODIFY SUBRECORD, SAVE RECORD.

1654 4D Language Reference

DELETE SUBRECORD Subrecords

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DELETE SUBRECORD (subtable)

Parameter Type Description

subtable Subtable → Subtable from which to delete the current subrecord

Compatibility note: Subtables are no longer supported starting with version 11 of 4D. A
compatibility mechanism ensures the functioning of this command in converted databases;
however, it is strongly recommended to replace any subtables with standard related tables.

Description
DELETE SUBRECORD deletes the current subrecord of subtable. If there is no current subrecord,
DELETE SUBRECORD has no effect. After the subrecord is deleted, the current subselection for
subtable is empty. As a result, DELETE SUBRECORD can’t be used to scan through a subselection
and delete selected subrecords.

The deletion of subrecords is not permanent until the parent record is saved. Deleting a parent
record automatically deletes all its subrecords.

To delete a subselection, create the subselection you want to delete, delete the first subrecord,
create the subselection again, delete the first subrecord, and so on.

Examples
1. The following example deletes all the subrecords of a subtable:

ALL SUBRECORDS([People]Children)
While (Records in subselection([People]Children)>0)
DELETE SUBRECORD([People]Children)
ALL SUBRECORDS([People]Children)
End while

4D Language Reference 1655

2. The following example deletes the subrecords in which the age of the child is greater than
or equal to 12, from the [People]Children subtable :
ALL RECORDS([People]) ` Select all the records
For ($vlRecord;1;Records in selection([People])) ` For all the records in the table
` Query all records that have subrecords with the criteria
QUERY SUBRECORDS([People]Children;[People]Children'Age>=12)
` Loop until no subrecords are left by the query
While (Records in subselection([People]Children)>0)
` Delete the subrecord
DELETE SUBRECORD([People]Children)
` Query again
QUERY SUBRECORDS([People]Children;[People]Children'Age>=12)
End while
SAVE RECORD([People]) ` Save the parent record
NEXT RECORD([People])
End for

See Also
ALL SUBRECORDS, QUERY SUBRECORDS, Records in subselection, SAVE RECORD.

1656 4D Language Reference

End subselection Subrecords

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

End subselection (subtable) → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

subtable Subtable → Subtable for which to test if subrecord pointer is
after the last selected subrecord

Function result Boolean ← Yes (TRUE) or No (FALSE)

Compatibility note: Subtables are no longer supported starting with version 11 of 4D. A
compatibility mechanism ensures the functioning of this command in converted databases;
however, it is strongly recommended to replace any subtables with standard related tables.

Description
End subselection returns True when the current subrecord pointer is after the end of the
current subselection of subtable. End subselection is used to check whether or not NEXT
SUBRECORD has moved the pointer after the last subrecord. If the current subselection is
empty, End subselection returns True.

Example
The following example is an object method for a button. When the button is clicked, the
pointer moves to the next subrecord. If the pointer is after the last subrecord, it moves to the
first subrecord:

NEXT SUBRECORD ([People]Children) ` Move to the next subrecord

If (End subselection ([People]Children)) ` If we have gone too far...
FIRST SUBRECORD ([People]Children) ` move to the first subrecord
End if

See Also
NEXT SUBRECORD.

4D Language Reference 1657

FIRST SUBRECORD Subrecords

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

FIRST SUBRECORD (subtable)

Parameter Type Description

subtable Subtable → Subtable in which to move
to the first selected subrecord

Compatibility note: Subtables are no longer supported starting with version 11 of 4D. A
compatibility mechanism ensures the functioning of this command in converted databases;
however, it is strongly recommended to replace any subtables with standard related tables.

Description
FIRST SUBRECORD makes the first subrecord of the current subselection of subtable the current
subrecord. All query, selection, and order by commands also set the current subrecord to the
first subrecord. If the current subselection is empty, FIRST SUBRECORD has no effect.

Example
The following example concatenates the first and last names in child records stored in a
subtable. It copies the names into the array atNames:

` Create an array to hold the names

ARRAY TEXT (atNames; Records in subselection ([People]Children))
` Start at the first subrecord and loop once for each child
FIRST SUBRECORD ([People]Children)
For ($vlSub; 1; Records in subselection ([People]Children))
atNames{$vlSub} := [People]Children'First Name+" "+ [People]Children'Last Name
NEXT SUBRECORD ([People]Children)
End for

See Also
LAST SUBRECORD, NEXT SUBRECORD, PREVIOUS SUBRECORD.

1658 4D Language Reference

LAST SUBRECORD Subrecords

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

LAST SUBRECORD (subtable)

Parameter Type Description

subtable Subtable → Subtable in which to move
to the last selected subrecord

Compatibility note: Subtables are no longer supported starting with version 11 of 4D. A
compatibility mechanism ensures the functioning of this command in converted databases;
however, it is strongly recommended to replace any subtables with standard related tables.

Description
LAST SUBRECORD makes the last subrecord of the current subselection of subtable the current
subrecord. If the current subselection is empty, LAST SUBRECORD has no effect.

Example
The following example concatenates the first and last names in child records stored in a
subtable. It copies the names into an array, called atNames. It is the same as the example for
FIRST SUBRECORD except that it moves through the subrecords from last to first:

` Create an array to hold the names

ARRAY TEXT (atNames; Records in subselection ([People]Children))
` Start at the last subrecord and loop once for each child
LAST SUBRECORD ([People]Children)
For ($vlSub;1;Records in subselection ([People]Children))
atNames{$vlSub}:=[People]Children First Names + " " + [People]Children Last Names
PREVIOUS SUBRECORD ([People]Children)
End for

See Also
FIRST SUBRECORD, NEXT SUBRECORD, PREVIOUS SUBRECORD.

4D Language Reference 1659

NEXT SUBRECORD Subrecords

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

NEXT SUBRECORD (subtable)

Parameter Type Description

subtable Subtable → Subtable in which to move
to the next selected subrecord

Compatibility note: Subtables are no longer supported starting with version 11 of 4D. A
compatibility mechanism ensures the functioning of this command in converted databases;
however, it is strongly recommended to replace any subtables with standard related tables.

Description
NEXT SUBRECORD moves the current subrecord pointer to the next subrecord in the current
subselection of subtable. If NEXT SUBRECORD moves the pointer past the last subrecord, End
subselection returns TRUE, and there is no current subrecord. If End subselection returns TRUE,
use FIRST SUBRECORD or LAST SUBRECORD to move the pointer back into the current
subselection. If the current subselection is empty, or Before subselection returns TRUE, NEXT
SUBRECORD has no effect.

Example
See the example for FIRST SUBRECORD.

See Also
FIRST SUBRECORD, LAST SUBRECORD, PREVIOUS SUBRECORD.

1660 4D Language Reference

ORDER SUBRECORDS BY Subrecords

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

ORDER SUBRECORDS BY (subtable; subfield{; > or <}{; subfield2; > or <2; ...; subfieldN; > or <N})

Parameter Type Description

subtable Subtable → Subtable by which to order the selected subrecords
subfield Subfield → Subfield on which to order by for each level
> or < → Ordering direction for each level:
> to order in ascending order or
< to order in descending order

Compatibility note: Subtables are no longer supported starting with version 11 of 4D. A
compatibility mechanism ensures the functioning of this command in converted databases;
however, it is strongly recommended to replace any subtables with standard related tables.

Description
ORDER SUBRECORDS BY sorts the current subselection of subtable. It sorts only the subselection
of the subtable contained in the current parent record.

The direction parameter specifies whether to sort subfield in ascending or descending order. If
direction is the “greater than” symbol (>), the subrecords are ordered in ascending order. If
direction is the “less than” symbol (<), the subrecords are ordered in descending order.
You can specify more than one level of sort by including more subfields and sort symbols.
After the sort is completed, the first subrecord of the sorted subselection is the current
subrecord. Sorting subrecords is a dynamic process. Subrecords are never saved in their sorted
order. If neither a current record nor a higher-level subrecord exists, ORDER SUBRECORDS BY
has no effect.
If a form contains a subform that is to be printed in a fixed frame, this command needs to be
called just once before printing in the Before phase of the parent form method.

Example
The following example sorts the [Stats]Sales subtable into ascending order, based on the
SalesDollars subfield:

ORDER SUBRECORDS BY ([Stats]Sales; [Stats]Sales'Dollars; >)

See Also
QUERY SUBRECORDS.

4D Language Reference 1661

PREVIOUS SUBRECORD Subrecords

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

PREVIOUS SUBRECORD (subtable)

Parameter Type Description

subtable Subtable → Subtable in which to move to
the previous selected subrecord

Compatibility note: Subtables are no longer supported starting with version 11 of 4D. A
compatibility mechanism ensures the functioning of this command in converted databases;
however, it is strongly recommended to replace any subtables with standard related tables.

Description
PREVIOUS SUBRECORD moves the current subrecord pointer to the previous subrecord in the
current subselection of subtable. If PREVIOUS SUBRECORD moves the pointer before the first
subrecord, Before subselection returns TRUE, and there is no current subrecord. If Before
subselection returns TRUE, use FIRST SUBRECORD or LAST SUBRECORD to move the pointer back
into the current subselection. If the current subselection is empty, or End subselection returns
TRUE, PREVIOUS SUBRECORD has no effect.

Example
See the example for LAST SUBRECORD.

See Also
FIRST SUBRECORD, LAST SUBRECORD, NEXT SUBRECORD.

1662 4D Language Reference

QUERY SUBRECORDS Subrecords

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

QUERY SUBRECORDS (subtable; queryFormula)

Parameter Type Description

subtable Subtable → Subtable to search
queryFormula Boolean → Query formula

Compatibility note: Subtables are no longer supported starting with version 11 of 4D. A
compatibility mechanism ensures the functioning of this command in converted databases;
however, it is strongly recommended to replace any subtables with standard related tables.

Description
QUERY SUBRECORDS queries subtable and creates a new subselection. This is the only
command that queries subrecords and returns a selection of subrecords. The queryFormula is
applied to each subrecord in subtable. If the formula evaluates as TRUE, the subrecord is added
to the new subselection. When the query is complete, QUERY SUBRECORDS makes the first
subrecord the current subrecord of subtable.

Remember that QUERY SUBRECORDS queries only the subrecords of the subtable contained in
the currently selected parent record, and not all the subrecords associated with the records of
the parent table. QUERY SUBRECORDS does not change the current parent record.

Typically, queryFormula tests a subfield against a variable or a constant, using a relational

operator. The queryFormula can contain multiple tests that are joined by AND conjunctions
(&) or OR conjunctions ( | ). Also, the queryFormula can be a function or contain a function.
The wildcard character (@) can be used with string arguments.

If neither a current record nor a higher-level subrecord exists, QUERY SUBRECORDS has no
effect.

Example
The following example queries for children older than 10 years:

QUERY SUBRECORDS ([People]Children; [People]Children'Age>10)

See Also
ALL SUBRECORDS, ORDER SUBRECORDS BY, Records in subselection.

4D Language Reference 1663

Records in subselection Subrecords

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Records in subselection (subtable) → Number

Parameter Type Description

subtable Subtable → Subtable for which to count number of subrecords

Function result Number ← Number of subrecords in current subselection

Compatibility note: Subtables are no longer supported starting with version 11 of 4D. A
compatibility mechanism ensures the functioning of this command in converted databases;
however, it is strongly recommended to replace any subtables with standard related tables.

Description
Records in subselection returns the number of subrecords in the current subselection of
subtable. Records in subselection applies only to subrecords in the current record. It is the
subrecord equivalent of Records in selection. The result is undefined if no parent record exists.

Example
The following example selects all the subrecords and displays the number of children for the
parent record:

` Select all children, then display how many

ALL SUBRECORDS ([People]Children)
ALERT ("Number of children: "+String(Records in subselection ([People]Children)))

See Also
ALL SUBRECORDS, QUERY SUBRECORDS.

1664 4D Language Reference

51
______________________
System Documents

4D Language Reference 1665

1666 4D Language Reference
System Documents System Documents

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Introduction
All the documents and applications you use on your computer are stored as files on the hard
disk(s) connected to or mounted on your machine, or floppy disk(s) or other similar
permanent storage devices. Within 4D, we use the terms file or document to refer to these
documents and applications. However, most commands in this theme use the term
"document" because most of the time you will use them to access documents (rather than
application or system files) on disk.

A hard disk can be formatted as one or several partitions, each of which is called a volume. It
does not matter if two volumes are physically present on the same hard disk; at the 4D First
level, you will usually treat these volumes as separate and equal entities.

A volume can be located on a hard disk physically connected to your machine or mounted
over the network through a file sharing protocol such as NetBEUI (Windows) or AFP
(Macintosh). Whatever the case, when using the System Documents commands at the 4D
level, you treat all these volumes in the same way (unless you know what you are doing and
use Plug-ins to extend the capability of your application in that domain).

Each volume has a volume name. On Windows, volumes are designated by a letter followed by
a colon. Usually A: and B: are used to designate the 5 1/4 or 3 1/2 floppy drives. Usually C:
designates the volume you use for booting your system (unless you configure your PC
otherwise). Then the letters D: through Z: are used for the additional volumes connected or
mounted to your PC (DVD drives, additional drives, network drives, and so on). On
Macintosh, volumes have natural names; these are the names you see on the desktop at the
Finder level.

Normally, you classify your documents into folders, which themselves can contain other
folders. It is not a good idea to accumulate hundreds or thousands of files at the same level of
a volume; it is messy and it slows down your system. On Windows, a folder is (or was) called a
directory. Folders have always been called so on the Macintosh.

To uniquely identify a document, you need to know the name of the volume and the name(s)
of the folder(s) where the document is located as well as the name of the document itself. If
you concatenate all these names, you get the pathname to the document. Within this
pathname, folder names are separated by a special character called the directory (separator)
symbol. On Windows, this character is the backslash (\); on Macintosh it is the colon (:).

4D Language Reference 1667

Let's look at an example. You have a document Important Memo located in the Memos folder,
which is located in the Documents folder, which is located in the Current Work folder.

On Windows, if the whole thing is located on the C: drive (volume), the pathname of the
document is:
C:\Current Work\Documents\Memos\Important Memo.TXT

Note: The \ character is also used by the method editor of 4D to designate escape sequences.
In order to avoid any interpretation problems, the editor automatically transforms pathnames
such as C:\Disk into C:\\Disk. For more information, refer to the paragraph below titled
“Specifying Document names or Document pathnames”.

On Macintosh, if the whole thing is located on the disk (volume) Internal Drive, the pathname
of the document is:
Internal Drive:Current Work:Documents:Memos:Important Memo

On Windows, the name of the document is suffixed with .TXT; we will see why in the next
section.

Whatever the platform, the full pathname of a document can be expressed as follows:
VolName DirSep { DirName DirSep { DirName DirSep { ... } } } DocName

All the documents (files) located on volumes have several characteristics, usually called
attributes or properties: the name of the document itself, the type and the creator.

Document Type and Creator

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

On Windows, a document has a type. On Macintosh, a document also has a type and may
have in addition a creator. The type of a document generally indicates what the document is
or what it contains. For instance, a text document contains some text (without style
variations).

The type of a document is determined by the suffix (called the file extension) attached to the
document name. For instance, .TXT or .TEXT is the file extension for text documents. This
principle is the same under Mac OS X, however for reasons of compatibility with previous
versions of the system, the type of a document is determined by the file type property if it has
been specified. This property is a 4-character signature (not displayed at the Finder level). For
instance, the file type of a text document is "TEXT".

1668 4D Language Reference

In addition,a document may have a creator, which designates the application that created the
document. This concept does not exist on Windows. The creator of a document is determined
by the file creator property. If a document has both the type and creator properties, Mac OS
will take them into account regardless of the document extension.

DocRef: Document reference number

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

A document is open in read/write mode, open in read-only mode or closed. Using the built-in
4D commands, a document can be opened in read/write mode by only one process at a time.
One process can open several documents, several processes can open multiple documents, you
can open the same document in read-only mode as many times as necessary, but you cannot
open the same document in read/write mode twice at a time.

You open a document with the Open document, Create document and Append document
commands. The Create document and Append document commands automatically open
documents in read/write mode. Only the Open document command lets you choose the
opening mode. Once a document is open, you can read and write characters from and to the
document (see the RECEIVE PACKET and SEND PACKET commands). When you are finished
with the document, you usually close it using the CLOSE DOCUMENT command.

All open documents are referred to using the DocRef expression returned by the Open
document, Create document and Append document commands. A DocRef uniquely identifies
an open document. It is formally an expression of the Time type. All commands working with
open documents expect DocRef as a parameter. If you pass an incorrect DocRef to one of these
commands, a file manager error occurs.

Handling I/O errors

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

When you access (open, close, delete, rename, copy) documents, when you change the
properties of a document or when you read and write characters in a document, I/O errors
may occur. A document might not be found; it may be locked; it may be already open in write
mode. You can catch these errors with an error-handling method installed with ON ERR CALL.
Most of the errors that can occur while using system documents are described in the section
OS File Manager Errors.

4D Language Reference 1669

The Document system variable
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The commands Open document, Create document, Append document and Select document
enable you to access a document using the standard Open or Save file dialog boxes. When you
access a document through a standard dialog, 4D returns the full pathname of the document
in the Document system variable. This system variable has to be distinguished from the
document parameter that appears in the parameter list of the commands.

Specifying Document names or Document pathnames

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Most of the routines of this section expecting a document name accept both a name or a
pathname to the document (except when signaled otherwise). If you pass a name, the
command looks for the document within the folder of the database. If you pass a pathname, it
must be valid.

If you pass a wrong name or a wrong pathname, the command generates a file manager error
that you can intercept using an ON ERR CALL method.

Entering Windows pathnames and escape sequences

The method editor of 4D allows the use of escape sequences. An escape sequence is a set of
characters that are used to replace a “special” character. The sequence begins with a backslash
\, followed by a character. For example, \t is the escape sequence for the Tab character.
The \ character is also used as the separator in pathnames under Windows. In general, 4D will
correctly interpret Windows pathnames that are entered in the method editor by replacing
single backslashes \ with double backslashes \\. For example, C:\Folder will become
C:\\Folder.
However, if you write C:\MyDocuments\New, 4D will display C:\\MyDocuments\New. In this
case, the second \is incorrectly interpreted as \N (an existing escape sequence). You must
therefore enter a double \\ when you want to insert a backslash before a character that is used
in one of the escape sequences recognized by 4D.

The following escape sequences are recognized by 4D:

Escape sequence Character replaced
\n LF (New line)
\t HT (Horizontal tab)
\r CR (Carriage return)
\\ \ (Backslash)
\" " (Quotes)

1670 4D Language Reference

Useful Project Methods when handling documents on disk
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

• Detecting on which platform you're running

Although 4D provides commands, such as MAP FILE TYPES, for eliminating coding variations
due to platform specificities, once you start to work at a lower level when handling documents
on disk (such as programmatically obtaining pathnames), you need to know if you are
running on a Macintosh or a Windows platform.

The On Windows project method listed here tells whether your database is running on
Windows:

` On windows Project Method

` On windows -> Boolean
` On windows -> True if on Windows

C_BOOLEAN($0)
C_LONGINT($vlPlatform;$vlSystem;$vlMachine)

PLATFORM PROPERTIES($vlPlatform;$vlSystem;$vlMachine)
$0:=($vlPlatform=Windows)

• Using the right directory separator symbol

On Windows, a directory level is symbolized by an backslash (\). On Macintosh, a folder level
is symbolized by a colon (:). Depending on which platform you are running, the Directory
symbol project method listed here returns the code of the correct directory symbol (character).
` Directory symbol Project Method
` Directory symbol -> Integer
` Directory symbol -> Code of "\" (Windows) or ":" (Mac OS)

C_INTEGER($0)

If (On Windows )
$0:=Character code("\\")
Else
$0:=Character code(":")
End if

4D Language Reference 1671

• Extracting the file name from a long name
Once you have obtained the long name (pathname + file name) of a document, you may need
to extract the file name of the document from that long name in order, for example, to
display it in the title of a window. The Long name to file name project method does this on
both Windows and Macintosh.

` Long name to file name Project Method

` Long name to file name ( String ) -> String
` Long name to file name ( Long file name ) -> file name

C_STRING(255;$1;$0)
C_INTEGER($viLen;$viPos;$viChar;$viDirSymbol)

$viDirSymbol:=Directory symbol
$viLen:=Length($1)
$viPos:=0
For ($viChar;$viLen;1;-1)
If (Character code($1[[$viChar]])=$viDirSymbol)
$viPos:=$viChar
$viChar:=0
End if
End for
If ($viPos>0)
$0:=Substring($1;$viPos+1)
Else
$0:=$1
End if
If (<>vbDebugOn) ` Set this variable to True or False in the On Startup database method
If ($0="")
TRACE
End if
End if

1672 4D Language Reference

• Extracting the pathname from a long name
Once you have obtained the long name (pathname + file name) of a document, you may need
to extract the pathname of the directory where the document is located from that long name;
for instance, you may want to save additional documents at the same location. The Long name
to path name project method does this on both Windows and Macintosh.

` Long name to path name Project Name

` Long name to path name ( String ) -> String
` Long name to path name ( Long file name ) -> Path name

C_STRING(255;$1;$0)
C_STRING(1;$vsDirSymbol)
C_INTEGER($viLen;$viPos;$viChar;$viDirSymbol)

$viDirSymbol:=Directory symbol
$viLen:=Length($1)
$viPos:=0
For ($viChar;$viLen;1;-1)
If (Character code($1[[$viChar]])=$viDirSymbol)
$viPos:=$viChar
$viChar:=0
End if
End for
If ($viPos>0)
$0:=Substring($1;1;$viPos)
Else
$0:=$1
End if
If (<>vbDebugOn) ` Set this variable to True or False in the On Startup database method
If ($0="")
TRACE
End if
End if

See Also
Append document, CLOSE DOCUMENT, COPY DOCUMENT, Create document, CREATE FOLDER,
DELETE DOCUMENT, Document creator, DOCUMENT LIST, Document type, FOLDER LIST, Get
document position, GET DOCUMENT PROPERTIES, Get document size, MAP FILE TYPES, MOVE
DOCUMENT, Open document, Select document, SET DOCUMENT CREATOR, SET DOCUMENT
POSITION, SET DOCUMENT PROPERTIES, SET DOCUMENT SIZE, SET DOCUMENT TYPE, Test path
name, VOLUME ATTRIBUTES, VOLUME LIST.

4D Language Reference 1673

Append document System Documents

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Append document (document{; fileType}) → DocRef

Parameter Type Description

document String → Document name or
Full document pathname or
Empty string for standard file dialog box
fileType String → List of types of documents to be screened, or
"*" to not screen the documents

Function result DocRef ← Document reference number

Description
The Append document command does the same as thing as Open document: it allows you to
open a document on disk.

The only difference is that Append document sets the file position at the end of the document
while Open document sets its at the beginning of the document.

Refer to Open document for more details about using Append document.

Example
The following example opens an existing document called Note, appends the string “and so
long” and a carriage return onto the end of the document, and closes the document. If the
document already contained the string “Good-bye”, the document would now contain the
string “Good-bye and so long”, followed by a carriage return:

C_TIME(vhDocRef)
vhDocRef:=Append document ("Note.txt") ` Open Note document
SEND PACKET (vhDocRef;" and so long"+Char(13)) ` Append a string
CLOSE DOCUMENT (vhDocRef) ` Close the document

See Also
Create document, Open document.

1674 4D Language Reference

CLOSE DOCUMENT System Documents

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

CLOSE DOCUMENT (docRef)

Parameter Type Description

docRef DocRef → Document reference number

Description
CLOSE DOCUMENT closes the document specified by docRef.

Closing a document is the only way to ensure that the data written to a file is saved. You must
close all the documents you open with the commands Open document, Create document or
Append document.

Example
The following example lets the user create a new document, writes the string “Hello” into it,
and closes the document:

C_TIME(vhDocRef)
vhDocRef:=Create document ("")
If (OK=1)
SEND PACKET(vhDocRef; "Hello") ` Write one word into the document
CLOSE DOCUMENT(vhDocRef) ` Close the document
End if

See Also
Append document, Create document, Open document.

4D Language Reference 1675

COPY DOCUMENT System Documents

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

COPY DOCUMENT (sourceName; destinationName{; *})

Parameter Type Description

sourceName String → Name of document to be copied
destinationName String → Name of copied document
* → Override existing document if any

Description
The COPY DOCUMENT command copies the document specified by sourceName to the
location specified by destinationName.

Both sourceName and destinationName can be a name referring to a document located in the
database folder or a pathname referring to a document in relation to the root level of a volume.

An error will occur if there is already a document named destinationName unless you specify
the optional * parameter instructing COPY DOCUMENT to delete and override the destination
document.

Examples
1. The following example duplicates a document in its own folder:

COPY DOCUMENT("C:\\FOLDER\\DocName";"C:\\FOLDER\\DocName2")

2. The following example copies a document to the database folder (provided C:\\FOLDER is
not the database folder):

COPY DOCUMENT("C:\\FOLDER\\DocName";"DocName")

3. The following example copies a document from one volume to another one:

COPY DOCUMENT("C:\\FOLDER\\DocName";"F:\\Archives\\DocName.OLD")

1676 4D Language Reference

4. The following example duplicates a document in its own folder overriding an already
existing copy:

COPY DOCUMENT("C:\\FOLDER\\DocName";"C:\\FOLDER\\DocName2";*)

See Also
MOVE DOCUMENT.

4D Language Reference 1677

CREATE ALIAS System Documents

version 6.7
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

CREATE ALIAS (targetPath; aliasPath)

Parameter Type Description

targetPath String → Name or access path of the alias/shortcut target
aliasPath String → Name or full pathname for the alias or shortcut

Description
The CREATE ALIAS command creates an alias (named “shortcut” under Windows) for the target
file or folder passed in targetPath. The name and location are defined by the targetPath
parameter.

An alias can be made for any kind of document or folder. The alias icon will be the same as
the target item. The icon contains a small arrow at the bottom left side. Under Mac OS, the
icon name is also displayed in italics characters.

This command does not assign a name by default, the name has to be passed in the aliasPath
parameter. If just a name is passed in this parameter, the alias is created in the current working
folder (usually the folder containing the structure file).

Note: Under Windows, the shortcuts are designated by a “.LNK” extension (invisible). If this
extension is not passed, it is automatically added by the command.

If an empty string is passed in the targetPath, the command does nothing.

Example
Your database generates text files called “Report Number” sorted in the database folder. The
user would like to create shortcuts to these reports and to store them at a convenient location:

`Method CREATE_REPORT
C_TEXT($vtRport)
C_STRING(250;$vtpath)
C_STRING(80;$vaname)
C_TIME(vDoc)
C_INTEGER($ReportNber)

1678 4D Language Reference

 $vTReport:=... `Create report
$ReportNber:=... `Compute the report number
$vaName:="Report"+String($ReportNber)+".txt" `File name
vDoc:=Create document($vaName)
If (OK=1)
SEND PACKET(vDoc;$vTReport)
CLOSE DOCUMENT(vDoc)
`Add the alias
CONFIRM("Create an alias for this report?")
If (OK=1)
$vtPath:=Select folder("Where do you want the alias to be created?")
If (OK=1)
CREATE ALIAS ($vaName;$vtPath+$vaName)
If (OK=1)
SHOW ON DISK($vtPath+$vaName)
`Show the alias location
End if
End if
End if
End if

System Variables or Sets

The OK system variable is set to 1 if the command execution was successful; otherwise it is set
to 0.

See Also
RESOLVE ALIAS.

4D Language Reference 1679

Create document System Documents

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Create document (document{; fileType}) → DocRef

Parameter Type Description

document String → Document name or
Full document pathname or
Empty string for standard file dialog box
fileType String → List of types of documents to be screened, or
"*" to not screen the documents

Function result DocRef ← Document reference number

Description
The Create document command creates a new document and returns its document reference
number.

Pass the name or full pathname of the new document in document. If document already exists
on the disk, it is overwritten. However, if document is locked or already open, an error is
generated.

If you pass an empty string in document, the Save As dialog box is displayed and you can then
enter the name of the document you want to create. If you cancel the dialog, no document is
created; Create document returns a null DocRef and sets the OK variable to 0.

If the document is correctly created and opened, Create document returns its document
reference number and sets the OK variable to 1. The system variable Document is updated and
returns the complete access path of the created document.

Whether or not you use the Save As dialog box, Create document creates a .TXT (Windows) or
TEXT (Macintosh) document by default. If you want to create another type of document, pass
the fileType parameter.
In the fileType parameter, pass the type(s) of file(s) that can be selected in the opening dialog
box. You can pass a list of several types separated by a ; (semi-colon). For each type set, an
item will be added to the menu used for choosing the type in the dialog box.

1680 4D Language Reference

Under Mac OS, you can pass either a standard Mac OS type (TEXT, APPL, etc.), or a UTI
(Uniform Type Identifier) type. UTIs are defined by Apple in order to meet standardization
needs for file types. For example, "public.text" is the UTI type of text type files. For more
information about UTIs, refer to the following address:
http://developer.apple.com/documentation/Carbon/Conceptual/understanding_utis/index.html.
Under Windows, you can also pass a standard Mac OS file type — 4D makes the
correspondence internally — or file extensions (.txt, .exe, etc.). Note that under Windows, the
user can “force” the display of all file types by entering *.* in the dialog box. However, in this
case, 4D will carry out an additional check of the selected file types: if the user selects an
unauthorized file type, the command returns an error.
If you do not want to restrict the displayed files to one or more types, pass the "*" (star) string
or ".*" in fileType.

On Windows you pass a Windows file extension or Macintosh file type mapped through the
MAP FILE TYPES mechanism. If you want to create a document without an extension, a
document containing several extensions, or a document containing an extension with more
than three characters, do not use the type parameters and pass the full name in document (see
example2).

Once you have created and opened a document, you can write and read the document using
the SEND PACKET and RECEIVE PACKET commands that you can combine with the Get
document position and SET DOCUMENT POSITION commands in order to directly access any
part of the document.

Do not forget to eventually call CLOSE DOCUMENT for the document.

Examples
1. The following example creates and opens a new document called Note, writes the string
“Hello” into it, and closes the document:

C_TIME(vhDoc)
vhDoc:=Create document ("Note.txt") ` Create new document called Note
If (OK=1)
SEND PACKET(vhDoc; "Hello") ` Write one word in the document
CLOSE DOCUMENT(vhDoc) ` Close the document
End if

4D Language Reference 1681

2. The following example creates documents with non-standard extensions under Windows:

$vtMyDoc:=Create document("Doc.ext1.ext2") `Several extensions

$vtMyDoc:=Create document("Doc.shtml") `Long extension
$vtMyDoc:=Create document("Doc.") `No extension (the period "." is mandatory)

System Variables or Sets

If the document has been created correctly, the system variable OK is set to 1 and the system
variable Document contains the full pathname and the name of document.

See Also
Append document, Open document.

1682 4D Language Reference

CREATE FOLDER System Documents

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

CREATE FOLDER (folderPath)

Parameter Type Description

folderPath String → Pathname to new folder to create

Description
The CREATE FOLDER command creates a folder according to the pathname you pass in
folderPath.

If you pass a name, the folder is created in the folder of the database. If you pass a pathname,
it must refer to a valid path up to the name of the folder you want to create, starting at the
root level of a volume or at the level of the database folder.

Examples
1. The following example creates the “Archives” folder in the folder of the database:

CREATE FOLDER("Archives")
2. The following example creates the Archives folder in the folder of the database, then it
creates the “January” and “February” subfolders:

CREATE FOLDER("Archives")
CREATE FOLDER("Archives\\January")
CREATE FOLDER("Archives\\February")

3. The following example creates the “Archives” folder at the root level of the C volume:

CREATE FOLDER("C:\\Archives")
4. The following example will fail if there is no “NewStuff” folder at the root level of the C
volume:

` WRONG, cannot create two folder levels in one call

CREATE FOLDER("C:\\NewStuff\\Pictures")

See Also
FOLDER LIST, Test path name.

4D Language Reference 1683

DELETE DOCUMENT System Documents

version 6.7.1 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DELETE DOCUMENT (document)

Parameter Type Description

document String → Document name or
Full document pathname

Description
The DELETE DOCUMENT command deletes the document whose name you pass in document.

If the document name or the entered path name is incorrect, an error is generated. This is also
the case if you try to delete an open document.

DELETE DOCUMENT doesn’t accept an empty string argument for document. If an empty string
is used, the Open File dialog box is not displayed and an error is generated.

WARNING: DELETE DOCUMENT can delete any file on a disk. This includes documents created
with other applications as well as the applications themselves. DELETE DOCUMENT should be
used with extreme caution. Deleting a document is a permanent operation and cannot be
undone.

Examples
1. The following example deletes the document named Note:

DELETE DOCUMENT ("Note") ` Delete the document

2. See example for the command APPEND DATA TO PASTEBOARD.

System Variables or Sets

Deleting a document sets the OK system variable to 1. If DELETE DOCUMENT can’t delete the
document, the OK system variable is set to 0.

1684 4D Language Reference

DELETE FOLDER System Documents

version 6.7
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DELETE FOLDER (folder)

Parameter Type Description

folder String → Name or full path of the folder to be deleted

Description
The DELETE FOLDER command deletes the folder whose name or full path has been passed in
folder.

Only empty folders can be deleted by this command.

• If you try to delete a folder containing files, the -47 error is generated (Attempt to delete a
non-empty folder).
• If you pass in folder a file path or an empty string or the path to a non-existing folder, the
command does nothing and generates a -43 error (File not found).

You can detect these errors through a method installed by the ON ERR CALL command.

See Also
DELETE DOCUMENT.

4D Language Reference 1685

Document creator System Documents

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Document creator (document) → String

Parameter Type Description

document String → Document name or
Full document pathname

Function result String ← Empty string (Windows) or

File Creator (Mac OS)

Description
The Document creator command returns the creator of the document whose name or
pathname you pass in document.

On Windows, Document creator returns an empty string.

See Also
Document type, SET DOCUMENT CREATOR.

1686 4D Language Reference

DOCUMENT LIST System Documents

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DOCUMENT LIST (pathname; documents)

Parameter Type Description

pathname String → Pathname to volume, directory or folder
documents String array ← Names of the documents present at this location

Description
The DOCUMENT LIST command populates the Text or String array documents with the names
of the documents located at the pathname you pass in pathname.

Note: The pathname parameter only accepts absolute pathnames.

If there are no documents at the specified location, the command returns an empty array. If
the pathname you pass in pathname is invalid, DOCUMENT LIST generates a file manager error
that you can intercept using an ON ERR CALL method.

See Also
FOLDER LIST, VOLUME LIST.

4D Language Reference 1687

Document type System Documents

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Document type (document) → String

Parameter Type Description

document String → Document name

Function result String ← Windows file extension (1 to 3-character string)

or Mac OS file type (4-character string)

Description
The Document type command returns the type of the document whose name or pathname
you pass in document.

On Windows, Document type returns the file extension of the document (i.e. 'DOC' for a
Microsoft Word document, 'EXE' for an executable file, and so on) or the corresponding Mac
OS-based 4 characters file type if this latter has been mapped with its equivalent Windows file
extension by 4D (i.e. 'TEXT' for the 'TXT' file extension) or by a prior call to MAP FILE TYPES.

On Macintosh, Document type returns, if specified, the 4-characters file type of the document
(i.e. 'TEXT' for a Text document, 'APPL' for a double-clickable application and so on).

Compatibility Note: The use of Mac OS file types is obsolete under Mac OS X. Like Windows,
file identification is now based on the suffix of its name (see the System Documents section).
For compatibility's sake, it nevertheless remains possible to read the Mac OS type of
documents when it has been specified.

See Also
Document creator, GET DOCUMENT PROPERTIES, MAP FILE TYPES, SET DOCUMENT TYPE.

1688 4D Language Reference

FOLDER LIST System Documents

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

FOLDER LIST (pathname; directories)

Parameter Type Description

pathname String → Pathname to volume, directory or folder
directories String array ← Names of the directories present at this location

Description
The FOLDER LIST command populates the Text or String array directories with the names of the
folders located at the pathname you pass in pathname.

Note: The pathname parameter only accepts absolute pathnames.

If there are no folders at the specified location, the command returns an empty array. If the
pathname you pass in pathname is invalid, FOLDER LIST generate a file manager error that you
can intercept using an ON ERR CALL method.

See Also
DOCUMENT LIST, VOLUME LIST.

4D Language Reference 1689

GET DOCUMENT ICON System Documents

version 6.7
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET DOCUMENT ICON (docPath; icon{; size})

Parameter Type Description

docPath String → Name or path of document to get icon,
or Empty string for standard Open File dialog box
icon Picture → Picture variable or field
← Document icon
size Longint → Size of the returned picture (in pixels)

Description
The GET DOCUMENT ICON command returns in the 4D picture variable or field icon, the icon
of the document whose name or complete pathname is passed in filePath. filePath can specify a
file of any type (executable, document, shortcut or alias, etc.) or a folder.

filePath should contain the full pathname of the document. You can also pass the document
name only or a relative pathname, in this case the document must be placed in the database
current working directory (usually, the folder containing the database structure file).
If you pass an empty string in filePath, the standard Open File dialog box is presented. The user
can then select the file to read. Once the dialog box is validated, the Document system variable
contains the full pathname to the selected file.

Pass in icon a 4D picture field or variable. After the command is executed, this parameter
contains the icon of the file (PICT format).

The optional size parameter allows you to set the dimensions in pixels of the returned icon.
This value actually represents the side length of the square including the icon. Icons are
usually defined in 32x32 pixels (“large icons”) or 16x16 pixels (“small icons”). If you pass 0 or
omit this parameter, the largest available icon is returned.

1690 4D Language Reference

Get document position System Documents

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get document position (docRef) → Number

Parameter Type Description

docRef DocRef → Document reference number

Function result Number ← File position (expressed in bytes)

from the beginning of the file

Description
This command operates only on a document currently open whose document reference
number you pass in docRef.

Get document position returns the position, starting from the beginning of the document,
where the next read (RECEIVE PACKET) or write (SEND PACKET) will occur.

See Also
RECEIVE PACKET, SEND PACKET, SET DOCUMENT POSITION.

4D Language Reference 1691

GET DOCUMENT PROPERTIES System Documents

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET DOCUMENT PROPERTIES (document; locked; invisible; created on; created at; modified on;

modified at)

Parameter Type Description

document String → Document name
locked Boolean ← Locked (True) or unlocked (False)
invisible Boolean ← Invisible (True) or visible (False)
created on Date ← Creation date
created at Time ← Creation time
modified on Date ← Last modification date
modified at Time ← Last modification time

Description
The GET DOCUMENT PROPERTIES command returns information about the document whose
name or pathname you pass in document.

After the call:

• locked returns True if the document is locked. A locked document cannot be modified.
• invisible returns True if the document is hidden.
• created on and created at return the date and time when the document was created.
• modified on and modified at return the date and time when the document modified for the
last time.

Example
You have created a documentation database and you would like to export all the records you
created in the database to documents on disk. Because the database is regularly updated you
want to write an export algorithm that create or recreate each document on disk if the
document does not exist or if the corresponding record has been modified after the document
was saved for the last time. Consequently, you need to compare the date and time of
modification of a document (if it exists) with its corresponding record.

1692 4D Language Reference

For illustrating this example, we use the table whose definition is shown below:

Rather than saving both a date and time values into each record, you can save a “time stamp”
value which expresses the number of seconds elapsed between an arbitrary anterior date and
time (in this example we use Jan, 1st 1995 at 00:00:00) and the date and time when the record
was saved.

In our example, the field [Documents]Creation Stamp holds the time stamp when the record
was first created and the field [Documents]Modification Stamp holds the time stamp when the
record was last modified.

The Time stamp project method listed below calculates the time stamp for a specific date and
time or for the current date and time if no parameters are passed:

` Time stamp Project Method

` Time stamp { ( date ; Time ) } -> Long
` Time stamp { ( date ; Time ) } -> Number of seconds since Jan, 1st 1995
C_DATE($1;$vdDate)
C_TIME($2;$vhTime)
C_LONGINT($0)

If (Count parameters=0)
$vdDate:=Current date
$vhTime:=Current time
Else
$vdDate:=$1
$vhTime:=$2
End if
$0:=(($vdDate-!01/01/95!)*86400)+$vhTime

Note: Using this method, you can encode dates and times from the 01/01/95 at 00:00:00 to
the 01/19/2063 at 03:14:07 which cover the long integer range 0 to 2^31 minus one.

4D Language Reference 1693

Conversely, the Time stamp to date and Time stamp to time project methods listed below allow
extracting the date and the time stored into a time stamp:

` Time stamp to date Project Method

` Time stamp to date ( Long ) -> Date
` Time stamp to date ( Time stamp ) -> Extracted date

C_DATE($0)
C_LONGINT($1)

$0:=!01/01/95!+($1\86400)

` Time stamp to time Project Method

` Time stamp to time ( Long ) -> Date
` Time stamp to time ( Time stamp ) -> Extracted time

C_TIME($0)
C_LONGINT($1)

$0:=Time(Time string(†00:00:00†+($1%86400)))

For ensuring that the records have their time stamps correctly updated no matter the way they
are created or modified, we just need to enforce that rule using the trigger of the table
[Documents]:

` Trigger for table [Documents]

Case of
: (Database event=Save New Record Event)
[Documents]Creation Stamp:=Time stamp
[Documents]Modification Stamp:=Time stamp
: (Database event=Save Existing Record Event)
[Documents]Modification Stamp:=Time stamp
End case

1694 4D Language Reference

Once this is implemented in the database, we have all we need to write the project method
CREATE DOCUMENTATION listed below. We use of GET DOCUMENT PROPERTIES and SET
DOCUMENT PROPERTIES for handling the date and time of creation and modification of the
documents.

` CREATE DOCUMENTATION Project Method

C_STRING(255;$vsPath;$vsDocPathName;$vsDocName)
C_LONGINT($vlDoc)
C_BOOLEAN($vbOnWindows;$vbDoIt;$vbLocked;$vbInvisible)
C_TIME($vhDocRef;$vhCreatedAt;$vhModifiedAt)
C_DATE($vdCreatedOn;$vdModifiedOn)

If (Application type=4D Client)

` If we are running 4D Client, save the documents
` locally on the Client machine where 4D Client is located
$vsPath:=Long name to path name (Application file)
Else
` Otherwise, save the documents where the data file is located
$vsPath:=Long name to path name (Data file)
End if
` Save the documents in a directory we arbitrarily name "Documentation"
$vsPath:=$vsPath+"Documentation"+Char(Directory symbol )
` If this directory does not exist, create it
If (Test path name($vsPath) # Is a directory)
CREATE FOLDER($vsPath)
End if
` Establish the list of the already existing documents
` because we'll have to delete the obsolete ones, in other words,
` the documents whose corresponding records have been deleted.
ARRAY STRING(255;$asDocument;0)
DOCUMENT LIST($vsPath;$asDocument)
` Select all the records from the [Documents] table
ALL RECORDS([Documents])
` For each record
$vlNbRecords:=Records in selection([Documents])
$vlNbDocs:=0
$vbOnWindows:=On Windows For ($vlDoc;1;$vlNbRecords)

4D Language Reference 1695

 ` Assume we will have to (re)create the document on disk
$vbDoIt:=True
` Calculate the name and the path name of the document
$vsDocName:="DOC"+String([Documents]Number;"00000")
$vsDocPathName:=$vsPath+$vsDocName
` Does this document already exist?
If (Test path name($vsDocPathName+".HTM")=Is a document)
` If so, remove the document from the list of the documents
` that may end up deleted
$vlElem:=Find in array($asDocument;$vsDocName+".HTM")
If ($vlElem>0)
DELETE FROM ARRAY($asDocument;$vlElem)
End if
` Was the document saved after the last time the record was modified?
GET DOCUMENT PROPERTIES($vsDocPathName+".HTM";$vbLocked;$vbInvisible;
$vdCreatedOn;$vhCreatedAt;$vdModifiedOn;$vhModifiedAt)
If (Time stamp ($vdModifiedOn;$vhModifiedAt)>=[Documents]Modification Stamp)
` If so, we do not need to recreate the document
$vbDoIt:=False
End if
Else
` The document does not exist, reset these two variables so
` we know we'll have to compute them before setting the final properties
` of the document
$vdModifiedOn:=!00/00/00!
$vhModifiedAt:=†00:00:00†
End if
` Do we need to (re)create the document?
If ($vbDoIt)
` If so, increment the number of updated documents
$vlNbDocs:=$vlNbDocs+1
` Delete the document if it already exists
DELETE DOCUMENT($vsDocPathName+".HTM")
` And create it again
If ($vbOnWindows)
$vhDocRef:=Create document($vsDocPathName;"HTM")
Else
$vhDocRef:=Create document($vsDocPathName+".HTM")
End if

1696 4D Language Reference

 If (OK=1)
` Here write the contents of the document
CLOSE DOCUMENT($vhDocRef)
If ($vdModifiedOn=!00/00/00!)
` The document did not exist, set the modification date and time
` to their right values
$vdModifiedOn:=Current date
$vhModifiedAt:=Current time
End if
` Change the properties of the document so its date and time of creation
` are made equal to those of the corresponding record
SET DOCUMENT PROPERTIES($vsDocPathName+".HTM";$vbLocked;
$vbInvisible;Time stamp to date ([Documents]Creation Stamp);
Time stamp to time ([Documents]Creation Stamp);$vdModifiedOn;
$vhModifiedAt)
End if
End if ` Just to know what's going on
SET WINDOW TITLE("Processing Document "+String($vlDoc)+" of "+
String($vlNbRecords))
NEXT RECORD([Documents])
End for
` Delete the obsolete documents, in other words
` those which are still in the array $asDocument
For ($vlDoc;1;Size of array($asDocument))
DELETE DOCUMENT($vsPath+$asDocument{$vlDoc})
SET WINDOW TITLE("Deleting obsolete document: "+Char(34)+$asDocument{$vlDoc}
+Char(34))
End for
` We're done
ALERT("Number of documents processed: "+String($vlNbRecords)+Char(13)+
"Number of documents updated: "+String($vlNbDocs)+Char(13)+
"Number of documents deleted: "+String(Size of array($asDocument)))

See Also
Document creator, Document type, SET DOCUMENT PROPERTIES.

4D Language Reference 1697

Get document size System Documents

version 11.3 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get document size (document{; *}) → Real

Parameter Type Description

document DocRef | String → Document reference number or
Document name
* → On Mac OS only:
- if omitted, size of data fork
- if specified, size of resource fork

Function result Real ← Size (expressed in bytes) of the document

Description
The Get document size command returns the size, expressed in bytes, of a document.

If the document is open, you pass its document reference number in document.
If the document is not open, you pass its name or pathname in document.

On Macintosh, if you do not pass the optional * parameter, the size of the data fork is
returned. If you do pass the * parameter, the size of the resource fork is returned.

See Also
Get document position, SET DOCUMENT POSITION, SET DOCUMENT SIZE.

1698 4D Language Reference

MAP FILE TYPES System Documents

version 3.5
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

MAP FILE TYPES (macOS; windows; context)

Parameter Type Description

macOS String → Mac OS file type (4-character string)
windows String → Windows file extension
context String → String displayed in List of Types drop-down list
of the Windows file dialog boxes

Description
MAP FILE TYPES lets you associate a Windows file extension with a Macintosh file type.

You need to call this routine only once to establish a mapping for an entire worksession with a
database. Once the call has been made, the commands Append document, Create document,
Create resource file, Open resource file and Open resource file while running on Windows will
automatically substitute the Windows file extension for the Macintosh file type you actually
pass as a parameter to the routine.

In the macOS parameter you pass a 4-character Macintosh file type. If you do not pass a 4-
character string, the command does nothing and generates an error.

In the windows parameter you pass a 1- to X-character Windows file extension. If you do not
pass a 1 to 3-character string, the command does nothing and generates an error.

In the context parameter you pass the string that will be displayed in the List Files of Type
drop-down list of the Windows Open File dialog box. The context string is limited to 32
characters; additional characters are ignored.

IMPORTANT: Once you have mapped a Windows file extension to a Macintosh file type, you
cannot change or delete this mapping within a single work session. If you need to change a
mapping while developing and debugging a 4D application, reopen the database and remap
the file extension.

4D Language Reference 1699

Example
The following line of 4D code (that could be part of the Startup database method) maps the
Macintosh MS-Word file type “WDBN” to the Windows file extension “.DOC”:
MAP FILE TYPES ("WDBN";"DOC";"Word documents")

Once the call above has been made, the following code will display only Word documents in
the Open file dialog on Windows and Macintosh:
$DocRef:=Open document("";"WDBN")
If (OK=1)
` ...
End if

See Also
Append document, Create document, Create resource file, Open resource file.

1700 4D Language Reference

MOVE DOCUMENT System Documents

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

MOVE DOCUMENT (srcPathname; dstPathname)

Parameter Type Description

srcPathname String → Full pathname to existing document
dstPathname String → Destination pathname

Description
The MOVE DOCUMENT command moves or renames a document.

You specify the full pathname to the document in srcPathname and the new name and/or new
location for the document in dstPathname.

Warning: Using MOVE DOCUMENT, you can move a document from and to any directory on
the same volume. If you want to move a document between two distinct volumes, use COPY
DOCUMENT to “move” the document then delete the original copy of the document using
DELETE DOCUMENT.

Examples
1. The following example renames the document DocName:

MOVE DOCUMENT("C:\\FOLDER\\DocName";"C:\\FOLDER\\NewDocName")

2. The following example moves and renames the document DocName:

MOVE DOCUMENT("C:\\FOLDER1\\DocName";"C:\\FOLDER2\\NewDocName")

3. The following example moves the document DocName:

MOVE DOCUMENT("C:\\FOLDER1\\DocName";"C:\\FOLDER2\\DocName")

Note: In the last two examples, the destination folder "C:\\FOLDER2" must exist. The MOVE
DOCUMENT command only moves a document; it does not create folders.

See Also
COPY DOCUMENT.

4D Language Reference 1701

Open document System Documents

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Open document (document{; fileType{; mode}}) → DocRef

Parameter Type Description

document String → Document name or
Full document pathname or
Empty string for standard file dialog box
fileType String → List of types of documents to be screened, or
"*" to not screen the documents
mode Integer → Document’s opening mode

Function result DocRef ← Document reference number

Description
The Open document command opens the document whose name or pathname you pass in
document.

If you pass an empty string in document, the Open File dialog box is presented, and you then
select the document to be open. If you cancel the dialog, no document is opened; Open
document returns a null DocRef and sets the OK variable to 0.

• If the document is correctly opened, Open document returns its document reference number
and sets the OK variable to 1.
• If the document is already open and the mode parameter is omitted, Open document opens
the document in Read mode and sets the OK variable to 1.
• If the document is already open and you try to open it in Write mode, an error is generated.
• If the document does not exist, an error is generated.

In the fileType parameter, pass the type(s) of file(s) that can be selected in the opening dialog
box. You can pass a list of several types separated by a ; (semi-colon). For each type set, an
item will be added to the menu used for choosing the type in the dialog box.
Under Mac OS, you can pass either a standard Mac OS type (TEXT, APPL, etc.), or a UTI
(Uniform Type Identifier) type. UTIs are defined by Apple in order to meet standardization
needs for file types. For example, "public.text" is the UTI type of text type files. For more
information about UTIs, refer to the following address:
http://developer.apple.com/documentation/Carbon/Conceptual/understanding_utis/index.html.

1702 4D Language Reference

Under Windows, you can also pass a standard Mac OS file type — 4D makes the
correspondence internally — or file extensions (.txt, .exe, etc.). Note that under Windows, the
user can “force” the display of all file types by entering *.* in the dialog box. However, in this
case, 4D will carry out an additional check of the selected file types: if the user selects an
unauthorized file type, the command returns an error.
If you do not want to restrict the displayed files to one or more types, pass the "*" (star) string
or ".*" in fileType.

The optional mode parameter allows you to define how document is to be opened. Four
different open file modes are possible. 4D offers the following predefined constants, located in
the "System Documents" theme:

Constant Type Value

Read and Write (default value) Integer 0
Write Mode Integer 1
Read Mode Integer 2
Get Pathname Integer 3

If a document is open, Open document initially sets the file position at the beginning of the
document while Append document sets it at the end of the document.

Once you have opened a document, you can read and write in the document using the
RECEIVE PACKET and SEND PACKET commands that you can combine with the Get document
position and SET DOCUMENT POSITION commands in order to directly access any part of the
document.

Do not forget to eventually call CLOSE DOCUMENT for the document.

Examples
1. The following example opens an existing document called Note, writes the string “Good-
bye” into it, and closes the document. If the document already contains the string “Hello”,
this string would be overwritten:

C_TIME(vhDoc)
vhDoc:=Open document ("Note.txt";Read and Write) ` Open a document called Note
If (OK=1)
SEND PACKET (vhDoc"Good-bye") ` Write one word into the document
CLOSE DOCUMENT (vhDoc) ` Close the document
End if

4D Language Reference 1703

2. You can now read a document even if it is already open in write mode:

vDoc:=Open document ("PassFile";"TEXT") ` The file is open

` Before the file is closed, it is possible to consult it in read-only mode:
vRef:=Open document ("PassFile";"TEXT";Read Mode)

System Variable and Sets

If the document is correctly opened, the OK system variable is set to 1; otherwise, it is set to 0.
After the call, the Document system variable contains the full name of the document.
If you call Open document with a mode of 3, the function returns ?00:00:00? (no document
reference). The document is not opened but the Document and OK system variables are
updated:
• OK is equal to 1.
• Document contains the full pathname and the name of document.

Note: If you pass an empty string in document, an open file dialog box appears. If the user
chooses a document and clicks the OK button, document is set to the path of the document
the user selected and OK is set to 1. If the user clicked the Cancel button, OK is set to 0.

See Also
Append document, Create document.

1704 4D Language Reference

RESOLVE ALIAS System Documents

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

RESOLVE ALIAS (aliasPath; targetPath)

Parameter Type Description

aliasPath String → Name or access path of the alias/shortcut
targetPath String ← Name or access path of the alias/shortcut target

Description
The RESOLVE ALIAS command returns the full path to the target file or folder of the alias
(named shortcut under Windows).

The full path to the alias is passed in aliasPath.

Once the command has been executed, the targetPath variable contains the full path to the
target file or folder of the alias and the OK system variable is set to 1.
If the path passed in aliasPath corresponds to a file and not an alias, targetPath returns the path
of the file and the OK system variable is set to 0.

See Also
CREATE ALIAS.

System Variables or Sets

If aliasPath does specify an alias/shortcut, the OK system variable is set to 1. If aliasPath
specifies a standard file, the OK system variable is set to 0.

4D Language Reference 1705

Select document System Documents

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Select document (directory; fileTypes; title; options{; selected}) → String

Parameter Type Description

directory Text | Longint → • Directory access path to display by default
in the document selection dialog box, or
• Empty string to display default user folder
(“My documents” under Windows,
“Documents” under Mac OS), or
• Number of the memorized access path
fileTypes Text → List of types of documents to filter, or
"*" to not filter documents
title Text → Title of the selection dialog box
options Longint → Selection option(s)
selected Text array ← Array containing the list of access paths +
names of selected files

Function result String ← Name of selected file (first file of the list
in case of multiple selection)

Description
The Select document command displays a standard open document dialog box which
allows the user to set one or more files and returns the name and/or full access path of the
selected file(s).

The directory parameter indicates the folder whose contents are initially displayed in the
open document dialog box. You can pass three types of values:
• a text containing the full access path of the folder to display.
• an empty string ("") to display the default user folder for the current opeerating system
(“My documents” under Windows, “Documents” under Mac OS).
• a number of the memorized access path (from 1 to 32000) to display the associated folder.
As such, you can store in memory the access path of the folder opened when the user
clicked the selection button, in other words, the folder selected by the user. During the first
call of an arbitrary number (for example, 5) the command displays the default user folder
of the operating system (equivalent of passing an empty string). The user could also browse
folders on the hard disk. When the user clicks on the selection button, the access path is
memorized and associated with number 5. During future calls to number 5, the memorized
access path will be used by default. If a new location is selected, path number 5 is updated.

1706 4D Language Reference

This mechanism lets you memorize up to 32,000 access paths. Under Windows, each path
is kept for the session only. Under Mac OS, the paths are kept by the system and remain
stored from one session to the next.

Note: This mechanism is the same as the one used by the Select folder command. The
numbers of the memorized pathnames are shared by both commands.

Pass the type(s) of file(s) that can be selected in the open file dialog box in the fileTypes
parameter. You can pass a list of several types separated by a ; (semi-colon). For each type
defined, a row will be added in the type choice menu of the dialog box.
Under Mac OS, you can pass either a standard Mac OS type (TEXT, APPL, etc.), or a UTI
(Uniform Type Identifier) type. UTI types have been defined by Apple in order to meet
requirements concerning the standardization of file types. For example, "public.text" is the
UTI type of text type files. For more information about UTIs, please refer to the following
address:
http://developer.apple.com/documentation/Carbon/Conceptual/understanding_utis/index.html.

Under Windows, you can also pass a standard Mac OS type file — 4D performs the
conversion internally — or the file extensions (.txt, .exe, etc.). Please note that under
Windows, the user can “force” the display of all document types by entering *.* in the
dialog box. However, in this case, 4D will perform an additional verification of the types of
files selected: if the user selects an unauthorized file type, the command returns an error.
If you do not want to restrict the files displayed to one or more types, pass the "*" (star) or
".*" string in fileTypes.

Pass the label that must appear in the dialog box in the title parameter. By default, if you
pass an empty string, the label “Open” is displayed.

The options parameter allows you to specify advanced functions that are allowed in an
open file dialog box. 4D provides the following pre-defined constants in the “System
Documents” theme:
Constant Type Value
Multiple files Longint 1
Package open Longint 2
Package selection Longint 4
Alias selection Longint 8
Use Sheet Window Longint 16

You can pass one or a combination of constants.

• Multiple files: Authorizes the simultaneous selection of several files using the key
combinations Shift+click (adjacent selection) and Ctrl+click (Windows) or Command+click
(Mac OS). In this case, the selected parameter, if passed, contains the list of all selected
files. By default, if this constant is not used, the command will not allow the selection of
multiple files.

4D Language Reference 1707

• Package open (Mac OS only): Authorizes the opening of packages as folders and thus the
viewing /selection of their contents. By default, if this constant is not used, the command
will not allow the opening of packages.
• Package selection (Mac OS only): Authorizes the selection of packages as entities. By
default, if this constant is not used, the command will not allow the selection of software
packages as such.
• Alias selection: Authorizes the selection of shortcuts (Windows) or aliases (Mac OS) as
document.
By default, if this constant is not used, when an alias or shortcut is selected, the command
will return the access path of the targeted element. When you pass the constant, the
command returns the path of the alias or shortcut itself.
• Use Sheet Window (Mac OS only): Displays the selection dialog box in the form of a sheet
window (this option is ignored under Windows).
Sheet windows are specific to the Mac OS X interface which have graphic animation (for
more information, refer to the Window Types section). By default, if this constant is not
used, the command will display a standard dialog box.

If you do not want to use an option, pass 0 in the options parameter.

The optional selected parameter allows you to get the full access path (access path + name)
of every file selected by the user. The command creates, sizes and fills the array according
to the user selection. This parameter is useful when the Multiple files option is used or when
you want to find out the access path of the selected file (simply take the name of the file
returned by the command from the value of the array). If no file is selected, the array is
returned empty.

Note: Under Mac OS, a selected package is considered as a folder. The pathname returned
in the selected array includes a final ":" character. For example: Disk:Applications:4D:4D
v11.4:US:4D Volume Desktop.app:

The command returns the name (name + extension under Windows) of the selected file. If
several files are selected, the command returns the name of the first file in the list of
selected files. The list of files can be obtained in the selected parameter. If no file is selected,
the command returns an empty string.

Example
This example is used to specify a 4D data file:

C_LONGINT($platform)
PLATFORM PROPERTIES($platform)
If($platform=Windows )
$DocType:=".4DD"
Else

1708 4D Language Reference

 $DocType:="com.4d.4d.data-file" `UTI type
End if
$Options:=Alias selection +Package open +Use Sheet Window
$Doc:=Select document("";$DocType;"Select the data file";$Options)

See Also
Open document, Select folder.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been correctly executed and a valid document was selected, the system
variable OK is set to 1 and the system variable Document will contain the full access path
of the selected file.
If no file was selected (for example, if the user clicked on the Cancel button in the open file
dialog box), the system variable OK is set to 0 and the system variable Document will be
empty.

4D Language Reference 1709

Select folder System Documents

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Select folder ({message}{; }{defaultPath}) → String

Parameter Type Description

message String → Title of the window
defaultPath String | Longint → • Default pathname or
• Empty string to display the default user
folder (“My documents” under Windows,
“Documents” under Mac OS), or
• Number of memorized pathname

Function result String ← Access path to the selected folder

Description
The Select folder command displays a dialog box that allows you to manually select a folder
and then retrieve the complete access path to that folder. The optional defaultPath parameter
can be used to designate the location of a folder that will be initially displayed in the folder
selection dialog box.

Note: This command does not modify 4D’s current folder.

The Select folder command displays a standard dialog box to browse through the workstation’s
volumes and folders.
The optional parameter message allows you to display a message in the dialog box. In the
following examples, the message is "Select a destination folder":

1710 4D Language Reference

Windows

Mac OS

You can use the defaultPath parameter to provide a default folder location in the folder
selection dialog box. You can pass three types of values in this parameter:
• The pathname of a valid folder using the syntax of the current platform.
• An empty string (“”) to display the default user folder of the system (“My documents” under
Windows, “Documents” under Mac OS).

4D Language Reference 1711

• The number of a memorized pathname (from 1 to 32,000) to display the associated folder.
This means that you can store in memory the pathname of the folder that is open when the
user clicks on the selection button; in other words, the folder chosen by the user. When
calling a random number (for instance, 5) the command displays the default user folder of the
system (equivalent to passing an empty string). The user may then browse among the folders
on their harddisk. When the user clicks on the selection button, the pathname is memorized
and associated with the number 5. When the number 5 is called subsequently, the memorized
pathnname will be used by default. If a new location is selected, the path number 5 will be
updated, and so on.
This mechanism can be used to memorize up to 32,000 pathnames. Under Windows, each
path is only kept during the session. Under Mac OS, the paths remain memorized from one
session to the next. If the pathname is incorrect, the defaultPath parameter is ignored.

Note: This mechanism is identical to the one used by the Select document command. The
numbers of memorized pathnames are shared between both these commands.

The user selects a folder and then clicks the OK button (on Windows) or the Select button (on
Mac OS). The access path to the folder is then returned by the function.
• On Windows, the access path is returned in the following format:
“C:\Folder1\Folder2\SelectedFolder\”
• On Mac OS, the access path is returned in the following format:
“Hard Disk:Folder1:Folder2:SelectedFolder:”

Note: On Mac OS, depending on whether or not the name of the folder is selected in the
dialog box, the access path that is returned to you may be different.

4D Server: This function allows you to view the volumes connected to the client workstations.
It is not possible to call this function from a stored procedure.

1712 4D Language Reference

If the user validates the dialog box, the OK system variable is set to 1. If the user clicks the
Cancel button, the OK system variable is set to 0 and the function returns an empty string.

Note: On Windows, if the user selected some incorrect elements, such as “Workstation”,
“Trash can”, and so on, the OK system variable is set to 0, even if the user validates the dialog
box.

Example
The following example allows you to select the folder in which the pictures in the picture
library will be stored:

$PictFolder:=Select folder("Select a folder for your pictures.")

PICTURE LIBRARY LIST (pictRefs;pictNames)
For ($n;1;Size of array(pictNames))
$vRef:=Create document($PictFolder+pictNames{$n};"PICT")
If (OK=1)
GET PICTURE FROM LIBRARY(pictRefs{$n};$vStoredPict)
SAVE PICTURE TO FILE($vRef;$vStoredPict)
CLOSE DOCUMENT($vRef)
End if
End for

See Also
CREATE FOLDER, FOLDER LIST, Select document.

4D Language Reference 1713

SET DOCUMENT CREATOR System Documents

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET DOCUMENT CREATOR (document; fileCreator)

Parameter Type Description

document String → Document name
or Full document pathname
fileCreator String → Mac OS file creator (4-character string)
or empty string (Windows)

Description
The SET DOCUMENT CREATOR command sets the creator of the document whose name or
pathname you pass in document.

You pass the new creator of the document in fileCreator.

This command does nothing on Windows.

See discussion about file creators in System Documents.

See Also
Document creator, SET DOCUMENT PROPERTIES, SET DOCUMENT TYPE.

1714 4D Language Reference

SET DOCUMENT POSITION System Documents

version 11.3 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET DOCUMENT POSITION (docRef; offset{; anchor})

Parameter Type Description

docRef DocRef → Document reference number
offset Real → File position (expressed in bytes)
anchor Integer → 1 = In relation to the beginning of the file
2 = In relation to the end of the file
3 = In relation to current position

Description
This command operates only on a document currently open whose document reference
number you pass in docRef.

SET DOCUMENT POSITION sets the position you pass in offset where the next read (RECEIVE
PACKET) or write (SEND PACKET) will occur.

If you omit the optional anchor parameter, the position is relative to the beginning of the
document. If you do specify the anchor parameter, you pass one of the values listed above.

Depending on the anchor you can pass positive or negative values in offset.

See Also
Get document position, RECEIVE PACKET, SEND PACKET.

4D Language Reference 1715

SET DOCUMENT PROPERTIES System Documents

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET DOCUMENT PROPERTIES (document; locked; invisible; created on; created at; modified on;

modified at)

Parameter Type Description

document String → Document name
or Full document pathname
locked Boolean → Locked (True) or Unlocked (False)
invisible Boolean → Invisible (True) or Visible (False)
created on Date → Creation date
created at Time → Creation time
modified on Date → Last modification date
modified at Time → Last modification time

Description
The SET DOCUMENT PROPERTIES command changes the information about the document
whose name or pathname you pass in document.

Before the call:

• Pass True in locked to lock the document. A locked document cannot be modified. Pass False
in Locked to unlock a document.
• Pass True in invisible to hide the document. Pass False in invisible to make the document
visible in the desktop windows.
• Pass the document creation date and time in created on and created at.
• Pass the document last modification date and time in modified on and modified at.

The dates and times of creation and last modification are managed by the file manager of your
system each time you create or access a document. Using this command, you can change
those properties for special purpose. See example for the command GET DOCUMENT
PROPERTIES.

See Also
GET DOCUMENT PROPERTIES, SET DOCUMENT CREATOR, SET DOCUMENT TYPE.

1716 4D Language Reference

SET DOCUMENT SIZE System Documents

version 11.3 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET DOCUMENT SIZE (docRef; size)

Parameter Type Description

docRef DocRef → Document reference number
size Real → New size expressed in bytes

Description
The SET DOCUMENT SIZE command sets the size of a document to the number of bytes you
pass in size.

If the document is open, you pass its document reference number in docRef.

On Macintosh, the size of the document's data fork is changed.

See Also
Get document position, Get document size, SET DOCUMENT POSITION.

4D Language Reference 1717

SET DOCUMENT TYPE System Documents

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET DOCUMENT TYPE (document; fileType)

Parameter Type Description

document String → Document name or
full document pathname
fileType String → Windows file extension
or Mac OS file type (4-character string)

Description
The SET DOCUMENT TYPE command sets the type of the document whose name or pathname
you pass in document.

You pass the new type of the document in fileType.

See the discussion of file types in System Documents and Document type.

On Windows, this command modifies the file extension and therefore the value of document.
For example, the instruction:
SET DOCUMENT TYPE("C:\\Docs\\Invoice.asc";"TEXT")
renames the file "Invoice.asc" to "Invoice.txt". In 4D, the Macintosh "TEXT" type corresponds
to the Windows "txt" type.

If the type has no equivalent provided by 4D, you will have to pass the extension. For
example, the following instruction renames the file "Invoice.asc" to "Invoice.zip":
SET DOCUMENT TYPE("C:\\Docs\\Invoice.asc";"zip")

See Also
Document type, MAP FILE TYPES, SET DOCUMENT CREATOR, SET DOCUMENT PROPERTIES.

1718 4D Language Reference

SHOW ON DISK System Documents

version 2004.1
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SHOW ON DISK (pathname{; *})

Parameter Type Description

pathname String → Pathname of item to show
* → If the item is a folder, show its contents

Description
The SHOW ON DISK command displays the file or folder whose pathname was passed in the
pathname parameter in a standard window of the operating system.
In a user interface, this command lets you designate the location of a specific file or folder.

By default, if pathname designates a folder, the command displays the level of the folder itself.
If you pass the optional * parameter, the command opens the folder and displays its contents
in the window. If pathname designates a file, the * parameter is ignored.

Examples
The following examples illustrate the operation of this command:

SHOW ON DISK("c:\\MyFolder\\MyFile.txt") ` Displays the designated file

4D Language Reference 1719

 SHOW ON DISK("c:\\MyFolder\\Folder2") ` Displays the designated folder

` Displays the contents of the designated folder

SHOW ON DISK("c:\\MyFolder\\Folder2";*)

System Variables and Sets

The system variable OK is set to 1 if the command is executed correctly.

1720 4D Language Reference

Test path name System Documents

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Test path name (pathname) → Number

Parameter Type Description

pathname String → Pathname to directory, folder or document

Function result Number ← 1, pathname refers to an existing document

0, pathname refers to an existing directory or folder
<0, invalid pathname, OS file manager error code

Description
The Test path name function checks if a document or folder whose name or pathname you
pass in pathname is present on the disk. You can pass either a relative or absolute pathname,
expressed in the syntax of the current system.

If a document is found, Test path name returns 1. If a folder found, Test path name returns 0.

The following predefined constant are provided by 4D:

Constant Type Value

Is a document Long Integer 1
Is a directory Long Integer 0

If no document nor folder is found, Test path name returns a negative value (i.e. -43 for File
not found).

4D Language Reference 1721

Example
The following tests if the document “Journal” is present in the folder of the database, then
creates it if it was not found:

If (Test path name("Journal") # Is a document)

$vhDocRef:=Create document("Journal")
If (OK=1)
CLOSE DOCUMENT($vhDocRef)
End if
End if

See Also
Create document, CREATE FOLDER.

1722 4D Language Reference

VOLUME ATTRIBUTES System Documents

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

VOLUME ATTRIBUTES (volume; size; used; free)

Parameter Type Description

volume String → Volume name
size Number ← Volume size expressed in bytes
used Number ← Used space expressed in bytes
free Number ← Free space expressed in bytes

Description
The VOLUME ATTRIBUTES command returns, expressed in bytes, the size, the used space and
the free space for the volume whose name you pass in volume.

Note: If volume indicates a non-mounted remote volume, the OK variable is set to 0 and the
three parameters return -1.

Example
Your application includes some batch operations running the night or the week-end that store
huge temporary files on disk. To make this process as automatic and flexible as possible, you
write a routine that will automatically find the first volume whose free space is sufficient for
your temporary files. You might write the following project method:

` Find volume for space Project Method

` Find volume for space ( Real ) -> String
` Find volume for space ( Space needed in bytes ) -> Volume name or Empty string

C_STRING(31;$0)
C_STRING(255;$vsDocName)
C_LONGINT($vlNbVolumes;$vlVolume)
C_REAL($1;$vlSize;$vlUsed;$vlFree)
C_TIME($vhDocRef)

4D Language Reference 1723

 ` Initialize function result
$0:=""
` Protect all I/O operations with an error interruption method
ON ERR CALL("ERROR METHOD")
` Get the list of the volumes
ARRAY STRING(31;$asVolumes;0)
gError:=0
VOLUME LIST($asVolumes)
If (gError=0)
` If running on windows, skip the (usual) two floppy drives
If (On Windows )
$vlVolume:=Find in array($asVolumes;"A:\")
If ($vlVolume>0)
DELETE FROM ARRAY($asVolumes;$vlVolume)
End if
$vlVolume:=Find in array($asVolumes;"B:\")
If ($vlVolume>0)
DELETE FROM ARRAY($asVolumes;$vlVolume)
End if
End if
$vlNbVolumes:=Size of array($asVolumes)
` For each volume
For ($vlVolume;1;$vlNbVolumes)
` Get the size, used space and free space
gError:=0
VOLUME ATTRIBUTES($asVolumes{$vlVolume};$vlSize;$vlUsed;$vlFree)
If (gError=0)
` Is the free space large enough (plus an extra 32K) ?
If ($vlFree>=($1+32768))
` If so, check if the volume is unlocked...
$vsDocName:=$asVolumes{$vlVolume}+Char(Directory symbol )+"XYZ"+
String(Random)+".TXT"
$vhDocRef:=Create document($vsDocName)
If (OK=1)
CLOSE DOCUMENT($vhDocRef)
DELETE DOCUMENT($vsDocName)
` If everything's fine, return the name of the volume
$0:=$asVolumes{$vlVolume}
$vlVolume:=$vlNbVolumes+1
End if
End if

1724 4D Language Reference

 End if
End for
End if
ON ERR CALL("")

Once this project method is added to your application, you can for instance write:

$vsVolume:=Find volume for space (100*1024*1024)

If($vsVolume#"")
` Continue
Else
ALERT("A volume with at least 100 MB of free space is required!")
End if

See Also
VOLUME LIST.

4D Language Reference 1725

VOLUME LIST System Documents

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

VOLUME LIST (volumes)

Parameter Type Description

volumes String array ← Names of the volumes currently mounted

Description
The VOLUME LIST command populates the Text or String array volumes with the names of the
volumes currently defined (Windows) or mounted (Macintosh) on your machine.

On Macintosh, it returns the list of the volumes visible at the Finder level.

On the other hand, on Windows, it returns the list of the volumes currently defined whether
or not each volume is physically present (i.e. the volume A:\ will be returned whether or not a
disk is actually present in the floppy drive).

Example
Using a scrollable area named asVolumes you want to display the list of the volumes defined or
mounted on your machine, you write:

Case of
: (Form event=On Load)
ARRAY STRING(31;asVolumes;0)
VOLUME LIST(asVolumes)

` ...
End case

See Also
DOCUMENT LIST, FOLDER LIST, VOLUME ATTRIBUTES.

1726 4D Language Reference

52
______________________
System Environment

4D Language Reference 1727

1728 4D Language Reference
Count screens System Environment

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Count screens → Longint

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Longint ← Number of monitors

Description
The Count screens command returns the number of screen monitors connected to your
machine.

See Also
Menu bar screen, SCREEN COORDINATES, SCREEN DEPTH, Screen height, Screen width.

4D Language Reference 1729

Current machine System Environment

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Current machine → String

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result String ← Network name of the machine

Description
The Current machine command returns the name of the machine as set in the network
parameters of the operating system.

Example
Even if you are not running with the Client/Server version of the 4D environment, your
application can include some network services that require your machine to be correctly
configured. In the On Startup database method of your application, you write:

If ( (Current machine="") | (Current machine owner=""))

` Display a dialog box asking the user to setup the Network identity
` of his or her machine
End if

See Also
Current machine owner.

1730 4D Language Reference

Current machine owner System Environment

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Current machine owner → String

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result String ← Network name of machine owner

Description
The Current machine owner command returns the owner name of your machine, as set in the
current user account on the machine.

Example
See example for the command Current machine.

See Also
Current machine.

4D Language Reference 1731

FONT LIST System Environment

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

FONT LIST (fonts)

Parameter Type Description

fonts Array ← Array of font names

Description
The FONT LIST command populates the string or text array fonts with the names of the fonts
available on your system.

Example
In a form, you want a drop-down list that displays a list of the fonts available on your system.
The method of the drop-down list is as follows:

Case of
: (Form event=On Load)
ARRAY STRING(63;asFont;0)
FONT LIST(asFont)
` ...

End case

See Also
Font name, Font number.

1732 4D Language Reference

Font name System Environment

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Font name (fontNumber) → String

Parameter Type Description

fontNumber Longint → Font number for which to return the font name

Function result String ← Font name

Description
The Font name command returns the name of the font whose number is fontNumber. If there
is no available font with that number, the command returns an empty string.

Examples
1. To display a form object with the default system font, you write:

FONT(myObject;Font name(0)) ` 0 is the font number of the default system font

2. To display a form object with the default application font, you write:

FONT(myObject;Font name(1)) ` 1 is the font number of the default application font

See Also
FONT LIST, Font number.

4D Language Reference 1733

Font number System Environment

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Font number (fontName) → Longint

Parameter Type Description

fontName String → Font name for which to return the font number

Function result Longint ← Font number

Description
The Font number command returns the number of the font whose name is fontName. If there
is no font with this name, the command returns 0.

Example
Some forms in your database use the font whose name is “Kind of Special.” Somewhere in
your database, you could write:

If (Font number("Kind of Special")=0)

ALERT("This form would look better if the font Kind of Special was installed.")
End if

See Also
FONT LIST, Font name.

1734 4D Language Reference

Gestalt System Environment

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Gestalt (selector; value) → Number

Parameter Type Description

selector String → 4-character gestalt selector
value Number ← Gestalt result

Function result Number ← Error code result

Description
The Gestalt command returns in value a numeric value that denotes the characteristics of your
system hardware and software, depending on the selector you pass in selector.

If the requested information is obtained, Gestalt returns 0 in function result; otherwise, it

returns the error -5550. If the selector is unkown, Gestalt returns the error -5551.

Important: The Gestalt Manager is part of Mac OS. On Windows, some of the selectors are also
implemented, but the usefulness of this command is limited.

For more information about the selectors that you can pass to Gestalt, refer to the Apple
Developer documentation related to the Gestalt Manager, available on-line at the following
address:
http://developer.apple.com/documentation/Carbon/Reference/Gestalt_Manager/index.html

Example
Using version 10.4.11 of Mac OS, the following code displays the alert “You're running system
version 0x1049”:

$vlErrCode:=Gestalt("sysv";$vlInfo)
If ($vlErrCode=0)
ALERT("You're running system version "+String($vlInfo;"&x"))
End if

4D Language Reference 1735

GET SYSTEM FORMAT System Environment

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET SYSTEM FORMAT (format; value)

Parameter Type Description

format Longint → System format to be retrieved
value String ← Value of format defined in the system

Description
The GET SYSTEM FORMAT command returns the current value of several regional
parameters defined in the operating system. This command can be used to build
“automatic” custom formats based on the system preferences.

In the format parameter, pass the type of parameter whose value you want to know. The
result is returned directly by the system in the value parameter as a character string. In
format, you must pass one of the following constants of the “System format” theme. Below
is a description of these constants:
Constant (value) Value(s) returned
Decimal separator (0) Decimal separator (e.g.: “.”)
Thousand separator (1) Thousand separator (e.g.: “,”)
Currency symbol (2) Currency symbol (e.g.: “$”)
System time short pattern (3) Corresponding time display format in the form
System time medium pattern (4) “HH:MM:SS”
System time long pattern (5)
System date short pattern (6) Corresponding date display format in the form
System date medium pattern (7) “dddd d MMMM yyyy”
System date long pattern (8)
Date separator (13) Separator used in date formats (e.g.: “/”)
Time separator (14) Separator used in time formats (e.g.: “:”)
Short date day position (15) Position of the day, month, and year in the short date
format:
Short date month position (16) “1” = left
Short date year position (17) “2” = middle
“3” = right
System time AM label (18) Additional label for a time before noon in 12-hour
formats (e.g.: “Morning”)
System time PM label (19) Additional label for a time after noon in 12-hour
formats (e.g.: “Afternoon”)

1736 4D Language Reference

Example
On a check that is filled in mechanically, the amounts written are generally prefixed by “*”
characters in order to prevent fraud. If the standard system display format for currency is “$
5,422.33”, the format for checks should be of the type “$***5432.33”: no comma after the
thousand digit and no space between the $ symbol and the first number. The format to be
used with the String function must be “$*******.**”. To build it via programming, it is
necessary to know the currency symbol and the decimal separator:

GET SYSTEM FORMAT(Currency symbol;$vCurrSymb)

GET SYSTEM FORMAT(Decimal separator;$vDecSep)
$MyFormat:="###"+$vCurrSymb+"*******"+$vDecSep+"**"
$Result:=String(amount;$MyFormat)

See Also
SET FORMAT.

4D Language Reference 1737

LOG EVENT System Environment

version 11.2 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

LOG EVENT ({outputType; }message{; importance})

Parameter Type Description

outputType Integer → Message output type
message String → Contents of the message
importance Integer → Message’s importance level

Description
The LOG EVENT command allows you to set up a customized system for recording internal
events that occur during the use of your application.

Pass the custom information to be noted according to the event in message.

The optional outputType parameter can be used to specify the output channel taken by the
message. You can pass one of the following constants, located in the "Log Events" theme, in
this parameter:
Constant Type Value
Into Windows Log Events Longint 0
Into 4D Debug Message Longint 1
Into 4D Request Log Longint 2
Into 4D Commands Log Longint 3

Note: If you omit the outputType parameter, the command uses channel 0 (Into Windows Log
Events).

• Into Windows Log Events: This value indicates to 4D to send the message to the “Log events”
of Windows. This log receives and stores messages coming from running applications.

Notes:
- For this feature to be available, the Windows Log Events service must be running.
- Under Mac OS, the command does nothing with this output type.

1738 4D Language Reference

• Into 4D Debug Message: This value indicates to 4D to send the message to the system
debugging environment. The result depends on the platform:
- Under Mac OS: the command sends the message to the Console
- Under Windows: the command sends the message as a debug message. To be able to read this
message, you must have Microsoft Visual Studio or the DebugView utility for Windows
(http://technet.microsoft.com/en-us/sysinternals/bb896647.aspx).

• Into 4D Request Log: This value indicates to 4D to record the message in the 4D requests log,
if this file has been activated.

•Into 4D Commands Log: This value indicates to 4D to record the message in the 4D
commands log file, if this file has been activated.

Note: 4D log files are grouped together in the Logs folder, which is created next to the
database structure file (see the Get 4D folder command).

If you have defined the outputType parameter as Into Windows Log Events, you can attribute a
level of importance to message, via the optional importance parameter which helps you to read
and understand the log events. There are three levels of importance: Information, Warning,
and Error.
4D provides you with the following predefined constants, placed in the “Log Events” category:

Constant Type Value

Information Message Integer 0
Warning Message Integer 1
Error Message Integer 2

If you don’t pass anything in importance or pass an incorrect value, the default value (0) is
used.

Example
If you want to have keep track of when your database is opened under Windows, you could
write the following line of code in the On Startup Database Method:

LOG EVENT (Into Windows Log Events;"The Invoice database was opened.")

Each time the database is opened, this information will be written in Windows’ log events and
its level of importance will be 0.

4D Language Reference 1739

Menu bar height System Environment

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Menu bar height → Longint

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Longint ← Height (expressed in pixels) of menu bar

(returns zero if menu bar is hidden)

Description
Menu bar height returns the height of the menu bar, expressed in pixels.

See Also
HIDE MENU BAR, Menu bar screen, SHOW MENU BAR.

1740 4D Language Reference

Menu bar screen System Environment

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Menu bar screen → Longint

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Longint ← Number of screen where menu bar is located

Description
Menu bar screen returns the number of the screen where the menu bar is located.

Windows note: On Windows, Menu bar screen usually returns 1.

See Also
Count screens, Menu bar height.

4D Language Reference 1741

PLATFORM PROPERTIES System Environment

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

PLATFORM PROPERTIES (platform{; system{; processor{; language}}})

Parameter Type Description

platform Number ← 2 = Mac OS, 3 = Windows
system Number ← Depends on the version you are running
processor Number ← Processor family
language Number ← Depends on the system you are using

Description
The PLATFORM PROPERTIES command returns information about the type of operating system
you are running, the version and the language of the operating system, and the processor
installed on your machine.

PLATFORM PROPERTIES returns environment information in the platform, system, processor and
language parameters.

• platform indicates the operating system used. This parameter returns one the following
predefined constants:

Constant Type Value

Mac OS Long Integer 2
Windows Long Integer 3

• The information returned in system depends on the version of 4D you are running.

Macintosh version
If you are running a Mac OS version of 4D, the system parameter returns a 32-bit (Long
Integer) value, for which the high level word is unused and the low level word is structured
like this:
- The high byte contains the major version number,
- The low byte is composed of two nibbles (4 bits each). The high nibble is the major update
version number and the low nibble is the minor update version. Example: System 9.0.4 is
coded as $0904, so you receive the decimal value 2308.

Note: In 4D, you can extract these values using the % (modulo) and \ (integer division)
numeric operators or the Bitwise operators.

1742 4D Language Reference

Use the following formula to find out the Mac OS main version number:

PLATFORM PROPERTIES($vlPlatform;$vlSystem)
$vlResult:=$vlSystem\256
`If $vlResult = 8 → you are under Mac OS 8.x
`If $vlResult = 9 → you are under Mac OS 9.x
`If $vlResult = 16 → you are under Mac OS 10.x

Windows version
If you are running the Windows version of 4D, the system parameter returns a 32-bit (Long
Integer) value, the bits and bytes of which are structured as follows:
If the high level bit is set to 0, it means you are running Windows NT, Windows 2000,
Windows XP or Windows Vista. If the bit is set to 1, it means you are running Windows 95 or
Windows 98 (both obsolete).

Note: The high level bit fixes the sign of the long integer value. Therefore, in 4D, you just
need to test the sign of the value; if it is positive you are running Windows NT, Windows
2000, Windows XP or Windows Vista. You can also use the Bitwise operators.
The low byte gives the major Windows version number. If it returns 4, you are running
Windows 95, 98 or Windows NT 4. If it returns 5, you are running Windows 2000 or Windows
XP (in both cases, the sign of the value tells whether or not you are running NT/2000). If it
returns 6, you are running Windows Vista..
The next low byte gives the minor Windows version number. If you are running Windows 95,
this value is 0.

Note: In 4D, you can extract these values using the % (modulo) and \ (integer division)
numeric operators or the Bitwise operators.

• The processor parameter indicates the microprocessor "family" of the machine. Two values
can be returned, available in the form of constants:
Constant Type Value
Intel Compatible Long Integer 586
Power PC Long Integer 406

The combination of the platform and processor parameters can be used for example to know
without ambiguity whether the machine used is of the “MacIntel” type (platform=Mac OS and
processor=Intel Compatible).

4D Language Reference 1743

• The language parameter is used to find out the current language of the system on which the
database is running. Here is a list of the codes that can be returned in this parameter, as well
as their meanings:

Code Language
1 Arabic
2 Bulgarian
3 Catalan
4 Chinese
5 Czech
6 Danish
7 German
8 Greek
9 English
10 Spanish
11 Finnish
12 French
13 Hebrew
14 Hungarian
15 Icelandic
16 Italian
17 Japanese
18 Korean
19 Dutch
20 Norwegian
21 Polish
22 Portuguese
24 Romanian
25 Russian
26 Croatian
26 Serbian
27 Slovak
28 Albanian
29 Swedish
30 Thai
31 Turkish
33 Indonesian
34 Ukrainian
35 Belarusian
36 Slovenian

1744 4D Language Reference

37 Estonian
38 Latvian
39 Lithuanian
41 Farsi
42 Vietnamese
45 Basque
54 Afrikaans
56 Faeroese

Note: If the command is not able to identify the system language, the value 9 (English) is
returned.

Example
The following project method displays an alert box showing the OS software you are using:

` SHOW OS VERSION project method

PLATFORM PROPERTIES($vlPlatform;$vlSystem;$vlMachine)
If (($vlPlatform<2) | ($vlPlatform>3))
$vsPlatformOS:=""
Else
If ($vlPlatform=Windows)
$vsPlatformOS:=""
If ($vlSystem<0)
$winMajVers:=((2^31)+$vlSystem)%256
$winMinVers:=(((2^31)+$vlSystem)\256)%256
If ($winMinVers=0)
$vsPlatformOS:="Windows™ 95"
Else
$vsPlatformOS:="Windows™ 98"
End if
Else
$winMajVers:=$vlSystem%256
$winMinVers:=($vlSystem\256)%256
Case of
: ($winMajVers=4)
$vsPlatformOS:="Windows™ NT"

4D Language Reference 1745

 : ($winMajVers=5)
If ($winMinVers=0)
$vsPlatformOS:="Windows™ 2000"
Else
$vsPlatformOS:="Windows™ XP"
End if
: ($winMajVers=6)
$vsPlatformOS:="Windows™ Vista"

End case
End if
$vsPlatformOS:=$vsPlatformOS+" version "+String($winMajVers)+"."+
String($winMinVers)
Else
$vsPlatformOS:="Mac OS™ version "
If (($vlSystem\256) = 16)
$vsPlatformOS:=$vsPlatformOS+"10"
Else
$vsPlatformOS:=$vsPlatformOS+String($vlSystem\256)
End if
$vsPlatformOS:=$vsPlatformOS+"."+String(($vlSystem\16)%16)+(("."+String
($vlSystem%16))*Num(($vlSystem%16) # 0))
End if
End if
ALERT($vsPlatformOS)

On Windows, you get an alert box similar to this:

1746 4D Language Reference

On Macintosh, you get an alert box similar to this:

See Also
Bitwise Operators.

4D Language Reference 1747

SCREEN COORDINATES System Environment

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SCREEN COORDINATES (left; top; right; bottom{; screen})

Parameter Type Description

left Longint ← Global left coordinate of screen area
top Longint ← Global top coordinate of screen area
right Longint ← Global right coordinate of screen area
bottom Longint ← Global bottom coordinate of screen area
screen Longint → Screen number, or main screen if omitted

Description
The SCREEN COORDINATES command returns in left, top, right, and bottom the global
coordinates of the screen specified by screen.

If you omit the screen parameter, the command returns the coordinates of the main screen.

See Also
Count screens, Menu bar screen, SCREEN DEPTH.

1748 4D Language Reference

SCREEN DEPTH System Environment

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SCREEN DEPTH (depth; color{; screen})

Parameter Type Description

depth Number ← Depth of the screen
(number of colors = 2 ^ depth)
color Number ← 1 = Color screen, 0 = Black and white or Gray scale
screen Number → Screen number, or main screen if omitted

Description
The Screen depth command returns in depth and color information about the monitor.

After the call:

• The depth of the screen is returned in depth. The depth of the screen is the exponent of the
power of 2 expressing the number of colors displayed on your monitor. For example, if your
monitor is set for 256 colors (2^8), the depth of your screen is 8.

The following predefined constants are provided by 4D:

Constant Type Value
Black and white Long Integer 0
Four colors Long Integer 2
Sixteen colors Long Integer 4
Two fifty six colors Long Integer 8
Thousands of colors Long Integer 16
Millions of colors 24 bit Long Integer 24
Millions of colors 32 bit Long Integer 32

If the monitor is set to display in color, 1 is returned in color. If the monitor is set to display
in gray scale, 0 is returned in color. Note that this value is significant on the Macintosh
platform.

4D Language Reference 1749

The following predefined constants are provided by 4D:
Constant Type Value
Is gray scale Long Integer 0
Is color Long Integer 1

• The optional parameter screen specifies the monitor for which you want to get information.
If you omit the screen parameter, the command returns the depth of the main screen.

Example
Your application displays many color graphics. Somewhere in your database, you could write:
SCREEN DEPTH ($vlDepth;$vlColor)
If ($vlDepth<8)
ALERT("The forms will look better if the monitor"+" was set to display 256 colors or
more.")
End if

See Also
Count screens, SET SCREEN DEPTH.

1750 4D Language Reference

Screen height System Environment

version 3.5
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Screen height {(*)} → Number

Parameter Type Description

* Number → Windows: height of application window, or
height of screen if * is specified
Macintosh: height of main screen

Function result Number ← Height expressed in pixels

Description
On Windows, Screen height returns the height of 4D application window (MDI window). If
you specify the optional * parameter, Screen height returns the height of the screen.

On Macintosh, Screen height returns the height of the main screen, the screen where the
menu bar is located.

See Also
SCREEN COORDINATES, Screen width.

4D Language Reference 1751

Screen width System Environment

version 3.5
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Screen width {(*)} → Number

Parameter Type Description

* Number → Windows: width of application window, or
width of screen if * is specified
Macintosh: width of main screen

Function result Number ← Width expressed in pixels

Description
On Windows, Screen width returns the width of 4D application window (MDI window). If you
specify the optional * parameter, Screen width returns the width of the screen.

On Macintosh, Screen width returns the width of the main screen, the screen where the menu
bar is located.

See Also
SCREEN COORDINATES, Screen height.

1752 4D Language Reference

Select RGB Color System Environment

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Select RGB Color ({defaultColor}{; }{message}) → Longint

Parameter Type Description

defaultColor Longint → Preselected RGB color
message Alpha 255 → Title of selection window

Function result Longint ← RGB color

Description
The Select RGB Color command displays the system color selection window and returns the
RGB value of the color selected by the user.

The system color selection window appears as follows:

Windows Macintosh

The optional defaultColor parameter can be used to preselect a color in the window. This
parameter can be used, for example, to restore by default the last color set by the user. Pass
an RGB-format color value in this parameter (for more information, refer to the description
of the SET RGB COLORS command). You can use one of the constants in the “SET RGB
COLORS” theme.

4D Language Reference 1753

If the defaultColor parameter is omitted or if you pass 0, the color black is selected when the
dialog box is opened.

The optional message parameter can be used to customize the title of the system window.
By default, if this parameter is omitted, the title “Colors” is displayed.

If the user validates the dialog box, the command returns the value of the color selected in
RGB format and the system variable OK is set to 1. If the user cancels the dialog box, the
command returns -1 and the system variable OK is set to 0.

Note: This command must not be executed on the server machine nor within a Web
process.

See Also
SET RGB COLORS.

System Variables or Sets

If the user validates the dialog box, the system variable OK is set to 1; otherwise, it is set to
0.

1754 4D Language Reference

SET SCREEN DEPTH System Environment

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET SCREEN DEPTH (depth{; color{; screen}})

Parameter Type Description

depth Number → Depth of the screen
(number of colors = 2 ^ Screen depth)
color Number → 1 = Color, 0 = Gray Scale
screen Number → Screen number, or main screen if omitted

Description
SET SCREEN DEPTH changes the depth and color/gray scale settings of the screen whose
number you pass in screen. If you omit this parameter, the command is applied to the main
screen.

For details about the values you pass in color and depth, see the description of the command
SCREEN DEPTH.

See Also
SCREEN DEPTH.

4D Language Reference 1755

System folder System Environment

version 11.4 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

System folder {(type)} → String

Parameter Type Description

type Longint → Type of system folder

Function result String ← Pathname to a system folder

Description
The System folder command returns the pathname to a particular folder of the operating
system or to the active Windows or Mac OS System folder itself.

You pass in the optional type parameter a value indicating the type of system folder. 4D
provides you with the following predefined constants, placed in the “System Folder” theme:

Constant Type Value

System Long Integer 0
Fonts Long Integer 1
User Preferences_All Long Integer 2
User Preferences_User Long Integer 3
Startup Win_All Long Integer 4
Startup Win_User Long Integer 5
Start Menu Win_All Long Integer 8
Start Menu Win_User Long Integer 9
System Win Long Integer 12
System32 Win Long Integer 13
Favorites Win Long Integer 14
Desktop Long Integer 15
Applications or Program Files Long Integer 16

Notes:
• The constants suffixed Win can be used on Windows only. When they are used on Mac OS,
System folder will return an empty string.

1756 4D Language Reference

• The pathnames to some system folders can specific to the current user. Constants 2 to 9
allow you to choose whether you want to obtain the pathname to a folder which is shared by
all users, or customized for the current user.

If you omit the type parameter, the function will return the pathname to active System folder
(= constant System).

See Also
Get 4D folder, Temporary folder.

4D Language Reference 1757

Temporary folder System Environment

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Temporary folder → String

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result String ← Pathname to temporary folder

Description
The Temporary folder command returns the pathname to the current temporary folder set by
your system.

Example
See example for the command APPEND DATA TO PASTEBOARD.

See Also
System folder.

1758 4D Language Reference

53
______________________
Table

4D Language Reference 1759

1760 4D Language Reference
Current default table Table

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Current default table → Pointer

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Pointer ← Pointer to the default table

Description
Current default table returns a pointer to the table that has been passed to the last call to
DEFAULT TABLE for the current process.

Example
Provided a default table has been set, the following line of code sets the window title to the
name of the current default table:

SET WINDOW TITLE(Table name(Current default table))

See Also
DEFAULT TABLE, Table, Table name.

4D Language Reference 1761

Current form table Table

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Current form table → Pointer

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Pointer ← Pointer to the table of the currently displayed form

Description
The Current form table command returns the pointer to the table of the form being displayed
or printed in the current process.

The function returns Nil in the following cases:

• There is no form being displayed or printed in the current process,
• The current form is a project form.

If there are several windows open for the current process (which means that the window
opened last is the current active window), the command returns the pointer to the table of the
form displayed in the active window.

If the currently displayed form is the Detail form for a subform area, you are in data entry and
you double-clicked on a record or a subrecord of a double-clickable subform area. In this case,
the command returns:
• The pointer to the table shown in the subform area, if the subform displays a table.
• A non-significant pointer, if the subform area displays a subtable.

Example
Throughout your application, you use the following convention when displaying a record:
If the variable vsCurrentRecord is present in a form, it displays “New Record” if you are
working with a new record. If you are working with the 56th record of a selection composed of
5200 records, it displays “56 of 5200”.

1762 4D Language Reference

To do so, use the object method to create the variable vsCurrentRecord, then copy and paste it
into all of your forms:
` vsCurrentRecord non-enterable variable object method
Case of
: (Form event =On Load)
C_STRING (31;vsCurrentRecord)
C_POINTER ($vpParentTable)
C_LONGINT ($vlRecordNum)
$vpParentTable:=Current form table
$vlRecordNum:=Record number ($vpParentTable->)
Case of
: ($vlRecordNum=-3)
vsCurrentRecord:="New Record"
: ($vlRecordNum=-1)
vsCurrentRecord:="No Record"
: ($vlRecordNum>=0)
vsCurrentRecord:=String (Selected record number ($vpParentTable->))+
" of "+String (Records in selection ($vpParentTable->))
End case
End case

See Also
DIALOG, INPUT FORM, OUTPUT FORM, PRINT SELECTION.

4D Language Reference 1763

DEFAULT TABLE Table

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DEFAULT TABLE (aTable)

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table to set as the default

Description
DEFAULT TABLE sets aTable as the default table for the current process.

There is no default table for a process until the DEFAULT TABLE command is executed. After a
default table has been set, any command that omits the table parameter will operate on the
default table. For example, consider this command:

INPUT FORM ([Table]; "form")

If the default table is first set to [Table], the same command could be written this way:

INPUT FORM ("form")

One reason for setting the default table is to create code that is not table specific. Doing this
allows the same code to operate on different tables. You can also use pointers to tables to write
code that is not table specific. For more information about this technique, see the description
of the Table name command.

DEFAULT TABLE does not allow the omission of table names when referring to fields. For
example:

[My Table]My Field:="A string" ` Good

could not be written as:

DEFAULT TABLE ([My Table])

My Field:="A string" ` WRONG

because a default table had been set. However, you can omit the table name when referring to
fields in the table method, form, and objects that belong to the table.

1764 4D Language Reference

In 4D, all tables are “open” and ready for use. DEFAULT TABLE does not open a table, set a
current table, or prepare the table for input or output. DEFAULT TABLE is simply a
programming convenience to reduce the amount of typing and make the code easier to read.

Tip: Although using DEFAULT TABLE and omitting the table name may make the code easier to
read, many programmers find that using this command actually causes more problems and
confusion than it is worth.

Example
The following example first shows code without the DEFAULT TABLE command. It then shows
the same code, with DEFAULT TABLE. The code is a loop commonly used to add new records to
a database. The INPUT FORM and ADD RECORD commands both require a table as the first
parameter:

INPUT FORM ([Customers];"Add Recs")

Repeat
ADD RECORD ([Customers])
Until (OK = 0)

Specifying the default table results in this code:

DEFAULT TABLE ([Customers])

INPUT FORM ("Add Recs")
Repeat
ADD RECORD
Until (OK = 0)

See Also
Current default table, NO DEFAULT TABLE.

4D Language Reference 1765

NO DEFAULT TABLE Table

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

NO DEFAULT TABLE

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
The NO DEFAULT TABLE command is used to cancel the effect of the DEFAULT TABLE
command. After this command is executed, there is no longer any default table defined for
the process.
This command will have no effect if the DEFAULT TABLE command has not been called
beforehand.

This command concerns the use of project forms (forms not linked with tables): most of
the commands related to forms (apart from user forms) accept an optional aTable parameter
as their first parameter. For example, this is the case with the GET FORM PARAMETER, Open
form window or DIALOG commands. Since a project form and table form can have the same
name, this parameter can be used to determine the form to be used: pass the aTable
parameter when you want to target the table form and omit it in the case of a project form.
In a database containing a project form named “TheForm” and a table form with the same
name for the [Table1] table:
DIALOG([Table1];"TheForm") `4D uses the table form
DIALOG("TheForm") `4D uses the project form
However, this principle is null and void if the DEFAULT TABLE command is executed when
the database contains a project form and a table form with the same name. In fact, in this
case 4D will use the table form by default, even if the aTable parameter is not passed. In
order to guarantee the use of project forms, simply use the NO DEFAULT TABLE command.

Example
In a database containing a project form named “TheForm” and a table form with the same
name for the [Table1] table:

DEFAULT TABLE([Table1])
DIALOG("TheForm") `4D uses the table form
NO DEFAULT TABLE
DIALOG("TheForm") `4D uses the project form

See Also
DEFAULT TABLE.

1766 4D Language Reference

54
______________________
Tools

4D Language Reference 1767

1768 4D Language Reference
Choose Tools

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Choose (criterion; value{; value2; ...; valueN}) → Expression

Parameter Type Description

criterion Boolean | Integer → Value to test
value Expression → Possible values

Function result Expression ← Value of criterion

Description
The Choose command returns one of the values passed in the value1, value2, etc.
parameters depending on the value of the criterion parameter.

You can pass either a Boolean or Number type in the criterion parameter:
• If criterion is a Boolean, Choose returns value1 if the Boolean equals True and value2 if the
Boolean equals False. In this case, the command expects exactly three parameters: criterion,
value1 and value2.
• If criterion is an integer, Choose returns the value whose position corresponds to criterion.
Be careful, numbering of the values begins with 0 (the position of value1 is thus 0). In this
case, the command expects at least two parameters: criterion and value1.

The command accepts all types of data for the value parameter(s), except for pictures,
pointers, BLOBS and arrays. Nevertheless, you need to make sure that all the values passed
are of the same type, 4D will not carry out any verification on this point.

If no value corresponds to criterion, Choose returns a “null” value with respect to the type of
the value parameter (for example, 0 for a Number type, “” for a String type, and so on).

This command can be used to generate concise code that replaces tests of the “Case of”
type that take up several lines (see example 2). It is also very useful in places where
formulas can be executed: query editor, application of a formula, quick report editor,
column calculated in a listbox, and so on.

Examples
1. Here is an example of the typical use of this command with a Boolean type criterion:

vTitle:=Choose([Person]Masculine;"Mr";"Ms")

4D Language Reference 1769

This code is strictly equivalent to:

If([Person]Masculine)
vTitle:="Mr"
Else
vTitle:="Ms"
End if

2. Here is an example of the typical use of this command with a Number type criterion:

vStatus:=Choose([Person]Status;"Single";"Married";"Widowed";"Divorced")

This code is strictly equivalent to:

Case of
:([Person]Status=0)
vStatus:="Single"
:([Person]Status=1)
vStatus:="Married"
:([Person]Status=2)
vStatus:="Widowed"
:([Person]Status=3)
vStatus:="Divorced"
End case

1770 4D Language Reference

DECODE Tools

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DECODE (blob)

Parameter Type Description

blob BLOB → BLOB encoded in Base64 format
← Decoded BLOB

Description
The DECODE command allows you to decode the BLOB coded in Base64 format passed in
the blob parameter. The command directly modifies the BLOB passed as a parameter.

The command does not verify the contents of the blob. You must verify that the data
passed is really coded in Base64 format, otherwise the result will be incorrect.

See Also
ENCODE.

4D Language Reference 1771

ENCODE Tools

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

ENCODE (blob)

Parameter Type Description

blob BLOB → BLOB to encode in Base64 format
← BLOB encoded in Base64 format

Description
The ENCODE command encodes the BLOB passed in the blob parameter in Base64 format.
The command directly modifies the BLOB passed as a parameter.

Base64 encoding modifies 8-bit coded data so that they do not keep more than 7 useful
bits. This encoding is required, for example, for handling BLOBs using XML.

See Also
DECODE.

1772 4D Language Reference

GET MACRO PARAMETER Tools

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET MACRO PARAMETER (selector; textParam)

Parameter Type Description

selector Longint → Selection to use
textParam Text ← Returned text

Description
The GET MACRO PARAMETER command returns, in the paramText parameter, all or part of
the text of the method from which it was called.

The selector parameter can be used to set the type of information to be returned. You can
pass one of the following constants, added to the “4D Environment” theme:
Constant Type Value
Full method text Longint 1
Highlighted method text Longint 2

If you pass Full method text in selector, all of the text of the method will be returned in
paramText. If you pass Highlighted method text in selector, only the text selected in the
method will be returned in paramText.

Example
Refer to the example of the SET MACRO PARAMETER command.

4D Language Reference 1773

LAUNCH EXTERNAL PROCESS Tools

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

LAUNCH EXTERNAL PROCESS (fileName{; inputStream{; outputStream{; errorStream}}})

Parameter Type Description

fileName String → File path and arguments of file to launch
inputStream String | BLOB → Input stream (stdin)
outputStream String | BLOB ← Output stream (stdout)
errorStream String | BLOB ← Error stream (stderr)

Warning: This command is designed for advanced users.

Description
The LAUNCH EXTERNAL PROCESS command allows you to launch an external process from
4D under Mac OS X and Windows.
Under Mac OS X, this command provides access to any executable application that can be
launched from the Terminal.

Note: For 4D Pack users, this command has the same functions (plus expanded features) as
the AP_Sublaunch command.

Pass the fixed file path of the application to execute, as well as any required arguments (if
necessary), in the fileName parameter.
Under Mac OS X, you can also pass the application name only; 4D will then use the PATH
environment variable to locate the executable.

Warning: This command can only launch executable applications; it cannot execute
instructions that are part of the shell (command interpreter). For example, under Mac OS it
is not possible to use this command to execute the echo instruction or indirections.

The inputStream parameter (optional) contains the stdin of the external process. Once the
command has been executed, the outputStream and errorStream parameters (if passed)
return respectively the stdout and stderr of the external process. You can use BLOB
parameters instead of strings if you manage text data of a size greater than 32 KB or binary
data (such as pictures).

Note: If you use the _4D_OPTION_BLOCKING_EXTERNAL_PROCESS environment variable via

the SET ENVIRONMENT VARIABLE command (asynchronous execution), the outputStream
and errorStream parameters are not returned.

1774 4D Language Reference

Examples under Mac OS X
The following examples use the Mac OS X Terminal available in the Application/Utilities
folder.

1. To change permissions for a file (chmod is the Mac OS X command used to modify file
access):

LAUNCH EXTERNAL PROCESS ("chmod +x /folder/myfile.txt")

2. To edit a text file (cat is the Mac OS X command used to edit files). In this example, the
full access path of the command is passed:

C_TEXT(input;output)
input:=""
LAUNCH EXTERNAL PROCESS ("/bin/cat /folder/myfile.txt";input;output)

3. To get the contents of the “Users” folder (ls -l is the Mac OS X equivalent of the dir
command in DOS):

C_TEXT($In;$Out)
LAUNCH EXTERNAL PROCESS("/bin/ls -l /Users";$In;$Out)

4. To launch an independent "graphic" application, it is preferableb to use the open system

command (in this case, the LAUNCH EXTERNAL PROCESS statement has the same effect as
double-clicking the application): 

LAUNCH EXTERNAL PROCESS("open /Applications/Calculator.app")

Examples under Windows

5. To open NotePad:

LAUNCH EXTERNAL PROCESS ("C:\\WINDOWS\\notepad.exe")

6. To open Notepad and open a specific document:

LAUNCH EXTERNAL PROCESS ("C:\\WINDOWS\\notepad.exe C:\\Docs\\

new folder\\res.txt")

7. To launch the Microsoft® Word® application and open a specific document (note the
use of the two ""):

$mydoc:="C:\\Program Files\\Microsoft Office\\Office10\\WINWORD.EXE \

"C:\\Documents and Settings\\Mark\\Desktop\\MyDocs\\
New folder\\test.xml\""
LAUNCH EXTERNAL PROCESS($mydoc;$tIn;$tOut)

4D Language Reference 1775

8. To execute a Perl script (requires ActivePerl):

C_TEXT($input;$output)
SET ENVIRONMENT VARIABLE("myvariable";"value")
LAUNCH EXTERNAL PROCESS ("D:\\Perl\\bin\\perl.exe D:\\Perl\\eg\\cgi\\env.pl";
$input;$output)

9. To launch a command with the current directory and without displaying the console:

SET ENVIRONMENT VARIABLE("_4D_OPTION_CURRENT_DIRECTORY";"C:\\4D_VCS")

SET ENVIRONMENT VARIABLE("_4D_OPTION_HIDE_CONSOLE";"true")
LAUNCH EXTERNAL PROCESS("mycommand")

10. To allow the user to open an external document on Windows:

$docname:=Select document("";"*.*";"Choose the file to open";0)

If(OK=1)
SET ENVIRONMENT VARIABLE("_4D_OPTION_HIDE_CONSOLE";"true")
LAUNCH EXTERNAL PROCESS("cmd.exe /C start \"\" \""+document+"\"")
End if

See Also
SET ENVIRONMENT VARIABLE.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been executed correctly, the system variable OK is set to 1. Otherwise
(file not found, insufficient memory, etc.), it is set to 0.

1776 4D Language Reference

OPEN WEB URL Tools

version 11.2 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

OPEN WEB URL (url{; *})

Parameter Type Description

url String → Startup URL
* * → If specified = URL is not translated,
If omitted = URL is translated

Description
The OPEN WEB URL command opens the file or URL passed in theurl parameter with the most
suitable application.

The url parameter can contain either a standard URL or a file pathname.

4D first attempts to interpret the parameter as a file pathname. The command accepts colons
(':') under Mac OS, slashes ('\') under Windows or a Posix URL beginning with file://. If this is
the case, 4D will request the system to open the file using the most suitable application (for
example, a browser for .html files, Word for .doc files, etc.). The * parameter is ignored in this
case.

If the url parameter contains a standard URL (mailto:, news:, http:, etc. protocols), 4D starts
the default Web browser and accesses the URL. If there is no browser on the volumes
connected to the computer, this command has no effect.

4D automatically encodes the URL’s special characters. If you pass the * character, 4D will not
translate the URL’s special characters. This option allows you to access and to send URLS of
type "http://www.server.net/page.htm?q=something".

Note: This command does not work when called from a Web process.

Examples
1. The following examples illustrate different types of strings that are accepted as URLs by the
command:

OPEN WEB URL( "http://www.4d.com")

OPEN WEB URL( "file://C:/Users/Lauren/Documents/pending.htm")
OPEN WEB URL( "C:\Users\Lauren\Documents\pending.htm")
OPEN WEB URL( "mailto:[email protected]")

4D Language Reference 1777

2. This example can be used to launch an application :

$fichier:=Select document("";"";0)
If(OK = 1)
OPEN WEB URL(Document)
End if

1778 4D Language Reference

SET DICTIONARY Tools

version 2004.5 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET DICTIONARY (dictionary)

Parameter Type Description

dictionary Longint → Dictionary to use for spell-check

Description
The SET DICTIONARY command causes the replacement of the current dictionary with the
one specified by the dictionary parameter. The current dictionary is used for the built-in
spell-check feature in 4D (for more information, refer to the 4D Design Reference manual).
The modification of the current dictionary is reflected in all the processes of the database
for the session.

By default, 4D uses the dictionary corresponding to the application language. Five main
dictionaries are available: English, French, German, Spanish and Norwegian.

In dictionary, pass the number of the dictionary to use. You can use one of the following
predefined constants, which are found in the “Dictionaries” theme:
Constant Type Value
English Dictionary Longint 69632
German Dictionary Longint 131584
Spanish Dictionary Longint 196608
French Dictionary Longint 262144
Norwegian Dictionary Longint 589824

In addition, numerous variants are available for each of the four main languages. Here is
the full list of all variants supported by the command. To load a variant, pass its value
directly in the dictionary parameter:

Dictionary Value
English (United Kingdom) 65536
English Irish (Ireland) 65600
English Australian (Australia) 65664
English of New Zealand 65680
English American (USA) 65792
English Canadian (Canada) 65920
English South African (South Africa) 66048
English West Indian (Caribbean) 66176
English Jamaican (Jamaica) 66192
English (United Kingdom + America) 69632 (*)

4D Language Reference 1779

German standard (Germany, old spelling) 131072
German of Luxembourg 131073
German of Austria 131088
German of Liechtenstein 131089
German of Switzerland (old spelling) 131104
German of South Tyrol 131120
German New spelling 131328
German of Switzerland New spelling 131360
German Old and New spelling 131584 (*)
German of Switzerland Old and New spelling 131616
Spanish standard (Spain) 196608 (*)
Spanish of Latin America standard 196864
Spanish Argentinean (Argentina) 196865
Spanish Bolivian (Bolivia) 196866
Spanish Chilean (Chile) 196867
Spanish Columbian (Columbia) 196868
Spanish Cuban (Cuba) 196869
Spanish Costa Rican (Costa Rica) 196870
Spanish Dominican (Dominican Rep.) 196871
Spanish Ecuadorian (Ecuador) 196872
Spanish Guatemalan (Guatemala) 196873
Spanish Honduran (Honduras) 196874
Spanish Mexican (Mexico) 196875
Spanish Nicaraguan (Nicaragua) 196876
Spanish Panamanian (Panama) 196877
Spanish Paraguayan (Paraguay) 196878
Spanish Peruvian (Peru) 196879
Spanish Puerto Rican (Puerto Rico) 196880
Spanish Salvadorian (El Salvador) 196881
Spanish Uruguayan (Uruguay) 196882
Spanish Venezuelan (Venezuela) 196883
Spanish Guinean (Equatorial Guinea) 197121
France, Monaco, Valle d’Aosta 262144 (*)
Canada 262160
Louisiana 262161
Belgium 262176
Luxembourg 262177
Switzerland 262192
Martinique, Guadeloupe, Haïti, Guyana 262208
Reunion, Seychelles, Comoro, Mauritius 262224
Tahiti, New Caledonia, Vanuatu, etc. 262240
Morocco, Algeria, Tunisia 262256
French African standard 262272
Benin 262273
Burkina Faso 262274
Burundi 262275
Cameroon 262276

1780 4D Language Reference

Central African Republics 262277
Congo (Brazzaville) 262278
Democratic Republic of Congo (ex-Zaire) 262279
Ivory Coast 262280
Djibouti 262281
Gabon 262282
Guinea 262283
Mauritania 262284
Niger 262285
Rwanda 262286
Senegal 262287
Chad 262288
Togo 262289
Bokmal Norwegian 589824 (*)
Nynorsk Norwegian 590080
Samnorsk Norwegian 590336

(*) standard dictionary that is installed when you use a constant.

Note: The Norwegian dictionary is not present by default in 4D. Please contact 4D in order
to obtain it free of charge. You must then install it in the 4D Extensions/Spellcheck folder.

See Also
SPELL CHECKING.

System Variables or Sets

If the dictionary is loaded correctly, the system variable OK is set to 1; otherwise, it is set to
0 and an error is returned.

4D Language Reference 1781

SET ENVIRONMENT VARIABLE Tools

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET ENVIRONMENT VARIABLE (varName; varValue)

Parameter Type Description

varName String → Variable name to set
varValue String → Value of the variable or
"" to reset default value

Description
The SET ENVIRONMENT VARIABLE command allows you to set the value of an environment
variable under Mac OS X and Windows. It is meant to be used with the SET CGI
EXECUTABLE or LAUNCH EXTERNAL PROCESS commands.

Pass the name of the variable to define in varName and its value in varValue.

• To get the general list of environment variables and possible values, please refer to the
technical documentation of your operating system.
• To see the list of environment variables available with the SET CGI EXECUTABLE
command, please refer to the Using CGIs section in the “Web Server” chapter.
• To see the list of environment variables available with the LAUNCH EXTERNAL PROCESS
command, please refer to the documentation for this command. Note that three specific
environment variables are available for use in this context:
_4D_OPTION_CURRENT_DIRECTORY: Used to set the current directory of the external
process to be launched. In varValue, you must pass the pathname of the directory (HFS type
syntax on Mac OS and DOS on Windows).
_4D_OPTION_HIDE_CONSOLE (Windows only): Used to hide the window of the DOS
console. You must pass "true" in varValue to hide the console or "false" to display it.
_4D_OPTION_BLOCKING_EXTERNAL_PROCESS: Used to execute the external process in
asynchronous mode, in other words, non-blocking for other applications. You must pass
"false" in varValue to set an asynchronous execution.
These variables are valid in the current process for the next call to LAUNCH EXTERNAL
PROCESS.

Example
Refer to examples 7 and 8 of the LAUNCH EXTERNAL PROCESS command.

See Also
LAUNCH EXTERNAL PROCESS, SET CGI EXECUTABLE, Using CGIs.

1782 4D Language Reference

SET MACRO PARAMETER Tools

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET MACRO PARAMETER (selector; textParam)

Parameter Type Description

selector Longint → Selection to use
textParam Text → Text sent

Description
The SET MACRO PARAMETER command inserts the paramText text into the method from
which it has been called.

If text has been selected in the method, the selector parameter can be used to set whether
the paramText text must replace all of the method text or only the selected text. In selector,
you can pass one of the following constants, added to the “4D Environment” theme:
Constant Type Value
Full method text Longint 1
Highlighted method text Longint 2

If no text has been selected, paramText is inserted into the method.

Compatibility Note: In order for the GET MACRO PARAMETER and SET MACRO PARAMETER
commands to work correctly, the new “version” attribute must be declared in the macro
itself. The “version” attribute must be declared as follows:
<macro name="MyMacro" version="2">
--- Text of macro ---
</macro>

Example
This macro builds a new text that will be returned to the calling method:

C_TEXT($input_text)
C_TEXT($output_text)
GET MACRO PARAMETER(Highlighted method text;$input_text)

4D Language Reference 1783

 `Suppose that the selected text is a table, i.e. “[Customers]”
$output_text:=""
` Select all ([Customers])
$output_text:=$output_text+Command name(47)+"("+$input_text+")"
` $i:=Records in selection([Customers])
$output_text:=$output_text+"$i:="+Command name(76)+"("+ $input_text+")"
SET MACRO PARAMETER(Highlighted method text;$output_text)
`Replaces the selected text by the new code

See Also
GET MACRO PARAMETER.

1784 4D Language Reference

SPELL CHECKING Tools

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SPELL CHECKING

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
The SPELL CHECKING command provokes the spell check of the field or variable having the
focus in the currently displayed form. The object checked must be of the string or text type.

Spell checking starts with the first word of the field or variable. If an unknown word is
detected, the spell check dialog box appears (for more information, refer to the Design
Reference manual of 4D). 4D uses the current dictionary (corresponding to the language of
the application) unless you have used the SET DICTIONARY command.

See Also
SET DICTIONARY.

4D Language Reference 1785

1786 4D Language Reference
55
______________________
Transactions

4D Language Reference 1787

1788 4D Language Reference
Using Transactions Transactions

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Transactions are a series of related data modifications made to a database within a process. A
transaction is not saved to a database permanently until the transaction is validated. If a
transaction is not completed, either because it is canceled or because of some outside event,
the modifications are not saved.

During a transaction, all changes made to the database data within a process are stored locally
in a temporary buffer. If the transaction is accepted with VALIDATE TRANSACTION, the changes
are saved permanently. If the transaction is canceled with CANCEL TRANSACTION, the changes
are not saved. In all cases, neither the current selection nor the current record are modified by
the transaction management commands.

Starting with version 11, 4D supports nested transactions, i.e. transactions on several
hierarchical levels. The number of subtransactions allowed is unlimited. The Transaction level
command can be used to find out the current transaction level where the code is executed.
When you use nested transactions, the result of each subtransaction depends on the
validation or cancellation of the higher-level transaction. If the higher-level transaction is
validated, the results of the subtransactions are confirmed (validation or cancellation). On the
other hand, if the higher-level transaction is cancelled, all the subtransactions are cancelled,
regardless of their respective results.

Compatibility option
Since nested transactions can lead to malfunctioning in databases developed with previous
versions of 4D, it is disabled by default in converted databases (transactions remain limited to
a single level). If you want to take advantage of transactions on several levels in a converted
database, you must indicate this explicitly by checking the Allow Nested Transactions option
on the “Application/Compatibility” page of the application Preferences.
This option only appears in converted databases. By default, it is not checked. It is specific to
each database. It has no effect on transactions carried out in the SQL engine of 4D. SQL
transactions are always multi-level.

4D Language Reference 1789

Transaction Examples
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

In this example, the database is a simple invoicing system. The invoice lines are stored in a
table called [Invoice Lines], which is related to the table [Invoices] by means of a relation
between the fields [Invoices]Invoice ID and [Invoice Lines]Invoice ID. When an invoice is
added, a unique ID is calculated, using the Sequence number command. The relation between
[Invoices] and [Invoice Lines] is an automatic Relate Many relation. The Auto assign related
value in subform check box is checked.

The relation between [Invoice Lines] and [Parts] is manual.

When a user enters an invoice, the following actions are executed:

• Add a record in the table [Invoices].
• Add several records in the table [Invoice Lines].
• Update the [Parts]In Warehouse field of each part listed in the invoice.

This example is a typical situation in which you need to use a transaction. You must be sure
that you can save all these records during the operation or that you will be able to cancel the
transaction if a record cannot be added or updated. In other words, you must save related data.

If you do not use a transaction, you cannot guarantee the logical data integrity of your
database. For example, if one record of the [Parts] records is locked, you will not be able to
update the quantity stored in the field [Parts]In Warehouse. Therefore, this field will become
logically incorrect. The sum of the parts sold and the parts remaining in the warehouse will
not be equal to the original quantity entered in the record. You can avoid such a situation by
using transactions.

1790 4D Language Reference

There are several ways of performing data entry using transactions:

1. You can handle the transactions yourself by using the transaction commands START
TRANSACTION, VALIDATE TRANSACTION, and CANCEL TRANSACTION. You can write, for
example:

READ WRITE([Invoice Lines])

READ WRITE([Parts])
INPUT FORM([Invoices];"Input")
Repeat
START TRANSACTION
ADD RECORD([Invoices])
If (OK=1)
VALIDATE TRANSACTION
Else
CANCEL TRANSACTION
End if
Until (OK=0)
READ ONLY(*)

2. To reduce record locking while performing the data entry, you can also choose to manage
transactions from within the form method and access the tables in READ WRITE only when it
becomes necessary.

You perform the data entry using the input form for [Invoices], which contains the related
table [Invoice Lines] in a subform. The form has two buttons: bCancel and bOK, both of which
are no action buttons.
The adding loop becomes:

READ WRITE([Invoice Lines])

READ ONLY([Parts])
INPUT FORM([Invoices];"Input")
Repeat
ADD RECORD([Invoices])
Until (bOK=0)
READ ONLY([Invoice Lines])

Note that the [Parts] table is now in read-only access mode during data entry. Read/write
access will be available only if the data entry is validated.

4D Language Reference 1791

The transaction is started in the [Invoices] input form method listed here:

Case of
: (Form Event=On Load)
START TRANSACTION
[Invoices]Invoice ID:=Sequence number([Invoices]Invoice ID)
Else
[Invoices]Total Invoice:=Sum([Invoice Lines]Total line)
End case

If you click the bCancel button, the data entry as well as the transaction must be canceled.
Here is the object method of the bCancel button:

Case of
: (Form Event=On Clicked)
CANCEL TRANSACTION
CANCEL
End case

If you click the bValidate button, the data entry must be accepted and the transaction must be
validated. Here is the object method of the bOK button:

Case of
: (Form Event=On Clicked)
$NbLines:=Records in selection([Invoice Lines])
READ WRITE([Parts]) ` Switch to Read/Write access for the [Parts] table
FIRST RECORD([Invoice Lines]) ` Start at the first line
$ValidTrans:=True ` Assume everything will be OK
For ($Line;1;$NbLines) ` For each line
RELATE ONE([Invoice Lines]Part No)
OK:=1 ` Assume you want to continue
` Try getting the record in Read/Write access
While (Locked([Parts]) & (OK=1))
CONFIRM("The Part "+[Invoice Lines]Part No+" is in use. Wait?")
If (OK=1)
DELAY PROCESS(Current process;60)
LOAD RECORD([Parts])
End if
End while

1792 4D Language Reference

 If (OK=1)
` Update quantity in the warehouse
[Parts]In Warehouse:=[Parts]In Warehouse-[Invoice Lines]Quantity
SAVE RECORD([Parts]) ` Save the record
Else
$Line:=$NbLines+1 ` Leave the loop
$ValidTrans:=False
End if
NEXT RECORD([Invoice Lines]) ` Go next line
End for
READ ONLY([Parts]) ` Set the table state to read only
If ($ValidTrans)
SAVE RECORD([Invoices]) ` Save the Invoices record
VALIDATE TRANSACTION ` Validate all database modifications
Else
CANCEL TRANSACTION ` Cancel everything
End if
CANCEL ` Leave the form
End case

In this code, we call the CANCEL command regardless of the button clicked. The new record is
not validated by a call to ACCEPT, but by the SAVE RECORD command. In addition, note that
SAVE RECORD is called just before the VALIDATE TRANSACTION command. Therefore, saving
the [Invoices] record is actually a part of the transaction. Calling the ACCEPT command would
also validate the record, but in this case the transaction would be validated before the
[Invoices] record was saved. In other words, the record would be saved outside the transaction.

Depending on your needs, you can customize your database, as shown in these examples. In
the last example, the handling of locked records in the [Parts] table could be developed further.

See Also
CANCEL TRANSACTION, In transaction, START TRANSACTION, VALIDATE TRANSACTION.

4D Language Reference 1793

CANCEL TRANSACTION Transactions

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

CANCEL TRANSACTION

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
CANCEL TRANSACTION cancels the transaction that was started with START TRANSACTION of
the corresponding level in the current process. CANCEL TRANSACTION cancels the operations
executed on the data during the transaction.

See Also
In transaction, START TRANSACTION, Transaction level, Using Transactions, VALIDATE
TRANSACTION.

1794 4D Language Reference

In transaction Transactions

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

In transaction → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Boolean ← Returns TRUE if current process is in transaction

Description
The In transaction command returns TRUE if the current process is in a transaction, otherwise it
returns FALSE.

Example
If you perform a multi-record operation (adding, modifying, or deleting records), you may
encounter locked records. In this case, if you have to maintain data integrity, you must be in
transaction so you can “roll-back” the whole operation and leave the database untouched.

If you perform the operation from within a trigger or from a subroutine (that can be called
while in transaction or not), you can use In transaction to check whether or not the current
process method or the caller method started a transaction. If a transaction was not started, you
do not even start the operation, because you already know that you will not be able to roll it
back if it fails.

See Also
CANCEL TRANSACTION, START TRANSACTION, Triggers, VALIDATE TRANSACTION.

4D Language Reference 1795

START TRANSACTION Transactions

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

START TRANSACTION

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
START TRANSACTION starts a transaction in the current process. All changes to the data
(records) of the database within the transaction are stored temporarily until the transaction is
accepted (validated) or canceled.

Beginning with version 11 of 4D, you can nest several transactions (sub-transactions). Each
transaction or sub-transaction must eventually be cancelled or validated. Note that if the main
transaction is cancelled, all the sub-transactions are cancelled as well, regardless of their result.

See Also
CANCEL TRANSACTION, In transaction, Transaction level, Using Transactions, VALIDATE
TRANSACTION.

1796 4D Language Reference

Transaction level Transactions

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Transaction level → Longint

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Longint ← Current transaction level (0 if no

transaction has been started)

Description
The Transaction level command returns the current transaction level for the process. This
command takes all the transactions of the current process into account, regardless of
whether they were started via the 4D language or via SQL.

See Also
In transaction, START TRANSACTION, Using Transactions.

4D Language Reference 1797

VALIDATE TRANSACTION Transactions

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

VALIDATE TRANSACTION

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
VALIDATE TRANSACTION accepts the transaction that was started with START TRANSACTION of
the corresponding level in the current process. VALIDATE TRANSACTION saves the changes to
the data of the database that occurred during the transaction.

Starting with version 11 of 4D, you can nest several transactions (sub-transactions). If the
main transaction is cancelled, all the sub-transactions are cancelled, even if they have been
validated individually using this command.

System Variables and Sets

The system variable OK is set to 1 if the transaction has been validated correctly; otherwise, it
is set to 0.

See Also
CANCEL TRANSACTION, In transaction, START TRANSACTION, Using Transactions.

1798 4D Language Reference

56
______________________
Triggers

4D Language Reference 1799

1800 4D Language Reference
Triggers Triggers

version 11.2 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

A Trigger is a method attached to a table. It is a property of a table. You do not call triggers;
they are automatically invoked by the 4D database engine each time you manipulate table
records (add, delete and modify). You can write very simple triggers, and then make them
more sophisticated.

Triggers can prevent “illegal” operations on the records of your database. They are a very
powerful tool for restricting operations on a table, as well as preventing accidental data loss or
tampering. For example, in an invoicing system, you can prevent anyone from adding an
invoice without specifying the customer to whom the invoice is billed.

Activating and Creating a Trigger

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

By default, when you create a table in the Design Environment, it has no trigger.

To use a trigger for a table, you need to:

• Activate the trigger and tell 4D when it has to be invoked.
• Write the code for the trigger.

Activating a trigger that is not yet written or writing a trigger without activating it will not
affect the operations performed on a table.

1. Activating a Trigger
To activate a trigger for a table, you must select one of the Triggers options (database events)
for the table in the Inspector window of the structure:

4D Language Reference 1801

On saving new record
If this option is selected, the trigger will be invoked each time a record is added to the table.
This happens when:
• Adding a record in data entry (Design environment, ADD RECORD command or the SQL
INSERT command).
• Creating and saving a record with CREATE RECORD and SAVE RECORD. Note that the trigger is
invoked at the moment you call SAVE RECORD, not when it is created.
• Importing records (Design environment or using an import command).
• Calling any other commands that create and/or save new records (i.e., ARRAY TO SELECTION,
SAVE RELATED ONE, etc.).
• Using a Plug-in that calls the CREATE RECORD and SAVE RECORD commands.

On saving an existing record

If this option is selected, the trigger will be invoked each time a record of the table is modified.
This happens when:
• Modifying a record in data entry (Design environment, MODIFY RECORD command or the
SQL UPDATE command).
• Saving an already existing record using SAVE RECORD.
• Calling any other commands that save existing records (i.e., ARRAY TO SELECTION, APPLY TO
SELECTION, etc.).
• Using a Plug-in that calls the SAVE RECORD command.

On deleting a record
If this option is selected, the trigger will be invoked each time a record of the table is deleted.
This happens when:
• Deleting a record (Design environment or calling DELETE RECORD, DELETE SELECTION or the
SQL DELETE command).
• Performing any operation that provokes deletion of related records through the deletion
control options of a relation.
• Using a Plug-in that calls the DELETE RECORD command.

Note: The TRUNCATE TABLE command does NOT call the trigger.

2. Creating a Trigger
To create a trigger for a table, use the Explorer Window, click on the Edit... button in the
Inspector window of the structure, or press Alt (on Windows) or Option (Macintosh) and
double-click on the table title in the Structure window. For more information, see the 4D
Design Reference manual.

1802 4D Language Reference

Database Events
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

A trigger can be invoked for one of the three database events described above. Within the
trigger, you detect which event is occurring by calling the Database event function. This
function returns a numeric value that denotes the database event.

Typically, you write a trigger with a Case of structure on the result returned by Database event.
You can use the constants of the Database Events theme:

` Trigger for [anyTable]

C_LONGINT($0)
$0:=0 ` Assume the database request will be granted
Case of
: (Database event=On Saving New Record Event)
` Perform appropriate actions for the saving of a newly created record
: (Database event=On Saving Existing Record Event)
` Perform appropriate actions for the saving of an already existing record
: (Database event=On Deleting Record Event)
` Perform appropriate actions for the deletion of a record
End case

Triggers are Functions

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

A trigger has two purposes:

• Performing actions on the record just before it is saved or deleted.
• Granting or rejecting a database operation.

1. Performing Actions
Each time a record is saved (added or modified) to a [Documents] table, you want to “mark”
the record with a time stamp for creation and another one for the most recent modification.
You can write the following trigger:

` Trigger for table [Documents]

Case of
: (Database event=On Saving New Record Event)
[Documents]Creation Stamp:=Time stamp
[Documents]Modification Stamp:=Time stamp
: (Database event=On Saving Existing Record Event)
[Documents]Modification Stamp:=Time stamp
End case

4D Language Reference 1803

Note: The Time stamp function used in this example is a small project method that returns the
number of seconds elapsed since a fixed date was chosen arbitrarily.

After this trigger has been written and activated, no matter what way you add or modify a
record to the [Documents] table (data entry, import, project method, 4D plug-in), the fields
[Documents]Creation Stamp and [Documents]Modification Stamp will automatically be assigned
by the trigger before the record is eventually written to the disk.

Note: See the example for the GET DOCUMENT PROPERTIES command for a complete study of
this example.

2. Granting or rejecting the database operation

To grant or reject a database operation, the trigger must return a trigger error code in the $0
function result.

Example
Let’s take the case of an [Employees] table. During data entry, you enforce a rule on the field
[Employees]Social Security Number. When you click the validation button, you check the field
using the object method of the button:

` bAccept button object method

If (Good SS number ([Employees]SS number))
ACCEPT
Else
BEEP
ALERT ("Enter a Social Security Number then click OK again.")
End if

If the field value is valid, you accept the data entry; if the field value is not valid, you display
an alert and you stay in data entry.

If you also create [Employees] records programmatically, the following piece of code would be
programmatically valid, but would violate the rule expressed in the previous object method:

` Extract from a project method

` ...
CREATE RECORD ([Employees])
[Employees]Name :="DOE"
SAVE RECORD ([Employees]) ` ← DB rule violation! The SS number has not been assigned!
` ...

1804 4D Language Reference

Using a trigger for the [Employees]table, you can enforce the [Employees]SS number rule at all
the levels of the database. The trigger would look like this:

` Trigger for [Employees]

$0:=0
$dbEvent:=Database event
Case of
: (($dbEvent=On Saving New Record Event) | ($dbEvent=
On Saving Existing Record Event))
If (Not(Good SS number ([Employees]SS number)))
$0:=-15050
Else
` ...
End if
` ...
End case

Once this trigger is written and activated, the line SAVE RECORD ([Employees]) will generate a
database engine error -15050, and the record will NOT be saved.

Similarly, if a 4D Plug-in attempted to save an [Employees] record with an invalid social

security number, the trigger will generate the same error and the record will not be saved.

The trigger guarantees that nobody (user, database designer, Plug-in, 4D Open client with
4D Server) can violate the social security number rule, either deliberately or accidentally.

Note that even if you do not have a trigger for a table, you can get database engine errors
while attempting to save or delete a record. For example, if you attempt to save a record with a
duplicated value in a unique indexed field, the error -9998 is returned.

Therefore, triggers returning errors add new database engine errors to your application:
• 4D manages the “regular” errors: unique index, relational data control, and so on.
• Using triggers, you manage the custom errors unique to your application.

Important: You can return an error code value of your choice. However, do NOT use error
codes already taken by the 4D database engine. We strongly recommend that you use error
codes between -32000 and -15000. We reserve error codes above -15000 for the database
engine.

4D Language Reference 1805

At the process level, you handle trigger errors the same way you handle database engine errors:
• You can let 4D display the standard error dialog box, then the method is halted.
• You can use an error-handling method installed using ON ERR CALL and recover the error the
appropriate way.

Notes:
• During data entry, if a trigger error is returned while attempting to validate or delete a
record, the error is handled like a unique indexed error. The error dialog is displayed, and you
stay in data entry. Even if you only use a database in the Design environment (not in the
Application environment), you have the benefit of using triggers.
• When an error is generated by a trigger within the framework of a command acting on a
selection of records (like DELETE SELECTION), the execution of the command is immediately
stopped, without the selection having necessarily been completely processed. This case
requires appropriate handling by the developer, based, for instance, on the temporary
preservation of the selection, the processing and elimination of the error before trigger
execution, etc.

Even when a trigger returns no error ($0:=0), this does not mean that a database operation will
be successful—a unique index violation may occur. If the operation is the update of a record,
the record may be locked, an I/O error may occur, and so on. The checking is done after the
execution of the trigger. However, at the higher level of the executing process, errors returned
by the database engine or a trigger are the same—a trigger error is a database engine error.

Triggers and the 4D Architecture

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Triggers execute at the database engine level. This is summarized in the following diagram:

1806 4D Language Reference

Triggers are executed on the machine where the database engine is actually located. This is
obvious with a 4D single-user version. On 4D Server, triggers are executed within the acting
process on the server machine (in the "twinned" process of the process that set off the trigger),
not on the client machine.

When a trigger is invoked, it executes within the context of the process that attempts the
database operation. This process, which invokes the trigger execution, is called the invoking
process.
The elements included in this context differ according to whether the database is executed
with 4D in local mode or with 4D Server :
• With 4D in local mode, the trigger works with the current selections, current records, table
read/write states, record locking operations, etc., of the invoking process.
• With 4D Server, only the context of the database of the invoking client process is preserved
(locked records, read/write states, etc.). 4D Server also guarantees that the current record of the
table of the trigger is correctly positioned. The other elements of the context (current
selections for example) are those of the trigger process.

Be careful about using other database or language objects of the 4D environment, because a
trigger may execute on a machine other than that of the invoking process—this is the case
with 4D Server!

• Interprocess variables: A trigger has access to the interprocess variables of the machine where
it executes. With 4D Server, it can access a machine other than that of the invoking process.
• Process variables: Each trigger has its own table of process variables. A trigger has no access
to the process variables of the invoking process.
• Local variables: You can use local variables in a trigger. Their scope is the trigger execution;
they are created/deleted at each execution.
• Semaphores: A trigger can test or set global semaphores as well as local semaphores (on the
machine where it executes). However, a trigger must execute quickly, so you must be very
careful when testing or setting semaphores from within triggers.
• Sets and Named selections: If you use a set or a named selection from within a trigger, you
work on the machine where the trigger executes. In client/server mode, "process" sets and
named selections (whose names do not begin with a $ nor with <>) that are created on the
client machine are visible in a trigger.
• User Interface: Do NOT use user interface elements in a trigger (no alerts, no messages, no
dialog boxes). Accordingly, you should limit any tracing of triggers in the Debugger window.
Remember that in Client/Server, triggers execute on the 4D Server machine. An alert message
on the server machine does not help a user on a client machine. Let the invoking process
handle the user interface.

4D Language Reference 1807

Triggers and Transactions
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Transactions must be handled at the invoking process level. They must not be managed at the
trigger level. During one trigger execution, if you have to add, modify or delete multiple
records (see the following case study), you must first use the In transaction command from
within the trigger to test if the invoking process is currently in transaction. If this is not the
case, the trigger may potentially encounter a locked record. Therefore, if the invoking process
is not in transaction, do not even start the operations on the records. Just return an error in $0
in order to signal to the invoking process that the database operation it is trying to perform
must be executed in a transaction. Otherwise, if locked records are met, the invoking process
will have no means to roll back the actions of the trigger.

Note: In order to optimize the combined operation of triggers and transactions, 4D does not
call triggers after the execution of VALIDATE TRANSACTION. This prevents the triggers from
being executed twice.

Cascading Triggers
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Given the following example structure:

Note: The tables have been collapsed; they have more fields than shown here.

Let’s say that the database “authorizes” the deletion of an invoice. We can examine how such
an operation would be handled at the trigger level (because you could also perform deletions
at the process level).

In order to maintain the relational integrity of the data, deleting an invoice requires the
following actions to be performed in the trigger for [Invoices]:
• In the [Customer] record, decrement the Gross Sales field by the amount of the invoice.
• Delete all the [Line Items] records related to the invoice.

1808 4D Language Reference

• This also implies that the [Line Items] trigger decrements the Quantity Sold field of the
[Products] record related to the line item to be deleted.
• Delete all the [Payments] records related to the deleted invoice.

First, the trigger for [Invoices] must perform these actions only if the invoking process is in
transaction, so that a roll-back is possible if a locked record is met.

Second, the trigger for [Line Items] is cascading with the trigger for [Invoices]. The [Line
Items] trigger executes “within” the execution of the [Invoices] trigger, because the deletion of
the list items are consequent to a call to DELETE SELECTION from within the [Invoices] trigger.

Consider that all tables in this example have triggers activated for all database events. The
cascade of triggers will be:

• [Invoices] trigger is invoked because the invoking process deletes an invoice

• [Customers] trigger is invoked because the [Invoices] trigger updates the Gross Sales
field
• [Line Items] trigger is invoked because the [Invoices] trigger deletes a line item
(repeated)
• [Products] trigger is invoked because the [Line Items] trigger updates the
Quantity Sold field
• [Payments] trigger is invoked because the [Invoices] trigger deletes a payment
(repeated)

In this cascade relationship, the [Invoices] trigger is said to be executing at level 1, the
[Customers], [Line Items], and [Payments] triggers at level 2, and the [Products] trigger at level
3.

From within the triggers, you can use the Trigger level command to detect the level at which a
trigger is executed. In addition, you can use the TRIGGER PROPERTIES command to get
information about the other levels.

For example, if a [Products] record is being deleted at a process level, the [Products] trigger
would be executed at level 1, not at level 3.

Using Trigger level and TRIGGER PROPERTIES, you can detect the cause of an action. In our
example, an invoice is deleted at a process level. If we delete a [Customers] record at a process
level, then the [Customers] trigger should attempt to delete all the invoices related to that
customer. This means that the [Invoices] trigger will be invoked as above, but for another
reason. From within the [Invoices] trigger, you can detect if it executed at level 1 or 2. If it did
execute at level 2, you can then check whether or not it is because the [Customers] record is
deleted. If this is the case, you do not even need to bother updating the Gross Sales field.

4D Language Reference 1809

Using Sequence Numbers within a Trigger
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

While handling an On Saving New Record Event database event, you can call the Sequence
number command to maintain a unique ID number for the records of a table.

Example

` Trigger for table [Invoices]

Case of
: (Database event=On Saving New Record Event)
` ...
[Invoices]Invoice ID Number:=Sequence number ([Invoices])
` ...
End case

See Also
Database event, Methods, Record number, Trigger level, TRIGGER PROPERTIES.

1810 4D Language Reference

Database event Triggers

version 11.2 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Database event → Longint

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Longint ← 0 Outside any trigger execution cycle

1 Saving a new record
2 Saving an existing record
3 Deleting a record

Description
Called from within a trigger, the Database event command returns a numeric value that
denotes the type of the database event, in other words, the reason why the trigger has been
invoked.

The following predefined constants are provided:

Constant Type Value
On Saving New Record Event Long Integer 1
On Saving Existing Record Event Long Integer 2
On Deleting Record Event Long Integer 3

Within a trigger, if you perform database operations on multiple records, you may encounter
conditions (usually locked records) that will make the trigger unable to perform correctly. An
example of this situation is updating multiple records in a [Products] table when a record is
being added to an [Invoices] table. At this point, you must stop attempting database
operations, and return a database error so the invoking process will know that its database
request cannot be performed. Then the invoking process must be able to cancel, during the
transaction, the incomplete database operations performed by the trigger. When this type of
situation occurs, you need to know from within the trigger if you are in transaction even
before attempting anything. To do so, use the command In transaction.

4D Language Reference 1811

When cascading trigger calls, 4D has no limit other than the available memory. To optimize
trigger execution, you may want to write the code of your triggers depending not only on the
database event, but also on the level of the call when triggers are cascaded. For example,
during a deletion database event for the [Invoices] table, you may want to skip the update of
the [Customers] Gross Sales field if the deletion of the [Invoices] record is part of the deletion
of all the invoices related to a [Customers] record being deleted. To do so, use the commands
Trigger level and TRIGGER PROPERTIES.

Example
You use the command Database event to structure your triggers as follows:
` Trigger for [anyTable]
C_LONGINT($0)
$0:=0 ` Assume the database request will be granted
Case of
: (Database event=On Saving New Record Event)
` Perform appropriates action for the saving of a newly created record
: (Database event=On Saving Existing Record Event)
` Perform appropriates actions for the saving of an already existing record
: (Database event=On Deleting Record Event)
` Perform appropriates actions for the deletion of a record
End case

See Also
In transaction, Trigger level, TRIGGER PROPERTIES, Triggers.

1812 4D Language Reference

Trigger level Triggers

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Trigger level → Number

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Number ← Level of trigger execution

(0 if outside any trigger execution cycle)

Description
The Trigger level command returns the execution level of the trigger.

For more information on execution levels, see the topic Cascading Triggers in the section
Triggers.

See Also
Database event, TRIGGER PROPERTIES, Triggers.

4D Language Reference 1813

TRIGGER PROPERTIES Triggers

version 11.2 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

TRIGGER PROPERTIES (triggerLevel; dbEvent; tableNum; recordNum)

Parameter Type Description

triggerLevel Number → Trigger execution cycle level
dbEvent Number ← Database event
tableNum Number ← Involved table number
recordNum Number ← Involved record number

Description
The TRIGGER PROPERTIES command returns information about the trigger execution level you
pass in triggerLevel. You use TRIGGER PROPERTIES in conjunction with Trigger level to perform
different actions depending on the cascading of trigger execution levels. For more
information, see the topic Cascading Triggers in the section Triggers.

If you pass a non-existing trigger execution level, the command returns 0 (zero) in all
parameters.

The nature of the database event for the trigger execution level is returned in dbEvent. The
following predefined constants are provided:
Constant Type Value
On Saving New Record Event Long Integer 1
On Saving Existing Record Event Long Integer 2
On Deleting Record Event Long Integer 3

The table number and record number for the record involved by the database event for the
trigger execution level are returned in tableNum and recordNum.

See Also
About Record Numbers, Database event, Trigger level, Triggers.

1814 4D Language Reference

57
______________________
User Forms

4D Language Reference 1815

1816 4D Language Reference
Overview of user forms User Forms

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

In 4D version 2004, developers can offer users the possibility of creating or modifying
customized forms. These “User forms” can then be used like any other 4D form.

Introduction
User forms are based on standard 4D forms created by the developer in the Design
environment (called “source” or “developer” forms) where the Editable by user property
has been applied in the Form editor. A simplified Form editor (called using the EDIT FORM
command) allows users to modify the form appearance, add graphic objects (using a library
of specific objects), hide elements, etc.— the developer can control of authorized actions.

User forms can be used in two different ways:

• The user modifies the “source” form and adapts it to his or her needs using the EDIT
FORM command. The user form is kept locally and is automatically used instead of the
original form.
This behavior responds to a developer’s need to set parameters for dialog boxes while on
site; for example, to add a company logo in forms, hide unnecessary fields, etc.
• The “source” file acts as a basic template that users can freely duplicate and make as many
copies as necessary using the CREATE USER FORM command. Each copy can be set freely
(content, name, etc.) using the EDIT FORM command. However, the name of each user
form must be unique. The INPUT FORM and OUTPUT FORM commands then let you specify
the user form to be used in each process.
This behavior lets developers build, for example, customized reports for users.

Storing and managing user forms

User form mechanisms work with both compiled and interpreted databases, with 4D in
local mode, 4D Server or 4D Desktop. In client/server mode, user modified forms are
available on all machines.

4D automatically handles changes in forms. When a form is set as Editable by user, it is

locked in the Design environment. The developer must explicitly click on the icon to
unlock it in order to be able to access form objects. This operation makes related user forms
obsolete, which must also be regenerated. When a “source” form is deleted, the related user
forms are also deleted.

User forms are stored in a separate file with a .4DA extension, placed next to the main
structure file (.4DB/.4DC). This file is called “user structure file”. The behavior of this file is
transparent: 4D uses a user form when it exists (the new LIST USER FORMS command allows
finding valid user forms at any time). It is also in this file that the INPUT FORM and
OUTPUT FORM commands look for the user forms. When a user form is obsolete, it is
deleted and 4D uses the source form by default.

4D Language Reference 1817

In client/server, the .4DA file is broadcast on client machines following the same rules as
the main structure file.
This principle also allows keeping user forms non-obsolete in case of a structure file update
by the developer.

Error codes
Specific error codes may be returned when using user form management commands. These
codes, located from -9750 to -9759, are described in the Database Engine Errors section.

User forms and project forms

User form mechanisms are no longer compatible with project forms. The commands of the
“User Forms” theme can therefore not be used with project forms.

1818 4D Language Reference

CREATE USER FORM User Forms

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

CREATE USER FORM (aTable; form; userForm)

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Source form table
form String → Source table form name
userForm String → Name of new user form

Description
The CREATE USER FORM command duplicates the 4D table form whose table and name are
passed as parameters and creates a new user form named userForm.

Once created, the userForm form can be modified using the EDIT FORM command. This
command allows you to create X user forms (for example, various report forms) from a
single source form.

See Also
DELETE USER FORM, EDIT FORM, INPUT FORM, LIST USER FORMS, OUTPUT FORM, Overview of
user forms.

System Variables or Sets

The OK variable returns 1 if the operation is executed properly; otherwise, it returns 0.

Error Handling
An error is generated if:
• form is already a user form,
• the name of userForm is the same as the name of the source form or an existing user form,
• the user cannot access the form because they do not have the proper access rights.
You can intercept these errors with the error-handling method installed by the ON ERR
CALL command.

4D Language Reference 1819

DELETE USER FORM User Forms

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DELETE USER FORM (aTable; form; userForm)

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → User form table
form String → Source table form name
userForm String → User form name

Description
The DELETE USER FORM command allows you to remove the user form set using the aTable,
form and userForm parameters.

If the user form was created directly using the EDIT FORM command, pass an empty string
("") in userForm.

See Also
CREATE USER FORM, LIST USER FORMS, Overview of user forms.

System Variables or Sets

If the user form is properly removed, the OK variable returns 1. Otherwise, OK is set to 0.

Error Handling
An error is generated if:
• the user form does not exist,
• the user does not have the proper access to remove the user form.
You can intercept this error with the error-handling method installed by the ON ERR CALL
command.

1820 4D Language Reference

EDIT FORM User Forms

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

EDIT FORM (aTable; form{; userForm{; library}})

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table of form to modify
form String → Name of table form to modify
userForm String → Name of the user form to modify
library String → Full pathname of usable object library

Description
The EDIT FORM command opens the table form set using the aTable, form and the optional
userForm parameters in the User form editor:

Note: The window of the editor opens only if it is the first window of the processs. In other
words, usually you will need to open a new process to display the editor.

If you pass an empty string in the userForm parameter and if there is not a user form
already linked to form, the source form is displayed in the editor. The modified form is
then copied in the user structure file (.4DA) and will be used as a form replacement.

If a user form was already generated from form using this command, the user form is
displayed in the editor. If you want to start from the source form, you must first delete the
user form using the DELETE USER FORM command.

The userForm parameter allows setting a user form (created using the CREATE USER FORM
command) to modify. In this case, the form is displayed in the editor.

4D Language Reference 1821

In the optional library parameter, pass the full access path of the object library that the user
will be authorized to use to customize the form. When used with the User form editor,
object libraries will allow you to paste objects with their graphic properties and automatic
actions. Objects with methods do not appear in the library. Be careful, it is up to the
developer to make sure that the addition of library objects is compatible with the user form
(and its objects) in terms of names, variables and types.
In client/server mode, the library must be found in the Resources folder of the database, at
the same level as the Plugins folder, so that it is available for all client machines. If the
library is valid, it is opened with the form window.
For more information on object libraries, refer to the Design Reference manual of the 4D
documentation.

Example
In this example, the user can choose a library then modify a dialog form:

MAP FILE TYPES("4DLB";"4IL";"4D Library")

$vALib:=Select document(1;"4DLB";"Please select a library";0)
If(OK=1)
`A library was chosen
$vALibPath:=Document
Else
$vALibPath:=""
End if

EDIT FORM([Dialogs];"Welcome";"Lib_Logos.4il")
If(OK=1)
`Display of modified form
DIALOG([Dialogs];"Welcome")
End if

See Also
CREATE USER FORM, DELETE USER FORM, LIST USER FORMS, Overview of user forms.

System Variables or Sets

If the user stores the changes made to the form, the OK variable is set to 1. In case of error,
OK is set to 0.

Error Handling
An error is generated if:
• the form has not been declared editable by the user in the Design environment or if it
does not exist,
• the form is already open and being modified in another process,
• the user cannot access the form because they do not have the proper access rights.
You can intercept this error with the error-handling method installed by the ON ERR CALL
command.

1822 4D Language Reference

LIST USER FORMS User Forms

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

LIST USER FORMS (aTable; form; userFormArray)

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Source form table
form String → Source table form name
userFormArray Array string ← Names of user forms coming from
the source form

Description
The LIST USER FORMS command fills the userFormArray array with the names of user forms
coming from the developer form (table form) set in the table and form parameters.

If the user form was created directly using the EDIT FORM command, the only item that
userFormArray contains is an empty string ("").

The array is empty if there are no user forms for the specified developer form.

See Also
CREATE USER FORM, EDIT FORM, Overview of user forms.

4D Language Reference 1823

1824 4D Language Reference
58
______________________
User Interface

4D Language Reference 1825

1826 4D Language Reference
BEEP User Interface

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

BEEP

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
The BEEP command causes the PC or Macintosh to generate a beep. Your computer (on
Windows or Macintosh) can emit a sound other than a beep, depending on the sound chosen
in the Sound control panel.

Warning: Do not call BEEP from within a Web connection process, because the beep will be
produced on the 4D Web server machine and not on the client Web browser machine.

Example
In the following example, if no records are found by the query, a beep is emitted and an alert
is displayed:

QUERY([Customers];[Customers]Name=$vsNameToLookFor)
If (Records in selection([Customers])=0)
BEEP
ALERT("There is no Customer with such a name.")
End if

See Also
PLAY.

4D Language Reference 1827

Caps lock down User Interface

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Caps lock down → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Boolean ← State of the Caps Lock key

Description
Caps lock down returns TRUE if the Caps Lock key is pressed.

Example
See example for the command Shift down.

See Also
Macintosh command down, Macintosh control down, Macintosh option down, Shift down,
Windows Alt down, Windows Ctrl down.

1828 4D Language Reference

Focus object User Interface

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Focus object → Pointer

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Pointer ← Pointer to the object having the focus

Description
Focus object returns a pointer to the object having the focus in the current form. If no object
has the focus, the command returns Nil. You can use Focus object to perform an action on a
form area without having to know which object is currently selected. Be sure to test that the
object is the correct data type, using Type, before performing an action on it.

Note: When it is used with a list box, the Focus object function returns a pointer to the list box
or the column of the list box depending on the context. For more information, please refer to
the Managing List Box Objects section.

This command cannot be used with fields in subforms.

Note: This command is to be used only in data entry context, otherwise it will return errors.

Example
The following example is an object method for a button. The object method changes the data
in the current object to uppercase. The object must be a text or string data type (type 0 or 24):
$vp := Focus object ` Save the pointer to the last area
Case of
: (Nil($pointer)) ` No object has the focus
...
` If it is a string or text area
: ((Type ($vp->) = Is Alpha field) | (Type($vp->) = Is String var))
$vp-> := Uppercase ($vp->) ` Change the area to uppercase
End case

4D Language Reference 1829

GET FIELD TITLES User Interface

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET FIELD TITLES (aTable; fieldTitles; fieldNums)

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table for which you want to find out the field names
fieldTitles Text array ← Current field names
fieldNums Longint array ← Field numbers

Description
The GET FIELD TITLES command fills the fieldTitles and fieldNums arrays with the names and
numbers of database fields for the desired aTable. The contents of these two arrays are
synchronized.

If the SET FIELD TITLES command is called during the session, GET FIELD TITLES only returns
the “modified” names and field numbers defined using this command.
Otherwise, GET FIELD TITLES returns the names of all database fields as defined in the
Structure window.
In both cases, the command does not return invisible fields.

See Also
GET TABLE TITLES, SET FIELD TITLES.

1830 4D Language Reference

GET HIGHLIGHT User Interface

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET HIGHLIGHT (area; startSel; endSel)

Parameter Type Description

area Field | Variable → Enterable field or variable
startSel Number ← Current text selection starting position
endSel Number ← Current text selection ending position

Description
The GET HIGHLIGHT command is used to determine what text is currently highlighted.

Warning: Although you pass a enterable field or variable name to GET HIGHLIGHT, this
command returns a significant selection position only when it is applied to the area currently
being edited.

Note: This command cannot be used with fields in the List form of a subform.

Text can be highlighted by the user or by the HIGHLIGHT TEXT command.

The parameter startSel returns the position of the first highlighted character.
The parameter endSel returns the position of the last highlighted character plus one.

If startSel and endSel are returned equal, the insertion point is positioned before the character
specified by startSel. The user has not selected any text, and no characters are highlighted.

Examples
1. The following example gets the highlighted selection from the field called
[Products]Comments:

GET HIGHLIGHT ([Products]Comments;vFirst;vLast)

If (vFirst<vLast)
ALERT("The selected text is: "+Substring([Products]Comments;vFirst;vLast-vFirst))
End if

4D Language Reference 1831

2. See example for the command FILTER KEYSTROKE.

See Also
FILTER KEYSTROKE, HIGHLIGHT TEXT, Keystroke.

1832 4D Language Reference

GET MOUSE User Interface

version 2003 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET MOUSE (mouseX; mouseY; mouseButton{; *})

Parameter Type Description

mouseX Number ← Horizontal coordinate of mouse
mouseY Number ← Vertical coordinate of mouse
mouseButton Number ← Mouse button state:
0 = Button up
1 = Button down
2 = Right button down
3 = Both buttons down
* → If specified, global coordinate system is used
If omitted, local coordinate system is used

Description
The GET MOUSE command returns the current state of the mouse.

The horizonal and vertical coordinates are returned in mouseX and mouseY. If you pass the *
parameter, the coordinates are expressed relative to the screen. If you omit the * parameter,
they are expressed relative to the frontmost window of the current process.

The parameter mouseButton returns the state of the buttons, as listed previously.

Note: The values 2 and 3 can be returned under Mac OS X starting with version 10.2.5 only.

Example
See the example for the command Pop up menu.

See Also
Caps lock down, Macintosh command down, Macintosh control down, Macintosh option down,
ON EVENT CALL, Shift down, Windows Alt down, Windows Ctrl down.

4D Language Reference 1833

Get platform interface User Interface

version 2004 (Modified)

Compatibility Note
This command is maintained only for compatibility reasons. In new databases (created with
4D starting with version 2004), the platform interface is managed automatically by the
program and this command is ignored. It can still be used in converted database, although it is
recommended to activate the new interface management feature in the Preferences dialog box
("System" option).
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get platform interface → Number

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Number ← Current platform interface in use

Description
The Get platform interface command returns a numeric value that denotes the current platform
interface used for displaying forms.

The function can return one of the following values:

Constant Type Value

Automatic Platform Longint -1
Mac OS 7 Longint 0
Windows 3.11, NT 3.51 Longint 1
Windows 9x Longint 2
Mac OS 9 Longint 3
Mac Theme Longint 4

You can change the platform interface using the command SET PLATFORM INTERFACE or
within the Preferences dialog box.

See Also
SET PLATFORM INTERFACE.

1834 4D Language Reference

GET TABLE TITLES User Interface

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET TABLE TITLES (tableTitles; tableNums)

Parameter Type Description

tableTitles Text array ← Current table names
tableNums Longint array ← Table numbers

Description
The GET TABLE TITLES command fills the tableTitles and tableNums arrays with the names
and numbers of database tables defined in the Structure window or using the SET TABLE
TITLES command. The contents of these two arrays are synchronized.

If the SET TABLE TITLES command is called during the session, GET TABLE TITLES only
returns the “modified” names and table numbers defined using this command.
Otherwise, GET TABLE TITLES returns the names of all database tables as defined in the
Structure window.
In both cases, the command does not return invisible tables.

See Also
GET FIELD TITLES, SET TABLE TITLES.

4D Language Reference 1835

HIDE MENU BAR User Interface

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

HIDE MENU BAR

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
The HIDE MENU BAR command makes the menu bar invisible.

If the menu bar was already hidden, the command does nothing.

Example
The following method displays a record in full-screen display (Macintosh) until you click the
mouse button:

HIDE TOOL BAR

HIDE MENU BAR
Open window(-1;-1;1+Screen width;1+Screen height;Alternate dialog box)
INPUT FORM([Paintings];"Full Screen 800")
DISPLAY RECORD([Paintings])
Repeat
GET MOUSE($vlX;$vlY;$vlButton)
Until($vlButton#0)
CLOSE WINDOW
SHOW MENU BAR
SHOW TOOL BAR

Note: On Windows, the window will be limited to the bounds of the application window.

See Also
HIDE TOOL BAR, SHOW MENU BAR, SHOW TOOL BAR.

1836 4D Language Reference

HIDE TOOL BAR User Interface

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

HIDE TOOL BAR

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
The HIDE TOOL BAR command makes the toolbar invisible.

If the toolbar was already hidden, HIDE TOOL BAR does nothing.

See Also
HIDE MENU BAR, SHOW MENU BAR, SHOW TOOL BAR.

4D Language Reference 1837

HIGHLIGHT TEXT User Interface

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

HIGHLIGHT TEXT (area; startSel; endSel)

Parameter Type Description

area Field | Variable → Enterable field or variable
startSel Number → New text selection starting position
endSel Number → New text selection ending position

Description
The HIGHLIGHT TEXT command highlights a section of the text in area.

If area is not the object currently being edited, the focus is then set to this area.

Note: This command cannot be used with fields in the List form of a subform.

startSel is the first character position to be highlighted, and lastSel is the last character plus one
to be highlighted. If startSel and lastSel are equal, the insertion point is positioned before the
character specified by startSel, and no characters are highlighted.

If lastSel is greater than the number of characters in area, then all characters between startSel
and the end of the text are highlighted.

Examples
1. The following example selects all the characters of the enterable field [Products]Comments:

HIGHLIGHT TEXT([Products]Comments;1;Length([Products]Comments)+1)

2. The following example moves the insertion point to the beginning of the enterable field
[Products]Comments:

HIGHLIGHT TEXT([Products]Comments;1;1)

1838 4D Language Reference

3. The following example moves the insertion point to the end of the enterable field
[Products]Comments:

$vLen:=Length([Products]Comments)+1
HIGHLIGHT TEXT([Products]Comments;$vLen;$vLen)

4. See example for the command FILTER KEYSTROKE.

See Also
GET HIGHLIGHT.

4D Language Reference 1839

INVERT BACKGROUND User Interface

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

INVERT BACKGROUND ({*; }textVar | textField)

Parameter Type Description

* → Allows entry of a variable or object name
textVar | textField Variable | Field → Text variable or field to invert

Description
INVERT BACKGROUND is used to invert textVar or textField in the form.

The scope of the command is the form being used.

You can use INVERT BACKGROUND when displaying on screen or printing to a dot matrix
printer. A postscript printer will not print an inverted background.

You cannot invert a variable in an output form. Avoid using INVERT BACKGROUND on an
enterable variable. Entering characters will only partially erase the inverted display.

Example
This example is an object method for a variable in an input form. It tests the value of a field. If
the field is positive, the object method does nothing. If the field is negative, the object
method inverts the display of the variable in the form:

vAmount:=[Accounts]Amount ` Put the value of field in the variable

If (vAmount < 0) ` If it is a negative amount…
INVERT BACKGROUND (vAmount) ` Invert the background
End if

Note: This command, originally created for black and white user interfaces, is now rarely used.
You now generally use colors to highlight a field or a variable.

See Also
SET COLOR, SET RGB COLORS.

1840 4D Language Reference

Macintosh command down User Interface

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Macintosh command down → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Boolean ← State of the Macintosh Command key

(Ctrl key on Windows)

Description
Macintosh command down returns TRUE if the Macintosh command key is pressed.

Note: When called on a Windows platform, Macintosh command down returns TRUE if the
Windows Ctrl key is pressed.

Example
See example for the command Shift down.

See Also
Caps lock down, Macintosh control down, Macintosh option down, Shift down, Windows Alt
down, Windows Ctrl down.

4D Language Reference 1841

Macintosh control down User Interface

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Macintosh control down → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Boolean ← State of the Macintosh Control key

Description
Macintosh control down returns TRUE if the Macintosh Control key is pressed.

Note: When called on a Windows platform, Macintosh control down always return FALSE. This
Macintosh key has no equivalent on Windows.

Example
See example for the command Shift down.

See Also
Caps lock down, Macintosh command down, Macintosh option down, Shift down, Windows Alt
down, Windows Ctrl down.

1842 4D Language Reference

Macintosh option down User Interface

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Macintosh option down → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Boolean ← State of the Macintosh Option key

(Alt key on Windows)

Description
Macintosh option down returns TRUE if the Macintosh Option key is pressed.

Note: When called on a Windows platform, Macintosh option down returns TRUE if the
Windows Alt key is pressed.

Example
See example for the command Shift down.

See Also
Caps lock down, Macintosh command down, Macintosh control down, Shift down, Windows Alt
down, Windows Ctrl down.

4D Language Reference 1843

PLAY User Interface

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

PLAY (objectName{; channel})

Parameter Type Description

objectName String → Sound name
Windows: .WAV, .MID or .AVI file
Any platform: Mac OS-based ‘snd’ resource
or empty string for stopping asynchronous play
channel Number → if specified, synthesizer channel and asynchronous
if omitted, synchronous

Description on Windows
On Windows, the PLAY command plays sound (.WAV files), MIDI (.MID files), or Video (.AVI
files) Windows files. You pass the full pathname of the file you want to play in objectName.

Note: You cannot play multimedia files or objects in asynchronous mode. To do so, use OLE
Services.

On Macintosh or on Windows (with some restrictions, see Important Note below), the
command PLAY plays the sound resource named by objectName on Macintosh.

The channel parameter specifies the Macintosh synthesizer channel. If channel is not specified,
the channel is for simple digitized sounds and is synchronous. Synchronous means that all
processing stops until the sound has finished. If channel is 0, the channel is for simple
digitized sounds and is asynchronous. Asynchronous means that processing does not stop and
the sound plays in the background.

To stop playing a synchronous sound, use the following statement:

PLAY ("";0)

If you work with a database on Macintosh and Windows concurrently, you can also play
Macintosh sounds on the Windows platform. To do so:
• On the Macintosh, using a resource editor such as ResEdit or Resorcerer, copy the required
'snd ' resources into the resource fork of the structure file.

1844 4D Language Reference

• Transport the database from Macintosh to Windows, using 4D Transporter.

Important Note: The Windows version of 4D does not play Macintosh sounds that have been
compressed by MACE. If your Macintosh ‘snd’ resource does not play on Windows, determine
whether it complies with the following requirements:

snd resource field Value (in hexadecimal)

Version 0x0001
NbSynth 0x0001
SynthResID 0x0005
SynthInitOptions 0x000000A0
NbSoundCommand 0x0001
FirstCommand 0x8051

You can check the internal data of a ‘snd’ resource using Resorcerer.

Examples
1. The following example shows how to play a video file on Windows:

$DocRef := Open document ( ""; "AVI")

If (OK=1)
CLOSE DOCUMENT($DocRef)
PLAY (Document)
End if

2. The following example code appears in a startup method. It welcomes the user with a sound
called Welcome Sound on Macintosh:

PLAY ("Welcome Sound") ` Play the Welcome Sound

See Also
BEEP.

4D Language Reference 1845

Pop up menu User Interface

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Pop up menu (contents{; default{; xCoord; yCoord}}) → Number

Parameter Type Description

contents Text → Menu text definition
default Number → Number of menu item selected by default
xCoord Number → X coordinate of upper left corner
yCoord Number → Y coordinate of upper left corner

Function result Number ← Selected menu item number

Description
The Pop up menu command displays a pop-up menu at the current location of the mouse.

In order to follow user interface rules, you usually call this command in response to a mouse
click and if the mouse button is still down.

You define the items of the pop-up menu with the parameter contents as follows:
• Separate each item from the next one with a semi-colon (;). For example,
"ItemText1;ItemText2;ItemText3".
• To disable an item, place an opening parenthesis (() in the item text.
• To specify a separation line, pass "(-" as item text.
• To specify a font style for a line, place in the item text a less than sign (<) followed by one of
these characters:
<B Bold
<I Italic
<U Underline
<O Outline (Macintosh only)
<S Shadow (Macintosh only)

• To add a check mark to an item, place in the item text an exclamation mark (!) followed by
the character you want as a check mark.
- On Macintosh, the character is displayed directly. To display the standard check mark
whatever the system version or language, use the following statement: Char(18).
- On Windows, a check mark is displayed, no matter what character you passed.

1846 4D Language Reference

• To add an icon to an item, place in the item text a circumflex accent (^) followed by a
character whose code plus 208 is the resource ID of a Mac OS-based icon resource.
• To add a shortcut to an item, place in the item text a slash (/) followed by the shortcut
character for the item. Note that this last option is purely informative; no shortcut will
activate the pop-up menu. However, you may want to include a shortcut if the pop-up menu
item has an equivalent in the main menu bar of your application.

Tip: It is possible to disable the mechanism for interpreting special characters (!, /, etc.) in the
pop up menu in order, for example, to have these characters included in the wording. To do
this, simply have the contents parameter begin with the statement Char(1) then use this
statement as a separator:
contents:=Char(1)+"1/4"+Char(1)+"1/2"+Char(1)+"3/4")
Note that once this statement has been executed, it is no longer possible to assign styles or
shortcuts to the pop up menu.

The optional default parameter allows you to specify the default menu item selected when the
pop-up menu is displayed. Pass a value between 1 and the number of menu items. If you omit
this parameter, the command selects the first menu item as the default.

The optional xCoord and yCoord parameters are used to designate the location of the pop-up
menu to be displayed. In xCoord and yCoord, pass respectively the horizontal and vertical
coordinates of the upper left corner of the menu. These coordinates must be expressed in
pixels in the local coordinate system of the current form. These two parameters must be
passed together; if only one is passed, it will be ignored.
If you use the xCoord and yCoord parameters, the default parameter is ignored. In this case, the
mouse is not necessarily located at the level of the pop-up menu.
These parameters are useful in particular for managing 3D buttons with an associated pop-up
menu.

If you select a menu item, the command returns its number; otherwise, it returns zero (0).

4D Language Reference 1847

Note: Use pop-up menus that have a reasonable number of items. If you want to display more
than 50 items, you might think about a using scrollable area in a form instead of a pop-up
menu.

Example
The project method MY SPEED MENU pulls down a navigation speed menu:

` MY SPEED MENU project method

GET MOUSE($vlMouseX;$vlMouseY;$vlButton)
If (Macintosh control down | ($vlButton=2))
$vtItems:="About this database...<I;(-;!-Other Options;(-"
For ($vlTable;1;Get last table number)
If(Is table number valid($vlTable))
$vtItems:=$vtItems+";"+Table name($vlTable)
End if
End for
$vlUserChoice:=Pop up menu($vtItems)
Case of
: ($vlUserChoice=1)
` Display Information
: ($vlUserChoice=2)
` Display options
Else
If ($vlUserChoice>0)
` Go to table whose number is $vlUserChoice-4
End if
End case
End if

This project method can be called from:

• The method of a form object that reacts to a mouse click without waiting for the mouse
button to be released (i.e., an invisible button)
• A process that “spies” events and communicate with the other processes
• An event-handling method installed using ON EVENT CALL.

In the last two cases, the click does not need to occur in any form object. This is one of the
advantages of the Pop up menu command. Generally, you use form objects to display pop-up
menus. Using Pop up menu, you can display the menu anywhere.

1848 4D Language Reference

The pop-up menu is displayed on Windows by pressing the right mouse button; it is displayed
on Macintosh by pressing Control-Click. Note, however, that the method does not actually
check whether or not there was a mouse click; the caller method tests that.

The following is the pop-up menu as it appears on Windows (left) and Macintosh (right). Note
the standard check mark for the Windows version.

See Also
Dynamic pop up menu, GET MOUSE.

4D Language Reference 1849

POST CLICK User Interface

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

POST CLICK (mouseX; mouseY{; process}{; *})

Parameter Type Description

mouseX Number → Horizontal coordinate
mouseY Number → Vertical coordinate
process Number → Destination process reference number, or
Application event queue, if omitted, or 0
* → If specified, global coordinate system is used
If omitted, local coordinate system is used

Description
The POST CLICK command simulates a mouse click. Its effect as if the user actually clicked the
mouse button.

You pass the horizontal and vertical coordinates of the click in mouseX and mouseY. If you
pass the * parameter, you express these coordinates relative to the screen. If you omit the *
parameter, you express these coordinates relative to the frontmost window of the process
whose process number you pass in process.

If you specify the process parameter, the click is sent to the process whose process number you
pass in process. If you pass 0 (zero) or if you omit the parameter, the click is sent at the
application level, and the 4D scheduler will dispatch it to the appropriate process.

See Also
POST EVENT, POST KEY.

1850 4D Language Reference

 Edited by Foxit Reader
Copyright(C) by Foxit Software Company,2005-2008
For Evaluation Only.
POST EVENT User Interface

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

POST EVENT (what; message; when; mouseX; mouseY; modifiers{; process})

Parameter Type Description

what Number → Type of event
message Number → Event message
when Number → Event time expressed in ticks
mouseX Number → Horizontal coordinate of mouse
mouseY Number → Vertical coordinate of mouse
modifiers Number → Modifier keys state
process Number → Destination process reference number, or
Application event queue, if omitted, or 0

Description
The POST EVENT command simulates a keyboard or mouse event. Its effect is as if the user
actually acted on the keyboard or the mouse.

You pass one of the following values in what:

Constant Type Value
Mouse down event Long Integer 1
Mouse up event Long Integer 2
Key down event Long Integer 3
Key up event Long Integer 4
Auto key event Long Integer 5

If the event is a mouse-related event, you pass 0 (zero) in message. If the event is a keyboard-
related event, you pass the code of the simulated character in message.

Usually, you pass the value returned by Tickcount in when.

If the event is a mouse-related event, you pass the horizontal and vertical coordinates of the
click in mouseX and mouseY.

In the parameter modifiers, you pass one or a combination of the Events (modifiers) constants.
For example, to simulate the Shift key, pass Shift key bit.

4D Language Reference 1851

If you specify the process parameter, the event is sent to the process whose process number
you pass in process. If you pass 0 (zero) or if you omit the parameter, the event is sent at the
application level, and the 4D scheduler will dispatch it to the appropriate process.

See Also
POST CLICK, POST KEY.

1852 4D Language Reference

POST KEY User Interface

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

POST KEY (code{; modifiers{; process}})

Parameter Type Description

code Number → Character code or function key code
modifiers Number → State of modifier keys
process Number → Destination process reference number, or
Application event queue, if omitted, or 0

Description
The POST KEY command simulates a keystroke. Its effect is as if the user actually entered a
character on the keyboard.

You pass the code of the character in code.

If you pass the modifiers parameter, you pass one or a combination of the Events (modifiers)
constants. For example, to simulate the Shift key, pass Shift key mask. If you do not pass
modifiers, no modifiers are simulated.

If you specify the process parameter, the keystroke is sent to the process whose process number
you pass in process. If you pass 0 (zero) or if you omit the parameter, the keystroke is sent at
the application level, and the 4D scheduler will dispatch it to the appropriate process.

Example
See example for the command Process number.

See Also
POST CLICK, POST EVENT.

4D Language Reference 1853

REDRAW User Interface

version 6.5 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

REDRAW (object)

Parameter Type Description

object Object → Table for which to redraw the subform, or
Field for which to redraw the area, or
Variable for which to redraw the area, or
Form table to redraw on a Web browser

Description
When you use a method to change the value of a field displayed in a subform, you must
execute REDRAW to ensure that the form is updated.

Web Server: When executed after the On Timer form event, the REDRAW command can be
called to periodically update a 4D form sent to a Web browser. For more information, please
refer to the description of the SET TIMER command.

See Also
SET TIMER.

1854 4D Language Reference

SCROLL LINES User Interface

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SCROLL LINES ({*; }object{; position{; *}})

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a table or a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Table or variable (if * is omitted)
position Longint → Line position in the selection
* * → Display the line in first position after scroll

Description
The SCROLL LINES command allows scrolling lines of a list form (displayed using the
MODIFY SELECTION or DISPLAY SELECTION commands), a subform, a hierarchical list or a
list box so that the first selected record/row or a specific record/row is displayed.

If you pass the first optional * parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is the
name of a subform, a hierarchical list or list box object (in this case, pass a string in object).
If you do not pass anything in this parameter, you indicate that the object parameter is a
table (list form table or subform table) or a variable (ListRef of a hierarchical list or list box).
If you do not pass the position parameter, the command provokes the vertical scroll of lines
of the list so that the first highlighted line in the list is visible. If no line is selected, the
command does nothing. If at least one selected line is already visible, the command does
nothing.
The position parameter allows you to indicate the number of the line to display. If you pass
this parameter, the command provokes the vertical scroll of lines of the list so that the set
line is visible (highlighted or not). If the line is already visible, the command does nothing.
For list forms and subforms, this number is the number of the line among the current
selection (its position). In the case of hierachical lists, the command takes the
expanded/collapsed state of the items into account. For list boxes, this number is the
number of the row among all the object rows (including hidden rows). If the number
passed in position corresponds to a hidden row in the list box, the command displays the
first visible row that follows.

If you pass the second optional * parameter, the line made visible using the command (if
the list was scrolled) will be placed in the first position of the list.
Note: The HIGHLIGHT RECORDS command features an optional * parameter that allows
delegating scroll management to the SCROLL LINES command.
See Also
HIGHLIGHT RECORDS, SELECT LISTBOX ROW.

4D Language Reference 1855

 Edited by Foxit Reader
Copyright(C) by Foxit Software Company,2005-2008
For Evaluation Only.
SET ABOUT User Interface

version 2004.4 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET ABOUT (itemText; method)

Parameter Type Description

itemText String → New About menu item text
method String → Name of method to execute when menu item is chosen

Description
The SET ABOUT command changes the About 4D menu command in the Help (Windows) or
in the Application (Mac OS X) menu to itemText.

After the call, when a user selects this menu command in Design or Application mode, method
will be called. Typically, this method can open a dialog box to give version information about
your database.

This command is used with 4D (all modes), 4D Desktop and 4D Server. A new process is
created when it is run on a server machine.

Examples
1. The following example replaces the About menu command with the About Scheduler menu
command. The ABOUT method displays a custom About box:

SET ABOUT(“About Scheduler…”; “ABOUT”)

2. The following example resets the About 4D menu command:

SET ABOUT("About 4D";"")

1856 4D Language Reference

SET CURSOR User Interface

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Compatibility note: This command has been kept for compatibility's sake only since it relies
on mechanisms that are now obsolete (Mac OS 'CURS' resources). Its use in new developments
is not recommended.

SET CURSOR {(cursor)}

Parameter Type Description

cursor Number → Mac OS-based cursor resource number

Description
The SET CURSOR command changes the mouse cursor to the cursor stored in the Mac OS-
based ‘CURS’ resource whose ID number you pass in cursor.

If you omit the parameter, the mouse cursor is set to the standard arrow.

Here are some basic cursors that might be passed in the cursor parameter:

1
2
3
4

4D Language Reference 1857

SET FIELD TITLES User Interface

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET FIELD TITLES (aTable; fieldTitles; fieldNumbers{; *})

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table for which to set the field titles
fieldTitles String Array → Field names as they must appear in dialog boxes
fieldNumbers Numeric Array → Actual field numbers
* → Use the custom names in the formula editor

Description
SET FIELD TITLES enables you to mask, rename, and reorder the fields of the table passed in
aTable or aSubtable when they appear in standard 4D dialog boxes, such as the Query editor,
within the Application environment (more specifically, when the editors are called via the 4D
language commands).
Using this command, you can also rename on the fly the labels of the fields in your forms, if
you used dynamic names. For more information about inserting dynamic field and table
names in forms, refer to the 4D Design Reference manual.

The fieldTitles and fieldNumbers arrays must be synchronized. In the fieldTitles array, you pass
the name of the fields as you would like them to appear. If you do not want to show a
particular field, do not include its name or new title in the array. The fields will appear in the
order you specify in this array. In each element of the fieldNumbers array, you pass the actual
field number corresponding to the field name or new title passed in the same element number
in the fieldTitles array.

For example, you have a table or subtable composed of the fields F, G, and H, created in that
order. You want these fields to appear as M, N, and O. In addition you do not want to show
field N. Finally, you want to show O and M in that order. To do so, pass O and M in a two-
element fieldTitles array and pass 3 and 1 in a two-element fieldNumbers array.

The optional * parameter lets you indicate whether or not custom names defined using this
command can be used in 4D formulas.
• By default, when this parameter is omitted, formulas executed in 4D cannot use these
custom names; it is necessary to use the real table names.

1858 4D Language Reference

• If the * parameter is passed, the names defined by this command can be used in the formulas
executed by 4D. Be careful in this case, the custom names must not contain characters that are
“forbidden” by the 4D language interpreter, like -?*! (for more information, refer to the
“Identifiers” section).

Note: At the formula editor level, the execution of this command without the * parameter
does not modify any settings made previously with the * parameter. In other words, the
formula editor always displays the custom name set via the last call of the command with the
* parameter.

SET FIELD TITLES does NOT change the actual structure of your table. It only affects subsequent
uses of the standard 4D dialog boxes and forms using dynamic names when they are called via
language commands (the real structure of the database is displayed when the editor or form is
called from a menu command in Design mode). The scope of the SET FIELD TITLES command is
the worksession. One benefit in Client/Server mode is that several remote 4D stations can
simultaneously “see” your table in different ways. You can call SET FIELD TITLES as many times
as you want.

Use the SET FIELD TITLES command for:

• Dynamically localizing a table.
• Showing fields the way you want, independent of the actual definition of your table.
• Showing fields in a way that depends on the identity or custom privileges of a user.

WARNING:
• SET FIELD TITLES does NOT override the Invisible property of a field. When a field is set to be
invisible at the Design level of your database, even though it is included in a call to SET FIELD
TITLES, it will not appear in Application mode.
• Plug-ins always access the "virtual" structure as specified by this command.

Example
See example for the SET TABLE TITLES command.

See Also
Field name, GET FIELD TITLES, Get last field number, SET TABLE TITLES.

4D Language Reference 1859

SET PLATFORM INTERFACE User Interface

version 2004 (Modified)

Compatibility Note
This command is maintained only for compatibility reasons. In new databases (created with
4D starting with version 2004), the platform interface is managed automatically by the
program and the command has no effect. It can still be used in converted database, although
it is recommended to activate the new interface management feature in the Preferences dialog
box ("System" option).

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET PLATFORM INTERFACE (interface)

Parameter Type Description

interface Number → New platform interface setting:
-1 Automatic
0 Mac OS 7
1 Windows 3.11, NT 3.51
2 Windows 9x
3 Mac OS 9
4 Mac Theme

Description
The SET PLATFORM INTERFACE command sets the platform interface used for displaying the
forms.

You can pass in interface one of the following predefined constants:

Constant Type Value

Automatic Platform Long Integer -1
Mac OS 7 Long Integer 0
Windows 3.11, NT 3.51 Long Integer 1
Windows 9x Long Integer 2
Mac OS 9 Long Integer 3
Mac Theme Long Integer 4

Note: The constant Mac Theme allows you to use the user interface defined with the
Appearance Manager. This manager only exists on Mac OS. When a database defined with “Mac
Theme” interface is displayed on Windows, the interface “Windows 9x” is applied.

1860 4D Language Reference

The command does nothing if the value you pass does not change the current platform
interface.

Note: The platform interface can also be changed in the Preferences dialog box.

Example
In a 4D Client/Server architecture, the Macintosh and Windows stations can use different
platform interfaces concurrently. To do so, you can call the SET PLATFORM INTERFACE
command in the On Startup Database Method:

` This example assumes that user preferences are stored in a [Preferences] table
` Look for the record corresponding to the current user
QUERY([Preferences];[Preferences]User name=Current User)
If (Records in selection([Preferences])=0)
` If not found, look for the default preferences
QUERY([Preferences];[Preferences]User name="Default")
End if
` Set the Platform Interface according to the user preferences
SET PLATFORM INTERFACE ([Preferences]Platform Interface)

See Also
Get platform interface.

4D Language Reference 1861

SET TABLE TITLES User Interface

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET TABLE TITLES (tableTitles; tableNumbers{; *})

Parameter Type Description

tableTitles String Array → Table names as they must appear in dialog boxes
tableNumbers Numeric Array → Actual table numbers
* → Use the custom names in the formula editor

Description
SET TABLE TITLES enables you to mask, rename, and reorder the tables of your database when
they appear in standard 4D dialog boxes such as the Query editor, within the Application
environment (more specifically, when the editors are called via the 4D language commands).
Using this command, you can also rename on the fly the table labels in your forms, if you
used dynamic names. For more information about inserting dynamic field and table names in
the forms, refer to the 4D Design Reference manual.

The tableTitles and tableNumbers arrays must be synchronized. In the tableTitles array, you pass
the names of the tables as you would like them to appear. If you do not want to show a
particular table, do not include its name or new title in the array. The tables will appear in the
order you specify in this array. In each element of the tableNumbers array, you pass the actual
table number corresponding to the table name or new title passed in the same element
number in the tableTitles array.

For example, you have a database composed of the tables A, B, and C, created in that order.
You want these tables to appear as X, Y, and Z. In addition you do not want to show table B.
Finally, you want to show Z and X, in that order. To do so, you pass Z and X in a two-element
tableTitles array, and you pass 3 and 1 in a two-element tableNumbers array.

The optional * parameter lets you indicate whether or not custom names defined using this
command can be used in 4D formulas.
• By default, when this parameter is omitted, formulas executed in 4D cannot use these
custom names; it is necessary to use the real table names.
• If the * parameter is passed, the names defined by this command can be used in the formulas
executed by 4D. Be careful in this case, the custom names must not contain characters that are
“forbidden” by the 4D language interpreter, like -?*! (for more information, refer to the
“Identifiers” section).

1862 4D Language Reference

Note: At the formula editor level, the execution of this command without the * parameter
does not modify any settings made previously with the * parameter. In other words, the
formula editor always displays the custom name set via the last call of the command with the
* parameter.

SET TABLE TITLES does NOT change the actual structure of your database. It only affects
subsequent uses of the standard 4D dialog boxes and forms using dynamic names when they
are called via language commands (the real structure of the database is displayed when the
editor or form is called from a menu command in Design mode). The scope of the SET TABLE
TITLES command is the worksession. One benefit in Client/Server is that several 4D Client
stations can simultaneously “see” your database in different ways. You can call SET TABLE
TITLES as many times as you want.

Use the SET TABLE TITLES command for:

• Dynamically localizing a database.
• Showing tables the way you want, independent from the actual definition of your database.
• Showing tables in a way that depends on the identity or custom privileges of a user.

Notes:
• SET TABLE TITLES does NOT override the Invisible property of a table. When a table is set to
be invisible at the structure level of your database, even though it is included in a call to SET
TABLE TITLES, it will not appear in Application mode.
• Plug-ins always access the "virtual" structure as specified by this command.

Example
• You are building a 4D application that you plan to sell internationally. Therefore, you must
carefully consider localization issues. Regarding the standard 4D dialog boxes that can appear
in the Application environment and your forms that use dynamic names, you can address
localization needs by using a [Translations] table and a few project methods to create and use
fields localized for any number of countries.
• In your database, add the following table:

4D Language Reference 1863

• Then, create the TRANSLATE TABLES AND FIELDS project method listed below. This method
browses the actual structure of your database and creates all the necessary [Translations] records
for the localization corresponding to the language passed as parameter.

  ` TRANSLATE TABLES AND FIELDS project method

  ` TRANSLATE TABLES AND FIELDS (Text)
  ` TRANSLATE TABLES AND FIELDS (LanguageCode)

C_TEXT($1) `language code

C_LONGINT($vlTable;$vlField)
C_TEXT($Language)
$Language:=$1

For($vlTable;1;Get last table number) ` Pass through each table

If($vlTable#(Table(->[Translations]))) `Do not translate table of translations
` Check if there is a translation of the table name for the specified language
 `desired language
QUERY([Translations];[Translations]LanguageCode=$Language;*) 
QUERY([Translations]; & ;[Translations]TableID=$vlTable;*)  `table number
`field number = 0 means that it is a table name
QUERY([Translations]; & ;[Translations]FieldID=0)  
If(Is table number valid($vlTable))  `check that the table still exists
If(Records in selection([Translations])=0)
` Otherwise, create the record
CREATE RECORD([Translations])
[Traductions]LanguageCode:=$Language
[Traductions]TableID:=$vlTable
[Traductions]FieldID:=0
` The name of the translated table will need to be entered
[Translations]Translation:=Table name($vlTable)+" in "+$Language
SAVE RECORD([Translations])
End if

1864 4D Language Reference

 For($vlField;1;Get last field number($vlTable))
` Check if there is a translation of the field name
` for the specified language
 `Desired language
QUERY([Translations];[Translations]LanguageCode=$Language;*) 
QUERY([Translations]; & ;[Translations]TableID=$vlTable;*)  `table number
QUERY([Translations]; & ;[Translations]FieldID=$vlField)  `field number
If(Is field number valid($vlTable;$vlField))
If(Records in selection([Translations])=0)
` Otherwise, create the record
CREATE RECORD([Translations])
[Traductions]LanguageCode:=$Language
[Traductions]TableID:=$vlTable
[Traductions]FieldID:=$vlField
` The name of the translated field will need to be entered
[Traductions]Translation:=Field name($vlTable;$vlField)+" in "+
$Language
SAVE RECORD([Translations])
End if
Else
If(Records in selection([Translations])#0)
` If the field no longer exists, remove the translation
DELETE RECORD([Translations])
End if
End if
End for
Else
If(Records in selection([Translations])#0)
` If the table no longer exists, remove the translation
DELETE RECORD([Translations])
End if
End if
End if
End for

• At this point, if you execute the following line, you create as many records as needed for a
Spanish localization of the tables and fields titles.

TRANSLATE TABLES AND FIELDS ("Spanish")

4D Language Reference 1865

• After this call has been executed, you can then enter the [Translations]Translated Name for
each of the newly created records.
• Finally, each time you want to show your database’s standard 4D dialog boxes or forms with
dynamic titles using the Spanish localization, you execute the following line:

LOCALIZED TABLES AND FIELDS ("Spanish")

with the project method LOCALIZED TABLES AND FIELDS:

` LOCALIZED TABLES AND FIELDS global method

` LOCALIZED TABLES AND FIELDS (Text)
` LOCALIZED TABLES AND FIELDS (LanguageCode)

C_TEXT($1) `Language code

C_LONGINT($vlTable;$vlField)
C_TEXT($Language)
C_LONGINT($vlTableNum;$vlFieldNum)
$Language:=$1

`Updating table names

ARRAY TEXT($asNames;0)  ` Initialize arrays for SET TABLE TITLES and SET FIELD TITLES
ARRAY INTEGER($aiNumbers;0)
QUERY([Translations];[Translations]LanguageCode=$Language;*)
QUERY([Translations]; & ;[Translations]FieldID=0)  `thus table names
SELECTION TO ARRAY([Translations]Translation;$asNames;[Translations]TableID;
$aiNumbers)
SET TABLE TITLES($asNames;$aiNumbers)

`Updating field names

$vlTableNum:=Get last table number ` Get number of tables in database
For($vlTable;1;$vlTableNum)  ` Pass through each table
If(Is table number valid($vlTable))
QUERY([Translations];[Translations]LanguageCode=$Language;*)
QUERY([Translations]; & ;[Translations]TableID=$vlTable;*)
`avoid the zero that serves as table name
QUERY([Translations]; & ;[Translations]FieldID#0)  
SELECTION TO ARRAY([Translations]Translation;$asNames;[Translations]FieldID;
$aiNumbers)
SET FIELD TITLES(Table($vlTable)->;$asNames;$aiNumbers)
End if
End for

1866 4D Language Reference

• Note that new localizations can be added to the database without modifying or recompiling
the code.

See Also
Get last table number, SET FIELD TITLES, Table name.

4D Language Reference 1867

Shift down User Interface

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Shift down → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Boolean ← State of the Shift key

Description
Shift down returns TRUE if the Shift key is pressed.
Example
The following object method for the button bAnyButton performs different actions, depending
on which modifier keys are pressed when the button is clicked:
` bAnyButton Object Method
Case of
` Other multiple key combinations could be tested here
` ...
: (Shift down & Windows Ctrl down)
` Shift and Windows Ctrl (or Macintosh Command) keys are pressed
DO ACTION1
` ...
: (Shift down)
` Only Shift key is pressed
DO ACTION2
` ...
: (Windows Ctrl down)
` Only Windows Ctrl (or Macintosh Command) key is pressed
DO ACTION3
` ...
` Other individual keys could be tested here
` ...
End case
See Also
Caps lock down, Macintosh command down, Macintosh control down, Macintosh option down,
Windows Alt down, Windows Ctrl down.

1868 4D Language Reference

SHOW MENU BAR User Interface

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SHOW MENU BAR

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
The SHOW MENU BAR command makes the menu bar visible.

If the menu bar was already visible, the command does nothing.

Example
See example for the command HIDE MENU BAR.

See Also
HIDE MENU BAR, HIDE TOOL BAR, SHOW TOOL BAR.

4D Language Reference 1869

SHOW TOOL BAR User Interface

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SHOW TOOL BAR

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
The SHOW TOOL BAR command makes the toolbar visible.

If the toolbar was already visible, SHOW TOOL BAR does nothing.

See Also
HIDE MENU BAR, HIDE TOOL BAR, SHOW MENU BAR.

1870 4D Language Reference

Tool bar height User Interface

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Tool bar height → Longint

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Longint ← Height (expressed in pixels) of tool bar

or 0 if tool bar is hidden

Description
The Tool bar height command returns the height of the 4D tool bar, expressed in pixels. If
the tool bar is hidden, the command returns 0.

See Also
HIDE TOOL BAR, Menu bar height, SHOW TOOL BAR.

4D Language Reference 1871

Windows Alt down User Interface

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Windows Alt down → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Boolean ← State of the Windows Alt key

(Option key on Macintosh)

Description
Windows Alt down returns TRUE if the Windows Alt key is pressed.

Note: When called on a Macintosh platform, Windows Alt down returns TRUE if the Macintosh
Option key is pressed.

Example
See example for the command Shift down.

See Also
Caps lock down, Macintosh command down, Macintosh control down, Macintosh option down,
Shift down, Windows Ctrl down.

1872 4D Language Reference

Windows Ctrl down User Interface

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Windows Ctrl down → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Boolean ← State of the Windows Ctrl key

(Command key on Macintosh)

Description
Windows Ctrl down returns TRUE if the Windows Ctrl key is pressed.

Note: When called on a Macintosh platform, Windows Ctrl down returns TRUE if the
Macintosh Command key is pressed.

Example
See example for the command Shift down.

See Also
Caps lock down, Macintosh command down, Macintosh option down, Shift down, Windows Alt
down, Windows Ctrl down.

4D Language Reference 1873

1874 4D Language Reference
59
______________________
Users and Groups

4D Language Reference 1875

1876 4D Language Reference
BLOB TO USERS Users and Groups

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

BLOB TO USERS (users)

Parameter Type Description

users BLOB → BLOB (encrypted) containing database user accounts
created and saved by the database Administrator

Description
The BLOB TO USERS command adds the user accounts present in the BLOB users in the
database. The BLOB users is encrypted and must have been created using the USERS TO
BLOB command.

Only the database Administrator or Designer can execute this command. If another user
attempts to execute it, the command does nothing and a privilege error (-9949) is
generated.

The following rules apply when adding a user account:

• The user ID is used as a reference. Users are processed in order according to their user ID.
• If the number already exists in the structure file, account information is updated if
necessary, according to the information contained in the BLOB.
• If the number does not exist in the structure file, the user is created according to the
information contained in the BLOB.
• If the number matches a user account that was deleted in the structure file, the account is
updated according to the information contained in the BLOB.
• If the information contained in the BLOB indicates that the user account is deleted, the
account is deleted from the structure file.
• Updated users are linked to groups according to the information in the BLOB.
• If a group does not exist, it is created.

If the command is executed correctly, the system variable OK is set to 1. Otherwise, it is set
to 0.

Compatibility note: User and group files (.4UG extension) created by the Save Groups...
menu command in versions of 4D prior to 2004 can be loaded in 4D version 2004 using
the following sequence:
DOCUMENT TO BLOB(mydoc; blob)
BLOB TO USERS(blob)

4D Language Reference 1877

However, user and group files generated in 4D starting with version 2004 cannot be opened
with a previous version.

See Also
USERS TO BLOB.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been executed correctly, the system variable OK is set to 1. Otherwise,
it is set to 0.

1878 4D Language Reference

CHANGE CURRENT USER Users and Groups

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

CHANGE CURRENT USER{(user; password)}

Parameter Type Description

user String | Num → Name or unique user ID
password String → Password (not encrypted)

Description
CHANGE CURRENT USER is used to change the identity of the current user in the database,
without having to quit. The user can change their identity themselves either using the
database connection dialog box (when the command is called without parameters) or directly
via the command. When a user changes their identity, they abandon any former access
privileges in favor of those belonging to the chosen user.

If the CHANGE CURRENT USER command is executed without parameters, the database
connection dialog box is displayed. The user must then enter or select a valid name and
password in order to enter the database. The contents of the connection dialog box will
depend on the options set on the Application/Access page of the database Preferences.

You can also pass the two optional user and password parameters in order to specify by
programming the new account to be used.
In the user parameter, pass the name or unique user ID (userRef) of the account to be used. The
user names and IDs can be obtained using the GET USER LIST command.

User ID User description

1 Designer
2 Administrator
3 to 15000 User created by the Designer
(user No. 3 is the first user created by the Designer,
user No. 4 is the second, etc.).
-11 to -15010 User created by the Administrator
(user No. -11 is the first user created by the Administrator,
user No. -12 is the second, etc.).

If the user account does not exist or was deleted, error -9979 is returned. You can intercept this
error with the error-handling method installed by the ON ERR CALL command. Otherwise, you
can call the function Is user deleted to test the user account before calling this command.

4D Language Reference 1879

Pass the non-encrypted user account password in the password parameter. If the password does
not match the user, the command will return error message -9978 and do nothing.

The command execution is now delayed to prevent flooding (brute force attack), in other
words, attempts of multiple user name/password combinations. As a result, after the 4th call
to this command, it is run only after a period of 10 seconds. This delay is throughout the
entire work station.

Offering a custom access management dialog box

The CHANGE CURRENT USER command can be used to set up custom dialog boxes for entering
the name and password (with entry and expiration rules) that benefit from the same
advantages as the access control system of 4D.
It works as follows:
1. The database is entered directly in the “Default user” mode, without a dialog box.
2. The On Startup database method displays a custom dialog box for entering the user name
and password. All types of processing are foreseeable in the dialog box:
- It is possible to display the list of database users, as in the standard access dialog box of 4D,
using the GET USER LIST command.
- The password entry field can contain various controls in order to check the validity of the
entered characters (minimum number of characters, uniqueness, etc.).
- In order for the characters of passwords being entered to be masked on screen, you can use
the FONT command with the special %password font.
- Expiration rules can be applied at the moment when the dialog box is validated: expiration
date, forced change to the initial connection, locking of account after several incorrect entries,
memorization of passwords already used, etc.
3. When the entry is validated, the required information (user name and password) are passed
to the CHANGE CURRENT USER command in order to open the database with the user account
privileges.

Example
The following example displays the connection dialog box:

CHANGE CURRENT USER

See Also
CHANGE PASSWORD.

1880 4D Language Reference

CHANGE LICENSES Users and Groups

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

CHANGE LICENSES

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
The CHANGE LICENSES command displays the 4D Update License dialog box, which enables
the user to activate plug-ins, the Web server or, with 4D Server, to add expansion numbers in
order to increase the number of clients who can use the database and its plug-ins
simultaneously.

Note: In 4D and 4D Server, you can display this dialog box by selecting the Update License...
command in the Help menu.

Using the CHANGE LICENSES command, you can display the 4D License dialog box from the
Application environment.

CHANGE LICENSES is a convenient way to allow licensing in a compiled 4D application

distributed to customers. 4D developers or IS managers can use this command to distribute a
4D application and let users enter their License without sending an update of the application
each time.

For more information about this dialog box, please refer to the 4D Installation Guide.

Example
In a custom configuration or preferences dialog box, you include a button whose method is:
` bLicense button object method
CHANGE LICENSES

4D Language Reference 1881

CHANGE PASSWORD Users and Groups

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

CHANGE PASSWORD (password)

Parameter Type Description

password String → New password

Description
CHANGE PASSWORD changes the password of the current user. This command replaces the
current password with the new password you pass in password.

Warning: Password are case-sensitive.

Example
The following example allows the user to change his or her password.

CHANGE CURRENT USER ` Present user with password dialog

If (OK=1)
$pw1:=Request("Enter new password for "+Current user)
` The password should be at least five characters long
If (((OK=1) & ($pw1#"")) & (Length($pw1)>5))
` Make sure the password has been entered correctly
$pw2:=Request("Enter password again")
If ((OK=1) & ($pw1=$pw2))
CHANGE PASSWORD($pw2) ` Change the password
End if
End if
End if

See Also
CHANGE CURRENT USER, FONT.

1882 4D Language Reference

Current user Users and Groups

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Current user → String

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result String ← User name of the current user

Description
Current user returns the user name of the current user.

Example
See example for the command User in group.

See Also
CHANGE CURRENT USER, CHANGE PASSWORD, User in group.

4D Language Reference 1883

DELETE USER Users and Groups

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DELETE USER (userID)

Parameter Type Description

userID Number → ID number of user to delete

Description
The DELETE USER command deletes the user whose unique user ID number you pass in userID.
You must pass a valid user ID number returned by the command GET USER LIST.

If the user account does not exist or has already been deleted, the error -9979 is generated. You
can catch this error with an error-handling method installed using ON ERR CALL.

Only the Designer and Administrator can delete users. It is not possible for the Administrator
to delete a user created by the Designer.

Deleted user names no longer appear in the Password window displayed when the database is
open or when you call CHANGE ACCESS. However, in order to maintain unique user ID
numbers, the user account is kept in the password system. Deleted user names are displayed in
green in the Users editor of the Design environment.

See Also
GET USER LIST, GET USER PROPERTIES, Is user deleted, Set user properties.

Error Handling
If you do not have the proper access privileges for calling DELETE USER or if the Password
system is already accessed by another process, an access privilege error is generated. You can
catch this error with an error-handling method installed using ON ERR CALL.

1884 4D Language Reference

EDIT ACCESS Users and Groups

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

EDIT ACCESS

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
EDIT ACCESS allows the user to edit the password system. When this command is executed,
the Toolbox window with only the Users and User groups pages is displayed.

Note: This command opens a modal window. Consequently, you should not call it from
another modal window; otherwise it will do nothing.

Groups can be edited by the Designer, the Administrator and group owners. The Designer and
the Administrator can edit any group. Group owners can edit only the groups they own. Users
can be added to and removed from groups. The command has no effect if no groups are
defined.

The Designer and the Administrator can add new users, as well as assign them to groups.

Example
The following example displays the Users and User groups management window to the user:

EDIT ACCESS

See Also
CHANGE CURRENT USER, CHANGE PASSWORD.

4D Language Reference 1885

Get default user Users and Groups

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get default user → Number

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Number ← Unique user ID number

Description
The Get default user command returns the unique user ID of the user set as “Default user”
in the database Preferences dialog box:

The following numbers can be used as user IDs:

ID User description
1 Designer
2 Administrator
3 to 15000 User created by Designer (user #3 is the 1st user created by Designer,
user #4 is the second, and so on).
-11 to -15010 User created by the Administrator (user #-11 is the 1st user created by
Administrator, user #-12 is the second, and so on).

If no default user has been set, the command returns 0.

1886 4D Language Reference

GET GROUP LIST Users and Groups

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET GROUP LIST (groupNames; groupNumbers)

Parameter Type Description

groupNames String Array ← Names of the groups as they appear
in the Password editor window
groupNumbers Numeric Array ← Corresponding unique group ID numbers

Description
GET GROUP LIST populates the arrays groupNames and groupNumbers with the names and
unique ID numbers of the groups as they appear in the Password editor window.

The array groupNumbers, synchronized with groupNames, is filled with the corresponding
unique group ID numbers. These numbers can have the following ranges:

Group ID number Group description

15001 to 32767 Group created by the Designer or affiliated Group Owner
(group #15001 is the first group created by the Designer,
group #15002 the second, and so on).
-15001 to -32768 Group created by the Administrator or affiliated Group Owner
(group #-15001 is the first group created by the Administrator,
group #-15002 the second, and so on).

See Also
GET GROUP PROPERTIES, GET USER LIST, Set group properties.

Error Handling
If you do not have the proper access privileges for calling GET GROUP LIST or if the Password
system is already accessed by another process, an access privilege error is generated. You can
catch this error with an error-handling method installed using ON ERR CALL.

4D Language Reference 1887

GET GROUP PROPERTIES Users and Groups

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET GROUP PROPERTIES (groupID; name; owner{; members})

Parameter Type Description

groupID Number → Unique group ID number
name String ← Name of the group
owner Number ← User ID number of group owner
members Numeric Array ← Group members

Description
GET GROUP PROPERTIES returns the properties of the group whose unique group ID number
you pass in groupID. You must pass a valid group ID number returned by the command GET
GROUP LIST. Group ID numbers can have the following values or ranges:

Group ID number Group description

15001 to 32767 Group created by the Designer or affiliated Group Owner
(group #15001 is the first group created by the Designer,
group #15002 the second, and so on).
-15001 to -32768 Group created by the Administrator or affiliated Group Owner
(group #-15001 is the first group created by the Administrator,
group #-15002 the second, and so on).

If you do not pass a valid group ID number, GET GROUP PROPERTIES returns empty parameters.

After the call, you retrieve the name and owner of the group, in the parameters name and
owner.

If you pass the optional members parameter, the unique ID numbers of the users and groups
belonging to the group are returned. Member ID numbers can have the following ranges:

Member ID number Member Description

1 Designer user
2 Administrator user
3 to 15000 User created by the Designer of the database
(user #3 is the first user created by the Designer,
user #4 the second, and so on).

1888 4D Language Reference

-11 to -15000 User created by the Administrator of the database
(user #-11 is the first user created by the Designer,
user #-12 is the second, and so on).
15001 to 32767 Group created by the Designer or affiliated Group Owner
(group #15001 is the first group created by the Designer,
group #15002 the second, and so on).
-15001 to -32768 Group created by the Administrator or affiliated Group Owner
(group #-15001 is the first group created by the Administrator,
group #-15002 the second, and so on).
See Also
GET GROUP LIST, GET USER LIST, Set group properties.

Error Handling
If you do not have the proper access privileges for calling GET GROUP PROPERTIES or if the
Password system is already accessed by another process, an access privilege error is generated.
You can catch this error with an error-handling method installed using ON ERR CALL.

4D Language Reference 1889

Get plugin access Users and Groups

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get plugin access (plugIn) → String

Parameter Type Description

plugIn Longint → Plug-in number

Function result String ← Group name associated with plug-in

Description
The Get plugin access command returns the name of the user group authorized to use the
plug-in whose number was passed in the plugIn parameter. If there is no group associated
with the plug-in, the command returns an empty string ("").

Pass the number of the plug-in for which you want to find out the associated group of users
in the plugIn parameter. Plug-in licenses include 4D Client Web and SOAP licenses. You
can pass one of the following constants found in the “Is license available” theme:

Constant Type Value

4D Draw License Longint 808464694
4D For OCI License Longint 808465208
4D View License Longint 808465207
4D Write License Longint 808464697
4D Client Web License Longint 808465209
4D Client SOAP License Longint 808465465
4D ODBC Pro License Longint 808464946
4D for ADO License Longint 808465714
4D for MySQL License Longint 808465712
4D for PostgreSQL License Longint 808465713
4D for Sybase License Longint 808465715

See Also
PLUGIN LIST, SET PLUGIN ACCESS.

1890 4D Language Reference

GET USER LIST Users and Groups

version 6.0
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET USER LIST (userNames; userNumbers)

Parameter Type Description

userNames String Array ← User names as they appear
in the Password editor window
userNumbers Numeric Array ← Corresponding unique user ID numbers

Description
GET USER LIST populates the arrays userNames and userNumbers with the names and unique
ID numbers of the users as they appear in the Passwords window.
The array userNames is filled with the user names displayed in the Passwords window,
including users whose accounts are disabled (user names displayed in green in the Passwords
window).

Note: Use the command Is user deleted to detect deleted users.

The array userNumbers, synchronized with userNames, is filled with the corresponding unique
user ID numbers. These numbers can have the following values or ranges:
User ID number User description
1 Designer user
2 Administrator user
3 to 15000 User created by the Designer of the database
(user #3 is the first user created by the Designer,
user #4 the second, and so on).
-11 to -15000 User created by the Administrator of the database
(user #-11 is the first user created by the Designer,
user #-12 is the second, and so on).

See Also
GET GROUP LIST, GET USER PROPERTIES, Set user properties.

Error Handling
If you do not have the proper access privileges for calling GET USER LIST or if the Password
system is already accessed by another process, an access privilege error is generated. You can
catch this error with an error-handling method installed using ON ERR CALL.

4D Language Reference 1891

GET USER PROPERTIES Users and Groups

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET USER PROPERTIES (userID; name; startup; password; nbLogin; lastLogin{; memberships{;
groupOwner}})

Parameter Type Description

userID Number → Unique user ID number
name String ← Name of the user
startup String ← Startup method name
password String ← Always an empty string
nbLogin Number ← Number of logins to the database
lastLogin Date ← Date of last login to the database
memberships Numeric Array ← ID numbers of groups to which the user belongs
groupOwner Number ← ID number of user group owner

Description
GET USER PROPERTIES returns the information about the user whose unique user ID number
you pass in userID. You must pass a valid user ID number returned by the command GET USER
LIST.

If the user account does not exist or has been deleted, the error -9979 is generated. You can
catch this error with an error-handling method installed using ON ERR CALL. Otherwise, you
can call Is user deleted to test the user account before calling GET USER PROPERTIES.

User ID numbers can have the following values or ranges:

User ID number User description

1 Designer user
2 Administrator user
3 to 15000 User created by the Designer of the database
(user #3 is the first user created by the Designer,
user #4 the second, and so on).
-11 to -15000 User created by the Administrator of the database
(user #-11 is the first user created by the Designer,
user #-12 is the second, and so on).

1892 4D Language Reference

After the call, you retrieve the name, startup method, encrypted password, number of logins
and date of last login for the user, in the parameters name, startup, password, nbLogin and
lastLogin.

Note: GET USER PROPERTIES no longer returns the encrypted password in the password
parameter. Starting with version 6.0.2, an empty string is always returned in this parameter.
To check the password of a user, call the Validate password function.

If you pass the optional memberships parameter, the unique ID numbers of the groups to
which the user belongs are returned. Group ID numbers can have the following ranges:

If you pass the optional groupOwner parameter, you get the ID number of the user group
“owner”, i.e. the default owner group of the objects created by this user.

The group ID numbers can be the following:

Group ID number Group description

15001 to 32767 Group created by the Designer or affiliated Group Owner
(group #15001 is the first group created by the Designer,
group #15002 the second, and so on).
-15001 to -32768 Group created by the Administrator or affiliated Group Owner
(group #-15001 is the first group created by the Administrator,
group #-15002 the second, and so on).

See Also
GET GROUP LIST, GET USER LIST, Set user properties, Validate password.

Error Handling
If you do not have the proper access privileges for calling GET USER PROPERTIES or if the
Password system is already accessed by another process, an access privilege error is generated.
You can catch this error with an error-handling method installed using ON ERR CALL.

4D Language Reference 1893

Is license available Users and Groups

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Is license available {(license)} → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

license Number → Plug-in for which license validity testing is desired

Function result Boolean ← True if plug-in is available, otherwise False

Description
The Is license available command enables you to know the availability of a plug-in. It is useful,
for instance, for displaying or hiding functions requiring the presence of a plug-in.

The Is license available command may be used in three different ways:

• The license parameter is omitted: in this case, the command returns False if the 4D
application is in demonstration mode.

• You pass one of the constants of the “Is license available” theme in the license parameter:
Constant Type Value
4D Draw License Longint 808464694
4D For OCI License Longint 808465208
4D View License Longint 808465207
4D Web License Longint 808464945
4D Write License Longint 808464697
4D Client Web License Longint 808465209
4D Client SOAP License Longint 808465465
4D SOAP License Longint 808465464
4D ODBC Pro License Longint 808464946
4D for ADO License Longint 808465714
4D for MySQL License Longint 808465712
4D for PostgreSQL License Longint 808465713
4D for Sybase License Longint 808465715

In this case, the command returns True if the corresponding plug-in has a license available.
The command takes into account any licenses attributed in Design mode or via the SET
PLUGIN ACCESS command.

1894 4D Language Reference

Is license available returns False if the plug-in is operating in demo mode.

• You pass the ID number of the plug-in “4BNX” resource directly in the license parameter. In
this case, the command behaves as described above.

See Also
Get plugin access, PLUGIN LIST, SET PLUGIN ACCESS.

4D Language Reference 1895

Is user deleted Users and Groups

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Is user deleted (userNumber) → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

userNumber Number → User ID number

Function result Boolean ← TRUE = User account is deleted or does not exist
FALSE = User account is active

Description
The Is user deleted command tests the user account whose unique user ID number you pass in
userID.

If the user account does not exist or has been deleted, Is user deleted returns TRUE. Otherwise,
it returns FALSE.

See Also
DELETE USER, GET USER PROPERTIES, Set user properties.

Error Handling
If you do not have the proper access privileges for calling Is user deleted or if the Password
system is already accessed by another process, an access privilege error is generated. You can
catch this error with an error-handling method installed using ON ERR CALL.

1896 4D Language Reference

Set group properties Users and Groups

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Set group properties (groupID; name; owner{; members}) → Number

Parameter Type Description

groupID Number → Unique ID number of group, or
-1 for adding a Designer group, or
-2 for adding an Administrator group
name String → New group name
owner Number → User ID number of new group owner
members Numeric Array → New group members

Function result Number ← Unique ID number of new group

Description
Set group properties enables you to change and update the properties of an existing group
whose unique group ID number you pass in groupID, or to add a new group affiliated with the
Designer or the Administrator.

If you are changing the properties of an existing group, you must pass a valid group ID
number returned by the command GET GROUP LIST. Group ID numbers can have the
following values or ranges:

Group ID number Group description

15001 to 32767 Group created by the Designer or affiliated Group Owner
(group #15001 is the first group created by the Designer,
group #15002 the second, and so on).
-15001 to -32768 Group created by the Administrator or affiliated Group Owner
(group #-15001 is the first group created by the Administrator,
group #-15002 the second, and so on).

To add a new group affiliated with the Designer, pass -1 in groupID. To add a new group
affiliated with the Administrator, pass -2 in groupID. After the call, if the group is successfully
added, its unique ID number is returned in groupID.

If you do not pass -1, -2 or a valid group ID number, Set group properties does nothing.

4D Language Reference 1897

Before the call, you pass the new name and owner of the group in the parameters name and
owner. If you do not want to change all the properties of the group (besides the members, see
below), first call GET GROUP PROPERTIES and pass the returned values for the properties you
want to leave unchanged.

If you do not pass the optional members parameter, the current member list of the group is
left unchanged. If you do not pass members while adding a group, the group will have no
members.

Note: The group owner is not automatically set as a member of the group that he or she owns.
It is up to you to include the group owner in the group, using the members parameter.

If you pass the optional members parameter, you change the whole member list for the group.
Before the call, you must populate the array members with the unique ID numbers of the users
and groups the group will get as members. Member ID numbers can have the following ranges:

Member ID number Member Description

1 Designer user
2 Administrator user
3 to 15000 User created by the Designer of the database
(user #3 is the first user created by the Designer,
user #4 the second, and so on).
-11 to -15000 User created by the Administrator of the database
(user #-11 is the first user created by the Designer,
user #-12 is the second, and so on).
15001 to 32767 Group created by the Designer or affiliated Group Owner
(group #15001 is the first group created by the Designer,
group #15002 the second, and so on).
-15001 to -32768 Group created by the Administrator or affiliated Group Owner
(group #-15001 is the first group created by the Administrator,
group #-15002 the second, and so on).

To remove all the members from a group, pass an empty members array.

See Also
GET GROUP LIST, GET GROUP PROPERTIES, GET USER LIST.

Error Handling
If you do not have the proper access privileges for calling Set group properties or if the
Password system is already accessed by another process, an access privilege error is generated.
You can catch this error with an error-handling method installed using ON ERR CALL.

1898 4D Language Reference

SET PLUGIN ACCESS Users and Groups

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET PLUGIN ACCESS (plugIn; group)

Parameter Type Description

plugIn Longint → Plug-in number
group String → Group name to associate with plug-in

Description
The SET PLUGIN ACCESS command lets you set, by programming, the user group allowed to
use each “serialized” plug-in that is installed in the database. By doing so, you can manage
how plug-in licenses are used.

Note: This operation can also be carried out in the Design environment using the Groups
editor.

Pass the number of the plug-in to be associated with a group of users in the plugIn
parameter. Plug-in licenses include 4D Client Web and SOAP licenses. You can pass one of
the following constants found in the “Is license available” theme:

Constant Type Value

4D Draw License Longint 808464694
4D For OCI License Longint 808465208
4D View License Longint 808465207
4D Write License Longint 808464697
4D Client Web License Longint 808465209
4D Client SOAP License Longint 808465465
4D ODBC Pro License Longint 808464946
4D for ADO License Longint 808465714
4D for MySQL License Longint 808465712
4D for PostgreSQL License Longint 808465713
4D for Sybase License Longint 808465715

Pass the name of the group whose users are authorized to use the plug-in in group.

Note: Only one group at a time can be allowed to use a plug-in. When this command is
executed, if another group had the plug-in access rights, it loses this privilege.

See Also
Get plugin access, PLUGIN LIST.

4D Language Reference 1899

Set user properties Users and Groups

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Set user properties (userID; name; startup; password; nbLogin; lastLogin{; memberships{;
groupOwner}}) → Number

Parameter Type Description

userID Number → Unique ID number of user account, or
-1 for adding a user affiliated with the Designer, or
-2 for adding a user affiliated with the Administrator
name String → New user name
startup String → Name of new user startup method
password String → New (unencrypted) password, or
* to leave the password unchanged
nbLogin Number → New number of logins to the database
lastLogin Date → New date of last login to the database
memberships Numeric Array → ID numbers of groups to which the user belongs
groupOwner Number ← ID number of user group owner

Function result Number ← Unique ID number of new user

Description
Set user properties enables you to change and update the properties of an existing user account
whose unique user ID number you pass in userID, or to add a new user affiliated with the
Designer or the Administrator.

If you are changing the properties of an existing user account, you must pass a valid user ID
number returned by the GET USER LIST command.

If the user account does not exist or has been deleted, the error -9979 is generated. You can
catch this error with an error-handling method installed using ON ERR CALL. Otherwise, you
can call Is user deleted to test the user account before calling Set user properties.

1900 4D Language Reference

User ID numbers can have the following values or ranges:

User ID number User description

1 Designer user
2 Administrator user
3 to 15000 User created by the Designer of the database
(user #3 is the first user created by the Designer,
user #4 the second, and so on).
-11 to -15000 User created by the Administrator of the database
(user #-11 is the first user created by the Administrator,
user #-12 is the second, and so on).

To add a new user affiliated with the Designer pass -1 in userID. To add a new user affiliated
with the Administrator pass -2 in userID.
After the call, if the user is successfully added or modified, its unique ID number is returned in
userID.

If you do not pass -1, -2 or a valid user ID number, Set user properties does nothing.

Before the call, you pass the new name, startup method, password, number of logins and date
of last login for the user, in the name, startup, password, nbLogin and lastLogin parameters. You
pass an unencrypted password in the password parameter. 4D will encrypt it for you before
saving it in the user account.
If the new user name passed in name is not unique (there is already a user with the same
name), the command does nothing and the error -9979 is returned. You can catch this error
with an error-handling method installed using ON ERR CALL.

If you do not want to change all the properties of the user (aside from the memberships, see
below), first call GET USER PROPERTIES and pass the returned values for the properties you want
to leave unchanged.

If you do not want to change the password for an account, pass the * symbol as a value for the
password parameter. This allows you to change the other properties of the user account
without changing the password for the account.

If you do not pass the optional memberships parameter, the current memberships of the user
are left unchanged. If you do not pass memberships when adding a user, the user will not
belong to any group.
If you pass the optional memberships parameter, you change all the memberships for the user.
Before the call, you must populate the memberships array with the unique ID numbers of the
groups to which the user will belong.

4D Language Reference 1901

If you pass the optional groupOwner parameter, you indicate the ID number of the user group
“owner”, i.e. the default owner group of the objects created by this user.

The group ID numbers can be the following:

Group ID number Group description

15001 to 32767 Group created by the Designer or affiliated Group Owner
(group #15001 is the first group created by the Designer,
group #15002 the second, and so on).
-15001 to -32768 Group created by the Administrator or affiliated Group Owner
(group #-15001 is the first group created by the Administrator,
group #-15002 the second, and so on).

To revoke all the memberships of a user, pass an empty memberships array.

See Also
DELETE USER, GET GROUP LIST, GET USER LIST, GET USER PROPERTIES, Is user deleted, Validate
password.

Error Handling
If you do not have the proper access privileges for calling Set user properties or if the Password
system is already accessed by another process, an access privilege error is generated. You can
catch this error with an error-handling method installed using ON ERR CALL.

1902 4D Language Reference

User in group Users and Groups

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

User in group (user; group) → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

user String → User name
group String → Group name

Function result Boolean ← TRUE = user is in group

FALSE = user is not in group

Description
User in group returns TRUE if user is in group.

Example
The following example searches for specific invoices. If the current user is in the Executive
group, he or she is allowed access to forms that display confidential information. If the user is
not in the Executive group, a different form is displayed:

QUERY([Invoices];[Invoices]Retail>100)
If (User in group(Current user;"Executive"))
OUTPUT FORM([Invoices];"Executive Output")
INPUT FORM([Invoices];"Executive Input")
Else
OUTPUT FORM([Invoices];"Standard Output")
INPUT FORM([Invoices];"Standard Input")
End if
MODIFY SELECTION([Invoices];*)

See Also
Current user.

4D Language Reference 1903

USERS TO BLOB Users and Groups

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

USERS TO BLOB (users)

Parameter Type Description

users BLOB → BLOB that must contain users
← User accounts (encrypted)

Description
The USERS TO BLOB command stores in the BLOB users the list of all user accounts and
database groups created by the Aministrator.

Only the database Administrator or the Designer can execute this command. If another
user attempts to execute it, the command does nothing and a privilege error (-9949) is
generated.

The generated BLOB is automatically encrypted and can only be read using the BLOB TO
USERS command. You can store this BLOB in a file on your hard disk or in a field.
This command is the equivalent of recording groups and users from the Toolbar. The only
difference is that it allows the storing of user accounts in a BLOB field and not just in a file.

This concept allows you to keep a backup of users in the database data and, as such,
implements a backup mechanism as well as a system to automatically load users in case of a
database structure file update (information related to user accounts are stored by 4D in the
database structure file).

See Also
BLOB TO USERS.

1904 4D Language Reference

Validate password Users and Groups

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Validate password (userID; password) → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

userID Number → Unique user ID
password String → Unencrypted password

Function result Boolean ← True = valid password

False = invalid password

Description
Validate password returns True if the string passed in password is the password for the user
account whose ID number is passed in userID.

The command execution is now delayed to prevent flooding (brute force attack), in other
words, attempts of multiple user name/password combinations. As a result, after the 4th call
to this command, it is run only after a period of 10 seconds. This delay is throughout the
entire work station.

Example
This example checks whether the password of the user “Hardy” is “Laurel”:

GET USER LIST(atUserName;alUserID)

$vlElem:=Find in array(atUserName;"Hardy")
If ($vlElem>0)
If (Validate password(alUserID{$vlElem};"Laurel"))
ALERT("Yep!")
Else
ALERT("Too bad!")
End if
Else
ALERT("Unknown user name")
End if

See Also
GET USER PROPERTIES, Set user properties.

4D Language Reference 1905

1906 4D Language Reference
60
______________________
Variables

4D Language Reference 1907

1908 4D Language Reference
CLEAR VARIABLE Variables

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

CLEAR VARIABLE (variable)

Parameter Type Description

variable Variable → Variable to clear

Description
CLEAR VARIABLE resets variable to its default type value (i.e., empty string for String and Text
variables, 0 for numeric variables, no elements for arrays, etc.). The variable still exists in
memory.

The variable you pass in variable must be a process or an interprocess variable.

Note: You do not need to clear process variables when a process ends; 4D clears them
automatically.

Local variables, which are variables preceded by a dollar sign ($), cannot be cleared with
CLEAR VARIABLE. They are cleared automatically when the method in which are located
completes execution.

Example
In a form, you are using the drop-down list asMyDropDown whose sole purpose is user
interface. In other words, you use that array during data entry, but once you are done with the
form, you will no longer use that array. Consequently, during the On Unload event, you just
get rid of the array:

` asMyDropDown drop-drop list object method

Case of
: (Form event=On Load)
` Initialize the array one way or another
ARRAY STRING(63;asMyDropDown;...)
` ...

4D Language Reference 1909

 : (Form event=On Unload)
` No longer need the array
CLEAR VARIABLE (asMyDropDown)
` ...
End case

See Also
Undefined.

1910 4D Language Reference

LOAD VARIABLES Variables

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

LOAD VARIABLES (document; variable{; variable2; ...; variableN})

Parameter Type Description

document String → Document containing 4D variables
variable Variable → Variables to receive the values

Description
The LOAD VARIABLES command loads one or several variables from the document specified by
document. The document must have been created using the command SAVE VARIABLES.

The variables variable, variable2...variableN are created; if they already exist, they are
overwritten.

If you supply an empty string for document, the standard Open File dialog box appears, so the
user can choose the document to open. If a document is chosen, the 4D system variable
Document is set to the name of the document.

In compiled databases, each variable must be of the same type as those loaded from disk.

WARNING: This command does not support array variables. Use the new BLOB commands
instead.

Example
The following example loads three variables from a document named UserPrefs:

LOAD VARIABLES ("User Prefs";vsName;vlCode;vgIconPicture)

System Variables or Sets

If the variables are loaded properly, the OK system variable is set to 1; otherwise it is set to 0.

See Also
BLOB TO DOCUMENT, BLOB TO VARIABLE, DOCUMENT TO BLOB, RECEIVE VARIABLE, VARIABLE
TO BLOB.

4D Language Reference 1911

SAVE VARIABLES Variables

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SAVE VARIABLES (document; variable{; variable2; ...; variableN})

Parameter Type Description

document String → Document in which to save the variables
variable Variable → Variables to save

Description
The SAVE VARIABLES command saves one or several variables in the document whose name
you pass in document.
The variables do not need to be of the same type, but have to be of type String, Text, Real,
Integer, Long Integer, Date, Time, Boolean, or Picture.
If you supply an empty string for document, the standard Save File dialog box appears; the user
can then choose the document to create. In this case, the 4D system variable Document is set
to the name of the document if one is created.

If the variables are properly saved, the OK variable is set to 1. If not, OK is set to 0.

Note: When you write variables to documents with SAVE VARIABLES, 4D uses an internal data
format. You can retrieve the variables only with the LOAD VARIABLES command. Do not use
RECEIVE VARIABLE or RECEIVE PACKET to read a document created by SAVE VARIABLES.

WARNING: This command does not support array variables. Use the new BLOB commands
instead.

Example
The following example saves three variables to a document named UserPrefs:

SAVE VARIABLES ("User Prefs";vsName;vlCode;vgIconPicture)

System Variables or Sets

If the variables are saved properly, the OK system variable is set to 1; otherwise it is set to 0.

See Also
BLOB TO DOCUMENT, BLOB TO VARIABLE, DOCUMENT TO BLOB, LOAD VARIABLES, System
Variables, VARIABLE TO BLOB.

1912 4D Language Reference

Undefined Variables

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Undefined (variable) → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

variable Variable → Variable to test

Function result Boolean ← True = Variable is currently undefined

False = Variable is currently defined

Description
Undefined returns True if variable has not been defined, and False if variable has been defined.
A variable is defined if it has been created via a compilation directive or if a value is assigned
to it. It is undefined in all other cases.

If the database has been compiled, the Undefined function returns False for all variables.

Example
The following code manages the creation of processes when a menu item for a particular
module of your application is chosen. If the process already exists, you bring it to the front; if
it does not exist, you start it. To do so, for each module of the application, you maintain an
interprocess variable <>PID_... that you initialize in the On Startup database method.

When developing the database, you add new modules. Instead modifying the On Startup
database method (to add the initialization of the corresponding <>PID_...) and then reopening
the database to reinitialize everything each time you add a module, you use the Undefined
command to manage the addition of the new module, on the fly:

` M_ADD_CUSTOMERS global procedure

If (Undefined(<>PID_ADD_CUSTOMERS)) ` Takes care of intermediate development stages

C_LONGINT(<>PID_ADD_CUSTOMERS)
<>PID_ADD_CUSTOMERS:=0
End if

4D Language Reference 1913

 If (<>PID_ADD_CUSTOMERS=0)
<>PID_ADD_CUSTOMERS:=New process("P_ADD_CUSTOMERS";64*1024;
"P_ADD_CUSTOMERS")
Else
SHOW PROCESS(<>PID_ADD_CUSTOMERS)
BRING TO FRONT(<>PID_ADD_CUSTOMERS)
End if
` Note: P_ADD_CUSTOMERS, the process master method,
` sets <>PID_ADD_CUSTOMERS to zero when it ends.

See Also
CLEAR VARIABLE.

1914 4D Language Reference

61
______________________
Web Area

4D Language Reference 1915

1916 4D Language Reference
 Edited by Foxit Reader
Copyright(C) by Foxit Software Company,2005-2008
For Evaluation Only.
Programmed management of Web Areas Web Area

version 11.2
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The commands of this theme are dedicated to the programmed management of Web Area
type form objects.

Web areas can display any type of Web content within your 4D environment: HTML pages
with static or dynamic contents, files, pictures, Javascript, Flash, PDF,etc. and even MS
Office documents (under Windows when MS Office is installed). The following picture
shows a Web area included in a form and displaying an HTML page:

In addition to the commands of the Web Area theme, several standard actions and form
events allow the developer to control the functioning of these Web areas. Specific variables
can be used to exchange information between the area and the 4D environment. These
tools can be used to develop a basic Web browser in your forms.

Creating and addressing a Web area

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

A Web area is created using a variant of the Plug-in Area/Subform button found in the
object bar of the 4D Form editor (for more information, please refer to the Design Reference
manual).

4D Language Reference 1917

Like other dynamic form objects, a Web area has an object name and a variable name,
which can be used to handle it by programming. The standard variable associated with a
Web area object is of the Text type. More specifically, you can use the SET VISIBLE and
MOVE OBJECT commands with Web areas.

Note: The text variable associated with the Web area does not contain a reference therefore
it cannot be passed as a parameter for a method. For example, for a Web area named
MyArea, the following code cannot be used:
Mymethod(MyArea)
Code for Mymethod:
WA REFRESH CURRENT URL($1) `Does not work
For this type of programming, you will need to use pointers:
Mymethod(->MyArea)
Code for Mymethod:
WA REFRESH CURRENT URL($1->) `Works

Compositing mode (Mac OS)

In order to be displayed, the Web areas must be included in windows designed in
"compositing mode." This internal mode for handling windows under Mac OS is not used
in all the 4D windows.
In 4D v11 SQL, the windows designed in "compositing mode" are:
• The windows generated by the Open window and Open form window commands having
the type Compositing Mode (constant value 4096);
• In Design mode, windows displaying a project form.
Note: Certain former generation objects are not compatible with the compositing mode
(for example 4D Chart areas). If they are displayed in windows in compositing mode, these
objects will not work.

Management of associated variables

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

In addition to the standard object variable (see previous paragraph), two specific variables
are automatically associated with each Web area:
• The "URL" variable
• The "Progression" variable.
By default, these variables are named, respectively, areaName_url and areaName_progress.

1918 4D Language Reference

You can change these names if desired. These variables can be accessed in the Property List:

URL Variable
"URL" is a String type variable. It contains the URL loaded or being loading by the
associated Web area.
The association between the variable and the Web area works in both directions:
• If the user assigns a new URL to the variable, this URL is automatically loaded by the Web
area.
• Any browsing done within the Web area will automatically update the contents of the
variable.
Schematically, this variable functions like the address area of a Web browser. You can
represent it via a text area above the Web area.

URL Variable and WA OPEN URL command

The URL variable produces the same effects as the WA OPEN URL command. The following
differences should nevertheless be noted:
- For access to documents, this variable only accepts URLs that are RFC-compliant
("file://c:/My%20Doc") and not system pathnames ("c:\MyDoc"). The WA OPEN URL
command accepts both notations.
- If the URL variable contains an empty string, the Web area does not attempt to load the
URL. The WA OPEN URL command generates an error in this case.
- If the URL variable does not contain a protocol (http, mailto, file, etc.), the Web area adds
"http://", which is not the case for the WA OPEN URL command.
- When the Web area is not displayed in the form (when it is located on another page of
the form), executing the WA OPEN URL command has no effect, whereas assigning a value
to the URL variable can be used to update the current URL.

4D Language Reference 1919

Progression Variable
"Progression" is a Longint type variable. It contains a value between 0 and 100, representing
the percentage of loading that is complete for the page displayed in the Web area.
This variable is automatically updated by 4D. It is not possible to modify it manually.

Form events
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Specific form events are intended for programmed management of Web areas, more
particularly concerning the activation of links:
• On Begin URL Loading
• On URL Resource Loading
• On End URL Loading
• On URL Loading Error
• On URL Filtering
• On Open External Link
• On Window Opening Denied

In addition, Web areas support the following generic form events:

• On Load
• On Unload
• On Getting Focus
• On Losing Focus
• On Drag Over
• On Drop
• On Begin Drag Over

For more information about these events, please refer to the description of the Form event
command.

Notes about use of Web areas

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

User interface
When the form is executed, standard browser interface functions are available to the user
in the Web area, which permit interaction with other form areas:
• Edit menu commands: When the Web area has the focus, the Edit menu commands can
be used to carry out actions such as copy, paste, select all, etc., according to the selection.
• Contextual menu: It is possible to use the standard contextual menu of the system with
the Web area (display of the contextual menu can be controlled using the WA SET
PREFERENCE command).
• Drag and drop: The user can drag and drop text, pictures and documents within the Web
area or between a Web area and the 4D form objects, according to the 4D object properties.

1920 4D Language Reference

MS Office Documents (Windows)
Under Windows, the Web area can support the display and modification of Microsoft
Office documents (when Microsoft Office is installed on the machine). In particular, Word,
Excel and Powerpoint documents (.doc, .xls and .ppt extensions) can be handled. The MS
Office XML format is also supported.
Note: MS Office 2007 does not allow the display of documents in a Web browser by
default; they are always opened in a new window. You can modify this functioning using
the instructions provided at the following address:
http://support.microsoft.com/kb/162059/en-us
Under Windows, Web areas can be used to display local or external folders via the ftp://
protocol or via network pathnames (\\myserver\myvolume).

Web Area and Web server conflict (Windows)

Under Windows, it is not recommended to access, via a Web area, the Web server of the 4D
application containing the area because this configuration could lead to a conflict that
freezes the application. Of course, a remote 4D can access the Web server of 4D Server, but
not its own Web server.

Insertion of protocol (Mac OS)

The URLs handled by programming in Web areas under Mac OS must begin with the
protocol. For example, you need to pass the string "http://www.mysite.com" and not just
"www.mysite.com".

4D Language Reference 1921

WA Back URL available Web Area

version 11.2
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

WA Back URL available ({*; }object) → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)

Function result Boolean ← True if there is a previous URL in the sequence of URLs
opened;otherwise, False

Description
The WA Back URL available command can be used to find out whether there is a previous URL
available in the sequence of URLs opened in the Web area designated by the * and object
parameters.

The command returns True if a URL exists and False otherwise. More particularly, this
command can be used, in a custom interface, to enable or disable navigation buttons.

See Also
WA Forward URL available, WA OPEN BACK URL.

1922 4D Language Reference

WA Create URL history menu Web Area

version 11.2
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

WA Create URL history menu ({*; }object{; direction}) → MenuRef

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)
direction Integer → 0 or omitted=List of previous URLs,
1=List of next URLs

Function result MenuRef ← Menu reference

Description
The WA Create URL history menu command creates and fills a menu that can be used directly
for navigation among the URLs visited during the session in the Web area designated by the *
and object parameters. It can be used to build a custom navigation interface.

The information provided concerns the session; in other words, the navigation carried out in
the same Web area as long as the form has not been closed.

Pass a value indicating the list to recover in direction. You can use one of the following
constants, found in the "Web Area" theme:

Constant Type Value

wa previous URLs Longint 0
wa next URLs Longint 1

If you omit the direction parameter, the value 0 is used.

Once the menu has been generated, you can display it via the 4D Dynamic pop up menu
command and you can work with it using the standard 4D menu management commands.
The ItemRef reference (string type) returned by the Dynamic pop up menu command contains
the URL of the page visited (see example).

Call the RELEASE MENU command to delete a URL history menu when it is no longer useful.

4D Language Reference 1923

Example
The following code can be associated with a 3D button having a pop-up menu entitled
"Previous":
Case of
`Single click
: (Form event=On clicked)
WA OPEN BACK URL (WA_area)
`Click on arrow -> display of pop up
: (Form event=On Arrow Click)
`Create a previous history menu
$Menu:=WA Create URL history menu (WA_area;wa previous URLs)
`Display this menu in a pop-up
$URL:=Dynamic pop up menu ($Menu)
`If an item is selected
If ($URL#"")
`Open Web page
WA OPEN URL(WA_area;$URL)
End if
`Delete menu to free up memory
RELEASE MENU($Menu)
End case

See Also
Dynamic pop up menu, RELEASE MENU, WA GET URL HISTORY.

1924 4D Language Reference

WA Execute JavaScript Web Area

version 11.2
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

WA Execute JavaScript ({*; }object; jsCode) → String

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)
jsCode String → JavaScript code

Function result String ← Result of execution

Description
The WA Execute JavaScript command executes, in the Web area designated by the * and object
parameters, the JavaScript code passed in jsCode.

Under Mac OS, the command returns the result.

Under Windows, the command returns an empty string. Use the WA EXECUTE JAVASCRIPT
FUNCTION command.

Example
This example of JavaScript code causes the previous URL to be displayed:
$result:=WA Execute JavaScript(MyWArea;"history.back()")

See Also
WA EXECUTE JAVASCRIPT FUNCTION.

4D Language Reference 1925

WA EXECUTE JAVASCRIPT FUNCTION Web Area

version 11.2
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

WA EXECUTE JAVASCRIPT FUNCTION ({*; }object; jsFunction; result|*{; param}{; param2; ...;
paramN})

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)
jsFunction String → Name of JavaScript function to execute
result|* Variable → Function result (if expected)
← or * for a function with no result
param String → Parameter(s) to pass to function

Description
The WA EXECUTE JAVASCRIPT FUNCTION command executes, in the Web area designated by
the * and object parameters, the JavaScript function jsFunction and optionally returns its result
in the result parameter.

If the function does not return a result, pass * in the result parameter.

You can pass one or more strings containing the parameters of the function in param.

Example
Calling a JavaScript function with 3 parameters:
$JavaScriptFunction:="TheFunctionToBeExecuted"
$Param1:="10"
$Param2:="true"
$Param3:="1,000.2" `note "," as thousands separator and "." as the decimal separator

WA EXECUTE JAVASCRIPT FUNCTION(MyWArea; $JavaScriptFunction;$Result; $Param1;

$Param2; $Param3)

See Also
WA Execute JavaScript.

1926 4D Language Reference

WA Forward URL available Web Area

version 11.2
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

WA Forward URL available ({*; }object) → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)

Function result Boolean ← True if there is a following URL in the sequence of URLs
opened;otherwise, False

Description
The WA Forward URL available command can be used to find out whether there is a next URL
available in the sequence of URLs opened in the Web area designated by the * and object
parameters.

The command returns True if a URL exists and False otherwise. More particularly, this
command can be used, in a custom interface, to enable or disable navigation buttons.

See Also
WA Back URL available, WA OPEN FORWARD URL.

4D Language Reference 1927

WA Get current URL Web Area

version 11.2
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

WA Get current URL({*; } object) → String

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)

Function result String ← URL currently loaded in the Web area

Description
The WA Get current URL command returns the URL address of the page displayed in the Web
area designated by the * and object parameters.

If the current URL is not available, the command returns an empty string.

If the Web page is completely loaded, the value returned by the function is the same as that of
the "URL" variable associated with the Web area. If the page is in the process of being loaded,
the two values will be different: the function returns the completely loaded URL and the
variable contains the URL in the process of being loaded.

Example
The page displayed is the URL "www.apple.com" and the "www.4d.com" page is in the process
of being loaded:
$url:=WA Get current URL(MyWArea) `returns "http://www.apple.com"
`The associated URL variable contains "http://www.4d.com"

See Also
WA OPEN URL.

1928 4D Language Reference

WA GET EXTERNAL LINKS FILTERS Web Area

version 11.2
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

WA GET EXTERNAL LINKS FILTERS ({*; }object; filtersArr; allowDenyArr)

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)
filtersArr Array string ← Filters array
allowDenyArr Array Boolean ← Allow-deny array

Description
The WA GET EXTERNAL LINKS FILTERS command returns, in the filtersArr and allowDenyArr
arrays, the external link filters of the Web area designated by the * and object parameters. If no
filter is active, the arrays are returned empty.

The filters are installed by the WA SET EXTERNAL LINKS FILTERS command. If the arrays are
reinitialized during the session, the WA GET EXTERNAL LINKS FILTERS command can be used to
find out the current settings.

See Also
WA GET URL FILTERS, WA SET EXTERNAL LINKS FILTERS.

4D Language Reference 1929

WA Get last filtered URL Web Area

version 11.2
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

WA Get last filtered URL ({*; }object) → String

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)

Function result String ← Last filtered URL

Description
The WA Get last filtered URL command returns the last URL that was filtered in the Web area
designated by the * and object parameters.

The URL may have been filtered for one of the following reasons:
• The URL was denied because of a filter (WA SET URL FILTERS command),
• The link is open in the default browser (WA SET EXTERNAL LINKS FILTERS command),
• The URL attempts to open a pop-up window.

It is advisable to call this command in the context of the On URL Filtering, On Open External
Link and On Window Opening Denied form events in order to find out the URL that was filtered.

See Also
WA GET EXTERNAL LINKS FILTERS, WA GET URL FILTERS, WA SET EXTERNAL LINKS FILTERS, WA
SET URL FILTERS.

1930 4D Language Reference

WA GET LAST URL ERROR Web Area

version 11.2
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

WA GET LAST URL ERROR ({*; }object; url; description; errorCode)

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)
url String ← URL at origin of error
description String ← Description of error (Mac OS)
errorCode Longint ← Error code

Description
The WA GET LAST URL ERROR command can be used to recover several items of information
concerning the last error occurring in the Web area designated by the * and object parameters.

This information is returned in three variables:

• url: URL causing error.
• description (Mac OS only): a text describing the error (if available). If it is not possible to
associate a text with the error, an empty string is returned. Under Windows, this parameter is
always returned empty.
• errorCode: the error code.
- If the code is >=400, it is an error related to the HTTP protocol. For more information about
this type of error, refer to the following address:
http://www.w3.org/Protocols/rfc2616/rfc2616-sec10.html
- Otherwise, it is an error returned by the WebKit (Mac OS) or ActiveX (Windows).

It is advisable to call this command within the framework of the On URL Loading Error form
event in order to find out the cause of the error that just occurred.

See Also
Form event.

4D Language Reference 1931

WA Get page content Web Area

version 11.2
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

WA Get page content ({*; }object) → String

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)

Function result String ← HTML source code

Description
The WA Get page content command returns the HTML code of the current page or the page
being displayed in the Web area designated by the * and object parameters.

This command returns an empty string if the contents of the current page is not available.

See Also
WA SET PAGE CONTENT.

1932 4D Language Reference

WA Get page title Web Area

version 11.2
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

WA Get page title ({*; }object) → String

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)

Function result String ← Title of current page

Description
The WA Get page title command returns the title of the current page or the page being
displayed in the Web area designated by the * and object parameters. The title corresponds to
the HTML "Title" tag.

This command returns an empty string if there is no title available for the current URL.

See Also
WA Get page content.

4D Language Reference 1933

WA GET PREFERENCE Web Area

version 11.2
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

WA GET PREFERENCE ({*; }object; selector; value)

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)
selector Longint → Preference to get
value Variable ← Current value of the preference

Description
The WA GET PREFERENCE command can be used to get the current value of the preference in
the Web area designated by the * and object parameters.

Pass the preference whose value you want to get in the selector parameter. You can pass one of
the following constants, found in the "Web Area" theme:

Constant Type Value

wa enable Java applets Longint 1
wa enable JavaScript Longint 2
wa enable plugins Longint 3
wa enable contextual menu Longint 4

For more information about these preferences, please refer to the description of the WA SET
PREFERENCE command.

In the value parameter, pass a variable that will receive the current value of the preference. The
type of variable depends on the preference. In the current version of 4D v11 SQL, the value
variable is always a Boolean: it contains True if the preference is active and False otherwise.

See Also
WA SET PREFERENCE.

1934 4D Language Reference

WA GET URL FILTERS Web Area

version 11.2
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

WA GET URL FILTERS ({*; }object; filtersArr; allowDenyArr)

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)
filtersArr Array string ← Filters array
allowDenyArr Array Boolean ← Allow-deny array

Description
The WA GET URL FILTERS command returns, in the filtersArr and allowDenyArr arrays, the filters
that are active in the Web area designated by the * and object parameters. If no filter is active,
the arrays are returned empty.

The filters are installed by the WA SET URL FILTERS command. If the arrays are reinitialized
during the session, the WA GET URL FILTERS command can be used to find out the current
settings

See Also
WA GET EXTERNAL LINKS FILTERS, WA SET URL FILTERS.

4D Language Reference 1935

WA GET URL HISTORY Web Area

version 11.2
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

WA GET URL HISTORY ({*; }object; urlsArr{; direction{; titlesArr}})

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)
urlsArr Alpha array ← Array of URLs visited
direction Integer → 0 or omitted=List of previous URLs,
1=List of next URLs
titlesArr Alpha array ← Array of window titles

Description
The WA GET URL HISTORY command returns one or two arrays containing the URLs visited
during the session in the Web area designated by the * and object parameters. It can be used to
build a custom navigation interface.

The information provided concerns the session; in other words, the navigation carried out in
the same Web area as long as the form has not been closed.

The urlsArr array is filled with the list of URLs visited. Depending on the value of the direction
parameter (if it is passed), the array recovers the list of previous URLs (default operation), or
the list of next URLs. These lists correspond to the content of the standard Back and Forward
buttons of browsers.

The URLs are classed by chronological order.

Pass a value indicating the list to recover in direction. You can use one of the following
constants, found in the "Web Area" theme:

Constant Type Value

wa previous URLs Longint 0
wa next URLs Longint 1

1936 4D Language Reference

If you omit the direction parameter, the value 0 is used.

If it is passed, the titlesArr parameter contains the list of window names associated with the
URLs. This array is synchronized with the urlsArr array.

See Also
WA Create URL history menu.

4D Language Reference 1937

WA OPEN BACK URL Web Area

version 11.2
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

WA OPEN BACK URL ({*; }object)

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)

Description
The WA OPEN BACK URL command loads the previous URL in the sequence of URLs opened
into the Web area designated by the * and object parameters.

If there is no previous URL, the command does nothing. You can test whether a previous URL
is available using the WA Back URL available command.

See Also
WA OPEN FORWARD URL, WA OPEN URL.

1938 4D Language Reference

WA OPEN FORWARD URL Web Area

version 11.2
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

WA OPEN FORWARD URL ({*; }object)

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)

Description
The WA OPEN FORWARD URL command loads the next URL in the sequence of URLs opened
into the Web area designated by the * and object parameters.

If there is no next URL (in other words, if the user has never returned to a previous URL), the
command does nothing. You can test whether a next URL is available using the WA Forward
URL available command

See Also
WA OPEN BACK URL, WA OPEN URL.

4D Language Reference 1939

WA OPEN URL Web Area

version 11.2
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

WA OPEN URL ({*; }object; url)

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)
url String → URL to load in Web area

Description
The WA OPEN URL command loads the URL passed in the url parameter into the Web area
designated by the * and object parameters.

If an empty string is passed in url, the WA OPEN URL command does nothing and no error is
generated. To load a blank page into the Web area, pass the string "about:blank" in url.

Like the existing OPEN WEB URL command, WA OPEN URL accepts several types of syntaxes in
the url parameter to designate the files:
• posix syntax: "file://c:/My%20File"
• system syntax: "c:\MyFolder\MyFile" (Windows) or "MyDisk:MyFolder:MyFile" (Mac OS).

This command has the same effect as modifying the value of the "URL" variable associated
with the area. For example, if the variable of the area is named MyWArea_url:
MyWArea_url:="http://www.4d.com/"
is the same as:
WA OPEN URL(MyWArea;"http://www.4d.com/")

See Also
OPEN WEB URL, WA OPEN BACK URL, WA OPEN FORWARD URL.

1940 4D Language Reference

WA REFRESH CURRENT URL Web Area

version 11.2
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

WA REFRESH CURRENT URL ({*; }object)

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)

Description
The WA REFRESH CURRENT URL command reloads the current URL displayed in the Web area
designated by the * and object parameters.

See Also
WA STOP LOADING URL.

4D Language Reference 1941

WA SET EXTERNAL LINKS FILTERS Web Area

version 11.2
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

WA SET EXTERNAL LINKS FILTERS ({*; }object; filtersArr; allowDenyArr)

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)
filtersArr Array string → Filters array
allowDenyArr Array Boolean → Allow-deny array

Description
The WA SET EXTERNAL LINKS FILTERS command can be used to set up one or more external link
filters for the Web area designated by the * and object parameters. External link filters
determine whether a URL associated with the current page via a link must be opened in the
Web area or in the default Web browser of the machine.

When the user clicks on a link in the current page, 4D consults the list of external link filters
in order to check whether the URL requested must be opened in the browser of the machine.
If so, the page corresponding to the URL is displayed in the Web browser and the On Open
External Link form event is generated. Otherwise (default operation), the page corresponding to
the URL is displayed in the Web area. The evaluation of the URL is based on the contents of
the filtersArr and allowDenyArr arrays.

The filtersArr and allowDenyArr arrays must be synchronized.

• Each element of the filtersArr array must contain a URL to be filtered. You can use the * as a
wildcard to replace one or more characters.
• Each corresponding element in the allowDenyArr array must contain a Boolean indicating
whether the URL must be opened in the Web area (True) or in the Web browser (False).

If there is a contradiction at the configuration level (the same URL is both allowed and
denied), the last setting is the one taken into account.

To disable URL filtering, call the command and pass empty arrays or pass, respectively, the
values "*" and True in the last elements of the filtersArr and allowDenyArr arrays.

1942 4D Language Reference

Important: The filtering established by the WA SET URL FILTERS command is taken into account
before that of the WA SET EXTERNAL LINKS FILTERS command. This means that if a URL is
denied because of a WA SET URL FILTERS command filter, it cannot be opened in the browser
even if it is explicitly specified by the WA SET EXTERNAL LINKS FILTERS command (see example
2).

Examples
1. This example causes sites to be opened in external browsers:
ARRAY STRING(0;$filters;0)
ARRAY BOOLEAN($AllowDeny;0)

APPEND TO ARRAY($filters;"*www.google.*") `Select "google"

APPEND TO ARRAY($AllowDeny;False)
`False: this link will be opened in an external browser
APPEND TO ARRAY($filters;"*www.apple.*")
APPEND TO ARRAY($AllowDeny;False)
`False: this link will be opened in an external browser
WA SET EXTERNAL LINKS FILTERS(MyWArea;$filters;$AllowDeny)

2. This example combines the filtering of both sites and external links:
ARRAY STRING(0;$filters;0)
ARRAY BOOLEAN($AllowDeny;0)
APPEND TO ARRAY($filters;"*www.google.*") `Select "google"
APPEND TO ARRAY($AllowDeny;False) `Deny this link
WA SET URL FILTERS(MyWArea;$filters;$AllowDeny)

ARRAY STRING(0;$filters;0)
ARRAY BOOLEAN($AllowDeny;0)
APPEND TO ARRAY($filters;"*www.google.*") `Select "google"
APPEND TO ARRAY($AllowDeny;False)
`False: this link should be opened in an external browser but this setting
`has no effect because the link will be blocked by the URL filtering.
WA SET EXTERNAL LINKS FILTERS(MyWArea;$filters;$AllowDeny)

See Also
WA GET EXTERNAL LINKS FILTERS, WA SET URL FILTERS.

4D Language Reference 1943

WA SET PAGE CONTENT Web Area

version 11.2
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

WA SET PAGE CONTENT ({*; }object; content; baseURL)

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)
content String → HTML source code
baseURL String → URL for relative references (Mac OS)

Description
The WA SET PAGE CONTENT command replaces the page displayed in the Web area designated
by the * and object parameters by the HTML code passed in the content parameter.

The baseURL parameter can be used to specify, under Mac OS, a base URL that will be added in
front of any relative links found in the page.
Under Windows, this parameter has no effect and the base URL is not specified. It is therefore
not possible to use relative references on this platform.

Note: Under Windows, it is imperative for a page to have already been loaded into the Web
area before this command can be called. If necessary, you can pass the "about:blank" URL in
order to load a blank page

Example
Display of the "Hello world!" phrase and definition of a "file:///" base URL (Mac OS only):
WA SET PAGE CONTENT(MyWArea;"<html><body><h1>Hello World!</h1></body>
</html>";"file:///")

See Also
WA Get page content.

1944 4D Language Reference

WA SET PAGE TEXT LARGER Web Area

version 11.2
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

WA SET PAGE TEXT LARGER ({*; }object)

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)

Description
The WA SET PAGE TEXT LARGER command increases the size of the text displayed in the Web
area designated by the * and object parameters.

Under Mac OS, the scope of this command is the 4D session: the configuration carried out by
this command is not retained after the 4D application is closed.
Under Windows, the scope of this command is global: the configuration is retained after the
4D application is closed.

See Also
WA SET PAGE TEXT SMALLER.

4D Language Reference 1945

WA SET PAGE TEXT SMALLER Web Area

version 11.2
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

WA SET PAGE TEXT SMALLER ({*; }object)

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)

Description
The WA SET PAGE TEXT SMALLER command reduces the size of the text displayed in the Web
area designated by the * and object parameters.

Under Mac OS, the scope of this command is the 4D session: the configuration carried out by
this command is not retained after the 4D application is closed.
Under Windows, the scope of this command is global: the configuration is retained after the
4D application is closed.

See Also
WA SET PAGE TEXT LARGER.

1946 4D Language Reference

WA SET PREFERENCE Web Area

version 11.2
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

WA SET PREFERENCE ({*; }object; selector; value)

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)
selector Longint → Preference to be modified
value Boolean → Value of the preference (True = allowed,
False = not allowed)

Description
The WA SET PREFERENCE command can be used to set different preferences for the Web area
designated by the * and object parameters.

Pass the preference to be modified in the selector parameter and the value to be assigned to it
in the value parameter. In selector, you can pass one of the following constants, found in the
"Web Area" theme:

Constant Type Value

wa enable Java applets Longint 1
wa enable JavaScript Longint 2
wa enable plugins Longint 3
wa enable contextual menu Longint 4

For each preference, pass True in value to activate it and False to deactivate it.

Here is the meaning of the selectors:

• wa enable Java applets: Used to allow the execution of Java applets in the Web area.
• wa enable JavaScript: Used to allow the execution of JavaScript code in the Web area.
• wa enable plugins: Used to allow the installation of plug-ins in the Web area.
• wa enable contextual menu: Used to allow the display of a standard contextual menu in the
Web area

See Also
WA GET PREFERENCE.

4D Language Reference 1947

WA SET URL FILTERS Web Area

version 11.2
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

WA SET URL FILTERS ({*; }object; filtersArr; allowDenyArr)

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)
filtersArr Array string → Filters array
allowDenyArr Array Boolean → Allow-deny array

Description
The WA SET URL FILTERS command can be used to set up one or more filters for the Web area
designated by the * and object parameters.

Before loading any page requested by the user, 4D consults the list of filters in order to check
whether or not the target URL is allowed. The evaluation of the URL is based on the contents
of the filtersArr and allowDenyArr arrays.

If the requested URL is not allowed, it is not loaded and the On URL Filtering form event is
generated.

The filtersArr and allowDenyArr arrays must be synchronized.

• Each element of the filtersArr array must contain a URL to be filtered. You can use the * as a
wildcard to replace one or more characters.
• Each corresponding element in the allowDenyArr array must contain a Boolean indicating
whether the URL must be allowed (True) or denied (False).

If there is a contradiction at the configuration level (the same URL is both allowed and
denied), the last setting is the one taken into account.

To disable URL filtering, call the command and pass empty arrays or pass, respectively, the
values "*" and True in the last elements of the filtersArr and allowDenyArr arrays.

1948 4D Language Reference

Once the command has been executed, the filters become a property of the Web area. If the
filtersArr and allowDenyArr arrays are deleted or reinitialized, the filters remain active as long as
the command has not been executed again. To find out the active filters for an area, you must
use the WA GET URL FILTERS command.

Important: The filtering of URLs carried out by this command only applies to the "URL"
variable associated with the Web area (variable usually enterable and displayed in the form).
The filtering does not apply to the WA OPEN URL command, nor to the other navigation
commands.

Examples
1. You want to deny access for all the .org, .net and .fr Web sites:

ARRAY TEXT($filters;0)
ARRAY BOOLEAN($AllowDeny;0)

APPEND TO ARRAY($filters;"*.org")
APPEND TO ARRAY($AllowDeny;False)
APPEND TO ARRAY($filters;"*.net")
APPEND TO ARRAY($AllowDeny;False)
APPEND TO ARRAY($filters;"*.fr")
APPEND TO ARRAY($AllowDeny;False)
WA SET URL FILTERS(MyWArea;$filters;$AllowDeny)

2. You want to deny access for all Web sites except Russian ones (.ru):

ARRAY TEXT($filters;0)
ARRAY BOOLEAN($AllowDeny;0)

APPEND TO ARRAY($filters;"*") `Select all

APPEND TO ARRAY($AllowDeny;False) `Deny all
APPEND TO ARRAY($filters;"www.*.ru") `Select *.ru
APPEND TO ARRAY($AllowDeny;True) `Allow
WA SET URL FILTERS(MyWArea;$filters;$AllowDeny)

4D Language Reference 1949

3. You want to allow access only to 4D Web sites (.com, .fr, .es, etc.):

ARRAY TEXT($filters;0)
ARRAY BOOLEAN($AllowDeny;0)

APPEND TO ARRAY($filters;"*") `Select all

APPEND TO ARRAY($AllowDeny;False) `Deny all
APPEND TO ARRAY($filters;"www.4D.*") `Select 4d.fr, 4d.com...
APPEND TO ARRAY($AllowDeny;True) `Allow
WA SET URL FILTERS(MyWArea;$filters;$AllowDeny)

4. You want to allow local access to the documentation only (found in the folder C://doc):

ARRAY TEXT($filters;0)
ARRAY BOOLEAN($AllowDeny;0)

APPEND TO ARRAY($filters;"*") `Select all

APPEND TO ARRAY($AllowDeny;False) `Deny all
APPEND TO ARRAY($filters;"file://C:/doc/*")
`Select the path file:// allowed
APPEND TO ARRAY($AllowDeny;True) `Allow
WA SET URL FILTERS(MyWArea;$filters;$AllowDeny)

5. You want to allow access for all sites except one, for example the Elcaro site:

ARRAY TEXT($filters;0)
ARRAY BOOLEAN($AllowDeny;0)

APPEND TO ARRAY($filters;"*")
APPEND TO ARRAY($AllowDeny;True) `Allow all
APPEND TO ARRAY($filters;"*elcaro*") `Deny all that contain elcaro
APPEND TO ARRAY($AllowDeny;False)
WA SET URL FILTERS(MyWArea;$filters;$AllowDeny)

1950 4D Language Reference

6. You want to deny access to specific IP addresses:

ARRAY TEXT($filters;0)
ARRAY BOOLEAN($AllowDeny;0)

APPEND TO ARRAY($filters;"*") `Select all

APPEND TO ARRAY($AllowDeny;True) `Allow all
APPEND TO ARRAY($filters;86.83.*") `Select IP addresses beginning with 86.83.
APPEND TO ARRAY($AllowDeny;False) `Deny
`Select IP addresses beginning with 86.1 (86.10, 86.135 etc.)
APPEND TO ARRAY($filters;86.1*")
APPEND TO ARRAY($AllowDeny;False) `Deny
WA SET URL FILTERS(MyWArea;$filters;$AllowDeny)
`(Note that the IP address of a domain may vary).

See Also
WA GET URL FILTERS, WA SET EXTERNAL LINKS FILTERS.

4D Language Reference 1951

WA STOP LOADING URL Web Area

version 11.2
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

WA STOP LOADING URL ({*; }object)

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, object is an object name (string)
If omitted, object is a variable
object Form object → Object name (if * is specified) or
Variable (if * is omitted)

Description
The WA STOP LOADING URL command stops loading the resources of the current URL of the
Web area designated by the * and object parameters.

See Also
WA REFRESH CURRENT URL.

1952 4D Language Reference

62
______________________
Web Server

4D Language Reference 1953

1954 4D Language Reference
Web Server, Overview Web Server

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4D in local mode, 4D in remote mode and 4D Server include a Web Server engine that
enables you to publish 4D databases or any type of HTML page on the Web. The principal
characteristics of the 4D Web Server engine are:

• Easy publication
You can start or stop publication of the database on the Web at any time. To do so, you just
need to choose a menu command or execute a language command.

• Contextual and Non-contextual mode

The 4D Web server can operate in two distinct modes: contextual mode and non-contextual
mode. You can use the 4D Web server in either of these modes and you can pass from one
mode to the other on the fly in accordance with your needs.
- contextual mode (available only with the Web server of 4D in local mode and 4D Server)
consists of a unique and unequaled feature. In this mode, 4D manages Web browsers as
standard database clients. Your database is published directly on the Web. You do not need to
develop a database, a Web site and then a CGI interface between the two. Your database is
your Web site. Any modification made to the structure or data of the database is immediately
passed on to all the browsers connecting to it. 4D converts database menu bars, forms and
methods into HTML on the fly: it is not necessary to know HTML to be able to publish a 4D
database on the Web. 4D automatically maintains a data use context for each Web browser
(selections, variables, etc.). Note that in return, Web navigation in contextual mode includes
specific constraints. For more information, refer to the Using the Contextual Mode section.
- Used in non-contextual mode (standard mode), the 4D Web server is a completely standard
HTTP server: Web pages are sent without it being necessary to maintain context. You can
access the data of the 4D database and build "semi-dynamic" HTML pages on the fly that
include both static data and data coming from the database, before sending them on to the
Web browsers. You can also send static Web pages that do not require any processing by the
Web server.

• Dedicated database methods

On Web Authentication Database Method and On Web Connection Database Method are the
entry points of requests in the Web server; they can be used to evaluate and route any type of
request.

4D Language Reference 1955

• Use of special tags and URLs
The 4D Web server offers numerous mechanisms that enable interaction with user actions, in
particular:
- special tags can be included in Web pages in order to initiate processing by the Web server at
the time when they are sent to browsers.
- special URLs that enable 4D to be called in order to execute any action.
- these URLs can also be used as form actions to trigger processing when the user posts HTML
forms.

• Access Security
Several automatic configuration options allow you to grant specific access authorizations to
Web browsers or to use the password system integrated into 4D. You can define a "Generic
Web User" to simplify access management within the database.
The On Web Authentication Database Method allows you to evaluate any request before it is
processed by the Web server. Moreover, the ability to define a default HTML root folder allows
you to restrict access to files on disk.
Finally, you must designate individually the project methods that may be executed via the
Web.

• SSL Connections
Your 4D Web server can communicate with browsers in secured mode through the SSL
protocol (Secured Socket Layer). This protocol, compatible with most Web browsers,
authenticates the sender and receiver and guaranties the confidentiality and integrity of the
exchanged information.

• Extended support for Internet formats

The 4D Web server is HTTP/1.1 compatible and supports XML documents and WML (Wireless
Markup Language) technology.

• CGI Support
The 4D Web Server can call CGIs in a very simple way, as well as be called by other HTTP
servers through CGIs.

• Simultaneous operation of databases

1956 4D Language Reference

4D in local mode and the Web
If you publish a 4D database on the Web using 4D in local mode, you can simultaneously:
• Use the database locally with 4D
• Connect to the database using Web browsers.

4D Server and the Web

If you publish a 4D database on the Web using 4D Server, you can simultaneously connect to
and operate the 4D database, using:
• 4D remote workstations
• 4D Open-based applications
• Web browsers.

4D Language Reference 1957

 4D client and the Web
When a 4D database is published on the Web with 4D client, it is possible to connect to the
4D database and to simultaneously use it:
- via 4D remote machines
- via applications using 4D Open
- via Web browsers. In this case, if the database is also published with 4D Server, the Web
browsers can connect to the published database via a 4D client machine or via 4D Server.
Moreover, this allows different data access modes to be handled (public, administration, etc.).

The basic mechanisms of the 4D Web server are used in a similar manner by 4D in remote
mode, with the exception of the contextual mode. In fact, it is not possible to use the
contextual mode with the Web server of 4D in remote mode (for more information about this
mode, refer to the Using the Contextual Mode section).
Similarly, the operation of language commands is usually identical, whether the command be
executed on 4D in local mode, 4D Server or 4D in remote mode. The main point is that
commands are applied to the Web site of the machine on which they are executed. You must
manage this using the Execute on server / EXECUTE ON CLIENT commands.

1958 4D Language Reference

• Load balancing with 4D clients: since any 4D machine in remote mode can be used as a Web
server, you can set up a dynamic Web server system with a load balancer. This offers extensive
development possibilities, including, more particularly:
- the setting-up of a load-balancing system in order to optimize the performance of the 4D
Web server: using a mirror of the Web site that is installed on each 4D Web server, a load
balancer (hardware or software) will send requests to the client machines on the basis of their
current load.

- the setting-up of a fault tolerance Web server: the 4D Web site is mirrored on two or more
4D client machines. If one 4D Web server fails, another one takes over.
- the creation of different views of the same data, for instance depending on the origin of the
requests. Within a company network, a Web server on a protected 4D client machine can
serve Intranet requests and a Web server on another 4D client machine, located beyond the
firewall, will serve Internet requests.
- the distribution of tasks between Web servers on different 4D client machines: one 4D Web
server can be in charge of SOAP requests, another can handle standard requests, and so on.

See Also
Connection Security, SEND HTML FILE, SET HOME PAGE, SET HTML ROOT, SET WEB DISPLAY
LIMITS, SET WEB TIMEOUT, STOP WEB SERVER, Using CGIs, Using SSL Protocol, Using the
Contextual Mode, Web Server Settings.

4D Language Reference 1959

Web server configuration and connection management Web Server

version 11.2 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4D and 4D Server include a Web server that enable you to publish the data of your databases
on the Web, transparently and dynamically.
This section describes the steps necessary for publication of 4D databases and for connection
of browsers, as well as the process of connection management.

Conditions for publishing a 4D database on the Web

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

To be able to publish a 4D database on the Web using 4D or 4D Server, you must have the
elements described below:
• A "4D Web Application" license. For more information, please refer to your 4D installation
guide.
• Web connections are made over the network using the TCP/IP protocol. Consequently:
- You must have TCP/IP installed on your machine and correctly configured. Refer to your
computer or Operating System manuals for more information.
- If you want to use SSL for network connections, make sure that requested components are
correctly installed (see section Using SSL Protocol).
• After all the previous points have been checked and taken care of, you need to start the Web
server from within 4D. This last point is discussed further on in this section.

Publication authorization (4D in remote mode)

By default, any 4D client machine can publish the database to which it is connected on the
Web. However, you can control the possibility of Web publication for each remote 4D
machine by using the 4D password system.
In fact, 4D Web licenses are considered as plug-in licenses by 4D Server. Therefore, in the same
way as for plug-ins, you must retrict the right to use Web Server licenses to a specific group of
users.

To do this, display the Groups page in the Toolbox using 4D (you must have suitable access
authorization to modify these parameters).

1960 4D Language Reference

Select a group in the list on the left, then check the Access option next to the Web Server line
in the Plug-in distribution area:

Above: only users belonging to the "Web" group are authorized to publish their 4D machine as
a Web server.

Configuring the Web server under Mac OS X

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Under Mac OS X, using TCP/IP ports reserved for Web publishing requires specific access
privileges: only the “root” user of the machine can launch an application using these ports.

These ports are numbers 0 to 1023. Remember that, by default, a 4D database is published on
TCP port 80 in standard mode and on port 443 in SSL mode.

4D Language Reference 1961

Once you publish a 4D database on the default TCP port without being connected as the
“root” user, an alert dialog box will be displayed:

To use the Web server under Mac OS X, you have four possibilities:

• Modify the TCP port numbers used by the 4D Web server.

You must use port numbers greater than 1023, for example, port 8080 for standard mode and
8043 for SSL mode.
This operation occurs in the Preferences dialog box (see Web Server Settings section) or using
the SET DATABASE PARAMETER command. In this case, it will be necessary to indicate the port
number after each database connection URL (for example,
http://www.mydatabase.com/pages/mypage.html:8080) and
https://www.mydatabase.com/pages/payment.html:8043.

• Logging on as the “root” user

By default, the “root” user is not enabled on a machine running Mac OS X. You must first
enable it and then log in with this user name.
Enabling a “root” user takes place using the NetInfo Manager utility provided by Apple and
installed in the Applications:Utilities folder.

1962 4D Language Reference

Once the utility has been launched, choose the Security command in the Domain menu, then
the Enable root user option. You must have first identified the machine administrator using
the Authenticate... command, located in the same menu (enter the shortened name and the
administrator password).

For more information on this operation, refer to the Mac OS X documentation.

Once the “root” user has been created, you must close the session (Apple menu) and then log
in using the “root” user name. You can then launch the Web server on port number 80, or a
4D Web server with a secure connection.

• Port transfer
This third solution lets you publish a 4D Web database under Mac OS X without being a
“root” user and without it being necessary to specify the port number behind each connection
URL to the server. It is based on port transfer. The principle consists of transferring, at the
system level, the requests received on the standard TCP port number (80) to one specified in
the 4D database (which must be greater than 1023). Note that this tip will not work with
secured connections (the TCP port 443 is not modifiable).
To carry out this operation, you must connect as a “root” user, start the Terminal and use
Unix commands.

To set up the port transfer under Mac OS X (assuming that your IP address is 192.168.93.45):
1. Open a session as a root user (see the previous paragraph).
2. Start the Terminal program.
This program is found in the Applications:Utilities folder.
3. Enter “su” (“substitute user” special account) followed by the root user password.

4D Language Reference 1963

4. Enter the following command:
ipfw add 400 fwd 192.168.93.45,8080 tcp from any to 192.168.93.45 80
Of course, you must replace “192.168.93.45” with your own IP address.
The figure 400 is the reference number of this operation.
5. Quit the Terminal program.
6. Start your 4D application as a standard user.
7. In the Preferences of the database, set the Web publication TCP port to 8080.
From then on, Mac OSX is ready to transfer the requests received on port 80 to port 8080
instantaneously and in a manner which is invisible for the user.

To remove this mode of operation:

1. Start the Terminal program and enter:
ipfw delete 400
The requests received on port 80 will no longer be transferred to port 8080.

• Open the port via a specialized application

The principle of this solution consists in delegating the opening of the Web port to a
specialized application, named HelperTool, which has the appropriate access rights. This
mechanism functions with 4D (all modes), 4D Server and 4D Volume Desktop executable
applications.
The HelperTool application is included in the 4D software. It must be installed in a specific
system location. Installation takes place automatically during the first opening of a port <1024
on the machine. The user is informed that a tool is going to be installed and is prompted to
enter a name and an administrator password for the machine. This operation only takes place
once
The application is renamed "com.4D.HelperTool" and is installed in the folder
"/Library/PrivilegedHelperTools/." After the initial sequence, the 4D Web server can be started
and stopped transparently.

Note: This mechanism requires at least version 10.4.6 of Mac OS X. If you have a prior version
of the system, you must use another publication solution.

Starting the 4D Web Server

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The 4D Web Server can be started in three different ways:

• Using the Run menu of 4D or the HTTP Server page of 4D Server(Start HTTP server button).
These commands allow you to start and stop the Web Server at your convenience:

1964 4D Language Reference

4D:

4D Server:

4D Language Reference 1965

• Automatically publishing the database each time it is opened. To automatically publish a
database on the Web, display the Configuration page of the Web theme of the application
Preference of the application:

In the Web Server Publishing section, select the Publish Database at Startup check box, then
click OK. Once this is done, the database will be automatically published on the Web each
time you open it with 4D or 4D Server.

• Programmatically, by calling the command START WEB SERVER.

Tip: You do not need to quit 4D and reopen your database to start or stop publishing a
database on the Web. You can interrupt and restart the Web server as many times as you want,
using the Run menu, the Start HTTP server button or by calling the commands START WEB
SERVER and STOP WEB SERVER.

1966 4D Language Reference

Testing the Web server
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The Test Web Server command can be used to make sure the built-in Web server is
functioning correctly (4D only). This command is accessible in the Run menu when the Web
server is launched:

When you select this command, the home page of the Web site published by the 4D
application is displayed in a window of your default Web browser:

This command lets you verify that the Web server, home page display, etc. work correctly. The
page is called using the URL Localhost, which is the standard shortcut designating the IP
address of the machine on which the Web browser is executed. The command takes into
account the TCP publication port number specified in the application preferences.

4D Language Reference 1967

Connecting to a 4D database published on the Web
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

After you have started publishing a 4D database on the Web, you can connect to it using a
Web browser. To do so:
• If your Web site has a registered name (i.e., “ www.flowersforever.com”), indicate that name
in the Open, Address, or Location area of your browser. Then press Enter to connect.
• If your Web Site does not have a registered name, indicate the IP address of your machine
(i.e., 123.4.567.89) in the Open, Address, or Location area of your browser. Then press Enter.

At this time, your browser should display the home page of your Web site. If you have
published a database in keeping with standard configurations, you should obtain the default
home page of the 4D Web server. This page lets you test the connection and the server
operation.

You may also encounter one of the following situations:

1. The connection fails and you get a message such as “...the server may not be accepting
connections or may be busy...”.
In this case, check the following:
• Verify that the name or the IP address you entered is correct.
• Verify that 4D or 4D Server is up and running and has started its Web server.
• Check if the database is configured for being served on a TCP Port other than the default
Web TCP Port (see situation 4).
• Check whether TCP/IP is correctly configured on both the server and browser machines.
Both machines must be on the same net and subnet, or your routers must be correctly
configured.
• Check your hardware connections.
• If you are not locally testing your own site, but rather attempting to connect to a Web
database served on Internet or Intranet by someone else, ultimately, the message might be
true: the server may be off or busy. So, retry later until you can log on, or contact the Web
provider.

2. You connect, but you get an HTTP 404 "File not found" error. This means that the site home
page has not be served. In this case, check that the home page actually exists at the location
defined in the database Preferences (see Web Server Settings section) or using the SET HOME
PAGE command.

1968 4D Language Reference

3. You connect, but you get a Web page with the message “Menu Bar/This database is not
ready to be published on the Web, you should first create a menu bar”. This means that you
correctly connected to the database published in contextual mode but no home page nor
menu bar has been defined (in contextual mode, 4D publishes menu bar #1 as the default
home page if no HTML page is specified). For more information, see the Your First Time with
the Web Server section.

4. You connect, but you do NOT obtain the Web page you were expecting! This can occur
when you have several Web servers running simultaneously on the same machine. Examples:
• You are running only one 4D Web database on a Windows system that is already running its
own Web server.
• You are running several 4D Web databases on the same machine.
In this kind of situation, you need to change the TCP port number on which your 4D Web
database is published. To do so, refer to Web Server Settings section.

Note: If your database is protected by a password system, you may have to enter a valid user
name and password (for more information, refer to section Connection Security).

Web Process management

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Various 4D processes support Web publication of databases and connection to browsers. This
paragraph describes these processes as well as their characteristics.

Web Server Process

The Web Server process runs and executes when the database is being published as a Web site.
In the Process page of the Runtime Explorer window shown here, the Web Server process is
the fifth process that is running and executing:

4D Language Reference 1969

This is a 4D kernel process; you cannot abort this process using the Abort button. Also, you
cannot attempt interprocess communication using commands such as CALL PROCESS. Note
that the Web Server process does not have any user interface components (windows, menus,
and so on).

You can start the Web Server process in the following ways:
• Click the Start HTTP server button on the "HTTP Server" page of 4D Server or choose Start
Web Server in the Run menu of 4D.
• Call the 4D command START WEB SERVER.
• Open a database whose Publish Database at Startup Preference is checked.

You can stop running the Web Server process in the following ways:
• Click the Start HTTP server button on the "HTTP Server" page of 4D Server or choose Stop
Web Server from the Run menu of 4D.
• Call the 4D command STOP WEB SERVER.
• Quit the database being currently published.

The purpose of the Web Server process is only to handle Web connection attempts. Starting
the Web Server process does not mean that you open an actual Web connection, it just means
that you allow Web users to initiate Web connections. Stopping the Web Server process does
not mean that you close currently running Web connection processes (if any), it just means
that you no longer allow Web users to initiate new Web connections.

If there are open Web connection processes when you stop the Web Server process, each of
these processes continues executing normally.
Consequently, a delay time can be necessary to complete the termination of the Web Server
process.

Web Connection Processes

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Each time a Web browser attempts to connect to the database, the request is handled by the
Web Server process, which performs the following steps:

• First, it creates one or several temporary local 4D processes called Web Processes to evaluate
and manage the connection with the Web browser.
Note: These temporary processes manage every HTTP request. They execute quickly and then
aborted or delayed. For the Web server to be reactive in non-contextual mode, 4D freezes this
“pool” of Web processes for 5 seconds and reuses them to execute any possible future HTTP
queries. You can customize this behavior using the command SET DATABASE PARAMETER.
• If the request does not require that a context be created, the Web process handles the
processing of the request and sends a response (if necessary) to the browser. The temporary
process is then aborted or delayed (see above).

1970 4D Language Reference

• If the request requires that a context is created, it checks to verify that there are available
resources for the new connection. If it is not the case, it sends the following message to the
Web browser: “This database has not been setup for the Web yet.”
If the Web connection is initiated successfully, then a Web Connection process is started. This
is the process that will handle the entire Web session for that connection. The Process list
shown here displays the Web connection process “Web Connection# 152142900,” started
after a Web browser connection has been initiated:

Note that the sixth process, which was started then aborted, handled the initialization of the
Web connection.

Note: For more information about the context management, see the paragraph Using the
Contextual Mode section.
• If during the session, the connection switches from contextual mode to non-contextual
mode, the Web connection process (with an ID) is aborted.
Conversely, if during the session, the connection switches from non-contextual mode to
contextual mode, a numbered Web connection process is created.

See Also
SEND HTML FILE, SET HTML ROOT, SET WEB DISPLAY LIMITS, SET WEB TIMEOUT, STOP WEB
SERVER, Using SSL Protocol.

4D Language Reference 1971

Your First Time with the Web Server Web Server

version 6.5 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Example in contextual mode

This section gives a simple example of instant database publication in contextual mode. This
automatic mode can be used more particularly for Intranet servers. It illustrates the basic
principles of 4D Web server operation.

The structure of this database (given at the end of this section) is simple: the database is made
of one table, an input form, an output form and a menu bar. The Home page is customized.
The database is published as a Web server.

1. Connect to the Web server database

Connect to the Web Server by opening the database on a Web browser. You get the following
Home Web page:

2. Display and browse the records

1972 4D Language Reference

Click on the linked text List Existing Records. This presents the Web equivalent of a 4D Display
Selection screen:

At this point, you can browse the records at your convenience. After you click the Done
button, you go back to the Web site Home page.

3. Add records
In the Web site Home page, click on the Linked text Add Some Records to display the Web
equivalent of a 4D Add Record screen:

4D Language Reference 1973

You can add as many as records as you wish. When you are done, click the Cancel button (the
one with the red cross) to return to the Web site Home page.

4. List or add records in the Main menu

In the Home page, click the Go to Main Menu Bar button. This exits the Home page and
presents the Web equivalent of the 4D Custom menu bar:

At this point, clicking on each menu item allows you to List or Add records: the same 4D
methods that were used from the Home page are associated to the menu items.

5. Terminate the connection

When you are done, just quit your browser. 4D will terminate the Web connection process
once the timeout delay has elapsed.

Initiating a Web connection in contextual mode

Each time a Web browser connects to a 4D database published as a Web Server in contextual
mode, 4D performs the following actions:
• It executes the On Web Authentication database method, if it exists.
• If this method returns True or does not exist, it executes the On Web Connection database
method, if it exists.
• If there is no such database method or if the method has completed, 4D then displays the
Default Home page defined in the Preferences, if any.
• If no Default home page is defined, 4D then displays the current menu bar (by default menu
bar #1), if it exists.
• If there is neither a Default Home page nor a menu bar, 4D displays a default Web page that
states: "This database has not been setup for the Web yet".

1974 4D Language Reference

The following diagram summarizes these actions:

4D Language Reference 1975

The On Web connection database method can call any of the project methods or forms defined
in the database as well as HTML pages. The database method can actually handle the whole
session.

A Web connection to 4D or 4D Server is not the same as a Client/Server connection. The HTTP
protocol, which supports HTML and the Web, is not a “session-based” protocol; it is rather a
“request-based” protocol. In Client/Server, you connect, work in a session, and then
disconnect from the server. With HTTP, each time you perform an action that requires the
attention of or an action from the Web Server, a request is sent to the server. In short, an
HTTP request can be understood as the sequence “Connect+Request+Wait for
reply+Disconnect.”

In contextual mode, in order to run a Client/Server session via HTTP, by default 4D maintains,
through a transparent encoding of the URLs, a context that uniquely identifies your Web
connection and at the same time associates the connection to the 4D process handling the
connection.

However, in this mode 4D has no way to provide an equivalent of the Client/Server

disconnect action that terminates a session. That is the reason why the termination of a
Client/Server session is handled through a timeout scheme. The 4D process handling the Web
connection terminates after no activity has been detected for a delay time equal to the
database Web timeout settings.

Database and Web Server in one

You can completely manage a 4D Web Server session using 4D Menus Bars, Forms and
Methods in contextual mode. In the preceding example, listing and adding records was
performed by simple 4D methods and forms. If we had not included an HTML home page, a
Web browser would have obtained, upon connection, the menu bar #1 shown.

If we eliminate the HTML home page, building a Web Server supporting database
Client/Server transactions consists of building a 4D database on Windows or Macintosh, for
one or multiple users. The following steps explain the process of creating the example
database in this way.

1976 4D Language Reference

• Here is the Structure of the example database:

• Input and Output forms are added to enable you to work with records.

• Menu bar #1 is added to enable you to work with Custom menus and to support Web
connections.

4D Language Reference 1977

• The two following project methods are written.

` M_ADD_RECORDS project method

C_TEXT($1) ` This parameter MUST be explicitly declared
Repeat
ADD RECORD ([Clients])
Until (OK=0)

` M_LIST_RECORDS project method

C_TEXT($1) ` This parameter MUST be explicitly declared
ALL RECORDS ([Clients])
MODIFY SELECTION([Clients])

The "Start a New Process" attribute is assigned to each method.

• The Web server starts up in contextual mode and a default home page is defined in the
database Preferences:

1978 4D Language Reference

• The home page contains two links,“Add Some Records” and “List Existing Records,” that
trigger the execution of the 4D project methods M_ADD_RECORDS and M_LIST_RECORDS
through their URLs. The convention is quite simple: any HTML object can link to a project
method of your database with the URL "/4DMETHOD/Name_of_your_Method". The Available
through 4DACTION, 4D METHOD and 4D SCRIPT attribute must be associated with each
method called using 4DMETHOD:

Once these links have been defined, when the Web browser sends back the URL, 4D executes
the project method specified after the /4DMETHOD/ keyword. Then, after the project method
has been completed, you go back to the HTML page that triggered its execution. Note that the
project method can itself display 4D forms, other HTML pages, and so on.
Your 4D-based Web Site can be a completely 4D-based system or a combination of 4D forms
and HTML pages. The interesting point in using HTML pages from within your 4D database is
that you benefit from both the 4D and HTML development environments. Remember, you do
not have to use HTML pages if you do not want to

The HTML home page in this example includes a button used to submit a record. There are
three types of HTML buttons: normal, submit, and reset.
• Normal - Normal buttons can be attributed an URL that refers to a 4D method using the
/4DMETHOD/ keyword. Normal buttons are used for navigation purposes.
• Submit - Submit buttons submit the form with the values entered by the user (if any) to the
Web server. They are useful for handling data entry that you prefer to perform via an HTML
page rather than a plain 4D form
• Reset - Reset buttons are not very useful within a 4D development: they clear the form of the
values entered by the user (if any) and does not send any request to the server.

4D Language Reference 1979

While integrating HTML pages into 4D, you will typically use normal or submit type buttons.
The code of the home page button is the following: INPUT TYPE="SUBMIT"
NAME="/4DMETHOD/GO_MAIN_MENUBAR"

To submit the HTML form on the 4D side, you need to specify the POST action 4D method
that will be executed by 4D after the form is submitted.
To do this, it must contain the line FORM ACTION="/4DMETHOD/GO_MAIN_MENU_BAR"
METHOD="POST"

• The GO_MAIN_MENU_BAR project method is the following:

SET HOME PAGE("")

In this example, this method has only one purpose: getting out of the current default home
page displayed on the Web browser and then sending the current menu bar. 4D switches to
the menu bar #1 of the database.

That is it!

In less than five minutes, you have created a 4D database that is both a locally operable
database and a Web Server that you can publish on your Intranet network or on the Internet.

See Also
SEND HTML FILE, SET WEB DISPLAY LIMITS, SET WEB TIMEOUT, START WEB SERVER, STOP WEB
SERVER.

1980 4D Language Reference

Connection Security Web Server

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The security of your 4D Web Server is based on the following elements:

• The combination of the Web password management system (BASIC mode or DIGEST mode)
and the On Web Authentication Database Method,
• The definition of a Generic Web User,
• The definition of a HTML Root folder by default,
• The definition of the “Available through 4DACTION, 4DMETHOD and 4DSCRIPT” property
for each project method of the database.

Note: The security of the connection itself can be managed through the SSL protocol. For
more information, refer to section Using SSL Protocol.

Password Management System for Web Access

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

BASIC Mode and DIGEST Mode

In the database Preferences, you can set the access control system that you want to apply to
your Web server. Two authentication modes are provided: BASIC mode and DIGEST mode
(starting with v11). The authentication mode concerns the way the information concerning
the user name and password are collected and processed.
• In BASIC mode, the name and password entered by the user are sent unencrypted in the
HTTP requests. This does not ensure total system security since this information could be
intercepted and used by a third party.
• The DIGEST mode provides a greater level of security since the authentication information is
processed by a one-way process called hashing which makes their contents impossible to
decipher.

For the user, the use of either authentication mode is transparent.

Notes:
- For compatibility reasons, the BASIC authentication mode is used by default in 4D databases
that are converted to version 11 (if the “Use Passwords” option was checked in the previous
version). You must explicitly activate the Digest mode.
- Digest authentication is an HTTP1.1 function and is not supported by all browsers. For
example, only versions 5.0 and later of Microsoft Internet Explorer accept this mode. If a
browser that does not support this functionality sends a request to a Web server when Digest
authentication is activated, the server will reject the request and return an error message to the
browser.

4D Language Reference 1981

You can now define, in the Preferences dialog box, the access control system you want to
apply to your Web server. To do this, in the Preferences dialog box, choose the Advanced page
of the Web theme:

In the "Passwords" area, three options are available to you:

• No passwords: No authentication is carried out for connections to the Web server. In this
case:
- If the On Web Authentication Database Method exists, it is executed and, in addition to $1
and $2, only the IP addresses of the browser and the server ($3 and $4) are provided, the user
name and password ($5 and $6) are empty. In this case, you can filter connections according
to the IP address of the browser and/or the requested IP address of the server.
- If the On Web Authentication Database Method does not exist, connections are automatically
accepted.

1982 4D Language Reference

• Passwords with BASIC protocol: Standard authentication in BASIC mode. When a user
connects to the server, a dialog box appears on their browser in order for them to enter their
user name and password. These two values are then sent to the On Web Authentication
Database Method along with the other connection parameters (IP address and port, URL...) so
that you can process them.
Note: In this case, if the On Web Authentication Database Method doesn’t exist, the connection
is refused.

This mode provides access to the Include 4D passwords option that allows you to use, instead
of or in addition to your own password system, 4D’s database password system (as defined in
4D).
• Passwords with DIGEST protocol: Authentication in DIGEST mode. As in BASIC mode, users
must enter their name and password when they connect. These two values are then sent
encrypted to the On Web Authentication Database Method with the other connection
parameters. You must authenticate a user using the Validate Digest Web Password command.

Notes:
- You must restart the Web server in order for the changes made to these parameters to be
taken into account
- With the 4D Client Web server, keep in mind that all the sites published by the 4D Client
machines will share the same table of users. Validation of users/passwords is carried out by the
4D Server application.

BASIC Mode: Combination of passwords and the On Web Authentication Database Method
If you use the BASIC mode, the system that filters connections to the 4D Web server depends
on the combination of two parameters:
• The Web password options in the Preferences dialog box,
• The existence of the On Web Authentication Database Method.

Here are the different resulting systems:

The “Passwords with BASIC protocol” option is selected and the “Include 4D Passwords” option is not
selected.
• If the On Web Authentication Database Method exists, it is executed and all its parameters are
given. You can therefore filter more precisely the connections according to the user name,
password, and/or the browser’s or Web server’s IP address.
• If the On Web Authentication Database Method doesn’t exist, the connection is automatically
refused and a message indicating that the Authentication method doesn’t exist is sent to the
browser.
Note: If the user name sent by the browser is an empty string and if the On Web Authentication
Database Method doesn’t exist, a password dialog box is sent to the browser.

4D Language Reference 1983

The “Passwords with BASIC protocol” and “Include 4D Passwords” options are selected.
• If the user name sent by the browser exists in the table of 4D users and the password is
correct, the connection is accepted. If the password is incorrect, the connection is refused.
• If the user name sent by the browser doesn’t exist in 4D, two results are then possible:
- If the On Web Authentication Database Method exists, the parameters $1, $2, $3, $4, $5, and
$6 are returned. You can therefore filter the connections according to the user name,
password, and/or the browser’s or Web server’s IP address.
- If the On Web Authentication Database Method doesn’t exist, the connection is refused.

DIGEST Mode
Unlike BASIC mode, the DIGEST mode is not compatible with standard 4D passwords: it is not
possible to use 4D passwords as Web IDs. The “Include 4D passwords” option is dimmed when
this mode is selected. The IDs for Web users must be managed in a customized manner (for
example, via a table).
When the DIGEST mode is activated, the $6 parameter (password) is always returned empty in
the On Web Authentication Database Method. In fact, when using this mode, this information
does not pass by the network as clear text (unencrypted). It is therefore imperative in this case
to evaluate connection requests using the Validate Digest Web Password command.

1984 4D Language Reference

The operation of the 4D Web server's access system is summarized in the following diagram:

4D Language Reference 1985

About robots (security note)
Certain robots (query engines, spiders...) scroll through Web servers and static pages. If you
want robots to be able to access your entire site, you can define which URLs they are not
allowed to access.
To do so, put the ROBOTS.TXT file at the server’s root. This file must be structured in the
following manner:
User-Agent: <name>
Disallow: <URL> or <beginning of the URL>

For example:
User-Agent: *
Disallow: /4D
Disallow: /%23%23
Disallow: /GIFS/
“User-Agent: *” means that all robots are affected.
“Disallow: /4D” means that robots are not allowed to access URLs beginning with /4D.
“Disallow: /%23%23” means that robots are not allowed to access URLs beginning with
/%23%23.
“Disallow: /GIFS/’ means that robots are not allowed to access the /GIFS/ folder or its
subfolders.

Another example:
User-Agent: *
Disallow: /
In this case, robots are not allowed to access the entire site.

Generic Web User

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

You can designate a user, previously defined in the 4D password table, as a “Generic Web
User.” In this case, each browser that connects to the database can use the access
authorizations and restrictions associated with this generic user. You can therefore easily
control the browser’s access to the different parts of the database.

Note: Do not confuse this option, which allows you to restrict the browser’s access to different
parts of the database (tables, menus, etc.), with the Web server’s connection control system,
managed by the password system and the On Web Authentication Database Method.

To define a Generic Web User:

1. In the Design mode, create at least one user with the Users editor of the Tool Box.
You can associate a password with the user if you wish.
2. In the different 4D editors, authorize or restrict access to this user.

1986 4D Language Reference

3. In the Preferences dialog, choose the Advanced page of the Web theme.
The “Web Passwords” area contains the Generic Web User drop-down list. By default, the
Generic Web User is the Designer and the browsers have full access to the entire database.
4. Choose a user in the drop-down list and validate the dialog box.

All the Web browsers that are authorized to connect to the database will benefit from the
access authorizations and restrictions associated with this Generic Web User (except when the
BASIC mode and the “Include 4D Passwords” option are checked and the user that connects
does not exist in the 4D password table, see below).

Interaction with the protocole BASIC

The "Passwords with BASIC protocol" option does not influence how the Generic Web User
operates. Whatever the state of this option, the access authorizations and restrictions
associated with the “Generic Web User” will be applied to all the Web browsers that are
authorized to connect to the database.

However, when the "Include 4D passwords" option is selected, two possible results can occur:
• The user’s name and password don’t exist in 4D’s password table. In this case, if the
connection has been accepted by the On Web Authentication Database Method, the Generic
Web User’s access rights will be applied to the browser.
• If the user’s name and password exist in 4D’s password table, the “Generic Web User”
parameter is ignored. The user connects with his own access rights.

Defining a HTML Root Folder by Default

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

This option in the Preferences allows you to define the folder in which 4D will search for the
static and semi-dynamic HTML pages, pictures, etc., to send to the browsers.

Moreover, the HTML root folder defines, on the Web server hard drive, the hierarchical level
above which the files will not be accessible. This access restriction applies to URLs sent to Web
browsers as well as to 4D’s Web server commands, such as SEND HTML FILE. If a URL is sent to
the database by a browser or if a 4D command tries to access a file located above the HTML
root folder, an error is returned indicating that the file has not been found.

4D Language Reference 1987

By default, 4D defines a HTML Root folder named WebFolder. If it does not already exist, the
HTML root folder is physically created on disk at the moment the Web server is launched for
the first time.
If you keep the default location, the root folder is created:
• with 4D in local mode and 4D Server, at the same level as that of the database structure file.
• with 4D in remote mode, in the local folder of the 4D database (see the Get 4D folder
command).

You can modify the default HTML root folder name and location in the Preferences dialog box
(Web theme, Configuration page):

In the “Default HTML Root” entry area, enter the new access path of the folder that you wish
to define.
The access path entered in this dialog box is relative: it is established from the folder
containing the structure of the database (4D in local mode or 4D Server) or the folder
containing the 4D application or software package (4D in remote mode).
For multi-platform compatibility of your databases, the 4D Web server uses particular writing
conventions to describe access paths. The syntax rules are as follows:
• Folders are separated by a slash (“/”)
• The access path must not end with a slash (“/”)
• To “go up” one level in the folder hierarchy, enter “..” (two periods) before the folder name
• The access path must not start with a slash (“/”) (except if you want the HTML root folder to
be the database or 4D remote folder, see below).
For example, if you want the HTML root folder to be the “Web” subfolder in the
“4DDatabase” folder, enter 4DDatabase/Web.
If you want the HTML root folder to be the database or 4D remote folder, but for access to the
folders above to be forbidden, enter “/” in the area. For a completely free access to the
volumes, leave the “Default HTML Root” area empty.

WARNING: If you do not define a default HTML Root folder in the Preferences dialog box, the
folder that contains the structure file of the database or the 4D application will be used. Be
careful because in this case there are no access restrictions (users can access all the volumes).

1988 4D Language Reference

Notes:
• When the HTML root folder is modified in the Preferences dialog box, the cache is cleared so
as to not store files whose access is restricted.

• You can also dynamically define the HTML root folder by using the SET HTML ROOT
command. In this case, the modification applies to all the current Web process for the
worksession. The cache of the HTML pages is therefore cleared.

Available through 4DACTION, 4DMETHOD and 4DSCRIPT

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The special 4DACTION (non-contextual mode) and 4DMETHOD (contextual mode) URLs, as
well as the 4DSCRIPT, 4DVAR and 4DHTMLVAR tags, allow you to trigger the execution of any
project method of a4D database published on the Web. For example, the request
http://www.server.com/4DACTION/Erase_All causes the execution of the Erase_All project
method, if it exists.

This mechanism therefore presents a security risk for the database, in particular if an Internet
user intentionally (or unintentionally) triggers a method not intended for execution via the
Web. You can avoid this risk in three ways:
• Restrict access to project methods using the 4D password system. Drawbacks: This system
requires the use of 4D passwords and forbids any type of method execution (including using
HTML tags).
• Filter the methods called via the URLS using the On Web Authentication Database Method.
Drawbacks: If the database includes a great number of methods, this system may by difficult to
manage.

4D Language Reference 1989

• Use the Available through 4DACTION, 4DMETHOD and 4DSCRIPT option found in the
Method properties dialog box:

This option is used to individually designate each project method that can be called using the
special URLs, 4DACTION and 4DMETHOD, or the 4DSCRIPT, 4DVAR and 4DHTMLVAR tags.
When it is not checked, the project method concerned cannot be executed using an HTTP
request containing a special URL or tag. Conversely, it can be executed using other types of
calls (formulas, other methods, etc.).

This option is unchecked by default for databases created. Methods that can be executed using
the 4DACTION or 4DMETHOD Web URLs or the 4DSCRIPT, 4DVAR and 4DHTMLVAR tags must
be specifically indicated.

In the Explorer, Project methods “available through 4DACTION, 4DMETHOD and 4DSCRIPT”
are given a specific icon:

See Also
On Web Authentication Database Method, On Web Connection Database Method, Using SSL
Protocol.

1990 4D Language Reference

On Web Authentication Database Method Web Server

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The On Web Authentication Database Method is in charge of managing Web server engine
access. It is called by 4D or 4D Server when a Web browser request requires the execution of a
4D method on the server (method called using a 4DACTION or 4DCGI URL, a 4DSCRIPT tag,
etc.).

This method receives six Text parameters: $1, $2, $3, $4, $5, and $6, and returns one Boolean
parameter, $0. The description of these parameters is as follows:

Parameters Type Description

$1 Text URL
$2 Text HTTP header + HTTP body (up to 32 kb limit)
$3 Text IP address of the Web client (browser)
$4 Text IP address of the server
$5 Text User name
$6 Text Password

$0 Boolean True = request accepted, False = request rejected

You must declare these parameters as follows:

` On Web Authentication Database Method

C_TEXT($1;$2;$3;$4;$5;$6)
C_BOOLEAN($0)

` Code for the method

Note: All the On Web Authentication database method’s parameters will not eventually be
filled in. The information received by the database method depends on the options that you
have previously selected in the Preferences dialog box (please refer to the section Connection
Security).

• URL
The first parameter ($1) is the URL entered by the user in the location area of his or her Web
browser, from which the host address has been removed.

4D Language Reference 1991

Let’s take the example of an Intranet connection. Suppose that the IP address of your 4D Web
Server machine is 123.4.567.89. The following table shows the values of $1 depending on the
URL entered in the Web browser:

URL entered in Web browser Location area Value of parameter $1

123.4.567.89 /
http://123.4.567.89 /
123.4.567.89/Customers /Customers
http://123.4.567.89/Customers /Customers
http://123.4.567.89/Customers/Add /Customers/Add
123.4.567.89/Do_This/If_OK/Do_That /Do_This/If_OK/Do_That

• Header and Body of the HTTP request

The second parameter ($2) is the header and the body of the HTTP request sent by the Web
browser. Note that this information is passed to your On Web Authentication database method
as it is. Its contents will vary depending on the nature of the Web browser which is attempting
the connection.
If your application deals with this information, it is up to you to parse the header and the
body.

Note: For more information about this parameter, please refer to the description of the On
Web Connection Database Method.

• Web client IP address

The $3 parameter receives the IP address of the browser’s machine. This information can allow
you to distinguish between Intranet and Internet connections.

• Server IP address
The $4 parameter receives the IP address used to call the Web server. 4D since version 6.5
allows for multi-homing, which allows you to exploit machines with more than one IP
address. For more information, please refer to the section Web Server Settings.

• User Name and Password

The $5 and $6 parameters receive the user name and password entered by the user in the
standard identification dialog box displayed by the browser. This dialog box appears for each
connection, if a password management option has been selected in the Preferences dialog box
(see section Connection Security).

Note: If the user name sent by the browser exists in 4D, the $6 parameter (the user’s password)
is not returned for security reasons.

1992 4D Language Reference

• $0 parameter

The On Web Authentication Database Method returns a boolean in $0:

• If $0 is True, the connection is accepted.
• If $0 is False, the connection is refused.

The On Web Connection Database Method is only executed if the connection has been
accepted by On Web Authentication.

WARNING: If no value is set to $0 or if $0 is not defined in the On Web Authentication

Database Method, the connection is considered as accepted and the On Web Connection
Database Method is executed.

Notes
• Do not call any interface elements in the On Web Authentication Database Method (ALERT,
DIALOG, etc.), otherwise it will be interrupted and the connection will be refused. The same is
true if an error occurs while the database method is being executed.
• It is possible to forbid execution by 4DACTION or 4DMETHOD for each project method using
the “Available through 4DACTION, 4DMETHOD and 4DSCRIPT” option in the Method
properties dialog. For more information about this point, refer to the Connection Security
section.

On Web Authentication Database Method calls

The On Web Authentication Database Method is automatically called, regardless of the mode,
when a request or processing requires the execution of a 4D method. It is also called when the
Web server receives an invalid static URL (for example, if the static page requested does not
exist).

The On Web Authentication Database Method is therefore called in the following cases:
• when 4D receives a URL beginning with 4DACTION/
• when 4D receives a URL beginning with 4DMETHOD/
• when 4D receives a URL beginning with 4DCGI/
• when 4D receives a URL requesting a static page that does not exist
• when 4D processes a 4DSCRIPT tag in a semi-dynamic page
• when 4D processes a 4DLOOP tag based on a method in a semi-dynamic page.

Note that the On Web Authentication Database Method is NOT called when the server receives a
URL requesting a valid static page.

4D Language Reference 1993

Examples
1. Example of the On Web Authentication Database Method in BASIC mode:

`On Web Authentication Database Method

C_TEXT($5;$6;$3;$4)
C_TEXT($user;$password;$BrowserIP;$ServerIP)
C_BOOLEAN($4Duser)
ARRAY TEXT($users;0)
ARRAY LONGINT($nums;0)
C_LONGINT($upos)
C_BOOLEAN($0)

$0:=False

$user:=$5
$password:=$6
$BrowserIP:=$3
$ServerIP:=$4

`For security reasons, refuse names that contain @

If (WithWildcard($user) | WithWildcard($password))
$0:=False
`The WithWildcard method is described below
Else
`Check to see if it’s a 4D user
GET USER LIST($users;$nums)
$upos:=Find in array($users;$user)
If ($upos > 0)
$4Duser:=Not(Is user deleted($nums{$upos}))
Else
$4Duser:=False
End if

1994 4D Language Reference

 If (Not($4Duser))
`It is not a user defined 4D, look in the table of Web users
QUERY([WebUsers];[WebUsers]User=$user;*)
QUERY([WebUsers]; & [WebUsers]Password=$password)
$0:=(Records in selection([WebUsers]) = 1)
Else
$0:=True
End if
End if
`Is this an intranet connection?
If (Substring($BrowserIP;1;7) # "192.100.")
$0:=False
End if

2. Example of the On Web Authentication Database Method in DIGEST mode:

`On Web Authentication Database Method

C_TEXT($1;$2;$5;$6;$3;$4)
C_TEXT($user)
C_BOOLEAN($0)
$0:=False
$user:=$5
`For security reasons, refuse names that contain @
If(WithWildcard($user))
$0:=False
`The WithWildcard method is described below
Else
QUERY([WebUsers];[WebUsers]User=$user)
If(OK=1)
$0:=Validate Digest Web Password($user;[WebUsers]password)
Else
$0:=False`User does not exist
End if
End if

4D Language Reference 1995

The WithWildcard method is as follows:

`WithWildcard Method
`WithWildcard ( String ) -> Boolean
`WithWildcard ( Name ) -> Contains a Wilcard character

C_INTEGER($i)
C_BOOLEAN($0)
C_TEXT($1)

$0:=False
For($i;1;Length($1))
If (Character code(Substring($1;$i;1)) = Character code("@"))
$0:=True
End if
End for

See Also
Connection Security, Database Methods, On Web Connection Database Method, URLs and Form
Actions.

1996 4D Language Reference

On Web Connection Database Method Web Server

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The On Web Connection database method can be called in three different cases:
• the Web server receives a request beginning with the 4DCGI URL.
• the Web server receives an invalid request.
• it is also called by 4D (local mode) and 4D Server each time a Web browser initiates a
connection to the database in contextual mode, or each time the Web server receives a request
requiring the creation of a context (this case is not handled by 4D 4D in remote mode, which
does not support the contextual mode).

For more information, refer to the paragraph “On Web Connection Database Method calls”
below.

The request should have been previously accepted by the On Web Authentication Database
Method (if it exists) and the database should be published as a Web server.

The On Web Connection database method receives six text parameters that are passed by 4D.
The contents of these parameters are as follows:

Parameters Type Description

$1 Text URL
$2 Text HTTP header + HTTP body (up to 32 kb limit)
$3 Text IP address of the Web client (browser)
$4 Text IP address of the server
$5 Text User name
$6 Text Password

You must declare these parameters as follows:

` On Web Connection Database Method

C_TEXT($1;$2;$3;$4;$5;$6)

` Code for the method

4D Language Reference 1997

• URL extra data
The first parameter ($1) is the URL entered by the user in the location area of his or her Web
browser, from which the host address has been removed.

Let’s take the example of an Intranet connection. Suppose that the IP address of your 4D Web
Server machine is 123.4.567.89. The following table shows the values of $1 depending on the
URL entered in the Web browser:

URL entered in Web browser Location area Value of parameter $1

123.4.567.89 /
http://123.4.567.89 /
123.4.567.89/Customers /Customers
http://123.4.567.89/Customers /Customers
http://123.4.567.89/Customers/Add /Customers/Add
123.4.567.89/Do_This/If_OK/Do_That /Do_This/If_OK/Do_That

Note that you are free to use this parameter at your convenience. 4D simply ignores the value
passed beyond the host part of the URL.

For example, you can establish a convention where the value "/Customers/Add" means “go
directly to add a new record in the [Customers] table.” By supplying the Web users of your
database with a list of possible values and/or default bookmarks, you can provide shortcuts to
the different parts of your application. This way, Web users can quickly access resources of
your Web site without going through the whole navigation path each time they make a new
connection to your database.

WARNING: In order to prevent a user from reentering a database with a bookmark created
during a previous session, 4D intercepts any URL that corresponds to one of the standard 4D
URLs.

• Header of the HTTP request followed by the HTTP body

The second parameter ($2) is the header and the body of the HTTP request sent by the Web
browser. Note that this information is passed to your On Web Connection Database Method as
it is. Its contents will vary depending on the nature of the Web browser which is attempting
the connection.

1998 4D Language Reference

With Netscape 4.5 running on Mac OS, you may receive a header similar to this:

GET / HTTP/1.0
Connection: Keep-Alive
User-Agent: Mozilla/4.5 (Macintosh; I; PPC)
Host: 123.45.67.89
Accept: image/gif, image/x-xbitmap, image/jpeg, image/pjpeg, image/png, */*
Accept-Encoding: gzip
Accept-Language: us
Accept-Charset: iso-8

With Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 running on Windows, you may receive a header similar to
this:

GET / HTTP/1.0
Connection: Keep-Alive
User-Agent: Mozilla/4.0 (compatible; MSIE 6.0; Windows NT 5.1)
Host: 123.45.67.89
Accept: image/gif, image/x-xbitmap, image/pjpeg, */*
Accept-Language: us

If your application deals with this information, it is up to you to parse the header and the
body.

• IP address of the Web client

The $3 parameter receives the IP address of the browser’s machine. This information can allow
you to distinguish between Intranet and Internet connections.

• IP address of the server

The $4 parameter receives the IP address to which the HTTP request was sent. 4D allows for
multi-homing, which allows you to exploit machines with more than one IP address. For more
information, please refer to the section Web Server Settings.

• User Name and Password

The $5 and $6 parameters receive the user name and password entered by the user in the
standard identification dialog box displayed by the browser. This dialog box appears for each
connection, if the Use Passwords option has been selected in the Preferences dialog box (see
section Connection Security).

Note: If the user name sent by the browser exists in 4D, the $6 parameter (the user’s password)
is not returned for security reasons.

4D Language Reference 1999

On Web Connection Database Method Calls
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The On Web Connection Database Method can be used as the entry point for the 4D Web
server, either using the special 4DCGI URL, or using customized command URLs. It also plays a
role as the entry point in contextual mode (with 4D in local mode and 4D Server).

Warning: Calling a 4D command that displays an interface element (ALERT, DIALOG...) ends
the method processing.

The On Web connection database method is therefore called in the following cases:
• When connecting a browser to a 4D Web server operating in contextual mode. The database
method is called with the /<action>... URL.
• When 4D receives the /4DMETHOD URL. The Web server switches to contextual mode and
the database method is called with the /4DMETHOD/MethodName URL in $1.
• When 4D receives the /4DCGI URL. The database method is called with the /4DCGI/<action>
URL in $1.
• When a Web page is called with a URL of type <path>/<file> is not found. The database
method is called with the URL (*).
• When a Web page is called with a URL of type <file>/ and no home page has been defined by
default. The database method is called with the URL (*).

(*) In this particular cases, the URL received in $1 does NOT start with the "/" character.

To know whether the On Web Connection Database Method was called from a contextual or
from a non-contextual connection, you can use the Web Context function, that returns True if
it is called from contextual mode, and False otherwise.
Consequently, we suggest that you structure the On Web Connection database method in the
following manner:

`On Web connection database method

C_TEXT($1;$2;$3;$4;$5;$6)
If (Web Context) `If in contextual mode
WithContext ($1;$2;$3;$4;$5;$6)
`The WithContext contains everything that was in the
`On Web connection database method in 4D 6.0.x
Else
NoContext ($1;$2;$3;$4;$5;$6)
`The NoContext method executes the non-contextual
`processing of requests (generally short)
End if

2000 4D Language Reference

Example: Implementing Client Local Home Pages in contextual mode
In the following example, the parameter $1, sent to the On Web Connection database method,
is used to implement Client Home Pages within an organization. The Intranet server operates
in contextual mode.

The database has two tables: [Customers] and [Tables]. The On Startup database method shown
here initializes interprocess arrays used later by the On Web Connection database method.

` On Startup Database Method

` Table List
ARRAY STRING(31;<>asTables;Get last table number)
For ($vlTable;1;Size of array(<>asTables);1;-1)
If(Is table number valie($vlTable))
<>asTables{$vlTable}:=Table name($vlTable)
Else
DELETE FROM ARRAY(<>asTables;$vlTable)
End if
End for

` Standard Web Actions at Login

ARRAY STRING(31;<>asActions;2)
<>asActions{1}:="Add"
<>asActions{2}:="List"

The main job of the On Web Connection database method is to decipher the extra data passed
in the URL after the host part of the address and to act accordingly. The method is as follows:

` On Web Connection Database Method

C_TEXT($1;$2;$3;$4;$5;$6)
C_TEXT($vtURL)

4D Language Reference 2001

 If (Web context) `If we are in contextual mode
` Just in case, check that $1 is equal to "/" or "/..."
If ($1="/@")
` Copy the URL into a local variable minus the first "/"
$vtURL:=Substring($1;2)
` Parse the URL and populate a local array with the tokens of the URL
` For example, if the URL extra data is "aaa/bbb/ccc", the resulting array
` will be of the three elements "aaa", "bbb" and "ccc" in that order
$vlElem:=0
ARRAY TEXT($atTokens;$vlElem)
While ($vtURL # "")
$vlElem:=$vlElem+1
INSERT IN ARRAY($atTokens;$vlElem)
$vlPos:=Position("/";$vtURL)
If ($vlPos>0)
$atTokens{$vlElem}:=Substring($vtURL;1;$vlPos-1)
$vtURL:=Substring($vtURL;$vlPos+1)
Else
$atTokens{$vlElem}:=$vtURL
$vtURL:=""
End if
End while
` If extra data was passed after the HOST part of the URL
If ($vlElem>0)
` Using the interprocess array initialized in the On Startup DB method
` Check whether the 1st token is a name of a table
$vlTableNumber:=Find in array(<>asTables;$atTokens{1})
If ($vlTableNumber>0)
` If so, get pointer to this table
$vpTable:=Table($vlTableNumber)
` Set the Input and Output forms
INPUT FORM($vpTable->;"Input Web")
OUTPUT FORM($vpTable->;"Output Web")
` Using an interprocess array initialized in the On Startup DB Method
` Check whether the 2nd token is a known standard action
$vlAction:=Find in array(<>asActions;$atTokens{2})

2002 4D Language Reference

 Case of
` Adding records
: ($vlAction=1)
Repeat
ADD RECORD($vpTable->;*)
Until (OK=0)
` Listing records
: ($vlAction=2)
READ ONLY($vpTable->)
ALL RECORDS($vpTable->)
DISPLAY SELECTION($vpTable->;*)
READ WRITE($vpTable->)
Else
` Here could additional standard table actions be implemented
End case
Else
` Here could other standard actions be implemented
End if
End if
End if
` Whatever happened above, pursue with the normal Log On process
WWW NORMAL LOG ON
Else
... ` Here could the code managing the non-contextual mode
`would be implemented
End if

At this point, people within the organization can connect to the database and enter a URL
according to the convention set by the methods listed. Users can also create bookmarks if they
do not want to re-enter the URL each time. In fact, the ultimate solution is to provide each
member of the organization with an HTML page that they will use locally to access the
database.

4D Language Reference 2003

This HTML page is shown:

In other words, the HTML page ACME_IS.HTM is the Client Local Home Page for the 4D-based
information system of the organization. If a user clicks on the Add New Products link, the
Web browser will connect to the host having the URL http://123.4.567.89/Products/Add.
Provided that the IP address of the database computer is 123.4.567.89, the On Web Connection
Database Method receives the extra URL data "/Products/Add" in $1, and therefore proceeds to
add records in the [Products] table.

Finally, users can drag and drop links from that page onto the desktop to create Internet
Shortcut icons, such as the Add New Customers icon shown here. Simply double-clicking
these icons will bring them directly into any part of your 4D Web database.

2004 4D Language Reference

The source code of this HTML page is listed here:

See Also
Database Methods, On Web Authentication Database Method, URLs and Form Actions, Using the
Contextual Mode.

4D Language Reference 2005

Binding 4D objects with HTML objects Web Server

version 2003 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

This section describes the means made available by the 4D Web server for exchanging
information via the Web, i.e. for dynamically sending and receiving values. The following
points will be dealt with:
• Sending dynamic values stored in 4D variables
• Receiving dynamic values via Web forms
• Using the COMPILER_WEB project method
• Managing server-side image mapping
• Embedding JavaScript

Note: the sending and receiving of dynamic values can be carried out automatically in
contextual mode via converted 4D forms. For more information on this point, refer to the
section Using the contextual mode.

Sending dynamic values

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

References to 4D variables can be inserted in your HTML pages. You can bind these references
with any type of HTML object. When the Web pages are sent to the browser, 4D will replace
these references with the current values of the variables. The pages received are therefore a
combination of static elements and values coming from 4D. This type of page is called semi-
dynamic.

Notes:
• You work with process variables.
• As HTML is a word processing oriented language, you will usually work with Text variables.
However, you can also use BLOBs variables (which avoid the 32 000 characters limitation of
text type variables). You just need to generate the BLOB in Text without length mode.

First, an HTML object can have its value initialized using the value of a 4D variable.

Second, after a Web form is submitted back, the value of an HTML object can be returned into
a 4D variable. To do so, within the HTML source of the form, you create an HTML object
whose name is the same as the name of the 4D process variable you want to bind. That point
is studied further in the paragraph “Receiving dynamic values” in this document.

Note: In non-contextual mode, it is not possible to make a reference to 4D picture variables.

2006 4D Language Reference

Since an HTML object value can be initialized with the value of a 4D variable, you can
programmatically provide default values to HTML objects by including <!--#4DVAR VarName-->
in the value field of the HTML object, where VarName is the name of the 4D process variable
as defined in the current Web process. This is the name that you surround with the standard
HTML notation for comments <!--#...-->.

Note: Some HTML editors may not accept <!--#4DVAR VarName--> in the value field of HTML
objects. In this case, you will have to type it in the HTML code.

The <!--#4DVAR --> tag also allows the insertion of 4D expressions in the pages sent (fields,
array elements, etc.). The operation of this tag with this type of data is identical to that with
variables. For more information, refer to the section 4D HTML Tags.

In fact, the syntax <!--#4DVAR VarName--> allows you to insert 4D data anywhere in the HTML
page. For example, if you write:

<P>Welcome to <!--#4DVAR vtSiteName-->!</P>

The value of the 4D variable vtSiteName will be inserted in the HTML page.

Here is an example:

` The following piece of 4D code assigns "4D4D" to the process variable vs4D
vs4D:="4D4D"
` Then it send the HTML page "AnyPage.HTM"
SEND HTML FILE("AnyPage.HTM")

4D Language Reference 2007

The source of the HTML page AnyPage.HTM is listed here:

In the HTML source code shown, note the hidden input object named vs4D. The value of this
object is set to the text value "<!--#4DVAR vs4D-->". Since the project method sending the
HTML file has previously defined the 4D process variable vs4D, 4D replaces the value of the
HTML object and sets it to "4D4D", the value of the 4D variable.

2008 4D Language Reference

The embedded JavaScript function Is4DWebServer tests the value of the vs4D HTML object.
Here is the trick: if the HTML page is served by 4D, the object’s value is changed to "4D4D".
However, if the HTML page is served by another application (i.e., 4D WebSTAR on Macintosh),
the object stays with its value as defined in the page, "[vs4D]". Bingo! By using JavaScript to
test the value of that object, from within the page on the Web Browser side, you can detect
whether or not the page is being served by 4D.

This first example shows how you can build “intelligent” HTML pages that provide additional
features when being served by 4D, while staying compatible with other Web servers.

Important: You bind process variables only. In addition, the current version of 4D does not
allow you to bind a 4D array to an HTML SELECT object. On the other hand, each element of
a SELECT object can refer to separate 4D variables (i.e., the first element to V1, the second to
V2, and so on).

The binding in the direction 4D toward Web Browser works with any encapsulation method
(SEND HTML FILE, SEND HTML BLOB, as well as, in contextual mode, static text or text or BLOB
variable in a 4D form).

Parsing of pages sent by the server

• In contextual mode, before sending an HTML page (HTML document or translated 4D form),
4D always parses the HTML source code in order to look for objects referring to 4D variables.
• In non-contextual mode, for the purpose of optimization, the parsing of the HTML source
code is not carried out by the 4D Web server when HTML pages are called using simple URLs
that are suffixed with “.HTML” or “.HTM”. Of course, 4D offers mechanisms that allow you to
"force" the parsing of pages when necessary (refer to the section 4D HTML Tags).

Inserting HTML Code into 4D Variables

You can insert HTML code into 4D variables. When the HTML static page is displayed on the
Web browser, the value of the variable is replaced by the HTML code and will be interpeted by
the browser.

4D Language Reference 2009

To insert HTML code into 4D variables, you have two possibilites:
• Make the 4D variable start with code 1 as first character (i.e., vtHTML:=Char(1)+"...HTML
code...") and add it to the HTML page using the <!--#4DVAR vtHTML--> tag.

• Insert directly the 4D variable (i.e., vtHTML:="...HTML code...") in the HTML page using the <!-
-#4DHTMLVAR vtHTML--> tag.
You can use a Text or a BLOB variable (the BLOB should have been generated in Text without
length mode).

For more information, refer to section “HTML Tags”.

Receiving dynamic values

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

When you send an HTML page using SEND HTML FILE or SEND HTML BLOB, you can also bind
4D variables with HTML objects in the “Web Browser toward 4D” direction. The binding
works both ways: once the HTML form is submitted, 4D can copy back the values of the HTML
objects into the 4D process variables. With a view to database compilation, these variables
must be declared in the COMPILER_WEB method (see paragraph below).

It is also possible to retrieve values from the Web forms sent to 4D without prior knowledge of
the fields that they contain, using the GET WEB FORM VARIABLES command. For more
information, refer to the description of this command.

Warning: Getting the values back into the 4D process variables is only possible with HTML
pages sent using SEND HTML FILE or SEND HTML BLOB. With HTML encapsulated in a 4D form
in contextual mode, getting back values is restricted to the actual 4D objects located in the
form.

2010 4D Language Reference

Consider the following HTML page source code:

4D Language Reference 2011

When 4D sends the page to a Web Browser, it looks like this:

The main features of this page are:

• It includes three Submit buttons: vsbLogOn, vsbRegister and vsbInformation.
• When you click Log On, the submission of the form is first processed by the JavaScript
function LogOn. If no name is entered, the form is not even submitted to 4D, and a JavaScript
alert is displayed.
• The form has a POST 4D Method as well as a Submit script (GetBrowserInformation) that
copies the Navigator properties to the four hidden objects whose names starts with vtNav_App.
• The initial value of the object vtUserName is <!--#4DVAR vtUserName-->.

Let’s examine the 4D method WWW Welcome that sends this HTML page using the SEND
HTML FILE command. This method is called by the On Web Connection Database Method.

` WWW Welcome Project Method

` WWW Welcome -> Boolean
` WWW Welcome -> Yes = Can start a session

C_BOOLEAN($0)
$0:=False

2012 4D Language Reference

 ` Hidden INPUT HTML objects returning Browser information
C_TEXT(vtNav_appName;vtNav_appVersion;vtNav_appCodeName;vtNav_userAgent)
vtNav_appName:=""
vtNav_appVersion:=""
vtNav_appCodeName:=""
vtNav_userAgent:=""
` Text INPUT HTML object where the user name is entered
C_TEXT(vtUserName)
vtUserName:=""
` HTML submit button values
C_STRING(31;vsbLogOn;vsbRegister;vsbInformation)
Repeat
` Do not forget to reset the values of the submit buttons!
vsbLogOn:=""
vsbRegister:=""
vsbInformation:=""
` Send the Web page
SEND HTML FILE("Welcome.HTM")
` Test the values of the submit buttons in order to detect which one was clicked
Case of
` The Log On button was clicked
: (vsbLogOn # "")
QUERY([WWW Users];[WWW Users]User Name=vtUserName)
$0:=(Records in selection([WWW Users])>0)
If ($0)
WWW POST EVENT ("Log On";WWW Log information )
` The method WWW POST EVENT saves information to a
` table of the database
Else
CONFIRM("This User Name is unknown, would you like to register?")
$0:=(OK=1)
If ($0)
$0:=WWW Register
` The method WWW Register allow a new Web User to register
End if
End if

4D Language Reference 2013

 ` The Register button was clicked
: (vsbRegister # "")
$0:=WWW Register

` The Information button was clicked

: (vsbInformation # "")
DIALOG([User Interface];"WWW Information")
End case
Until (Not(<>vbWebServicesOn) | $0)

The features of this method are:

• The 4D variables vtNav_appName, vtNav_appVersion, vtNav_appCodeName, and

vtNav_userAgent (bound to the HTML objects having the same names) use the
GetBrowserInformation JavaScript script to get back the values assigned to the HTML objects.
Simple and direct, the method initializes the variables as strings, then gets back the values
after the Web page has been submitted.

• The 4D variables vsbLogOn, vsbRegister and vsbInformation are bound to the three Submit
buttons. Note that these variables are reset each time the page is sent to the browser. When
the submit is performed by one of these buttons, the browser returns the value of the clicked
button to 4D. The 4D variables are reset each time, so the variable that is no longer equal to
the empty string tells you which button was clicked. The two other variables are empty
strings, not because the browser returned empty strings, but because the browser “said”
nothing about them; consequently, 4D left the variables unchanged. That is why it is
necessary to reset those variables to the empty string each time the page is sent to the browser.

This the way to distinguish which Submit button was clicked when several Submit buttons
exist on the Web page. Note that 4D buttons in a 4D form are numeric variables. However,
with HTML, all objects are text objects.

If you bind a 4D variable with a SELECT object, you also bind a text variable. In 4D, to test
which element of a drop-down list was chosen, you test the numeric value of the 4D array.
With HTML, this is the value of the selected item that is returned in the 4D variable bound to
the HTML object.

No matter which object you bind with a 4D variable, the returned value is of type Text, so you
bind String or Text 4D process variables.

2014 4D Language Reference

An interesting point of this example is that after you have obtained information about the
Browser, you can store these values in a 4D table, again combining Web and database
capabilities. This is what the (unlisted) WWW POST EVENT project method does. It does not
“post an event”; it saves the web session information into the tables shown here:

After you have saved the information in a table, you can use other project methods to send
the information back to the Web user. To do so, simply use QUERY to find the right
information and then use DISPLAY SELECTION to show the [WWW Log] records. The following
figure shows the log information available to the registered user of the Web site:

Using the binding features shown in this example, combined with all the information you can
give to or gather from users via HTML dialogs or 4D forms, you can add some very interesting
administrative capabilities to your database Web site.

4D Language Reference 2015

COMPILER_WEB Project Method
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

When the 4D Web server receives a posted form, it automatically calls the project method
called COMPILER_WEB (if it exists). This method must contain all the typing and/or variable
initialization directives, which are the variables whose names are the same as the field names
in the form. It will be used by the compiler when compiling the database.
The COMPILER_WEB method is common to all the Web forms. By default, the COMPILER_WEB
method does not exist. You must explicitly create it.

Note: You can also use the GET WEB FORM VARIABLES command, which gets the value for all
the variables included in a submitted HTML page.

Web Services: The COMPILER_WEB project method is called, if it exists, for each SOAP request
accepted. You must use this method to declare all the 4D variables associated with incoming
SOAP arguments, for all methods published as Web Services. In fact, the use of process
variables in Web Services methods requires that they be declared before the method is called.
For more information on this point, refer to the description of the SOAP DECLARATION
command.

Binding HTML Objects with 4D Variables - Image Mapping

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

As seen in the section Using the Contextual Mode, when a 4D form is used as a Web page, 4D
provides Server-side Image Mapping by means of invisible-like buttons that overlap a static
picture.

If you send an HTML document using SEND HTML FILE or SEND HTML BLOB, you can bind 4D
variables with Image Map HTML objects (INPUT TYPE="IMAGE") to retrieve information. For
example, you can create an Image Map HTML object named bImageMap (you can actually use
any name). Each time you click on the image on the browser side, a submit with the click
position is sent back to the 4D Web Server. To retrieve the coordinates of the click (expressed
relative to the top left corner of the image), you just need to read the value the 4D process
variables bImageMap_X and bImageMap_Y (of type Longint) which contain the horizontal and
vertical coordinates of the click. These variables should be declared in the COMPILER_WEB
project method (see previous paragraph).

• In the HTML page, you write something like:

<P><INPUT TYPE="image" SRC="MyImage.GIF" NAME="bImageMap" BORDER=0></P>

• The 4D method that sends the HTML page contains:

SEND HTML FILE("ThisPage.HTM")

2016 4D Language Reference

• In the COMPILER_WEB project method, you write:

C_LONGINT(bImageMap_X;bImageMap_Y)
bImageMap_X:=-1 `Initializing the variable
bImageMap_Y:=-1 `Initializing the variable
• Then, in the POST action 4D method or in the current method, after the POST action
method issued a SEND HMTL FILE("") call, you retrieve the coordinates of the click in the
bImageMap_X and bImageMap_Y variables :

If (($bImageMap_X#-1)&($bImageMap_Y#-1))
` Do something accordingly to the coordinates
End if

JavaScript Encapsulation
4D supports JavaScript source code embedded into HTML documents, and also JavaScript .js
files embedded in HTML documents (for example <SCRIPT SRC="...").

Using SEND HTML FILE or SEND HTML BLOB in standard mode, you send a page that you have
prepared in an HTML source editor or built programmatically using 4D and saved as a
document on disk. In both cases, you have full control of the page. You can insert JavaScript
scripts in the HEAD section of the document as well as use scripts with the FORM markup. In
the previous example, the script refers to the form "frm" because you were able to name the
form. You can also trigger, accept, or reject the submission of the form at the FORM markup
level.
In contextual mode, if you encapsulate HTML in a 4D form, you do not have control over the
HEAD section or the FORM declaration. The scope of the scripts is therefore different. For
example, you cannot access the HTML form by its name. However, compare the Is4DWebServer
JavaScript function of the previous example with this one:

Both functions do the same thing, but the second example uses the forms property of the
HTML document object to access the object through the element forms[0]. As a result, it
operates even if you do not know the name that 4D may or may have not given to the
translated HTML page (form).

Note: 4D supports Java applets transport.

See Also
4D HTML Tags, SEND HTML BLOB, SEND HTML FILE, URLs and Form Actions.

4D Language Reference 2017

URLs and Form Actions Web Server

version 2003 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The 4D Web Server offers different URLs and HTML form actions that allow you to implement
various actions in your database, in both contextual and non-contextual modes.

These URLs are the following:

• 4DMETHOD/, to link any HTML object to a project method of your database in contextual
mode,
• 4DACTION/, to link any HTML object to a project method of your database in non-
contextual mode,
• 4DCGI/, to call the On Web Connection Database Method from any HTML object.

In addition, the 4D Web Server accepts several additional URLs:

• /4DSTATS, /4DHTMLSTATS, /4DCACHECLEAR and /4DWEBTEST, to allow you to obtain
information about the functioning of your 4D Web site. These URLs are described in the
section Information about the Web Site.
• /4DWSDL, to allow you to access the declaration file of Web Services published on the server.
For more information, refer to the Web Services (Server) commands section and to the Design
Reference manuel.

URL 4DACTION/
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Syntax: 4DACTION/MyMethod{/Param}
Mode: Non-contextual. When called from contextual mode, aborts the context process and
switches to non-contextual mode.
Usage: URL or Form action.

This URL allows you to link an HTML object (text, button...) to a 4D project method in non-
contextual mode. The link will be /4DACTION/MyMethod/Param where MyMethod is the name
of the 4D project method to be executed when the user clicks on the link and Param an
optional Text parameter to pass to the method in $1 (see paragraph “The Text Parameters
Passed to 4D Methods Called via URLs” below).
When 4D receives a /4DACTION/MyMethod/Param request, the On Web Authentication
Database Method (if it exists) is called. If it returns True, the MyMethod method is executed.
4DACTION/ can be associated with a URL in a static Web page. The syntax of the URL must be
in the following form: <A HREF="/4DACTION/MyMethod/Param">Do Something</A>

2018 4D Language Reference

The MyMethod project method should generally return a "reply" (sending of an HTML page
using SEND HTML FILE or SEND HTML BLOB, etc.). Be sure to make the processing as short as
possible in order not to block the browser.

Note: A method called by 4DACTION must not call interface elements (DIALOG, ALERT...).

Warning: For a 4D method to be able to be executed using the 4DACTION/ URL, it must have
the “Available through 4DACTION, 4DMETHOD and 4DSCRIPT” attribute (unchecked by
default), defined in the Method properties. For more information on this point, refer to the
Connection Security section.

Example
This example describes the association of the 4DACTION/ URL with an HTML picture object in
order to dynamically display a picture in the page. You insert the following instructions in a
static HTML page:
<IMG SRC="/4DACTION/PICTFROMLIB/1000">

The PICTFROMLIB method is as follows:

C_TEXT($1) `This parameter must always be declared

C_PICTURE($PictVar)
C_BLOB($BlobVar)
C_LONGINT($Number)
`We retrieve the picture’s number in the string $1
$Number:=Num(Substring($1;2;99))
GET PICTURE FROM LIBRARY($Number;$PictVar)
PICTURE TO GIF($PictVar;$BlobVar)
SEND HTML BLOB ($BlobVar;"Pict/gif")

4DACTION to post forms

The 4D Web server offers an additional possibility when you want to use “posted” forms,
which are static HTML pages that send data to the Web server. The POST type must be
associated to them and the form’s action must imperatively start with
/4DACTION/MethodName.

Note: A form can be submitted through two methods (both can be used with 4D):
• POST, usually used to add data into the Web server - to a database,
• GET, usually used to request the Web server - data coming from a database.

4D Language Reference 2019

In this case, when the Web server receives a posted form, it calls the COMPILER_WEB project
method (if it exists, see below), then the On Web Authentication Database Method (if it exists).
If it returns True, the MethodName method is executed. 4D analyzes the HTML fields present
in the form, retrieves their values and automatically fills the 4D variables with their contents.
The field in the form and the 4D variable must have the same name.

Note: For more information, refer to the section Binding 4D objects with HTML objects.

The HTML syntax to apply in the form is of the following type:

• to define the action in a form:
<FORM ACTION="/4DACTION/MethodName" METHOD=POST>
• to define a field in a form:
<INPUT TYPE=Field type NAME=Field name VALUE="Default value">

For each field in the form, 4D sets the value of the field to the value of the variable with the
same name. For the form options (for example, check boxes), 4D sets the associated variable to
1 if it is selected, otherwise 0.
For numerical data entries, 4D converts the value of the field from Alpha–>Real.

Note: If a field in the form is named OK (for example the Submit button), the OK system
variable is set to 1 if the value of the field is not empty, otherwise it is set to 0.

Example
In a 4D Web database started and used in “non-contextual” mode, we hope that the browsers
can search records by using a static HTML page. This page is called “search.htm”. The database
contains other static pages that allow you to, for example, display the search result
(“results.htm”). The POST type has been associated to the page, as well as the
/4DACTION/SEARCH action.

2020 4D Language Reference

Here is the page as it appears in an HTML editor, in our case Adobe® PageMill™:

Here is the HTML code that corresponds to this page:

<FORM ACTION="/4DACTION/PROCESSFORM" METHOD=POST>

<INPUT TYPE=TEXT NAME=VNAME VALUE=""><BR>
<!-- Usually we put the name of the button in VALUE, for interpretation reasons, you must put a
number in VALUE-->
<INPUT TYPE=CHECKBOX NAME=EXACT VALUE="1">Whole word<BR>
<!-- OK is a particular case-->
<INPUT TYPE=SUBMIT NAME=OK VALUE="Search">
</FORM>

During data entry, type “ABCD” in the data entry area, check the option and validate it by
clicking the Search button.

4D then calls the COMPILER_WEB project method, which is as follows:

C_TEXT(VNAME)
VNAME:=""
C_LONGINT(vEXACT)
vEXACT:=0
OK:=0 `particular case

4D Language Reference 2021

In the example, VNAME contains the string “ABCD”, vEXACT is equal to 1 and OK is equal to
1 (because the button’s name is OK).
4D calls the On Web Authentication Database Method (if it exists), then the PROCESSFORM
project method is called, which is as follows:

If (OK=1)
If (vEXACT=0) `If the option has not been selected
vNAME:=VNAME+"@"
End if
QUERY([Jockeys];[Jockeys]Name=vNAME)
vLIST:=Char(1) `Return the list in HTML
FIRST RECORD([Jockeys])
While (Not(End selection([Jockeys])))
vLIST:=vLIST+[Jockeys]Name+” “+[Jockeys]Tel+”<BR>”
NEXT RECORD([Jockeys])
End while
SEND HTML FILE(“results.htm”) `Send the list to the results.htm form
`which contains a reference to the variable vLIST (that is <!--4DVAR vLIST––>)
...
End if

URL 4DMETHOD/
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Syntax: 4DMETHOD/MyMethod{/Param}
Mode: Contextual. When called from non-contextual mode, switches to contextual mode.
Usage: URL or Form action.

This URL allows you to link an HTML object (text, button...) to a 4D project method in
contextual mode. The link will be /4DMETHOD/Method_Name/Param where Method_Name is
the name of the 4D project method to be executed when the HTML object is clicked and
Param an optional Text parameter to pass to the method in $1 (see paragraph “The Text
Parameters Passed to 4D Methods Called via URLs” below). The linked item triggers the
execution of the 4D project method through their URLs. The project method can itself display
4D forms, other HTML pages, and so on.

When 4D receives a /4DMETHOD request, the On Web Authentication Database Method (if it
exists) is called. If it returns True, the On Web Connection Database Method (if it exists) is
called, then the Method_Name method is executed with the /Param string as parameter (in $1).

2022 4D Language Reference

If you assign /4DMETHOD/Method_Name as form action to a HTML static page, the method is
executed when a Submit button of the form is clicked. To submit the HTML form on the 4D
side, you need to specify the POST action 4D method that will be executed by 4D after the
form is submitted. Refer to the example of the command SEND HTML FILE.
While integrating HTML pages into 4D, you will typically use normal or submit type buttons.
The HTML syntax to apply in the form is of the following type:
<FORM ACTION="/4DMETHOD/MethodName" METHOD=POST>
For more information about posted forms, refer to the previous paragraph.

Warning: For a 4D method to be able to be executed using the 4DMETHOD/ URL, it must have
the “Available through 4DACTION, 4DMETHOD and 4DSCRIPT” attribute (unchecked by
default), defined in the Method properties. For more information on this point, refer to the
Connection Security section.

URL 4DCGI/<action>
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Syntax: 4DCGI/<action>
Mode: Both.
Usage: URL.

When the 4D Web server receives the /4DCGI/<action> URL, the On Web Authentication
Database Method (if it exists) is called. If it returns True, the Web server calls the On Web
Connection Database Method by sending the URL “as is ” to $1.

The 4DCGI/ URL does not correspond to any file. Its role is to call 4D using the On Web
Connection Database Method. The “<action>” parameter can contain any type of information.

This URL allows you to perform any type of action. You just need to test the value of $1 in the
On Web Connection Database Method or in one of its submethods and have 4D perform the
appropriate action. For example, you can build completely custom static HTML pages to add,
search, or sort records or to generate GIF images on-the-fly. Examples of how to use this URL
are in the descriptions of the PICTURE TO GIF and SEND HTTP REDIRECT commands.

When issuing an action, a “response” must be returned, by using commands that send data
(SEND HTML FILE, SEND HTML BLOB, etc.).

Warning: Please be sure to execute the shortest possible actions so as not to hold up the
browser.

4D Language Reference 2023

The Text Parameters Passed to 4D Methods Called via URLs
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4D sends text parameters to any 4D method called via special URLs (4DMETHOD/, 4DACTION/
and 4DCGI/), in both contextual and non-contextual modes. Regarding these text parameters:
• Although you do not use these parameters, you must explicitly declare them with the
command C_TEXT, otherwise runtime errors will occur while using the Web to access a
database that runs in compiled mode.
• The $1 parameter returns the extra data placed at the end of the URL, and can be used as a
placeholder for passing values from the HTML environment to the 4D environment.

Runtime Errors in Compiled Mode

Let’s consider the following example. You execute a method bound to an HTML object using a
link and obtain the following screen on your Web browser:

This runtime error is related to the missing declaration of the text $1 parameter in the 4D
method that is called when you click on the HTML link referring to that method. As the
context of the execution is the current HTML page, the error refers to the “line 0” of the
method that has actually sent the page to the Web browser.

2024 4D Language Reference

Following the example from the section Your First Time with the Web Server, you avoid the
problem by explicitly declaring the text $1 parameter within the M_ADD_RECORDS and
M_LIST_RECORDS methods:

` M_ADD_RECORDS project method

C_TEXT($1) ` This parameter MUST be declared explicitly
Repeat
ADD RECORD([Customers])
Until(OK=0)

` M_LIST_RECORDS project method

C_TEXT($1) ` This parameter MUST be declared explicitly
ALL RECORDS([Customers])
MODIFY SELECTION([Customers])

After these changes have been made, the compiled runtime errors no longer occur.

Parameters to declare explicitly in the called 4D method

You must declare differents parameters depending on the nature and the origin of the call to a
4D method.

• On Web Authentication Database Method and On Web Connection Database Method

You must declare the six parameters of the connection:

` On Web Connection Database Method

C_TEXT($1;$2;$3;$4;$5;$6)

• Method called by the URL 4DMETHOD/

You must declare the $1 parameter:

` Method called by the URL 4DMETHOD/

C_TEXT($1)

• Method called by the URL 4DACTION/

You must declare the $1 parameter:

` Method called by the URL 4DACTION/

C_TEXT($1)

4D Language Reference 2025

• Method called by the tag 4DSCRIPT/ as an HTML comment in a document
The method should return a value in $0. You must declare the $0 and $1 parameter:

` Method called by the tag 4DSCRIPT/ as an HTML comment

C_TEXT($0; $1)

See Also
Binding 4D objects with HTML objects, GET WEB FORM VARIABLES, Using the Contextual Mode,
Your First Time with the Web Server.

2026 4D Language Reference

4D HTML Tags Web Server

version 2004.2 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The 4D Web server provides you with different HTML tags specific to 4D, which allow you to
insert references to 4D variables or expressions, or different types of processing, in static HTML
pages sent by the Web server, for example using the SEND HTML FILE and SEND HTML BLOB
commands. These pages are called semi-dynamic pages.

These tags are inserted as HTML comments (<!--#Tag Contents--> in HTML code). Most HTML
editors offer editing facilities to insert comments.

The following 4D HTML tags are available:

• 4DVAR, to insert 4D variables and expressions,
• 4DHTMLVAR, similar to 4DVAR but inserting HTML code,
• 4DSCRIPT, to execute a 4D method,
• 4DINCLUDE, to include a page within another one,
• 4DIF, 4DELSE and 4DENDIF, to insert conditions in the HTML code,
• 4DLOOP and 4DENDLOOP, to make loops in the HTML code.

Compatibility Note: In version 6.0.x of 4D, the notation to use for inserting 4D variables in
static pages was square brackets [VarName]. In a converted database, to be able to use the
standard HTML syntax (<!--#4DVAR VarName-->), make sure that the option “Use 4DVAR
Comments instead of Brackets” in the Preferences dialog box is checked (see section Web
Server Settings).

About 4D HTML Tags

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Parsing of the contents of semi-dynamic pages sent by 4D takes place when SEND HTML FILE
(.htm, .html, .shtm, .shtml) or SEND HTML BLOB (text/html type BLOB) commands are called,
as well as when sending pages called using URLs.
However, in non-contextual mode, for reasons of optimization, pages that are suffixed with
“.htm” and “.html” are NOT parsed. In order to "force" the parsing of HTML pages in this case,
you must add the suffix “.shtm” or “.shtml” (for example,
http://www.server.com/dir/page.shtm).
An example of the use of this type of page is given in the description of the WEB CACHE
STATISTICS command.

4D Language Reference 2027

Below are the cases where 4D parses the tags contained in the HTML pages sent to the Web
browsers:

Sending Conditions Content analysis of the sent pages

Contextual mode Non-contextual mode
• Page extension (general case):
.htm, .html, .shtm, .shtml (HTML pages) X X
.xml, .xsl (XML pages) X X
.wml (WML pages) X X
• Pages called via URLs X X, except for pages with “.htm”
or “.html” extensions
• SEND HTML FILE command call X X
• SEND HTML BLOB command call (if the X X
BLOB is “text/html” type)
• Inclusion by the <!--4DINCLUDE --> tag X X
• Inclusion by the {mypage.htm} tag X -

In order to be processed by 4D, an HTML comment should have the following format <!--
#4D...-->. Please note that some HTML editors automatically add other information within the
comment; this can lead to some misinterpretation.
However, other HTML comments such as <!--Beginning of list--> are possible.

If a comment <!--#4D... does not end by -->, the following message “<!--#4D... : --> expected”
will be inserted and the analysis will stop at this level (the page will be sent to indicate the
error).
It is possible to mix several types of comments. For example, the following HTML syntax is
possible:
<HTML>
...
<BODY>
<!--#4DSCRIPT/PRE_PROCESS--> (Method call)
<!--#4DIF (myvar=1)--> (If condition)
<!--#4DINCLUDE banner1.html--> (Subpage insertion)
<!--#4DENDIF--> (End if)
<!--#4DIF (myvar=2)-->
<!--#4DINCLUDE banner2.html-->
<!--#4DENDIF-->

2028 4D Language Reference

<!--#4DLOOP [TABLE]--> (loop on the current selection)
<!--#4DIF ([TABLE]ValNum>10)--> (If [TABLE]ValNum>10)
<!--#4DINCLUDE subpage.html--> (subpage insertion)
<!--#4DELSE--> (Else)
<B>Value: <!--#4DVAR [TABLE]ValNum--></B><BR>
(Field display)
<!--#4DENDIF-->
<!--#4DENDLOOP--> (End for)
</BODY>
</HTML>

4DVAR

Syntax: <!--#4DVAR VarName--> or <!--#4DVAR 4DExpression-->

The tag <!--#4DVAR VarName--> allows you to insert a reference to the 4D variable or
expression VarName anywhere in an HTML page. For example, if you write:
<P>Welcome to <!--#4DVAR vtSiteName-->!</P>
The value of the 4D variable vtSiteName will be inserted in the HTML page.
You can insert a 4D text variable in HTML code, provided its first character is code 1 (i.e.,
vtHTML:=Char(1)+"...HTML code..."). You can also use the tag 4DHTMLVAR.

You can also insert 4D expressions (not only variables) in 4D HTML comments with the
4DVAR tag. You can directly insert a field content (for example <!--#4DVAR
[tableName]fieldName-->) or an item array content (for example <!--#4DVAR arr{1}-->) or a
method returning a value (<!--#4DVAR mymethod-->).
The expression conversion follows the same rules as the variable ones. Moreover, the
expression must comply with 4D syntax rules.

Note: Executing a 4D method with 4DVAR depends on the value of the “Available through
4DACTION, 4DMETHOD and 4DSCRIPT” attribute set in the Method properties. For more
information about this, refer to the Connection Security section.

Although an expression can contain direct calls to 4D functions, this is not recommended for
localization issues. For example, <!--#4DVAR Current date-->, although correctly interpreted
with a 4D in English will not be understood by an French version. The same applies to real
numbers (the decimal separator can be different according to the language). In both cases, we
strongly advise you to assign a variable through programming.
In case of interpretation error, the inserted text will appear as “<!--#4DVAR myvar--> : ## error #
error code”.

4D Language Reference 2029

Notes:
• You work with process variables.
• You can display a picture field content. In addition (in contextual mode only), you can also
display a picture variable content. In both modes, it is not possible to display the content of a
picture array item.
• Since HTML is a word processing oriented application, you will usually work with Text
variables. However, you can also use BLOB variables (which avoid the 32 000 characters
limitation of text type variables). You just need to generate the BLOB in Text without length
mode.
• Examples of 4DVAR uses are given in the section Binding 4D objects with HTML objects.

4DHTMLVAR

Syntax: <!--#4DHTMLVAR VarName--> or <!--#4DHTMLVAR 4DExpression-->

This tag allows assessing a variable or a 4D expression and inserting it in a page as an HTML
expression. In fact, this tag works exactly the same way as the <!--#4DVAR VarName--> tag
when VarName starts with the code 1 (see above).

For example, here are the insertion results of the 4D text variable myvar with the available
tags:
myvar Value Tags Web Page Insertion
myvar:="<B>" <!--#4DVAR myvar--> &lt;B&gt;
myvar:=Char(1)+"<B>" <!--#4DVAR myvar--> <B>
myvar:="<B>" <!--#4DHTMLVAR myvar--> <B>

In case of an interpretation error, the inserted text will be “<!--#4DHTMLVAR myvar--> : ## error
# error code”.

Note: Executing a 4D method with 4DHTMLVAR depends on the value of the “Available
through 4DACTION, 4DMETHOD and 4DSCRIPT” attribute set in the Method properties. For
more information about this, refer to the Connection Security section.

Note: The text variable should be expressed using the ISO Latin-1 character map (for more
information, refer to the Mac to ISO command description).

2030 4D Language Reference

4DSCRIPT/

Syntax: <!--#4DSCRIPT/MethodName/MyParam-->

The 4DSCRIPT tag allows you to execute 4D methods when sending static HTML pages. The
presence of the <!--#4DSCRIPT/MyMethod/MyParam--> tag in a static page as an HTML
comment forces the execution of the MyMethod method with the MyParam parameter as a
string in $1. When loading the home page, 4D calls the On Web Authentication Database
Method (if it exists). If it returns True, 4D executes the method.
The method returns text in $0. If the string starts with the code character 1, it is considered as
HTML (the same principle is true for the variables).

Note: The execution of a method with 4DSCRIPT depends on the value of the “Available
through 4DACTION, 4DMETHOD and 4DSCRIPT” attribute defined in the Method properties.
For more information about this, refer to the Connection Security section.

The analysis of the contents of the page is done when either SEND HTML FILE (.htm, .html,
.shtm, .shtml) or SEND HTML BLOB (blob of type text/html) is called.
Remember that in non-contextual mode, the analysis is also done when a URL points to a file
that has either the “.shtm” or “.shtml” extension (for example
http://www.server.com/dir/page.shtm).

Note: In contextual mode, the method is executed in the context.

For example, let’s say that you insert the following comment “Today is <!--
#4DSCRIPT/MYMETH/MYPARAM-->” into a static page. When loading the page, 4D calls the On
Web Authentication Database Method (if it exists), then calls the MYMETH method and passes
the string “/MYPARAM” as the parameter $1.
The method returns text in $0 (for example “12/31/03”); the expression “Today is <!--
#4DSCRIPT/MYMETH/MYPARAM––>” therefore becomes “Today is 12/31/03”.
The MYMETH method is as follows:

C_TEXT($0) `This parameter must always be declared

C_TEXT($1) `This parameter must always be declared
$0:=String(Current date)

Warning: You must always declare the $0 and $1 parameters in the called method.

Note: A method called by 4DSCRIPT must not call interface elements (DIALOG, ALERT...).

4D Language Reference 2031

As 4D executes methods in their order of appearance, it is absolutely possible to call a method
that sets the value of many variables that are referenced further in the document, whichever
mode you are using.

Note: You can insert as many <!--#4DSCRIPT...--> comments as you want in a static page.

Compatibility note: In 4D previous versions, the same tag, 4DACTION, could be used as a URL
(for example, http://myserver/4DACTION/meth), or as an HTML comment in a static page (<!--
#4DACTION/meth-->). As this could be misleading, starting with 4D version 6.7 the 4DSCRIPT
tag replaces the 4DACTION tag. It is used only as an HTML comment (<!--#4DSCRIPT/meth-->)
and has the same effect as <!--#4DACTION/meth-->. 4DACTION is now just used for URLs.

4DINCLUDE

Syntax: <!--#4DINCLUDE Path-->

This comment allows the body of another HTML page (indicated by the path parameter) to be
included in an HTML page. An HTML page body is included within the <BODY> and
</BODY> tags (the tags themselves are not included).
The <!--#4DINCLUDE --> comment is very useful for tests (<!--#4DIF-->) or loops (<!--#4DLOOP--
>). It is very convenient to include tags according to a criteria or randomly.
When including, regardless of the mode and file name extension, 4D analyses the called page
and then inserts the contents (modified or not) in the page originating the 4DINCLUDE call.

An included page with the <!--#4DINCLUDE --> comment is loaded in the Web server cache the
same way as pages called via a URL or sent with the SEND HTML FILE command.

In path, put the path leading to the document to include. Warning: In the case of a
4DINCLUDE call, the path is relative to the document being analyzed, that is, the “parent”
document. Use the slash character (/) as a folder separator and the two dots (..) to go up one
level (HTML syntax).

Note: When you use the 4DINCLUDE tag with the PROCESS HTML TAGS command, the
default folder is the folder containing the database structure file.

The number of <!--#4DINCLUDE path--> within a page is unlimited. However, the <!--
#4DINCLUDE path--> calls can be made only at one level. This means that, for example, you
cannot insert <!--#4DINCLUDE mydoc3.html--> in the mydoc2.html body page, which is called
by <!--#4DINCLUDE mydoc2--> inserted in mydoc1.html.
Furthermore, 4D verifies that inclusions are not recursive.

2032 4D Language Reference

In case of error, the inserted text is "<!--#4DINCLUDE path--> :The document cannot be
opened".

Note: In contextual mode, if a page is inserted in a form via a tag {mypage.html} inserted in a
static text area, the 4DINCLUDE comments (if any) will be ignored.

Examples
<!--#4DINCLUDE subpage.html-->
<!--#4DINCLUDE folder/subpage.html-->
<!--#4DINCLUDE ../folder/subpage.html-->

4DIF, 4DELSE and 4DENDIF

Syntax: <!--#4DIF expression--> <!--#4DELSE--> <!--#4DENDIF-->

Used with the <!--#4DELSE--> (optional) and <!--#4DENDIF--> comments, the <!--#4DIF
expression--> comment offers the possibility to execute HTML code conditionally.
The expression parameter can contain any valid 4D expression returning a Boolean value. It
must be indicated within parenthesis and comply with the 4D syntax rules.

The <!--#4DIF expression--> ... <!--#4DENDIF--> blocks can be nested in several levels. Like in
4D, each <!--#4DIF expression--> should match a <!--#4DENDIF-->.

In case of an interpretation error, the text “<!--#4DIF expression-->: A boolean expression was
expected” is inserted instead of the contents located between <!--#4DIF --> and <!--#4DENDIF--
>.
Likewise, if there are not as many <!--#4DENDIF--> as <!--#4DIF -->, the text “<!--#4DIF
expression-->: 4DENDIF expected” is inserted instead of the contents located between <!--#4DIF
--> and <!--#4DENDIF-->.

Example
This example of code inserted in a static HTML page displays a different label according the
vname#"" expression result:

<BODY>
...
<!--#4DIF (vname#"")-->
Names starting with <!--#4DVAR vname-->.
<!--#4DELSE-->

4D Language Reference 2033

No name has been found.
<!--#4DENDIF-->
...
</BODY>

4DLOOP and 4DENDLOOP

Syntax: <!--#4DLOOP condition--> <!--#4DENDLOOP-->

This comment allows repetition of a portion of HTML code as long as the condition is
fulfilled. The portion is delimited by <!--#4DLOOP--> and <!--#4DENDLOOP-->.

The <!--#4DLOOP condition--> ... <!--#4DENDLOOP--> blocks can be nested. Like in 4D, each <!-
-#4DLOOP condition--> should match a <!--#4DENDLOOP-->.

There are three kinds of conditions:

• <!--#4DLOOP [table]-->
This syntax makes a loop for each record from the table current selection in the current
process. The HTML code portion located between the two comments is repeated for each
current selection record.

Note: When the 4DLOOP tag is used with a table, records are loaded in Read only mode.

The following HTML code:

<!--#4DLOOP [People]-->
<!--#4DVAR [People]Name--> <!--#4DVAR [People]Surname--><BR>
<!--#4DENDLOOP-->

... could be expressed in 4D language in the following way:

FIRST RECORD([People])
While(Not(End selection([People])))
...
NEXT RECORD([People])
End while

2034 4D Language Reference

• <!--#4DLOOP array-->
This syntax makes a loop for each item array. The array current item is increased when each
HTML code portion is repeated.

Note: This syntax cannot be used with two dimension arrays. In this case, it is better to
combine a method with nested loops.

The following HTML code example:

<!--#4DLOOP arr_names-->
<!--#4DVAR arr_names{arr_names}--><BR>
<!--#4DENDLOOP-->
... could be expressed in 4D language in the following way:
For ($Elem;1;Size of array(arr_names))
arr_names:=$Elem
...
End for

• <!--#4DLOOP method-->
This syntax makes a loop as long as the method returns True. The method takes a Long Integer
parameter type. First it is called with the value 0 to allow an initialization stage (if necessary);
it is then called with the values 1,then 2, then 3 and so on, as long as it returns True.

For security reasons, the On Web Authentication Database Method can be called once just before
the initialization stage (method execution with 0 as parameter). If the authentication is OK,
the initialization stage will proceed.

Warning: C_BOOLEAN($0) and C_LONGINT($1) MUST be declared within the method for
compilation purposes.

The following HTML code example:

<!--#4DLOOP my_method-->
<!--#4DVAR var--> <BR>
<!--#4DENDLOOP-->

4D Language Reference 2035

... could be expressed in 4D language in the following way:
If(AuthenticationWebOK)
If(my_method(0))
$counter:=1
While(my_method($counter))
...
$counter:=$counter+1
End while
End if
End if
The my_method method can be as follow:
C_LONGINT($1)
C_BOOLEAN($0)
If($1=0)
`Initialisation
$0:=True
Else
If($1<50)
...
var:= ...
$0:=True
Else
$0:=False `Stops the loop
End if
End if
In case of an interpretation error, the text “<!--#4DLOOP expression-->: description” is inserted
instead of the contents located between <!--#4DLOOP --> and <!--#4DENDLOOP-->.
The following messages can be displayed:
- Unexpected expression type (standard error);
- Incorrect table name (error on the table name);
- An array was expected (the variable is not an array or is a two dimension array);
- The method does not exist;
- Syntax error (when the method is executing);
- Access error (you do not have the appropriate access privileges to access the table or the
method).
- 4DENDLOOP expected (the <!--#4DENDLOOP--> number does not match the <!--#4DLOOP --
>).
See Also
Binding 4D objects with HTML objects, URLs and Form Actions, Using the Contextual Mode.

2036 4D Language Reference

Web Server Settings Web Server

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

You can configure the operation of the 4D Web server using the parameters defined in the
Web theme of the database Preferences. This section describes the parameters of the
Configuration, Advanced and Options pages of this theme as well as the “Web Compatibility”
section of the Application/Compatibility page.

Publishing Page
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Publish Database at Startup

Indicates whether the Web server will be launched on startup of the 4D application. This
option is described in the Web server configuration and connection management section.

4D Language Reference 2037

TCP port number
By default, 4D publishes a Web database on the regular Web TCP Port, which is port 80. If that
port is already used by another Web service, you need to change the TCP Port used by 4D for
this database. Modifying the TCP port allows you to start the 4D Web server under Mac OS X
without being the root user of the machine (see Web server configuration and connection
management section).
To do so, go to the TCP Port enterable area and indicate an appropriate value (a TCP port not
already used by another TCP/IP service running on the same machine).

Note: If you specify 0, 4D will use the default TCP port number 80.

From a Web browser, you need to include that non-default TCP port number into the address
you enter for connecting to the Web database. The address must have a suffix consisting of a
colon followed by the port number. For example, if you are using the TCP port number 8080,
you will specify “123.4.567.89:8080”.

WARNING: If you use TCP port numbers other than the default numbers (80 for standard
mode and 443 for SLL mode), be careful not to use port numbers that are defaults for other
services that you might want to use simultaneously. For example, if you also plan to use the
FTP protocol on your Web server machine, do not use the TCP port 20 and 21, which are the
default ports for that protocol (unless you know what you are doing). To find out the standard
assignment of TCP port numbers, refer to the Appendix B, TCP port numbers section in the
documentation of the 4D Internet Commands. Ports numbers below 256 are reserved for well
known services and ports numbers from 256 to 1024 are reserved for specific services
originated on the UNIX platforms. For maximum security, specify a port number beyond these
intervals, for example in the 2000's or 3000's.

Defining the IP Address for the HTTP Requests

You can define the IP address on which the Web server must receive HTTP requests.

By default, the server responds to all IP addresses (All option).

The drop-down list automatically lists all available IP addresses on the machine. When you
select a specific address, the server only responds to requests sent to this address.

This feature is for 4D Web Servers located on machines with multiple TCP/IP addresses. It is,
for example, frequently the case of most Internet host providers.

2038 4D Language Reference

Implementing such a MultiHoming system requires specific configurations on the Web server
machine:

• Installing secondary IP addresses on Mac OS

To configure a MultiHoming system on Mac OS:
1. You must use Open Transport version 1.3 or later. This new feature is only available in this
version of Open Transport.

2. Open the TCP/IP Control Panel.

3. Select the Manually option from the Configuration pop up menu.

4. Create a text file called "Secondary IP Addresses" and save it in the Preferences subfolder of
your System folder.
Each line of the "Secondary IP Addresses" file should contain a secondary IP address and an
optional subnet mask and router address for the secondary IP address.

Please check the Apple Open Transport documentation for more information.

• Installing secondary IP addresses on Windows

To configure a MultiHoming system on Windows:
1. Select the following sequences of commands:
• Windows NT: Start menu > Settings > Control Panel > Network Control panel > Protocols
tab > TCP/IP Protocol > Properties button > Advanced.
• Windows 2000: Start menu > Settings > Network and Dial-up Connections > Local Area
Connection > Properties button > Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) > Properties button > Advanced.
The "Advanced TCP/IP Settings" dialog box appears.
• Windows XP: Start menu > Control Panel > Network and Internet Connections > Network
connections > Local Area Connection (Properties) > Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) > Properties
button > Advanced... button.
The "Advanced TCP/IP Settings" dialog is displayed.

2. Click the Add.... button in the "IP Addresses" area, and add additional IP addresses.
You can define up to 5 different IP addresses. You may need to consult your systems
administrator to do so. For more information, please refer to Windows documentation.

Allow SSL for Web Server

Indicates whether or not the Web server will accept secure connections. This option is
described in the Using SSL Protocol section.

4D Language Reference 2039

HTTPS Port Number
Allows you to modify the TCP/IP port number used by the Web server for secured HTTP
connections over SSL (HTTPS protocol). By default, the HTTPS port number is set to 443
(standard value).
You may consider changing this port number for two main reasons:
• for security reasons — hacker attacks against Web servers are generally concentrated on
standard TCP ports (80 and 443).
• under Mac OS X, in order to allow “standard” users to launch the Web server in a secured
mode — under Mac OS X, the use of TCP/IP ports reserved for Web publications (0 to 1023)
requires specific access privileges: only the root user can launch an application using these
ports. In order for standard users to be able to launch the Web server, one solution is to
modify the TCP/IP port number (see the Web server configuration and connection management
section).
You can pass any valid value (in order to avoid access restrictions under Mac OS X, you should
pass a value greater than 1023). For more information about TCP port numbers, refer to the
“TCP port number” paragraph above.

Default HTML Root

Allows you to define the default location of the Web site files and to indicate the hierarchical
level on the disk above which the files will not be accessible. This option is described in the
Connection Security section.

Defining a Default Home Page

You can designate a default home page for all the browsers that connect to the database, no
matter which mode (contextual or non-contextual) has been defined for the Web sessions.
This page can be static or semi-dynamic.

2040 4D Language Reference

By default, when the Web server is launched for the first time, 4D creates a home page named
“index.html” and puts it in the HTML root folder. If you do not modify this configuration,
any browser connecting to the Web server will obtain the following page:

To modify the default home page, simply replace it in the database root folder with your own
“index.html” page or enter the relative access path of the page that you want to define in the
“Default Home Page” entry area.
The access path must be set up in relation to the default HTML root folder.
In order to ensure multi-platform compatibility of your databases, the 4D Web server uses
particular writing conventions to define access paths. The syntax rules are as follows:
• folders are separated by a slash (“/”)
• the access path must not end with a slash (“/”)
• to “go up” one level in the folder hierarchy, enter “..” (two periods) before the folder name
• the access path must not start with a slash (“/”)
For example, if you want the default home page to be “MyHome.htm”, and it is located in the
“Web” folder (itself located in the default HTML root folder of the database), enter
“Web/MyHome.htm”.

4D Language Reference 2041

Note: You can also define a default home page for each Web process by using the routine SET
HOME PAGE.
If you do not specify a default custom home page, the operation of the Web server will differ
depending on the startup mode:
• If the Web server starts up in non-contextual mode (standard mode), the On Web Connection
Database Method is called. It’s up to you to process the request procedurally.
• If the Web Server starts up in contextual mode, the current menu bar — by default, menu
bar number 1 — is sent as the home page, as in previous versions of 4D.

Starting Mode
Allows you to define the mode in which the Web server will be started. This option is
described in the Using the Contextual Mode section.

Reuse Temporary Contexts (only visible with 4D Client)

Allows you to optimize the operation of the 4D Client Web server by reusing Web processes
created for processing previous Web requests. In fact, the Web server of 4D Client needs a
specific Web process for the handling of each Web request; when necessary, this process
connects to the 4D Server machine in order to access the data and database engine. It then
generates a temporary context using its own variables, selections, etc. Once the request has
been dealt with, this process is killed.
When the Reuse Temporary Contexts option is checked, 4D maintains the specific Web
processes created on 4D Client and reuses them for subsequent requests. By removing the
process creation stage, Web server performance is improved.
In return, you must make sure in this case to systematically initialize the variables used in 4D
methods in order to avoid getting incorrect results. Similarly, it is necessary to erase any
current selections or records defined during the previous request.

2042 4D Language Reference

Advanced page
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Cache for Static Pages

The 4D Web Server has a cache that allows you to load static pages, GIF images, JPEG images
(<128 kb) and style sheets (.css files) in memory, as they are requested.
Using the cache allows you to significantly increase the Web server’s performance when
sending static pages.

The cache is shared between all the Web processes. You can set the size of the cache in the
Preferences. By default, the cache of the static pages is not enabled. To activate it, simply
check the Use the 4D Web cache option.

You can modify the size of the cache in the Pages Cache Size area. The value you set depends
on the number and size of your Web site’s static pages, as well as the resources that the host
machines has at its disposal.

4D Language Reference 2043

Note: While using your Web database, you can check the performance of the cache by using
the routine WEB CACHE STATISTICS. If, for example, you notice that the cache’s rate of use is
close to 100%, you may want to consider increasing the size that has been allocated to it.
The /4DSTATS and /4DHTMLSTATS URLs allow you to also obtain information about the
cache’s state. Please refer to section Information about the Web Site.

Once the cache has been enabled, the 4D Web server looks for the page requested by the
browser first in the cache. If it finds the page, it sends it immediately. If not, 4D loads the page
from disk and places it in the cache.
When the cache is full and additional space is required, 4D “unloads” the oldest pages first,
among the least demanded ones.

Clearing the Cache

At any moment, you can clear the cache of the pages and images that it contains (if, for
example, you have modified a static page and you want to reload it in the cache).
To do so, you just have to click on the Clear Cache button. The cache is then immediately
cleared.

Web Process Timeout

Allows you to define the timeout for the Web connection processes (contextual mode only).
This option is described in the Using the Contextual Mode section.

Defining the Maximum Number of Web Processes

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

This option indicates the strictly high limit of Maximum Concurrent Web Processes of any
type (contextual, non-contextual or belonging to the“pool of processes”) that can be
simultaneously open on the server. This parameter allows prevention of 4D Server saturation
as the result of massive number of requests or an excessive demand of contexts creation.

By default, this value is 32000. You can set the number anywhere between 10 and 32000.

When the maximum number of concurrent Web processes (minus one) is reached, 4D no
longer creates new processes and sends the following message “Server unavailable” (status
HTTP 503 – Service Unavailable) for each new request.

How to determine the right value?

In theory, the maximum number of Web processes is the result of the following formula:
Available memory/Web process stack size.
Another solution is to visualize the information on Web processes displayed in the Runtime
Explorer: the current number of Web processes and the maximum number reached since the
Web server boot are indicated.

2044 4D Language Reference

About the Pool of Web Processes
The “pool” of Web processes allows increasing the reactivity of the Web server in the non-
contextual mode. This reserve is sized by a minimum (0 by default) and a maximum (10 by
default) of processes to recycle. These processes can be modified using the SET DATABASE
PARAMETER command. Once the maximum number of Web processes has been changed, if
this number is inferior to the superior limit in the “pool”, this limit is lowered to the
maximum number of Web processes. The maximum number of Web processes can also be
defined using the SET DATABASE PARAMETER command.

Using Javascript for Data Entry Controls

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

When this option is checked, in contextual mode a part of the data entry controls can be done
on the browsers by using automatic Javascripts.

On the browser, the data entry controls and the data types (fields or variables) to which they
can be applied are as follows:
• minimum value (for numeric values)
• maximum value (for numeric values)
• mandatory value (for numeric and alphanumeric values)

Generated Javascripts, which are small in size, display alert dialog boxes without preventing
the user from accepting a data entry (it is still 4D’s responsibility).
Actually, if a data entry area contains an incorrect value, an alert message is displayed on the
browser when the user clicks on a button (OK, Cancel, etc.):

Once the alert dialog box is validated, if the user clicks a second time on the button, the
button’s action is then taken into account.
Complete data entry control is carried out by the 4D Web server.

Save Request in File (logweb.txt)

This option enables you to generate a log of requests sent to the Web server in the form of a
CLF text file. This option is described in the Information about the Web Site section.

“Passwords” area
Configuration of Web site access protection using passwords. This option is described in the
Connection Security section.

4D Language Reference 2045

 Edited by Foxit Reader
Copyright(C) by Foxit Software Company,2005-2008
Options page For Evaluation Only.
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Directly Sending Extended Characters

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

By default, the 4D Web server converts the extended characters in the dynamic and static Web
pages according to HTML standards before sending them. They are then interpreted by the
browsers.
You can set the Web server so that the extended characters are sent “as is”, without converting
them into HTML entities. This option has shown a speed increase on most foreign operating
systems (especially the Japanese system).

To do this, check the Send Extended Characters Directly option.

2046 4D Language Reference

 Edited by Foxit Reader
Copyright(C) by Foxit Software Company,2005-2008
Standard Sets For Evaluation Only.
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The Standard Set drop-down list allows you to define the set of characters to be used by the
4D Web server. By default, the character set is UTF-8.

Keep-Alive Connections
The Web server of 4D can use keep-alive connections. The keep-alive option allows you to
maintain a single open TCP connection for the set of exchanges between the Web browser
and the server to save system resources and to optimize transfers.
The Use Keep-Alive Connections option enables or disables keep-alive TCP connections for the
Web server. This option is enabled by default. In most cases, it is advisable to keep this option
check since it accelerates the exchanges. If the Web browser does not support connection keep
alive, the 4D Web server automatically switches to HTTP/1.0.
The 4D Web server keep-alive function concerns all TCP/IP connections (HTTP, HTTPS), in
contextual and non-contextual mode. Note however that keep-alive connections are not
always used for all 4D Web processes. In some cases, other optimized internal functions may
be invoked. Keep-alive connections are useful mainly for static pages.

Two options allow you to set how the keep-alive connections work:
• Number of requests by connection: Allows you to set the maximum number of requests and
responses able to travel over a connection keep alive. Limiting the number of requests per
connection allows you to prevent server flooding due to a large number of incoming requests
(a technique used by hackers).
The default value (100) can be increased or decreased depending on the resources of the
machine hosting the 4D Web server.
• Timeout: This value defines the maximum wait period (in seconds) during which the Web
server maintains an open TCP connection without receiving any requests from the Web
browser. Once this period is over, the server closes the connection.
If the Web browser sends a request after the connection is closed, a new TCP connection is
automatically created. This operation is not visible for the user.

4D Language Reference 2047

 Edited by Foxit Reader
Copyright(C) by Foxit Software Company,2005-2008
Web Compatibility For Evaluation Only.
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The Compatibility page of the Application theme of the Preferences includes options allowing
you to adjust the operation of the Web server:

Use 4DVAR comments instead of Brackets

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

This option allows you to define the notation to use when inserting 4D variables on static
pages.
• When the option is checked (default value), the syntax you need to use is the standard
HTML notation <!--#4DVAR MYVAR--> (A space character must be inserted between 4DVAR and
the variable name).
• When the option is not checked, the syntax you need to use is the notation with square
brackets ([MYVAR]) — which is a proprietary solution used in former versions of the 4D Web
server.

New Mode to Reference Contexts

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

When this option is checked (default value), in contextual mode the Web server places the
current context number in the basic URL of the documents sent to the browsers.
With the previous system (option not checked), the 4D Web server sends the context number
for each element of a page to the browser, which slows down processing.
This option can be unchecked for reasons of compatibility. Keep in mind that after modifying
it, you must restart the database in order for the new operation to take effect.

2048 4D Language Reference

Remove "/" on unknown URLs
In previous versions of 4D, unknown URLs (that corresponded neither to an existing page nor
to a 4D special URL) were returned in the On Web Authentication and On Web Connection
database methods ($1) without being preceded by the “/” character. This particularity has been
removed starting with version 2004.
However, if you have set up mechanisms based on this particularity and wish to keep the
previous behavior, you can check the Remove “/” on unknown URLs option. By default, this
option is checked for converted databases and unchecked for new databases.

See Also
Connection Security, SET DATABASE PARAMETER, SET HOME PAGE, Using the Contextual Mode.

4D Language Reference 2049

 Edited by Foxit Reader
Copyright(C) by Foxit Software Company,2005-2008
For Evaluation Only.
Information about the Web Site Web Server

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4D allows you to obtain information about the functioning of your 4D Web site.

• You can control the site by using particular URLs (/4DSTATS, /4DHTMLSTATS,
/4DCACHECLEAR and /4DWEBTEST).
• You can generate a log of all the requests.
• You can obtain information regarding the Web Server in the Watch page of the Runtime
Explorer window.

Web Server Management URLs

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4D Web Server accepts four particular URLs: /4DSTATS, /4DHTMLSTATS, /4DCACHECLEAR and
/4DWEBTEST.
• /4DSTATS, /4DHTMLSTATS and /4DCACHECLEAR are only available to the Designer and
Administrator of the database. If the database’s 4D password system has not been activated,
these URLs are available to all the users.
• /4DWEBTEST is always available.

/4DSTATS
The /4DSTATS URL returns the following information in pure text form:
• the number of “hits” (low-level connections),
• the number of contexts created,
• the number of contexts that could not be created,
• the number of password errors,
• the number of pages stored in the cache,
• the percentage of cache used,
• the list of pages and JPEG or GIF files stored in the cache of the static pages (*).

(*) For more information about the cache of static pages and pictures, please refer to section
Web Server Settings.

This information can allow you to check the functioning of your server and eventually adapt
the corresponding parameters.

Note: The command WEB CACHE STATISTICS allows you to also obtain information about how
the cache is being used for static pages.

2050 4D Language Reference

/4DHTMLSTATS
The /4DHTMLSTATS URL returns, also in pure text form, the same information as the /4DSTATS
URL. The difference is that in the last field (contained in the cache), only the list of HTML
pages — without the .GIF and .JPEG files — present in the cache is returned.

/4DCACHECLEAR
The /4DCACHECLEAR URL immediately clears the cache of the static pages and images. It
allows you to therefore “force” the update of the pages that have been modified.

/4DWEBTEST
The /4DWEBTEST URL is designed to check the Web Server status. When this URL is called, 4D
returns a text file only with the following HTTP fields filled:

• Date: current date at the RFC 822 format

For example: “Date: Wed, 26 Jan 2000 13:12:50 GMT”
• Server: 4D WebStar_D/internal version number
For example: “4D WebStar_D/7.0”
• User-Agent: name and version @ IP client address
For example: “Mozilla/4.08 (Macintosh; I; PPC, Nav) @ 192.193.00.00”

Connection Log File

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4D allows you to obtain a log of requests.

This file is named “logweb.txt” and is automatically located:

• with 4D in local mode and 4D Server, in the Logs folder located next to the database
structure file.
• with 4D in remote mode, in the Logs subfolder of the 4D client database folder (cache
folder).

4D Language Reference 2051

Activation and Format
The activation and configuration of the log file contents is carried out in the Preference of the
application on the Web/Log Format page:

Note: The activation and deactivation of the log file of requests can also be carried out by
programming using the SET DATABASE PARAMETER command.

The log format menu provides the following options:

• No Log File: Whenthis option is selected, 4D will not generate a log file of requests.
• CLF (Common Log Format): When this option is selected, the log of requests is generated in
CLF format. With the CLF format, each line of the file represents a request, such as:
host rfc931 user [DD/MMM/YYYY:HH:MM:SS] "request" state length

Each field is separated by a space and each line ends by the CR/LF sequence (character 13,
character 10).
• host: IP address of the client (ex. 192.100.100.10)
• rfc931: information not generated by 4D, it’s always - (a minus sign)
• user: user name as it is authenticated, or else it is - (a minus sign). If the user name contains
spaces, they will be replaced by _ (an underscore).
• DD: day, MMM: a 3-letter abbreviation for the month name (Jan, Feb,...), YYYY: year, HH:
hour, MM: minutes, SS: seconds

2052 4D Language Reference

• The date and time are local to the server.
• request: request sent by the client (ex. GET /index.htm HTTP/1.0)
• state: reply given by the server.
• length: size of the data returned (except the HTTP header) or 0.

Note: For performance reasons, the operations are saved in a memory buffer in packets of 1Kb
before being written to disk. The operations are also written to disk if no request has been sent
every 5 seconds.

The possible values of state are as follows:

200: OK
204: No contents
302: Redirection
304: Not modified
400: Incorrect request
401: Authentication required
404: Not found
500: Internal error
The CLF format cannot be customized.
• DLF (Combined Log Format): When this option is selected, the request log is generated in
DLF format. DLF format is similar to CLF format and uses exactly the same structure. It simply
adds two additional HTTP fields at the end of each request: Referer and User-agent.
- Referer: Contains the URL of the page pointing to the requested document.
- User-agent: Contains the name and version of the browser or software of the client at the
origin of the request.
The DLF format cannot be customized.
• ELF (Extended Log Format): When this option is selected, the request log is generated in ELF
format. The ELF format is very widespread in the world of HTTP browsers. It can be used to
build sophisticated logs that meet specific needs. For this reason, the ELF format can be
customized: it is possible to choose the fields to be recorded as well as their order of insertion
into the file.
• WLF (WebStar Log Format): When this option is selected, the request log is generated in
WLF format. WLF format was developed specifically for the 4D WebSTAR server. It is similar to
the ELF format, with only a few additional fields. Like the ELF format, it can be customized.

Configuring the fields

When you choose the ELF (Extended Log Format) or WLF (WebStar Log Format) format, the
“Weg Log Token Selection” area displays the fields available for the chosen format. You will
need to select each field to be included in the log. To do so, use the arrow buttons or simply
drag and drop the desired fields into the “Selected Tokens” area.

Note: You cannot select the same field twice.

4D Language Reference 2053

The following table lists the fields available for each format (in alphabetical order) and
describes its contents:
Field ELF WLF Value
BYTES_RECEIVED X Number of bytes received by the server
BYTES_SENT X X Number of bytes sent by the server to the client
C_DNS X X IP address of the DNS (ELF: field identical to the C_IP field)
C_IP X X IP address of the client (for example 192.100.100.10)
CONNECTION_ID X Connection ID number
CS(COOKIE) X X Information about cookies contained in the HTTP request
CS(HOST) X X Host field of the HTTP request
CS(REFERER) X X URL of the page pointing to the requested document
CS(USER_AGENT) X X Information about the software and operating system of the
client
CS_SIP X X IP address of the server
CS_URI X X URI on which the request is made
CS_URI_QUERY X X Request query parameters
CS_URI_STEM X X Part of request without query parameters
DATE X X DD: day, MMM: 3-letter abbreviation for month (Jan,
Feb, etc.), YYYY: year
METHOD X X HTTP method used for the request sent to the server
PATH_ARGS X CGI parameters: string located after the “$” character
STATUS X X Reply provided by the server
TIME X X HH: hour, MM: minutes, SS: seconds
TRANSFER_TIME X X Time requested by server to generate the reply
USER X X User name if authenticated; otherwise - (minus sign).
If the user name contains spaces, they are replaced
by _ (underlines)
URL X URL requested by the client

Note: Dates and times are given in GMT.

Periodicity of Backups
Since a Web log file can become considerably large, it is possible to set up an automatic
archiving mechanism. The triggering of a backup can be based on a certain period of time
(expressed in hours, days, week or months), or based on the file size; when the set deadline (or
file size) is reached, 4D automatically closes and archives the current log file and creates a new
one.
When the Web log file backup is triggered, the log file is archived in a folder named “Logweb
Archives,” which is created at the same level as the logweb.txt file (that is, next to the database
structure file).
The archived ile is renamed based on the following example:
“DYYYY_MM_DD_Thh_mm_ss.txt.” For instance, for a file archived on September 4, 2006 at
3:50 p.m. and 7 seconds: “D2006_09_04_T15_50_07.txt.”

2054 4D Language Reference

Backup Parameters
The automatic backup parameters for the request log are set on the Web/Log Scheduler page of
the application Preferences:

First you must choose the frequency (days, weeks, etc.) or the file size limit criterion by
clicking on the corresponding radio button. You must then specify the precise moment of the
backup if necessary.
• No Backup: The scheduled backup function is deactivated.
• Every X hour(s): This option is used to program backups on an hourly basis. You can enter a
value between 1 and 24 .
- starting at: Used to set the time at which the first back up will begin.
• Every X day(s) at X: This option is used to program backups on a daily basis. Enter 1 if you
want to perform a daily backup. When this option is checked, you must indicate the time
when the backup must be started.
• Every X week(s), day at X: This option is used to program backups on a weekly basis. Enter 1
if you want to perform a weekly backup. When this option is checked, you must indicate the
day(s) of the week and the time when each backup must be started. You can select several days
of the week if desired. For example, you can use this option to set two weekly backups: one on
Wednesdays and one on Fridays.
• Every X month(s), Xth day at X: This option is used to program backups on a monthly basis.
Enter 1 if you want to perform a monthly backup. When this option is checked, you must
indicate the day of the month and the time when the backup must be started.

4D Language Reference 2055

• Every X MB: This option is used to program backups based on the size of the current request
log file. A backup is automatically triggered when the file reaches the set size. You can set a
size limit of 1, 10, 100 or 1000 MB.

Note: In the case of scheduled backups, if the Web server was not launched when the backup
was scheduled to occur, on the next startup 4D considers the backup as failed and applies the
appropriate settings, set in the dataase Preferences.

Runtime Explorer Information

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The Watch page (“Information” heading) in the Runtime Explorer displays three pieces of
information relative to the Web Server:

• Web Cache Usage: indicates the number of pages present in the Web cache as well as its use
percentage. This information is only available if the Web server is active and if the cache size
is greater than 0.

• Web Server Elapsed Time: indicates the duration of use (in hours:minutes:seconds format) of
the Web server. This information is only available if the Web server is active.

• Web Hits Count: indicates the total number of HTTP requests received since the Web server
boot, as well as an instantaneous number of requests per second (measure taken between two
Runtime Explorer updates). This information is only available if the Web server is active.

Note: For more information about the Runtime Explorer, refer to 4D Design Reference manual.

See Also
WEB CACHE STATISTICS, Web Server Settings.

2056 4D Language Reference

 Edited by Foxit Reader
Copyright(C) by Foxit Software Company,2005-2008
For Evaluation Only.
Using the Contextual Mode Web Server

version 2003 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The 4D Web server can operate in two different modes: non-contextual mode (standard mode)
and contextual mode. This section describes these two modes and details the particularities of
the contextual mode.

Warning: The contextual mode can only be used with 4D in local mode and 4D Server. The
Web server of 4D in remote mode does not support this mode.

Note: The section Your First Time with the Web Server gives a complete example of the
publication of a database in contextual mode.

Non-contextual and contextual mode

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The 4D Web server uses the non-contextual mode by default (disconnected mode). In this
mode, the operation of the 4D Web server is comparable to that of standard Web servers:
when an HTTP request is received from a browser (URL, posted form, etc.), the server processes
the request, then returns a response when necessary (sending a Web page, for example). No
specific connection is maintained subsequently between the server and the browser.
In non-contextual mode, the Web server can send static or semi-dynamic pages. Semi-
dynamic pages allow you to access data in the database or to carry out any type of processing
using special 4D tags that are evaluated at the time the page is sent. Semi-dynamic pages allow
you to build, manage and send Web pages whose content originates in whole or in part from
processing carried out by 4D. Non-contextual mode generally meets most Web site
development needs.

In contextual mode, connection to a Web browser causes the creation of a context in which
the current selection, its variables, etc. will be placed. In a way, each browser is considered as a
4D client connecting to the database in Application mode. The context is handled by a
specific Web connection process.
This mode allows instant publication of a 4D database on the Web, without it being necessary
to create Web pages: 4D manages and sends to the browser dynamic pages stemming from
automatic conversion of database menu bars and forms into HTML. In contextual mode, it is
still possible to send semi-dynamic or static pages. It is also possible to insert HTML or
Javascript code into 4D forms in order to add functions to the pages displayed on the Web.
In addition, in this mode 4D automatically handles simultaneous access to data: when a
browser or a 4D client machine loads a record, 4D locks it for other users in a transparent
manner, whether they be browsers or other 4D client machines. Moreover, 4D allows you to
carry out data entry during a transaction with a Web browser, in the same way as with 4D.

4D Language Reference 2057

 Edited by Foxit Reader
Copyright(C) by Foxit Software Company,2005-2008
Forto
This system enables the 4D Web server Evaluation Only.
control the actions of the browsers and to guarantee
data integrity.
In return for this ease of publication, the contextual mode includes several constraints:
- Web browsers allowing “surfing” from one Web page to another, one site to another, etc.
With a client/server type database, this navigation must be controlled in order to respect the
logic of database transactions. Each entry carried out by a user in a record must be validated or
cancelled in order not to remain in an uncertain state. The 4D Web server engine contains
automatic mechanisms that manage database sessions and contexts. These mechanisms
prevent the use of certain standard browser functions (Reload, Previous page, etc., see next
paragraph).
- The connection process in charge of maintaining the context remains active until the
timeout of the browser defined in the database Preferences is reached. If, for instance, the
browser has left the site in the meantime, the context is then “wasted”.
These constraints mean that the contextual mode is intended rather for Intranet use or for use
within the framework of specific Internet applications.

How 4D Web Server functions is summarized in the following figure:

2058 4D Language Reference

 Edited by Foxit Reader
Copyright(C) by Foxit Software Company,2005-2008
Choice of mode For Evaluation Only.
Choosing the 4D Web server operating mode is carried out as follows:
• On startup of the server, using the Starting Mode option of the database Preferences,
• During Web server use, according to the URLs sent or the commands executed.
In fact, some special URLs and certain 4D commands can be used to change the mode. In
principle, the current mode remains in use as long as no URL or 4D command causes it to
change.

• Defining the contextual mode on startup

By default, the Web server starts in non-contextual mode. You can start the Web server
directly in contextual mode. This means that when a user connects to the database, a context
is automatically generated.
To specify the non-contextual mode on startup, check the Contextual Mode (permanent
context) option on the Configuration page in the Web theme of the database Preferences
dialog:

• Commands and URLs that cause the mode to change

During database operation, you can change mode by calling the following elements:
• Change to non-contextual mode:
- SEND HTML BLOB by passing True in the optional noContext parameter
- SEND HTML TEXT by passing True in the optional noContext parameter
- SEND HTTP REDIRECT
- URL beginning with /4DACTION
• Change to contextual mode:
- URL beginning with /4DMETHOD/MyMethod.
When the /4DMETHOD/MyMethod URL is sent, the 4D Web server creates a new context and
carries out the following operations:
- The On Web Authentication Database Method is executed (if any),
- The On Web Connection Database Method is executed (if any) — in this particular case, $1 is
equal to /4DMETHOD/MyMethod instead of / (slash),
- Finally, the requested method is executed in the newly created context.

4D Language Reference 2059

Finding out the number of contexts generated
Depending on the actions that they carry out, some Web processes use Web contexts and
other do not.
You can find out the number of contexts generated using the PROCESS PROPERTIES command:
for any Web process, this command indicates, in the origin parameter, whether it uses a
context (-11, Web process with context) or not (-3, Web process without context).

Web Connection Context Management

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Web Connection Context ID

The number present in the name of the Web connection process is called the context ID,
which is randomly generated and uniquely identifies each Web connection. The context ID is
maintained on both the 4D and the browser sides during the entire Web connection. In this
example, the context ID is 1066993139. In the Web browser window shown here, you can see
this number in the URL displayed in the Location area of the browser:

The URLs are automatically maintained by 4D during the whole Web session in contextual
mode. Each time an HTTP request is received via TCP/IP, 4D extracts the context ID from the
URL, and thereby can redirect the request to the right Web Connection process.

Context IDs:
• Enable 4D to maintain both a Web and Database session over each Web connection.
• Transparently handle multiple concurrent Web connections.
• Prevent future undesirable connections when using bookmarks, because a different context
ID is generated at each connection.

2060 4D Language Reference

 Edited by Foxit Reader
Copyright(C) by Foxit Software Company,2005-2008
For Evaluation
Synchronizing Web and Database sessions: Only.
Web Connection Subcontext ID
In the window shown above, note that the context ID is followed by a dot and a second
number, called the subcontext ID. 4D automatically manages and increments this number
each time a new 4D-based HTML page is sent to the browser in contextual mode. The
subcontext ID is essential to the maintenance of the database session.

Usually, a Web browser includes navigation controls, such as the Back and Forward buttons,
History windows, and so on. These controls are useful when you are browsing documents,
news, bulletin boards, etc. They are less appealing when you perform a database transaction.

For example, if a Web user is adding a record to a table, you need to know whether or not the
data entry is validated, that is, whether or not the Web user clicked the Accept or Cancel
buttons of your 4D form. If, at this point, the Web user navigates to other pages, the data
entry is left in an uncertain state. To prevent this, 4D uses the subcontext ID to synchronize
the Web session on the browser side with the database session on the 4D side.

Each time a form is submitted or an HTTP request is sent to 4D by the browser, if a

desynchronization of the Web and database sessions is detected, 4D sends the message “Using
browser navigation controls, you left a form requiring data validation. 4D will now return to
that form so you can accept or cancel it.” 4D then goes back to the Web data entry page using
the subcontext ID.

This synchronization is also essential for the Web Connection process. You need to correctly
get out of, for example, an ADD RECORD ([...]) to pursue the execution of your 4D code.

The synchronization is selective. If the current Web page displayed on the browser side is a 4D
form (ADD RECORD, DISPLAY SELECTION, DIALOG, etc.), the synchronization will eventuallly
occur.
If the current Web page is an HTML page accessed by link from another Web page (sent using
the command SEND HTML FILE), then you can navigate freely through the pages.

Given the following piece of 4D code:

ADD RECORD ([Customers])

SEND HTML FILE ("anyPage.HTM")
DISPLAY SELECTION ([Products])

4D Language Reference 2061

 Edited by Foxit Reader
Copyright(C) by Foxit Software Company,2005-2008
For Evaluation
The following figure details what happens Only.
both on 4D and the Web browser during execution.
• Lines in red denote 4D form translations and submissions.
• Lines in blue denote switching back and forth between 4D-based and non 4D-based HTML
pages.
• Areas in green denote non 4D-based HTML pages.

2062 4D Language Reference

Description of the steps

(1) An ADD RECORD is issued. 4D translates the current input form of the table into an HTML
page and sends it to the Web browser. If the form is a multi-page form, the standard 4D page
navigation buttons allow you to navigate through the pages of the form. This 4D-based
navigation is implemented and performed transparently by 4D (via Web form submission).

(2) During data entry (therefore within the ADD RECORD call), a button is clicked and its
object method issues a SEND HTML FILE call.

(3) Within the SEND HTML FILE call, if the HTML page includes links, it is possible to navigate
through several pages. Eventually, when a SEND HTML FILE("") is issued, the HTML mode is
exited.

(4) The object method of the button that was clicked and the data entry initiated by ADD
RECORD are executed. Note that steps (2) and (3) can be repeated several times within the data
entry.
(5) Finally, the data entry is accepted or canceled, and the Web Connection process is
executed.

(6) The next call is a SEND HTML FILE.

(7) This step is analogous to step 3. If the HTML page includes links, it is possible to navigate
through several pages. Eventually, when a SEND HTML FILE("") is issued, the HTML mode is
exited.
(8) The Web Connection process is executed.

(9) A DISPLAY SELECTION is issued. 4D translates the current output form of the table into an
HTML page and sends to the Web browser. During the DISPLAY SELECTION, 4D transparently
navigates between the selection page and the display of individual records. 4D also uses
MODIFY SELECTION to manage data entry and record locking, via Web form submissions.
(10) During navigation through the selection, a button in the footer area of the form is clicked
and its object method issues a SEND HTML FILE call.

(11) This step is analogous to steps 7 and 3. If the HTML page includes links, it is possible to
navigate through several pages. Eventually, when a SEND HTML FILE("") is issued, the HTML
mode is exited.
(12) The object method of the button that was clicked and the selection display initiated by
DISPLAY SELECTION are executed. Note that steps (10) and (11) can be repeated several times
during navigation of the selection.

4D Language Reference 2063

(13) Finally, the selection display is exited and the Web Connection process is executed.
And so on...

Free Web navigation (clicking on the Back or Forward buttons for instance) is possible within
any SEND HTML FILE (green areas in the figure above). On the other hand, any 4D-based HTML
page (data entry, selection display... including standard dialog boxes such those displayed by
CONFIRM or Request) is exited through the use of one of the browser navigation controls, 4D
will eventually synchronize the Web sessions and the Database sessions by going back to the
Web page whose subcontext ID corresponds to that of the issued 4D command currently
being executed on the Web Connection process side.

Web Connection process and Web session

From the user viewpoint, the user's actions on the Web browser side pilot a Web session.
From the programmatic viewpoint, the Web Connection process pilots the Web session, not
the reverse. The Web browser displays the pages sent by the Web Connection process, which
either:
• Executes 4D code, or
• Waits for the submission from the browser of the current Web page.
From a Design viewpoint, the Web Connection process should be seen as a 4D process whose
domain of execution is 4D or 4D Server, but whose user interface is remotely echoed on the
connected Web browser.

With this in mind, always take into account this duality of the Web Connection process when
designing Web database applications in contextual mode. For example:
• During data entry of any kind, the main menu bar is that of the browser, not that of 4D.
Within a form, do not rely on the 4D menu bar; it is on the Web server machine, not on the
Web browser machine,
• When you design forms to be used on the Web browser, remember that the 4D form set of
features is limited to that of HTML (but sometimes with some 4D additions). Do not rely on
the whole 4D forms feature set (i.e., object types and form events). For more information on
this point, refer to the paragraph “Automatic HTML conversion” below.

• In terms of interprocess communication, CALL PROCESS, when applied to a Web Connection
process, has no effects because its current active form is displayed on the Web browser. On the
other hand, a Web Connection process can issue a CALL PROCESS toward another 4D process.
In addition, interprocess communication can be indifferently performed in both directions
using the GET PROCESS VARIABLE and SET PROCESS VARIABLE commands, which do not require
a process to have a user interface.

2064 4D Language Reference

Inactive Web Process Timeout
As explained previously, a Web Connection process in contextual mode is either executing 4D
code or waiting for the submission of the Web page currently displayed on the browser side.
In the latter case, a Web Connection process will wait for a delay equal to the Inactive Web
Process Timeout, set on the Advanced page (Web theme) of the Preferences window or set
programmatically using the SET WEB TIMEOUT command.
The scope of the Web Server Connections Timeout setting is the database session. All
contextual Web Connection processes are subjected to that value; they are immediately
affected if that setting is changed. The default value is 5 minutes.

Note: The command SET WEB TIMEOUT allows you to specify a different Timeout for each Web
process.

You can increase or decrease this timeout at your convenience. For example, you can increase
the timeout if your application allows Web users to surf to other Web sites via HTML links in
the pages served by your database. By increasing the timeout, you enable users to navigate
longer within the other Web sites without closing their connections to your databases.

WARNING: There is no way to programmatically stop a Web Connection process. If you

specify a long timeout, the process will wait for that delay, even though the Web user may
have stopped working with the Web Connection for quite some time. If you specify No
Timeout, the Web Connection processes will stop only when the database is exited. However,
a Web connection process is automatically aborted as soon as the Web server switches to non-
contextual mode.

Tip: Unlike Web Server process, Web Connection processes can be aborted using the Abort
command (available in the Runtime Explorer when the Process page is displayed).

Automatic HTML conversion

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

This paragraph specifies the elements, objects and mechanisms handled automatically during
database conversion into HTML by 4D in contextual mode.

Menu Bars
• Each menu bar is translated into one HTML page. Each menu title appears as text only and
menu commands associated with 4D methods appear as links to these 4D methods. Menu
commands that are only associated with automatic actions appear as text only.

4D Language Reference 2065

• Clicking a menu item on the Web Browser side starts the execution of the associated 4D
method on the Web Connection process side.
Note: When the “Start a New Process” property is assigned to a menu command, the
associated method is executed by the 4D Web server in a new Web connection process using
the 4DMETHOD URL. In this case, the method of the menu must have the Available through
4DACTION, 4DMETHOD and 4DSCRIPT attribute (unchecked by default for new databases). For
more information, refer to the Connection Security section.
• The picture associated with a menu bar is placed below the menus on the browser.

Forms
• Objects are translated from top to bottom and from left to right, and they have the same
position on the browser as they do in the 4D form. Note, however, that HTML is a word
processing oriented application; horizontal objects positions may be different and wrap-
around may occur.
• Multi-page forms are supported transparently, including a page zero and inherited forms.
• Automatic actions, when appropriate, are supported transparently.
• Form events (On Load, On Unload, On Clicked and On Timer) are supported. Other events are
not supported.
• The Header, Detail, Break and Footer tags are taken into account during calls to DISPLAY
SELECTION and MODIFY SELECTION. The Header of the form appears once at the beginning of
the HTML page, the detail area is repeated as many times as necessary, and variables (such as
buttons) placed in the Footer area appear at the end of the HTML page, just under the
automatic selection page navigation links.
• The tips associated with buttons displayed as pictures in the form editor appear on the
browser — if the browser allows these tips to be displayed.
• A picture replicated (“Replicated” display) inserted in the (0,0,x,x) coordinates in 4D’s form
editor is sent as a background picture on the browser. Please note that dark pictures should be
avoided.

Note: The 4D Web server uses CSS1 to produce HTML pages with a very similar appearance to
the 4D forms themselves. CSS1 (Cascading Style Sheet 1) specifications have been defined by
the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C). These style sheets set some characteristics related to
the document appearance: font, size, color, title, body, spacing, etc. .CSS documents are sent
with the MIME type “text/css”. In both contextual or non-contextual mode, these documents
are not processed by 4D.
For compatibility reasons, you can modify the Web conversion mode to use for the forms
using the SET DATABASE PARAMETER command (selector 8, Web Conversion Mode).

2066 4D Language Reference

Field Objects
When a 4D form is translated to an HTML page, field objects are translated as follows:

4D Field Type HTML Object HTML Markup

Alphanumeric Text field (*) <INPUT Type="text" ...>
Text Text field (*) <TEXTAREA ...> (**)
<INPUT Type="text" ...> (***)
Real Text field (*) <INPUT Type="text" ...>
Integer Text field (*) <INPUT Type="text" ...>
Long Integer Text field (*) <INPUT Type="text" ...>
Date Text field (*) <INPUT Type="text" ...>
Time Text field (*) <INPUT Type="text" ...>
Boolean Radio or Check box (*) <INPUT Type="radio" ...>
<INPUT Type="checkbox" ...>
Picture Image (always non-enterable) <IMG SRC="..." ...>
Subtable No HTML support None
BLOB No HTML support None
(*) or text only if non-enterable
(**) If the text value is composed of several lines
(***) If the text value is composed of only one line or is empty

Note: Enterable variables behave like fields of the same type.

Form Objects
When a 4D form is translated to an HTML page, form objects are translated as follows:

4D Form Object Equivalent HTML Object HTML Markup

Line Horizontal Line (1) <HR>
Rectangle Rectangle Managed by CSS1
Oval No HTML support None
Rounded Rectangle No HTML support None
Static Picture Image or Image Map (2) <IMG SRC="...">
<INPUT Type="image" ...>
Group Box Text Text with font markups if any
Static Text Text Text with font markups if any
Button Submit button <INPUT Type="submit" ...>
Default Button Submit button <INPUT Type="submit" ...>
Radio Button Radio button (3) <INPUT Type="radio" ...>
Check Box Check Box <INPUT Type="checkbox" ...>

4D Language Reference 2067

Pop-up/Drop-down List Drop-down List <SELECT ...>...</SELECT>
Combo Box Drop-down List <SELECT ...>...</SELECT>
Scrollable Area Scrollable List (4) <SELECT ...>...</SELECT>
Tab Control URL lists (5) <A HREF="/4DTAB/4DVar.Onglet...">
Invisible Button See note 2
Highlight Button See note 2
3D Button See note 2
Button Grid See note 2
Graph Image (non-enterable) <IMG SRC="..." ...>
Plug-in HTML text, Image Text with font markups if any
or Image Map (6) or <IMG SRC="..." ...>
or <INPUT Type="image"...>

The following objects are not supported by HTML and therefore are ignored during the
translation:
Hierarchical Pop-up menu, Hierarchical List, Subform, Radio Picture, Thermometer, Ruler, Dial,
Picture Pop-up Menu, Picture Button, 3D Check Box, 3D Radio Button.

Notes
1. Non-horizontal lines are not supported in HTML; they are therefore ignored.

2. Invisible-like buttons are objects of type Invisible Button, Highlight Button, 3D Button, and
Button Grid. If a static picture is not overlapped by an invisible-like button, the picture is
translated as a static image. If it is overlapped by at least one invisible-like button, it is
translated as a Server-Side Image Map. On the Web browser side, the image is treated as a
Server-Side Image Map. On the 4D side, when the submission is received, 4D recalculates the
position of the click in order to generate an On Clicked event for the appropriate button, as if
the button was actually clicked. Managing invisible-like buttons is therefore quite simple,
provided that they overlap with static pictures. You manage these buttons through the Form
method or their object methods, as you would do in the regular 4D interface. This also
provides you with a very simple way to handle Web Image Mapping. If an invisible-like button
does not overlap with any static picture objects, it is ignored during the translation.
3. Radio button grouping is maintained though the translation.

4. Grouped scrollable areas are not supported in HTML. 4D translates them as independent
scrollable lists located on the same line.

2068 4D Language Reference

5. Tab controls (of type array or created by using the values defined in the Object properties)
are converted into URL lists.

If the array elements are empty strings, 4D displays 1, 2, 3... on the browser.
6. Plug-in areas are publishable on the Web, by first being converted into HTML, Image or
Image Map. This last solution allows you to manage mouse clicks inside the plug-in area (for
example, the integrated plug-in 4D Chart is published in an Image Map and the 4D_Pack _AP
External clock area is published as an Image). The way in which a plug-in area, which is on a
4D form, is published on the Web depends on the plug-in editor’s specifications.

Display Selection / Modify Selection

• The UserSet mechanism is not supported
• An automatic selection paging mechanism is provided by 4D. For more information, see the
description of the SET WEB DISPLAY LIMITS command.

4D Commands
While developing a 4D Web database, you may ask what happens when this or that command
is called. Will the command take effect on the Web Server machine or on the Web Browser
machine? The Web Connection Process is executing on the Web Server machine, but its user
interface is remotely echoed on the connected Web Browser. Consequently, for Web database
development, the 4D commands can be classified as follows:

Commands that are not affected by execution from within a Web Connection process
A command such as CREATE RECORD works within the executing process; in this case, it
creates a record within the Web Connection process. The same applies to commands such as
Screen width, which returns the width of the screen on the Web Server machine (the machine
on which the process is executing).

4D Language Reference 2069

Commands that include extra built-in capabilities for transparent Web support
Command Name Comments
ADD RECORD Automatic translation of the form, multi-page forms supported
ALERT Automatic translation of the dialog box
CONFIRM Automatic translation of the dialog box
DIALOG Automatic translation of the form, multi-page forms supported
DISPLAY SELECTION Automatic translation of the form
Built-in Web paging mechanism
UserSet mechanism is not supported
MODIFY RECORD Automatic translation of the form, multi-page forms supported
MODIFY SELECTION Automatic translation of the form
Built-in Web paging mechanism
UserSet mechanism is not supported
QUERY Standard Query dialog box supported
QUERY BY EXAMPLE Automatic translation of the form, multi-page forms supported
Request Automatic translation of the dialog box
REDRAW Update of the form displayed on the browser

Commands to use when you know what you want to do

The following commands execute locally on the Web Server machine.

For example, you can invoke the printing of a selection from a Web Browser. However, the
printing will be performed on the Web Server machine.
In addition, when a user interface component is involved, it appears on the Web Server
machine, i.e., Open document("") vs Open Document("This document"). You should avoid such
calls, because the Web Browser will wait for a reply until the dialog box is closed on the Web
Server machine. On the other hand, it is perfectly OK to call these routines when no dialog
boxes are involved.

Command Name Comments

Append document OK, if no file dialog box is invoked
BEEP Beeps on Web Server machine
Create document OK, if no file dialog box is invoked
DISPLAY RECORD Does nothing

2070 4D Language Reference

EXPORT DIF OK, if no file dialog box is invoked
EXPORT SYLK OK, if no file dialog box is invoked
EXPORT TEXT OK, if no file dialog box is invoked
IMPORT DIF OK, if no file dialog box is invoked
IMPORT SYLK OK, if no file dialog box is invoked
IMPORT TEXT OK, if no file dialog box is invoked
LOAD SET OK, if no file dialog box is invoked
LOAD VARIABLES OK, if no file dialog box is invoked
MESSAGE Messages will appear on Web Server machine
Open document OK, if no file dialog box is invoked
Open external window Window opens on Web Server machine
Open resource file OK, if no file dialog box is invoked
Open window Window opens on Web Server machine
PLAY Sound is played on 4D machine
Print form OK, if no Printing dialog box is invoked
PRINT LABEL OK, if no Printing dialog box is invoked
PRINT RECORD OK, if no Printing dialog box is invoked
PRINT SELECTION OK, if no Printing dialog box is invoked
QUIT 4D Supported, you can shutdown the Web server remotely
SAVE SET OK, if no file dialog box is invoked
SAVE VARIABLES OK, if no file dialog box is invoked
SELECT LOG FILE OK, if no file dialog box is invoked
SET CHANNEL OK, if no file dialog box is invoked (documents)
TRACE Debugger window appears on Web Server machine

Commands Not Supported by Web Connection Processes

Command Name Comments

ADD DATA SEGMENT Do NOT call this command from within a Web Connection process
This command has not been designed to be used on the Web
ADD SUBRECORD Do NOT call this command from within a Web Connection process
This command has not been designed to be used on the Web

4D Language Reference 2071

CHANGE CURRENT USER Do NOT call this command from within a Web Connection process
This command has not been designed to be used on the Web
EDIT ACCESS Do NOT call this command from within a Web Connection process
The Passwords window appears on the 4D machine
The Browser will wait until the window is closed
GRAPH TABLE Do NOT call this command from within a Web Connection process
This command has not been designed to be used on the Web
MODIFY SUBRECORD Do NOT call this command from within a Web Connection process
This command has not been designed to be used on the Web
ORDER BY Programmatical support only
Standard Order By dialog box not supported on the Web
PRINT SETTINGS Do NOT call this command from within a Web Connection process
The Printing dialog boxes will appear on the 4D machine
The Browser will wait until the dialog boxes are closed
QR REPORT Do NOT call this command from within a Web Connection process
The Quick Report window appears on the 4D machine
The Browser will wait until the window is closed

Embedding HTML
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

You can customize the content of 4D forms converted into HTML by embedding HTML code
(or Javascript) into the form. The resulting form, on the Web browser side, is a combination of
HTML and 4D objects.

Inserting an HTML page using a static text object

A static text object of a 4D form containing, for instance, the string "{page.HTM}", inserts the
HTML document "page.HTM" into the 4D form at the place where the text object is located.
You insert a document in its entirety (in fact, everything included between the <BODY> and
</BODY> tags). You can either use an existing HTML document, or, using language, build a
document that you save to disk and to which you refer subsequently.

Note: In some cases, HTML conversion of 4D forms created in version 6.0.x that contain a
reference to an HTML document ({mapage.htm}) do not always give the expected result with
4D version 6.7 and later. In this case, it is possible to modify the form conversion mode using
the SET DATABASE PARAMETER command.

2072 4D Language Reference

Inserting HTML code
Any 4D text variable can embed HTML code into a 4D form, if its first character has the code 1
(for example, vtHTML:=Character(1)+"...HTML code...").
You can thus insert pieces of code and, in this case, you can build the HTML code into
memory.

File References and URLs

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

In contextual mode, to insure the maintenance of the database context and subcontext IDs,
4D automatically remaps file references and URLs. For example, 4D remaps all IMG and HREF
references to local files.

If you insert your own HTML code into a 4D form using a text variable, you must follow the
4D remapping syntax.

Local GIF files are remapped as "/4DBin/_/GIF_file_pathname", where GIF_file_pathname is the

full HTML path name of the GIF file relative to the root of the volume where the file is located.

Example
The following 4D method returns the remapped reference for the pathname received as
parameter:

` WWW Local GIF URL Project Method

` WWW Local GIF URL Project ( Text )
` WWW Local GIF URL ( Native pathname ) -> URL to local GIF file
C_TEXT($0;$1)
$0:="/4Bin/_/"+HTML Pathname ($1)

Note: For details about the method HTML Pathname, see the examples of the command Mac to
ISO.

Then, when inserting HTML code into a 4D form using a text variable, you can write:

vtHTML:=Char(1)+"<P><IMG SRC="+Char(34)+WWW Local GIF URL("F:\ThisImage.HTM"+

Char(34)+" ALIGN=MIDDLE></P>"+Char(13)

This will insert the GIF document in the 4D form at the location of the 4D variable vtHTML.

Important: You only need to write this kind of code to insert custom HTML code into a 4D
form. If you just send an HTML page using SEND HTML FILE or if you use a command such as
ADD RECORD, remember that 4D transparently translates and remaps the HTML.

4D Language Reference 2073

The remapping does not change links that have the following protocols:
• http:
• ftp:
• mailto:
• news:
• gopher:
• javascript:
• nntp:
• wais:
• prospero:
• telnet:

See Also
Connection Security, On Web Authentication Database Method, On Web Connection Database
Method, SET DATABASE PARAMETER.

2074 4D Language Reference

 Edited by Foxit Reader
Copyright(C) by Foxit Software Company,2005-2008
For Evaluation Only.
Using SSL Protocol Web Server

version 2003 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The 4D Web server can communicate in secured mode through the SSL protocol (Secured
Socket Layer).

SSL Protocol Definition

The SSL protocol has been designed to secure data exchanges between two applications —
mainly between a Web server and a browser. This protocol is widely used and is compatible
with most Web browsers.

At the network level, the SSL protocol is inserted between the TCP/IP layer (low level) and the
HTTP high level protocol. SSL has been designed mainly to work with HTTP.
Network configuration using SSL:

Note: The SSL protocol can also be used to secure standard 4D Server client/server connections
as well as SQL server connections. For more information, refer to the section Encrypting
Client/Server Connections in the 4D Server Reference manual as well as the Configuration of 4D
SQL Server section in the SQL Reference manual.

The SSL protocol is designed to authenticate the sender and receiver and to guarantee the
confidentiality and integrity of the exchanged information:
• Authentication: The sender and receiver identities are confirmed.
• Confidentiality: The sent data is encrypted so that no third person can understand the
message.
• Integrity: The received data has not been changed, by accident or malevolently.

4D Language Reference 2075

SSL uses a public key encryption technique based on a pair of asymmetric keys for encryption
and decryption: a public key and a private key.
The private key is used to encrypt data. The sender (the web site) does not give it to anyone.
The public key is used to decrypt the information and is sent to the receivers (Web browsers)
through a certificate. When using SSL with the Internet, the certificate is delivered through a
certification authority, such as Verisign®. The Web site pays the Certificate Authority to
deliver a certificate which guaranties the server authentication and contains the public key
allowing to exchange data in a secured mode.

Note: For more information on the encryption method and the public and private key issues,
refer to the ENCRYPT BLOB command description.

How to get a certificate?

A 4D Web server working in secured mode means that you need a digital certificate from a
certification authority. This certificate contains various information such as the site ID as well
as the public key used to communicate with the site. This certificate is transmitted to the Web
browsers connecting to this site. Once the certificate has been identified and accepted, the
communication is made in secured mode.

Note: A browser authorizes only the certificates issued by a certification authority referenced
in its properties.

The certification authority is chosen according to several criteria. If the certification authority
is well known, the certificate will be authorized by many browsers, however the price to pay
will be expensive.

To get a SSL certificate:

1. Generate a private key using the GENERATE ENCRYPTION KEYPAIR command.

Warning: For security reasons, the private key should always be kept secret. Actually, it should
always remain with the Web server machine. The Key.pem file must be placed in the Database
structure folder.

2076 4D Language Reference

2. Use the GENERATE CERTIFICATE REQUEST command to issue a certificate request.

3. Send the certificate request to the chosen certificate authority.

To fill in a certificate request, you might need to contact the certification authority. The
certification authority checks that the information transmitted are correct. The certificate
request is generated in a BLOB using the PKCS format. This format allows to copy and paste
the keys as text and to send them via E-mail without modifying the key content. For example,
you can save the BLOB containing the certificate request in a text document (using the BLOB
TO DOCUMENT command), then open and copy and paste its content in a mail or a Web form
to be sent to the certification authority.

4. Once you get your certificate, create a text file named “cert.pem” and paste the contents of
the certificate into it.
You can receive a certificate in different ways (usually by E-mail or HTML form). The 4D Web
Server accepts all platform-related text formats for certificates (Mac OS, PC, Linux...). However,
the certificate must be in PKCS format.

5. Place the “cert.pem” file in the Database structure folder.

The Web server can now work in a secured mode. A certificate is valid between 6 months to a
year.

SSL installation and activation within 4D

If you want to use the SSL protocol with the 4D Web server, the following components should
be installed on the server, at different locations:

• 4DSLI.DLL: Secured Layer Interface dedicated to the SSL management.

This file is installed by default, it is placed:
- Under Windows, next to the executable file of the 4D or 4D Server application
- Under Mac OS, in the [4D Extensions] subfolder of the 4D or 4D Server package.

• key.pem: document containing the private encryption key.

- with 4D in local mode or 4D Server, this file must be located in the database folder.
- with 4D in remote mode , this file must be located in the 4D application folder/package.

• cert.pem: document containing the "certificate".

- with 4D in local mode or 4D Server, this file must be located in the database folder.
- with 4D in remote mode , this file must be located in the 4D application folder/package.

Note: 4DSLI.DLL is also necessary to use the encryption commands ENCRYPT BLOB and
DECRYPT BLOB.

4D Language Reference 2077

The installation of these elements makes it possible to use SSL for connections to the 4D Web
server. However, in order for SSL connections to be accepted by the 4D Web server, you must
“activate” the SSL. This parameter is accessible on the Configuration page of the Web theme in
the database Preferences:

By default, the SSL connections are allowed. You can uncheck this option if you do not want
to use SSL functionalities with your Web server, or if another Web server allowing secure
connections is operating on the same machine.

The TCP port dedicated to SSL data exchange is 443 by default. This port number can be
modified in the HTTPS Port Number area in order, for example, to reinforce the security of the
Web server (for more information about this pont, refer to the Web Server Settings section).
The TCP port defined in this page of the Preferences is used for standard mode Web server
connections.

Note: The other Preferences defined for the 4D Web Server management (password, timeout,
cache size, etc.) are applied, regardless of whether or not the server is operating in SSL mode.

2078 4D Language Reference

Browser connection with SSL
For a Web connection to be carried out in secure mode, the URL sent by the browser simply
needs to begin with “https” (instead of “http”).
In this case, a warning dialog appears on the browser. If the user clicks OK, the Web server
sends the certificate to the browser.

The encryption algorithm used for the connection is then decided by the browser and the
Web server. The server offers several symetric encryption algorithms (RC2, RC4, DES...). The
most powerful common algorithm is used.

Warning: The level of encryption allowed depends on current laws in the country of use. The
level of encryption offered by 4D Web Server depends on the version of the encryption system
library used. By default, 4D provides an "Export" version of the library whereby symetric
algorithms are limited to 40 bits.

Management of the connection mode

Using SSL with 4D Web server does not require any specific system configuration. However,
you should keep in mind that a SSL Web server can also work in a non-secured mode. The
connection mode can switch to another mode if the browser requires so (for example, in the
browser URL area, the user can replace “HTTPS” by “HTTP”). The developer can forbid or
redirect requests made in a non secured mode. The command Secured Web connection allows
you to get the current connection mode.

See Also
DECRYPT BLOB, ENCRYPT BLOB, GENERATE CERTIFICATE REQUEST, GENERATE ENCRYPTION
KEYPAIR, Secured Web connection, Web Server Settings.

4D Language Reference 2079

XML and WML Support Web Server

version 6.7
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

WML
4D Web Server supports WML (Wireless Markup Language) technology. This feature allows a
mobile phone or a PDA’s owner to read and enter data in a 4D database.

Note: The WML language associated to the WAP (Wireless Application Protocol) is developed by
several companies. The WAP technology offers a set of network communication tools so that
mobile phones and PDA users can visualize text published on Web pages. The WML
technology is open and free of charge. For more information on WML, please refer to the
Phone.com Web site: http://www.phone.com/.

The data can be entered or read through WML pages using 4DVAR or 4DSCRIPT tags.

Here is the list of the WML documents supported by 4D Web server:

Extension MIME Type Description
.wml text/vnd.wap.wml WML pages (always supported by 4D*)
.wmls text/vnd.wap.wmlscript WML Scripts (on the client’s side)
.wmlc application/vnd.wap.wmlc WML binary pages
.wmlsc application/vnd.wap.wmlscript WML binary scripts
.wbmp picture/vnd.wap.wbmp Bitmap images for mobile phones (not always
supported)

* Allows dynamic data insertion through 4DVAR and 4DSCRIPT tags.

XML
The 4D Web server supports .xml,.xls and .dtd documents which are sent with the following
MIME type: “text/xml” and “text/xsl”.

Regardless of the mode applied to the sent documents (contextual or non-contextual mode),
4D analyzes their content and processes their 4DVAR or 4DSCRIPT type tags (if any) in order to
generate dynamic XML.

Note: It is not possible to send XML format from a 4D form in contextual mode using a tag
such as {mypage.xml} included in a static text.

See Also
Binding 4D objects with HTML objects.

2080 4D Language Reference

Using CGIs Web Server

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The 4D Web Server supports CGIs (Common Gateway Interface). CGIs for Web servers are
similar to plug-ins for 4D methods. They are called by the Web server to execute a task and
return an answer, i.e. a full Web page or some HTML code inserted in the page sent by the
server. CGIs are frequently used to display visitors counters, generate guest books, receive a
form-mail, etc. A multitude of CGIs are available today, most of which are freeware.

Note: Originally, CGI was a standard for interfacing external applications with HTTP server.
The "CGI" word is now used for the external applications themselves.

The 4D Web Server supports CGIs in two ways:

• 4D Web Server can use CGIs in automatic or manual mode
• 4D Web Server can be interfaced with other HTTP servers using CGIs extensions (Windows
only)

Executing CGIs from 4D Web Server

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4D supports all types of CGIs, under Mac OS X and under Windows. A CGI can be an
application, a PERL script or a DLL interfacing with a Web server.
- Executables (.EXE) using the “console” and the environment variables. The source code is
usually cross-platform (Windows and Unix). The CGI names are usually written as follows:
nnn.exe or nph-nnn.exe. For more information on this kind of CGI, please refer to the
http://hoohoo.ncsa.uiuc.edu/cgi/ Internet site.
- DLL ISAPI, i.e. extensions for IIS (Internet Information Server). The CGI names are written as
follows: nnn.dll or nph-nnn.dll. The DLLs are downloaded once the Web server has been
stopped for performance purposes.
For more information on this type of CGI, please refer to the http://www.microsoft.com/iis/
Internet site.
- PERL scripts using the “console” and the environment variables. The CGIs require an
interpreter to execute. However they are cross-platform (Windows, Unix and Mac OS). Their
names are written as follows: nnnn.pl, nph-nnnn.pl, nnnn.cgi or nph-nnnn.cgi.
For more information on this kind of CGI, please refer to the http://www.perl.com/ Internet
site.

4D Language Reference 2081

Executing CGIs in automatic mode
An automatic CGI call is made through an URL, an action or a HTML tag inserted within a
page according to the task to be done by the CGI. In any case, the HTML string has to contain
/cgi-bin/ followed by the CGI name or possibly a path using the HTML syntax as well as the
search string.

For example, an URL “http://195.1.2.3/cgi-bin/search.exe” will trigger the search.exe CGI

launch. Similarly, the <IMG SRC="/special/cgi-bin/counter.exe"> marker is placed within a
HTML page, the counter.exe CGI will be launched when the page will be sent.

The CGI should be located at the root of the folder named cgi-bin. This folder should be
placed at the Web server root or in a subfolder. A server can have several cgi-bin folders. This
folder can contain other files than executable application, but only the latest can be called
from a Web client.

Example of installation with a CGI called “Count.exe”:

2082 4D Language Reference

Below are some examples or locations and matching URLs:

Items location Matching URLs

(Web server root)
[mybase] folder
mybase.4db (structure) (http://195.1.2.3/)
[cgi-bin] folder
counter.exe (http://195.1.2.3/cgi-bin/counter.exe)
[Misc] folder
[cgi-bin] folder
script.pl (http://195.1.2.3/Misc/cgi-bin/script.pl)

Executing CGIs in manual mode

Calling CGIs in manual mode requires the use of the SET CGI EXECUTABLE command. In
particular, this command lets you execute a CGI without it being visible for the Web user in
the URL.
For more information about this point, refer to the description of this command.

Interaction between 4D Web Server and CGIs

A call to a CGI does not modify the 4D environment (selection, variables...).
4D does not limit the response size. However, note that the maximum processing time
allocated to a CGI is limited to 30 seconds. After that time, the Web server will return an error.

A CGI is always executed without context, regardless of the calling mode. Note however, that
in contextual mode, we strongly recommend that you not use a CGI sending back HTML
code, as it might desynchronize the context.

Errors returned by 4D regarding CGI calls

When a call to a CGI generates an error, 4D will return one of the following answers in a
standard HTML page:
• Not found: 4D does not find the CGI, or a PERL interpreter is missing
• Forbidden: the Web client is asking something other than an executable in a [cgi-bin] folder
• Timeout: the request has not been processed by the CGI in less than 30 seconds
• Bad Answer: 4D was not able to process the CGI answer, or the ISAPI DLL caused an exception
• Internal Error: memory full, etc.

Note: When a CGI does not work, check that the execution privileges of the CGI are adequate
and that the line feeds in the CGI script are correct.

4D Language Reference 2083

Information for CGI Developers
This section in mainly intended for programmers who wish to develop specific CGIs for their
4D databases.

• Environment variables
4D defines environment variables in compliance with CGI/1.1 specifications, and the
following information:
GATEWAY_INTERFACE: always “CGI/1.1”
SERVER_SOFTWARE: always “4D WebStar_D/version”
SERVER_PROTOCOL: always “HTTP/1.0”
SERVER_PORT_SECURE: contains “1” if the HTTP connection is secure, else “0”.
PATH_TRANSLATED: contains the full path to the HTML server root, and the part of the path
following the CGI name. For security reasons, this part cannot contain the character
sequences // or ..
Example : Root of the server “C:/web”. For a CGI call such as /cgi-bin/cgi.exe/path,
PATH_TRANSLATED value is “C:/web/path”. For a CGI call such /cgi-bin/cgi.exe/../path, 4D
returns the error Forbidden.
REMOTE_IDENT: user name (if relevant), else undefined.
HTTP_AUTHORIZATION, HTTP_CONTENT_LENGTH and HTTP_CONTENT_TYPE: undefined.
ALL_HTTP and URL are defined in case of ISAPI DLLs calls.
CERT_xxx and HTTPS_xxx are defined if the connection is secured (for DLL only).

Note: The SET ENVIRONMENT VARIABLE command lets you set these variables.

In addition to the standard environment variables, 4D provides text variables

FORMVAR_variablename:
- if the request is sent using the "POST" method, these variables are filled with the form entry
areas (for example FORMVAR_NAME, FORMVAR_FIRSTNAME...) except for binary fields (INPUT
TYPE="FILE"). This system can be used with both “www/url-encoded” and “multipart/form-
data” encoded forms.
- if the request is sent using the "GET" method, these variables are filled with the values passed
in the request string (for example, in the case of the URL .../cgi.exe?name=smith&code=75,
FORMVAR_NAME will get the value “smith” and FORMVAR_CODE will get the value “75”).

This functionality makes form processing easier (it is not necessary to parse strings such as
a=1&b=2&...), however the CGI is made 4D-specific.

• Processing of the answers sent by the CGI

If the name of the CGI (Windows executable or PERL script) starts with nph- (No Parsing
Header), 4D sends the answer “as is” to the Web client. In this case, it is up to the CGI to
comply with HTTP rules. Regarding ISAPI DLLs, 4D will never parse the response, whatever the
prefix.

2084 4D Language Reference

Otherwise, 4D will send the HTTP header:
- if “Content-Type” is not specified by the CGI, 4D will always send “Content-Type:
text/html”,
- if “Location” is specified, 4D will not take the other elements of the answer into account and
will perform a HTTP redirection,
- if “Status” not specified, 4D will send “HTTP/1.0 200 OK”.
4D accepts any kind of line return combination (Windows-CRLF, Mac OS-CR, Unix-LF) in the
header of the HTTP answer and will reformat it.

Regarding ISAPI DLLs, 4D accepts asynchrone processings (HttpExtensionProc returns

HSE_STATUS_PENDING). A call to ServerSupportFunction (HSE_REQ_DONE_WITH_SESSION) must
occur during the next 30 seconds. If the function TerminateExtension is defined, it is always
called with the value HSE_TERM_MUST_UNLOAD.

Calling a 4D Web Server using CGIs (Windows only)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4D is provided with two new extensions, 4DISAPI.DLL and NPH-CGI4D.EXE. These extensions
have been designed to allow a HTTP server to send requests to a 4D HTTP server. For example,
a non secured 4D Web server can be interrogated via another HTTP server, running in secured
mode.

Warning: These two extensions are available under Windows only.

• The 4DISAPI extension complies to the specifications defined by ISAPI (Internet Services
Application Programming Interface). The ISAPI technology has been developed originally by
Microsoft® for the IIS server but since it has been made compatible with various HTTP servers
such as Netscape®, Apache® or Sambar®.

• The NPH-CGI4D.EXE extension complies to the CGI specifications (Common Gateway

Interface) and can be used with all the CGI compatible servers.

These two extensions work the same way. The CGI compatibility is broadly used with HTTP
servers, however the CGI extension performances are usually lower than the ISAPI ones.

4D Language Reference 2085

How does it work?
These extensions work as follow: HTTP server “A” publishes pages on the Internet, another
HTTP server “B” is a 4D Server used in Intranet. To make the two servers communicate, you
just have to add the 4DISAPI or NPH-4DCGI extension in the server “A” [Scripts] directory.
When a Web browser sends a request to the server A, it transmits it to the server B via the
4DISAPI or NPH-4DCGI extension through the URL (usually, the extension transmits to the
server B the URL part located after the call, including the request items). The answer is then
sent back to the browser. When the CGI name starts with NPH (No Parsing Header), the server
does not have to parse the answer HTTP header, the CGI does the formatting. The extensions
do not change the HTTP request or answer body.
The initial request sent to the server A can be done in a normal or secured mode (SSL). The
communication between the two HTTP servers and the 4DISAPI.DLL extension is done in a
non secured mode.

Note: The 4DISAPI and NPH-4DCG extensions are not compatible with 4D Web server
contextual mode.

The following figure illustrates this principle:

• The extensions identify the GET, HEAD and POST methods which manage the various status
sent back by 4D (200 OK, 302 Moved Temporarily, 404 Not Found...).

2086 4D Language Reference

• It is not possible to authenticate at the HTTP level via the 4DISAPI or NPH-CGI4D extension.
To do so, an HTML form should be used (which can be done in a secured connection).

Note: The extensions have been designed to receive and send dynamic data and more
specifically to post data. The basic Web page service does not offer good performance when
the ISAPI or CGI extensions are used.

Installation and configuration

To install 4DISAPI and NPH-CGI4D extensions, copy the 4DISAPI.DLL or NPH-CGI4D.EXE files in
the HTTP server [Scripts] folder.

Each installed extension file is provided with a configuration file (.INI file). The .INI file
should bear the same name as the extension (for example 4DISAPI.INI). The extension and
configuration files should be located in the same folder.

An HTTP server can be defined to target several other HTTP servers. In this case, copy in the
HTTP server [Scripts] folder as many extensions as target servers. You just need to rename
them (for example, 4DISAPI2.DLL, 4DISAPI3.DLL, etc.). Make sure that a configuration file is
associated to each extension and that its name is correct (4DISAPI2.INI, 4DISAPI3.INI, etc.).

A .INI file contains one section: [Forward] which authorizes the following commands:
• TargetServer =
IP name or address of the Web server to target (for example, myserver.net or 192.193.194.195).
The line can be left blank for targeting a server by its address if the name resolution is
unavailable.
The “localhost” name is identified to the 127.0.0.1 address.
The address 127.0.0.1 is used by default.
• TargetPort =
Port used by the target server (by example, 81). The port number 8080 is used by default.
• Timeout =
Maximum timeout for the server answer (in seconds). The default value is set to 30 seconds.
• Allowed =
Allowed URL list, separated by a comma. For example: /pages, /img to give access only to the
URL starting with /pages and /img. To give access to the full site, enter a slash character /
(default setting).
• Forbidden =
Forbidden URL list, separated by a comma. For example: /4DMETHOD, /pages2 to forbid the
access to the URL starting with /4DMETHOD and /pages2. To give unlimited access, do not
enter anything in the list (default setting).

4D Language Reference 2087

According to the rules stated above, the access to the following URLs will be given or not:
/pages/document.html accessible
/pages1/onepage.html accessible
/www/picture.gif not accessible
/pages2/mypage.html not accessible
/4dmethod/myproc not accessible

If a forbidden URL is called, the extension directly returns the error “HTTP/1.0 403 Forbidden”.

Using the extensions

4DISAPI and NPH-CGI4D extensions support the following URLs:

• 4D call (4D will receive only the URL part located after the extension name):
http://server-address/cgi-bin/4disapi.dll/[Path]
http://server-address/cgi-bin/nph-cgi4d.exe/[Path]

• Checking of the extension (echo of the request):

http://server-address/cgi-bin/4disapi.dll/~~echo
http://server-address/cgi-bin/nph-cgi4d.exe/~~echo

• Information about the extension (technical support):

http://server-address/cgi-bin/4disapi.dll/~~info
http://server-address/cgi-bin/nph-cgi4d.exe/~~info
The following information is returned:
name and version of the extension, for example "Script name: 4disapi.dll (6.7.0b1.2)"
name and version of the server calling the extension, for example "Server software:
4D_WebStar_D/6.7"
version of the HTTP protocol, for example "Server protocol: HTTP/1.0"
version of the CGI protocol, for example "Gateway interface: CGI/1.1"

• Checking of the target server (is the server available?) :

http://server-address/cgi-bin/4disapi.dll/~~target
http://server-address/cgi-bin/nph-cgi4d.exe/~~target
The answer is either:
"Good: target server reached.": the target server answered (whatever the contents of the
answer).
or "Bad: target server not reached.": the target server cannot be reached or did not answer.

2088 4D Language Reference

In this case, the fail can be caused by:
- the configuration file is missing;
- the target address or port is incorrect;
- the target server is out;
- the target server did receive the request but is unable to answer.

Note concerning 4D WebSTAR: 4D WebSTAR® is one of the most popular Web servers on Mac
OS. Various interaction possibilities between 4D and 4D WebSTAR have been developed, in
particular the 4D WebSTAR plug-in called 4D Link. For more information about this plug-in,
please refer to the 4D WebSTAR documentation.

See Also
SET CGI EXECUTABLE, SET ENVIRONMENT VARIABLE.

4D Language Reference 2089

 Edited by Foxit Reader
Copyright(C) by Foxit Software Company,2005-2008
For Evaluation Only.
GET HTTP BODY Web Server

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET HTTP BODY (body)

Parameter Type Description

body BLOB | Text ← Body of the HTTP request

Description
The GET HTTP BODY command returns the body of the HTTP request being processed. The
HTTP body is returned as is, without processing or parsing.

This command only operates in non-contextual mode. It can be called using a Web
database method (On Web Authentication Database Method, On Web Connection Database
Method) or any Web method executed in non-contextual mode.

In body, you can pass a variable or a field of the BLOB or Text type. Keep in mind that it is
generally preferable to use the BLOB type since the number of characters is not limited. The
Text type, on the other hand, is limited to 32,000 characters; if you exceed this amount,
any excess data received will be truncated.

This command allows you, for example, to carry out queries in the body of requests. It also
permits advanced users to set up a WebDAV server within a 4D database.

Example
In this example, a simple request is sent to the 4D Web server and the contents of the
HTTP body are displayed in the debugger. Here is the form sent to the 4D Web server, as
well as the corresponding HTML code:

2090 4D Language Reference

Here is the Test4D2004 method:

C_BLOB($request)
C_TEXT($requestText)

GET HTTP BODY($request)

$requestText:=BLOB to text($request;UTF8 Text without length)
SEND HTML FILE("page.html")

Note: This method is declared “Available through 4DACTION, 4DMETHOD and

4DSCRIPT” in its properties.

When the form is submitted to the Web server, the $requestText variable receives the text of
the HTTP request body.

See Also
GET HTTP HEADER.

4D Language Reference 2091

 Edited by Foxit Reader
Copyright(C) by Foxit Software Company,2005-2008
For Evaluation Only.
GET HTTP HEADER Web Server

version 6.7
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET HTTP HEADER (header|fieldArray{; valueArray})

Parameter Type Description

header|fieldArray Text|Text Array ← Request HTTP header or HTTP header fields
valueArray Text Array ← HTTP header fields content

Description
The GET HTTP HEADER command returns either a string or two arrays, containing the HTTP
header used for the currently processed request.

This command works only in non-contextual mode. It can be called from within any method
(On Web Connection Database Method or On Web Authentication Database Method, method
called by '/4DACTION'...) executed in a Web process in a non-contextual mode. If GET HTTP
HEADER is called in contextual mode, it returns empty strings.

• First syntax: GET HTTP HEADER (header)

When this syntax is used, the result returned in the header variable is as follows:

"GET /page.html HTTP\1.0"+Char(13)+Char(10)+"User-Agent: browser"+

Char(13)+Char(10)+"Cookie: C=HELLO"

Each header field is separated by a CR+LF (Carriage return+Line feed) sequence under
Windows and Mac OS.

• Second syntax: GET HTTP HEADER (fieldArray; valueArray)

When this syntax is used, the returned results in the fieldArray and valueArray are as follows:

fieldArray{1} = "X-METHOD" valueArray{1} = "GET" *

fieldArray{2} = "X-URL" valueArray{2} = "/page.html" *
fieldArray{3} = "X-VERSION" valueArray{3} = "HTTP/1.0" *
fieldArray{4} = "User-Agent" valueArray{4} = "browser"
fieldArray{5} = "Cookie" valueArray{5} = "C=HELLO"
* These first three items are not HTTP fields. They are part of the first line of the request.

To comply with the HTTP standard, field names are always written in English.

2092 4D Language Reference

Here is a list of some HTTP fields that can be used in a request:

• Accept: content allowed by the browser.

• Accept-Language: language(s) that can be used by the browser (for information). Allows to
select a web page using the language defined in the browser.
• Cookie: cookies list
• From: browser user email address.
• Host: server name or address (for example using an URL, http://mywebserver/mypage.html,
Host takes the «mywebserver» value). Allows to manage several names pointing towards the
same IP address (virtual hosting).
• Referer: request origin (for example http://mywebserver/mypage1.html), i.e. the page which
is displayed when clicking on the Previous button.
• User-Agent: browser or proxy name and version.

Example
The following method allows getting any HTTP request header field content:

` Project method GetHTTPField

` GetHTTPField (Text) -> Text
` GetHTTPField (HTTP header name) -> HTTP header content

C_TEXT($0;$1)
C_LONGINT($vlItem)
ARRAY TEXT($names;0)
ARRAY TEXT($values;0)
$0:=""
GET HTTP HEADER($names;$values)
$vlItem:=Find in array($names;$1)
If ($vlItem>0)
$0:=$values{$vlItem}
End if

• Once this project method has been written, it can be called as follows:

` Cookie header content

$cookie:=GetHTTPField("Cookie")

4D Language Reference 2093

• You can send different pages according to the language set in the browser (for example in
the On Web Connection Database Method):

$language:=GetHTTPField("Accept-Language")
Case of
: ($language="@fr@") `French (see list ISO 639)
SEND HTML FILE("index_fr.html")
: ($language="@sp@") `Spanish (see list ISO 639)
SEND HTML FILE("index_es.html")
Else
SEND HTML FILE("index.html")
End case

Note: Web browsers allow defining several languages by default. They are listed in the "Accept-
Language" field, separated by a ";". Their priority is defined according to their position within
the string; therefore it is a good idea to test language positions in the string.

• Here is an example of virtual hosts (for example, in the On Web Connection Database
Method). The following names "home_site.com", "home_site1.com" and "home_site2.com" are
directed towards the same IP address, for example 192.1.2.3.

$host:=GetHTTPField("Host")
Case of
: ($host="www.site1.com")
SEND HTML FILE("home_site1.com")
: ($host="www.site2.com")
SEND HTML FILE("home_site2.com")
Else
SEND HTML FILE("home_site.com")
End case

See Also
GET HTTP BODY, SET HTTP HEADER.

2094 4D Language Reference

GET WEB FORM VARIABLES Web Server

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET WEB FORM VARIABLES (nameArray; valueArray)

Parameter Type Description

nameArray Text Array ← Web form variable names
valueArray Text Array ← Web form variable values

Description
The GET WEB FORM VARIABLES command fills the text arrays nameArray and valueArray with
the variable names and values contained in the Web form “submitted” (i.e. sent to the Web
server).

This command gets the value for all the variables which can be included in HTML pages: text
area, button, checkbox, radio button, pop up menu, choice list...

Note: Regarding checkboxes, the variable name and value are returned only if the checkbox
has been actually checked.

This command is valid for non-contextual mode or in contextual mode, regardless of the type
of URL or form (POST or GET method) sent to the Web server.

This command can be called, if necessary, in the On Web Connection Database Method or any
other 4D method resulting from a form submission.

About Web forms and their associated actions

Each form contains named data entry area (text area, buttons, checkboxes).
When a form is submitted (a request is sent to the Web server), the request contains (within
others) the list of the data entry areas and their associated values.
A form can be submitted through two methods (both can be used with 4D):
• POST, usually used to add data into the Web server - to a database,
• GET, usually used to request the Web server - data coming from a database.

Example
A form contains two fields, vName and vCity with “ROBERT” and “DALLAS” values. The
action associated to the form is “/4DACTION/WEBFORM”.
• If the form method is POST (most frequently used), the data entered will not be visible in
the URL (http://127.0.0.1/4DACTION/WEBFORM).

4D Language Reference 2095

• If the form method is GET, the data entered will be visible in the URL
(http://127.0.0.1/4DACTION/WEBFORM?vNAME=ROBERT&vCITY=DALLAS).

The WEBFORM method can be as follows:

ARRAY TEXT($anames;0)
ARRAY TEXT($avalues;0)
GET WEB FORM VARIABLES($anames;$avalues)

The result will be:

$anames{1} = "vNAME"
$anames{2} = "vCITY"
$avalues{1} = "ROBERT"
$avalues{2} = "DALLAS"

The vNAME variable contains ROBERT and the vCITY variable contains DALLAS.

See Also
Binding 4D objects with HTML objects, URLs and Form Actions.

2096 4D Language Reference

 Edited by Foxit Reader
Copyright(C) by Foxit Software Company,2005-2008
For Evaluation Only.
PROCESS HTML TAGS Web Server

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

PROCESS HTML TAGS (inputData; outputData)

Parameter Type Description

inputData BLOB | Text → Data containing HTML tags to process
outputData BLOB | Text ← Processed data

Description
The PROCESS HTML TAGS command causes the processing by 4D of 4D HTML tags
contained in the inputData parameter (field or variable of the BLOB or Text type) and
returns the resulting data in outputData.

This command lets you carry out processing on tagged HTML code without it being
necessary for the Web server to send an HTML page using a command of the SEND HTML
BLOB type or that a page suffixed “.shtml” be requested via a URL. It is not even necessary
for the 4D Web server to be started.

Pass the data containing the tags to be processed in the inputData parameter. This
parameter can be a field or variable of the BLOB or Text type. Keep in mind that it is
generally prefereable to use the BLOB type since the number of characters is not limited
(32,000 limit for the Text type).

All the HTML tags of 4D are supported (4DVAR, 4DSCRIPT, 4DLOOP, etc.), regardless of the
Web server operating mode (contextual or non-contextual) — and even when it is not
started.

Note: When using the 4DINCLUDE tag outside the framework of the Web server (Web
process):
• with 4D in local mode or 4D Server, the default folder is the folder containing the
database structure file,
• with 4D in remote mode, the default folder is the folder containing the 4D application.

After command execution, the outputData parameter receives the data of the inputData
parameter, along with the result of the processing of any 4D HTML tags that it contains,
when applicable. If inputData does not contain any 4D HTML tags, the contents of
outputData is identical to that of inputData.
The outputData parameter may be a field or a variable, but it must be of the same type as
that of the inputData parameter.

4D Language Reference 2097

This command makes it possible to store the values resulting from the processing of HTML
tags in the database before they are sent.
It also permits the parsing of 4D HTML tags apart from the use of the Web server. In
particular, you can use it to send e-mail messages in HTML format that contain processing
of and/or references to data contained in the database via the 4D Internet Commands.

Example
The following example shows how this command works:

C_BLOB($in)
C_BLOB($out)
C_TEXT($in_text)
C_TEXT(Var)
C_TEXT(VarHTML)

Var:="<B>"
$in_text:="<p><!--#4DVAR Var→</p>"
TEXT TO BLOB($in_text;$in;UTF8 Text without length)
PROCESS HTML TAGS($in;$out)
VarHTML:=BLOB to text($out;UTF8 Text without length)
` HTMLvar contains <p>&lt;B&gt;</p>

See Also
4D HTML Tags.

2098 4D Language Reference

Secured Web connection Web Server

version 6.7
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Secured Web connection → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Boolean ← True = the web connection is secured.

False = the web connection is not secured.

Description
The Secured Web connection command returns a Boolean indicating if the 4D Web server
connection was done in secured mode through SSL (the request starts with “https:” instead of
“http:”).

• If the connection is made through SSL, the function returns True.

• If the connection is made in a non-secured mode, the function returns False.

Note: For more information on the SSL protocol, refer to section Using SSL Protocol.

This command allows, for example, denying connections made in a non-secured mode (if
any).

See Also
GENERATE CERTIFICATE REQUEST, Using SSL Protocol.

4D Language Reference 2099

SEND HTML BLOB Web Server

version 6.5
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SEND HTML BLOB (blob; type{; noContext})

Parameter Type Description

blob BLOB → BLOB to send to the browser
type String → Data type of the BLOB
noContext Boolean → True = Switch to non contextual mode
False = Keep current mode

Description
The SEND HTML BLOB command allows you to send blob to the browser.

The type of data contained in the BLOB is indicated by type. This parameter can be one of the
following types:

• type = Empty String (""): In this case, you don’t need to supply any more information in the
BLOB. The browser will try to interpret the contents of the BLOB.

• type = File extension (example: ".HTM", ".GIF", ".JPEG", etc.): In this case, you specify the
MIME type of the data contained in the BLOB by indicating its extension. The BLOB will then
be interpreted according to its extension. However, the extension must be a standard one so
that the browser can correctly interpret it.

• type = Mime/Type (example: “text/html”, “image/tiff”, etc.): In this case, you directly specify
the MIME type of data contained in the BLOB. This solution offers you more freedom. Besides
the standard types, you can pass a custom MIME type to send proprietary documents via
Intranet. To do so, you only need to configure the browsers so that they recognize the type
sent and so that they can open the appropriate application. The value you pass to type is, in
this case, “application/x-[TypeName]”. In the client workstations’s browser, you reference this
type and associate it to the “Launch the application” action. The SEND HTML BLOB command
allows you to therefore send all types of documents, the Intranet clients automatically open
the associated application.

2100 4D Language Reference

Note: If the BLOB is of type “text/html” (.htm, .html, .shtm, .shtml), it is translated and
analyzed as an HTML file. In this case, when used in contextual mode, SEND HTML BLOB
works exactly as SEND HTML FILE. That is, a 4D method that issues a SEND HTML BLOB("") call
should be called in one of the HTML pages, in order to terminate the original SEND HTML
BLOB call. For more information, refer to the SEND HTML FILE command description.

Here is a list of the most common MIME types:

Extension Mime/Type
.htm text/html
.html text/html
.shtml text/html
.shtm text/html
.css text/css
.pdf application/pdf
.rtf application/rtf
.ps application/postscript
.eps application/postscript
.hqx application/mac-binhex40
.js application/javascript
.txt text/plain
.text text/plain
.gif image/gif
.jpg image/jpeg
.jpeg image/jpeg 
.jpe image/jpeg
.jfif image/jpeg
.pic image/pict
.pict image/pict
.tif image/tiff
.tiff image/tiff
.mpeg video/mpeg
.mpg video/mpeg
.mov video/quicktime
.moov video/quicktime
.aif audio/aiff
.aiff audio/aiff
.wav audio/wav
.ram audio/x-pn-realaudio
.sit application/x-stuffit
.bin application/x-stuffit
.z application/x-zip

4D Language Reference 2101

.zip application/x-zip
.gz application/x-gzip
.tar application/x-tar

Note: For more information, go to http://www.iana.org and look for “Protocol Numbers and
Assignment Services” topics.

The noContext parameter allows you to tell the 4D Web server that you want to switch from
contextual mode to non-contextual mode. In this case, pass True to noContext.
If the parameter is omitted or contains False, the current mode is used.
The references to 4D variables and 4DSCRIPT type tags in the page are always parsed, whatever
the mode.

Example
Refer to the example of the routine PICTURE TO GIF.

See Also
SEND HTML FILE.

2102 4D Language Reference

SEND HTML FILE Web Server

version 6.5 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SEND HTML FILE (htmlFile)

Parameter Type Description

htmlFile String --> HTML Pathname to HTML file
or empty string for terminating SEND HTML FILE

Description
The SEND HTML FILE command sends, to the Web browser, the Web page stored in the HTML
document whose pathname you pass in htmlFile.

By default, 4D looks for the HTML document within the HTML root folder, defined in the
application Preferences.

This command will only acccept path names in HTML syntax as a parameter: names of
directories or folders must be separated with a slash ("/") regardless of the platform.
If you specify an invalid HTML pathname, 4D sends the message “The requested HTML page
could not be found” to the Web browser.

The alternate syntax SEND HTML FILE(""), in which you pass an empty string in hmtlFile, allows
you, in contextual mode, to terminate the call to SEND HTML FILE, which initiated the HTML
mode. This is illustrated in the following diagram:

4D Language Reference 2103

1. In contextual mode, a 4D Method (Project, Object or Database) issues a call to SEND HTML
FILE, sending an HTML document to the browser.
2. The initial Web page sent to the browser may have HTML links to other Web pages or can
itself refer to 4D Methods that call SEND HTML FILE to send other Web pages. These other
pages may have links or refer to 4D Methods for accessing other pages, and so on. While
navigating through the Web pages, you can also use browser’s navigation controls, such as the
Back button.

3. Any of the Web pages can include references to a 4D method that issues a SEND HTML
FILE("") call. This call terminates the SEND HTML FILE call that initiated the whole thing, and
you go back, pursuing the execution 4D Method that originally started the free Web
navigation.

Once SEND HTML FILE is executed, the OK system variable is updated: if the file to be sent
exists and if the timeout has not run out, OK is equal to 1. Otherwise, it is equal to 0.

Note: If you call SEND HTML FILE from within a process that is not a Web process, the
command does nothing and returns no error; the call is simply ignored.

The references to 4D variables and 4DSCRIPTS type tags in the page are always parsed,
whatever the mode.

Examples
1. The HTML root folder of the database is the WebDocs folder. It contains the following
elements:

..\WebDocs\HTM\MyPage.HTM

Sending the Web page "MyPage.HTM" must be carried out in the following manner :

SEND HTML FILE ("HTM/MyPage.HTM")

2. Example in contextual mode:during a 4D Web session, you are adding records using a 4D
form. In this form, there is a bHelp button, whose object method is as follows:

` bHelp button Object Method

SEND HTML FILE ("Help.HTM")

Starting from the Help.HTM document, you can freely navigate between numerous HTML
pages which implement the database Help system for your Web site. In each page, you have a
submit button titled Done, which allows you to go back to data entry.

2104 4D Language Reference

To do so, each of the HTML documents must contain the definition of this submit button:

<!-- bDone submit button -->

<P><INPUT TYPE="submit" NAME="bDone" VALUE="Done"></P>
as well as the definition of the form post action:

<!-- Execute the 4D htm_Help_Done when a submit button is hit -->

<FORM action="/4DMETHOD/htm_Help_Done" method="POST">

On the 4D side, the project method htm_Help_Done terminates the SEND HTML FILE initiated
by the bHelp button:

` htm_Help_Done Project Method

SEND HTML FILE ("")

The call to SEND HTML FILE in the object Method of the bHelp button is the last line of the
method. When the method is completed, you return to data entry.

System Variables and Sets

If the file to be sent exists and if the timeout has not run out, OK is set to 1. Otherwise, it is
equal to 0.

See Also
Binding 4D objects with HTML objects, SEND HTML BLOB, Your First Time with the Web Server.

4D Language Reference 2105

SEND HTML TEXT Web Server

version 6.7
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SEND HTML TEXT (htmlText{; noContext})

Parameter Type Description

htmlText Text → HTML text field or variable to be sent
to the Web browser
noContext Boolean → True = Go to non contextual mode
False or omitted = Remains in the current mode

Description
The SEND HTML TEXT command directly sends HTML formatted text data.

The htmlText parameter contains the data to be sent. As 4D does not check the parameter
content, make sure that the HTML encoding is correct. The text variable should be expressed
using the ISO Latin-1 character map.

Note: This command is similar to the SEND HTML BLOB command using a BLOB with a
“html/txt” type.

The noContext parameter indicates to the 4D Web server that you want to switch from the
contextual mode to the non-contextual mode when executing the command.
In this case, pass True in the noContext parameter if you want to use the non-contextual
mode. Pass False or nothing if you want to use the current mode.

The references to the 4D variables and 4DSCRIPT type tags (if any) in the text are always
analyzed, regardless of the mode.

Example
The following method:

TEXT TO BLOB("<html><head></head><body>"+String(Current time)+"</body></html>";

$blob;;UTF8 Text without length)
SEND HTML BLOB($blob;"text/html")

2106 4D Language Reference

... can be replaced by the single line:

SEND HTML TEXT("<html><head></head><body>"+String(Current time)+

"</body></html>")

See Also
Mac to ISO, SEND HTML BLOB.

4D Language Reference 2107

SEND HTTP RAW DATA Web Server

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SEND HTTP RAW DATA (data{; *})

Parameter Type Description

data BLOB → HTTP data to send
* * → Send chunked

Description
The SEND HTTP RAW DATA command lets the 4D Web server send “raw” HTTP data, which
can be chunked. It only operates in non-contextual mode.

The data parameter contains the two standard parts of an HTTP response, i.e. Header and
Body. The data are sent without prior formatting by the server. However, 4D carries out a
basic check of the response header and body in order to make sure that they are valid:
• If the header is incomplete or does not comply with the HTTP protocol specifications, 4D
will change it accordingly.
• If the HTTP request is incomplete, 4D adds the missing information. If, for instance, you
want to redirect the request, you must write:
HTTP/1.1 302
Location: http://...
If you only pass:
Location: http://...
4D will complete the request by adding HTTP/1.1 302.

The optional * parameter lets you specify that the response will be sent “chunked”. The
cutting up of responses into chunks can be useful when the server sends a response without
knowing its total length (if, for instance, the response has not yet been generated). All
HTTP/1.1-compatible browsers accept chunked responses.
If you pass the * parameter, the Web server will automatically include the transfer-encoding:
chunked field in the header of the response, if necessary (you can handle the response
header manually if you so desire). The remainder of the response will also be formatted in
order to respect the syntax of the chunked option. Chunked responses contain a single
header and an undefined number of body “chunks”.
All the SEND HTTP RAW DATA statements that follow the execution of SEND HTTP RAW
DATA(data;*) within the same method will be considered as part of the response (regardless
of whether they contain the * parameter). The server puts an end to the chunked send
when the method execution is terminated.

2108 4D Language Reference

Note: If the Web client does not support HTTP/1.1, 4D will automatically convert the
response into an HTTP/1.0-compatible format (the data sent will not be chunked).
However, in this case, the result may not correspond to your wishes. It is therefore
recommended to check whether the Web browser supports HTTP/1.1 and to send an
appropriate response. To do so, you can use a method such as:
C_BOOLEAN($0)
ARRAY TEXT(arFields;0)
ARRAY TEXT(arValues;0)
GET HTTP HEADER(arFields;arValues)
$0:=False
If (Size of array(arValues)>=3)
If (Position("HTTP/1.1";arValues{3})>0)
$0:=True ` The browser supports HTTP/1.1; $0 returns True
End if
End if

Combined with the new GET HTTP BODY command and other commands of the “Web
Server” theme, this command completes the range of tools available to 4D developers in
order to entirely customize the processing of incoming and outgoing HTTP connections.
These different tools are shown in the following diagram:

4D Language Reference 2109

Example
This example illustrates the use of the chunked option with the SEND HTTP RAW DATA
command. The data (a sequence of numbers) are sent in 100 chunks generated on the fly in
a loop. Keep in mind that the header of the response is not explicitly set: the SEND HTTP
RAW DATA command will send it automatically and insert the transfer-encoding: chunked
field into it since the * parameter is used.

C_LONGINT($cpt)
C_BLOB($my_blob)
C_TEXT($output)

For ($cpt;1;100)
$output:="["+String($cpt)+"]"
TEXT TO BLOB($output;$my_blob;UTF8 Text without length)
SEND HTTP RAW DATA($my_blob;*)
End for

See Also
GET HTTP BODY, GET HTTP HEADER.

2110 4D Language Reference

SEND HTTP REDIRECT Web Server

version 6.5
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SEND HTTP REDIRECT (url{; *})

Parameter Type Description

url String → New URL
* * → If specified = URL is not translated,
If omitted = URL is translated

Description
The SEND HTTP REDIRECT command allows you to transform a URL into another one.

The url parameter contains the new URL that allows you to redirect the request. If this
parameter is a url to a file, it must contain the reference to this file, for example: SEND HTTP
REDIRECT ("/MyPage.HTM").

When this command is called in contextual mode, the Web process is aborted just after being
executed. The command prevails over commands that send data (SEND HTML FILE, SEND HTML
BLOB, etc.) that may be in the same method.

This command also allows you to redirect a request to another Web server.

4D automatically encodes the URL’s special characters. If you pass the * character, 4D will not
translate them.

Example
You can use this command to execute custom requests in 4D by using static pages. Imagine
that you have placed the following elements in a static HTML page:

4D Language Reference 2111

Note: The POST action “/4dcgi/rech” has been associated to the text area and to the OK and
Cancel buttons.

In the On Web Connection database method part (or subroutine) that manages the non-
contextual mode, you insert the following code:

Case of
: ($1="/4dcgi/rech") `When 4D receives this URL
`If the OK button has been used and the ‘name’ field contains a Value
If ((bOK="OK") & (name # ""))
`Change the URL to execute the request code,
`placed farther down in the same method
SEND HTTP REDIRECT("/4dcgi/rech?"+name)
Else
`Else return to the beginning page
SEND HTTP REDIRECT("/page1.htm")
End if
...
: ($1="/4dcgi/rech?@") `If the URL has been redirected
... `Put the request code here
End case

2112 4D Language Reference

SET CGI EXECUTABLE Web Server

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET CGI EXECUTABLE (url1{; url2})

Parameter Type Description

url1 String → Access URL
url2 String → Access URL

Description
The SET CGI EXECUTABLE command is used to execute a CGI without it being visible to the
Web user in the URL. This command can be used in particular in the On Web
Authentication Database Method to determine, for example, which CGI to execute. It
operates both under Mac OS X and Windows.

Note: For more information about CGIs, refer to the Using CGIs section.

In url1, pass the access URL for the CGI to be executed. For example, if you write SET CGI
EXECUTABLE("/myfile.pl"), the 4D Web server will execute the CGI myfile.pl — this
application must be located in the default folder of the Web server.
If you pass an empty string ("") in url1, 4D will execute the CGI specified in the URL sent by
the browser directly, where applicable.

In the optional url2 parameter, pass the access URL for the file that you want to be
processed by the CGI. For example, if you write SET CGI EXECUTABLE("cgi-
bin/Perl2.cgi";"Perl2.pl"), the Web server will execute the CGI Perl2.cgi (located in the cgi-
bin folder) by passing it the Perl2.pl file.
If you pass an empty string ("") in url2, 4D will pass the file specified in the URL sent by the
browser to the CGI for processing. This mechanism is used more particularly by PHP.
Example: SET CGI EXECUTABLE("/cgi-bin/php";"").

If the access URL indicated by the command is incorrect, the browser will display the “File
not found” error page.

Keep in mind that the SET CGI EXECUTABLE command does not return an error directly.
This command only sets a “current value” that will be used subsequently when the CGI is
called. In the event of multiple calls with this command, only the value indicated by the
last call will be used.

4D Language Reference 2113

Example
In this example, the example.php file, which is not located in the cgi-bin folder, is
processed by the CGI Perl2.cgi, located in the cgi-bin folder:

SET CGI EXECUTABLE("/cgi-bin/Perl2.cgi";"example.php")

See Also
Using CGIs.

2114 4D Language Reference

SET HOME PAGE Web Server

version 6.5
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET HOME PAGE (homePage)

Parameter Type Description

homePage String → Page name or HTML access path to the page or
"" to not send the custom home page

Description
The SET HOME PAGE command allows you to modify the custom home page for the current
Web process.

The defined page is linked to the Web process, you can therefore define the different home
pages depending, for example, on the user that is connected. This page can either be static or
semi-dynamic.

You pass the name of the HTML home page or the page’s HTML access path to the homePage
parameter.
To stop sending homePage as home page for the current Web process, execute SET HOME PAGE
with an empty string ("") passed in homePage.

Note: 4D also allows you to define a default home page in the Preferences dialog box. In this
case, the page applies to all the Web connections whatever the Web server’s startup mode
(contextual or non-contextual).

See Also
Web Server Settings.

4D Language Reference 2115

SET HTML ROOT Web Server

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET HTML ROOT (rootFolder)

Parameter Type Description

rootFolder String → Pathname of Web server root folder

Description
The SET HTML ROOT command is used to modify the default root folder where 4D looks for
the HTML files requested of the Web server.
This command does not take the default root folder that may have been set in the database
Preference into account. For more information about this folder, please refer to the Connection
Security section.

The location of the root folder can be expression either in HTML syntax (URL type), or in
system syntax (absolute path):
• HTML syntax: folder names are separated by a slash ("/"), regardless of the platform you use.
• System syntax: absolute pathname (“long name”) respecting the syntax of the current
platform, for example:
- (Mac OS) Disk:Applications:myserv:folder
- (Windows) C:\Applications\myserv\folder

Notes:
• The Web server will need to be restarted in order for the new root folder to be taken into
account.
• You can find out the location of the current root folder at any time using the Get 4D folder
command.

If you specify an invalid pathname, an OS File manager error is generated. You can intercept
the error with an ON ERR CALL method. If you display an alert or a message from within the
error method, it will appear on the browser side.

See Also
Get 4D folder, ON ERR CALL.

2116 4D Language Reference

SET HTTP HEADER Web Server

version 6.8 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET HTTP HEADER (header|fieldArray{; valueArray})

Parameter Type Description

header|fieldArray Text|Text Array → Field or variable containing the request HTTP header
or HTTP header fields
valueArray Text Array → HTTP header field content

Description
The SET HTTP HEADER command allows you to set the fields in the HTTP header of the reply
sent to the Web browser by 4D. It only has an effect in a Web process in non-contextual
mode.
This command allows you to manage “cookies”.

Two syntaxes are available for this command:

• First syntax: SET HTTP HEADER (header)

You pass the HTTP header fields to the fields parameter, of the Text type (variable or field),
that you want to set.
This syntax allows writing header types such as "HTTP/1.0 200 OK"+Char(13)+"Set-Cookie:
C=HELLO". Header fields must be separated by the CR or CR+LF (Carriage return + Line feed)
sequence, under Windows and Mac OS, 4D formats the reply.

Here is an example of a custom “cookie”:

C_TEXT($vTcookie)
$vTcookie:="SET-COOKIE: USER="+String(Abs(Random))+"; PATH=/"
SET HTTP HEADER($vTcookie)

Note: The command will not accept a literal text type constant as the header parameter; it
must be a 4D variable or field.

For more information about the syntax, please refer to the R.F.Cs (Request For Comments)
that can be found at the following Internet address: http://www.w3c.org.

4D Language Reference 2117

• Second syntax: SET HTTP HEADER (fieldArray; valueArray)
The HTTP header is defined through two text arrays, fieldArray and valueArray. The header will
be written as follows:

fieldArray{1}:="X-VERSION"
fieldArray{2}:="X-STATUS"
fieldArray{3}:="Set-Cookie"

valueArray{1}:="HTTP/1.0" *
valueArray{2}:="200 OK" *
valueArray{3}:="C=HELLO"

* The first two items are the first line of the reply. When they are entered, they must be the
first and second items of the arrays. However, it is possible to omit them and to write only the
following (4D will handle the header format):

fieldArray{1}:="Set-Cookie"
valueArray{1}:="C=HELLO"

If you do not specify a state, it will automatically be HTTP/1.0 200 OK.

The Server, Date and Content-Length fields are always set by 4D.

See Also
GET HTTP HEADER.

2118 4D Language Reference

SET WEB DISPLAY LIMITS Web Server

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET WEB DISPLAY LIMITS (numberRecords{; numberPages{; picRef}})

Parameter Type Description

numberRecords Number → Maximum number of records to display
in each HTML page
numberPages Number → Maximum number of page references
at bottom of each HTML page
picRef Number → Picture reference number for full page record button

Description
The SET WEB DISPLAY LIMITS command modifies the way 4D displays a selection of records on
the Web browser side when you call DISPLAY SELECTION or MODIFY SELECTION. This
command only operates in contextual mode.

When you display a selection of records using 4D, the program does not load all the records of
the selection; it only loads (from the disk) the records that are visible in the window at one
time. In doing so, although you create a selection of thousands of records, displaying them is
quite fast. Then, if you scroll or resize the window, 4D loads the records appropriately.

On the Web, 4D divides the selection of records to be displayed in pages. Without a paging
scheme, a selection of thousands of records would result in thousands of records going over
the Internet or your Intranet to be displayed in only one Web page. It also would take quite
some time to download these records, and your Web browser would more than likely run out
of memory.

By default, 4D displays the first 20 records of the selection and includes, at the end of each
HTML page, 20 links to the first 20 pages of the selection. This means that, by default, you can
browse the first 400 records of the selection by clicking on the page links located at the end of
each selection page. Note that this paging system is transparent to your coding; everything
happens within the call to DISPLAY SELECTION or MODIFY SELECTION.

SET WEB DISPLAY LIMITS enables you to change these settings. In the numberRecords parameter,
you indicate the maximum number of records you want to display per selection page. In
numberPages, you indicate the maximum number of selection page links you want at the end
of each selection page.

4D Language Reference 2119

For example, if you have a selection of 10,000 records and want to browse all of them in one
display selection, you can pass numberRecords=100 and numberPages=100. However,
remember that the data is going over the network or Internet; with the Internet, you must
take the speed factor into account when changing the display selection settings.
In addition, SET WEB DISPLAY LIMITS optionally allows you to change the default icon of the
full page record button. In the picRef parameter, specify the picture reference number of the
picture stored in the database Picture library you want to use as new icon.
SET WEB DISPLAY LIMITS only affects subsequent calls to DISPLAY SELECTION or MODIFY
SELECTION, and its scope is local to the current process.

Example
In the following example, a DISPLAY SELECTION or a MODIFY SELECTION is issued for a [Zip
Codes] table. By default, 4D displays the records on the Web browser side as shown here:

Note that the first 400 records can be browsed.

If the following picture is added to the database Picture Library:

2120 4D Language Reference

And, if the project method that displays the selection performs the SET WEB DISPLAY LIMITS
call shown here, prior to the call to DISPLAY SELECTION or MODIFY SELECTION:

SET WEB DISPLAY LIMITS (50;100;17877)

Then the selection on the Web browser side ends up looking like this:

You can now browse the first 5,000 records of the selection.

See Also
DISPLAY SELECTION, MODIFY SELECTION, Using the Contextual Mode.

4D Language Reference 2121

SET WEB TIMEOUT Web Server

version 6.5 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET WEB TIMEOUT (timeout)

Parameter Type Description

timeout Number → Web connections timeout expressed in seconds

Description
The SET WEB TIMEOUT command sets the timeout for the Web Connection processes in
contextual mode. The default timeout is 5 minutes.

You reduce or increase this delay by passing, in the timeout parameter, the new timeout
expressed in seconds.

The command takes effect immediately, and its scope is the working session.
• If SET WEB TIMEOUT is called from within a Web process, the value of timeout is applied to
that process only.
• If SET WEB TIMEOUT is not called from a Web process, all the Web Connection processes are
affected.

See Also
Using the Contextual Mode, Web Server Settings.

2122 4D Language Reference

START WEB SERVER Web Server

version 2003 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

START WEB SERVER

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
The START WEB SERVER command starts the Web server of the 4D application on which it has
been executed (4D ou 4D Server). The database is therefore published on your Intranet
network or on the Internet.

If the Web Server is successfully started, OK is set to 1, otherwise OK is set to 0 (zero). For
example,
if the TCP/IP network protocol is not properly configured, OK is set to 0.

See Also
STOP WEB SERVER.

System Variables and Sets

If the Web Server is successfully started, OK is set to 1; otherwise OK is set to 0.

4D Language Reference 2123

STOP WEB SERVER Web Server

version 2003 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

STOP WEB SERVER

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
The STOP WEB SERVER command stops the Web server of the 4D application on which it has
been executed (4D ou 4D Server). If the Web server has been started, all Web connections are
stopped, and all Web processes terminated.
If the Web server has not been started, the command does nothing.

See Also
START WEB SERVER.

2124 4D Language Reference

Validate Digest Web Password Web Server

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Validate Digest Web Password (userName; password) → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

userName Text → User name
password Text → User password

Function result Boolean ← True=Authentication OK,

False=Authentication failed

Description
The Validate Digest Web Password command can be used to check the validity of the
identifying information (name and password) provided by a user connecting to the Web
server. This command must be used in the On Web Authentication Database Method in the
context of Web authentication in Digest mode (see the Connection Security section).

In the userName and password parameters, pass the identifying information of the user
stored locally. The command uses this information to generate a value that it compares
with the information sent by the Web browser.

If the values are the same, the command returns True. Otherwise, it returns False.

You can use this mechanism to manage and maintain your own secure access system to the
Web server by programming. Note that Digest validation cannot be used jointly with 4D
passwords.

Note: If the browser does not support Digest authentication, an error is returned
(authentication error).

Example
Example using On Web Authentication Database Method in Digest mode:

` On Web Authentication Database Method

C_TEXT($1;$2;$5;$6;$3;$4)
C_TEXT($user)
C_BOOLEAN($0)
$0:=False
$user:=$5

4D Language Reference 2125

 `For security reasons, refuse names containing @
If (WithWildcard($user))
$0:=False
`The WithWildcard method is described in the
` "On Web Authentication Database Method" section
Else
QUERY([WebUsers];[WebUsers]User=$user)
If (OK=1)
$0:=Validate Digest Web Password($user;[WebUsers]password)
Else
$0:=False `User does not exist
End if
End if

See Also
On Web Authentication Database Method.

2126 4D Language Reference

WEB CACHE STATISTICS Web Server

version 6.5
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

WEB CACHE STATISTICS (pages; hits; usage)

Parameter Type Description

pages Text Array ← Names of the most consulted pages
hits Longint Array ← Number of hits for each page
usage Number ← Percentage of the cache used

Description
The WEB CACHE STATISTICS command allows you to obtain information about the most
consulted pages loaded in the Web server’s cache. Consequently, these statistics only concern
static pages, GIF pictures, JPEG pictures <100 KB and style sheets (.css).

Note: For more information about setting the 4D Web server’s cache, please refer to section
Web Server Settings.

The command fills the pages Text array with the names of the most consulted pages. The hits
Longint array receives the number of “hits” for each page. The usage parameter receives the
percentage of the Web cache used by each page.

Example
Let’s assume that you want to generate a semi-dynamic page that displays the statistics of the
Web cache. For this, in a static HTML page named “stats.shtm”, you place the tag <!--
4DACTION/STATS––>. Then you insert two 4D variables, vPages and vUsage.
In the project method STATS, you write the following code:

C_TEXT ($1)
ARRAY TEXT (pages;0)
ARRAY LONGINT (hits;0)
C_LONGINT (vUsage)

4D Language Reference 2127

 WEB CACHE STATISTICS(pages;hits;vUsage)
vPages:=Char(1)
For ($i;1;Size of array(pages))
` For each page present in the cache
vPages:=vPages+pages{$i}+"&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;"+String(hits{$i})+"<br>"
` Insert the name of the page and the HTML code
End for
SEND HTML FILE("stats.shtm")
` The contents of the pages with the suffix “.shtm” is always parsed

See Also
Information about the Web Site, Web Server Settings.

2128 4D Language Reference

Web Context Web Server

version 2003 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Web Context → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Boolean ← True = Contextual mode

False = Non contextual mode

Description
The Web Context command must be called from a Web process. It returns a boolean that
indicates if the Web connection is executing in contextual mode (True) or in non-contextual
mode (False).

Note : The Web Context command always returns False when it is:
• called from a process other than a Web process,
• executed on a 4D Client machine.

The use of this function is advocated in the On Web Connection Database Method.

Example
Here is an example of the On Web Connection database method:

If (Web Context)
WithContext ($1;$2;$3;$4;$5;$6)
Else
WithoutContext ($1;$2;$3;$4;$5;$6)
End if

See Also
On Web Connection Database Method, PROCESS PROPERTIES, Using the Contextual Mode.

4D Language Reference 2129

2130 4D Language Reference
63
______________________
Web Services (Client)

4D Language Reference 2131

2132 4D Language Reference
Web Services (Client) Commands Web Services (Client)

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Starting with version 2003, 4D supports“Web Services”, meaning that the program enables
you to publish (server part) and/or use (client part) Web Services directly from your
database. A Web Service is a set of functions published on a network. These functions can
be called and used by any application compatible with Web Services and connected to a
network. Web Services can carry out all types of tasks, such as supervising the routing of
packages at a transporter’s, e-commerce, monitoring market values, etc.
For more information about the concept and operation of Web Services, refer to the Design
Reference manual.

Subscription to Web Services with 4D is easy to carry out using the Web Services Wizard. In
most cases, this Wizard will be sufficient for you to be able to use Web Services. However, if
you want to customize certain mechanisms, you must use the client SOAP commands of
4D.

This section describes the commands used for subscription to external Web Services (client
part). For a description of the commands used for the publication of Web Services (server
part), refer to the Web Services (Server) Commands theme.

Note: By convention, the terms “SOAP” and “Web Service” have been used to differentiate
between command (and constant) names on the server and client side, respectively. These
two concepts refer to the same technology.

4D Language Reference 2133

AUTHENTICATE WEB SERVICE Web Services (Client)

version 11.3 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

AUTHENTICATE WEB SERVICE (name; password{; authMethod{; *}})

Parameter Type Description

name String → User name
password String → User password
authMethod Longint → Authentication method
0 or omitted = not specified, 1 = BASIC, 2 = DIGEST
* * → If passed: authentication by proxy

Description
The AUTHENTICATE WEB SERVICE command enables the use of Web Services requiring
authentication of the client application (simple authentication). The BASIC and DIGEST
methods are supported, as well as the presence of a proxy.

Note: For more information about the BASIC and DIGEST authentication methods, please
refer to the Connection Security section.

In the name and password parameters, pass the required identification information (user
name and password). This information will be encoded and added to the HTTP request sent
to the Web Service using the CALL WEB SERVICE command. It is thus necessary to call the
AUTHENTICATE WEB SERVICE command before calling the CALL WEB SERVICE command.

The optional authMethod parameter can be used to indicate the authentication method to
be used for the next call to the CALL WEB SERVICE command. You can pass one of the
following values:
• 2 = use the DIGEST authentication method
• 1 = use the BASIC authentication method
• 0 (or parameter omitted) = use the appropriate method. In this case, 4D sends an
additional request in order to negotiate the authentication method.

If you pass the * parameter, you indicate that the authentication information is to be sent
to an HTTP proxy. This configuration must be implemented when there is a proxy that
requires authentication between the Web Service client and the Web Service itself. If the
Web Service is itself authenticated, a double authentication is required (see the example).

By default, the authentication information is reset to zero after each request. Therefore, you
must use the AUTHENTICATE WEB SERVICE command before each CALL WEB SERVICE
command. It is nevertheless possible to temporarily keep this information using an option
of the SET WEB OPTION SERVICE command. In this case, it is not necessary to execute the
AUTHENTICATE WEB SERVICE command before each CALL WEB SERVICE command.

2134 4D Language Reference

If authentication fails, the SOAP server returns an error that you can identify using the Get
Web Service error info command.

Example
Authentication with a Web Service located behind a proxy:

`Authentication to Web Service in DIGEST mode

AUTHENTICATE WEB SERVICE("SoapUser";"123";2)
`Authentication to proxy in default mode
AUTHENTICATE WEB SERVICE("ProxyUser";"456";*)
CALL WEB SERVICE(...)
See Also
CALL WEB SERVICE, Get Web Service error info.

4D Language Reference 2135

CALL WEB SERVICE Web Services (Client)

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

CALL WEB SERVICE (accessURL; soapAction; methodName; namespace{; complexType{; *}})

Parameter Type Description

accessURL String → Access URL to Web Service
soapAction String → Contents of SOAPAction field
methodName String → Name of the method
namespace String → Namespace
complexType Longint → Configuration of complex types
(simple types if omitted)
* * → Do not close connection

Description
The CALL WEB SERVICE command is used to call a Web Service by sending an HTTP request.
This request contains the SOAP message created previously using the SET WEB SERVICE
PARAMETER command.

Any subsequent call to the SET WEB SERVICE PARAMETER command will cause the creation
of a new request. The execution of the CALL WEB SERVICE command also erases any result
from a previously-called Web Service and replaces it with the new result(s).

In accessURL, pass the complete URL allowing access to the Web Service (do not confuse
this URL with that of the WSDL file, which describes the Web Service).

• Access in secure mode (SSL): If you want to use a Web Service in secure mode using SSL,
pass https:// in front of the URL instead of http://. This configuration automatically enables
connection in secure mode.

In soapAction, pass the contents of the SOAPAction field of the request. This field generally
contains the value “ServiceName#MethodName”.

In methodName, pass the name of the remote method (belonging to the Web Service) that
you want to execute.

In namespace, pass the XML namespace used for the SOAP request. For more information
about XML namespaces, refer to the Design Mode manual of 4D.

2136 4D Language Reference

The optional complexType parameter specifies the configuration of the Web Service
parameters sent or received (defined using the SET WEB SERVICE PARAMETER and GET WEB
SERVICE RESULT commands). The value of the complexType parameter depends on the
publication mode of the Web Service (DOC or RPC, see the Design Reference manual of 4D)
and on its own parameters.
In complexType, you must pass one of the following constants, located in the Web Services
(Client) theme:
Constant Type Value
Web Service Dynamic Longint 0 (default)
Web Service Manual In Longint 1
Web Service Manual Out Longint 2
Web Service Manual Longint 3

Each constant corresponds to a Web Services “configuration”. A configuration represents

the combination of a publication mode (RPC/DOC) and the types of parameters
(input/output, simple or complex) implemented.

Note: Remember that the “input” or “output” characteristic of parameters is evaluated from
the point of view of the proxy method/Web Service:
• an “input” parameter is a value passed to the proxy method and thus to the Web Service,
• an “output” parameter is returned by the Web Service and thus by the proxy method
(generally via $0).

The following table shows all the possible configurations as well as the corresponding
constants:
Input parameters
Output parameters Simple Complex
Simple Web Service Dynamic Web Service Manual In
(RPC mode) (RPC mode)
Complex Web Service Manual Out Web Service Manual
(RPC mode) (RPC or DOC mode)

The five configurations described below can therefore be implemented. In all cases, 4D will
handle the formatting of the SOAP request to be sent to the Web Service as well as its
envelope. It is up to you to format the contents of this request according to the
configuration used.

Note: Despite the fact that they are complex XML types, data arrays are handled by 4D as
simple types.

RPC mode, simple input and output

This configuration is the easiest to use. In this case, the complexType contains the Web
Service Dynamic constant or is omitted.
The parameters sent and responses received can be handled directly, without prior
processing.
Refer to the example of the command GET WEB SERVICE RESULT.

4D Language Reference 2137

RPC mode, complex input and simple output
In this case, the complexType parameter contains the Web Service Manual In constant. With
this configuration, you must “manually” pass each XML source element in the form of a
BLOB to the Web Service, using the SET WEB SERVICE PARAMETER command.
It is up to you to format the initial BLOB as a valid XML element. As its first element, this
BLOB must contain the first apparent “child” element of the <Body> element of the final
request.
• Example
C_BLOB($1)
C_BOOLEAN($0)

SET WEB SERVICE PARAMETER("MyXMLBlob";$1)

CALL WEB SERVICE("http://my.domain.com/my_service";"MySoapAction";
"TheMethod";"http://my.namespace.com/";Web Service Manual In)
GET WEB SERVICE RESULT($0;"MyOutputVar";*)

RPC mode, simple input and complex output

In this case, the complexType parameter contains the Web Service Manual Out constant.
Each output parameter will be returned by the Web Service in the form of an XML element
stored in a BLOB. You retrieve this parameter using the GET WEB SERVICE RESULT command.
You can then parse the contents of the BLOB received using the XML commands of 4D.
• Example
C_BLOB($0)
C_BOOLEAN($1)

SET WEB SERVICE PARAMETER("MyInputVar";$1)

CALL WEB SERVICE("http://my.domain.com/my_service";"MySoapAction";
"TheMethod";"http://my.namespace.com/";Web Service Manual Out)
GET WEB SERVICE RESULT($0;"MyXMLOutput";*)

RPC mode, complex input and output

In this case, the complexType parameter contains the Web Service Manual constant. Each
input and output parameter must be stored in the form of XML elements in BLOBs, as
described in the two previous configurations.
• Example
C_BLOB($0)
C_BLOB($1)

SET WEB SERVICE PARAMETER("MyXMLInputBlob";$1)

CALL WEB SERVICE("http://my.domain.com/my_service";"MySoapAction";
"TheMethod";"http://my.namespace.com/";Web Service Manual)
GET WEB SERVICE RESULT($0;"MyXMLOutput";*)

2138 4D Language Reference

DOC mode
A proxy calling method for a DOC Web Service is similar to a proxy calling method for an
RPC Web Service using complex type input and output parameters.
The only difference between these two configurations lies at the level of the XML content
of BLOB parameters sent and received. From 4D’s point of view, the building and sending
of the SOAP request are identical.
• Example
C_BLOB($0)
C_BLOB($1)

SET WEB SERVICE PARAMETER("MyXMLInput";$1)

CALL WEB SERVICE("http://my.domain.com/my_service";"MySoapAction";
"TheMethod";"http://my.namespace.com/";Web Service Manual)
GET WEB SERVICE RESULT($0;"MyXMLOutput";*)

Note: In the case of DOC Web Services, the value of the strings (“MyXMLInput” and
“MyXMLOutput” above) passed as parameters is of no importance; it is even possible to
pass empty strings "". In fact, these values are not used in the SOAP request containing the
XML document. It is, nevertheless, mandatory to pass these parameters.

To use a Web Service published in DOC mode (or in RPC mode with complex types), it is
advisable to proceed as follows:
• Generate the proxy method using the Client Web Services Wizard.
The proxy method will be called in the following manner:
$XMLresultBlob:=$DOCproxy_Method($XMLparamBlob)
• Familiarize yourself with the contents of SOAP requests to be sent to the Web Service
using an on-line test (for instance, http://soapclient.com/soaptest.html). This type of tool is
used to generate HTML test forms based on the WSDL of the Web Service.
• Copy the XML contents generated from the first child element of <body>.
• Write the method enabling you to place the real parameter values into the XML code;
this code must then be placed in the $XMLparamBlob BLOB.
• To parse the response, you can also use an on-line test, or make use of the WSDL that
specifies the returned elements.

4D Language Reference 2139

The * parameter can be used to optimize calls. When it is passed, the command does not
close the connection used by the process at the end of its execution. In this case, the next
call to CALL WEB SERVICE will reuse this same connection if the * parameter is passed, and
so on. To close the connection, simply execute the CALL WEB SERVICE command without
the * parameter. This mechanism can be used to noticeably accelerate the processing of
successive calls of several different Web Services on the same server, in particular in a WAN
configuration (via the Internet, for example). Note that this mechanism depends on the
“keep-alive” setting of the Web server. This setting generally defines a maximum number
of requests via the same connection, and can even deny requests. If the CALL WEB SERVICE
requests following each other in the same connection reach this maximum number, or if
keep-alive connections are not allowed, 4D will create a new connection for each request.

See Also
GET WEB SERVICE RESULT, SET WEB SERVICE PARAMETER.

System Variables or Sets

If the request has been correctly routed and the Web Service has accepted it, the system
variable OK is set to 1. Otherwise, it is set to 0 and an error is returned.

2140 4D Language Reference

Get Web Service error info Web Services (Client)

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get Web Service error info (infoType) → String

Parameter Type Description

infoType Longint → Information to be retrieved

Function result String ← Information about the last SOAP error

Description
The Get Web Service error info command returns information about any error generated
during the execution of the last SOAP request sent to a remote Web Service. This command
should generally be called within an error-handling method installed by the ON ERR CALL
command.

The infoType parameter allows you to indicate the type of information that you want to
obtain. You must pass one of the constants listed below, located in the Web Services (Client)
theme:
Constant Type Value
Web Service Error Code Longint 0
Web Service Detailed Message Longint 1
Web Service HTTP Error code Longint 2
Web Service Fault Actor Longint 3

These constants are used to retrieve the following values:

• Web Service Error Code: Main error code (defined by 4D). This code is also returned in the
Error system variable.
List of codes that may be returned:
9910: Soap fault (see also Web Service Fault Actor)
9911: Parser fault
9912: HTTP fault (see also Web Service HTTP Error code)
9913: Network fault
9914: Internal fault.

• Web Service Detailed Message: Detailed message describing the error. The type of message
differs according to the main error type.
- If the main error = 9910 (Soap fault): the cause of the SOAP fault is returned (e.g.: “the
remote method does not exist”).
- If the main error = 9911 (Parser fault): the location of the error in the XML document is
returned.

4D Language Reference 2141

- If the main error = 9912 (HTTP fault):
- if the HTTP error is located in the interval [300-400] (problems linked to the
location of the requested document), the new location of the requested URL is
returned..
- for any other HTTP error code, the <body> is returned.
- If the main error = 9913 (Network fault): the cause of the network fault is returned (e.g.:
“ServerAddress: DNS lookup failure”)
- If the main error = 9914 (Internal fault): the cause of the internal fault is returned.

• Web Service HTTP Error code: HTTP error code (to be used in case of main error 9912).

• Web Service Fault Actor: Cause of the error (returned by the SOAP protocol — to be used in
the case of main error 9910).
- Version Mismatch
- Must Understand (the server was unable to interpret a parameter defined as
mandatory)
- Client Fault
- Server Fault
- Encoding Unknown .

An empty string is returned when no information is available, more particularly when the
last SOAP request did not generate any errors.

2142 4D Language Reference

GET WEB SERVICE RESULT Web Services (Client)

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET WEB SERVICE RESULT (returnValue{; returnName{; *}})

Parameter Type Description

returnValue Variable ← Value returned by the Web Service
returnName String → Name of the parameter to be retrieved
* → Free up memory

Description
The GET WEB SERVICE RESULT command is used to retrieve a value sent back by the Web
Service as a result of the processing performed.

Note: This command must be used only after the CALL WEB SERVICE command.

The returnValue parameter receives the value sent back by the Web Service. Pass a 4D
variable in this parameter. This variable is generally $0, corresponding to the value
returned by the proxy method. It is, however, possible to use intermediary variables (you
must use process variables only).

Note: Each 4D variable or array used must be previously declared using the commands of
the “Compiler” and “Arrays” themes.

The optional returnName parameter is used to specify the name of the parameter to be
retrieved. However, since most Web Services only return a single value, this parameter is
generally not necessary.

The optional * parameter signals the program to free up the memory devoted to the
processing of the request. You must pass this parameter after retrieving the last value sent
by the Web Service.

Example
Imagine that a Web Service returns the current time in any city in the world. The
parameters received by the Web Service are the name of the city and the country code. In
return, the Web Service sends the corresponding time. The proxy calling method could be
in the following form:

C_TEXT($1)
C_TEXT($2)
C_TIME($0)

4D Language Reference 2143

 SET WEB SERVICE PARAMETER("city";$1)
SET WEB SERVICE PARAMETER("country_code";$2)

CALL WEB SERVICE("http://www.citiesoftheworld.com/WS";"WSTime#City_time";

"City_time";"http://www.citiesoftheworld.com/namespace/default")

If (OK=1)
GET WEB SERVICE RESULT($0;"return";*) 
End if

See Also
CALL WEB SERVICE, SET WEB SERVICE PARAMETER.

2144 4D Language Reference

SET WEB SERVICE OPTION Web Services (Client)

version 11.3 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET WEB SERVICE OPTION (option; value)

Parameter Type Description

option Longint → Code of the option to set
value Longint | Text → Value of the option

Preliminary note: This command is designed for advanced Web Services users. Its use is
optional.

Description
The SET WEB SERVICE OPTION command allows you to set different options that will be
used during the next SOAP request triggered using the CALL WEB SERVICE command.
You can call this command as many times as there are options to be set.

In the option parameter, pass the number of the option to set and in the value parameter,
pass the new value of the option. For these parameters, you can use one of the following
predefined constants of the “Web Services (Client)” theme:

Constant (option param) Type Value

Web Service HTTP Timeout Longint 1
Web Service SOAP Header Longint 2
Web Service SOAP Version Longint 3
Web Service display auth dialog Longint 4
Web Service reset auth settings Longint 5
Web Service HTTP Compression Longint 6

Constant (value param) Type Value

Web Service SOAP_1_1 Longint 0
Web Service SOAP_1_2 Longint 1
Web Service Deflate Compression Longint 1

The following details each of the options and possible values:

• option = Web Service HTTP Timeout

value = timeout of the client portion expressed in seconds.
The timeout of the client portion is the wait period of the Web Service client in case the
server does not respond. After this period, the client closes the session and the request is
lost.
This timeout is 10 seconds by default. It can be modified for specific reasons (network
status, Web Service specifics, etc.).

4D Language Reference 2145

• option = Web Service SOAP Header
value = XML root element reference to insert as a header in the SOAP request.
This option allows you to insert a header in a SOAP request generated using the CALL WEB
SERVICE command. SOAP requests do not contain a specific header by default. However,
certain Web Services require a header, for example when managing identification
parameters.

• option = Web Service SOAP Version

value = Web Service SOAP_1_1 or Web Service SOAP_1_2
This option lets you specify the SOAP protocol version used in the request. Pass the Web
Service SOAP_1_1 constant in value to indicate version 1.1 and Web Service SOAP_1_2 to
indicate version 1.2.

• option = Web Service display auth dialog

value = 0 (do not display dialog box) or 1 (display dialog box)
This option manages the display of the authentication dialog box during execution of the
CALL WEB SERVICE command. By default, this command never displays the dialog box;
normally, you have to use the AUTHENTICATE WEB SERVICE command to do so. However, if
you want the authentication dialog box to appear in order for the user to enter their
identifiers, you will need to use this option: pass 1 in value to display the dialog box and 0
otherwise. The dialog box only appears if the Web service requires authentication.

• option = Web Service reset auth settings

value = 0 (do not erase information) or 1 (erase information)
This option lets you indicate to 4D whether to memorize the authentication information of
the user (user name, password, method, etc.), in order to reuse it subsequently. By default,
this information is erased after each execution of the CALL WEB SERVICE command. Pass 0
in value to store the information and 1 to erase it. Note that when you pass 0, the
information is kept during the session but is not stored.

• option = Web Service HTTP Compression

value = Web Service Deflate Compression
This option is used to enable an internal compression mechanism for SOAP requests in
order to accelerate inter-4D application exchanges. When you execute the statement SET
WEB SERVICE OPTION(Web Service HTTP Compression ; Web Service Deflate Compression) on
the 4D client of the Web Service, the data of the next SOAP request sent by the client will
be compressed using a standard HTTP mechanism before being sent to the 4D SOAP server.
The server will decompress and parse the request, then will reply automatically using the
same mechanism. Only the request that follows the call to the SET WEB SERVICE OPTION
command is affected. You must therefore call this command each time you want to use
compression. By default, 4D does not compress Web Service HTTP requests.
Notes:
• "Deflate" is the name of the compression algorithm used internally by 4D.
• This mechanism cannot be used for requests sent to a 4D SOAP server whose version is
earlier than 11.3.

2146 4D Language Reference

• So that you can further optimize this functioning, additional options configure the
threshold and compression rate of the requests. These options can be accessed via the SET
DATABASE PARAMETER command.

The order in which the options are called is not important. If the same option is set several
times, only the value of the last call is taken into account.

Examples
1. Insertion of a customized header in the SOAP request:

` Creating an XML reference

C_STRING(16;vRootRef;vElemRef)
vRootRef:=DOM Create XML Ref("RootElement")
vxPath:="/RootElement/Elem1/Elem2/Elem3"
vElemRef:=DOM Create XML element(vRootRef;vxPath)
`Modifying SOAP header with reference
SET WEB SERVICE OPTION(Web Service SOAP Header;vElemRef)

2. Using version 1.2 of the SOAP protocol:

SET WEB SERVICE OPTION(Web Service SOAP Version;Web Service SOAP_1_2)

See Also
CALL WEB SERVICE.

4D Language Reference 2147

SET WEB SERVICE PARAMETER Web Services (Client)

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET WEB SERVICE PARAMETER (name; value{; soapType})

Parameter Type Description

name String → Name of parameter to include in SOAP request
value Variable → 4D variable containing the value of the parameter
soapType String → SOAP type of the parameter

Description
The SET WEB SERVICE PARAMETER command enables the definition of a parameter used for a
client SOAP request. Call this command for each parameter in the request (the number of
times the command is called depends on the number of parameters).

In name, pass the name of the parameter as it must appear in the SOAP request.

In value, pass the 4D variable containing the value of the parameter. In the case of proxy
methods, this variable is generally $1, $2, $3, etc., corresponding to a 4D parameter passed
to the proxy method when it was called. It is, however, possible to use intermediary
variables.

Note: Each 4D variable or array used must first be declared using the commands of the
“Compiler” and “Arrays” themes.

By default, 4D automatically determines the most appropriate SOAP type for the name
parameter according to the content of value. The indication of the type is included in the
request.
However, you may want to “force” the definition of the SOAP type of a parameter. In this
case, you can pass the optional soapType parameter using one of the following character
strings (primary data types):

soapType Description
string String
int Longint
boolean Boolean
float 32-bit real
decimal Real with decimal
double 64-bit real
duration Duration in years, months, days, hours, minutes, seconds, for example
P1Y2M3DT10H30M
datetime Date and time in ISO8601 format, for example 2003-05-31T13:20:00

2148 4D Language Reference

time Time, for example 13:20:00
date Date, for example 2003-05-31
gyearmonth Year and month (Gregorian calender), for example 2003-05
gyear Year (Gregorian calender), for example 2003
gmonthday Month and day (Gregorian calender), for example --05-31
gday Day (Gregorian calender), for example ---31
gmonth Month (Gregorian calender), for example --10--
hexbinary Value expressed in hexadecimal
base64binary BLOB
anyuri Uniform Resource Identifier (URI), for example
http://www.company.com/page
qname Qualified XML name (namespace and local part)
notation Notation attribute

Note: For more information about XML data types, refer to the URL
http://www.w3.org/TR/xmlschema-2/

Example
This example defines two parameters:

C_TEXT($1)
C_TEXT($2)
SET WEB SERVICE PARAMETER("city";$1)
SET WEB SERVICE PARAMETER("country";$2)

See Also
CALL WEB SERVICE, GET WEB SERVICE RESULT.

4D Language Reference 2149

2150 4D Language Reference
64
______________________
Web Services (Server)

4D Language Reference 2151

2152 4D Language Reference
Web Services (Server) Commands Web Services (Server)

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Publication of Web Services with 4D is carried out easily using options in the method
properties. In most cases, this operation will be sufficient to enable you to publish Web
Services. However, if you want to customize certain mechanisms, use data arrays, etc., you
must use the server SOAP commands of 4D.

This section describes the commands used for the publication of Web Services in 4D (server
part). For more general information about Web Services or for a description of the
commands used for subscription to Web Services (client part), refer to the Web Services
(Client) Commands section.

Note: By convention, the terms “SOAP” and “Web Service” have been used to differentiate
between command (and constant) names on the server and client side, respectively. These
two concepts refer to the same technology.

4D Language Reference 2153

Get SOAP info Web Services (Server)

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get SOAP info (infoNum) → String

Parameter Type Description

infoNum Longint → Number of type of SOAP info to get

Function result String ← SOAP Information

Description
The Get SOAP info command is used to retrieve, in the form of a character string, the
different types of information concerning a SOAP request.

When you process a SOAP request, it may be useful to obtain additional information —
other than the RPC parameter values — about the request. For instance, for security
reasons, you can use this command in the On Web Authentication Database Method to find
out the name of the requested Web Service method.

Pass the number of the type of SOAP information you want to get in the infoNum
parameter. You can use the following predefined constants, located in the “Web Services
(Server)” theme:
Constant Type Value
SOAP Method Name Longint 1
SOAP Service Name Longint 2

• SOAP Method Name = name of the Web Service method about to be executed.
• SOAP Service Name = name of the Web Service to which the method belongs.

Note: Also for security reasons, it is possible to set the maximum size for Web Services
requests sent to 4D. This configuration is carried out using the SET DATABASE PARAMETER
command (“Structure Access” theme).

See Also
SEND SOAP FAULT, SET DATABASE PARAMETER.

2154 4D Language Reference

Is SOAP request Web Services (Server)

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Is SOAP request → Boolean

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result Boolean ← True if the request is SOAP; otherwise, False

Description
The Is SOAP request command returns True if the code being executed is part of a SOAP
request.

This command can be used for security reasons in the On Web Authentication Database
Method in order to determine the nature of the received requests.

See Also
On Web Authentication Database Method, SOAP DECLARATION.

4D Language Reference 2155

SEND SOAP FAULT Web Services (Server)

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SEND SOAP FAULT (faultType; description)

Parameter Type Description

faultType Longint → 1 = Client fault, 2 = Server fault
description String → Description of error to be sent to SOAP client

Description
The SEND SOAP FAULT command is used to return an error to a SOAP client indicating the
origin of the fault: client or server. Using this command enables you to indicate an error to
a client without having to return a result.

For instance, a fault on the client side may be detected when you publish a “Square_root”
Web Service and a client sends a request with a negative number; you can use this
command in order to indicate to the client that a positive value is required.

A possible fault on the server side may be, for instance, a lack of memory occurring during
method execution.

Pass the origin of the error in faultType. You can use the following predefined constants,
located in the “Web Services (Server)” theme:

Constant Type Value

SOAP Client Fault Longint 1
SOAP Server Fault Longint 2

Pass a description of the error in description. If the client implementation is in conformity,

the error can be processed.

Example
To go back to the example of the “Square_root” Web Service provided in the command
description, the following command can be used to process requests with negative numbers:

SEND SOAP FAULT(SOAP Client Fault;"Positive values required")

See Also
Get SOAP info, SOAP DECLARATION.

2156 4D Language Reference

SOAP DECLARATION Web Services (Server)

version 11.2 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SOAP DECLARATION (variable; type; input_output{; alias})

Parameter Type Description

variable 4D variable → Variable referring to an incoming
or outgoing SOAP argument
type Longint → 4D type to which the argument points
input_output Longint → 1 = SOAP Input, 2 = SOAP Output
alias String → Name published for this argument
during SOAP exchanges

Description
The SOAP DECLARATION command is used to explicitly declare the type of parameters used
in a 4D method published as a Web Service.

When a method is published as a Web Service, the standard parameters $0, $1... $n are used
to describe the parameters of the Web Service to the outside world (more particularly in the
WSDL file). The SOAP protocol requires that parameters be explicitly named; 4D uses the
names “FourD_arg0, FourD_arg1 ... FourD_argn” by default.

This default operation can nevertheless prove to be problematic for the following reasons:
• It is not possible to declare $0 or $1, $2, etc. as an array. Therefore, it is necessary to use
pointers; however, in this case, the type of values must be known for the generation of the
WSDL file.
• It can be useful or necessary to customize the parameter names (incoming and outgoing).
• You may want to use parameters such as XML structures and DOM references.
• It may also be necessary to retur values with a size greater than 32 KB (limit for Text
arguments in databases that are in non-Unicode mode).
• Finally, this operation makes it impossible to return more than one value per RPC call (in
$0).

The SOAP DECLARATION command allows you to be free from these limits. You can execute
this command for each incoming and outgoing parameter and assign it a name and a type.

Note: Even if the SOAP DECLARATION command is used, it is always necessary to declare 4D
variables and arrays in the Compiler_Web method using commands of the “Compiler”
theme.

In variable, pass the 4D variable to be referred to when calling the Web Service.
Warning: You can only refer to process variables or 4D method arguments ($0 to $n). Local
and interprocess variables cannot be used.

4D Language Reference 2157

By default, because only Text type arguments can be used, the SOAP server responses are
limited to 32 KB in databases that are in non-Unicode mode. However, it is possible to
return SOAP arguments with a size greater than 32 KB, using BLOBs. To exceed this limit,
you simply need to declare the arguments as BLOBs before calling the SOAP DECLARATION
command (see example 4).
Note: On the client side, if you subscribe to this type of Web Service with 4D, the Web
Services Wizard will of course generate a Text type variable. To be able to use it, you just
need to re-type this return variable as a BLOB in the proxy method.

In type, pass the corresponding 4D type. Most types of 4D variables and arrays can be used.
You can use the following predefined constants, located in the “Field and Variable Types”
theme, as well as, for XML types, two constants of the “Web Services (Server)” theme:
"Field and Variable Types" Constants Type Value
Is BLOB Longint 30
Is Boolean Longint 6
Is Integer Longint 8
Is LongInt Longint 9
Is Real Longint 1
Boolean array Longint 22
String array Longint 21
Date array Longint 17
Integer array Longint 15
LongInt array Longint 16
Real array Longint 14
Text array Longint 18
Is Text Longint 2
Is Date Longint 4
Is Time Longint 11
Is String Var Longint 24

"Web Services (Server)" Constants Type Value

Is XML Longint 36
Is DOM reference Longint 37

In input_output, pass a value indicating whether the processed parameter is “incoming” (i.e.
corresponding to a value received by the method) or “outgoing” (i.e. corresponding to a
value returned by the method). You can use the following predefined constants, located in
the “Web Services (Server)” theme:
Constant Type Value
SOAP Input Longint 1
SOAP Output Longint 2

2158 4D Language Reference

Use of XML types: You can declare variables of the "XML structure" and "DOM reference"
type, both incoming and outgoing, via the Is XML and Is DOM reference constants. When
parameters of this type are specified, no processing or encoding is applied to them and the
data are transmitted "as is" (see example 5).
• Outgoing parameters:
- Is XML indicates that the parameter contains an XML structure,
- Is DOM reference indicates that the parameter contains the DOM reference of an XML
structure. In this ccase, inserting the XML structure into the SOAP message is equivalent to
executing the DOM EXPORT TO VAR command.
Note: In the case of DOM references used as outgoing parameters, it is recommended to use
global references, created, for example, on startup and closed when the application is
closed. In fact, a DOM reference created within the Web Service itself cannot be closed with
DOM CLOSE XML, otherwise the Web Service no longer returns anything. Multiple calls to
the Web Service therefore involve creating multiple unclosed DOM references, which can
lead to memory saturation
• Incoming parameters:
- Is XML indicates that the parameter must receive an XML argument sent by the SOAP
client.
- Is DOM reference indicates that the parameter must receive the DOM reference of an XML
structure corresponding to the XML argument sent by the SOAP client.
• Modification of the WSDL: These XML structures will be declared by 4D as the "anyType"
type (undetermined) in the WSDL. If you want to type an XML structure precisely, you
must save the WSDL file and manually add the desired data schema in the <types> section
of the WSDL

COMPILER_WEB method: Incoming SOAP arguments referred to using 4D variables (and

not 4D method arguments) must first be declared in the COMPILER_WEB project method.
In fact, the use of process variables in Web Services methods requires that they be declared
before the method is called. The COMPILER_WEB project method is called, if it exists, for
each SOAP request accepted. By default, the COMPILER_WEB method does not exist. You
must specifically create it.
Note that the COMPILER_WEB method is also called by the 4D Web server when receiving
“conventional” Web requests of the POST type (see Web Services, Special URLs and Form
Actions section).

In alias, pass the name of the argument as it must appear in the WSDL and in the SOAP
exchanges.
Warning: This name must be unique in the RPC call (both input and output parameters
taken together), otherwise, only the last declaration will be taken into account by 4D.

Note: The argument names must not begin with a number nor contain spaces. Moreover,
to avoid any risks of incompatibility, it is recommended to not use extended characters
(such as accented characters).

4D Language Reference 2159

If the alias parameter is omitted, 4D will use, by default, the name of the variable or
FourD_argN for the 4D method arguments ($0 to $n).

Note: The SOAP DECLARATION command must be included in the method published as a
Web Service. It is not possible to call it from another method.

Examples
1. This example specifies a parameter name:

` In the COMPILER_WEB method

C_LONGINT($1)

` In the Web Service method

` During generation of the WSDL file and SOAP calls, the word
` zipcode will be used instead of fourD_arg1
SOAP DECLARATION($1;Is LongInt;SOAP Input;"zipcode")

2. This example is used to retrieve an array of zip codes in the form of longints:

`In the COMPILER_WEB method

ARRAY LONGINT(codes;0)

`In the Web service method

SOAP DECLARATION(codes;LongInt array;SOAP Input;"in_codes")

3. This example is used to refer to two return values without specifying an argument name:

SOAP DECLARATION(ret1;Is LongInt;SOAP Output)

SOAP DECLARATION(ret2;Is LongInt;SOAP Output)

4. This example allows the 4D SOAP server to return an argument with a size greater than
32 KB in databases in non-Unicode mode:

C_BLOB($0)
SOAP DECLARATION($0; Is Text; SOAP Output)

Note the type Is Text (and not Is BLOB). This allows the argument to be correctly processed.

2160 4D Language Reference

5. This example illustrates the results of different types of declarations:

ALL RECORDS([Contact])

`Build an XML structure from the Contacts selection and store the XML in a BLOB
C_BLOB(ws_vx_xmlBlob)
getContactsXML (->ws_vx_xmlBlob)
`Retrieve the XML structure in a text variable
C_TEXT(ws_vt_xml)
ws_vt_xml:=BLOB to text(ws_vx_xmlBlob;UTF8 text without length)
`Retrieve a DOM reference to the XML structure
C_TEXT(ws_vt_xmlRef)
ws_vt_xmlRef:=DOM Parse XML variable (ws_vt_xml)

`Test the various declarations

SOAP DECLARATION(ws_vx_xmlBlob;Is BLOB ;SOAP Output ;"contactListsX")
`The XML is converted into Base64 by 4D

SOAP DECLARATION(ws_vt_xml;Is Text;SOAP Output;"contactListsText")

`The XML is converted into text by 4D (< > become entities)

SOAP DECLARATION(ws_vt_xml;Is XML;SOAP Output;"xmlContacts")

`The XML is passed as XML text

SOAP DECLARATION(ws_vx_xmlBlob;Is XML;SOAP Output;"blobContacts")

`The XML is passed as an XML BLOB

SOAP DECLARATION(ws_vt_xmlRef;Is DOM reference;SOAP Output;"contactByRef")

`The XML is passed as a reference

See Also
Get SOAP info, Is data file locked, SEND SOAP FAULT.

Constants
Field and Variable Types and Web Services (Server) themes.

4D Language Reference 2161

2162 4D Language Reference
65
______________________
Windows

4D Language Reference 2163

2164 4D Language Reference
Managing Windows Windows

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Windows are used to display information to the user. They have three main uses: to enter
data, to display data, and to inform the user in messages and dialogs.

There is always at least one window open. Scroll bars are added, when needed, to let the user
scroll in a form that is larger than the window. In the Design environment, this window
displays either the record list (output form) or the data entry screen (input form). In the
Application environment, this window displays a splash screen (a custom graphic).

When you execute a menu command within the Application process, the splash screen can be
replaced with data by commands that display forms. When the commands finish executing,
the splash screen is displayed again by default.

You can open various types of custom windows with the Open Window or Open form window
commands (see the Window Types section). All windows opened by these commands are
referenced through a WinRef expression. A WinRef is the unique ID of each open window. It is
a Longint expression. All commands working with custom windows expect a WinRef
parameter.

When you no longer need a custom window, you should close it using the CLOSE WINDOW
command or by clicking the Control-menu box (Windows) or Close Box (Macintosh), if it
exists.

Some commands open their own windows. Commands such as GRAPH TABLE, QR REPORT, and
PRINT LABEL open a window that becomes the frontmost window.

If you start a new process and do not open a window at the beginning of the process method,
4D will automatically open a default one as soon as a form is to be displayed.

4D Language Reference 2165

Side pushers
Starting with version 2004 of 4D, the right side and bottom of windows have become
“pusher” splitters by default. This means that objects found to the right or below the limits of
a window on screen are automatically pushed to the right or towards the bottom if the
window is enlarged:

This mechanism allows you to manage retractable windows like the Explorer window (see the
example of the SET FORM SIZE command).

Note: This does not work with windows that have scrollbars.

Window coordinates and "right-to-left" mode

In window management commands, the window coordinates are determined with respect to a
point of origin generally situated at the top left of the window/screen.

2166 4D Language Reference

However, when the "right-to-left" mode is activated for the application, the coordinates are
reversed and the point of origin switches to the top right of the window/screen.
Consequently, in this mode the horizontal coordinates used by the following commands must
also be reversed:
Open window
Open form window
Open external window
GET WINDOW RECT
SET WINDOW RECT
Find window

Note: For more information about "right-to-left" mode, please refer to the Design Reference
manual and to the description of the SET DATABASE PARAMETER command.

See Also
Open form window, Open window, Window Types.

4D Language Reference 2167

Window Types Windows

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

You can use one of the following predefined constants to specify the type of window that you
open with Open window:

Constant Type Value Can be a floating

window
Plain window Long Integer 8 No
Plain no zoom box window Long Integer 0 No
Plain fixed size window Long Integer 4 No
Modal dialog box Long Integer 1 No
Alternate dialog box Long Integer 3 Yes
Movable dialog box Long Integer 5 Yes
Plain dialog box Long Integer 2 Yes
Palette window Long Integer 1984 Yes
Round corner window Long Integer 16 No
Pop up window Long Integer 32 No
Sheet window Long Integer 33 No
Resizable sheet window Long Integer 34 No
Metal Look Long Integer 2048 Yes
Compositing Mode Long Integer 4096 Yes

Floating Windows: If you pass one of these constants to Open window, you open a regular
windows. To open a floating windows, pass a negative window type value to Open window.
The main characteristic of floating windows is that they remain in the foreground even if the
user clicks on another window of the process. Floating windows are generally used to display
permanent information or tool bars.

Modal windows
A modal window places the user in a state (or “mode”) where they can only act within this
window. As long as the modal window is displayed, the menu commands and other
application windows are inaccessible. To close a modal window, the user must either validate
it, cancel it, or choose one of the options it offers. Warning dialog boxes are a typical example
of modal windows.

2168 4D Language Reference

In 4D, windows of the types 1 and 5 are modal windows.

Note: A modal window always stays in the foreground. As a consequence, when a modal
window calls a non-modal window, this latter window is displayed in the background, even
though it was called subsequent to the modal window. You should thus avoid this type of
operation.
On the other hand, when a modal window calls another modal window, this latter window
will be displayed in the foreground.

The following table shows each window type, on Windows (left) and on Macintosh (right).

Plain window (8)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

• Can have a title: Yes

• Can have a close box or equivalent: Yes
• Can be resized: Yes
• Can be minimized/maximized or zoomed: Yes
• Suitable for scroll bars: Yes
• Usage: data entry with scrollbars, DISPLAY SELECTION, MODIFY SELECTION, etc.

4D Language Reference 2169

Plain no zoom box window (0)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

• Can have a title: Yes

• Can have a close box or equivalent: Yes
• Can be resized: Yes
• Can be minimized/maximized or zoomed: No on Macintosh
• Suitable for scroll bars: Yes
• Usage: data entry with scrollbars, DISPLAY SELECTION, MODIFY SELECTION, etc.

Plain fixed size window (4)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

• Can have a title: Yes

• Can have a close box or equivalent: Yes
• Can be resized: No on Macintosh
• Can be minimized/maximized or zoomed: No
• Suitable for scroll bars: Yes and No
• Usage: data entry with ADD RECORD(...;...*) or equivalent

2170 4D Language Reference

Modal dialog box (1)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

• Can have a title: No

• Can have a close box or equivalent: No
• Can be resized: No
• Can be minimized/maximized or zoomed: No
• Suitable for scroll bars: No
• Usage: DIALOG, ADD RECORD(...;...;*) or equivalent
• Windows of this type are modal

Alternate dialog box (3)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

• Can have a title: No

• Can have a close box or equivalent: No
• Can be resized: No
• Can be minimized/maximized or zoomed: No
• Suitable for scroll bars: No
• Usage: DIALOG, ADD RECORD(...;...;*) or equivalent
• Windows of this type are modal, unless used as floating windows

4D Language Reference 2171

Movable dialog box (5)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

• Can have a title: Yes

• Can have a close box or equivalent: No
• Can be resized: No
• Can be minimized/maximized or zoomed: No
• Suitable for scroll bars: No
• Usage: DIALOG, ADD RECORD(...;...;*) or equivalent
• Windows of this type are modal, but can be moved and can be used as floating windows

Plain dialog box (2)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

• Can have a title: No

• Can have a close box or equivalent: No
• Can be resized: No
• Can be minimized/maximized or zoomed: No
• Suitable for scroll bars: No
• Usage: DIALOG, ADD RECORD(...;...;*) or equivalent, splashscreens
• Windows of this type are modal, unless used as floating windows

2172 4D Language Reference

Palette window ( 1984 {+ 1} {+ 2} {+ 4} {+ 8} )
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

When you call Open window, you can add one or several of the following constants to Palette
window in order to obtain variations in the behavior of the window:

Constant Type Value

Has zoom box Long Integer 8
Has grow box Long Integer 4
Has window title Long Integer 2
Has highlight Long Integer 1

• Can have a title: Yes, if Has window title variation is specified

• Can have a close box or equivalent: Yes
• Can be resized: Yes, if Has grow box variation is specified
• Can be minimized/maximized or zoomed: Yes, if Has zoom box variation is specified
• Suitable for scroll bars: Yes, if Has grow box variation is specified
• Usage: Floating windows with DIALOG or DISPLAY SELECTION (no data entry)

4D Language Reference 2173

Round corner window (16)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

• Can have a title: Yes

• Can have a close box or equivalent: Yes
• Can be resized: No on Macintosh
• Can be minimized/maximized or zoomed: No
• Suitable for scroll bars: No on Macintosh
• Usage: Rare (obsolete)

Pop up window (32)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

This type of window has the same basic characteristics of the Plain dialog box (2) type
windows and features the following advanced specifics:
• The window is automatically closed and the "cancel" event is passed to the window when:
- a click occurs outside the window;
- the background window or the MDI (Multiple Document Interface) window is moved;
- the user clicks the Esc key.

2174 4D Language Reference

• This window is displayed in front of its "parent" window (it must not be used as the main
window of the process). The background window is not disabled. However, it no longer
receives events.
• You cannot resize or move the window using the mouse; however, when performing these
actions programmatically, the redraw of background items is optimized.
• Usage: This type of window is primarily used to handle pop-up menus related to 3D “bevel”
or “toolbar” type buttons.

Sheet window (33) and Resizable sheet window (34)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Sheet windows are specific to Mac OS X. These windows “drop down” over the title bar of the
main window using animation and are displayed above the main window. They are
automatically centered in the main window. Their properties are comparable to those of the
modal dialog boxes. They are generally used to perform an action directly relating to the
action occurring in the primary window.

• You can only create a sheet window under Mac OS X if the last open window is visible and a
document type (form).

4D Language Reference 2175

• The command opens a type 1 (Modal dialog box) window instead of a type 33 window or
type 8 (Plain) window instead of type 34:
- if the last opened window is not visible or is not a document type,
- under Windows.
• Since a sheet window must be drawn above a form, its display is pushed back in the On load
event of the first form loaded in the window (see example 4 of the Open window command).
• Usage: DIALOG, ADD RECORD(...;...*) or equivalent, under Mac OS (not standard under
Windows).

Metal Look (2048)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Under Mac OS, it is possible to apply the metal look to windows. This type of look is found
throughout the Macintosh interface. Under Windows, this property has no effect.

To apply the metal look to a window created by the Open window command, you can just add
the Metal Look constant to the window type set in the type parameter. For example:

$win:=Open window(10;80;-1;-1;Plain window+Metal Look;"")

This look can be associated with the following types of windows:

Plain window
Plain no zoom box window
Plain fixed size window
Movable dialog box
Round corner window

Compositing Mode (4096)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The "compositing" mode is an internal mode for handling windows under Mac OS X, which is
now recommended by Apple. In 4D, this mode is required more particularly to display certain
dynamic objects such as Web areas.

2176 4D Language Reference

For historical reasons, this mode is not used in all 4D windows. It is always used by the project
forms executed from the Design environment. On the other hand, windows managed via the
Open window and Open form window commands do not use it by default. To activate it, you
need to add the Compositing Mode constant (Open window) or the Compositing Mode form
window (Open form window) constant to the type of window when calling the command.
Under Windows, this property has no effect.

Note: Certain former architecture objects are not compatible with the compositing mode (for
example 4D Chart areas). If they are displayed in windows in compositing mode, these objects
will not work.

See Also
Open external window, Open window.

4D Language Reference 2177

CLOSE WINDOW Windows

version 3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

CLOSE WINDOW {(window)}

Parameter Type Description

window WinRef → Window reference number, or
Frontmost window of current process, if omitted

Description
CLOSE WINDOW closes the active window opened by the Open window or Open form window
command in the current process. CLOSE WINDOW has no effect if a custom window is not
open; it does not close system windows. CLOSE WINDOW also has no effect if called while a
form is active in the window. You must call CLOSE WINDOW when you are done using a
window opened by Open window or Open form window.

It is useless to pass a number to CLOSE WINDOW when closing a window previously opened by
the Open window or Open form window function, since a call to CLOSE WINDOW will always
close the last window created by one of these commands.

If you pass an external window reference number in the extWindowRef parameter, CLOSE
WINDOW closes the specified external window. For more information about external windows,
refer to the Open external window function.

Example
The following example opens a window and adds new records with the ADD RECORD
command. When the records have been added, the window is closed with CLOSE WINDOW:
Open window (5; 40; 250; 300; 0; "New Employee")
Repeat
ADD RECORD ([Employees]) ` Add a new employee record
Until (OK = 0) ` Loop until the user cancels
CLOSE WINDOW ` Close the window

See Also
Open external window, Open form window, Open window.

2178 4D Language Reference

Current form window Windows

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Current form window → WinRef

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Function result WinRef ← Current form window reference number

Description
The Current form window command returns the reference of the current form window. If no
window has been set for the current form, the command returns 0.

The current form window can be generated automatically using a command such as ADD
RECORD, following a user action or by using the Open window or Open form window
commands.

See Also
Open form window, Open window, RESIZE FORM WINDOW.

4D Language Reference 2179

DRAG WINDOW Windows

version 6.8 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DRAG WINDOW

Parameter Type Description

This command does not require any parameters

Description
The DRAG WINDOW command allows users to drag the window on which they clicked
following the movements of the mouse. Usually you call this command from within an object
method of an object that can respond instantaneously to mouse clicks (i.e., invisible buttons).

Example
The following form, shown here in the Form editor, contains a frame created with a static
picture, above which are four invisible buttons for each side:

Each button has the following method:

DRAG WINDOW ` Start dragging window when clicked

2180 4D Language Reference

After executing the following project method:

Open window(50;50;50+400;50+300;2)
DIALOG([Table1];"Custom Drag")
CLOSE WINDOW

You obtain a window similar to this:

Then you can drag the window by clicking anywhere on the borders.

See Also
GET WINDOW RECT, SET WINDOW RECT.

4D Language Reference 2181

ERASE WINDOW Windows

version 6.0 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

ERASE WINDOW {(window)}

Parameter Type Description

window WinRef → Window reference number, or
Frontmost window of current process, if omitted

Description
The ERASE WINDOW command clears the contents of the window whose reference number is
passed in window.

If you omit the window parameter, ERASE WINDOW clears the contents of the frontmost
window for the current process.

Usually, you will use ERASE WINDOW in combination with MESSAGE and GOTO XY. In this
case, ERASE WINDOW clears the contents of the window and moves the cursor to the upper-left
corner of the window, the GOTO XY (0; 0) position.

Do not confuse ERASE WINDOW, which clears the contents of a window, with CLOSE
WINDOW, which removes the window from the screen.

See Also
GOTO XY, MESSAGE.

2182 4D Language Reference

Find window Windows

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Find window (left; top{; windowPart}) → WinRef

Parameter Type Description

left Number → Global left coordinate
top Number → Global top coordinate
windowPart Number ← Window part ID number

Function result WinRef ← Window reference number

Description
The Find window command returns (if any) the reference number of the first window
“touched” by the point whose coordinates passed in left and top.

The coordinates must be expressed relative to the top left corner of the contents area of the
application window (Windows) or to the main screen (Macintosh).

If you specify the windowPart parameter, whether or not a window has been found, the
parameter returns one of the following values:

Constants Type Value Platform

In menu bar Long Integer 1 Macintosh only
In system window Long Integer 2 Macintosh only
In contents Long Integer 3 Windows or Macintosh
In drag Long Integer 4 Macintosh only
In grow Long Integer 5 Macintosh only
In go away Long Integer 6 Macintosh only
In zoom box Long Integer 7 Macintosh only

See Also
Frontmost window, Next window.

4D Language Reference 2183

Frontmost window Windows

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Frontmost window {(*)} → WinRef

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, take floating windows into account
If omitted, ignore floating windows

Function result WinRef ← Window reference number

Description
The Frontmost window command returns the window reference number of the frontmost
window.

See Also
Frontmost process, Next window.

2184 4D Language Reference

GET WINDOW RECT Windows

version 2003 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET WINDOW RECT (left; top; right; bottom{; window})

Parameter Type Description

left Number ← Left coordinate of window's contents area
top Number ← Top coordinate of window's contents area
right Number ← Right coordinate of window's contents area
bottom Number ← Bottom coordinate of window's contents area
window WinRef → Window reference number, or
Frontmost window of current process, if omitted or
MDI window if -1 (Windows)

Description
The GET WINDOW RECT command returns the coordinates of the window whose reference
number is passed in window. If the window does not exist, the variable parameters are left
unchanged.

If you omit the window parameter, GET WINDOW RECT applies to the frontmost window for
the current process.

The coordinates are expressed relative to the top left corner of the contents area of the
application window (on Windows) or of the main screen (on Macintosh). The coordinates
return the rectangle corresponding to the contents area of the window (excluding title bars
and borders).

Note: Under Windows, if you pass -1 in window, GET WINDOW RECT returns the coordinates
of the application window (MDI window). These coordinates correspond to the contents area
of the window (excluding menu bars and borders).

Example
See example for the command WINDOW LIST.

See Also
SET WINDOW RECT.

4D Language Reference 2185

Get window title Windows

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Get window title {(window)} → String

Parameter Type Description

window WinRef → Window reference number, or
Frontmost window of current process, if omitted

Function result String ← Window title

Description
The Get window title command returns the title of the window whose reference number is
passed in window. If the window does not exist, an empty string is returned.

If you omit the window parameter, Get window title returns the title of the frontmost window
for the current process.

Example
See example for the command SET WINDOW TITLE.

See Also
SET WINDOW TITLE.

2186 4D Language Reference

HIDE WINDOW Windows

version 6.0.5
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

HIDE WINDOW {(window)}

Parameter Type Description

window WinRef → Window reference number or
Current process frontmost window, if omitted

Description
The HIDE WINDOW command allows you to hide the window whose number was passed in
window or, if this parameter is omitted, the current process frontmost window. For
example, this command allows you to display only the active window in a process that
consists of several processes.

The window disappears from the screen but remains open. You can still programmatically
apply any changes supported by 4D windows.

To display a window that was previously hidden by the HIDE WINDOW command:

• Use the SHOW WINDOW command and pass the window reference ID.
• Use the Process page of the Runtime Explorer. Select the process in which the window is
handled, then click on the Show button.

To hide all the windows of a process, use the HIDE PROCESS command.

Example
This example corresponds to a method of a button located in an input form. This button
opens a dialog box in a new window that belongs to the same process. In this example, the
user wants to hide the other windows of the process (an entry form and a tool palette)
while displaying the dialog box. Once the dialog box is validated, other process windows
are displayed again.

` Object method for the "Information" button

HIDE WINDOW(Entry) ` Hide the entry window

HIDE WINDOW(Palette) ` Hide the palette
$Infos:=Open window(20;100;500;400;8) ` Create the information window
` Place here instructions that are dedicated to the dialog management

4D Language Reference 2187

 CLOSE WINDOW($Infos) ` Close the dialog
SHOW WINDOW(Entry)
SHOW WINDOW(Palette) ` Display the other windows

See Also
SHOW WINDOW.

2188 4D Language Reference

MAXIMIZE WINDOW Windows

version 6.0.5
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

MAXIMIZE WINDOW {(window)}

Parameter Type Description

window WinRef → Window reference number or if omitted,
all current process frontmost
windows (Windows) or current
process frontmost window (Mac OS)

Description
The MAXIMIZE WINDOW command triggers the expansion of the window whose reference
number was passed in window. If this parameter is omitted, the effect is the same but is
applied to all the frontmost windows of the current process (Windows) or to the frontmost
window of the current process (Mac OS).

This command has the same effect as a click on the zoom box of a 4D application window:

On Windows
The size of the window is increased to match the current size of the application window.
The maximized window is set to be the frontmost window. If you do not pass the window
parameter, the command is applied to all the application windows.

Windows zoom box

On Mac OS
The size of the window is increased to match the size of its contents. If you do not pass the
window parameter, the command is applied to the frontmost window of the current
process.

Zoom box on Mac OS

Notes:
• This command only applies to windows that contain a zoom box. If the window type
does not include it, the command does nothing. For more information, please refer to the
Window Types section.

4D Language Reference 2189

• On Mac OS, the zoom is based on the contents of the window; so, the command must be
called in a context where the contents of the window are defined, for example in a form
method. Otherwise, the command does nothing.
• If the window is already maximized, the command does nothing.

MAXIMIZE WINDOW sets a window to its "maximum" size. If the window is actually a form
whose size was defined in the form properties, the window size is set to those values.

A later click on the zoom box of the window or a call to the MINIMIZE WINDOW command
reduces the window to its initial size. On Windows, a call to MINIMIZE WINDOW without
parameters sets the size of all application windows to their initial sizes.

Example
This example sets the window size of your form to full screen when it is opened. To achieve
this, the following code is placed in the form method:

` In the Form method

MAXIMIZE WINDOW

See Also
MINIMIZE WINDOW.

2190 4D Language Reference

MINIMIZE WINDOW Windows

version 6.0.5
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

MINIMIZE WINDOW {(window)}

Parameter Type Description

window WinRef → Window reference number or if omitted,
all the current process frontmost
windows (Windows) or current
process frontmost window (Mac OS)

Description
The MINIMIZE WINDOW command sets the size of the window whose number is passed as
window to the size it was before being maximized. If window is omitted, the command
applies to each window of the application (Windows) or to the frontmost window of the
process (on Mac OS).

This command has the same effect as one click on the reduction box of the 4D application:

On Windows
The size of the window is set to its initial size, i.e., its size before being maximized. If the
window parameter is omitted, all the application windows are set to their initial sizes.

Reduction box on Windows

On Mac OS
The size of the window is set to its initial size (i.e. its size before being maximized). If the
window parameter is omitted, the frontmost window of the current process is set to its
initial size.

Reduction/zoom box on Mac OS

If the windows to which the command is applied were not previously maximized
(manually or using MAXIMIZE WINDOW), or if the window type does not include a zoom
box, the command has no effect. For more information on window types, refer to the
Window Types section.

4D Language Reference 2191

Note: This function is not to be confused with minimizing a window to a button
(Windows) or in the Dock (Mac OS), which is triggered by a click on the button shown:

Windows

Mac OS

See Also
MAXIMIZE WINDOW.

2192 4D Language Reference

Next window Windows

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Next window (window) → WinRef

Parameter Type Description

window WinRef → Window reference number

Function result WinRef ← Window reference number

Description
The Next window command returns the window reference number of the window “behind”
the window you pass in window (based on the front-to-back order of the windows).

See Also
Frontmost window.

4D Language Reference 2193

Open external window Windows

version 6.0 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Open external window (left; top; right; bottom; type; title; plugInArea) → Number

Parameter Type Description

left Number → Global left coordinate of window contents area
top Number → Global top coordinate of window contents area
right Number → Global right coordinate of window contents area
bottom Number → Global bottom coordinate of window contents area
type Number → Window type
title String → Title of window
plugInArea String → External area command

Function result Number ← Reference number for window and external area

Description
Open external window opens a new window and displays the external area supported by the
command plugInArea provided by a 4D plug-in. The code passed in plugInArea is generally in
the form "_PluginName", for example: _4D Write, _4D View or _4D Draw.

Open external window returns a Long Integer value that can be used both as a window
reference number (that can be used with other Windows theme commands) and as a reference
to the external area displayed in the window (that can be used with other routines provided
by the 4D plug-in).

The first six arguments are the same as those of the the Open window command. However,
none of the parameters are optional.

Open external window creates modeless windows. The command does not wait for user input,
so you can have several active windows open at once. You can click between each window and
edit the one in front. If the window type has a title bar, a Control-menu box (Windows) or a
Close Box (Macintosh) will be added to enable the user to close the window.

2194 4D Language Reference

Examples
The following example opens an external window and displays the 4D Write external area:

wrWind:=Open external window (50; 50; 350; 450; 8; "Letter Writing"; "_4D WRITE")

The following example closes the external window opened in the previous example:

CLOSE WINDOW (wrWind)

See Also
CLOSE WINDOW, Open window.

4D Language Reference 2195

Open form window Windows

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Open form window ({aTable; }formName{; type{; hPos{; vPos{; *}}}}) → WinRef

Parameter Type Description

aTable Table → Table of the form or Default table, if omitted
formName String → Name of the form
type Longint → Window type
hPos Longint → Horizontal position of the window
vPos Longint → Vertical position of the window
* * → Save current position and size of the window

Function result WinRef ← Window reference number

Description
The Open form window command opens a new window using the size and resizing properties
of the form formName.

Note that formName is not displayed in the window. If you want to display the form, you have
to call a command which loads a form (ADD RECORD for example).

By default (if the type parameter is not passed), a standard window with a close box is opened.
Unlike the Open window command, no method is associated to the window's close box.
Clicking on this close box cancels and closes the window, except if the On Close Box form
event has been activated for the form. In this case, the code associated with the On Close Box
event will be executed.

If formName is resizable, the window opened will contain a zoom box as well as a grow box.

Note: To know the main properties of a form, use the GET FORM PROPERTIES command.

2196 4D Language Reference

The optional type parameter allows you to specify a type for the window. You must pass one
of the following predefined constants (placed in the “Open form window” theme):
Constant Type Value
Plain form window Longint 8
Modal form dialog box Longint 1
Movable form dialog box Longint 5
Palette form window Longint 1984
Pop up form window Longint 32
Sheet form window Longint 33
Compositing Mode form window Longint 4096

Notes:
• The attributes (grow box, close box...) of the window created depend on the interface
specifications of the operating system for the chosen type. It is therefore possible to obtain
different results depending on the platform used.
• The Compositing Mode form window constant must be added to one of the other type
constants in order to activate this mode for the window.
• For more information about window types, refer to the Window types section. Note that only
the types listed in the “Open form window” theme can be used with the Open form window
command.

The optional parameter hPos allows you to define the horizontal position of the window. You
can pass a defined position, expressed in points, to this parameter (refer to the Open window
command) or one of the following predefined constants placed in the “Open form window”
theme:
Constant Type Value
Horizontally Centered Longint 65536
On the Left Longint 131072
On the Right Longint 196608

The optional parameter vPos allows you to define the vertical position of the window. You can
pass a defined position, expressed in points, to this parameter (refer to the Open window
command) or one of the following predefined constants placed in the “Open form window”
theme:
Constant Type Value
Vertically Centered Longint 262144
At the Top Longint 327680
At the Bottom Longint 393216

4D Language Reference 2197

These parameters take into account the presence of the tool bar and menu bar as well as the
current size of the application's window (on Windows).

If you pass the optional parameter *, the current position and size of the window are
memorized when closed. When the window is reopened again, its previous position and size
are respected. In this case, the vPos and hPos parameters are only used the first time the
window is opened.

Examples
1. The following statement opens a standard window with a close box and automatically
adjusts it to be the same size as the "Input" form. Since the form has been defined as resizable,
the window also has a grow and a zoom box:

$winRef := Open form window ([Table1];"Enter")

2. The following statement opens a floating palette in the upper left portion of the screen
based on a project form named "Tools".. This palette uses the last position it was in when the
user closed it each time it is reopened:

$winRef := Open form window ("Tools"; Palette form window; On the Left; At the Top;*)

See Also
GET FORM PROPERTIES, Open window, Window Types.

2198 4D Language Reference

Open window Windows

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Open window (left; top; right; bottom{; type{; title{; controlMenuBox}}}){ → WinRef }

Parameter Type Description

left Number → Global left coordinate of window contents area
top Number → Global top coordinate of window contents area
right Number → Global right coordinate of window contents area,
or -1 for using form default size
bottom Number → Global bottom coordinate of window contents area,
or -1 for using form default size
type Number → Window type
title String → Title of window
or "" for using default form title
controlMenuBox String → Method to call when the Control-menu box is
double-clicked or the Close box is clicked

Function result WinRef ← Window reference number

Description
Open window opens a new window with the dimensions given by the first four parameters:
• left is the distance in pixels from the left edge of the application window to the left internal
edge of the window.
• top is the distance in pixels from the top of the application window to the top internal edge
of the window.
• right is the distance in pixels from the left edge of the application window to the right
internal edge of the window.
• bottom is the distance in pixels from the top of the application window to the bottom
internal edge of the window.

If you pass -1 in both right and bottom, you instruct 4D to automatically size the window
under the following conditions:
• You have designed a form and set its Sizing Options in the Design environment Form
properties window
• Before calling Open window, you selected the form using the command INPUT FORM, to
which you passed the optional * parameter.

4D Language Reference 2199

Important: This automatic sizing of the window will occur only if you made a prior call to
INPUT FORM for the form to be displayed, and if you passed the * optional parameter to INPUT
FORM.

• The type parameter is optional. It represents the type of window you want to display, and
corresponds to the different windows shown in the section Window Types. If the window type
is negative, the window created is a floating window. If the type is not specified, type 1 is used
by default.• The title parameter is the optional title for the window

If you pass an empty string ("") in title, you instruct 4D to use the Window Title set in the
Design environment Form Properties window for the form to be displayed.

Important: The default form title will be set to the window only if you made a prior call to
INPUT FORM for the form to be displayed, and if you passed the * optional parameter to INPUT
FORM.

• The controlMenuBox parameter is the optional Control-menu box method for the window. If
this parameter is specified, a Control-menu box (Windows) or a Close Box (Macintosh) is
added to the window. When the user double-clicks the Control-menu box (Windows) or clicks
on the Close Box (Macintosh), the method passed in controlMenuBox is called.

Note: You can also manage the closing of the window from within the form method of the
form displayed in the window when an On Close Box event occurs. For more information, see
the command Form event.

If more than one window is open for a process, the last window opened is the active
(frontmost) window for that process. Only information within the active window can be
modified. Any other windows can be viewed. When the user types, the active window will
always come to the front, if it is not already there.

Forms are displayed inside an open window. Text from the MESSAGE command also appears in
the window.

2200 4D Language Reference

Examples
1. The following project method opens a window centered in the main window (Windows) or
in the main screen (Macintosh). Note that it can accept two, three, or four parameters:

` OPEN CENTERED WINDOW project method

` $1 – Window width
` $2 – Window height
` $3 – Window type (optional)
` $4 – Window title (optional)
$SW:=Screen width\2
$SH:=(Screen height\2)
$WW:=$1\2
$WH:=$2\2
Case of
: (Count parameters=2)
Open window($SW-$WW;$SH-$WH;$SW+$WW;$SH+$WH)
: (Count parameters=3)
Open window($SW-$WW;$SH-$WH;$SW+$WW;$SH+$WH;$3)
: (Count parameters=4)
Open window($SW-$WW;$SH-$WH;$SW+$WW;$SH+$WH;$3;$4)
End caseAfter the project method is written, you can use it this way:

OPEN CENTERED WINDOW (400;250;Movable dialog box;"Update Archives")

DIALOG([Utility Table];"UPDATE OPTIONS")
CLOSE WINDOW
If (OK=1)
` ...
End if

2. The following example opens a floating window that has a Control-menu box (Windows)
or Close Box (Macintosh) method. The window is opened in the upper right hand corner of
the application window.

Open window(Screen width-149;33;Screen width-4;178;- Palette window;"";

"CloseColorPalette")
DIALOG([Dialogs];"Color Palette")

The CloseColorPalette method calls the CANCEL command:

CANCEL

4D Language Reference 2201

3. The following example opens a window whose size and title come from the properties of
the form displayed in the window:

INPUT FORM([Customers];"Add Records";*)

Open window(10;80;-1;-1;Plain window;"")
Repeat
ADD RECORD([Customers])
Until (OK=0)

Reminder: In order to have Open window automatically use the properties of the form, you
must call INPUT FORM with the optional * parameter, and the properties of the form must
have been set accordingly in the Design environment.

4. This example illustrates the “delay” mechanism for displaying sheet windows under
Mac OS X:

$myWindow:=Open window(10;10;400;400;Sheet window)

`For the moment, the window is created but remains hidden
DIALOG([Table];"dialForm")
`The On Load event is generated then the sheet window is displayed; it "drops down"
`from the bottom of the title bar

See Also
CLOSE WINDOW, Open external window, Open form window.

2202 4D Language Reference

REDRAW WINDOW Windows

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

REDRAW WINDOW {(window)}

Parameter Type Description

window WinRef → Window reference number, or
Frontmost window of current process, if omitted

Description
The REDRAW WINDOW command provokes a graphical update of the window whose reference
number you pass in window.

If you omit the window parameter, REDRAW WINDOW applies to the frontmost window for the
current process.

Note: 4D handles the graphical updates of the windows each time you move a window, resize
it, or bring it to the front, as well as when you change the form and/or the values displayed in
the window. You will rarely use this command.

See Also
ERASE WINDOW.

4D Language Reference 2203

RESIZE FORM WINDOW Windows

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

RESIZE FORM WINDOW (width; height)

Parameter Type Description

width Longint → Pixels to add to or remove from the current
form window width
height Longint → Pixels to add to or remove from the current
form window height

Description
The RESIZE FORM WINDOW command lets you change the size of the current form window.

Pass the number of pixels that you would like to add to the current window size in the
width and height parameters. Pass 0 in either parameter if you do not wish to change the
current size. To reduce the size, pass a negative value in the width and height parameters.

This command produces the exact same result as a manual window resize using the resize
box (if the window type allows it). As a result, the command takes into consideration resize
properties for objects and size limitations defined in the form properties. If, for example,
the command resizes a window to a size greater than what is allowed in the form, the
command will have no effect.

Please note that this behavior is different than that of the SET WINDOW RECT command,
which does not take form properties nor content into account when resizing the window.
Also, note that this command does not necessarily modify the form size. To modify the size
of a form by programming, please see the SET FORM SIZE command.

2204 4D Language Reference

Example
Given the following window (the fields and frame have the “Grow” property for horizontal
resizing):

After execution of this line:

RESIZE FORM WINDOW(25;0)

... the window appears as follows:

See Also
GET FORM PROPERTIES, SET FORM SIZE, SET WINDOW RECT.

4D Language Reference 2205

SET WINDOW RECT Windows

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET WINDOW RECT (left; top; right; bottom{; window})

Parameter Type Description

left Number → Global left coordinate of window's contents area
top Number → Global top coordinate of window's contents area
right Number → Global right coordinate of window's contents area
bottom Number → Global bottom coordinate of window's contents area
window WinRef → Window reference number, or
Frontmost window of current process, if omitted

Description
The SET WINDOW RECT command changes the global coordinates of the the window whose
reference number is passed in window. If the window does not exist, the command does
nothing.

If you omit the window parameter, SET WINDOW RECT applies to the frontmost window for
the current process.

This command can resize and move the window, depending on the new coordinates passed.

The coordinates must be expressed relative to the top left corner of the contents area of the
application window (on Windows) or to the main screen (on Macintosh). The coordinates
indicate the rectangle corresponding to the contents area of the window (excluding title bars
and borders).

Warning: Be aware that by using this command, you may move a window beyond the limits
of the main window (on Windows) or of the screens (on Macintosh). To prevent this, use
commands such as Screen width and Screen height to double-check the new coordinates of the
window.

This command does not affect form objects. If the window contains a form, the form objects
are not moved or resized by the command (regardless of their properties). Only the window is
modified. In order to modify a form window while taking the resizing properties and the
objects it contains into account, you must use the RESIZE FORM WINDOW command.

2206 4D Language Reference

Examples
1. See example for the WINDOW LIST command.

2. Given the following window:

After execution of the following line:

SET WINDOW RECT(100;100;300;300)

The window appears as follows:

See Also
DRAG WINDOW, GET WINDOW RECT, RESIZE FORM WINDOW.

4D Language Reference 2207

SET WINDOW TITLE Windows

version 6.0 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET WINDOW TITLE (title{; window})

Parameter Type Description

title String → Window title
window WinRef → Window reference number, or
Frontmost window of current process, if omitted

Description
The SET WINDOW TITLE command changes the title of the window whose reference number is
passed in window to the text passed in title (max. length 80 characters).

If the window does not exist, SET WINDOW TITLE does nothing.

If you omit the window parameter, SET WINDOW TITLE changes the title of the frontmost
window for the current process.

Note: In the Design environment, 4D changes the window titles automatically —i.e., “Entry
for Table” when you perform data entry. If you change a window title, 4D will probably
override it. On the other hand, in the Application environment, 4D does not change the titles
of the windows.

Example
While performing data entry in a form, you click on a button that executes a lengthy
operation (i.e., browsing programmatically related records shown in a subform). You keep
informed about the progress of the operation using the title of the current window:

` bAnalysis button Object Method

Case of
: (Form event=On Clicked)
` Save current window title in a local variable
$vsCurTitle:=Get window title
` Start the lengthy operation
FIRST RECORD([Invoice Line Items])

2208 4D Language Reference

 For($vlRecord;1;Records in selection([Invoice Line Items]))
DO SOMETHING
` Show progress information
SET WINDOW TITLE("Processing Line Item #"+String($vlRecord))
End for
` Restore original window title
SET WINDOW TITLE($vsCurTitle)
End case

See Also
Get window title.

4D Language Reference 2209

SHOW WINDOW Windows

version 6.0.5
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SHOW WINDOW {(window)}

Parameter Type Description

window WinRef → Window reference number or
Current process frontmost window, if omitted

Description
The SHOW WINDOW command allows you to display the window whose number was
passed in window. If this parameter is omitted, the frontmost window of the current
process will be displayed.

In order to use the SHOW WINDOW command, the window must have been hidden by
using the HIDE WINDOW command. If the window is already displayed, the command does
nothing.

Example
Refer to the example of the HIDE WINDOW command.

See Also
HIDE WINDOW.

2210 4D Language Reference

Window kind Windows

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Window kind {(window)}

Parameter Type Description

window WinRef → Window reference number, or
Frontmost window of current process, if omitted

Description
The Window kind command returns the 4D type of the window whose reference number is
passed in window. If the window does not exist, Window kind returns 0 (zero).

Otherwise, Window kind may return one of the following values:

Constant Type Value

Regular window Long Integer 8
Modal dialog Long Integer 9
External window Long Integer 5
Floating window Long Integer 14

If you omit the window parameter, Window kind returns the type of the frontmost window for
the current process.

Example
Set example for the command WINDOW LIST.

See Also
GET WINDOW RECT, Get window title, Window process.

4D Language Reference 2211

WINDOW LIST Windows

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

WINDOW LIST (windows{; *})

Parameter Type Description

windows Array ← Array of window reference numbers
* * → If specified, take floating windows into account
If omitted, ignore floating windows

Description
The WINDOW LIST command populates the array windows with the window reference numbers
of the windows currently open in all running processes (kernel or user processes).

If you do not pass the optional * parameter, floating windows are ignored.

Example
The following project method tiles all the current open window, except floating windows and
dialog boxes:

` TILE WINDOWS project method

WINDOW LIST($alWnd)
$vlLeft:=10
$vlTop:=80 ` Leave enough room for the Tool bar
For ($vlWnd;1;Size of array($alWnd))
If (Window kind($alWnd{$vlWnd}) # Modal Dialog)
GET WINDOW RECT($vlWL;$vlWT;$vlWR;$vlWB;$alWnd{$vlWnd})
$vlWR:=$vlLeft+($vlWR-$vlWL)
$vlWB:=$vlTop+($vlWB-$vlWT)
$vlWL:=$vlLeft
$vlWT:=$vlTop
SET WINDOW RECT($vlWL;$vlWT;$vlWR;$vlWB;$alWnd{$vlWnd})
$vlLeft:=$vlLeft+10
$vlTop:=$vlTop+25
End if
End for

2212 4D Language Reference

Note: This method could be improved by adding tests on the size of the main window (on
Windows) or the size and location of the screens (on Macintosh).

See Also
Window kind, Window process.

4D Language Reference 2213

Window process Windows

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Window process {(window)} → Number

Parameter Type Description

window WinRef → Window reference number

Function result Number ← Process reference number

Description
The Window process command returns the process number that runs the window whose
reference number is passed in window. If the window does not exist, 0 (zero) is returned.

If you omit the window parameter, Window process returns the process of the current
frontmost window.

See Also
Current process.

2214 4D Language Reference

66
______________________
XML DOM

4D Language Reference 2215

2216 4D Language Reference
Overview of XML DOM Commands XML DOM

version 11.3 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4D includes a set of commands used for parsing objects containing XML (eXtensible
Markup Language) data.

About the XML language

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The XML language is a data exchange standard. It is based on the use of tags and enables
precise description of the data exchanged as well as their structure. XML files are Text
format files; their content is parsed by the applications importing the data. Many
applications now support this format.
For more information about XML, refer, for instance, to the http://xml.org and
http://www.w3.org sites.

For XML support, 4D uses a library named Xerces.dll developed by the Apache Foundation
company. 4D supports XML version 1.0.

Note: 4D allows direct importing and exporting of data in XML format using the
import/export editor.

DOM and SAX

The commands of this theme are prefixed DOM. In fact, 4D offers two separate sets of XML
commands, prefixed DOM and SAX: DOM (Document Object Model) and SAX (Simple API
XML) are two different parsing modes for XML documents.
• The DOM mode parses an XML source and builds its structure (its “tree”) in memory.
Because of this, access to each element of the source is extremely fast. However, since the
entire tree structure is stored in memory, the processing of large XML documents may lead
to the memory capacity being exceeded and thus provoke errors.
• The SAX mode does not build a tree structure in memory. In this mode, “events” (such as
the start and end of an element) are generated when parsing the source. This mode lets you
parse XML documents of any size, regardless of the amount of memory available. The SAX
commands are grouped together in the "XML SAX" theme. For more information, please
refer to the Overview of XML SAX Commands section.
For more information on XML standards, consult the following sites:
http://www.saxproject.org/?selected=event and http://www.w3schools.com/xml/.

Creating, opening and closing XML documents via DOM

Objects created, modified or parsed by the 4D DOM commands can be text, URLs,
documents or BLOBs. The DOM commands used for opening XML objects in 4D are DOM
Parse XML source and DOM Parse XML variable.
Many commands then let you read, parse and write the elements and attributes. Errors are
recovered using the GET XML ERROR command (common to both XML standards).
The DOM CLOSE XML command lets you close the source in the end.

4D Language Reference 2217

Use of XPath notation (DOM)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Three XML DOM commands (DOM Create XML element, DOM Find XML element and DOM
SET XML ELEMENT VALUE) accept XPath notation for accessing XML elements.
XPath notation comes from the XPath language, designed to navigate within XML structures. It
allows the setting of elements directly within an XML structure via a "pathname" type syntax,
without necessarily having to indicate the complete pathname in order to reach it. For
example, given the following structure:
<RootElement>
<Elem1>
<Elem2>
<Elem3 Font=Verdana Size=10> </Elem3>
</Elem2>
</Elem1>
</RootElement>

XPath notation allows you to access element 3 using the /RootElement/Elem1/Elem2/Elem3

syntax.

4D also accepts indexed XPath elements using the Element[ElementNum] syntax. For
example, given the following structure:
<RootElement>
<Elem1>
<Elem2>aaa</Elem2>
<Elem2>bbb</Elem2>
<Elem2>ccc</Elem2>
</Elem1>
</RootElement>

XPath notation allows you to access the “ccc” value using the /RootElement/Elem1/Elem2[3]
syntax.

For an illustration of XPath notation, please refer to the examples in the DOM Create XML
element and DOM Find XML element commands.

Character Sets
The following character sets are supported by the XML DOM and XML SAX commands of
4D:
• ASCII
• UTF-8
• UTF-16 (Big/Small Endian)
• UCS4 (Big/Small Endian)
• EBCDIC code pages IBM037, IBM1047 and IBM1140 encodings,
• ISO-8859-1 (or Latin1)
• Windows-1252.

2218 4D Language Reference

Terminology
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The XML language uses a number of specific terms and acronyms. This non-exhaustive list
details the main XML concepts used by the commands and functions of 4D.

Attribute: an XML sub-tag associated with an element. An attribute always contains a name
and a value (see diagram below).

Child: In an XML structure, an element in a level directly below another.

DTD: Document Type Declaration The DTD records the set of specific rules and properties
that the XML must follow. These rules define, more particularly, the name and content of
each tag as well as its context. This formalization of the elements can be used to check
whether an XML document is in compliance (in which case, it is declared “valid”).
The DTD may be included in the XML document (internal DTD) or in a separate document
(external DTD). Note that the DTD is not mandatory.

Element: an XML tag. An element always contains a name and a value. Optionally, an
element may contain attributes (see diagram).

ElementRef: XML reference used by the 4D XML commands to specify an XML structure.
This reference is made up of 8 coded characters in hexadecimal form, which means it
consists of 16 characters.

Parent: In an XML structure, an element in a level directly above another.

Parsing, parser: The act of analyzing the contents of a structured object in order to extract
useful information. The commands of the “XML” theme are used to parse the contents of
any XML objects.

Root: An element located at the first level of an XML structure.

Sibling: In an XML structure, an element at the same level as another.

Structure XML: structured XML object. This object can be a document, a variable, or an
element.

Validation: An XML document is “validated” by the parser when it is “well-formed” and in

compliance with the DTD specifications. See also Well-formed.

4D Language Reference 2219

Well-formed: An XML document is declared “well-formed” by the parser when it complies
with the generic XML specifications. See also Validation.

XML: eXtensible Markup Language. A computerized data exchange standard enabling the
transfer of data as well as their structure. The XML language is based on the use of tags and
a specific syntax, in keeping with the HTML language. However, unlike the latter, the XML
language allows the definition of customized tags.

XSL: eXtensible Stylesheet Language. A language permitting the definition of style sheets
used to process and display the contents of an XSL document.

2220 4D Language Reference

DOM CLOSE XML XML DOM

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DOM CLOSE XML (elementRef)

Parameter Type Description

elementRef String → XML root element reference

Description
The DOM CLOSE XML command frees up the memory occupied by the XML object
designated by elementRef.

If elementRef is not an XML root object, an error is generated.

See Also
DOM Parse XML source, DOM Parse XML variable.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been correctly executed, the system variable OK is set to 1. If an error
occurs, it is set to 0.

4D Language Reference 2221

DOM Count XML attributes XML DOM

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DOM Count XML attributes (elementRef) → Longint

Parameter Type Description

elementRef String → XML element reference

Function result Longint ← Number of attributes

Description
The DOM Count XML attributes command returns the number of XML attributes present in
the XML element designated by elementRef. For more information about XML attributes,
refer to the Overview of XML Commands section.

Example
Before retrieving the values of elements in an array, you want to know the number of
attributes in the following XML element:

C_BLOB(myBlobVar)
C_STRING(16;$xml_Parent_Ref;$xml_Child_Ref)
C_TEXT(myResult)
C_LONGINT($numAttributes)

$xml_Parent_Ref:=DOM Parse XML variable(myBlobVar)

$xml_Child_Ref:=DOM Get first child XML element($xml_Parent_Ref)

$numAttributes:=DOM Count XML attributes($xml_Child_Ref)

ARRAY TEXT(tAttrib;$numAttributes)
ARRAY TEXT(tValAttrib;$numAttributes)
For($i;1;$numAttributes)
DOM GET XML ATTRIBUTE BY INDEX($xml_Child_Ref;$i;tAttrib{$i};tValAttrib{$i})
End for

2222 4D Language Reference

In the above example, $numAttributes equals 3, tAttrib{1} contains “Font”, tAttrib{2}
contains “N”, tAttrib{3} contains “size” and tValAttrib contains “Verdana”, “1” and “10”.

Note: The index number does not correspond to the location of the attribute in the XML
file displayed in text form. In XML, the index of an attribute indicates its position among
the attributes arranged in alphabetical order (according to their name).

See Also
DOM Count XML elements.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been correctly executed, the system variable OK is set to 1. If an error
occurs, it is set to 0.

4D Language Reference 2223

DOM Count XML elements XML DOM

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DOM Count XML elements (elementRef; elementName) → Longint

Parameter Type Description

elementRef String → XML element reference
elementName String → Name of XML elements to count

Function result Longint ← Number of elements

Description
The DOM Count XML elements command returns the number of “child” elements
dependent on the elementRef parent element and named elementName.

See Also
DOM Get XML element.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been correctly executed, the system variable OK is set to 1. If an error
occurs, it is set to 0.

2224 4D Language Reference

DOM Create XML element XML DOM

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DOM Create XML element (elementRef; xPath{; attrName; attrValue}{; attrName2;

attrValue2; ...; attrNameN; attrValueN}) → String

Parameter Type Description

elementRef String → Root XML element reference
xPath Text → XPath path of the XML element to create
attrName String → Attribute to set
attrValue String | Value → New attribute value

Function result String ← Reference of the created XML element

Description
The DOM Create XML element command allows you to create a new element in the XML
element elementRef in the path set by the xPath parameter and to add attributes to it if
necessary.

Pass the root element reference in elementRef (created, for example, using the DOM Create
XML Ref command).

In xPath, pass the access path in XPath notation of the element to create (see the “Use of
XPath notation” paragraph in the Overview of XML Commands section). If any path
elements do not exist, they are created.
It is possible to pass a simple item name directly in the xPath parameter in order to create a
sub-item from the current item (see example 3).

Note: If you have defined one or more namespaces for the tree set using elementRef (see the
DOM Create XML Ref command), you must precede the xPath parameter with the
namespace to be used (for example, “MyNameSpace:MyElement”).

You can pass attribute/attribute value pairs (in the form of variables, fields or literal values)
in the optional attrName and attrValue parameters. You can pass as many pairs as you want.
The attrValue parameter can be of the text type or another type (Boolean, integer, real, date
or time). If you pass a value other than text, 4D handles its conversion to text, according to
the following principles:
Type Example of converted value
Boolean "true" or "false" (not translated)
Integer "123456"
Real "12.34" (the decimal separator is always ".")
Date "2006-12-04T00:00:00Z" (RFC 3339 standard)
Time "5233" (number of seconds)

4D Language Reference 2225

The command returns the XML reference of the element created as a result.

Examples
1. We want to create the following element:
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" standalone="no" ?>
<RootElement>
<Elem1>
<Elem2>
<Elem3> </Elem3>
<Elem3> </Elem3>
</Elem2>
</Elem1>
</RootElement>

To do so, simply write:

C_STRING(16;vRootRef;vElemRef)
vRootRef:=DOM Create XML Ref("RootElement")
vxPath:="/RootElement/Elem1/Elem2/Elem3"
vElemRef:=DOM Create XML element(vRootRef;vxPath)
vxPath:="/RootElement/Elem1/Elem2/Elem3[2]"
vElemRef:=DOM Create XML element(vRootRef;vxPath)

2. We want to create the following element (containing attributes):

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" standalone="no" ?>
<RootElement>
<Elem1>
<Elem2>
<Elem3 Font=Verdana Size=10> </Elem3>
</Elem2>
</Elem1>
</RootElement>

To do so, simply write:

C_STRING(16;vRootRef;vElemRef)
C_STRING(80;$aAttrName1;$aAttrName2;$aAttrVal1;$aAttrVal2)
$aAttrName1:="Font"
$aAttrName2:="Size"
$aAttrVal1:="Verdana"
$aAttrVal2:="10"

2226 4D Language Reference

 vRootRef:=DOM Create XML Ref("RootElement")
vxPath:="/RootElement/Elem1/Elem2/Elem3"
vElemRef:=DOM Create XML element(vRootRef;vxPath;$aAttrName1;$aAttrVal1;
$aAttrName2;$aAttrVal2)

3. We want to create and export the following structure:

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" standalone="no" ?>
<Root>
<Elem1>Hello</Elem1>
</Root>

We want to use the syntax based on a simple item name. To do this, simply write:

C_STRING(16;$root)
C_STRING(16;$ref1)

$root:=DOM Create XML Ref ("Root")

$ref1:=DOM Create XML element($root;"Elem1")
DOM SET XML ELEMENT VALUE($ref1;"Hello")
DOM EXPORT TO FILE($root;"mydoc.xml")
DOM CLOSE XML($root)

See Also
DOM Get XML element, DOM REMOVE XML ELEMENT.

System Variables or Sets

If the command was executed correctly, the system variable OK is set to 1. Otherwise, it is
set to 0 and an error is generated.

Error Handling
An error is generated when:
• The root element reference is invalid.
• The name of the element to create is invalid (for example, if it starts with a number).

4D Language Reference 2227

DOM Create XML Ref XML DOM

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DOM Create XML Ref (root{; nameSpace}{; nameSpaceName; nameSpaceValue}{;

nameSpaceName2; nameSpaceValue2; ...; nameSpaceNameN; nameSpaceValueN}) → String

Parameter Type Description

root String → Name of root element
nameSpace String → Value of namespace
nameSpaceName String → Namespace name
nameSpaceValue String → Namespace value

Function result String ← Root XML element reference

Description
The DOM Create XML Ref command creates an empty XML tree in memory and returns its
reference.

Pass the name of the XML tree root element in the root parameter.

Pass the declaration of the namespace value of the tree in the optional nameSpace
parameter (for example, “http://www.4d.com”).
In this case, you must prefix the root parameter with the namespace name followed by :
(for example, “MyNameSpace:MyRoot”).

Note: The namespace is a string that allows you to make sure the XML variable names are
unique. In general, a URL like http://www.mysite.com/myurl is used. The URL does not
necessarily have to be valid, but it does have to be unique.

You can declare one or more additional namespaces in the generated XML tree using
nameSpaceName/nameSpaceValue pairs. You can pass as many namespace name/value pairs
as you want.

Important: Remember to call the DOM CLOSE XML command in order to free up the
memory when you have finished using the XML tree.

Examples
1. Creating a single XML tree:

C_STRING (16;vElemRef)
vElemRef:=DOM Create XML Ref("MyRoot")

2228 4D Language Reference

This code produces the following result:
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8" standalone="no" ?>
<MyRoot/>

2. Creating an XML tree with a single namespace:

C_STRING (16;vElemRef)
$Root:="MyNameSpace:MyRoot"
$Namespace:="http://www.4D.com/tech/namespace"
vElemRef:=DOM Create XML Ref($Root$Namespace)

This code produces the following result:

<MyNameSpace:MyRoot xmlns:MyNameSpace="http://www.4D.com/tech/namespace"/>

3. Creating an XML tree with several namespaces:

C_STRING (16;vElemRef)
C_STRING (80;$aNSName1;$aNSName2;$aNSValue1;$aNSValue2)
$Root:="MyNameSpace:MyRoot"
$Namespace:="http://www.4D.com/tech/namespace"
$aNSName1:="NSName1"
$aNSName2:= "NSName2"
$aNSValue1:="http://www.4D.com/Prod/namespace"
$aNSValue2:="http://www.4D.com/Mkt/namespace"
vElemRef:=DOM Create XML Ref($Root;$Namespace;$aNSName1;$aNSValue1;
$aNSName2;$aNSValue2)

This code produces the following result:

<MyNameSpace:MyRoot xmlns:MyNameSpace="http://www.4D.com/tech/nameSpace"
NSName1="http://www.4D.com/Prod/namespace"
NSName2="http://www.4D.com/Mkt/namespace"/>

See Also
DOM CLOSE XML, DOM SET XML OPTIONS.

System Variables or Sets

If the command was executed correctly, the system variable OK is set to 1. Otherwise, it is
set to 0 and an error is generated.

4D Language Reference 2229

DOM EXPORT TO FILE XML DOM

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DOM EXPORT TO FILE (elementRef; filePath)

Parameter Type Description

elementRef String → Root XML element reference
filePath Text → Full access path of the file

Description
The DOM EXPORT TO FILE command allows you to store an XML tree in a file on disk.

Pass the root element reference to export in the elementRef parameter.

Pass the full access path to use or create of the export file in filePath. If the file does not
already exist, it is created.
If you only pass a file name (without an access path), a search for the file will take place or
it will be created next to the structure file.
If you pass an empty string (""), a standard open file and new file dialog box appears.

Example
This example stores the tree vElemRef in the file MyDoc.xml:

DOM EXPORT TO FILE(vElemRef;"C:\\folder\MyDoc.xml")

See Also
DOM EXPORT TO PICTURE, DOM EXPORT TO VAR.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been executed correctly, the system variable OK is set to 1. Otherwise,
it is set to 0 and an error is generated.

Error Handling
An error is generated when:
• The element reference is invalid,
• The specified access path is invalid,
• The storage volume returns an error (insufficient disk space, etc.).

2230 4D Language Reference

DOM EXPORT TO VAR XML DOM

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DOM EXPORT TO VAR (elementRef; vXmlVar)

Parameter Type Description

elementRef String → Root XML element reference
vXmlVar Text | BLOB → Variable to receive XML tree

Description
The DOM EXPORT TO VAR command allows you to save an XML tree in a text or BLOB
variable.

Pass the root element reference to export in elementRef.

Pass the name of the variable that must contain the XML tree in vXmlVar. This variable
must either be a Text or BLOB type. You can select the type depending on what you plan
on doing next or the size that the tree can reach (remember that when not in Unicode
mode, Text type variables are limited to 32 K of text, whereas in Unicode mode, this limit is
2 GB).

Keep in mind that if you use a Text variable to store elementRef when not in Unicode
mode, , it will be encoded using the “current” Mac character set (i.e. Mac Roman on most
Western systems). This means that the text returned will lose its original encoding
(encoding="xxx"). In this case, the vVarXml variable allows you to view or store the code but
NOT to generate a valid XML document (using the SEND PACKET command for example).

In Unicode mode, the original encoding is kept in the variable.

Example
This example stores the tree vElemRef in a text variable:

C_TEXT(vtMyText)
DOM EXPORT TO VAR(vElemRef;vtMyText)

See Also
DOM EXPORT TO FILE, DOM EXPORT TO PICTURE.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been executed correctly, the system variable OK is set to 1. Otherwise,
it is set to 0 and an error is generated (for example, if the element reference is invalid).

4D Language Reference 2231

DOM Find XML element XML DOM

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DOM Find XML element (elementRef; xPath{; arrElementRefs}) → elementRef

Parameter Type Description

elementRef String → XML element reference
xPath Text | BLOB → XPath path of the element to look for
arrElementRefs String 16 array ← List of element references found (if applicable)

Function result elementRef ← Reference of the element found (if applicable)

Description
The DOM Find XML element command allows you to look for specific XML elements in an
XML structure. The search starts at the element designated by the elementRef parameter.

The XML node to seek is set expressed in XPath notation using the xPath parameter (see the
“Use of XPath notation” parameter in the Overview of XML Commands section). Indexed
elements can be used.

Note: In conformity with the XML standard, searches will be case sensitive.

The command returns the XML reference of the element found.

When the arrElementRefs string array is passed, the command fills it with the list of XML
references found. In this case, the command returns the first element of the arrElementRefs
array as the result. This parameter is useful when several elements with the same name
exist at the location specified by the xPath parameter.

Examples
1. This example lets you quickly look for an XML element and display its value:

vFound:=DOM Find XML element(vElemRef;"Items/Book[15]/Title")

DOM GET XML ELEMENT VALUE(vFound;value)
ALERT("The value of the element is: \""+value+"\"")

2232 4D Language Reference

The same search can also be done as follows:

vFound:=DOM Find XML element(vElemRef;"Items/Book[15]")

vFound:=DOM Find XML element(vFound;"Book/Title")
DOM GET XML ELEMENT VALUE(vFound;value)
ALERT("The value of the element is: \""+value+"\"")

Note: As you can see in the above example, the XPath path must always begin with the
name of the current element. This detail is important when you are handling relative
XPath paths.

2. Given the following XML structure:

<Root>
<Elem1>
<Elem2>aaa</Elem2>
<Elem2>bbb</Elem2>
<Elem2>ccc</Elem2>
</Elem1>
</Root>

The following code can be used to retrieve the reference of each Elem2 element in the
arrAfound array:

ARRAY STRING(16;arrAfound;0)
vFound:=DOM Find XML element(vElemRef;"/Root/Elem1/Elem2";arrAfound)

See Also
DOM Count XML elements, DOM Create XML element.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been executed correctly, the system variable OK is set to 1. Otherwise,
it is set to 0 and an error is generated.

Error Handling
An error is generated when:
• The element reference is invalid
• The specified xPath path is invalid.

4D Language Reference 2233

DOM Find XML element by ID XML DOM

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DOM Find XML element by ID (elementRef; id) → String

Parameter Type Description

elementRef String → XML element reference
id String → Value of ID attribute of element to look for

Function result String ← Reference of the element found (if applicable)

Description
The DOM Find XML element by ID command can be used to search for an XML element
based on the value of its ID attribute. The search begins at the element designated by the
elementRef parameter.

The ID attribute can be used to associate a unique identifier to each element. The value of
the ID attribute must be a valid XML name and must be unique. Pass the value of the
attribute to be searched for in id.

The command returns the XML reference of the element found as a result.

See Also
DOM Find XML element.

2234 4D Language Reference

DOM Get first child XML element XML DOM

version 2004.2 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DOM Get first child XML element (elementRef{; childElemName{; childElemValue}}) → String

Parameter Type Description

elementRef String → XML element reference
childElemName String ← Name of child XML element
childElemValue String ← Value of child XML element

Function result String ← Child XML element reference (16 characters)

Description
The DOM Get first child XML element command returns a reference to the first “child” of the
XML element passed in elementRef. This reference can be used with other XML parsing
commands.

The childElemName and childElemValue parameters, if they are passed, receive respectively
the name and the value of the child element.

Examples
1. Retrieval of the reference of the first XML element of the parent root. The XML structure
(C:\\import.xml) is first loaded into a BLOB:

C_BLOB(myBlobVar)
C_STRING(16;$xml_Parent_Ref;$xml_Child_Ref)

DOCUMENT TO BLOB("c:\\import.xml";myBlobVar)
$xml_Parent_Ref:=DOM Parse XML variable(myBlobVar)
$xml_Child_Ref:=DOM Get first child XML element($xml_Parent_Ref)

4D Language Reference 2235

2. Retrieval of the reference, name and value of the first XML element of the parent root.
The XML structure (C:\\import.xml) is first loaded into a BLOB:

C_BLOB(myBlobVar)
C_STRING(16;$xml_Parent_Ref;$xml_Child_Ref)
C_TEXT($childName;$childValue)

DOCUMENT TO BLOB("c:\\import.xml";myBlobVar)
$xml_Parent_Ref:=DOM Parse XML variable(myBlobVar)
$xml_Child_Ref:=DOM Get first child XML element($xml_Parent_Ref;$childName;
$childValue)

See Also
DOM Get next sibling XML element.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been correctly executed, the system variable OK is set to 1. Otherwise,
it is set to 0.

2236 4D Language Reference

DOM Get last child XML element XML DOM

version 2004.2
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DOM Get last child XML element (elementRef{; childElemName{; childElemValue}}) → String

Parameter Type Description

elementRef String → XML element reference
childElemName String ← Name of child element
childElemValue String ← Value of child element

Function result String ← XML element reference (16 characters)

Description
The DOM Get last child XML element command returns an XML reference to the last “child”
of the XML element passed as reference in elementRef. This reference may be used with the
other XML parsing commands.

The optional childElemName and childElemValue parameters, when passed, receive

respectively the name and value of the “child” element.

Example
Recovery of the reference of the last XML element of the parent root. The XML structure
(C:\\import.xml) is loaded into a BLOB beforehand:

C_BLOB(myBlobVar)
C_STRING(16;$ref_XML_Parent;$ref_XML_Child)
C_TEXT($childName;$childValue)

DOCUMENT TO BLOB("c:\\import.xml";myBlobVar)
$ref_XML_Parent:=DOM Parse XML variable(myBlobVar)
$ref_XML_Child:=DOM Get last child XML element($ref_XML_Parent;$childName;
$childValue)

See Also
DOM Get first child XML element.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been executed correctly, the system variable OK is set to 1. Otherwise,
it is set to 0.

4D Language Reference 2237

DOM Get next sibling XML element XML DOM

version 2004.2 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DOM Get next sibling XML element (elementRef{; siblingElemName{; siblingElemValue}}) →

String

Parameter Type Description

elementRef String → XML element reference
siblingElemName String ← Name of sibling XML element
siblingElemValue String ← Value of sibling XML element

Function result String ← Sibling XML element reference (16 characters)

Description
The DOM Get next sibling XML element command returns a reference to the next “sibling”
of the XML element passed as reference. This reference can be used with other XML parsing
commands.

The siblingElemName and siblingElemValue parameters, if they are passed, receive

respectively the name and the value of the “sibling” element.

This command is used to navigate among the “children” of the XML element.

After the last “sibling,” the system variable OK is set to 0.

Examples
1. Retrieval of the reference of the next sibling XML element following the element passed
as parameter:

C_STRING(16;$xml_Parent_Ref;$next_XML_Ref)
$next_XML_Ref:=DOM Get next sibling XML element($xml_Parent_Ref)

2238 4D Language Reference

2. Retrieval in a reference loop of all the child XML elements following the parent element
passed as parameter, beginning with the first child:

C_STRING(16;$xml_Parent_Ref;$first_XML_Ref;$next_XML_Ref)

$first_XML_Ref:=DOM Get first child XML element($xml_Parent_Ref)

$next_XML_Ref:=$first_XML_Ref
While(OK=1)
$next_XML_Ref:=DOM Get next sibling XML element($next_XML_Ref)
End while

See Also
DOM Get first child XML element.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been correctly executed and if the parsed element is not the last
“sibling” of the referenced element, the system variable OK is set to 1. If an error occurs or
if the parsed element is the last “sibling” of the referenced element, it is set to 0.

4D Language Reference 2239

DOM Get parent XML element XML DOM

version 2004.2
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DOM Get parent XML element (elementRef{; parentElemName{; parentElemValue}}) → String

Parameter Type Description

elementRef String → XML element reference
parentElemName String ← Name of parent XML element
parentElemValue String ← Value of parent XML element

Function result String ← Parent XML element reference (16 characters)

Description
The DOM Get parent XML element command returns an XML reference to the “parent” of
the XML element passed as reference in elementRef. This reference may be used with the
other XML parsing commands.

The optional parentElemName and parentElemValue parameters, when passed, receive

respectively the name and value of the parent element.

See Also
DOM Get first child XML element, DOM Get last child XML element, DOM Get Root XML
element.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been executed correctly, the system variable OK is set to 1. Otherwise,
it is set to 0.

2240 4D Language Reference

DOM Get previous sibling XML element XML DOM

version 2004.2
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DOM Get previous sibling XML element (elementRef{; siblingElemName{; siblingElemValue}}) →

String

Parameter Type Description

elementRef String → XML element reference
siblingElemName String ← Name of sibling XML element
siblingElemValue String ← Value of sibling XML element

Function result String ← Sibling XML element reference (16 characters)

Description
The DOM Get previous sibling XML element command returns a reference to the previous
“sibling” of the XML element passed as reference. This reference may be used with the
other XML parsing commands.

The optional siblingElemName and siblingElemValue parameters, when passed, receive

respectively the name and value of the previous “sibling” element.

This command can be used to navigate among the “children” of an XML element.

Before the first “sibling,” the system variable OK is set to 0.

See Also
DOM Get next sibling XML element.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been executed correctly and if the referenced element is not the first
“child” of the structure, the system variable OK is set to 1. If an error occurs or if the
element parsed is the first “child” of the structure, it is set to 0.

4D Language Reference 2241

DOM Get Root XML element XML DOM

version 11.3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DOM Get Root XML element (elementRef) → String

Parameter Type Description

elementRef String → XML element reference

Function result String ← Reference of root element (16 characters)

or "" in case of error

Description
The DOM Get Root XML element command returns a reference to the root element of the
document to which the XML element that is passed in the elementRef parameter belongs.
This reference can be used with the other XML parsing commands.

See Also
DOM Get parent XML element.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been executed correctly, the OK system variable is set to 1. If an error
occurs, for example if the element reference is invalid, the OK variable is set to 0 and the
command generates an error. In this case, the command returns an empty string.

2242 4D Language Reference

DOM GET XML ATTRIBUTE BY INDEX XML DOM

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DOM GET XML ATTRIBUTE BY INDEX (elementRef; attribIndex; attribName; attribValue)

Parameter Type Description

elementRef String → XML element reference
attribIndex Longint → Attribute index number
attribName Variable ← Attribute name
attribValue Variable ← Attribute value

Description
The DOM GET XML ATTRIBUTE BY INDEX command is used to get the name of an attribute
specified by its index number as well as its value.

Pass the reference of an XML element in elementRef and the index number of the attribute
that you want to know the name of in attribIndex. The name is returned in the attribName
parameter and its value is returned in the attribValue, parameter. 4D will attempt to convert
the value obtained into the same type as that of the variable passed as parameter.

Note: The index number does not correspond to the location of the attribute in the XML
file displayed in text form. In XML, the index of an attribute indicates it position among
the attributes when placed in alphabetical order (based on their names). For an illustration
of this, refer to the example of the DOM Count XML attributes command.

If the value passed in attribIndex is greater than the number of attributes present in the
XML element, an error is returned.

Example
Refer to the example in the DOM Count XML attributes command.

See Also
DOM GET XML ATTRIBUTE BY NAME.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been correctly executed, the system variable OK is set to 1. If an error
occurs, it is set to 0.

4D Language Reference 2243

DOM GET XML ATTRIBUTE BY NAME XML DOM

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DOM GET XML ATTRIBUTE BY NAME (elementRef; attribName; attribValue)

Parameter Type Description

elementRef String → XML element reference
attribName String → Attribute name
attribValue Variable ← Attribute value

Description
The DOM GET XML ATTRIBUTE BY NAME command is used to get the value of an attribute
specified by name.

Pass the reference of an XML element in elementRef and the name of the attribute that you
want to know the value of in attribName. The value is returned in the attribValue parameter.
4D will attempt to convert the value obtained into the same type as that of the variable
passed as parameter.

If no attribName attribute exists in the XML element, an error is returned. If several

attributes of the XML element have the same name as that specified, only the value of the
first attribute is returned.

Example
This method is used to retrieve the value of an XML attribute using its name:

C_BLOB(myBlobVar)
C_STRING(16;$xml_Parent_Ref;$xml_Child_Ref)
C_LONGINT($LineNum)

$xml_Parent_Ref:=DOM Parse XML variable(myBlobVar)

$xml_Child_Ref:=DOM Get first child XML element($xml_Parent_Ref)
DOM GET XML ATTRIBUTE BY NAME($xml_Child_Ref;"N";$LineNum)

2244 4D Language Reference

If this method is applied to the example below, $LineNum contains the value 1:

See Also
DOM GET XML ATTRIBUTE BY INDEX.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been correctly executed, the system variable OK is set to 1. If an error
occurs, it is set to 0.

4D Language Reference 2245

DOM Get XML element XML DOM

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DOM Get XML element (elementRef; elementName; index; elementValue) → String

Parameter Type Description

elementRef String → XML element reference
elementName String → Name of element to get
index Longint → Index number of element to get
elementValue Variable ← Value of the element

Function result String ← XML reference (16 characters)

Description
The DOM Get XML element command returns a reference to the “child” element dependent
on the elementName and index parameters.

The value of the element is also returned in the elementValue parameter.

See Also
DOM GET XML ELEMENT VALUE.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been correctly executed, the system variable OK is set to 1. If an error
occurs, it is set to 0.

2246 4D Language Reference

DOM GET XML ELEMENT NAME XML DOM

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DOM GET XML ELEMENT NAME (elementRef; elementName)

Parameter Type Description

elementRef String → XML element reference
elementName Variable ← Name of the element

Description
The DOM GET XML ELEMENT NAME command returns, in the elementName parameter, the
name of the XML element designated by elementRef. For more information on XML
element names, refer to the Overview of XML Commands section.

Example
This method returns the name of the $xml_Element_Ref element:

C_STRING(16;$xml_Element_Ref)
C_TEXT($name)

DOM GET XML ELEMENT NAME($xml_Element_Ref;$name)

See Also
DOM Get XML element, DOM GET XML ELEMENT VALUE, DOM SET XML ELEMENT NAME.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been correctly executed, the system variable OK is set to 1. If an error
occurs, it is set to 0.

4D Language Reference 2247

DOM GET XML ELEMENT VALUE XML DOM

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DOM GET XML ELEMENT VALUE (elementRef; elementValue{; cDATA})

Parameter Type Description

elementRef String → XML element reference
elementValue Variable ← Value of the element
cDATA Variable ← Contents of the CDATA section

Description
The DOM GET XML ELEMENT VALUE command returns, in the elementValue parameter, the
value of the XML element designated by elementRef. 4D will attempt to convert the value
obtained into the same type as that of the variable passed as parameter.

The optional cDATA parameter is used to retrieve the contents of the CDATA section(s) of
the elementRef XML element. Like with the elementValue parameter, 4D will attempt to
convert the value obtained into the same type as that of the variable passed as parameter.

Note: If the element designated by elementRef is a BLOB processed by the DOM SET XML
ELEMENT VALUE command, it has been automatically encoded in base64. Since DOM GET
XML ELEMENT VALUE does not automatically carry out the reverse operation, you will need
to use the DECODE command in this case.

Example
This method returns the value of the $xml_Element_Ref element:

C_STRING(16;$xml_Element_Ref)
C_REAL($value)

DOM GET XML ELEMENT VALUE($xml_Element_Ref;$value)

See Also
DOM Get XML element, DOM GET XML ELEMENT NAME, DOM SET XML ELEMENT VALUE.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been correctly executed, the system variable OK is set to 1. If an error
occurs, it is set to 0.

2248 4D Language Reference

DOM Get XML information XML DOM

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DOM Get XML information (elementRef; xmlInfo) → String

Parameter Type Description

elementRef String → XML root element reference
xmlInfo Longint → Type of information to get

Function result String ← Value of the XML information

Description
The DOM Get XML information command is used to retrieve diverse information about the
XML element designated by elementRef.

In xmlInfo, pass a code indicating the type of information to be retrieved. You can use the
following predefined constants, located in the “XML” theme:
Constant Type Value
PUBLIC ID Longint 1
SYSTEM ID Longint 2
DOCTYPE Name Longint 3
Encoding Longint 4
Version Longint 5
Document URI Longint 6

These constants indicate the following information:

• PUBLIC ID: Public identifier (FPI) of the DTD to which the document conforms (if the
DOCTYPE xxx PUBLIC tag is present).
• SYSTEM ID: System identifier.
• DOCTYPE Name: Name of the root element as defined in the DOCTYPE marker.
• Encoding: Encoding used (UTF-8, ISO...).
• Version: Accepted XML version.
• Document URI: URL of the DTD.

See Also
GET XML ERROR.

Constants
XML theme.

4D Language Reference 2249

DOM Parse XML source XML DOM

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DOM Parse XML source (document{; validation{; dtd | schema}}) → String

Parameter Type Description

document String → Document pathname
validation Boolean → True = Validation
False = No validation
dtd | schema String → Location of the DTD or XML schema

Function result String ← Reference of XML element (16 characters)

Description
The DOM Parse XML source command parses a document containing an XML structure and
returns a reference for this document. The command can validate (or not) the document
via a DTD or an XML schema (XML Schema Definition (XSD) document).
The document can be located on the disk or on the Internet/Intranet.

In the document parameter, you can pass:

• either a standard complete pathname (of the type C:\\Folder\\File\\... under Windows
and MacintoshHD:Folder:File under Mac OS),
• or a Unix path under Mac OS (which must start with /).
• or a network path of the type http://www.site.com/File or ftp://public.ftp.com...

The Boolean parameter validation is used to indicate whether or not to validate the
structure.
• If validation equals True, the structure will be validated. In this case, the parser will
attempt to validate the XML structure of the document based either on the DTD or XSD
reference included in the document, or via the DTD or XML schema designated by the
third parameter when it is passed.
• If validation equals False, the structure will not be validated.
If you pass True in validation and omit the third parameter, the command will attempt to
validate the XML structure via a DTD or XSD reference found in the structure itself.
Validation can be indirect: if the structure contains a reference to a DTD file that itself
contains a reference to an XSD file, the command will attempt to carry out both validations.

The third parameter is used to indicate a specific DTD or an XML schema for document
parsing. If you use this parameter, the command will not take the DTD referred to in the
XML document into account.

2250 4D Language Reference

Validation by DTD
There are two ways to specify a DTD:
• as a reference. To do this, pass the complete pathname of the new DTD (“dtd” extension)
in the dtd parameter. If the document indicated does not contain a valid DTD, the dtd
parameter is ignored and an error is generated.
• directly in a text. In this case, if the contents of the parameter begin with “<?xml”, 4D
will consider that it is the DTD; otherwise, 4D will consider it as a pathname.

Validation by schema
To validate the document via an XML schema, you just need to pass a file or URL with an
“xsd” extension instead of a “dtd” one in the third parameter. Validation by XML schema
is considered to be more flexible and more powerful than validation by DTD. The language
of XSD documents is based on XML language. More particularly, XML schemas support
data types. For more information about XML schemas, please refer to the following address:
http://www.w3.org/XML/Schema.

If validation cannot be performed (no DTD or XSD, incorrect URL, etc.), an error is
generated. The Error system variable indicates the error number. You can intercept this
error using a method installed by the ON ERR CALL command.

The command returns a 16-character string (ElementRef) making up the reference in the
memory of the document virtual structure. This reference should be used with other XML
parsing commands.
Important: Once you no longer have any need for it, remember to call the DOM CLOSE
XML command with this reference in order to free up the memory.

Examples
1. Opening an XML document located on disk, without validation:

$xml_Struct_Ref:=DOM Parse XML source("C:\\import.xml")

2. Opening an XML document located next to the database structure file, without
validation:

$xml_Struct_Ref:=DOM Parse XML source("import.xml")

3. Opening an XML document located on disk and validation using a DTD on the disk:

$xml_Struct_Ref:=DOM Parse XML source("C:\\import.xml";True;

"C:\\import_dtd.xml")

4D Language Reference 2251

4. Opening an XML document located at a specific URL, without validation:

$xml_Struct_Ref:=DOM Parse XML source("http://www.4D.com/xml/import.xml")

See Also
DOM CLOSE XML, DOM Parse XML variable.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been correctly executed, the system variable OK is set to 1. Otherwise,
it is set to 0.

2252 4D Language Reference

DOM Parse XML variable XML DOM

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DOM Parse XML variable (variable{; validation{; dtd}}) → String

Parameter Type Description

variable BLOB/Text → Name of the variable
validation Boolean → True = Validation by the DTD,
False = No validation
dtd String → Location of the DTD

Function result String ← Reference of XML element (16 characters)

Description
The DOM Parse XML variable command parses a BLOB or Text type variable containing an
XML structure and returns a reference for this variable. The command can validate (or not)
the document.

Pass the name of the BLOB or Text variable containing the XML object in the variable
parameter.

The Boolean parameter validation is used to indicate whether or not to validate the
structure using the DTD.
• If validation equals True, the structure will be validated. In this case, the parser will
attempt to validate the XML structure of the document based either on the DTD defined or
referred to in the document, or that designated by the dtd parameter.
• If validation equals False, the structure will not be validated.

The third parameter, dtd, is used to indicate the specific DTD for document parsing. If you
use this parameter, the command will not take the DTD referred to in the XML variable
into account.

There are two ways to specify a DTD:

• as a reference. To do this, pass the complete pathname of the new DTD in the dtd
parameter. If the document indicated does not contain a valid DTD, the dtd parameter is
ignored and an error is generated.
• directly in text. In this case, if the contents of the parameter begin with “<?xml”, 4D will
consider that it is the DTD; otherwise, 4D will consider it as a pathname.

If validation cannot be performed (no DTD, incorrect URL to DTD, etc.), an error is
generated. The Error system variable indicates the error number. You can intercept this
error using a method installed by the ON ERR CALL command.

4D Language Reference 2253

The command returns a 16-character string (ElementRef) making up the reference in the
memory of the document virtual structure. This reference should be used with other XML
parsing commands.

Important: Once you no longer have any need for it, remember to call the DOM CLOSE
XML command with this reference in order to free up the memory.

Examples
1. Opening an XML object located in a 4D Text variable, without validation:

C_TEXT(myTextVar)
C_TIME(vDoc)
C_STRING(16;$xml_Struct_Ref)

vDoc:=Open document ("Document.xml")

If (OK=1)
RECEIVE PACKET(vDoc;myTextVar;32000)
CLOSE DOCUMENT(vDoc)
$xml_Struct_Ref:=DOM Parse XML variable(myTextVar)
End if

2. Opening an XML document located in a 4D BLOB, without validation:

C_BLOB(myBlobVar)
C_STRING(16;$ref_XML_Struct)

DOCUMENT TO BLOB(“c:\\import.xml”;myBlobVar)
$xml_Struct_Ref:=DOM Parse XML variable(myBlobVar)

See Also
DOM CLOSE XML, DOM Parse XML source.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been correctly executed, the system variable OK is set to 1. Otherwise,
it is set to 0.

2254 4D Language Reference

DOM REMOVE XML ELEMENT XML DOM

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DOM REMOVE XML ELEMENT (elementRef)

Parameter Type Description

elementRef String → XML element reference

Description
The DOM REMOVE XML ELEMENT command removes the element designated by elementRef.

See Also
DOM Create XML element.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been executed correctly, the system variable OK is set to 1. Otherwise,
it is set to 0 and an error is generated.
An error is generated when:
• The element reference is invalid,
• The element is empty.

4D Language Reference 2255

DOM SET XML ATTRIBUTE XML DOM

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DOM SET XML ATTRIBUTE (elementRef; attrName; attrValue{; attrName2; attrValue2; ...;
attrNameN; attrValueN})

Parameter Type Description

elementRef String → XML element reference
attrName String → Attribute to set
attrValue String | Value → New attribute value

Description
The DOM SET XML ATTRIBUTE command allows adding one or more attributes to the XML
element whose reference is passed in the elementRef parameter. It also allows setting the
value of each attribute defined.

Pass the attriibute to set and its value respectively in the attrName and attrValue parameters
(in the form of variables, fields or literal values). You can pass as many attribute/value pairs
as you want.
The attrValue parameter can be of the text type or another type (Boolean, integer, real, date
or time). If you pass a value other than text, 4D handles its conversion to text, according to
the following principles:
Type Example of converted value
Boolean "true" or "false" (not translated)
Integer "123456"
Real "12.34" (the decimal separator is always ".")
Date "2006-12-04T00:00:00Z" (RFC 3339 standard)
Time "5233" (number of seconds)

Example
In the following XML source:
<Book>
<Title>The Best Seller</Title>
</Book>

If the following code is executed:

vAttrName:="Font"
vAttrVal:="Verdana"
DOM SET XML ATTRIBUTE(vElemRef;vAttrName;vAttrVal)

2256 4D Language Reference

We get:
<Book>
<Title Font=Verdana>The Best Seller</Title>
</Book>

See Also
DOM GET XML ATTRIBUTE BY INDEX, DOM GET XML ATTRIBUTE BY NAME.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been executed correctly, the system variable OK is set to 1. Otherwise,
it is set to 0 and an error is generated.

4D Language Reference 2257

DOM SET XML ELEMENT NAME XML DOM

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DOM SET XML ELEMENT NAME (elementRef; elementName)

Parameter Type Description

elementRef String → XML element reference
elementName String → New name of element

Description
The DOM SET XML ELEMENT NAME command allows you to modify the name of the
element set by elementRef.

Pass the reference of the element to rename in elementRef and the new name of the
element in elementName. The command will also take charge of updating the open and
close tags of the element.

Example
In the following XML source:
<Book>
<Title>The Best Seller</Title>
</Book>

If the following code is executed, with vElemRef containing the reference to the ‘Book’
element:

DOM SET XML ELEMENT NAME(vElemRef;"BestSeller")

We get:
<BestSeller>
<Title>The Best Seller</Title>
</BestSeller>

See Also
DOM GET XML ELEMENT NAME.

2258 4D Language Reference

System Variables or Sets
If the command was executed correctly, the system variable OK is set to 1. Otherwise, it is
set to 0 and an error is generated.

Error Handling
An error is generated when:
• The element reference is invalid
• The new name of the element to create is invalid (for example, if it starts with a number).

4D Language Reference 2259

DOM SET XML ELEMENT VALUE XML DOM

version 2004.4 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DOM SET XML ELEMENT VALUE (elementRef{; xPath; elementValue{; *})

Parameter Type Description

elementRef String → XML element reference
xPath Text → XPath path of the XML element
elementValue String | Variable → New value of element
* * → If passed: set the value in CDATA

Description
The DOM SET XML ELEMENT VALUE command allows you to modify the value of the
element set by elementRef.

If you pass the optional xPath parameter, you choose to use XPath notation to indicate the
element to be modified (for more information about this notation, refer to the “Use of
XPath notation” paragraph in the Overview of XML Commands section). In this case, you
must pass the reference of a root XML element in elementRef and the XPath path of the
element to be modified in xPath .

In elementValue, pass a string or a variable (or a field) containing the new value of the
specified element:
• If you pass a string, the value will be used “as is” in the XML structure.
• If you pass a variable or a field, 4D will process the value, depending on the type of
elementValue. All data types can be used, except arrays, pictures and pointers.

When the optional asterisk (*) parameter is passed, this indicates that the value of the
element must be set in the form of CDATA. The special CDATA form can be used to write
raw text as is (see example 2).

Note: If the element designated by elementRef is a BLOB processed by the DOM SET XML
ELEMENT VALUE command, it has been automatically encoded in base64. However, since
the DOM GET XML ELEMENT VALUE does not automatically carry out the reverse operation,
you will need to use the DECODE command.

Examples
1. In the following XML source:
<Book>
<Title>The Best Seller</Title>
</Book>

2260 4D Language Reference

If the following code is executed, with vElemRef containing the reference to the “Title”
element:

DOM SET XML ELEMENT VALUE(vElemRef;"The Loser")

We get:
<Book>
<Title>The Loser</Title>
</Book>

2. In the following XML source:

<Maths>
<Postulate>1+2=3</Postulate>
</Maths>

We want to write the text “12<18” in the <Postulate> element. This string cannot be
written as is in XML because the “<” character is not accepted. This character must
therefore be changed into “&lt;” or the CDATA form must be used. If vElemRef indicates the
XML <Postulate> node:

` Normal form
DOM SET XML ELEMENT VALUE(vElemRef;"12<18")

We get:
<Maths>
<Postulate>12 &lt; 18</Postulate>
</Maths>

` CDATA form
DOM SET XML ELEMENT VALUE(vElemRef;"12<18";*)

We get:
<Maths>
<Postulate><![CDATA[12 < 18]]></Postulate>
</Maths>

See Also
DOM GET XML ELEMENT VALUE.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been executed correctly, the system variable OK is set to 1. Otherwise,
it is set to 0 and an error is generated (for example, if the element reference is invalid).

4D Language Reference 2261

DOM SET XML OPTIONS XML DOM

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

DOM SET XML OPTIONS (elementRef; encoding{; standalone{; indentation}})

Parameter Type Description

elementRef String → XML element reference
encoding String → XML document character set
standalone Boolean → True = document is standalone
False (default) = document is not standalone
indentation Boolean → True (default) = document is indented
False = document is not indented

Description
The DOM SET XML OPTIONS command allows you to define various options that are useful
in creating the XML tree set using elementRef. These options concern encoding, the
standalone property and tree identation options:
• encoding: Indicates the character set used in the document. By default (if the command is
not called), the UTF-8 character set (compressed Unicode) is used.
• standalone: Indicates whether the tree is standalone (True) or if it needs other files or
external resources to operate (False). By default (if the command is not called or if the
parameter is omitted), the tree is not standalone.
• indentation: Indicates whether the tree should display indentations corresponding to XML
key hierarchies (True) or not (False). By default (if the command is not called or if the
parameter is omitted), the tree is indented.

Example
The following example sets the encoding to use and the standalone option in the
elementRef element:

DOM SET XML OPTIONS(elementRef;"UTF-16";True)

See Also
DOM Create XML Ref.

2262 4D Language Reference

67
______________________
XML SAX

4D Language Reference 2263

2264 4D Language Reference
Overview of XML SAX Commands XML SAX

version 11.3 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

This theme groups together the XML SAX commands of 4D.

For general information about XML (overview, character sets, glossary) as well as the
differences between the DOM and SAX modes, please refer to the Overview of XML DOM
Commands section.

Creating, opening and closing XML documents via SAX

The SAX commands work with the standard document references of 4D (DocRef, Time type
reference). It is therefore possible to use these commands jointly with the 4D commands
used to manage documents, such as SEND PACKET or Append document.
The creation and opening of XML documents by programming is carried out using the
Create document and Open document commands. Subsequently, the use of an XML
command with these documents will cause the automatic implementation of XML
mechanisms such as encoding. For instance, the <?xml version="1.0" encoding="… encodage
…" standalone = "no "?> header will be written automatically in the document.

Note: Documents read by SAX commands must be opened in read-only mode by the Open
document command. This avoids any conflict between 4D and the Xerces library when you
open “standard” and XML documents simultaneously. If you execute a SAX parsing
command with a document open in read-write mode, an alert message is displayed and
parsing is impossible.

Closing an XML document must be carried out using the CLOSE DOCUMENT command. If
any XML elements were open, they will be closed automatically.

4D Language Reference 2265

SAX ADD PROCESSING INSTRUCTION XML SAX

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SAX ADD PROCESSING INSTRUCTION (document; statement)

Parameter Type Description

document DocRef → Reference of open document
statement Text → Statement to insert in the document

Description
In the XML document referenced by document, the SAX ADD PROCESSING INSTRUCTION
command adds an XML processing statement.

A processing statement lets you indicate the application type and when necessary any
additional parameters allowing you to process an unparsable external entity.

The command formats the data of the statement in conformity with XML. However, the
statements themselves are not parsed and it is up to the developer to make sure that they
are valid.

Example
The following code:

vtInstruct:="xml-stylesheet type="+Char(Quotes)+"text/xsl"+Char (Quotes)+

"href="+Char (Quotes)+"style.xsl"+Char (Quotes)
SAX ADD PROCESSING INSTRUCTION ($DocRef;vtInstruct)

... will write the following line in the document:

<?xml-stylesheet type="text/xsl" href="style.xsl"?>

See Also
SAX GET XML PROCESSING INSTRUCTION.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been executed correctly, the system variable OK is set to 1. Otherwise,
it is set to 0 and an error is generated.

2266 4D Language Reference

SAX ADD XML CDATA XML SAX

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SAX ADD XML CDATA (document; data)

Parameter Type Description

document DocRef → Reference of open document
data Text | BLOB → Text or BLOB to insert in the document
between CData tags

Description
In the XML document referenced by document, the SAX ADD XML CDATA command adds
data of the text or BLOB type. This data will be automatically framed between the
<![CDATA[ and ]]> tags.
The text included in a CData section is ignored by the XML interpreter.

If you want to encode the contents of data, you must use the ENCODE command. In this
case, of course, you must pass a BLOB in data.

In order for this command to operate correctly, an element must be open. Otherwise, an
error will be generated.

Example
You want to insert the following lines in your XML document:
function matchwo(a,b)
{
if (a < b && a < 0) then
{
return 1
}
else
{
return 0
}
}

To do this, you just need to execute the following code:

C_TEXT (vtMytext)
... ` place the text in the vtMytext variable here
SAX ADD XML CDATA($DocRef;vtMytext)

4D Language Reference 2267

The result will thus be:
<![CDATA[
function matchwo(a,b)
{
if (a < b && a < 0) then
{
return 1
}
else
{
return 0
}
}
]]>

See Also
SAX GET XML CDATA.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been executed correctly, the system variable OK is set to 1. Otherwise,
it is set to 0.

2268 4D Language Reference

SAX ADD XML COMMENT XML SAX

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SAX ADD XML COMMENT (document; comment)

Parameter Type Description

document DocRef --> Reference of open document
comment String --> Comment to be added

Description
The SAX ADD XML COMMENT command adds a comment in the XML document referenced
by document.

An XML comment is a text whose contents will not be parsed by the XML interpreter. XML
comments must be enclosed between the <!-- and --> characters.

Example
The following statement:

vComment:= "Created by 4D"

SAX ADD XML COMMENT ($DocRef;vComment)

... will write the following line in the document:

<!--Created by 4D-->

See Also
SAX ADD XML DOCTYPE.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been executed correctly, the system variable OK is set to 1. Otherwise,
it is set to 0.

Error Handling
In the event of an error, the command returns an error which can be intercepted using an
error-handling method.

4D Language Reference 2269

SAX ADD XML DOCTYPE XML SAX

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SAX ADD XML DOCTYPE (document; docType)

Parameter Type Description

document DocRef → Reference of open document
docType String → DocType to be added

Description
The SAX ADD XML DOCTYPE command adds a DocType statement set by the docType
parameter in the XML document referenced by document.

The DocType statement lets you indicate the type of XML in which the document has been
written and to specify the Document Type Declaration (DTD) used. A DocType statement
generally takes the following form: <!DOCTYPE XML_type "DTD_address">.

Example
The following statement:

vDocType := "SYSTEM Books \"Book.DTD\""

SAX ADD XML DOCTYPE ($DocRef;vDocType)

... will write the following line in the document:

<!DOCTYPE SYSTEM Books "Book.DTD">

See Also
SAX ADD XML COMMENT.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been executed correctly, the system variable OK is set to 1. Otherwise,
it is set to 0.

Error Handling
In the event of an error, the the command returns an error which can be intercepted using
an error-handling method.

2270 4D Language Reference

SAX ADD XML ELEMENT VALUE XML SAX

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SAX ADD XML ELEMENT VALUE (document; data; *)

Parameter Type Description

document DocRef → Reference of open document
data Text | Variable → Text or variable to insert in the document
* * → If passed: encoding of special characters
If omitted: no encoding

Description
In the XML document referenced by document, the SAX ADD XML ELEMENT VALUE
command adds data directly without converting them. This command is equivalent, for
instance, to inserting an attachment in the body of an e-mail.

In data, you can either pass a character string directly, or a 4D variable. The variable
contents will be converted into text before being included in the XML document.
If you want to encode the contents of data, you must use the ENCODE command. In this
case, of course, you must passs a BLOB in data.

By default, the command does not encode special characters (< > ” ’...) contained in the
data parameter. To force the encoding of these parameters, simply pass the optional *
parameter.

In order for this command to operate correctly, an element must be open. Otherwise, an
error will be generated.

Example
This example inserts the whitepaper.pdf file into the open XML element:

C_BLOB(vBMyBLOB)
DOCUMENT TO BLOB ("c:\\whitepaper.pdf";vBMyBLOB)
SAX ADD XML ELEMENT VALUE($DocRef;vBMyBLOB)

See Also
SAX GET XML ELEMENT VALUE.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been executed correctly, the system variable OK is set to 1; otherwise,
it is set to 0 and an error is generated.

4D Language Reference 2271

SAX CLOSE XML ELEMENT XML SAX

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SAX CLOSE XML ELEMENT (document)

Parameter Type Description

document DocRef → Reference of open document

Description
In the XML document referenced by document, the SAX CLOSE XML ELEMENT command
writes the statements necessary for closing the last element opened using the SAX OPEN
XML ELEMENT command.

The use of this command is optional. In fact, 4D will automatically add the necessary end
tags for any unclosed elements when XML documents are closed.

Example
If the last element opened is <Book>, the following statement:

SAX CLOSE XML ELEMENT($DocRef)

... will write the following line in the document:

</Book>

See Also
SAX OPEN XML ELEMENT, SAX OPEN XML ELEMENT ARRAYS.

2272 4D Language Reference

SAX GET XML CDATA XML SAX

version 11.3 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SAX GET XML CDATA (document; value)

Parameter Type Description

document DocRef → Reference of open document
value Text | BLOB ← Element value

Description
The SAX GET XML CDATA command allows you to get the CDATA value of an XML element
that exists in the XML document referenced in the document parameter. This command
must be called with the XML CDATA SAX event. For more information about SAX events,
refer to the description of the SAX Get XML node command.

Pass a value variable of the Text type if you want to retrieve data having a size greater than
32 KB (the database must be running in Unicode mode).

Data is returned as is (it is not modified).

Example
Let's look at the following piece of XML code:
<RootElement>
<Child>MyText<![CDATA[MyCData]]</Child>
</RootElement>

The following 4D code will return “MyCData” in vTextData:

C_BLOB (vData)
C_TEXT (vTextData)
SAX GET XML CDATA(DocRef;vData)
vTextData:=BLOB to text(vData;UTF8 C string)

See Also
SAX ADD XML CDATA, SAX Get XML node.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been executed correctly, the system variable OK is set to 1. Otherwise,
it is set to 0 and an error is generated.

4D Language Reference 2273

SAX GET XML COMMENT XML SAX

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SAX GET XML COMMENT (document; comment)

Parameter Type Description

document DocRef → Reference of open document
comment String ← XML comment

Description
The SAX GET XML COMMENT command returns a comment if an XML Comment SAX event
is generated in the XML document referenced in the document parameter. For more
information about SAX events, refer to the description of the SAX Get XML node command.

See Also
SAX ADD XML COMMENT, SAX Get XML node.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been executed correctly, the system variable OK is set to 1. Otherwise,
it is set to 0 and an error is generated.

2274 4D Language Reference

SAX GET XML DOCUMENT VALUES XML SAX

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SAX GET XML DOCUMENT VALUES (document; encoding; version; standalone)

Parameter Type Description

document DocRef → Reference of open document
encoding String ← XML document character set
version String ← XML version
standalone Boolean ← True = document is standalone,
otherwise False

Description
The SAX GET XML DOCUMENT VALUES command gets basic information from the XML
header of the XML document referenced in the document parameter.

The command returns the type of encoding, version and the “standalone” property of the
document respectively in the encoding, version and standalone parameters. This command
must be used with the SAX event XML Start Document. For more information about SAX
events, refer to the description of the SAX Get XML node command.

See Also
SAX Get XML node, SAX SET XML OPTIONS.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been executed correctly, the system variable OK is set to 1. Otherwise,
it is set to 0 and an error is generated.

4D Language Reference 2275

SAX GET XML ELEMENT XML SAX

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SAX GET XML ELEMENT (document; name; prefix; attrNames; attrValues)

Parameter Type Description

document DocRef → Reference of open document
name String ← Element name
prefix String ← Namespace
attrNames Array string ← Attribute names
attrValues Array string ← Attribute values

Description
The SAX GET XML ELEMENT command returns various information about the element name
that is present in the XML document reference in the document parameter. This command
must be called with the XML Start Element or XML End Element SAX events. In the specific
case of XML End Element, the attribute parameters are not handled. For more information
about SAX events, refer to the description of the SAX Get XML node command.

The name parameter contains the name of the element.

The prefix parameter returns the namespace of the element. This parameter is empty if no
namespace is linked to the element.

The command fills the attrNames array with the names of attributes of the target element.
If necessary, the command creates and sizes the array automatically.

The command also fills the attrValues array with the values of attributes of the target
element. If necessary, the command creates and sizes the array automatically.

Example
Let's look at the following piece of XML code:
<RootElement>
<Child Att1="111" Att2="222" Att3="333">MyText</Child>
</RootElement>

Once the following statement has been executed:

SAX GET XML ELEMENT (DocRef;vName;vPrefix;tAttrNames;tAttrValues)

2276 4D Language Reference

...vName will contain “Child”
vPrefix will contain “”
tAttrNames{1} will contain “Att1”, tAttrNames{2} will contain “Att2”, tAttrNames{3} will
contain “Att3”
tAttrValues{1} will contain “111”, tAttrValues{2} will contain “222”, tAttrValues{3} will
contain “333”

See Also
SAX Get XML node.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been executed correctly, the system variable OK is set to 1. Otherwise,
it is set to 0 and an error is generated.

4D Language Reference 2277

SAX GET XML ELEMENT VALUE XML SAX

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SAX GET XML ELEMENT VALUE (document; value)

Parameter Type Description

document DocRef → Reference of open document
value Text | BLOB ← Element value

Description
The SAX GET XML ELEMENT VALUE command allows you to get the value of an XML
element that exists in the XML document referenced in the document parameter. This
command must be called with the XML DATA SAX event. For more information about SAX
events, refer to the description of the SAX Get XML node command.

Pass a Text or BLOB type variable in the value parameter. If you pass a BLOB, the text will
be returned as is (it will not be modified).

Example
Let's look at the following piece of XML code:
<RootElement>
<Child Att1="111" Att2="222" Att3="333">MyText</Child>
</RootElement>

The following instruction will return “MyText” in vValue:

SAX GET XML ELEMENT VALUE(DocRef;vValue)

See Also
SAX ADD XML ELEMENT VALUE, SAX Get XML node.

System Variables or Sets

If the command was executed correctly, the system variable OK is set to 1. Otherwise, it is
set to 0 and an error is generated.

2278 4D Language Reference

SAX GET XML ENTITY XML SAX

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SAX GET XML ENTITY (document; name; value)

Parameter Type Description

document DocRef → Reference of open document
name String ← Entity name
value String ← Entity value

Description
The SAX GET XML ENTITY command allows you to get the name and value of an XML entity
that exists in the XML document referenced in the document parameter. This command
must be called with the XML Entity SAX event. For more information about SAX events,
refer to the description of the SAX Get XML node command.

Examples
Let's look at the following piece of XML code:
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<!DOCTYPE body [
<!ELEMENT body (element*)>
<!ELEMENT element (#PCDATA)>
<!ENTITY name "Replacement">
]>
<body>
<element>Entity updated by &name;</element>
</body>

The following instruction will return “name” in vName and “Replacement” in vValue.
SAX GET XML ENTITY(DocRef;vName;vValue)

See Also
SAX Get XML node.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been executed correctly, the system variable OK is set to 1. Otherwise,
it is set to 0 and an error is generated.

4D Language Reference 2279

SAX Get XML node XML SAX

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SAX Get XML node (document) → Longint

Parameter Type Description

document DocRef → Reference of open document

Function result Longint ← Event returned by function

Description
The SAX Get XML node command returns a long integer that indicates the type of SAX
event returned while the XML document referenced in document is parsed.

Events that can be returned are available as “XML” theme constants:

Constant Type Value
XML Start Document Longint 1
XML Comment Longint 2
XML Processing Instruction Longint 3
XML Start Element Longint 4
XML End Element Longint 5
XML DATA Longint 6
XML CDATA Longint 7
XML Entity Longint 8
XML End Document Longint 9

Example
The following example processes an event:

DocRef:=Open document("";"xml";Read Mode)

If (OK=1)
Repeat
MyEvent:=SAX Get XML node(DocRef)
Case of
: (MyEvent=XML Start Document)
DoSomething

2280 4D Language Reference

 : (MyEvent=XML Comment)
DoSomethingElse
End case
Until (MyEvent=XML End Document)
End if
CLOSE DOCUMENT (DocRef)

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been executed correctly, the system variable OK is set to 1. Otherwise,
it is set to 0 and an error is generated.

4D Language Reference 2281

SAX GET XML PROCESSING INSTRUCTION XML SAX

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SAX GET XML PROCESSING INSTRUCTION (document; name; value)

Parameter Type Description

document DocRef --> Reference of open document
name String ← Instruction name
value String ← Instruction value

Description
The SAX GET XML PROCESSING INSTRUCTION command returns the name and value of the
XML instruction processed in the XML document referenced in the document parameter.
This command must be called with the XML Processing Instruction event. For more
information about SAX events, refer to the description of the SAX Get XML node command.

Example
Let's look at the following piece of XML code:
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<!-- Edited with XML Spy v3.0.7 NT (http://www.xmlspy.com) by Myself (4D SA)-->
<?PI TextProcess?>
<!DOCTYPE RootElement SYSTEM "ParseTest.dtd">

The following instruction will return “PI” in vName and “TextProcess” in vValue:

SAX GET XML PROCESSING INSTRUCTION($DocRef;vName;vValue)

See Also
SAX ADD PROCESSING INSTRUCTION, SAX Get XML node.

2282 4D Language Reference

SAX OPEN XML ELEMENT XML SAX

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SAX OPEN XML ELEMENT (document; tag{; attribName; attribValue}{; attribName2;

attribValue2; ...; attribNameN; attribValueN})

Parameter Type Description

document DocRef → Reference of open document
tag String → Name of element to open
attribName String → Attribute name
attribValue String → Attribute value

Description
The SAX OPEN XML ELEMENT command lets you add a new element in the XML document
referenced by document as well as, optionally, attributes and their values.
The added element is “open” in the document (the end tag is not added). To close an
element created using this command, you must either:
• Use the SAX CLOSE XML ELEMENT command, or
• Close the XML document. In this case, 4D will automatically add the necessary XML end
tags.
In tag, pass the name of the element to be created. This name may only contain letters,
numbers and the characters “.”, “-“,”_” and “:”. If an invalid character is passed in tag, an
error will be generated.
Optionally, the command can pass one or more attribute/value pairs (in the form of
variables, fields or literal values) using the attribName and attribValue parameters. You can
pass as many attribute/value pairs as you want.

Example
The following statement:

vElement:="Book"
SAX OPEN XML ELEMENT($DocRef;vElement)
... will write the following line in the document:
<Book

See Also
SAX CLOSE XML ELEMENT, SAX OPEN XML ELEMENT ARRAYS.

Error Handling
If an invalid character is passed in tag, an error is generated.

4D Language Reference 2283

SAX OPEN XML ELEMENT ARRAYS XML SAX

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SAX OPEN XML ELEMENT ARRAYS (document; tag{; attribNamesArray; attribValuesArray}{;

attribNamesArray2; attribValuesArray2; ...; attribNamesArrayN; attribValuesArrayN})

Parameter Type Description

document DocRef → Reference of open document
tag String → Name of element to open
attribNamesArray Array string → Array of attribute names
attribValuesArray Array string → Array of attribute values

Description
The SAX OPEN XML ELEMENT ARRAYS command is used to add a new element in the XML
document whose reference is passed in document as well as, optionally, attributes and their
values in the form of arrays.

Except for the support of arrays (see below), this command is identical to SAX OPEN XML
ELEMENT. Please refer to the description of this command for more information about its
operation.

Optionally, the SAX OPEN XML ELEMENT ARRAYS command can be used to pass pairs of
attributes and attribute values in the form of arrays in the attribNamesArray and
attribValuesArray parameters.
The arrays must have been created previously and operate in attribute/attribute value pairs.
You can pass as many pairs of arrays, and as many items in each pair, as you want.

Example
The following method:

ARRAY STRING(80;tAttrNames;2)
ARRAY STRING(80;tAttrValues;2)
vElement:="Book"
tAttrNames{1}:="Font"
tAttrValues{1}:="Arial"
tAttrNames{2}:="Style"
tAttrValues{2}:="Bold"
SAX OPEN XML ELEMENT ARRAYS($DocRef;vElement;tAttrNames;tAttrValues)

2284 4D Language Reference

... will write in the document:
<Book Font="Arial" Style="Bold">

See Also
SAX CLOSE XML ELEMENT, SAX OPEN XML ELEMENT.

4D Language Reference 2285

SAX SET XML OPTIONS XML SAX

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SAX SET XML OPTIONS (document; encoding{; standalone{; indentation}})

Parameter Type Description

document DocRef → Reference of open document
encoding String → XML document character set
standalone Boolean → True = the document is standalone
False (default) = document is not standalone
indentation Boolean → True (default) = document is indented
False = document is not indented

Description
The SAX SET XML OPTIONS command initializes the XML document referenced in
document using the values passed in the parameter. These parameters allow determining
the encoding, standalone attribute and document indentation.
• encoding: Indicates the character set used in the document. By default (if the command is
not called), the UTF-8 character set (compressed Unicode) is used.
• standalone: Indicates whether the document is standalone (True) or if it needs other files
or external resources to operate (False). By default (if the command is not called or if the
parameter is omitted), the document is not standalone.
• indentation: Indicates whether the document should display indentations corresponding
to XML key hierarchies (True) or not (False). By default (if the command is not called or if
the parameter is omitted), the document is indented.

This command must be called one time per document and before the first XML set
command in the document; otherwise, an error message will be generated.

Example
The following code:

SAX SET XML OPTIONS($DocRef;"UTF-16";True)

... will write this line in the document:

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-16" standalone="yes"?>

See Also
SAX GET XML DOCUMENT VALUES.

2286 4D Language Reference

68
______________________
XML Utilities

4D Language Reference 2287

2288 4D Language Reference
Overview of XML Utilities Commands XML Utilities

version 11.3 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

This theme groups together the XML "utilities" commands of 4D. These are error-
management commands as well as commands specialized in XSL and SVG.

For general information about XML (overview, glossary) as well as the differences between
DOM and SAX modes, please refer to the Overview of XML DOM Commands section.

XSL transformations management

4D supports the application of XSL style sheets (eXtended Stylesheet Language). The XSL
language allows you to modify the tags of an XML document.

The XSL language features two different aspects:

• Formatting: It allows you to apply style and display rules to XML elements, similar to CSS
(Cascading StyleSheet) in HTML.
• Transformations: It allows you to change XML tags to a different tag system, for example,
HTML. This function is known as XSLT. An XSL style sheet can totally reorganize the XML
elements of a document by selecting them then transforming them into other elements.
This function is useful, for example, for synchronizing a set of dissimilar documents.

Note: 4D uses the Xalan-C_1_6_0.dll library to perform XSL transformations. Xalan is a

freeware XSLT processor. For more information, please visit http://xml.apache.org/xalan-
c/index.html.

XSL style sheets are text documents (with .xsl extensions) generated manually or using
specialized applications. The XSL language features various elements and functions that
allow you to perform any type of dynamic transformation. For more information on this
language, please visit http://xmlfr.org (for example).

4D allows you to transform an XML document using an existing XSL style sheet (APPLY
XSLT TRANSFORMATION command). Also, 4D allows you to modify XSL style sheet
parameters on the fly using the SET XSLT PARAMETER command.

Note: An option in the export dialog box lets you use an XSL style sheet when exporting
XML and thus generate a transformed XML document.

4D Language Reference 2289

What is SVG?
SVG (Scalable Vector Graphics) is a file format used to describe vector graphics (extension
.svg) in XML. The most common use of SVG is the publication of statistical or mapping
data.
These files can be viewed in Web browsers either natively, or via plug-ins. 4D v11 includes
an SVG rendering engine that lets you view SVG files in picture fields or variables. The SVG
EXPORT TO PICTURE command can be used to generate a picture in 4D based on an SVG
description. Also note that the GRAPH command can be used to take advantage of the
integrated SVG engine of 4D.
For more information about this format, please refer to the following address:
http://www.w3.org/Graphics/SVG/.

2290 4D Language Reference

APPLY XSLT TRANSFORMATION XML

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

APPLY XSLT TRANSFORMATION (xmlSource; xslSheet; result{; compileSheet})

Parameter Type Description

xmlSource String | BLOB → Name or access path of XML source document, or
BLOB containing the XML source
xslSheet String | BLOB → Name or access path of document containing XSL
stylesheet, or
BLOB containing the XSL stylesheet
result String | BLOB → Name or access path of the document receiving the
result of the XSLT transformation, or
BLOB receiving the result of the XSLT transformation
compileSheet Boolean → True = Optimize XSLT transformation
False or omitted = No optimization, remove the
compiled XSL file (if any)

Description
The APPLY XSLT TRANSFORMATION command applies an XSLT transformation to a
document or a BLOB containing XML and generates a document or a BLOB result. The
scope of this command is the current process.

Note: For more information about XSL transformation (or XSLT), refer to the Overview of
XML Utilities Commands section.

The command requires three BLOBs or character string parameters. Warning: This
command only accepts variables or fields as parameters.

If you pass a character string, you designate a document. In this case, you can only pass the
name (the document must be next to the database structure) or the full access path of the
document.
You cannot mix different types of parameters within the same call.

• The xmlSource parameter must contain the XML source to transform. The command
checks the validity of the XML code.
• The xslSheet parameter must contain the XSL style sheet to use for the XSLT
transformation. This style sheet may have been generated manually or using speciality
software. The command checks the validity of the XML code.
• The result parameter must contain the name of the document or the BLOB that must
receive the result of the XSLT transformation. If you pass a document name that does not
exist at the designated location, 4D creates it automatically. If the document is already
open with write access, an error is generated.

4D Language Reference 2291

The command parses the XML source and transforms it using the instructions in the XSL
style sheet. If the SET XSLT PARAMETER command was used beforehand, the command
replaces the parameters defined by their value. The result of the transformation is written
in the document or BLOB result.

The optional compileSheet parameter can be used to optimize the XSLT transformation,
more particularly in the case of successive applications of the same XSL style sheet. When
the compileSheet parameter is passed and is set to True, the XSL file xslSheet is parsed on
the first call of the command, then is compiled and stored in memory. On each subsequent
call with the same XSL sheet, the command uses the compiled file directly (unless it has
been modified), which can accelerate processing. Optimization does not take into account
any modifications carried out in the imported file (via xsl:import). If a file referenced by the
XSL file is modified, it is necessary to “force” the recompiling of a new XSL file by calling
the command again with the compileSheet parameter set to False (or omitted).

Example
Refer to the example of the SET XSLT PARAMETER command.

See Also
GET XSLT ERROR, SET XSLT PARAMETER.

System Variables or Sets

If the transformation was executed correctly, the system variable OK is set to 1. Otherwise,
it is set to 0.

2292 4D Language Reference

GET XML ERROR XML Utilities

version 2003
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET XML ERROR (elementRef; errorText{; row{; column}})

Parameter Type Description

elementRef String → XML element reference
errorText Variable ← Text of the error
row Variable ← Row number
column Variable ← Column number

Description
The GET XML ERROR command returns, in the errorText parameter, a description of the
error encountered when processing the XML element designated by the elementRef
parameter. The information returned is supplied by the Xerces.DLL library.

The optional row and column parameters indicate the location of the error: they retrieve,
respectively, the row number and, in this row, the position of the first character of the
expression at the origin of the error.

See Also
DOM Get XML information.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been correctly executed, the system variable OK is set to 1. If an error
occurs, it is set to 0.

4D Language Reference 2293

GET XSLT ERROR XML Utilities

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

GET XSLT ERROR (errorText{; row{; column}})

Parameter Type Description

errorText Variable ← Text of the error
row Variable ← Row number
column Variable ← Column number

Description
The GET XSLT ERROR command returns, in the errorText parameter, a description of the last
error encountered during the XSLT transformation performed in the current process. The
information returned is supplied by the Xerces.dll library.

The optional row and column parameters indicate the location of the error in the XSL
document: they retrieve, respectively, the row number and, in this row, the position of the
first character of the expression at the origin of the error.

See Also
APPLY XSLT TRANSFORMATION, SET XSLT PARAMETER.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been executed correctly, the system variable OK is set to 1. If an error
occurs, it is set to 0.

2294 4D Language Reference

SET XSLT PARAMETER XML

version 2004
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SET XSLT PARAMETER (paramName; paramValue)

Parameter Type Description

paramName String → Name of the parameter to look for in the XSL sheet
paramValue String → Value of the parameter to use in the transformed
document

Description
The SET XSLT PARAMETER command must be used jointly with the APPLY XSLT
TRANSFORMATION command. It allows you to define values of variable parameters placed
in an XSL style sheet when the XSLT transformation of an XML document begins. Using
this command, it is possible to insert values coming from 4D processes in the XSL style
sheets right before using APPLY XSLT TRANSFORMATION.

Notes:
• For more information about XSL transformation (or XSLT), refer to the Overview of XML
Utilities Commands section.
• The scope of this command is the current process. It must be called in the same process as
the associated APPLY XSLT TRANSFORMATION command.

Pass the name of the XSL variable parameter to replace in paramName. This parameter must
be present in the XSL style sheet as $toreplace. However, the $ character is not necessary in
paramName. For example, if the instruction <xsl:template match=$myvar> is placed in the
XSL file, simply pass “myvar” in paramName to set this parameter.

In paramValue, pass the value that you wish to insert instead of the XSL variable in the
transformed file. To use the above example, if you pass “title” in paramValue, the XSLT
traansformation will take into account the <xsl:template match="title"> instruction (which
set “title” elements as subject to style rules).
If the value type is string, you must include it between single quotes (for example 'myvalue')
— in addition to the double quotes of the 4D syntax ("'myvalue'").

Note: For a detailed description of XSL language, you can refer to a number of sites on the
Internet dedicated to this language. For example, http://xml.org.

To pass several parameters in an XSL style sheet, simply call the SET XSLT PARAMETER
command several times. The parameters are “stacked” until the APPLY XSLT
TRANSFORMATION call in the same process. Once APPLY XSLT TRANSFORMATION is
executed, the “stack” of parameters is automatically deleted.

4D Language Reference 2295

Example
The following example defines two XSL parameters then transforms the document
mydoc.xml into an HTML file using the style sheet mysheet.xsl:

SET XSLT PARAMETER("varstyle";"'bold'")

SET XSLT PARAMETER("varcolor";"'blue'")
$xmldoc:="mydoc.xml"
$xslsheet:="mysheet.xsl"
$htmldoc:="mydoc.html"
APPLY XSLT TRANSFORMATION($xmldoc;$xslsheet;$htmldoc)

See Also
APPLY XSLT TRANSFORMATION, GET XSLT ERROR.

System Variables or Sets

If the command has been executed correctly, the system variable OK is set to 1. Otherwise,
it is set to 0.

2296 4D Language Reference

SVG Find element ID by coordinates XML Utilities

version 11.3
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SVG Find element ID by coordinates ({*; }pictureObject; x; y) → String

Parameter Type Description

* * → If specified, pictureObject is an object name (string)
If omitted, pictureObject is a field or variable
pictureObject Picture → Object name (if * specified) or
Field or Variable (if * omitted)
x Longint → X coordinate in pixels
y Longint → Y coordinate in pixels

Function result String ← ID of element found at the location X, Y

Description
The SVG Find element ID by coordinates command returns the ID ("id" or "xml:id" attribute)
of the XML element found at the location set by the coordinates (x,y) in the SVG picture
designated by the pictureObject parameter. This command can be used more particularly to
create interactive graphic interfaces using SVG objects.

Note: For more information about the SVG format, please refer to the Overview of XML
Utilities Commands section.

If you pass the optional * parameter, you indicate that the pictureObject parameter is an
object name (string). If you do not pass this parameter, you indicate that the pictureObject
parameter is a field or variable. In this case, you do not pass a string but a field or variable
reference (field or variable object only).

Note that it is not mandatory for the picture to be displayed in a form. In this case, the
"object name" type syntax is not valid and you must pass a field or variable name.

The coordinates passed in the x and y parameters must be expressed in pixels relative to the
top left corner of the picture (0,0). In the context of a picture displayed in a form, you can
use the values returned by the MouseX and MouseY System Variables. These variables are
updated in the On Clicked and On Double Clicked form events, as well as in the On Mouse
Enter and On Mouse Move form events.

Note: In the picture coordinate system, [x;y] always specifies the same point, regardless of
the picture display format, except in the case of the "Replicated" format.

4D Language Reference 2297

The point taken into account is the first point reached. For example, in the case below, the
command will return the ID of the circle if the coordinates of point A are passed and that
of the rectangle if the coordinates of point B are passed:

When the coordinates correspond to superimposed or composite objects, the command

returns the ID of the first object having a valid ID attribute by going back, if necessary,
among the parent elements.

The command returns an empty string if:

• the root is reached without an "id" attribute having been found,
• the coordinates point does not belong to any object,
• the "id" attribute is an empty string.

System Variables or Sets

If pictureObject does not contain a valid SVG picture, the command returns an empty string
and the OK system variable is set to 0. Otherwise, if the command has been executed
correctly, the OK system variable is set to 1.

2298 4D Language Reference

SVG EXPORT TO PICTURE XML Utilities

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

SVG EXPORT TO PICTURE (elementRef; pictVar{; exportType})

Parameter Type Description

elementRef String → Root XML element reference
pictVar Picture → Picture variable to receive XML tree
(SVG picture)
exportType Longint → 0 = Do not store data source
1 = Copy data source
2 (default) = Own data source

Description
The SVG EXPORT TO PICTURE command can be used to save an SVG format picture
contained in an XML tree in the picture field or variable indicated by the pictVar parameter.

Note: For more information about the SVG format, please refer to the Overview of XML
Utilities Commands section.

Pass the root XML element reference that contains the SVG picture in elementRef.

Pass the name of the 4D picture field or variable that will contain the SVG picture in
pictVar. The picture is exported in its native format (XML description) and is redrawn via
the SVG rendering engine when it is displayed.

The optional exportType parameter can be used to define the way the XML data source is to
be handled by the command. You can pass one of the following constants, found in the
“XML” theme, in this parameter:
•Get XML Data Source (0): 4D only reads the XML data source; it is not kept with the
picture. This noticeably increases command execution speed; however, because the DOM
tree is not kept, it is not possible to store or export the picture.
• Copy XML Data Source (1): 4D keeps a copy of the DOM tree with the picture, which
means the picture can be saved in a picture field of the database and then redisplayed or
exported at any time.
• Own XML Data Source (2): 4D exports the DOM tree with the picture. The picture can be
stored or exported and command execution is fast. However, the elementRef XML reference
can then no longer be used by other 4D commands. This is the default mode for exporting
when the exportType parameter is omitted.

4D Language Reference 2299

Example
The following example can be used to display “Hello World” in a 4D picture:

C_PICTURE(vpict)
$svg:=DOM Create XML Ref("svg";"http://www.w3.org/2000/svg")
$ref:=DOM Create XML element($svg;"text";"font-size";26;"fill";"red")
DOM SET XML ELEMENT VALUE($ref;"Hello World")
SVG EXPORT TO PICTURE($svg;vpict;Copy XML Data Source)
DOM CLOSE XML($svg)

See Also
DOM EXPORT TO FILE, DOM EXPORT TO VAR.

2300 4D Language Reference

69
______________________
Error Codes

4D Language Reference 2301

2302 4D Language Reference
Backup Manager Errors (1401 -> 1421) Error Codes

version 2004.4 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The following table lists the specific error codes generated by the backup and restore
module of 4D.
You can retrieve these errors using a method installed via the ON ERR CALL command.

Code Description
1401 The maximum number of backup attempts has been reached; automatic backup
is
temporarily disabled.
1403 No log file.
1404 A transaction is opened in this process.
1405 The maximum timeout for transactions to end in a concurrent process has been
reached.
1406 Backup canceled by user.
1407 Destination folder is not valid.
1408 Error during log file backup.
1409 Error during backup.
1410 Cannot find the backup file to be checked.
1411 Error during backup file check.
1412 Cannot find the log backup file to be checked.
1413 Error during log backup file check.
1414 This command can only be executed on 4D Server.
1415 Cannot back up log file; a critical operation is in progress.
1416 This log file does not correspond to the database opened.
1417 A log integration operation is already running. The backup cannot be launched.
1420 Integration aborted due to detection of locked records.
1421 This command cannot be used in a client/server environment.

• Errors 1408 and 1409 generally come from a read error for files to be backed up or a write
error during file backup.
• Errors 1411 and 1413 occur during checking of archives.
When these errors occur, it may be prudent to first check the space remaining on the disk
and the read-write access privileges.

See Also
ON ERR CALL.

4D Language Reference 2303

Database Engine Errors (-10600 -> 4004) Error Codes

version 11.4 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

This table lists the error codes generated by the 4D Database Engine. These codes cover errors
that occur at a low level of the database engine, such as user interruption, privilege errors, and
damaged objects.

Code Description
-10600 This BLOB could not be read. It may be damaged.
-10517 Failed to synchronize {folder_name} folder.
-10516 The server is running a maintenance operation, please reconnect later.
-10515 Your attempt to connect to 4D Server has been denied
-10514 The maximum number of concurrent users for your license has been reached
-10513 Can't call {cmd_name} command from a 4D remote machine.
-10512 The encoding is not supported
-10511 Can't call command "" from a component.
-10510 Can't load component "".
-10509 Can't open database "".
-10508 Project method not found.
-10507 This version does not allow a compiled database to be opened.
-10506 Limit of the Standard Edition version.
-10505 Client and server have version numbers that are incompatible.
-10504 Index page # is out of range (index needs to be repaired).
-10503 Record # is out of range (during GOTO RECORD, or data file needs to be repaired).
(see note 3)
-10502 Invalid record structure (data file needs to be repaired).
-10501 Invalid index page (index needs to be repaired).
-10500 Invalid record address (database needs to be repaired).

-9999 No more room to save the record. (see note 4)

-9998 Duplicated key.
-9997 Maximum number of records has been reached.
-9996 Stack is full (too much recursion or nested calls).
-9995 Demo limit has been reached.
-9994 Serial communication interrupted by the user—user pressed Ctrl-Alt-Shift
(Windows) or Command-Option-Shift (Mac OS).
-9993 Menu bar is damaged (database needs to be repaired).
-9992 Wrong password.
-9991 Privileges error.
-9990 Time-out error.

2304 4D Language Reference

-9989 Invalid structure (database needs to be repaired).
-9988 The form cannot be loaded. Either the form or the structure is damaged.
-9987 Some other records are already related to this record.
-9986 Record locked during an automatic deletion action.
-9985 Recursive integrity.
-9984 Transaction has been cancelled because of a duplicated index key error.
-9983 The same external package is installed twice.
-9982 The record was not loaded because it is not in the selection on the workstation.
-9981 Invalid field name/field number definition table sent by the workstation.
-9980 The file cannot be created because the structure is locked.
-9979 Unknown user.
-9978 Bad user password.
-9977 The selection does not exist.
-9976 Backup in progress; no modification allowed.
-9975 Transaction index page could not be loaded.
-9974 Record has already been deleted.
-9973 The TRIC resources are not the same.
-9972 Table number is out of range requested by workstation.
-9971 Field number is out of range requested by workstation.
-9970 Field is not indexed.
-9969 Invalid field type requested by workstation.
-9968 Invalid selected record number requested by workstation.
-9967 The record could not be modified because it could not be loaded.
-9966 Invalid type requested by a workstation.
-9965 Bad search definition table sent by a workstation.
-9964 Bad sort definition table sent by a workstation.
-9963 Invalid record number requested by a workstation.
-9962 The backup cannot be run because the server is shutting down.
-9961 The backup process is not currently running.
-9960 4D Backup is not installed on the server.
-9959 The backup process has already been started by another user or process.
-9958 The process could not be started.
-9957 The choice list is locked.
-9956 Versions of 4D Client and 4D Server are different.
-9955 QuickTime is not installed.
-9954 There is no current record.
-9953 There is no Log file.
-9952 Invalid data segment header.
-9951 This field has no relation.
-9950 Invalid data segment number.
-9949 License or privilege error.
-9948 A modal dialog is activated.

4D Language Reference 2305

-9947 The “Allow 4D Open connections” check box has not been selected.
-9946 Unable to clear the named selection because it does not exist.
-9945 CD-ROM 4D Runtime error; writing operations are not allowed.
-9944 The user does not belong to the 4D Open access group.
-9943 4D Connectivity Plug-ins version error.
-9942 4D Client licensing scheme is incompatible with this version of 4D Server.
-9941 Unknown EX_GESTALT selector.
-9940 4D Extension initialization failed.
-9939 External routine not found.
-9938 The current record has been changed from within the trigger.
-9937 Password System is locked by another user.
-9936 Password extern code does not correspond to the database one
-9935 The XML file is not valid or is not well-formed.
-9934 The XML file is not well-formed.
-9933 The XML file is not valid.
-9932 The XML DLL is not loaded.
-9931 The index for this attribute is invalid.
-9930 There is no attribute with this name for this element.
-9929 The index for this element is invalid.
-9928 The name of the element is unknown.
-9927 The referenced element is not the “root”.
-9926 The referenced element is invalid.
-9925 The referenced element is null.
-9924 The file must be opened in read only
-9923 The attribute name is not valid
-9922 Lack the parameter value in the attributes definition
-9921 Attempt to write a XML Prolog on a non empty document
-9920 The type of the node is invalid
-9919 This encoding is not supported.
-9918 The name of the element is invalid.
-9917 The type of the array passed in parameter is invalid.
-9916 The element is not open.
-9915 The document's reference is invalid.
-9914 Internal fault.
-9913 Network fault.
-9912 HTTP fault.
-9911 Parser fault.
-9910 Soap fault.
-9909 No window available to run the form.
-9855 Invalid parameter number 5.
-9854 Invalid parameter number 4.
-9853 Invalid parameter number 3.

2306 4D Language Reference

-9852 Invalid parameter number 2.
-9851 Invalid parameter number 1.
-9850 Invalid area parameter passed to an external command.
-9800 One of the processes modified the access rights.
-9759 The Object Library could not be opened.
-9758 The user form already exists.
-9757 The user form does not exist.
-9756 There is no user structure file.
-9755 The user form does not have a name.
-9754 This command cannot be used from a dialog window.
-9753 The source form does not exist.
-9752 The user form cannot be created.
-9751 The source form is not accessible by the user.
-9750 The source form is not editable.

-1 Unknown entry point requested by a Plug-In

1001 No column to import in table {TableName}

1002 Wrong table to import
1003 No column to export in table {TableName}
1004 Wrong table to export
1006 Program interrupted by user—user pressed Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click
(Mac OS)
1006 Cannot save structure of database {BaseName}
1007 Cannot create data file of database: {BaseName}
1008 Wrong data segment in database {BaseName}
1009 Memory is full
1010 Cannot load a table definition of database {BaseName}
1011 Cannot open data file of database {BaseName}
1012 Data segment is full in database: {BaseName}
1013 Cannot save data segment in database {BaseName}
1014 Cannot read data segment of database {BaseName}
1015 Wrong database header in database {BaseName}
1016 Cannot create table in database {BaseName}
1017 Cannot read index list of database {BaseName}
1018 Cannot write index list of database {BaseName}
1019 Wrong table reference in database {BaseName}
1020 Wrong field reference in database {BaseName}
1021 Invalid index type in database {BaseName}
1022 Invalid field name in table {TableName} of database {BaseName}
1023 Invalid database name
1024 Cannot open structure of database {BaseName}

4D Language Reference 2307

1025 Cannot create structure of database {BaseName}
1026 Cannot load bit selection of database {BaseName}
1027 Cannot load set of database {BaseName}
1028 Cannot modify set of database {BaseName}
1029 Cannot save set of database {BaseName}
1030 Cannot save BLOB {BlobNum} in table {TableName} of database {BaseName}
1031 Cannot load BLOB {BlobNum} in table {TableName} of database {BaseName}
1032 Cannot allocate BLOB {BlobNum} in table {TableName} of database {BaseName}
1033 Cannot load data bit table of database {BaseName}
1034 Cannot save data bit table of database {BaseName}
1035 Cannot load table of data bit tables of database {BaseName}
1036 Cannot save table of data bit tables in database {BaseName}
1037 Cannot close data segment of database {BaseName}
1038 Cannot delete data segment of database {BaseName}
1039 Cannot open data segment of database {BaseName}
1040 Cannot create data segment of database {BaseName}
1041 Cannot allocate space in data segment
1042 Cannot free space in data segment of database {BaseName}
1043 File is write protected
1044 Cannot access field in record {RecNum} in table {TableName} of database
{BaseName}
1045 Field definition code is missing in record {RecNum} in table {TableName} of
database {BaseName}
1046 Cannot save record {RecNum} in table {TableName} of database {BaseName}
1047 Cannot load record {RecNum} in table {TableName} of database {BaseName}
1048 Cannot allocate record in table {TableName} of database {BaseName}
1049 Cannot update record {RecNum} in table {TableName} of database {BaseName}
1050 Wrong header for record {RecNum} in table {TableName} of database {BaseName}
1051 Cannot save definition of table {TableName} of database {BaseName}
1052 Cannot update definition of table {TableName} of database {BaseName}
1053 Field name already exists
1055 Cannot update index values while saving a record in table {TableName} of database
{BaseName}
1056 Cannot update BLOBs while saving a record in table {TableName} of database
{BaseName}
1057 Cannot delete BLOBs while saving or deleting a record in table {TableName} of
database {BaseName}
1058 Cannot add field in table {TableName} of database {BaseName}
1059 Cannot allocate table in memory
1061 Cannot allocate record in memory
1062 Cannot completely delete table {TableName} of database {BaseName}
1063 Cannot lock record {RecNum} in table {TableName} of database {BaseName}

2308 4D Language Reference

1064 Cannot unlock record {RecNum} in table {TableName} of database {BaseName}
1065 Cannot delete record {RecNum} in table {TableName} of database {BaseName}
1066 Record {RecNum} is locked in table {TableName} of database {BaseName}
1067 Sequential search could not be completed in table {TableName} of database
{BaseName}<
1068 Cannot save header for table {TableName} of database {BaseName}<
1069 Cannot import data in table {TableName} of database {BaseName}
1070 Cannot load index header of database {BaseName}
1071 Cannot save header for index {IndexName} of database {BaseName}
1072 Cannot get page address for index {IndexName} of database {BaseName}
1073 Cannot set page address for index {IndexName} of database {BaseName}
1074 Cannot drop index {IndexName} of database {BaseName}
1075 Cannot sort index {IndexName} of database {BaseName}
1076 Cannot load page for index {IndexName} of database {BaseName}
1077 Cannot save page for index {IndexName} of database {BaseName}
1078 Cannot insert key into index {IndexName} of database {BaseName}
1079 Cannot delete key from index {IndexName} of database {BaseName}
1080 Cannot completely delete index {IndexName} of database {BaseName}
1081 Cannot complete scan on index {IndexName} of database {BaseName}
1082 Cannot complete sort of index {IndexName} of database {BaseName}
1083 Cannot insert key into page of index {IndexName} of database {BaseName}
1084 Cannot delete key from page of index {IndexName} of database {BaseName}
1085 Cannot load index cluster of database {BaseName}
1086 Cannot add to index cluster of database {BaseName}
1087 Cannot delete from index cluster of database {BaseName}
1088 Index {IndexName} is invalid
1089 SQL syntax error (Obsolete)
1090 SQL token not found (Obsolete)
1091 Not implemented
1092 Cannot register code
1093 Operation in progress cancelled by user
1094 Transaction conflict
1095 Invalid table name in database {BaseName}
1096 Table {TableName} is locked in database {BaseName}
1097 Database {BaseName} is locked
1098 Data address is invalid in database {BaseName}
1099 Record is empty
1100 Wrong source field
1101 Wrong destination field
1102 Invalid relation name
1103 Field types do not match
1104 Relation is empty<

4D Language Reference 2309

1105 Cannot load relations list from database {BaseName}
1106 Cannot save relations list into database {BaseName}
1107 Query and lock not completed; at least one record locked somewhere else
1108 Invalid record
1109 Wrong record ID
1110 Relation already exists in database {BaseName}
1111 Index already exists in database {BaseName}
1112 Wrong comparison operator
1113 End of data buffer
1114 Wrong DB4D version number
1115 Duplicated key
1116 Mandatory field is Null in record {RecNum} in table {TableName}
1117 Cannot set field to mandatory for table {TableName}
1118 Cannot get exclusive access to table {TableName}
1119 Cannot check referential integrity of table {TableName}
1120 Reference integrity: some foreign keys still exist matching primary key on record
{RecNum} in table {TableName}
1121 Cannot delete all records in selection of table {TableName}
1122 BLOB is Null
1123 Invalid database context
1124 Invalid relation reference
1125 Invalid record name in table {TableName}
1126 Wrong field type
1127 Cannot load extra properties
1128 Cannot save extra properties
1129 Subrecord ID is out of range
1130 Duplicate name for index {IndexName} in database {BaseName}
1131 Invalid name for index {IndexName} in database {BaseName}
1132 Wrong key value on index {IndexName}
1133 Wrong type for index {IndexName}
1134 Invalid accessor
1135 Accessor is read only
1136 Null value not accepted
1137 THIS is Null
1138 Selection is Null
1139 Database {BaseName} is write protected
1140 Database {BaseName} is closing
1141 Invalid transaction
1142 Array limit is exceeded
1143 Creator of array values is missing
1144 Cannot build selection of table {TableName}
1145 Busy object

2310 4D Language Reference

1146 Data file does not match structure file
1147 Cannot start listener
1148 Cannot start server
1149 No listener
1150 Task is dying
1151 Invalid request tag
1152 Invalid context ID
1153 Not enough temporary space on disk
1154 Data set is Null
1155 No primary key matching the foreign key
1156 Type of field {FieldName} of table {TableName} does not support being set to
Unique
1157 Type of field {FieldName} of table {TableName} does not support being set to
NEVER NULL
1158 Cannot alter primary key definition of table {TableName}
1159 Maximum number of records has been reached for table {TableName}
1160 Maximum number of BLOBs has been reached for table {TableName}
1161 Indice is out of range
1162 Query is invalid
1163 Record is NULL
1164 Object is NULL
1165 Wrong owner for this object
1166 Object was not locked
1167 Object is locked by another context
1168 Internal error on remote connection
1169 Invalid table number
1170 Invalid field number
1171 Invalid Database ID
1172 Invalid Parameter
1173 Cache Flushing did not complete
1174 Data Flushing did not complete
1175 Structure Flushing did not complete
1176 Log file is invalid for database {BaseName}
1177 Log file cannot be found for database {BaseName}
1178 Last operation in log file doest not match the one in database {BaseName}
1179 Log file does not match database {BaseName}
1180 Data Table has been deleted
1181 Keys are not unique in index {IndexName}
1182 Cannot create log file for database {DataBase}
1183 Cannot write into log file of database {DataBase}
1184 Cannot drop table {TableName} in database {DataBase}
1185 Remote database cannot be opened<

4D Language Reference 2311

1186 Log file cannot be integrated into database {DataBase}
1187 Internal Computation on Set cannot be completed
1188 Array cannot be saved
1189 Array cannot be loaded
1190 Sequence number header cannot be loaded
1191 Cannot select record
1192 Record cannot be created
1193 Cannot complete selection to array in table {TableName} of database {BaseName}
1194 Cannot complete array to selection in table {TableName} of database {BaseName}
1195 Cannot complete sequential sort
1196 Selection cannot be locked
1197 Index key cannot be loaded
1198 Index key cannot be saved
1199 Index key cannot be built
1200 Query cannot be completed
1201 Query cannot be analyzed
1202 Formula could not be processed on this column
1203 Query could not be completed
1204 Query could not be analyzed
1205 Could not get all distinct values of table {TableName} of database {BaseName}
1206 Cannot build array of values in table {TableName} of database {BaseName}
1207 Selection cannot be loaded
1208 Cannot send data
1209 Cannot receive request reply
1210 Cannot send request
1211 Cannot create connection
1212 Index {IndexName} cannot be quickly created in database {BaseName}
1213 Cannot build distinct index keys
1214 Selection cannot be sorted in table {TableName} of database {BaseName}
1215 Address table cannot loaded
1216 Address table cannot modified
1217 Cannot allocate new entry into address table
1218 Cannot allocate free entry from address table
1219 Transaction temporary record cannot be saved
1220 Transaction temporary blob cannot be saved
1221 Transaction temporary record cannot be loaded
1222 Transaction temporary blob cannot be loaded
1223 Transaction cannot be started
1224 Transaction cannot be commited
1225 Cannot get extra property
1226 Cannot set extra property
1227 Table name is already used

2312 4D Language Reference

1228 Cannot get list of NULL keys from index {IndexName}
1229 Cannot modify list of NULL keys of index {IndexName}
1230 Invalid key for index {IndexName}
1231 Cannot set log file
1232 Context is NULL
1233 Database {BaseName} cannot be locked
1234 Wrong field reference in record# {RecNum} of table: {TableName} of database:
{BaseName}
1235 Wrong field reference in table: {TableName} of database: {BaseName}
1236 Cannot read data from temporary transaction file
1237 Cartesian Product failed
1238 Cannot merge selections
1239 The format of the {BaseName} database cannot be upgraded in read only mode
1240 Wrong Header
1241 Wrong CheckSum
1243 Cannot load data tables of database: {BaseName}
1244 The list of foreign key constraints is not empty for table: {TableName} of database:
{BaseName}
1245 Address entry is not empty
1246 Cannot pre-allocate address
1247 Cannot update new record in table {TableName} of database {BaseName}
1248 Cannot save new record in table {TableName} of database {BaseName}
1249 Cannot save subrecord
1250 Cannot save record
1251 Cannot lock structure object definition
1252 Cannot unlock structure object definition
1253 Invalid relation number
1254 Circular Reference in records address table of table {TableName} of database
{BaseName}
1255 Circular Reference in blobs address table of table {TableName} of database
{BaseName}
1256 Duplicated Schema Name in database {BaseName}
1257 Schema cannot be saved in database {BaseName}
1258 Schema cannot be deleted in database {BaseName}
1259 Schema cannot be renamed in database {BaseName}
1260 Selected log file is too recent for database {BaseName}
1261 Selected log file is too old for database {BaseName}

1300 Invalid Selection Type

1301 Array is too big
1302 Array size does not match
1303 Invalid Selection ID
1304 Invalid Selection Part

4D Language Reference 2313

4001 Invalid table number requested by a Plug-In
4002 Invalid record number requested by a Plug-In
4003 Invalid field number requested by a Plug-In
4004 Access to a table's current record requested by a Plug-in while there is no current
record

Notes
1. While some of the errors listed reflect serious problems, i.e., -10502 Invalid record structure
(data file needs to be repaired), other errors may occur on a regular basis and can be managed
using an ON ERR CALL project method. For example, it is common to handle the error –9998
Duplicated key if your application offers opportunities to create duplicated values for a table
that includes an indexed field whose Unique property is set.

2. Some of the errors listed never occur at the 4D language level. They can occur and be
handled at a low level by database engine routines or when using 4D Backup or 4D Open.

3. The error -10503 Record # is out of range generally means that your code (for example, the
GOTO RECORD command) is attempting to access a record that no longer exists (or has never
existed). In certain more unusual cases, this error may mean that the database needs repairing.

4. The error -9999 No more room to save the record occurs when the data file of your database
is full or located on a full volume. This error can also be generated if the data file is locked or
located on a locked volume.

See Also
ON ERR CALL.

2314 4D Language Reference

Mac OS System Errors (4 -> 28) Error Codes

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The following table lists some of the Mac OS system errors. It is usually not possible to recover
from these errors.

Code Description
4 Zero divide
15 Segment Loader Error: 4D failed in loading one of its own code segments.
You must allocate more memory to 4D.
17 to 24 A system package is missing. Check if your system directory has been correctly
installed
25 Out of memory
You must allocate more memory to 4D.
28 Stack has moved into the application heap.
You must allocate more memory to 4D.

4D Language Reference 2315

Network Errors (-10051 -> -10001) Error Codes

version 6.8 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The following table describes the errors that can occur with a network connection.

Code Description
-10051 Incorrect value in Get/SetOption.
-10050 Unknown option in Get/SetOption.
-10033 Incorrect data size during read cycle.
-10031 Desynchronization has occured during the read cycle.
-10030 Desynchronization has occured during the write cycle.
-10021 No server was found while using OP Find 4D server.
-10020 No server was selected while using OP Select 4D server.
-10003 Bad connection parameters.
-10002 The connection for this process has been disrupted.
-10001 The actual connection to the database has been disrupted.

2316 4D Language Reference

OS File Manager Errors (-124 -> -33) Error Codes

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The following table lists codes returned by the Operating System File Manager. These codes
can be returned when you are using, for example, the System Documents commands. In this
list, the word “file” indicates a document on disk and not a file in your database structure.

Code Description
-124 Tried to access a disconnected shared volume.
-121 An access path could not be created.
-120 Tried to access a file by using a pathname that specifies a non existing directory.
-84 There is a hardware problem with the disk (bad installation, incorrect formatting,...).
-64 There is a hardware problem with the disk (bad installation, incorrect formatting,...).
-61 Read/write permission doesn’t allow writing.
-60 Bad master directory block. Your disk is damaged.
-58 Error in the external file system.
-57 Tried to work with a non-Macintosh disk.
-54 Attempt to open locked file for writing.
-53 Volume not on line.
-52 Internal file manager error (position of file marker is lost).
-51 Tried to access a document with an invalid document reference number.
-49 Tried to open a file already open with write permission.
-48 Tried to rename a file with the name of an already deleted file.
-47 Tried to access a file that has been deleted.
-46 Volume is locked by an application.
-45 File is locked.
-44 Volume is locked by a hardware setting.
-43 File not found.
-42 Too many files open at the same time.
-41 Not enough memory to open a new file on the disk.
-40 Attempt to position before start of file.
-39 Logical end-of-file reached during read operation.
-38 Tried to read or write to a file that is not open.
-37 Bad filename or volume name.
-36 I/O error. There is probably a bad block on the disk.
-35 Specified volume doesn’t exist.
-34 Disk is full. There is no more room available on the disk.
-33 File directory full. You cannot create new files on disk.

See Also
ON ERR CALL.

4D Language Reference 2317

OS Memory Manager Errors (-117 -> -108) Error Codes

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The following table lists the error codes returned by the Operating System Memory Manager.

Code Description
-117 Internal Memory problem. Memory is probably logically corrupted.
Exit as soon as possible. Restart your machine and reopen the database.
-111 Internal Memory problem. Memory is probably logically corrupted.
Exit as soon as possible. Restart your machine and reopen the database. (*)
-109 Internal Memory problem. Memory is probably logically corrupted.
Exit as soon as possible. Restart your machine and reopen the database.
-108 Not enough memory to perform an operation.
Give more memory to your 4D application.

Tip: When allocating and working with large arrays, BLOBs, pictures, as well as sets (objects
that can hold large amount of data), use an ON ERR CALL project method to test the error -108.

(*) Error -111 can also occur when you attempt to read a value from a BLOB with an offset out
of range. In this case, the error is minor and you do not need to terminate the working
session. Just fix the offset you pass to the BLOB command.

See Also
ON ERR CALL.

2318 4D Language Reference

OS Printing Manager Errors (-8192 -> -1) Error Codes

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The following table lists the error codes returned by the Operating System Printing Manager.
These codes can be returned during printing.

Code Description
-8192 LaserWriter time-out
-8151 The printer has been initialized with a different driver version
-8150 A LaserWriter is not selected
-4101 Printer busy or not connected
-4100 Printer connection has been interrupted
-193 Resource file not found
-128 Printing interrupted by the user
-27 Problem opening or closing connection with printer
-1 Problem saving file to be printed

See Also
ON ERR CALL.

4D Language Reference 2319

OS Resource Manager Errors (-196 -> -1) Error Codes

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The following table lists the error codes returned by the Operating System Resource Manager.

Code Description
-196 Resource could not be deleted
-194 Resource could not be added
-193 Resource map is damaged (file needs to be repaired)
-192 Resource not found
-1 Resource file could not be opened

See Also
ON ERR CALL.

2320 4D Language Reference

OS Serial Ports Manager Errors (-28) Error Codes

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The following table lists error codes returned by the Operating System Serial Ports Manager.

Code Description
-28 There is no open serial port

See Also
ON ERR CALL.

4D Language Reference 2321

OS Sound Manager Errors (-209 -> -203) Error Codes

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The following table lists the codes returned by the Operating System Sound Manager.

Code Description
-209 The sound channel is busy
-207 Not enough memory to perform the sound
-206 The format of the sound resource is wrong
-205 The sound channel is logically corrupted
-204 The sound resource cannot be loaded
-203 Too many sound commands

See Also
ON ERR CALL.

2322 4D Language Reference

SANE NaN Errors (1 -> 255) Error Codes

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The following table lists the NaN codes returned by the Operating System. NaN is a Standard
Apple Numeric Environment (SANE) representation which means “Not a Number.” NaN
appears when an operation produces a result that is beyond SANE’s scope.

Code Description
1 Invalid square root
2 Invalid addition
4 Invalid division
8 Invalid multiplication
9 Invalid remainder
17 Converting an invalid ASCII string
20 Converting a Comp type number to floating-point
21 Creating a NaN with a zero code
33 Invalid argument to a trig function
34 Invalid argument to an inverse trig function
36 Invalid argument to a log function
37 Invalid argument to an xi or xy function
38 Invalid argument to a financial function
255 Uninitialized storage

4D Language Reference 2323

SQL Engine Errors (1001 -> 3018) Error Codes

version 11
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The SQL engine of 4D returns specific errors which are listed below. These errors can be
intercepted using an error-handling method installed by the ON ERR CALL command and
analyzed using the GET LAST ERROR STACK command.

Generic errors
1001 INVALID ARGUMENT
1002 INVALID INTERNAL STATE
1003 SQL SERVER IS NOT RUNNING
1004 Access denied
1005 FAILED TO LOCK SYNCHRONIZATION PRIMITIVE
1006 FAILED TO UNLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION PRIMITIVE
1007 SQL SERVER IS NOT AVAILABLE
1008 COMPONENT BRIDGE IS NOT AVAILABLE
1009 REMOTE SQL SERVER IS NOT AVAILABLE
1010 EXECUTION INTERRUPTED BY USER

Semantic errors
1101 Table '{key1}' does not exist in the database.
1102 Column '{key1}' does not exist.
1103 Table '{key1}' is not declared in the FROM clause.
1104 Column name reference '{key1}' is ambiguous.
1105 Table alias '{key1}' is the same as table name.
1106 Duplicate table alias - '{key1}'.
1107 Duplicate table in the FROM clause - '{key1}'.
1108 Operation {key1} {key2} {key3} is not type safe.
1109 Invalid ORDER BY index - {key1}.
1110 Function {key1} expects one parameter, not {key2}.
1111 Parameter {key1} of type {key2} in function call {key3} is not implicitly
convertible to {key4}.
1112 Unknown function - {key1}.
1113 Division by zero.
1114 Sorting by indexed item in the SELECT list is not allowed - ORDER BY item
{key1}.
1115 DISTINCT NOT ALLOWED
1116 Nested aggregate functions are not allowed in the aggregate function {key1}.
1117 Column function is not allowed.
1118 Cannot mix column and scalar operations.
1119 Invalid GROUP BY index - {key1}.
1120 GROUP BY index is not allowed.
1121 GROUP BY is not allowed with 'SELECT * FROM ...'.

2324 4D Language Reference

1122 HAVING is not an aggregate expression.
1123 Column '{key1}' is not a grouping column and cannot be used in the ORDER BY
clause.
1124 Cannot mix {key1} and {key2} types in the IN predicate.
1125 Escape sequence '{key1}' in the LIKE predicate is too long. It must be exactly one
character.
1126 Bad escape character - '{key1}'.
1127 Unknown escape sequence - '{key1}'.
1128 Column references from more than one query in aggregate function {key1} are
not allowed.
1129 Scalar item in the SELECT list is not allowed when GROUP BY clause is present.
1130 Sub-query produces more than one column.
1131 Subquery must return one row at the most but instead it returns {key1}.
1132 INSERT value count {key1} does not match column count {key2}.
1133 Duplicate column reference in the INSERT list - '{key1}'.
1134 Column '{key1}' does not allow NULL values.
1135 Duplicate column reference in the UPDATE list - '{key1}'.
1136 Table '{key1}' already exists.
1137 Duplicate column '{key1}' in the CREATE TABLE command.
1138 DUPLICATE COLUMN IN COLUMN LIST
1139 More than one primary key is not allowed.
1140 Ambiguous foreign key name - '{key1}'.
1141 Column count {key1} in the child table does not match column count {key2} in
the parent table of the foreign key definition.
1142 Column type mismatch in the foreign key definition. Cannot relate {key1} in
child table to {key2} in parent table.
1143 Failed to find matching column in parent table for '{key1}' column in child
table.
1144 UPDATE and DELETE constraints must be the same.
1145 FOREIGN KEY DOES NOT EXIST
1146 Invalid LIMIT value in SELECT command - {key1}.
1147 Invalid OFFSET value in SELECT command - {key1}.
1148 Primary key does not exist in table '{key1}'.
1149 FAILED TO CREATE FOREIGN KEY
1150 Column '{key1}' is not part of a primary key.
1151 FIELD IS NOT UPDATEABLE
1152 FOUND VIEW COLUMN
1153 Bad data type length '{key1}'.
1154 EXPECTED EXECUTE IMMEDIATE COMMAND
1155 INDEX ALREADY EXISTS
1156 Auto-increment option is not allowed for column '{key1}' of type {key2}.
1157 SCHEMA ALREADY EXISTS
1158 SCHEMA DOES NOT EXIST
1159 Cannot drop system schema
1160 CHARACTER ENCODING NOT ALLOWED

4D Language Reference 2325

Implementation errors
1203 FUNCTIONALITY IS NOT IMPLEMENTED
1204 Failed to create record {key1}.
1205 Failed to update field '{key1}'.
1206 Failed to delete record '{key1}'.
1207 NO MORE JOIN SEEDS POSSIBLE
1208 FAILED TO CREATE TABLE
1209 FAILED TO DROP TABLE
1210 CANT BUILD BTREE FOR ZERO RECORDS
1211 COMMAND COUNT GREATER THAN ALLOWED
1212 FAILED TO CREATE DATABASE
1213 FAILED TO DROP COLUMN
1214 VALUE IS OUT OF BOUNDS
1215 FAILED TO STOP SQL_SERVER
1216 FAILED TO LOCALIZE
1217 Failed to lock table for reading.
1218 FAILED TO LOCK TABLE FOR WRITING
1219 TABLE STRUCTURE STAMP CHANGED
1220 FAILED TO LOAD RECORD
1221 FAILED TO LOCK RECORD FOR WRITING
1222 FAILED TO PUT SQL LOCK ON A TABLE
1223 FAILED TO RETAIN COOPERATIVE TASK
1224 FAILED TO LOAD INFILE

Parsing error
1301 PARSING FAILED

Runtime language access errors

1401 COMMAND NOT SPECIFIED
1402 ALREADY LOGGED IN
1403 SESSION DOES NOT EXIST
1404 UNKNOWN BIND ENTITY
1405 INCOMPATIBLE BIND ENTITIES
1406 REQUEST RESULT NOT AVAILABLE
1407 BINDING LOAD FAILED
1408 COULD NOT RECOVER FROM PREVIOUS ERRORS
1409 NO OPEN STATEMENT
1410 RESULT EOF
1411 BOUND VALUE IS NULL
1412 STATEMENT ALREADY OPENED
1413 FAILED TO GET PARAMETER VALUE
1414 INCOMPATIBLE PARAMETER ENTITIES
1415 Query parameter is either not allowed or was not provided.
1416 COLUMN REFERENCE PARAMETERS FROM DIFFERENT TABLES
1417 EMPTY STATEMENT
1418 FAILED TO UPDATE VARIABLE

2326 4D Language Reference

1419 FAILED TO GET TABLE REFERENCE
1420 FAILED TO GET TABLE CONTEXT
1421 COLUMNS NOT ALLOWED
1422 INVALID COMMAND COUNT
1423 INTO CLAUSE NOT ALLOWED
1424 EXECUTE IMMEDIATE NOT ALLOWED
1425 ARRAY NOT ALLOWED IN EXECUTE IMMEDIATE
1426 COLUMN NOT ALLOWED IN EXECUTE IMMEDIATE
1427 NESTED BEGIN END SQL NOT ALLOWED
1428 RESULT IS NOT A SELECTION
1429 INTO ITEM IS NOT A VARIABLE
1430 VARIABLE WAS NOT FOUND
1431 PTR OF PTR NOT ALLOWED
1432 POINTER OF UNKNOWN TYPE

Date formatting errors

1501 SEPARATOR_EXPECTED
1502 FAILED TO PARSE DAY OF MONTH
1503 FAILED TO PARSE MONTH
1504 FAILED TO PARSE YEAR
1505 FAILED TO PARSE HOUR
1506 FAILED TO PARSE MINUTE
1507 FAILED TO PARSE SECOND
1508 FAILED TO PARSE MILLISECOND
1509 INVALID AM PM USAGE
1510 FAILED TO PARSE TIME ZONE
1511 UNEXPECTED CHARACTER
1512 Failed to parse timestamp.
1513 Failed to parse duration.
1551 FAILED TO PARSE DATE FORMAT

Lexer errors
1601 NULL INPUT STRING
1602 NON TERMINATED STRING
1603 NON TERMINATED COMMENT
1604 INVALID NUMBER
1605 UNKNOWN START OF TOKEN
1606 NON TERMINATED NAME/* closing ']' is missing
1607 NO VALID TOKENS

Validation errors for error stack - state errors that follow direct errors
1701 Failed to validate table '{key1}'.
1702 Failed to validate FROM clause.
1703 Failed to validate GROUP BY clause.
1704 Failed to validate SELECT list.
1705 Failed to validate WHERE clause.

4D Language Reference 2327

1706 Failed to validate ORDER BY clause.
1707 Failed to validate HAVING clause.
1708 Failed to validate COMPARISON predicate.
1709 Failed to validate BETWEEN predicate.
1710 Failed to validate IN predicate.
1711 Failed to validate LIKE predicate.
1712 Failed to validate ALL ANY predicate.
1713 Failed to validate EXISTS predicate.
1714 Failed to validate IS NULL predicate.
1715 Failed to validate subquery.
1716 Failed to validate SELECT item {key1}.
1717 Failed to validate column '{key1}'.
1718 Failed to validate function '{key1}'.
1719 Failed to validate CASE expression.
1720 Failed to validate command parameter.
1721 Failed to validate function parameter {key1}.
1722 Failed to validate INSERT item {key1}.
1723 Failed to validate UPDATE item {key1}.
1724 Failed to validate column list.
1725 Failed to validate foreign key.
1726 Failed to validate SELECT command.
1727 Failed to validate INSERT command.
1728 Failed to validate DELETE command.
1729 Failed to validate UPDATE command.
1730 Failed to validate CREATE TABLE command.
1731 Failed to validate DROP TABLE command.
1732 Failed to validate ALTER TABLE command.
1733 Failed to validate CREATE INDEX command.
1734 Failed to validate LOCK TABLE command.
1735 Failed to calculate LIKE predicate pattern.

Execution errors for error stack - state errors that follow direct errors
1801 Failed to execute SELECT command.
1802 Failed to execute INSERT command.
1803 Failed to execute DELETE command.
1804 Failed to execute UPDATE command.
1805 Failed to execute CREATE TABLE command.
1806 Failed to execute DROP TABLE command.
1807 Failed to execute CREATE DATABASE command.
1808 Failed to execute ALTER TABLE command.
1809 Failed to execute CREATE INDEX command.
1810 Failed to execute DROP INDEX command.
1811 Failed to execute LOCK TABLE command.
1812 Failed to execute TRANSACTION command.
1813 Failed to execute WHERE clause.
1814 Failed to execute GROUP BY clause.

2328 4D Language Reference

1815 Failed to execute HAVING clause.
1816 Failed to aggregate.
1817 Failed to execute DISTINCT.
1818 Failed to execute ORDER BY clause.
1819 Failed to build DB4D query.
1820 Failed to calculate comparison predicate.
1821 Failed to execute subquery.
1822 Failed to calculate BETWEEN predicate.
1823 Failed to calculate IN predicate.
1824 Failed to calculate ALL/ANY predicate.
1825 Failed to calculate LIKE predicate.
1826 Failed to calculate EXISTS predicate.
1827 Failed to calculate NULL predicate.
1828 Failed to perform arithmetic operation.
1829 Failed to calculate function call '{key1}'.
1830 Failed to calculate case expression.
1831 Failed to calculate function parameter '{key1}'.
1832 Failed to calculate 4D function call.
1833 Failed to sort while executing ORDER BY clause.
1834 Failed to calculate record hash.
1835 Failed to compare records.
1836 Failed to calculate INSERT value {key1}.
1837 DB4D QUERY FAILED
1838 FAILED TO EXECUTE ALTER SCHEMA COMMAND
1839 FAILED TO EXECUTE GRANT COMMAND

Cacheable errors
2000 CACHEABLE NOT INITIALIZED
2001 VALUE ALREADY CACHED
2002 CACHED VALUE NOT FOUND
2003 CACHE IS FULL
2004 CACHING IS NOT POSSIBLE

Protocol errors
3000 HEADER NOT FOUND
3001 UNKNOWN COMMAND
3002 ALREADY LOGGED IN
3003 NOT LOGGED IN
3004 UNKNOWN OUTPUT MODE
3005 INVALID STATEMENT ID
3006 UNKNOWN DATA TYPE
3007 STILL LOGGED IN
3008 SOCKET READ ERROR
3009 SOCKET WRITE ERROR
3010 BASE64 DECODING ERROR

4D Language Reference 2329

3011 SESSION TIMEOUT
3012 FETCH TIMESTAMP ALREADY EXISTS
3013 BASE64 ENCODING ERROR
3014 INVALID HEADER TERMINATOR
3015 INVALID SESSION TICKET
3016 HEADER TOO LONG
3017 INVALID AGENT SIGNATURE
3018 UNEXPECTED HEADER VALUE

2330 4D Language Reference

Syntax Errors (1 -> 81) Error Codes

version 2004 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The following table lists the syntax error codes for errors that may occur during code
execution in the Design or Application environment. Some of these errors may occur in
interpreted mode only, some in compiled mode only, some in both modes. You can intercept
these errors using an error interruption method installed using ON ERR CALL.

Code Description
1 A “(” was expected.
2 A field was expected.
3 The command may be executed only on a field in a subtable.
4 Parameters in the list must all be of the same type.
5 There is no table to which to apply the command.
6 The command may only be executed on a Subtable type field.
7 A Numeric argument was expected.
8 An Alphanumeric argument was expected.
9 The result of a conditional test was expected.
10 The command cannot be applied to this field type.
11 The command cannot be applied between two conditional tests.
12 The command cannot be applied between two Numeric arguments.
13 The command cannot be applied between two Alphanumeric arguments.
14 The command cannot be applied between two Date arguments.
15 The operation is not compatible with the two arguments.
16 The field has no relation.
17 A table was expected.
18 Field types are incompatible.
19 The field is not indexed.
20 An “=” was expected.
21 The method does not exist.
22 The fields must belong to the same table or subtable for a sort or graph.
23 A “<” or “>” was expected.
24 A “;” was expected.
25 There are too many fields for a sort.
26 The field type cannot be Text, Picture, Blob or Subtable.
27 The field must be prefixed by the name of its table.
28 The field type must be Numeric.
29 The value must be 1 or 0.
30 A variable was expected.
31 There is no menu bar with this number.

4D Language Reference 2331

32 A date was expected.
33 Unimplemented command or function.
34 Accounting files are not open.
35 The sets are from different tables.
36 Invalid table name.
37 A “:=” was expected.
38 This is a function, not a procedure.
39 The set does not exist.
40 This is a procedure, not a function.
41 A variable or field belonging to a subtable was expected.
42 The record cannot be pushed onto the stack.
43 The function cannot be found.
44 The method cannot be found.
45 Field or variable expected.
46 A Numeric or Alphanumeric argument was expected.
47 The field type must be Alphanumeric.
48 Syntax error.
49 This operator cannot be used here.
50 These operators cannot be used together.
51 Module not implemented.
52 An array was expected.
53 Indice out of range.
54 Argument types are incompatible.
55 A Boolean argument was expected.
56 Field, variable, or table expected.
57 An operator was expected.
58 A “)” was expected.
59 This kind of argument was not expected here.
60 A parameter or a local variable cannot be used in an EXECUTE statement
in a compiled database.
61 The type of an array cannot be modified in a compiled database.
62 The command cannot be applied to a subtable.
63 The field is not indexed.
64 A picture field or variable was expected.
65 The value should contain 4 characters.
66 The value should not contain more than 3 characters.
67 This command cannot be executed on 4D Server.
68 A list was expected.
69 An external window reference was expected.
70 The command cannot be applied between two Picture arguments.
71 The SET PRINT MARKER command can only be called in the header of a form being
printed.

2332 4D Language Reference

72 A pointer array was expected.
73 A numeric array was expected.
74 The size of arrays does not match.
75 No pointer on local arrays.
76 Bad array type.
77 Bad variable name.
78 Invalid sort parameter.
79 This command cannot be executed during the draw of a list.
80 Too many query arguments.
81 The form was not found.
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Tips
Some of these error codes denote plain syntax errors due to mistyping. For example, you get
an error #37 if you execute the statement v=0 when you actually meant v:=0. You can
eliminate the error by fixing your code in the Method editor.

Some of these error codes are due to simple programming errors. For example, you get an error
#5 if you execute an ADD RECORD command, when you have not first set the default table
(using the DEFAULT TABLE command), and do not pass the table parameter. In this case, there
is no table to which to apply the command. You eliminate the error by checking to see if you
forgot to set the default table or if you forgot to pass the table parameter to the command for
this occurrence.

Some of these error codes denote errors due to a flaw in the design. For example, you get an
error #16 if you apply RELATE ONE to a field that is not related to any other field. You
eliminate the error by checking to see if your code is actually wrong or if you simply forgot to
create the relation starting from the field.

Some errors, when they occur, are not always located exactly where your code breaks. For
example, if in a subroutine you get an error #53 (indice out of range) on the line
vpFld:=Field($1;$2), the error is due to a wrong table and/or field number that has been passed
to the subroutine as a parameter. Therefore, the error is located in the caller method and not
where the error actually occurs. In this case, trace your code in the Debugger window to
determine which line of code is the real culprit, then fix it in the Method editor.

See Also
ON ERR CALL.

4D Language Reference 2333

2334 4D Language Reference
70
______________________
Character Codes

4D Language Reference 2335

2336 4D Language Reference
Unicode Codes Character Codes

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

In databases created with version 11 of 4D, the language as well as the database engine store
and work natively with Unicode characters.
This facilitates the internationalization of 4D applications. Unicode is a standard unified
character set that can handle practically every common language of the world. A character set
is a character/number value correspondence table, for example “a”->1, “b”->2, “5”->15, “oe”-
>662, and so on. Whereas with ASCII, the basic number value is typically included between 1
and 127, with Unicode the upper limit exceeds 65,000, which means that nearly every
character for all languages can be represented.
There are several ways to code the Unicode number values: UTF-16 codes them on 16-bit
integers, UTF-32 uses 32-bit integers and UTF-8 uses 8-bit integers. 4D mainly uses UTF-16
(like Windows and Mac OS). Sometimes, essentially for specific needs related to the Internet,
4D uses UTF-8 which has the advantage of being more compact and having better readability
for common characters (a-z,0-9).

For more information about the Unicode standard, please refer, for example, to the following
page:
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Unicode
A list of Unicode codes:
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_Unicode_characters

Warning: In Unicode in 4D v11, the following character codes are reserved and must never be
included in a text:
0
65534 (FFFE)
65535 (FFFF)

Compatibility Note: Databases created with a version of 4D prior to version 11 can function in
ASCII compatibility mode. For more information, please refer to the ASCII Codes section.

4D Language Reference 2337

ASCII Codes ASCII Codes

version 11 (Modified)
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

Compatibility Note: 4D can function with two character sets: Unicode or ASCII. The Unicode
mode is the standard mode used in new databases beginning with version 11 of 4D. The ASCII
mode is kept for compatibility reasons in databases created with an earlier version of 4D. This
mode is called ASCII compatibility mode.

It is possible to apply the Unicode mode to converted databases via the Unicode Mode selector
of the Get database parameter and SET DATABASE PARAMETER commands or via the Unicode
Mode option found on the Application/Compatibility page of the Preferences:

In most cases, the initial functioning of applications is not affected by this setting, since 4D
handles any necessary character conversions internally. Moreoever, the most common
characters (a-z, 0-9, and so on) have the same value (from1 to 127) in both Unicode and ASCII
(Windows and Mac OS).

2338 4D Language Reference

However, certain language statements, more particularly those using commands that work
with character strings, may require some adaptation. For example, the statement Char(200)
will not return the same value in Unicode as in ASCII. This manual describes the differences in
functioning between the Unicode mode and the ASCII compatibility mode for each command
concerned.

Note: This mode is specific to each database. It is therefore possible to have a Unicode
database coexisting with non-Unicode components (or vice versa).

Understanding ASCII Codes and 4D

When the database is operating in ASCII compatibility mode, on both Macintosh and
Windows, the internal database engine and the 4D language work with the Macintosh
extended ASCII set. When you enter data using the keyboard (adding records, editing
procedures, etc.), 4D uses the internal Altura ASCII conversion scheme to convert what comes
from the keyboard (expressed using the Windows set) to the Macintosh set. For example, to
enter an “é”, you type ALT+0233, and 4D stores ASCII code 142 in the record. This is
transparent to the end user, because when you create a search, you actually type (in the Search
editor) the value for which you are looking. Therefore, the value that you typed (ALT+0233) is
also translated into ASCII code 142, and you find the value.

The codes work the same when you type ALT+0233 in the Procedure editor. However, to look
for a character using its ASCII code, you use the Macintosh ASCII code of the character.

For example:

QUERY (...; [MyFile]MyField="é") ` é is Alt+0233

is the same as:

QUERY (...;[MyFile]MyField=Char(142)) ` é is ASCII 142

ASCII Code Tables

• The standard ASCII codes, 0 through 127, are common to Windows and Macintosh.

• The ASCII codes 128 through 255 are different on Windows and Macintosh. In order to
maintain platform independence, the Windows version of 4D automatically converts ASCII
codes from Windows to Macintosh ASCII maps when characters are entering the 4D
environment (Data entry, Edit/Paste, Import, etc.) and from Macintosh to Windows ASCII
maps when characters are leaving the 4D environment (Edit/Cut or Copy, Export, etc.).

4D Language Reference 2339

• ASCII Codes 0 to 63

2340 4D Language Reference

4D Language Reference 2341
• ASCII Codes 64 to 127

2342 4D Language Reference

4D Language Reference 2343
• ASCII Codes 128 to 191

2344 4D Language Reference

4D Language Reference 2345
2346 4D Language Reference
4D Language Reference 2347
• ASCII Codes 192 to 255

2348 4D Language Reference

4D Language Reference 2349
2350 4D Language Reference
Note: The grayed out boxes indicate characters that are not available under Windows, or
different from Macintosh characters.

See Also
Character code, ISO to Mac, Mac to ISO, Mac to Win, ON EVENT CALL, Win to Mac.

4D Language Reference 2351

Function Key Codes ASCII Codes

version 6.0
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

4D returns values for Function keys in the KeyCode system variable, which is used within
project methods installed by the ON EVENT CALL command. These project methods are used to
catch events.

The values for Function keys are not based on ASCII Codes. They are:

Reminder
The KeyCode system variable is to be used in a project method installed using ON EVENT CALL.

2352 4D Language Reference

In addition to the function keys, the following table lists the values returned in KeyCode when
you press one of the common keys, such as Return or Enter.

See Also
ON EVENT CALL, System Variables.

4D Language Reference 2353

2354 4D Language Reference
71
______________________
Command Syntax

4D Language Reference 2355

2356 4D Language Reference
Command Syntax by Name Command Syntax

version 11.4 (Modified)

________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

The first column indicates the number for each command, used more particularly by the
Command name command.

156 ABORT
99 Abs (number) → Number
269 ACCEPT
303 ACCUMULATE (data{; data2; ...; dataN})
346 Activated → Boolean
361 ADD DATA SEGMENT
56 ADD RECORD ({aTable}{; }{*})
202 ADD SUBRECORD (subtable; form{; *})
393 Add to date (date; years; months; days) → Date
119 ADD TO SET ({table; }set)
31 After → Boolean
41 ALERT (message{; ok button title})
47 ALL RECORDS {(table)}
109 ALL SUBRECORDS (subtable)
403 APPEND DATA TO PASTEBOARD (dataType; data)
265 Append document (document{; fileType}) → DocRef
411 APPEND MENU ITEM (menu; itemText{; subMenu}{; process}{; *})
911 APPEND TO ARRAY (array; value)
376 APPEND TO LIST (list; itemText; itemRef{; sublist; expanded})
491 Application file → String
494 Application type → Long Integer
493 Application version {(*)} → String
70 APPLY TO SELECTION (aTable; statement)
73 APPLY TO SUBSELECTION (subtable; statement)
882 APPLY XSLT TRANSFORMATION (xmlSource; xslSheet; result{; compileSheet})
20 Arctan (number) → Number
223 ARRAY BOOLEAN (arrayName; size{; size2})
224 ARRAY DATE (arrayName; size{; size2})
220 ARRAY INTEGER (arrayName; size{; size2})

4D Language Reference 2357

221 ARRAY LONGINT (arrayName; size{; size2})
279 ARRAY PICTURE (arrayName; size{; size2})
280 ARRAY POINTER (arrayName; size{; size2})
219 ARRAY REAL (arrayName; size{; size2})
218 ARRAY STRING (strLen; arrayName; size{; size2})
222 ARRAY TEXT (arrayName; size{; size2})
287 ARRAY TO LIST (array; list{; itemRefs})
261 ARRAY TO SELECTION (array; field{; array2; field2; ...; arrayN; fieldN})
512 ARRAY TO STRING LIST (strings; resID{; resFile})
786 AUTHENTICATE WEB SERVICE (name; password{; authMethod}{; *})
2 Average (series) → Number

887 BACKUP
151 BEEP
29 Before → Boolean
198 Before selection {(table)} → Boolean
199 Before subselection (subtable) → Boolean
948 Begin SQL
717 BEST OBJECT SIZE ({*; }object; bestWidth; bestHeight{; maxWidth})
536 BLOB PROPERTIES (blob; compressed{; expandedSize{; currentSize}})
605 BLOB size (blob) → Longint
526 BLOB TO DOCUMENT (document; blob{; *})
549 BLOB to integer (blob; byteOrder{; offset}) → Number
557 BLOB to list (blob{; offset}) → ListRef
551 BLOB to longint (blob; byteOrder{; offset}) → Number
682 BLOB TO PICTURE (pictureBlob; picture{; codec})
553 BLOB to real (blob; realFormat{; offset}) → Real
555 BLOB to text (blob; textFormat{; offset{; textLength}}) → Text
850 BLOB TO USERS (users)
533 BLOB TO VARIABLE (blob; variable{; offset})
646 BOOLEAN ARRAY FROM SET (booleanArr{; set})
302 BREAK LEVEL (level{; pageBreak})
326 BRING TO FRONT (process)
871 BUILD APPLICATION {(projectName)}
194 BUTTON TEXT ({*; }object; buttonText)

2358 4D Language Reference

C

329 CALL PROCESS (process)

778 CALL WEB SERVICE (accessURL; soapAction; methodName; namespace{; complexType{; *}})
270 CANCEL
241 CANCEL TRANSACTION
547 Caps lock down → Boolean
289 CHANGE CURRENT USER{(user; password)}
637 CHANGE LICENSES
186 CHANGE PASSWORD (password)
234 Change string (source; newChars; where) → String
90 Char (charCode) → String
91 Character code (character) → Number
799 CHECK LOG FILE
955 Choose (criterion; value{; value2; ...; valueN}) → Expression
377 CLEAR LIST (list{; *})
333 CLEAR NAMED SELECTION (name)
402 CLEAR PASTEBOARD
144 CLEAR SEMAPHORE (semaphore)
117 CLEAR SET (set)
89 CLEAR VARIABLE (variable)
267 CLOSE DOCUMENT (docRef)
996 CLOSE PRINTING JOB
498 CLOSE RESOURCE FILE (resFile)
154 CLOSE WINDOW {(window)}
987 COMBINE PICTURES (resultingPict; pict1; operator; pict2{; horOffset; vertOffset})
538 Command name (command) → String
937 Compact data file (structurePath; dataPath{; archiveFolder{; option{; method}}})
1001 COMPONENT LIST (componentsArray)
534 COMPRESS BLOB (blob{; compression})
355 COMPRESS PICTURE (picture; method; quality)
359 COMPRESS PICTURE FILE (document; method; quality)
162 CONFIRM (message{; OK button title{; cancel button title}})
713 Contextual click → Boolean
360 Convert case (string; target; srcMask) → String
1011 CONVERT FROM TEXT (4Dtext; charSet; convertedBLOB)
1002 CONVERT PICTURE (picture; codec)
1012 Convert to text (BLOB; charSet) → Text
226 COPY ARRAY (source; destination)
558 COPY BLOB (srcBLOB; dstBLOB; srcOffset; dstOffset; len)

4D Language Reference 2359

541 COPY DOCUMENT (sourceName; destinationName{; *})
626 Copy list (list) → ListRef
331 COPY NAMED SELECTION ({table; }name)
600 COPY SET (srcSet; dstSet)
18 Cos (number) → Number
907 Count in array (array; value) → Longint
380 Count list items ({*; }list{; *}) → Longint
405 Count menu items (menu{; process}) → Number
404 Count menus {(process)} → Number
259 Count parameters → Number
437 Count screens → Longint
335 Count tasks → Integer
343 Count user processes → Integer
342 Count users → Integer
694 CREATE ALIAS (targetPath; aliasPath)
313 CREATE DATA FILE (accessPath)
266 Create document (document{; fileType}) → DocRef
140 CREATE EMPTY SET ({table; }set)
475 CREATE FOLDER (folderPath)
966 CREATE INDEX (theTable; fieldsArray; indexType; indexName{; *})
408 Create menu {(menu)} → MenuRef
68 CREATE RECORD {(table)}
65 CREATE RELATED ONE (field)
496 Create resource file (resFilename{; fileType{; *}}) → DocRef
640 CREATE SELECTION FROM ARRAY (table; recordArray{; selectionName})
116 CREATE SET ({table; }set)
641 CREATE SET FROM ARRAY (table; recordsArray{; setName})
72 CREATE SUBRECORD (subtable)
679 CREATE THUMBNAIL (source; dest{; width{; height{; mode{; depth}}}})
808 CREATE USER FORM (aTable; form; userForm)
33 Current date {(*)} → Date
363 Current default table → Pointer
276 Current form page → Number
627 Current form table → Pointer
827 Current form window → WinRef
483 Current machine → String
484 Current machine owner → String
684 Current method name → String
322 Current process → Number
178 Current time {(*)} → Time

2360 4D Language Reference

182 Current user → String
334 CUT NAMED SELECTION ({table; }name)
604 C_BLOB ({method; }variable{; variable2; ...; variableN})
305 C_BOOLEAN ({method; }variable{; variable2; ...; variableN})
307 C_DATE ({method; }variable{; variable2; ...; variableN})
352 C_GRAPH ({method; }variable{; variable2; ...; variableN})
282 C_INTEGER ({method; }variable{; variable2; ...; variableN})
283 C_LONGINT ({method; }variable{; variable2; ...; variableN})
286 C_PICTURE ({method; }variable{; variable2; ...; variableN})
301 C_POINTER ({method; }variable{; variable2; ...; variableN})
285 C_REAL ({method; }variable{; variable2; ...; variableN})
293 C_STRING ({method; }size; variable{; variable2; ...; variableN})
284 C_TEXT ({method; }variable{; variable2; ...; variableN})
306 C_TIME ({method; }variable{; variable2; ...; variableN})

490 Data file {(segment)} → String

527 DATA SEGMENT LIST (Segments)
369 Database event → Longint
102 Date (dateString) → Date
114 Day number (aDate) → Number
23 Day of (date) → Number
347 Deactivated → Boolean
9 Dec (number) → Number
896 DECODE (blob)
690 DECRYPT BLOB (toDecrypt; sendPubKey{; recipPrivKey})
46 DEFAULT TABLE (aTable)
323 DELAY PROCESS (process; duration)
159 DELETE DOCUMENT (document)
693 DELETE FOLDER (folder)
228 DELETE FROM ARRAY (array; where{; howMany})
560 DELETE FROM BLOB (blob; offset; len)
624 DELETE FROM LIST ({*; }list; itemRef | *{; *})
967 DELETE INDEX (fieldPtr | indexName{; *})
830 DELETE LISTBOX COLUMN ({*; }object; colPosition{; number})
914 DELETE LISTBOX ROW ({*; }object; position)
413 DELETE MENU ITEM (menu; menuItem{; process})
58 DELETE RECORD {(table)}
501 DELETE RESOURCE (resType; resID{; resFile})

4D Language Reference 2361

66 DELETE SELECTION {(table)}
232 Delete string (source; where; numChars) → String
96 DELETE SUBRECORD (subtable)
615 DELETE USER (userID)
810 DELETE USER FORM (aTable; form; userForm)
1044 DESCRIBE QUERY EXECUTION (status)
40 DIALOG ({aTable; }form; *)
122 DIFFERENCE (set; subtractSet; resultSet)
193 DISABLE BUTTON ({*; }object)
150 DISABLE MENU ITEM (menu; menuItem{; process})
910 DISPLAY NOTIFICATION (title; text{; duration})
105 DISPLAY RECORD {(table)}
59 DISPLAY SELECTION ({aTable}{; selectMode{; enterList{; *{; *}}}})
897 Displayed line number → Longint
339 DISTINCT VALUES (aField; array)
529 Document creator (document) → String
474 DOCUMENT LIST (pathname; documents)
525 DOCUMENT TO BLOB (document; blob{; *})
528 Document type (document) → String
722 DOM CLOSE XML (elementRef)
727 DOM Count XML attributes (elementRef) → Longint
726 DOM Count XML elements (elementRef; elementName) → Longint
865 DOM Create XML element (elementRef; xPath{; attrName{; attrValue}}{; attrName2;
attrValue2; ...; attrNameN; attrValueN}) → String
861 DOM Create XML Ref (root{; nameSpace{; nameSpaceName{; nameSpaceValue}}}{;
nameSpaceName2; nameSpaceValue2; ...; nameSpaceNameN; nameSpaceValueN})
→ String
862 DOM EXPORT TO FILE (elementRef; filePath)
863 DOM EXPORT TO VAR (elementRef; vXmlVar)
864 DOM Find XML element (elementRef; xPath{; arrElementRefs}) → elementRef
1010 DOM Find XML element by ID (elementRef; id) → String
723 DOM Get first child XML element (elementRef{; childElemName{; childElemValue}})
→ String
925 DOM Get last child XML element (elementRef{; childElemName{; childElemValue}})
→ String
724 DOM Get next sibling XML element (elementRef{; siblingElemName{; siblingElemValue}})
→ String
923 DOM Get parent XML element (elementRef{; parentElemName{; parentElemValue}})
→ String

2362 4D Language Reference

924 DOM Get previous sibling XML element (elementRef{; siblingElemName{;
siblingElemValue}}) → String
1053 DOM Get Root XML element (elementRef) → String
729 DOM GET XML ATTRIBUTE BY INDEX (elementRef; attribIndex; attribName; attribValue)
728 DOM GET XML ATTRIBUTE BY NAME (elementRef; attribName; attribValue)
725 DOM Get XML element (elementRef; elementName; index; elementValue) → String
730 DOM GET XML ELEMENT NAME (elementRef; elementName)
731 DOM GET XML ELEMENT VALUE (elementRef; elementValue{; cDATA})
721 DOM Get XML information (elementRef; xmlInfo) → String
719 DOM Parse XML source (document{; validation{; dtd | schema}}) → String
720 DOM Parse XML variable (variable{; validation{; dtd}}) → String
869 DOM REMOVE XML ELEMENT (elementRef)
866 DOM SET XML ATTRIBUTE (elementRef; attrName; attrValue{; attrName2; attrValue2; ...;
attrNameN; attrValueN})
867 DOM SET XML ELEMENT NAME (elementRef; elementName)
868 DOM SET XML ELEMENT VALUE (elementRef{; xPath; elementValue{; *})
859 DOM SET XML OPTIONS (elementRef; encoding{; standalone{; indentation}})
607 DRAG AND DROP PROPERTIES (srcObject; srcElement; srcProcess)
452 DRAG WINDOW
608 Drop position {(columnNumber)} → Number
225 DUPLICATE RECORD {(table)}
30 During → Boolean
1006 Dynamic pop up menu (menu{; default{; xCoord{; yCoord}}}) → String

281 EDIT ACCESS

807 EDIT FORM (aTable; form{; userForm{; library}})
806 EDIT FORMULA (table; formula)
870 EDIT ITEM ({*; }object{; item})
192 ENABLE BUTTON ({*; }object)
149 ENABLE MENU ITEM (menu; menuItem{; process})
895 ENCODE (blob)
689 ENCRYPT BLOB (toEncrypt; sendPrivKey{; recipPubKey})
36 End selection {(table)} → Boolean
949 End SQL
37 End subselection (subtable) → Boolean
160 ERASE WINDOW {(window)}
676 Euro converter (value; fromCurrency; toCurrency) → Real
63 EXECUTE FORMULA (statement)

4D Language Reference 2363

1007 EXECUTE METHOD (methodName; result | *{; param}{; param2; ...; paramN})
651 EXECUTE ON CLIENT (clientName; methodName{; param}{; param2; ...; paramN})
373 Execute on server (procedure; stack{; name{; param{; param2; ...; paramN}{; *}}})
→ Number
21 Exp (number) → Number
535 EXPAND BLOB (blob)
666 EXPORT DATA (fileName{; project{; *}})
84 EXPORT DIF ({aTable; }document)
85 EXPORT SYLK ({aTable; }document)
167 EXPORT TEXT ({aTable; }document)

215 False → Boolean

253 Field (tableNum | fieldPtr{; fieldNum}) → Number | Pointer
257 Field name (fieldPtr | tableNum{; fieldNum}) → String
321 FILTER EVENT
389 FILTER KEYSTROKE (filteredChar)
230 Find in array (array; value{; start}) → Number
653 Find in field (targetField; value) → Longint
952 Find in list ({*; }list; value; scope{; itemsArray{; *}}) → Longint
449 Find window (left; top{; windowPart}) → WinRef
250 FIRST PAGE
50 FIRST RECORD {(table)}
61 FIRST SUBRECORD (subtable)
297 FLUSH BUFFERS
278 Focus object → Pointer
473 FOLDER LIST (pathname; directories)
164 FONT ({*; }object; font)
460 FONT LIST (fonts)
462 Font name (fontNumber) → String
461 Font number (fontName) → Longint
165 FONT SIZE ({*; }object; size)
166 FONT STYLE ({*; }object; styles)
388 Form event → Number
327 Frontmost process {(*)} → Integer
447 Frontmost window {(*)} → WinRef

2364 4D Language Reference

G

691 GENERATE CERTIFICATE REQUEST (privKey; certifRequest; codeArray; nameArray)

688 GENERATE ENCRYPTION KEYPAIR (privKey; pubKey{; length})
488 Gestalt (selector; value) → Number
485 Get 4D folder ({folder}{; }{*}) → String
707 Get alignment ({*; }object) → Number
908 GET ALLOWED METHODS (methodsArray)
899 GET AUTOMATIC RELATIONS (one; many)
888 GET BACKUP INFORMATION (selector; info1; info2)
699 Get component resource ID (compName; resType; originalResNum) → Number
990 Get current data source → String
1009 Get current database localization → String
788 Get current printer → String
989 GET DATA SOURCE LIST (sourceType; sourceNamesArr; driversArr)
643 Get database parameter ({table; }selector{; stringValue}) → Longint
826 Get default user → Number
700 GET DOCUMENT ICON (docPath; icon{; size})
481 Get document position (docRef) → Number
477 GET DOCUMENT PROPERTIES (document; locked; invisible; created on; created at;
modified on; modified at)
479 Get document size (document{; *}) → Number
655 Get edited text → Text
685 GET FIELD ENTRY PROPERTIES (fieldPtr|tableNum{; fieldNum}; list; mandatory;
nonEnterable; nonModifiable)
258 GET FIELD PROPERTIES (fieldPtr | tableNum{; fieldNum; fieldType{; fieldLength{; indexed{;
unique{; invisible}}}})
920 GET FIELD RELATION (manyField; one; many{; *})
804 GET FIELD TITLES (table; fieldTitles; fieldNums)
976 Get file from pasteboard (xIndex) → String
898 GET FORM OBJECTS (objectsArray{; variablesArray{; pagesArray{; *}}})
969 GET FORM PARAMETER ({aTable; }form; selector; value)
674 GET FORM PROPERTIES ({table; }formName; width; height{; numPages{; fixedWidth{;
fixedHeight{; title}}}})
894 Get format ({*; }object) → String
610 GET GROUP LIST (groupNames; groupNumbers)
613 GET GROUP PROPERTIES (groupID; name; owner{; members})
209 GET HIGHLIGHT (area; startSel; endSel)
902 GET HIGHLIGHTED RECORDS ({aTable; }setName)
814 GET HTTP BODY (body)

4D Language Reference 2365

697 GET HTTP HEADER (header|fieldArray{; valueArray})
517 GET ICON RESOURCE (resID; resData{; fileRef})
510 Get indexed string (resID; strID{; resFile}) → String
255 Get last field number (tableNum | tablePtr) → Number
1045 Get Last Query Path (descFormat) → String
1046 Get Last Query Plan (descFormat) → String
1015 GET LAST ERROR STACK (codesArray; intCompArray; textArray)
254 Get last table number → Number
378 GET LIST ITEM ({*; }list; itemPos  | *; itemRef; itemText{; sublist{; expanded}})
954 Get list item font ({*; }list; itemRef | *) → String
951 GET LIST ITEM ICON ({*; }list; itemRef | *; icon)
985 GET LIST ITEM PARAMETER ({*; }list; itemRef | *; selector; value)
631 GET LIST ITEM PROPERTIES ({*; }list; itemRef | *; enterable{; styles{; icon{; color}}})
632 GET LIST PROPERTIES (list; appearance{; icon{; lineHeight{; doubleClick{; multiSelections{;
editable}}}}})
832 GET LISTBOX ARRAYS ({*; }object; arrColNames; arrHeaderNames; arrColVars;
arrHeaderVars; arrVisible; arrStyles)
971 GET LISTBOX CELL POSITION ({*; }object; column; row{; colVar})
834 Get listbox column width ({*; }object) → Integer
917 Get listbox information ({*; }object; info) → Longint
836 Get listbox rows height ({*; }object) → Integer
1014 GET LISTBOX TABLE SOURCE ({*; }object; tableNum{; name})
991 Get localized string (resName) → String
997 GET MACRO PARAMETER (selector; textParam)
979 Get menu bar reference {(process)} → MenuRef
422 Get menu item (menu; menuItem{; process}) → String
983 GET MENU ITEM ICON (menu; menuItem; iconRef{; process})
424 Get menu item key (menu; menuItem{; process}) → Number
428 Get menu item mark (menu; menuItem{; process}) → String
981 Get menu item method (menu; menuItem{; process}) → String
980 Get menu item modifiers (menu; menuItem{; process}) → Number
972 GET MENU ITEM PROPERTY (menu; menuItem; property; value{; process})
1003 Get menu item parameter (menu; menuItem) → String
426 Get menu item style (menu; menuItem; itemStyle{; process})
977 GET MENU ITEMS (menu; menuTitlesArray; menuRefsArray)
430 Get menu title (menu{; process}) → String
468 GET MOUSE (mouseX; mouseY; mouseButton{; *})
831 Get number of listbox columns ({*; }object) → Longint
915 Get number of listbox rows ({*; }object) → Longint
663 GET OBJECT RECT ({*; }object; left; top; right; bottom)

2366 4D Language Reference

401 GET PASTEBOARD DATA (dataType; data)
958 GET PASTEBOARD DATA TYPE (4Dsignatures; nativeTypes{; formatNames})
565 GET PICTURE FROM LIBRARY (picRef | picName; picture)
522 GET PICTURE FROM PASTEBOARD (picture)
502 GET PICTURE RESOURCE (resID; resData{; resFile})
470 Get platform interface → Number
846 Get plugin access (plugIn) → String
304 Get pointer (varName) → Pointer
708 Get print marker (markNum) → Number
734 GET PRINT OPTION (option; value1{; value2})
703 GET PRINTABLE AREA (height{; width})
711 GET PRINTABLE MARGIN (left; top; right; bottom)
702 Get printed height → Number
371 GET PROCESS VARIABLE (process; srcVar; dstVar{; srcVar2; dstVar2; ...; srcVarN; dstVarN})
650 GET REGISTERED CLIENTS (clientList; methods)
686 GET RELATION PROPERTIES (fieldPtr|tableNum{; fieldNum; oneTable; oneField{;
choiceField{; autoOne{; autoMany}}})
508 GET RESOURCE (resType; resID; resData{; resFile})
513 Get resource name (resType; resID{; resFile}) → String
515 Get resource properties (resType; resID{; resFile}) → Number
889 GET RESTORE INFORMATION (selector; info1; info2)
1005 Get selected menu item parameter → String
696 GET SERIAL INFORMATION (key; user; company; connected; maxUser)
909 GET SERIAL PORT MAPPING (numArray; nameArray)
784 Get SOAP info (infoNum) → String
506 Get string resource (resID{; resFile}) → String
994 GET SYSTEM FORMAT (format; value)
687 GET TABLE PROPERTIES (tablePtr|tableNum; invisible{; trigSaveNew{; trigSaveRec{;
trigDelRec{; trigLoadRec}}}})
803 GET TABLE TITLES (tableTitles; tableNums)
524 Get text from pasteboard → String
504 Get text resource (resID{; resFile}) → Text
609 GET USER LIST (userNames; userNumbers)
611 GET USER PROPERTIES (userID; name; startup; password; nbLogin; lastLogin{;
memberships{; groupOwner}})
683 GET WEB FORM VARIABLES (nameArray; valueArray)
780 Get Web Service error info (infoType) → String
779 GET WEB SERVICE RESULT (returnValue{; returnName{; *}})
443 GET WINDOW RECT (left; top; right; bottom{; window})
450 Get window title {(window)} → String

4D Language Reference 2367

732 GET XML ERROR (elementRef; errorText{; row{; column}})
884 GET XSLT ERROR (errorText{; row{; column}})
206 GOTO AREA ({*; }object)
247 GOTO PAGE (pageNumber)
242 GOTO RECORD ({aTable; }record)
245 GOTO SELECTED RECORD ({table; }record)
161 GOTO XY (x; y)
169 GRAPH (graphArea; graphNumber; xLabels; yElements{; yElements2; ...; yElementsN})
298 GRAPH SETTINGS (graph; xmin; xmax; ymin; ymax; xprop; xgrid; ygrid; title{; title2; ...;
titleN})
148 GRAPH TABLE ({aTable; }graphType; x field; y field{; y field2; ...; y fieldN})

432 HIDE MENU BAR

324 HIDE PROCESS (process)
434 HIDE TOOL BAR
436 HIDE WINDOW {(window)}
656 HIGHLIGHT RECORDS ({aTable}{; setName{; *}})
210 HIGHLIGHT TEXT (area; startSel; endSel)

311 IDLE
665 IMPORT DATA (fileName{; project{; *}})
86 IMPORT DIF ({aTable; }document)
87 IMPORT SYLK ({aTable; }document)
168 IMPORT TEXT ({aTable; }document)
113 In break → Boolean
191 In footer → Boolean
112 In header → Boolean
397 In transaction → Boolean
55 INPUT FORM ({aTable; }form{; userForm{; *}})
227 INSERT IN ARRAY (array; where{; howMany})
559 INSERT IN BLOB (blob; offset; len{; filler})
625 INSERT IN LIST({*; } list; beforeItemRef | *; itemText; itemRef{; expanded; sublist})
829 INSERT LISTBOX COLUMN ({*; }object; colPosition; colName; colVariable; headerName;
headerVar)

2368 4D Language Reference

970 INSERT LISTBOX COLUMN FORMULA ({*; }object; colPosition; colName; formula;
dataType; headerName; headerVariable)
913 INSERT LISTBOX ROW ({*; }object; position)
412 INSERT MENU ITEM (menu; afterItem; itemText{; subMenu}{; process}{; *})
231 Insert string (source; what; where) → String
8 Int (number) → Number
548 INTEGER TO BLOB (integer; blob; byteOrder{; offset | *})
927 INTEGRATE LOG FILE (pathName)
121 INTERSECTION (set1; set2; resultSet)
93 INVERT BACKGROUND ({*; }textVar | textField)
621 Is a list (list) → Boolean
294 Is a variable (aPointer) → Boolean
492 Is compiled mode {(*)} → Boolean
716 Is data file locked → Boolean
1000 Is field number valid (tableNum | tablePtr; fieldNum) → Boolean
964 Is field value Null (aField) → Boolean
273 Is in set (set) → Boolean
714 Is license available {(license)} → Boolean
668 Is new record {(table)} → Boolean
669 Is record loaded {(table)} → Boolean
783 Is SOAP request → Boolean
999 Is table number valid (tableNum) → Boolean
616 Is user deleted (userNumber) → Boolean
520 ISO to Mac (text) → String

390 Keystroke → String

251 LAST PAGE

200 LAST RECORD {(table)}
201 LAST SUBRECORD (subtable)
811 LAUNCH EXTERNAL PROCESS (fileName{; inputStream{; outputStream{; errorStream}}})
16 Length (string) → Number
101 Level → Number
633 List item parent ({*; }list; itemRef | *) → Longint

4D Language Reference 2369

629 List item position ({*; }list; itemRef) → Number
957 LIST OF CHOICE LISTS (numsArray; namesArray)
288 LIST TO ARRAY (list; array{; itemRefs})
556 LIST TO BLOB (list; blob{; *})
809 LIST USER FORMS (aTable; form; userFormArray)
357 LOAD COMPRESS PICTURE FROM FILE (document; method; quality; picture)
383 Load list (listName) → ListRef
52 LOAD RECORD {(table)}
185 LOAD SET ({table; }set; document)
74 LOAD VARIABLES (document; variable{; variable2; ...; variableN})
147 Locked {(table)} → Boolean
353 LOCKED ATTRIBUTES ({table; }process; 4Duser; sessionUser; processName)
22 Log (number) → Number
667 LOG EVENT ({outputType; }message{; importance})
928 Log File → String
647 LONGINT ARRAY FROM SELECTION (table; recordArray{; selection})
550 LONGINT TO BLOB (longInt; blob; byteOrder{; offset | *})
14 Lowercase (aString; *) → String

519 Mac to ISO (text) → String

463 Mac to Win (text) → String
546 Macintosh command down → Boolean
544 Macintosh control down → Boolean
545 Macintosh option down → Boolean
366 MAP FILE TYPES (macOS; windows; context)
1019 Match regex (pattern; aString{; start; pos_found; length_found; *}) → Boolean
3 Max (series) → Number
453 MAXIMIZE WINDOW {(window)}
440 Menu bar height → Longint
441 Menu bar screen → Longint
152 Menu selected {(subMenu)} → Number
88 MESSAGE (message)
175 MESSAGES OFF
181 MESSAGES ON
704 Method called on error → String
705 Method called on event → String
459 Milliseconds → Longint
4 Min (series) → Number

2370 4D Language Reference

454 MINIMIZE WINDOW {(window)}
98 Mod (number1; number2) → Number
32 Modified (field) → Boolean
314 Modified record {(table)} → Boolean
57 MODIFY RECORD ({table}{; }{*})
204 MODIFY SELECTION ({table}{; selectMode{; enterList{; *{; *}}}})
203 MODIFY SUBRECORD (subtable; form{; *})
24 Month of (aDate) → Number
540 MOVE DOCUMENT (srcPathname; dstPathname)
664 MOVE OBJECT ({*; }object; moveH; moveV{; resizeH{; resizeV{; *}}})
844 MOVED LISTBOX COLUMN NUMBER ({*; }object; oldPosition; newPosition)
837 MOVED LISTBOX ROW NUMBER ({*; }object; oldPosition; newPosition)
718 MULTI SORT ARRAY (array{; sort}{; array2; sort2; ...; arrayN; sortN})

375 New list → ListRef

926 New log file → Text
317 New process (method; stack{; name{; param{; param2; ...; paramN}{; *}}}) → Number
248 NEXT PAGE
51 NEXT RECORD {(table)}
62 NEXT SUBRECORD (subtable)
448 Next window (window) → WinRef
315 Nil (aPointer) → Boolean
993 NO DEFAULT TABLE
158 NO TRACE
34 Not (boolean) → Boolean
1052 NOTIFY RESOURCES FOLDER MODIFICATION
11 Num (expression; separator) → Number

35 Old (field) → Expression

263 OLD RELATED MANY (field)
44 OLD RELATED ONE (aField)
155 ON ERR CALL (errorMethod)
190 ON EVENT CALL (eventMethod{; processName})
189 ONE RECORD SELECT {(table)}
903 OPEN 4D PREFERENCES (selector)

4D Language Reference 2371

1047 OPEN ADMINISTRATION WINDOW
312 OPEN DATA FILE (accessPath)
264 Open document (document{; fileType{; mode}}) → DocRef
309 Open external window (left; top; right; bottom; type; title; plugInArea) → Number
675 Open form window ({aTable; }formName{; type{; hPos{; vPos{; *}}}}) → WinRef
995 OPEN PRINTING JOB
497 Open resource file (resFilename{; fileType}) → DocRef
1018 OPEN SECURITY CENTER
673 OPEN WEB URL (url{; *})
153 Open window (left; top; right; bottom{; type{; title{; controlMenuBox}}}){ → WinRef }
49 ORDER BY ({aTable}{; aField{; > or <{; aField2; > or <2; ...; aFieldN; > or <N}{; *}}})
300 ORDER BY FORMULA (table{; expression{; > or <}}{; expression2; > or <2; ...; expressionN;
> or <N})
107 ORDER SUBRECORDS BY (subtable; subfield{; > or <}{; subfield2; > or <2; ...; subfieldN;
> or <N})
54 OUTPUT FORM ({aTable; }form{; userForm})
328 Outside call → Boolean

6 PAGE BREAK {(* | >)}

299 PAGE SETUP ({aTable; }form)
400 Pasteboard data size (dataType) → Number
319 PAUSE PROCESS (process)
992 PICTURE CODEC LIST (codecArray{; namesArray})
564 PICTURE LIBRARY LIST (picRefs; picNames)
457 PICTURE PROPERTIES (picture; width; height{; hOffset{; vOffset{; mode}}})
356 Picture size (picture) → Number
692 PICTURE TO BLOB (picture; pictureBlob; codec)
671 PICTURE TO GIF (pict; blobGIF)
681 PICTURE TYPE LIST (formatArray{; nameArray})
365 PLATFORM PROPERTIES (platform{; system{; processor{; language}}})
290 PLAY (objectName{; channel})
847 PLUGIN LIST (numbersArray; namesArray)
177 POP RECORD {(table)}
542 Pop up menu (contents{; default{; xCoord{; yCoord}}}) → Number
15 Position (find; aString{; start{; lengthFound{; *}}}) → Number
466 POST CLICK (mouseX; mouseY{; process}{; *})
467 POST EVENT (what; message; when; mouseX; mouseY; modifiers{; process})
465 POST KEY (code{; modifiers{; process}})

2372 4D Language Reference

249 PREVIOUS PAGE
110 PREVIOUS RECORD {(table)}
111 PREVIOUS SUBRECORD (subtable)
5 Print form ({aTable; }form{; area1{; area2}}){ → Number }
39 PRINT LABEL ({aTable}{; document{; * | >}})
785 PRINT OPTION VALUES (option; namesArray{; info1Array{; info2Array}})
71 PRINT RECORD ({table}{; }{* | >})
60 PRINT SELECTION ({aTable}{; }{* | >})
106 PRINT SETTINGS {(dialType)}
789 PRINTERS LIST (namesArray{; altNamesArray{; modelsArray}})
275 Printing page → Number
672 Process aborted → Boolean
816 PROCESS HTML TAGS (inputData; outputData)
372 Process number (name{; *}) → Number
336 PROCESS PROPERTIES (process; procName; procState; procTime{; procVisible{; uniqueID{;
origin}}})
330 Process state (process) → Number
176 PUSH RECORD {(table)}

771 QR BLOB TO REPORT (area; blob)

764 QR Count columns (area) → Longint
749 QR DELETE COLUMN (area; colNumber)
754 QR DELETE OFFSCREEN AREA (area)
791 QR EXECUTE COMMAND (area; command)
776 QR Find column (area; expression) → Longint
795 QR Get area property (area; property) → Longint
798 QR GET BORDERS (area; column; row; border; line{; color})
792 QR Get command status (area; command{; value}) → Longint
756 QR GET DESTINATION (area; type{; specifics})
773 QR Get document property (area; property) → Longint
747 QR Get drop column (area) → Longint
775 QR GET HEADER AND FOOTER (area; selector; leftTitle; centerTitle; rightTitle; height{;
picture{; pictAlignment}})
751 QR Get HTML template (area) → Text
766 QR GET INFO COLUMN (area; colNum; title; object; hide; size; repeatedValue;
displayFormat)
769 QR Get info row (area; row) → Longint
755 QR Get report kind (area) → Longint

4D Language Reference 2373

758 QR Get report table (area) → Longint
793 QR GET SELECTION (area; left; top{; right{; bottom}})
753 QR GET SORTS (area; aColumns{; aOrders})
760 QR Get text property (area; colNum; rowNum; property) → Longint
768 QR GET TOTALS DATA (area; colNum; breakNum; operator; text)
762 QR GET TOTALS SPACING (area; subtotal; value)
748 QR INSERT COLUMN (area; colNumber; object)
735 QR New offscreen area → Longint
790 QR ON COMMAND (area; methodName)
197 QR REPORT ({aTable; }document{; hierarchical{; wizard{; search{; *}}}})
770 QR REPORT TO BLOB (area; blob)
746 QR RUN (area)
796 QR SET AREA PROPERTY (area; property; value)
797 QR SET BORDERS (area; column; row; border; line{; color})
745 QR SET DESTINATION (area; type; specifics)
772 QR SET DOCUMENT PROPERTY (area; property; value)
774 QR SET HEADER AND FOOTER (area; selector; leftTitle; centerTitle; rightTitle; height{;
picture{; pictAlignment}})
750 QR SET HTML TEMPLATE (area; template)
765 QR SET INFO COLUMN (area; colNum; title; object; hide; size; repeatedValue;
displayFormat)
763 QR SET INFO ROW (area; row; hide)
738 QR SET REPORT KIND (area; type)
757 QR SET REPORT TABLE (area; table)
794 QR SET SELECTION (area; left; top; right; bottom)
752 QR SET SORTS (area; aColumns{; aOrders})
759 QR SET TEXT PROPERTY (area; colNum; rowNum; property; value)
767 QR SET TOTALS DATA (area; colNum; breakNum; operator | value)
761 QR SET TOTALS SPACING (area; subtotal; value)
277 QUERY ({aTable}{; queryArgument{; *}})
292 QUERY BY EXAMPLE ({aTable}{; }{*})
48 QUERY BY FORMULA ({aTable}{; }{queryFormula})
942 QUERY BY SQL ({aTable; }sqlFormula)
341 QUERY SELECTION ({aTable}{; queryArgument{; *}})
207 QUERY SELECTION BY FORMULA (aTable{; queryFormula})
1050 QUERY SELECTION WITH ARRAY (targetField; array)
108 QUERY SUBRECORDS (subtable; queryFormula)
644 QUERY WITH ARRAY (targetField; array)
291 QUIT 4D {(time)}

2374 4D Language Reference

R

100 Random → Number

145 READ ONLY {(table | *)}
362 Read only state {(table)} → Boolean
678 READ PICTURE FILE (fileName; picture{; *})
146 READ WRITE {(table | *)}
552 REAL TO BLOB (real; blob; realFormat{; offset | *})
172 RECEIVE BUFFER (receiveVar)
104 RECEIVE PACKET ({docRef; }receiveVar; stopChar | numChars)
79 RECEIVE RECORD {(table)}
81 RECEIVE VARIABLE (variable)
243 Record number {(table)} → Number
76 Records in selection {(table)} → Number
195 Records in set (set) → Number
7 Records in subselection (subtable) → Number
83 Records in table {(table)} → Number
174 REDRAW (object)
382 REDRAW LIST (list)
456 REDRAW WINDOW {(window)}
351 REDUCE SELECTION ({aTable; }number)
648 REGISTER CLIENT (clientName{; period{; *}})
38 REJECT {(aField)}
262 RELATE MANY (oneTable | Field)
340 RELATE MANY SELECTION (aField)
42 RELATE ONE (manyTable | Field{; choiceField})
349 RELATE ONE SELECTION (manyTable; oneTable)
978 RELEASE MENU (menu)
561 REMOVE FROM SET ({table; }set)
567 REMOVE PICTURE FROM LIBRARY (picRef | picName)
233 Replace string (source; oldString; newString{; howMany}{; *}) → String
163 Request (message{; defaultResponse{; OKButtonTitle{; CancelButtonTitle}}}) → String
890 RESIZE FORM WINDOW (width; height)
695 RESOLVE ALIAS (aliasPath; targetPath)
394 RESOLVE POINTER (pointer; varName; tableNum; fieldNum)
500 RESOURCE LIST (resType; resIDs; resNames{; resFile})
499 RESOURCE TYPE LIST (resTypes{; resFile})
918 RESTORE
320 RESUME PROCESS (process)
712 Right click → Boolean

4D Language Reference 2375

94 Round (round; places) → Number

384 SAVE LIST (list; listName)

358 SAVE PICTURE TO FILE (document; picture)
53 SAVE RECORD {(table)}
43 SAVE RELATED ONE (aField)
184 SAVE SET (set; document)
75 SAVE VARIABLES (document; variable{; variable2; ...; variableN})
857 SAX ADD PROCESSING INSTRUCTION (document; statement)
856 SAX ADD XML CDATA (document; data)
852 SAX ADD XML COMMENT (document; comment)
851 SAX ADD XML DOCTYPE (document; docType)
855 SAX ADD XML ELEMENT VALUE (document; data; *)
854 SAX CLOSE XML ELEMENT (document)
878 SAX GET XML CDATA (document; value)
874 SAX GET XML COMMENT (document; comment)
873 SAX GET XML DOCUMENT VALUES (document; encoding; version; standalone)
876 SAX GET XML ELEMENT (document; name; prefix; attrNames; attrValues)
877 SAX GET XML ELEMENT VALUE (document; value)
879 SAX GET XML ENTITY (document; name; value)
860 SAX Get XML node (document) → Longint
875 SAX GET XML PROCESSING INSTRUCTION (document; name; value)
853 SAX OPEN XML ELEMENT (document; tag{; attribName{; attribValue}}{; attribName2;
attribValue2; ...; attribNameN; attribValueN})
921 SAX OPEN XML ELEMENT ARRAYS (document; tag{; attribNamesArray{;
attribValuesArray}}{; attribNamesArray2; attribValuesArray2; ...; attribNamesArrayN;
attribValuesArrayN})
858 SAX SET XML OPTIONS (document; encoding{; standalone{; indentation}})
350 SCAN INDEX (aField; number{; > or <})
438 SCREEN COORDINATES (left; top; right; bottom{; screen})
439 SCREEN DEPTH (depth; color{; screen})
188 Screen height {(*)} → Number
187 Screen width {(*)} → Number
906 SCROLL LINES ({*; }object{; position{; *}})
698 Secured Web connection → Boolean
905 Select document (directory; fileTypes; title; options{; selected}) → String
670 Select folder ({message}{; }{defaultPath}) → String
381 SELECT LIST ITEMS BY POSITION ({*; }list; itemPos{; positionsArray})

2376 4D Language Reference

630 SELECT LIST ITEMS BY REFERENCE (list; itemRef{; refArray})
912 SELECT LISTBOX ROW ({*; }object; position{; action})
345 SELECT LOG FILE (logFile | *)
956 Select RGB Color ({defaultColor}{; }{message}) → Longint
379 Selected list items ({*; }list{; itemsArray{; *}}) → Longint
246 Selected record number {(table)} → Number
368 SELECTION RANGE TO ARRAY (start; end; field | table; array{; field2 | table2; array2; ...;
fieldN | tableN; arrayN})
260 SELECTION TO ARRAY (field | table; array{; field2 | table2; array2; ...; fieldN | tableN;
arrayN})
308 Self → Pointer
143 Semaphore (semaphore{; tickCount}) → Boolean
654 SEND HTML BLOB (blob; type{; noContext})
619 SEND HTML FILE (htmlFile)
677 SEND HTML TEXT (htmlText{; noContext})
815 SEND HTTP RAW DATA (data{; *})
659 SEND HTTP REDIRECT (url{; *})
103 SEND PACKET ({docRef; }packet)
78 SEND RECORD {(table)}
781 SEND SOAP FAULT (faultType; description)
80 SEND VARIABLE (variable)
244 Sequence number {(aTable)} → Number
316 SET ABOUT (itemText; method)
706 SET ALIGNMENT ({*; }object; alignment)
805 SET ALLOWED METHODS (methodsArray)
310 SET AUTOMATIC RELATIONS (one{; many})
606 SET BLOB SIZE (blob; size{; filler})
813 SET CGI EXECUTABLE (url1{; url2})
77 SET CHANNEL (port | operation{; settings | document})
237 SET CHOICE LIST ({*; }object; list)
271 SET COLOR ({*; }object; color{; altColor})
787 SET CURRENT PRINTER (printerName)
469 SET CURSOR {(cursor)}
642 SET DATABASE PARAMETER ({aTable; }selector; value)
392 SET DEFAULT CENTURY (century{; pivotYear})
904 SET DICTIONARY (dictionary)
531 SET DOCUMENT CREATOR (document; fileCreator)
482 SET DOCUMENT POSITION (docRef; offset{; anchor})
478 SET DOCUMENT PROPERTIES (document; locked; invisible; created on; created at;
modified on; modified at)

4D Language Reference 2377

480 SET DOCUMENT SIZE (document; size)
530 SET DOCUMENT TYPE (document; fileType)
238 SET ENTERABLE ({*; }entryArea; enterable)
812 SET ENVIRONMENT VARIABLE (varName; varValue)
919 SET FIELD RELATION (manyTable | manyField; one; many)
602 SET FIELD TITLES (aTable | aSubtable; fieldTitles; fieldNumbers{; *})
965 SET FIELD VALUE NULL (aField)
975 SET FILE TO PASTEBOARD (filePath)
235 SET FILTER ({*; }object; entryFilter)
892 SET FORM HORIZONTAL RESIZING (resize{; minWidth{; maxWidth}})
891 SET FORM SIZE ({object; }horizontal; vertical{; *})
893 SET FORM VERTICAL RESIZING (resize{; minHeight{; maxHeight}})
236 SET FORMAT ({*; }object; displayFormat)
614 Set group properties (groupID; name; owner{; members}) → Number
639 SET HOME PAGE (homePage)
634 SET HTML ROOT (rootFolder)
660 SET HTTP HEADER (header|fieldArray{; valueArray})
344 SET INDEX (aField; index{; mode{; *}})
385 SET LIST ITEM({*; } list; itemRef | *; newItemText; newItemRef{; sublist; expanded})
953 SET LIST ITEM FONT ({*; }list; itemRef | *; font)

950 SET LIST ITEM ICON ({*; }list; itemRef | *; icon)

986 SET LIST ITEM PARAMETER ({*; }list; itemRef | *; selector; value)
386 SET LIST ITEM PROPERTIES ({*; }list; itemRef | *; enterable; styles; icon{; color})
387 SET LIST PROPERTIES (list; appearance{; icon{; lineHeight{; doubleClick{; multiSelections{;
editable}}}}})
833 SET LISTBOX COLUMN WIDTH ({*; }object; width)
842 SET LISTBOX GRID COLOR ({*; }object; color; horizontal; vertical)
835 SET LISTBOX ROWS HEIGHT ({*; }object; height)
1013 SET LISTBOX TABLE SOURCE ({*; }object; tableNum | name)
998 SET MACRO PARAMETER (selector; textParam)
67 SET MENU BAR (menuBar{; process{; *}})
348 SET MENU ITEM (menu; menuItem; itemText{; process}{; *})
984 SET MENU ITEM ICON (menu; menuItem; iconRef{; process})
208 SET MENU ITEM MARK (menu; menuItem; mark{; process})
982 SET MENU ITEM METHOD (menu; menuItem; methodName{; process})
973 SET MENU ITEM PROPERTY (menu; menuItem; property; value{; process})
1004 SET MENU ITEM PARAMETER (menu; menuItem; param)
423 SET MENU ITEM SHORTCUT (menu; menuItem; itemKey{; modifiers{; process}})
425 SET MENU ITEM STYLE (menu; menuItem; itemStyle{; process})

2378 4D Language Reference

503 SET PICTURE RESOURCE (resID; resData{; resFile})
566 SET PICTURE TO LIBRARY (picture; picRef; picName)
521 SET PICTURE TO PASTEBOARD (picture)
367 SET PLATFORM INTERFACE (interface)
845 SET PLUGIN ACCESS (plugIn; group)
709 SET PRINT MARKER (markNum; position{; *})
733 SET PRINT OPTION (option; value1{; value2})
364 SET PRINT PREVIEW (preview)
710 SET PRINTABLE MARGIN (left; top; right; bottom)
370 SET PROCESS VARIABLE (process; dstVar; expr{; dstVar2; expr2; ...; dstVarN; exprN})
661 SET QUERY AND LOCK (lock)
396 SET QUERY DESTINATION (destinationType{; destinationObject})
395 SET QUERY LIMIT (limit)
623 SET REAL COMPARISON LEVEL (epsilon)
509 SET RESOURCE (resType; resID; resData{; resFile})
514 SET RESOURCE NAME (resType; resID; resName{; resFile})
516 SET RESOURCE PROPERTIES (resType; resID; resAttr{; resFile})
628 SET RGB COLORS ({*; }object; foregroundColor; backgroundColor{; altBackgrndColor})
537 SET SCREEN DEPTH (depth{; color{; screen}})
843 SET SCROLLBAR VISIBLE ({*; }object; horizontal; vertical)
507 SET STRING RESOURCE (resID; resData{; resFile})
601 SET TABLE TITLES (tableTitles; tableNumbers{; *})
505 SET TEXT RESOURCE (resID; resData{; resFile})
523 SET TEXT TO PASTEBOARD (text)
268 SET TIMEOUT (seconds)
645 SET TIMER (tickCount)
612 Set user properties (userID; name; startup; password; nbLogin; lastLogin{; memberships{;
groupOwner}}) → Number
603 SET VISIBLE ({*; }object; visible)
620 SET WEB DISPLAY LIMITS (numberRecords{; numberPages{; picRef}})
901 SET WEB SERVICE OPTION (option; value)
777 SET WEB SERVICE PARAMETER (name; value{; soapType})
622 SET WEB TIMEOUT (timeout)
444 SET WINDOW RECT (left; top; right; bottom{; window})
213 SET WINDOW TITLE (title{; window})
883 SET XSLT PARAMETER (paramName; paramValue)
543 Shift down → Boolean
841 SHOW LISTBOX GRID ({*; }object; horizontal; vertical)
431 SHOW MENU BAR
922 SHOW ON DISK (pathname{; *})

4D Language Reference 2379

325 SHOW PROCESS (process)
433 SHOW TOOL BAR
435 SHOW WINDOW {(window)}
17 Sin (number) → Number
274 Size of array (array) → Number
782 SOAP DECLARATION (variable; type; input_output{; alias})
229 SORT ARRAY (array{; array2; ...; arrayN}{; > or <})
391 SORT LIST (list{; > or <})
916 SORT LISTBOX COLUMNS ({*; }object; colNum; order{; colNum2; order2; ...; colNumN;
orderN})
900 SPELL CHECKING
824 SQL CANCEL LOAD
821 SQL End selection → Boolean
820 SQL EXECUTE (sqlStatement{; boundObj}{; boundObj2; ...; boundObjN})
881 SQL EXPORT (sourceTable{; project{; *}})
825 SQL GET LAST ERROR (errCode; errText; errODBC; errSQLServer)
819 SQL GET OPTION (option; value)
880 SQL IMPORT (sourceTable{; project{; *}})
822 SQL LOAD RECORD {(numRecords)}
817 SQL LOGIN{(dataEntry; userName; password{; *})}
872 SQL LOGOUT
818 SQL SET OPTION (option; value)
823 SQL SET PARAMETER (object; paramType)
539 Square root (number) → Number
962 START SQL SERVER
239 START TRANSACTION
617 START WEB SERVER
26 Std deviation (series) → Number
963 STOP SQL SERVER
618 STOP WEB SERVER
10 String (expression{; format}) → String
511 STRING LIST TO ARRAY (resID; strings{; resFile})
489 Structure file {(*)} → String
12 Substring (source; firstChar{; numChars}) → String
97 Subtotal (data{; pageBreak}) → Number
1 Sum (series) → Number
28 Sum squares (series) → Number
1054 SVG Find element ID by coordinates ({*;} pictObject; x; y) → String
1017 SVG EEXPORT TO PICTURE(elementRef; pictVar{; exportType})
487 System folder {(type)} → String

2380 4D Language Reference

T

252 Table (tableNum | aPtr) → Pointer | Number

256 Table name (tableNum | tablePtr) → String
19 Tan (number) → Number
486 Temporary folder → String
476 Test path name (pathname) → Number
652 Test semaphore (semaphore) → Boolean
554 TEXT TO BLOB (text; blob; textFormat{; offset | *})
458 Tickcount → Number
179 Time (timeString) → Time
180 Time string (seconds) → String
1016 Tool bar height → Longint
157 TRACE
961 Transaction level → Longint
988 TRANSFORM PICTURE (picture; operator{; param1{; param2{; param3{; param4}}}})
398 Trigger level → Number
399 TRIGGER PROPERTIES (triggerLevel; dbEvent; tableNum; recordNum)
214 True → Boolean
95 Trunc (number; places) → Number
1051 TRUNCATE TABLE {(aTable)}
295 Type (fieldVar) → Number

82 Undefined (variable) → Boolean

120 UNION (set1; set2; resultSet)
212 UNLOAD RECORD {(table)}
649 UNREGISTER CLIENT
13 Uppercase (aString; *) → String
205 USE CHARACTER SET (map | *{; mapInOut})
959 USE EXTERNAL DATABASE (sourceName{; user; password})
960 USE INTERNAL DATABASE
332 USE NAMED SELECTION (name)
118 USE SET (set)
338 User in group (user; group) → Boolean
849 USERS TO BLOB (users)

4D Language Reference 2381

V

946 Validate Digest Web Password (userName; password) → Boolean

638 Validate password (userID; password) → Boolean
240 VALIDATE TRANSACTION
532 VARIABLE TO BLOB (variable; blob{; offset | *})
635 VARIABLE TO VARIABLE (process; dstVar; srcVar{; dstVar2; srcVar2; ...; dstVarN; srcVarN})
27 Variance (series) → Number
1008 VERIFY CURRENT DATA FILE (objects; options; method{; tablesArray; fieldsArray})
939 VERIFY DATA FILE (structurePath; dataPath; objects; options; method{; tablesArray;
fieldsArray})
495 Version type → Long Integer
472 VOLUME ATTRIBUTES (volume; size; used; free)
471 VOLUME LIST (volumes)

1026 WA Back URL available ({*;}object) → Boolean

1049 WA Create URL history menu ({*;}object{; direction}) → MenuRef
1029 WA Execute JavaScript ({*;}object; jsCode) → String
1043 WA EXECUTE JAVASCRIPT FUNCTION ({*;}object; jsFunction; result|*{; param1;...;paramN})
1027 WA Forward URL available ({*;}object) → Boolean
1025 WA Get current URL ({*;}object) → String
1033 WA GET EXTERNAL LINKS FILTERS({*;}object; filtersArr; allowDenyArr)
1035 WA Get last filtered URL ({*;}object) → String
1034 WA GET LAST URL ERROR ({*;}object; url; description; errorCode)
1038 WA Get page content({*;}object) → String
1036 WA Get page title ({*;}object) → String
1042 WA GET PREFERENCE({*;}object; selector; value)
1031 WA GET URL FILTERS({*;}object; filtersArr; allowDenyArr)
1048 WA GET URL HISTORY({*;}object; urlsArr{; direction{; titlesArr}})
1021 WA OPEN BACK URL({*;}object)
1022 WA OPEN FORWARD URL({*;}object)
1020 WA OPEN URL({*;}object; url)
1023 WA REFRESH CURRENT URL ({*;}object)
1032 WA SET EXTERNAL LINKS FILTERS({*;}object; filtersArr; allowDenyArr)
1037 WA SET PAGE CONTENT ({*;}object; content; baseURL)
1039 WA SET PAGE TEXT LARGER ({*;}object)
1040 WA SET PAGE TEXT SMALLER({*;}object)

2382 4D Language Reference

1041 WA SET PREFERENCE({*;}object; selector; value)
1030 WA SET URL FILTERS({*;}object; filtersArr; allowDenyArr)
1024 WA STOP LOADING URL ({*;}object)
658 WEB CACHE STATISTICS (pages; hits; usage)
657 Web Context → Boolean
464 Win to Mac (text) → String
445 Window kind {(window)}
442 WINDOW LIST (windows{; *})
446 Window process {(window)} → Number
563 Windows Alt down → Boolean
562 Windows Ctrl down → Boolean
680 WRITE PICTURE FILE (fileName; picture{; codec})

25 Year of (date) → Number

4D Language Reference 2383

2384 4D Language Reference
Constants

4D Language Reference 2385

2386 4D Language Reference
4D Environment
Related command(s): Application type, Get 4D folder, GET MACRO PARAMETER, SET MACRO
PARAMETER, Version type.

Constant Type Value

4D Client Database Folder Long Integer 3

4D First Long Integer 6
4D Local Mode Long Integer 0
4D Remote Mode Long Integer 4
4D Server Long Integer 5
4D Volume Desktop Long Integer 1
Active 4D Folder Long Integer 0
Current Resources Folder Long Integer 6
Database Folder Long Integer 4
Database Folder Unix Syntax Long Integer 5
Demo Version Long Integer 1
Extras Folder Long Integer 2
Full method text Long Integer 1
Full Version Long Integer 0
Highlighted method text Long Integer 2
HTML Root Folder Long Integer 8
Licenses Folder Long Integer 1
Logs Folder Long Integer 7
_O_4D Desktop Long Integer 3
_O_4D Interpreted Desktop Long Integer 2

4D Language Reference 2387

ASCII Codes
Related command(s): Char, ON EVENT CALL.

Constant Type Value

ACK ASCII code Long Integer 6

At sign Long Integer 64
Backspace Long Integer 8
BEL ASCII code Long Integer 7
BS ASCII code Long Integer 8
CAN ASCII code Long Integer 24
Carriage return Long Integer 13
CR ASCII code Long Integer 13
DC1 ASCII code Long Integer 17
DC2 ASCII code Long Integer 18
DC3 ASCII code Long Integer 19
DC4 ASCII code Long Integer 20
DEL ASCII code Long Integer 127
DLE ASCII code Long Integer 16
Double quote Long Integer 34
EM ASCII code Long Integer 25
ENQ ASCII code Long Integer 5
Enter Long Integer 3
EOT ASCII code Long Integer 4
ESC ASCII code Long Integer 27
Escape Long Integer 27
ETB ASCII code Long Integer 23
ETX ASCII code Long Integer 3
FF ASCII code Long Integer 12
FS ASCII code Long Integer 28
GS ASCII code Long Integer 29
HT ASCII code Long Integer 9
LF ASCII code Long Integer 10
Line feed Long Integer 10
NAK ASCII code Long Integer 21
NBSP Long Integer 202
NUL ASCII code Long Integer 0
Period Long Integer 46
Quote Long Integer 39
RS ASCII code Long Integer 30
SI ASCII code Long Integer 15

2388 4D Language Reference

ASCII Codes (continued)
Constant Type Value

SO ASCII code Long Integer 14

SOH ASCII code Long Integer 1
SP ASCII code Long Integer 32
Space Long Integer 32
STX ASCII code Long Integer 2
SUB ASCII code Long Integer 26
SYN ASCII code Long Integer 22
Tab Long Integer 9
US ASCII code Long Integer 31
VT ASCII code Long Integer 11

4D Language Reference 2389

Backup and Restore
Related command(s): GET BACKUP INFORMATION, GET RESTORE INFORMATION.

Constant Type Value

Last Backup Date Long Integer 0

Last Backup Status Long Integer 2
Last Restore Date Long Integer 0
Last Restore Status Long Integer 2
Next Backup Date Long Integer 4

2390 4D Language Reference

BLOB
Related command(s): BLOB PROPERTIES, BLOB to integer, BLOB to longint, BLOB to real, BLOB to
text, INTEGER TO BLOB, LONGINT TO BLOB, REAL TO BLOB, TEXT TO BLOB.

Constant Type Value

Compact compression mode Long Integer 1

Extended real format Long Integer 1
Fast compression mode Long Integer 2
Is not compressed Long Integer 0
Mac C string Long Integer 0
Mac Pascal string Long Integer 1
Mac Text with length Long Integer 2
Mac Text without length Long Integer 3
Macintosh byte ordering Long Integer 1
Macintosh double real format Long Integer 2
Native byte ordering Long Integer 0
Native real format Long Integer 0
PC byte ordering Long Integer 2
PC double real format Long Integer 3
UTF8 C string Long Integer 4
UTF8 Text with length Long Integer 5
UTF8 Text without length Long Integer 6

4D Language Reference 2391

Colors
Related command(s): SET COLOR.

Constant Type Value

Black Long Integer 15

Blue Long Integer 6
Brown Long Integer 13
Dark Blue Long Integer 5
Dark Brown Long Integer 10
Dark Green Long Integer 9
Dark Grey Long Integer 11
Green Long Integer 8
Grey Long Integer 14
Light Blue Long Integer 7
Light Grey Long Integer 12
Orange Long Integer 2
Purple Long Integer 4
Red Long Integer 3
White Long Integer 0
Yellow Long Integer 1

2392 4D Language Reference

Communications
Related command(s): SET CHANNEL.

Constant Type Value

Data bits 5 Long Integer 0

Data bits 6 Long Integer 2048
Data bits 7 Long Integer 1024
Data bits 8 Long Integer 3072
MacOS Printer Port Long Integer 0
MacOS Serial Port Long Integer 1
Parity Even Long Integer 12288
Parity None Long Integer 0
Parity Odd Long Integer 4096
Protocol DTR Long Integer 30
Protocol None Long Integer 0
Protocol XONXOFF Long Integer 20
Speed 115200 Long Integer 1022
Speed 1200 Long Integer 94
Speed 1800 Long Integer 62
Speed 19200 Long Integer 4
Speed 230400 Long Integer 1021
Speed 2400 Long Integer 46
Speed 300 Long Integer 380
Speed 3600 Long Integer 30
Speed 4800 Long Integer 22
Speed 57600 Long Integer 0
Speed 600 Long Integer 189
Speed 7200 Long Integer 14
Speed 9600 Long Integer 10
Stop bits One Long Integer 16384
Stop bits One and a half Long Integer -32768
Stop bits Two Long Integer -16384

4D Language Reference 2393

Data file maintenance
Related command(s): Compact data file, VERIFY DATA FILE.

Constant Type Value

Create process Long Integer 32768

Do not compact index Long Integer 2
Do not create log file Long Integer 16384
Move to Replaced files folder Long Integer 4
New file Long Integer 0
New file dialog Long Integer 1
Renumber records Long Integer 1
Use selected file Long Integer 2
Verify All Long Integer 16
Verify Indexes Long Integer 8
Verify Records Long Integer 4

2394 4D Language Reference

Database Engine
Related command(s): Record number.

Constant Type Value

New record Long Integer -3

No current record Long Integer -1

4D Language Reference 2395

Database Events
Related command(s): Database event, TRIGGER PROPERTIES.

Constant Type Value

On Deleting Record Event Long Integer 3

On Saving Existing Record Event Long Integer 2
On Saving New Record Event Long Integer 1
_O_On Loading Record Event Long Integer 4

2396 4D Language Reference

Database Parameters
Related command(s): Get database parameter, SET DATABASE PARAMETER.

Constant Type Value

4D Local Mode Scheduler Long Integer 10

4D Remote Mode Scheduler Long Integer 12
4D Remote Mode Timeout Long Integer 14
4D Server Log Recording Long Integer 28
4D Server Scheduler Long Integer 11
4D Server Timeout Long Integer 13
Auto Synchro Resources Folder Long Integer 48
Cache writing mode Long Integer 26
Character set Long Integer 17
Client Character set Long Integer 24
Client HTTPS Port ID Long Integer 40
Client IP Address to listen Long Integer 23
Client Log Recording Long Integer 45
Client Max Concurrent Web Proc Long Integer 25
Client Max Web requests size Long Integer 21
Client Maximum Web Process Long Integer 20
Client Minimum Web Process Long Integer 19
Client Port ID Long Integer 22
Client Server Port ID Long Integer 35
Client Web Log Recording Long Integer 30
Database Cache Size Long Integer 9
Debug Log Recording Long Integer 34
HTTP Compression Level Long Integer 50
HTTP Compression Threshold Long Integer 51
HTTPS Port ID Long Integer 39
Idle Connections Timeout Long Integer 54
Index Compacting Long Integer 4
Invert Objects Long Integer 37
IP Address to listen Long Integer 16
Max Concurrent Web Processes Long Integer 18
Maximum Web Process Long Integer 7
Maximum Web requests size Long Integer 27
Minimum Web Process Long Integer 6
Order By Formula On Server Long Integer 47
Port ID Long Integer 15
QUERY BY FORMULA Joins Long Integer 49

4D Language Reference 2397

Database Parameters (continued)
Constant Type Value

Query By Formula On Server Long Integer 46

Real Display Precision Long Integer 32
Seq Access Optimization Long Integer 2
Seq Distinct Values Ratio Long Integer 3
Seq Order Ratio Long Integer 1
Seq Query Select Ratio Long Integer 5
SQL Autocommit Long Integer 43
SQL Engine Case Sensitivity Long Integer 44
Table Sequence Number Long Integer 31
TCP_NODELAY Long Integer 33
Temporary memory size Long Integer 42
Unicode mode Long Integer 41
Web Conversion Mode Long Integer 8
Web Log Recording Long Integer 29
WEDD Signature Long Integer 36

2398 4D Language Reference

Date Display Formats
Related command(s): Get format, SET FORMAT, String.

Constant Type Value

Blank if null date Long Integer 100

Internal date abbreviated Long Integer 6
Internal date long Long Integer 5
Internal date short Long Integer 7
Internal date short special Long Integer 4
ISO Date Long Integer 8
System date abbreviated Long Integer 2
System date long Long Integer 3
System date short Long Integer 1

4D Language Reference 2399

Days and Months
Related command(s): Day number, Month of.

Constant Type Value

April Long Integer 4

August Long Integer 8
December Long Integer 12
February Long Integer 2
Friday Long Integer 6
January Long Integer 1
July Long Integer 7
June Long Integer 6
March Long Integer 3
May Long Integer 5
Monday Long Integer 2
November Long Integer 11
October Long Integer 10
Saturday Long Integer 7
September Long Integer 9
Sunday Long Integer 1
Thursday Long Integer 5
Tuesday Long Integer 3
Wednesday Long Integer 4

2400 4D Language Reference

Dictionaries
Related command(s): SET DICTIONARY.

Constant Type Value

English Dictionary Long Integer 69632

French Dictionary Long Integer 262144
German Dictionary Long Integer 131584
Norwegian Dictionary Long Integer 589824
Spanish Dictionary Long Integer 196608

4D Language Reference 2401

Euro currencies
Related command(s): Euro converter.

Constant Type Value

Austrian Schilling String ATS

Belgian Franc String BEF
Deutschemark String DEM
Euro String EUR
Finnish Markka String FIM
French Franc String FRF
Greek Drachma String GRD
Irish Pound String IEP
Italian Lira String ITL
Luxembourg Franc String LUF
Netherlands Guilder String NLG
Portuguese Escudo String PTE
Spanish Peseta String ESP

2402 4D Language Reference

Events (Modifiers)
Related command(s): POST EVENT, POST KEY, SET MENU ITEM SHORTCUT.

Constant Type Value

Activate window bit Long Integer 0

Activate window mask Long Integer 1
Caps Lock key bit Long Integer 10
Caps Lock key mask Long Integer 1024
Command key bit Long Integer 8
Command key mask Long Integer 256
Control key bit Long Integer 12
Control key mask Long Integer 4096
Mouse button bit Long Integer 7
Mouse button mask Long Integer 128
Option key bit Long Integer 11
Option key mask Long Integer 2048
Right control key bit Long Integer 15
Right control key mask Long Integer 32768
Right option key bit Long Integer 14
Right option key mask Long Integer 16384
Right shift key bit Long Integer 13
Right shift key mask Long Integer 8192
Shift key bit Long Integer 9
Shift key mask Long Integer 512

4D Language Reference 2403

Events (What)
Related command(s): POST EVENT.

Constant Type Value

Activate event Long Integer 8

Auto key event Long Integer 5
Disk event Long Integer 7
Key down event Long Integer 3
Key up event Long Integer 4
Mouse down event Long Integer 1
Mouse up event Long Integer 2
Null event Long Integer 0
Operating system event Long Integer 15
Update event Long Integer 6

2404 4D Language Reference

Expressions
Related command(s): RECEIVE BUFFER, RECEIVE PACKET.

Constant Type Value

MAXINT Long Integer 32767

MAXLONG Long Integer 2147483647
MAXTEXTLENBEFOREV11 Long Integer 32000

4D Language Reference 2405

Field and Variable Types
Related command(s): GET FIELD PROPERTIES, INSERT LISTBOX COLUMN FORMULA, SOAP
DECLARATION, Type.

Constant Type Value

Array 2D Long Integer 13

Boolean array Long Integer 22
Date array Long Integer 17
Integer array Long Integer 15
Is Alpha Field Long Integer 0
Is BLOB Long Integer 30
Is Boolean Long Integer 6
Is Date Long Integer 4
Is Float Long Integer 35
Is Integer Long Integer 8
Is Integer 64 bits Long Integer 25
Is LongInt Long Integer 9
Is Picture Long Integer 3
Is Pointer Long Integer 23
Is Real Long Integer 1
Is String Var Long Integer 24
Is Subtable Long Integer 7
Is Text Long Integer 2
Is Time Long Integer 11
Is Undefined Long Integer 5
LongInt array Long Integer 16
Picture array Long Integer 19
Pointer array Long Integer 20
Real array Long Integer 14
String array Long Integer 21
Text array Long Integer 18

2406 4D Language Reference

Find window
Related command(s): Find window.

Constant Type Value

In contents Long Integer 3

In drag Long Integer 4
In go away Long Integer 6
In grow Long Integer 5
In menu bar Long Integer 1
In system window Long Integer 2
In zoom box Long Integer 8

4D Language Reference 2407

Font Styles
Related command(s): FONT STYLE, Get menu item style, SET LIST ITEM PROPERTIES, SET MENU
ITEM STYLE.

Constant Type Value

Bold Long Integer 1

Italic Long Integer 2
Plain Long Integer 0
Underline Long Integer 4
_O_Condensed Long Integer 32
_O_Extended Long Integer 64
_O_Outline Long Integer 8
_O_Shadow Long Integer 16

2408 4D Language Reference

Form area
Related command(s): Get print marker, Print form, SET PRINT MARKER.

Constant Type Value

Form Break0 Long Integer 300

Form Break1 Long Integer 301
Form Break2 Long Integer 302
Form Break3 Long Integer 303
Form Break4 Long Integer 304
Form Break5 Long Integer 305
Form Break6 Long Integer 306
Form Break7 Long Integer 307
Form Break8 Long Integer 308
Form Break9 Long Integer 309
Form Detail Long Integer 0
Form Footer Long Integer 100
Form Header Long Integer 200
Form Header1 Long Integer 201
Form Header10 Long Integer 210
Form Header2 Long Integer 202
Form Header3 Long Integer 203
Form Header4 Long Integer 204
Form Header5 Long Integer 205
Form Header6 Long Integer 206
Form Header7 Long Integer 207
Form Header8 Long Integer 208
Form Header9 Long Integer 209

4D Language Reference 2409

Form Events
Related command(s): Form event.

Constant Type Value

On Activate Long Integer 11

On After Edit Long Integer 45
On After Keystroke Long Integer 28
On After Sort Long Integer 30
On Arrow Click Long Integer 38
On Before Data Entry Long Integer 41
On Before Keystroke Long Integer 17
On Begin Drag Over Long Integer 46
On Begin URL Loading Long Integer 47
On Clicked Long Integer 4
On Close Box Long Integer 22
On Close Detail Long Integer 26
On Collapse Long Integer 44
On Column Moved Long Integer 32
On Column Resize Long Integer 33
On Data Change Long Integer 20
On Deactivate Long Integer 12
On Display Detail Long Integer 8
On Double Clicked Long Integer 13
On Drag Over Long Integer 21
On Drop Long Integer 16
On End URL Loading Long Integer 49
On Expand Long Integer 43
On Getting Focus Long Integer 15
On Header Long Integer 5
On Header Click Long Integer 42
On Load Long Integer 1
On Load Record Long Integer 40
On Long Click Long Integer 39
On Losing Focus Long Integer 14
On Menu Selected Long Integer 18
On Mouse Enter Long Integer 35
On Mouse Leave Long Integer 36
On Mouse Move Long Integer 37
On Open Detail Long Integer 25
On Open External Link Long Integer 52

2410 4D Language Reference

Form Events (continued)
Constant Type Value

On Outside Call Long Integer 10

On Plug in Area Long Integer 19
On Printing Break Long Integer 6
On Printing Detail Long Integer 23
On Printing Footer Long Integer 7
On Resize Long Integer 29
On Row Moved Long Integer 34
On Selection Change Long Integer 31
On Timer Long Integer 27
On Unload Long Integer 24
On URL Filtering Long Integer 51
On URL Loading Error Long Integer 50
On URL Resource Loading Long Integer 48
On Validate Long Integer 3
On Window Opening Denied Long Integer 53

4D Language Reference 2411

Form Parameters
Related command(s): DISPLAY SELECTION, GET FORM PARAMETER, MODIFY SELECTION.

Constant Type Value

Multiple Selection Long Integer 2

No Selection Long Integer 0
NonInverted Objects Long Integer 0
Single Selection Long Integer 1

2412 4D Language Reference

Function Keys
Related command(s): ON EVENT CALL.

Constant Type Value

Backspace Key Long Integer 8

Down Arrow Key Long Integer 31
End Key Long Integer 4
Enter Key Long Integer 3
Escape Key Long Integer 27
F1 Key Long Integer -122
F10 Key Long Integer -109
F11 Key Long Integer -103
F12 Key Long Integer -111
F13 Key Long Integer -105
F14 Key Long Integer -107
F15 Key Long Integer -113
F2 Key Long Integer -120
F3 Key Long Integer -99
F4 Key Long Integer -118
F5 Key Long Integer -96
F6 Key Long Integer -97
F7 Key Long Integer -98
F8 Key Long Integer -100
F9 Key Long Integer -101
Help Key Long Integer 5
Home Key Long Integer 1
Left Arrow Key Long Integer 28
Page Down Key Long Integer 12
Page Up Key Long Integer 11
Return Key Long Integer 13
Right Arrow Key Long Integer 29
Tab Key Long Integer 9
Up Arrow Key Long Integer 30

4D Language Reference 2413

Hierarchical Lists
Related command(s): GET LIST PROPERTIES, SET LIST PROPERTIES.

Constant Type Value

Additional text String 4D_additional_text

Ala Macintosh Long Integer 1
Ala Windows Long Integer 2
Macintosh node Long Integer 860
Use PicRef Long Integer 131072
Use PICT resource Long Integer 65536
Windows node Long Integer 138

2414 4D Language Reference

Index Type
Related command(s): CREATE INDEX, SET INDEX.

Constant Type Value

Cluster BTree Index Long Integer 3

Default Index Type Long Integer 0
Keywords Index Long Integer -1
Standard BTree Index Long Integer 1

4D Language Reference 2415

Is license available
Related command(s): Get plugin access, Is license available, PLUGIN LIST, SET PLUGIN ACCESS.

Constant Type Value

4D Client SOAP License Long Integer 808465465

4D Client Web License Long Integer 808465209
4D Draw License Long Integer 808464694
4D for ADO License Long Integer 808465714
4D for MySQL License Long Integer 808465712
4D for OCI License Long Integer 808465208
4D for PostgreSQL License Long Integer 808465713
4D for Sybase License Long Integer 808465715
4D ODBC Pro License Long Integer 808464946
4D SOAP License Long Integer 808465464
4D SOAP Local License Long Integer 808531000
4D SOAP One Connection Licence Long Integer 825242680
4D SQL Server License Long Integer 808464949
4D SQL Server Local License 808530485
4D SQL Server One Conn. Licence Long Integer 825242165
4D View License Long Integer 808465207
4D Web License Long Integer 808464945
4D Web Local License Long Integer 808530481
4D Web One Connection License Long Integer 825242161
4D Write License Long Integer 808464697

2416 4D Language Reference

ISO Latin Character Entities
Constant Type Value

ISO L1 a acute String &aacute;

ISO L1 a circumflex String &acirc;
ISO L1 a grave String &agrave;
ISO L1 a ring String &aring;
ISO L1 a tilde String &atilde;
ISO L1 a umlaut String &auml;
ISO L1 ae ligature String &aelig;
ISO L1 Ampersand String &amp;
ISO L1 c cedilla String &ccedil;
ISO L1 Cap A acute String &Aacute;
ISO L1 Cap A circumflex String &Acirc;
ISO L1 Cap A grave String &Agrave;
ISO L1 Cap A ring String &Aring;
ISO L1 Cap A tilde String &Atilde;
ISO L1 Cap A umlaut String &Auml;
ISO L1 Cap AE ligature String &AELig;
ISO L1 Cap C cedilla String &Ccedil;
ISO L1 Cap E acute String &Eacute;
ISO L1 Cap E circumflex String &Ecirc;
ISO L1 Cap E grave String &Egrave;
ISO L1 Cap E umlaut String &Euml;
ISO L1 Cap Eth Icelandic String &ETH;
ISO L1 Cap I acute String &Iacute;
ISO L1 Cap I circumflex String &Icirc;
ISO L1 Cap I grave String &Igrave;
ISO L1 Cap I umlaut String &Iuml;
ISO L1 Cap N tilde String &Ntilde;
ISO L1 Cap O acute String &Oacute;
ISO L1 Cap O circumflex String &Ocirc;
ISO L1 Cap O grave String &Ograve;
ISO L1 Cap O slash String &Oslash;
ISO L1 Cap O tilde String &Otilde;
ISO L1 Cap O umlaut String &Ouml;
ISO L1 Cap THORN Icelandic String &THORN;
ISO L1 Cap U acute String &Uacute;
ISO L1 Cap U circumflex String &Ucirc;
ISO L1 Cap U grave String &Ugrave;
ISO L1 Cap U umlaut String &Uuml;
ISO L1 Cap Y acute String &Yacute;

4D Language Reference 2417

ISO Latin Character Entities (continued)
Constant Type Value

ISO L1 Copyright String &copy;

ISO L1 e acute String &eacute;
ISO L1 e circumflex String &ecirc;
ISO L1 e grave String &egrave;
ISO L1 e umlaut String &euml;
ISO L1 eth Icelandic String &eth;
ISO L1 Greater than String &gt;
ISO L1 i acute String &iacute;
ISO L1 i circumflex String &icirc;
ISO L1 i grave String &igrave;
ISO L1 i umlaut String &iuml;
ISO L1 Less than String &lt;
ISO L1 n tilde String &ntilde;
ISO L1 o acute String &oacute;
ISO L1 o circumflex String &ocirc;
ISO L1 o grave String &ograve;
ISO L1 o slash String &oslash;
ISO L1 o tilde String &otilde;
ISO L1 o umlaut String &ouml;
ISO L1 Quotation mark String &quot;
ISO L1 Registered String &reg;
ISO L1 sharp s German String &szlig;
ISO L1 thorn Icelandic String &thorn;
ISO L1 u acute String &uacute;
ISO L1 u circumflex String &ucirc;
ISO L1 u grave String &ugrave;
ISO L1 u umlaut String &uuml;
ISO L1 y acute String &yacute;
ISO L1 y umlaut String &yuml;

2418 4D Language Reference

List box
Related command(s): Get listbox information, SELECT LISTBOX ROW.

Constant Type Value

Add to listbox selection Long Integer 1

Display listbox header Long Integer 0
Display listbox hor scrollbar Long Integer 2
Display listbox ver scrollbar Long Integer 4
Listbox header height Long Integer 1
Listbox hor scrollbar height Long Integer 3
Listbox ver scrollbar width Long Integer 5
Position listbox hor scrollbar Long Integer 6
Position listbox ver scrollbar Long Integer 7
Remove from listbox selection Long Integer 2
Replace listbox selection Long Integer 0

4D Language Reference 2419

Log Events
Related command(s): LOG EVENT.

Constant Type Value

Error Message Long Integer 2

Information Message Long Integer 0
Into 4D Commands Log Long Integer 3
Into 4D Debug Message Long Integer 1
Into 4D Request Log Long Integer 2
Into Windows Log Events Long Integer 0
Warning Message Long Integer 1

2420 4D Language Reference

Math
Related command(s): Arctan, Cos, Sin, Tan.

Constant Type Value

Degree Real 0.0174532925199432958

e number Real 2.71828182845904524
Pi Real 3.141592653589793239
Radian Real 57.29577951308232088

4D Language Reference 2421

Menu item properties
Constant Type Value

Access Privileges String 4D_access_group

Associated Standard Action String 4D_standard_action
Start a New Process String 4D_start_new_process

2422 4D Language Reference

Object alignment
Related command(s): Get alignment, SET ALIGNMENT.

Constant Type Value

Align default Long Integer 1

Align left Long Integer 2
Align right Long Integer 4
Center Long Integer 3

4D Language Reference 2423

Open form window
Related command(s): Open form window.

Constant Type Value

At the Bottom Long Integer 393216

At the Top Long Integer 327680
Compositing Mode form window Long Integer 4096
Horizontally Centered Long Integer 65536
Modal form dialog box Long Integer 1
Movable form dialog box Long Integer 5
On the Left Long Integer 131072
On the Right Long Integer 196608
Palette form window Long Integer 1984
Plain form window Long Integer 8
Pop up form window Long Integer 32
Sheet form window Long Integer 33
Vertically Centered Long Integer 262144

2424 4D Language Reference

Open window
Related command(s): Open external window, Open window.

Constant Type Value

Alternate dialog box Long Integer 3

Compositing Mode 4096
Has grow box Long Integer 4
Has highlight Long Integer 1
Has window title Long Integer 2
Has zoom box Long Integer 8
Metal Look Long Integer 2048
Modal dialog box Long Integer 1
Movable dialog box Long Integer 5
Palette window Long Integer 1984
Plain dialog box Long Integer 2
Plain fixed size window Long Integer 4
Plain no zoom box window Long Integer 0
Plain window Long Integer 8
Pop up window Long Integer 32
Resizeable sheet window Long Integer 34
Round corner window Long Integer 16
Sheet window Long Integer 33

4D Language Reference 2425

Pasteboard
Related command(s): APPEND DATA TO PASTEBOARD, GET PASTEBOARD DATA, Pasteboard data
size.

Constant Type Value

No such data in pasteboard Long Integer -102

Picture data String PICT
Text data String TEXT

2426 4D Language Reference

Picture Compression
Related command(s): COMPRESS PICTURE, COMPRESS PICTURE FILE, LOAD COMPRESS PICTURE
FROM FILE.

Constant Type Value

QT Animation compressor String rle

QT Compact video compressor String cdvc
QT Graphics compressor String smc
QT Photo compressor String jpeg
QT Raw compressor String raw
QT Video compressor String rpza

4D Language Reference 2427

Picture Display Formats
Related command(s): CREATE THUMBNAIL, Get format, SET FORMAT.

Constant Type Value

On Background Long Integer 3

Replicated Long Integer 7
Scaled to Fit Long Integer 2
Scaled to fit prop centered Long Integer 6
Scaled to fit proportional Long Integer 5
Truncated Centered Long Integer 1
Truncated non Centered Long Integer 4

2428 4D Language Reference

Picture Transformation
Constant Type Value

Crop Long Integer 100

Fade to grey scale Long Integer 101
Flip horizontally Long Integer 3
Flip vertically Long Integer 4
Horizontal concatenation Long Integer 1
Reset Long Integer 0
Scale Long Integer 1
Superimposition Long Integer 3
Translate Long Integer 2
Vertical concatenation Long Integer 2

4D Language Reference 2429

Platform Interface
Related command(s): Get platform interface, SET PLATFORM INTERFACE.

Constant Type Value

Automatic Platform Long Integer -1

Mac OS 7 Long Integer 0
Mac OS 9 Long Integer 3
Mac Theme Long Integer 4
Windows 3.11, NT 3.51 Long Integer 1
Windows 9x Long Integer 2

2430 4D Language Reference

Platform Properties
Related command(s): PLATFORM PROPERTIES.

Constant Type Value

Intel Compatible Long Integer 586

Mac OS Long Integer 2
Power PC Long Integer 406
Windows Long Integer 3
_O_INTEL 386 Long Integer 386
_O_INTEL 486 Long Integer 486
_O_Macintosh 68K Long Integer 1
_O_PowerPC 601 Long Integer 601
_O_PowerPC 603 Long Integer 603
_O_PowerPC 604 Long Integer 604
_O_PowerPC G3 Long Integer 510

4D Language Reference 2431

Print options
Related command(s): GET PRINT OPTION, PRINT OPTION VALUES, SET PRINT OPTION.

Constant Type Value

Color option Long Integer 8

Destination option Long Integer 9
Double sided option Long Integer 11
Hide printing progress option Long Integer 14
Mac spool file format option Long Integer 13
Number of copies option Long Integer 4
Orientation option Long Integer 2
Paper option Long Integer 1
Paper source option Long Integer 5
Scale option Long Integer 3
Spooler document name option Long Integer 12

2432 4D Language Reference

Process state
Related command(s): PROCESS PROPERTIES, Process state.

Constant Type Value

Aborted Long Integer -1

Delayed Long Integer 1
Does not exist Long Integer -100
Executing Long Integer 0
Hidden modal dialog Long Integer 6
Paused Long Integer 5
Waiting for input output Long Integer 3
Waiting for internal flag Long Integer 4
Waiting for user event Long Integer 2

4D Language Reference 2433

Process Type
Related command(s): PROCESS PROPERTIES.

Constant Type Value

Apple Event Manager Long Integer -7

Backup Process Long Integer -19
Cache Manager Long Integer -4
Client Manager Process Long Integer -31
Created from execution dialog Long Integer 3
Created from Menu Command Long Integer 2
Design Process Long Integer -2
Event Manager Long Integer -8
Execute on Client Process Long Integer -14
Execute on Server Process Long Integer 1
External Task Long Integer -9
Indexing Process Long Integer -5
Internal 4D Server Process Long Integer -18
Internal Timer Process Long Integer -25
Log File Process Long Integer -20
Main Process Long Integer -1
Method editor macro Process Long Integer -17
Monitor Process Long Integer -26
MSC Process Long Integer -22
None Long Integer 0
On Exit Process Long Integer -16
Other 4D Process Long Integer -10
Other User Process Long Integer 4
Process Server Interface Long Integer -15
Restore Process Long Integer -21
Serial Port Manager Long Integer -6
SQL Method Execution Process Long Integer -24
Web Process on 4D Client Long Integer -12
Web Process with Context Long Integer -11
Web Process with no Context Long Integer -3
Web server Process Long Integer -13

2434 4D Language Reference

QR Area Properties
Related command(s): QR Get area property, QR SET AREA PROPERTY.

Constant Type Value

qr view color toolbar Long Integer 5

qr view column toolbar Long Integer 6
qr view contextual menus Long Integer 7
qr view menubar Long Integer 1
qr view operators toolbar Long Integer 4
qr view standard toolbar Long Integer 2
qr view style toolbar Long Integer 3

4D Language Reference 2435

QR Borders
Related command(s): QR GET BORDERS.

Constant Type Value

qr bottom border Long Integer 8

qr inside horizontal border Long Integer 32
qr inside vertical border Long Integer 16
qr left border Long Integer 1
qr right border Long Integer 4
qr top border Long Integer 2

2436 4D Language Reference

QR Commands
Related command(s): QR EXECUTE COMMAND, QR Get command status.

Constant Type Value

qr cmd 4D View destination Long Integer 2503

qr cmd add column Long Integer 2608
qr cmd alt back color palette Long Integer 1004
qr cmd automatic width Long Integer 2605
qr cmd average Long Integer 507
qr cmd back color palette Long Integer 1003
qr cmd back colors toolbar Long Integer 2052
qr cmd bold Long Integer 500
qr cmd borders Long Integer 2609
qr cmd center justified Long Integer 504
qr cmd columns toolbar Long Integer 2054
qr cmd count Long Integer 510
qr cmd default justified Long Integer 512
qr cmd delete column Long Integer 2601
qr cmd disk file destination Long Integer 2501
qr cmd edit column Long Integer 2603
qr cmd font color palette Long Integer 1002
qr cmd font dropdown Long Integer 1000
qr cmd format Long Integer 2606
qr cmd generate Long Integer 2008
qr cmd graph destination Long Integer 2502
qr cmd header and footer Long Integer 2005
qr cmd hide column Long Integer 2602
qr cmd hide line Long Integer 2607
qr cmd HTML file destination Long Integer 2504
qr cmd insert column Long Integer 2600
qr cmd italic Long Integer 501
qr cmd left justified Long Integer 503
qr cmd max Long Integer 509
qr cmd min Long Integer 508
qr cmd move left Long Integer 3002
qr cmd move right Long Integer 3003
qr cmd new Long Integer 2000
qr cmd open Long Integer 2001
qr cmd operators toolbar Long Integer 2051
qr cmd page setup Long Integer 2006

4D Language Reference 2437

QR Commands (continued)
Constant Type Value

qr cmd plain Long Integer 511

qr cmd presentation Long Integer 2611
qr cmd print preview Long Integer 2007
qr cmd printer destination Long Integer 2500
qr cmd repeated values Long Integer 2604
qr cmd revert to save Long Integer 2004
qr cmd right justified Long Integer 505
qr cmd save Long Integer 2002
qr cmd save as Long Integer 2003
qr cmd standard deviation Long Integer 513
qr cmd standard toolbar Long Integer 2053
qr cmd style toolbar Long Integer 2050
qr cmd sum Long Integer 506
qr cmd totals spacing Long Integer 2610
qr cmd underline Long Integer 502

2438 4D Language Reference

QR Document Properties
Related command(s): QR Get document property, QR SET DOCUMENT PROPERTY.

Constant Type Value

qr printing dialog Long Integer 1

qr unit Long Integer 2

4D Language Reference 2439

QR Operators
Related command(s): QR GET TOTALS DATA, QR SET TOTALS DATA.

Constant Type Value

qr average Long Integer 2

qr count Long Integer 16
qr max Long Integer 8
qr min Long Integer 4
qr standard deviation Long Integer 32
qr sum Long Integer 1

2440 4D Language Reference

QR Output Destination
Related command(s): QR GET DESTINATION, QR SET DESTINATION.

Constant Type Value

qr 4D Chart area Long Integer 4

qr 4D View area Long Integer 3
qr HTML file Long Integer 5
qr printer Long Integer 1
qr text file Long Integer 2

4D Language Reference 2441

QR Report Types
Related command(s): QR Get report kind, QR SET REPORT KIND.

Constant Type Value

qr cross report Long Integer 2

qr list report Long Integer 1

2442 4D Language Reference

QR Rows for Properties
Related command(s): QR GET BORDERS, QR Get info row, QR SET BORDERS, QR SET INFO ROW, QR
SET TEXT PROPERTY.

Constant Type Value

qr detail Long Integer -2

qr footer Long Integer -5
qr grand total Long Integer -3
qr header Long Integer -4
qr title Long Integer -1

4D Language Reference 2443

QR Text Properties
Related command(s): QR Get text property, QR SET TEXT PROPERTY.

Constant Type Value

qr alternate background color Long Integer 9

qr background color Long Integer 8
qr bold Long Integer 3
qr font Long Integer 1
qr font size Long Integer 2
qr italic Long Integer 4
qr justification Long Integer 7
qr text color Long Integer 6
qr underline Long Integer 5

2444 4D Language Reference

Queries
Related command(s): SET QUERY DESTINATION.

Constant Type Value

Description in Text Format Long Integer 0

Description in XML Format Long Integer 1
Into current selection Long Integer 0
Into named selection Long Integer 2
Into set Long Integer 1
Into variable Long Integer 3

4D Language Reference 2445

Relations
Related command(s): GET FIELD RELATION, SET FIELD RELATION.

Constant Type Value

Automatic Long Integer 3

Do not modify Long Integer 0
Manual Long Integer 2
No relation Long Integer 0
Structure configuration Long Integer 1

2446 4D Language Reference

Resources Properties
Related command(s): Get resource properties, SET RESOURCE PROPERTIES.

Constant Type Value

Changed resource bit Long Integer 1

Changed resource mask Long Integer 2
Locked resource bit Long Integer 4
Locked resource mask Long Integer 16
Preloaded resource bit Long Integer 2
Preloaded resource mask Long Integer 4
Protected resource bit Long Integer 3
Protected resource mask Long Integer 8
Purgeable resource bit Long Integer 5
Purgeable resource mask Long Integer 32
System heap resource bit Long Integer 6
System heap resource mask Long Integer 64

4D Language Reference 2447

SCREEN DEPTH
Related command(s): SCREEN DEPTH, SET SCREEN DEPTH.

Constant Type Value

Black and white Long Integer 0

Four colors Long Integer 2
Is color Long Integer 1
Is gray scale Long Integer 0
Millions of colors 24 bit Long Integer 24
Millions of colors 32 bit Long Integer 32
Sixteen colors Long Integer 4
Thousands of colors Long Integer 16
Two fifty six colors Long Integer 8

2448 4D Language Reference

SET RGB COLORS
Related command(s): SET RGB COLORS.

Constant Type Value

Default background color Long Integer -2

Default dark shadow color Long Integer -3
Default foreground color Long Integer -1
Default light shadow color Long Integer -4
Disable highlight item color Long Integer -11
Highlight menu background color Long Integer -9
Highlight menu text color Long Integer -10
Highlight text background color Long Integer -7
Highlight text color Long Integer -8

4D Language Reference 2449

SQL
Related command(s): GET DATA SOURCE LIST, SQL GET OPTION, SQL LOAD RECORD, SQL LOGIN,
SQL SET OPTION, SQL SET PARAMETER.

Constant Type Value

SQL All Records Long Integer -1

SQL Asynchronous Long Integer 1
SQL Charset Long Integer 100
SQL Connection Timeout Long Integer 5
SQL Max Data Length Long Integer 3
SQL Max Rows Long Integer 2
SQL Param In Long Integer 1
SQL Param In Out Long Integer 2
SQL Param Out Long Integer 4
SQL Query Timeout Long Integer 4
SQL_INTERNAL String ;DB4D_SQL_LOCAL;
System Data Source Long Integer 2
User Data Source Long Integer 1

2450 4D Language Reference

Standard System Signatures
The Standard System Signatures are 4-character strings designated standard file types, resource
types, standard data types stored into the Clipboard and so on.

Related command(s): APPEND DATA TO PASTEBOARD, GET PASTEBOARD DATA, Get resource
properties, Pasteboard data size, SET RESOURCE PROPERTIES.

Constant Type Value

Picture Document String PICT

Text Document String TEXT
Windows MIDI Document String MID
Windows Sound Document String WAV
Windows Video Document String AVI

4D Language Reference 2451

System Documents
Related command(s): Open document, Select document, Test path name.

Constant Type Value

Alias selection Long Integer 8

Get Pathname Long Integer 3
Is a directory Long Integer 0
Is a document Long Integer 1
Multiple files Long Integer 1
Package open Long Integer 2
Package selection Long Integer 4
Read and Write Long Integer 0
Read Mode Long Integer 2
Use sheet window Long Integer 16
Write Mode Long Integer 1

2452 4D Language Reference

System Folder
Related command(s): System folder.

Constant Type Value

Applications or Program Files Long Integer 16

Desktop Long Integer 15
Favorites Win Long Integer 14
Fonts Long Integer 1
Start Menu Win_All Long Integer 8
Start Menu Win_User Long Integer 9
Startup Win_All Long Integer 4
Startup Win_User Long Integer 5
System Long Integer 0
System Win Long Integer 12
System32 Win Long Integer 13
User Preferences_All Long Integer 2
User Preferences_User Long Integer 3
_O_Mac Control Panels Long Integer 11
_O_Mac Extensions Long Integer 10
_O_Mac Shutdown Items_All Long Integer 6
_O_Mac Shutdown Items_User Long Integer 7

4D Language Reference 2453

System format
Constant Type Value

Currency symbol Long Integer 2

Date separator Long Integer 13
Decimal separator Long Integer 0
Short date day position Long Integer 15
Short date month position Long Integer 16
Short date year position Long Integer 17
System date long pattern Long Integer 8
System date medium pattern Long Integer 7
System date short pattern Long Integer 6
System time AM label Long Integer 18
System time long pattern Long Integer 5
System time medium pattern Long Integer 4
System time PM label Long Integer 19
System time short pattern Long Integer 3
Thousand separator Long Integer 1
Time separator Long Integer 14

2454 4D Language Reference

TCP Port Numbers
Related command(s): Get database parameter, SET DATABASE PARAMETER.

Constant Type Value

TCP Authentication Long Integer 113

TCP DNS Long Integer 53
TCP Finger Long Integer 79
TCP FTP Control Long Integer 21
TCP FTP Data Long Integer 20
TCP Gopher Long Integer 70
TCP HTTP WWW Long Integer 80
TCP IMAP3 Long Integer 220
TCP Kerberos Long Integer 88
TCP KLogin Long Integer 543
TCP Nickname Long Integer 43
TCP NNTP Long Integer 119
TCP NTalk Long Integer 518
TCP NTP Long Integer 123
TCP PMCP Long Integer 1643
TCP PMD Long Integer 1642
TCP POP3 Long Integer 110
TCP Printer Long Integer 515
TCP RADACCT Long Integer 1646
TCP RADIUS Long Integer 1645
TCP Remote Cmd Long Integer 514
TCP Remote Exec Long Integer 512
TCP Remote Login Long Integer 513
TCP Router Long Integer 520
TCP SMTP Long Integer 25
TCP SNMP Long Integer 161
TCP SNMPTRAP Long Integer 162
TCP SUN RPC Long Integer 111
TCP Talk Long Integer 517
TCP Telnet Long Integer 23
TCP TFTP Long Integer 69
TCP UUCP Long Integer 540
TCP UUCP RLOGIN Long Integer 541

4D Language Reference 2455

Time Display Formats
Related command(s): Get format, SET FORMAT, String.

Constant Type Value

Blank if null time Long Integer 100

HH MM Long Integer 2
HH MM AM PM Long Integer 5
HH MM SS Long Integer 1
Hour Min Long Integer 4
Hour Min Sec Long Integer 3
ISO Time Long Integer 8
Min Sec Long Integer 7
MM SS Long Integer 6
System time long Long Integer 11
System time long abbreviated Long Integer 10
System time short Long Integer 9

2456 4D Language Reference

Value for Associated Standard Action
Related command(s): GET MENU ITEM PROPERTY, SET MENU ITEM PROPERTY.

Constant Type Value

Accept Action Long Integer 2

Add subrecord Action Long Integer 14
Cancel Action Long Integer 1
Clear Action Long Integer 21
Copy Action Long Integer 19
Cut Action Long Integer 18
Delete record Action Long Integer 7
Delete subrecord Action Long Integer 13
Edit subrecord Action Long Integer 12
First page Action Long Integer 10
First record Action Long Integer 5
Last page Action Long Integer 11
Last record Action Long Integer 6
MSC Action Long Integer 36
Next page Action Long Integer 8
Next record Action Long Integer 3
No Action Long Integer 0
Paste Action Long Integer 20
Preferences Action Long Integer 32
Previous page action Long Integer 9
Previous record Action Long Integer 4
Quit Action Long Integer 27
Redo Action Long Integer 31
Return to Design mode Long Integer 35
Select all Action Long Integer 22
Show Clipboard Action Long Integer 23
Test Application Action Long Integer 26
Undo Action Long Integer 17

4D Language Reference 2457

Web Area
Related command(s): WA Create URL history menu, WA GET PREFERENCE, WA GET URL
HISTORY, WA SET PREFERENCE.

Constant Type Value

wa enable contextual menu Long Integer 4

wa enable Java applets Long Integer 1
wa enable JavaScript Long Integer 2
wa enable plugins Long Integer 3
wa next URLs Long Integer 1
wa previous URLs Long Integer 0

2458 4D Language Reference

Web Services (Client)
Related command(s): CALL WEB SERVICE, Get Web Service error info, SET WEB SERVICE OPTION.

Constant Type Value

Web Service Deflate compression Long Integer 1

Web Service Detailed Message Long Integer 1
Web Service display auth dialog Long Integer 4
Web Service Dynamic Long Integer 0
Web Service Error Code Long Integer 0
Web Service Fault Actor Long Integer 3
Web Service HTTP Compression Long Integer 6
Web Service HTTP Error code Long Integer 2
Web Service HTTP Timeout Long Integer 1
Web Service Manual Long Integer 3
Web Service Manual In Long Integer 1
Web Service Manual Out Long Integer 2
Web Service reset auth settings Long Integer 5
Web Service SOAP Header Long Integer 2
Web Service SOAP Version Long Integer 3
Web Service SOAP_1_1 Long Integer 0
Web Service SOAP_1_2 Long Integer 1

4D Language Reference 2459

Web Services (Server)
Related command(s): Get SOAP info, SEND SOAP FAULT, SOAP DECLARATION.

Constant Type Value

SOAP Client Fault Long Integer 1

SOAP Input Long Integer 1
SOAP Method Name Long Integer 1
SOAP Output Long Integer 2
SOAP Server Fault Long Integer 2
SOAP Service Name Long Integer 2

2460 4D Language Reference

Window kind
Related command(s): Window kind.

Constant Type Value

External window Long Integer 5

Floating window Long Integer 14
Modal dialog Long Integer 9
Regular window Long Integer 8

4D Language Reference 2461

XML
Related command(s): DOM Get XML information, SAX Get XML node, SVG EXPORT TO PICTURE.

Constant Type Value

Copy XML Data Source Long Integer 1

DOCTYPE Name Long Integer 3
Document URI Long Integer 6
Encoding Long Integer 4
Get XML Data Source Long Integer 0
Own XML Data Source Long Integer 2
PUBLIC ID Long Integer 1
SYSTEM ID Long Integer 2
Version Long Integer 5
XML CDATA Long Integer 7
XML Comment Long Integer 2
XML DATA Long Integer 6
XML End Document Long Integer 9
XML End Element Long Integer 5
XML Entity Long Integer 8
XML Processing Instruction Long Integer 3
XML Start Document Long Integer 1
XML Start Element Long Integer 4

2462 4D Language Reference

Command Index
A
ABORT............................................................................................................795
Abs................................................................................................................. 873
ACCEPT.......................................................................................................... 587
ACCUMULATE.............................................................................................. 1135
Activated........................................................................................................ 611
ADD DATA SEGMENT.....................................................................................147
ADD RECORD................................................................................................. 481
ADD SUBRECORD...........................................................................................484
Add to date.................................................................................................... 497
ADD TO SET................................................................................................. 1515
After............................................................................................................... 612
ALERT............................................................................................................. 949
ALL RECORDS............................................................................................... 1475
ALL SUBRECORDS.........................................................................................1651
APPEND DATA TO PASTEBOARD...................................................................1073
Append document........................................................................................1674
APPEND MENU ITEM......................................................................................900
APPEND TO ARRAY......................................................................................... 244
APPEND TO LIST.............................................................................................701
Application file................................................................................................148
Application type............................................................................................. 149
Application version......................................................................................... 150
APPLY TO SELECTION...................................................................................1476
APPLY TO SUBSELECTION.............................................................................1652
APPLY XSLT TRANSFORMATION...................................................................2291
Arctan.............................................................................................................874
ARRAY BOOLEAN............................................................................................245
ARRAY DATE................................................................................................... 247
ARRAY INTEGER.............................................................................................. 249
ARRAY LONGINT............................................................................................ 251
ARRAY PICTURE.............................................................................................. 253
ARRAY POINTER..............................................................................................255
ARRAY REAL.................................................................................................... 257
ARRAY STRING................................................................................................259
ARRAY TEXT....................................................................................................261

4D Language Reference 2463

ARRAY TO LIST................................................................................................263
ARRAY TO SELECTION.................................................................................... 265
ARRAY TO STRING LIST.................................................................................1423
AUTHENTICATE WEB SERVICE.......................................................................2134
Average........................................................................................................ 1030

B
BACKUP..........................................................................................................293
BEEP............................................................................................................. 1827
Before.............................................................................................................613
Before selection............................................................................................ 1478
Before subselection....................................................................................... 1653
Begin SQL.....................................................................................................1538
BEST OBJECT SIZE...........................................................................................982
BLOB PROPERTIES...........................................................................................313
BLOB size........................................................................................................315
BLOB TO DOCUMENT....................................................................................316
BLOB to integer.............................................................................................. 318
BLOB to list.....................................................................................................320
BLOB to longint..............................................................................................322
BLOB TO PICTURE........................................................................................ 1099
BLOB to real................................................................................................... 324
BLOB to text................................................................................................... 326
BLOB TO USERS............................................................................................1877
BLOB TO VARIABLE.........................................................................................328
BOOLEAN ARRAY FROM SET...........................................................................267
BREAK LEVEL.................................................................................................1136
BRING TO FRONT.........................................................................................1205
BUILD APPLICATION.......................................................................................152
BUTTON TEXT................................................................................................ 984

C
CALL PROCESS............................................................................................. 1187
CALL WEB SERVICE....................................................................................... 2136

2464 4D Language Reference

CANCEL..........................................................................................................588
CANCEL TRANSACTION............................................................................... 1794
Caps lock down............................................................................................ 1828
CHANGE CURRENT USER..............................................................................1879
CHANGE LICENSES.......................................................................................1881
CHANGE PASSWORD....................................................................................1882
Change string...............................................................................................1582
Char............................................................................................................. 1583
Character code............................................................................................. 1584
CHECK LOG FILE.............................................................................................294
Choose......................................................................................................... 1769
CLEAR LIST..................................................................................................... 707
CLEAR NAMED SELECTION.............................................................................972
CLEAR PASTEBOARD.....................................................................................1080
CLEAR SEMAPHORE...................................................................................... 1189
CLEAR SET.................................................................................................... 1516
CLEAR VARIABLE........................................................................................... 1909
CLOSE DOCUMENT......................................................................................1675
CLOSE PRINTING JOB................................................................................... 1137
CLOSE RESOURCE FILE..................................................................................1426
CLOSE WINDOW..........................................................................................2178
COMBINE PICTURES.....................................................................................1101
Command name.............................................................................................813
Compact data file........................................................................................... 154
COMPONENT LIST......................................................................................... 157
COMPRESS BLOB............................................................................................330
COMPRESS PICTURE.....................................................................................1103
COMPRESS PICTURE FILE..............................................................................1104
CONFIRM....................................................................................................... 952
Contextual click.............................................................................................. 614
Convert case.................................................................................................1586
CONVERT FROM TEXT..................................................................................1587
CONVERT PICTURE.......................................................................................1106
Convert to text............................................................................................. 1592
COPY ARRAY...................................................................................................268
COPY BLOB.................................................................................................... 332
COPY DOCUMENT....................................................................................... 1676
Copy list......................................................................................................... 709

4D Language Reference 2465

COPY NAMED SELECTION..............................................................................973
COPY SET..................................................................................................... 1517
Cos.................................................................................................................875
Count in array................................................................................................ 269
Count list items...............................................................................................710
Count menu items..........................................................................................903
Count menus..................................................................................................904
Count parameters...........................................................................................816
Count screens...............................................................................................1729
Count tasks...................................................................................................1215
Count user processes.................................................................................... 1216
Count users.................................................................................................. 1217
CREATE ALIAS............................................................................................... 1678
CREATE DATA FILE.......................................................................................... 158
Create document..........................................................................................1680
CREATE EMPTY SET.......................................................................................1519
CREATE FOLDER............................................................................................1683
CREATE INDEX..............................................................................................1628
Create menu...................................................................................................905
CREATE RECORD...........................................................................................1372
CREATE RELATED ONE..................................................................................1394
Create resource file....................................................................................... 1427
CREATE SELECTION FROM ARRAY...................................................................975
CREATE SET.................................................................................................. 1520
CREATE SET FROM ARRAY.............................................................................1521
CREATE SUBRECORD.................................................................................... 1654
CREATE THUMBNAIL.................................................................................... 1107
CREATE USER FORM..................................................................................... 1819
Current date................................................................................................... 498
Current default table.....................................................................................1761
Current form page..........................................................................................649
Current form table........................................................................................1762
Current form window................................................................................... 2179
Current machine...........................................................................................1730
Current machine owner................................................................................1731
Current method name.................................................................................... 818
Current process............................................................................................ 1218
Current time...................................................................................................501

2466 4D Language Reference

Current user..................................................................................................1883
CUT NAMED SELECTION................................................................................977
C_BLOB.......................................................................................................... 451
C_BOOLEAN...................................................................................................452
C_DATE.......................................................................................................... 453
C_GRAPH........................................................................................................454
C_INTEGER..................................................................................................... 455
C_LONGINT................................................................................................... 457
C_PICTURE..................................................................................................... 458
C_POINTER.....................................................................................................459
C_REAL........................................................................................................... 460
C_STRING.......................................................................................................461
C_TEXT...........................................................................................................463
C_TIME...........................................................................................................464

D
Data file..........................................................................................................159
DATA SEGMENT LIST......................................................................................160
Database event.............................................................................................1811
Date............................................................................................................... 502
Day number................................................................................................... 504
Day of............................................................................................................ 506
Deactivated.................................................................................................... 615
Dec.................................................................................................................876
DECODE.......................................................................................................1771
DECRYPT BLOB...............................................................................................333
DEFAULT TABLE............................................................................................ 1764
DELAY PROCESS........................................................................................... 1219
DELETE DOCUMENT.....................................................................................1684
DELETE FOLDER............................................................................................1685
DELETE FROM ARRAY......................................................................................270
DELETE FROM BLOB....................................................................................... 334
DELETE FROM LIST......................................................................................... 713
DELETE INDEX.............................................................................................. 1630
DELETE LISTBOX COLUMN.............................................................................843
DELETE LISTBOX ROW.................................................................................... 844

4D Language Reference 2467

DELETE MENU ITEM........................................................................................906
DELETE RECORD...........................................................................................1373
DELETE RESOURCE........................................................................................1430
DELETE SELECTION.......................................................................................1480
Delete string................................................................................................. 1593
DELETE SUBRECORD.....................................................................................1655
DELETE USER................................................................................................ 1884
DELETE USER FORM......................................................................................1820
DESCRIBE QUERY EXECUTION...................................................................... 1247
DIALOG.......................................................................................................... 486
DIFFERENCE..................................................................................................1522
DISABLE BUTTON........................................................................................... 986
DISABLE MENU ITEM......................................................................................907
DISPLAY NOTIFICATION................................................................................. 955
DISPLAY RECORD..........................................................................................1374
DISPLAY SELECTION..................................................................................... 1482
Displayed line number.................................................................................. 1485
DISTINCT VALUES...........................................................................................271
Document creator........................................................................................ 1686
DOCUMENT LIST..........................................................................................1687
DOCUMENT TO BLOB....................................................................................335
Document type.............................................................................................1688
DOM CLOSE XML.........................................................................................2221
DOM Count XML attributes..........................................................................2222
DOM Count XML elements...........................................................................2224
DOM Create XML element........................................................................... 2225
DOM Create XML Ref................................................................................... 2228
DOM EXPORT TO FILE..................................................................................2230
DOM EXPORT TO VAR..................................................................................2231
DOM Find XML element...............................................................................2232
DOM Find XML element by ID......................................................................2234
DOM Get first child XML element.................................................................2235
DOM Get last child XML element................................................................. 2237
DOM Get next sibling XML element............................................................. 2238
DOM Get parent XML element.....................................................................2240
DOM Get previous sibling XML element.......................................................2241
DOM Get Root XML element........................................................................2242
DOM GET XML ATTRIBUTE BY INDEX...........................................................2243

2468 4D Language Reference

DOM GET XML ATTRIBUTE BY NAME........................................................... 2244
DOM Get XML element................................................................................2246
DOM GET XML ELEMENT NAME.................................................................. 2247
DOM GET XML ELEMENT VALUE.................................................................. 2248
DOM Get XML information.......................................................................... 2249
DOM Parse XML source................................................................................ 2250
DOM Parse XML variable.............................................................................. 2253
DOM REMOVE XML ELEMENT......................................................................2255
DOM SET XML ATTRIBUTE............................................................................2256
DOM SET XML ELEMENT NAME...................................................................2258
DOM SET XML ELEMENT VALUE...................................................................2260
DOM SET XML OPTIONS..............................................................................2262
DRAG AND DROP PROPERTIES........................................................................573
DRAG WINDOW........................................................................................... 2180
Drop position................................................................................................. 582
DUPLICATE RECORD.....................................................................................1375
During............................................................................................................616
Dynamic pop up menu...................................................................................908

E
EDIT ACCESS................................................................................................ 1885
EDIT FORM...................................................................................................1821
EDIT FORMULA...............................................................................................673
EDIT ITEM.......................................................................................................590
ENABLE BUTTON............................................................................................988
ENABLE MENU ITEM.......................................................................................910
ENCODE.......................................................................................................1772
ENCRYPT BLOB...............................................................................................337
End selection................................................................................................ 1487
End SQL........................................................................................................1539
End subselection...........................................................................................1657
ERASE WINDOW...........................................................................................2182
Euro converter................................................................................................ 879
EXECUTE FORMULA........................................................................................675
EXECUTE METHOD.........................................................................................819
EXECUTE ON CLIENT....................................................................................1220

4D Language Reference 2469

Execute on server..........................................................................................1222
Exp................................................................................................................. 881
EXPAND BLOB................................................................................................343
EXPORT DATA................................................................................................ 777
EXPORT DIF.................................................................................................... 779
EXPORT SYLK..................................................................................................781
EXPORT TEXT................................................................................................. 783

F
False............................................................................................................... 369
Field............................................................................................................. 1631
Field name....................................................................................................1632
FILTER EVENT..................................................................................................797
FILTER KEYSTROKE..........................................................................................592
Find in array................................................................................................... 273
Find in field...................................................................................................1249
Find in list.......................................................................................................715
Find window.................................................................................................2183
FIRST PAGE..................................................................................................... 651
FIRST RECORD.............................................................................................. 1489
FIRST SUBRECORD........................................................................................1658
FLUSH BUFFERS.............................................................................................. 161
Focus object................................................................................................. 1829
FOLDER LIST.................................................................................................1689
FONT............................................................................................................. 990
FONT LIST.................................................................................................... 1732
Font name.................................................................................................... 1733
Font number.................................................................................................1734
FONT SIZE......................................................................................................991
FONT STYLE....................................................................................................992
Form event..................................................................................................... 617
Frontmost process........................................................................................ 1206
Frontmost window....................................................................................... 2184

2470 4D Language Reference

G
GENERATE CERTIFICATE REQUEST................................................................ 1467
GENERATE ENCRYPTION KEYPAIR.................................................................1470
Gestalt..........................................................................................................1735
Get 4D folder..................................................................................................162
Get alignment................................................................................................ 994
GET ALLOWED METHODS.............................................................................. 676
GET AUTOMATIC RELATIONS....................................................................... 1395
GET BACKUP INFORMATION..........................................................................296
Get component resource ID..........................................................................1433
Get current data source................................................................................ 1540
Get current database localization.................................................................... 167
Get current printer........................................................................................1138
GET DATA SOURCE LIST............................................................................... 1541
Get database parameter..................................................................................168
Get default user............................................................................................ 1886
GET DOCUMENT ICON................................................................................1690
Get document position.................................................................................1691
GET DOCUMENT PROPERTIES...................................................................... 1692
Get document size........................................................................................1698
Get edited text............................................................................................... 638
GET FIELD ENTRY PROPERTIES...................................................................... 1633
GET FIELD PROPERTIES................................................................................. 1635
GET FIELD RELATION.................................................................................... 1396
GET FIELD TITLES..........................................................................................1830
Get file from pasteboard............................................................................... 1081
GET FORM OBJECTS....................................................................................... 652
GET FORM PARAMETER.................................................................................. 653
GET FORM PROPERTIES.................................................................................. 655
Get format......................................................................................................996
GET GROUP LIST...........................................................................................1887
GET GROUP PROPERTIES...............................................................................1888
GET HIGHLIGHT............................................................................................1831
GET HIGHLIGHTED RECORDS....................................................................... 1490
GET HTTP BODY........................................................................................... 2090
GET HTTP HEADER........................................................................................2092

4D Language Reference 2471

GET ICON RESOURCE...................................................................................1434
Get indexed string........................................................................................ 1436
GET LAST ERROR STACK................................................................................. 799
Get last field number.................................................................................... 1637
Get Last Query Path......................................................................................1250
Get Last Query Plan...................................................................................... 1251
Get last table number................................................................................... 1638
GET LIST ITEM................................................................................................ 718
Get list item font.............................................................................................720
GET LIST ITEM ICON.......................................................................................721
GET LIST ITEM PARAMETER.............................................................................723
GET LIST ITEM PROPERTIES.............................................................................725
GET LIST PROPERTIES......................................................................................727
GET LISTBOX ARRAYS..................................................................................... 845
GET LISTBOX CELL POSITION.........................................................................847
Get listbox column width................................................................................849
Get listbox information...................................................................................850
Get listbox rows height...................................................................................852
GET LISTBOX TABLE SOURCE..........................................................................853
Get localized string....................................................................................... 1594
GET MACRO PARAMETER............................................................................. 1773
Get menu bar reference..................................................................................911
Get menu item............................................................................................... 912
GET MENU ITEM ICON...................................................................................913
Get menu item key......................................................................................... 914
Get menu item mark.......................................................................................916
Get menu item method.................................................................................. 917
Get menu item modifiers................................................................................ 918
Get menu item parameter...............................................................................921
GET MENU ITEM PROPERTY............................................................................920
Get menu item style....................................................................................... 922
GET MENU ITEMS...........................................................................................924
Get menu title................................................................................................ 925
GET MOUSE..................................................................................................1833
Get number of listbox columns.......................................................................854
Get number of listbox rows.............................................................................855
GET OBJECT RECT...........................................................................................998
GET PASTEBOARD DATA...............................................................................1082

2472 4D Language Reference

GET PASTEBOARD DATA TYPE.......................................................................1084
GET PICTURE FROM LIBRARY........................................................................ 1110
GET PICTURE FROM PASTEBOARD................................................................1085
GET PICTURE RESOURCE...............................................................................1438
Get platform interface...................................................................................1834
Get plugin access..........................................................................................1890
Get pointer.....................................................................................................820
Get print marker........................................................................................... 1139
GET PRINT OPTION...................................................................................... 1140
GET PRINTABLE AREA....................................................................................1142
GET PRINTABLE MARGIN.............................................................................. 1143
Get printed height........................................................................................1145
GET PROCESS VARIABLE................................................................................1190
GET REGISTERED CLIENTS.............................................................................1227
GET RELATION PROPERTIES.......................................................................... 1639
GET RESOURCE.............................................................................................1439
Get resource name........................................................................................1441
Get resource properties.................................................................................1443
GET RESTORE INFORMATION.........................................................................297
Get selected menu item parameter................................................................. 926
GET SERIAL INFORMATION.............................................................................171
GET SERIAL PORT MAPPING............................................................................373
Get SOAP info...............................................................................................2154
Get string resource....................................................................................... 1444
GET SYSTEM FORMAT.................................................................................. 1736
GET TABLE PROPERTIES.................................................................................1641
GET TABLE TITLES.........................................................................................1835
Get text from pasteboard..............................................................................1086
Get text resource.......................................................................................... 1445
GET USER LIST.............................................................................................. 1891
GET USER PROPERTIES.................................................................................. 1892
GET WEB FORM VARIABLES...........................................................................2095
Get Web Service error info............................................................................2141
GET WEB SERVICE RESULT.............................................................................2143
GET WINDOW RECT..................................................................................... 2185
Get window title...........................................................................................2186
GET XML ERROR...........................................................................................2293
GET XSLT ERROR...........................................................................................2294

4D Language Reference 2473

GOTO AREA....................................................................................................599
GOTO PAGE................................................................................................... 656
GOTO RECORD............................................................................................ 1376
GOTO SELECTED RECORD............................................................................1492
GOTO XY....................................................................................................... 956
GRAPH............................................................................................................681
GRAPH SETTINGS........................................................................................... 687
GRAPH TABLE................................................................................................. 689

H
HIDE MENU BAR...........................................................................................1836
HIDE PROCESS..............................................................................................1207
HIDE TOOL BAR............................................................................................1837
HIDE WINDOW.............................................................................................2187
HIGHLIGHT RECORDS...................................................................................1494
HIGHLIGHT TEXT..........................................................................................1838

I
IDLE................................................................................................................465
IMPORT DATA................................................................................................ 785
IMPORT DIF....................................................................................................787
IMPORT SYLK..................................................................................................789
IMPORT TEXT................................................................................................. 791
In break.......................................................................................................... 640
In footer......................................................................................................... 641
In header........................................................................................................ 642
In transaction................................................................................................1795
INPUT FORM.................................................................................................. 657
INSERT IN ARRAY............................................................................................275
INSERT IN BLOB..............................................................................................345
INSERT IN LIST................................................................................................729
INSERT LISTBOX COLUMN............................................................................. 856
INSERT LISTBOX COLUMN FORMULA............................................................ 858
INSERT LISTBOX ROW.................................................................................... 860

2474 4D Language Reference

INSERT MENU ITEM........................................................................................927
Insert string.................................................................................................. 1596
Int.................................................................................................................. 882
INTEGER TO BLOB..........................................................................................346
INTEGRATE LOG FILE...................................................................................... 300
INTERSECTION............................................................................................. 1524
INVERT BACKGROUND.................................................................................1840
Is a list............................................................................................................ 731
Is a variable.....................................................................................................821
Is compiled mode........................................................................................... 173
Is data file locked............................................................................................ 174
Is field number valid......................................................................................1642
Is field value Null.......................................................................................... 1543
Is in set......................................................................................................... 1526
Is license available.........................................................................................1894
Is new record................................................................................................1377
Is record loaded............................................................................................1378
Is SOAP request............................................................................................ 2155
Is table number valid.................................................................................... 1643
Is user deleted...............................................................................................1896
ISO to Mac................................................................................................... 1597

K
Keystroke........................................................................................................600

L
LAST PAGE......................................................................................................659
LAST RECORD...............................................................................................1496
LAST SUBRECORD.........................................................................................1659
LAUNCH EXTERNAL PROCESS.......................................................................1774
Length..........................................................................................................1599
Level.............................................................................................................1146
List item parent...............................................................................................732
List item position............................................................................................ 735

4D Language Reference 2475

LIST OF CHOICE LISTS.................................................................................... 737
LIST TO ARRAY................................................................................................276
LIST TO BLOB................................................................................................. 349
LIST USER FORMS......................................................................................... 1823
LOAD COMPRESS PICTURE FROM FILE......................................................... 1111
Load list..........................................................................................................738
LOAD RECORD............................................................................................. 1358
LOAD SET..................................................................................................... 1527
LOAD VARIABLES.......................................................................................... 1911
Locked..........................................................................................................1359
LOCKED ATTRIBUTES....................................................................................1360
Log.................................................................................................................883
LOG EVENT.................................................................................................. 1738
Log File...........................................................................................................302
LONGINT ARRAY FROM SELECTION............................................................... 278
LONGINT TO BLOB........................................................................................ 351
Lowercase.....................................................................................................1600

M
Mac to ISO................................................................................................... 1601
Mac to Win...................................................................................................1604
Macintosh command down..........................................................................1841
Macintosh control down...............................................................................1842
Macintosh option down............................................................................... 1843
MAP FILE TYPES............................................................................................ 1699
Match regex................................................................................................. 1606
Max..............................................................................................................1031
MAXIMIZE WINDOW....................................................................................2189
Menu bar height...........................................................................................1740
Menu bar screen...........................................................................................1741
Menu selected................................................................................................ 929
MESSAGE........................................................................................................958
MESSAGES OFF...............................................................................................961
MESSAGES ON............................................................................................... 963
Method called on error...................................................................................800
Method called on event..................................................................................801

2476 4D Language Reference

Milliseconds....................................................................................................507
Min.............................................................................................................. 1033
MINIMIZE WINDOW.................................................................................... 2191
Mod............................................................................................................... 884
Modified.........................................................................................................489
Modified record............................................................................................1379
MODIFY RECORD........................................................................................... 491
MODIFY SELECTION.....................................................................................1497
MODIFY SUBRECORD..................................................................................... 493
Month of........................................................................................................ 509
MOVE DOCUMENT...................................................................................... 1701
MOVE OBJECT.............................................................................................. 1000
MOVED LISTBOX COLUMN NUMBER.............................................................861
MOVED LISTBOX ROW NUMBER.................................................................... 862
MULTI SORT ARRAY........................................................................................ 279

N
New list.......................................................................................................... 740
New log file.................................................................................................... 303
New process................................................................................................. 1228
NEXT PAGE.....................................................................................................660
NEXT RECORD..............................................................................................1498
NEXT SUBRECORD........................................................................................1660
Next window................................................................................................2193
Nil.................................................................................................................. 822
NO DEFAULT TABLE......................................................................................1766
NO TRACE...................................................................................................... 823
Not.................................................................................................................370
NOTIFY RESOURCES FOLDER MODIFICATION................................................ 175
Num.............................................................................................................1609

O
Old.................................................................................................................494
OLD RELATED MANY.................................................................................... 1399

4D Language Reference 2477

OLD RELATED ONE.......................................................................................1400
ON ERR CALL..................................................................................................802
ON EVENT CALL............................................................................................. 807
ONE RECORD SELECT...................................................................................1499
OPEN 4D PREFERENCES..................................................................................176
OPEN ADMINISTRATION WINDOW................................................................180
OPEN DATA FILE.............................................................................................182
Open document........................................................................................... 1702
Open external window................................................................................. 2194
Open form window...................................................................................... 2196
OPEN PRINTING JOB.................................................................................... 1148
Open resource file.........................................................................................1446
OPEN SECURITY CENTER................................................................................ 183
OPEN WEB URL.............................................................................................1777
Open window...............................................................................................2199
ORDER BY.....................................................................................................1252
ORDER BY FORMULA.................................................................................... 1257
ORDER SUBRECORDS BY...............................................................................1661
OUTPUT FORM...............................................................................................661
Outside call.....................................................................................................643

P
PAGE BREAK................................................................................................. 1149
PAGE SETUP..................................................................................................1151
Pasteboard data size..................................................................................... 1087
PAUSE PROCESS........................................................................................... 1231
PICTURE CODEC LIST................................................................................... 1113
PICTURE LIBRARY LIST...................................................................................1114
PICTURE PROPERTIES....................................................................................1116
Picture size....................................................................................................1117
PICTURE TO BLOB........................................................................................ 1118
PICTURE TO GIF............................................................................................1119
PICTURE TYPE LIST........................................................................................1122
PLATFORM PROPERTIES................................................................................1742
PLAY............................................................................................................. 1844
PLUGIN LIST................................................................................................... 184

2478 4D Language Reference

POP RECORD................................................................................................1380
Pop up menu................................................................................................1846
Position........................................................................................................ 1612
POST CLICK..................................................................................................1850
POST EVENT................................................................................................. 1851
POST KEY......................................................................................................1853
PREVIOUS PAGE..............................................................................................663
PREVIOUS RECORD.......................................................................................1500
PREVIOUS SUBRECORD.................................................................................1662
Print form..................................................................................................... 1153
PRINT LABEL................................................................................................. 1156
PRINT OPTION VALUES.................................................................................1159
PRINT RECORD.............................................................................................1161
PRINT SELECTION.........................................................................................1163
PRINT SETTINGS...........................................................................................1165
PRINTERS LIST.............................................................................................. 1166
Printing page................................................................................................1168
Process aborted............................................................................................ 1232
PROCESS HTML TAGS...................................................................................2097
Process number............................................................................................ 1233
PROCESS PROPERTIES...................................................................................1235
Process state................................................................................................. 1238
PUSH RECORD..............................................................................................1381

Q
QR BLOB TO REPORT....................................................................................1287
QR Count columns....................................................................................... 1288
QR DELETE COLUMN....................................................................................1289
QR DELETE OFFSCREEN AREA....................................................................... 1290
QR EXECUTE COMMAND.............................................................................1291
QR Find column............................................................................................1292
QR Get area property....................................................................................1293
QR GET BORDERS.........................................................................................1294
QR Get command status...............................................................................1296
QR GET DESTINATION..................................................................................1297
QR Get document property.......................................................................... 1298

4D Language Reference 2479

QR Get drop column.................................................................................... 1299
QR GET HEADER AND FOOTER.....................................................................1300
QR Get HTML template................................................................................ 1302
QR GET INFO COLUMN................................................................................1303
QR Get info row............................................................................................1306
QR Get report kind....................................................................................... 1307
QR Get report table...................................................................................... 1308
QR GET SELECTION...................................................................................... 1309
QR GET SORTS..............................................................................................1310
QR Get text property.................................................................................... 1311
QR GET TOTALS DATA..................................................................................1313
QR GET TOTALS SPACING............................................................................ 1315
QR INSERT COLUMN....................................................................................1316
QR New offscreen area................................................................................. 1317
QR ON COMMAND..................................................................................... 1318
QR REPORT...................................................................................................1319
QR REPORT TO BLOB....................................................................................1322
QR RUN........................................................................................................1323
QR SET AREA PROPERTY................................................................................1324
QR SET BORDERS..........................................................................................1325
QR SET DESTINATION.................................................................................. 1327
QR SET DOCUMENT PROPERTY....................................................................1329
QR SET HEADER AND FOOTER......................................................................1330
QR SET HTML TEMPLATE..............................................................................1332
QR SET INFO COLUMN................................................................................ 1334
QR SET INFO ROW........................................................................................1338
QR SET REPORT KIND................................................................................... 1339
QR SET REPORT TABLE..................................................................................1340
QR SET SELECTION.......................................................................................1341
QR SET SORTS.............................................................................................. 1342
QR SET TEXT PROPERTY................................................................................1343
QR SET TOTALS DATA...................................................................................1345
QR SET TOTALS SPACING.............................................................................1348
QUERY..........................................................................................................1259
QUERY BY EXAMPLE..................................................................................... 1266
QUERY BY FORMULA.................................................................................... 1267
QUERY BY SQL..............................................................................................1546
QUERY SELECTION....................................................................................... 1270

2480 4D Language Reference

QUERY SELECTION BY FORMULA..................................................................1272
QUERY SELECTION WITH ARRAY...................................................................1273
QUERY SUBRECORDS....................................................................................1663
QUERY WITH ARRAY..................................................................................... 1274
QUIT 4D......................................................................................................... 185

R
Random..........................................................................................................885
READ ONLY.................................................................................................. 1361
Read only state................................................................................................ ???
READ PICTURE FILE....................................................................................... 1124
READ WRITE..................................................................................................1362
REAL TO BLOB................................................................................................ 354
RECEIVE BUFFER..............................................................................................374
RECEIVE PACKET............................................................................................. 376
RECEIVE RECORD............................................................................................379
RECEIVE VARIABLE...........................................................................................384
Record number.............................................................................................1382
Records in selection...................................................................................... 1501
Records in set............................................................................................... 1528
Records in subselection.................................................................................1664
Records in table............................................................................................ 1384
REDRAW....................................................................................................... 1854
REDRAW LIST..................................................................................................741
REDRAW WINDOW.......................................................................................2203
REDUCE SELECTION..................................................................................... 1502
REGISTER CLIENT..........................................................................................1240
REJECT............................................................................................................ 606
RELATE MANY...............................................................................................1401
RELATE MANY SELECTION............................................................................1404
RELATE ONE................................................................................................. 1405
RELATE ONE SELECTION...............................................................................1407
RELEASE MENU...............................................................................................931
REMOVE FROM SET...................................................................................... 1529
REMOVE PICTURE FROM LIBRARY.................................................................1125
Replace string............................................................................................... 1614

4D Language Reference 2481

Request...........................................................................................................964
RESIZE FORM WINDOW............................................................................... 2204
RESOLVE ALIAS............................................................................................. 1705
RESOLVE POINTER.......................................................................................... 824
RESOURCE LIST.............................................................................................1449
RESOURCE TYPE LIST.................................................................................... 1451
RESTORE.........................................................................................................306
RESUME PROCESS.........................................................................................1243
Right click.......................................................................................................644
Round.............................................................................................................886

S
SAVE LIST........................................................................................................742
SAVE PICTURE TO FILE.................................................................................. 1126
SAVE RECORD...............................................................................................1385
SAVE RELATED ONE...................................................................................... 1408
SAVE SET...................................................................................................... 1530
SAVE VARIABLES............................................................................................1912
SAX ADD PROCESSING INSTRUCTION......................................................... 2266
SAX ADD XML CDATA..................................................................................2267
SAX ADD XML COMMENT........................................................................... 2269
SAX ADD XML DOCTYPE..............................................................................2270
SAX ADD XML ELEMENT VALUE................................................................... 2271
SAX CLOSE XML ELEMENT........................................................................... 2272
SAX GET XML CDATA...................................................................................2273
SAX GET XML COMMENT............................................................................ 2274
SAX GET XML DOCUMENT VALUES..............................................................2275
SAX GET XML ELEMENT............................................................................... 2276
SAX GET XML ELEMENT VALUE.....................................................................2278
SAX GET XML ENTITY...................................................................................2279
SAX Get XML node.......................................................................................2280
SAX GET XML PROCESSING INSTRUCTION.................................................. 2282
SAX OPEN XML ELEMENT.............................................................................2283
SAX OPEN XML ELEMENT ARRAYS................................................................2284
SAX SET XML OPTIONS................................................................................ 2286
SCAN INDEX................................................................................................ 1504

2482 4D Language Reference

SCREEN COORDINATES................................................................................1748
SCREEN DEPTH.............................................................................................1749
Screen height............................................................................................... 1751
Screen width................................................................................................ 1752
SCROLL LINES...............................................................................................1855
Secured Web connection.............................................................................. 2099
Select document...........................................................................................1706
Select folder..................................................................................................1710
SELECT LIST ITEMS BY POSITION....................................................................743
SELECT LIST ITEMS BY REFERENCE.................................................................. 746
SELECT LISTBOX ROW.................................................................................... 863
SELECT LOG FILE............................................................................................ 298
Select RGB Color...........................................................................................1753
Selected list items........................................................................................... 748
Selected record number................................................................................1505
SELECTION RANGE TO ARRAY........................................................................ 282
SELECTION TO ARRAY.................................................................................... 285
Self................................................................................................................. 826
Semaphore................................................................................................... 1193
SEND HTML BLOB........................................................................................ 2100
SEND HTML FILE...........................................................................................2103
SEND HTML TEXT.........................................................................................2106
SEND HTTP RAW DATA.................................................................................2108
SEND HTTP REDIRECT...................................................................................2111
SEND PACKET.................................................................................................385
SEND RECORD................................................................................................388
SEND SOAP FAULT....................................................................................... 2156
SEND VARIABLE.............................................................................................. 389
Sequence number.........................................................................................1387
SET ABOUT...................................................................................................1856
SET ALIGNMENT...........................................................................................1002
SET ALLOWED METHODS...............................................................................677
SET AUTOMATIC RELATIONS........................................................................1409
SET BLOB SIZE................................................................................................ 357
SET CGI EXECUTABLE................................................................................... 2113
SET CHANNEL................................................................................................ 390
SET CHOICE LIST.......................................................................................... 1003
SET COLOR...................................................................................................1004

4D Language Reference 2483

SET CURRENT PRINTER................................................................................. 1169
SET CURSOR.................................................................................................1857
SET DATABASE PARAMETER............................................................................ 187
SET DEFAULT CENTURY.................................................................................. 511
SET DICTIONARY.......................................................................................... 1779
SET DOCUMENT CREATOR...........................................................................1714
SET DOCUMENT POSITION..........................................................................1715
SET DOCUMENT PROPERTIES.......................................................................1716
SET DOCUMENT SIZE...................................................................................1717
SET DOCUMENT TYPE.................................................................................. 1718
SET ENTERABLE.............................................................................................1006
SET ENVIRONMENT VARIABLE...................................................................... 1782
SET FIELD RELATION.....................................................................................1410
SET FIELD TITLES...........................................................................................1858
SET FIELD VALUE NULL................................................................................. 1550
SET FILE TO PASTEBOARD.............................................................................1090
SET FILTER.................................................................................................... 1008
SET FORM HORIZONTAL RESIZING.................................................................664
SET FORM SIZE...............................................................................................665
SET FORM VERTICAL RESIZING....................................................................... 669
SET FORMAT.................................................................................................1010
Set group properties..................................................................................... 1897
SET HOME PAGE...........................................................................................2115
SET HTML ROOT...........................................................................................2116
SET HTTP HEADER.........................................................................................2117
SET INDEX.................................................................................................... 1644
SET LIST ITEM................................................................................................. 752
SET LIST ITEM FONT.......................................................................................754
SET LIST ITEM ICON....................................................................................... 755
SET LIST ITEM PARAMETER..............................................................................757
SET LIST ITEM PROPERTIES..............................................................................759
SET LIST PROPERTIES...................................................................................... 762
SET LISTBOX COLUMN WIDTH.......................................................................865
SET LISTBOX GRID COLOR............................................................................. 866
SET LISTBOX ROWS HEIGHT........................................................................... 867
SET LISTBOX TABLE SOURCE.......................................................................... 868
SET MACRO PARAMETER.............................................................................. 1783
SET MENU BAR............................................................................................... 932

2484 4D Language Reference

SET MENU ITEM............................................................................................. 936
SET MENU ITEM ICON....................................................................................937
SET MENU ITEM MARK...................................................................................938
SET MENU ITEM METHOD..............................................................................939
SET MENU ITEM PARAMETER..........................................................................942
SET MENU ITEM PROPERTY.............................................................................940
SET MENU ITEM SHORTCUT...........................................................................943
SET MENU ITEM STYLE................................................................................... 945
SET PICTURE RESOURCE............................................................................... 1453
SET PICTURE TO LIBRARY..............................................................................1127
SET PICTURE TO PASTEBOARD......................................................................1091
SET PLATFORM INTERFACE...........................................................................1860
SET PLUGIN ACCESS.....................................................................................1899
SET PRINT MARKER.......................................................................................1170
SET PRINT OPTION.......................................................................................1176
SET PRINT PREVIEW...................................................................................... 1179
SET PRINTABLE MARGIN...............................................................................1180
SET PROCESS VARIABLE................................................................................ 1196
SET QUERY AND LOCK................................................................................. 1275
SET QUERY DESTINATION............................................................................ 1277
SET QUERY LIMIT..........................................................................................1283
SET REAL COMPARISON LEVEL....................................................................... 887
SET RESOURCE..............................................................................................1454
SET RESOURCE NAME...................................................................................1457
SET RESOURCE PROPERTIES..........................................................................1458
SET RGB COLORS......................................................................................... 1018
SET SCREEN DEPTH...................................................................................... 1755
SET SCROLLBAR VISIBLE................................................................................1023
SET STRING RESOURCE.................................................................................1461
SET TABLE TITLES..........................................................................................1862
SET TEXT RESOURCE.....................................................................................1462
SET TEXT TO PASTEBOARD...........................................................................1093
SET TIMEOUT................................................................................................. 395
SET TIMER...................................................................................................... 645
Set user properties........................................................................................ 1900
SET VISIBLE................................................................................................... 1024
SET WEB DISPLAY LIMITS..............................................................................2119
SET WEB SERVICE OPTION............................................................................2145

4D Language Reference 2485

SET WEB SERVICE PARAMETER...................................................................... 2148
SET WEB TIMEOUT....................................................................................... 2122
SET WINDOW RECT......................................................................................2206
SET WINDOW TITLE......................................................................................2208
SET XSLT PARAMETER...................................................................................2295
Shift down....................................................................................................1868
SHOW LISTBOX GRID..................................................................................... 869
SHOW MENU BAR........................................................................................ 1869
SHOW ON DISK............................................................................................1719
SHOW PROCESS........................................................................................... 1208
SHOW TOOL BAR......................................................................................... 1870
SHOW WINDOW..........................................................................................2210
Sin..................................................................................................................889
Size of array.................................................................................................... 287
SOAP DECLARATION.................................................................................... 2157
SORT ARRAY................................................................................................... 288
SORT LIST.......................................................................................................771
SORT LISTBOX COLUMNS..............................................................................870
SPELL CHECKING..........................................................................................1785
SQL CANCEL LOAD...................................................................................... 1551
SQL End selection......................................................................................... 1552
SQL EXECUTE............................................................................................... 1553
SQL EXPORT.................................................................................................1556
SQL GET LAST ERROR................................................................................... 1558
SQL GET OPTION......................................................................................... 1559
SQL IMPORT.................................................................................................1560
SQL LOAD RECORD......................................................................................1562
SQL LOGIN...................................................................................................1563
SQL LOGOUT............................................................................................... 1568
SQL SET OPTION..........................................................................................1569
SQL SET PARAMETER.................................................................................... 1571
Square root.....................................................................................................890
START SQL SERVER........................................................................................1573
START TRANSACTION...................................................................................1796
START WEB SERVER.......................................................................................2123
Std deviation................................................................................................ 1035
STOP SQL SERVER.........................................................................................1574
STOP WEB SERVER........................................................................................ 2124

2486 4D Language Reference

String........................................................................................................... 1616
STRING LIST TO ARRAY.................................................................................1463
Structure file................................................................................................... 205
Substring...................................................................................................... 1619
Subtotal........................................................................................................1182
Sum..............................................................................................................1036
Sum squares................................................................................................. 1037
SVG EXPORT TO PICTURE.............................................................................2299
SVG Find element ID by coordinates.............................................................2297
System folder................................................................................................1756

T
Table............................................................................................................ 1646
Table name...................................................................................................1647
Tan.................................................................................................................891
Temporary folder..........................................................................................1758
Test path name.............................................................................................1721
Test semaphore............................................................................................ 1199
TEXT TO BLOB................................................................................................358
Tickcount........................................................................................................513
Time............................................................................................................... 514
Time string..................................................................................................... 515
Tool bar height.............................................................................................1871
TRACE............................................................................................................ 827
Transaction level...........................................................................................1797
TRANSFORM PICTURE.................................................................................. 1130
Trigger level..................................................................................................1813
TRIGGER PROPERTIES....................................................................................1814
True................................................................................................................368
Trunc..............................................................................................................892
TRUNCATE TABLE......................................................................................... 1506
Type............................................................................................................... 829

4D Language Reference 2487

U
Undefined.....................................................................................................1913
UNION......................................................................................................... 1531
UNLOAD RECORD........................................................................................ 1363
UNREGISTER CLIENT.....................................................................................1244
Uppercase.....................................................................................................1621
USE CHARACTER SET...................................................................................... 397
USE EXTERNAL DATABASE............................................................................ 1575
USE INTERNAL DATABASE.............................................................................1576
USE NAMED SELECTION.................................................................................978
USE SET........................................................................................................ 1518
User in group................................................................................................1903
USERS TO BLOB............................................................................................1904

V
Validate Digest Web Password...................................................................... 2125
Validate password.........................................................................................1905
VALIDATE TRANSACTION............................................................................. 1798
VARIABLE TO BLOB.........................................................................................361
VARIABLE TO VARIABLE.................................................................................1200
Variance....................................................................................................... 1038
VERIFY CURRENT DATA FILE............................................................................207
VERIFY DATA FILE............................................................................................208
Version type....................................................................................................212
VOLUME ATTRIBUTES................................................................................... 1723
VOLUME LIST............................................................................................... 1726

W
WA Back URL available..................................................................................1922
WA Create URL history menu........................................................................1923
WA Execute JavaScript.................................................................................. 1925
WA EXECUTE JAVASCRIPT FUNCTION...........................................................1926

2488 4D Language Reference

WA Forward URL available............................................................................ 1927
WA Get current URL......................................................................................1928
WA GET EXTERNAL LINKS FILTERS................................................................ 1929
WA Get last filtered URL................................................................................1930
WA GET LAST URL ERROR............................................................................. 1931
WA Get page content................................................................................... 1932
WA Get page title......................................................................................... 1933
WA GET PREFERENCE....................................................................................1934
WA GET URL FILTERS.................................................................................... 1935
WA GET URL HISTORY.................................................................................. 1936
WA OPEN BACK URL.....................................................................................1938
WA OPEN FORWARD URL.............................................................................1939
WA OPEN URL.............................................................................................. 1940
WA REFRESH CURRENT URL.......................................................................... 1941
WA SET EXTERNAL LINKS FILTERS.................................................................1942
WA SET PAGE CONTENT.............................................................................. 1944
WA SET PAGE TEXT LARGER..........................................................................1945
WA SET PAGE TEXT SMALLER........................................................................1946
WA SET PREFERENCE.................................................................................... 1947
WA SET URL FILTERS..................................................................................... 1948
WA STOP LOADING URL...............................................................................1952
WEB CACHE STATISTICS............................................................................... 2127
Web Context................................................................................................ 2129
Win to Mac...................................................................................................1622
Window kind................................................................................................ 2211
WINDOW LIST..............................................................................................2212
Window process........................................................................................... 2214
Windows Alt down....................................................................................... 1872
Windows Ctrl down......................................................................................1873
WRITE PICTURE FILE......................................................................................1132

Y
Year of............................................................................................................ 516

4D Language Reference 2489

2490 4D Language Reference